Adlei 

1 

tt 

A 

Vi 

Alin’i 

Brya: 

Dicti 

Eicli] 

Heyd 

Kroe! 

la 

Mast 

ai 

Oehls 

Ollen 

1 


V-54h 

1887 


New  Grammar  for  Germans  to  Learn  English.  By  P.  Gands.  12mo. 


Key  to  same.  12mo. 


1 


•om 

840 


ns* 


ting 


mo. 


Roemer’s  Polyglot  Reader  (in  German).  Translated  by  Dr.  Solger.  12mo. 
Key  to  saofie  (in  English).  12mo. 

Schulte.  Elementary  German  Course.  By  Adam  E.  Schulte,  Teacher  of  Ger- 
man in  the  Public  Schools  of  the  City  of  New  York.  12mo. 


Return  this  book  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below. 


V/rag 

L 

G: 

Fi 

Wrag-i 
(Pc 
Ki 


JDictiol 

Jontar 

Jforesti 

Meadow 

Hillhoi 

Secc 

Kuovo 

Ollendo: 

Kei 

Pri] 

Hoemer 

Key 


University  of  Illinois  Library 


. a Pa  ^ ' 

Mfiy  -9  I9si 

KllY 


*354 


d’fi 


■6 


ccT  li 

FEB 


KOV  0 9 
OCI I 2 


m 


?r\on 


.'Q-C/ 


974 

12 


Ahn.  A 

after 
ofNe 
Key 

Butler. 

able  I 
By  Fb 

Be  Belen 

tainin^ 


the  Auxiliary  and  the  Rejnlar  Verbs-on 
By  E.  M.  DE  Belem.  88  pages.  18nio. 


the  plan  of  the 


L161— H41 
late  Abbd  Bossuet. 


Adle] 

1 

G 

tt 

A 

Vi 

Ahn’i 

Brya 

Bicti 

Bichl 

Heyd 

Kroe: 

la 

Mast 

ai 

OehlE 


4-fe8..g. 

VMn 

1887 


Ollen 

1 

New  Grammar  for  Germans  to  Learn  English.  By  P.  Gands.  12mo. 


Key  to  same.  12mo. 


:s 


I 


•om 

840 


ns* 


ling 


mo. 


Boemer’s  Polyglot  Reader  (in  German).  Translated  by  Dr.  Solger.  12mo. 
Key  to  same  (in  English).  12mo. 

Schulte.  Elementary  German  Course.  By  Adam  E.  Schulte,  Teacher  of  Ger- 
man in  the  Public  Schools  of  the  City  of  New  York.  12mo. 


I 


STANDARD  ITALIAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 


"Wrage’s  Practical  German- Grammar.  12mo.  Key  to  same. 

Lehrbuch  der  Englischen  Spracbe.  Key  to  same. 

German  Primer. 

First  German  Reader. 

Wrage  and  Monfanti’s  Method  of  Learning  Spanish,  on  Ollendoi-ff’s  System. 

(For  Germans  to  Learn  Spanish.)  13mo. 

Key  to  same. 

ITALIAN  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Dictionaries.  See  Meadows  and  Millhousb. 

Montana’s  Elementary  Grammar  of  the  Italian  Language.  12mo. 

Foresti’s  Italian  Reader.  12mo. 

Ideadows’s  Italian-English  Dictionary.  A new  revised  edition. 

MilUlOUse’s  New  English-and-Italian  Pronouncing  and  Explanatory  Dictionary. 

Second  edition,  revised  and  improved.  Two  thick  vols.,  small  8vo. 

Nuovo  Tesoro  di  Scherzi,  Massime,  Proverhi,  etc.  1 vol.,  l2mo.  Cloth. 
Ollendorff’s  New  Method  of  Learning  Italian.  Edited  by  F.  Foresti.  12mo. 

Key  to  do. 

Primary  Lessons.  18mo. 

Doemer’s  Polyglot  Reader  (in  Italian).  Translated  by  Dr.  Botta. 

Key  to  same,  in  English. 

SPANISH  TEXT-BOOKS. 

Ahn.  A New,  Practical,  and  Easy  Method  of  Learning  the  Spanish  Language, 
after  the  System  of  F.  Ahn,  Doctor  of  Philosophy  and  Professor  at  the  College 
ofNeuss.  12mo. 

Key  to  Spanish  Grammar. 

Sutler.  The  Spanish  Teacher  and  Colloquial  Phrase-Book : An  Easy  and  Agree- 
able Method  of  acquiring  a Speaking  Knowledge  of  the  Spanish  Language. 
By  Francis  Butler.  293  pages.  18mo. 

De  Belem.  The  Spanish  Phrase-Book;  or.  Key  to  Spanish  Conversation:  con- 
taining the  Chief  Idioms  of  the  Spanish  Language,  with  the  Conjugations  of 
the  Auxiliary  and  the  Regular  Verbs— on  the  plan  of  the  late  Abbd  Bossuet. 
By  E.  M.  DE  Belem.  88  pages.  18mo. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


V 

https://archive.org/details/ollendorffsnewmeOOvela 


OLLENDORFF’S  NEW  METHOD 

OF  LBAENING  TO 

READ,  WRITE,  AND  SPEAK 

THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 


WITR  AJSr  APPENDIX 

CONTAINING 

A BRIEF  BUT  COMPREHENSIVE  RECAPITULATION  OF  THE  RULES,  AS 
WELL  AS  OF  ALL  THE  VERBS,  BOTH  REGULAR  AND  IRREGULAR; 

SO  AS  TO  RENDER  THEIR  USE  EASY  AND  FAMILIAR 
TO  THE  MOST  ORDINARY  CAPACITY 

TOGETHER  WITH 

PRACTICAL  RULES  FOR  THE  SPANISH  PRONUNCIATION 

AND  MODELS  OF  SOCIAL  AND  COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE 


THE  WHOLE  DESIGNED  FOR  YOUNG  LEARNERS  AND 
PERSONS  WHO  ARE  THEIR  OWN  INSTRUCTORS 


BY 

M.  VELAZQUEZ  and  T.  SIMONNE 

PROFESSORS  OF  THE  SPANISH  AND  FRENCH  LANGUAGES 


ISTEW  YORK 

D.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY 

1,  3,  AND  5 BOND  STREET 

1887 


Enteeed,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1848,  by 
D.  APPLETON  & CO., 

In  the  Clerk’s  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern 
District  of  New  York. 


O"  IVoTi^E. — A Key  to  the  Exercises  of  this  Grammar  is  published 
i separate  Volume 


\/ 

mi 

PREFACE. 


The  superiority  of  Ollendorff  s Method  of  teaching  Ian- 
guagos  is  now  so  universally  acknowledged,  both  in  the  United 
[ States  and  in  Europe,  that  an  adaptation  of  it  to  the  Euphonic 
Castilian,  or  Spanish  Language,  must  be  considered  as  a de- 
V sideratum  to  persons  wishing  to  learn  it.  Divested  of  the  ab- 
stractedness of  Grammar,  it  contains,  however,  all  its  elements ; 
but  it  develops  them  so  gradually,  and  in  so  simple  a manner, 
as  to  render  them  intelligible  to  the  most  ordinary  capacity. 
The  difficulties  are  met  singly,  thoroughly  analyzed,  and  made 
familiar  by  dint  of  a varied  and  interesting  repetition, — the  most 
effectual  means  to  impress  them  on  young  and  unlearned  minds, 
generally  averse  to  thought  or  reflection,  and  always  prone  to 
trust  to  their  undisciplined  memory,  a power  often  treacherous 
from  want  of  proper  direction.  It  is,  therefore,  hardly  possible 
to  go  through  this  book  with  any  degree  of  application,  without 
becoming  thoroughly  conversant  with  the  colloquial,  idiomatic, 
and  classic  use  of  the  Spanish  language.  Consequently,  persons 
transacting  business  in  the  countries  of  which  the  Spanish  is 
the  vernacular  tongue,  will  find  this  work  to  be  their  best  guide 
in  learning  to  speak  it  with  propriety. 

For  the  benefit  of  persons  grammatically  acquainted  with  the 
English,  or  other  languages,  a Synopsis  of  the  Spanish  has  been 
annexed  as  an  Appendix,  containing  tables  of  the  regular  con- 
jugations of  the  verbs,  copious  lists  of  the  irregular  verbs,  gen- 
eral mles  of  etymology,  syntax,  Ac.,  by  means  of  which  they 
may  learn  all  the  peculiarities  of  the  Spanish,  and  make  them- 
selves perfect  masters  of  it  in  a very  short  time,  without  the 
assistance  of  a teacher. 


7'7ti779 


0 


PKEFACK. 


To  enhance,  if  possible,  the  importance  and  utility  of  this 
Method,  the  pronunciation  of  the  Spanish  letters  is  explained 
and  exemplified,  in  so  simple,  clear,  and  easy  a manner,  as  to 
render  it  comprehensible  to  every  capacity. 

Consulting  also  the  benefit  of  the  learners,  and  with  a view 
to  render  this  work  a complete  course  for  Reading,  Speaking, 
and  Writing  the  Spanish  language,  Models  of  Familiar  and 
Commercial  Letters  are  added  to  it,  containing  directions  for  all 
the  usual  commercial  transactions,  by  the  aid  of  which,  young 
learners,  and  persons  who  instruct  themselves,  may  transact,  in 
writing,  any  business. 

It  is  hardly  necessary  to  remark,  that  the  English  phrases  in 
the  Exercises  are  not  always  models  worthy  of  imitation ; but 
they  are  made  use  of  in  order  to  instinct  the  scholar  how  to 
express  them  properly  in  Spanish,  and  thereby  to  teach  liim 
its  idioms. 


Msw  Yo3K  Fthruarxi  1848 


CONTENTS 


Pag-e 

Preface — 5 

El  Estornino  Sagaz 8 

Lessons  L to  LXXXVI 9-397 

Some  Idiomalical  Expressions 389 

Some  of  the  proverbs  most  in  use. . . 396 

Appendix 401 

Orthography 401 

Remarks  on  the  Pronunciation...  400 

Double  Letters 406 

Division  of  Syllables 407 

Punctuation 407 

Accent 408 

Reading  Lessons 410 

Common  Spanish  Abbreviations-...  414 

Etymology 419 

Article 41^ 

Nouns 419 

Adjectives 426 

Nouns  of  Number 430 

Pronouns 433 

Of  the  Verb 438 

Terminations  of  the  Verbs 442 

Conjugations  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  449 
Idiomatical  translation  of  some 

tenses  451 

Passive  Verbs 452 

Pronominal  or  Reflective  Verbs..  453 
Gerund  454 


Participle 454 

Verbs  that  have  two  participles. . . 455 

Adverbs 458 

Prepositions 457 

Conjunctions 457 

Interjections 458 

Analogy 458 

Syntax 459 

Of  the  Article 460 

Of  the  Noun  and  Adjective 464 

Of  the  Pronoun 468 

Of  the  Verb 473 

Of  the  Participle 483 

Of  the  Adverb 484 

Of  the  Preposition 485 

Of  the  Conjunction 488 

Of  the  Interjection 488 

Table  containing  the  Verbs  that  gov- 
ern certain  Prepositions 489 

The  Irregular  Verbs 514 

Impersonal  Verbs 532 

A list  of  all  the  Irregular  Verbs 533 

Modelos  de  Cartas  mercantiles  y 

familiares 537 

Tabla  de  laJVloneda  corriente  en  Es- 
paha,  y las  Repiiblicasde  America  514 

Cartas  Familiares 544 

Index  551 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  SIGNS  USED  IN  THIS  BOOlv. 

The  irregular  verbs  are  designated  by  a star  (*). 

The  figures  1,  2,  3,  placed  after  the  verbs,  denote  that  they  are  regular,  and  incil 
cate  the  conjugations  to  which  they  respectively  belong. 

T’he  figures  1,  2,  3,  placed  before  the  verbs,  denote  the  persons,  either  singular  oi 
plural. 

N.  1,  N.  2,  &c.,  are  used  to  designate  the  simple  tenses  of  the  verbs. 

N.  1,  pf.,  N.  2,  p.,  &c.,  designate  the  compound  tenses  of  the  verbs. 

Expressions  which  vary  either  in  theii  construction  or  idiom  from  the  Er.glish 
Rre  marked  thus  t. 

A hand  (5^^)  denotes  a particular  re  nark 


THE  SAGACIOUS  STARLING. 


A THIRSTY  starling  found  a decanter  of  water,  and  attempted  to  drink 
?Tom  it ; but  the  water  scarcely  touched  the  neck  of  the  decanter,  and  the 
fiird’s  bill  could  not  reach  it. 

He  began  to  peck  at  the  outside  of  the  vessel,  in  order  to  make  a hole 
ai  it ; but  in  vain,  the  glass  was  too  hard.  ' 

He  then  attempted  to  upset  the  decanter.  In  thi®  he  succeeded  no  bet- 
ter ; the  vessel  was  too  heavy. 

At  length  the  starling  hit  upon  an  idea  that  succeeded:  he  threw  littlo 
pebbles  into  the  decanter,  which  caused  the  water  gradually  to  rise  till  with- 
in the  reach  of  his  bill. 

» * * 

Skill  is  better  than  strength : patience  and  reflection  make  many  things 
easy  which  at  first  appear  impossible. 


EL  ESTORNINO  SAGAZ. 


Un  estornino  sediento  hall6  una  garrafa  llena  de  agua,  6 inmediata- 
mente  procurd  beber ; pero  el  agua  d pdnas  llegaba  al  cuello  de  la  garrafa, 
y el  pico  del  pdjaro  no  podia  alcanzarla. 

Se  puso  luego  d picar  la  garrafa  d fin  de  hacer  un  agugerito ; pero  se  e» 
lorzd  en  vano,  porque  el  vidrio  era  muy  grueso. 

Entdnces  intentd  voltear  la  garrafa  para  derramar  el  agua  ; pero  no  pudo 
hacerlo,  porque  era  muy  pesada. 

Al  fin  concibid  una  idea,  que  se  le  logrd : echd  poco  d poco  en  la  garrafa 
ona  cantidad  tan  grande  de  piedrecitas,  que  hicieron  subir  gradualmente  e! 
;igna  d la  distancia  que  su  pico  podia  alcanzar,  y luego  apagd  su  sed. 

* * * 

Mas  vale  mafia  que  fuerza : la  paciencia  y la  reflexion  hacen  fdeiit« 
muchas  cosas,  que  parecian  imposibles  d primera  vista. 


OLLENDORFF’S 


SPANISH  GRAMMAR. 


FIRST  LESSON.— Leccion  Prhnera. 


DEFINITE  ARTICI.E .—Ariiculo  Definido. 


Masculine  Singular. — Masculinu  Singular 


The. 

Of  or  from  the. 
To  or  at  the. 


EL 

Del. 

Al. 


Have  you? 

Y es,  Sir,  I have. 
The  hat. 

Have  you  the  hat? 


iTieneV.?^ 

Si,  sehor,  yo  teugo.  nor. 
El  sombrero. 

I Tione  V.  el  sombrero 


You.  1 listed f (V.) 

Ohs  There  are  in  Spanhh  three  ways  of  addressing  a person,  to  wit 
1st.  By  translating  literally  the  pronoun  thou,  Td. 

2d  “ “ “ you,  Vos,  in  the  singular. 

VosoTROs,  VosoTRAs,  plural 

M.  “ the  pronoun  you,  UsTED,  sing. ; UsTEDES,  pi. 

As  the  celebrated  Spanish  poet,  Cadalso,  says. 


“ Una  dama  seria  y grave 
Y que  la  critica  sabe 
Del  Vos,  del  Tii,  y del  listed” 

Tu  is  used  among  the  Clearest  relatives  of  a family,  intimate  fr’ends,  little 
children,  in  poetry,  and  speaking  to  menial  servants. 


To  Teachers. — Each  lesson  should  be  dictated  to  the  pupils,  wlio 
ehould  pronounce  each  word  as  soon  as  dictated.  The  teacher  should  ala« 
exercise  his  pupils  by  putting  the  fjuestions  to  them  in  various  ways. 

■ A Spanish  interrogative  sentence  stands  between  two  points  of  intorro- 
gallon;  the  first  of  which  is  inverted,  to  show  when  the  emphasis  begins. 


10 


FIRST  LESSON. 


was  formerly  generally  used  among  all  classes  of  society,  adoressin^ 
each  other  individually;  at  present  it  is  confined  to  persons  of  high  rank,  oi 
those  placed  in  high  posts,  as  superiors  addressing  their  inferiors. 

Public  speakers,  preachers,  &c.,  addressing  the  public,  congregations 
&c.,  use  Vosotros;  unless  they  be  corporate  bodies  entitled  to  l>e  styled 
Vsias,  (your  Lordships,)  &c. 

UsTED,  a contraction  of  Vuestra  Merced,  ( your  Honor,  or  your  W orship, 
formerly  used,  then  abridged  into  Vuesarced,  and  finally  into  listed,  or 
Uste,  is  the  only  word  used  in  the  common  intercourse  in  polite  society,  in 
all  the  transactions  of  life ; excepting  the  cases  above  explained,  and  when 
he  persons  spoken  to  are  entitled  to  a higher  mark  of  respect  by  calling 
ihem  Usia,  (Vuestra  Sehoria,  V.  S.,  your  Lordship  or  Ladyship,)  &c. 

listed,  and  its  plural  Ustedes,  are  common  to  both  genders,  and  agiee 
with  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural,  according  to  their  re- 
spective number;  as.  You  are  a good  boy,  listed  es  un  huen  muchacho : 
You  are  good  boys,  Ustedes  son  buenos  muchachos, 

Usted,  and  Ustedes,  have  been  always  written  in  abbreviation,  thus; 
Vmd.,  Vmds. — Vm,,  Vms.  At  present,  Usted  is  represented  by  a V.,  and 
Ustedes  by  VV, 

The  speaker  by  using  Usted  may  be  sure  never  to  give  oiFence.  The 
omission  of  it  is  considered  vulgar ; for  instance.  Digame  que  hora  es,  (tell 
me  what  hour  it  is,)  instead  of  Digame  V.  que  hora  es. 

When  Usted  is  made  use  of  at  the  beginning  of  a phrase,  to  avoid  ita 
repetition  the  cases  of  the  pronouns  he,  el,  or  she,  ella,  are  employed ; as. 
When  I saw  you  this  morning,  I told  you,  that  I would  accompany  you 
and  present  you  to  him  this  afternoon — Cuando  yo  vi  d Usted  esta  mahana 
le  dije,  que  yo  le  (or  la)  acompanaria,  y le  (la)  presentaria  d el  esta  tarde 

In  translating  ancient  history,  public  speeches,  &c.,  tu,  vos,  or  vosotros 
must  be  used  ; because  Usted  is  of  a very  modern  introduction  into  the  lan- 
guage. 

With  the  view  to  make  the  scholar  perfectly  familiar  with  the  use  oi 
these  three  modes  of  address,  some  of  the  exercises  are  translated  in  one 
and  some  in  another ; but  preference  is  given  to  Usted,  because  it  is  the 
most  necessary  and  usual  in  the  colloquial  polite  intercourse. 


L 

The  bread. 

The  cane. 

I’he  soap. 

The  sugar. 

The  paper. 

Have  you  the  paper  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I have  the  paper 


Yo.  yo^  >6 

El  pan. 

El  baston. 

El  jabon.  ja. 

El  aziicar.  zu. 

El  papel. 

iTiene-V.  el  papel? 

Si,  senor,  yo  tengo  el  papel. 


Have  you  my  hat? 
Yc2,  I have  your  hat 
My 


I I Tiene  V.  mi  sombrero  i 
I Si,  yo  tengo  su  sombrero  de  V 
1 Mi,  (both  genders.) 


SECOND  LESSON. 


11 


O^Miiid  that  (n)  stauds  for  a common  noun. 


iour.  y"  I su  (u)  de 

Have  you  your  cane  ? 

I have  my  cane. 

Have  you  my  paper? 

I have  your  paper. 


Which  hat  have  you  ? 

Which  or  What  7 
Which  bread  have  you? 
I nave  my  bread. 

Which  cane  have  you  ? 

I have  your  cane 


V.  is  more  polite  than  ol  ;^ii)  de  V 

I Tiene  V.  su  baston 
Yo  tengo  mi  baston. 

I Tiene  V.  mi  papel  ? 

Yo  tengo  su  papel  de  V.,  o? 
el  papel  de  V. 


^ Que  sombrero  tiene  V ? 

^ Que  7 que. — 7 

I Que  pa'i  tiene  V ? 

Yo  tengo  mi  pan. 

I Que  baston  tiene  V.  ? 

Y 0 tengo  el  baston  de  Y.,  or 
Yo  tengo  su  baston  de  V 


EXERCISE. 

1. 

Have  you  the  hat  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  the  hat. — Have  you  your  hat  1 
have  my  hat. — Have  you  my  hat  ? — I have  your  hat. — Which  hat 
have  you  ? — I have  my  hat. — Have  you  the  bread  ? — I have  the  bread. 
— Have  you  my  bread  ? — I have  your  bread. — Have  you  your  bread  ? 
— I have  my  bread.^Which  bread  have  you  ? — I have  your  bread. — 
Have  you  my  cane? — I have  your  cane. — Have  you  your  cane? — 
Which  cane  have  you ? — I have  your  cane. — Have  you  your  soap? — 
Yes,  Sir,  I have  my  soap. — Which  soap  have  you  ? — Your  soap,  Sir. — 
Which  sugar  have  you  ? — I have  your  sugar. — Have  you  my  paper  ? 
— I have  your  paper. — Have  you  the  paper? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  the 
paper. — Which  sugar  have  you.  Sir  ? — I have  my  sugar.  Sir. — Have 
vou  your  hat  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  my  hat.* 


SECOND  LESSON. — Leccion  Segunda. 


Have  you  the  paper  ? 
Have  you  it  7 
I have  it. 


I Tiene  V.  el  papel  ? 
^ he  tiene  V.  ? 

Yo  Ze  tengo. 


' In  writing  these  exercises,  the  pupils  must  pronounce  all  the  phrasea 
aloud,  as  they  write  them. 

Ohs.  DdSjre  dictating  a new  lesson,  the  teacher  puts  to  the  pupils  th« 
questions  contained  in  the  printed  exercise  of  the  last  lessiu ; then  he  dio 
tates  the  new  lesson,  and  puts  fresh  questions. 


12 


SECOND  LESSON. 


It 

Have  you  my  hat 
Yes,  Sir,  I have  it 
The  cloth. 
The  shoe. 

I'he  dog. 

The  horse. 
The  leather 


Le,  'this  pronoun  goes  before  th« 
verb.) 

I Tiene  V.  mi  sombrero  ? 

Si,  senor,  yo  le  tengo. 


El  pano. 

El  zapato. 

El  perro. 

El  caballo. 
El  Cordoban. 


For  the  pronunciation 
of  the  syllables  nor, 
no,  za,  llo,  see  ths 
Table. 


Have  you  my  good  cloth  ! [ i Tiene  V.  mi  buen  pano  1 

Good.  Bueno,  makes  buen  before  a noun  mi*scu!ine  singular.  ue. — 6 
Bad.  Malo,  “ mat  “ « 


Pretty. 

Handsome  or  fine. 
Ugly. 

Old. 


Bonito. 

Hermoso. 

Feo.  jeo, 

Viejo.  vie,  jo. — i 


Have  you  the  pretty  dog  ? 

No,  Sir. 

I have  it  not. 

No, 

Not, 

I have  not. 

Have  you  my  old  hat! 

I have  not  your  old  hat. 


I Tiene  V.  el  bonito  perro  ? 

No,  senor. 

Yo  no  le  tengo. 

No,  [verb.) 

No,  (^No  comes  always  before  the 
Yo  no  tengo. 

I Tiene  V.  mi  sombrero  viejo  ? jo 
Yo  no  tengo  sombrero  viejo  de  V 


Which  paper  have  you? 

I have  the  good  paper. 
Have  you  my  good  soap  • 
I have  it  not 


I Que  papel  tiene  V.  ? 

Yo  tengo  el  buen  papel.  uen. — 
I Tiene  V.  mi  buen  jabon  ? 

Yo  no  le  tengo. 


Have  you  the  paper  hat  ? 

Of. 


I I Tiene  V.  el  sombrero  de  papel  1 
1 T>e, 


Chs.  Two  substantives  depending  on  each  other,  without  any  stop 
between  them,  or  separated  by  an  apostrophe  (’),  are  translated  by  changing 
iheir  order,  and  placing  the  preposition  de  (of)  between  them : as,  He  haa 
a brick  House,  il  tiene  una  casa  de  ladrillo ; Pope’s  works,  las  ohras  de 
Vcfe. 


The  leather  shoe. 
The  gun. 
The  ‘jon. 
The  iron  gun. 


I El  zapato  de  cordoban. 

I El  fusil.  u. 

j El  hierro,  el  fierro.  iet  —6 

I El  fusil  de  hierro. 


THIPD  LESSON”. 


13 


The  cotton 
The  cap. 

The  cotton  cap. 

Have  you  the  leather  shoe  ? 
My  old  iron  gun. 

Your  pretty  cotton  cap. 


El  algodon. 

El  gorro.  rro, 

El  gorro  de  algodon. 

I Tiene  V.  el  zapato  de  cordoban  ? 
Mi  fusil  viejo  de  hierro. 

Su  boiiito  gorro  de  algodon  de  V jf 
El  bonito  gorro  de  algodon  de  V' 


EXERCISE. 

2. 

Have  you  my  fine  horse  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  it. — Have  you  your  do 
iltoe  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  it  not. — Have  you  my  pretty  leather  shoe  ? — 
[ have  it. — Wliich  horse  have  you  ? — I have  your  good  horse. — 
Which  shoe  have  you  ? — I have  my  ugly  leather  shoe. — Have  yo  j 
my  cap  ? — I have  it  not. — Have  you  your  bad  cap  ? — Yes,  I have  it. — 
Have  you  my  ugly  cotton  cap  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  it  not. — Which  cap 
have  you  ? — I have  the  paper  cap. — Have  you  the  good  cloth  ? — Yes, 
I have  it. — Have  you  my  fine  cloth  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  it  not. — Which 
cloth  have  you  ? — I have  your  pretty  cloth. — Have  you  ycur  old  soap  ? 
— I have  it  not.  Sir. — Have  you  my  good  soap  ? — No,  Sir ; I have  your 
bad  soap. — Which  soap  have  you  ? — 1 have  your  old  soap. — Have  you 
your  good  gun  ? — I have  it  not.  Sir. — Have  you  my  old  iron  gun  ? — 
I have  it. — Which  gun  have  you  ? — I have  the  old  iron  gun. — Have 
you  my  cloth  cap  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  your  pretty  cloth  cap. — 
Have  you  the  fine  leather  shoe  ? — No,  I have  it  not. — Which  leather 
shoe  have  you  ? — I have  the  ugly  leather  shoe. — Have  you  your  old 
horse  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  it  not. — Wliich  horse  have  you  ? — I have  my 
fine  horse. — Have  you  my  old  dog  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  not  your  old  dog 
I have  your  good  dog. 


THIRD  LESSON. — Leccion  Tercera. 


Have  you  any  thing  ? 

I have  something. 

Any  thing — something. 
I have  nothing. 

I have  not  any  thing. 

Nothing. 

Not  any  thing 


I Tiene  V.  algo  ? or  alguna  cosa. 
Yo  tengo  algo.  go. 

Alguna  cosa,  algo.  gu. 

Yo  no  tengo  nada. 

Yo  nada  tengo,  (or  no  tengo  uinguua 
cosa.) 

No  (v)  nada 
Nada  (v). 


Ohs.  A If  nada  is  used  without  no,  nada  is  placed  before  the  verb. 

I nave  nothing  1 Nada  tengo,  (or  no  tengo  nada.) 


14 


THIRD  LESSON. 


Obs.  B.  The  pronoun  subject,  or  nominative,  is  almost  always  omitled  be* 
sause  the  termination  of  the  verb  shows  the  person  which  perfonns  the  ac- 
tion expressed  by  the  verb. 


The  wine. 

El  vino. 

The  money. 

El  dinero. 

The  gold. 

El  oro. 

The  button. 

El  boton. 

The  gold  button. 

El  boton  de  oro. 

The  coffee. 

El  cafd. 

The  cheese. 

El  queso. 

The  candlestick. 

El  candelero. 

The  golti  candlestick. 

El  candelero  de  oro. 

Have  you  any  thing  good? 
I have  nothhig  good. 

Are  you  hungry  ? 

I am  hungry. 

I am  not  hungry. 

Are  } ou  thirsty  ? 

I am  not  thirsty. 

Are  you  sleepy  ? 

I am  sleepy. 

Are  you  ashamed  ? 

I am  not  ashamed. 


What  have  you?  * 

What  ? 

What  have  you  good  ? 

Ohs,  C.  Que,  in  connection  with 
before  the  adjective. 

What  have  you  bad  ? 

I have  nothing  bad. 


I Tiene  V.  algo  bueno,  ,or  de  bueno?) 
Yo  no  tengo  nada  de  bueno,  (ir  naaa 

de  bueno  tengo.) 

t I Tiene  V.  hambre  ? [bre.; 

t Yo  tengo  hambre,  (or  tengo  ham- 
t No  tengo  hambre 

I I Tiene  V.  sed  ? 
t No  tengo  sed. 

1 1 Tiene  V.  sueho  ? sue. 

t Tengo  sueno.  ho — n. 

1 1 Tiene  V.  vergiienza  ? ue. 
t No  tengo  vergiienza.  za — z. 

I Que  tiene  V.  ? 

I Que  ? 

I Que  tiene  V.  bueno?  (or  de  buen*. 
an  adjective,  requires,  sometimes, 

I I Que  tiene  Vm.  malo?  (''r  de  malo. 

1 No  tengo  nada  male,  de  malo.) 


EXERCISE. 

3. 

Have  you  my  good  wine  ? — I have  it. — Have  you  the  old  gold  ? — 1 
nave  it  not. — Have  you  any  tiling? — Yes,  I have  something. — What 
aave  you  ? — I have  the  money. — Have  you  the  gold  candlestick  ?— 
No,  1 nave  it  not;  I have  nothing.  Sir. — Have  you  my  old  (jihcjo) 
cheese? — have  it. — Have  you  a^iy  thing  bad? — Yes,  Sir,  I have 
something  bad;  I have  the  bad  coffee. — Hove  you  your  ugly  iron 
mutton  ? — No,  I have  it  not. — What  have  you  ? — I have  the  gold  candle- 
stick.— Have  vou  my  cloth  cap  ? — No,  I have  it  not. — Yes,  you  have 


FOURTH  LESSON. 


15 


)l. — No,  Sir,  I have  not  any  thing. — Have  you  any  thing  handsi  me  1 
— No,  Sir,  I have  something  ugly. — What  have  you  ugly  ? — I have 
the  ugly  dog. — Have  you  any  thing  old  ? — I have  nothing  old ; I havo 
something  pretty. — What  have  you  pretty  ? — I have  the  pretty  papeT 
cap. — Are  you  hungry  ? — Yes,  I am  hungry. — Are  you  sleepy  ? — No, 
I am  not  sleepy  ; I am  thirsty. — Are  you  ashamed  ? — No,  Sir,  I am 
sleepy. — Have  you  any  thing  good  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  voui  good 
bread. 


FOURTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Cuarta. 


Have  you  that  book  ? 

T have  that  book. 

That. 

That  horse. 

That  money. 

That  cloth  cap. 
That  old  dog. 

That  pretty  paper  hat. 


I Tiene  V.  ese  libro  ? 

Ten  go  ese  libro 
Ese. 

Ese  caballo 
Ese  dinero. 

Ese  gorro  de  pano. 

Ese  perro  viejo. 

Ese  bonito  sombrero  de  papei. 


flave  you  the  bread  of  the  baker? 


I Tiene  V.  el  pan  del  panadero  ^ 


Of  the. 

Of  the  tailor. 

Of  the  neighbor. 

Have  you  the  cloth  of  the  tailor  ? 

The  tailor’s  cloth. 

S'  (meaning)  the  (n)  of  the  (n). 

The  neighbor’s  cap. 

My  tailor’s  dog. 

That  neighbor’s  horse. 

Ohs.  A.  El  (n)  de  is  used  before 
Have  you  my  neighbor’s  cap  ? 

Have  you  that  tailor’s  cloth  ? 


Del. 

Del  sastre. 

Del  vecino. 

[Tiene  V.  el  pano  del  sastre  ? 

El  pano  del  sastre. 

El  (n)  del  (n),  or  el  (n)  de. 

El  sombrero  del  vecino. 

El  perro  de  mi  sastre. 

El  caballo  de  este  vecino. 
adjective  pronouns,  such  as  my,  that 
I I Tiene  V.  el  gorro  de  mi  vecino  ? 

I I Tiene  V.  el  pano  de  este  sastre  ? 


Have  you  the  neighbor’s? 

That,  or  the  one. 

S meaning  that  of,  or  the  on*>  of 
The  neighbor’s. 

My  tailor’s 
That  tailors. 

Your  brother’s. 

Brother. 

The  man. 


[ Tiene  V.  el  del  vecino  ? 

El  del,  or  el  de. 

El  del,  or  el  de.  (See  Obs.  A,] 
El  del  vecino. 

El  de  mi  sastre. 

El  de  ese  sastre. 

El  de  su  hermano  de  V. 

Hermann. 

El  horabre. 


id 


FOURTH  LESSON. 


Have  you  my  bread  or  the  baker’s? 
Or, 

I have  your  neighbor’s. 

Have  you  yours  or  mine  s 
I have  mine , I have  not  yours. 
MinCi  or  my  own. 

Yours. 

Ohs.  B.  El  suyo  is  used  when  \ 
the  phrase  ; but  el  de  V.  must  be  us 


I Tiene  V.  mi  pan  d el  del  pauadero 

d, 

Yo  tengo  el  de  su  vecino  de  V 
I Tiene  V.  el  suyo  6 el  mio  ? 

Yo  tengo  el  mio ; no  tengo  el  de  V 
El  mio, 

El  suyo,  (or  el  de  F.) 
nas  been  expressed  in  the  first  part  rd 
d when  V.  has  not  been  expressed 


Are  you  warm  ? 
I am  warm. 

Are  you  cold? 

I am  not  cold. 
Are  you  afraid  ? 
I am  afraid. 
That  coal. 

My  friend. 

The  man’s. 


1 1 Tiene  V.  calor  ? 
t Tengo  caloi. 

t I Tiene  V.  frio  ? io. — 6. 

t Yo  no  tengo  frio. 
t I Tiene  V.  miedo  ? 

T Tengo  miedo. 
i Ese  carbon, 
j Mi  amigo, 
i El  del  hombre. 


EXERCISES.' 

4. 

Have  you  that  book  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  it  not. — Which  book  have 
)ou? — I have  the  neighbor’s. — Have  you  my  stick  or  that  of  my 
friend  ? — I have  your  friend’s. — Have  you  your  bread  or  the  baker’s  ? 
— I have  not  that  of  the  baker ; I have  mine. — Have  you  the  neigh- 
bor’s horse  ? — No,  I have  not  tlie  neighbor’s. — Which  horse  have  you? 
— I have  the  baker’s. — Have  you  your  dog  or  the  tailor’s  ? — I have  my 
own. — Have  you  the  pretty  gold  button  of  my  brother  ? — I have  it 
not. — Which  button  have  you  ? — I have  my  cloth  button. — Have  you 
my  cloth  cap,  or  the  tailor’s  ? — I have  not  yours ; I have  the  tailor’s, 
— Have  you  my  brother’s  horse,  or  mine  ? — I have  your  brother’s. — 
Which  coffee  have  you  ? — I have  the  neighbor’s. — Have  you  your 
dog,  or  that  of  the  man  ? — I have  the  man’s. — Have  you  your  friend’s 
money  ? — I have  it  not ; I have  my  own. — Are  you  afraid  of  that  dog? 
—No,  Sir. — Are  you  cold  or  warm  ? — I am  warm. — Are  you  sieepy  ? 
— 1 am  not  sleepy ; I am  hungry. 

5. 

Have  you  my  bread,  or  the  baker’s  ? — I have  yours. — ^Have  you  my 
gold  candlestick,  or  the  neighbor’s  ?— I have  the  neighbor’s. — Have 
you  your  paper  or  mine  ? — I have  mine, — Have  you  your  tailor’s  cloth  1 
— have  it  not. — Wliich  cloth  have  you  ? — My  brother’s.. — V/hi  :h  haf 


FIFTH  LESSON. 


17 


save  you  ? — I ha\'e  tlmt  man’s. — Have  you  the  old  sticR  of  ny  brother  1 
*— No,  I have  not  your  brother’s  old  stick ; I have  my  own. — Have 
you  that  man’s  soap  ? — No,  I have  it  not. — Which  soap  have  you  ? — 
I have  your  brother’s  old  soap. — Have  you  my  iron  gun,  or  my  broth 
er’s  ? — I have  yours. — Wnich  shoe  have  you  ? — I Lave  my  friend’s 
.Gather  shoe. — Have  you  your  gold  button,  or  mine? — I have  nol 
yours. — Which  button  have  you  ? — I have  the  tailor’s. — Have  you 
any  thing  good  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  something  good. — What  have  you 
good? — I have  your  brother’s  good  horse. — Are  you  afraid  of  thai 
man  ? — No,  Sir,  I am  not  afraid  of  that  man. — Have  you  my  neigh- 
bor’s coal  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I have  it. — Have  you  that  man’s  good  horse  ? — 
No,  Sir,  I have  my  own. 


FIFTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Quinta 


The  merchant. 

Of  the  shoemaker. 
The  boy. 

The  pencil 
The  chocolate. 


E!  comerciante. 
Del  zapatero. 

El  muchacho. 
El  Idpiz. 

El  chocolate. 


chueno 

iz. — z. 


Have  you  the  merchant’s  cane  or 
your  own? 

I have  neither  the  merchant’s  cane 
nor  mine. 

Neither — nor 


I Tieiie  V.  el  baston  del  comerciante 
6 el  de  V.? 

Yo  710  tengo  ni  el  palo  del  comer- 
ciante ni  el  mio. 

No — ni — ni. 


I have  neither  the  bread  nor  the  Yo  no  tengo  ni  el  pan  ni  el  queso,  (oi 
cheese.  ni  el  pan  ni  el  queso  tengo.) 

Ohs.  A.  When  no  is  used,  it  stands  before  the  verb ; but  when  it  is  not 
used,  ni  — ni  must  be  placed  before  the  nouns,  and  then  the  verb  is 
placed  last. 


Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  ? 

I am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty 
Are  you  ^arrn  or  cold  ? 

I am  neither  warm  nor  cold. 

Have  you  the  iron  or  the  gold  button  ? 

[ have  neither  the  iron  nor  the  gold 
button. 

Have  you  yours  or  mine  ? 

I have  neither  yuiirs  nor  mine 


t I Tiene  V.  hambre  6 sed  ? 
t Yo  no  tengo  ni  hambre  ni  sed. 
t I Tiene  V.  calor  6 frio  ? 
t Ni  calor  ni  frio  tengo. 

1 * I Tiene  V.  el  boton  de  liierro  0 el 
de  oro? 

t Ni  el  betoa  de  hierro  ni  el  do  ore 
tengo. 

I Tiene  V.  el  suyo  o el  mio  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  ni  (d  do  V.  ni  el  mio. 


FIFI'H  LESSON. 


(8 


The  cork 
The  corkscrew 
That  umbrella . 
The  Frenchman 
Of  the  carpenter 
The  wine. 

The  hammer. 


El  corcho. 

El  tirabuzon. 

Ese  pardguas.  guas. — S 

El  Frances.  ces. — e 

Del  carpintero. 

El  vino. 

El  martin 0.  llo. — II 


IV hat  is  the  matter  with  you?  I t i Que  tiene  V.? 

Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me  | t Yo  no  tengo  nada,  {^or  iiada  tengvi ; 

What  is  the  matter  with ? J i Que ? 

Nothing  is  the  matter  with ? ^ Nada , (or  no—nada.'l 

Ohs.  B.  The  first  of  these  phrases  means — What  have  you  ? and  tlwe 
second — I have  nothing ; in  which  what  is  translated  que^  and  nothings 
nada;  and  is  the  matter  with  is  changed  into  tiene,  tienen,  or  tengo  &.c.j 
'have.) 


EXERCISES. 

6. 

1 am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty. — Have  you  my  shoe  or  the  snoe- 
maker’s? — I have  neither  yours  nor  the  shoemaker’s. — Have  you 
your  pencil  or  the  boy’s  ? — I have  neither  mine  nor  the  boy’s. — Which 
pencil  have  you  ? — I have  that  of  the  merchant. — Have  you  my  choco- 
late or  the  merchant’s  ? — I have  neither  yours  nor  the  merchant’s ; 1 
nave  my  own. — Have  you  the  bread  or  the  wine  ? — I have  neither  the 
bread  nor  the  wine. — Have  you  your  cloth  or  the  tailor’s  ? — 1 have  not 
the  tailor’s ; I ha\  e mine  — Have  y )u  your  corkscrew  or  mine  ? — I 
have  neither  yours  nor  mine. — Which  cork  have  you  ? — I have  my 
neighbor’s. — Have  you  the  iron  or  the  gold  button  ? — I have  neither 
the  iron  nor  the  gold  button. — Are  you  warm  or  cold  ? — 1 am  neither 
warm  nor  cold ; I am  sleepy. — Have  you  my  hammer  or  the  carpen- 
ter’s ? — I have  neither  yours  nor  the  carpenter’s. — Which  hammer 
have  you  ? — I have  the  iron  hammer. — Have  you  any  thing  ? — I have 
something  fine. — What  have  you  fine  ? — I have  the  Frenchman’s  fine 
umbrella. — Have  you  the  hat  or  the  cap  ? — I have  neither  the  hat  nc.  r 
me  cap. 

7. 


Have  you'  my  gun  or  yours  ? —I  have  neither  youi-s  nor  mine. — 
Which  gun  have  you  ? — I have  my  friend’s. — Have  you  my  clotli  cap 
or  that  of  my  brother  ? — I have  neither  yours  nor  your  brother’s.— 
Wliich  cap  have  you  ? — I have  my  boy’s  paper  cap. — Have  you  the 
book  of  the  Frenchman  or  that  of  the  merchant  ?-  -I  have  neither  the 
Frenchman’s  nor  the  merchant’s — Which  book  have  vou?— ! hav<» 


SIXTH  LESSON.  19 

fOUTs. — What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? — I am  cold  and  hungiy. — Hav€ 
fou  any  thing  good  or  bad  ? — I have  neither  any  thing  good  or  bad 


SIXTH  LESSON— Leccion  Sexta. 


The  ox. 

The  biscuit. 

Of  the  captain. 
Of  the  cook. 


El  buey. 

El  bizcocho. 
Del  capitan. 
Del  cocinero 


ue^. 


Have  I ? 

/. 

You  have. 

You  have  not. 

Am  I hungry  ? 

You  are  hungry 
You  are  not  hungry 
Am  I afraid? 

You  are  afraid. 

You  are  not  afraid 
You  are  right 
I am  right 
You  are  wrong 
I am  wrong. 

Am  1 right  or  wrong? 

You  are  neither  right  nor  wrong. 
Are  you  right  or  wrong  ? 

1 am  neither  wrong  nor  right. 

Obs.  I am  wrong,  is  rendered  i 
io  ill — Yo  no  tengo  razouj  or  Yo  hag 
Are  you  rights  or  not  7 i Tiene  V.  ra 
tor  wrong,  word  for  word  is.  You  hav 
V,  ni  tiene  razon  ni  deja  de  tcnerla. 
Have  I the  nail  ? 

You  have  it 
You  have  it  not. 

Have  I any  thing  good  ? 

You  have  nothing  good. 

Have  I the  carpenter’s  hammer  ' 
You  have  it  not 
Have  you  it  ? 

I have  it. 

I hive  it  not 


i Tengo  yo? 

Yo. 

V.  tiene. 

V.  no  tiene. 

1 1 Tengo  yo  harnbre  i 
t V.  tiene  harnbre, 
t V.  no  tiene  harnbre. 

1 1 Tengo  yo  rniedo  ? 
t V.  tiene  miedo. 
t V.  no  tiene  miedo. 
t V.  tiene  razon. 
t Yo  tengo  razon. 
t V.  no  tiene  razon. — V.  hace  mai 
t Yo  no  tengo  razon. — Yo  hago  mal 
1 1 Tengo  yo  razon,  6 no  ? 
t V.  ni  tiene  razon  ni  deja  de  tenerla 
t I Tiene  V.  razon,  6 no  ? 
t (Yo)  ni  ♦eugo  razon  ni  dejo  dr 
tenerla. 

i Spanish  by,  f am  not  right,  or  i 

0 mal.  Are  you  right  or  wrong  ? by 
zon,  6 no  ? and.  You  are  neither  right 
> neither  reason  nor  are  in  need  of  it 

1 Tengo  yo  el  clavo  ? 

V.  le  tiene. 

V.  no  le  tiene. 

I Tengo  yo  algo  (de)  bueno  ? 

V.  no  tiene  nada  (de)  hueiio. 

I Tengo  yo  el  martillo  de)  carpinterc 
V.  no  le  tiene. 

I Le  tiene  V.  ? 

Le  tengo. 

No  le  tengo 


20 


SIXTH  LESSOS. 


I'lie  mutton- 
The  knife. 

Have  you  the  fine  one  ? 
Have  I the  ugly  one  ? 
The  fine  one. 
The  ugly  one 


El  carnero. 

El  cuchillo.  llo. — 

1 1 Tiene  V.  el  hennoso  ? 
t I Tengo  yo  el  feo  ? 
t El  hermoso. 
t El  feo. 


Which  one  have  you  ? 

Which  one  have  I ? 

Which  one  ? 

Am  I afraid  or  ashamed  ? 

You  are  neither  afraid  nor  ashamed, 
tiave  I my  knife  or  yours  ? 

You  have  neither  yours  nor  mine. 


I Cual  tiene  V.  ? 

I Cual  tengo  yo  ? ua. — 

I Cual  ? 

I Tengo  yo  miedo  6 vergiienza  ? 

V.  no  tiene  ni  miedo  ni  vergiienza 
I Tengo  yo  mi  cuchillo  6 el  de  V.  ? 
V.  no  tiene  ni  el  suyo  ni  el  mio 


EXERCISES. 

8 

I have  neitlier  the  baker’s  dog,  nor  that  of  my  Mend. — Are  you 
ashamed  ? — I am  not  ashamed. — Are  you  afraid  or  ashamed  ? — I am 
neither  ashamed  nor  afraid. — Have  you  my  knife  ? — Which  one  ? — 
The  fine  one, — Have  you  my  mutton  or  the  cook’s  ? — I have  neither 
yours  nor  the  cook’s. — Which  (one)  have  you  ? — I have  that  of  the 
captain. — Have  I your  biscuit? — You  have  it  not. — Am  I hungry  or 
thirsty  ? — You  are  neither  hungry  nor  tliirsty. — Am  I warm  or  cold  ? 
— You  are  neither  cold  nor  warm. — Am  I afraid  ? — You  are  not  afraia. 
— Have  I any  thing  good  ? — You  have  nothing  good. — What  have  I?- 
You  have  nothing. — Which  pencil  have  I? — You  have  that  of  the 
Frenchman. — Have  I your  cloth  or  the  tailor’s  ? — You  have  neither 
mine  nor  that  of  the  tailor. — Which  one  have  1 ? — You  have  your 
friend’s. — Have  I your  iron  gun? — You  have  it. 

9. 

Am  I right? — You  are  right. — Am  I wrong? — You  are  wrong. — 
Am  I right  or  wrong? — You  are  neither  right  nor  wrong;  you  are 
afraid. — Have  I the  good  coffee  or  the  good  sugar  ? — You  have  neither 
the  good  coffee  nor  the  good  sugar. — Have  I any  thing  good  or  bad  ? 
— You  have  neither  any  thing  good  nor  bad. — What  have  I? — You 
have  nothing. — What  have  I pretty? — You  have  my  friend’s  dog. — 
Which  one  ? — The  pretty  one. — Which  corkscrew  have  I ? — You  have 
the  old  one. — Have  I the  old  one  ? — Yes,  Sir,  you  have  it. — Have  I 
your  chocolate? — No,  you  have  yours. — Have  I the  shoemaker’a 
leather  shoe? — You  have  not  the  shoemaker’s;  you  have  the  cap- 
tain’s.— Have  I it  ? — Yes,  you  have  it. — Am  I ashamed  of  that  man  1 
— No,  you  are  not  ashamed  of  that  man ; you  are  afraid  of  his  dog. 


SEVENTH  LESSON. 


21 


SEVENTH  LESSON. 
Who  7 

V/ho  has  the  pencil  1 
Who  has  it? 

Has  the  boy  it? 

He  has  it  not. 

Has  he  it  not? 

He. 

Ohs.  A.  Ely  when  it  is  a pronoun, 
? hen  it  is  an  article,  it  has  it  not 
Has  he  the  hat  ? 

He  has  it. 

I have 
You  have. 

He  has. 

Have  I? 

Have  you? 

Has  he  ? 


— Leccion  Septima. 

I Quien  ? qute. — () 

I Quien  tiene  el  lapii ' 

I Quien  le  tiene  ? 

I Le  tiene  el  muchacho  ? 

El  no  le  tiene. 
i No  le  tiene  el  7 
El. 

is  pointed  out  by  an  accent ; bia 

I Tiene  O el  sombrero  ? 

6l  le  tiene. 

Yo  tengo. 

V.  tiene. 

^ll  tiene. 
i Tengo  yo? 

I Tiene  V.  ? 

I Tiene  ^1  ? 


The  chicken. 

The  chest,  the  trunk 
The  bag. 

The  waistcoat 
The  ship. 

The  young  man. 

Has  the  young  man  ? 

Has  my  friend  ? 

Has  that  bedter? 


The  rice.  I 

The  countryman,  the  peasant 
The  servant. 

Is  the  peasant  hungry  ? 

He  is  hungry. 

Is  your  brother  warm  ? 

Is  he  ashamed  ? 

What  has  he  ? ■ 

What  has  my  friend  ? j 

What  have  I ? 


El  polio 

El  haul,  el  cofre. 

El  costal  or  saco. 

El  chaleco. 

El  barco. 

El  jdven  or  mozo. — Mozo  mearsi 
also  servant,  waiter. 

I Tiene  el  mozo  ? 
i Tiene  mi  amigo  ? 
i Tiene  ese  panadero? 


El  arroz. 

El  aldeano,  el  paisano.  ea. 

El  criado. 

1 1 Tiene  hambre  el  aldeano  ? 
t El  tiene  hambre. 
t I Tiene  calor  su  hermano  de  V 
t I Tiene  ^1  vergiienza?  ue. 

I Que  tiene  el  ? 

I Que  tiene  mi  amigo? 

I Que  tengo  yo  ? 


Has  he  his  shoe  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  he  has  his  shoe. 


I Tiene  el  su  zapato  ? 

Si,  (sehor,  el  tiene  su  zapaio 


seventh  lesson. 


His. 
His  bird 
His  foot 
His  eye. 


Su.  (Adjective  pionoua.) 
Su  pdjaro 
Su  pie. 

Su  ojo. 


Which  book  has  that  maul 
He  has  his  own. 

His  or  his  own. 

Has  he  his  or  mine  I 
He  has  neither  his  nor  yours. 
Has  he  his  money  \ 

Yes,  he  has  his  own. 


I Que  libro  tiene  ese  hombre  ? 

tiene  el  suyo,  (or  el  suyo  prcpio.) 
El  suyo,  or  el  suyo  propio.  (Ab 
solute  possessive  pronoun.) 

I Tiene  61  el  suyo  6 el  inio? 
fil  no  tiene  ni  el  suyo  ni  el  de  V 
I Tiene  ^1  su  dinero  7 
Sij  6\  tiene  el  suyo. 


Has  anybody  my  money  ? 

No,  Sir,  nobody  has  it. 
Somebody,  anybody. 
Some  one,  any  one. 
Nobody,  not  anybody. 
No  one,  not  any  one. 


I Tiene  alguno  (or  algu  en)  mi  di- 
nero? 

No,  senor,  ninguno  le  tiene. 

Alguno. 

Alguien. 

Ninguno 

Nadie 


Obs.  B.  Alguno,  Alguien,  Ninguno,  and  Nadie,  are  indefinite  proiiouni 
standing  always  for  persons.  See  Appendix. 


Has  anybody  my  bird  ? 
Somebody  has  it 
Nobody  has  it. 


i Tiene  alguno  mi  pdjaro? 

Alguno  le  tiene. — Alguien  le  tiene. 
Ninguno  le  tieno. — Nadie  le  tiene 


EXERCISES. 

10. 

Who  has  my  trunk  ? — The  boy  has  it. — Is  he  thirsty  or  hungry 
He  is  neither  thirsty  nor  hungry. — Has  the  man  the  chicken  ? — He 
aas  it. — ^Who  has  my  waistcoat  ? — The  young  man  has  it. — ^Has  th<^ 
captain  my  ship  ? — He  has  it  not. — Who  has  it  ? — The  merchant  has 
it. — Who  has  tne  knife  ? — Which  knife  ? — ^Mine. — The  servant  has 
it. — -Is  he  afraid  ? — He  is  not  afraid. — Is  the  man  right  or  wong  ? — • 
He  is  neither  right  nor  wrong. — Who  has  the  countryman’s  nee  ? — 
My  servant  has  it. — Has  he  my  horse  ? — No,  Sir,  he  has  it  not. — Who 
has  it  ? — The  peasant  has  it. — Who  has  my  old  shoe  ? — The  shoe- 
maker has  it. — What  has  your  friend  ? — He  has  his  good  money.— 
Has  he  my  gold  ? — He  has  not  yours ; he  has  his  own. — Who  has  it  ?-  * 
The  young  man  has  it. — Who  is  cold  ? — Nobody  is  cold. — Is  anybjxly 
warm  ?— -Nobody  is  warm. 


EIGHTH  LESSON. 


23 


11. 


lias  any  one  my  gun  ? — No  one  has  it. — Has  the  young  man  my 
book  ? — He  has  it  not. — What  has  he  ? — He  has  nothing. — Has  he 
the  hammer  or  the  stick  ? — He  has  neither  the  hammer  nor  the  stick. 
— Has  he  my  umbrella  ? — He  has  it  not. — Who  has  it  ? — Nobody  has 
it. — Yes,  somebody  has  it. — Who  ? — That  man  has  it. — Has  your 
baker  my  bird  or  Ms  ? — He  has  not  yours,  he  has  Ms. — Have  I you> 
bag  or  that  of  your  friend  ? — You  have  neither  mine  nor  my  friend’s ; 
vou  have  your  own. — Who  has  the  peasant’s  bag”! — The  old  baker 
has  it. — Who  is  afraid  ? — The  tailor’s  boy  is  afraid. — Is  he  sleepy  ? — 
He  is  not  sleepy ; he  is  cold. — What  is  the  matter  with  Mm  ? — NotMng. 
— Has  the  peasant  my  money  ? — He  has  it  not. — Has  the  captain  it  ? 
— He  has  it  not. — Who  has  it  ? — Nobody  has  it. — Has  your  neighbor 
any  thing  good  ? — He  has  notMng  good. — What  has  he  ugly  ? — He 
has  notMng  ugly. — Has  he  any  thing  ? — He  has  nothing. 


Has  the  merchant  my  cloth  or  liis  ? — He  has  neither  yours,  nor  Ms. 
— WMch  cloth  has  he? — He  has  that  of  my  brother. — WMch  clotn 
has  the  tailor  ? — He  has  his  own. — Has  your  brother  his  wine  or  the 
neighbor’s  ? — He  has  neither  Ms  nor  the  neighbor’s. — Which  wine  has 
he  ? — He  has  Ms  own. — Has  anybody  my  gold  button  ? — Nobody  has 
it. — Who  has  my  button  ? — ^Your  good  boy  has  it. — Has  he  my  paper 
or  my  horse  ? — He  has  neither  your  paper  n.i  ^^ur  horse ; he  has  Ms 
friend’s  horse. — Who  has  the  Frenchman’s  good  chocolate  ?~-The 
merchant  has  it. — Has  he  it  ? — Yes,  Sir,  he  has  it. — Are  you  afraid  oi 
ashamed  ? — I am  neither  afraid  nor  ashamed. — Has  your  cook  Ms 
mutton  ? — He  has  it. — Have  you  my  bread  or  my  cheese  ? — I have 
neither  your  bread  nor  your  cheese. — Have  I your  wine  or  your 
bread  ? — You  have  neither  my  wine  nor  my  bread. — What  have  I ? — 
You  have  your  mutton. — Has  any  one  my  gold  button? — No  one 
has  it. 


12. 


EIGHTH  I ESSON 


-Leccion  Octava. 

El  marinero. 

Su  drbol. 

El  espejo. 

Su  colchou  de  V.,  or  el  cclcbss 

de  V. 


The  sailor. 

His  tree. 

The  looking-glass. 
Y^our  mattress. 


1 


The  stranger. 
The  foreigner 
The  garden. 
My  glove. 


El  estrangero. 

El  estrangero  or  forastero. 
El  jardin. 

Mi  guanto. 


24 


EIGHTH  LS8SOW. 


This  OX. 
This  hay. 
That  friend 
That  man. 


Este  bney. 
Este  heno. 
Ese  amigo. 
Aquel  hombre 


This  I Esie. 

That  I EsCf  aquel. 


_ Ohs.  A.  Este  refers  to  the  persons  or  things  nearest  to  the  speaker ; ess 
io  tlrO  persons  or  things  nearest  to  the  person  spoken  to ; and  aquel  is  used 
lo  point  out  persons  or  things  distant,  both  from  the  speaker  and  from  the 
person  spoken  to.  It  is  also  employed  when  speaking  of  events,  &c.,  passed 


long  time  since ; as.  In  those  days,  en 
Have  you  this  or  that  book  ? 

I have  this  one,  I have  not  that  one 
This  one. 

That  one. 

Qbs.  B.  One  is  not  translated  ; we 
Have  I this  one  or  that  one  ? 

\Tou  have  this  one,  you  have  not 
that  one. 

Has  the  man  tnis  hat  or  that  one  ? 


aquellos  dias. 

I Tiene  V.  este  libro  6 aquel  7 
Tengo  este,  no  tengo  aquel 
Este. 

Aquel. 

only  say  this  or  that. 

I Tengo  yo  este  6 aquel  ? 

V.  tiene  este,  no  tiene  aquel 

I Tiene  el  hombre  este  sombrero  d 
aquel ? 


He  has  nr»^  this  one,  IJiiY  thai  one. 


']&!  no  tiene  este,  sino  aquel 


Sino.  Pero. 

tiene  este,  pero  no  tiene  aqueL 
It  is  better  to  repeat  the  verb  in  the  second  part  of  the  phrase. 


But. 

He  has  this  one,  but  not  that  one. 
Ohs.  C. 

He  has  not  this  one,  but  that  one 
The  billet 
The  garret. 

The  grana^. 

The  ass. 

The  crm. 

Have  you  this  billet  or  that  one? 

I have  not  this  one,  but  that  one. 

I have  this  one,  but  not  that  one. 
Has  the  neighbor  this  looking-glass 
or  that  one? 

Ho  has  this  one,  but  not  that  one 


6l  no  tiene  este,  sino  tiene  aquel 
El  billete. 

El  desvan. 

El  granero. 

El  burro. 

El  grano,  el  trigo. 

I Tiene  V.  este  billete  6 aquel  ? 

No  tengo  este,  pero  tengo  aquel. 
Tengo  este,  pero  no  tengo  aquel. 

I I iene  el  vecino  este  espejo  < 
aquel  ? 

^ tiene  este,  pero  no  tiene  aquel 


Have  you  the  oillet  that  my  brother 
has  ? 

I have  not  the  billet  which  your 
brother  lias 


^ Tiene  V.  el  billete  que  mi  her 
mano  tiene  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  el  biliete  que  su  he?* 
mano  de  V tiene 


SIGHT  H LE6SON. 


25 


Which.  Thai. 

Have  you  the  horse  which  I have  ? 

I have  the  horse  which  you  have. 

I have  not  that  which  you  have. 

That  which.  The  one  which. 
Have  I the  glove  which  you  have? 
You  have  not  the  one  which  I have. 
That  which  he  has. 

T^e  one  which  you  have. 


Q,ue.  (Relative  pronoun ) 

I Tiene  V.  el  caballo  que  tengo  r 
Tengo  el  caballo  que  V.  tiene. 

Yo  no  tengo  el  que  V.  tiene. 

El  que 

I Tengo  yo  el  guanto  que  V.  tiona  > 
V.  no  tiene  el  que  yo  tengo. 

El  que  6\  tiene. 

El  que  V.  tiene. 


EXERCISES. 

13. 

Which  hay  has  the  stranger  ? — He  has  that  of  the  peasant.-  -liaa 
die  sailor  my  looking-glass  ? — He  has  it  not. — Have  you  this  hat 
or  that  one  ? — I have  this  one. — Have  you  the  hay  of  my  garden  or 
diat  of  yours  ? — I have  neither  that  of  your  garden  nor  that  of  mine, 
Dut  I have  that  of  the  stranger. — Which  glove  have  you  ? — I have 
that  of  the  sador. — Have  you* his  mattress? — I have  it. — Which 
gun  has  the  sailor  ? — He  has  his  own. — Who  has  my  good  billet  ? — 
This  man  has  it. — Who  has  that  stick  ? — Your  friend  has  it. — Have 
you  the  corn  of  your  granary  or  that  of  mine  ? — I have  neither  that 
of  your  granary  nor  that  of  mine,  but  I have  that  of  my  merchant. — 
Who  has  my  glove  ? — That  servant  has  it. — What  has  you  servant  ? 
— He  has  the  tree  of  this  garden. — Has  he  that  man’s  book  ? — He 
has  not  the  book  of  that  man,  but  lie  has  that  of  this  boy. — Has  the 
peasant  thi^;  or  that  ox  ? — He  has  neither  this  nor  that,  but  he  hag 
the  one  which  the  boy  has. — Has  this  ass  his  hay  or  that  of  the  horse  ? 
— He  has  neither  his  nor  that  of  the  horse. — Wliich  horse  has  this 
peasant  ?—  He  has  that  of  your  neighbor. — Have  I your  hay  or  his  ? 
— You  have  neither  mine  nor  his,  but  you  have  that  of  your  friend. — 
Have  you  this  horse’s  hay  ? — I have  not  his  hay,  but  his  corn. — Has 
your  brother  my  wine  or  his  ? — He  has  neither  yours  nor  his  own, 
but  he  hes  the  sailor’s. — Has  the  stranger  my  bird  or  his  own  ? — He 
nas  that  of  tlie  captain. — Have  you  the  tree  of  this  garden  ?— I have 
It  not. — Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  ? — I am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty, 
ful  I cm  sleepy. 

14. 

Has  the  .sailor  this  bird  or  that  one  ? — He  has  not  this,  but  that 
2Jne. — Has  your  servant  tliis  sack  or  that  one  ? — He  has  this  one 
but  not  that  one. — Has  your  cook  this  chicken  or  that  one? — He 
!ias  neither  this  one  nor  that  one,  but  he  has  that  of  his  neighbor.— 
A.m  I riglit  or  wrong? — You  are  neither  right  nor  wrong,  but  you? 
§ock1  boy  is  wrong. — Have  I this  knife  or  that  one? — You  have  nei 


26 


NINTH  LESSON. 


ther  this  nor  that  one. — What  have  I? — You  have  nothing  gr>od,  but 
you  have  something  bad. — Have  }^ou  the  chest  which  I have  ? — 1 
have  not  that  which  you  have.- — Which  horse  have  you  ? — I have  the 
one  which  your  brother  has. — Have  you  the  ass  which  my  friend  has  1 
— I have  not  that  which  he  has,  but  I have  that  which  you  have.—* 
Has  your  friend  the  looking-glass  wliich  you  have  or  that  which  J 
have  ? — He  has  neither  that  which  you  have  nor  that  which  I have 
but  he  has  liis  own. 

15. 

Which  bag  has  the  peasant? — He  has  the  one  whicn  his  ooy  hafi. 
— Have  I your  golden  or  your  iron  candlestick  ? — You  have  neither 
mv  golden  nor  my  iron  candlestick. — Have  you  my  waistcoat  or  that 
of  the  tailor  ? — I have  neither  yours  nor  that  of  the  tailor. — Which 
one  have  you  ? — I have  that  which  my  friend  has. — Are  you  cold  or 
warm  ? — I am  neitiier  cold  nor  warm,  but  I am  thirsty. — Is  your  friend 
afraid  or  ashamed  ? — He  is  neither  afraid  nor  ashamed,  but  he  is 
sleepy. — Who  is  wrong? — Your  friend  is  wrong. — Has  any  one  my 
umbrella  ? — No  one  has  it.— Is  any  one  ashamed  ? — No  one  is  ashamed, 
but  my  friend  is  hungry. — Has  the  captain  the  ship  which  you  have 
or  that  which  I have  ? — He  has  neither  that  which  you  have,  nor  that 
which  I have. — Which  one  has  he  ? — He  has  that  of  his  friend. — Is 
he  right  or  wrong  ? — He  is  neither  right  nor  wrong. — Has  the  French- 
man any  thing  good  or  bad  ? — He  has  neither  any  thing  good  nor  bad, 
but  he  has  something  pretty. — What  has  he  pretty  ? — He  has  the 
pretty  chicken. — Has  he  the  good  biscuit  ? — He  has  it  not,  but  hie 
neighbor  has  it. 


NINTH  LESSON.— Lecciou  Nona, 

DEFINITE  ARTICLE  IN  THE  PLURAL 

MASCULINE. 

The.  Los. 

Of  the,  from  the.  De  los. 

To  the^  at  the,  i A los. 

• THE  FORMATION  OF  THE  PLURAL. 

Rule. — Nouns  terminating  in  a short  or  unaccented  vowel  are  mad? 
plural  by  adding  s to  the  singular ; as,  book,  libro,  books,  libros. 

Nouns  ending  in  a long  or  accented  vowel,  or  in  a consonant,  or  in  y 
add  es  to  make  the  plural ; as,  bashaw,  baja,  bashaws,  bajdes,  captain 
^apkan.,  ca,p<’alns,  capitanes,  law,  ley,  laws,  leyes. 


NINTH  LESSON. 


27 


Words  oiidiiiff  in  z add  es,  and  change  the  z into  c, 


judge,  judges,  ^'mcccs,  oy  juezes. 


The  book. 
Good. 

The  stick. 
The  ox. 
The  judge. 


El  libro  + s. 
Bueno  -{-  s. 

El  baston  -j- 
El  buey  es. 
El  juez  + ( *^8. 


The  books. 
Good  books 
The  sticks 
The  oxen. 
The  judges. 


or  retain  it;  a:' 

Los  libros 
Buenos  libros 
Los  bastone-B 
Los  bueyee 
Los  juecefi' 


The  books 
The  good  books. 

Of  the  books. 

The  canes. 

The  good  canes. 

Of  the  canes. 

The  neighbors. 

The  good  neighbors. 

The  friends. 

The  old  friends. 

The  pretty  dogs. 

The  ugly  hats. 

The  woods,  (forest.) 

The  Frenchmen,  (the  French.) 
The  Englishman. 

The  Englishmen,  (the  English.) 
Ohs.  A.  Adjectives  must  agree  ii 
pronouns  they  qualify,  and  their  pi 
kiid  down  above  for  nouns. 

The  place,  the  places 
The  nail,  the  nails. 


Los  libros. 

Los  buenos  libros. 

De  los  libros 
Los  bastones. 

Los  buenos  bastones. 

De  los  bastones. 

Los  vecinos. 

Los  buenos  vecinos 
Los  amigos. 

Los  amigos  viejos. 

Los  bonitos  perros. 

Los  sombreros  feos. 

Los  bosques. 

Los  Franceses. 

El  Ingles. 

Los  Ingleses. 

gender  and  number  with  the  noun£ 
ral  is  made  according  to  the  niliis 

El  lugar,  los  lugares. 

El  clavo,  los  clavos. 


Have  you  the  books  ? 
I have  the  books. 
Who  has  the  hats  ? 
He  has  the  hats. 
Have  I the  birds  ? 
Yes,  Sir. 


I I Tiene  V.  los  libros  ? 

1 Yo  tengo  los  libros. 

I Quien  tiene  los  sombreros  r 
El  tiene  los  sombreros. 

I Tengo  yo  los  pajaros  1 
Si,  sehor 


Have  you  my  knives  ? 

? have  not  your  knives 


I Tiene  V.  mis  cuchillos  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  sus  cuchillos  de  V 


My 

Yen? 


SINGULAR.  PLURAL 


Mi. 

Su  (n)  de  V 
El  (a)  de  V. 
Vuostro 

/'See  Obs. 


Mis. 

Sus  (n)  de  V 
Los  (n)  de  V 
V uestros. 

A,  Lesson  IV 


28 


NI^^H  LESSOJ<. 


llis  or  lier 

Our. 

Tlieir. 


8INGULAH  PLURAI* 

Su.  Sus. 

Nuestro.  Nuestros.  tus  -(i 

Su.  . Sus. 


Ohs.  B.  These  adjectives  agree  in  number  with  the  nouns  that  come  aftei 
ibeni,  and  to  which  they  refer. 


I lis  or  her  books. 

Our  book,  our  books. 
The  w'ork,  (labor.) 
The  works. 

Our  gloves. 

Small. 

Large. 


I Sus  libros. 

I Nuestro  libro,  nuestros  libros. 

El  trabajo. 

Los  trabajos. 

I Nuestros  guantes. 

I Pequeno,  (sing.)  Pec  aeh os,  (plur.) 

I Grande,  (sing.)  Grandes,  (plur.) 


Which  hats  ? 

WJiich  ones  7 
These  books. 

Those  books. 

These. 

Those. 

These  or  tnose  booKs. 

Have  you  these  or  those  bocks  ? 
These  birds  or  those. 

Have  I these  or  those  bira  ? 


I Que  sombreros  ? 

I Cuales  ? 

Estos  libros. 

Esos  libros,  aquellos  libros- 
Estos. 

Esosj  aquellos. 

(See  Obs.  A,  Lesson  VIII.) 
Estos  libros  6 aquellos. 

I Tiene  V.  estos  libros  6 aquellos  ? 
Estos  pdjaros  6 aquellos. 

I Tengo  yo  estos  pdjaros  6 aquellos  < 


The  eyes. 

The  asses 

VV'hich  horses  have  y>u? 

Have  you  the  fine  norses  of  your 
good  neighbors  ? 

Have  I his  small  gloves  ? 

V^ou  have  not  his  small  gloves,  but 
yiu  have  his  large  hats. 

Ha3  your  brother  his  iron  guns  ? 

He  has  not  his  iron  guns 
Whicli  ones  has  he  I 


Los  ojos. 

Los  burros. 

I Que  caballos  tiene  V ? 

I Tiene  V.  los  hermosos  caballos  di 
sus  buenos  vecinos  (de  V.  ?) 

i Tengo  yo  sus  guantes  pequenos? 
(or  guantecitos.) 

V.  no  tiene  sus  guantes  pequenos, 
pero  V.  tiene  sus  sombreros  gran- 
des. 

I Tiene  el  hermano  de  V.  sus  fusiles 
de  hierro  ? 

fil  no  tiene  sus  fusiles  de  hierro. 

I Cuales  tiene  ^1  ? 


Of  my  gardens. 

Of  your  pretty  horses 


De  mis  jardines 

De  sus  bonitos  caballos  de  "V 


NIKTH  LESSON. 


29 


The  Fieiichmeij’s  fine  umbrellas. 

Of  my  woods. 

Of  your  fine  trees. 

Have  you  the  Frenchmen’s  fine  um- 
brellas ? 

I have  not  their  umbrellas,  but  I 
have  their  hue  canes. 

Have  you  the  trees  of  my  gardens  ? 

I have  not  the  trees  of  your  gardens 

{lave  you  my  leamern  shoes  ? 

I have  not  your  leathern  shoes,  but 
1 have  your  cloth  caps. 

The  bread,  the  loaves. 


Los  hcrmosos  pardguas  dc  ^os  Fran 
ceses. 

De  mis  bosques. 

De  los  hermosos  drboles  de  V. 

^ Tiene  Vm.  los  hermosos  paiaguac 
de  los  Franceses  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  sus  paraguas,  pero  tengo 
sus  hermosos  bastones. 

^Tiene  V los  drboles  de  mis  jar- 
dines  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  los  drboles  de  sus  jar- 
dines  de  V. 

I Tiene  V.  mis  zapatos  de  cordoban  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  sus  zapatos  de  cordo- 
ban de  V.,  pero  tengo  sus  gorros 
de  pano. 

Ei  pan,  los  panes. 


EXERCISES. 

16. 

Have  you  the  gloves  ? — Yes,  Sir,  1 have  the  gloves. — Ha^^e  you  my 
gloves? — No,  Sir,  I have  not  your  gloves. — Have  I your  looking- 
glasses  ? — You  have  my  looking-glasses. — Have  I your  pretty  books  ? 
— You  have  not  my  pretty  books. — Which  books  have  I ? — You  have 
the  pretty  books  of  your  friends. — Has  the  foreigner  ou/  good  guns  ?— 
He  has  not  our  good  guns,  but  our  good  ships. — Who  has  our  fine 
norses  ? — Nobody  has  your  fine  horses,  but  somebody  has  your  fine 
oxen. — Has  your  neighbor  the  trees  of  your  gardens  ? — He  has  not  the 
trees  of  my  gardens,  but  he  has  your  handsome  woods. — Have  you  the 
horses’  hay  ? — I have  not  their  hay,  but  their  corn. — Has  your  tailor 
my  fine  golden  buttons  ? — He  has  not  your  fine  golden  buttons,  but 
your  fine  golden  candlestick. — What  has  the  sailor  ? — He  has  his  fine 
sliips. — Has  he  my  sticks  or  my  guns  ? — He  has  neither  your  sticks 
nor  your  guns. — Who  has  the  tailor’s  good  waistcoats  ? — Nobody  has 
.\is  waistcoats,  but  somebody  has  his  gold  buttons. — Has  the  French- 
man’s boy  my  good  umbrellas  ? — He  has  not  vour  good  umbrellas,  but 
your  good  sticks. — Has  the  shoemaker  my  leather  shoes  ? — He  lia^ 
vour  leather  shoes. — What  has  the  captain  ? — He  has  his  good  sailors. 

17. 

Which  mattresses  has  the  sailor  ? — He  has  the  good  mattresses  of 
his  captain. — Which  gardens  has  the  Spaniard  ? — He  has  the  gardens 
3f  the  English. — Wliich  servants  has  the  Englishman  ? — He  has  the 
sen^ants  of  the  French. — What  has  your  bov  ? — He  has  his  pretty  birds 


80 


TENTH  lesson. 


— What  has  thu  merchani  ? — He  hasour  pretty  chests. — What  has  the 
baker  ? — He  has  our  fine  asses.— -Has  he  our  nails  or  our  hammers  ? — • 
tie  has  neither  our  nails  nor  our  hammers,  but  he  has  our  good  loaves. 
— Has  the  carpenter  his  iron  hammers  ? — He  has  not  his  iron  hammers, 
but  his  iron  nails. — Which  biscuits  has  the  baker  ? — He  has  the  bis- 
cuits of  his  friends. — Has  our  friend  our  fine  pencils  ? — He  has  not  our 
fine  pencils. — Which  ones  has  he  ? — Ho  has  the  small  pencils  of 
merchants. — Which  sticks  has  your  servant  ? — He  has  the  sticks  of  his 
good  merchants. — Has  your  fnend  the  small  knives  of  our  merchants  ? 
— He  has  not  their  small  knives,  but  their  golden  candlesticks. — Have 
you  these  guns  ? — I have  not  these  guns,  but  these  iron  knives. — Has 
the  man  this  or  that  billet  ? — He  has  neither  this  nor  that. — Has  he 
your  book  or  your  friend’s  ? — He  has  neither  mine  nor  my  friend’s ; he 
has  his  own. — Has  your  brother  the  wine  which  1 have  or  that  which 
you  have  ? — He  has  neither  that  which  you  have  nor  that  which  I have. 
— Wliich  wine  has  he  ? — He  has  that  of  his  merchants. — Have  you 
the  bag  which  my  servant  has  ? — I have  not  the  bag  which  your  ser- 
vant has. — Have  you  the  chicken  which  my  cook  has  or  that  which 
the  peasant  has  ? — 1 have  neither  that  which  your  cook  has  nor  that 
which  the  peasant  has. — Is  the  peasant  cold  or  warm  ? — He  is  neither 
cold  nor  warm. 


TENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Decima. 


Those  of. 

Have  you  my  books  or  those  of  the 
man  ? 

[ have  not  your  books  I have  those 
of  the  man 


Los  de. 

I Tieiie  V.  mis  libros  6 Los  del  hom- 
bre  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  los  libros  de  Vrn.,  tengo 
los  del  hombre. 


Those  which. 

Have  you  the  books  which  I have  ? 

I l<ave  those  which  you  have. 

Has  the  Englishman  the  knives 
whicli  you  have,  or  those  which  1 
have  ? 

He  has  neither  those  which  you 
have,  nor  those  whii^h  I have. 

Which  knives  has  he  ? 

He  has  his  own. 

Have  you  mine  ? 

No,  1 have  not  yours 


Los  qne 

I Tiene  V.  los  libros  que  tengo  I 
Yo  tengo  los  que  V.  tiene. 

I Tiene  el  Ingles  los  cuchillos  quo  V 
tiene,  6 los  que  yo  tengo? 

No  tiene  ni  los  que  V.  tiene,  ni 
que  yo  tengo. 

I Que  cuchillos  tiene  (61  ?) 

]6l  tiene  los  suyos. 

I Tiene  V.  los  mios  ? 

No,  yo  no  tengo  los  de  V 


TENTH  LESSON. 


31 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS 


i^ine 

Yours. 


His,  hers,  Jiis  own,  her  own.; 
Ours. 

Theirs,  (their  own.; 


PLURAL 

Los  mios. 

Los  suyos. 

Los  de  V. 

Los  viiestros. 
(See  Ohs.  A,  Lesson  i V ) 
j El  suyo.  Los  suyos. 

I El  nuestro.  Los  nuestros. 

. El  suyo.  Los  suyos. 


Ohs.  A.  These  pronouns  agree  in  number  with  the  object  possessed 
ill  at  is,  the  noun  they  refer  to  or  stand  for 


Have  you  yours  or  mine  ? 

[ have  not  yours,  I have  mine. 
These,  (plur.  of  th.’s  one.) 
Those,  (plur.  of  that  one.) 


I Tieno  V.  los  suyos  o los  mios  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  los  de  V.,  tengo  los  mice 
Estos. 

Esos,  aquellos. 


Ohs.  B.  These  words  are  used  with  or  without  substant  v^es. 


I have  neither  these  nor  those 
Have  I these  or  those  ? 

You  have  these  ; you  have  not  those. 
Ilafo  I the  looking-glasses  of  the 
French,  or  those  of  the  English  ? 
You  have  neither  the  former  nor  the 
latter. 

The  former. 

The  latter. 


Yo  no  tengo  ni  estos  ni  aquellos 
I Tengo  yo  estos  6 aquellos  ? 

V.  tiene  estos ; no  tiene  aquellos. 
t Tengo  yo  los  espojos  de  los  Fian* 
ceses,  6 los  de  los  Ingleses  ? 

V.  no  tiene  ni  aquellos,  ni  estos. 


1 Aquel,  (sing.) 
! Este,  (sing.) 


Aquellos,  (plur  > 
Estos,  (plur.) 


Ohs.  C.  In  Spanish  aquel  and  aquellos  refer  always  to  the  object  first 
mentioned ; este,  estos,  to  the  object  last  spoken  of. 


Have  you  my  canes  or  my  guns? 

I have  the  latten  but  I have  not  the 
former 

Has  the  man  these  or  those  trunks  ? 

He  has  these,  but  not  those. 

Have  ysu  your  guns  or  mine  ? 

I have  neither  yours  nor  mine  but 
those  of  our  good  friends 


I Tiene  V.  mis  bastones  6 mis  fusiles  ? 

Yo  tengo  estos,  pero  no  tengo  aquel- 
los. 

I Tiene  el  hombre  estos  6 aquellos 
baules  ? 

Tiene  esos,  pero  no  aquellos. 

I Tiene  V.  sus  fusiles  6 los  mios  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  ni  los  de  V.  ni  los  mios, 
pero  los  de  nuestros  buenos  ami* 


AUGMENTATIVE  AND  DIMINUTIVE  NOUNS. 

Augmentative  and  Diminutive  nouns,  in  Spanish,  are  those  which  by  the 
v‘,ddition  of  a certain  termination  increase  or  diminish  the  signification  ot 
heir  primitives 


52 


TENTH  LESSON. 


The  augmentative  nouns  are  formed  by  adding  on,  ore,  azo,  or  onazo,  to 
llie  masculine  nouns,  and  onn,  ota^  aza^  or  onaza  to  the  feuiinine  j sup- 
pressing their  last  letter,  should  it  be  n,  e,  or  o ; as. 


A boy.  TJn  muchacho.  | A girl.  Vna  inuchacha 

A big  boy.  Un  muchachon.  | A big  girl.  Una  muchachona 


On  and  o/e,  ona  and  ota,  genera^.y  indicate  goodness  in  the  object ; 
uza,  onazo,  onazUt  most  commonly  refer  only  to  size. 

The  termination  azo  frequently  signifies  the  blow  or  injury  caused  by 
the  object  to  which  it  is  added  ; as, 


Whip. 

A very  large  whjp. 

A stroke  with  a whip. 


Latigo. 

Un  latigazo. 
Un  latigazo. 


The  termination  a^ro^dded  to  the  noun  to  express  a bkw,  or  injury,  haa 
no  change  when  it  is  formed  out  of  a noun  feminine  ; as. 


Hand. 

A large  hand. 

A blow,  or  stroke  with  the  hand. 


Mano. 

Manaza. 

Manazo. 


The  diminutive  nouns  are  formed  by  adding  illo,  uelo  for  the  mas- 
culine, and  ita,  ilia,  uela  for  the  feminine,  to  the  noun,  which  drops  its  last 
letter  if  it  be  a,  e,  or  o ; as, 

A boy.  I Un  muchacho. 

A little  boy.  1 Un  muchachito 

Una  muchacha. 

Una  muchachita. 


A girl. 

A little  girl. 


Ito  and  ita  generally  express  love  towards  the  object,  and  beauty  in  it , 
illo  and  ilia  sometimes  mean  pity,  and  sometimes  contempt ; uelo  and  uela 
formerly  were  used  in  the  same  sense  as  ito  and  ita,  at  present  they  indi- 
cate only  contempt. 

The  greatest  part  of  nouns  ending  in  an,  in,  on,  che,  ge,  que,  re,  te,  ve, 
add  Clio,  cillo,  zuelo,  or  cita,  cilia,  zuela  to  the  noun,  which  in  such  case 
does  not  drop  the  ast  letter  ; as, 


Lion 

Man,. 

Woman. 


Leon. 

Honihre 

Mujer. 


Pretty  little  lion.  Leoncito. 

Good  little  man.  Hornbrecito 

Handsome  little  woman.  Mujercita 


Exception. 


Gentleman, 

Mister, 


Senor. 


Xc»uns  ending  in  z change  it  into  c,  and  add  cito,  cita,  &c. ; as, 

. Cross.  Cruz.  I Little  cross.  Crucecita. 

Fish  Fez.  j Little  fish.  Peceritn^  vececillo 

Nouns  ending  in  co  or  ca  change  this  syllable  into  quito,  qmia;  aj. 

Boat.  Barco.  1 Little  boat.  Barquito. 

Barge  Barca.  j Little  barge.  Barquita 

ftndiuQ  *ii  p'o  or  fra,  di'D  the  o and  add  uito.  iiita.  6lc.  X as, 


TENTH  LESSON. 


33 


B'nend  Amigo.  i Dear  little  friend  Amiguito. 

t rieiid  Amiga.  | Dear  little  friend.  Amiguita 

Nouns  ending  in  zo,  za.  generally  dc  not  admit  the  termination,  and  ex 
Dress  the  diminutive  by  translating  the  adjective ; as,  The  little  Claudius, 
El  pequeiio  Claudio,  or  El  niilo  Claudio,  Sometimes  they  drop  the  last 
two  vowels  and  add  the  regular  termination;  as,  Jz/Zzrt,  Jui’ita ; indio,  in* 
dito.  When  the  letter  n precedes  the  said  last  syllables  io,  ia,  it  is  geuerall? 
cloanged  into  n;  as,  Antonio,  Antohito. 


EXERCISES. 

18. 

Have  you  these  or  those  billets  ? — I have  ne  thei  these  nor  those. 
— Have  you  the  horses  of  the  Spaniards  or  those  of  the  English  ? — 1 
iiave  those  of  the  English,  but  I have  not  those  of  the  Spaniards. — 
VVhich  oxen  have  you  ? — 1 have  those  of  the  foreigners. — Have  you 
the  chests  which  I have  ? — I have  not  those  which  you  have,  but  those 
which  your  brother  has. — Has  your  brother  your  biscuits  or  mine  ? — 
He  has  neither  yours  nor  mine. — Which  biscuits  has  he  ? — He  has  his 
own. — Which  horses  has  your  friend  ? — He  has  those  which  I have. — 
Has  your  friend  my  books  or  his  ? — He  has  neither  yours  nor  his ; but 
ne  has  those  of  the  captain. — Have  I your  waistcoats  or  those  of  the 
tailors  ? — You  have  neither  these  nor  those. — Have  I our  asses  ? — You 
have  not  ours,  but  those  of  our  neighbors. — Have  you  the  birds  of  the 
sailors  ? — I have  not  their  birds,  but  their  fine  sticks. — Which  caps 
has  your  boy  ? —He  has  mine. — Have  I my  shoes  or  those  of  the  shoe- 
makers ? — You  have  not  yours,  but  theirs,  (those  of  the  shoemakers,  j 

jy. 

Which  paper  has  the  man  ? — He  has  ours. — Has  he  our  coffee  ? — 
He  has  it  not. — Have  you  our  bags  or  those  of  the  strangers  ? — I have 
not  yours,  but  theirs. — Has  your  carpenter  our  hammers  or  those  of 
our  friends  ? — He  has  neither  ours  nor  those  of  our  friends. — Which 
nails  has  he  ? — He  has  his  good  iron  nails. — Has  any  one  the  ships  of 
the  English? — No  one  has  those  of  the  English,  but  some  one  has 
those  of  the  French. — Who  has  the  cook’s  chickens  ? — Nobody  has  his 
chickens,  but  somebody  has  his  mutton. — Who  has  his  cheese  ? — His 
boy  has  it. — Who  has  my  old  gun  ? — The  sailor  has  it. — Have  I that 
peasant’s  bag? — You  have  not  his  bag,  but  his  corn. — Which  guns 
nas  the  Englishman  ? — He  lias  those  which  you  have. — Which  urn- 
orellas  has  the  Frenchman  ? — He  has  those  which  his  friend  has. — 
Has  he  our  books  ? — He  has  not  ours,  but  those  which  his  neighboi 
nas. — Is  the  merchant’s  boy  hungry  ? — He  is  not  hungry,  but  thirsty, 
— Is  your  friend  cold  or  warm  ? — He  is  neither  cold  nor  warm. — Is  ho 
fraid  ? — He  is  not  afraid,  but  ashamed. — Has  the  young  man  the  sticks 


34 


ELEVENTH  LESSON. 


3f  our  servants? — He  hys  not  their  sticks,  but  their  soap. — Which 
pencils  has  he  ? — He  has  chose  of  his  old  merchants. — Have  you  anv 
thing  good  or  bad  ? — I have  neither  any  thing  good  nor  bad,  but  some* 
thing  tine. — What  have  you  fine'? — I have  our  cooks’  fine  wine. — 
Have  YOU  not  their  fine  mutton  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  it  not- 


KLEVENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Undecwia. 


The  comb 
The  glass. 

The  glass,  (tumbler.) 
Have  you  my  small  combs  ? 
I have  them. 


El  peine. 

El  vidrio,  (a  factitious  substanco.j 
El  vaso. 

^ I Tiene  V.  mis  peines  chiquitos  * (or 
( peinecitos  ?) 

I Yo  /os  teiigo. 


Them. 


I Los. 


Ohs.  A.  Los  is  a pronoun  when  it 
placed ; but  when  los  is  an  article, 
Has  he  my  fine  glares? 

He  has  them. 

Have  I tliem? 

You  have  them. 

You  have  them  not. 

Has  the  man  my  pretty  combs  ? 
He  has  them  not. 

Has  the  boy  them? 

The  men  have  them. 

Have  the  men  them? 


is  governed  by  a verb  before  which  it 
,t  comes  before  a substantive. 

; Tiene  6\  mis  hermosos  vasos '? 

6l  los  tiene 
I Los  tengo  yo  ? 

V.  los  tiene. 

V.  no  los  tiene. 

I Tiene  el  hombre  mis  bonitos  peiu«s  ^ 
!&1  no  los  tiene. 

I Los  tiene  el  muchacho  ? 

Los  hombres  los  tienen. 

I Los  tienen  los  hombres? 


They 

They  have  them. 
They  have  them  not. 
Who  has  them? 


I Elios 
I Elios  los  tienen. 

I Elios  no  los  tiener 
I I Quien  los  tiene  ? 


The  Germans. 

The  Turks. 

The  Germans  have  them 
The  Italians. 

The  Spaniards. 


Los  Alemanes. 

Los  Turcos. 

Los  Alemanes  los  tienen 
Los  Italianos. 

Los  Espanoles. 


Sof/ie  or  any  | 

Obs.  B.  Some  iiwdi  any^  used  in  an  unlimited  sense,  are  not  translated, 
particularly  when  they  are  not  '^ullowed  by  a noun  : but  the  noun  which  a 


ELEVENTH  LESSON. 


35 


j!i(iersl(/od  in  English  is  sometimes  expressed  in  Spanish,  or,  what  is  morg 
asual,  we  give  another  form  to  the  sentence,  by  merely  using  the  woKb-— 
Vet,  Sir,  Sif  seilor  ; No,  sir.  No,  senor,  either  with  or  without  the  verb 


fJavo  you  any  wine? 

] have  some,  (wine  understood.) 

I have  noL  any,  (wine  understood.) 

Will  you  send  for  wine? 

i will  send  for  some,  (wine  under- 
stood.) 

i will  not  send  for  any,  (wine  under- 
stood.; 


j I Tiene  V.  vino  ? 

T engo  vino. 

Si,  teiigo. 

Si,  senor. 
r No  tengo  vino. 

^ No  tengo. 

( No,  senor. 

1 I Quiere  V.  enviar  poi  vino 
r Yo  quiero  enviar  por  vino. 

) Si,  quiero. 

f Si,  senor 

C No  quiero  enviar  por  vino 

/ No  quiero. 

( No,  senor. 


So?ne,  meaning  a little,  is  expressed  and  translated  by  un  pocv 


t have  some,  (a  little.) 

Yo  tengo  un 

Some  or  any  wine. 

t Vino. 

Some  or  any  bread 

t Pan. 

Some  or  any  tea 

t T6. 

Some  or  any  buttons 

t Botones. 

Some  or  any  knives 

t Cuchillos. 

Some  or  any  men 

t Hombres. 

Have  you  any  wine  ? 

I have  some  wine. 

Has  this  man  any  cloth? 
He  heis  some  cloth. 

Has  he  any  books? 

He  has  some  books. 
Have  you  any  money? 

I have  some  money. 


t I Tiene  V.  vino  ? 
t Yo  tengo  vino,  or 
Tengo  un  poco. 
t I Tiene  paho  este  hombre  i 
t fil  tiene  paho. 

1 1 Tiene  dl  libros  ? 
t El  tiene  libios,  or 
Tiene  algunos  libros. 
t I Tiene  V.  dinero  ? 
t Yo  tengo  dinero,  or 
Tengo  un  poco  de  diueio. 


No  Not  any 
1 have  no  wine. 

Ho  has  not  any  money. 
You  Uave  no  books. 

They  have  not  any  friends 


No.  (In  a general  indefinite  f?cniio. 
Yo  no  tengo  vino. 

El  no  tiene  dinero. 

V.  no  tiene  libros. 

Elios  no  tienen  amiiroa 


56 


ELEVENTH  LESSON. 


Some, 

Some,  Any. 
Some.  Ones 


I Un  pocoy  (a  smaJ  quantity.; 
r Alguno.  {Algun^  before  a noun 
) masculine  siiiguiar.) 

( Algunos. 


Obs.  C.  Alguno,  Algun,  and  Algunos  are  used  in  a limited  sense. 


Has  he  any  paper? 

Have  you  any  good  paper? 
Have  I any? 

Have  you  any  good  ? 


I Tiene  (el)  algun  papel  ? 

I Tiene  V.  algun  biieu  pape.  ? 
I Tengo  yo  alguno? 

I Tiene  V.  alguno  buono  ? 


(No. 


, I Ninguno.  (Ninqun,  before  a noun 

No.  Not  any.  ISone.  S ^ i \ 

^ masculine  singulai.) 

L Ningunos 

Ohs.  D.  Ninguno,  Ningun,  and  Ningunos,  are  used  in  a limited  sense 


He  has  not  any  paper.  < 

He  has  not  any  good  paper.  | 

He  has  not  any.  | 

I have  none.  | 

He  has  not  any  good.  | 

He  has  none  good.  | 

Have  you  any  paper? 

I have  some 
I have  some  good. 


(El)  no  tiene  ningun  papel,  or 
Ningun  papel  tiene. 

(See  Obs.  B,  Lesson  III.) 
(6i)  no  tiene  ningun  bueii  papel,  oi 
Ningun  buen  papel  tiene. 

Ninguno  tiene,  or 
No  tiene  ninguno. 

Ninguno  tengo,  {pi.  ningunos  tengo.) 
No  tiene  ninguno  bueno,  or 
No  tiene  ningunos  buenos. 

Ninguno  bueno  tiene,  or 
Ningunos  buenos  tiene. 


I Tiene  Vm.  algun  papel  ? 
Tengo  alguno,  (or  un  poco.) 
Tengo  alguno  bueno. 


Some  old  wine. 
Some  bad  cheese 


Vino  af  ejo. 
Queso  malo. 


Ohs.  E.  When  malo  is  befor*'  a noun  of  person  it  means  wicked. 


Any  excellent  coffee. 

The  painter. 

The  picture. 

The  picture,  (likeness.) 

Tlie  painter  has  some  pictures. 


Excelente  cafe  ex. — x 

El  pintor. 

El  cuadro. 

El  retrata 

El  pintor  tiene  algunos  cuadros. 


ELEVENTH  LESSON. 


37 


EXERCISES. 

2C. 

Have  }ou  my  fine  glasses  ? — I have  them. — Have  you  the  fine 
aoraes  of  tl  .e  English  ? — I have  them  not. — Which  sticks  have  you  ? 
—1  have  t lose  of  the  foreigners. — Who  has  my  small  combs  ? — My 
boys  have  them. — Which  knives  have  you  ? — I have  those  of  your 
friends. — Have  I your  good  guns  ? — You  have  them  not,  but  your 
friends  have  them. — Have  you  my  pretty  pictures,  or  those  of  my 
brothers  ? — I have  neither  yours  nor  your  brothers’,  but  my  own. — 
Which  ships  have  the  Germans  ? — The  Germans  have  no  ships. — 
Have  the  sailors  our  fine  mattresses  ? — They  have  them  not. — Have 
the  cooks  them  ? — They  have  them. — Has  the  captain  your  prettv 
books? — He  has  them  not. — Have  I them? — You  have  them.  Yon 
have  them  not. — Has  the  Italian  them  ? — He  has  them. — Havo  the 
Turks  our  fine  guns  ? — They  have  them  not. — Have  the  Spam’^rtb^ 
them  ? — They  have  them. — Has  the  German  the  pretty  umbi%lla»  of 
the  Spaniards? — He  has  them. — Has  he  them? — Yes,  Sir,  he  has 
them. — Has  the  Italian  our  pretty  gloves  ? — He  has  them  not. — Who 
has  them  ? — The  Turk  has  them. — Has  the  tailor  our  waistcoats  o 
those  of  our  friends  ? — He  has  neither  the  latter  nor  the  former.— 
Which  caps  has  he  ? — He  has  those  which  the  Turks  have. — Which 
flogs  have  you  ? — I have  those  which  my  neighbors  haye. 

21. 

Have  you  any  woods  ? — I have  some  woods. — Has  your  brotlier  any 
soap  ? — He  has  no  soap. — Have  I any  mutton  ? — You  have  no  mutton 
but  you  have  some  cheese. — Have  your  friends  any  money  ?-  They 
have  some  money. — Have  they  any  tea  ? — They  have  no  tea,  but  the\ 
have  some  excellent  coffee. — Have  I any  soap? — You  have  no  soap, 
but  you  have  some  coal. — Has  the  merchant  any  cloth  ? — He  has  no 
cloth!  but  some  pretty  shoes. — Have  the  English  any  gold  ? — They 
have  no  gold,  but  they  have  some  excellent  iron. — Have  you  any  good 
coffee  ? — i have  no  good  coffee,  but  some  excellent  wine. — Has  the 
merchant  any  good  books  ? — He  has  some  good  books. — Has  the  young 
man  any  tea  ? — He  has  no  tea,  but  some  excellent  chocolate. — Have 
the  French  any  good  gloves  ? — They  have  some  excellent  gloves. — 
Have  they  any  birds  ? — They  have  no  birds,  but  they  have  some  pretty 
pictures. — Who  has  the  fine  knives  of  the  English  ? — Their  friends 
have  them. — Who  has  the  good  biscuits  of  the  bakers  ? — Tlie  sailors 
of  our  captains  have  them. — Have  they  our  ships  ? — Yes,  Sir,  they 
nave  them. — What  have  the  Italians  ? — They  have  some  beautifu 
pictures. — What  have  the  Spaniards  ? — The,y  have  some  fine  asses,— 
What  have  tlie  Germans  ? — Thev  have  some  excellent  corn. 


38 


TWELFTH  LESSaN, 


22. 


Have  you  any  friends  ? — I have  some  friends. — Have  your  friends 
any  coal  ? — They  have  some. — Have  the  shoemakers  any  good  shoes  1 
— They  have  no  good  shoes,  but  they  have  some  excellei  t leather. — 
Have  the  tailors  any  good  waistcoats  ? — They  have  no  good  waistcoats, 
but  some  excellent  cloth. — Has  the  painter  any  umbrellas  ? — He  has 
no  umbrellas,  but  he  has  some  beautiful  pictures. — Has  he  the  pictures 
of  the  French  or  those  of  the  Italians  ? — He  has  neither  tlie  latter  nor 
the  former. — Which  ones  has  he  ? — He  has  those  of  his  good  friends. 
— Have  the  Russians  (los  Rusos)  any  thing  good  ? — They  have  some- 
thing good. — What  have  they  good  ? — They  have  some  good  oxen. — 
Has  any  one  my  small  combs  ? — No  one  has  them. — Who  has  the 
peasants’  fine  chickens  ? — Your  cooks  have  them. — What  have  the 
bakers  ? — They  have  some  excellent  bread. — Have  your  friends  any 
old  wine  ? — They  have  no  old  wine,  but  some  good  coffee. — Has  any- 
hoe*"  / y6ur  srolden  candlesticks  ? — Nobody  has  them. 


TWELFTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Duodecima  duo,  — o 

INDEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


Of  a,  an,  from  a,  an. 


.4  or  an,  or  one. 


Un. 

De  un. 


Vo  a,  an,  at  a,  an. 

A man. 

A book. 

A stick,  (of  wood.) 
A slick,  (a  cane.) 
Of  a boy. 

Of  a good  sailor 


A un. 

Un  hombro. 

Un  libro. 

Un  palo. 

Un  bastofl. 

De  un  muchacho. 

De  un  buen  marinero. 


A small  knife. 


^ Un  cuchillo  pequeho.  A' 


A large  cap. 


I Un  cuchillito. 

I Un  gorro  grande. 


One. 

Two. 

Three. 


Rave  you  any  books  ? 
Yes,  Sir,  I have  one. 
Have  you  a glass  ? 

I have  no  glass 
I have  one. 

Have  you  a good  horse  ? 
I have  a good  horse 


I Tiene  V.  algunos  libros  ? 
Si,  senor,  yo  tengo  uno. 

I Tiene  V.  un  vaso  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  vaso. 

Yo  tengo  uno. 

I Tiene  V.  un  buen  caballo  ? 
Yo  tengo  un  buer  caballo 


TWELFTH  LESSORS. 


39 


Have  you  any  good  horses? 

1 Tiene  V.  buenos  cabal  1 os  ? 

[ have  two  good  ones. 

Tengo  dos  buenos 

Have  you  two  good  horses  ? 

1 Tiene  V.  dos  buenos  caballos  ' 

Yes,  Sir,  I have  two  good  ones 

Si,  senor,  tengo  dos  buenos 

Four. 

Cuatro. 

Five. 

Cinco. 

Have  you  five  horses 

1 Tiene  V.  cinco  caballos  ? 

i have  none,  Sir. 

Ninguno  tengo,  senor 

Have  you  a small  lion  ? 

1 Tiene  V.  un  leoncito  ? 

I have  one 

Tengo  uno. 

Have  you  any  good  shoes  ? 

1 Tiene  V.  buenos  zapatos  ? 

I have  some  good. 

Tengo  algunos  buenos. 

I have  some  bad  ones. 

Tengo  algunos  mal5s. 

Has  your  brother  a friend  ? 

1 Tiene  algun  amigo  su  hermano  de 
V.? 

He  has  a good  one. 

Tiene  uno  bue:  lo. 

Has  he  one  ? 

1 Tiene  uno  ? 

He  has  one. 

(El)  tiene  uno. 

He  has  two  good  ones 

Tiene  dos  buenos. 

He  has  two  of  them. 

t tiene  dos. 

Have  you  five  good  dogs  ? 

1 Tiene  V.  cinco  buenos  perros  ? 

1 have  three  good  and  two  bad  ones. 

t Yo  tengo  tres  buenos  y dos  maloi 

Who  has  a pretty  umbrella  ? 

1 Quien  tiene  un  bonito  pardguas  ? 

My  brother  has  one. 

Mi  hermano  tiene  uno 

The  hatter. 

El  sombrerero. 

EXERCISES. 

23. 

Have  you  any  wine  ? — I have  some. — ^Have  you  any  coffee  ? — I 
(lave  not  any. — Have  you  any  good  wine  ? — I have  some  good. — 
Have  you  any  good  cloth  ? — I have  no  good  cloth,  but  I have  some 
good  paper. — Have  I any  good  sugar  ? — You  have  not  any  good. — 
Has  the  man  any  good  paper  ? — He  has  some. — Has  he  any  good 
cheese  ? — He  has  not  any. — Has  the  American  {el  Americano)  any 
money  ? — He  has  some. — Have  the  French  any  cheese  ? — They  have 
Qo*  any. — Have  the  English  any  good  wine  ? — They  have  no  good 
'vine,  but  they  have  some  excellent  tea. — Who  has  some  good 
soap  ? — The  merchant  has  some. — Who  has  some  good  bread  ? — 
The  baker  has  some. — Has  the  foreigner  any  woods  ? — He  has  some. 
— Has  he  any  coal  ? — He  has  not  any. — What  rice  have  you  ? — 1 
lave  some  good. — What  hay  has  the  horse  ? — He  has  some  good. — 
Wi.at  leather  has  ti  e shoemaker  ? — He  has  some  excellent. — Have 


40 


TWELFTH  LESSOR 


you  any  nails  ? — 1 have  not  any. — Who  h?s  some  iiahs  ?—  The 
merchant  has  some. — Have  1 any  shoes  ? — You  have  some  shoes. — 
Have  I any  hats  ? — You  have  no  hats. — Has  your  friend  any  pretty 
knives  ? — He  has  some  pretty  ones. — Has  he  any  ^ood  oxen  He 
has  not  any  good  ones. — Have  the  Italians  any  fine  horses  ? — They 
have  not  any  fine  ones. — Who  has  some  fine  asses  ? — The  Spaniardi 
be  VO  some. 

24. 

Has  the  captain  any  good  sailors  ? — He  has  some  good  ones.  — 
Have  the  sailors  any  good  mattresses  ? — They  have  not  any  good 
ones. — Who  has  some  good  biscuits  ? — The  baker  of  our  good  neigh- 
bor has  some. — Has  he  any  bread  ? — He  has  not  any. — Who  has 
some  beautiful  hats  ? — The  French  have  some. — Who  has  some 
excellent  iron  nails  ? — The  carpenter  has  some. — Has  he  rny  ham- 
mers ? — Ha  has  some. — What  hammers  has  he  ? — He  has  son^e  iron 
ones. — What  is  the  matter  with  your  brother  ? — Nothing  ?s  the  mat 
ter  with  him. — Is  he  cold  ?— ^He  is  neither  cold  nor  warm. — Is  he 
afraid  ? — He  is  not  afraid. — Is  he  ashamed  ? — He  is  not  ashamed. — 
What  is  the  matter  with  him  ? — He  is  hungry. — Who  has  some 
beautiful  gloves  ? — I have  some. — Who  has  some  fine  pictures  ? — 
The  Italians  have  some. — Have  the  painters  any  fine  gardens  ? — 
They  have  some  fine  ones. — Has  the  hatter  good  or  bad  hats  ? — He 
nas  some  good  ones. — Has  the  carpenter  good  or  bad  nails  ? — He  ha> 
some  good. — Who  has  some  pretty  caps  ? — The  boys  of  our  mer 
chants  have  some. — Have  they  any  birds  ? — They  have  not  any.— 
Who  has  some  ? — ^IVIy  servant  has  some. — Has  your  servant  any  sticks  ^ 
— He  has  not  any. — Who  has  some  ? — The  servants  of  my  neighbo 
have  some. 

25. 

Have  you  a pencil  ? — I have  one. — Has  your  boy  a good  book  ?— 
He  has  a good  one. — Has  the  German  a good  ship  ? — He  has  none 
— Has  your  tailor  a good  ccat  ? — He  has  a good  one.  He  has  twr 
good  ones.  He  has  three  good  ones  — Has  the  captain  a fine  dog  ? — 
He  has  two  of  them. — Have  your  Hends  two  fine  horses  ? — They 
have  four. — Has  the  young  man  a good  o^  a bad  hat  ? — He  has  no  gooC 
one.  He  has  a bad  one. — Have  you  a cork  ? — I have  none. — Have  I 
a friend  ? — You  have  a good  one.  You  have  two  good  friends. — Has 
tlie  carpenter  an  iron  nail  ? — He  has  six  iron  rails.  * He  has  six  good 
ones  and  seven  bad  ones. — Who  has  good  tea  ? — Our  cook  has  some. 
— Who  has  five  good  horses  ? — Our  neighbor  has  ‘^iv. — Has  the  peas- 
ant any  corn  ? — He  has  some. — Has  he  any  gm\s  ? — He  has  not  any 
— W ho  has  some  good  tnends  ? — The  Turks  have  sow  —Have  .hcv 


THIRTEENTH  LESSON. 


41 


any  money  ? — They  have  not  any.— Who  has  their  money  ? — Theii 
friends  have  it. — Are  their  friends  thirsty  ? — They  are  not  thirsty, 
but  hungfry. — Has  your  servant  a good  dog  ? — He  has  one. — Has  he 
tliis  or  that  nail  ? — He  has  neither  this  nor  that. — Have  the  peasants 
these  or  those  bags  ? — They  have  neither  these  nor  those. — Which 
bags  have  they  ? — They  have  their  own. — Have  you  a go(»d  servant  1 
— I have  a good  one. — Who  has  a good  chest  ? — My  brother  has  one 
—Has  he  a leather  or  an  iron  chest  ? — He  has  an  iron  one. 


THIRTEENTH  LESSON.— Leccion 


How  much  7 
How  many  7 

How  much  bread  have  you  ? 
How  much  money  ? 

How  many  knives? 

How  many  men? 

How  many  friends  ? 


Only, 

But 

1 have  but  one  friend. 

1 have  but  one. 

I have  but  one  good  gun. 

I have  but  one  good  one. 

The  book  is  not  mine,  but  yours. 
You  have  but  one  good  one. 

How  many  horses  has  your  brother  ? 

He  has  but  one 
Hu  lias  but  two  good  ones. 


Much 

Many. 

A good  deal,  very  much. 
Much  bread. 

Many  men. 

A good  deal  of  good  bread. 
Have  you  much  money  ? 

I have  a good  deal. 

Have  you  much  good  wine 
I have  a good  deal. 


Decima  tercia 

I Cuanto  7 
I Cuantos  7 
I Cuanto  pan  tiene  V.  1 
I Cuanto  dinero  ? 

1 Cuantos  cuchillos? 
i Cuantos  hombres? 

I Cuantos  amigos  ? 

^ Solo. 

J Solamente 
I No  (v)  sino 
I No  (v)  mas  que 
Solo  tengo  un  amigo. 

Tengo  uno  solamente. 

No  tengo  mas  que  un  buen  fusil. 
(Yo)  tengo  solamente  uno  bueno 
El  libro  no  es  mio  sino  de  V. 

V.  no  tiene  mas  que  uno  bueno. 

I Cuantos  caballos  tiene  su  bermanv 
, deV.? 

No  tiene  mas  que  uno. 

El  tiene  solamente  dos  buenos. 


I Muchc 
Muchos. 

Muchisimo.  MucJnsimcs, 
Mucho  pan. 

Muchos  hombres. 

Muchisimo  pan  bueno. 

I Tiene  V.  mucho  dinero  T 
Tengo  muchisimo. 

I Tiene  V.  mucho  vino  bueno  ? 
Tengo  muchisimo. 


THIRTEENTH  LESSON. 


Too  much, 

Too  many. 

Vou  have  too  much  wine. 
\Tou  have  too  many  books 
Enough. 

Enough  money 
Knives  enough. 


DemasiadOf  sohradu 
Demasiadosy  sohradna 
V.  tiene  demeisiado  vino. 
V.  tiene  demasiados  libroix 
Bastante,  hastantcs 
Bastante  dinero. 

Bastantes  cuchillos 


Little^  (in  size.) 


Little, 

Few, 

A little, 


Small  in  quantit} 
or  number. 


I 

I 


A little  room.  | 

A little  wine.  \ 

Few  friends.  | 

But  little.  ^ 

Only  a little.  i 


But  few. 

Not  much. 

Not  many. 

You  have  not  much  money. 
We  have  few  friends. 


Pequeho. 

Poco,  pocos. 

Unos  pocos,  unos  cuanlot> 

Un  poco,  (after  a verb.) 

Un  poco  de,  (before  a noun  ^ 
Un  cuarto  pequeno. 

Un  poco  de  vino. 

Unos  pocos  amigos. 

Unos  cuantos  amigos. 

Solo un  poco 

Solamente  un  poco. 

May  poco 

Solo pocos. 

Solamente  unos  cuantos 
Muy  pocos. 

No mucho. 

No muchos. 

V.  no  tiene  mucho  dinero. 
Nosotros  tenemos  pocos  amigos 


We. 

We  have. 
Have  wo  ? 
We  have  not. 


Nosotros. 

(Nosotros)  tenemos. 
[Tenemos  (nosotros?) 
(Nosotros)  no  tenemos. 


Ohs.  The  pronoun  subject  is  almost  alv/ays  omitted  in  Spanish 


Courage. 

flave  we  any  vinegar  ? 

We  have  some. 

We  have  not  any. 

They  have  but  little  courage. 


Valor.  (Aiiimo.) 

[ Tenemos  vinagre  1 
Si  tenemos,  (or  Tenemos  mi  poco  ] 
No  tenemos,  (or  Ninguno  tenemce  ) 
t Tienen  muy  poco  valor 


Have  you  a good  deal  of  money  1 j 
I have  but  little  of  it.  | 

You  have  but  little  of  it  ! 

He  has  but  little  of  it.  j 

W e liaie  but  a little  of  it  ' 


I Tiene  V.  muchisimo  dinero  1 
Solo  tengo  un  poco. 

V.  tiene  solo  un  poco. 

(^11)  tiene  solamente  un  pcHx- 
Solo  tenemos  un  poco 


THIKTEEN’I'H  LESSON. 


43 


Have  you  enough  wine  ? 

I have  but  a little,  but  enough. 


I Tiene  V.  bastante  vino  ] 

Solo  tengo  un  poco ; tongo  scFo 
el  bastante. 


•‘^even. 

Eight. 

Nine. 

Ton. 


Siete. 

Ocho. 

Nueve, 

Diez. 


And. 


I/- 


Some  bread  and  meat.  | t Pan  y came. 

Have  you  any  tea  and  coffee  ? I ‘f’  i Tiene  V.  te  v cafe  ? 


The  hatter. 
The  joiner. 


El  sombrerero. 
El  ensambladoi 


EXERCISES. 

26. 

How  many  friends  have  you  ? — I have  twc  good  friends. — Have  you 
sight  good  trunks  ? — I have  nine. — Has  your  servant  three  glasses  ? — 
Be  has  only  one  good  one. — Has  the  captain  two  good  ships  ? — He 
iids  but  two  good  ones. — How  many  shoes  has  the  shoemaker  ? — He 
has  only  five. — How  many  guns  has  your  brother  ? — He  has  only  four. 
— Have  you  much  bread  ? — I have  a good  deal. — Have  the  Spaniards 
much  money  ? — They  have  but  little. — Has  your  neighbor  much  cof- 
fee ? — He  has  only  a little. — Has  the  foreigner  much  corn  ? — He  has  a 
good  deal. — What  has  the  American  (el  Americano  1) — He  has  much 
sugar. — What  iias  the  Russian  (el  Ruso  ?) — He  has  a great  deal  of 
ham. — Has  the  peasant  much  rice  ? — He  has  not  any. — Has  he  much 
cheese  ? — He  has  but  little. — What  have  we  ? — We  have  much  bread, 
much  wine,  and  many  books. — Have  we  much  money? — We  have 
only  a little,  but  enough. — Have  you  many  brothers  ? — I have  only  one. 
—Have  the  French  many  friends  ? — They  have  but  few. — Has  our 
neighbor  m.uch  hay  ? — He  has  enough. — Has  the  Italian  much  cheese  ? 
— He  has  a great  deal. — Has  this  man  courage  ? — He  has  none. — Haj 
ne  painter’s  boy  any  pencils  ? — He  has  some. — How  many  hammem 
has  the  carpenter  ? — He  has  only  one. 

27. 

Have  you  much  paper  ? — I have  but  little. — Has  the  cook  mucn 
mutton  ? — He  has  but  little  mutton,  but  he  has  a good  deal  of  ham. — 
How  many  oxen  has  the  German  ? — He  has  eight. — How  many  horses 
hiMs  he? — He  has  only  four.  — Wlio  has  a good  many  biscuits? — Om 


14 


FOURTEENTH  LESSON. 


‘•^ailors  have  a good  many. — How  many  books  have  we  ? — We  have 
only  three  pretty  ones. — Have  you  too  much  cheese  ? — I have  no’ 
enough. — Have  our  boys  too  many  books  ? — They  have  too  many.— 
Has  our  friend  too  much  coffee  ? — He  has  only  a little,  but  enough.— 
Who  has  a good  deal  of  tea  ? — The  peasants  have  a good  deal. — Have 
they  many  gloves  ? — They  have  not  any. — Has  the  cook  enough  sugar  ? 
— He  has  not  enough. — Has  he  enough  vinegar  ? — He  has  enough. — 
Have  you  much  soap  ? — I have  only  a little. — Has  the  merchant  much 
cloth  ? — He  has  a good  deal. — Has  our  tailor  many  buttons  ? — He  has 
•i  good  many. — Has  the  painter  many  gardens  ? — He  has  noi  many. — 
How  many  (gardens)  has  he  ? — He  has  but  two. — How  many  knives 
has  the  Germ.an  ? — He  has  three  of  mem. — Has  the  captain  any  fine 
horses? — He  has  some  fine  ones,  but  his  brother  has  none. — Have  we 
any  buttons  ? — We  have  a good  many. — What  buttons  have  we  ? — We 
have  gold  buttons. — What  candlesticks  have  our  friends  ? — They  have 
gold  candJesticks. — Have  they  gold  nails  ? — They  have  some. 

28. 

Has  the  youth  any  pretty  sticks  ? — He  has  no  pretty  sticks,  but  some 
beautiful  birds. — What  chickens  has  our  cook? — He  has  some  pretty 
chickens. — How  many  has  he  ? — He  has  six. — Has  the  hatter  any  hats? 
— He  has  a good  many. — Has  the  joiner  much  work  ? — He  has  not  a 
great  deal,  but  enough. — Have  we  the  horses  of  the  French,  or  those 
of  the  Germans  ? — We  have  neither  these  nor  those. — Which  horses 
have  we  ? — We  have  our  own. — Has  the  Turk  my  small  combs  ? — He 
has  them  not. — Who  has  them? — Your  boy  has  them. — Who  has  our 
looking-glasses  ? — The  Italians  have  them. — Has  the  Frenchman  this 
or  that  umbrella  ? — He  has  neither  this  nor  that. — Has  he  the  mattress 
es  which  we  have  ? — He  has  not  those  which  we  have,  but  those  which 
his  friends  have. — Is  he  ashamed  ? — He  is  not  ashamed,  but  afraid. 


FOURTEENTH  LESSON.- 

A few 

A few  books.  j 

Have  you  a i'ew  books  1 | 

I have  u few.  | 

You  have  a few  I 

Ho  has  a few  I 


-Leccion  Decima  cuarta. 

Algunos. 

Unos. 

Unos  pocGs. 

Unos  cuantos. 

Algunos  libros,  (or  unos  Hbioe  ) 
[Tiene  V.  algunos  fibres'^ 

Yo  tengo  algunos. 

Tengo  unos  cuaiitos. 

V.  tiene  algunos. 

6l  tiene  algunos. 


FOTTRTEKNTH  LESSON 


45 


But  a few 


I have  but  a few. 

Y have  but  a few  books. 
He  has  but  a few  farthings. 


{Solo  (v)  alguncs. 

Solamente  algunos. 

Solo  unos  cuantos. 

Solamente  unos  cuantos. 

C Solo  tengo  algunos,  (or  unos  cuantos. 
^ (Yo)  tengo  solamente  algunos. 

^ No  tengo  mas  que  algunos. 

V.  tiene  solamente  algunos  libros. 

6l  tiene  solamente  algunos  cuartos 


I have  but  a few. 

No  tengo  mas 

que  algunos. 

You  have  but  a few 

V.  no  tiene  mas  que  algunos. 

He  has  but  a few. 

El  no  tiene  mas  que  algunos. 

PLURAL. 

PLURAL. 

Oae,  or  a farthing. 

Farthings. 

Un  cuarto. 

Cuartos 

One,  or  a shilling. 

Shillings. 

Un  real. 

Reales 

One,  01  a dollar. 

Dollars.  | 

Un  peso. 
Un  duro. 

Pesos. 

Duros 

Other 

Another. 

> Otro. 

' 

Have  you  another  horse  “ 
I have  another. 

No  other  horse. 

I have  no  other  horse 
I have  no  other. 


I Tiene  V.  otro  caballo  ? 
Yo  tengo  otro. 


Ningun  otro  caballo. 
No  tengo  otro  caballo. 
No  tengo  otro. 


Some  oiner. 

Any  other 

Have  you  any  other  horses 
! have  some  others. 

I hav)  no  others. 


{Otro. 

Otros. 

Algun  otro. 

Algunos  otros. 

S I Tiene  V otros  caballos  ? 

} I Tiene  V.  algunos  otros  caballos  ? 

5Yo  tengo  otros. 

Yo  tengo  algunos  otros. 

S Yo  no  tengo  otros. 

No  tengo  iiing\mos  otroe 


The  arm. 
The  heart. 
The  foot. 
The  writing 

The  volume 


El  brazo. 

El  corazon 
El  pie. 

I El  escrito 
^ El  tomo. 

/ El  voMmou 


FOURl^ENTH  LESSON. 


No  otner 
Not  any  other 

ytither  the  one  nor  the  other 


No  (v)  otro. 

No  (v)  ningun  otru 
i No  (v)  otros. 

( No  (v)  ningunos  otros 
Ni  el  uno  ni  el  otro, 

Ni  uno  ni  otro. 

Ni  los  unos  ni  los  otros 
Ni  unos  ni  otros. 


H ii at  day  of  the  month  is  it  7 

(It  is)  the  first. 

(It  is)  the  second. 

(It  is)  the  third. 

.What  day  of  the  month  is  this  ? 
(It  is)  the  eleventh. 


t I Que  dia  del  mes  tenem^  ? 
t I Que  dia  es  hoy  ? 

El  primero. 
t El  dos. 
t El  tres. 

t i A cuantos  estamos? 


t A once. 

Obs.  Except  the  first  day  of  the  month,  all  the  other  days  are  ex 
preyed  by  a cardinal  number  preceded  by  the  article 


Which  volume  have  you  ? 

I have  the  fourth 

The  first. 

The  second 
The  third. 

The  fourth. 

The  fifth. 

The  sixth. 

The  seventh. 

The  eighth. 

The  ninth. 

The  tenth. 

The  eleventh. 

The  twentieth. 

The  thirtieth. 

I [ ive  you  tlio  first  or  second  book  ? 


I Que  tomo  tiene  V.  ? 
Yo  tengo  el  cuarto. 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

J El  primero.  ^ 

Los  primeros. 

1 El  primer.*  \ 

1 El  segundo. 

Los  segundos. 

^ El  tercero.  ) 

Los  terceros. 

( El  tercer.*  \ 

El  cuarto. 

Los  cuartos. 

El  quinto. 

Los  quintos. 

El  sexto. 

Los  sextos. 

El  septimo. 

Los  septimos. 

El  octavo. 

Los  octavos. 

^ El  nono. 

Los  nonos. 

^ El  noveno. 

Los  no  veil  os. 

El  decimo. 

Los  decimos 

El  undecimo. 

Los  undecimos 

El  vigesimo. 

Los  vigesimos 

El  trig^simo. 

Los  trigdsimos.’ 

1 Tiene  V.  el 

primero  6 el  segundt 

1 lioro  ? 

* Vrimero  and  tercero  lose  the  o before  a noun.  Ex. — El  primer  tomo . 
terccj  tomo. 

^ Henceforth  the  learner  sliould  write  the  date  before  his  task  Ex  - 
Nueva-York,  Setiembre  veintej  de  inil  ochoeientos  cuarenta  y siete ; Rtvv 
Vork,  September  20tb,  1847 


FOURTEENTH  LESSON. 


47 


vVIiich  volumes  have  you 
, have  the  two  first  cues. 


The  twelfth. 
The  thirteenth 


I Que  tomos  tione  V.? 
t Yo  teiigo  los  dos  primeros 
El  duodecimo. 

El  decimo  tercio 


But. 

The  American 
The  Russian. 


Pero. 

El  Americano,  (pi.)  los  Aniericuiios 
El  Ruso,  (pi.)  los  Rusos 


EXERCISES. 

29. 


Have  you  many  knives  ? — I have  a few. — Have  you  many  pencils  ? — 
1 have  only  a few. — Has  the  painter’s  friend  many  looking-glasses  ■ — 
1 le  has  only  a few. — Has  your  boy  a few  farthings  ? — He  has  a few. 
— Have  you  a few  farthings  ? — We  have  a few. — How  many  shillings 
have  you  ? — I have  ten. — How  many  shillings  has  the  Spjmiard  ? — He 
has  not  many,  he  has  only  five. — Who  has  the  beautiful  glasses  of  the 
Italians? — We  have  them. — Have  the  English  many  ships? — They 
ha\e  a good  many. — Have  the  Italians  many  horses? — They  have  not 
many  horses,  but  a good  many  asses. — What  have  the  Germans  ? — 
They  have  many  dollars. — How  many  dollars  have  they  ? — They  have 
eleven. — Have  we  the  umbrellas  of  the  Spaniards  ? — We  have  them 
not,  but  the  Americans  have  them. — Have  you  much  coffee  ? — I have 
only  a little,  but  enough. — Has  the  Frenchman  many  shillings  ? — Ho 
has  only  a few,  but  he  has  enough. — Has  your  servant  many  far- 
things ? — He  has  no  farthings,  but  shilling’s  enough. 


Have  the  Russians  paper  ? — They  have  but  little  paper,  but  a good 
deal  of  iron. — Have  the  Turks  much  wine  ? — They  have  not  much 
wine,  but  a good  deal  of  colfee. — Who  has  a good  deal  of  dollars  ? — 
The  Germans  (have  a good  deal.) — Have  you  no  other  gun  ? — I have 
no  other. — Have  we  any  other  cheese  ? — We  have  some  other. — Have 
I no  other  gun  ? — You  have  another. — Has  our  neighbor  no  other 
horse  ? — He  has  no  other. — Has  your  brother  no  other  friends  ? — He 
has  some  others. — Have  the  shoemakers  no  other  shoes  ? — They  have 
no  others. — How  many  gloves  have  you  ? — I have  only  two. — Have 
5^ou  any  other  biscuits  ? — I have  no  other. — How  many  arms  has  this 
man  ? — He  has  only  one,  the  other  is  of  cork. — What  heart  has  your 
boy  ? — He  has  a good  heart. — Have  you  no  other  servant  ? — I have 
anotlier. — Has  your  friend  no  other  birds  ? — ^He  has  some  others. — 
How  many  other  birds  has  he  ? — He  has  six  others. — How  many  gar- 
have  yon  ? — I have  cnlv  one,  but  mv  friend  has  two  of  them. 


30. 


48 


FIFTEENTH  LESSO^ 


31 

Which  volume  have  you  ? — I have  the  first. — Have  you  the  secono 
volume  ? — I have  it. — Have  you  the  third  or  fourth  boon  > — I have 
neither  the  former  nor  the  latter. — Have  we  the  fifth  or  sixth  volume? — 
We  have  the  fifth,  but  we  have  not  the  sixth  volume. — Which  volumes 
has  your  friend  ? — He  has  the  seventh  (volume.) — What  day  of  the 
month  is  it  ? — It  is  the  eighth. — Is  it  not  the  eleventh  ? — No,  Sir,  it  is 
the  tenth. — Who  has  our  dollars  ? — The  Russians  have  them. — Have 
they  our  gold  ? — They  have  it  not. — Has  the  youth  much  money  ? — 
He  has  not  much  money,  but  much  courage. — Have  you  the  nails  of 
the  carpenters  or  those  of  the  joiners  ? — I have  neither  those  of  the 
carpenters  nor  those  of  the  joiners,  but  those  of  my  merchants. — Has 
the  Italian  a few  farthings  ? — He  has  a few. — Has  he  a few  shillings 
— He  has  five  of  them. — Have  you  another  stick  ? — I have  another.- 
What  other  stick  have  you  ? — That  of  my  brother. — Have  you  a few 
other  candlesticks? — We  have  a few. — Has  your  boy  another  hat? — 
He  has  another. 


The  one  and  the  other. 

Neither  the  one  nor  the  other. 
Have  you  tiie  first  or  the  second 
volume  of  my  dictionary  ? 

I have  both. 

Have  you  my  book  or  my  paper  ? 

1 have  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. 
Has  my  brother  my  gloves  or  his 
own  ? 

He  has  both  yours  and  his. 

Has  he  my  books  or  those  of  the 
Spaniards  ? 

He  lias  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. 


Amhos. 

Uno  y otro. 

El  uno  y el  otro. 

Los  unos  y los  otros.  (Plur.) 

Ni  el  uno  ni  el  otro. 

I Tiene  V.  ©.  primero  6 ei  segundo 
tomo  de  mi  diccionario  ? 

Tengo  ambos. 

I Tiene  V.  mi  libro  6 mi  papel  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  ni  el  uno  ni  el  otro. 

I Tiene  mi  hermano  mis  gu  antes  6 
los  suyos  ? 
t tiene  dmbos. 
i Tiene  6\  mis  libros  6 los  de 
Espanoles  ? 

El  no  tiene  ni  los  unos  ni  los  otros 


FIFTEENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Decima  quinta. 


Both. 


The  Scotchman 
The  Irishman. 
The  Dutchman 
The  Russian 


El  Escoces. 
El  Irlandes. 
El  Holandes 
EI 


FIFTEENTH  LESSON. 


49 


Some  mure. 
Any  more. 

Some  more. 
Any  more. 

A few  more. 

me  more  wine 
S me  more  money 
/.  few  more  buttons. 


{Mas.  "i 

Algun.  [ ^ 

t Todavia.  f ® 

Ann.  J 

f Todavia  mas.  | 

\ Aun  mas.  ( In  a limited 

I Algunos  mas.  ^ sense 

L Todavia  algunos.) 

SMas  vino. 

Todavia  vino,  (or  algun  vina) 

\ Mas  dinero. 

^ Aun  dinero,  (or  algun  dinero.) 

J Algunos  botones  mas. 

Todavia  algunos  botones. 


iitve  you  any  more  wine  1 
I have  some  more  wine. 

I have  some  more. 

Has  he  any  more  money  1 
He  has  some  more. 

Have  I any  more  books  ? 
Vou  have  some  more. 


I Tiene  V.  todavia  mas  vino  ? 
Tengo  todavia  mas  vino, 
t Todavia  tengo,  (or  aun  ten^?.; 
I Tiene  61  mas  dinero  ? 

Tiene  alguno. 

I Tengo  yo  mas  libros  ? 

V.  tiene  algunos  mas. 


Not  any  more,  no  more 
Much  more. 

Many  more. 

I have  no  more  bread. 

He  has  no  more  money 
Have  you  any  more  wine  ? 
1 have  no  more. 

We  have  no  more. 

Has  he  any  more  vinegar  ? 
He  has  no  more. 

We  have  no  more  books. 
He  has  no  more  dogs. 

Ho  has  no  more 

Not  muck  more. 

Not  many  more. 

Have  you  much  more  wine  ? 
1 have  not  much  more. 

Have  you  many  more  books  i 
\ have  not  many  more 
3 


No  (v)  mas. 

Mucho  mas. 

Muchos  mas. 

Yo  no  tengo  mas  pan. 

6l  no  tiene  mas  dinero. 

I Tiene  V.  aun  mas  vino  ? 

No  tengo  mas. 

No  tenemos  mas. 

I Tiene  todavia  vinagre  ? 

No  tiene  mas. 

Nosotros  no  tenemos  mas  libros. 
fil  no  tiene  masperros. 

No  tiene  mas. 


No  (v)  mucho  ?nas. 

No  (v)  muchos  mas. 

I Tiene  V.  mucho  mas  vino  ? 
(Yo)  no  tengo  mucho  rnas. 

I Tiene  Vm.  muchos  mas  libroE  ? 
No  tengo  muchos  mas. 


50 


FITTEENTH  LESSON. 


You  have  a few  more. 
We  liave  a few  more. 
They  have  a few  more. 


Have  I a few  farthings  more  1 


Have  you  a few  dollars  njore  ? 


I have  a few  more. 


Orie  more  book. 

One  more  good  book. 
Four  more  books. 

A few  more  books. 


t Otro  libro  mas. 
t Otro  bucn  libro  mas 
t Otros  cuatro  libros  mas 
Algunos  libros  mas. 

I Tiene  V.  algunos  pesos  mud  ) 
(Yo)  tengo  algunos  mas 
I Tengo  yo  algunos  cuartos  mas  I 
V.  tiene  algunos  mas. 

(Nosotros)  tenemos  algunos  mas, 
Elios  tienen  algunos  mas. 


Tome,  volume 


I Tomo,  volumen. 


EXERCISES. 

32. 


Which  volume  of  his  dctionary  have  you  ? — I have  the  first.  -How 
many  tomes  has  it  ? — It  has  two. — Have  you  my  dictionary  or  my 
brother’s  ? — I have  both. — Has  the  foreigner  my  comb  or  my  knife  ? 
— He  has  both. — Have  you  my  bread  or  my  cheese  ? — I have  neither 
the  one  nor  the  other. — Has  the  Dutchman  my  glass  or  that  of  my 
friend  ? — He  has  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Has  the  Irishman  our 
horses  or  our  chests  ? — He  has  both. — Has  the  Scotchman  our  shoes 
or  our  caps  ? — He  has  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — What  has  he  ? 
— He  has  his  good  iron  guns. — Have  the  Dutch  our  ships  or  those  of 
the  Spaniards  ? — Tliey  have  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Which 
ships  have  they  ? — They  have  their  own. — Have  we  any  more  hay  ? 
— We  have  some  more. — Has  our  merchant  any  more  paper  ? — He 
nas  some  more. — Has  your  friend  any  more  money  ? — He  has  not  any 
more. — Has  he  any  more  nails  ? — He  has  so.iie  more. — Have  you  any 
more  coffee  ? — We  have  no  more  coffee ; but  we  have  some  more 
chocolate. — Has  the  Dutchman  any  more  sugar  ? — He  has  no  more 
sugar ; but  he  has  some  more  tea. — ^Has  the  painter  any  more  pictures  ? 
— He  has  no  more  pictures ; but  he  has  some  more  pencils. — Have  the 
sailors  any  more  biscuits  ? — They  have  not  any  more. — Have  your 
boys  any  more  books  ? — They  have  not  any  more. — Has  the  young 
man  any  more  friends  ? — He  has  no  more. 


Has  our  cook  much  more  ham  ? — He  has  not  much  more. — Has 
he  many  more  chickens  ? — He  has  not  many  more. — Has  the  peasant 
much  more  hay  ? — He  has  not  much  more  hay  ; but  he  has  a great 
deal  more  wine. — ^Have  the  French  many  more  horses  7 — Thv  have 
not  many  more.  — Have  you  much  more  paper  ? — I nave  much  more 
— Have  we  many  m^re  looking-glasses  ? — V/e  have  many  more. — 


33. 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON. 


51 


Ha\ft  you  one  more  book  ? — I have  one  more. — Have  our  neighbors 
one  more  garden  ? — They  have  one  more. — Has  our  friend  one  more 
umbrella  ? — He  has  no  more. — Have  the  Scotch  a few  more  books  ? 
— They  have  a few  more. — Has  the  tailor  a few  more  buttons  ? — 
has  not  any  more. — Has  your  carpenter  a few  more  nails  ? — He  lus 
no  more  nails  ; but  he  has  a few  sticks  more. — Have  the  Spaniards  a 
few  farthings  more  ? — They  have  a few  more. — Has  the  German  a few 
more  oxen  ? — He  has  a few  more. — Have  you  a few  more  shillings  ?— 
I have  no  more  shillings  ; but  I have  a few  more  dollars. — What  have 
you  more  ? — We  have  a few  more  ships  and  a few  more  good  sailors. 
— Have  I a little  more  money  ? — You  have  a little  more. — Have 
you  any  more  courage  ? — I have  no  more. — Have  you  much  more 
\unegar  ? — I have  not  much  more  ; but  my  brother  has  a great  deal 
more. 


Has  he  sugar  enough  ? — He  has  not  enough. — Have  we  dollars 
enough  ? — We  have  not  enough. — Has  the  joiner  iron  enough  ? — He 
has  enough. — Has  he  hammers  enough  ? — He  has  enough. — Have 
you  rice  enough  ? — We  have  not  rice  enough  ; but  we  have  enough 
sugar. — Have  you  many  more  gloves  ? — I have  not  many  more. — 
Has  the  Russian  another  ship  ? — He  has  another. — Has  he  another 
bag  ? — He  has  no  other. — What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? — It  is  the 
sixth. — How  many  friends  have  you  ? — I have  but  one  good  friend.— 
Has  the  peasant  too  much  bread  ? — He  has  not  enough. — Has  he 
much  money  ? — He  has  but  little  money,  but  he  has  enough  hay. — 
Have  we  the  cloth  or  the  cotton  caps  of  the  Americans  ? — We  hava 
neither  their  cloth  nor  their  cotton  caps. — Have  you  any  more  bread  ? 
—I  have  no  more. — Have  you  any  more  oxen  ? — I have  n«Dt  anv 
naore. 


34. 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Decima  sexia. 


Several. 
Several  men. 
Several  children 
Several  knives 


Varies f {algunoSy  or  mucho^.) 
Varies  hombres. 

Alguiios  nifios. 

Algunos  cuchillofv 


The  father 
The  son. 
The  child. 
The  cake 
T<xi 


El  padre 
El  hijo. 
El  niho. 
El  bollo 
T^ 


52 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON 


As  much 
manj. 

As  much  (n)  as 
As  many  (n)  as. 

As  much  bread  as  wine 
As  many  men  as  children. 

Have  )’ou  as  much  gold  as  lead  ? 

I have  as  much  of  this  as  of  that. 

C have  as  much  of  the  former  as  of 
the  latter. 

[ have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 
other. 

Have  you  as  many  shoes  as  panta- 
loons ? 

r have  as  many  of  these  as  of  those. 

I have  as  many  of  the  latter  as  of 
the  former. 


Tanto. 

Tantos. 

Tanto  (n)  como. 

Tantos  (n)  como. 

Tanto  pan  como  vino 
Tantos  hombres  como  nihos. 


I Tiene  V.  tanto  oro  como  plomo  T 

Tengo  tanto  de  este  como  de  aquel 

Tengo  tanto  de  aquel  como  de  este 

Tenge  tanto  del  uno  como  del  otro 

I Tiene  V.  tantos  zapatc«  como  paii- 
talones  ? 

Tengo  tantos  de  estos  como  de  aque- 
llos. 

Tengo  tantos  de  estos  como  de  aque- 
llos. 


Quite  (or  just)  as  much. 

Quite  (or  just)  as  many. 

I have  quite  as  much  of  this  as  of 
that. 

Quite  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 
other. 

Quite  as  many  of  those  as  of  these. 

Quite  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the 
other. 


Tanto,  just amente  tanto. 

Tantos,  justamente  tantos. 

Tengo  tanto  de  este  como  de  aquel. 

Tanto  del  uno  como  del  otro. 

Tantos  de  aquellos  como  de  estos. 
Tantos  de  los  unos  como  de  los  otroa 


An  enemy,  enemies. 
The  finger. 

The  eye. 


More. 

More  (n)  than. 

Than. 

More  bread  than  wine. 

More  knives  than  forks. 

More  of  this  than  of  that, 
liiore  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. 
More  of  these  than  of  those. 

More  of  the  ones  than  of  the  others. 

I liave  more  of  your  sugar  than  of 
nuno 


Un  enemigo,  enemigos 
El  dedo. 

El  ojo. 


Mas. 

Mas  (n)  que. 

Que 

Mas  pan  que  vino. 

Mas  cuchillos  que  tenedores. 

Mas  de  este  que  de  aquel. 

Mas  del  uno  que  del  otro. 

Mas  de  estos  que  de  aquellos. 

Mas  de  los  unos  que  de  los  otros. 
Tengo  mas  del  azficar  de  V.  que  del 
mio. 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON.  53 


tfe  has  more  of  our  oooks  than  of 

1 (fil)  tiene  mas  de  uueslros  libroa  que 

his  own. 

1 de  los  suvos. 

Less — Fewer, 

1 Menos. 

Less  (n)  than. 

Fewer  (ii)  than  ' 

1 Menos  (n)  que. 

Fewer — less  than  I. 

1 M^nos  que  yo. 

Fewer — less  than  he. 

1 M^nos  que  el. 

Fewer — less  than  we. 

M^nos  que  nosotros. 

Fewer — less  than  you 

M4ncjs  que  vosotros. 

Fewer — less  than  you 

i M^nos  que  V.,  (or  VV  ^ 

Fewer — less  than  they 

Mdnos  que  ello«> 

As  much  as  I 

Tanto  come  yo 

As  much  as  he. 

Tan  to  como  6\. 

As  much  as  we. 

Tanto  como  nosotros. 

As  much  as  you. 

Tanto  como  vosotros,  (or  voe ) 

As  much  as  you. 

Tanto  como  V.,  (or  VV.) 

As  much  as  they. 

Tanto  como  ellos. 

Coat,  (or  garment.) 

Vestido. 

A gun,  (a  piece  of  artillery.) 

Un  canon. 

A tooth. 

Un  diente. 

Have  you  as  much  of  your  wine  as 

1 Tiene  V.  tanto  de  su  vino  como  del 

of  mine  ? 

mio  ? 

I have  quite  as  much  of  yours  as  of 

Tengo  tanto  del  de  V como  del  mio 

mine. 

EXERCISES. 

35. 

Have  you  a horse  ? — I have  several. — Who  has  my  grood  cakes  ? — 
Several  men  have  them. — Has  your  friend  a child  ? — He  has  several. — 
Have  you  as  much  coftee  as  tea  ? — I have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 
other. — Has  this  man  a son  ? — He  has  several. — How  many  sons  has 
he  ? — He  has  four. — How  many  children  have  our  friends  ? — They 
have  many ; they  have  ten  of  them. — Have  we  as  much  bread  as  wine  ? 
—You  have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Has  this  man  as  many 
friends  as  enemies  ? — He  has  as  many  of  the  one  as  ot  the  other. — 
Have  we  as  many  shoes  as  coats  ? — We  have  as  many  of  the  one 
ds  of  the  other. — Has  your  father  as  much  gold  as  iron  ? — He  has 
more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. 

36. 

Have  you  as  many  guns  as  I ? — I have  just  as  many. — Has  the 
foreigner  as  much  courage  as  we  ? — He  has  quite  as  much. — Have  we 


64 


BIXIEENTH  LESSON, 


IS  mucn  good  as  bad  paper  ? — We  have  as  much  of  ihe  one  as  of  the 
other. — Have  your  sons  as  many  cakes  as  books  ? — They  have  more  of 
the  latter  than  of  the  former ; more  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. — How 
many  teeth  has  this  man  ? — He  has  but  one. — How  many  fingers  has 
he  ? — He  has  several. — How  many  guns  have  you  ? — I have  only  one, 
but  my  father  has  more  than  I ; he  has  five. — Have  my  children  as 
much  courage  as  yours  ? — Yours  have  more  than  mine. — Have  I as 
much  money  as  you  ? — You  have  less  than  I. — Have  you  as  many 
books  as  I ? — I have  fewer  than  you. — Have  I as  many  enemies  as 
your  father? — You  have  fewer  than  he. — Have  the  French  as  many 
ships  as  we  ? — They  have  fewer  than  we. — Have  we  as  many  combs 
as  they  ? — We  have  fewer  than  they. — Have  we  fewer  knives  than 
the  children  of  our  friends  ? — We  have  fewer  than  they. 

37. 

Who  has  fewer  friends  than  we  ? — Nobody  has  fewer. — Have  you 
as  much  of  your  wine  as  of  mine  ? — I have  as  much  of  yours  as  of 
mine. — Have  I as  many  of  your  books  as  of  mine  ? — You  have  fewer 
of  mine  than  of  yours. — Has  the  Turk  as  much  of  your  money  as  of 
his  own  ? — He  has  less  of  his  own  than  of  ours. — Has  our  merchant 
fewer  dogs  than  horses? — He  has  fewer  of  the  latter  than  of  the 
former ; (fewer  of  the  one  than  of  the  other.) — Has  our  cook  as  much 
Dread  as  ham  ? — He  has  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. — Has  he 
as  many  chickens  as  birds  ? — He  has  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the 
former. 


38. 

Has  the  carpenter  as  many  sticks  as  nails  ? — He  has  just  as  many 
of  these  as  of  those. — Have  you  more  biscuits  than  glasses  ? — I have 
more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Who  has  more  soap  than  I i 
— My  son  has  more. — Who  has  more  pencils  than  you  ? — The  painter 
has  more. — Has  he  as  many  horses  as  I ? — He  has  not  so  many  horses 
as  you ; but  he  has  more  pictures. — Has  the  merchant  fewer  oxen 
than  we  ? — He  has  fewer  oxen  than  we,  and  we  have  less  corn  than 
be. — Have  you  another  book  ? — I have  another. — Has  your  son  one 
more  coat  ? — He  has  several  more. — Have  the  Dutch  as  many  gardens 
fvs  we  ? — We  have  fewer  than  they.  We  have  less  bread  and  less 
wine  than  they.  We  have  but  little  money,  but  enough  bread,  ham, 
cheese,  and  wine. — Have  '^ou  as  much  courage  as  our  neignbor’a 
sen  ?— I have  just  as  much. 


SEVENTfiEJJfTH  LESSON. 


5£ 


SEVENTEENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Decima  seytima, 

OF  THE  INFINITIVE. 

Tliere  are  in  Spanish  three  conjugatiqns,  which  are  distinguished  by  Jic 
<prminali\>n  of  the  present  of  the  infinitive,  viz. ; 

I The  first  has  its  intinitive  terminated  in  ar  ; as : — 


Hablar, 

to  speak ; 

Comprar, 

to  buy ; 

Cortar, 

to  cut. 

.in  ER  ; as : — 
Vender, 

to  sell ; 

Comer, 

to  eat,  (to  dine  ;) 

Beber, 

to  dr:nk. 

.in  iR ; as  : — 

Recibir, 

to  receive ; 

Dividir, 

to  divide ; 

Abrir, 

to  open. 

Each  verb  we  shall  hereafter  give 
^ion  to  which  it  belongs  marked  after 
risk  (♦)  are  irregular. 

Fear. 

Shame 
Right. 

Time. 

Courage 

A mind,  (or  a wish.) 

W rong. 

To  work. 

To  speak. 

Have  you  a mind  to  work  ? 

I am  ashamed  to  speak. 


will  have  the  number  of  the  conjuga» 
it.  The  verbs  marked  with  an  asto- 

Miedo  de. 

Vergiienza  de. 

Razon  de. 

Tiempo  de. 

Valor  de,  (para.) 

Gana,  (or  deseo  de.) 

No  tener  razon  de,  (or  hacer  mal  en.) 
Trabajar  1 
Hablar  1. 

I Tiene  V.  gana  de  trabajar  ? 

Tengo  vergiienza  de  hablar 


To  cut. 

To  cut  it. 

To  cut  them. 
To  cut  some. 


Cortar  1. 
Cortarle 
Cortarlos. 
Cortar  alguno 


06s  A,  When  a pronoun  object  is  governed  by  a v^rb  in  the  infinitive 
it  is  placed  after  the  infinitive,  and  joined  with  it,  so  as  to  form  a single  word 


Still 

Have  you  still  a mind  to  buy  it  ? 


Aun,  (or  Todavia.) 

I Tieae  V todavia  deseo  de  com 
I prarle  7 


56 


SEVENTEEMH  LESSON. 


Have  you  time  to  cut  the  bread  ? 
1 have  time  to  cut  it. 

Has  he  a mind  to  cut  trees  ? 

He  has  a mind  to  cut  some 


I Tiene  V.  tiempo  de  rebanar  el  pan  t 
Yo  tengo  tiempo  de  rebanarle. 

I Tiene  el  gana  de  cortar  drbolcs  1 
Tiene  gana  de  aortar  algunos 


To  buy. 


To 

buy  some  more 

To 

buy  one. 

To 

buy  two. 

To 

buy  one  more. 

To 

buy  two  more. 

To 

break,  to  tear. 

To 

pick  up. 

To 

mend. 

To 

repair. 

To 

look  for,  to  seek. 

Have  you 

a mind  to  buy  one  more 

horse  ? 

I have  a mind  to  buy  one  more. 
Have  you  a mind  to  buy  some  books? 
I have  a mind  to  buy  some,  but  I 
have  no  money. 

Are  you  afraid  to  break  the  glasses  ? 
I am  afraid  to  break  them. 

Has  he  time  to  work  ? 


He  has  time,  but  no  mind  to  work. 


Comprar  1. 

Comprar  algunos  mas. 
Comprar  uno. 
Comprar  dos. 
t Comprar  otro  mas. 
Comprar  dos  mas 


I Romper  2. 

Alzar  del  suelo  1. 
C Remendar  * 1. 

< Reparar  1. 

( Commoner  * 2. 

I Buscar  1. 


I Tiene  V.  gana  de  comprar  todavia 
otro  caballo  ? 

Tengo  gana  de  comprar  otro  mas. 

I Tiene  V.  gana  de  comprar  libros  ? 

Tengo  gana  de  comprar  algunos,  pore 
no  tengo  dinero. 

I Tiene  V.  miedo  de  romper  los  vasos  1 

Tengo  miedo  de  romperlos. 

I Tiene  ^1  tiempo  de  trabajar  ? 

^ El  tiene  tiempo,  pero  no  tiene  gana 
de  trabajar. 

' fil  tiene  tiempo,  pero  no  tiene  gana 

El  tiene  tiempo,  pero  no  tiene  gana 

L de  hacerloy  (to  do  it.) 


Ohs.  B.  To  avoid  the  immediate  repetition  of  a verb  in  the  same  mood 
m tense,  it  is  more  elegant  to  suppress  it,  or  to  make  use  of  the  verb  haner 
in  its  stead,  as  in  the  example. 


To  he  right. 

Ami  right  in  buying  horses  ? 
To  be  wrong. 

Fou  are  wrong  in  buying  one. 


Tener  razon  de^  (or  hacer  bien  en) 

I Tengo  yo  razon  de  comprar  caba- 
11  os. 

No  tener  razon  de,  (or  hacer  mol  on.) 
V.  no  tiene  razon  de  comprar  una 
t V hace  mal  en  comprar  uno. 


SEVENTEENTH  LESSON. 


57 


Oba.  C.  When  the  present  participle  governed  by  in,  stands  for  the  in 
Suiiive  governed  by  of,  it  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  infinitive ; then 
“ in  buying”  must  be  translated  “ de  comprar”  . 

You  (PJur.)  I VV.,  (for  Ustedes.)  (See  Less.  I.' 


EXERCISES. 

39. 

Have  you  still  a mind  to  buy  my  friend’s  horse  ? — I have  still  a mind 
to  buy  it ; but  I have  no  more  money. — Have  you  time  to  work  ? — I 
have  time,  but  no  mind  to  work. — Has  your  brother  time  to  cut  some 
sticks  ? — He  has  time  to  cut  some. — Has  he  a mind  to  cut  some  oread  ? 
— He  has  a mind  to  cut  some,  but  he  has  no  knife. — Have  you  time  to 
cut  some  cheese  ? — I have  time  to  cut  some. — Has  he  , a desire  to  cut 
the  tree  ? — He  has  a desire  to  cut  it,  but  he  has  no  time. — Has  the 
tailor  time  to  cut  the  cloth  ? — He  has  time  to  cut  it. — Have  I time  to 
cut  the  trees  ? — You  have  time  to  cut  them. — Has  the  painter  a mind 
to  buy  a horse  ? — He  has  a mind  to  buy  two. — Has  your  captain  time 
to  speak  ? — He  has  time  but  no  desire  to  speak. — Are  you  afraid  to 
speak  ? — I am  not  afraid,  but  I am  ashamed  to  speak. — Am  I right  in 
buying  a gun  ? — You  are  right  in  buying  one. — Is  your  friend  right  in 
buying  a great  ox  ? — He  is  wrong  in  buying  one. — Am  I right  in  buy- 
ing little  oxen  ? — You  are  right  in  buying  one. 

40. 

Have  you  a desire  to  speak  ? — I have  a desire  but  I have  not  the 
courage  to  speak. — Have  you  the  courage  to  cut  your  finger  ? — I have 
not  the  courage  to  cut  it. — Am  I right  in  speaking  ? — You  are  not 
wTong  in  speaking,  but  you  are  wrong  in  cutting  my  trees. — Has  the 
son  of  your  friend  a desire  to  buy  one  more  bird  ? — He  has  a desire  to 
buy  one  more. — Have  you  a desire  to  buy  a few  more  horses  ? — We 
have  a desire  to  buy  a few  more,  but  we  have  no  more  money. — What 
has  our  tailor  a mind  to  mend  ? — He  has  a mind  to  mend  our  old  coats. 
— Has  the  shoemaker  time  to  mend  our  shoes  ? — He  has  time,  but  he 
has  no  mind  to  mend  them. — Wlio  has  a mind  to  mend  our  hats  ? — 
The  hatter  has  a mind  to  mend  them. — Are  you  afraid  to  look  for  my 
norse  ? — I am  not  afraid,  but  I have  no  time  to  look  for  it. — Wliat  have 
you  a mind  to  buy  ? — We  have  a mind  to  buy  something  good. — itave 
you  a mind  to  break  my  nail  2 — I have  a mind  to  pick  it  up,  but  not  tc: 
break  it. 

41. 

Who  has  a mind  to  break  our  looking-glasses  ? — Our  enemy  has  a 
uiind  to  break  them. — Have  the  foreigners  a mind  to  break  our  guns  ‘i 
—They  have  a mind,  but  they  have  not  the  courage  to  break  them.— 


58 


EIGHTEENTH  LESSON. 


Wlio  has  a mind  to  buy  my  beautiful  dog  ? — Nobody  has  a mind  to  buy 
It. — Have  you  a mind  to  buy  my  beautifu  trunks,  or  those  of  the  French 
man  ? — I have  a mind  to  buy  yours,  but  not  those  of  the  Frenchman.— 
Which  books  has  the  Englishman  a mind  to  buy  ? — He  has  a mind  tn 
ouy  that  which  you  have,  that  which  your  son  has,  and  that  which  mine 
has. — Which  gloves  have  you  a mind  to  seek  ? — I have  a mind  to  seek 
V.mrs,  mine,  and  our  children’s. 

42. 

Wliich  looking-glasses  have  the  enemies  a desire  to  break  ? — They 
have  a desire  to  break  those  which  you  have,  those  which  I have,  and 
those  which  our  children  and  our  friends  have. — Has  your  father  a 
desire  to  buy  these  or  those  cakes  ? — He  has  a mind  to  buy  these. — 
Am  I right  in  picking  up  your  canes  ? — You  are  right  in  picking  them 
up. — Is  the  Italian  right  in  seeking  your  hat  ? — He  is  wrong  in  seeking 
it. — Have  you  a mind  to  buy  another  ship  ? — I have  a mind  to  buy 
another. — Has  our  enemy  a mind  to  buy  one  more  ship  ? — He  has  a 
mind  to  buy  several  more,  but  he  is  afraid  to  buy  them. — Have  y )u 
two  horses  ? — I have  only  one,  but  I have  a wish  to  buy  one  more 


EIGHTEENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Decima  octava, 
Hacer  * 2 
Querer  * 2. 


To  make 
To  do. 

To  be  willing. 
To  wish. 


Will  you? 

Are  you  willing  ? 

Do  you  wish  ? 
j will,  I am  willing,  I wish. 

Will  he?  is  he  willing?  does  he 
wish  ? 

He  will,  he  is  willing,  he  wishes. 

We  will,  we  are  willing,  we  wish. 
You  will,  you  are  willing,  you  wish. 

They  will,  they  are  willing,  they 

Wish. 

Do  ) oil  wish  to  make  my  fire  ? 

[ am  willing  to  make  it. 

[ dc  not  wish  to  make  it. 

Does  he  wish  to  make  it  ? 

He  wishes  to  make  It. 


I Quiere  V.  ? ^ Quereis  vos  ? i Querna 
vosotros  ? 

Yo  quiero. 

I Quiere  ^1  ? 

t\  quiere. 

Nosotros  queremos. 

V quiere,  (plur.,  VV.)  quieren,  voso- 
tros, or  vos  quereis. 

Elios  quieren. 

I I Quiere  V.  hacer  mi  tuego  ? 

Yo  quiero  hacerle. 

Yo  no  quiero  hacerle 
I Quiere  61  hacerle  ? 

^11  Quiere  hacerle. 


EIGHTEENTH  LESSON. 


Does  he  wish  to  buy  your  horse  ? 
He  wishes  to  buy  it. 

To  burn. 

To  warm 
To  tear 
The  broth 
My  fork. 


69 

I Quiere  el  comprar  su  caballo  (ie  V ^ 
]&1  quiere  comprarlo 

Quemar  1. 

Caleutar  * 1. 

Desgarrar  1.  Despedazar  1 
El  caldo. 

Mi  tenedor 


Obs  A.  Do,  doth,  does,  and  did,  in  questions,  in  negative  sentences,  auci 
when  energetically  used,  must  not  be  translated;  they,  however,  point  oul 
he  person  and  tense 


TO  BE — ^SER  and  estar. 

To  he  may  be  expressed  in  Spanish  by  Ser  or  Esiar  ; but  the  meaning 
jf  these  verbs  being  very  different,  the  scholar  must  pay  particular  atten- 
non  to  the  following  rules,  in  order  to  use  them  properly : 

Sei  is  used  to  express  the  qualities  inherent,  or  essential  to  persons  o! 
things ; the  state  of  fixed  mind  ; the  materials  of  which  a thing  is  made 
the  condition,  employment,  rank,  trade,  &c.  of  persons ; the  object,  pur- 
pose, destination,  &c.  of  persons  or  things. 

Estar  is  employed  to  denote  the  accidental,  or  temporary  qualities  or 
affections  of  persons  or  things,  and  is  followed  in  English  by  a present 
participle. 

These  rules  will  be  more  easily  understood  by  these  examples; 


This  man  is  good. 

Tins  man  is  in  good  health. 

He  was  wicked  during  his  youth 
He  was  sick  in  his  youth. 

[nk  is  black. 

This  ink  is  whitish- 
He  is  very  tall. 

He  is  placed  very  high. 

His  watch  is  gold. 

His  watch  is  broken. 

Is  this  wine  good  ? 


Este  hombre  es  bueno. 

Este  hombre  estd  bueno. 

'ktlfui  malo  en  su  juventud. 

El  estuvo  malo  en  su  juventud. 
La  tinta  es  negra. 

Esta  tinta  estd  blanca. 

^il  es  muy  alto. 

El  estd  muy  alto. 

Su  reloj  es  de  oro. 

Su  reloj  estd  quebrado 
I Es  bueno  este  vino  ? 


To  be,  followed  by  an  active  participle,  is  translated  Estar  ; as. 
They  are  playing.  | Elios  estan  jugando. 

To  he  is  translated  Tener  in  the  following  accefitations 


Tc  bo  five  feet  long. 

To  bo  three  feet  broad,  wide. 

To  be  seven  feet  deep. 

To  be  fifty  feet  in  circumference 

To  be  twenty  years  old. 


Tener  cinco  pies  de  largo. 

Tener  tres  pies  de  ancho. 

Tener  siete  pies  de  profundo. 

Tener  cincuonta  pies  de  circunfo 
reucia. 

Tener  veinte  aiios. 


60 


SIOHTEBKTH  LESSOR. 


be  afraid  of. 

Tener  miedo  do. 

To  be  obliged  to. 

Tener  precision  do. 

To  be  so  good  as  to 

Tener  la  bondad  de 

To  be  prudent  in. 

Tener  prudencia. 

To  be  right  in. 

Tener  razon  para. 

To  be  wrong  in 

No  tener  razon  para. 

To  bo  cold. 

Tener  frio. 

T o be  hot,  or  warm. 

Tener  calor. 

To  be  hungry,  thirsty,  sleepy,  &c. 

Tener  hambre,  sed,  auenc 

To  go. 

Ir  *3. 

At  the  house  of. 

En  la  casa  de,  (or  en  casa  de.j 

To  the  house  of. 

A la  casa  de,  (or  d casa  de.) 

To  be  at  the  man’s  house. 

Estar  en  la  casa  del  hoinbre. 

To  go  to  the  man,  or  to  the  man’s 
house. 

Ir  d casa  (or  la  casa)  del  hombre. 

To  bo  at  his  friend’s  (house.) 

Estar  en  la  casa  de  su  amigo. 

To  go  to  my  father’s  (house.) 

Ir  d casa  (or  la  casa)  de  mi  padre 

At  home. 

En  casa. 

To  be  at  home. 

Estar  en  casa. 

To  go  home. 

Ir  d casa.  Ir  d la  casa. 

Ohs.  B.  A casa  means  the  house  of  the  person  who  speaks.  Ex. — Dc 
you  go  home,  (to  your  house  ?)  i Va  V.  d su  casa  ? — Do  you  go  home,  fU 
niy  house  ?)  iVa  V.  d casa  7 (the  house  of  him  who  speaks.) 

) Estar  en  casa. 

) Estar  en  mi  casa. 

I Estar  en  nuestra  casa. 

} Ir  d casa. 

^ Ir  (or  venir)  d mi  casa. 

V Ir  (or  venir)  d nuestra  casa 


) Estar  en  su  casa  de  V. 

J Estar  en  la  casa  de  V. 

^ Ir  d su  casa  de  V. 

^ Ir  d la  casa  de  V* 

I Estar  en  su  casa  de  ellos,  (or  ellaa 
^ Ir  d su  casa  de  ellos,  (or  ellas.) 


Estar  en  su  casa, 
Ir  d su  casa. 


To  be  at  my  house. 

To  be  staying  with  mo. 
To  be  at  our  house. 

To  be  staying  with  us. 
To  go  to  my  house. 

To  come  to  me. 

To  go  to  our  house. 

To  come  to  us. 

To  be  at  his  house. 

To  be  staying  with  him 
To  go  to  his  house. 

To  go  to  him. 

To  be  at  your  house. 

To  be  staying  with  you. 
To  go  to  your  house. 

To  go  to  you. 

To  be  at  their  house. 

To  be  staying  with  them. 
To  go  to  their  house. 

To  go  to  them 


EIGHIEENTH  LESSON. 


61 


To  be  at  some  one’s  house. 
To  be  with  some  one. 

To  go  to  some  one’s  house 
To  go  to  some  one. 


^ Estar  en  la  casa  de  alguno. 
^ Ir  d la  casa  de  alguno. 


At  whose  house  7 
To  whose  house  7 

T o whose  house  do  vou  wish  to  go  ? 
T c whom  do  you  wish  to  go  ? 

I wish  to  go  to.  no  one’s  house. 

[ wish  to  go  to  no  one. 

At  whose  house  is  your  brother? 
With  whom  is  your  brother? 

With  whom  is  he  ? 

He  is  at  our  house 
He  is  with  us. 

Is  he  at  home  ? 

He  is  not  at  home. 

Are  you  ? 

Tired. 

• Are  you  tired  ? 

1 am  tired. 

I am  not  tired. 

Is  he? 

He  is. 

We  are. 

They  are. 

To  drink. 

Where  7 


I En  c isa  de  quien  7 i En  la  casa 
de  quien  ? 

^ A casa  de  quien  7 i A la  casa  de 
quien? 

I A casa  de  quien  quiere  V.  ir  ? 
t A la  casa  de  quien  quiere  V ir? 

No  quiero  ir  a casa  de  ninguno. 

^ En  casa  de  quien  estd  su  hemiano 
de  V.  ? 

I En  la  casa  de  quien  estd  su  hermano 
de  V.? 

I Con  quien  estd  ? 

I En  la  casa  de  quien  estd  ? 

( Estd  en  nuestra  casa 
.?  6l  estd  con  nosotros. 

^ Estd  en  nuestra  casa. 

I Estd  (el)  en  casa  ? 

(6l)  no  estd  en  casa 
t I Estd  V.  ? I Estan  W.  ? (plur.) 

( I Estais  VOS  ? or  vosotros. 

Cansado.  - 

I Esta  V.  cansado  ? i Estais  cansados  I 
(Yo)  estoy  cansado. 

(Yo)  no  estoy  cansado. 

I Estd  61  ? 

El  estd. 

(Nosotros)  estamos. 

Elios  estan. 

I Beber  2. 

I I En  donde  ? i Donde  ?) 


What  do  you  wish  to  do  ? | Que  quiere  V.  hacer  ? 

What  does  your  brother  wish  to  do  ? | i Que  quiere  hacer  su  hermano  de  V.? 


Is  your  father  at  home  ? 

What  will  the  Germans  buy  ? 
They  will  buy  something  good. 
They  will  buy  nothing. 


I Estd  en  casa  su  padre  de  V.  ? 

I Que  quieren  comprar  los  Alemanes* 
Elios  quieren  comprar  algo  bueno  ? 
Elios  no  quieren  comprar  nada. 


62 


EIGHTEENTH  JE8SON 


Do  they  wish  to  buy  a oook  1 
They  wish  to  buy  cue. 

Do  you  v/ish  to  drink  any  thing  ? 
I do  not  wish  to  drink  any  thing. 


i Quieren  (ellos)  comprar  un  ibro? 
Elios  quieren  comprar  uno 
I Quiere  V beber  algo  t 
Yo  no  quiero  beber  nada. 


Do  you  wish  to  look  for  my  son  7 


’ Quiere  V.  buscar  d mi  hijo  7 


Obs  C,  When  the  object  direct  of  an  active  verb  is  a person,  /rope? 
aoun,  or  any  noun  personified,  it  must  be  preceded  by  the  preposition  d 

Yo  estoy  pronto  d (quiero)  buscar  d* 
hijo  de  V. 

Ir  d la  casa  del  amigo  de  V 
Ir  d casa  de  su  vecino 


I am  willing  to  look  for  your  son 

To  go  to  your  friend. 

To  go  to  his  neighbor 


EXERCISES. 

43. 

Do  you  wish  to  work  ? — I am  willing  to  work,  but  I am  tired.— Do 
you  wish  to  break  my  glasses  ? — I do  not  wish  to  break  tnem. — Are 
you  willing  to  look  for  my  son  ? — I am  willing  to  look  for  him. — What 
do  you  wish  to  pick  up  ? — I wish  to  pick  up  this  dollar  and  that  shil- 
ling.— Does  that  man  wish  to  cut  your  finger  ? — He  does  not  wish  to 
cut  mine. — Does  the  painter  wish  to  burn  some  paper  ? — He  wishes  to 
burn  some. — What  does  the  shoemaker  wish  to  mend  ? — He  wishes  to 
mend  our  old  shoes. — Does  the  tailor  wish  to  mend  any  thing  ? — He 
wishes  to  mend  some  waistcoats. — Do  you  wish  to  do  any  thing  ? — I do 
not  wish  to  do  any  thing. — What  do  you  wish  to  do  ? — We  wish  to 
warm  our  tea  and  our  father’s  coffee. — Do  you  wish  to  wa^m  my 
Drother’s  broth  ? — I am  willing  to  warm  it. 

44. 

Do  you  wish  to  speak  ? — 1 do  wish  to  speak. — Is  your  son  willing 
to  work  ? — He  is  not  willing  to  work. — What  does  he  wish  to  do  ? — 
He  wishes  to  drink  some  wine. — Do  you  wish  to  buy  any  thing  ? — I 
wish  to  buy  something. — What  do  you  wish  to  buy  ? — I wish  to  buy 
some  forks. — Are  you  willing  to  mend  my  coat  ? — I am  willing  to 
mend  it. — Who  will  mend  our  son’s  shoes  ? — We  will  mend  them. — 
What  does  he  wish  to  buy  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  some  ships. — Does 
your  father  wish  to  look  for  his  umbrella  or  for  his  stick  ? — He  wishes 
to  look  for  both. — Do  you  wish  to  drink  some  wine  ? — I wish  to  drink 
some,  but  I have  not  any. — Does  the  sailor  wish  to  drink  some  wine  ? — 
He  does  not  wish  to  drink  any,  he  is  not  thirsty. — What  does  the  cap- 
tain  wish  to  drink  ? — He  does  not  wish  to  drink  any  thing. — Whai 
does  the  hatter  wish  to  make  ? — He  wishes  to  make  some  hats  — Dc 
you  wish  to  buy  a bird  ? — I wish  tc  buy  several. 


EIGHTEENTH  JLESOGN. 


03 


45. 

How  many  forks  does  your  servant  wish  to  buy  ? — He  wishes  toba} 
^ree. — Do  you  wish  to  buy  many  caps  ? — We  wish  to  buy  only  a few 
out  our  children  wish  to  buy  a great  many. — Does  any  one  wish  tc 
tear  vour  coat  ? — No  one  wishes  to  tear  it. — Who  wishes  to  tear  my 
ijooks  ? — Your  children  wish  to  tear  them. — With  whom  is  our  father  ? 
— He  is  W’th  his  friend. — Will  you  go  to  my  house  ? — I will  not  go  tc 
yours  but  to  my  brother’s. — Does  your  father  wish  to  go  to  his  friend  ? 
—He  does  not  wish  to  go  to  his  friend,  but  Ip  his  neighbor. — At  whose 
house  is  your  son  ? — He  is  at  our  house. — Will  you  look  for  our  nais 
or  for  those  of  the  Dutch  ? — I will  look  for  neither  yours,  nor  for  those 
of  the  Dutch,  but  I will  look  for  mine,  and  for  those  of  my  good  frieiuj^ 

46. 

Ami  right  in  warming  your  broth  ? — You  are  right  in  warming  it 
— Is  my  servant  right  in  warming  your  tea  ? — He  is  wrong  in  warming 
it. — Is  he  afraid  to  tear  your  coat  ? — He  is  not  afraid  to  tear  it,  but  to 
burn  it. — Are  your  children  at  home  ? — They  are  not  at  home,  but  at 
their  neighbors’. — Is  the  captain  at  home  ? — He  is  not  at  home,  but  at 
his  brother’s. — Is  the  foreigner  at  our  brother’s  ? — He  is  not  at  our 
brother’s.  -At  whose  house  is  the  Englishman  ? — He  is  at  yours. — Is 
the  American  at  our  house  ? — No,  Sir,  he  is  not  at  our  house. — 
With  whom  is  tlie  Italian  ? — He  is  with  nobody ; he  is  at  home. — Dc 
you  wish  to  g©  home  ? — 1 do  not  wish  to  go  home  ; I wish  to  go  to  the 
son  of  my  neighbor. — Is  your  father  at  home  ? — No,  Sir,  he  is  not  at 
home. — Will  you  go  to  any  one’s  house  ? — I will  go  to  no  one’s  house. 

47. 

, Where  is  your  son  ? — He  is  at  home. — Is  your  brother  at  home  ? — 
He  is  not  at  home ; he  is  at  the  foreigner’s. — What  will  the  German 
do  at  home  ? — He  will  work,  and  drink  some  good  wine. — What  have 
you  at  home  ? — I have  notliing  at  home. — Are  you  tired  ? — I am  not 
tired. — Who  is  tired  —My  brother  is  tired. — Do  you  wish  to  drink 
any  thing  ? — I do  not  wish  to  drink  any  thing. — How  many  chickens 
does  the  cook  wish  to  buy  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  four. — Does  the  Span- 
iard wish  to  buy  any  thing  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  something,  but  he  has 
no  money. — Do  you  wish  to  go  to  our  brothers’  ? — I do  not  wisl*  to  go 
to  their  house,  but  to  their  children’s. — Is  the  Scotchman  at  anybody’s 
house  ? — He  is  at  nobody’s ; he  is  at  his  own  house. — Is  this  good 
paper  ? — It  is  very  good. — Who  is  that  man  ? — He  is  my  shoemakiBr. — 
Is  this  boy  in  good  health  ? — Yes,  Sir. — Is  he  wicked  ? — No,  Sir,  he  is 
not  wdcked. — Is  your  watch  gold  ? — It  is  gold,  but  it  is  broken. 


64 


NINETilENTH  LESSOR. 


NINETEENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Decima  mtna, 


Where  ? 

There,  thither 
To  go  there 
To  be  there 

Do  you  wiph  to  go  tiere? 
Yes,  £ wisli  to  go  there. 

To  take,  to  carry 
To  send. 

Vo  take,  to  lead,  to  conducts 
To  take  it  there 

Him,  (object  of  the  verb.) 
To  send  him  there. 

To  take  him  there 


I En  donde  7 i Donde  ? 
Alla,  or  AllL 
Ir  alld,  (or  ir  alli.) 

Estar  alia,  (or  estar  alli  ) 

I Quiere  V ir  alld  ? 

Si,  yo  quiero  ir  alli. 

Llevar  1 

Enviar  1,  (or  mandar  1.) 
Conducir  * 3. 

Llevarle  alia.  , 

I Le. 

I Enviarle  alli. 

1 Conducirle  alld. 


Thevi,  (object.) 
To  carry  them  there. 
To  carry  some  there. 


Los,  (pronoun  object  ti  a verb ) 
Llevarlos  alld. 

Llevar  alguno,  (or  algunos  alld.) 


Wil  you  send  him  to  my  father  ? 
I wiU  send  him  there,  to  him. 


I Quiere  V.  enviarle  d casa,  (or  & le 
casa  de  mi  padre  ?) 

Yo  le  quioro  enviar  (alld.) 


O/s.  A.  Alli  and  alld  are  omitted  when  no  ambiguity  can  result  froit 
the  omission. 


Do  y m wish  to  go  honie  ? 
Yes,  7 wish  to  go  there. 
The  physician. 

Te  come. 


I Quiere  V.  ir  d casa  ? 
Si,  yo  quiero  ir  (alld.) 
El  medico. 

Venir  * 3. 


Whei  ? 

To-morrow. 

To-day. 

Somewhere,  anywhere,  i hithei 

Nowhere,  noi  anywhere 

l>o  you  wish  to  go  anywheiv  ' 

I wish  to  go  somewhere, 
do  not  w isb  to  go  anywhere 

To  write. 

At  what  o’clock  ? 

At  one  o’clock. 

At  two  o’clock. 


I Cuando  ? 

Manana. 

Hoy.  oy-  6 

a 

Alguna  parte 

Ninguna  parte 

I Quiere  V.  ir  d alguna  parte  > 

Yo  quiero  ir  d alguna  parte. 

No  quiero  ir  d ninguna  pnrti» 

I Fscrihir  3. 

I 1 t A que  here. 

t A la  una. 

1 t A 1a#»  cW 


NINETEENTH  LESSON. 


65 


Half. 

The  quarter 
One  0^ clock* 


Medio.  Media,  (fern ) 
El  cuarto. 
t La  una* 


Ohs.  B.  The  word  o^clock  is  never  translated.  The  noun  hour,  hora 
Hiust  be  preceded  by  the  article  la  before  una,  (one  o’clock,)  and  las  before 
the  rest  of  the  hours.  Half  being  an  adjective  must  agree  with  Aora,  fern- 
.nine,  consequently  it  is  translated  media.  Feminine  nouns  will  be  fully 
explained  hereafter. 

I t A la  una  y media 


At  half-past  one. 

At  a quarter  past  one. 

At  a quarter  past  two. 

At  a quarter  to  one. 

At  twelve  o’clock  at  night. 
Midnight. 

At  twelve  o’clock. 
Mid-day. 

The  night. 

In  the  night 
Less. 

At  twenty  minutes  to  four 
Note,  (billet.) 


t A la  una  y cuarto. 
t A las  dos  y cuarto 
A la  una  mdnos  cuarto. 

A los  tres  cuartos  para  la  una 
A las  doce  de  la  noche. 

Media  noche. 

A las  doce. 

Medio  dia. 

La  noche. 

En  la  noche,  (de  noche.) 

Mems. 

A las  cuatro  mdnos  veinte  raiiiutos. 
Billete. 


EXERCISES. 

48. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  home  ? — Yes,  I wish  to  go. — Does  your  son  wish 
to  go  to  my  house  ? — He  wishes  to  go. — Is  your  brother  at  home  V — 
He  is. — Where  do  you  wish  to  go  ? — I wish  to  go  home. — Do  your 
children  wish  to  go  to  my  house  ? — They  do  not  wish  to  go. — Tc 
whom  will  you  take  this  note  ? — I will  take  it  to  my  neighbor’s. — Will 
your  servant  take  my  note  to  your  father  ? — He  will  take  it  there.— 
To  whom  do  our  enemies  wish  to  carry  our  guns,  (canones  ?) — To  the 
Turks. — Will  he  carry  them  home  ? — He  will  not  carry  them  home. — 
Will  you  come  ? — I will  not  come,  (tr.) — Where  do  you  wish  to  go  ? — 
I wish  to  go  to  the  good  English. — Will  the  good  Italians  go  to  oui 
house  ? — They  will  not  go. — Where  do  they  wish  to  go  ? — Tliey  wil 
go  nowhere. 

49. 

Will  you  take  your  son  to  my  house  ? — Yes,  I will. — When  will 
you  take  him  to  the  captain’s  ? — I ^vill  take  nim  there  to-morrow.— 
Do  you  wish  to  take  my  children  to  the  physician  ? — I will  take  thcirr 


66 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. 


there. — When  will  you  take  them  ? — I will  take  them  to-day. — At  whai 
o’clock  ? — At  half-past  two. — When  will  you  sena  your  servant  to  the 
physician  ? — To-day. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  a quarter  past  ten.^ — 
Will  you  go  anywhere  ? — I will  go  somewhere. — Where  will  you 
go  ? — I will  go  to  the  Scotchman. — To  whom  does  he  wish  to  go  ?— 
He  wishes  to  go  to  his  friends. — Will  the  Spaniards  go  anywhere  ?— 
They  will  go  nowhere. — Will  our  friend  go  to  any  one  ? — He  wih 
go  to  no  one. 

50. 

When  will  you  take  the  young  man  to  the  painter  ? — To-day. — 
Will  he  carry  these  birds  ? — He  will  carry  them  home. — Will  you 
take  the  physician  to  this  man  ? — I will  take  him  there. — When 
will  the  physician  go  to  your  brother  ? — He  will  go  there  to-day. 
— Will  you  send  a servant  to  my  house  ? — I will  send  one  there. — 
Has  your  brother  time  to  come  to  my  house  ? — He  has  no  time  to 
come  (tr)  there. — ^Will  the  Frenchman  write  one  more  billet  ? — He 
will  write  one  more. — Has  your  friend  a mind  to  write  as  much  as  I ? 
— He  has  a mind  to  write  quite  as  much. — To  whose  nouse  does  he 
wish  to  send  them  ? — To  his  friends’. — Who  wishes  to  write  little 
notes  ? — The  young  man. — Do  you  wish  to  carry  many  books  to  my 
father’s  ? — I will  only  carry  a few. 

51. 

Will  you  send  one  more  trunk  to  our  friend  ? — I will  send  him 
several  more. — How  many  more  hats  has  the  hatter? — He  has  six  ^ 
more. — Will  he  send  them  to  the  shoemaker  ? — He  will  send  one. — 
Do  you  wish  to  buy  as  many  dogs  as  horses  ? — I will  buy  more  of  the 
latter  than  of  the  former. — At  what  o’clock  do  you  wish  to  send  your 
servant  to  the  Dutchman’s  ? — At  a quarter  to  six. — At  what  o’clock  is 
your  father  at  home  ? — He  is  at  home  at  twelve  o’clock. — At  what 
o’clock  does  your  friend  wish  to  go  there  ? — He  will  go  there  at  mid- 
night.— Are  you  afraid  to  go  there  ? — I am  not  afraid,  but  ashamed 
lo  go  there. 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. — Leccion  Vigesima, 

To,  (meaning  in  order  to  or  for.)  j Para. 

To  see.  | Ver  * 2. 

Have  you  any  money  to  buy  bread  ? i Tiene  V.  dinero  para  comprar  pan  ? 
1 have  some  to  buy  some.  Si,  tengo  para  comprar  un  poco. 

iVill  you  go  to  your  brother  in  order  ; Quiere  V.  ir  d la  CcTsa  do  su  henna 
to  see  him  ? no  para  verle  ? 


TWENTIETH  LESSO^N. 


67 


[t  b uecetssary  to  go  early  to  see  him. 
Can  you  cut  me  some  bread? 
lias  your  brother  a knife  to  cut  his 
bread  ? 

He  has  none  to  cut  it. 


To  sweep. 
To  kill. 

To  salt. 
Salt. 


Es  necesario  ir  temprano  para  verle 
t I Puede  V.  rebanar  pan  para  mi? 

I Tiene  su  hermaiio  de  V.  un  cuchilh 
para  rebanar  su  pan  ? 

6l  no  tiene  ninguno  para  rebaiiarle 

Barrer  2. 

Matar  1 

Salar  1.  Echar  en  sal. 

Sal,  (feminine ) 


To  he  able,  {can.) 

Can  you  ? or  are  you  able  1 
I can,  or  I am  able. 

I cannot,  I am  not  able. 

Can  you  not?  are  you  not  able? 
Can  he  ? is  he  able  ? 

He  can,  he  is  able. 

He  cannot,  he  is  not  able 
Can  he  not  ? is  he  not  able  ? 

We  can,  we  are  able 
You  can,  you  are  able. 

They  can,  they  are  able. 


Poder  * 2.  Saber  * 2. 

I Puede  V 7 (i  Podeis  vos?) 

Yo  puedo. 

Yo  no  pur^do. 

I No  puede  V ? 

I Puede  el  ? 

^11  puede 
^11  no  puede. 

I No  puede  el  ? 

(Nosotros)  podemts 

V.  puede — {plur.)  VV  pueden. 

Elios  pueden 


Me. 

Him. 

To  see  me 
To  see  him. 

To  see  the  man 

To  see  the  tree. 
To  kill  him. 


To. 

To  the,  or  at  the, 

SINGULAB 

To  the  friend. 

To  the  man. 

To  the  captain, 
lb  the  book. 


PLURAL. 

To  the  friends. 
To  the  men. 

To  the  captains 
To  the  books. 


To  him,  to  her 
To  me 


Me,  (object.) 

Le,  (object.) 

Verme,  (or  para  verme.y 
Verle,  (or  para  verle  ) 

Ver  al  hombre.  (See  Obs.  C,  Les 
son  XVIII.) 

Ver  el  drbol 

Matarle,  (or  para  matarle-'' 


Al — (plur.)  d los 

SINGULAR. 

Al  amigo. 

Al  hombre. 

Al  capitan. 

Al  libro. 

Le,  (complement.) 
Me,  (complement.) 


PLURAL. 

A los  amigos 
A los  hombres. 
A los  capitan?a 
A los  libros 


To  fspeak  to  me. 

To  speak  to  him,  (to  her.) 
To  write  to  him.  (to  her.) 


Hablarme. 

Hablarle. 

Escribirle. 


68 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. 


To  write  to  me. 

To  speak  to  the  man. 
To  speak  to  the  captain 
To  write  to  the  captain. 


Esoaibirme. 

Hablar  al  hombm 
Hablar  al  capitan. 
Escribir  al  capitan. 


Can  you  write  to  me  ? 

I can  write  to  you. 

Gan  the  man  speak  to  you  ? 
lie  can  speak  to  me. 


, [ Piiede  V.  escribirme  1 
Yo  puedo  escribirle. 

Yo  puedo  escribir  d V 
i I Puede  el  hombre  hablai  d V ? 
\ ]&1  me  puede  hablar. 

) Puede  hablarme. 


Ods.  A.  When  a verb  govcnis  another  in  the  infinitive,  the  pronoun  ob- 
ject may  be  placed  either  before  the  first,  or  after  the  second  verb. 


Will  you  write  to  your  brother  ? 
1 will  write  to  iiim. 


I I Quiere  V.  escribir  d su  hermano  ? 
Yo  le  quiero  escribir. 

Quiero  escribirle. 


The  basket. 
The  floor 
The  cat 
The  broom. 
The  carpet. 


El  canasto. 
El  suelo. 

El  gate. 

La  escoba, 
La  alfombra, 
El  tapete. 


) Tliese  two  words  are 
\ feminine. 


Will  you  send  the  book  to  the  man  ? 
I will  send  it  to  him. 

When  will  you  send  it  to  him  ? 

I will  send  it  to  him  to-morrow. 


I Quiere  V.  enviar  el  libro  al  hombre  1 
Yo  quiero  envidrsele. 
tCuando  quiere  V.  envidrsele  ? 

Yo  quiero  envidrsele  manana. 


SINGULAR. 

Object,  Complement, 

governed  by  a verb.  gov.  by  d undei  stoo.  < 


1st 

person. 

Ms. 

To  me.  ' 

1 Me. 

Me. 

3d. 

4( 

Him. 

To  him  1 

1 Le. 

Le. 

PLURAL. 

1st 

.<( 

Us. 

To  us. 

Nos. 

Nos. 

2d. 

« 

You. 

To  you. 

A'  V.,  (d  VOS.) 

OSf  (d  V.) 

3d. 

« 

Them. 

To  them. 

Los. 

Les. 

Does  he  wish  to  speak  to  you  ? I i Quiere  el  hablar  a V.  ? 

He  does  not  wish  to  speak  to  me,  | fil  no  quiere  hablarme,  pero  quteri 
but  to  you.  I hablar  d V. 

1 (See  Obs  C,  Lesson  VllL 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. 


69 


Do  you  wish  lo  write  to  him? 

[ do  not  wish  to  write  to  him,  but  to 
his  brother. 


I Quiere  V.  escribirlo  ? 

No  quiero  escribirle,  pero  qaiero  es 
cribir  d su  hermano. 


The  following  is  the  order  in  which  the  personal  pronouns  must  be  placed 
!U  a sentence : — 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

It  to  me. 

Them  to  me. 

r Me  le. 

t Me  los 

It  to  thee. 

Them  to  thee. 

t Te  le. 

t Te  los 

It  to  him. 

Them  to  him. 

t Se  le 

t Se  log 

It  to  her. 

Them  to  her. 

t Se  le. 

t Se  los. 

It  to  us. 

Them  to  us. 

t Nos  le. 

t Nos  los. 

> t Os  le. 

t Os  los. 

It  to  you. 

Them  to  you.  "j 

► t Se  le  (d  V.) 

t Se  los  (a  V.) 

It  to  them. 

Them  to  them 

j t Se  le  (d  ellos.) 

t Se  los  (d  ellcs ) 

r 1 Cuando  me  quiere  V.  enviar  el  ca- 

When  will  you  send  me  the  basket  ? ^ 

I nasto  I 
I t Cuando  quiere 

V.  enviarmo  el  ca 

L nasto  ? 

I will  send  it  to  you  to-day 


Yo  quiero  enviarsele  d V.  hoy. 
Yo  se  le  quiero  enviar  hoy 


I Quiere  V darmo  pan  ? 

Yo  quiero  darle  d V.  un  poco 


Are  you  willing  to  give  me  some 
bread  ? 

I am  willing  to  give  you  some,  (a 
little.) 

Obs.  B.  We  call  Subject,  the  nominative  case ; Object,  the  direct  ob- 
•ective  case  ; Complement,  the  indirect  objective  case.  When  two  pronounfl^ 
object  and  complement,  come  together,  the  complement  is  always  before  th«? 
object  When  they  are  governed  by  a verb  in  the  infinitive  or  imperative 
mood,  they  are  added  to  it  and  form  a single  word  with  it ; but  in  that  casr 
the  acute  accent  should  be  written  on  that  vowel  of  the  infinitive  upoB 
which  lies  the  stress  of  the  voice.  Example — 

You  wish  to  send  them  to  me  | V.  quiere  enviarmelos. 


To  have  to. 

Have  you  any  thing  to  do  ? 
{ have  nothing  to  do 
To  lend 


Tener  * 2 que. 

I Tiene  V.  algo  que  hacer  ? 
Nada  tengo  que  hacer 
Prestar  1. 


TABLE  OF  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


ro 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. 


s >. : 


VS 

eo  eo 


^ OJ 


cT  « S 
S w ^ 


M « 

S c* 


.£3  ^ 


.t3  •«-»  ,w 

2*  I .1  i i 

S :5  G X >1  .ti 


^ ^ 


->  _G  ® ^ ® 

►-<  G3  ^ 'S3  t>»  .tJ 


§ § ^ 


--SS- 

s s ® ® § 

g-  g.  -a  -=  £, 


s g 


CQ  OQ  O O . 

G G >»  >%  ’G3 


I I 

-S  -C3 


05 


- .>  5 I I s 

03  CB  O O O 

G G >%  >>  *5  ■S  >-. 


«o  eo  Co  «o 


g 3 3 5 3 S 

■«  ’G  'G  "G 

crj  CO  00  « 


d S 


.g  ^ 


^ G 


O O >, 
G ^ w 

2 7:1 

S .T-- 

£ ? S- 


G o O 


0)  ^ 

§1 
K)  G. 

§ s 

O 

G -TiJ 


>S  § 


s S)  I 


^ G 
G 

I 1 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. 


71 


Different  foims  of  sentences  in  which  nronoiins  are  used  as  Subjcals 


Objects,  and  Complements : — 

Do  you  lend  it  ? 

I lend  it. 

Do  you  not  lend  them 

I do  not  lend  them. 

Does  he  lend  it  to  me  I 

He  lends  it  to  you. 

Does  he  not  lend  it  to  me  ? 

He  does  not  lend  it  to  you 

Do  I lend  them  to  you  ? — to  him  1 — 
to  her  ? — to  them  ? 

You  lend  them  to  me. 

You  lend  them  to  him — to  her — to 
them. 

Does  he  not  lend  it  to  her  ? — to 
you  ? — to  them  ? 

f Je  does  not  lend  it  to  her — to  you — 
to  them. 


I Le — la  presta  V.  ? 

Yo  le — la  presto. 

[No  los — las  presta  V ? 

Yo  no  los — las  presto. 

I Me  le — me  la  presta  ^1  ? 

]fcl  se  le — se  la  presta  d V. 

I No  me  le — me  la  presta  6\  1 

El  no  (se)  le — (se)  la  presta  d V. 

[ (Se)  los — (se)  las  presto  yo  d V ? — 
d el  ? — d ella  ? — a ellos  ? 

V.  me  los — me  las  presta  (d  mi.) 

V.  (se)  los — (se)  las  presta  d 6\ — d 
ella — d ellos. 

I No  (se)  le — (se)  la  presta  61  d ella  ? 
V.?— d VV  ?— d ellos?— d 
ellas  ? 

El  no  (se)  le — (se)  la  presta  d ella — 
d V. — d VV. — d ellos — d ellas 


EXERCISES. 

62. 

Can  the  carpenter  buy  a hammer  ? — He  has  enough  money  to  buy 
one. — Has  the  captain  money  enough  to  buy  a ship  ? — He  has  not 
enough  to  buy  one. — Has  not  your  son  paper  to  write  a note  ? — He  has 
not  any. — Does  your  father  wish  to  see  me  ? — He  does  not  wish  to  see 
you. — Has  not  your  servant  a (itna)  broom  to  sweep  the  floor  ? — He 
has  one  (una)  to  sweep  it. — Is  he  willing  to  sweep  it  ? — He  is  willing 
to  sweep  it. — Has  the  sailor  money  to  buy  the  chocolate  ? — He  has 
none  to  buy  it. — Has  the  cook  money  to  buy  some  ham  ? — He  has 
some  to  buy  some. — Has  he  money  to  buy  some  chickens  ? — He  ha« 
some  to  buy  some. — Have  you  salt  enough  to  salt  my  ham  ? — I have 
enough  to  salt  it. — Has  your  neighbor  a desire  to  kill  his  horse  ? — He 
has  no  desire  to  kih  it. — Will  you  kill  your  friends  ? — I will  kill  only 
my  enemies. 

53. 

Can  you  cut  me  some  bread  ? — I can  cut  you  some. — Have  you  a 
Knife  to  cut  it  ? — I have  one. — Will  you  speak  to  the  physician  ? — J 
will  speak  to  him. — Does  your  son  wish  to  see  me  in  order  to  speak  to 
me  ? — He  wishes  to  see  you  in  order  to  give  you  a dollar. — Does  he 
wish  to  kill  me  ? — He  does  not  wish  to  kill  you  ; he  only  wishes  to 
see  you.— Who  has  a mind  to  kill  our  cat  ? — Our  n^^ighbor’s  boy  has  c 


72 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. 


mind  to  kill  it. — How  much  money  can  you  send  me  ? — 1 can  send  you 
twenty  shillings. — Will  you  send  me  my  carpet  ? — I will  send  it  tc 
you. — Will  you  not  send  him  your  coats  ? — No,  I will  send  them  to 
the  tailor. — Are  your  children  able  to  write  to  me  ? — Yes,  Sir. — Will 
you  lend  me  your  basket  ? — Yes,  Sir. 

54. 

H ive  you  a glass  to  drink  your  wine  ? — Yes,  Sir,  but  I have  no 
wine  ; I have  only  tea. — Will  you  give  me  money  to  buy  some  ? — Yes. 
Sir,  but  I have  only  a little. — Will  you  give  me  that  which  you  have  ? 
— Yes,  Sir. — Can  our  neighbor  make  his  fire  ? — He  can  make  it ; but 
he  has  no  money  to  buy  coal. — Are  you  willing  to  lend  him  some  ? — I 
am  willing  to  give  him  some. — Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  the  German  ? 
— I wish  to  speak  to  him. — Where  is  he  ? — He  is  with  the  son  of  the 
American. — Does  the  German  wish  to  speak  to  me  ? — He  wishes  to 
speak  to  you. — Does  he  wish  to  speak  to  my  brother  or  to  yours  ? — He 
wishes  to  speak  to  both. — Can  the  children  of  our  neighbor  work  — 
They  can  work,  but  they  will  not. 

55. 

Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  the  children  of  the  Dutchman  ? — I wish  to 
speak  to  them. — What  will  you  give  them  ? — I will  give  them  good 
cakes. — Will  you  lend  them  any  thing  ? — I am  willing,  but  I cannot,  I 
have  nothing. — Has  the  cook  some  more  salt  to  salt  the  mutton  ? — He 
has  a little  more. — Has  he  some  more  rice  ? — He  has  a great  deal 
more. — Will  he  give  me  some  ? — He  will  give  you  some. — Which  ox 
will  he  kill  ? — That  of  the  good  peasant. — Who  will  send  us  biscuits  ? 
—The  baker  will  send  you  {jplural)  some. — Have  you  any  thing  to  do 
— T have  nothing  to  do. 


56. 

To  whom  do  you  wish  to  speak  ? — To  the  Italians  and  to  the  French. 
—Do  you  wish  to  give  them  something  ? — I wish  to  give  them  some 
money. — Do  you  wish  to  give  this  man  some  bread  ? — I wish  to  give 
him  some. — Will  you  give  nim  a coat  ? — I will  give  him  one. — Will 
you  lend  me  your  books  ? — I will  lend  them  to  you. — Will  you  lend 
your  neighbors  your  mattress  ? — I will  not  lend  it  to  them. — Will  you 
lend  them  your  looking-glass  ? — I will  lend  it  to  them. — To  whom  wiL 
you  lend  your  umbrellas  ? — I will  lend  them  to  my  friends. — To  whom 
dees  your  friend  wish  to  lend  his  horse  ? — To  nobody. 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON 


7(5 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON. — Leccion  Viges.ma  primer  a. 


Whom..... 
To  whom 

What  .... 


t^yUlBTl^^QUtCTl^Sy  (pl»)  ^ 

4 , . / 1 X c For  persons. 

.A  quien — a qmenes,  (pi.)  ) ^ 

) Fcr  things  of  both  genders  and 
. i^ue.  ^ numbers 


Sulject. 

Object. 

Object. 

Complement 

(( 

(( 


Who  .... 
Whom ... 
What  ... 
Whom.  ) 
Whose.  ) 
What.... 


Quien — quienes.  } _ 

A quien — a qmenes.  ) ^ 

Que.  For  persons  or  tilings. 

Quien — quienes.  For  persons 
Que.  For  persons  or  things. 


Who  wi^nes  to  write  ? 

Whom  do  you  wish  to  see  ? 

To  whom  do  you  wish  to  speak  ? 

What  does  he  wish  to  write  ? 

Of  what  do  you  wish  to  speak  ? 


i Quien  quiere  escribir  ? (Subject.; 
I A quien  quiere  V.  ver?  (Object. 

I A quien  quiere  V.  hablar  ? (Com- 
plement.) 

I Que  quiere  escribir  el  ? (Object) 
I De  que  quiere  V.  hablar  ? (Com 
plement.) 


Ohs.  A.  Responder  requires  the  preposition  d after  it.  There  are  in 
Spanish  some  verbs  that  govern,  or  require  certain  prepositions  after  them. 
The  scholar  will  find  a complete  list  of  them  in  the  Appendix 


To  answer. 

To  answer  the  man. 

To  answer  the  men. 

To  whom  do  you  wish  to  answer? 
I wish  to  answer  to  my  brother. 
To  answer  him. 

To  answer  them. 


Responder  2 
Responder  al  hombre. 

Responder  d,  los  hombres 
I A quien  quiere  V.  responder  ? 

Yo  quiero  responder  d mi  hermano. 
Responderle. 

Responderles 


To  answer  the  note. 
To  answer  it. 

To  itf  to  them.. 

To  answer  the  notes. 
To  answer  them. 

Will  you  answer  my  note  ? 
I will  answer  it 


! Responder  al  billete,  (d  la  esquela.) 
Responder  d el. 

A elt  d ellos 
Responder  d los  billetes. 

Responder  d ellos. 

I Quiere  V.  responder  d mi  billete  ? 
j Yo  quiero  responderle. 


Tlie  play,  the  theatre  | El  teatro,  (la  comedia,  sometimef 

j used.) 

I El  baile 


The  ball 


4 


ui — b 


74 


TWENlf-FIRST  LESSON. 


To  or  at  the  play. 
To  or  at  the  ball. 

To  or  at  the  garden. 


SINGULAR. 

A1  teatro, 
Al  baile, 
A1  jardiii, 


PLURAL 
d los  teatros 
d los  bailos. 
d los  jardiii(?8 


The  storehouse. 

The  magazine. 

The  warehouse. 

The  counting-house. 
The  market. 


> El  almacen. 

I El  escritorio,  (el  despacho,  or  el  ofic  o \ 
I El  mercado.  (La  plaza,  fern,) 


There. 


Ohs  B.  There  is  not  translated  when  it  refers  to  a place  just  men- 
tioned, and  which  can  easily  be  understood  in  English. 


Do  you  wish  to  go  to  the  play  ? 

Yes,  I wdsh  to  go  (there.) 

Is  your  brother  at  the  play  ? 
Yes,  he  is  (there.) 

He  is  not  there. 

Where  is  he  ? 


I I Quiere  V.  ir  al  teatro  ? (d  la  come- 
I dia  ?) 

I Si,  yo  quiero  ir 

I I Estd  su  hermano  de  V.  en  el  let  tro  ? 
I Si,  estd. 

I No,  el  no  estd  alia 
I 5 Donde  estd  ? 


In. 

Is  your  father  in  his  garden  ? 

He  is  there. 

Is  he  in  the  storehouse  ? 

He  is  (there — in  it.) 

TherCi  (meaning  in  it,  in  them.) 
‘Where  is  the  merchant  ? 

He  is  in  the  warehouse. 

To  have  to,  (must') 

What  have  you  to  do 

I have  nothing  to  do. 

Have  you  any  thing  to  do  ? 

I have  to  answer  a note. 

I have  to  speak  to  your  brother. 

To  have  to,  {to  meaning  for  to.) 
What  has  the  man  to  drink  7 

Ho  has  wine. 

What  have  you  to  eat  ? 

We  have  ham 


En. 

I Estd  su  padre  de  V.  en  su  jardin  ? 
Estd  en  el,  (or  estd  alii.) 

I Estd  el  en  el  almacen 
Estd  alia,  or  alH. 

En  cZ — en  ellos. 

I Donde  estd  el  comerciante  ? 

^il  estd  en  el  almacen. 

I Tener  que.  (It  implies  obligation.^ 

I I Que  tiene  V.  que  hacer  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  nada  que  hacer 
Nada  tengo  que  hacer. 

I Tiene  V.  algo  que  hacer*? 
j Tengo  que  responder  d un  billete. 
Tengo  que  hablar  d su  hermano  de 
V. 

Tener  que,  or  para. 

I Que  tiene  que  (or  para)  beber  ol 
hombre  ? 

6 1 tiene  vino. 

tQue  tieneii  VV  que  (para)  comer? 
Tenemos  jamon. 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON 


75 


EXERCISES. 

57. 

Will  you  write  to  me  ? — I will  write  to  you. — Will  you  write  to  the 
lalian  ?—  I will  write  to  him. — Will  you  answer  your  friend  ? — I wil 
answer  him. — Whom  will  you  answer  ? — To  my  good  father. — Will 
you  not  answer  your  good  friends  ? — Yes,  Sir. — Who  will  write  to 
vou  ? — The  Russian. — Will  you  answer  him  ? — No,  Sir. — -Who  will 
write  to  our  friends  ? — The  children  of  our  neighbor. — Will  they 
answ^er  them  ? — They  will  answer  them. — To  whom  do  you  wish  to 
write  ? — I wish  to  write  to  the  Russian. — Will  he  answer  you  ? — He 
wishes  to  answer  me,  but  he  cannot. — Can  the  Spaniards  answer  us  ? 
— They  cannot  answer  us,  but  we  can  answer  them. — To  whom  do 
you  wish  to  send  this  note  ? — To  you.  Sir. 

68. 

What  have  you  to  do  ? — I have  to  write. — W hat  have  you  to  write  ? 
— A note. — To  whom  ? — To  the  carpenter. — What  has  your  father  to 
drink  ? — He  has  some  good  wine. — What  has  the  shoemaker  to  do  ^ 
— He  has  to  mend  my  shoes. — To  whom  have  you  to  speak  ? — I have 
to  speak  to  the  captain. — WTien  will  you  speak  to  him  ? — To-day. — 
W’here  will  you  speak  to  him  ? — At  his  house. — To  whom  has  youi 
brother  to  speak  ? — To  your  son. — Which  note  has  he  to  answer  ? — 
That  of  the  good  German. — Have  I to  answer  the  note  in  Spanish  ? 
— Yes,  Sir,  in  Spanish. — Has  not  your  father  to  answer  me  ? — He  haa 
to  answer  you. — Who  has  to  answer  my  notes  ? — Our  children. — 
W^ill  you  answer  the  merchants’  ? — I will  answer  them. 

59. 

Which  notes  will  your  father  answer? — He  will  answer  only  those 
of  his  good  friends. — Who  will  answer  my  brothers’  ?— Your  friends 
will  answer  them. — Have  you  a mind  to  go  to  the  ball  ? — I have  a 
mind  to  go  (there.) — When  will  you  go  (there  ?) — To-day. — At  whai 
o’clock  ? — At  half-past  ten. — When  will  you  take  your  boy  to  the 
olay  ? — To-morrow. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  a quarter  to  six. — Whore 

your  son  ? — He  is  at  the  play. — Is  your  friend  at  the  ball  ? — He  is 
there. — Where  is  the  merchant  ? — He  is  at  his  counting-house. — 
Where  do  you  wish  to  take  me  to  ? — I wish  to  take  you  to  my  ware- 
.^louse. — Where  does  your  cook  wish  to  go  to  ? — He  wishes  to  go  to  the 
market. — Where  is  the  young  man  ? — In  the  magazine. 

60. 

Where  is  the  Dutchman  ? — He  is  in  his  garret. — Will  you  come  w 
me  in  oider  to  go  to  the  play  ? — I will  come  (?r)  to  you,  but  I have  no 


76 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


mind  to  go  to  the  play. — Where  is  the  Irishman  ? — He  is  at  the  mar 
^’et. — To  which  theatre  do  you  wish  to  go  ? — To  the  theatre  of  the 
Spaniards. — Will  you  go  to  my  garden  or  to  that  of  the  Scotchman  ? — 
I will  go  neither  to  yours  nor  to  that  of  the  Scotchman  ; I wish  to  go 
to  that  of  the  Italian. — Dc»es  the  physician  wish  to  go  to  our  storehouses 
or  to  those  of  the  Dutch  ? — He  will  go  neither  to  yours  nor  to  those 
of  the  Dutch,  but  to  those  of  the  French. — What  do  you  wish  to  buy 
«it  the  market  ? — I wish  to  buy  a basket  and  some  carpets. — Where 
wil  you  take  them  to  ? — I will  take  them  home. 

61. 

How  many  carpets  do  you  wish  to  buy  ? — I wish  to  buy  two. — To 
whom  do  you  wish  to  give  them  ? — To  my  servant. — Has  he  a mind 
fcn  sweep  the  floor  ? — He  has  a mind  to  do  it,  but  he  has  no  time. — 
Have  the  English  many  storehouses  ? — They  have  many. — Have  you 
many  guns  in  your  warehouses  ? — We  have  many  (there,)  but  we  have 
but  little  corn. — Do  you  wish  to  see  our  guns  ? — I will  go  into  your 
warehouses  in  order  to  see  them. — Do  you  wish  to  buy  any  thing  ? — I 
do  wish  to  buy  something. — What  do  you  wish  to  buy  ? — I wish  to 
buy  a basket,  a looking-glass,  and  a gun. — Where  will  you  buy  youi 
n-unk  ? — I will  buy  it  at  the  market. — Who  wishes  to  tear  my  coat  ?— 
No  one  wishes  to  tear  it. 


62. 

Will  the  English  give  us  some  bread  ? — They  will  give  you  some.- 
Will  you  give  this  man  a shilling  ? — I will  give  him  several. — How 
many  shillings  will  you  give  him  ? — I will  give  him  five. — What  will 
the  French  lend  us  ? — They  will  lend  us  many  books. — Have  you 
time  to  write  to  the  merchant  ? — I wish  to  write  to  him,  but  I have  no 
time  to-day. — When  will  you  answer  the  German  ? — I will  answer 
him  to-morrow. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  eight. — Where  does  the 
Spaniard  wish  to  go  to  ? — He  wishes  to  go  nowhere. — Does  your  servant 
wish  to  warm  my  broth  ? — He  wishes  to.  warm  it. — Is  he  willing  to 
make  my  fire  ? — He  is  willing  to  make  it. — Where  does  the  bakei 
wish  to  go  to  ? — He  wishes  to  go  to  the  wood. — Where  is  the  boy  ?— 
He  is  at  the  play. — Who  ;s  at  the  captain’s  ball  ? — Our  cliildren  anc 
CUT  friends  are  there. 


TWENTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


77 


TWENTY-SECOND  LESSON. — Leccion  Vigesima  scg^xnds 


To  or  at  the  corner. 

To  or  at  the  hole. 

In  the  hole,  in  the  holes. 

To  or  at  the  bottom. 

IV  or  at  the  bottom  of  the  bag. 

At  the  corner  of  the  garden. 
The  hole 
The  room. 


JAI  or  cn  el  rincon. 

X.  los,  en  los  rincones.  (Plur.) 
< A1  or  en  el  agujero. 

( A los,  en  los  agujeros  (Plur) 

SEn  el  agujero. 

En  los  agujeros.  (Plur.) 

i A1  fondo,  (or  en  el  fondo.; 

JAl  fondo  del  costal. 

En  el  fondc  del  costai. 

A or  en  el  i aicon  del  jardin 
El  agujero,  (or  el  hoyo.) 

El  cuarto. 


To  or  at  the  end. 

To  or  at  the  end  of  the  road. 
To  or  at  the  end  of  the  roads. 
The  road. 


A1  cabo. 

A1  cabo  del  camino. 

A1  cabo  do  los  caminos 
El  camino. 


To  send  for. 

To  go  for,  to  fetch. 

To  fetch,  to  bring. 

Will  you  send  for  some  wine  ? 

I will  send  for  some,  (a  little.) 

Will  your  boy  go  for  some  bread  ? 

He  will  not  (go  for  any.) 

I will  send  for  the  physician. 

I will  send  for  him. 

He  will  send  for  my  brothers. 

He  will  send  for  them 
Will  you  send  for  glasses  ? 

I will  send  for  some. 

What  have  you  to  do  ? 

I have  to  go  to  the  market. 

You  have  to  mend  your  coat 
What  have  you  to  drink  ? 

. have  (to  drink  some)  good  wine. 


Enviar  por,  {mandar  por,  or  enmoA 
d huscar.) 

Ir  por,  (or  ir  d buscar  ) 

Traer 

I Quiere  V.  enviar  por  vino  ? 
tYo)  quiero  enviar  por  un  poco. 

I Quiere  ir  por  pan  su  muchacho  de 
V.? 

(^^)  no  quiere,  (or  no,  sefior.) 

(See  Lesson  XI./ 
Yo  quiero  enviar  por  el  medico. 

Yo  quiero  enviar  por  6\. 
ti  quiere  mandar  (or  enviar)  pot 
mis  hermanos 
6l  quiere  mandar  por  ellos 
I Quiere  V.  enviar  por  vasos  ? 

Yo  quiero  enviar  por  algunos 


I Que  tiene  V.  que  hacer  ? 

(Yo)  tengo  que  ir  al  mercado. 

V.  tiene  que  remendar  su  vestido. 
I Que  tiene  V.  quo  beber  f 
Tengo  buen  vino 


78 


TWENTY -SECOND  LESSON. 


They  ha\o.  ' Elios  tienen. 

What  have  the  men  to  do?  i Que  tienen  que  hacer  los  hombnja 

Tliey  have  to  go  to  the  storehouse.  (Elios)  tienen  que  ir  al  almaceu 


This  evening. 

This. 

The  cook. 
The  hearth. 
The  study. 

In  the  evening. 
The. 

This  morning. 

In  the  morning. 


Esta  tarde  (Fern.) 

Este.  Esta.  (Fem.i 

El  cocinero 
El  hogar. 

El  estudio. 

t For  la  tarde,  (or  en  la  tarde.) 

El.  La.  (Fern.) 

Esta  mahana.  (Fein.) 

+ For  la  mahana,  (or  en  la  mahana  ) 


Now,  at  present  | Ah  ora. 


Thou.  I Tu. 

Ohs.  A.  In  addressing  one  another  the  Spaniards  use  V.  (Usted,)  VV 
fUstedos.)  The  second  person  singular  is  used  by  parents  and  children, 
brothers  and  sisters,  and  by  intimate  friends,  or  in  addressing  menial  servants 
.'"See  Lesson  I.) 


Thou  hast 
Thou  art. 

Art  thou  fatigued  ? 
I am  not  fatigued. 
Are  the  men  tired  ? 


Th  tienes. 

Td  estas,  (or  th  eres.) 

I Estas  tii  fatigado  ? 

Yo  no  estoy  fatigado 
I Estan  cansados  los  hombres  / 


Obs.  B.  When  the  adjective  qualifies  a noun  or  a pronoun,  it  agrees 
with  it  in  gender  and  number.  Rule. — Adjectives  form  their  pluial  in  thf. 
same  manner  as  nouns. 


They  are  not  tired.  | Elios  no  estan  cansados. 


Thou  wilt,  (or  wishest) 

Thou  art  able,  (or  canst.) 

Art  thou  willing  to  make  my  fire  ? 

I am  willing  to  make  it,  but  I can- 
not. 

Art  thou  afraid  ? 

I am  not  afraid,  I am  cold 
Art  thou  hungry  ? 


Tu  quieres. 

Th  puedes. 

I Quieres  th  hacer  mi  fuego  ? 

Yo  quiero  hacerle,  pero  no  puedo 

I I Tienes  (th)  miedo  ? 

Yo  no  tengo  miedo,  tengo  frio 
I Tienes  hambre  ? 


To  sell. 

To  tell>  to  say. 

To  toll  some  one,  to  say  to  some 
OBO 


Vender  !2. 

Decir  * 3. 
Decir  d alguno. 


TWENTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


79 


The  word. 

H ill  you  tell  the  servant  to  make 
the  fire? 

! will  tell  him  to  make  it. 

To  make  a fire. 

Thy. 

Thine 

Thy  book,  thy  books. 


Art  not  thou  tired  ? 


La  palabra.  (Fem.) 

I Quiere  V.  decir  al  criado  qjo  eiici< 
enda  candela. 

Yo  quiero  decirle  que  la  encienda. 

I Encender  candela,  or  lumbrc. 

7'u.  Tus.  (Plur.) 

El  iuyo.  Los  tuyos.  (Flur) 

Tu  libro.  T u&  libros.  ( Plur ) 


I ^No  estas  td  cansado  ? 


EXERCISES. 

63. 

Will  you  send  for  some  sugar? — I will  send  for  some. — Son,  Jiijo 
rnio,)  wilt  thou  go  for  some  cakes  ? — Yes,  father,  (jpadre,)  I will  go  for 
some. — Where  wilt  thou  go  ? — I will  go  into  the  garden. — Who  is  in 
the  garden  ? — The  children  of  our  friends  are  there. — Will  you  send 
for  the  physician  ? — I will  send  for  him. — Who  will  go  for  my  brother  ? 
— My  servant  will  go  for  him. — Where  is  he  ? — He  is  in  his  counting- 
house. — Will  you  give  me  my  broth  ? — I will  give  it  you. — Where  is 
it  ? — It  is  at  the  corner  of  the  hearth. — Will  you  give  me  some  money 
to  (para)  fetch  some  bread  ? — I will  give  you  some  to  fetch  some. — 
Where  is  your  money  ? — It  is  in  my  counting-house  : will  you  go  for 
it  ? — I V ill  go  for  it. — Will  you  buy  my  horse  ? — I cannot  buy  it ; I 
have  no  money. — Where  is  your  cat  ? — It  is  in  the  hole. — In  which 
hole  is  it  ? — In  the  hole  of  the  garret. — ^Where  is  this  man’s  dog  ? — It 
is  in  a corner  of  the  ship. — Where  has  the  peasant  his  com  ? — He  lias 
it  in  his  bag. — Has  he  a cat  ? — He  has  one. — Where  is  it  ? — It  is  at 
the  bottom  of  the  bag. — Is  your  cat  in  this  bag  ? — It  is  in  it. 

64. 

Have  you  any  tiling  to  do  ? — I have  something  to  do. — What  have 
3^  ;U  to  do  ? — I have  to  mend  my  coat,  and  to  go  to  the  end  of  the  road. 
— Wlio  is  at  the  end  of  the  road  ? — My  father  is  there. — Flas  your  cook 
any  thing  to  drink  ? — He  has  (to  drink  some)  wine  and  some  good  broth. 
—(Jan  you  give  me  as  much  ham  as  bread  ? — I can  give  you  more  of  the 
latti)r  than  of  tne  former. — Can  our  friend  drink  as  much  wine  as  cof- 
fee — He  cannot  drink  so  much  of  the  latter  as  of  the  former. — Have 
/ou  to  speaR  to  any  one  ?— I have  to  speak  to  several  men. — To  how 
many  men  have  you  to  speak  ? — I have  to  speak  to  four. — When  have 
you  to  speak  to  them  ? — This  evening. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  a 
quarter  to  nine. — When  can  you  go  to  the  market,  (la  plaza  7) — I can 
go  (thither)  in  the  morning. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  half-past  seven-— 


80 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


When  will  you  go  to  the  Frenchman? — I will  go  to  him  to-mght.-» 
Will  you  go  to  the  physicitEh  in  the  morning  or  in  the  evening  ?•— 
I will  go  (to  him)  in  the  morning. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  a quartos 
past  ten. 

G5. 

Have  you  to  write  as  many  notes  as  the  Englivshman  ? — 1 have  to 
write  fewer  of  them  than  he. — Will  you  speak  to  the  German  ? — I wiD 
speak  to  him. — When  will  you  speak  to  him  ? — At  present. — Where  is 
he  ? — He  is  at  the  other  end  of  the  wood. — Will  you  go  to  the  market  ? — 
Yes,  I will  go  to  {jpara)  buy  some  bread. — Do  your  neighbors  not  wish 
to  go  to  the  market  ? — They  cannot  go  (thither  ;)  they  are  fatigued. — 
Hast  thou  the  courage  to  go  to  the  wood  in  the  evening  ? — I have  the 
courage  to  go  (thither,)  but  not  in  the  evening. — Are  your  children 
able  to  answer  my  notes  ? — They  are  able  to  answer  them. — What  do 
you  wish  to  say  to  the  servant  ?-^I  wish  to  tell  him  to  make  the  fire, 
{que  ejicienda,)  and  to  sweep  (que  harra)  the  warehouse. — Will  you 
tell  your  brother  to  sell  {que  me  venda)  me  his  horse  ? — I will  tell  him 
to  sell  {venda)  it  you. — What  do  you  wish  to  tell  me  ? — I wish  to  tell 
you  a word,  {la  palabra) — Whom  do  you  wish  to  see  ? — I wish  to  see 
the  Scotchman. — Have  you  any  thing  to  tell  him  ? — I have  to  tell  him 
a few  words. — Which  books  does  my  brother  wish  to  sell  ? — He  wishes 
to  sell  thine  and  his  own. 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON. — Leccion  Vigesima  tercera. 


To  go  out 
To  remain,  to  stay. 

When  do  you  wish  to  go  out  1 
I wish  to  go  out  now 
To  remain  (to  stay)  at  home. 


Salir  * 3. 

Qaedar  1,  Quedarse,  (Reflective 
verb.)' 

I Cuando  quiere  V.  salir  ? 

Yo  quiero  salir  ahora. 

Quedar  or  eslar  ea  casa. 


Here, 

To  remain  here. 
There. 

W ill  you  stay  here  7 
I will  stay  here. 


Aqui. 

Quedar  aqui,  (or  quedarse  aqui ) 
Alld,  or  alii. 

I Quiere  V.  quedarse  aqui  ? 

Yo  quiero  quedarme  aqui. 


The  pronominal  verbs,  in  Spanish,  terminate  their  present  of  the  infmi' 
ti/o  mood  by  the  pronoun  se,  which  must  be  suppressed  in  order  to  find  oul 
the  conjugation  ; thus,  acercarse,  dolerse,  arrepentirse,  (se,)  are  acerrjr,  ls< 
conjugation  ; doler,  2d  conjugation  ; and  arreperitir,  3d  conjugation 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


iVil!  your  friend  remain  here  ? 

lie  will  not  stay  here. 

Will  you  go  to  your  brother 

I will  go  to  him. 

The  pleasure 
The  favor. 

To  give  pleasure. 

To  do  a favor. 

Are  you  going? 

I am  going. 

Am  I not  going  ? 

I am  not  going. 

Thou  art  going. 

Is  he  going? 

He  goes,  he  is  going. 
He  is  not  going. 

Are  we  going? 

We  go,  we  are  going. 


81 

i Quiore  quedarse  aqui  su  a nigo  dt 
V.? 

^ll  no  quiere  quedarse  aqai. 

I Quiere  V.  ir  d la  casa  de  su  her 
mano  ? 

Yo  quiero  ir  d ^1. 

El  placer,  (or  el  gusto., 

El  favor. 

Bar  gusto 
Hacer  un  ^avor 


t Va  V.  ? 

Yo  voy. 

I No  voy  yo  ? 

Yo  no  voy. 

Tu  vas. 
t Va  dl  ? 

61  va 
El  no  va. 

I Vamos  nosotros  ? 
Nosotros  vamos. 


What  are  yon  going  to  do  ? 

I am  going  to  read. 

To  read. 


I Que  va  V.  d hacer  ? 
I Que  vais  d hacer  ? 

I Yo  voy  d leer. 

I Leer  2. 


Are  you  going  to  your  brother  ? 
I am  going  there. 

Wh3r©  is  he  going  to? 

Ho  is  going  to  his  father 


i Va  V.  d casa  de  su  hermaius  ■ 
Yo  voy  alia. 

I A donde  va  ^1  ? 

El  va  d casa  de  su  padre 


The  soldier. 

All,  every. 

Every  day. 
Every  morning 

Every  evening 


I El  soldado. 

^ Todo.  ^ Todos.  (Plur.) 

( Toda.  Todas.  (Fem.) 
I + Todos  los  dias. 

I t Todeis  las  mahanas 
^ t Todas  las  tardes. 

( t Todas  las  noches. 


It  is.  I Es. 

Late.  I Tarde. 


82 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


It  in  the  impersonal  verbs,  that  is  to  say,  verbs  used  only  in  the 
third  person  singular,  and  wnen  it  js  redundant,  is  not  translated 


^^hat  o’clock  is  it  ? 

It  is  three  o’clock. 

It  is  twelve  o’clock. 

It  is  a quarter  past  twelve. 
It  wants  a quarter  to  six. 

It  is  half-past  one 


1 1 Que  hora  es  ? 
t Son  las  tres. 
t Son  las  doce. 
t Son  las  doce  y cuarto 
t Son  las  seis  menos  cuarto. 
t Es  la  uiia  y media. 


Need, 

To  want. 

To  he  in  want  of 

I want  It. 

I ara  in  want  of  it. 

Are  you  in  want  of  this  knife  ? 

I am  not  in  want  of  it. 

I am  in  want  of  them. 

I am  not  in  want  of  them. 

I am  not  in  want  of  any  thing. 

Is  he  in  want  of  money  ? 

He  is  not  in  want  of  more. 
What  are  you  in  want  of? 
What  do  you  want  ? 


Tenet  necesidad  de 
Haber  menester  de 
Necesitar  1 
Haher  menester. 

Le  necesito 
Le  he  menester. 

I Necesita  V.  este  cuchillo  ? 
No  le  he  menester. 

No'  le  necesito. 

Los  he  menester 
Los  necesito. 

No  los  he  menester. 

No  los  necesito. 

Yo  no  necesito  nada. 

Nada  he  menester 
I Necesita  ^1  algun  dinero  ? 
No  necesita  mas. 
i Que  necesita  V.  ? 

I Que  ha  menester  V.  ? 


To  he  acquainted  with,  to  know.  | Conocer  2 
To  be  acquainted  with  (to  know)  a ] Conocer  d un  hombre. 
man.  I (See  Obs.  C,  Less  XVIIl. 


Is  your  father  in  want  of  me  ? 

He  is  in  want  of  you. 

Are  you  in  want  of  these  books  ? 
I am  in  want  of  them. 

Is  he  in  want  of  my  brothers  ? 
He  is  m want  of  them. 


I Me  necesita  su  padre  de  V ? 
necesita  d V. 

I Necesita  V.  estos  libros  ? 

Yo  los  necesito. 

Necesita  dl  d mis  hermanosl 
los  necesita. 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


83 


EXERCISES. 

66. 

Will  you  do  me  a favor  ? — Yes,  Sir : which,  {cua  1) — ^Will  you  tell 
my  servant  to  make  (que  encienda)  the  fire  ? — I will  tell  him  to  make  it, 
{que  la  encierula.) — Will  you  tell  him  to  sweep  {que  harra)  the  ware- 
houses ? — I will  tell  him  to  sweep  (que  los  barra)  them. — What  will 
you  tell  your  father  ? — I will  te J him  to  sell  you  his  horse. — Have 
you  any  thing  to  tell  me  ? — I have  nothing  to  tell  you. — Have  you  any 
tiling  to  say  to  my  father  ? — I have  a word  to  say  to  him. — Do  these 
men  wish  to  sell  their  carpets  ? — They  do  not  wish  to  sell  them. — 
John ! {Juan)  art  thou  here  ? — Yes,  Sir,  I am  here. — What  art  thou 
going  to  do  ? — I am  going  to  your  hatter  to  tell  him  to  mend  {que 
componga)  your  hat. — Wilt  thou  go  to  the  tailor  to  tell  him  to  mend 
'que  componga)  my  coats  ? — I will  go  to  him.— Are  you  willing  to  go 
lo  the  market  ? — Yes,  Sir. — What  has  your  merchant  to  sell  ? — He 
nas  to  sell  some  beautiful  gloves,  combs,  good  cloth,  and  fine  baskets. — 
Has  he  any  iron  guns  to  sell  ? — He  has  some  to  sell. — Does  he  wish 
to  sell  me  his  horses  ? — He  wishes  to  sell  them  to  you. — Have  you 
any  thing  to  sell  ? — I have  nothing  to  sell. 

67. 

Is  it  late  ? — It  is  not  late. — What  o’clock  is  it  ? — It  is  a quarter  past 
welve. — At  what  o’clock  does  the  captain  wish  to  go  out  ? — He  wishes 
to  go  out  at  a quarter  to  eight. — What  are  you  going  to  do  ? — I am 
going  to  read. — What  have  you  to  read  ? — I have  to  read  a good  book. 
— Will  you  lend  it  to  me  ? — I will  lend  it  you. — When  will  you  lend 
it  me  ? — I will  lend  it  you  to-morrow. — Have  you  a mind  to  go  out  ? — 
I have  HD  mind  to  go  out. — Are  you  willing  to  stay  here,  my  dear 
{querido)  friend  ? — I cannot  remain  here. — Where  have  you  to  go  ? — 
I have  to  go  to  the  counting-house. — When  will  you  go  to  the  ball  ? — 
To-night. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  midnight. — Do  you  go  to  the 
Scotchman  in  the  evening  or  in  the  morning  ? — I go  to  him  in  the 
evening  and  in  the  morning. — ^Where  are  you  going  to  now  ? — I am 
going  to  the  theatre. — Where  is  your  son  going  to  ? — He  is  going  no- 
where ; he  is  going  to  stay  at  home  to  write  his  exercises. — Where  is 
your  brother  ? — He  is  at  his  warehouse. — Does  he  not  wish  to  go  out  ? 
— No,  Sir^  he  does  not  wish  to  go  out. — ^What  is  he  going  to  do  there  1 
—He  is  going  to  write  to  his  friends. — Win  you  stay  here  or  there  ?— 
will  stay  there. — ^Where  will  your  father  stay  ? — He  will  stay  there 


84 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON 


68. 

At  what  o^clock  is  the  Dutchman  at  ht)me  ? — He  is  at  home  ever^ 
evening  at  a quarter  past  nine. — When  does  our  neigl  bor  go  to  the 
Irishmen  ? — He  goes  to  them  every  day. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  eight 
o’clock  in  {de)  the  morning. — What  do  you  wish  to  buy  ? — I do  not 
wish  to  buy  any  thing ; but  my  father  wishes  to  buy  an  ox. — Does  lu 
wish  to  buy  this  or  that  ox  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  neither  tliis  nor  that 
— Which  one  does  he  wish  to  buy  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  your  friend’s 
— Has  the  merchant  one  more  c^t  to  sell  ? — He  has  one  more,  but  he 
does  not  wish  to  sell  it. — When  does  he  sell  his  books  ? — He  will  seh 
them  to-day. — Where  ? — At  his  warehouse. — Do  you  wish  to  see  my 
friend  ? — I do  wish  to  see  him  in  order  to  know  him. — Do  you  wish 
to  know  my  children  ? — I do  wish  to  know  them. — How  many  children 
have  you  ? — I have  only  two  ; but  my  brother  has  more  than  I : he  has 
six  (of  them.) — Does  that  man  wish  to  drink  too  much  wine? — He 
wishes  to  drink  too  much  (of  it.) — Have  you  wine  enough  to  drmk  ? — 
I have  only  a little,  but  enough. — Does  not  your  brother  wish  to  buy 
roo  many  cakes  ? — He  wishes  to  buy  a great  many,  but  not  too  many. 


69. 

Can  you  lend  me  a knife  ? — I can  lend  you  one. — Can  your  fathei 
lend  me  a book  ? — He  can  lend  you  several. — What  are  you  in  want 
of  ? — 1 am  in  want  of  a good  gun. — Are  you  in  want  of  this  picture  ? — 
I am  in  want  of  it. — Does  your  brother  want  money  ? — He  does  not 
want  any. — Does  he  want  some  shoes  ? — He  does  not  want  any. — 
What  does  he  want  ? — He  wants  nothing. — Are  you  in  want  of  these 
sticks  ? — I am  in  want  of  them. — Who  wants  some  sugar  ? — Nobody 
wants  any. — Does  anybody  want  paper  ? — Nobodv  wants  any. — What 
do  I want  ? — You  want  nothing. — Does  your  father  want  these  or 
those  pictures  ? — He  wants  neither  these  nor  those. — Are  you  in  want 
of  me  ? — I am  in  want  of  you. — When  do  you  want  me  ? — At  present. 
— What  have  you  to  say  to  me  ? — I have  a word  {una  palahra)  to  say 
to  you. — Is  your  son  in  want  of  us  ? — He  is  in  want  of  you  and  youi 
brothers. — Are  you  in  want  of  my  servants  ? — I am  in  want  of  them  — 
Does  any  one  want  my  brother? — No  one  wants  him. — Does  youi 
father  want  any  thing  ? — He  does  not  want  any  thing. — What  does  the 
Englishman  want  ? — He  wants  some  glasses. — Does  ho  not  wan' 
some  wine  ? — He  does  not  want  any,  he  has  enough. 


TWENIT-FOURTH  LESSON. 


85 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON.— Xeccwn  Vigesima  cuarta. 
THE  CONJUGATIONS. 

In  Sf>anish  all  the  tenses  and  persons  of  verbs  are  formed  from  the 
present  of  the  infinitive  mood,  by  changing  the  last  two  letters  of  it  iutc 
d'lO  termination  corresponding  to  each  person  in  every  tense. 

Soe  the  table  of  terminations  in  the  Appendix. 


Conjugations 

2d. 

3d. 

'i  ?rminatlous  of  the  Infinitive 

er. 

ir. 

“ of  tho  Gerund 

iendo. 

iendo. 

* of  the  Past  Participle 

’do. 

ido. 

1st  per.  sing.  Yo ( 

o. 

0. 

SA  “ Til 

es. 

es. 

3A  “ 6l,  Ella,  V 

e. 

e. 

1 st.  per.  pi  iir  N osotros 

emos. 

imos. 

2d.  “ Vosotros,  Vos 

eis. 

is. 

3d.  « Ellos,  Ellas,  VV 

en. 

en. 

> No.  1 


Infinitive 
To  speak. 


I speak,  then  speakest,  he  speaks. 
We  speak,  you  speak,  they  speak. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

Gerund,  l Infinitivo.  Gerundio 

Speaking.  | Hablar.  Hablaiido. 

Present,  No.  1. 

Yo  hablo,  td  hablas,  el  habla,  V 
habla. 


Nosotros  hablamos,  vosotros  habla??, 
ellos  hablan,  VV.  hablan. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


To  sell.  Selling. 

I sell,  thou  sellest,  he  sells. 

We  sell,  you  sell,  they  sell. 


Vender.  Vendiendo. 

Yo  vendo,  tii  voudes,  el  yende,  V. 
vende. 

Nosotros  vendemos,  vosotros  vendeis, 
ellos  venden,  VV.  venden. 

THIRD  CONJUGATIOxN. 


To  receive.  Receiving. 

I receive,  thou  receivest,  he  receives. 

We  receive,  you  receive,  they  re- 
ceive. 


Recibir.  Recibiendo 

Yo  recibo,  td  recibes,  ^1  recibe,  V 
recibe. 

Nosotros  recibimos,  vosotros  recibbi 
ellos  reciben,  VV.  reciben. 

Ohs.  A.  The  preceding  are  the  regular  terminations  of  the  present  tense  ; 
but  as  some  irregular  verbs  have  been  introduced  in  the  exorcises,  they  an? 
conjugated  below  in  order  to  make  the  scholar  acquainted  with  their  irregu 
iarities,  and  to  enable  him  to  translate  them  properly. 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON, 


To  have.  Having. 

I liave,  thou  haat,  he  has. 

VVe  have,  you  have,  they  have. 

To  ask  for.  Asking  for. 

I ask  for,  thou  askest  for,  he  asks  for. 
VVe  ask  for,  you  ask  for,  they  ask  for 

Tc  warm.  Warmijig. 

[ warm,  thou  warmest,  he  warms. 
W'^e  warm,  you  warm,  they  warm. 

To  make.  Making. 

To  do.  Doing. 

I make,  thou  makest,  he  makes. 

I do,  thou  dost,  he  does. 

We  make,  you  make,  they  make. 
We  do,  you  do,  they  do. 


Tcner.  Tenieiido 

Yo  tengo,  tii  tieues,  dl  tiene. 
Nosotros  tenemoSy  vosotros  teneisy  ol- 
ios tienen. 

• 

Pedir.  Pidiendo 

Yo  pido,  tii  pides,  6\  pide. 

Nosotros  pedimosy  vosotros  pedts,  eh 
los  piden. 

Calentar.  Calentando. 

Yo  caliento,  tii  calientas,  dl  calieiita 
Nosotros  calentamosy  vosotros  caltn 
taisy  ellos  caiientan. 

llacer.  Haciendo. 

Yo  hago,  td  haces,  6\  hace 

Nosotros  hacemoSy  vosotros  haceiSt 
ellos  hacen. 


To  go.  Going. 

I go,  thou  goest,  he  goes. 

We  go,  you  go,  they  go. 

To  mend.  Mending. 

To  repair  Repairing. 

I mend,  thou  mendest,  he  mends. 

[ repair,  thou  repairest,  he  repairs. 
We  mend,  you  mend,  they  mend. 
We  repair,  you  repair,  they  repair. 


To  be.  Being. 

[ am,  thou  art,  he  is. 

We  are,  you  are,  they  are. 


To  take  to.  Taking  to. 

To  lead  to.  Leading  to. 

/'Meaning  to  conduct.) 


Ir.  Y endo. 

Yo  voy,  td  vas,  dl  va. 

Nosotros  vamos,  vosotros  vais,  eIlot< 
van. 

Remendar.  Remendando. 

Yo  remiendo,  td  remiendas,  dl  re- 
mienda. 

Nosotros  remendamosy  vosotros  re- 
mendaisy  ellos  remiendan. 

" Estar  Estanda 

Yo  estoy,  td  estasy  dl  estd. 

Nosotros  estamoSy  vosotros  estais.  el- 
los estan. 

Ser.  Siendo. 

Yo  soy  (soi,)  td  eres,  dl  es. 

^ Nosotros  somos, vosotros  sois,  ellos  son 

1 

> Conducir,  Conduciendo 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


87 


i take,  thou  takest,  he  takes. 

( lead,  thou  leadest,  he  leads. 

I conduct,  thou  conductest,  he  con- 
ducts. 

VVe  take,  you  take,  they  take. 

We  lead,  you  lead,  they  lead. 

We  conduct,  you  conduct,  they  con- 
duct 

To  come.  Coming. 

1 come,  thou  comest,  he  comes. 

We  come,  you  come,  they  come. 

To  see.  Seeing. 

I see,  thou  seest,  he  sees. 

We  see,  you  see,  they  see. 

To  go  out.  Going  out. 

I go  out,  thou  goest  out,  he  goes  out. 
We  go  out,  you  go  out,  they  go  out. 

To  he  able  (can).  Being  able. 

I am  able,  thou  art  able,  he  is  able. 
We  are  able,  you  are  able,  they  are 
able. 

To  tell.  Telling. 

To  say.  Saying. 

( tell,  thou  tellest,  he  tells. 

I say,  thou  sayest,  he  says. 

We  tell,  you  tell,  they  tell. 

We  say,  you  say,  they  say. 


Yo  conduzco,*  t1  conduces,  61  con* 
duce. 

No&otros  conducimosy  vosotros  condu^ 
ciSf  ellos  conducen. 

Venir.  Viniendo. 

Yo  vengo,  td  vienes,  6i  'vlene. 
Nosotros  venimos,  vosotros  veniSy 
ellos  vienen. 

Ver.  Viendo. 

Yo  veo,  td  veSf  el  ve. 

Nosotros  vemosy  vosotros  veisy  ellos 
ven. 

Salir.  Saliendo. 

Yo  salgo,  td  sales y dl  sale. 

Nosotros  salimosy  vosotros  salisy  ellos 
salen. 

Poder  Pudiendo. 

Yo  puedo,  td  puedes,  dl  puede. 
Nosotros  podemos,  vosotros  podeisy 
ellos  puoden. 

Decir  Diciendo. 

Yo  digo,  td  dices,  dl  dice. 

Nosotros  decimosy  vosotros  decisy  ell<3« 
dicen. 


To  finish. 

Any  one. 

No  one. 

Where  (to.) 

To  love. 

\ love,  I do  love,  I am  loving. 

Thou  lovest,  thou  dost  love,  thou  art 
loving. 

He  lo  /es  he  does  love,  he  is  loving. 


Acabar  1. 

Alguien.  Alguno.  ) Indefinite  pro- 
Nadie.  Ninguno.  ( nouns. 

A donde. 

Amar  1. 

Yo  amo. 

Td  amas. 

fil  ama. 


Verbs  in  ucir  take  z before  c,  when  c is  followed  by  a or  o.  (See  App.) 


88 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


Vou  love,  you  do  love,  you  are  lov-  V.  ama,  VV.  aman,  vosotros  an>ak 
ing. 

We  love,  we  do  love,  we  are  loving.  Nosotros  amamos. 

I'hey  love,  they  do  love,  they  are  Elios  aman 
loving. 

Obs.  B In  Spanish  the  Gerund  may  be,  as  in  English,  conjugated  with 
Ih*^  verb  sOy  I am  loving,  is  E stay  amando;  You  areivriting — V.cstA 

iscribiendo. 


To  like,  to  be  fond  of,  to  please  one  | Gustarle  d uno. 

Ohs.  C.  This  verb  is  always  in  the  third  person  singular  or  p.ura  it  agreef 
with  the  thing  liked,  which  is  its  subject,  and  never  agrees  with  the  person 
who  likes,  which  is  its  complement 


I like,  I am  fond  of. 

Thou  likest,  thou  art  fond  of. 

He  likes,  he  is  fond  of. 

We  love,  we  are  fond  of. 

Sing  You  love,  you  are  fond  of. 

Plur.  You  love,  you  are  fond  of. 

They  love,  they  are  fond  of. 

Do  you  like  this  man  ? 

I do  like  him. 

I do  not  like  him. 

Are  they  fond  of  those  children  ? 

Yes,  they  are  fond  of  them. 

No,  they  are  not  fond  of  them. 

Obs.  D.  Word  for  word  : Does  this  man  please  you?  Yes,  he  pleaseis 
me.  No,  he  does  not  please  me. — Do  those  children  ’ please  them?  Yea, 
Ehey  please  them.  No,  they  do  not  please  them. 


(A  mi)  me  gusta — me  gustan. 

(A  ti)  te  gusta — te  gustan. 

(A  dl)  le  gusta — le  gustan. 

(A  nosotros)  nos  gusta — nos  gustan. 
A V.  le  gusta. 

A vosotros  os  gusta 
A V.  le  gustan. 

I A VV.  les  gusta. 

' A VV.  les  gustan. 

(A  ellos)  les  gusta,  oi  les  gustan 
I Le  gusta  A V.  este  hombre 
Si,  6\  me  gusta. 

No,  no  me  gusta. 

I Les  gustan  estos  nihos  ? 

Si,  d ellos  les  gustan. 

No,  a ellos  no  les  gustan. 


What  are  you  fond  of? 

I am  fond  of  study. 

Do  you  like  him  ? 

I do  like  him. 

I do  not  like  him. 

Do  you  sell  your  horse  ? 

I do  sell  it 
Do  you  sell  it  ? 

Does  he  send  you  the  note  ? 
He  does  send  it  to  me. 


I Que  le  gusta  d V.  ? 

A ml  me  gusta  el  estudio. 
I Le  gustd  el  d V.  ? 

6l  me  gusta. 

El  no  me  gusta. 

I V ende  V.  su  caballo  ? 

Si,  yo  le  vendo. 

I Le  vende  V.  ? 

I Envia  dl  el  billete  d V”  ? 
El  me  le  envia.' 


See  for  the  place  of  p’oncuns  what  has  been  said  in  Lesson  XX., 


TWENTT-FOLTTITH  LESSON. 


89 


To  open. 

Do  you  open  the  note  ? 
I do  not  open  it. 

Docs  he  open  his  eyes? 
He  opens  them 
Whom  do  you  love  ? 

I love  my  father. 


To  arrangCj  to  set  in  order. 
What  are  you  arranging? 

1 am  arranging  my  books 
What  is  he  drinking? 

He  is  drinking  wine. 

Is  he  fond  of  wine  ? 

He  is  fond  of  it 


Ahrir  3 — past  participle  abierto 

I Abre  V.  el  billete  ? 

Yo  no  le  abro. 

I I Abre  el  los  ojos  ? 

El  los  abre. 

I A quien  ama  V.?  ) See  Obs.  C, 

Yo  amo  ^ mi  padre  ) Less  XVllJ 


Ordenar  1.  Arregla? 

I Que  esti  V.  arreglando  ? 
Estoy  ordenando  mis  libros 
I Que  estd  el  bebiendo  ? 
Estd  bebiendo  vino 
I Le  gusta  el  vino  ? 

A el  le  gusta 


What  is  the  American  fond  of? 
He  is  fond  of  coffee 
To  answer. 

Do  you  answer  the  note  ? 

Yes,  I answer  it. 

To  know.  I know. 

A stick  of  wood. 

Yet  Not  yet. 

It  is  not  yet  seven  o’clock. 

Also. 

More  than. 

He  buys  more  than  twenty. 

The  cook. 


I Que  le  gusta  al  Americano  ? 

Le  gusta  el  cafe. 

Responder  2,  (takes  a before  a noun./ 
I Responde  V.  al  billete  ? 

Si,  yo  le  respondo. 

Saber  * 2.  Yo  sd,  (the  other  persons 
are  regular.) 

Un  palo. 

Todavia.  No  (v)  todavia. 

No  son  todavia  las  sieto. 

Tambien. 


El  cocinero. 


S relating  to  quantity, 
not  to  comparison. 


Mas  de. 


EXERCISES. 

70. 

Do  you  lo  /e  your  brother  ? — do  love  him. — Does  your  brother  love 
7f.u  ? — He  does  not  love  me. — Dost  thou  love  me,  my  good  child  ? — ] 
do  love  thee. — Dost  thou  love  this  ugly  man  ? — I do  not  love  him. — 
Wliom  do  you  love  ? — I love  my  children. — Whom  do  we  love  ? — We 
love  our  friends. — Do  we  like  any  one  ? — We  like  no  one. — Does  any- 
body like  us  ? — The  Americans  like  us. — Do  you  want  any  thing  ? — 
I want  nothing. — Whom  is  your  father  in  want  of  ? — He  is  in  want  of 
his  servant. — What  do  you  want  ? — I want  the  exercise. — Do  you  want 
this  or  that  exercise  ? — I want  this  one. — What  do  you  wish  to  do  with 
>t  ? — I wish  to  have  it,  in  order  to  read  it.-  -Does  your  son  read  oiu 


90 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


exercises  ? — He  does  read  them. — ^Wlien  does  he  read  them  ?-  -Hf 
reads  them  when  he  sees  them. — Does  he  receive  as  many  exercises 
as  I ? — He  receives  more  of  them  than  you. — What  do  you  give  me  ? 
— I do  not  give  thee  any  thing. — Do  you  give  this  book  to  my  brother  ? 
— I do  give  it  him. — Do  you  give  him  a bird  ? — I do  give  him  one. — 
To  whom  do  you  lend  your  books  ? — I lend  them  to  my  friends  —Does 
your  friend  lend  me  a coat  ? — He  lends  you  one. — To  whom  do  you 
■e  id  your  clothes,  (vestidos  ?) — I do  not  lend  them  to  anybody. 

71. 

Do  we  arrange  any  thing  ? — We  do  not  arrange  any  thing. — What 
does  your  brother  set  in  order  ? — He  »ets  in  order  his  books. — Do  you 
sell  your  ship  ? — I do  not  sell  it. — Does  the  captain  sell  his  ? — He  does 
sell  it. — What  does  the  American  sell  ? — He  sells  his  oxen. — Does  the 
Englishman  finish  his  tea  ? — He  does  finish  it. — Which  notes  do  you 
finish  ? — I finish  those  which  I write  to  my  friends. — Dost  thou  see 
any  thing  ? — I see  nothing. — Do  you  see  my  large  garden  ? — I do  see 
it. — ^Does  you  father  see  our  ships  ? — He  does  not  see  them,  but  we 
see  them. — How  many  soldiers  do  you  see  ? — We  see  a good  many, 
we  see  more  than  thirty  of  them. — Do  you  drink  any  thing  ? — 1 drink 
some  wine. — What  does  the  sailor  drink  ? — He  drinks  wine  also. — 
What  do  the  Italians  drink  ? — They  drink  some  chocolate. — Do  we 
drink  wine  ? — We  do  drink  some. — What  art  thou  writing  ? — I am 
writing  a note. — To  whom  ? — To  my  neighbor. — Does  your  friend  write  ? 
— He  does  write. — To  whom  does  he  write  ? — He  writes  to  his  tailor. 

72. 

Do  you  write  your  exercises  (el  tema)  in  the  evening  ? — W e write 
ihem  in  the  morning. — What  dost  thou  say  ? — I say  nothing. — Does 
your  brother  say  any  thing  ? — He  says  something. — What  does  he 
say  ? — I do  not  know. — What  do  you  say  to  my  servant  ? — I tell  him 
to  sweep  (que  barra)  the  floor,  and  to  go  (que  vayd)  for  some  bread, 
cheese,  and  wine. — Do  we  say  any  thing  ? — We  say  nothing. — What 
does  your  friend  say  to  the  shoemaker  ? — He  tells  him  to  mend  (que 
remiende)  his  shoes. — What  do  you  tell  the  tailors  ? — I tell  them  to 
make  (que  hag  an)  my  clothes,  (vestidos.) — Dost  thou  go  out  ? — I do  not 
go  out. — Who  goes  out  ? — My  brother  goes  out. — Where  is  he  going  to  ? 
— He  is  going  to  the  garden. — To  whom  are  you  going  ? — We  are 
going  to  the  good  English. — What  art  thou  reading  ? — I am  reading  a 
note  from  (de)  my  friend. — What  Is  your  father  reading  ? — He  is  read- 
ing a book. — What  are  you  doing  ? — W 3 are  reading. — Are  your  chil- 
dren reading  ? — They  are  not  reading,  they  have  no  time  to  read. — Do 
you  read  the  books  which  I read  ? — I do  not  read  those  which  you  read, 
but  those  whitii  your  father  reads. — Do  you  know  this  man  ? — I do 
not  know  him. — Does  your  fiiend  know  him  l—He  does  know  him. 


TWENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


91 


73. 

Do  you  know  my  children  ? — We  do  know  them. — i)otl  ey  knotv  you  ? 
—They  do  not  know  up. — Whom  are  you  acquainted  with  ? — I am  ac- 
quainted with  nobody. — Is  any  one  acquainted  with  you? — Some  ono 
is  acquainted  with  me. — Who  is  acquainted  with  you  ? — The  good 
cantain  knows  me. — What  dost  thou  eat  ? — I eat  some  bread. — Does 
not  your  son  eat  some  cheese  ? — He  does  not  eat  any. — Do  you  cut 
any  thing  ? — We  cut  some  sticks. — What  do  the  merchants  cut  ? — 
They  cut  some  cloth. — Do  you  send  me  any  thing  ? — I send  you  a good 
gun. — Does  your  father  send  you  money  ? — He  does  send  me  some. — 
Does  he  send  you  more  than  I ? — He  sends  me  more  than  you. — How 
much  does  he  send  you  ? — He  sends  me  more  than  fifty  (cincuentd) 
dollars. — When  do  you  receive  your  money  ? — I receive  it  every 
morning. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  half-past  ten. — Is  your  son  coming? — 
He  is  con dng. — Do  you  come  to  me  ? — I do  not  come  (ir)  to  you,  but 
to  your  children. — Where  is  our  friend  going  to  ? — He  is  going  no 
•vhither ; he  remains  at  home. — Are  you  going  home  ? — We  are  not 
going  home,  but  to  our  friends’. — Where  are  your  friends  ? — They  are 
in  their  garden. — Are  the  Scotchmen  in  their  gardens  ? — They  are  there. 

74. 

What  do  you  like  ? — I like  study. — Are  you  fond  of  birds  ? — I anr 
fond  of  them. — How  many  horses  does  the  German  buy  ? — He  buys  a 
good  many ; (he  buys)  more  than  twenty. — What  does  your  servant 
carry  ? — He  carries  a large  trunk. — Where  is  he  carrying  it  to  ? — He  is 
carrying  it  home. — To  whom  do  you  speak  ? — I speak  to  the  Irishman. 
— Do  you  speak  to  him  every  day  ? — I speak  to  him  every  morning 
and  every  evening. — Does  he  come  to  your  house  ? — He  does  not  come 
to  my  house,  but  I see  him  at  the  theatre. — What  has  your  servant  to 
do  ? — He  has  to  sweep  the  floor,  and  set  my  books  in  order. — What 
does  your  boy  break  ? — He  breaks  noiAing,  but  your  boys  break  my 
glasses. — Do  they  tear  any  thing  ? — They  tear  nothing. — Who  burns 
my  hat  ? — Nobody  burns  it. — What  is  my  son  fond  of  ? — He  is  fond  of 
money. — What  does  your  cook  kill  ? — He  kills  a cliicken. 

75. 

To  what  house  do  you  take  my  boy  ? — I take  him  to  the  painter.— 
When  is  the  painter  at  home  ? — He  is  at  home  every  evening  at  four 
o’clock. — What  o’clock  is  it  now  ? — It  is  not  six  o’clock. — Do  you  go 
out  in  the  evening  ? — I go  out  in  the  morning. — Are  you  afraid  to  go 
out  in  the  evening  ? — I am  not  afraid,  but  I have  no  time  to  go  out  in 
the  evening. — Do  you  work  as  much  as  your  son  ? — I do  not  work  as 
much  as  he. — Does  he  eat  more  than  you  ? — He  eats  less  than  I. — Can 
/our  children  write  as  many  exercises  as  mine  ? — They  can  write  as 
many.— -When  do  our  neighbors  go  out  ? — They  go  out  every  morning 


92 


T’WiJiNTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


at  a quarter  to  six. — Do  you  like  Spanish? — Yes,  Sir,  I like  it. — D« 
you  speak  it  ? — No,  but  I am  going  to  learn  it. — Are  you  fond  of  study  'i 
— I study  every  day,  and  I like  it. — Do  you  like  your  dictionary  ? — 1 
do  not  like  it ; it  is  not  good. — Do  you  not  like  mine  ? — I like  yours. 

We  should  fill  volumes  were  we  tc  gi\e  all  the  exercises  that  are 
applicable  to  our  lessons,  and  which  the  pupils  may  very  easily  compose  by 
tliemselves.  We  shall,  therefore,  merely  repeat  what  we  have  already  said 
at  the  commencement: — Pupils  who  wish  to  improve  rapidly  ought  to  com- 
pose a great  many  sentences  in  addition  to  those  given ; but  they  must  pro- 
nounce tnem  aloud.  This  is  tho  only  way  in  which  they  will  acquhe  the 
habit  of  speaking  fluently 


TWENTY-FIFTH  LESSON.—Leccion  Vigesima  quinta. 


To  bring. 

I bring,  thou  bringest,  he  brings. 

To  find. 

To  or  at  the  play. 

The  butcher. 
The  sheep. 


Traer  * 2. 

Yo  traigOj  tfi  traes,  el  trae 
Hollar  1. 

A1  teatro. 

El  carnicero. 

El  carnero- 


Whati  (meaning  that  which,  the 
thing  which.) 

Do  you  find  what  you  look  for  ? 

Do  you  find  what  you  are  looking  for? 
I find  what  I look  for 
I find  what  I am  looking  for. 

He  does  not  find  what  he  is  looking 
for. 

We  find  what  we  look  for. 

They  find  what  they  look  for 
I mend  what  you  mend. 

[ buy  what  you  buy. 


Do  you  take  him  to  the  play  ? 
I do  take  him  thither. 


Lo  que,  (subject  or  object.) 

I Halla  V.  lo  que  busca  ? 

I Halla  V.  lo  que  estd  buscando? 
Yo  hallo  lo  que  busco. 

Yo  hallo  lo  que  estoy  buscando 
£l  no  halla  lo  que  estd,  buscando 

Hallamos  lo  que  estamos  buscando 
Elios  hallan  lo  que  estan  buscando 
Yo  remiendo  lo  que  V.  remienda 
Yo  compro  lo  que  V.  compra 


I I Le  lleva  V.  al  tcatio  ? 

I Yo  le  lie  VO  alia 

Estudiar  1. 

En  vez  de.  En  lugar  de. 

I En  vez  de  traer 

followed  by  tho  present  participle^  but 


To  study. 

Instead  of. 

Instead  of  bringing 

Ohs.  Instead  of  is  in  English 
in  Spanish  it  is  Allowed  bv  the  present  of  the  infinitive  mood. 


TWENTY-FIFTH  LESSON 


93 


To  play. 

Jugar  * 1 

I play,  thou  playest. 

Yo  juego,  tu  juegas.  ) The  otners 

He  plays,  they  play. 

]&1  juega,  ellos  juegan.  ) are  leguiar 

To  listen  to. 

Escuchar  1 

Instead  of  listening. 

En  vez  de  escuchar. 

Instead  of  playing. 

Ell  lugar  ('or  en  vez)  de  jugar. 

Do  you  play  instead  of  studying  / 

[JuegaV  en  lugar  de  estudiar? 

1 study  instead  of  playing. 

Yo  estudio  en  lugar  de  jugar. 

iTiat  man  speaks  instead  of  listen- 

Este  hombre  habla  en  vez  de  ts 

rng. 

cuchar 

To  have  a sore.  < 

Tener  mal  de  (n^ 

[ Tener  (n)  malo. 

Have  you  a sore  finger  Y 

t 1 Tiene  V.  el  dedo  malo  i 

1 have  a sore  finger. 

t Yo  tengo  un  dedo  malo. 

Has  your  brother  a sore  foot  s 

1 1 Tiene  su  hermano  de  V.  un  pii 
malo  ? 

He  has  a sore  eye. 

t El  tiene  mal  de  ojos. 

We  have  sore  eyes. 

t Nosotros  tenemos  los  ojos  maloe. 

The  elbow 

El  codo. 

The  arm. 

El  brazo. 

The  back. 

La  espalda — (pi.)  las  espaldas,  (fom.) 

The  knee. 

La  rodilla — (pi.)  las  rodillas,  (fern  ) 

It. 

Le,  (mas.)  La,  (fern.) 

Them. 

Los,  (mas.)  Las,  (fern.) 

!)c  you  read  instead  of  writing  ? 

1 Lee  V.  en  vez  de  escribir  ? 

Does  your  brother  read  instead  of 

1 Lee  su  hermano  de  V en  lugar  du 

speaking  ? 

hablar  ? 

The  bed. 

La  cama,  (fern.) 

Does  the  servant  make  the  bed  ? 

1 Hace  la  cama  el  criado  ? 

He  makes  the  fire  instead  of  making 

Hace  el  fuego  en  lugar  de  hacer  la 

the  bed. 

cama. 

To  learn. 

Aprender  2. 

I learn  to  read. 

Aprendo  d,  leer. 

He  learns  to  write. 

Aprende  d escribir 

EXERCISES.- 

76. 

Do  you  go  to  the  play  this  evening  ? — I do  not  go  to  the  play. — 
What  have  you  to  do  ? — I have  to  study. — At  what  o’clock  do  you  gti 
cut  ? — I do  not  go  out  in  the  evening. — Does  your  father  go  out 


94 


TWENTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


He  does  not  go  out. — What  does  he  do  ? — He  writes. — Does  he  wril€ 
a book  ? —He  does  write  one. — When  does  he  write  it  ? — He  writes  it 
In  the  m )rning  and  in  the  evening. — Is  he  at  home  now  ? — He  is  at 
nome. — Does  he  not  go  out  ? — He  cannot  go  out ; he  has  a sore  foot. 
— Does  the  shoemaker  bring  our  shoes  ? — He  does  not  bring  them.— 
Is  he  not  able  to  work  ? — He  is  not  able  to  work ; he  has  a sore  knee. 
—Has  anybody  a sore  elbow  ? — My  tailor  has  a sore  elbow. — Who 
has  a sore  arm  ? — I have  a sore  arm. — Do  you  cut  me  some  bread  ? — 
i cannot  cut  you  any ; I have  sore  fingers. — Do  you  read  your  book  ? 
—I  cannot  read  it ; I have  a sore  eye. — Who  has  sore  eyes  ? — The 
French  have  sore  eyes. — Do  they  read  too  much  ? — They  do  r ot  read 
enough. — What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day  ? — It  is  the  ihird,  (Lesson 
XIV.) — What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-morrow  ? — To-morrow  is  the 
fourth. — Are  you  looking  for  any  one  ? — I am  not  looking  for  any  one. 
— What  is  the  painter  looking  for  ? — He  is  not  looking  for  any  thing. 
— Whom  are  you  looking  for  ? — I am  looking  for  your  son. — Have 
vou  any  thing  to  tell  him  ? — I have  something  to  tell  him. 

77. 

Who  is  looking  for  me  ? — Your  father  is  looking  for  you. — Is  any- 
body looking  for  my  brother  ? — Nobody  is  looking  for  him. — Dost  thou 
find  what  thou  art  looking  for  ? — I do  find  what  I am  looking  for. — 
Does  the  captain  find  what  he  is  looking  for  ? — He  finds  what  he  is 
looking  for,  but  his  children  do  not  find  what  they  are  looking  for. — 
What  are  they  looking  for? — They  are  looking  for  their  books. — 
Where  dost  thou  take  me  to  ? — I take  you  to  the  theatre. — Do  you 
not  take  me  to  the  market  ? — I do  not  take  you  thither. — Do  the 
Spaniards  find  the  umbrellas  which  they  are  looking  for  ? — Th»>y  do 
not  find  them. — Does  the  tailor  find  his  thimble  ? — He  does  not  find  it. 
— Do  the  merchants  find  the  cloth  which  they  are  looking  for  ? — They 
do  find  it. — What  dc  the  butchers  find  ? — They  find  the  oxen  and 
sheep  which  they  are  looking  for. — What  does  your  cook  find  ? — He 
finds  the  chickens  which  he  is  looking  for. — What  is  the  physituan 
doing  ? — He  is  doing  what  you  are  doing. — ^What  is  he  doing  in  his 
room  ? — He  is  reading.— -What  is  he  reading  ? — He  is  reading  tlie 
book  of  your  father. — Whom  is  the  Englishman  looking  for  ? — He  is 
’ooking  for  his  friend,  in  order  to  take  him  into  the  garden. — What  is 
tie  German  doing  in  his  room  ? — He  is  learning  to  read. — Does  he 
aot  learn  to  write  ? — He  does  not  learn  it. — Does  your  son  learn  to 
write  ? — He  learns  to  write  and  to  read. 

78. 

Does  the  Dutenman  speak  instead  of  listening  ? — He  speaks  instead 
>if  listening, — Do  you  go  out  instead  of  remaining  at  home  ? — I remain 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


95 


at  home  instead  of  going  out. — Does  your  son  play  instead  uf  study- 
ing ? — He  studies  instead  of  playing. — When  does  he  study? — He 
studies  every  day. — In  the  morning  or  in  the  evening  ? — In  the  morn- 
ing and  in  the  evening. — Do  you  buy  an  umbrella  instead  of  buying 
a book  ? — I buy  neither  the  one  nor  the  other. — Does  our  neighboi 
break  his  sticks  instead  of  breaking  his  glasses  ? — He  breaks  neithei 
the  ones  nor  the  others. — What  does  he  break? — He  breaks  liis  guns. 
— Do  tlie  children  of  our  neighbor  read  ? — They  read  instead  of 
writing. — What  does  our  cook  ? — He  makes  a fire,  instead  of  going 
to  the  market. — Does  the  captain  give  you  any  thing  ? — He  does  give 
me  something. — What  does  he  give  you  ? — He  g'jyes  me  a great  deal 
of  money. — Does  he  give  you  money  instead  of  giving  you  bread  ? — 
He  gives  me  (both)  money  and  bread. — Does  he  give  you  more  cheeso 
than  bread  ? — He  gives  me  less  of  the  latter  than  of  tlie  former. 


Do  you  give  my  friend  fewer  knives  than  gloves. — I give  him  more 
of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — What  does  he  give  you  ? — He  gives 
me  many  books  instead  of  giving  me  money. — Does  your  servant  make 
vour  bed  ? — He  does  not  make  it,  (la.) — Wliat  is  he  doing  instead  of 
making  your  bed  ? — He  sweeps  the  room  instead  of  making  my  bed. — 
Does  he  drink  instead  of  working  ? — He  works  instead  of  drinking. — 
Do  the  physicians  go  out  ? — They  remain  at  home  instead  of  going 
out. — Does  your  servant  make  coffee  ? — He  makes  tea  instead  of 
making  coffee. — Does  any  one  lend  you  a gun  ? — Nobody  lends  me 
one. — What  does  your  friend  lend  me  ? — He  lends  you  many  books 
and  many  diotionaries. — Do  you  read  the  book  which  I read  ? — I do 
not  read  the  one  which  you  read,  but  the  one  which  the  great  captain 
reads. — Are  you  ashamed  to  read  the  books  which  I read  ? — I am 
not  ashamed,  but  I have  no  wish  to  read  them. 


79. 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Vigesnna  sexta. 


To  go  for. 

Something,  any  thing. 
Do  you  go  for  any  thing  ? 


Ir  por  * 3,  (or  ir  a buscar.') 
Alguna  cosa. 

iVa  V.  6 buscar  alguna  cosa — oj 


I go  fo*  nothing. 

Ho  goes  for  some . . . . 


algo  ? 

Yo  no  voy  d buscar  nada. 

6l  va  d buscar  . . (or  dl  va  por ) 


(See  Lesson  XI.) 


Ir  * 3 For  the  conjugation  of  this  verb,  see  Appendix. 


96 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


Do  you  learn  Freiich  ? 

I do  learn  it. 

I do  not  learn  it. 

French. 

English. 

German. 

Italian. 

Spanish. 

Polish. 

Russian. 

Latin. 

Greek. 

Arabian,  Arabic. 
Syrian,  Syriac. 

I learn  Spanish. 

•Vly  brother  learns  German. 


The  Pole. 

The  Roman. 

The  Greek. 

The  Arab,  the  Arabian. 
The  Syrian. 


• I Aprende  V.  el  francos  ? 

Si,  yo  le  aprendo. 

Yo  no  le  aprendo. 

I El  Frances. 

! El  ingles. 

El  aleman. 

El  italianct. 

El  espahol. 

El  polaco. 

El  ruso. 

El  latin. 

El  griego. 

El  drabe,  el  ardbigo. 

El  siriaco. 

Yo  aprendo  el  espahol. 

Mi  hermano  aprende  el  aleman. 


El  Polaco. 
El  Romano. 
El  Griego. 
El  Arabe. 
El  Siriaco. 


Are  you  an  Englishman  ? | ^ Es  V.  Ingles  V 

Ohs.  A.  Where  the  indefinite  article  is  used  in  English  to  denote  quail 
aes,  the  Spaniards  make  use  of  no  article. 


No,  Sir,  I am  a German. 
He  is  a Frenchman. 

Is  h*e  a tailor  t 

No,  he  is  a shoemaker. 

Is  ho  a fool  ? 


No,  sehor,  yo  soy  aleman. 

El  es  Frances. 

I Es  (el)  sastre  ? 

No,  (el)  es  zapatero. 

I Es  (el)  bobo,  (tonto,  or  necio  ?) 


The  fool. 

The  afternoon. 
The  morning. 
The  day. 


I El  bobo,  or  tonto,  or  necio 
I La  tarde.  (Fern.) 

I La  man  an  a.  (Fern.) 

I El  dia. 


Ohs.  Bi  The  indefinite  article  a in  English  is  sometimes  rendered  by  th« 
dfjfinite  article  el,  la,  in  Spanish,  particularly  in  speaking  of  the  parts  of  th^ 
body.  If  the  nouns  expressing  these  are  in  the  plural,  they  often  take  the 
article  los,  las.  Examples: — 


Are  you  ? — i Es  Vm.?  I am, — Yo  soy.  For  the  conjugation  of  this 
verb,  see  Appendix  ; and  for  the  difference  between  Estar  and  Ser,  see 
lesson  XVI TL,  and  also  the  Appendix 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON 


97 


He  has  tf  large  forehead. 
He  has  blue  eyes. 

You  have  a beautiful  foot 
I'hey  have  white  teeth. 


Tieno  la  frente  ancha. 

Tiene  ojos  (or  Us  ojos)  azu.es, 
V.  tiene  un  pie  hermoso. 

Elios  tieneii  los  dientes  blancos. 


Tlie  forehead. 
Blue. 

Black. 
White. 
Large.  Big. 


La  frente.  (Fern. 

Azul. 

Negro. 

Blanco. 

Grande,  or  largo.  Larga.  (Feni ) 


Great.  \ Grande. 


Ob»  C.  Grande  (great,)  loses  the  last  syllable  wnen  its  meaning  is 
greatness  in  quality  ; as,  the  Great  Captain,  el  Gran  Carpitan;  but  it  re- 
ains  it  when  it  is  applied  to  size  or  bulk  ; and  even  in  the  first  meaning 
vhen  coming  before  a vowel — as,  un  grande  odio,  a great,  or  implacable 
aatred  ; un  grande  cahaLlOy  a large  horse;  un  gran  caballoy  a famous 


Big,  large. 

Tall. 

A large  knife. 

A large  man. 

A great  man.  I 

A Spanish  book. 

An  English  book. 

Spanish  money. 

English  paper. 

Obs.  D.  All  adjectives  expressing 
their  substantives.  Example  : — 

Do  you  read  a German  book  ? 

I read  an  Italian  book. 


Grande,  largo. 

Grande,  (or  alto.) 

Un  cuchillo  grande.  Un  cuchillon 
Un  hombre  grande.  Un  hombroa 
Un  gran  hombre. 

Un  libro  espanol. 

Un  libro  ingles. 

Moneda  espanola* 

Papel  ingles. 

the  names  of  nations  are  placed  aflai 

I Lee  V.  un  libro  aleman  ? 

Yo  leo  un  libro  italiano 


To  listen  to  something. 

To  listen  to  some  one. 
What,  or  the  thing  which. 
It. 


t Escuchar  alguna  eosa,  or  algo. 
Escuchar  d uno,  or  d alguno. 
ho  que. 
ho. 


Obs.  E.  It,  not  standing  for  a substantive,  but  meaning  the  thing  which 
s translated  lo.  It  is  an  indefinite  pronoun  object,  and  has  no  plural  numbei 


Do  you  listen  to  that  man  ? 

V es,  I listen  to  him. 

Do  you  listen  to  wha*  he  tells  you  ? 
Yes,  I listen  to  it. 

Do  you  listen  tc  what  I tell  you  ? 
Do  you  listen  to  me  ? 


5 


I Escucha  V.  a ese  hombre  ? 
Si,  yo  le  escucho. 

I Escucha  V.  lo  que  le  dice  ? 
Si,  yo  lo  escucho. 

I Escucha  V.  lo  que  le  digo  ? 
I Me  escucha  V.  ? 


98 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON 


I do  listen  to  you. 

Do  you  listen  to  my  brother  ? 
I do  not  listen  to  him. 

Do  you  listen  to  the  men  ? 
i listen  to  them. 


SI,  yo  escucho  d V.,  (or  le  oscueho 
I Escucha  V.  d mi  hermano  ? 

Yo  no  le  escucho 
I Escuc  ha  V.  d los  hombres  ? 

Yo  los  escucho. 


To  correct. 


To  take  off. 

To  take  away 


Corregir  * 3. 
Quitar  del  medio. 


(See  the  verb  PedU 
in  the  Appendix '' 


( Quit  arse — quitar  1. 

I Llevarse — Llevar  1. 

Ohs.  F.  Quitar  and  Llevar  are  used  here  as  reflective  or  pronomina* 
zerbs.  (See  Lesson  XXIII.) 

The  exercise.  | El  tema.  El  ejercicio 


To  take. 


I Tomar  I. 


Do  you  take  your  hat  off  i 
I take  it  off. 

My — thy — his — your. 


t i Se  quita  V.  el  sornbrerc  / 
Me  le  quito. 

El — los — la — las. 


Ohs.  G.  When  the  adjective  possessive  pronouns  are  used  with  a verii 
arhich  in  Spanish  is  a reflective  verb,  they  must  be  changed  in  Spanish  into 
the  definite  article — viz.,  el,  (mas.)  la,  (fern.)  singular  ; los,  (mas.)  las,  (fem.) 
plural.  Examples : — 


I take  my  gloves  off. 

Do  you  take  your  shoes  off? 

1 take  them  off. 

Does  your  father  correct  your  exer- 
cises ? 

He  corrects  them. 


Yo  me  quito  los  guantes. 
t i Se  quita  V.  los  zapatos  ? 
t Yo  me  los  quito. 

I Corrije  los  temas  de  V.  su  padre  I 


!^1  los 


corrije. 


To  drink  coffee. 

To  drink  tea» 

Do  you  drink  tea  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I drink  some,  (a  little.) 

Do  you  drink  tea  every  day  1 

1 do  drink  some  every  day. 

My  father  drinks  coffee. 

He  drinks  coffee  every  morning. 

My  brother  drinks  chocolate. 

He  drinks  chocolate  every  morning. 


t Tomar  cafe. 

t Tomar  mi,  tu,  su,  &c.,  cafe,  or  e 
cafe. 

t Tomar  te. 

t Tomar  mi,  tu,  su,  &.C.,  tS,  or  el  t4 
1 1 Toma  V.  te  ? 

Si,  senor,  yo  tomo  un  pooo. 

1 1 Toma  V.  su  td  (or  el  td)  todos  la 
dias  ? 

t Yo  tomo  un  poco  todos  los^ias. 
t Mi  padre  toma  cafd. 
t Toma  su  cafd  todas  las  mananas 
t Mi  hermano  toma  chocolate, 
t Toma  chocolate  todas  las  manana? 


TWENTY  SiXTH  LESSON.  99 

Obs.  II.  When  some,  not  followed  jy  a substantive,  means  a liltle,  it  w 
translated  itn  poco.  (See  Lesson  XL) 

The  nose.  1 La  nariz,  (feminine  ; 

EXERCISES. 

HO. 

Do  you  go  for  any  thing? — I dt)  go  for  something. — What  do  ycu 
g!.  for  ? — I go  for  some  wine. — D )es  your  father  send  for  any  thing  ? 
-—He  sends  for  some  wine. — Doen  your  servant  go  for  some  bread  ? — 
He  goes  for  some.— -For  whom  d(  es  your  neighbor  send  ? — He  sends 
for  the  physician. — Does  your  ser  ;ant  take  off  his  coat  in  order  to  make 
the  fire  ? — He  takes  it  off  in  order  to  make  it. — Do  you  take  off  your 
gloves  in  order  to  give  me  money '' — I do  take  them  off  in  order  to  give 
you  some. — Do  you  learn  French  ^ — I do  learn  it. — Does  your  brother 
learn  German  ? — He  does  learn  it.-  -Who  learns  English  ? — The  French- 
man learns  it. — Do  we  learn  Itali  in? — You  do  learn  it. — What  do  the 
English  learn  ? — They  learn  Fr  mch  and  German. — Do  you  speak 
Spanish  ? — No,  Sir,  I speak  Italian  — Who  speaks  Polish  ? — My  brother 
speaks  Polish. — Do  our  neighbors  speak  Russian  ? — They  do  not  speak 
Russian,  but  Arabic. — Do  you  spoak  Arabic  ? — No,  I speak  Greek  and 
Latin. — What  knife  have  you  ? — have  an  English  knife. — What 
money  have  you  there  ? Is  it  Itahan  or  Spanish  money  ? — It  is  Rus- 
sian money. — Have  you  an  Italian  hat  ? — No,  I have  a Spanish  hat.— 
Are  you  a Frenchman  ? — No,  I am  an  Englishman. — Art  thou  a Greek  ? 
— No,  I am  a Spaniard. 

H. 

Are  these  men  Germans  ? — N*»,  they  are  Russians. — Do  the  Rus- 
sians speak  Polish  ? — They  do  not  speak  Polish,  but  Latin,  Greek,  and 
Arabic. — Is  your  brother  a merchint  ? — No,  he  is  a joiner. — Are  these 
men  merchants  ? — No,  they  are  carpenters. — Are  you  a cook  ? — No,  1 
am  a baker. — Are  we  tailors? — No,  we  are  shoemakers. — Art  thou  a 
fool  ? — I am  not  a fool. — What  h»  that  man  ? — He  is  a physician. — Du 
you  wish  me  any  thing  ? — I wisij  yua  a good  morning. — Has  the  Gei- 
man  black  eyes  ? — No,  he  has  blue  eyes. — Has  that  man  large  feet  ? — 
He  has  little  feet,  a large  forehead,  and  a large  nose. — Have  you  time 
to  read  my  book  ? — I have  no  tine  to  read  it,  but  much  courage  to 
(para)  study  Spanish. — What  dosr  thou  do  instead  of  playing  ? — I study 
instead  of  playing. — Dost  thou  le^rn  instead  of  writing  ? — I write  in- 
stead of  learning. — ^What  does  tl  e son  of  our  friend  do  ? — He  goes 
into  the  garden  instead  of  doing  his  exercise. — Do  the  children  of  oui 
neighbors  read  ? — They  write  instead  of  reading. — What  does  oui 
cook  ? — He  makes  a fire  instead  of  going  to  the  market. — Does  youi 
father  sell  his  ox  ? — He  sells  his  horse  instead  of  selling  his  ox. 


100  TWENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 

82. 

Does  the  son  of  the  painter  study  English  ? — He  studies  Greek  ir>' 
stead  of  studying  English. — Does  the  butcher  kil.  oxen  ? — He  kiila 
sheep  instead  of  lulling  oxen. — Do  you  listen  to  me  ? — I do  listen  to 
you. — Does  your  brother  listen  to  me  ? — He  speaks  instead  of  listening 
to  you. — Do  you  listen  to  what  I am  telling  you  ? — I do  listen  to  what 
you  are  telling  me. — Dost  thou  listen  to  what  thy  brother  tells  thee  ? — 
I do  listen  to  it. — Do  the  children  of  the  physician  listen  to  what  we 
tell  them  ? — They  do  not  listen  to  it. — Do  you  go  to  the  theatre  ? — 1 
am  going  to  the  warehouse  instead  of  going  to  the  theatre. — Are  you 
willing  to  read  my  book  ? — I am  willing  to  read  it,  but  I cannot ; I 
nave  sore  eyes. — Does  your  father  correct  my  exercises,  or  those  ol 
my  brother  ? — He  corrects  neither  yours  nor  your  brother’s. — Which 
exercises  does  he  correct  ? — He  corrects  mine. — Do  you  take  off  your 
hat  in  order  to  speak  to  my  father  ? — I do  take  it  off  in  order  to  speak 
to  him. — Do  you  take  off  your  shoes  ? — I do  not  take  them  off. — Who 
'akes  off  his  hat  ? — My  friend  takes  it  off. — Does  he  take  off  his  gloves  ? 
—He  does  not  take  them  off. — What  do  these  boys  take  off? — They  take 
off  their  shoes  and  their  hats. — Who  takes  away  the  glasses  ? — Your 
servant  takes  them  away. — Do  you  give  me  English  or  German  paper  ? 
— I give  you  neither  English  (repeat  papel)  nor  German  paper ; 1 
give  you  French  paper. — Do  you  read  Spanish  ? — I do  not  read  Spanish^ 
but  German. — What  book  is  your  brother  reading  ? — He  is  reading  a 
Spanish  book. — Do  you  drink  tea  or  coffee  in  the  morning  ? — I drink 
tea. — Do  you  drink  tea  every  morning  ? — I do  dri.  k some  every  morn- 
ing.— What  do  you  drink  ? — I drink  coffee. — What  does  your  brother 
drink  ? — He  drinks  chocolate. — Does  he  drink  some  (le)  every  day  ? — 
He  drinks  some  (le)  every  morning. — Do  your  children  drink  tea  ? — 
They  drink  coffee  instead  of  drintiing  tea. — What  do  we  drink  ? — We 
drink  tea  or  coffee. 


'TWENTY' SEVENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Vigesima  septima. 


/ To  wet,  to  moisten. 

To  shoio. 

I show  you  my  bock 
You  show  them  to  me. 


I Mojar  1 Humedecer  2.^ 

Mostrar  * 1.  Ensenar  1 * 

Hacer  ver. 

Yo  muestro  (enseno)  mi  lihro  d V. 
V.  me  los  mue&tra,  (me  los  ensena.) 


* See  verbs  in  car,  cer,  &c.,  in  the  App<jndix 
“ See  the  verb  Acordar,  in  the  Appendix. 


TWENTY  -SEVE  NTH  LESSON . 


lOl 


To  show  to  some  ono. 

Mostrar  d alguno  Ensenar  d ah 
guno. 

Some  one* * 

Alguno,  (indefinite  pronoun.) 

Do  you  show  me  your  gun  ? 

1 Me  muestra  (or  ensena)  V.  su  fusil  ? 

I do  show  it  to  you. 

Se  le  enseno  d V.  (Se  le  muestro  d V.] 

What  do  you  show  the  man  ? 

1 Que  ensena  (or  que  muestra)  V d 
h ombre  ? 

I show  him  my  fine  clothes.  | 

Yo  le  muestro  ^ mis  hermosos  voa- 
Yo  le  enseno  S tidos 

Tobacco. 

Tabaco. 

SnuiF.  1 

Tabaco  de  polvo.  Rapd 

To  smoke. 

Fumar  1. 

The  gardener 

El  jardinero. 

The  valet. 

El  criado. 

The  concert. 

El  concierto. 

To  intend. 

j Intentar  1.  Pensar  * 1.* 

Do  you  intend  to  go  to  the  ball  this 

1 Piensa  V.  ir  al  baile  esta  noche  1 

evening  ? 

(fern ) 

I intend  to  go  (there.) 

Yo  pienso  ir. 

To  know 

Saber  * 2.  (See  this  verb  in  App.) 

Do  you  know  ? 

iSabe  V.? 

I know  my  verb. 

Yo  se  mi  verbo. 

What  does  he  know  ? 

1 Que  sabe  61  ? 

To  swim. 

1 Nadar  1. 

Do  you  know  how  to  swim  ? 

1 1 1 Sabe  V.  nadar  ? 

Ohs.  A.  When  how  does  not  express  the  manner,  it  is  not  translated, 
md  saber,  to  know,  governs  the  infinitive  without  any  preposition. 


Do  you  know  how  to  write  ? 
Does  he  know  how  to  read  ? 
To  conduct. 


I Sabe  V.  escribir  » 
I Sabe  leer  ? 
Conducir  * 3* 


I conduct  him  there. 
Trader,  storekeeper 
Ring. 


Yo  le  conduzco  alii. 
Mercader,  tender© 
Anillo. 


See  Alentar,  in  the  Appendix. 

• See  this  veil),  and  the  verbs  ending  in  acer,  ccer,  ucir,  in  the  Ap- 
pendix. 


102 


TWENTY-SEVEJ^TH  LESSON. 


To  extinguish, 

T)o  you  extinguish  the  fire  ? 

I do  net  extinguish  it 
He  extinguishes  it. 

Thou  extinguishest  it 

To  light,  to  kindle. 

Often, 

As — as. 

Do  you  often  go  to  the  ball  ? 
^6'  often  as  you. 

As  often  as  I. 

As  often  as  he. 

As  often  as  they. 

Do  you  often  see  my  brother? 


Oftener 
Oftener  than. 

I see  him  oftener  than  you. 

NoP  so  often. 

Not  so  often  as, 

Ohs.  B.  No  is  separated  from  tan 
I speak  not  so  often  as  you. 

Not  so  often  as  you. 

Not  so  often  as  I. 

Not  so  often  as  they. 

IntOy  in. 

Into,  meaniiig  to. 

Vc  ^ into  the  garden 

To  go  ovt 


Apagar  1.  Extinguir  * 3.  (See  Ap- 
pendix for  verbs  in  guir  \ 
4 Apaga  V.  el  fuego  1 
Yo  no  le  apago. 

£l  le  apaga. 

Tii  le  apagas  ' 

I Encender  * 2. 

V 

4'  menudo.  Frecueniemente 
Tan — como. 

[Va  V.  frecuentemente  al  bade? 
Tan  frecuentemente  como  V 
Tan  ^ menudo  como  yo. 

Tan  d menudo  como  6\. 

Tan  d menudo  corno  ellos. 
t 4 Ve  V.  d menudo  d mi  hermano  7 
J \ V.  d mi  hermano  frecuente 
f mente  ? 

I Mas  d menudo. 

I Mas  d menudo  que. 
j Yo  le  veo  mas  d menudo  que  V 
I So  tan  d menudo. 

\ So  tan  d menudo  como. 
t menudo  by  the  verb 

Yo  no  hablo  tan  d menudo  como  V 
No  tan  d menudo  como  V. 

No  tan  d menudo  como  yo. 

No  tan  d menudo  como  ellos 

I En. 

I Ir  al  jardin. 

Salir  • 3,  or  saltr  fuera,  or  d fuera 
(See  the  verb  Salir^  in  the 
pendix.) 


TWENTY- SEVENTH  LESSON. 


103 


EXERCISES. 

83. 

What  does  your  father  want  ? — He  wants  some  tobacco. — Will  you 
for  some  ? — I will  go  for  some. — What  tobacco  does  he  want  ? — 
He  wants  some  snufF. — Do  you  want  tobacco,  (for  smoking  ?) — I do 
not  want  any ; I do  not  smoke. — Do  you  show  me  any  thing  ? — I show 
you  gold  rings. — Does  your  father  show  his  gun  to  my  brother  ? — He 
does  show  it  him. — Does  he  show  him  his  beautiful  birds  ? — He  does 
show  them  to  him. — Doss  the  Frenchman  smoke? — He  does  not 
smoke. — Do  you  go  to  the  ball  ? — I go  to  the  theatre  instead  of  going 
to  the  ball. — Does  the  gardener  go  into  the  garden  ? — He  goes  to  the 
market  instead  of  going  into  the  garden. — Do  you  send  your  valet  to 
the  tailor  ?-  I send  him  to  the  shoemaker  instead  of  sending  him  tc 
the  tailor. — Does  your  brother  intend  to  go  to  the  ball  this  evening  ? — 
He  does  not  intend  to  go  to  the  ball,  but  to  the  concert. — When  do  you 
intend  to  go  to  the  concert  ? — I intend  to  go  there  this  evening. — At 
what  o’clock  ? — At  a quarter  past  ten. — Do  you  go  for  my  son  ? — I do 
go  for  him. — Where  is  he  ? — He  is  in  the  counting-house. — Do  you 
find  the  man  whom  you  are  looking  for  ? — I do  find  him. — Do  your 
sons  find  the  friends  whom  they  are  looking  for  ? — They  do  not  find 
them. 


84. 

Do  your  friends  intend  to  go  to  the  theatre  ? — They  do  intend  to  go 
there. — When  do  they  intend  to  go  there  ? — They  intend  to  go  there 
to-morrow. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  half-past  seven. — What  does  the 
merchant  wish  to  sell  you  ? — He  wishes  to  sell  me  some  cloth. — Do 
you  intend  to  buy  some  ? — I will  not  buy  any. — ^Dost  thou  know  any 
thing  ? — I do  not  know  any  thing. — What  does  your  little  brother 
know  ? (use  the  diminutive.) — He  knows  how  to  read  and  to  write. — Does 
he  know  Spanish  ? — He  does  not  know  it. — Do  you  know  German  ? — 
[ do  know  it. — Do  your  brothers  know  Greek  ? — They  do  not  know  it, 
but  they  intend  to  study  it. — Do  you  know  English  ? — do  not  know 
it,  but  intend  to  learn  it. — Do  my  children  know  how  to  read  Italian  ? 
—They  know  how  to  read,  but  not  (jpero  no)  how  to  speak  it. — Do  you 
know  how  to  swim  ? — I do  not  know  how  to  swim,  but  how  to  play. — 
Does  your  son  know  how  to  make  coats  ? — He  does  not  know  how  to 
make  any,  (los;)  he  is  no  tailor. — Is  he  a merchant  ? — He  is  not,  (no  lo 
es.) — ^What  is  he  ? — He  is  a physician. — Do  you  intend  to  study  Ara- 
bic ? — I do  intend  to  study  Arabic  and  Syriac. — Does  the  Frenchman 
know  Russian  ? — He  does  not  know  it ; but  he  intends  learning  it. — 
Wliere  are  you  going  ? — I am  going  into  the  garden  in  order  to  speak 
!0  my  gardener  — Does  he  listen  to  you  ? — He  does  listen  to  me 


104 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


S5. 


Do  you  wish  to  drink  some  tea  ? — I wish  to  drink  some  wme ; hav€ 
you  any  ? — I have  none,  but  I will  send  for  it.— When  will  you  send 
for  it  ? — Now. — Do  you  know  how  to  make  tea  ? — I know  how  to 
make  it. — Where  is  your  father  going  to  ? — He  is  going  nowhere  ; he 
remains  at  home. — Do  you  know  how  to  write  a note  2 — I know  how 
to  write  one. — Can  you  write  exercises  ? — I can  write  some. — Dost 
thou  conduct  anybody  ? — I conduct  nobody. — Whom  do  you  conduc;  ? 
—I  conduct  my  son. — Where  are  you  conducting  him  to  ? — I conduct 
him  to  my  friends. — Does  your  servant  conduct  your  child? — He 
conducts  it. — Where  dc^s  he  conduct  it  ? — He  conducts  it  into  the 
garden. — Do  we  conduct  any  one  ? — We  conduct  our  children.— 
Where  are  our  friends  conducting  their  sons  ? — They  are  conducting 
them  home. 


Do  you  extinguish  the  fire  ? — I do  not  extinguish  it. — Does  your 
servant  light  the  fire  ? — He  does  light  it,  (la.) — Where  does  he  light  it  ? 
— He  lights  it  in  your  w^arehouse. — Do  you  often  go  to  the  Spaniard  ? 
— I go  often  to  him. — Do  you  go  oftener  to  him  than  I ? — I do  go 
often er  to  him  than  you. — Do  the  Spaniards  often  come  to  you  ? — 
They  do  come  often  to  me. — Do  your  children  oftener  go  to  the  ball 
than  we  ? — They  do  go  there  oftener  than  you. — Do  we  go  out  as 
often  as  our  neighbors  ? — We  do  go  out  oftener  than  they. — Does  youi 
servant  go  to  the  market  as  often  as  my  cook  ? — He  does  go  there  as 
often  as  he. — Do  you  see  my  father  as  often  as  I ? — I do  not  see  him 
as  often  as  you. — When  do  you  see  him  ? — I see  him  every  morning 
at  a quarter  to  five. 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.— Leccion  Vigesima  octava. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  an  interrogative  sentence,  in  Spanish,  de- 
pends rather  on  emphasis,  than  on  its  grammatical  construction.  Hence, 
an  inverted  interrogation  is  placed  at  the  beginning  of  such  sentences, 
us  a guide  to  the  reader  in  the  modulatio^i  of  his  voice.  The  pronoun 
iimject,  therefore,  may  or  may  not  be  expressed,  in  conformity  with 
the  degree  rf  emphasis  that  the  writer  may  lay  on  it. — The  English 
auxiliary  verbs  do,  does,  did — am,  is,  are,  serve  only  to  point  out  the  per- 
3on  and  tense,  oy  which  the  principal  verb  must  be  expressed  ; but  they  arf 
aot  translated.  \ 


86. 


Can  I ? Am  I able  ? 

Am  I doing* 


Do  I wish  ? 


I Quiero  ? i Quierc  yo  ? 

I Puedo  ? I Puedo  yo  ? 

I Hago  ? I Estoy  haciendo  ? 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.  105 


VVliat  am  I doing? 

What  do  I say? 

Where  am  I going  to? 

To  whom  do  I speak  ? 
Where  do  you  go  ? 

Where  does  he  go  ? 

It  will  be  seen 
Ua  the  first  would  lead  to  ambiguity. 


I Que  estoy  haciendo  ? i Que  hago  ^ 
I Que  digo  ? 

^ A donde  voy  ? 

I A quien  “l^ablo  ? 

I A donde  va  V.  ? 

I A donde  va  ? 


from  the  last  two  sentences,  that  the  omission  of  V 


When  do  is  used  in  English  with  a certain  emphasis  to  give  more  oowei 
to  the  sentence,  the  pronoun  subject  should  be  expressed  in  Spanish  Ex- 
amples : — 


Does  he  speak  to  you  ? 

Yes,  he  does  speak  to  me. 

Do  you  drink  cider? 

I do  drink  cider,  but  my  brother 
drinks  wine. 

Cider. 

Do  you  receive  a note  every  day  ? 
Yes,  I do  receive  one. 

To  begin. 

Do  I begin  to  speak  Spanish  ? 

You  begin  to  speak  it. 

When  do  you  begin  ? 

I begin  now. 


I Habla  el 
Si,  el  me  habla. 

I Bebe  V.  sidra? 

Yo  bebo  sidra,  pero  mi  ..lermano  bebt 
vino. 

Sidra,  (feminine.) 

I Recibe  V.  un  billete  todos  los  dias  ? 
Si,  yo  recibo  uno. 

Comenzar  * 1.  (See  Alentavy  in  tho 
Empezar  * 1.  Appendix.) 

Principiar  1. 

I Comienzo  d hablar  espanol? 

V.  comienza  d hablarle. 

I Cuando  empieza  V.  ? 

Erapiezo  ahora. 


Before. 

Do  you  speak  before  you  listen  ? 

I listen  before  I speak. 

Does  he  go  to  market  before  he 
breakfasts  ? 

To  breakfast. 

The  breakfast. 

Does  he  go  there  before  he  writes  ? 
He  goes  there  before  breakfast 
Do  you  take  off  your  pantaloons  be- 
fore you  take  oflT  your  shoes  ?_ 


Antes  de. 

1 1 Habla  V.  dntes  de  escuchar  ? 
t (Yo)  escucho  dntes  de  hablar 
t i Va  al  mercado  (d  la  plaza)  dntoe 
de  almorzar  ? 

Almorzar  * 1.  (See  Acordar^  in  the 
Appendix.) 

DesayunarsCi  (reflective  verb.) 

El  desayuno.  El  almuerzo. 

Va  alia  dntes  de  escribir? 

Va  alld  dntes  del  almuerzo. 

I Se  quita  V.  los  pantalones  dnter 
quitarse  los  zapatoa? 


m j S Marcharsc  1,  (reflective  vorb.^ 

To  depart,  to  set  out.  j , 3 3 


106 


TWENTY -EIGtTH  LESSON. 


When  do  ycu  intend  to  depart  ? 
I intend  to  depart  to-morrow. 

Well. 

Badly 


I ;Cuando  piensa  V.  salir,  (oi  mar 
I charse  ?) 

I Fienso  salir  manana 

I BieUi  (adverb.) 

1 Maly  ^^adverb.) 


Ols.  When  an  adverb  modifies  a verb,  it  is  generally  placed  aftoi 
the  verb;  when  it  modifies  an  adjective  or  another  adverb,  it  is  generally 
placed  before. 


Does  he  speak  well  ? i l Habla  bien  ? 

He  speaks  baaly.  | Habla  mal 

Do  you  speak  Spanish  well  ? I k Habla  V.  bien  el  espanol  ? 

I speak  Spanish  well.  | Yo  hablo  bien  le  espanol. 

I Demasiado,  (adverb.) 

I Lo  inismoj  (adverb.) 

^ Justamente  lo  mismo,  (adv.  expresoij 
\ Cahalmente  lo  mismo. 

EXERCISES. 

87. 

Do  I read  well  ? — You  do  read  well. — Do  I,  speak  well  ? — You  do  not 
speak  well. — Does  my  brother  speait  Spanish  well  ? — He  does  speak  it 
well. — Does  he  speak  German  well  ? — He  speaks  it  badly. — Do  we 
speak  well  ? — You  speak  badly. — D)  I drink  too  much  ? — You  do  not 
drink  enough.— Am  I able  to  make  hats  ? — You  are  not  able  to  make 
any ; you  are  not  a hatter. — Am  I able  to  write  a note  ? — You  are  able 
to  write  one. — Am  I doing  my  exer  use  well  ? — You  are  doing  it  well. 
— What  am  I doing  ? — You  are  doing  exercises. — What  is  my  brother 
doing  ? — He  is  doing  nothing. — W1  at  do  I say  ? — You  say  nothing. — 
Do  I begin  to  speak  ? — You  do  begin  to  speak. — Do  I begin  to  speak 
well  ? — Y"ou  do  not  begin  to  speak  \vell,  but  to  read  well. — Where  ara 
[ going  to? — You  are  going  to  your  friend. — Is  he  at  home? — Dc  I 
know,  (lo  ?) — Am  I able  to  speak  an  often  as  the  son  of  our  neighbor  ? 
—He  is  able  to  speak  oftener  than  you. — Can  I work  as  much  as  he  ? 
— You  cannot  work  as  much  as  he.- —Do  I read  as  often  as  you  ? — You 
do  not  read  as  often  as  I,  but  you  speak  oftener  than  I. — Do  I speak  as 
well  as  you  ? — You  do  not  speak  as  well  as  I. — Do  I go  to  you,  or  dc 
you  come  to  me  ? — You  come  to  m and  I go  to  you. — When  do  yon 
cfmie  tr  me  ? — Every  morning  at  h^  lf-past  six. 


Too  much. 

The  same. 
Just  as  much. 
Just  the  same. 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


107 


88 

Do  you  know  the  Russian  wliom  I know  ? — I do  not  know  the  on« 
fou  know,  but  I know  another. — Do  you  drink  as  much  coffee  as  wine  1 
— J drink  less  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Does  the  Pole  drink  as 
much  as  the  Russian  ? — He  drinks  just  as  much. — Do  the  Germans 
drink  as  much  as  the  Poles? — The  latter  drink  more  than  the  former. 
— Dost  thou  receive  any  thing  ? — I do  receive  something. — What  dost 
tliou  receive  ? — I receive  some  money. — Does  your  friend  receive  books  ? 
^Ile  does  receive  some. — What  do  we  receive  ? — We  receive  some 
riiie. — Do  the  Poles  receive  tobacco? — They  do  receive  »cme. — 
From  whom  do  the  Spaniards  receive  money  ? — They  receive  some 
from  the  English,  and  from  the  French. — Do  you  receive  as  many 
friends  as  enemies  ? — 1 receive  fewer  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. 
— From  whom  do  your  children  receive  books  ? — They  receive  some 
from  me  and  from  their  friends. — Do  I receive  as  much  cheese  as 
bread  ? — You  receive  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Do  our 
servants  receive  as  many  brooms  as  coats  ? — They  receive  fewer  of 
the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Do  you  receive  one  more  gun  ? — I do 
"eceive  one  more. — How  many  more  books  does  our  neighbor  receive? 
— He  receives  three  more. 

89. 

When  does  the  foreigner  intend  to  depart  ? — He  intends  to  depart 
to-day. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  half-past  one. — Do  you  intend  to  dO' 
part  this  evening  ? — I intend  to  depart  to-morrow. — Does  the  French- 
man depart  to-day  ? — He  departs  now. — Where  is  he  going  to  ? — He  is 
going  to  his  friends. — Is  he  going  to  the  English? — He  is  going  to 
them. — Dost  thou  set  out  to-morrow  ? — I set  out  this  evening. — When 
do  you  intend  to  write  to  your  friends  ? — I intend  to  write  to  them  to- 
day.— Do  your  friends  answer  you  ? — They  do  answer  me. — Does  your 
father  answer  your  note  ? — He  answers  it. — Do  you  answer  my  bro- 
thers’ notes  ? — I do  answer  them. — Does  your  brother  begin  to  learn 
Italian  ? — He  begins  to  learn  it. — Can  you  speak  Spanish  ? — I can 
speak  it  a little. — Do  our  friends  begin  to  speak  German  ? — They  do 
oegin  to  speak  it. — Are  they  able  to  write  it  ? — They  are  able  to  write 
it. — Does  tiie  merchant  begin  to  sell  ? — He  does  begin. — ^Do  you  speak 
before  you  listen  ? — I listen  before  I speak. — Does  your  brother  listen 
to  you  before  he  speaks  ? — He  speaks  before  he  listens  to  me. — Do 
your  children  read  before  they  write  ? — They  write  before  they  read. 

90. 

Does  your  servant  sweep  the  warehouse  before  he  goes  to  the  mar- 
ket ? — He  goes  to  the  market  before  he  sweeps  the  warehouse. — Dosi 
thou  drink  before  thou  goest  out  ? — 1 go  out  before  I drink. — Do  you 


108 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON, 


intend  to  go  out  before  you  breakfast? — I intend  to  breakfast  before  I 
go  out. — Does  your  son  take  otf  his  shoes  before  he  takes  off  his  coal  1 
— He  neither  takes  off  his  shoes  nor  his  coat. — Do  I take  off 
gloves  before  I take  off  my  hat  ? — You  take  off  your  hat  before  you 
take  off  your  gloves. — Can  I take  off  my  shoes  before  1 take  off  m^ 
gloves? — You  caoiot  take  off  your  shoes  before  you  take  off  youi 
gloves. — At  what  o’clock  do  you  breakfast  ? — I breakfast  al  half- past 
eigb^. — At  what  o’clock  does  the  American  breakfast  ? — He  breakfasts 
every  day  at  nine  o’clock. — At  what  o’clock  do  your  children  breakfast  ? 
— They  breakfast  at  seven  o’clock. — Do  you  go  to  my  father  belorv 
you  breakfast  ? — I do  go  to  him  before  I breakfast. 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON.— Vigcs.ma  nona. 

A FULL  Table  of  the  Comparison  of  Nouns,  Verbs,  Adjectives,  and 
Adverbs. 

COMPARISON  OF  NOUNS. 

EQUALITY. 


As  much — as 
As  many — as. 

^ Tanto — como. 

( Tanta — como. 
^ Tantos — como. 
( Tantas — como. 

No  less — than. 
No  fewer — than. 

1 No— m^nos — quo. 

inferiority 

Less — than. 
Fewer — than. 

Not  so  much — as. 

1 Mdnos — que. 

^ No — tanto — como. 

( No — tanta — como 

Not  so  many — as. 

{ No — tantos — como. 
( No — tantas — come 

superiority 

More — than. 

1 Mas — que. 

Ohs.  A.  More  than — less  than. 

in  Spanish,  when  followed  by  a nuniera 

adjective,  change  que  into  de.  Example : — 

More  than  one,  two. 

1 Mas  de  uno,  de  dos. 

Less  than  three,  four. 

1 Mdnos  de  tres,  de  cuatio. 

1 have  as  much  money  as  you. 

1 Tengo  tanto  dinero  como  V 

You  have  as  many  friends  as  I. 

1 V.  tiene  tantos  amigos  como  yo 

He  has  no  less  bread  than  ham. 

1 No  tiene  menos  pan  que  jamon. 

We  have  less  money  than  he. 

1 Tenemos  menos  dinero  que 

TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


lOfi 


They  have  not  so  many  books 
you. 

[ have  more  tea  than  coffee. 

You  have  more  than  ten  dolIarsL 
fie  has  less  than  four  cents. 

More  than  five  years. 

LfSJ  than  twenty  years. 


I No  tienen  tantos  libros  como  VV 

Tengo  mas  que  cafd. 

V.  tiene  mas  de  diez  pesos. 

Tiene  menos  de  cuatro  cuartoip 
Mas  de  cinco  anos. 

I Menos  de  veinte  ahos. 


COMPARISON  OF  VERBS. 


As  much — as. 

Not — less  than. 

Less  than. 

Not — as  much  as. 

More  than. 


Most. 

Least. 


EQUALITY. 

I Tanto  como.  Lanto  cuanio 
I No — menos  que. 

INFERIORITY. 

I Menos  que. 

I No — tanto  como 

SUPERIORITY. 

1 Mas  que. 

SUPERLATIVE 

I Mas. 

I Menos. 


Much.  Very  much. 

You  speak  as  much  as  I. 

He  does  not  speak  less  than  you. 
They  drink  less  than  we. 

He  does  not  speak  as  much  as  they. 
1 read  more  than  you. 

This  is  the  book  that  I most  like. 

He  is  tlie  man  that  I least  esteem. 
He  studies  very  much. 


Mucho.  Muchisimo 
V.  habla  tanto  como  yo. 

6l  no  habla  menos  que  V 
Beben  menos  que  nosotros 
No  habla  tanto  como  ellos. 

Yo  leo  mas  que  V. 

Este  es  el  libro  que  mas  me  gusta 
^il  es  el  hombre  que  mdnos  cslimc 
^il  estudia  muchisimo. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  AND  ADVtJiBS 

As — as. 

Not  less — than 

INFERIORITY 

Mdnos — que. 

N o — tan — como. 

SUPERIORITY. 

tlore  (or  the  termination  er)  -than.  ] Mas — que. 


Less — than. 
Not  so — as 


EQUALITY 

I Tan — como. 

1 No — menos — que 


110 


rWENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


SUPERLATIVE  ABSOLUTE 


Veiy. 

Extremely 

Infinitely 

Very^  > with  a past 

Very  muclh  y participle. 


Muy. 

Bien. 

Extremameute. 

Infinitamente. 

Muyf  Sumamentc. 


Obs.  B.  The  Superlative  Absolute  is  also  formed  by  adding  the  fodowing 
terminations  to  the  positive,  viz.  isimo,  isima,  for  adjectives  ; isimamente  foi 
adverbs.  In  forming  the  Superlative  Absolute,  adjectives  ending  in  </, 
and  0,  lose  these  letters  ; and  those  ending  in  ble  co,  and  go,  change  these 
syllables  into  bil,  qu,  and  gu.  Examples : — Hermosa,  htjrmosisima ; alto, 
altisimo  ; prudente,  prudentisimo  ; amable,  amabilisimo  ; rico,  riquisimo  i 
largo,  larguisimo.  Examples  of  adverbs: — hermosisimamente,  altisimamente, 
prudentisimamente,  amabilisimamente,  &c. 


SUPERLATIVE  RELATIVE. 


"T*he  mos\.,  (or  the  termination  est.) 

The  least. 

The  most. 

The  least. 


El  mas — la  mas.  'J 

Los  mas — las  mas.  ! For 

El  menos — la  menos.  f adjectives 

Los  menos — las  menos-  J 

Lo  mas.  ) 
r X > For  adverbs. 

Lo  menos.  i 


You  are  as  good  as  he. 

You  are  not  less  rich  than  I. 

We  are  less  prudent  than  they. 

He  is  not  so  good  as  you. 

You  are  richer  than  we 
You  speak  as  correctly  as  I. 

You  speak  not  less  correctly  than  I 

He  is  very  J 

He  is  extremely  > prudent. 

He  is  infinitely  ) 

You  read  very  elegantly. 

I have  the  handsomest, 
fie  is  the  least  prudent. 

The  most  foolishly. 

The  least  prudently 
The  more — the  more. 

The  less — the  less. 

The  more — the  less. 

The  lesvs — the  more. 


V.  es  tan  bueno  como  ^1. 
i V.  710  es  menos  rico  que  yo. 

Somos  menos  prudentes  que  ellos. 

El  no  es  tan  bueno  como  V. 

V.  es  mas  rico  que  nosotros. 

I V.  habla  tan  correctamente  como  yo. 
: V.  no  habla  menos  correctamente 
que  yo. 

UC  muy 
El  es<  extremameute 
( infinitamente 
1 es  prudentisimo 
V.  lee  muy  elegantemente — eUga nV. 
simamente. 

Yo  tengo  el  mas  herrnoso. 

6s  el  menos  prudente. 

Lo  mas  imprudentemeiite. 

Lo  menos  prudentemente. 

Cuanto  mas — tanto  mas. 

Cuanto  m6nos — tanto  m€nos 
Cuanto  mas — tanto  m^nos 
Cuanto  uf'^nos — tanto  mas 


> prudente. 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


Ill 


Die  more  he  studies,  the  more  he 
learns 

The  less  he  drinks,  the  less  thirsty 
he  is. 

The  more  he  plays,  the  less  he 
learns. 

I he  less  lie  plays,  the  more  he 
studies 

So  inuch  the  more — than. 

So  much  the  less — than. 


Cuanto  mas  estudia,  tanto  mao 
aprende. 

Cuanto  menos  bebe,  tanto  meiK#s  sed 
tiene. 

Cuanto  mas  juega,  tanto  mdaos 
aprende. 

Cuanto  menos  juega,  tanto  mas  es- 
tudia. 

Tanto  mas — que. 

Tanto  menos — que. 


IRREGULAR  COMPARATIVES  AND  SUPERLATIVES. 


High — ^higher — highest. 

Low — lower — lowest. 

Good — better — very  good — best. 
Great — greater — greatest. 

Bad — worse — worst. 

Li  ttle — 1 ess — 1 e ast. 

Small — smaller — smallest. 
Strong — very  strong. 

New — very  new. 

Wise — very  wise. 

Sacred — very  sacred. 

Faithful — very  faithful. 

Honest — very  honest. 

Healthy — very  healthy. 


Alto — superlcr — supremo. 

Bajo — inferior — mfimo. 

Bueno — mejor — bonisimo — 6ptimo 
Grande — mayor — miximo. 

Malo — peor — pdsimo. 

Pequeno — menor — mmimo. 

F uerte — fortisimo. 

N ue  VO — no  visimo. 

Sabio — sapientisimo. 

Sagrado — sacratisimo. 

Fiel — fidelisimo. 

Integra — integOrrimo. 

Salubre — salub^rrimo. 


ADVERBS. 


Well — better — the  best 
Bad— worse — the  worst. 
Little — less — the  least. 
Much — more — the  most. 


Bien — mejor — lo  mejoi. 
Mai — peor — lo  peor. 

Poco — menos — lo  m^nos. 
Mucho — mas — lo  mas. 


Phis  book  is  small,  that  is  smaller, 
and  that  is  the  smallest  of  all 

AIL 

Hiis  hat  is  large,  but  that  is  larger. 

Is  your  hat  as  large  as  mine  ? 

Is  it  larger  than  yours  ? 
ft  is  not  80  large  as  yours. 


£ste  libro  es  pequeno,  ese  es  maj 
pequeno,  y aquel  es  el  mas  pe- 
queho  de  todos. 

Todo.  Todos,  (adj.) 

Este  sombrero  es  grande,  pero  aquel 
es  mas  grande. 

I Es'  su  sombrero  de  V.  tan  grande 
como  el  mio  ? 

I Es  mas  grande  que  el  de  V ? 

No  es  tan  grande  como  el  de  V 


112 


TWENTY -NINTH  LESSON. 


A.ie  our  neighbor’s  children  as  good 
as  ours  ? 

Tliey  are  better  than  ours. 

They  are  not  so  good  as  ours 


I I Son  los  nihos  de  nuestro  vecino  tai 
I buenos  como  los  nuestros  ? 

I Son  mejores  que  los  nuestros. 

I No  son  tan  buenos  como  los  nuestros 


A very  fine  book 

t 

Very  fine  books 

A very  pretty  knife. 
Very  well. 


Un  libio  muy  hermoso,  or  hermosiei 
mo. 

Libros  muy  hermosos,  or  hermosisi 
mos. 

Un  cuchilk  muy  bonito 
Muy  bien. 


Xliat  man  is  extremely  learned. 
This  bird  is  very  handsome. 


Aquel  hombre  es  extromamente  sabio 
or  sapientisimo. 

Este  pajaro  es  muy  hermoso,  or  hei 
mosisimo. 


Whose  ? {of  whom  ?) 


Whose  hat  is  this  ? 

Ohs.  C.  Cuyo  agrees  in  gender 
after  it. 

To  be,  (meaning  belonging  to ) 
It  is. 

It  is  my  brother’s  hat 
It  is  the  hat  of  my  brother. 

It  is  my  brother’s. 

Who  has  the  finest  hat  ? 

Whose  hat  is  the  finest  ? 

That  of  my  father  is  the  finest. 
Whose  gun  is  the  handsomer,  yours 
or  mine  ? 


j I De  quien  ? {Cuyo,  cuya — cuyos 
I cuyas.) 

r I De  quien  es  este  sombrero  ? 

J I Cuyo  sombrero  es  este  ? 

( I Cuyo  es  este  sombrero  ? 
and  number  with  the  noun  that  come? 

I Ser  de. 

I Es — de.  (See  Ser,  in  the  Appendix.'^ 

Es  el  sombrero  de  mi  hernmno. 

t Es  de  mi  hermano 
^ Quien  tiene  el  mas  hermoso  son  • 
brero  1 * 

I Cuyo  sombrero  es  el  mas  hermoso 
El  do  mi  padre  es  el  mas  hermoso. 

I Que  fusil  es  el  mas  hermoso,  el  de 
V.  6 cl  mio  ? 


Do  you  read  as  often  as  I ? 

I read  els  often  as  you. 

Does  he  read  as  often  as  I ? 

lie  reads  and  writes  as  often  as  you. 

Do  our  children  write  as  much  as 
we  ? 

They  write  more  than  you. 
iVe  read  more  than  the  children  of 
oui  friends. 


I Lee  V.  tan  d,  menudo  como  yo  ? 
Leo  tan  d,  menudo  como  V. 

I Lee  6\  tan  d,  menudo  como  yo  ? 

]&1  lee  y escribe  tan  d,  menudo  come 

V. 

I Escriben  nuestros  ninos  tnnto  come 
nosotros  ? 

Escriben  mas  que  VV 
Leemos  mas  que  los  ninos  de  nues* 
tros  amigos. 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


113 


To  whom  do  you  write  ? 
I write  to  our  friends. 
We  read  good  books 


I A quien  escribe  V.  ? 
Escribe  d nuestros  amigos. 
Leemos  buenos  libros. 


EXERCISES. 

91. 


Whose  book  is  this  ? — It  is  mine. — Whose  hat  is  that  ? — It  .s  m\ 
Other’s. — Are  you  taller  {mas  alto)  than  I ? — I am  talfer  than  you. — 
fa  your  brother  as  tall  as  you  ? — He  is  as  tall  as  I. — Is  thy  hat  as  bad 
is  that  of  my  father  ? — It  is  better,  but  not  so  black  as  his. — Are  the 
clothes  (vestidos)  of  the  Italians  as  fine  as  those  of  the  Irish  ? — They 
are  finer,  but  not  so  good. — Who  have  the  finest  gloves  ? — The  French 
have  them. — Who  has  the  finest  horses  ? — Mine  are  fine,  yours  are 
finer  than  mine ; but  those  of  our  friends  are  the  finest  of  all. — Is  your 
horse  good  ? — It  is  good,  but  yours  is  better,  and  that  of  the  English- 
man is  the  be^t  of  all  the  horses  which  we  know. — Have  you  pretty 
shoes  ? — I have  very  pretty  ones,  (Zo5,)  but  my  brother  has  prettier  ones 
(los)  than  I. — From  whom  {de  quien)  does  he  receive  them  ? — He 
receives  them  from  {de)  his  best  friend. 


Is  your  wine  as  good  as  mine  ? — It  is  better. — Does  your  merchant 
sell  good  knives  ? — He  sells  the  best  knives  that  I know,  {conocer.) — 
Do  we  read  more  books  than  the  French  ? — We  read  more  of  them 
than  they ; but  the  English  read  more  of  them  than  we,  and  the  Ger- 
mans read  the  most. — Hast  thou  a finer  garden  than  that  of  our 
physician  ? — I have  one  finer  than  his. — Has  the  American  a finer 
stick  than  thine  ? — He  has  a finer  one. — Have  we  as  fine  children  as 
our  neighbors  ? — We  have  finer  ones. — Is  your  coat  as  pretty  as  mine  ? 
— It  is  not  so  pretty,  but  better  than  yours. — Do  you  depart  to-day  ? — 
I do  not  depart  to-day. — When  does  your  father  set  out  ? — He  ‘‘ets  out 
this  evening  at  a quarter  to  nine. — Which  of  these  two  children  is  the 
better,  {sabio  ?) — The  one  who  studies  is  better  than  the  one  who  plays. 
— Does  your  servant  sweep  as  well  as  mine  ? — He  sweeps  better  than 
yours. — Does  the  Englishman  read  as  many  bad  books  as  good  ones  ? 
—He  reads  more  of  the  good  than  of  the  bad  ones. 


Do  the  merchants  sell  more  sugar  than  coffee  ? — They  sell  more  of 
the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Does  your  shoemaker  make  as  many 
shoes  as  mine  ? — He  makes  more  of  them  than  yours. — Can  you  swim 
as  well  {tan  bien)  as  my  son  ? — I can  swim  better  than  he,  but  he  can 
?peak  Spanish  better  than  I. — Does  he  read  as  well  as  you  ? — Hq 
reads  better  than  I. — Does  the  son  of  your  neighbor  go  to  market  ? — 


92. 


93. 


114 


THIRTIETH  LESS  0 IT. 


N^o,  he  remains  at  home ; he  has  sore  feet. — Do  you  learn  as  well  a& 
viur  gardener’s  son  ? — I learn  better  than  he,  but  he  works  better  tlian 
I. — Whose  gun  is  the  finest  ? — Yours  is  very  fine,  but  that  of  the 
captain  is  still  finer,  and  ours  is  the  finest  of  all. — Has  any  one  finer 
children  than  you  ? — No  one  (tkemy  has  finer  ones. — Does  your  son 
»’ead  as  often  as  I ? — He  reads  oftener  than  you. — Does  my  brothcn 
speak  French  as  often  as  you  ? — He  speaks  and  reads  it  as  often  as  1. 
— Do  I write  as  much  as  you  ? — You  write  more  than  I. — Do  our 
neighbor’s  children  read  German  as  often  as  we  ? — ^We  do  not  read  it 
as  often  as  they. — ^Do  we  write  it  as  often  as  they? — They  write 
oftener  than  we. — To  whom  do  they  write  ? — They  write  to  their 
friends. — Do  you  read  English  books  ? — We  read  French  books  instead 
r>r  reading  English  books. 

THIRTIETH  LESSON. — Leccion  Trigesima, 

To  believe. 

To  put. 

To  put  on. 

Do  you  put  on  ? 

I put  on 

I put  on  my  hat. 

He  puts  on  his  gloves 

Do  you  put  on  your  shoes  ? 

We  do  put  them  on. 

What  do  your  brothers  put  on  ? 

They  put  on  their  clothes. 

Where  do  you  conduct  me  to  ? 

I conduct  you  to  my  father. 


Creer  2.  (See  verbs  in  eer,  in  the 
Appendix.) 

Poner  * 2.  (See  this  verb  in  the 
Appendix.) 

^Uterse  (Reflective  verb.) 
t i Se  pone  V.  ? 
t Me  pongo. 
t Me  pongo  el  sombrero 
t Se  pone  los  guantes. 
t i Se  pone  V.  los  zapatos  ? 
t Nos  los  ponemos. 

1 1 Que  se  ponen  sus  hermanos  de  V.  1 
t Se  ponen  los  vestidos. 

I A donde  me  conduce  V.  ? 

V Yo  conduzco  d V.  d casa  de  mi  pad  re. 

( Yo  le  conduzco  d casa  de  mi  padie. 


Do  you  go  out  ? 

I do  go  out. 

Do  we  go  out  ? 

fVIien  does  vour  father  go  out  ? 


I Sale  V.  ? 

Yo  salgo. 

I Salimos  ? 

I Cuaiido  sale  su  padre  de  V.  ? 


Early. 

As  early  as  you. 

He  goes  out  as  early  as  you 
Late. 

Too. 


Temprano. 

Tan  temprano  como  V. 

El  sale  tan  temprano  como  V 
Tarde. 

Demasiado. 


Them,  to  be  translated  los  tiene. 


THIRTIETH  LESSON. 


115 


Too  late. 

Too  soon,  too  early. 

Too  large,  too  great,  (in  size.) 
Too  little,  too  small. 


Demasiado  tarde. 

Demasiado  tem.prano. 

Demasiado  largo,  or  grande 
Demasiado  peqiieno,  or  deinasiadc 
chico. 


Too  much  ! Demasiado,  demasiadamente. 


Do  you  speak  too  much  ? 

I do  not  speak  enough. 

Later  than  you. 

I go  out  later  than  you. 


Sooner  earlier 

Does  your  father  go  there  earlier 
than  1 1 

He  goes  there  too  early. 

Already 

■ -c  you  speak  already  ? 

Not  yet, 

I do  not  speak  yet. 

Not  yet.  Sir. 

Do  you  finish  your  note  ? 

1 do  not  finish  it  yet 
Do  you  breakfast  already  ? 


I Habla  V.  demasiado — demasiada- 
mente  ? 

Yo  no  hablo  bastante. 

Mas  tarde  que  V. 

Salgo  mas  tarde  que  V 

Mas  temprano, 

i Va  su  padre  de  V alia  mas  toni' 
prano  que  yo  ? 

El  va  alia  demasiado  tempraua 
Ya,  todavia,  aun, 

I Habla  V.  aun  ? 

No  (v)  todavia. 

Todavia  no, 

Aun  no. 

No  hablo  todaria. 

Todavia  no,  senor. 

I Acaba  V.  su  billete  ? 

No  le  acabo  todavia. 

Aun  no  le  acabo. 

I Almuerza  V.  ya  ? 

I Esta  V.  ya  almorzando  ? 


Who  receives  the  most  money  ? 

The  English  receive  the  most. 

We  read  more  than  they,  but  the 
French  read  the  most. 

The  letter. 

That  letter. 

The  letters. 


I Quien  recibe  mas  dinero  ? 

Los  Ingleses  son  los  que  reciben  rn&4 
Leemos  mas  que  ellos,  pero  los  Fran- 
ceses son  los  que  leen  mas. 

La  carta,  (feminine.) 

Aquella  (or  esa)  carta. 

Las  cartas. 


_ , , \ Comer  demasiado  es  peligroso. 

/>  eat  too  much  IS  dangerous.  17/  1 1 i- 

^ ^ til  comer  demasiado  es  peligroso. 

Ohs.  There  is  no  preposition  before  an  infinitive  when  it  is  used  m 
ih©  subject  of  a verb  ; it  is  then  taken  substantively,  and  in  Spanish  is  fre- 
(pxently  preceded  by  the  article  el,  (the,)  as — 


116 


THIRTIETH  LESSON. 


To  speak  too  much  is  foolish. 

To  do  good  to  those  that  have  offend- 
ed us,  is  a commendable  action. 


El  hablar  demasiado  es  muy  necio. 
Es  muy  necio  hablar  demasiado 
Hacer  (or  el  hacer)  bien  d los  que  nos 
ban  ofendido  es  una  accion  laudable 


EXERCISES. 

94. 

Do  you  put  on  another  coat  in  order  to  go  to  the  play  ? — I do  put  on 
another. — Do  you  put  on  your  gloves  before  you  put  on  your  shoes  ? — 
I put  on  my  shoes  before  I put  on  my  gloves. — Does  your  brother  pul 
on  his  hat  instead  of  putting  on  his  coat  ? — He  puts  on  his  coat  before 
he  puts  on  his  hat. — Do  our  children  put  on  their  shoes  in  order  to  go 
to  our  friends  ? — They  put  them  on  in  order  to  go  to  them. — What  do 
our  sons  put  on  ? — They  put  on  their  clothes  and  their  gloves. — Do 
you  already  speak  Spanish  ? — I do  not  speak  it  yet,  but  I begin  to 
learn. — Does  your  father  go  out  already  ? — He  does  not  yet  go  out. — 
At  what  o’clock  does  he  go  out  ? — He  goes  out  at  ten  o’clock. — Does 
he  breakfast  before  he  goes  out  ? — He  breakfasts  and  writes  his  notes 
(la  carta)  before  he  goes  out. — Does  he  go  out  earlier  than  you  ? — I go 
out  earlier  than  he. — Do  you  go  to  the  play  as  often  as  I ? — I go  there 
as  often  as  you. — Do  you  begin  to  know  (conocer)  this  man  ? — I do 
begin  to  know  him. — Do  you  breakfast  early  ? — We  do  not  breakfast 
late. — Does  the  Englishman  go  to  the  concert  earlier  than  you  ? — He 
goes  there  later  than  I. — At  what  o’clock  does  he  go  there  ? — He  goe? 
there  at  half-past  eleven. 

95. 

Do  you  not  go  too  early  to  the  concert  ? — I go  there  too  late. — Do  J 
write  too  much  ? — You  do  not  write  too  much,  but  you  speak  too  much 
— Do  I speak  more  than  you  ? — You  do  speak  more  than  I and  my 
brother. — Is  my  hat  too  large  ? — It  is  neither  too  large  nor  too  small. — 
Do  you  speak  Spanish  oftener  than  English  ? — I speak  English  oftenei 
than  Spanish. — Do  your  friends  buy  too  much  corn  ? — They  buy  bul 
little. — Have  you  bread  enough  ? — I have  only  a little,  but  enough. — 
Is  it  late  ? — It  is  not  late. — What  o’clock  is  it  ? — It  is  one  o’clock. — 
Is  it  too  late  to  (para)  go  to  your  father  ? — It  is  not  too  late  to  go  to 
him. — Do  you  conduct  me  to  him,  (alia  ?) — I do  conduct  you  to  him. 
(alia.) — Where  is  he  ? — He  is  in  his  counting-house. — Does  the 
Spaniard  buy  a horse  ? — He  cannot  buy  one. — Is  he  poor  ? — He  is  not 
poor ; he  is  richer  than  you. — Is  your  brother  as  learned  as  you  ? — 
He  is  more  learned  than  I,  but  you  are  more  learned  than  he  and  I. 

96. 

Do  you  kiiow  that  man  ? — I do  know  him. — Is  he  learned  ? — He  is 
(68)  the  most  learned  of  all  men  that  I know. — Is  your  horse  wotse 


THIRTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


117 


(preceding  Lesson)  than  mine? — It  is  not  so  bad  as  youis. — Is  mine 
vvorse  than  the  Spaniard’s  ? — It  is  worse ; it  is  the  worst  horse  that  1 
jinow. — Do  you  give  those  men  less  bread  than  cheese  ? — I give  them 
!ess  of  tJie  latter  than  of  the  former. — Do  you  receive  as  much  money 
as  your  neighbors. — I receive  much  more  than  they. — Who  receivesi 
Kie  most  money  ? — The  English  receive  the  most. — Can  your  son 
already  write  a letter  ? — He  cannot  write  one  yet,  but  he  begins  to  read 
1 little. — Do  you  read  as  much  as  the  Russians  ? — We  read  more  than 
ihey,  but  the  French  read  the  most. — Do  the  Americans  write  more 
Uian  we  ? — They  write  less  than  we,  but  the  Italians  write  the  least, 
(preceding  Lesson.) — Are  they  as  rich  as  the  Americans  ? — They  are 
'.ess  rich  tlian  they. — Are  your  birds  as  fine  as  those  of  the  Irish  ? — 
They  are  less  fine  than  theirs,  but  those  of  the  Spaniards  are  the  least 
line. — Do  you  sell  your  bird  ? — I do  not  sell  it;  I like  it  too  mu/h  to 
Kph  it,  {para  que  le  venda.) 


THIRTY-FIRST  LESSON. — Leccion  Trigesima  'primera. 
THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

The  past  participle  is  formed  from  the  infinitive  mood,  by  changing  the 
jerminalions  ar,  cr,  ir,  into  ado^  ido,  ido. — (See  Lesson  XXIV.) 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

To  love, 

loved. 

Amar, 

amado. 

To  speak, 

spoken 

Hablar, 

hablado. 

To  buy, 

bought; 

Comprar, 

comprado 

SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

To  sell, 

sold. 

Vender, 

vendido 

To  eat,  to  dine, 

eaten,  dined. 

Comer, 

com  ido 

To  drink. 

drunk 

Beber, 

bebido 

THIRD  CONJUGATION 

To  receive, 

received. 

Recibir, 

recibido 

To  divide. 

divided. 

Dividir, 

dividido. 

To  part. 

parted. 

Partir, 

partido. 

To  hcf 

been  \ 

} Estar, 

sido 

eetado. 

To  havCf 

hadf  (auxiliary.)  i 

Haber  f 

hahido. 

I have,  thou  hast,  he  has. 

Yo  he,  tti  has,  el  ha. 

U’e  have,  you  have. 

, they  have. 

Nosotros  hemos, 

vosotros  hubeis, 

1 

1 

ban. 

118 


THIRTY -FIRST  LESSON. 


Oh  . When  to  have  is  used  as  an  active  verb,  it  is  ti'anslatel  by* 
TENErt ; but  when  it  is  an  auxiliary  verb,  that  is  to  say,  a verb  ust  J to  f >nn 
the  compound  tenses  of  other  verbs,  it  must  be  translated  by  HABiiA. 

When  the  past  participle  follows  immediately  after  the  verb  hub^r,  it  k 
civariable  ; that  is  to  say,  it  neither  takes  the  gender  nor  the  nuruLer  of  tha 
lubjoct 


To  have  been  to,  (gone  to.) 
To  have  gone  to. 

To  have  been  at. 

To  have  gone  at. 

To  have  been  in. 

H.ave  you  been  to  market  ? 

Did  you  go  to  market  ? 

I have  been. 

I went 

I have  not  been. 

I did  not  go. 

I have  esteemed  them. 

He  has  esteemed  her 
They  have  been  esteemed. 

The  sisters  have  been  admired 


I Haber  ido  d. 

I Haber  ido  a Hahei  estadi.  m. 
j Haber  ido  d. 

Haber  estado  en. 

I Ha  ido  V.  al  mercado  ? 

[ Fue  V.  d la  plaza  ( 

Yo  he  ido. 

Yo  fui.*- 
Yo  no  he  ido. 

Yo  no  fui. 

Yo  los  he  estimado 
fil  la  ha  estimado. 

Elios  han  sido  estimados. 

Las  hermanas  han  sido  admiradaa 


Ever. 

Never 

Have  you  been  at  the  ball  ? 

Have  you  ever  been  at  the  bal‘  '< 

I have  never  been. 

Thou  hast  never  been  there. 

He  has  never  been  there. 

You  have  never  been  there. 


Jamas.  Alguna  vez. 

En  algun  tiempo. 

I No — -jamas.  Nunc  a.  Nanca 
i Ha  estado  V.  en  el  bade  ? 

I Ha  ido  V.  al  baile  ? 

SI  Ha  estado  V.  alguna  vez  en  el  bad#^ 
I Ha  ido  V.  alguna  vez  al  baile  ? 

I Nunca  he  estado.  Jamas  he  ido 
I Nunca  (jamas)  has  ido  alld. 

I Nunca  (jamas)  ha  ido  alia. 

) V.  no  ha  ido  jamas  alia. 


Already,  yet 

Have  you  already  been  at 
play  ? 

1 nave  already  been 
Not  yet 

I have  not  yet  been  there. 

Hast  thou  ever  been  there  * 


I Ya. 

the  k I Ha  estado  V.  ya  en  el  teatro? 

) ^Haido  V.ya  al  teatro,(d  la  com^dia  ?) 

I Ya  he  ido.  Ya  he  estado. 

I Todavia  no.  No — todavia.  Aun  no 
> Yo  no  he  ido  (estado)  alia  todavia. 
i Todavia  no  he  ido  (estado)  alia 

I[  Has  ido  (estado)  tii  jamas  (alguna 
vez)  alld? 

no  ha  ido  (estado)  alia  todavia 


Me  has  not  been  there. 


THIRTY- FIRST  LESSON. 


119 


Vou  have  not  been  there  yet. 
We  have  not  yet  been  there. 


Have  you  already  been  at  my  fa- 
ther’s ? 

1 have  not  been  yet. 
bave  already  been. 

Wliere  have  you  bc»cu  this  riiorn- 
ing? 

1 have  been  in  the  garden. 

Where  has  thy  brother  been  ? 

He  has  been  in  the  warehouse. 

Has  he  been  there  as  early  as  I? 

He  has  been  there  earlier  than  you. 


I V.  no  ha  ido  (estado)  alia  todavio. 

Todavia  no  hemos  ido  (estado)  all4. 

iHa  ido  (estado)  V.  ya  d,  casa  de 
padre  ? 

Todavia  no  he  ido,  (estado ) 

Ya  he  ido.  Ya  he  estado 

iAdonde  ha  estado  (ido)  V.  esta 
manana  ? 

Yo  he  estado  en  el  jardin. 

I Adonde  ha  estado  tii  hermaiio 

^)1  ha  estado  en  el  almacen. 

I Ha  ido  (estado)  6\  alld.  tan  temprano 
como  yo  ? 

6l  ha  ido  (estadv ) alia  mas  temprano 
que  V 


Anywhere. 

Nowhere. 

To  remain,  to  stay. 

Do  you  go  anywhere  ? 

I go  nowhere  now  ; I stay  at  homo. 

Do  you  remain  in  the  garden  ? 

Yes,  I remain  here. 


Alguna  parte  Cualquiera  parte. 
Ninguna  parte. 

Quedarse.  Estarsc. 
i Va  V.  d alguna  parte  ? 

Yo  no  voy  d ninguna  parte  ahora  ; 

me  quedo  en  casa. 

I Se  queda  V.  en  el  jardin  ? 

Si,  mo  quedo  aqui. 


EXERCISES. 

97. 

Where  have  you  been  ? — I have  been  to  the  market. — Have  you 
been  to  the  ball  ? — I have  been. — Have  I been  to  the  play  ? — You  have 
been  there. — Hast  thou  been  there  ? — I have  not  been  there. — Has  your 
son  ever  been  at  the  theatre  ? — He  has  never  been. — Hast  thou  already 
been  in  my  warehouse  ? — I have  never  been. — ^Do  you  intend  to  (Obs. 
B,  Lesson  XXL)  go  there  ? — I do  intend  to  go  there. — When  will  you 
go  there  ? — I will  go  there  to-morrow. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  twelve 
o’clock. — Has  your  brother  already  been  in  my  large  garden  ? — He 
has  not  yet  been  there. — Does  he  intend  to  see  it  ? — He  does  intend  to 
Bee  it. — When  will  he  go  there  ? — He  will  go  there  to-day. — Does  he 
intend  to  go  to  the  ball  this  evening? — He  does  intend  to  go. — Have 
you  already  been  at  the  ball  ? — I have  not  yet  been. — When  do  you 
intend  to  go  there  ? — I intend  to  go  to-morrow. — Have  you  already 
been  in  the  Frenchman’s  garden  ? — I have  not  yet  been  in  it. — ^Have 
70U  been  in  my  warehouses  ? — 1 have  been  there. — When  did  you  gc 


120 


THIRTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


there  ? — I went  this  morning. — Have  I been  in  your  counting-house,  oi 
in  that  of  your  friend  ? — You  have  neither  been  in  mine,  nor  in  that  of 
my  friend,  but  in  that  of  the  Englishman. 

•98, 

Has  the  Italian  been  in  our  warehouses,  or  in  those  of  the  Dutch  ? 
— He  has  neither  been  in  ours  nor  in  those  of  the  Dutch,  but  in  those 
of  the  Germans. — Hast  thou  already  been  at  the  market  ? — I have  not 
foi  been,  but  I intend  to  (Obs.  B,  Lesson  XXL)  go  there. — Has  oui 
aeighoor’s  son  been  there  ? — He  has  been  there. — WJien  has  he  been 
there  ? — He  has  been  there  to-day. — Does  the  son  of  our  gardener  in- 
tend to  go  to  the  market  ? — He  does  intend  to  go  there. — What  does 
he  wish  to  buy  there  ?— -He  wishes  to  buy  some  chickens,  oxen,  corn, 
wine,  and  cheese. — Have  you  already  been  at  my  brother’s  house  ? — 
[ have  already  been  there,  (alia.) — Has  your  friend  already  been 
there  ? — He  has  not  yet  been  there. — Have  we  already  been  at  our 
friends’  ? — We  nave  not  yet  been  there.- — Have  our  friends  ever  been 
at  our  house  ? — They  have  never  been. — Have  you  ever  been  at  the 
theatre  ? — I have  never  been. — Have  you  a mind  to  write  an  exercise  ? 
— I have  a mind  to  write  one. — To  whom  do  you  wish  to  write  a letter  ? 
—I  wish  to  write  one  to  my  son. — Has  your  father  already  been  at  tna 
concert  ? — He  has  not  yet  been,  but  he  intends  to  go. — Does  he  intend 
to  go  there  to-day  ? — He  intends  to  go  there  to-morrow. — At  what 
o’clock  will  he  set  out  ? — He  will  set  out  at  half-past  six. — Does  he 
intend  to  leave  (salir)  before  he  breakfasts  ? — He  intends  to  breakfast 
before  he  leaves. 

99. 

Have  you  been  to  the  play  as  early  as  1 ? — 1 have  been  (there)  earlier 
than  you. — Have  you  often  been  at  the  concert  ? — I have  often  been 
(there.) — Has  our  neighbor  been  at  the  theatre  as  often  as  we  ? — He 
has  been  (there)  oftener  than  we. — Do  our  friends  go  to  their  counting 
house  too  early  ? — They  go  there  too  late. — Do  they  go  there  as  late 
as  we  ? — They  go  there  later  than  we. — Do  the  English  go  to  their 
warehouses  too  early  ? — They  go  there  too  early. — Is  your  friend  as 
often  in  the  counting-house  as  you  ? — He  is  (there)  oftener  than  I. — 
What  does  he  do  there  ? — He  writes. — Does  he  write  as  much  as  you  ’ 
— He  writes  more  than  I. — Where  does  your  friend  remain  ? — He  re 
mains  m his  counting-house. — Does  he  not  go  out  ? — He  does  not  go 
out. — Do  you  remain  in  the  garden  ? — I do  remain  there. — Do  you  go 
to  your  friend  every  day  ? — I do  go  to  him  every  day. — When  does  he 
come  to  you  ? — He  comes  to  me  every  evening. — Do  you  go  anywhere 
in  the  evening  ? — I go  nowhere  ; I stay  at  home. — Do  you  send  for 
any  one?- -I  send  for  my  physician. — Does  your  servant  go  for  any 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


121 


? — He  g-oes  foi  some  wine. — Have  you  been  anywhere  this  morn 
ing  ? — 1 have  been  nowhere. — Where  has  your  father  been  ? — He  has 
been  nowhere. — When  do  you  drink  (Lesson  XXVI.)  tea  ? — 1 drink 
some  (el)  every  morning. — Does  your  son  drink  coffee  ? — He  drinks 
chocolate. — Have  you  been  to  drink  some  coffee  ? — I have  been  to  drinV 
some,  (ie.) 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON.— Leccioa 


To  have — had,  (auxiliary) 
To  have — had,  (active.) 
Have  you  I ad  my  book  ? 

I have  not  had  it. 

Have  I had  it  ? 

You  have  had  it. 

Have  I not  had  it  ? 

You  have  not  had  it. 

Thou  hast  not  had  it. 

Hai  he  had  it  ? 

He  has  had  it 
He  has  not  had  it. 

Hast  thou  had  the  coat  ? 

1 have  not  had  it. 


Trigesima  seghnda 

Haher — hahido, 

Tenet — tenido, 
i Ha  tenido  V.  mi  libro 
No  le  he  tenido. 

Le  he  tenido  yo  ? 

V.  le  ha  tenido. 

[ No  le  he  tenido  yo  ? 

V.  no  lo  ha  tenido. 

Tii  no  le  has  tenido. 

I Le  ha  tenido  dl  ? 

El  le  ha  tenido. 

]&1  no  le  ha  tenido. 

I Has  tenido  el  vestido  ? 

Yo  no  le  he  tenido. 


I have  had  them. 

I have  not  had  them. 

Have  I had  them  ? 

You  have  had  them. 

You  hav3  not  had  them. 
Has  he  had  them  ? 

He  has  not  had  them 
Have  you  had  any  bread  ? 
1 have  had  some,  (a  little.) 
I have  not  had  any. 

Have  you  had  any  ? 

Have  1 had  any  ? 

You  have  had  some. 

You  have  not  had  any. 
Has  he  had  any  ? 

He  has  not  had  any. 

Have  vou  had  any  knives  ? 
I have  had  some. 

1 have  net  had  any. 


Yo  los  he  tenido 
No  los  he  tenido. 

I Los  ho  tenido  yo  ? 

V.  los  ha  tenido. 

V.  no  los  ha  tenido. 

I Los  ha  tenido  6\  ? 
t\  no  los  ha  tenido. 

I Ha  tenido  V.  pan  ? 

He  tenido  un  poco. 

Yo  no  he  tenido  ninguno. 

I Ha  tenido  V.  alguno? 

I He  tenido  yo  alguno  ? 

V.  Ha  tenido  un  poco. 

V.  no  ha  tenido  ninguno. 

I Ha  tenido  el  un  poco  1 
El  no  ha  tenido  ninguno. 

I Ha  tenido  V.  algunos  cuchOlos:  i 
He  tenido  algunos,  uuo£$. 
Ningunos  he  tenido. 


122 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


What  has  he  had  ? 
He  has  had  uothing 


I I Que  ha  tenido  41  i 
I No  ha  tenido  nada.  Nada  ha  tenido 


Have  you  been  hungry  ? 

I l\'»ve  been  afraid, 
lie  has  never  been  either  right  or 
wrong. 


t I Ha  tenido  V.  hambre  1 
t Yo  he  tenido  miedo. 
t nunca  ha  tenido,  ni  ha  dejadc 
de  tentr  razon. 


To  take  place. 

Thati  (meaning  that  thing.) 


Does  the  ball  take  place  this  even- 

ing? 


It  does  take  place 
It  takes  place  this  evening. 

It  does  not  take  place  to-day 

When  did  the  ball  take  place  ? 
When  has  the  ball  taken  place  ? 


I 

I 


f 

I 


It  took  place  yesterday. 

It  has  taken  place  yesterday. 


Tenerse.  Verificarse 
Celehrarse,  Darse.  Haber,  flnv 
personal.) 

Eso.  Aijuello 

t i Se  celebra  el  baile  esta  noche  ? 
t ^ Se  da  el  baile  esta  noche  1 
t I Hay  baile  esta  noche  ? 
t Se  celebra.  Se  da  le  hoy. 
t Se  celebra  esta  noche. 

Se  da  esta  noche,  &c. 
t No  se  celebra  hoy.  No  se  da  hoy 
No  le  hay  hoy. 


1 1 Cuando  se  celebrd  ? 
t I Cuando  se  did  el  baile  ? 
t I Cuando  se  ha  tenido  baile  ? 
t I Cuando  ha  habido  baile  ? 
t Se  did  ayer. 

Se  celebrd  ayer. 

Se  tuvo  ayer. 


Yesterday 

rhe  day  before  yesterday. 

How  many  times,  (how  often  ?) 
Once 
Twice. 

Many  times. 

Several  times. 


I Ayer. 

I Anteayer  Antier 

I Cuantas  veces  ? 

Una  vez. 

Dos  veces. 

Muchas  veces. 

Varias  veces.  Algunas  veces. 


C Antfguamente.  En  otro  tiempo 
Formerly.  < En  tiempo  pasado.  En  lo  paaado. 

^ Antes  de  este  tiempo. 

Sometimes.  | Algunas  veces. 


Do  you  go  sometimes  to  the  bal  'i 
I go  sometimes. 


i Va  V.  algunas  veces  al  baile  ? 
Voy  algunas  veces 


THIRTY-SJiCOND  LESSON. 


123 


Goue 

Gone  there. 

flave  you  goue  there  sometimes  ? 
I have  goue  there  often. 

Oftener  than  you 

Elave  you  not  had? 

Have  they  not  had  any  oread  ? 
Have  the  men  had  my  trunk  ? 

They  have  "^ot  had  it. 

Who  has  had  it  ? 

Have  they  had  my  knives  ? 

Have  they  not  had  them  ? 

They  have  not  had  them 
Who  has  had  them  ? 


I Ido. 

Ido— alld. 

I Ha  ido  V.  alld  algunas  veces  ? 
He  ido  alld  d menudo. 

Mas  d menudo  que  V. 


I No  ha  tenido  V.? 

^ No  han  ellos  tenido  pan  ? 

I Han  tenido  mi  cofre  (mi  haul)  los 
hombres  ? 

No  le  han  tenido. 

I Quien  le  ha  tenido? 

I Han  tenido  ellos  mis  cuchillos  ? 

I No  los  han  tenido  ellos  ? 

No  los  han  tenido. 

I Quien  los  ha  tenido  ? 


Have  I been  wrong  in  buying  books  ? 

You  have  not  been  wrong  in  buying 
some. 

When  had  I it,  (when  have  I had 
it?) 

Where  had  you  them?  (have  you 
had.) 

Have  you  had  any  thing  ? 

I have  had  nothing. 


t I He  hecho  tral  en  comprar  libros  i 
t V.  no  ha  hecho  ?nal  en  comprai 
algunos. 

I Cuando  le  he  tenido? 

I Donde  los  ha  tenido  V.  ? 

I Ha  tenido  V.  algo  ? 

Nada  he  tenido. 


The  watch.  | El  reloj.  Relojes,  (pi ) 

EXERCISES. 

100. 

Have  you  had  my  dog  ? — I have  had  it. — ^Have  you  had  my  glove  f 
— I have  not  had  it. — Hast  thou  h id  my  umbrella  ? — I have  not  had  it. 
—Have  I had  your  knife  ? — You  Jiave  had  it. — When  had  I it  ? — You 
had  it  yesterday. — Have  I had  your  gloves  ? — You  have  had  them.— 
Has  your  brother  had  my  iron  haramer  ? — He  has  had  it. — Has  he  had 
my  golden  knife  ? — He  has  not  had  it. — Have  the  English  had  my 
beautiful  ship  ? — They  have  had  it. — Who  has  had  my  leather  shoes  ? 
' — Your  servants  have  had  them.— -Have  we  had  the  iron  trunk  of  oui 
good  neighbor  ? — We  have  had  it  — Have  we  had  his  fine  gun  ? — Wc 
nave  not  had  it. — Have  we  had  the  mattresses  of  the  foreigners  ?— 
We  have  not  had  them. — Has  the  American  had  my  good  watch  ? — 
He  has  had  it. — Has  he  had  my  ij  on  knife  ? — He  has  not  had  it. — Has 
the  young  man  had  the  first  volume  of  my  dictionary  ? — He  has  not 


124 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


had  the  firsi,  but  the  second. — Has  he  had  it  ? — Yes,  Sir,  he  has  had  it 
— When  has  he  had  it  ? — He  has  had  it  this  morning. — Have  you  had 
any  sugar? — I have  had  some. — Have  ! had  »ny  good  paper? — You 
have  not  had  any. — Has  the  cook  of  the  Russian  captain  had  anv 
chickens  ? — He  has  had  some. — He  has  not  had  any. 

101. 

1 las  the  Frenchman  had  good  wine  ? — He  has  had  some,  and  he  has 
3till  (aun)  some. — Hast  thou  had  large  cakes  ? — I have  had  some. — 
Has  tliy  brother  had  any  ? — He  has  not  had  any. — Has  the  son  of  our 
gardener  had  any  bread  ? — He  has  had  some. — Have  the  Poles  had 
good  tobacco  ? — They  have  had  some. — What  tobacco  have  they  had  ? 
— They  have  had  tobacco  and  snuff. — Have  the  English  had  as  much 
sugar  as  tea  ? — They  have  had  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other.— 
Has  the  physician  been  right? — He  has  been  wrong. — Has  the  Dutch- 
man been  right  or  wrong  ? — He  has  never  been  either  right  or  wrong, 
(see  Lesson  VI.) — Have  I been  wrong  in  buying  a horse  ? — You  have 
been  wrong  in  buying  one. — What  has  the  painter  had  ? — He  has  had 
fine  pictures. — Has  he  had  any  fine  gardens  ? — He  has  not  had  any. — 
Has  your  servant  had  my  shoes  ? — He  has  not  had  them. — What  has 
the  Spaniard  had  ? — He  has  had  nothing. — Who  has  had  courage  ? — 
The  English  sailors  have  had  some. — Have  the  Germans  had  many 
friends  ? — They  have  had  many. — Have  we  had  more  friends  than 
enemies  ? — We  have  had  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Has 
your  son  had  more  wine  than  bread  ? — He  has  had  more  of  the  latter 
than  of  the  former. — Has  the  Turk  had  more  paper  than  corn  ? — He 
has  had  less  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. — Has  the  Italian  painter 
had  any  thing  ? — He  ha^  had  nothing. 

102. 

Have  I been  right  in  writing  to  my  brother  ? — You  have  not  been 
wrong  in  writing  to  him. — Have  you  had  a sore  finger  ? — I have  had  a 
Bore  eye. — Have  you  had  any  thing  good  ? — I have  had  nothing  bad. — 
Did  the  ball  take  place  yesterday  ? — It  did  not  take  place. — Does  it 
take  place  to-day  ? — It  takes  place  to-day. — When  does  the  ball  tJike 
place  ? — It  takes  place  this  evening. — Did  it  take  place  the  day  before 
jresterday  ? — It  did  take  place. — At  what  o’clock  did  it  take  place  ?— 
It  took  place  (it  has  taken  place)  at  eleven  o’clock. — Did  you  go  to 
my  brother’s  ? — I went. — How  often  have  you  been  at  my  friend’s 
house  ? — -I  have  been  twice. — Do  you  go  sometimes  to  the  theatre  ? — 
I go  sometimes. — How  many  times  have  you  been  at  the  theatre  ? — 
I have  been  only  once. — Have  you  sometimes  been  at  the  ball  ? — I have 
often  been. — Has  your  brother  ever  gone  to  the  ball  ? — He  has  never 
gone. — Has  he  gone  there  as  often  as  you  ? — He  has  gone  oftener 


THIRTT-THIRD  LESSON 


125 


Uian  1. — Dost  thou  go  sometimes  into  the  garden  ? — I go  sometimes. — 
Flast  thou  often  been  there  ? — I have  often  been  tliere. — Does  youi 
old  cook  often  go  to  the  market  ? — He  goes  there  often. — Does  he  gc 
ihere  as  often  as  my  gardener? — He  goes  oftener  than  he. — Did  that 
talm  place  ? — It  did  take  place. — When  did  that  take  place  ? — I do  nc  ‘ 
hiiovv. 

103. 

Have  you  formerly  gone, to  the  ball  ? — I have  gone  there  sometimes 
—When  hast  thou  been  at  the  concert  ? — I was  (I  have  been)  tho 
day  before  yesterday. — Didst  thou  find  anybody  (alguna  gente)  there  ? 
— 1 found  nobody  there. — Hast  thou  gone  to  the  ball  oftener  than  thy 
brothers  ? — I have  not  gone  thither  so  often  as  they. — Has  your  friend 
often  been  at  the  play  ? — He  has  been  there  several  times. — Have  you 
sometimes  been  hungry  ? — I have  often  been  hungry. — Has  your  valet 
often  been  thirsty  ? — He  has  never  been  either  hungry  or  ihirsty. — 
Did  you  go  to  the  play  early  ? — I went  late. — Did  I go  to  the  ball  as 
early  as  you  ? — You  went  earlier  than  I. — Did  your  brother  go  there 
too  late  ? — He  went  there  too  early. — Have  your  brothers  had  any 
thing  ? — They  have  had  nothing. — Who  has  had  my  sticks  and  my 
gloves? — Your  servant  has  had  both. — Has  he  had  my  hat  and  my 
gun  ? — He  has  had  both. — Hast  thou  had  my  horse  or  my  brother’s  ? — 
I have  had  neither  yours  nor  your  brother’s. — Have  I had  your  note  or 
the  physician’s? — You  have  had  neither  the  one  nor  the  ^ther. — What 
has  the  physician  had  ? — He  has  had  nothing. — Has  anybody  had  my 
golden  candlestick  ? — Nobody  has  had  it. — Has  any  one  had  my  silver 
knives  ? — No  one  has  had  them. 


THIRTY-THIRD  LESSON. — Leccion  Trigesima  tercera 

OF  THE  PERFECT  TENSE. — Del  Preterito  Perfecto  Proximo 

The  preterito  perfecto  proximo  (tho  perfect  teme)  is  formed  from  the 
present  of  habery  (to  have,)  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  which  is  U 
be  conjugated. 

This  tense  is  used  to  express  a thing  done  at  a time  designated  in  an  in- 
determinate manner,  or  at  a time  past,  but  of  which  something  yet  re 
mains  ; as,  Yo  he  aprendido  la  gramatica — I have  learned  grammar  ; He 
esiudiado  esta  mahana — I have  studied  this  morning. 

I Hacer,  Hecho, 

I I Que  ha  hecho  V.  ? 

^ No  he  hecho  nada 
\ Nada  he  hecho 


To  makcy  to  do.  Made,  done. 
What  have  you  done  ? 

I have  done  nothing 


TUIRTY-TUIRD  LESSON. 


126 

lIoB  that  shoemaker  made  my  shoes  ? 

Ele  has  made  them. 

[ie  has  not  made  them. 

To  putj  to  put  on,  Puty  put  on. 

Have  you  put  on  your  shoes? 

I liave  put  them  on. 

To  take  off.  Taken  off. 

Have  you  taken  off  your  gloves  ? 

I have  taken  them  off. 


I Ha  hecho  mis  zapatos  aquel  zaps 
tero  ? 

6l  los  ha  hecho. 

No  los  ha  hecho. 

Ponery  pon^rse.  Puesto. 

(See  the  verb  Poner  in  App.1 
t ^ Se  ha  puesto  V.  los  zapatos 
t Me  los  he  puesto.  ' 

Quitarse,  Quitado. 
t Se  ha  quitado  V.  los  guantes  ? 
t Yo  me  los  he  quiteido. 


To  telly  to  say.  Toldy  said. 

Have  you  said  the  proverbs? 

I liave  said  them. 

Have  you  told  me  the  proverb  ? 
I have  told  you  the  proverb. 

[ have  told  it  you. 


Decir  * 3.  •Dicho. 

(See  this  verb  in  App^i 
t Ha  dicho  V.  los  refranes  ? 

Yo  los  he  dicho. 

I Me  ha  dicho  V el  refran  ? 

Yo  he  dicho  el  refran  d V 
Yo  le  he  dicho  d,  V. 

Se  le  he  dicho  d.  V 


I 


The  proverb. 

Thaty  (meaning  that  thing.) 
ThiSy  (meaning  this  thing.) 

Has  he  told  you  that  7 

He  has  told  me  that. 
Have  I told  you  that  ? 
You  have  told  me  that. 


El  refran.  El  proverbio 
Eso.  Aquello. 

Esto. 

I Ha  dicho  ^1  eso  d.  V.  ? 

I Le  ha  dicho  esto  d,  V.  ? 
Me  ha  dicho  eso. 

‘ He  dicho  yo  eso  ^ V.  ? 
V.  me  ha  dicho  eso. 


It. 


Obs.  ThiSy  thaty  and  it,  are  translated  as  above  when  they  do  not 
refer  to  a noun.  EstOy  esoy  and  aquello y may  be  either  the  subject  or  tlifl 
abject  of  the  verb,  but  lo  is  most  always  the  object  of  the  verb. 


Have  you  told  it  me  ? 

I have  told  it  you. 

I have  not  told  it  you. 

Has  he  told  it  you  ? 

He  has  told  it  me. 

He  has  not  told  it  me. 
Have  you  told  him  that  ? 

^ I have  told  it  him,  (to  him.) 
You  have  told  it  him. 
lie  has  told  it  him 


I Me  lo  ha  dicho  V.  ? 

Yo  se  lo  he  dicho  d,  V. 
No  se  lo  he  dicho  d.  V 
I Se  lo  ha  dicho  dl  d,  V.T 
El  me  lo  ha  dicho. 

^ll  no  me  lo  ha  dicho. 

[ Le  ha  dicho  V.  eso  ? 
Yo  se  lo  he  dicho. 

V.  se  lo  ha  dicho  (d  dl.) 
(El)  se  lo  ha  dicho  d 6L 


THIRTY-THIIiD  LESSON. 


127 


Have  yun  told  it  them,  (to  them?) 
I have  told  it  them. 


Flave  you  spoken  to  the  men  1 
t have  spoken  to  them. 

To  whom  did  you  speak,  (have  you 
spoken  ?) 

Which  proverbs  has  he  written  ? 
tie  has  written  those  which  you  see. 


I Se  lo  ha  dicho  V.  k ellos  ? 
Yo  se  lo  he  dicho  d ellos. 


I Ha  hablado  V.  d los  hombres  ? 
Yo  les  he  hablado. 

I A quien  ha  hablado  V.  ? 

I Que  refranes  ha  escrito  dl  ? 

^il  ha  escrito  los  que  V.  vd. 


To  drink.  Drunk. 

To  see.  Seen. 

To  read.  Read. 

To  he  acquainted  with.  Been  ac- 
quainted with. 

Which  men  have  you  seen  ? 

I have  seen  those. 

Which  books  have  you  read  ? 

1 have  read  those  which  you  lent 
me. 

Have  you  been  acquainted  with  these 
men  ? 

I have  not  been  acquainted  with 
them. 


Bcher.  Behido, 

Ver.  Vis  to — (See  App.) 

Leer,  Leido, 

Conocer,  Conocido. 


I Que  hombres  ha  visto  V 1 
He  visto  d aquellos. 

I Que  libros  ha  leido  V.  ? 

Yo  he  leido  los  que  V.  me  ha 
do. 

I Ha  conocido  V.  d estos  hombres  ? 
Yo  no  los  he  conocido. 


Have  you  seen  any  sarbrs  ? 

[ have  seen  some. 

[ have  not  seen  any. 

To  call.  Called. 

To  throw. 

To  throw  away. 

Who  calls  me  ? 

Your  father  calls  you. 

Have  you  called  the  boys? 

I have  not  called  them. 

00  you  throw  your  money  away 

1 do  not  throw  it  away. 

Who  throws  away  his  books? 

Wave  you  thrown  away  any  thing? 
I have  thrown  away  my  gloves. 

Are  you  willing? 

I am  willing  ta 


I Ha  visto  V.  d algunos  marineros  ? 
He  visto  d algunos. 

A ningunos  he  visto. 

Llamar.  Llamado. 

Tirar,  Arrojar. 

Desperdiciar.  Botar. 

I Quien  me  llama? 

Su  padre  de  V.  le  llama. 

I Ha  llamado  V.  d los  muchachos  ? 
No  los  he  llamado. 

I Desperdicia  V.  su  dinero  ? 

No,  yo  no  le  desperdicio,  (or  bote.) 

I Quien  tira  sus  libros  ? 

I Ha  tirado  V.  algo? 

Yo  he  tirado  mis  guantes. 

( I Quiere  V.  ? 

( t Tiene  V.  gana  do  7 
( Yo  quiero. 

J t Tengo  gana  de 


128 


THIRTT-TEIED  LESSOH. 


To  he  ill. 


Estar  malo.  Enfermo. 
I Estd  V.  malo  ? 

Si.  Lo  estoy. 


Are  you  ill  ? 
I am 


EXERCISES. 

104. 


Have  you  any  thing  to  do  ? — I have  nothing  to  do. — What  hast  Ihcu 
done  ? — I have  done  nothing. — Have  I done  any  thing  ? — You  have 
done  something. — What  have  I done  ? — You  have  torn  my  books. — 
What  have  your  children  done  ? — They  have  torn  their  clothes. — What 
nave  we  done  ? — You  have  done  nothing;  but  your  brothers  have  burnt 
my  fine  pencils. — Has  the  tailor  already  made  your  coat  ? — He  has  not 
yet  made  it. — Has  your  shoemaker  already  made  your  shots  ? — He  has 
already  made  them. — Have  you  sometimes  made  a hat  ? — I have  never 
made  one. — Have  our  neighbors  ever  made  books  ? — They  made  some 
formerly. — How  many  coats  has  your  tailor  made  ? — He  has  made 
twenty  or  thirty. — Has  he  made  good  or  bad  coats  ? — He  has  made 
(both)  good  and  bad. — Has  your  father  put  on  his  coat  ? — He  has  not 
yet  put  it  on,  but  he  is  going  to  put  it  on. — Has  your  brother  put  his 
shoes  on  ? — He  has  put  them  on. — Have  our  neighbors  put  on  their 
shoes  and  their  pantaloons  ? — They  have  put  on  neither,  (m  unos  ni 
otros.) — Wlat  has  the  physician  taken  away? — He  has  taken  away 
nothing. — W hat  have  you  taken  off? — I have  taken  off  my  large  hat. 
— Have  your  children  taken  off  their  gloves  ? — They  have  taken  them 
off. — When  lid  the  ball  take  place? — It  took  place  the  day  before 
yesterday. — Who  has  told  you  that  ? — My  servant  has  told  it  to  me. — 
What  has  your  brother  told  you  ? — He  has  told  me  nothing. — Did  I 
tell  you  that  ? — You  did  not  tell  it  to  me. — Has  he  told  it  to  you  ? — He 
has  told  it  to  me. — Who  has  told  it  to  your  neighbor  ? — The  English 
have  told  it  to  him. — Have  they  told  it  to  the  French  ? — They  have  told 
it  to  them. — Who  has  told  it  to  you  ? — Your  son  has  told  it  to  me. — Has 
he  told  it  to  you  ? — He  has  told  it  to  me. — Are  you  willing  to  tell  your 
friends  tliat  ? — I am  willing  to  tell  it  to  them. 


Are  you  the  brother  of  that  young  man? — I am. — Is  that  young 
man  your  son  ? — He  is. — Are  y )ur  friends  as  rich  as  they  say  ? — They 
a:e  so. — Are  these  men  as  learned  as  they  say  ? — They  are  not  so. — = 
Do  you  sweep  the  warehouse  often  ? — I sweep  it  as  often  as  I can. — 
Has  our  neighbor  money  enough  to  buy  some  coal  ? — I do  not  know, 
— Has  your  cook  gone  to  the  market  ? — He  has  not  gone. — Is  he  ill  1 
—He  is. — Am  I ill  ? — You  are  not. — Are  you  as  tall  (alto)  as  I ? — 
am. — Are  you  as  fatigued  as  your  brother  ? — I am  more  so  than  he  - 


105. 


THIRTY-THIHD  LESSON. 


129 


Have  you  written  a letter  ? — I have  nDt  written  a letter,  but  an  exer- 
cise.— What  have  your  brothers  written  ? — They  have  written  their 
exercises. — When  did  they  write  them  ? — They  wrote  {have  written) 
diern  yesterday. — Have  you  written  your  exercises  ? — I have  written 
^hem. — Has  your  friend  written  his  ? — He  has  not  written  them  yet.-'- 
Which  exercises  has  your  little  brother  written  ? — He  has  wriiten  his 
own. — Have  you  spoken  to  my  father  ? — I have  spoken  to  him. — When 
did  you  speak  to  him  ? — I spoke  to  him  the  day  before  yesterday. — How 
many  times  have  you  spoken  to  the  captain? — I have  spoken  to  him 
several  times. — Have  you  often  spoken  to  his  son? — I Lave  often 
spoken  to  him. — To  which  men  has  your  friend  snoken? — He  has 
spoken  to  these  and  to  those. 


106. 

Have  you  spoKen  to  the  Russians  ? — I have  spoken  to  them. — Have 
lae  English  ever  spoken  to  you  ? — They  have  often  spoken  to  me. — 
What  has  the  German  told  you  ? — He  has  told  me  the  proverbs. — 
Which  proverbs  has  he  told  you  ? — He  has  told  me  these  proverbs. — 
What  have  you  to  tell  me  ? — I have  a few  proverbs  to  tell  you. — Which 
exercises  has  your  friend  written? — He  has  written  those. — Which 
oooks  have  your  children  read  ? — They  have  read  those  which  you 
have  lent  them. — Have  you  seen  these  men  or  those  ? — I have  neither- 
seen  these  nor  those. — Which  men  have  you  seen  ? — I have  seen  those 
to  whom  {d  quienes)  you  have  spoken. — Have  you  been  acquainted 
with  these  men  ? — I have  been  acquainted  with  them. — With  which 
boys  has  your  brother  been  acquainted  ? — He  has  been  acquainted  with 
those  of  our  merchant. — Have  I been  acquainted  with  these  French- 
men?— You  have  not  been  acquainted  with  them. — Which  wine  has 
your  servant  drunk  ? — He  has  drunk  mine. — Have  you  seen  my  bro- 
±rrs  ? — I have  seen  them. — Where  have  you  seen  them  ? — I have 
seen  them  at  their  own  house. — Have  you  ever  seen  Greeks  ? — I have 
never  seen  any. — Has  your  father  seen  any  ? — He  has  sometimes  seen 
some. — Do  you  call  me  ? — I do  call  you. — Who  calls  your  brother  ? — 
My  father  calls  him. — Dost  thou  call  any  one  ? — I call  no  one. — Have 
/ou  thrown  away  your  hat? — I have  not  thrown  it  away. — Does  your 
father  throw  away  any  thing  ? — ^He  throws  away  the  letters  which  he 
receives. — Have  you  thrown  away  your  pencils  ? — I have  not  thrown 
them  away. — Dost  thou  throw  away  thy  book  ? — I do  not  throw  it 
away ; 1 want  it  to  (jpara)  study  (el  E^paiW}  Spanish 


130 


THIRTY-FOURTH  LESSOR. 


THIRTY-FOURTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Trigesima  cuarta. 


To  light,  (kindle,)  lighted,  (lit.) 

To  extinguish,  extinguished 

To  open,  opened. 

To  be  able,  (can,)  been  able,  (could.) 
To  be  willing,  been  willing. 


Encender 

encendido. 

Extinguir, 

extinguido 

Apagar, 

apagado. 

Abrir. 

abieito.* 

Poder  *, 

podido. 

Querer  *, 

querido 

NEUTER  VERBS. 


hi  neuter  verbs  the  action  is  intransitive,  hat  is,  it  remains  in  the  agont 
111  Spanish,  neuter  verbs  form  their  compound  tenses  with  haber,  (to  nave 
therefore  their  past  participles  are  invariable. 


To  set  out.  Set  out. 

To  go  out.  Gone  out. 

To  come.  Come. 

Has  your  father  set  out? 
Have  your  friends  set  «ut  ? 

They  have  not  set  out. 


f Partir.  Partido. 

? Salir.  Salido. 
f Marcharse.  Marchado 
I Salir — Salido.  Irse — Ido. 

I Venir.  Venido. 
j ^ Se  ha  ido  el  padre  de  V.  ? 

( i Se  ha  marchado  el  padre  de  V.  ? 

I Se  han  ido  (marchado)  los  amigos 
de  V.? 

No  se  han  ido,  (marchado.) 


When  did  your  brothers  go  out  ? 
When  have  your  brothers  gone  out  ? 
They  went  out  at  ten  o’clock. 

They  have  gone  out  at  ten  o’clock. 


Have  the  men  come  to  your  father  ? 
They  have  come  to  him. 


I Cuando  se  han  ido  (marchado)  loa 
hermanos  de  V.? 

Elios  se  han  ido  (marchado)  d las 
diez. 


I Han  venido  los  hombres  d casa  de 
su  padre  de  V.  ? 

Si,  han  venido.  Han  venido  aqui. 
Han  venido  d casa. 


Obs.  When  did  your  brothers  go  out  ? They  went  out  at  ten 
o’clock. — Until  the  learner  is  acquainted  with  the  Preterito  Pcrfecio  Re- 
wotOf  (imperfect  tense,)  he  must  use  the  Spanish  Preterito  Perfecto  Proz- 
imOf  (perfect  tense ;)  therefore,  before  translating  the  above  two  sentences, 
they  must  be  changed  into.  When  have  your  brothers  gone  out  ? They 
hav*?<  gone  out  at  ten  o’clcok. — i Cuando  han  salido  los  hermanos  de  V / 
Han  salido  d las  diez. 


Which  fires  have  you  extinguished  ? I i Que  fuegos  han  apagado  VV  ? 
Which  storehouses  have  you  opened?  | i Que  almacenes  han  abierto  VV  ? 


THIRTY-FOURTH  LESSON 


llav*9  you  conducted  them  to  the 
5?tor(  house  ? 

r have  conducted  them  there. 

Which  books  have  you  taken? 
tlow  many  notes  have  you  received  ? 

VVe  liave  received  but  one. 


Upon. 

Lpon  the  bench. 
The  bench. 

Upon  it. 


131 

I Los  ha  conducido  V.  a alniacen? 

Los  he  conducido  alld. 

I Que  libros  ha  tornado  V.  ? 

I Cuantos  billetes  hau  rocibido  VV. 
Heinos  recihido  solarnente  uiio. 

No  hemos  recibido  sino  uno 


Sobrcj  (prep.) 
Sobre  el  banco 
El  banco. 
Sobre  6\, 


Under 

Under  the  bench. 

Under  it 

Where  is  my  hat? 

It  is  upon  the  bench. 

Are  my  gloves  on  the  bench  ? 
They  are  under  it. 


Do  you  learn  to  read  ? 

1 do  (learn  it.) 

I learn  to  write. 

Have  you  learned  to  speak  ? 
We  have  (learned  that.) 


Dehajo  de.  Bajo. 

Debajo  del  banco. 

Debajo  de  el.  Debajo 
I En  donde  estd  mi  sombrero  ? 

Estd  sobre  el  banco. 

I Estan  mis  guanles  sobre  el  banco  ? 
Estan  debajo.  Debajo  de  dl. 


I Aprende  V.  d leer  ? 

Si,  yo  aprendo.  Aprendo  d leer. 
Yo  aprendo  d escribir. 

^ Han  aprendido  VV.  d hablar  ? 
Si,  hemos  aprendido,  (d  hablar.) 


In  the  storehouse 
In  the  hearth. 

In  it.  Within. 


En  el  almacen. 
En  el  hogar. 
Dentro. 


To  wash. 

To  get  mended.  To  have  mended 

Got  mended.  Had  mended 

To  get  washed.  To  have  washed. 
Got  v^ashed.  Had  washed. 

To  get  made.  To  have  made. 

Got  made.  Had  made. 

To  get  swept.  To  have  swept. 
Got  swept.  Had  swept. 

To  get  sold.  To  have  sold. 

Got  sold.  Had  sold. 


Lavar  1. 

Mandar  remendar,  componer 
Hacer  remendar,  reparar, 
Mandado  remendar. 

Hecho  remendar. 

Mandar  lavar.  Hacer  lavar. 
Mandado  lavar.  Hecho  lavar. 
Mandar  hacer.  Hacer  hacer. 
Mandado  hacer.  Hecho  hacer, 
Hacer  harrer.  Mandar  harrer. 
Hecho  harrer.  Mandado  harrer. 
Hacer  vender.  Mandar  vender. 
HerJio  vender.  Mandado  vender 


132 


THIRTY -FOURm  LESSON. 


To  get  the  coat  mended. 

To  have  it  mended. 

To  get  them  mended 

Are  5"ou  getting  a coat  made  ? 

Do  you  order  a coat  ? 

r am  getting  one  made. 

I have  had  one  made 

[lave  you  had  your  coat  mended  ? 

I have  had  it  mended. 

I have  not  had  it  mended. 

I liave  had  my  shoes  mended 
[ have  had  them  mended. 

To  wipe. 

When?  Where  ? 

Have  you  seen  my  books  ? 

T have  seen  them 

vVhen  did  you  see  my  brother  ? 

When  have  you  seen  my  brother? 

I saw  him  the  day  before  yesterday. 
I have  seen  him  the  day  before  yes- 
terday. 

Where  have  you  seen  him? 

[ have  seen  him  at  the  theatre. 


t Hacer  remendai  el  vestido 
t Mandar  remendar  el  vestido. 
t Hacerle  remendar,  (reparar.) 
t Hacerlos  remendar,  (reparar.) 
t i Se  manda  V.  hacer  un  vestido  ? 
t t Se  hizo  V.  hacer  un  vestido  ? 
t Mando  hacerme  uno. 
t Hago  hacerme  uno. 

K t Me  he  mandado  hacer  uno 
( + Me  he  hecho  hacer  uno. 
t ; Ha  hecho  V.  remendar  su  vestide  ? 
t Yo  le  he  hecho  remendar,  (leparur.) 
t No  le  he  hecho  reparar. 
i Yo  he  hecho  remendar  mis  zapatos 
t Los  he  hecho  remendar. 

Enjugar.  Enjugado^  {cnjuto,  ir- 
regular participle.) 

I Cuando  7 i Donde  7 i En  dondc  ; 
I Ha  visto  V.  mis  libros  ? 

Yo  los  he  visto. 

I Cuando  ha  visto  V.  d mi  herrnano 

Yo  le  he  visto  anteayer,  (antier.'l 

I i En  donde  le  ha  visto  V.  ? 

1 Yo  le  he  visto  en  el  teatro 


EXERCISES. 

107. 

Where  are  your  brothers  gone  to  ? — They  are  gone  to  the  theatre- 
— When  did  the  F'‘?nch  boys  come  to  your  brother  ? — They  came  tc 
him  yesterday. — Did  their  friends  also  come? — They  came  also. — 
Has  any  one  come  to  us  ? — The  good  Germans  have  come  to  us. — 
Has  the  servant  carried  my  note  ? — He  has  carried  it. — Where  has  he 
carried  it  ? — He  has  carried  it  to  your  friend. — Which  books  has  the 
servant  taken  ? — He  has  taken  those  which  you  do  not  read. — Have 
tlie  merchants  opened  their  storehouses  ? — They  have  opened  them. — 
Which  storehouses  have  they  opened  ? — They  have  opened  those 
which  you  have  seen. — Which  fires  have  the  men  extinguished  ? — 
They  have  extinguished  those  which  you  have  seen. — Have  you 
received  any  notes  ? — We  have  received  some. — How  many  have  you 
received  ? — TS'e  have  '"eceived  only  one  ; but  our  brother  has  receiveo 
more  tiian  we;  he  has  »*eceived  six. 


THIRTY-FOtTRTH  LESSON. 


133 


108. 

Wliere  is  niy  coat  ? — Tt  is  upon  the  bench. — Are  my  shoes  upon  the 
bench  ? — They  are  under  it. — Is  the  coal  under  the  bench  ? — It  is  in 
die  iiearth. — Have  you  put  any  coal  into  the  hearth  ? — I have  put  some 
into  it. — Are  you  cold  ? — I am  not  cold. — Have  you  not  been  afraid  to 
burn  my  papers  ? — I have  not  been  afraid  to  burn  them. — Have 
you  sent  your  little  boy  to  market  ? — I have. — When  ? — This  {la 
manana)  morning. — Have  you  written  to  your  father  ? — I have  written 
U)  him. — Has  he  answered  you  ? — He  has  not  yet  answered  me. — Arc 
you  getting  your  floor  swept  ? — I am  getting  it  swept. — Have  you  had 
your  counting-house  swept  ? — I have  not  had  it  swept  yet,  but  I intend 
to  have  it  swept  to-day. — Have  you  evei  written  to  the  physician  ?— 
I have  never  written  to  him. — Has  he  sometimes  written  to  you  ? — Ht 
has  often  written  to  me. — What  has  he  written  to  you  ? — He  has 
v/ritten  something  to  me. — How  many  times  have  your  friends  written 
to  you  ? — They  have  written  to  me  more  than  twenty  times. — Have 
you  seen  my  sons  ? — I have  never  seen  them. 

109. 

Have  you  already  seen  a Syrian  ? — I have  already  seen  one. — 
Where  have  you  seen  one  ? — At  the  theatre. — Have  you  given  the 
book  to  my  brother  ? — I have  given  it  to  him. — Have  you  given  money 
to  the  merchant  ? — I have  given  him  some, — How  much  have  you 
given  to  him  ? — I have  given  to  him  fourteen  dollars. — Have  you  given 
any  gold  forks  to  our  neighbor’s  children  ? — I have  given  them  some. 
— Wilt  thou  give  me  some  wine  ? — I have  given  you  some  already. — 
\Wien  didst  thou  give  me  some  ? — I gave  you  some  this  morning. — 
Wilt  thou  give  me  some  now  ? — I cannot  give  you  any ; I have  none 
--Has  the  American  lent  you  money  ? — He  has  lent  me  some. — Has 
the  Italian  ever  lent  you  money  ? — He  has  never  lent  me  any. — Is  ho 
poor  ? — He  is  not  poor ; he  is  richer  than  you. — Will  you  lend  me  a 
dollar  ? — I will  lend  you  two. — Has  he  come  earlier  than  I ? — At  what 
o’clock  did  you  come? — I came  at  half-past  five. — He  has  come 
earlier  than  you 

110. 

Has  the  concert  taken  place  ?— It  has  taken  place.— Has  it  taken 
place  late  ? — It  has  taken  place  early. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At  twelve. 
—At  what  o’clock  has  the  ball  taken  place  ? — It  has  taken  place  at 
midnight. — Does  your  brother  learn  to  write? — He  does  learn. — Does 
he  know  how  (Lesson  XXVII.)  to  read  ? — He  does  not  know  how  yet. 
—Do  you  know  the  Frenchman  whom  I know  ? — I do  not  know  tlie 
one  wliom  you  know,  but  I know  another. — Does  your  friend  know 
the  same  merchants  as  I know  ? — He  does  not  know  the  same,  but  la 


134 


THIRTY-FIFTH  LESSOiy. 


know«i  Others. — Have  you  ever  had  your  coat  mended  ? — I nave  some 
times  had  it  mended. — Hast  thou  had  thy  bat  or  thy  shoe  mended  ?— 

I have  neither  had  the  one  nor  the  other  mended. — Have  you  had  youi 
coats  or  your  gloves  washed  ? — I have  neitlier  had  the  one  nor  the 
other  vashed. — Has  your  father  had  any  thing  made  ? — He  has  not  had 
any  thing  made. — Have  you  looked  for  my  gloves  ? — I have  looked  for 
tliem. — Where  nave  you  looked  for  them  ? — I have  iooKed  for  therr 
upon  the  bed,  and  have  found  them  under  (it.) — Have  yon  found  my 
letters  in  the  hearth  ? — I have  found  them  in  it. — Have  you  found  rav 
pantaloons  under  the  bed  ? — I have  found  them  upon  it,  (dla.) 


THIRTY-FIFTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Trigesima  quinta. 


To  ‘promise y promised. 

To  learuy  learned. 

Do  you  promise  me  to  come  ? 

I do  promise  you,  (it  to  you.) 

What  have  you  promised  the  man  ? 

I have  promised  him  nothing. 

Have  you  ever  learned  Spanish  ? 

I learned  it  formerly. 

I have  learned  it  formerly. 

To  wear  out. 

To  refuse. 

To  spell. 

How  7 
Well. 

Badly 

So.  Thus. 

So  80. 

In  this  manner 

Hew  has  your  brother  written  his 
exercise  ? 

He  ha*  written  it  well 


Prometer,  prometido 

Aprender,  aprenUido 

I Me  promete  V.  venir  ? 

Se  lo  prometo  d V. 

I Que  ha  prometido  V.  al  homhre  ? 
Yo  no  le  he  prometido  nada. 

Nada  le  he  prometido. 

[Ha  aprendido  V.  alguna  vez  e 
espanol  ? 

Yo  le  he  aprendido  en  otro  tiempo. 


Usar.  Gastar.  Consumir 
Rehusar.  Negar  * 

Deletrear. 

I Como? 

Bien. 

Mai. 

Asi, 

t De  suerte  que. 

Asi  asi. 

t De  este  modo.  De  esta  manera 
Asi. 

I Como  ha  escrito  su  tema  su  her 
mano  de  V.  ? 

Le  ha  escrito  bien. 


To  dry 
To  put  to  dry 


Secar. 

Poner  d secar.  Hacer  secar. 


THIRTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


135 


Do  you  put  your  coat  to  dry  ? 

’ do  put  it  to  dry 

The  coat. 

How  old  ? 

llcw  old  are  you  ? 

1 am  twelve  years  old. 

!Iow  old  is  vour  brother  ? 

Ho  is  thirteen  years  old 


( I Pone  V.  d secar  su  cas^ca  ? 

\ I flace  V.  secar  su  casaca  ? 

Yo  la  pongo  d secar,  (or  la  hago  eecai.) 
La  casaca,  (fern.) 

I Que  edad  ? i Cuanios  aiios  ? 

S t I Que  edad  tiene  V.  ? 

( f I Cuantos  ahos  tiene  V.  ? 

I t Tengo  doce  anos. 
r t i Cuantos  anos  tiene  su  hermano 
) de  V.  ? 

f t ^ Que  edad  tiene  su  hermano  de  V t 
1 Tiene  trece  ahos. 


Almost 

He  is  almost  fourteen  years  old 


CasL 

Tiene  casi  catorce  ahos. 


About . Nearly. 

I am  about  fifteen  years  old. 

He  is  nearly  eighteen  years  old. 

Something  like. 

He  is  something  like  thirty. 


Cerca  de.  Poco  mas  6 menos  de. 
f Tengo  cerca  de  quince  ahos. 
t Tiene  diez  y ocho  ahos  poco  mas  6 
menos. 

Como  unos,  (unas,  fern.) 
t lil  tiene  como  unos  treinta  anos. 


Hardly. 

Not  quite. 

1 am  not  quite  sixteen  years  old. 

Art  thou  older  than  thy  brother? 

am  younger  than  he. 

Old,  (in  years.) 


Apenas, 

No — todavia.  Todavia  no 
t No  tengo  todavia  diez  y seis  ahos. 
t Todavia  no  tengo  diez  y seis  ahos 


1 1 Eres  mayor  que  tu  hermano  ? 

1 1 Eres  de  mas  edad  que  tu  her 
mano  ? 

(t  Soy  menor. 

t Soy  de  mdnos  edad  que  dl. 

Soy  mas  jhven  que  el. 
t Tengo  menos  ahos  que  ^1. 

Viejo.  Anciano. 

Avanzado  en  ahos,  (or  edad.) 


There  is.  There  are. 
There  has  been. 

There  have  been. 


I Hay. 

> Ha  habido,  (past  participle.) 


How  many  shillings  are  there  in  one  ^ t Cuantos  reales  hay  en  un  peso  ? 
dollar  ? \ i Cuantos  reales  tiene  un  peso  J 


136 


THIRTY -FIFTH  LESSON. 


Eight 

There  are  two  sixpences  in  one  shil 
ling 


Ocho 

Hay  dos  medios  en  un  real, 
t Un  real  tiene  dos  medios  (reulos.j 


To  understand 
To  hear 

To  wait  for  To  expect. 
To  lose* 


Entender  * 2.  Comprender  2. 

Oir  * 3.  Sentir  * 3 (In  speaking 
of  noise  , 

Aguardar.  Esperar 
Perder  * 2. 


Do  you  understand  me  ? 

I do  understand  you. 

Have  you  understood  the  man  ? 

I have  understood  him. 

I hear  you,  but  I do  not  understand 
you. 


I Me  comprende  V ? 

I Me  entiende  V.  ? 

Yo  le  comprendo  d V 
Yo  le  entiendo  d V. 

I Ha  entendido  V.  al  hombre  ? 

Yo  le  he  comprendido. 

Yo  oigo  d V.,  pero  no  le  comprorido, 
(or  entiendo.) 


The  noise. 

The  wind. 

Ihe  noise  (roaring)  of  the  wind. 

Do  you  hear  the  roaring  of  the 
wind  ? 

I do  hear  it. 

To  bark. 

The  barking. 

Have  you  heard  the  barking  of  the 
dogs? 

I have  heard  it. 


Some  one.  Somebody. 
Do  you  wait  for  somebody  ? 
Do  you  expect  some  one  ? 

Do  you  expect  something? 
Do  you  wait  for  my  brother  ? 
I am  waiting  for  him. 

Do  you  expect  some  friends  7 
I do  expect  some  here. 


El  ruido.  El  estruendo.  El  estrepito 

El  viento. 

El  susurro  (or  el  bramido  el  estru- 
endo) del  viento. 

iOye  V.  (oi  siente  V,)  el  susurm 
del  viento  ? 

Si,  le  oigo. 

Si,  le  siento. 

Ladrar  1. 

El  ladrido. 

i Ha  oido  V los  ladridos  de  los  pei 
ros  ? 

Los  he  oido. 


Alguien.  Alguno. 

I Aguarda  V.  d alguien,  (d  aijiuno?) 
I Espera  V.  d alguien,  (d  alguno?) 

^ Espera  V.  algo,  (alguna  cosa'^) 

I Aguarda  V.  d mi  hermano  ? 

Yo  le  estoy  aguardando. 

I Espera  V.  d algunos  amigos  ? 

Yo  aguardo  d algunos  aqui. 


How  much  };as  your  brother  lost 

He  has  lost  about  one  dollar. 

I have  lost  more  than  he. 


I Cuanto  ha  perdido  su  hermano  de 
V.? 

Ha  perdido  cerca  de  an  peso. 

Yo  he  perdido  mas  que  ^1. 


THIRTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


137 


To  remain* 

The  nobleman 

Noblemen. 

Gentle.  Pretty- 
Gentle.  Tame. 

Where  has  the  nobleman  remained 
He  has  remained  at  home. 

Have  you  remained  with  him 
With. 

With  me. 

Nobody.  No  one. 

What,  (that  which.) 

The  pauper. 


I Quedarse  1,  (reflective.) 

C El  hidalgo 
< El  gentilhombre. 

^ El  noble. 

Hidalgos.  Gentilhombres  Nojlea 
Gracioso.  Bonito.  Benigno. 
Manso,  (in  speaking  of  animals.) 

? I Donde  se  ha  quedado  el  hidalgo  ? 
Se  ha  quedado  en  casa. 

I Se  ha  quedado  V.  con  ? 

Con. 

Conmigo. 

Nadie.  Ninguno 
Lo  que. 

El  pobro. 


EXERCISES.. 

111. 

Do  you  promise  me  to  come  to  the  ball  ? — I do  promise  you. — Have 
I promised  you  any  thing  ? — You  have  promised  me  nothing. — What 
nas  my  father  promised  you  ? — He  has  promised  me  a fine  book. — 
Have  you  received  it  ? — Not  yet. — Do  you  give  me  what  (lo  que)  you 
have  promised  me  ? — I give  it  you. — Has  your  friend  received  muc. 
money  ? — He  has  received  but  little. — How  much  has  he  received  ? — 
He  has  received  but  one  dollar. — How  much  money  have  you  given 
to  my  son  ? — I have  given  him  thirty  shillings. — Have  you  not  promised 
him  more  ? — I have  given  him  what  I promised  him. — Have  you  any 
Spanish  money  ? — I have  some. — What  money  have  you  ? — I have 
dollars,  shillings,  and  farthings. — How  many  sixpences  are  there  in  a 
shilling  ? — There  are  two  sixpences  in  a shilling. — Have  you  any  six- 
pences ? — I have  a few. — How  many  sixpences  are  there  in  a shilling  ? 
— There  are  two. — And  how  many  are  there  in  a dollar  ? — Sixteen. — 
Will  you  lend  me  your  coat  ? — I will  lend  it  you,  but  it  is  v/orn  out. — 
Are  your  shoes  worn  out  ? — They  are  not  worn  out. — Will  you  lend 
them  to  my  brother  ? — I will  lend  them  to  him. — To  whom  have  you 
lent  your  hat  ? — I have  not  lent  it ; I have  given  it  to  somebody.— To 
whom  have  you  given  it  ? — I have  given  it  to  a pauper. 


112. 

Does  your  little  brother  already  know  how  to  spell  ? — He  does 
know. — Does  he  spell  well  ? — He  does  spell  well. — How  has  youi 
little  boy  spelt  ? — He  has  spelt  so-so. — How  have  your  children 
written  their  exercises  ? — They  have  written  them  badly. — Has  my 


138 


THIRTY-FIFTH  LESSOH. 


neighbor  lent  you  his  gloves  ? — He  has  refused  to  lend  them  to  me.— 
Do  you  know  Spanish  ? — I know  it. — Does  your  son  speak  Italian  ?— 
He  speaks  it  well. — How  do  your  friends  speak  ? — They  do  not  speak 
badly. — Do  they  listen  to  what  you  tell  them  ? — They  listen  to  it.~ 
How  hast  thou  learned  English  ? — I have  learned  it  in  this  manner.— 
Have  you  called  me  ? — 1 have  not  called  you,  but  I have  called  youi 
brother. — Is  he  come  ? — Not  yet. — Where  did  you  wet  your  clothes  ? 
—I  wetted  them  in  the  garden. — Will  you  put  them  to  dry  ? — I have 
already  put  them  to  dry. — Does  the  nobleman  wish  to  give  me  any 
thing  to  do  ? — He  wishes  to  give  you  something  to  do. — How  old  arc 
you  ? — 1 am  hardly  eighteen  years  old. — How  old  is  your  brother  ? — 
He  is  twenty  years  old. — Are  you  as  old  as  he  ? — I am  not  so  old. — 
How  old  art  thou  ? — I am  about  twelve  years  old. — Am  I younger  thar. 
you  ? — I do  not  know. — How  old  is  our  neighbor? — He  is  not  quite 
thirty  years  old. — Are  our  friends  as  young  as  we? — Tney  are  older 
than  we. — How  old  are  they  ? — The  one  is  nineteen,  and  the  other  is 
twenty  years  old. — Is  your  father  as  old  as  mine  ? — He  is  older 
than  yours. 

113. 

Have  you  read  my  book  ? — I have  not  quite  read  it  yet. — Has  your 
friend  finished  his  books  ? — He  has  almost  finished  them. — Do  you 
understand  me  ? — I do  understand  you. — Does  the  Frenchman  under- 
stand us  ? — He  does  understand  us. — Do  you  understand  what  we  are 
telling  you  ? — We  do  understand  it. — Dost  thou  understand  Spanish  ? 
— I do  not  understand  it  yet,  but  I am  learning  it. — Do  we  understand 
the  English  ? — We  do  not  understand  them. — Do  the  English  under- 
stand us  ? — They  do  understand  us. — Do  we  understand  them  ? — We 
hardly  understand  them. — Do  you  hear  any  noise  ? — 1 hear  nothing. — 
Have  you  heard  the  roaring  of  the  wind  ? — I have  heard  it. — What  do 
you  hear? — I hear  the  barking  of  the  dogs. — Whose  (Lesson  XXIX.) 
dog  is  this  ? — It  is  the  dog  of  the  Scotchman. — Has  your  father  lost 
as  much  money  as  I ? — He  has  lost  more  than  you. — How  much  hav^c 
I lost  ? — You  have  hardly  lost  a dollar. — Did  your  friends  remain  at 
the  ball  ? — They  remained  there. — Do  you  know  as  much  as  the 
English  physician  ? — I do  ncit  know  as  much  as  he. — How  many  books 
have  you  read  ? — I have  almost  read  two. — Do  you  wait  for  any  one  ? 
—I  wait  for  no  one. — Are  you  waiting  for  the  man  whom  I saw  this 
morning  ? — I am  waiting  for  him. — Art  thou  waiting  for  thy  book  ? — 
I am  waiting  for  it. — Do  you  expect  your  father  this  evening  ? — I dc 
i!‘xpect  him — ^Do  you  expect  some  friends  ? — I do  expect  some. 


THIRTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


139 


THIRTY-SIXTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Trigesima  ^exta. 


To  heat  Beaten. 
Tc  bite.  Bitten. 


{Golpear  1.  Golpeado. 
Apulear  1.  Apaleado 
t Dar  * 1.  Dado. 
Pegar  1,  (familiar.) 

1 Morder  ^ 2.  Murdido 


Why? 

Why  do  you  beat  the  dog? 

Because. 

I beat  it,  because  it  has  bitten  me. 


I Porque  ? 

^ Porque  golpea  V el  perro  ? 

Porque. 

Le  golpeo  (le  doy)  porque  me  ha 
mordido. 


To  owe.  Owed. 

How  much  do  you  owe  me  ? 

•*  owe  you  fifty  dollars. 

How  much  does  this  man  owe  you  ? 
He  owes  me  six  shillings. 

Do  our  neighbors  owe  as  much  as 
we? 

We  owe  more  than  they. 

How  much  dost  thou  owe  ? 

Two  hundred  dollars. 

Five  hundred  dollars. 

Oue  thousand  dollars. 

A hundred.  One  hundred. 


Deher  2.  Dehido. 

I Cuanto  me  debe  V 1 
Yo  le  debo  d V.  cincuenta  pesos,  (or 
duros.) 

I Cuanto  debe  d V.  este  hombre  ? 

El  me  debe  seis  reales. 

I Deben  nuestros  vecinos  tanto  conio 
nosotros  ? 

Debemos  mas  que  ellos 
I Cuanto  debes  tii  ? 

Doscientos  pesos. 

Quinientos  pesos. 

Mil  pesos. 

Ciento. 


01)3.  CientOf  (hundred,>  when  immediately  followed  by  a noun,  dro|»s 
the  last  syllable ; as,  There  are  places  for  one  hundred  men,  and  for  one 
hundred  women — Hay  plazas  para  cien  homhreSy  para  cien  mujcres.  The 
numeral  adjectives  doscientos^  &c.,  retain  the  syllable,  but  change  its 
lermination  to  agree  with  the  noun  they  refer  to ; as,  doscientos  bueyes, 
doscientas  vacas. 


To  have  to 
To  he  to. 

I am  to. 

Where  are  you  to  go  this  morning  ? 

I am  iu  gu  to  tho  warenouse. 

Is  your  brother  to  come  here  to-day  ? 

Soon.  Shortly. 

He  is  to  come  here  soon 


Tener  que.  Deher. 

Haber  de. 

He  de. 

t ^ A donde  ha  de  ir  V.  esta  man  ana  ? 
•f  He  de  ir  al  almacen. 
t I Ha  de  venir  hoy  aqui  su  hermanc 
de  V.? 

Pronto.  LuegOfprontamente. 

( t 6l  ha  de  venir  aqui  pronto. 


140 


THIRTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


To  return,  (to  come  back.) 

A-t  what  o’clock  do  you  return  from 
market  ? 

I return  at  twelve  o’clock. 

Does  the  servant  return  early  from 
the  warehouse  1 

[la  returns  at  six  o’clock  in  the 
morning. 

At  nine  o’clock  in  the  morning. 

At  five  o’clock  in  the  evening 

At  eleven  o’clock  at  night 


! Volver  * 2.  Vuelto. 

I A que  hora  vuelve  V.  del  mercaco 
(de  la  plaza?) 

Yo  vuelvo  d,  las  doce 
I Vuelve  el  criado  temprano  drj  m 
macen  ? 

V uelve  a las  seis  de  la  manana 

t A las  jiueve  de  la  manana. 
t A las  cinco  de  la  tarde 
t A las  once  de  la  noche 


How  long  7 
During. 


For,  (relating  to  time.) 
EIow  long  has  he  remained  there  ; 
A minute. 

An  hour. 

A day. 

A month. 

A year. 

The  summer. 

The  winter. 

During  the  summer. 

For  one  month. 


To  live,  ) 
To  remain,  ) 
To  reside. 


To  dwell. 


I I Cuanto  tiempo  ? 

S Durante. 

Mientras,  todo  el,  toda  la. 

For.  Durante. 

[Cuanto  tiempo  se  ha  quedadt.  atia 
Un  minuto. 

Una  hora,  (fern.) 

Un  dia. 

Un  mes 
Un  ano. 

El  estio.  El  verano 
El  invierno 
Durante  el  verano. 

For  un  mes. 


5 


Vivir,  ) 
Parar,  ^ 
Residir. 


Morar 


Where  do  you  live  ? 

I live  in  Troy-street,  number  one 
hundred  and  twenty-two. 

Where  did  your  brother  live  ? 

Where  has  your  brother  lived  ? 

He  lived  in  Rivoli-street — he  has  lived 
in  Rivoli-street  — number  forty- 
nine. 

Dost  thou  live  at  thy  brother’s  house  ? 

I do  not  live  at  his,  but  at  my  father’s 
house. 

Does  your  friend  still  live  whore  I 
have  lived  ? 

fie  liven  no  longer  where  you  lived. 

He  lives  no  longer  where  you  have 
lived. 


I En  donde  vive  V.  ? 

Yo  vivo  en  la  calle  de  Troya,  mlmor*' 
ciento  vointidos. 

I En  donde  ha  vivido  su  hcrmano  de 
V.? 

Ha  vivido  en  la  calle  de  Rivoli,  mi 
mero  cuarenta  y nueve. 

[Vives  tii  en  casa  de  tu  hermano? 

Yo  no  paro  en  la  casa  de  mi  herma- 
no, pero  vivo  en  casa  do  mi  padre 

[Vive  todavia  su  amigo  de  V en 
donde  yo  he  vivido  ? 

Ya  no  vive  mas  en  donde  V ha 
vivido 


THIRTY-SIXTH  LESSON 


141 


No  longer. 

Do  you  speak  to  that  man  ? 

[ speak  to  him  no  longer. 

(low  long  have  you  been  speaking  to 
that  man  ? 

I have  spoken  to  him  for  two  hours. 
Did  you  remain  long  with  my  father? 
Have  you  remained  long  with  my 
father  ? 

1 remained  with  him  an  hour. 

Long,  (relating  to  time.) 

Not  long,  (relating  to  time.) 
The  number. 

Other.  Others. 

00  you  see  the  men  whom  I see  ? 

1 do  not  see  those  whom  you  see, 
but  I see  others. 


Ya  no — mas. 

I Habla  V.  d ese  hombre 
Ya  (yo)  no  le  hablo  mas. 

^Cuauto  tiempo  ha  estado  V na 
blando  d,  este  hombre  ? 

Yo  le  he  hablado  durante  dos  hoi  as 

I Ha  parado  V.  largo  (or  mucho) 
tiempo  en  casa  de  mi  padre  ? 

t Me  detuve  una  hoia  en  su  casa. 
Largo  tiempo.  Mucho  tiempo. 

No  mucho  (largo)  tiempo. 

El  numero. 

Otro.  Otros. 

[ Ve  V.  d los  hombres  que  yc  reo  1 
Yo  no  veo  d los  que  V vd,  pero  veo 
I d otros. 


EXERCISES. 

114. 

Why  do  you  not  drink  ? — I do  not  drink  because  I am  not  thirsty. — 
Why  do  you  pick  up  this  nail  ? — I pick  it  up  because  I want  it. — Wh^ 
do  you  lend  money  to  this  man  ? — I lend  him  money  because  he  wants 
some. — Why  does  your  brother  study  ? — He  studies,  because  he  wishes 
to  learn  Spanish. — Has  your  cousin  drunk  already  ? — He  has  not  yet 
drunk,  because  he  has  not  yet  been  thirsty. — Does  the  servant  show 
you  the  floor  which  he  sweeps  ? — He  does  not  show  me  that  which  he 
sweeps  now,  but  that  which  he  swept  (he  has  swept)  yesterday. — 
Why  do  you  love  that  man  ? — I love  him,  because  he  is  good. — Why 
does  your  neighbor  beat  his  dog  ? — Because  it  has  bitten  his  boy. — 
Why  do  our  friends  love  us  ? — They  love  us  because  we  are  good. — 
Why  do  you  bring  me  wine  ? — I bring  you  some  because  you  are 
thirsty. — WTiy  does  the  sailor  drink  ? — He  drinks  because  he  is  thirsty. 
— Do  you  see  the  sailor  who  is  in  the  ship  ? — I do  not  see  the  one  who 
is  in  the  ship,  but  the  one  who  is  in  the  market. — Do  you  read  the 
books  which  my  father  has  given  you  ? — I do  read  them. — Do  you 
understand  them  ? — I understand  them  so-so. — Do  you  know  the 
Italians  whom  we  know  ? — We  do  not  know  those  whom  you  know, 
but  we  know  others. — Does  the  shoemaker  mend  the  shoes  which 
vou  have  sent  him  ? — ^He  does  not  mend  them,  because  tl  ley  arc 
vorn  out. 


142 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


115. 


Is  your  servant  returned  from  market  ?~He  is  not  yet  returned.— 
How  long  do  you  intend  to  remain  at  the  ball  ? — I intend  to  remain 
there  a few  minutes. — How  long  did  the  Frenchman  remain  with  you  ? 
— He  remained  with  me  for  two  hours. — How  long  did  your  brothers 
remain  in  town,  (Ja  ciudad  ?) — They  remained  there  (en  ella)  during 
the  winter. — Do  you  intend  to  remain  long  with  us  ? — I intend  to 
remain  with  you  during  the  summer. — How  much  do  I owe  you  ? — 
You  do  not  owe  me  much. — How  much  do  you  owe  your  tailor? — 
I owe  him  eighty  dollars. — How  much  dost  thou  owe  thy  shoemaker  ? 
— I owe  him  already  eighty-five  shillings. — Do  I owe  you  any  thing  ? — 
You  owe  me  nothing. — How  much  does  the  Englishman  owe  vou  ? — 
He  owes  me  more  than  you. — Do  the  English  owe  as  much  as  the 
Spaniards  ? — Not  quite  so  much. — Do  I owe  you  as  much  as  my 
brother? — You  owe  me  more  than  he. — Do  our  friends  owe  you  as 
much  as  we  ? — They  owe  me  less  than  you. — How  much  do  they 
owe  you  ? — They  owe  me  two  hundred  and  fifty  dollars. — How  much 
do  we  owe  you  ? — You  owe  me  three  hundred  dollars. 


Why  do  you  give  money  to  the  merchant  ? — I give  him_some,  be- 
cause he  has  sold  me  something. — Where  are  you  to  go  ? — I am  to  go 
to  the  market. — Is  your  friend  to  come  hither  to-day  ? — He  is  to  come 
hither. — When  is  he  to  come  hither? — He  is  to  come  hither  soon. — 
When  are  our  sons  to  go  to  the  play  ? — They  are  to  go  (there)  to-night. 
— When  are  they  to  return  (from  it  ?) — They  are  to  return  from  it  at 
half-past  ten. — When  are  you  to  go  to  the  physician  ? — I am  to  go  to 
him  at  ten  o’clock  at  night. — When  is  your  son  to  return  from  the 
painter’s  ? — He  is  to  return  from  him  at  five  o’clock  In  the  evening. — 
Where  do  you  live  ? — I live  m Rivoli-street,  number  forty-seven. — 
Where  does  your  father  live  ? — He  lives  at  his  friend’s  house. — Where 
do  your  brothers  live? — They  live  in  jWilliam-street,  number  one 
nundred  and  twenty. — Dost  thou  live  at  thy  brother’s  house  ? — I live 
at  his  house. — Where  does  he  live  at  present  ? — He  lives  at  his  father’s 
house. — Do  you  still  live  in  Broadway? — Yes,  Sir. — ^Does  your  friend 
live  in  John-street  ? — No,  Sir. 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Trigesima  scptima. 


116. 


How  long  ? 


Till  Until 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.  143 


Till  twelve  o’clock,  (till  noon.) 
Till  to-morrow. 

Till  the  day  after  to-morrow 
Till  Sunday 
Till  Monday. 

Till  this  evening. 

Till  evening. 

Until  morning. 

Until  the  next  day. 

Until  that  day. 

Until  that  moment. 

Till  now.  Hitherto 
Until  then. 

Then. 


' Ilasta  medio  dia,  (las  doce  del  dia.) 
Hasta  manana. 

Hasta  pasado  manana 
Hasta  el  Domingo. 

Hasta  el  Lunes 
Hasta  esta  tarde, 

Hasta  la  tarde. 

Hasta  la  manana. 

Hasta  el  dia  siguiente 
Hasta  aquel  dia. 

Hasta  aquel  memento 
Hasta  ahora.  Hasta  aqut  ^ 

I Hasta  entdnces. 

' Ent6nces 


Tuesday.  Wednesday. 
Thursday.  Friday 
Saturday. 


El  Miirtes.  El  Midrcoles 
El  Jueves.  El  Viernes. 
El  Sdbado. 


Ohs.  A.  The  names  of  the  days  of  the  week,  months,  and  seasons  of 
(he  year,  are  of  the  masculine  gender,  except  la  primacera,  the  spring, 
which  is  feminine.  ^ 


Till  my  return. 

Till  I return. 

Till  my  brother’s  return. 

Till  my  brother  returns. 

Till  four  o’clock  in  the  morning 
Till  midnight,  (twelve  o’clock  at 
night.) 

The  return,  (or  .returning — corrlihg 
back.y 


Hasta  mi  vuelta. 
t Hasta  que  yo  vuelva. 

Hasta  la  vuelta  de  mi  Lermano. 

t Hasta  las  cuatro  de  la  manana. 
Hasta  media  noche,  (las  doce  de  1& 
noche.) 

La  vuelta,  (fern.) 


How  long  did  you  remain  at  my 
father’s  house  H 

I remained  at  his  house  till  eleven 
o’clock  at  night. 

One.  People.  They.  Any  one. 


t I Hasta  que  hora  se  ha  quedadr- 
(ha  estado)  V.  en  casa  de  mi 
padre  ? 

Yo  me  he  quedado  (yo  he  estado) 
hasta  las  once  de  la  noche. 

Se  ('or  a verb  in  the  third  person.) 


Ohs.  B.  They,  people,  any^one,  one,  not  referring  to  any  person  already 
mentioned,  but  used  in  a general  and  unlimited  sense,  are  rendered  by  se, 
translating  the  verb  In  the  third  person  singular,  or  by  the  third  person 
plural  of  the  verb  without  any  pronoun.  One  may  also  be  translated 
as,  One  is  not  always  master  of  his  passions — Uno  no  es  siempre  duenj  de 
9US  acciones, 


144 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


Have  they  brought  my  shoes? 
They  have  brought  them. 
They  have  not  brought  them. 

What  have  they  said  ? 

They  have  said  nothing. 
What  have  they  done  ? 

They  have  done  nothing. 


To  he  willing,  (to  wish.) 
Been  willing,  (wished.) 
Have  they  been  willing  to  mend  my 
coat  ? 

They  have  not  been  willing  to  mend 

it. 


To  he  able,  (can.) 

Been  able,  (could.) 
Have  they  been  able  to  find 
books  ? 

They  could  not  find  them 

Can  they  find  them  now  ? 

One  cannot  find  them. 

They  cannot  find  them 
Can  you  read,  (are  you  able?) 

I cannot  read,  (I  am  not  able.) 


I Han  traido  mis  zanatos  ? 
Los  han  traido. 

No  los  han  traido. 

I Que  se  ha  drcno  ? 

^ Que  han  dicho? 

Nada  se  ha  dicho. 

Nada  han  dicho. 

I Que  se  ha  hecho  ? 

I Que  han  hecho  ? 

Nada  se  ha  hecho. 

Nada  han  hecho. 


Querer  * 2. 

Querido. 

^ I Han  querido  remendar  mi  veslido  1 
^ I Han  querido  componer  mi  vestido? 

I No  han  querido  remendarle,  (con. 

I ponerle.) 


( Poder  * 2.  Podido. 

\ Saber,  Sahido. 

the  ( t ^ Se  han  podido  hallar  los  librosV 
) I Han  podido  hallar  los  libros 
< t No  se  han  podido  hallar. 

( No  han  podido  hallarlos. 

^ t ^ Se  pueden  hallar  ahora  ? 

( I Pueden  hallarlos  ahora  ? 

( No  se  pueden  hallar. 

( No  pueden  hallarlos. 

I t I Sabe  V.  leer  ? 

1 t Yo  no  sc  leer. 


They,  (meaning  one.)  One. 

Can  they  do  what  they  wish  ? 

Can  one  do  what  he  wishes  ? 

They  do  what  they  can,  but  not 
what  they  wdsh. 

One  does  what  he  can,  but  not  what 
ho  wishes. 


I i/no,  (in  a general  unlimited  sense ; 

I I Puede  hacer  uno  lo  que  quiere  ? 

^ Hacen  lo  que  pueden,  pero  no  lo  que 
quieren. 

Se  hace  lo  que  se  puede,  pero  no  lo 
que  se  quiere. 

Uno  hace  lo  que  puede,  pero  no  lo 
que  quiere. 


What  is  said  new  ? 
Nothing  new  is  said. 
Wine  is  sold  here. 
Spanish  is  spoken  here. 


t I Que  se  dice  de  nuevo  { 
t No  se  dice  nada  nuevo,  (de  nuevo.' 
t Aqm  se  vende  vino, 
t Aquf  se  habla  Espanol 


THIRTY -SE  ;ENTH  LESSON. 


145 


Obs  C.  To  form  these  tiiid  similar  sentences,  in  which  a p&ssivo  verb  ia 
English  is  made  use  of,  the  Spaniards  use  the  reflective  pronoun  se  and  a 
?erb  in  the  third  person. 


Something  new. 
Any  thing  new. 
Nothing  new. 

Not  any  thing  new. 
New, 

My  new  coat. 
My  new  friend. 

To  brush 
This  me  man 
Those  fine  trees 


Algo  (de)  nuevo 

Nada  ^de)  nuevo 
Nuevo 

Mi  vestido  nuevo. 

Mi  nuevo  amigo. 
Acepillar,  Acepillad^. 
Este  hermoso  hombre. 
Aquellos  hermosos  drboles. 


Do  they  believe  that  I 
They  do  not  believe  it 
Do  they  speak  of  that  ? 
They  do  speak  of  it 
They  do  not  speak  of  it 


I Se  cree  eso  ? i Cteeii  eso  ? 

No  se  cree  eso.  No  lo  creen. 

I Se  habla  de  eso  ? 

Si,  se  habla  de  ello. 

No  se  habla  de  ello. 

(See  Lessons  XX.,  XX VI., Obs.  E, 
and  Obs.,  Less.  XXXIII ) 


Thread. 

Father  and  son. 

French  and  Italian. 

01  s.  D.  Y (and)  changes  into  e 


Hilo. 

Padre  6 hi  jo. 

Frances  6 Italiano. 
before  nouns  beginning  with  t or  ht. 


EXERCISES. 

117. 

How  long  have  you  been  writing  ? — I have  been  writing  until  mid- 
night.— How  long  did  I work  ? — You  worked  (have  worked)  till  four 
o’clock  in  the  morning. — How  long  did  my  brother  remain  with  you  ? 
— He  remained  with  me  until  evening. — How  long  hast  thou  been 
working  ? — I have  been  working  till  now. — Hast  thou  still  long  {largo 
tiempo)  to  write  ? — I have  to  write  till  the  day  after  to-morrow. — ^Has 
the  physician  still  long  to  work  ? — He  has  to  work  till  to-morrow. — 
Am  I to  remain  long  here  ? — You  are  to  remain  here  till  Sunday. — la 
my  brother  to  remain  long  with  you  ? — He  is  to  remain  with  us  till 
Monday. — How  long  are  we  to  work  ? — You  are  to  work  till  the  day 
after  to-morrow. — Have  you  still  long  to  speak  ? — I have  still  an  hour 
to  apeak. — ^Did  you  speak  long  ? — I spoke  (have  spoken)  till  the  next 
day. — ^Did  you  remain  long  in  my  counting-house  ? — I remained  in  il 


146 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


liil  this  moment. — Have  you  still  long  to  live  at  the  Frenchman's 
house  ? — I have  still  long  to  live  at  his  house. — How  long  have  you 
still  to  live  at  his  house  ? — Till  Tuesday. — Has  the  servant  brushed 
my  coats  ? — He  has  brushed  them. — Has  he  swept  the  floor  ? — He  has 
swept  it. — How  long  did  he  remain  here  ? — Till  noon. — Does  youi 
friend  still  live  with  you  ? — He  lives  with  me  no  longer. — Have  vor 
remained  in  the  garden  till  now  ? — I have  remained  there  till  new. 

118. 

What  do  you  do  in  the  morning  ? — 1 read. — And  wnat  do  you  do 
tlien  ? — I breakfast  and  work. — Do  you  breakfast  before  you  read  ? — 
No,  Sir,  I read  before  I breakfast. — Dost  thou  play  instead  of  work- 
ing ? — I work  instead  of  playing. — What  do  you  do  in  the  evening  ? — 
I work. — What  hast  thou  done  this  evening  ? — I have  brushed  youi 
clothes,  and  have  gone  to  the  theatre. — Didst  thou  remain  long  at  the 
theatre  ? — I remained  (there)  but  a few  minutes. — Are  you  willing  to 
wait  here  ? — How  long  am  I to  wait  ? — You  are  to  wait  till  my  father 
returns. — Has  anybod}^  come  ? — Somebody  has  come. — Have  you 
waited  for  me  long  ? — I have  waited  for  you  two  hours. — Have  you 
been  able  to  read  my  note? — I have  been  able  to  read  it. — Have 
you  understood  it  ? — I have  understood  it. — Have  you  shown  it  to  any 
one  ? — I have  shown  it  to  no  one. — Plave  they  brought  my  fine  clothes  ? 
— They  have  not  brought  them  yet. — Have  they  swept  my  floor  and 
brushed  my  clothes  ? — Yes,  Sir. — What  have  they  said  ? — They  have 
said  nothing. — What  have  they  done  ? — They  have  done  nothing.—  ^ 
Has  your  little  brother  been  spelling  ? — He  has  not  been  willing  to 
spell. — Has  the  merchant’s  boy  been  willing  to  work  ? — He  has  not 
been  willing. — What  has  he  been  willing  to  do? — He  has  not  been 
willing  to  do  any  thing. 

119. 

Has  the  shoemaker  been  able  to  mend  my  shoes  ? — He  has  not  teen 
able  to  mend  them. — Why  has  he  not  been  able  to  mend  them  ? — 
Because  he  has  had  no  time. — Have  they  (se)  been  able  to  find  my 
gold  buttons  ? — They  have  not  been  able  to  find  them. — Why  has  the 
tailor  not  mended  my  coat  ? — Because  he  has  no  good  thread. — Why 
have  you  beaten  the  dog  ? — Because  it  has  bitten  me. — Why  do  you 
drink  ? — Because  I am  thirsty. — What  have  they  wished  to  say  ? — 
They  have  not  wished  to  say  any  thing. — Have  they  said  any  thing 
new  ? — They  have  not  said  any  thing  new.^ — What  do  they  (se)  say 
new  in  the  market  ? — They  say  nothing  new  there. — Do  they  believe 
that  ? — They  do  not  believe  it. — Do  they  speak  of  that  ? — They  dc 
speak  of  it. — Do  they  speak  of  the  man  that  has  been  killed  ? — They 
do  not  speak  of  him. — Can  they  do  what  they  wish  ? — They  do  whal 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


. U7 


Jiey  can  ; but  tliey  do  not  what  they  wish.— What  have  they  orought  1 
—They  have  brought  your  new  coat. — Do  you  like  your  new  friends  1 
—I  do  like  them. — Is  Spanish  spoken  here  ? — Yes,  Sir,  Spanish, 
French,  and  Italian  are  spoken  here. — What  is  sold  here  ? — Spanish 
Dooks  are  sold  here.— What  is  said  new  ?— Nothing  new  is  said.-  Do 
•hey  not  say  that  the  city  (la  ciudad)  of  Mexico  has  been  .aken  1-^ 
Yes,  Sir,  they  say  so. 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.— jLeccion  Trigesima  ociava. 


How  far  ? 

Up  to.  .4.5  far  as. 
As  far  as  my  brother’s. 

As  far  as  here,  hither 
As  far  as  there,  thither 
As  far  as  London. 

As  far  as  Paris. 

1 1 Hasta  donde  ? 

; Hasta. 

Hasta  la  casa  de  mi  hermano. 
Hasta  aqui. 

Hasta  alld,.  Hasta  alii. 

Hasta  Londres. 

Hasta  Paris. 

To,  at,  or  in  Madrid. 
To,  at,  or  in  Cadiz. 

A'  Madrid.  En  Madrid 
A'  Cadiz.  En  Cadiz. 

To,  at,  or  in  Spain. 

To,  at,  or  in  England.  | 

A Espana.  En  Espaha 
A Inglaterra.  En  Inglaterr% 

As  far  as  England. 
As  far  as  Spain. 

As  far  as  France. 
As  far  as  Italy 

Hasta  Inglaterra. 
Hasta  Espana. 
Hasta  Francia. 
Hasta  Italia. 

As  far  as  my  house. 

As  far  as  the  warehouse. 

As  far  as  the  corner. 

s\s  far  as  the  end  of  the  road. 

As  far  as  the  middle  of  the  road 

Hasta  mi  casa. 

Hasta  el  almacen. 

Hasta  el  rincon,  (la  esquina.) 
Hasta  el  fin  del  camino. 
Hasta  el  medio  del  camino. 

Above,  or  up  stairs. 
Below,  or  down  stairs. 
As  far  as  above. 

.\s  far  as  below. 

Arriba. 

Abajo. 

Hasta  arriba. 
Hasta  abajo. 

This  side. 

That  side. 

On  this  side  of  the  road. 
On  that  side  of  the  road. 

De  este  lado  Por  este  lado. 

De  aquel  lado.  Por  aquel  lade, 
De  (por)  este  lado  del  camino. 
De  (por)  aquel  lado  del  camino. 

148  . 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


This  side  of  the  road. 
That  side  of  the  road. 


El  lado  de  acd  del  caniiiic 
Mas  acd  del  camiuo. 

El  lado  de  alld  del  camino. 
Mas  alia  del  camiuo 


Germany. 

America. 

Spain. 

Holland. 


La  Alemania. 
La  America. 
La  Espana. 
La  Holaiida. 


Obs.  A.  The  names  of  empires,  kingdoms,  states,  provinces,  cities,  &c., 
are  generally  feminine  when  they  terminate  in  a,  and  masculine  when  they 
end  in  other  letters ; as,  Spain  lays  in  the  south  of  Europe — Espana  esid 
situfida  al  sur  de  Europa,  But  when  they  refer  to  a common  noun,  such 
as  reino,  (kingdom,)  &c.,  they  are  masculine;  as.  The  United  States  cl 
America  are  prosperous — Los  Estados  Unidos  de  la  America  son  pros- 
peros. 

To  go  to  Spain.  | Ir  d Espana. 

^ ^ Venir  de  Francia. 

7 0 come,  to  return  from  France.  ^ Francia. 

Ohs.  B.  When  the  names  of  countries  are  governed  by  verbs  expressing 
lo  go  to,  to  coine  from,  to  return  to  or  from,  they  do  not  admit  the 
article. 


Do  you  intend  to  go  to  Spain  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I intend  to  go  (there)  in 
the  spring. 

Does  he  return  from  France  ? 

Vo,  Sir,  he  returns  from  Germany. 


I Piensa  V.  ir  d Espana  ? 

Si,  sehor,  yo  pienso  ir  en  la  prima 
vera,  (fern.) 

I V uelve  (dl)  de  Francia  ? 

No,  senor,  (dl)  vuelve  de  Alemania 


To  go  on  one  side. 

To  go  on  the  middle. 
The  middle,  half. 
The  well. 

The  cask. 

The  castle 


Ir  por  un  lado, 

Ir  por  el  medio 

El  medio.  La  mitad,  (la  media) 
El  pozo. 

El  barril.  El  tonel. 

El  Castillo. 


To  travel. 

To  travel  in,  {through.) 
Do  you  go  to  Paris  ? 

Do  you  travel  to  Paris  ? 

I travel  (I  go)  there. 

Is  he  gone  to  England  ? 

He  is  gone  there. 

How  far  is  he  gone  ? 

How  far  has  he  travelled  ? 
He  is  gone  as  far  as  Siberia. 


Viajar  1.  Caminar  1.  Ir  * 3. 
Viajar  en  {por.) 

i Va  V.  d Paris  ? 

I Si,  voy  alld.  Si,  voy  d Pa^’a. 

I i Ha  ido  el  d Inglaterra  1 
{ Si,  ha  ido  alld. 

Ha  ido  d Inglaterra. 

I Hasta  donde  ha  ido  ? 

I Hasta  donde  ha  viajado  7 
El  ha  ido  hasta  Siberia. 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


149 


To  steal. 

To  steal  something  from  some  one. 

Hare  they  stolen  your  hat  from  you  ? 
Fhey  have  stolen  it  from  mo. 

Has  the  man  stolen  the  books  from 
you? 

tie  has  stolen  them  from  me. 

^Vliat  have  they  stolen  from  you  ^ 

All. 

All  the  wine. 

All  the  books. 

All  the  men. 


Rohar  1.  Hurtar  1. 

Robar  algo  {algun.j  cosa)  d alguno. 
d uno. 

t i Lo  ban  robado  d V.  el  sombrero  1 
t Me  lo  han  robado. 

1 1 Te  ha  robado  los  libros  el  horo« 
bre  ? 

t El  me  los  ha  robado. 
t i Que  le  han  robado  d V ? 

Todo.  To  do  Si  (pi.) 

Todo  el  vino. 

Todos  los  libros. 

Todos  los  hombres. 


How  do  you  spell  this  word  ? 
How  is  this  word  written  ? 

It  is  written  thus. 

The  word. 

My  word.  This  word. 


( I Como  deletrea  V.  esta  palabra  ? 

t ^ Como  se  deletrea  esta  palabra? 
( t ^ Como  se  escribe  esta  palabra  ? 
t Se  escribe  asi.  De  esta  manera. 
La  palabra,  (fcm.) 

Mi  palabra.  Esta  palabra. 


To  dye.  To  color. 

To  dy©  black. 

To  dye  red 
To  dye  green. 

To  dye  blue. 

To  dye  yellow. 

Ohs.  C.  Adjectives  denoting  color 
My  blue  coat. 

His  new  watch. 

His  round  hat. 

This  white  hat. 

00  you  dye  your  coat  blue  ? 

1 dye  it  green. 

What  color  will  you  dye  your  coat? 

I will  dye  it  blue. 

The  dyer. 

To  get  dyed.  Got  dyed. 

What  color  have  you  had  your  hat 
dyed? 

I liave  got  it  dyed  white. 


Tehir  * 3.  TeTddOi  (past  part.'l 
Color  ar  1. 
t Tenir  de  negro. 

t Tehir  de  Colorado,  (de  encarnado  ) 
t Tehir  de  verde. 
t Tehir  de  azul. 
t Tehir  de  amarillo. 
or  shape  are  placed  after  the  noun. 
Mi  vestido  azul. 

Su  reloj  nuevo. 

Su  sombrero  redondo. 

Este  sombrero  bianco, 
t I Tine  V.  su  vestido  de  azul  ? 
t Yo  le  tiho  de  verde. 
t i De  que  color  quiero  V.  tenir  sa 
vestido  ? 

t Yo  le  quiero  tehir  de  azul 
El  tlntorero. 

t Hacer  tehir.  Hecho  tehir 
t Mandar  tehir.  Mandado  tehir 
I De  que  color  ha  hecho  V.  tehir  er 
sombrero  ? 

t Le  he  hecho  tehir  de  bianco. 


150 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  LESSOS. 


Red. 

Brown. 

Gray. 


Colorado.  Rojo.  Encamado 
Moreno.  Pardo  Caf4 
Pardo.  Gris 


Poor. 

The  stocking,  the  stockings. 
My  thread  stockings. 

The  spring. 


Pobre. 

La  media,  las  medias,  (feminine  ' 
Mis  medias  de  hilo. 

La  nrimavera,  (feminine ) 


EXERCISES. 

120. 

How  far  have  you  travelled  ? — I have  travelled  a^  far  as  Germany. 
- -Has  he  travelled  as  far  as  Italy  ? — He  has  travelled  as  far  as 
America. — How  far  have  the  Spaniards  gone  ? — They  have  gone  as 
far  as  London. — How  far  has  this  poor  man  come  ? — He  has  come  as 
far  as  here. — Has  he  come  as  far  as  your  house  ? — He  has  come  as 
far  as  my  father’s. — Have  they  stolen  any  thing  from  you  ? — They 
have  stolen  all  the  good  wine  from  me. — Have  they  stolen  any  thing 
from  your  father? — They  have  stolen  all  his  good  books  from  him. — 
Dost  thou  steal  any  thing  ? — I steal  nothing. — Hast  thou  ever  stolen 
any  thing  ? — I have  never  stolen  any  thing. — Have  they  stolen  your 
good  clothes  from  you  ? — They  have  stolen  them  from  me. — What 
have  they  stolen  from  me  ? — They  have  stolen  all  the  good  books  from 
you. — Have  tliey  ever  stolen  any  thing  from  us  ? — They  have  never 
stolen  any  thing  from  us. — How  far  do  you  wish  to  go  ? — I wish  to 
go  as  far  as  the  wood. — Have  you  gone  as  far  as  there  ? — I have 
not  gone  as  far  as  there. — How  far  does  your  brothei  wish  to  go  ? — 
He  wishes  to  go  as  far  as  the  end  of  that  road. — Where  art  thou  going  ? 
— I am  going  to  the  market. — How  far  are  we  going  ? — We  are  going 
as  far  as  the  theatre. — Are  you  going  as  far  as  the  well  ? — I am  going 
as  far  as  the  castle. — Has  the  carpenter  drunk  all  the  wine  ? — He  has 
drunk  it. — Has  your  little  boy  torn  all  his  books  ? — He  has  torn  them 
all. — Wh}  has  he  torn  them  ? — Because  he  does  not  wish  to  study. 

121. 

How  much  have  you  lost  ? — I have  lost  all  my  money. — Do  you 
know  where  my  father  is  ? — I do  not  know. — Have  you  not  seen  my 
book  ? — I have  not  seen  it. — Do  you  know  how  this  word  is  written  ? 
— It  is  written  thus. — Do  you  dye  any  thing  ? — I dye  my  hat. — What 
color  do  you  dye  it  ? — I dye  it  black. — What  color  do  you  dye  your 
clothes  ? — 1 dye  them  yellow. — Do  you  get  your  thread  dyed  ? — I get 
it  dyed. — What  color  do  you  get  it  dyed  ? — I get  it  dyed  green.-— 
What  color  dost  thou  get  thy  thread  stockings  dyed  ? — I got  them  dvod 


THIRrsr-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


151 


red.— -Does  your  son  get  his  cloth  dyed  ?— He  dues  get  it  dyed.— 
Does  he  get  it  dyed  red  ? — He  gets  it  dyed  gray. — Wliat  color  have 
your  friends  got  their  coats  dyed  ?— They  have  got  them  (las)  dyed 
green.— What  color  have  the  Italians  had  their  hats  dyed  ?— They 
have  had  them  dyed  brown. — Have  you  a white  hat  ? — 1 have  a black 
one. — What  hat  has  the  nobleman  ? — He  has  two  hats ; a white  one 
ind  a black  one. — What  hat  has  the  American  ? — He  has  a round  hat. 

Have  I a white  hat? — You  have  several  white  and  black  hats. — Has 

your  dyer  already  dyed  your  cloth  ? — He  aas  dyed  it. — What  color 
ha'i  he  dyed  it  ?— He  has  dyed  it  green. — Do  you  travel  sometimes  ?— 
I travel  often. — Where  do  you  intend  to  go  to  this  summer  ? — I intend 
to  go  to  Paris. — Do  you  not  go  to  Italy  ? — I do  go  tliither. — Hast  thou 
sometimes  travelled  ? — I have  never  travelled. — Have  your  friends  a 
mind  to  go  to  Holland  ? — They  have  a mind  to  go  (thither.) — When 
do  they  intend  to  depart  ? — They  intend  to  depart  the  dav  after  to- 
morrow. 

122. 

Is  your  brother  already  gone  to  Spain  ? — He  is  not  yet  gone 
(thither.) — Have  you  travelled  in  Spain  ? — I have  travelled  there. — 
When  do  you  depart  ? — I depart  to-morrow. — At  what  o’clock  ? — At 
five  o’clock  in  the  morning. — What  have  the  Spaniards  done  ? — They 
have  burnt  all  our  good  ships. — Have  you  finished  all  your  exercises  ? 
— I have  finished  them  all. — How  far  is  the  Frenchman  come  ? — He  is 
come  as  far  as  the  middle  of  the  road. — Where  does  your  friend  live  ? 
— He  lives  on  this  side  of  the  road. — Where  is  your  warehouse  ?* — 
It  is  on  that  side  of  the  road. — Where  is  the  counting-house  of  our 
friend  ? — It  is  on  that  side  of  the  theatre. — Is  the  garden  of  your  friend 
on  this  or  that  side  of  the  wood  ? — It  is  on  that  side. — Is  our  warehouse 
not  on  tliis  side  of  the  road  ? — It  is  on  this  side. — Where  have  you 
been  this  morning  ? — I have  been  at  the  castle. — How  long  did  you 
remain  at  the  castle  ? — I remained  tnere  an  hour. — Is  your  brother 
below  or  above  ? — He  is  above. — How  far  has  your  servant  carried  my 
trunk  ? — He  has  carried  it  as  far  as  my  warehouse. — Has  he  come  aa 
far  as  my  house  ? — No,  Sir. — Have  you  been  in  France  ? — I have  been 
(there)  several  times. — Have  your  children  already  been  in  Germany  ? 
—They  have  not  yet  been  (there,)  but  I intend  to  send  them  tliere  in 
tiio  spring. — Will  you  go  on  tliis  or  that  side  of  the  road  ? — I will  go 
neither  on  this  nor  that  side ; I will  go  in  the  middle  of  the  road.— 
How  far  does  tliis  road  lead  ? — It  leads  as  far  as  London. 


Fct  the  use  of  the  verb  to  see  Lesson  XVIII.,  page  59. 


152 


THIRTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


THIRTY-NINTH  LESSON.— Leccion  Trigesima  noTuz. 


To  be  necessary. 

Is  it  necessary*? 

Must  I ? Must  we? 
It  is  necessary 


Must. 


i Ser  menester^  > an  irregula.  impel 
( Ser  necesariOf  y soiial  verb. 

1 1 i Es  menester  ? ^ Es  necesario  ? 

I t Es  menester.  Es  necesario 


1 3 it  necessary  to  go  to  the  market? 
M usl  I,  must  we,  go  to  market  ? 

U is  not  necessary  to  go  (there.) 
VViiat  must  be  done  to  learn  Spanish  ? 


It  is  necessary  to  study  a great  deal. 
Musi,  (implying  obligation.) 

What  must  I do? 


You'  must  stay  still 

Where  must  he  go? 

He  must  go  home. 

We  must. 

You  must. 

What  must  wo  do? 

W’^e  must  write  the  letter. 

You  must  write  your  exercises.  < 

Must  have.  ) 

To  want.  To  need.  ^ 


t ^ Es  menester  ir  al  mercado? 
t ^ Es  necesario  ir  al  mere  ado  ? 

No  es  menester  (necesario)  ir  (alia.) 

I Que  es  menester  (necesario)  hacei 
para  aprender  el  Espahol  ? 

Es  menester  estudiar  mucliisimo. 
Deber.  Ser  menester.  Ser  necesario 
[Que  debo  yo  hacer? 
t I Que  es  menester  (necesario)  ha* 
cer  ? 

V.  debe  quedarsequieto,  (estar  quieto.) 
t Es  menester  (necesario)  quedarse 
quieto,  (estar  quieto.) 

I Adonde  debe  ir  ^1  ? 

debe  ir  d,  su  casa,  (d  casa  ) 
Debemos. 

t Es  menester  Es  necesaiio. 

VV.  deben. 

t Es  menester.  Es  necesario 
I Que  debemos  hacer? 

I Que  es  menester  (necesario)  hacei  i 
Debemos  escribir  la  carta, 
t Es  menester  escribir  la  carta, 
t Es  necesario  escribir  la  carta. 

VV.  deben  escribir  sus  temas,  (mas.) 
t Es  menester  (necesario)  escribir  sus 
temas. 

Haber  menester.  Necesitar. 


O*  Mind  that  have  is  not  translated. 


What  must  you  have  ? 

I must  have  some  money. 
Must  you  have  one  shilling? 


t I Que  ha  menester  V.  ? 

I Que  necesita  V.  ? 
t He  menester  algun  dinera 
Necesito  algun  dinero. 
t I Ha  menester  V.  un  real 
[Necesita  V.  un  real? 


THIRTY  -NINTH  LESSON. 


153 


iHust  you  have  a great  deal  i 
must  have  a great  deal 
I want  only  one  penny. 

Is  that  all  you  want  ? 

That  is  all  I want 

(low  much  must  thou  have  7 
How  much  dost  thou  want  ? 

I want  only  a shilling. 

flow  much  must  your  brother  have? 

fie  wants  only  two  shillings. 


t I Ha  menester  V.  muchisimc  ? 
t i^Necesita  V.  muchisiino? 
t lie  menester  muchisiino. 
t Necesito  muchisiino. 
t Solo  he  menester  un  cuarto. 
t Solo  necesito  un  cuarto. 
r t ^ Es  cuanto  ha  menester  V.? 

< t ^ No  ha  menester  V.  mas  qu#*  eso 
( t iNo  necesita  /.  mas  que  eso? 

^ t Eso  es  cuanto  he  menester. 

( t Eso  es  cuanto  necesito. 
t I Cuanto  has  menester  ? 
t I Cuanto  necesitas  ? 
t No  he  menester  mas  que  un  reaL 
t No  necesito  mas  de  un  real, 
t ^Cuanto  ha  menester  su  henrano 
de  V.? 

t ^Cuanto  necesita  su  hermano  de 
V.? 

t Ha  menester  dos  reales  sola- 
mente. 

t Necesita  dos  reales  solamente. 


Have  >ou  wnat  you  want? 
I have  what  I want. 

He  has  what  he  wants. 
They  have  what  they  want 


5 I Tiene  V.  lo  que  ha  menester  ? 

I I Tiene  V.  lo  que  necesita  ? 

Tengo  lo  que  he  menester,  (or  ue 
cesito.) 

Tiene  lo  que  ha  menester,  (or  ne^ 
cesita.) 

Tieiien  lo  que  han  menester,  (or  no- 
cesitan,  quieren.) 


More.  No  more. 
Do  you  not  wart  more  ? 

I do  not  want  more. 

He  does  not  want  more 


Mas.  No — mas. 

I No  ha  menester  V.  (or  no  necesita 
V.,  or  no  quiere  V.)  mas? 

No  he  menester  (or  no  necesito, 
no  quiero)  mas. 

No  ha  menester  (or  no  necesita^ 
mas. 


To  he  to — must. 
To  have  to — must. 
^hat  am  I to  do  ? 

Vou  must  work. 


Haber  de. 

Tener  que, 

I Que  he  de  hacer  ? 
V.  ha  de  trabajar. 


154 


THIRTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


Arn  1 to  go  there  ? I i He  de  ir  yo  alld,  ? 

You  may,  or  you  can  go  there.  | V.  puede  ir  alld. 


May — can. 

To  he  worth 

tiow  much  can  that  horse  be  worth? 
fie  may  be  v/orth  a hundred  dollars 
flow  much  are  you  worth? 

We  cannot  be  worth  much, 
lie  may  be  worth  something 

Mow  much  is  that  gun  worth  ? 

It  is  worth  but  one  dollar. 

How  much  is  that  worth  ? 

That  is  not  worth  much. 

That  is  not  worth  any  thing. 

This  is  worth  more  than  that 
The  one  is  not  worth  so  much  as 
the  other. 

To  he  oetteTf  (worth  more.) 
Am  I as  good  as  my  brother  ? 

You  are  better  than  he. 

I am  not  so  good  as  you. 


To  give  hack. 

To  restore. 

Does  ho  restore  you  your  book  ? 
) le  does  restore  it  to  me 


I Poder  * 2. 

Valer  * 2.  Poseer 
t Tener. 

I Cuanto  puede  Valer  ese  Cuba  lie 
Puede  valer  cien  pesos, 
t I Cuanto  tienen  VV.  ? 
t No  podemos  tener  mucho. 
t El  puede  tener  algun  caudal 

I Cuanto  vale  ese  fusil  ? 

No  vale  mas  que  un  peso. 

I Cuanto  vale  eso  ? 

Eso  no  vale  mucho. 

Eso  no  vale  nada. 

Este  vale  mas  que  aquel. 

El  uno  no  vale  tanto  como  el  otro 


I t Valer  mas,  {ser  mejor.) 
r t Valgo  yo  tanto  como  mi  her 
< mano  ? 

t I Soy  tan  bueno  como  mi  hermano  ? 
t V.  vale  mas  que  el. 

V.  es  mejor  que  el. 
t Yo  no  valgo  tanto  como  V. 

Yo  no  soy  tan  bueno  como  V 


Volver  * 2. 

Restituir  (See  veiDs  in  utr.] 

t [ Le  vuelve  €[  d V.  el  libro  ? 
t ^ Le  restituye  €\  d V.  el  libro  ? 

El  me  le  vuelve. 

6l  me  le  restituye. 
t i Le  ha  vuelto  d V.  los  guantes  1 
t ^ Le  ha  restituido  d V.  los  guanU&  i 
6l  me  los  ha  vuelto. 

^^1  mo  los  ha  restituido. 


fs2.i  he  given  you  bacK  your  gloves? 
lie  has  given  me  them  back. 


Has  your  brother  already  com-  | i Ha  empezado  ya  sua  temas  el  hor- 
monced  his  exercises  ? mano  de  V ? 

He  has  not  yet  commenced  them.  i No  los  ha  empezado  todavfa. 


THIRTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


155 


Tlie  present,  (gift.) 

flave  you  received  a present  ? 

I have  received  several. 

Have  you  received  the  books  ? 

S liEve  received  them. 


From  whom  7 

From  whom  have  you  received  pres- 
ents ? 

From  my  friends. 


r El  regalo. 

< El  presente. 

L La  dddiva,  (fern.) 

I I Ha  recibido  V.  un  legalo,  (un  pre- 
I sente) ? 

He  recibido  algunos. 

I Ha  recibido  V.  los  libros  7 
Yo  los  he  recibido. 


I ^ De  quien  ? 

[ I De  quien  ha  recibido  V.  presenlcfci 
(regalos)  ? 

1 Do  mis  amigos. 


Whence  7 
TWiere  from  7 
Where  do  you  come  from  ? 

[ come  from  the  garden. 
Where  is  he  come  from  ? 

He  is  come  from  the  theatre. 
Where  have  they  come  from  ? 


De  donde  7 

I De  donde  viene  V.  ? 

Yo  vengo  del  jardin. 

I De  donde  ha  venido  (di)  ? 
(El)  ha  venido  del  teatro. 

I De  donde  han  venido  (ellos)  ? 


From  which  7 

From  which  f 
The  same. 

From  which  garden  do  you  come  ? 
From  mine.  # 

From  which  ? 

From  the  same  v-’here  you  go. 
The  same  one. 

The  same  ones. 


EXERCISES. 

123. 

Is  it  necessary  to  go  to  the  market  ? — It  is  not  necessary  to  go 
thither. — What  must  you  buy  ? — I must  buy  some  mutton. — Must  1 
go  for  some  wine  ? — You  must  go  for  some. — Am  I to  go  to  the  ball  ? 
— You  must  go.— When  must  I go? — You  must  go  this  evening. — 
Must  I go  for  the  carpenter? — You  must  go  for  him. — What  must  be 
done  to  learn  Russian  ? — It  is  necessary  to  study  a great  deal. — Is 
It  necessary  to  study  a great  deal  to  learn  German  ? — It  is  neces- 
sary to  study  a great  deal. — What  must  I do? — You  must  buy  u 
good  book. — What  is  ne  to  do  ? — He  must  stay  still. — What  are  we  tc 


^ Del  cual  7 ) (not  followed  by 

I De  los  cuales  7 \ a noun.) 

I De  que  7 (followed  by  a noun.) 

El  mismo — los  mismos, 

I De  que  jardin  viene  V.  ? 

Del  mio. 

I Del  cual  ? 

Del  mismo  adonde  V.  va. 

El  mismo. 

Los  mismos. 


156 


THIRTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


do  ? — You  must  work. — ^IMust  you  work  much  in  ordei  to  learn  the 
Arabic  ? — I must  work  much  to  learn  it. — Why  must  I go  to  market  \ 
— You  must  go  to  buy  some  mutton  ana  wine. — Must  1 go  anywhere? — 
Thou  mast  go  into  the  garden. — Must  I send  for  any  thing  ? — ThoL 
must  send  tor  some  wine. — What  must  I do? — You  must  vvritea^ 
exercise. — To  whom  must  I write  a letter? — You  mus^  vrite  one  tt 
your  friend. — What  do  you  want,  Sir? — I want  some  cloth. — How 
much  is  that  hat  worth  ? — It  is  worth  four  dollars. — Do  you  want  aii} 
stockings? — I want  some,  (algunas.) — How  much  are  these  stockhigifi 
worth  ? — They  are  worth  two  shillings. — Is  that  all  you  want  ? — That 
is  all. — Do  you  not  want  any  shoes  ? — I do  not  want  any. — Dost  thou 
want  much  money? — I want  much. — How  much  must  thou  have? — 
I must  have  five  dollars. — How  mucti  does  your  broil  er  want  ? — He 
wants  but  sixpence. — Does  he  not  want  more  ? — He  does  not  want 
more. — Does  your  friend  want  more  ? — He  does  not  want  so  much^as  I. 
— What  do  you  want  ? — I want  money  and  clothes. — Have  you  now 
what  you  want  ? — I have  what  I want.-^Has  your  father  what  he 
wants  ? — He  has  what  he  wants 

124. 

Have  the  neighbor’s  boys  given  you  back  your  books  ? — They  have 
given  me  them  back. — When  did  they  give  them  back  to  you  ? — Yester- 
day.— Has  your  little  boy  received  a present  ? — He  has  received 
several. — From  whom  has  he  received  any  ? — From  my  father  and 
from  yours. — Have  you  received  any  presents  ? — I have  received 
some. — What  presents  have  you  received  ? — I have  received  fine 
presents. — Do  you  come  from  the  garden  ? — I do  not  come  from  the 
garden,  but  from  the  warehouse. — Where  are  you  going  to  ? — I am 
going  to  the  garden. — Whence  does  the  Irishman  come  ? — He  comes 
from  the  garden. — Does  he  come  from  the  garden  from  which  you 
come  ? — He  does  not  come  from  the  same. — From  which  garden  does 
he  come  ? — He  comes  from  the  garden  of  our  old  friend. — Whence 
comes  your  boy? — From  the  play. — How  much  may  that  horse  oe 
worth  ? — It  may  be  worth  five  hundred  dollars. — Is  this  book  worth  an 
much  as  that  ? — It  is  worth  more. — How  much  is  my  gun  worth  ?— » 
It  is  worth  as  much  as  that  of  your  friend. — Are  your  horses  worth  os 
much  as  those  of  the  English  ? — They  are  not  worth  so  much.— Hcv-’ 
nuch  is  that  knife  worth  ? — It  is  worth  nothing. 

125. 

Is  your  servant  as  good  as  mine  ? — He  is  better  than  youni. — Are 
you  as  good  as  your  brother  ? — He  is  better  than  I. — Art  thou  is  good 
as  ihv  friend  ? — I am  as  good  as  he. — Are  we  as  good  as  our  neigh 


rOKTIETH  LESSON. 


157 


^i>rs  ? — We  are  better  than  they. — Is  your  umordla  worth  as  much  as 
mine? — It  is  not  worth  so  much. — Why  is  it  not  worth  so  much  as 
mine? — Because  it  is  not  so  fine  as  yours. — How  much  is  that  gun 
wortli  ? — It  is  not  worth  much. — Do  you  wish  to  sell  your  horse  ? — 
I do  wish  to  sell  it. — How  much  is  it  worth  ? — It  is  worth  two 
hundred  dollars. — Do  you  wish  to  buy  it? — I have  bought  one  already. 
— Does  your  father  intend  to  buy  a horse  ? — He  does  intend  to  buy 
one,  but  not  yours. — Have  your  brothers  commenced  their  exercises  ? — 
They  have  commenced  them. — Have  you  received  your  letters  ? — 
Wc  have  not  yet  received  them,  (las.) — Have  we  what  we  want  ? — We 
have  not  what  we  want. — What  do  we  want  ? — We  want  fine  horses, 
.several  servants,  and  much  money. — Is  mat  all  we  want  ?-  -That  is  all 
we  want. — What  must  I do? — You  must  write. — To  whom  must  I 
write? — You  must  write  to  your  friend. — Where  is  he? — He  is  in 
America. — Where  am  I to  go? — You  may  go  to  France. — How  far 
must  I go  ? — You  may  go  as  far  as  Paris. — Which  dogs  has  your 
servant  beaten  ? — He  has  beaten  those  that  have  made  much  noise. 


FORTIETH  LESSON. — Leccion  Cuadragesima. 

OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

There  are  in  Spanisli  two  tenses  corresponding  to  the  English  Imperfect 
viz  : the  Imperfect,  Preterito  Imperfecto^  No.  2 ; and  the  Preterit,  Prete 
rito  Perfecto  Remoto,  No.  3. 

The  Imperfrcto,  No.  2,  represents  the  action  as  present,  or  still  going  on 
at  the  time  spoken  of,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  waSy  or  were,  fol- 
.owed  by  the  present  participle.  Example : — I studied  my  lesson  when  you 
came  in  ; that  is,  / was  studying,  <Slc.  : Yo  estudiaba  mi  leccion  cuando 
V.  entr6. 

It  also  expresses  habitual  actions,  and  in  this  case  answers  to  the  Eng- 
.ish  used  to.  Example When  I was  at  Madrid,  I went  to  the  Prado 
fvery  day  ; that  is,  / used  to,  &c. : Cuando  yo  estaba  en  Madrid,  iba  al 
liado  todos  los  dias. 

The  Preterito  Perfecto  Remoto,  No.  3,  expresses  an  action  that  has 
taken  place  in  a time  entirely  past,  but  that  may  be  specified  by  some 
circumstances  ; it  corresponds  to  the  English  did,  followed  by  an  infini- 
dve.  Example  : — I read  your  letter  yesterday,  (I  did  read :)  Yo  lei  su  carta 
de  V.  ayer.  I stayed  two  hours  in  my  room,  (I  did  stay  :)  Yo  me  quedi 
dcs  Iioras  en  mi  cuarto 


158 


FORTIETH  LESSON. 


HOW  TO  TRANSLATE  THE  ENGLISH  IMPERFECT. 


In  all  cases  in  which  the  English  Imperfect  can  be  turned  into  ui^ed  to 
tnd  an  infinitive,  or  was^  were,  and  a present  participle,  use  No.  2 in 
Spanish  ; in  all  other  cases,  use  No.  3.  Example : — I wrote  letters  every 
morning,  (that  is,  I used  to  write  ) Here  use  No.  2,  and  say : Yo  escrihia 
cartas  todos  los  dias. — I wrote  a letter  when  you  came  in,  (I  was  writing 
when  you  did  come  in.)  In  this  case  use  No.  2 for  the  first  verb,  and  No.  3 
for  the  second,  and  say ; Yo  escribia  una  carta  cuando  V.  entro. — I was 
throe  days  in  Madrid.  In  this  example  we  cannot  say  / used  to  he  ; there 
fore,  use  No.  3,  and  say ; Yo  estuve  tres  dias  en  Madrid. 

For  the  formation  of  these  two  tenses,  see  the  table  in  the  Appendix. 

To  have,  (active.) 


I had. 

To  have,  (auxiliary.) 

I had. 

To  be 

I was. 

To  make. 

I did,  made,  or  did  make. 

To  be  able,  (^can.) 

I was  able. 

I could 

Last  night. 

l>id  you  go  to  the  ball  last  ii’giit  ? 

k'es,  Sir,  I went  with  ycur  son  and 
my  brotlier 


1 Tener,  (activo.) 

2.  r Tenia, tenias,  tenia;  temamos,  .eniais, 
I tenian. 

3.  I Tuve,  tuviste,  tuvo  ; tuvimos,  tuvis- 
L teis,  tuvi^ron. 

1 Ilaber,  (auxiliar.) 

2 r Habia,  habias,  habia  ; habiamos, 
j habiais,  habian. 

3.  I Hube,  hubiste,  hubo  ; hubimos,  hu- 
L bisteis,  hubieron. 

I Ser  and  Estar. 

^ r Era,  eras,  era  ; frames,  ^rais,  eran. 
2.  < Estaba,  estabas,  estaba ; estiba- 

mos,  est^lbais,  estaban. 

< fFui,  fuiste,  fue  ; fuimos,  fuisteis, 
I fusion. 

I Estuve,  estuviste,  estuvo  ; estuvi- 
^ I mos,  estuvisteis,  estuvi^ron. 

I Hacer. 

2.  f Hacia,  hacias,  haeia  ; haciamos,  ha- 
J ciais,  hacian. 

3.  I Hice,  hiciste,  hizo  ; hicimos,  hiefsteis, 
t hici^ron. 

I Poder. 

2.  f Podia,  podias,  podia  ; podiamos, 
J podiais,  podian. 

3.  j Pude,  pudiste,  pudo ; puuimos,  pu 
L dlsteis,  pudidron. 

Anoche.  Ayer  noche. 

I Fud  V.  al  baile  anoche  fjr  ayei 
noche) ? 

Si,  senor,  yo  lui  con  su  hijo  de  V v 
mi  hermano. 


FORTIETH  LESSON.  159 

Did  you  stay  until  the  end  of  the  i Se  quedarsn  VV.  hasta  ol  fia  d^‘l 
ball  ? I haile  ? 

No,  Sir,  we  left  the  room  as  your  | No,  senor,  dejdmos  la  sala  cuanda 
brother  was  coming  in.  | entraba  su  hermano  de  V. 

Had  you  any  thing  to  do  this  morn-  ^ Tenia  V.  algo  que  hacer  esta  ma* 
ing?  I nana? 

I had  some  letters  to  write,  but  I had  j Yo  tenia  que  escribir  algunas  cartas, 
no  paper  j pero  no  tenia  papel. 

Could  you  not  ask  for  some?  | i No  podia  V.  pedir  alguno  ? 

i was  going  to  ask  for  some  when  | Yo  se  Ze  iba  6.  pedir  a V.  cuando  m«* 
you  called  me.  I llamo. 

Some  ' Le.  La. 

Obs.  A.  When  so7/ie,  used  in  an  unlimited  sense,  is  not  fcllowed  oy  a 
noun,  it  is  rendered  by  one  of  the  persons  Ze,  eZ,  eZZa,  &c.,Ze,  Zfl,&c. 

I have  no  wine,  but  I am  going  to  | Yo  no  tengo  vino,  pero  voy  d enviai 
send  for  some.  j por  el. 


FEMININE  SUBSTANTIVES  AND  ADJECTIVES 


DEFINITE  ARTICLE FEMININE. 


The.  ( 
To  the. 
The  woman 
Of  the  woman. 
To  the  woman. 
The  mother. 

To  the  sister. 


)f  the. 

The  women. 

Of  the  women. 
To  the  women. 
Of  the  mothers. 
To  the  sisters. 


SINGULAR. 

La.  De  la. 

A la. 

La  mujer. 

De  la  mujer. 

A la  mujer. 

La  madre. 

A la  hermana. 


PLURAL 

Las.  De  laa 
A las. 

Las  mujeres. 

De  las  mujeres. 
A las  mujeres. 
De  las  madres. 
A las  hermanas. 


She.  They 


Has  she  ? 

She  has 
She  has  not. 

Have  they  ? Tern.) 
They  liave,  (fern.) 
They  have  not,  (fern.) 


Ella.  Ellas. 

(See  Table  of  Personal  PronomOf 
Less.  XX.) 

I Tiene  ella? 

Ella  tiene. 

Ella  no  tiene. 

I Tienen  ellas  s 
Ellas  tienen. 

Ellas  no  tienen 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Rde  The  Spanish  Possessive  Adjectives,  or  Pronouns,  are  always  alike 
for  both  genders  ; and  they  agree  in  number,  not  with  the  possessor,  as  iu 
English,  but  with  the  thing  possessed;  or  substantive  that  follows  afl^^J 
diem 


160 


FORTIETH  LESSON, 


My 

1 SINGULAR 

1 Mi. 

PLUKAL. 

Mis. 

Thy. 

Tu. 

Tus 

Her.  Its  Their 

1 Su. 

Sus. 

Your. 

\ Vuestro,  (mas.) 
\ Vuestra,  (fern.) 

V uestros. 

V uestras. 

Our. 

\ Nuestro,  (mas.). 
( Nuestra,  (fern.) 

N uestroe 
N uestras 

O*  Iri  colloquial  polite  conversation  the  following  are  used : 

{Su,  or  el  — de  V.,  or  de  VV 
Sus,  or  los  — de  V...  or  de  W (pi.) 
Su,  or  la  — de  V.,  or  de  VV. 

Sus,  or  las  — de  V.,  oi  de  VV 


They  sold  their  share,  (in  stocks.) 

She  sold  her  houses. 

The  father  and  his  son,  or  his 
daughter. 

The  mother  and  her  son,  or  her 
daughter. 

The  child  and  its  brother,  or  its  sis- 
ter. 


Elios  vendidron  su  accion. 

Ella  vendi6  sus  casas. 

El  padre  y su  hijo,  or  su  hija. 

La  madre  y su  ;iijo,  or  su  hija 

El  nino  y su  hermano,  or  su  hcr- 
mana. 


My  pen. 

My  spoon, 
liis  or  her  nut. 
Our  hand. 

Your  window. 

Their  door. 


My  pens. 

My  spoons. 

His  or  her  nuts. 
Our  hands. 

Your  windows. 

Their  doors. 


SINGULAR. 

Mi  pluma. 

Mi  cuchara. 
Su  nuez 
Nuestra  mano. 


PLURAL. 

Mis  plumas 
Mis  cucharas 
Sus  nueces. 
Nuestras  manos. 


C Vuestra  ventana.  Vuestras  ventanas. 
< La  (su)  ventana  de  V.,  or  de  VV 
^ Las  (sus)  ventanas  de  V , or  de  VV 
I Su  puerta.  Sus  puertas. 


Ohs.  B.  In  detached  sentences,  and  in  order  to  avoid  ambiffuitv,  his  is 
translated  dv  el;  her,  de  clla ; their,  de  ellosy  or  de  cllas ; your,  (in  colloquial 
polite  style,)  de  T.,  or  de  FF.,  after  su  or  sus ; although  these  pronouns 
may  he  su})pressed. 


His  father. 
Their  books. 

Your  brother. 


t Su  padre  de  el.  El  padre  do 
t Los  libros  de  ellos,  (de  ellas.) 
t Su  hermano  de  V. 
t El  hermano  de  V. 


Mule.  All  adjectives  terminating  in  o,  change  it  into  a to  form  the 
inme,  and  make  their  plural  by  adding  5 ; as  good — buenOf  buenos-  bucnii 
hvenas. 


FORTIETH  LESSON. 


161 


Virtuous. 

The  virtuous  woman. 
The  virtuous  women. 


Virtuoso 

La  mujer  virtuosa 
Las  rnujeres  virtuosas 


Oha.  C.  Adjectives  form  tlieir  plural  in  conforrr  ity  with  the  rule  aid 
iowu  for  the  substant.’vos.  (See  Less.  IX.,  Page  26,  and  App.) 


Rule.  Adjectives  ending  in  any  other  letter  but  o,  are  common  to  lx>th 
genders.  Except  a few  terminating  in  an  and  that  add  an  a for  th« 
feminine. 


The  amiable  boy. 

Is  she  amiable  ? 

The  two  sisters  are  very  amiable. 


El  muchacho  amable. 

I Es  ella  amable  ? 

Las  dos  hermanas  son  muy  amables 


Obs.  D.  Adjectives  signifying  the  natives  of  a country,  or  its  productions, 
such  as  American^  Spaniard^  or  Spanish^  terminating  in  o,  change  it  into 
a to  form  the  feminine  ; those  ending  in  a consonant,  add  a ; and  a few 
ending  in  a are  the  same  for  both  genders. 


America.  American. 

The  American  women  are  hand- 
some, virtuous,  and  well  educated. 
Ireland.  Irishman.  Irish. 
The  female  servants  in  this  city  are 
almost  all  Irishwomen. 

Which  woman?  Which  women? 
Which  daughter  ? Which  daughters  ? 


Amdrica.  Americapo— Amer^ana 
Las  Americanas  son  bermpsHf  vir- 
tuosas y bien  educadas. 

Irlanda.  Irlandes.  Trlaudesa. 

Las  criadas  en  esta  ciudad  so*>  vasi 
todas  Irlandesas 

i Que  mujer  ? i Que  raujores  f 
I Que  hija  ? ^ Quo  hijas  ? 


This,  or  that  woman.  I Esta  6 esa  mujer. 

These,  or  those  women.  | Estas  6 esas  rnujeres^ 


This  young  lady. 
These  young  ladies. 
That  young  lady. 
Those  young  ladies. 


Esta  senorita. 

Estas  sefioritas. 

Esa  (or  aquella)  senorita 
Esas  (or  aquellas)  seiioritaa 


Tlie  hand.  The  hands. 
The  right  hand. 
The  left  hand. 

I have  a sore  hand. 


La  mano.  Las  manos 
La  mano  derecha. 

La  mano  izquierda. 
t Tengo  mala  la  mano. 


Ola.  E.  To  havCi  followed  by  a noun  expressing  that  the  part  of  Ihi 
oody  signified  by  it  is  afl’ected  with  pain,  c illness,  may  be  translated  inU 
»5panish  by  Tener  dolor  de,  or  by  Doler  ; when  the  latter  is  made  use  of, 
die  noun  representing  the  part  affected  is  placed  in  the  uominativo,  as  a 
mibject,  and  the  person  suffering,  in  the  objective  case. 


16^ 


FORTIETH  LESSOJS. 


The  tooth 
The  teeth. 

Elave  you  the  toothache  ? 

I have  the  headache. 

I have  a very  severe  headache 
1 feel  a pain  in  my  side 
Ills  feet  are  sore. 


t La  mucla,  (ei  diente.) 
t Las  muelaSf  (los  dientes.) 
t I Tiene  V.  dolor  de  mutlae  ? 
Tengo  dolor  de  cabeza 
Me  daele  la  cabeza. 

I t Tengo  jaqueca. 

Tengo  un  doloi  enel(or  de)  costadc 
Me  duele  el  costado. 
i Tiene  los  pies  malos 


The  face. 

1 La  cara. 

The  mouth. 

La  boca 

The  cheek 

La  mejilla. 

The  tongue,  the  language. 

La  lengua. 

The  door. 

La  puerta 

The  window. 

La  ventana 

The  street. 

La  calle. 

The  town. 

La  ciudad. 

The  stulF. 

La  tela. 

The  old  woman 

La  vieja 

Ohs.  F.  Common  nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  a,  (excepting  those 
derived  from  the  Greek,)  as,  clima,  climate ; dogma^  &.c  ; and  also  dia- 
day;  map,  &c.,  are  generally  feminine.  (See  Appendix.') 


INDEFINITE 

A.  An. 

Of  a.  From.  a. 

To  a 

An  industrious  girl 
A happy  young  lady. 

An  active  young  woman. 


ARTICLE FEMININE. 

Una. 

De  una. 

A una 

Una  muchacha  industriosa. 
Una  sehorita  feliz. 

Una  jdven  activa. 


Ohs.  G.  Common  substantives, 
tile  gender  by  the  article. 

A holy  female  martyr. 

Have  ycd  my  pen? 

No,  Madam,  I have  it  not. 
vVhich  bottle  have  you  broken? 

VVhidi  door  have  you  opened? 


r nouns  of  one  termination  distinguish 

I Una  Santa  mdrtir. 

I i Tiene  V.  mi  pluma? 

No,  sehora,  yo  no  la  tengo. 

I I Que  botella  ha  quebrado  V 1 
^ I Que  puerta  ha  abierto  V.  ? 

( i Que  puerta  habeis  abierto  ? 


O’  The  past  participle  coming  immediately  after  the  verb  to  have, 
haber,)  admits  of  no  change  ; but  when  it  follows  the  verb  to  be,  (ser,  oj 
it  agrees  with  the  subject  noun  or  pronoun  in  gender  and  number. 


FORTIETH  LESSON. 


168 


Which  windows  have  you  opened  ? 
Which  windows  have  been  opened  ? 
Which  letters  have  you  written  ? 
Which  letters  had  been  written  ? 


i Que  ventaiias  ha  abierto  V.  1 
I Que  ventanas  ban  sido  ahierlaa  ? 
I Que  cartas  han  escrito  VV.  ? 

I Que  cartas  habian  sidi  escritas  7 


These. 

Those. 

Slave  you  this,  or  that  pen  ? 
I have  neither  this,  nor  that. 


Estas. 

Esas.  Aquellas 

I Tiene  V.  esta,  6 esa  (or  aqueila 
pluma  ? 

No  tengo  esta,  ni  esa,  (ni  aquella.) 


It,  or  her  Them. 

Do  you  see  that  woman  1 
i see  her 

lave  you  seen  my  sisters  ? 
fo,  my  lady,  I have  not  seen  them. 
To  him.  To  her.  To  it. 

To  them. 

Do  you  speak  to  my  sisters  ? 

I speak  to  them. 


Some  good  water 
Some,  any. 

A napkin.  A towel. 

Te  celebrate.  To  feast. 


I La.  Las. 

^ Ve  V.  d,  esa  mu  er  1 
^ Veis  d esa  mujer  ? 

I Yo  la  veo.  (See  Less.  XX.,  Table.; 
I Ha  visto  V.  a mis  hermanas  ? 

No,  sehora,  no  las  he  visto. 

Le.  (See  Pronouns,  Loss.  XX  ! 
Les. 

^ Habla  V d mis  hermanas  ? 

Yo  les  hablo. 


( Alguna  agua  buena. 

Un  poco  dc  agua  huena. 
Alguna,  algunas,  (fern.) 
Una  servilleta.  Una  toalla. 
Celebrar  1.  Festejar  1. 


EXERCISES. 

126. 

How  are  your  brothers  ? — They  have  been  very  well  for  these  few 
days,  (ultimas  dias.) — W here  do  they  reside,  (se  kalian  ?) — They  reside 
n Paris. — Which  day  of  the  week  do  the  Turks  celebrate  ? — They 
celebrate  Friday,  but  the  Christians  celebrate  Sunday,  the  Jews  Satur- 
day, and  the  ne^oes  their  birthday. — “ Among  you  country  people 
there  are  many  fools,  are  there  not  ?”  (no  es  asi,)  asked  a philosopher 
lately  (el  otro  dia)  of  a peasant.  The  latter  answered,  “ Sir,  they  are 
to  be  found  in  all  stations,  (estado.^^)  “ Fools  sometimes  tell  the  truth;” 
said  the  philosopher. — Has  your  sister  my  gold  lace,  (galonl) — She 
has  it  not. — What  has  she  ? — She  has  nothing. — Has  your  mother  any 
tiling  ? — She  has  a gold  fork. — Who  has  my  large  bottle  ? — Your 
sister  has  it. — Do  yon  sometimes  see  my  mother  ? — I see  her  often. — 
When  did  see  your  sister  ? — I saw  her  a fortnight  ago,  (kace  quiva 


164 


FORTIETH  LESSON. 


dias.) — Who  has  my  fine  nuts  ? — Your  good  sister  has  them. — Has 
she  also  my  silver  forks  ? — She  has  them  not. — Wlio  has  them 
Your  mother  has  them. — What  fork  have  you  ? — I have  my  iron  fork. 
— Have  your  sisters  had  my  pens  ? — They  have  not  had  them,  but  i 
believe  that  their  children  have  had  them. — Why  does  your  brother 
complain  ? — He  complains  because  his  right  hand  aches. — Why  dcs 
you  complain  ? — I complain  because  my  left  hand  aches. 

127. 

Is  your  sister  as  old  as  my  mother  ? — She  is  not  so  oM,  but  she  is 
taller. — Has  your  brother  purchased  any  thing  ? — He  has  purchased 
something. — What  has  he  bought  ? — He  has  bought  fine  linen  and 
good  pens. — Has  he  not  bought  some  silk  stockings  ? — He  has  bought 
some. — Is  your  sister  writing  ? — No,  Madam,  she  is  not  writing  — 
Why  does  she  not  write  ? — Because  slie  has  a sore  hand. — Why  does 
not  the  daughter  of  your  neighbor  go  out  ? — She  does  not  go  out 
because  she  has  sore  feet. — Why  does  my  sister  not  speak  ? — Because 
she  has  a sore  mouth. — Hast  thou  not  seen  my  silver  pen  ? — I have 
not  seen  it. — Does  the  wife  (la  mujer)  of  our  shoemaker  go  out 
already  ? — No,  my  lady,  she  does  not  go  out  yet,  for  she  is  still  very 
ill. — Wliich  bottle  has  your  little  sister  broken  ? — She  broke  the 
one  which  my  mother  bought  yesterday. — Have  you  eaten  of  my  soup 
or  of  my  mother’s  ? — I have  eaten  neither  of  yours  nor  your  mother’s, 
but  of  that  of  my  good  sister. — Have  you  seen  the  woman  who  was 
with  me  this  morning  ? — I have  not  seen  her. — Has  your  mother  hurt 
herself  ? — She  has  not  hurt  herself. 

128. 

Have  you  a sore  nose  ? — I have  not  8 sore  nose,  but  I have  the 
toothache. — Have  you  cut  your  finger  ? — No,  my  lady,  (sehora,)  I have 
cut  my  hand. — Will  you  give  me  a pen  ? — I will  give  you  one. — Will 
you  have  this  or  that  ? — I will  have  neither. — Which  one  do  you  wish 
to  have  ? — I wish  to  have  that  which  your  sister  has. — Do  you  wish  to 
have  my  mother’s  good  black  silk  or  my  sister’s  ? — I wish  to  have 
neither  your  mother’s  nor  your  sister’s,  but  that  which  you  have. — 
Can  you  write  with  this  pen  ? — I can  write  with  it. — Each  (cada) 
woman  thinks  herself  amiable,  and  each  (cada  una)  is  conceited,  (tictie 
amor  pn/pio.) — The  same  as  (sucede  d los)  men,  my  dear  friend 
Many  a one  thinks  himself  learned  who  is  not  so,  and  many  men 
surpass  (exceden)  women  in  vanity. — What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?— 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. — Why  does  your  sister  complain  ?— 
Because  she  has  a pain  in  her  cheek. — Has  your  orother  a sore  hand  ? 
^ No.  but  he  feels  a pain  in  his  side. — Do  you  open  the  window  ?• 


FORTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


165 


I open  it,  because  it  is  too  warm. — Which  wind,  ws  has  your  sister 
opened  ? — She  has  opened  those  of  the  front  room,  (el  cuarto  d la  calk, 
— Have  you  been  at  the  ball  of  my  old  acquaintance,  (conoculo?)^ 
I have  been  there. — Which  young  ladies  have  you  taken  to  the  ball  ? 
i — I took  my  sister’s  friends  there. — Did  they  dance  ? — They  danced  a 
good  deal. — Did  they  amuse  tliemselves  ? — They  amused  themselves. 
— Did  they  remain  long  at  the  ball  ? — They  remained  there  two  hours. 
—Is  this  young  lady  a Turk  ? — No,  she  is  a Greek. — Does  she  speak 
French  ? — She  speaks  it. — Does  she  not  speak  English  ? — She  speaks 
it  also,  but  she  speaks  French  better. — Has  your  sister  a companion  ? 
— Shj  has  one. — Does  she  like  her  ? — She  likes  her  very  much,  for 
she  is  very  amiable. 


FORTY-FIRST  LESSON. 

To  eat.  Eaten. 

To  dine,  (eat  dinner.) 

The  dinner 
The  breakfast. 

To  eat  supper^  (to  sup.) 
The  supper 

After, 

After  me. 

After  him. 

After  you. 

After  my  brother 


. — Leccion  Cuadragesima  printer  a. 
Comer  Comido 
Comer. 

La  comida. 

El  almuerzo.  El  desayuno. 
Ccnar  1 Cenado 
La  cena. 

Despvcs  dcy  (prep.) 

Despues  de  mi. 

Despues  de  el. 

Despues  de  V.  Despues  de  S^V 
Despues  de  mi  hermano. 


After  having  spoken.  I t Despues  de  haber  hablado. 

After  carving  the  boiled  meat.  \ t Despues  de  trinchar  el  cocido 

O*  Whenever  the  present  participle  in  English  is  preceded  by  a prepo- 
sition, it  must  be  translated  in  Spanish  by  the  present  of  the  infinitive 
mood  ; except  when  the  preposition  is  by,  which  is  generally  omitted,  and 
the  present  participle  translated  liter-iliy. 

After  having  sold  his  house.  t Despues  de  haber  vendido  su  cn« 
j sa. 

After  having  been  there.  | t Despues  de  haber  estado  alld. 

I broke  your  knife  after  cutting  the  | t Yo  quebrd  el  cuchillo  de  V doa 
roasted  meat.  1 pues  de  trinchar  el  asado. 


To  break.  Broken. 

[ have  dined  earlier  than  you 
\Tou  have  supped  late. 


Romper.  Rjmpido,  or  roto. 

He  comido  mas  temprano  quo  V 
V.  ha  cona<!o  tarde. 


166 


FOETY-FIRST  LESSON. 


To  pay for 

To  pay  a man  for  a horse. 

To  pay  the  tailor  for  the  coat. 

Do  you  pay  the  shoemaker  for  the 
shoes  ? 

f pay  him  for  them. 

I >ncs  he  pay  you  for  the  knives  t 
I ie  pays  me  for  them. 


Pagar  (object)  d (complement.) 
t Pagar  un  caballo  d uu  hombra 
t Pagar  el  vestido  al  sastre. 

1 1 Paga  V.  los  zapatos  al  zapatero  ? 

t Yo  se  los  pa  go. 
t I Paga  el  los  cuchillos  d V ? 
t El  me  los  paga. 


To  ask for 

To  ask  a man  for  money. 

I eisk  my  father  for  some  mcney. 
Do  you  ask  me  for  your  hat 
1 do  ask  you  for  it. 


Pedir  * 3 (cbiect)  d (complement  j 
t Pedir  dinero  d un  hombre. 
t Yo  pido  dinero  d mi  padre. 

1 1 Me  pide  V.  su  sombrero  ? 

Yo  se  le  pido  d V 


O’  In  Spanish  the  thing  paid  or  asked  for  is  the  object  of  the  srerb,  and 
the  person  Avho  has  been  paid,  or  asked,  is  the  complement  governed  by  th© 
preposition  d,  to ; but  if  the  person  or  the  thing  is  only  mentioned,  that  per- 
son or  that  thing  must  be  made  the  object  of  the  Spanish  verb. 


I have  paid  the  tailor. 

You  have  paid  him. 

Have  you  paid  the  shoemaker  ? 

1 have  paid  him. 

Do  you  pay  w/tat  you  owe  ? 

Yes,  I pay  what  I owe. 

Have  you  paid  for  your  books? 

I have  paid  for  them. 

Have  you  asked  for  breakfast  ? 

I have  asked  for  it. 

How  much  have  you  paid  for  them  ? 
I have  paid  two  dollars  for  them. 

Do  you  ask  for  something  ? 

1 ask  for  bread. 

To  ask  for,  (inquire  after.) 

Dc  you  ask  for  somebody  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I ask  for  your  brother 

Do  you  ask  for  any  thing  ^ 


He  pagado  al  sastre. 

V.  le  ha  pagado. 

I Ha  pagado  V.  al  zapatero  ? 

Yo  le  he  pagado 

I Paga  V.  lo  que  debe  ? 

Si,  yo  pago  lo  que  debo. 

t I Ha  pagado  V.  sus  libros  ? 
t Yo  los  ha  pagado. 
t I Ha  pedido  V.  el  almuerzo  V 
t Yo  le  he  pedido. 
t i A cuanto  los  ha  pagado  V ? 
t Los  he  pagado  d dos  pesois. 

^ t i Pide  V.  algo  ? 

( t Quiere  V.  algo  ? 

1 t Pido  pan. 

t Preguntar  1 por.  Buscar  1. 
t Informarse  1 de.  Accrca  de. 

I I Pregunta  V.  por  alguno  ? 

I Busca  V.  d,  alguien  ? 

I Si,  senor,  pregunto  por  su  IiemTano 
de  V. 

I t I B isca  V.  alguna  cosa? 


* “ As  soon  as  I arrived  at  the  inn,  I asked  for  supper” — “ Luego  qvt 
Uegue  al  mcsoUi  pedi  la  cena  ” — Gil  Blas,  translated  by  Isla,  Book  1 
Chap.  II. 


FORTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


167 


I aak  for  the  letters. 

After  whom  do  you  inquire  ? 
They  inquire  after  your  brother 

^be  inquires  of  you 

he  inquire  after  the  boy  * 


JBusco  las  cartas, 
t Vengo  a buscar  las  cartas 
t I Acerca  de  quicn  quiere  V.  inf  or- 
marse  ? 

f I For  quien  pregunta  V.? 

I Elios  preguntan  por  su  hermanc  c2e 

I V. 

Ella  se  informa  de  V. 

Ella  le  pregunta  d V. 

1 I Se  informa  el  acerca  del  mucha 

I cho  ? 


To  tryj  (to  essay,  attempt.) 
Will  you  try  to  do  that? 

1 have  tried  to  do  it.., 

I'ou  must  try  to  do  it  better. 


I Probar  * I d.  Procurar  1. 

I t I Quiere  V.  probar  d hacer  eso  ? 
I He  probado  d hacerlo. 

{ V.  debe  procurar  hacerlo  mejor. 

^ Debeis  procurar  hacerlo  mejor. 


To  hold.  Held. 
Do  you  hold  my  stick  ? 
I do  hold  it 


Tener  Tenido.  Asir  * 3 
I Tiene  V.  mi  baston 
Yo  le  tengo 


To  look  for. 

Are  you  looking  for  any  thing? 

Whom  are  you  looking  for? 

I look  for  a brother  of  mine. 


My  uncle. 

My  cousin. 

My  relation. 

'Fhe  parents,  (father  and  mother ) 


I Buscar. 

St  I Busca  V.  algo  ? 

t I Estd  V.  buscaudo  algo? 

I t ^ A quien  busca  V.  ? 

I t Yo  busco  d uu  hermano  mio. 


I Mi  tio. 

I Mi  primo. 

I Mi  pariente. 

1 t Los  padres. 


A brother  of  mine. 

A cousin  of  yours. 

A relation  of  his,  of  hers. 

A friend  of  ours. 

A neighbor  of  theirs. 

Obs.  Mio,  mia;  mios,  mias,  are 
dressing  a person.  Examples : — 

Cost  thou  come  from  the  garden,  ray 
son? 

My  deal  friend.^,  you  have  come  late. 


t Un  hermano  mio. 
t Un  primo  de  V.,  (or  suyo.) 
t Un  pariente  suyo,  (de  el,  de  ella.) 
t Un  amigo  nuestro. 
t Un  vecino  suyo,  (deellos,  ellas.) 

also  used  without  an  article  in  ad 
I Vienes  del  jardin,  hijo  mio  ? 

Queridos  amigos  mios,  VV  han  ve- 
nido  tarde. 


1G8 


FORTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


To  tryy  (to  endeavor.) 
Dues  he  try  to  see  me  ? 

He  tries  to  see  you. 

Whom  does  he  try  to  see  ? 

He  tries  to  see  an  uncle  of  his. 


\ Procurar  1.  Esforzarsc  • I 
\ Probar  * 1. 

\ I Procura  el  \ erme  ? 

( ^ Se  esfuerza  el  d,  verme? 

) J&l  procura  ver  a V. 

I 6l  se  esfuerza  para  ver  d.  V. 

J i A quien  procura  ver? 

^ i A quien  se  esfuerza  d ver  ? 
Procura  ver  d un  tio  suyo. 

Se  esfuerza  d ver  d un  tio  suya 


Properly, 

Properly, 

Properly. 

Properly, 

Properly 

To  do  ine^s  duty. 

You  write  properly. 

These  men  du  their  duty  properly. 


As  it  should  he. 
As  I ought, 

AuS  he  ought. 

As  you  ought. 
As  they  ought. 


Have  you  don o j Our  task  properly  ? 

We  have  done  it  properly. 

It. 

The  duty.  The  task 
A glass  of  wine. 

A piece  of  bread. 


t C)mo  se  dehe.  Deber  Bien 
t Como  deho. 
t Como  debe. 
t Como  V.  debe. 
t Cojno  debeH, 

Cumplir  con  su  obligacion. 
t V.  escribe  como  debe. 
t Evstos  hombres  cumplen  con  si 
obligacion  como  deben. 
t I Han  hecho  VV.  su  tarea  como  do 
ben  ? 

t La  hemos  hecho  como  debemos. 

L' , (mas.)  La,  (fern.) 

E)  deber.  La  tarea. 

Ln  vaso  de  vino. 

Ln  pedazo  de  pan 


EXERCISES.* 

129. 


Have  you  paid  for  the  gun  ? — I have  paid  for  it. — Has  your  uncle 
paid  for  the  hooks  ? — He  has  paid  for  them. — Have  I paid  the  tailor  for 
the  clothes? — You  have  paid  him  for  them. — Hast  thou  paid  the 
merchant  for  the  horse  ? — I have  not  yet  paid  him  for  it. — Have  we 
paid  for  our  g»oves? — We  have  paid  for  them. — Has  your  cousin 
already  paid  for  his  shoes  ? — He  has  not  yet  paid  for  them. — Does  my 
brother  pay  you  what  he  owes  you  ? — Ho  does  pay  it  me. — Do  you 
pay  what  you  owe? — I do  pay  what  I owe. — Have  you  paid  the 
baker  ? — I have  paid  him. — Has  your  uncle  paid  the  butcher  for  the 
mutton  ? — He  has  paid  him  for  it. — Who  has  broken  my  knife  ? — 
1 have  broken  it  after  cutting  the  bread. — Has  your  son  broken  my 
pencils  ? — He  has  broken  them  after  writing  his  letters. — Have  you 
paid  the  merchant  for  the  wine  after  drinking  it  ? — I have  paid  for  it 

^ No.  2 and  No.  3,  Less.  XL.,  page  158,  should  be  used  according  to 
die  directions  p-iven. 


FORIT- FIRST  LESSON. 


169 


after  drinldnt^  it. — How  do  I speak  ? — You  speak  properly. — How  has 
my  cousin  written  his  exercises  ? — He  has  written  them  properly. — 
How  have  my  children  done  their  task  ? — They  have  done  it  well.— 
Does  this  man  do  his  duty  ? — He  always  does  it. — Do  these  men  do 
their  duty  ? — They  always  do  it. — Do  you  do  your  duty  ? — I do  wliat 
1 ('an. — What  do  you  ask  this  man  for  ? — I ask  him  for  some  'money. 
'-What  does  this  boy  ask  me  for  ? — He  asks  you  for  some  money. — 
Do  you  ask  me  for  any  tiling  ? — I ask  you  for  a dollar. — Do  you  ask 
me  for  the  bread  ? — I do  ask  you  for  it. — ^Which  merchant  do  you  ask 
for  gloves  ? — I ask  those  for  some  who  live  in  William-street. — What 
do  you  ask  the  baker  for  ? — I ask  him  for  some  bread. 

130. 

Do  you  ask  the  butchers  for  some  mutton  ? — I do  E.sk  them  for 
some. — Dost  thou  ask  me  for  the  stick  ? — I do  ask  thee  for  it. — Does 
he  ask  thee  for  the  book  ? — He  does  ask  me  for  it. — What  have  you 
asked  tlie  Englishman  for  ? — I have  asked  him  for  my  leather  trunk. — 
Has  he  given  it  you  ? — He  has  given  it  me. — Whom  have  you  asked 
for  some  sugar  ? — I have  asked  the  merchant  for  some. — Whom  does 
your  brother  pay  for  his  shoes  ? — He  pays  the  shoemakers  for  them. — 
iVhom  have  we  paid  for  the  bread  ? — We  have  paid  our  bakers  for  it. 
— How  old  art  thou  ? — I am  not  quite  ten  years  old. — Dost  thou 
ilready  learn  Spanish  ? — I do  already  learn  it. — Does  thy  brother 
know  German  ? — He  does  not  know  it. — Why  does  he  not  know  it  ? — 
Because  he  has  not  had  time. — Is  your  father  at  home  ? — No,  he  is 
gone  out,  but  my  brother  is  at  home. — Where  is  your  father  gone  to  ? — 
He  is  gone  to  England. — Have  you  sometimes  been  there  ? — I have 
never  been  there. — Do  you  intend  going  to  France  this  summer  ? — 
I do  intend  going  there. — Do  you  intend  to  stay  there  long  ? — I intend 
to  stay  there  during  the  summer. — How  long  does  your  brother  remain 
at  home  ? — Till  twelve  o’clock. — Have  you  had  your  gloves  dyed  ? — 
I have  had  them  dyed. — What  have  you  had  them  dyed  ? — I have  had 
Jiem  dyed  yellow. — Have  you  already  dined  ? — Not  yet. — At  what 
D’clock  do  you  dine  ? — I dine  at  six  o’clock. — At  whose  house  (en  cuya 
casa)  do  you  dine  ? — I dine  at  the  house  of  a friend  of  mine. — With 
whom  did  you  dine  yesterday  ? — I dined  with  a relation  of  mine. — 
What  did  you  eat  ? — We  ate  good  bread,  ham,  and  cakes. — What  did 
Tou  drink  ? — Wine. — Where  does  your  uncle  dine  to-day  ? — He  dines 
with  us. — At  what  o’clock  does  your  father  sup  ? — He  sups  at  nine 
o’cljck. — Do  you  sup  earlier  than  he  ? — I sup  later  than  he. 

131. 

Where  are  you  going  to  ? — I am  going  to  a relation  of  mine,  in 
order  to  breakfast  with  him. — Art  thou  willing  to  hold  my  gloves  ? — 
t am  willing  to  hold  them. — Who  holds  my  hat  ? — Your  son  holds  it 
8 


170 


FORTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


— ^Dost  tliou  hold  my  stick  ? — I do  hold  it. — Will  you  try  to  spc^k  ? -- 
I will  try. — Has  your  little  brother  ever  tried  to  do  exercises  ?* — Ha 
has  tried. — Have  you  ever  tried  to  make  a hat  ? — I have  never  tried  to 
make  one. — Whom  are  you  looking  for  ? — I am  looking  for  the  man 
who  has  sold  a horse  to  me. — Is  your  relation  looking  for  any  one  ? — ^ 
He  is  looking  for  a friend  of  his. — Are  we  looking  for  any  one  ? — ^We 
are  looking  for  a neighbor  of  ours. — Whom  dost  thou  look  for  ? — I 
took  for  a friend  of  ours. — Are  you  looking  for  a servant  of  mine  ?— 
No,  I am  looking  for  one  of  mine. — Have  you  tried  to  speak  to  your 
uncle  ? — I have  tried  to  speak  to  him. — Have  you  tried  to  see  my 
father  ? — I have  tried  to  see  him. — Has  he  received  you  ? — He  has  not 
received  me. — Has  he  received  your  brothers  ? — He  has  received 
them. — Have  you  been  able  to  see  your  relation  ? — I have  not  been 
able  to  see  him. — ^What  did  you  do  after  writing  your  exercises  ? — I 
wrote  my  letter. — After  whom  do  you  inquire? — I I'nquire  after  tie 
tailor. — Does  this  man  inquire  after  any  one  ? — He  inquires  after  you. 
—Do  they  inquire  after  you  ? — They  do  inquire  after  me. — Do  they 
inquire  after  me  ? — They  do  not  inquire  after  you,  but  after  a friend 
of  yours. — Do  you  inquire  after  the  physician  ? — I do  inquire  after 
him. — What  does  your  little  (the  diminutive)  brother  ask  for  ? — He 
asks  for  a small  (the  diminutive)  piece  of  bread. — Has  he  not  yet 
breakfasted  ? — He  has  breakfasted,  but  he  is  still  hungry. — What  does 
your  uncle  ask  for  ? — He  asks  for  a glass  of  wine. — Has  he  not  already 
drunk  ? — He  has  already  drunk,  but  he  is  still  thirsty. 


FORTY-SECOND  LESSON. — Leccion  CuadragHima  segunda. 


Who. 

The  one  who  Him  who. 

Those  who. 

To  perceive,  (to  see.) 

Do  you  perceive  the  man  who  is 
coming  ? 

I perceive  him  who  is  coming. 

Do  you  perceive  the  men  who  are 
going  into  the  warehouse? 

I perceive  those  who  are  going  into 
it 

To  go  in,  {tc  enter  understood.) 

How  is  the  weathei  ? 

What  kind  of  weather  is  it  .' 
ft  is  fine  weather  now. 

What  was  the  weather  yesterday  ? 


Qmc,  (relative  pronoun.) 

El  que. 

Los  que. 

Percibir  3.  Divisar  1.  Columbrar  1. 
I Columbra  V.  al  hombre  que  viene  s 

I Divisa  V al  hombre  que  viene  ? 

Yo  diviso  (co)  umbro)  al  que  viene. 

i Divisa  V.  d los  hombres  quo  van  « 
entrer  en  el  almacen  ? 

Yo  diviso  d los  que  van  d ^ntrsr  t‘3 
61. 

Entrar. 

I I Que  tiempo  hace  1 

1 1 Que  tiempo  tenemoe  7 
I t Hace  hermoso  tiompa 
1 1 1 Que  tiempo  hizo  ayor  ? 


FOP.TY-SSCOND  LESSON. 


171 


it  was  bad  weather  yesterday. 
VV  as  it  good  or  bad  weather  ? 
rt  weis  not  good  weather. 

lUwas  very  warm 
It  was  very  cold. 
Very 

Is  it  very  warm  now? 

It  is  neither  warm  nor  cold. 


t Hizo  mal  tiempo  ayer. 

1 1 Hizo  buen  tiempo  6 mal  tiemtx)  1 
t No  hizo  buen  tiempo. 
t Hizo  mucho  calor. 
t Hizo  mucho  frio. 

MuchOj  (before  a noun.) 

1 1 Hace  mucho  calor  ahora  I 
■f  No  hace  calor  ni  frio. 


Dark.  Obscure. 
Dusky.  Gloomy. 
Clear.  Light. 

Is  it  dark  in  your  warehouse  ? 

Is  it  dark  in  his  garret? 

It  is  ^'erv  dark  there. 

Wet.  Damp. 

Dry. 

Are  the  streets  wet  ? 
They  are  not  very  dry. 

Is  the  weather  damp  ? 

It  is  not  damp. 

Is  it  dry  weather  ? 

The  weather  is  too  dry. 
The  moonlight. 

The  moonshine. 

It  is  moonlight. 

We  have  too  much  sun. 


Oseuro. 

Lhbrego.  Triste. 

Claro.  Despejado. 
t i Es  (or  esta)  oseuro  su  almacen  dc 
V.', 

+ i Ee  (or  esta)  oseuro  su  desvan  ? 
Estd,  muy  oseuro  alii. 

Mojado.  Hiimedo. 

Seco. 

I Estan  mojadas  las  callos  ? 

No  estan  muy  secas. 

I Esth  humedo  el  tiempo  ( 

No  estd,  humedo. 

I Es  seco  el  tiempo  ? 

El  tiempo  estd  demasiado  seco. 

La  luz  de  la  luna. 

El  claro  de  la  luna. 
t Hay  luna.  Hace  luna. 

Demasiado  sol  tenemos. 


To  taste. 

Have  you  tasted  that  wine? 


I have  tasted  it. 

How  do  you  like  it  ? 

I like  it  well. 

Do  you  like  cider  ? 
No,  I like  wine. 

To  like. 

I like  fish. 

He  likes  fowl. 


Gustar.  Probar.  Catar 
I Ha  probado  (ha  catado)  V.  aqiiel 
vino  ? 

Le  he  gustado,  (probado,  catado.) 
t I Como  le  gusta  d V.  ? 
t Me  gusta  mucho. 
t i Le  gusta  d V.  la  sidra  ? 
t No,  me  gusta  el  vino. 
r Gustarle  duno.  (See  Less.  XXIV.) 
t Me  gusta  el  pescado. 
t A dl  le  gusta  el  polio. 


Do  you  like  to  see  my  brother? 
f like  to  see  him. 

[ like  to  do  it. 

He  likes  to  study. 


t I Le  gusta  d V.  ver  d mi  hermawc  I 
t Me  gusta  verle. 
t Me  gusta  hacerlo. 
t Le  gusta  estudiar. 


172 


^ tfORTY'SECOND  LESSON. 


The  scholar. 

'Fhe  pupil. 

The  master,  (teacher.) 

Tq  learn  by  heart, 

Dc  yom  scholars  like  to  learn  by 
heart  ? 

They  do  not  like  learning  by  h^skart. 

Have  you  learned  your  exercises  by 
heart  ? 

We  have  learned  them. 


' El  discipulo,  (escolar,  estudlante 
I El  alumno  El  discipulo 
El  maestro. 

Aprender  de  memoria  « 

1 1 Les  gusta  d sus  discipulos  de  V 
aprender  de  memoria  1 
t El  aprender  de  memoria  no  I’e* 
gusta. 

No  les  gusta  aprender  de  memt»ria- 
t I Han  aprendido  VV  sus  temas  do 
memoria  1 

Los  hemos  aprendido 


Once  a day. 

Three  times  a month 
So  much  a year. 

So  much  a head. 

So  much  a soldier. 

Six  times  a year. 

Early  in  the  morning. 

We  go  out  early  in  the  morning. 
When  did  your  father  go  out  ? 

To  speak  of  some  one,  or  of  some- 
thing. 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ? 

We  speak  of  the  man  whom  you 
know. 

Of  what  are  they  speaking? 

They  are  speaking  of  the  weather. 
The  weather 
The  soldier. 

Also. 


t Una  vez  al  dia. 
t Tres  voces  al  mes,  ^>or  ine':i  / 
t Taiito  al  ano. 
t Tanto  por  cabeza. 
t Tanto  por  soldado 
t Seis  veces  al  aho. 

t 

Por  la  manana  temprano. 

Salimos  por  la  manana  temprano 
I Cuando  salid  su  padre  de  V.  ? 

Hablar  de  alguno,  {de  algo. 

I De  quien  hablan  VV  ? 

I De  quien  hablais  ? 

Hablamos  del  hombre  que  V.  conosoL 

I De  que  estan  hablando  ellos  ? 
Estan  hablando  del  tiempo. 

El  tiempo. 

El  soldado. 

Tamhien. 


T 0 he  content,  satisfied  with  some 
one,  or  with  something. 

4r9  you  satisfied  with  this  man  ? 

I am  satisfied  with  him. 

Ajre  you  content  with  your  new 
coat  ? 

[ am  content  with  it. 

With  what  are  you  contented  ? 
Discontente  i. 


Estar  contento  con  (or  de)  alguicn, 
con  (or  dc)  algo. 

I Estd,  V.  satisfecho  de  este  hombre  1 
Estoy  satisfecho  de  6\. 

I Est4  V.  contento  con  su  vestidf 
nuevo  ? 

j Estoy  satisfecho  de  dl. 
j I De  que  esta  V.  contento  ? 

' Malcontento.  Descontento. 


i’ORTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


ilh 


Tliey  speak  of  your  friend. 

They  speak  of  him. 

They  are  speaking  of  your  book. 

They  are  speaking  of  it. 


Hablan  (se  habla)  de  su  amigo  de  V 
Hablan  (se  habla)  de  ^1. 

Estan  hablando  (se  esta  hablando) 
de  su  libro  de  V. 

Estaii  (se  esta)  hablando  de  el. 


If 

I intend  paying  you  if  I receive 
money. 

Do  you  intend  to  buy  paper? 

I intend  to  buy  some,  if  they  pay  me 
what  they  owe  me. 

How  was  the  weather  yesterday  ? 

It  was  fine  weather. 


I Si, 

! Pienso  (mtento)  pagar  d V.  si  recibo 
dinero. 

I Piensa  V.  comprar  papel  ? 

Intenlo  comprar  alguno  si  me  pagan 
lo  que  mo  ieben. 

I I Que  tiempo  hizc  ayer  ? 

1 Hizo  buen  tiempo. 


EXERCISES. 

132. 

Do  you  perceive  the  man  who  is  coming  ? — I do  not  perceive  him.^ 
Do  you  perceive  the  soldier’s  children  ? — I do  perceive  them. — Do  yo'i 
perceive  the  men  who  are  going  into  the  garden  ? — I do  not  perceive 
those  who  are  going  into  the  garden,  but  those  who  are  going  to  the 
market. — Does  your  brother  perceive  the  man  who  has  lent  him 
money  ? — He  does  not  perceive  the  one  who  has  lent  him,  but  the  one 
to  whom  he  has  lent  some. — Dost  thou  see  the  children  who  are 
studying  ? — I do  not  see  those  who  are  studying,  but  those  who  are 
playing. — Dost  thou  perceive  any  thing  ? — I perceive  nothing. — Have 
you  perceived  my  parents’  warehouses  ? — I have  perceived  them. — 
Where  have  you  perceived  them  ? — I have  perceived  them  on  that 
side  of  the  road. — Do  you  like  a large  hat  ? — I do  not  like  a large  hat, 
but  a large  umbrella. — What  do  you  like  to  do  ? — I like  to  write. — Do 
you  like  to  see  these  little  boys  ? — I like  to  see  them. — Do  you  like 
wine  ? — I do  like  it. — Does  your  brother  like  cider,  (sidra  ?) — He  does 
like  it. — What  do  the  soldiers  like  ? — They  like  wine. — Dost  thou  like 
tea  or  coffee  ? — I like  both. — Do  these  children  like  to  study  ? — They 
like  to  study  and  to  play. — Do  you  like  to  read  and  to  write  ? — I like 
to  read  and  to  write. — How  many  times  a day  do  you  eat  ? — Four 
times. — How  often  do  your  children  drink  a day  ? — They  drink  several 
times  a day. — Do  you  drink  as  often  as  they  ? — I drink  oftcner. — Do 
you  often  go  to  the  theatre  ? — I go  sometimes. — How  often  in  a month 
do  you  go  ? — I go  but  once  a momn. — How  many  times  a year  does 
your  cousin  go  to  the  ball  ? — He  goes  twice  a year. — Do  you  go  as 
often  as  he  ? — I never  go. — Does  your  cook  often  go  to  the  market  - 
He  goes  thither  every  morning. 


L74 


FORTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


133. 

Do  you  often  go  to  my  uncle  ? — I go  to  him  six  times  a year.— 
Do  you  like  fowl  ? — I like  fowl,  but  I do  not  like  fish. — What  do  you 
like? — I like  a piece  of  bread  and  a glass  of  wine. — Do  you  learn  by 
heart  ? —I  do  not  like  learning  by  heart. — Do  your  pupils  like  to  learn 
by  heart  ? — They  like  to  study,  but  they  do  not  like  learning  by  heart. 
— How  many  exercises  do  they  do  a day  ? — They  only  do  two,  out 
they  do  them  properly. — Were  you  able  to  re  id  the  note  which  I wrote 
to  you  ? — I was  able  to  read  it. — Did  you  understand  it  ? — I did  under- 
stand it. — Do  you  understand  the  man  who  is  speaking  to  you  ?— 
T do  not  understand  him. — Why  do  you  not  understand  him  ? — Because 
he  speaks  too  badly. — Does  this  man  know  French  ? — He  knows  it, 
but  I do  not  know  it. — Why  do  you  not  learn  it  ? — I have  no  time  to 
learn  it. — Do  you  intend  going  to  the  theatre  this  evening  ? — I intend 
going,  if  you  go. — Does  your  father  intend  to  buy  that  horse  ? — He 
intends  buying  it,  if  he  receives  his  money. — Does  your  friend  intend 
going  to  England  ? — He  intends  going  thither,  if  they  pay  him  what 
they  owe  him. — Do  you  intend  going  to  the  concert  ? — I intend  to  go, 
if  my  friend  goes. — Does  your  brother  intend  to  study  Spanish  ? — Ho 
intends  studying  it,  if  he  finds  a good  master. 

134. 

How  is  the  weather  to-day  ? — It  is  very  fine  weather. — Was  it  fine 
weather  yesterday  ? — It  was  bad  weather  yesterday. — How  was  the 
weather  this  morning  ? — It  was  bad  weather,  but  now  it  is  fine  weather. 
— Is  it  warm  ? — It  is  very  warm. — Is  it  not  cold  ? — It  is  not  cold. — 
Is  it  warm  or  cold  ? — It  is  neither  warm  nor  cold. — Did  you  go  to  the 
garden  the  day  before  yesterday  ? — I did  not  go. — Why  did  you  not 
go  ? — I did  not  go,  because  it  was  bad  weather. — Do  you  intend  going 
there  to-morrow  ? — I do  intend  going  there  if  the  weather  is  fine. — 
Is  it  light  in  your  counting-house  ? — It  is  not  light  in  it. — Do  you  wish 
to  work  in  mine  ? — I do  wish  to  work  in  it. — Is  it  light  there  ? — It  is 
very  light  there. — Why  cannot  your  brother  work  in  his  warehouse  ? 
— He  cannot  work  there,  because  it  is  too  dark. — Where  is  it  too 
dark  ? — In  his  warehouse. — Is  it  light  in  that  hole  ? — It  is  dark  (there.) 
— Is  the  weather  dry  ? — It  is  very  dry. — Is  it  damp  ? — It  is  not  damp. 
It  Is  too  dry. — Is  it  moonlight  ? — It  is  not  moonlight,  it  is  very  damp. 
— Of  what  does  your  uncle  speak  ? — He  speaks  of  the  fine  weather. — 
Of  what  do  those  men  speak? — They  speak  of  fair  and  bad  weather. 
— Do  they  not  speak  of  the  wind  ? — They  do  also  speak  of  it. — Dost 
thou  speak  of  my  uncle  ? — I do  not  speak  of  him. — Of  whom  dost 
thou  speak  ? — I speak  of  thee  and  thy  parents. — Do  you  inquire  after 
any  one  ? — I inquire  after  your  cousin  ; is  he  at  home  ? — No,  he  ia 
at  his  best  friend’s. 


FORTY-THIRD  LESSON 


175 


135. 

Have  you  lasted  that  wine  ? — 1 have  tasted  it. — How  do  you  like  it  1 
—I  like  it  well. — IIow  does  your  cousin  like  that  cider  ? — He  does 
xiot  like  it. — \Miich  wdne  do  you  wish  to  taste  ? — I wish  to  taste  that 
which  you  have  tasted. — Will  you  taste  this  tobacco  ? — I have  tasted 
it  already.— How  do  you  like  it  ? — I like  it  well. — Why  do  you  not 
taste  that  cider  ? — Because  I am  not  thirsty. — Wliy  does  your  friend 
not  taste  this  ham  ? — Because  he  is  not  hungrv. — Of  whom  have  Biey 
spoken  ? — They  have  spoken  of  your  friend. — Have  they  not  spoken 
of  the  physicians  ? — They  have  not  spoken  of  tliem. — Do  they  not 
speak  of  tlie  man  of  whom  we  have  spoken  ? — They  do  speak  of  him. 
— Have  they  spoken  of  the  noblemen,  (caballeros  7) — They  nave 
spoken  of  them. — Have  they  spoken  of  those  of  whom  we  speak  ? — 
They  have  not  spoken  of  those  of  whom  we  speak,  but  they  have 
spoken  of  others. — Have  they  spoken  of  our  cliildren  or  of  those  of  our 
neighbors  ? — They  have  neither  spoken  of  ours,  nOr  those  of  our 
neighbors. — Wliich  children  have  been  spoken  of? — Those  of  our 
master  have  been  spoken  of. — Do  they  speak  of  my  book  ? — They  do 
speak  of  it. — Are  you  satisfied  with  your  pupils  ? — I am  satisfied  with 
them. — How  does  my  brother  study  ? — He  studies  well. — How  many 
exercises  have  you  studied  ? — I have  already  studied  forty-two. — Is 
your  master  satisfied  with  his  scholar  ? — He  is  satisfied  with  him. — 
Is  your  master  satisfied  with  the  presents  which  he  has  received  ? — 
He  is  satisfied  with  them. — Have  you  received  a note  ? — I have 
received  one. — Will  you  answer  (it  ?) — I am  going  to  answer  (it.) — 
When  did  you  receive  it  ? — I received  it  early  this  morning. — Are  you 
satisfied  with  it  ? — I am  not  satisfied  with  it. — Does  your  friend  ask 
you  for  money  ? — He  does  ask  me  for  some. 


FORTY-THIRD  LESSON. — Leccion  Cuadraghima  tercera. 


OF  PASSIVE  VERBS. 

Passive  Verbs  represent  the  subject  as  receiving  or  suffering  from  othem 
action  expressed  by  the  verb.  In  Spanish,  els  in  English,  they  are  con- 
jugated by  means  of  the  auxiliary  verb  Ser,  (to  be,)  placed  before  the  past 
participle  of  the  active  verb ; and  the  noun  or  pronoun,  representing  tho 
agent  (the  subject)  in  the' active  phrase,  must  be  preceded  by  tlie  preposi- 
tions por  or  dcf  (by.)  Either  of  them  may  be  used  when  the  action  of  the 
verb  refers  to  the  mind,  and  por  only,  v/hen  otherwise.  O"  Observe  thai 
Jie  past  participle  of  the  principal  verb  must  agree  in  gender  and  numboi 
vith  the  subject  of  the  verb 


176 


FORIY-THIRD  LESSON. 


I lev©. 

I am  loved. 

Thou  conductest. 
Thou  art  conducted. 

lie  praises. 

IJo  is  praised. 

You  punish. 

You  are  punished. 

Tliey  blame. 

They  are  blamed. 


Yo  amo. 

Yo  soy  amado  de,  (pof.) 

Tu  conduces. 

Tu  eres  conducido  por 
Fil  alaba. 

El  es  alabado  de,  (por). 

V castiga. 

V.  es  castigado  por 
Elios  vituperan 

Elios  son  vituperados  de,  (por.) 


To  praise. 
To  punish 
To  blame. 


Alahar.  Elogxar. 
Castigar. 

Vituperar.  Culpar. 


By  me.  By  us. 

By  thee.  By  you. 

By  him.  By  them. 


Por  (de)  mi  Por  (de)  nosotros. 

Por  (de)  ti.  Por  (de)  vos,  or  vosocros 
por  (de)  V. ; por  (de)  VV. 

Por  (de)  el.  Por  (de)  ellos. 


I am  loved  by  him. 

Who  is  punished? 

I’he  naughty  boy  is  punished. 

By  whom  is  he  punished? 
tie  is  punished  by  his  father. 

Which  man  is  praised,  and  which  is 
blamed  ? 

Which  t (not  followed  by  a noun.) 
Naughty. 

Skilful.  Diligent.  Clever. 
Assiduous.  Industrious.  Studious. 
Idle. 

Ignorant. 

The  id^er,  (the  lazy  fellow.) 


To  reward. 

To  esteem. 

To  despise. 

To  hate. 

To  travel  to  a place. 
Where  has  he  travelled  to  ? 
has  travelled  to  Vienna. 


Soy  amado  de  el. 

I Quien  es  castigado  ? 
i El  muchacho  malo  es  castigado 
( El  mal  muchacho  es  castigado. 

I Por  quien  es  castigado  ? 

El  es  castigado  por  su  padre. 

I Que  hornbre  es  alabado,  y cual  e 
vituperado  ? 

^ Cual  7 

Malo.  (Mal,  before  a noun.) 

Habil.  Diligente.  Diestro. 

, Asiduo.  Industrioso.  Estudiosa 
Ocioso.  Perezoso.  Holgaza^ 
Ignorante. 

I El  haragan. 

Recompensar  1.  Premiar  1. 
Estimar.  Apreciar  1. 

Despreciar.  Menospreciar  1. 

Aborreccr  2.  (See  verbs  in  fci  / 

Ir  d.  Irse  d. 

I Adonde  se  ha  ido  1 
Se  ha  ido  a Viena. 


FORTT-THIRD  LESSON. 


177 


is  il  good  travelling  ? 

U IS  good  travelling. 

It  is  bad  travelling. 

In  the  winter. 

In  the  summer. 

In  the  spring. 

In  the  autumn. 

& is  rtad  travelling  in  the  winter 


To  drive,  to  ride  in  a carriage. 

To  r^de,  (on  horseback.) 

To  go  on  foot. 

Do  you  like  to  ride  ? 

1 like  to  drive. 


I Es  bueno  viajar  ? 

Es  bueno  viajar. 

Es  malo  viajar. 

En  el  invierno. 

En  el  veraho. 

En  la  primavera. 

En  el  otoho. 

Es  malo  viajar  en  el  invierno. 


t Ir  en  coclic.  Andar  1 * 
en  coche. 

t Ir , {andar,  pasear)  d cahaUo 
Montar  d caballo. 

Cahalgar. 

Ir  d pie, 

t ^ Le  gusta  d.  V.  andar  d.  caballo  ? 
t Me  gusta  ir  en  coche. 


To  live. 

Is  it  good  living  in  Paris  ? 

Living  is  good  in  Paris. 

It  is  good  living  here. 

The  living  is  good  here. 

Dear, 

Is  the  living  dear  in  London  ? 
Is  it  dear  living  in  London  ? 

The  living  is  dear  he* . 

It  is  dear  living  her» 

Thunder 
The  storm 
The  fog. 

Is  it  windy  ? Does  the  wind  blow  ? 
h is  windy  The  wir  d blows, 
h is  not  w indy, 
ft  is  very  windy 
Does  it  thunder  ? 


j Vivir. 

^ I Se  vive  bien  en  Paris  ? 

( f ^ Lo  pasa  uno  bien  en  Paris  ? 

I Se  vive  bien  en  Paris. 

SAqui  se  vive  bien. 

Lo  pasa  uno  bien  aqui. 

I Caro.  Costoso.  Costar  mucho, 
f ^ Es  caro  (costoso)  el  vivir  en  Ldn 
^ dres  ? 

( I Cuesta  mucho  vivir  en  Londres? 

^ El  vivir  aqui  es  caro. 

( Cuesta  mucho  vivir  aqui. 


I Trueno.  Truenos. 

^ La  tormenta.  La  tempestad. 
f La  borrasca. 

I La  niebla. 
t t ^ Hace  viento  ? 

( I Corre  viento,  (hace  aire)  ? 

( t Hace  viento 
( Corre  viento,  (hace  aire.) 
t t No  hace  viento. 

( No  corre  viento,  (hace  aire.) 

{ Hace  mucho  viento. 

( Corre  mucho  viento,  (hace  aire, 
I t i Hay  truenos  1 ^ Truena  ? 

} I Estd.  tronanda  ? 


178 


POR^rr-THIRD  LESSON. 


is  it  foggy  ? 

Is  it  stoimy  ? 

It  is  not  stoimy. 

Does  tho  sun  shine  ? 
it  thunders  very  much. 


1 1 1 Hace  niebla  ? i Hay  niebla  j 
W i Estd  tempestuoso  el  tiempo  7 
^ t [ Hay  tempestad  ? 

^ 1 No  hay  tempestad. 

) No  estd  tempestuoso. 

I I Luce  el  sol  ? i Hay  sol  1 
1 Trueiia  muchisimo. 


Afterwards 
As  soon  as. 

As  soon  as  I have  eaten  I drink. 

As  soon  as  I have  taken  off  my 
shoes,  I take  otf  my  stockings. 
What  do  you  do  in  the  evening  ? 

To  sleep. 

Does  your  father  still  sleep  ? 

He  still  sleeps. 


I Despues. 

Luego  que.  Asi  que 
Asi  que  he  comido,  bebo 
t Luego  que  me  he  quitado  los  z& 
patos,  me  quito  las  medias. 

I Que  hace  V.  por  la  tarde 

Dormir  * 3. 

I Duerme  todavia  su  padre  de  V ? 
Duerme  todavia.  Aun  dueim© 


Without. 

Without  money. 

Without  speaking. 

Qhs.  Sin  (without)  requires  the 
live 

Without  saying  any  thing 


Sin 

Sin  dinero. 
t Sin  hablar. 

verb  which  follows  it  to  be  in  the  infuu' 

f t Sin  decir  nada. 

< t Sin  hablar  palabra. 
f t Sin  abrir  la  boca. 


At  last. 

To  arrive. 

Has  he  arrived  at  last  ? 
He  has  not  arrived  yot. 
Is  he  coming  at  last  ? 
He  is  coming. 


Al  Jin.  Finalmente 
Llegar  1.  (See  verbs  in  gar.) 
I Ha  llegado  finalmente  ? 
Todavia  no  ha  llegado. 

I Viene  al  fin  ? 

El  viene 


And  then. 

And  then  he  sleeps. 

As  soon  as  he  has  supped  he  reads, 
and  then  he  sleeps. 


Y entonces.  Y pues.  Y que 

Y entdnces  duerme. 

Luego  que  ha  cenado  *ee,  y eatdmc* 
duerme 


The  parents,  (father  and  mother.) 

Father  and  mother. 

Are  you  loved  by  your  father  and 
mother  ? 

I am  loved  by  my  parents 


I t Los  padres. 

I t Los  padres. 

t i Es  V amado  de  sus  padros  ? 
t Soy  amado  de  mis  oadres. 


FORTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


179 


EXERCISES. 

136. 

Are  you  loved  ? — I am  loved. — By  whom  are  you  loved  ?— I am 
oved  by  my  uncle. — By  whom  am  I loved  ? — Thou  art  loved  by  thy 
parents. — By  whom  are  we  loved  ? — You  are  loved  by  your  friends.— 
By  whom  are  those  boys  loved  ? — They  are  loved  by  their  friends. — 
By  whom  is  this  man  conducted  ? — He  is  conducted  by  me. — Where 
do  you  conduct  him  to  ? — I conduct  him  home. — By  whom  are  we 
blamed  ? — We  are  blamed  by  our  enemies. — Why  are  we  blamed  by 
them  ? — Because  they  do  not  love  us. — Are  you  punished  by  your 
master  ? — I am  not  punished  by  him,  because  I am  good  and  studious. 
— Are  we  heard  ? — We  are,  (Zo.) — By  whom  are  we  heard  ? — We  are 
heard  by  our  neighbors. — Is  thy  master  heard  by  his  pupils  ? — He  is 
heard  by  them. — Which  children  are  praised  ? — Those  that  are  good. 
— Which  are  punished  ? — Those  that  are  idle  and  naughty. — Are  we 
praised  or  blamed  ? — We  are  neither  praised  nor  blamed. — Is  our 
frrend  loved  by  his  masters  ? — He  is  loved  and  praised  by  them, 
oecause  he  is  studious  and  good  ; but  his  brother  is  despised  by  his, 
oecause  he  is  naughty  and  idle. — Is  he  sometimes  punished  ? — He  is 
(Zo)  every  morning  and  every  evening. — Are  you  sometimes  punished  ? 
— I am  Q6)  never ; I am  loved  and  rewarded  by  my  good  masters. — 
Are  these  children  never  punished  ? — They  are  (Zo)  never,  because 
they  are  studious  and  good  ; but  those  are  so  (Zo)  very  often,  because 
they  are  idle  and  naughty. — Who  is  praised  and  rewarded  ? — Skilful 
children  are  praised,  esteemed,  and  rewarded,  but  the  ignorant  are 
blamed,  despised,  and  punished. — Who  is  loved  and  who  is  hated  ? — 
He  who  is  studious  and  good  is  loved,  and  he  who  is  idle  and  naughty 
is  hated. — Must  (one)  oe  good  in  order  to  be  loved  ? — (One)  must  be 
so. — What  must  (one)  do  in  order  to  be  loved  ? — (One)  must  be  good 
and  assiduous. — What  must  (one)  do  in  order  to  be  rewarded  ? — (One) 
must  be  skilful,  and  study  much,  (see  Lesson  XXXIX.,  page  152.; 

137. 

Why  are  those  children  loved  ? — They  are  loved  because  they  are 
good. — Are  they  better  than  we  ? — They  are  not  better,  but  more 
studious  than  you. — Is  your  brother  as  assiduous  as  mine  ? — He  is  as 
assiduous  as  he,  but  your  brother  is  better  than  mine. — Do  you  like  to 
drive  ? — I like  to  ride. — Has  your  brother  ever  been  on  horseback  ? — 
He  has  never  been  on  horseback. — Does  your  brother  ride  on  horse- 
back as  often  as  you  ? — He  rides  on  horseback  oftener  than  I. — Did 
you  go  on  horseback  the  day  before  yesterday  ? — I went  on  horseback 
to-day. — Do  you  like  travelling  ? — I do  like  travelling. — Do  you  like 
travelling  in  the  winter  ? — I do  not  like  travelling  in  the  winter ; I like 


180 


FORTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


travelling  in  the  spring  and  in  autumn. — Is  it  good  .ravelling  in  the 
spring  ? — It  is  good  travelling  in  spring  and  in  autumn,  but  it  is  bad 
travelling  in  the  summer  and  in  the  winter. — Have  you  sometime? 
travelled  in  tlie  winter? — I have  often  travelled  in  the  winter  and  ir 
tlie. summer. — Does  your  brother  travel  often  ? — He  travels  no  longer 
he  formerly  travelled  much. — Wnen  do  you  like  to  ride  ? — I ike  tc; 
ride  in  the  morning. — Have  you  been  in  London  ? — I have  been  there. 
— Is  the  living  good  there  ? — The  living  is  good  there,  but  dear. — Is  it 
dear  living  in  Paris  ? — It  is  good  living  'there,)  and  not  dear. — Do  you 
like  travelling  in  France  ? — I like  travelling  there,  because  one  finds 
good  people  (buenas  gentes)  there. — Does  your  frierd  like  travelling  in 
Holland  ? — He  does  not  like  travelling  there,  because  the  living  is  bad 
there. — Do  you  like  travelling  in  Italy  ? — I do  like  travelling  there, 
because  the  living  is  good  there,  and  one  (se  hallo)  finds  good  people 
there;  but  the  roads  are  not  very  good  there. — Do  tie  English  like  to 
travel  in  Spain  ? — They  like  to  travel  there  ; but  they  find  the  roads 
too  bad. — How  is  the  weather  ? — The  weather  is  very  bad. — Is  it 
windy  ? — It  is  very  windy. — Was  it  stormy  yesterday  ? — It  was  very 
stormy. 

138. 

Do  you  go  to  the  market  this  morning  ? — I do  go,  if  it  is  not  stormy 
— Do  you  intend  going  to  France  this  year  ? — I intend  going  (thither) 
if  the  weather  is  not  too  bad. — Do  you  like  to  go  on  foot  ? — I do  not 
like  to  go  on  foot,  but  I like  going  in  a carriage  when  {cuando)  I am 
travelling. — Will  you  go  on  foot  ? — I cannot  go  on  foot,  because  I am 
tired. — What  sort  of  weather  is  it  ? — It  thunders. — Does  the  sun 
shine  ? — The  sun  does  not  shine ; it  is  foggy. — Do  you  hear  the  thun- 
der ? — I hear  it. — Is  it  fine  weather  ? — The  wind  blows  hard,  and  it 
thunders  much. — Of  whom  have  you  spoken  ? — We  have  spoken 
of  you. — Have  you  praised  me  ? — We  have  not  praised  you  ; we  have 
blamed  you. — Why  have  you  blamed  me  ? — Because  you  do  not  study 
well. — Of  what  has  your  brother  spoken  ? — He  has  spoken  of  his 
books,  his  horses,  and  his  dogs. — What  do  you  do  in  the  evening  ? — 
I work  as  soon  as  I have  supped. — And  Vv'hat  do  you  do  afterwards  ? — 
(Afterwards  I sleep. — When  do  you  drink  ? — I drink  as  soon  as  I have 
oaten. — Have  you  spoken  to  the  merchant  ? — I have  snoken  to  him. — 
What  has  he  said  ? — He  has  left  (salir)  Vithout  saying  any  thing.— 
Cun  you  work  without  speaking  ? — I can  work,  but  not  study  Spanish 
without  speaking. — Wilt  thou  go  for  some  wine  ? — I cannot  go  foi 
wine  vvitliout  money. — Have  you  bought  any  horses  ? — I do  not  buy 
without  money. — Has  your  father  arrived  at  last  ? — He  has  arrived. — 
Wlien  did  he  arrive  ? — This  morning  at  four  o’clock. — Has  youi 
isousin  set  out  at  last  ? — He  has  not  set  out  yet. — Have  you  at  last 


FORTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


181 


^imd  a good  master  ? — I have  at  last  found  one. — Are  you  at  last 
learning  Spanish  ? — I am  at  last  learning  it. — ^Vhy  have  you  not 
already  learned  it  ? — Because  I have  not  been  able  to  find  a g(X)d 
master. 


FORTY-FOURTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Cuadragesima  cuarta^ 
OF  REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 


When  the  action  falls  upon  the  agent,  and  the  object  refers  to  the  sam« 
person  as  the  subject,  the  verb  is  called  reflective  or  pronominal.  In  Span- 
ish almost  all  active  verbs  may  become  reflective,  and  used  as  pronominal 
These  verbs  form  their  compound  tenses  with  the  auxiliary  habere  (to  have.) 
The  pronoun  object  must  be  of  the  same  person  as  that  of  the  subject 
and  each  person  is  conjugated  with  a double  personal  pronoun.  However, 
the  pronoun  subject  is  almost  always  understood  in  Spanish,  while  in  English 
it  is  the  object. 


I — (myself.) 

Thou — (thyself.) 

He — (himself.) 

She — (herself.) 

It — (itself.) 

One — (one’s  self.) 

We — (ourselves.) 

Sing.  You — (yourself.) 

Plur.  You,  ye — (yourselves.) 

Mas.  They — (themselves.) 
Fern.  They — (themselves.) 


I (Yo)  me — (n  mi  mismo.y 
I (Tii)  te — (a  ti  inismo.) 

(El)  se — {d  si  mismo.) 

I (Ella)  se — (d  si  misma,) 

S(El)  se — (d  si  mismo.) 

(Ella)  se — (d  si  misma.) 

Uno  se — alguno  se — (d  si  mismo.) 
(Nosotros)  nos — (d  nosotros  mismos 
V se — iyos  os)  a si  mismo— (d  vod 
mismo.) 

W.  se — (vosotros  os) — (d  si  mismos] 
— (d  vosotros  mismos.) 

Elios  se — (d  si-  mismos.) 

Ellas  se — (d  si  mismas.) 


Obs.  A.  It  will  be  remarked  that  the  pronoun  object  of  the  third  peran 
s always  se,  whatever  its  gender  or  number  may  be. 


To  cut  yourself. 
To  cut  myself. 
To  cut  ourselves 
To  cut  himself. 
I'o  cut  herself. 


Cortarse  V.  (Cortaros.) 
Cortarme. 

Cortarnos. 

Cortarse  (el.) 

Cortarse  (ella.' 


^ The  words  in  italics  are  often  added  to  the  verb  to  givo  more  energy  in 
t'.'e  Boutonce. 


182 


FORTr-FOURTH  LESSON. 


To  cut  itself. 

To  cut  one’s  self. 


Do  you  burn  yourself? 

I do  not  burn  myself. 

You  do  not  bum  yourseli 
I see  myself. 

Do  I see  myself? 

He  sees  himself. 

Wo  see  ourselves. 

They  see  themseWes. 

He  always  praises  himself 

Do  you  wdsh  to  warm  yourself? 

I do  wish  to  warm  myself. 

Does  he  wish  to  warm  himself? 
He  does  wish  to  warm  himself 
They  wish  to  warm  themselves. 


To  enjoy. 

To  divert. 

To  amuse  one^s  self. 

In  what  do  you  amuse  yourself? 

I amuse  myself  in  reading. 

He  diverts  himself  in  playing. 

Each. 

Each  one. 

Kacn  man  amuses  himself  as  he 
likes. 

Each  one  amuses  himself  in  the  best 
way  he  can. 

The  taste. 

Each  man  has  his  taste. 

Each  of  you. 

The  world,  (the  people.) 

Every  one.  Everybody 
fiveiybody  speaks  of  it. 


Cortarse  (dl.)  Cortarse  felia-1 
Cortarse. 


I Se  quema  V.  ? 

(Yo)  no  me  quemo 
V.  no  se  quema 
(Yo)  me  veo. 

I Me  veo  yo  ? 
fil  se  ve. 

(Nosotros)  nos  vemos. 

Elios  se  ven.  Ellas  se  ven. 

6l  se  alaba  siempre  d si  mismo 


I Quiere  V.  calentarse  ? 

I Se  quiere  V.  calentar  ? 
Me  quiero  calentar. 

I Quiere  4\  calentarse  ? 

quiero  calentarse. 
Elios  se  quieren  calentar 


Divertirse 
Entretenerse  * * 

Recrearse  1. 

I A (or  en)  que  so  divierte  V.  ? 

Yo  me  recreo  leyendo,  (or  en  leer  ) 
Se  entretiene  en  jugar,  (jugando.) 

Qada.  Todo. 

Cada  uno. 

Cada  hombre  se  divierte  como  le 
gusta,  (como  gusta.) 

Cada  uno  se  divierte  del  mejor  mode 
que  puede. 

El  gusto. 

Cada  uno  tiene  su  gusto. 

Cada  hombre  tiene  su  gusto. 

Cada  uno  de  VV. 

El  mundo,  (la  gente.; 

Cada  uno.  Todo  cl  mundo. 

Todos. 

Cada  uno  (or  todo  el  mundo)  habia 
de  ello. 

Todos  hablan  de  ello. 


s 

5 

I 


‘ See  W <^^he  Appendix 


Conjugated  like  tener 


FORTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


183 


Ev  eiy  one  is  liable  to  error. 


Cada  uno  (tod)  el  muiido)  comoto 
yerros 

t Todos  estamos  sujetos  d error 


To  mistake 
You  are  mistaken. 
He  is  mistaken. 


t Equivocarse  1 
t V.  se  equivoca. 
t El  se  equivoca. 


To  deceive,  to  cheat 
<lo  has  cheated  me. 
lie  has  cheated  me  of  a hundred 
dollars. 


Enganar  en.  t Hacer  droga 
El  me  ha  eiiganado. 
t lil  me  ha  hecho  droga  cien  pesos 


You  cut  your  finger  1 V.  se  cortd  el  dedo. 

Obs.  B.  When  an  agent  performs  an  act  upon  a part  of  himself,  the  vert 
is  made  reflective ; and  my,  his,  yours,  &lc.,  are  rendered  by  cl,  la,  los,  las 


I cut  my  nails. 

A hair 
To  pull  out. 
He  pulls  out  his  hair 
He  cuts  his  hair. 

The  piece. 

A piece  of  bread. 


Yo  me  corto  las  uhas,  (fern,  pi.) 
Un  cabello. 

Arrancar  1 Arrancarse. 

Se  arranca  el  cabello. 

Se  corta  el  cabello. 

El  pedazo.  La  pieza 
Uu  pedazo  de  pan. 


To  go  away. 

Are  you  going  away  ? 

1 am  going  away. 

He  is  going  away. 

Is  he  going  away  ? 

Are  we  going  away  ? 

You  are  going  away 

Are  these  men  going  away  ? 

They  are  not  going  away. 

To  feel  sleepy 

Do  you  feel  sleepy  ? | 

I feel  sleepy.  j 


Irse.  Marcharse. 
i Se  va  V.  ? ^ Se  marcha  V.? 

Mo  voy.  Me  marcho. 

^il  se  va.  Se  marcha. 
i Se  va  el?  i Se  marcha  el  ? 
i Nos  vamos  ? Nos  march  amos  ? 
VV.  se  van.  VV.  se  marchan. 
i Se  van  (or  so  marchan)  estos  hom 
bres  ? 

Elios  no  se  van,  (no  se  marchan.) 

Tener  sueno.  Sentirse  con  suefu 
t Tener  gana  de  dormir. 

Quererse  dormir, 

. t Estarse  durmiendo. 

I t I Tiene  V.  sueiio  [ 

I t Yo  tengo  sueho. 


To  soil. 

To  fear,  to  dread. 
.iead,  tliou  dreadest,  he  dreads. 


Ensuciar  1.  Ensuciarse. 
Manchar  1.  Mancharse, 

I Tenter  2.  Recelar  1 
I Temo,  temes,  teme. 


184 


FORTY-FOURTH  LESSOJT. 


He  fears  to  soil  his  finger, 
bo  you  dread  to  go  out  ? 

I do  dread  to  go  out. 

He  is  afraid  to  go  out. 


(6l)  teme  ensuciarse  el  deda 
I Teme  V.  salir,  (d  fuera)  ? 

Yo  temo  salir. 

Teme  salir.  t El  tiene  miedo  do  saJu 


To  fear  some  one 
I do  not  fear  him 
Do  you  fear  that  man  ? 
What  do  you  fear  ? 
Whom  do  you  fear  ? 

(I  fear)  nobody 


Temer  a alguno. 

Yo  no  le  temo. 

I Teme  V.  d ese  h ombre  7 
I Que  teme  V.  ? 

I A quien  temo  V { 

A ninguno. 


The  ivood,  Uo  burn.) 


I liU  lena,  (fern.) 


EXERCISES. 

139. 

Do  you  see  yourself  in  that  small  looking-glass  j — I see  myself  ir 
ft. — Can  your  friends  see  themselves  in  that  large  looking-glass  ?— 
They  can  see  themselves  therein,  (in  it.) — Why  does  your  brother  not 
light  the  fire  ? — He  does  not  light  it,  because  he  is  afraid  of  burning 
himself. — Why  do  you  not  cut  your  bread  ? — I do  not  cut  it,  because 
1 fear  to  cut  my  finger. — Have  you  a sore  finger  ? — I have  a sore 
finger  and  a sore  foot. — Do  you  wish  to  warm  yourself? — I do  wish 
to  warm  myself,  because  I am  very  cold. — Why  does  that  man  not 
warm  himself  ? — Because  he  is  not  cold. — Do  your  neighbors  warm 
themselves  ? — They  warm  themselves,  because  they  are  cold. — Do 
.you  cut  your  hair  ? — I do  cut  my  hair. — Does  your  friend  cut  his 
nails  ? — He  cuts  his  nails  and  his  hair. — What  does  that  man  do  ? — 
He  pulls  out  his  hair. — In  what  do  you  amuse  yourself  ? — I amuse 
myself  in  the  best  way  I can. — In  what  do  your  children  amuse  them- 
selves ? — They  amuse  themselves  in  studying,  writing,  and  playing. — 
In  what  does  your  cousin  amuse  himself? — He  amuses  himself  in 
reading  good  books  and  in  writing  to  his  friends. — In  what  do  you 
amuse  yourself  when  you  have  nothing  to  do  at  home  ? — I go  to  the 
play  and  to  the  concert.  I often  say,  “ Every  one  amuses  himself  as 
be  likes.” — Every  man  has  his  taste ; what  is  yours  ? — Mine  is  tc 
4tudy,  to  read  a good  book,  to  go  to  the  theatre,  the  concert,  and  the 
:)fall,  and  to  ride. 

140. 

Why  does  your  cousin  not  brush  his  coat  ? — He  does  not  brush  it. 
because  he  is  afraid  of  soiling  his  fingers. — What  does  my  neighboi 
tell  you  ? — He  tells  me  that  you  wish  to  buy  nis  horse  ; but  I 

know  that  (gue)  he  is  mistaken,  because  you  have  no  money  to  buy  it 


FORTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


185 


—What  do  they  (se)  say  at  the  market  ? — They  say  that  (gue)  the 
enemy  is  beaten. — Do  you  believe  that  ? — I believe  it,  because  every 
one  says  so. — Why  have  you  bought  that  book  ? — I have  bought  it, 
because  I want  it  to  learn  Spanish,  and  because  every  one  speaks  of  it. 
— Are  your  friends  going  away  ? — They  are  going  away. — When  are 
they  going  away  ? — They  are  going  away  to-morrow. — When  are  you 
going  away  ? — We  are  going  away  to-day. — Am  I going  away  ? — V"ou 
are  going  away  if  you  like. — What  do  our  neighbors  say  ? — They  are 
going  away  without  saying  any  thing. — How  do  you  like  this  wine  ?-- 
I do  not  like  it. — What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? — I feel  sleepy. — Does 
your  friend  feel  sleepy  ? — He  does  not  feel  sleepy,  but  he  is  cold. — 
Why  does  he  not  warm  himself  ? — He  has  no  wood  to  make  a fire. — 
Why  does  he  not  buy  some  wood  ? — He  has  no  money  to  buy  any. — 
Will  you  lend  him  some  ? — If  he  has  none  I will  lend  him  some. — 
Are  you  thirsty  ? — I am  not  thirsty,  but  very  hungry. — Is  your  servant 
sleepy  ? — He  is  sleepy. — Is  he  hungry  ? — He  is  hungry. — Why  does 
he  not  eat  ? — Because  he  has  nothing  to  eat. — Are  your  children 
hungry  ? — They  are  hungry,  but  they  have  nothing  to  eat. — Have  they 
any  thing  to  drink  ? — They  have  nothing  to  drink. — Why  do  you  not 
eat  ? — I do  not  eat  when  I am  not  hungry. — Why  does  the  Russian 
not  drink  ? — He  does  not  drink  when  he  is  not  thirsty. — Did  your 
brother  eat  any  thing  yesterday  evening  ? — He  ate  a piece  of  beef,  a 
small  piece  of  fowl,  and  a piece  of  bread. — Did  he  not  drink  ? — He 
also  drank. — What  did  he  drink  ? — He  drank  a glass  of  wine. 


FORTY-FIFTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Cuadragesima  quinia. 

PERFECT  OF  REFLECTIVE  VERBS : 

(Preterito  Perfecto  Proximo  de  los  Verbos  Pronominales.) 


In  Spanish  all  reflective  verbs,  as 
fcnses  the  auxiliary  habeV)  (to  have.) 

Have  you  cut  yourself? 

I have  cut  myself 
Have  I cut  myself? 

You  have  cut  yourself. 

You  have  not  cut  yourself 
Hast  thou  cut  thyself? 

] have  not  cut  myself. 

lias  your  brother  cut  himself? 


in  English,  take  in  their  compoumj 

I Se  ha  cortado  V.  ? 

Yo  me  he  cortado. 

I Me  he  cortado  (yo)  ? 

V.  se  ha  cortado.* 

V.  no  se  ha  cortado.* 
i Te  has  cortado  (tU)  ? 

(Yo)  no  me  he  cortado. 

I Se  ha  cortado  su  (ol)  hermuno  Je 
V.? 


* Vosotros  haheis  cortado. 


* No  os  habeis  cortado. 


186 


FORIT- FIFTH  LESS015T. 


He  has  cut  himself, 
ilave  we  cut  ourselves? 

Vou  have  not  cut  yourselves. 
Have  these  men  cut  themselves  ? 
They  have  not  cut  tnemselves 

To  take  a walk. 

To  go  a- walking. 

To  take  an  airing  in  a carriage  ^ 
The  coach. 

To  take  a r«de. 

Do  you  take  a walit  ? 

I do  take  a walk. 

He  takes  a walk. 

JVVe  take  a walk. 

Thou  wisliest  to  take  an  airing. 
They  wish  to  take  a ride. 


To  walk  a child,  (to  take  it  a-walk- 
ing.) 

Do  you  take  your  children  a-walk- 
ing? 

I take  them  a-walking  every  morn- 
ing. 


fil  se  ha  cortado. 

Nos  hemos  cortado. 

VV.  no  se  han  cortado.^ 

I Se  han  cortado  estos  honibres  ? 
(Elios')  no  se  han  cortado 


t Fasearse  1. 

Ir  d pasear.  Salir  a pasear. 
t Pasearse  (dar  un  paseo)  en  coclie 
El  coche. 

t Pasearse  d caballo. 
t i Se  pasea  V. 
t Yo  me  paseo. 
t El  se  pasea. 
t Nosotros  nos  paseamos. 
t Tu  te  quieres  pasear  en  coche. 
t Elios  quieren  pasearse  d caballo 


Hacer  pasear  d un  niho,  or  lleva^ 
un  niho  d pasear. 
t I Hace  V.  pasear  d sus  nihos  ? 

1 Los  hago  pasear  todas  las  mananas 


Every f (meaning  frequency.) 

To  go  to  bed 
To  lie  down. 

To  get  up.  To  rise. 

Do  you  rise  early  ? 

I rise  at  sunrise. 

I go  to  bed  at  sunset. 

The  sunset. 

The  sunrise. 

/it  wnat  time  did  you  go  to  bed  1 
A.t  three  o’clock  in  the  morning. 

A.t  what  o’clock  did  he  go  to  bed 
yesterday  ? 

He  went  to  bed  late. 


I Todos  los.  Todas  las,  (fern,  pi.) 

^ t Acostarse. 

I't  Ir  d acostarse  Irse  d la  catna. 
I Levantarse  1. 

I Se  levanta  V.  temprano  ? 

Me  levanto  al  salir  del  sol. 

Me  acuesto  al  ponerse  del  sol. 

El  ponerse  del  sol. 

El  salir  del  sol.  El  rayar  del  alba. 
I A que  hora  se  acostd  V.  ? 
t A las  tres  de  la  manana. 
t i A que  hora  se  acostd  dl  ayor  ? 

(fil)  se  acostd  tarde. 


To  rejoice  at  something  | Alegrarse  de  algo,  (cr  de  algun^i 
I cosa.)  Regocijarse  de. 


^ No  oe  hoheis  cortado. 


’ I Os  paseais  vosotros,  or  vos  ? 


FORIT-FIFTH  l^SSON. 


{ rejoice  at  your  happiness. 

The  happiness. 

&.1  what  does  your  uncle  rejoice  ? 

I have  rejoiced. 

They  have  rejoiced. 

VVe  have  mistaken. 

You  have  mistaken. 

To  hurt  somebody, 

The  evil.  The  pain.  The  harm. 

flave  you  hurt  that  man  ? 

have  hurt  that  man. 

^Vhy  did  you  hurt  that  man  ? 

I have  not  hurt  him, 

Does  that  hurt  you  ? 

That  hurts  me. 

To  do  good  to  anybody. 

Have  I ever  done  you  any  harm  ? 

On  the  contrary. 

Vo  ; on  the  contrary,  you  have  done 
me  good. 

I have  never  done  harm  to  any  one. 


Have  I hurt  you  ? 
You  have  not  hurt  me 

That  does  me  good 

To  do  with. 

To  dispose  of. 


187 

t Me  alegro  de  la  dicha  de  V- 
La  dicha.  La  felicidad. 
t i De  que  se  alegra  el  senoi  tio  de 
V ? 

Yo  me  he  alegrado. 

Elios  se  han  alegrado. 
t Nos  hemos  equivocado. 
t V.  se  ha  eouivocado.^ 

Hacer  mal  (dano  or  lastimar)  i 
alguno.  t Ofender. 

El  mal.  El  dolor  El  dano. 

^Ha  hecho  V.  mal  (dano)  d ese 
hombre  ? 

I Ha  lastimado  V.  d,  ese  hombre  ? 

He  hecho  mal  (dano)  d ese  hombre 
Yo  he  lastimado  d ese  hombre 
I Porque  hizo  V mal  (dano)  d e.se 
hombre  ? 

I Porque  lastimd  V.  d,  ese  hombre  ? 
No  le  he  hecho  mal,  (dano.) 

No  le  he  lastimado. 

I Le  hace  mal  (daiio)  d V.  eso  7 
I Le  lastima  eso  d V.  ? 

Eso  me  hace  mal,  (dano.) 

Hacer  Men  a alguno,  {a  uno.) 

I Le  he  hecho  jamas  algun  mal  a 
V.? 

A1  contrario. 

No ; al  contrario,  V.  me  ha  hecltr 
bien. 

Nunca  he  hecho  mal  d nadio. 


I He  hecho  yz  a.gun  mal  d V ? 
I Le  he  lastimado  d V.  ? 

V no  me  ha  hecho  mal 

V nc  me  ha  lastimado. 


Eso  me  hace  bien. 


Hacer  con. 

Disponer  de  (See  Poner.) 


* Vosofrcs  os  habeis  equivocado. 


188 


FORTY-FIF\H  LESSON. 


What  does  the  servant  do  with  his 
broom  ? 

lie  sweeps  the  floor  with  it. 

With  it. 

What  does  he  wish  to  make  with  his 
wood  ? 

lie  does  not  wish  to  make  any  thing 
with  it. 


I Que  hace  el  criado  con  la  euoobuJ 

Barre  el  suelo  con  ella. 

Con  cl,  (mas.)  Con  ella,  (fern  ) 

I Que  quiere  61  hacer  con  su  lefia  ? 

fil  no  quiere  hacer  nada  con  ella. 


Ohs.  When  a proposition  has  no  definite  subject,  the  English,  in 
order  to  avoid  the  pronouns  they,  people,  &c.,  use  the  verb  in  the  passive 
voice,  and  say  : / was  told,  instead  of,  They  told  me  ; He  is  flattered,  in- 
stead of.  They  flatter  him.  This  is  always  expressed  in  Spanish  by  the 
pronoun  se  and  a verb  in  the  third  person  singular,  or  by  a verb  in  the 
third  person  plural  without  the  pronoun  se.  (See  Lesson  XXVIII., 
Ohs.  A.  and  B.)  Example  : — 


He  is  flattered,  but  he  is  not  be- 
loved. 

/ am  told  that  he  is  arrived. 

That. 

\ knife  was  given  to  him  to  cut  his 
bread,  and  he  cut  his  finger. 

To  flatter  some  one. 

To  flatter  one’s  self. 

He  flatters  himself  to  know  Spai  ish. 
Nothing  hut. 

He  has  nothing  but  enemies. 


(A  el)  se  le  alaba,  pero  no  so  le  ama 
(A  el)  le  alaban,  pero  no  le  aman. 
Me  dicen  que  (el)  ha  llegado. 

Se  me  dice  que  ha  llegado. 

Que,  (conjunction.) 

Se  le  ha  dado  un  cuchillo  para  re- 
ban ar  el  pan,  y dl  se  cortd  el  dedti 
Le  dieron  un  cuchillo,  &c. 

Alahar  {lisonjear)  d alguno,  a iino 
Alabarse  (d  si  mismo.) 

Llsonjearse.  Preciarse. 

Se  precia  de  saber  el  Espanol. 

Se  alaba  de  saber  el  EspanoU 
Sino.  No  (v)  sino. 

No  (v)  mas  que. 

6i  no  tiene  sino  enemigos. 

^il  no  tiene  mas  que  enemigos. 


To  become,  sto  turn.^ 

He  has  turned  a soldier 
Have  you  turned  a merchant  ? 

I have  turned  (become)  a lawyer. 
What  has  become  of  your  brother  ? 

Wliat  has  become  of  him  7 
1 do  not  know  what  has  become  ci 
him. 


t Hacerse.  Meterse. 
t (6l)  se  ha  hecho  soldado. 
t [ Se  ha  hecho  V.  comerciante  ? 
t Me  he  hecho  abogado. 
t i Que  se  ha  hecho  de  su  hennar  i 
de  V.? 

t I Que  se  ha  hecho  de  6\  ? 
t Yo  no  se  lo  que  se  ha  hech:  dc  A 


To  enlist.  To  enrol. 


i Alisiarse.  Hacerse  soldado 
t t Sentar  plaza. 


FORTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


189 


He  has  enlisted.  [ Se  ha  alistado.  Ha  sentado  plaza. 


For,  (meaning  because.)  j Porque 

cannot  pay  you,  for  I have  no  ! Yo  no  puedo  pagar  d V.  porque  nc 
money  ! tengo  dinero. 

f!e  cannot  give  you  any  bread,  for  no  puede  dar  pan  d V.  porque  nc 
he  has  none  tiene,  (ninguno.) 


To  believe  some  one 
Do  you  believe  that  man  ? 

I do  not  believe  him 
But  we  say  : 

To  believe  in  God 
I believe  in  God. 


Creer  d alguno,  (d  uno.) 
I Cree  V.  d ese  hombre  ? 
Yo  no  le  creo. 

Creer  en  Dios. 

Yo  creo  en  Dios. 


To  utter  a falsehood.  To  lie. 
I lie,  thou  best,  he  lies. 

The  stoiy-teller,  the  liar. 


Decir  una  falsedad.  Mentir  * 
Miento,  mientes,  miente. 

El  embustero,  el  mentiroso 


EXERCISES. 

141. 

Why  has  that  child  been  praised  ? — It  has  been  praised  because  it 
nas  studied  well. — Hast  thou  ever  been  praised  ? — I have  often  been 
praised. — Why  has  that  other  child  been  punished  ? — It  has  been  pun- 
ished, because  it  bas  been  naughty  and  idle. — Has  this  child  been  re- 
warded ? — It  has  been  rewarded  because  it  has  worked  well. — Wliat 
must  one  do  in  order  to  be  praised  ? — One  must  be  studious  and 
good. — Wliat  has  become  of  your  friend  ? — He  has  become  a lawyer. 
— What  has  become  of  your  cousin  ? — He  has  enlisted. — Has  your 
neighbor  enlisted  ? — He  has  not  enlisted. — What  has  become  of  him  ? 
— He  has  turned  a merchant. — What  has  become  of  his  children  ? — 
His  children  have  become  men. — Wlmt  has  become  of  your  son  ? — He 
nas  become  a great  man. — Has  he  become  learned  ? — He  has  become 
learned. — What  has  become  of  my  book  ? — I do  not  know  what  has 
become  of  it. — Have  you  torn  it? — I have  not  torn  it. — What  has  be- 
come of  our  friend’s  son  ? — I do  not  know  what  has  become  of  him. — 
What  have  you  done  with  your  money  ? — I have  bought  a book  with 
it. — What  has  the  joiner  done  with  his  wood  ? — He  has  made  a bench 
of  it. — What  has  the  tailor  done  with  the  cloth  which  you  gave  him  ? 
— He  has  made  clothes  of  it  for  your  children  and  mine. — Has  that 
man  hurt  you  ? — No,  Sir,  he  has  not  hurt  me.— What  must  one  do  in 
order  to  be  loved,  (para  que  le  amenl) — One  must  (es  menester  qut 
^iagamos  hien)  do  good  to  those  that  have  done  u?  harm. — Have  wp 


190 


FORTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


g^^er  done  you  harm  ? — No  ; you  have  on  the  contiary  done  us  goijd 
■ — Do  you  do  harm  to  any  one  ? — I do  no  one  any  harm. — Why  have 
you  hurt  these  children  ? — I have  not  hurt  them. — Have  I hurt  you  ? — 
You  have  not  hurt  me,  but  your  boys  have. — What  have  tliey  done  to 
you  ? — They  have  beaten  me. — Is  it  your  brother  who  has  hurt  my 
son  ? — No,  Sir,  it  is  not  my  brotner,  for  he  has  never  hurt  any  one. 

142. 

Have  you  drunk  that  wine  ? — I have  drunk  it. — How  did  you  like  it  ? 
— I liked  it  very  well. — Has  it  done  you  good  ? — It  has  done  me  good. 
— Have  you  hurt  yourself  ? — I have  not  hurt  myself. — Who  has  hurt 
himself  ? — My  brother  has  hurt  himself,  for  he  has  cut  his  fingei . — Is 
he  still  ill,  {malo  ?) — He  is  better. — I rejoice  to  hear  that  he  is  no  longer 
ill,  for  I love  him. — Why  does  your  cousin  pull  out  his  hair  ? — Because 
he  cannot  pay  what  he  owes. — Have  you  cut  your  hair  ? — I have  not 
cut  it  (myself,)  but  I have  had  it  cut,  {me  le  he  heclio  riyriar.^ — What 
has  this  child  done  ? — He  has  cut  his  foot. — Why  was  a knife  given 
to  him  ? — A knife  was  given  him  to  {'paro)  cut  {que  se  cortasc)  his 
nails,  and  he  has  cut  his  finger  and  his  foot. — Do  you  go  to  bed  early  ? 
— I go  to  bed  late,  for  I cannot  sleep  when  I go  to  bed  early. — At  what 
o’clock  did  you  go  to  bed  yesterday  ? — Yesterday  I went  to  bed  at  a 
quarter  past  eleven. — At  what  o’clock  do  your  children  go  to  bed  ?— 
They  go  to  bed  at  sunset. — Do  they  rise  early  ? — They  rise  at  sunrise. 
— At  what  o’clock  did  you  rise  to-day  ? — To-day  I rose  late,  because  I 
wont  to  bed  late  yesterday  evening,  {ayer  noche.) — Does  your  son  rise 
Late  ? — He  rises  early,  for  he  never  goes  to  bed  late. — What  does  he 
do  when  he  gets  up  ? — He  studies,  and  then  breakfasts. — Does  he  not 
go  out  before  he  breakfasts  ? — No,  he  studies  and  breakfasts  before  he 
goes  out. — What  does  he  do  after  breakfasting  ? — As  soon  as  he  has 
breakfasted  he  comes  to  my  house,  and  we  take  a ride. — Didst  thou 
rise  this  morning  as  early  as  I ? — I rose  earlier  than  you,  for  I rose 
before  sunrise. 

143. 

Do  you  often  go  a-walking  ? — I go  a-walking  when  I have  nothing 
t(j  do  at  home. — Do  you  wish  to  take  a walk  ? — I cannot  take  a v/alk, 
for  I have  too  much  to  do. — Has  your  brother  taken  a ride  ? — He  has 
^ken  an  airing  in  a carriage. — Do  your  children  often  go  a-walking  1 
■ — They  go  a-walking  every  morning  after  breakfast. — Do  you  take  a 
walk  after  dinner  ? — After  dinner  I drink  tea,  and  then  I take  a walk. 
—Do  you  often  take  your  children  a-walking  ? — I take  them  a-walking 
every  morning  and  every  evening. — Can  you  go  with  me? — I cannoi 
go  with  you,  for  I am  to  take  my  little  brother  out  a-walking. — Where 
do  you  walk  ?— We  walk  in  our  uncle’s  garden. — Did  your  father 


FORTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


191 


rejoice  to  see  you  ? — lie  did  rejoice  to  see  me. — What  did  you  rejoice 
at  ? — I rejoiced  at  seeing  my  good  friends. — What  was  your  uncle  de- 
lighted with,  {se  ha  alegrado  — He  was  delighted  with  {de  recilnr)  the 
horse  which  you  have  sent  him. — What  were  your  children  delighted 
witJi  ? — They  were  delighted  with  {de  tener)  the  fine  clothes  which  J 
had  liad  made  for  them,  {que  les  mandc  hacer.) — Why  does  this  man 
rejoice  so  much  ? — Because  he  flatters  himself  he  has  good  friends. — 
is  he  not  right  in  rejoicing  ? — He  is  wrong,  for  he  has  (nothing > but 
enemies. — Is  he  not  loved  ? — He  is  flattered,  but  he  is  not  beloved. — 
Do  you  flatter  yourself  that  you  know  Spanish  ? — I do  flatter  myseii 
tliat  1 know  it ; for  I can  speak,  read,  and  write  it. — Has  the  physician 
done  any  harm  to  your  child  ? — He  has  cut  his  finger,  {el  le  ha  cortado 
el  dedo,)  but  he  has  not  done  him  any  harm,  so  (y)  you  are  mistaken,  if 
you  believe  that  he  has  done  him  any  harm. — Why  do  you  listen  jo 
that  man  ? — I listen  to  him,  but  I do  not  believe  him  ; fjr  I know  that 
he  is  a story-teller. — How  do  you  know  that  he  is  a story-teller  ? — He 
does  not  believe  in  God  j and  all  those  {los  que)  who  do  not  believe  in 
God  are  storv-teller^ 


FORTY-SIXTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Cuadragesima  sexta. 


We  have  already  seen  (Lessons  XLI.  and  XLII.)  some  idiomatical  ex- 
pressions with  hacer,  all  of  which  belong  to  the  impersonal  verbs.  Tnece 
vorl)s,  having  no  determinate  subject,  are  conjugated  only  in  the  third  per- 
»oii  singular,  without  any  pronoun 


OF  IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


To  rain.  It  rains. 

To  snow.  It  snows. 

To  hail.  It  hails. 

To  lighten.  It  lightens 

Does  it  lighten  ? 

It  does  lighten. 

It  rains  very  hard. 


lilover  * 2.  Llueve. 

Nevar  * 1.  Nieva. 

Granizar  1.  Graniza. 

Relampaguear  1.  Relampaguea. 
I Relampaguea  ? 

Relampaguea,  (or  si.; 

Llueve  muy  recio. 

El  reHmpago. 

El  quitasol. 

Relampaguea  mucho. 

I Nieva  ? i Estl  nevando  i 
I Nieva  mucho. 

I Graniza  mucho. 


The  lightning 
The  parasol 


It  lightens  much. 
Does  it  snow  ? 

It  snows  much. 

It  hails  much 


192 


FORTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


The  sun  does  not  shine 
The  sun  is  in  my  eyes 


r t No  hay  sol.  No  hace  sol 
/ 7 No  parece  el  sol. 

(No  luce  el  sol. 

I t Mo  da  el  sol  en  los  ojoB 


To  thunder,  it  thunders  1 Tronar  * 1,  truena. 

To  shine,  to  glitter.  | Lucir,  resplandecer.  (See  App.j 


To  shut. 

Have  you  done  ? 

Is  the  walking  good  ? 

In  that  country. 

The  country. 

He  has  made  many  friends  in  that 
country. 


Cerrar  * 1. 
t I Ha  acabado  V.  ? 

I Estd,  bueno  (el  piso)  para  pasoar  ? 
En  ese  pais. 

El  pais. 

El  se  ha  hecho  muchos  amigos  ec 
ese  pais. 


{De  quCf  (of  both  genders  and  numbers.) 

BOTH  GENDERS.  MAS  FEM 

De  quien.  Del  cual.  De  la  cual,  (sing) 
De  quienes.  De  los  cuales.  De  las  cuales,  (plur.) 


r see  the  man  of  whom  you  speak.  | 
1 have  bought  the  horse  of  which 
vou  spoke  to  mo  | 


Whose, 

1 see  the  man  whos  brother  has  kill- 
ed my  dog. 

I see  the  man  whose  dog  you  have 
killed. 

Do  you  see  the  child  whose  father 
set  out  yesterday '? 

I see  it. 

Whom  have  you  seen  ? 

1 have  seen  the  merchant  whose 
warehouse  you  have  taken. 

[ have  spoken  to  the  man  whose 
warehouse  has  been  burnt. 

That  which. 

That  of  which. 


Yo  veo  al  hombre  de  quien  V.  habla. 
He  comprado  el  caballo  de  que  (or 
del  cual)  V.  me  habl6. 


SINGULAR.  PLURAL 

Cuyo,  (mas.)  Cuyos,  (mas.) 

Cuya,  (fern.)  * Cuyas,  (fern.) 

Yo  veo  al  hombre  cuyo  hermano  na 
matado  mi  perro. 

Yo  veo  al  hombre  cuyo  perro  V.  ha 
matado. 

^Ve  V.  al  niho  cuyo  padre  se  mar- 
cho  ayer? 

Yo  le  veo. 

I A quien  ha  visto  V.  ? 

Yo  he  visto  al  comerciante  cuyo  al- 
macen  ha  tornado  V. 

He  hablado  al  hombre  cuyo  almacer 
se  ha  quemado. 

Lo  que.  Aquello  que 

Aquello  de  que 


KOHTY-SIXTH  LESSOJ^, 


193 


Thaty  or  the  one  of  which. 


Thoscy  or  the  ones  of  which. 

I have  that  of  which  I have  need. 
[ have  what  I want. 

H 3 has  what  he  wants. 


f Aquel  de  quien,  (mas.  sing.) 

J Aquclla  de  quien,  (fern,  sing.) 

I Aquel  del  cual,  (mas.  sing.) 

L Aquella  de  la  cunl,  (fern,  sing.) 
r Aquellos  de  quienes,  (mas.  plur.) 
j Aquellas  de  quienes,  (fern,  plur.) 

I Aquellos  de  los  cuales,  (mas.  plur ) 

L Aquellas  de  las  cuales,  (fem.  plur.) 

Tengo  lo  que  he  menester,  (necesito.l 
I Tiene  lo  que  ha  menester,  (necesita.) 


Have  you  the  book  of  which  you 
have  need? 

I have  that  of  which  I have  need. 
Has  the  man  the  nails  of  which  he 
has  need  ? 

He  has  those  of  which  he  has  need. 

To  need.  To  want 
To  have  need  ot 


I Tiene  V.  el  libro  que  ha  meLestei 
(que  necesita)  ? 

Tengo  el  que  he  menester,  (necesito.) 
I Tiene  el  hombre  los  clavos  que  ha 
menester,  (que  necesita)  ? 

6l  tiene  los  que  ha  menester. 

El  tiene  aquellos  que  necesita. 

/ Haber  menester.  Necesitar. 


Which  men  do  you  see  ? 

[ see  those  of  whom  you  have  spoken 
to  me. 

Do  you  see  the  pupils  of  whom  I 
have  spoken  tc  you  ? 

{ see  them. 


I Que  hombres  ve  V.  ? 

Yo  veo  d,  aquellos  de  quienes  (de  los 
cuales)  V.  me  ha  hablado. 
iVe  V.  d los  discipulos  de  quienee 
(de  los  cuales)  he  hablado  d V.  ? 
Yo  los  veo. 


To  whom. 

[ the  children  to  whom  you  have 
given  some  cakes. 

To  which  men  do  you  speak  ? 

1 8}>eak  to  those  to  whom  you  have 
applied. 

To  apply  to. 

To  meet  with. 

\ have  met  with  the  men  to  whom 
you  have  applied. 


Al  cualy  (mas.)  A'  los  cuales,  (pi.) 

, A la  cualy  (fem.)  A'  las  cuales,  (pi.) 

Yo  veo  los  ninos  d quienes  (d  loa 
cuales)  V.  ha  dado  algunos  hollos, 
(bizcochos.) 

A que  hombres  habla  V.? 

Yo  hablo  d aquellos  d quienes  (or  d 
los  cuales)  V.  ha  recurrido. 

Recurrir  a.  Acudir  a.  Dirigirse  d. 

Encontrar  d.  Encontrarse  con. 

Yo  me  he  encontrado  con  los  hom 
bres  d quienes  (or  d los  cualoe)  V 
ha  acudido. 


194 


i’ORTY-SIXTH  LESSON 


Df  which  men  do  you  speak  ? 

[ speak  of  those  whose  children  have 
been  studious  and  obedient. 
Obedient.  Disobedient. 

So  that, 

j !>av8  lost  my  money,  so  that  I can- 
not pay  you. 

I am  ill,  so  that  I cannot  go  out. 


I De  que  hombres  habla  V.7 
Yo  hablo  de  aquellos  cuyos  Ui'Scs; 

han  sido  estudiosos  y ohedientes 
Obediente.  Desobedieiite 

AsL  De  suerte  qucy  (conjuncticn.; 
He  perdido  mi  dinero,  y asi  no  Ifi 
puedo  pagar  d V. 

Estoy  malo,  asi  no  puedo  salir. 


111.  j Malo.  Enfermc 

To  be  ill.  1 Estar  malo.  Esti.i  eiifermo 


EXERCISES. 

144. 

Have  you  at  last  learned  Spanish  ? — I was  ill,  so*  that  I cculd  nd 
learn  it. — Has  your  brother  learned  it  ? — He  has  not  learned  it,  because 
he  has  not  yet  been  able  to  find  a good  master. — Do  you  go  to  the  baU 
this  evening  ? — I have  sore  feet,  so  that  I cannot  go  (to  it.) — Did  you 
understand  that  German  ? — I do  not  know  German,  so  that  I could  not 
understand  him. — Have  you  bought  the  horse  of  which  you  spoke  to 
me  ? — I have  no  money,  so  that  I could  not  buy  it. — Have  you  seen 
the  man  from  whom  I have  received  a present  ? — I have  not  seen  him. 
— Have  you  seen  the  fine  gun  of  which  I spoke  to  you  ? — I have  seen 
it. — Has  your  uncle  seen  the  books  of  which  you  spoke  to  him  ? — He 
has  seen  them. — Hast  thou  seen  the  man  whose  children  have  been 
punished  ? — I have  not  seen  him. — To  whom  have  you  been  speaking 
in  the  theatre  ? — I have  been  speaking  to  the  man  whose  brother  has 
killed  my  fine  dog. — Have  you  seen  the  little  boy  whose  father  has  be- 
come a lawyer  ? — I have  seen  him. — Whom  have  you  seen  at  the  ball  1 
— I have  seen  there  the  men  whose  horses,  and  those  whose  coach  you 
have  bought. — Whom  do  you  see  now  ? — I see  the  man  whose  servant 
has  broken  my  looking-glass. — Have  you  heard  the  man  whose  friend 
has  lent  me  money  ? — I have  not  heard  him. — Whom  have  you  heard  ? 
— I have  heard  the  French  captain  whose  son  is  my  friend. — Hast  thou 
brushed  the  coat  of  which  1 spoke  to  thee  ? — I have  not  yet  brushed  it. 
«-Have  you  received  the  money  which  you  have  been  wanting  ? — I 
aave  received  it. — Have  I the  paper  of  which  I have  need  ? — You  have 
It. — Has  your  brother  the  books  which  he  is  wanting  ? — ^He  has  them. 
— Have  you  spoken  to  the  merchants  whose  warehouse  we  have 
taken  ? — We  have  spoken  to  them. — ^Have  you  spoken  to  the  physician 
whose  son  has  studied  German  ? — I have  spoken  to  him. — Hast  thou 


FORTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


195 


seen  the  poor  men  whose  warehouses  have  been  burnt  ? — I nave  seen 
tliem. — Have  you  read  the  books  which  we  have  lent  you  ? — Wo  have 
read  them. — What  do  you  say  of  them  ? — We  say  that  they  are  very 
.ane. — Have  your  children  what  they  want  ? — They  have  what  ihey 
want. 

145. 

Of  which  man  do  you  speak  ? — I speak  of  the  one  whose  brothe? 
has  turned  soldier.-^f  which  children  have  you  spoken  ? — 1 ilav^^ 
spoken  of  those  whose  parents  are  learned. — Which  book  have  you 
read  ? — I have  read  that  of  which  I spoke  to  vou  yesterday. — Which 
paper  has  your  cousin  ? — He  has  that  of  which  he  has  need. — Which 
fishes  has  he  eaten  ? — He  has  eaten  those  which  you  do  not  like. — 
Of  which  books  are  you  in  want  ? — I am  in  want  of  those  of  which 
you  have  spoken  to  me. — Are  you  not  in  want  of  those  which  I am 
reading  ? — I am  not  in  v/ant  of  them. — Do  you  see  the  children  to 
whom  I have  given  cakes  ? — I do  not  see  those  to  whom  you  have 
given  cakes,  but  those  whom  you  have  punished. — To  whom  have  you 
given  some  money? — I have  given  some  to  those  who  have  been 
skilful. — To  which  children  must  one  give  books  ? — One  must  give 
(some)  to  those  who  are  good  and  obedient. — To  whom  doT  you  give  to 
eat  and  to  drink  ? — To  those  who  are  hungry  and  thirsty. — Do  you 
give  any  thing  to  the  children  who  are  idle  ? — I give  them  nothing. — 
Did  it  snow  yesterday  ? — It  did  snow,  hail,  and  lighten. — Did  it  rain  ? 
— It  did  rain. — Did  you  go  out  ? — I never  go  out  when  it  is  bad 
weather. — Have  the  captains  at  last  listened  to  that  man  ? — They  have 
refused  to  listen  to  him  ; all  those  to  whom  he  applied  have  refused  to 
near  him. — With  whom  have  you  met  this  morning  ? — I have  met 
with  the  man  by  whom  I am  esteemed. — Have  you  given  any  cakes 
to  your  pupils  ? — They  have  not  studied  well,  so  that  I have  given 
them  nothing. 


TORTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Cuadragesima  septima, 
OF  THE  FUTURE— No  4. 

The  First  Future,  Futuro  Indejinidoy  is  formed  from  the  infinitive  mood 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  other  tenses.  (See  the  table  of  terminations  ir 
the  Appendix.) 

To  speak — I shall  or  will  speak. 

I’o  sell — I shall  or  will  sell. 

To  receive — I shai!  or  will  receive. 


Hablar — yo  hablar^. 
Vender — yo  vendere 
Recibir — v^*  recibird. 


196 


FORTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


Thou  shait  or  wilt  speak. 
He  shall  or  will  speak. 
You  shall  or  will  speak. 
We  shall  or  will  speak. 
They  shall  or  will  speak. 
You  shall  or  will  speak. 


Tii  hablards. 

]^^1  hablara. 

V.  hablard.  {Vos  hahlateis. 
Nosotros  hablardmos. 

Elios  (ellas)  hablardn. 

VV.  hablaran.  {Vosbtros  hahlareib.) 


Qbs,  111  Spanish,  the  first  person  singular  of  the  Future  always  end/; 
In  c,  and  from  this  all  the  other  persons  may  be  formed  by  changing  i 
into  dSf  df  emos,  eisy  dn.  Examples: — 


To  love — I shall  or  will  love. 

To  foresee — I shall  or  will  foresee. 
To  restore — I shall  or  will  restore. 
To  have — I shall  or  will  havp,  (act.) 
To  have — I shall  or  will  have,  (aux.) 
'To  be — I shall  or  will  be. 

To  be — I shall  or  will  be. 


Amar — amare, 
Prever — prevere, 
Restituir — restituire, 
Teller — tendre, 
Haber — habre, 

Ser — sere, 

Estar — estare. 


asy  «,  emns, 
eiSy  in. 


To  go — I shall  or  vill  go. 

To  come — I shall  or  will  come. 

To  know — I shall  or  will  know. 

To  be  worth — I shall  or  will  be 
worth. 

To  be  able — I shall  or  will  be  able. 
To  do — I shall  or  will  do. 

To  be  willing — I shall  or  will  be 
willing. 

To  go  out — I shall  or  will  go  out. 

To  owe — I shall  or  will  owe. 

To  give — I shall  or  will  give. 

To  see — I shall  or  will  see. 


Ir — ire, 

Venir,  vendre. 
Saber — sabre, 
Valer — valdre, 

Poder — podre, 
Hacer — hare, 
Querer — querre, 

Salir — saldre, 
Deber — debere, 
Dar — dare, 

Ver — vere. 


aSf  a,  emo8, 
eiSy  dn. 


To  be  necessary — it  will  or  shall  be 
necessary. 

To  rain — it  will  rain. 

To  send — I shall  or  will  send. 

To  sit  down — I shall  or  will  sit  down. 


Ser  menester — serd,  menester. 

Ser  necesario — serd,  necesario 
Llover — lloverd,. 

Enviar — enviare. 

Sentarse — me  sentare.  (See  reftvXf* 
tive  verbs.) 


Shall  or  will  he  have  money  ? 
ilo  will  have  some. 

He  will  not  have  any. 

Shall  you  soon  have  done  (finish) 
writing  ? 

[ shall  soon  have  done,  (finish.) 

Ele  will  soon  have  done  (finish)  his 
exercise. 


I Tendrd  el  dinero? 

El  tendrd,  alguno,  (or  uii  poco.; 
fil  no  tendrd.  ninguno. 

I Acabard  V.  pronto  de  escribir  if 

Pronto  acabard. 

Pronto  acabard  su  ejercicio 


FORTY-SEVENTH  LESSOJ^. 


191 


^Vlieu  shall  you  write  your  exer- 
cises? 

i will  do  them  soon,  (ere  long.) 

My  brother  will  do  his  exercise  to- 
morrow 

Next  Monday. 

Last  Monday 
Next  month. 

This  month. 

This  country. 


^Cuando  escribiri  V.  sus  ejerc  .cios? 

Yo  los  escribire  pronto. 

Mi  hermano  hara  su  tema  manana 

t El  Ldnes  que  viene,  (or  proximo 
or  que  entra.) 
t El  Lunes  pasado. 
t El  mes  que  viene,  (or  que  entra.) 
Este  mes. 

Este  pais. 


When  will  your  cousin  go  to  the 
concert? 

lie  will  go  next  Tuesday. 

Shall  you  go  anywhere  ? 

We  shall  go  nowhere. 


iCuando  ird  al  concierto  su  prime 
de  V.? 

6l  ird.  el  Mdrtes  que  viene 
I Iran  VV.  d alguna  parte  ? 

No  iremosd  ninguna  parte 


Will  he  send  me  the  book  ? 

He  will  send  it  you  if  he  has  done 
with  it 

Shall  you  be  at  home  this  afternoon  ? 
I shall  be  (there.) 

Will  your  father  be  at  home  ? 

He  will  be  (there.) 

Will  your  cousins  be  there  ? 

They  will  be  (there.) 


I Me  enviard  el  libro  ? 

El  se  le  enviard  d V.  si  le  ha  scaba* 
do. 

I Estard  V.  en  casa  esta  tarde  ? 

Si,  senor;  or,  Yo  estard. 

[ Estard  en  casa  el  senor  padre  de  V.? 
Si,  senor  ; or  Si,  estard. 

I Estardn  alii  los  senores  primos  de 
V.? 

Si,  senor ; or,  Elios  estardn 


'Vill  he  send  me  the  books  ? 

He  will  send  them  to  you. 

Will  he  send  some  paper  to  my 
counting-house  ? 

He  will  send  some  (thither.) 


I Me  enviard  dl  los  libros  ? 

se  los  enviard  a V. 
i Enviard  dl  algun  papel  d mi  oficio 

Si,  enviard  algune. 


Sliall  you  be  able  to  pay  your  shoe- 
maker ? 

I have  lost  my  money,  so  that  I 
shall  not  bo  able  to  pay  him. 

My  friend  has  lost  his  pocket-book, 
so  that  he  will  mt  be  able  to  pay 
Cor  his  shoes. 


Will  you  nold  any  thing  ? 

I shall  hold  your  umbrella 


I Podrd  V.  pagar  d su  zapatero  ? 

He  perdido  mi  dinero,  asi  no  podr$ 
pagarle. 

Mi  amigo  ha  perdido  su  cartera,  y 
por  consiguiente,  (y  asi,)  no  podri 
pagar  sus  zapatos. 


I I Tendrd  V.  alguna  cosa  ? 

1 Yo  tendrd  su  pardguas  de  V 


198 


irORTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


Will  your  friend  go  tc  my  concert  ? 

' Ird  su  amigo  de  V.  d m;  ooncierto  ? 

He  will  go. 

fil  ird. 

Shall  you  come  ? 

^VendrdV.  ? 

I shall  come. 

i Yo  vendre. 

Will  it  be  necessary  to  go  to  the 

1 Serd  menester  (or  neceEario)  ir  ol 

market  ? 

mere  ado  (plaia)  ? 

It  will  be  necessary  to  go  to-marrow 

Serd  menester  (or  necesario)  ir  mo- 

morning. 

nana  por  la  manana. 

It  will  not  be  necessary  to  go  there 

No  seid  menester  (or  necesario)  if 
alld. 

Shall  you  see  my  father  to-day  ? 

1 Vera  V.  d mi  padre  hoy  ? 

I shall  see  him. 

Yo  le  vere. 

To  lean. 

Apoyarse.  Me  apoyard 

To  employ. 

Emplear.  Empleard 

To  try. 

Probar  *.  Probard. 

To  run. 

Correr.  Correrd. 

To  expire. 

Espirar.  Espirare 

The  pocket-book. 

La  cartera,  (fern.) 

The  beef. 

La  vaca,  (fern.) 

EXERCISES. 

146. 

Shall  you  have  any  books? — I shall  have  some — Who  will  give 
you  any  ? — My  uncle  will  give  me  some. — When  will  your  cousin 
have  money  ? — He  will  have  some  next  m:iiith. — How  much  money 
shall  you  have? — I shall  have  thirty-five  dollars. — Who  will  have 
good  friends  ? — The  English  will  have  some. — Will  your  father  be  at 
home  this  evening  ? — He  will  be  at  home. — Will  you  be  there  ? — 1 
shall  also  be  there. — Will  your  uncle  go  out  to-day  ? — He  will  go  out, 
if  it  is  fine  weather. — Shall  you  go  out  ? — 1 shall  go  out,  if  it  does  not 
rain. — Will  you  love  my  son  ? — 1 shall  love  him,  if  he  is  good. — Will 
you  pay  your  shoemaker  ? — I shall  pay  him,  if  I receive  my  money. — 
Will  you  love  my  children  ? — If  they  are  good  and  assiduous  I shall 
love  them  ; but  if  they  are  idle  and  naughty  I shall  despise  and  punish 
them. — Am  I right  in  speaKing  thus  ? — You  are  not  wrong. — Is  your 
friend  still  writing  ? — He  is  still  writing. — Have  you  not  done  speak- 
mg  ? — I shall  soon  have  done. — Have  our  friends  desne  reading  ?~  - 
Tliey  will  soon  have  done. — Has  the  tailor  made  my  coat  ? — He  has 
not  made  it  yet,  but  he  will  soon  make  it. — When  will  he  make  it  ? — 
When  he  rhall  have  {tenga)  time  —When  will  you  do  vour  exe»*cises  1 


IfORTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


199 


— I shall  do  tliem  when  I shall  have  (tenga)  time  — When  will  your 
brother  do  his  ? — He  will  do  them  next  Saturday. — Wilt  thou  come  to 
me,  {d  verme  1) — I shall  come. — When  wilt  thou  come  ? — I shall  come 
next  Friday. — When  have  you  seen  my  uncle  ? — I saw  him  last  Sun- 
day — Will  your  cousins  g’o  to  the  ball  next  Tuesday  ? — They  will 
go. — Will  you  come  to  my  concert  ? — I shall  come,  if  1 am  not  ill. 

147. 

When  will  you  send  me  the  money  which  you  owe  me  ?—  J shal 
send  it  you  soon. — Will  your  brothers  send  me  the  books  which  I have 
lent  them  ? — They  will  send  them  to  you. — When  will  they  send  them 
to  me  ? — They  will  send  them  to  you  next  monti. — Will  you  be  able 
to  pay  me  what  you  owe  me  ? — I shall  not  be  able  to  pay  it  you,  for  I 
have  lost  all  my  money. — Will  the  American  be  able  to  pay  for  his 
shoes  ? — He  has  lost  his  pocket-book,  so  that  he  will  not  be  able  to 
pay  for  them. — Will  it  be  necessary  to  send  for  the  physician  ? — 
Nobody  is  ill,  so  that  it  will  not  be  necessary  send  for  him. — Will 
it  be  necessary  to  go  to  the  market  to-morrow  V — It  will  be  necessary 
to  go  (there,)  for  we  want  some  beef,  some  b-ead,  and  some  wine. — 
Shall  you  see  your  father  to-day  ? — I shall  see  him. — Where  will  he 
be  ? — He  will  be  at  his  counting-house. — W'  11  you  go  to  the  ball 
to-night  ? — I shall  not  go,  for  I am  too  ill  to  go  (out.) — Will  your 
friend  go  ? — He  will  go,  if  you  go. — Where  wi  1 our  neighbors  go  ? — 
They  will  go  nowhere ; they  will  remain  at  home,  for  they  have  a 
good  deal  to  do. 


FORTY-EIGHTH  LESSON.— Leccion 


To  belong. 

Do  you  belong? 

I do  belong. 

Does  that  horse  belong  to  your 
father  ? 

It  dees  belong  to  him. 

To  whom  do  these  gloves  belong  ? 
They  belong  to  the  captains. 

Do  these  horses  belong  to  the  cap- 
tains ? 

They  do  belong  to  them. 


Cuadraghima  octava, 

Ser  de,  Pertenccer  a, 

I Pertenece  V.  ? 

Yo  pertener.co. 

I Pertenece  ese  cabal lo  d su  paUre 
de  V.? 

I Es  ese  caballo  de  su  padre  de  V ? 
Si,  es  de  dl.  Es  suyo. 

I De  quien  son  estos  guantes  ?‘ 

Son  de  los  capitaiies. 

I Son  estos  caballos  de  los  capitanea 

Son  de  ellos.  Son  suyos. 


To  suit. 


i Acomodar.  Ajustar.  Vemr. 
( Convenir  * 2,  (like  venir.) 


200  FORTY-EIGHIH  LESSON. 


Does  that  cl^th  suit  your  brother? 

It  suits  him. 

Do  those  shoes  suit  your  trothers? 

They  suit  them. 

Does  it  suit  you  to  do  that  ? 

It  suits  me  to  do  it 
Does  it  suit  ycur  cousin  tc  come 
with  us? 

It  does  not  suit  him  to  go  out. 


To  succeed. 

Do  you  succeed  in  learning  Spanish  ? 
I succeed  in  it. 

1 do  succeed  in  learning  it. 

Do  these  men  succeed  in  selling 
their  horses  ? 

They  succeed  therein. 


I Conviene  este  pafio  al  heimauo  de 
V.? 

Le  conviene. 

I Acomodan  (vienen)  esos  zapatos  ^ 
sus  lierinaijos  de  V.  ? 

Les  acomodan.  Tes  vienen. 

I Le  conviene  d V.  hacer  eso? 

Me  conviene  hacerlo. 

I Le  conviene  al  primo  de  V ven* 
con  nosotros? 

No  le  conviene  salir. 


Conseguir  3,  (see  App.)  hograr. 

I Consigue  V.  aprender  el  Espahol  ? 
Lo  consigo. 

Yo  consigo  aprenderle. 

I Consiguen  estos  hombrea  vendei 
sus  caballos  ? 

Consiguen  venderlos. 


To  succeed. 

Do  you  succeed  in  doing  that  ? 
I succeed  in  it. 


Tener  huen  exito.  Salir  bten. 
Lograr. 

1 1 Tiene  V.  buen  exito  en  hacer  eso  ^ 
t t Le  sale  d V.  bien  hacer  eso  7 
t Teiigo  buen  exito  en  hacerlo. 
t Me  sale  bien  hacerlo. 


To  forget 
To  clean. 

Tho  inkstand. 


Olvidar  1. 
Limpiar  1. 
El  tintero. 


Immediately,  directly 
This  instant,  instantly 
Presently. 

I am  going  to  do  it. 

I will  do  it  immediately. 

I am  going  to  work. 


Inmediatamente.  Luego. 

Al  instante.  De  repente. 
Presenternente.  Ahora.  Luego 
Voy  d hacerlo. 

Yo  lo  hard  inmediatamente. 

Voy  d trabajar. 


is  there  7 
Are  there  T 
There  is  not. 
There  are  not. 
Will  there  bo? 
There  will  bo» 


I I Hay  7 

I No  hay. 

I I Habrd  ? 
1 Hahrl 


BORTl  EIGHTH  LESSOR. 


20] 


Was  or  were  there)^ — ^has  there 
been  ? 

I'here  was  or  were) — there  has 
been. 

Is  there  any  wine  ? 

Tliere  is  some. 

There  is  not  any. 

Are  there  any  men  ? 

There  are  some. 

There  are  not  any. 


I Hubo  1 I Ha  habido  1 

Hubo.  Ha  habido. 

I Hay  algun  vino  ? 

Hay  un  poco. 

No  hay  ningimo. 

I Hay  algunos  hombres  ? 
Hay  algunosr 
No  hay  ning^unos. 


I'.’iere  are  men  who  will  not  study. 
Is  there  any  one  ? 

\t6  there  to  be  many  people  at  the 
ball  ? 

There  are  to  be  a great  many  people 
(there.) 


Hay  hombres  que  no  quieren  estudiai 
I Hay  alguien  ? i Hay  alguno  ? 

I Ha  de  haber  mucha  gente  en  e 
bade  ? 

Ha  de  haber  muclia  (gente.) 


On  credit. 

To  sell  on  credit. 

The  credit. 

Ready  money. 

To  buy  for  cash. 

To  sell  for  cash. 

To  pay  down. 

Will  you  buy  for  cash  ? 

Does  it  suit  you  to  sell  me  on  credit  ? 


A1  fiado. 

Vender  al  fiado. 

El  credito. 

Dinero  contante. 

Comprar  contante,  (al  contado.) 
Vender  al  contante,  (al  contado) 
Pagar  dinero  contante. 

I Quiere  V.  comprar  al  contado  ? 

I Le  conviene  a V.  vendermo  a 
fiado,  (d  credito)  ? 


To  Jit, 

Does  that  coat  fit  me  ? 

It  fits  you. 

That  hat  does  not  fit  your  brother 

It  does  not  fit  him. 

They  fit  me. 

That  fits  you  very  well. 


t Caerle  a uno.  (See  App.) 

Sentar,  (See  App.) 
t I Me  cae  bien  este  vestido  ? 
i Me  sienta  bien  ? 
t Le  cae  bien  d V. 

Le  sienta  d V.  bieri. 

Ese  sombrero  no  le  sienta  bien  d sti 
hermano  de  V. 

No  le  sienta  bien. 

t Me  caen  bien. 

t Eso  le  cae  muy  bien  d V. 


To  keep. 
You  had  better. 
I had  better. 

He  had  better. 


Guardar  1.  t Quedarse  con. 
t V.  hard,  mejor,  (haria  mejor.) 
t Yo  hard  mejor,  (haria  mejor.; 
t 6l  hard,  mejor,  (haria  mejor.) 


202 


FORTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


Instead  of  keeping  vonr  horse,  you 
had  better  sell  it. 

Instead  of  selling  his  hat,  he  had  bet- 
ter keep  it. 

Will  you  keep  the  horse  ? 

I shall  keep  it. 

¥ ou  must  not  keep  my  money. 

To  please,  to  be  pleased. 

To  please  some  one. 

Does  that  book  please  you  ? 

It  pleases  me  much. 

I will  do  what  you  please. 

You  are  pleased  to  say  so. 

V/hat  is  your  pleasure  ? 

What  do  you  want  ? 

What  do  you  say  ? 


t En  vez  de  guardar  su  caballo,  V 
hard  mejor  en  venderle. 
t En  vez  de  vender  su  sombrsn 
hard  mejor  en  quedarse  con  61 


I Guardard  V.  el  caballo  ? 
t ^ Se  quedard  V.  con  el  caballo  ? 

I Yo  le  guardare.  t Me  quedard  con 
I V.  no  debe  guardar  mi  dinero. 


Gustar.  Gustarle  d uno. 

Gustar.  Agradar.  Placer  d uno 
t [ Le  gusta  a V.  ese  libro  ? 
t Me  gusta  mucho. 
t Yo  hard  lo  que  V.  guste,  (subj.) 
t Es  cortesia  de  V.  el  decir  oso. 
t V.  tiene  la  bondad  de  decir  eso. 
t I Que  man  da  V.? 

I Qiie  gusta  V.  ? 

I Que  dice  V.  ? i Que  quiere  V.  ? 


To  please. 

liow  do  you  please  yourself  here  ? 

I please  myself  very  well. 

Ohs.  A The  impersonal  it  is  is 
son  in  the  plural. 

Whose  book  is  this  ? 

It  is  mine,  (it  belongs  to  me.) 

Are  these  your  shoes? 

They  are  ours,  (they  belong  to  us.) 

Obs.  B.  When  the  possessive  pn 
belonging  to  it,  it  loses  the  article. 


I t Irlc  a uno.  Pasarlo.  Estar 
( t ^ Como  le  va  d V.  aqui  ? 

( I Como  lo  pasa  V.  ? 

I t A mi  me  va  bien. 
rendered  by  es  in  the  singular,  and  b) 

I De  quien  es  este  libro  ? 

Es  mio. 

I Son  de  VV.  estos  zapatos  ? 

Son  nuestros. 

)noun  comes  after  ser,  (to  be,)  meaning 


Ir  is  they  who  have  seen  him 
It  is  your  friends  who  are  in  the 
rght. 

Ji  is  I who. 

It  is  you  who. 

It  is  they  who. 


t Elios  son  los  que  le  han  visto. 
t Los  amigos  de  V sou  los  que  tienoii 
razon. 

Yo  soy  quien. 

V.  es  quien.  W son  nuienes. 

1 Elios  son  quienes. 


M ino  —mine,  (belonging  to  me.) 
3urs  —ours,  (belonging  to  us.) 

My  fj  icnd’s,  (belonging  to  my  friend.) 


El  mio — los  mios.  Mio — ^mios. 

El  nuestro — los  nuestros.  Nuestro  - 
nuestros. 

Es  de  mi  am^s^o. 


j^OKTY -EIGHTH  LESSON; 


203 


Is  that  your  son  ? I i ese  el  hijo  de  \ ? 

Is  that  yoiu  child?  j ^ Es  de  V.  ese  nifio  1 

Obs.  C.  When  the  demonstrative  pronouns  this  and  that  are  not  f )ilov,^ed 
a noun,  they  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  esto,  eso,  and  aquello,  meaning 
this  or  that  thing ; but  when  the  word  pointed  out  in  English  by  this  ox 
that  is  understood,  it  should  be  expressed  in  Spanish  ; or  another  turn  must 
be  given  to  the  sentence,  so  as  to  have  the  demonstrative  pronoun  immedi- 
ately before  the  word  it  points  out.  Therefore  the  last  two  sentences  above 
4;ould  be  constructed  thus : Is  that  boy  your  son  ? — i Es  ese  muchacho  el 

Lijo  da  V.  ? Is  that  child  yours  ? — i Es  de  V.  ese  niiio  ? 


EXERCISES. 

148. 

To  whom  does  tliat  horse  belong  ? — It  belongs  to  the  English  cap- 
tain whose  son  has  written  a note  to  you. — Does  this  money  belong  to 
you  ? — It  does  belong  to  me. — From  whom  have  you  received  it  ? — 
I have  received  it  from  the  men  whose  children  you  have  seen. — 
Whose  horses  are  those  ? — They  are  ours. — Have  you  told  your 
brother  that  I am  waiting  for  him  here  ? — I have  forgotten  to  tell  him 
so,  (Zo.) — Is  it  your  father  or  mine  who  is  gone  to  Berlin  ? — It  is  mine. 
— Is  it  your  baker,  or  that  of  our  friend,  who  has  sold  you  bread  on 
credit  ? — It  is  ours. — Is  that  your  son  ? — He  is  not  mine,  he  is  my 
friend’s. — Where  is  yours  ? — He  is  at  Paris. — Have  you  brought  me 
the  book  wiiich  you  promised  me  ? — I have  forgotten  it. — Has  your 
uncle  brought  you  the  pocket-books  which  he  promised  you  ? — He  has 
forgotten  to  bring  me  them,  {las,) — Have  you  already  written  to  your 
friend  ? — I have  not  yet  had  time  to  write  to  him. — Have  you  forgotten 
to  write  to  your  relation  ? — I have  not  forgotten  to  write  to  him.-— 
Does  this  cloth  suit  you  ? — It  does  not  suit  me ; have  you  no  other  ? — 
I have  some  other ; but  it  is  dearer  than  this. — Will  you  show  it  me  ? 
—I  will  show  it  you. — Do  these  shoes  suit  your  uncle  ? — They  do  not 
suit  him,  because  they  are  too  dear. — Are  these  the  shoes  of  which 
you  have  spoken  to  us  ? — They  are  the  same. — Whose  shoes  are 
Uxese  ? — They  belong  to  the  nobleman  whom  you  have  seen  this 
morning  in  my  warehouse. — Does  it  suit  you  to  come  with  us  ? — I 
ices  not  suit  me. — Does  it  suit  you  to  go  to  the  market  ? — It  does  no* 
suit  me  to  go  (thither.) — Did  you  go  on  foot  to  Germany  ? — It  does 
not  suit  me  to  go  on  foot,  so  that  I went  thither  in  a CDach. — (Lesson 
KLIV.) 

149. 

What  is  your  pleasure.  Sir? — I am  inquiring  after  your  fatlier.  is 
ho  at  home  ? — No,  Sir,  he  is  gine  out. — What  do  you  say  ? — I toll  yes 


204 


FORTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


that  he  is  gone  out. — Will  you  wait  till  he  comes  bavk,  {el  vuelva  'j 
(Lesson  XXXVI.) — I have  no  time  to  wait. — Does  this  merchant  sell 
on  credit  ? — He  does  not  sell  on  credit. — Does  it  suit  you  to  buy  fo* 
cash  ? — It  does  not  suit  me. — Where  did  you  buy  these  pretty  knives 
— I bought  them  of  the  merchant  whose  warehouse  you  saw  yesterday. 
— Has  he  sold  them  to  >ou  on  creait  ? — He  has  sold  them  to  me  for 
'ash. — Do  you  often  buy  for  cash  ? — Not  so  often  as  you. — Have  you 
forgotten  any  tiling  here  1 — I have  forgotten  nothing. — Does  it  suit 
you  to  learn  tliis  by  heart  ? — I have  not  much  time  to  study,  so  that  it 
does  not  suit  me  to  learn  it  by  heart. — Has  that  man  tried  to  speak 
to  your  father  ? — He  has  tried  to  speak  to  him,  but  he  has  not  suc- 
ceeded in  it. — Have  you  succeeded  in  writing  an  exercise? — I have 
succeeded  in  it. — Have  those  merchants  succeeded  in  selling  their 
horses  ? — They  have  not  succeeded  therein. — Have  you  tried  to  clean 
my  inkstand  ? — I have  tried,  but  I have  not  succeeded  in  it. — Do  your 
children  succeed  in  learning  English? — They  do  succeed  in  it. — Is 
there  any  wine  in  this  cask  ? — There  is  some  in  it. — Is  there  any 
vinegar  in  this  glass  ? — There  is  none  in  it. — Is  wine  or  cider  in  it  ? — 
There  is  neither  wine  nor  cider  in  it. — What  is  there  in  it  ? — There  is 
some  vinegar  in  it. 

150. 

Are  there  any  men  in  your  warehouse  ? — There  are  some  there.-* 
Is  there  any  one  in  the  warehouse  ? — There  is  no  one  there. — Wer<. 
there  many  people  in  the  theatre  ? — There  were  many  (there.) — WiL 
there  be  many  people  at  your  ball  ? — There  will  be  many  (there.) — 
Are  there  many  children  that  will  not  play  ? — There  are  many  that 
will  not  study,  but  all  will  play. — Hast  thou  cleaned  my  trunk  ? — 
I have  tried  to  do  it,  but  I have  not  succeeded. — Do  you  intend  buying  an 
umbrella  ? — I intend  buying  one,  if  the  merchant  sells  it  me  on  credit. 
— Do  you  intend  to  keep  mine  ? — I intend  to  give  it  you  back,  (Lesson 
XXXIX.,  page  154,)  if  I buy  one. — Have  you  returned  the  books  tc 
my  brother  ? — I have  not  returned  them  to  him  yet. — How  long  do  you 
intend  keeping  them  ? — I intend  keeping  them  till  next  Saturday. — 
How  long  do  you  intend  keeping  my  horse  ? — I intend  keeping  it  till 
my  father  returns,  {vuelva.) — Have  you  cleaned  my  knife  ? — 1 have  not 
hrtd  time  yet,  but  I will  do  it  this  instant. — Have  you  made  a hre, 
(encendido  la  candela  1) — Not  yet ; but  I will  make  one  presently.— 
Why  have  you  not  worked  ? — I have  not  yet  been  able. — What  had 
you  to  do  ? — I had  to  clean  your  carpet,  and  to  mend  your  thread 
stockings. — Do  you  intend  to  sell  your  coat  ? — I intend  keeping  it,  for 
I want  it. — Instead  of  keeping  it  you  had  better  sell  it. — Do  you  seli 
your  horses  ? — I do  nrt  sell  them. — Instead  of  keeping  them  you  hac 


FOKTY-NINTH  LESSON, 


205 


setter  sell  them. — Does  our  friend  keep  his  parasol  ? — He  does  keep  it , 
nut  instead  of  keeping  it  he  had  better  sell  it,  for  it  is  worn  out. — 
Does  your  son  tear  his  book  ? — He  does  tear  it ; but  ho  is  wrong  in 
doing  so,  for  instead  of  tearing  it  he  had  better  read  it. 


FORTY-NINTH  LESSON.— Leccio7i 


To  go  away. 

When  will  you  go  away? 

! will  go  soon. 

By  and  by. 

He  will  go  away  soon,  (by  and  by.) 
We  will  go  away  to-morrow. 

They  will  go  to-morrow 
I'hou  wilt  go  immediately. 

When. 


To  become 

What  will  become  of  you  if  .you  lose 
your  money  ? 

do  not  know  what  will  become  of 
me. 

What  will  become  of  him  ? 

What  will  become  of  us  ? 

I do  not  know  what  will  become  of 
them. 

The  turn. 

My  turn. 

In  my  turn. 

In  his  turn, 
lu  my  brothel’s  turn 
Each  in  his  turn. 


Cuadragesima  nona 

Irse  *.  March  arse.  H.ess  XLIV.) 

I Cuando  se  ird,,  (orse  marchara  V ?) 
Pronto  me  ire,  (or  me  marchare  ) 

r hue  go. 

) t De  aqui  a poco. 

^ t Dentro  de  poco. 

! se  ird  (or  so  marchar*^^  luego. 
i Nos  iremos  (nos  marcharemoH)  ma 
I nan  a. 

So  iran  (se  marcharan)  mahana. 

Te  iras  (te  marchards)  inmediata- 
mente. 

j Cuando. 

Hacerse  de.  Ser  de.  (Less.  XLIV.) 
Suceder. 

t I Que  se  hard  de  V si  pierde  sv 
dinero  7 

t I Que  le  suceder d d V.  si  pierdt 
su  dinero  7 

t Yo  no  se  lo  que  se  hard  de  mi. 
t Yo  no  se  Zo  que  serd  de  mi. 

I I Que  serd.  de  el  ? 

t ^ Que  serd  de  nosotros  ? 
t Yo  no  se  lo  que  se  hard,  de  clloe 
t Yo  no  se  lo  que  sera  de  ellos 

El  turno. 

Mi  turno. 

A mi  turno. 

t Cuando  d mi  me  toque. 

A su  turnc. 

t Cuando  d.  €[  le  toque. 

A1  turno  de  mi  hermano. 
t Cuando  le  toque  d,  mi  hermano 
Cada  uno  d,  su  turno. 
t Cuando  d cada  mio  le  tonur 


! 

I 

! 

1, 


! 

S 


206 


FORTY- KINTH  LESSON. 


Wlien  it  comes  to  your  turn 
Our  turn  will  come 

To  take  a turn,  (a  walk.) 

Ho  has  gone  to  take  a walk. 

To  walk  round  the  garden. 

Behind. 

To  run 

A blow.  A knock 
A stab. 

A clap.  A slap. 

Have  you  given  that  man  a blow? 

t have  given  him  one. 

A blow  with  a stick. 

A kick,  (with  the  foot.) 

A blow  with  the  fist. 

A stab  of  a knife. 

A shot,  or  the  report  of  a gun. 
The  shot  of  a pistol. 

A glance  of  the  eye. 

A clap  of  thunder. 


t Cuando  sea  el  turno  do  V 
t Cuando  le  toque  d.  V. 

Nuestro  turno  vendrd.. 
t Nos  tocard  d nosotros. 

t Dar  una  vuelta,  (un  passo  ) 
f Ir  d pasear. 

1 t Ha  ido  d dar  una  vuelta,  (un  pesaa 
^ t Dar  una  vuelta  en  el  jardin. 

( t Dar  un  paseo  en  el  jardin 
Detras  de  Tras 
Correr. 

Un  golpo.  Un  porraic 
Una  punalada.  Una  herida. 

Una  palmada.  Una  bofetada 
I Ha  dado  V.  un  golpo  -(un  Dorraz j'  i 
ese  hombre  ? 

Si ; or,  Yo  le  he  dado  (uno.) 
t Un  palo  Un  garrotazo 
t Un  puntapid. 

t Un  punetazo.  Una  punada 
t Una  cuchillada. 
t Un  tiro.  Un  canonazo. 
t Un  pistoletazo. 
t Una  ojeada.  Una  mirada 
t Un  trueno. 


To 

give 

a cut  with  a knife. 

To 

give 

a man  a blow  with  a stick. 

To 

give 

a man  a kick. 

To 

give 

a man  a blew  with  the  fist. 

To  pull.  To  draw. 

To  shoot.  To  fire. 

To 

fire  a gun. 

To 

fire  a pistol 

To  fire  at  some  one 

I iiav3  firea  at  that  bird. 

I have  fired  twice. 

[ have  fired  three  times. 

( have  fired  several  times. 

How  many  times  have  you  fired  ? 
How  many  times  have  you  fired  at 
tliat  bird  ? 


Dar  una  cuchillada. 
t Dar  de  palos  d un  hombre.  Apaiear 
Dar  un  puntapid  d un  hombre 
Dar  un  punetazo  d un  hombre. 
Tirar.  Sacar 
Disparar.  Hacer  fuego. 

Disparar  un  fusil,  (or  un  caiion.; 
Disparar  una  pistola. 
t Disparar  un  tiro  d alguno,  ,or  e 
uno.) 

Tirar  un  tiro  d alguno,  (or  d uno.) 
t He  disparado  un  tiro  d ese  pljaro 
t He  tirado  un  tiro  d ese  pajaro 
t He  tirado  dos  tiros. 

He  tirado  tres  tiros. 

He  tirado  varios  tiros, 
t I Cuantas  veces  ha  tirado  V 7 
t I Cuantas  vecos  ha  tirado  V.  a ese 
pdjaro  ? 


FORTY-NINTH  LESSON 


207 


%.  have  fired  at  it  several  times. 

. have  heard  a shot. 

I have  heard  the  report  of  a pistol. 
Wo  Jiave  heard  a clap  of  thunder 


t Le  he  tirado  varies  tirce. 
He  oido  un  tiro. 

He  oido  un  pistoletaza 
Hemos  oido  un  trueno. 


The  fist. 


To  cast  an  eye  upon  some  one^  or 
something. 

I have  cast  an  eye  upon  that  book. 
i have  cast  an  eye  upon  it. 


I El  puno. 


Echar  una  ojeada  (or  mirada)  a 
alguno,  (or  alguna  cosa.) 

He  echado  una  ojeada  (una  mirada  i 
d ese  libro. 

i He  echado  una  mirada  a €\. 


Has  that  man  gone  away? 

He  has  gone  away. 

Have  your  brothers  gone  away  1 
They  have  gone  away. 

They  have  not  gone  away. 

Have  they  gone  away  ? 

They  were  not  willing  to  go  away. 


I Se  ha  marchado  ese  hombre  ? 
El  se  ha  marchado. 

I Se  han  ido  sus  hermanos  de  V ? 
Se  han  ido,  (marchado.) 

No  se  han  ido,  (marchado.) 

^Se  han  marchado  ellos? 

No  querian  marcharso. 

No  quisi^ron  march  arse. 


EXERCISES. 

151. 

Are  you  going  away  already  ? — I am  not  going  yet. — When  will 
that  man  go  away  ? — He  will  go  presently. — Will  you  go  away  soon  1 
— I shall  go  away  next  Thursday. — When  will  your  friends  go  away  V 
— They  will  go  away  next  month. — When  wilt  thou  go  away  ? — I will 
go  away  instantly. — Why  has  your  father  gone  away  so  soon  ? — He 
has  promised  his  friend  to  be  at  his  house  at  a quarter  to  nine,  so  that 
he  went  away  early  in  order  to  keep  (cumplir  con)  what  he  has 
promised. — When  shall  we  go  av/ay  ? — ^We  shall  go  away  to-morrow. 
— Shall  we  start  (partir)  early? — We  shall  start  at  five  o’clock  in  the 
morning. — When  will  you  go  av/ay  ? — I shall  go  away  as  soon  as  I have 
done  {hay a acabado  de)  writing. — When  will  your  children  go  away  ? — 
They  will  go  as  soon  as  they  have  done  {hay an  acabado)  their  exercises. 
— Will  you  go  when  I shall  go,  {vaya  7) — I shall  go  away  when  you  go, 
vaya.) — Will  our  neighbors  soon  go  away  ? — They  will  go  away  when 
they  have  (hayan)  done  speaking. — What  will  become  of  your  son  if 
he  does  not  study  ? — If  he  dofts  not  study  he  will  learn  nothing. — 
What  will  become  of  yDu  if  you  lose  your  money? — I do  not  know 
i^’hat  will  become  of  me. — What  will  become  of  your  friend  if  he  loses 
sis  pocket-book  ? — I do  not  kiow  what  will  become  of  him  if  he  loses 


208 


FORTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


it. — What  has  become  of  your  son  ? — I do  not  know  what  has  become 
of  him. — Has  he  enlisted  ? — He  has  not  enlisted. — What  will  bocomc 
of  us  if  our  friends  go  away  ? — I do  not  know  what  will  become  of  us 
if  they  go  away. — W'hat  has  become  of  your  relations  ? — They  have 
gone  away. 

152. 

Jo  you  intend  buying  a horse  ? — I cannot  buy  one,  for  I have  not 
}et  received  my  money. — Must  I go  to  the  theatre? — You  must  net 
go  (thither,)  for  it  is  very  bad  weather. — Why  do  you  not  go  to  my 
brother  ? — It  does  not  suit  me  to  go  to  hun,  for  I cannot  yet  pay  him 
what  I owe  him. — Why  does  your  servant  give  that  man  a cut  with 
his  knife? — He  gives  him  a cut,  because  the  man  has  given  him  a 
blow  with  the  fist. — Which  of  these  two  pupils  begins  to  speak  ? — 
The  one  who  is  studious  begins  to  speak. — What  does  the  other  do 
who  is  not  so  ? — He  also  begins  to  speak,  but  he  knows  neither  how 
to  write  nor  to  read. — Does  he  not  listen  to  what  you  tell  him  ? — Ho 
does  not  listen  to  it,  if  I do  not  give  him  a beating,  {azotes.) — Why  do 
these  children  not  work  ? — Their  master  has  given  them  blows  with 
his  fist,  so  that  they  will  not  work. — Why  has  he  given  them  blows 
with  his  fist  ? — Because  they  have  been  disobedient. — Have  you  fired 
a gun  ? — I have  fired  three  times. — At  what  did  you  fire  ? — I fired  at 
a bird. — Have  you  fired  a gun  at  that  man  ? — I have  fired  a pistol  at 
him. — Why  have  you  fired  a pistol  at  him  ? — Because  he  has  given 
me  a stab  with  his  knife. — How  many  times  have  you  fired  at  that 
bird  ? — I have  fired  at  it  twice. — Have  you  killed  it  ? — I have  killed  it 
at  the  second  shot,  {al  segnndo  tiro.) — Have  you  killed  that  bird  at 
tlie  first  shot,  {al  'primer  tiro  1) — I have  killed  it  at  the  fourth. — Do  you 
fire  at  the  birds  which  you  see  upon  the  trees,  or  at  those  which  you 
see  in  the  gardens  ? — I fire  neither  at  those  which  I see  upon  tho 
D’ees  nor  at  those  which  I see  in  the  gardens,  but  at  those  which  t 
oerceive  on  the  castle  behind  the  wood. 

153. 

How  many  times  have  the  enemies  fired  at  us  ? — They  have  fired 
at  us  several  times. — Have  they  killed  any  one  ? — They  have  killed 
no  one. — Have  you  a wish  to  fire  at  that  bird  ? — I have  a desire  to  fire 
at  it. — Why  do  you  not  fire  at  those  birds  ? — I cannot,  for  I liave  a 
sore  finger. — When  did  the  captain  fire  ? — He  fired  Qiizo  fuego)  when 
rds  soldiers  fired,  {lo  hicieron.) — How  many  birds  have  you  shot  at  ? — 
f have  shot  at  all  that  I have  perceived,  but  I have  killed  none,  because 
iry  gun  is  good  for  nothing. — Have  you  cast  an  eye  upon  that  man 
{ have  cast  an  eye  upon  him. — Has  he  seen  you  ? — He  has  not  seen 
Tie,  for  he  has  sore  eyes. — Have  you  drunk  of  that  wine  ? — T liave 


FIFTIETH  LESSON. 


209 


arunk  of  it,  {un  ;;oco,)  and  it  has  done  me  good. — What  have  you  done 
tvitJi  my  book  ? — I have  put  it  upon  your  trunk. — Am  I to  answer 
you  ? — You  will  answer  me  when  it  comes  to  your  turn,  {cuando  le 
totjue.) — Is  it  my  brother’s  turn  ? — When  it  comes  to  his  turn  (le  toque) 
shall  ask  (se  lo)  him,  for — each  in  his  turn. — Have  you  Uiken  a walk 
Uiis  morning  ? — 1 have  taken  a walk  round  the  garden. — Where  is 
your  uncle  gone  to  ? — He  is  gone  to  take  a walk. — Why  do  you  run  ? 
— I run  because  I see  my  best  friend. — Who  runs  behind  us  ? — Our 
dog  runs  behind  us. — Do  you  perceive  that  bird  ? — I perceive  it  behind 
the  tree. — Why  have  your  brothers  gone  away  ? — They  have  gone 
away,  because  they  did  not  wish  to  be  seen  by  the  man  whose  dog 
they  have  killed. 


FIFTIETH  LESSON.-^-Deccion  Quincuagesima, 


To  hear  of. 


Have  you  heard  of  your  brother  ? 


I heard  of  him.' 


Since. 

Ib  it  long  since  you  have  breakfast- 
ed? 

How  long  is  it  since  you  breakfasted? 

it  is  not  long  since  I have  breakfast- 
ed. 

(t  is  a great  while  Vince.  ' 

It  is  a short  while  since. 

How  long  is  it  since  you  heard  of 
your  brother? 

It  is  a year  since  I heard  of  him. 


Oir  hahlar  de.  Tenet  noticias  de 

Saber  de. 

Ha  oido  V.  hablar  de  su  hermano 
de  V.? 

^ I Ha  sabido  V.  de  su  hermano  ? 

I Ha  tenido  V noticias  del  hermano 
. deV.? 

He  oido  hablar  de  dl. 

He  sabido  de  dl. 

He  tenido  noticias  do  el,  (noticias 
suyas.) 

I Desde. 

I I Hace  mucho  que  V.  ha  almorza- 
do? 

1 1 Hay  mucho  tiemp©  desde  que  V 
ha  almorzado? 

t ^Cuanto  hace  que  V.  ha  almorza* 
do? 

1 1 Cuanto  hay  que  V.  ha  almorzado  1 

f No  hace  mucho  quo  yo  he  almor- 
zado. 

I t No  hay  mucho  tiempo  que  yo  ha 

L almorzado. 

Mucho  tiempo  hace,  (hay.) 

Poco  tiempo  hace,  (hay.) 

I Cuanto  hace  que  V.  ha  tenido  nc- 
ticias  de  su  hermano  de  V.  ? 

Hace  un  aho  que  no  he  sabido  de  Ol 


/ 


210 


FIFTIETH  LESSON. 


It  is  only  a year  since. 

It  is  more  than  a year  since. 
More  than. 

Wore  than  nine. 

More  than  twenty  times. 

1 1 is  hardly  six  months  since 
Ago, 

A few  hours  ago. 

Half  an  hour  ago. 

Two  years  ago. 

Two  hours  and  a half  ago. 

A fortnight  ago. 

A fortnight. 


Have  you  been  long  in  Spain? 


No  hace  mas  de  un  ano. 

Hay  mas  de  un  ano. 

Mas  de.  (See  Lesson  XXIX.  i 
Mas  de  nueve. 

Mas  de  veinte  veces. 
t Hace  d peiias  seis  meses, 
t Hay  d penas  seis  meses. 

Pasado. 

t Hace  pocas  horas.  Hay  (ha)  pocii 
horas. 

t Hace  media  hora.  Hay  media  ho 
ra. 

t Hace  dos  ahos.  Hay  dos  anoe 
t Hace  (hay)  dos  horas  y media, 
t Hace  (hay)  quince  dias,  (dos  se- 
man  as.) 

Quince  dias  (dos  semanas.) 

( I Ha  estado  V.  mucho  tiempo  en  Es- 
I paha  ? 

] i^Hace  mucho  tiempo  que  V esU 
I en  Espana  ? # 


Ods.  A,  In  English  the  state  of  existence  of  action,  when  in  its  duia- 
tion,  is  always  expressed  in  the  perfect  tense,  while  in  Spanish  it  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  present  tense. 


He  has  been  in  Madrid  these  three  j Hace  tres  ahos  que  estd  en  Madrid, 
years. 

I have  been  living  here  these  two  t Hace  dos  ahos  que  vivo  (que  estoy) 
years.  aqui. 


Rem. — The  word  tiempo  is  often  understood. 

How  long  have  you  had  that  hat  ? t ^ Cuanto  hace  que  tieiie  V esc 

sombrero  ? 

I have  had  it  these  five  years.  t Hace  cinco  ahos  que  le  tengo. 


How  long  1 (since  when  ?) 

How  long  has  he  been  here  ? 

These  three  days. 

Since  the  third  of  this  month. 

This  month. 

Since  the  first  of  the  month. 

I nave  seen  him  more  than  twenty 
iiraes. 


I Cuanto  hace  7 i Cuanto  hay  (jha)  1 

I Desde  cuando  7 

t I Cuanto  hace  (hay)  que  estd  aqnl  5 

I I Desde  cuando  estd  aqm  ? 
t Hace  (hay)  tres  dias. 

t Desde  el  tres  de  este  mes, 
t Hace  (hay)  un  mes. 
t Desde  el  primero  de  este  mes. 

Le  he  visto  mas  de  veinte  vecee 


FIFTIETH  LESSON. 


211 


It  is  six  moutiis  since  I spoke  to  him. 

Since  I saw  you  it  has  rained  very 
much. 

It  is  more  than  a year  since  I heard 
of  him. 


Hace  eeis  meses  que  le  hat>l^. 

Hace  seis  meses  que  le  he  hablado. 
Desde  que  le  vi  d V.  ha  llovido  mu- 
ch o. 

Hace  mas  (or  hay  mas)  de  un  ahr 
que  he  sabido  de  cl. 


C En  este  momento.  Ahora  mismo. 
(relating  to  time.)  ^ Al  7no?nento.  Alpunto.  Alinstante 

( Poco  ha.  Poco  hace. 

To  have  just  | t Acahar  de. 

Ohs.  B To  express  an  action  recently  past,  the  Spaniards  make  use  of 
the  verb  acahar,  (to ’finish,)  followed  by  de,  (of,)  and  the  infinitive  mood  oi 
the  verb. 

t Acabo  de  ver  a su  hermano  de  V 
t Acaba  de  escribir, 
t Los  hombres  acaban  de  llegar. 

I Hace  mucho  tiempo  que  aguarda 
ese  hombre  ? 

Ahora  mismo  llega. 
t Acaba  de  llegar  ahora. 


/ have  just  seen  your  brother 
ie  has  just  done  writing. 

The  men  have  just  arrived. 

Hao  that  man  been  waiting  long  ? 

He  has  but  just  come. 


To  do  one’s  best. 

I will  do  my  best. 
He  will  do  his  best 

I do  my  best 


t Haccr  uno  lo  mejor  que  puede. 
t Hacer  todo  su  poder. 

Empeharse  en. 

t Yo  hare  lo  mejor  que  pueda.  ) ^ . . 
t 6l  hard  lo  mejor  que  pueda.  S 
i t Yo  hago  lo  mejor  que  puedo. 

I t Yo  me  empeuo. 


To  spend  {money.) 

How  much  have  you  spent  to-day? 
He  has  fifty  dollars  a month  to  live 
upon. 


Gastar  {dinero.) 

I Cuanto  ha  gastado  V.  hoy  ? 
t Tlene  cincuenta  pesos  de  renta  al 
mes. 


ilavo  the  horses  been  found  ? 

They  have  been  found. 

The  men  have  been  seen. 

Our  children  have  been  praised  and 
rev,"arded,  because  they  have  been 
good  and  studious. 

By  whom  have  they  been  rewarded? 
By  whom  have  we  been  blamed? 


I Se  han  hallado  los  caballos  ? 

Se  han  hallado. 

Los  hombres  han  sido  vistos 
Nuestros  ninos  haii  sido  alabadisy 
recompensados,  porque  han  side 
buenos  y estudiosos. 

I Tor  quien  han  sido  recompensados  1 
I For  quien  hemos  sido  vit  uporados  1 


To  pass. 
Before, 


Pasar. 

Antes.  Ante.  Delantc.  Par, 


212 


FIFTIETH  LESSON. 


Ohs  C.  Before  is  expressed  in  Spanish  by  antes  when  it  denotes  priorit} 
of  time  ; by  delante,  or  sometimes  por,  when  it  designates  the  place  ; aiif' 
by  ante  when  it  signifies  in  the  presence  of ; as,  before  me,  ante  mi. 


Before  ten  o’clock. 

To  pass  before  some  one 
To  pass  before  a place. 

A place. 

I have  passed  before  the  theatre. 
He  has  passed  before  me. 


Antes  de  las  diez. 

Pasar  delaiile  de  alguno,  (de  uno 
Pasar  delante  de  (pOr)  un  iugar. 

Uu  lugar. 

He  pasado  delante  de  (por^  d teatro 
Ha  pasado  delante  de  mi. 


To  spend  time  in  something. 

What  do  you  spend  your  time  in  ? 

I wspend  my  time  in  studying. 
What  has  he  spent  his  time  in  ? 
What  shall  we  spend  our  time  in  ? 


Pasar  {emplear  or  gastar)  el  tiem^ 
po  cn  alguna  cosa. 
t I En  que  pasa  V.  su  tiempo  ? 
t Yo  empleo  mi  tiempc  en  estudiar 
t I En  que  ha  empleado  su  tiempo  1 
t i En  que  pasarenios  nuestro  tiem 
po  ? 


To  miss,  to  fail. 

The  merchant  has  failed  to  bring  the 
money. 

You  have  missed  your  turn. 

V"ou  have  failed  to  come  to  me  this 
morning. 

To  be  good  for  something. 

To  he  good  for  nothing. 

Of  what  use  is  that  ? 

It  is  good  for  nothing. 

A good-for-nothing  fellow. 

(s  the  gun  which  you  have  bought  a 
good  one  ? 

[1  is  werth  nothing,  (good  for  noth- 
ing.) 

To  throw  away. 

Have  you  thrown  away  any  thing  ? 

I have  not  thrown  away  any  thing. 
The  store.  The  shop. 
Storekeeper.  Shopkeeper. 


Perder.  Omitir.  Faltat  Descuidar 

El  comerciante  ha  faltado  d traer  el 
dinero. 

V.  ha  perdido  su  turno. 

V.  ha  faltado  d (V.  se  ha  descuidado 
de)  venir  d mi  casa  esta  manana. 

Ser  bueno  para  algo,  (para  alguna 
cosa.) 

Servir  de  algo. 

No  ser  hueno  para  nada,  (para  nin- 
guna  cosa.) 

No  servir  de  nada,  (or  para  nada.) 

I Para  que  (de  que)  sirve  eso  ? 

Eso  no  es  bueno  para  nada. 

t Eso  de  nada  sirve. 

Un  bribon. 

I Es  bueno  el  fusil  que  V ha  com 
prado  ? 

No  es  bueno  para  naaa. 

t No  sirve  de  nada. 


Tirar.  Arrojar.  Desechai 
I Ha  tirade  V.  algo,  (alguna  cosa)  ! 
Nada  he  tirado. 

La  tienda. 

Tendero.  M ereader 


FIFTIETH  LESSON. 


213 


EXERCISES. 

154. 

Have  you  heard  of  any  one  ? — I have  not  heard  of  any  one,  for  i 
oave  not  gone  out  this  morning. — Have  you  not  heard  of  tlie  man  wlio 
has  killed  a soldier  ?— I have  not  heard  of  him.— Have  you  heard  of 
my  brothers  ? — I have  not  heard  of  them. — Ot  whom  has  your  cousin 
n^^rd  ? — He  has  heard  of  his  friend  who  is  gone  to  America. — Is  it 
long  since  he  heard  of  him  ? — It  is  not  long  since  he  heard  of  him. — 
How  long  is  it  ?— It  is  only  a month. — Have  you  been  long  in  Paris  ? 
—These  three  years. — Has  your  brother  been  long  in  London  ? — He  has 
oeen  there  these  ten  years. — How  long  is  it  since  you  dined  ? — It  is  long 
since  I dined,  but  it  is  not  long  since  I supped. — How  long  8 it  since 
y^ou  supped  ? — It  is  half  an  hour. — How  long  have  you  had  these  books? 
— I have  had  them  these  three  months. — How  long  is  it  since  your 
cousin  set  out  ? — It  is  more  than  a year  since  he  set  out. — What  is 
become  of  the  man  who  has  lent  you  money  ? — I do  not  know  what  is 
become  of  him,  for  it  is  a great  while  since  I saw  him. — Is  it  long  since 
you  heard  of  the  soldier  who  gave  your  friend  a cut  with  the  knife  ? — 
It  is  more  than  a year  since  I heard  of  him. — How  long  have  you  been 
learning  Spanish  ? — I have  been  learning  it  only  these  two  Oronths. — 
Do  you  know  already  how  to  speak  it  ? — You  see  that  I am  beginning 
to  speak  it. — Have  the  children  of  the  English  noblemen  been  learning 
it  long  ? — They  have  been  learning  it  these  three  years,  and  they  do 
not  yet  begin  to  speak. — Why  do  they  not  know  how  to  speak  it  ? — 
They  do  not  know  how  to  speak  it,  because  they  are  learning  it  badly. 
— Why  do  they  not  learn  it  well  ? — They  have  not  a good  master,  so 
that  they  do  not  learn  it  well. 

155. 

Is  it  long  since  you  saw  the  young  man  wlio  learned  German  with 
the  master  with  whom  we  learned  it  ? — I have  not  seen  liim  for  nearly 
a year. — How  long  is  it  since  that  child  ate  ? — It  ate  a few  minutes 
ago. — How  long  is  it  since  those  children  drank  ? — They  drank  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  ago. — How  long  has  your  friend  been  in  Spain  ? — 
He  has  been  there  this  month. — How  often  have  you  seen  the  king, 
{al  rey  ?) — I saw  him  more  than  ten  times  when  I was  in  Madrid. — 
Wlien  did  you  meet  my  brother  ? — I met  him  a fortnight  ago. — Wliere 
did  you  meet  him  ? — I met  him  before  the  theatre.— Did  he  do  you  any 
ton  ? — He  did  me  no  harm,  for  he  is  a very  good  boy. — Where  are 
my  gloves  ? — They  (los  han)  have  thrown  them  away. — Have  tlie 
horses  been  found  ? — They  have  been  found. — V/here  have  they  been 
found  ? — They  have  been  found  behind  the  wood,  on  this  side  of  the 
read. — Have  you  been  seen  by  anybody  ? — I have  been  seen  by  no* 


214 


FIFTIETH  LESSON. 


body. — Do  you  expect  any  one  7 — 1 expect  my  cousin  tlie  captain.  - 
Have  you  not  seen  him  ? — I have  seen  him  this  morning  ; he  has 
passed  before  my  warehouse. — What  does  this  young  man  wait  for  ? — 
He  waits  for  money. — Art  thou  waiting  for  any  thing  ? — I am  waiting 
for  my  book. — Is  this  young  man  waiting  for  his  money  ? — He  is 
waiting  for  it. — Has  the  king  passed  here,  (por  aqun)—lle  has  not 
passed  here,  but  before  tlie  theatre. — Has  he  not  passed  before  tho 
•'.astle  ? — He  has  passed  there,  but  I have  net  seen  him. 

156. 

What  do  you  spend  your  time  in  7 — I spend  my  cime  in  studying. — 
What  does  your  brother  spend  his  time  in  ? — ^He  spends  his  time  in 
reading  and  playing. — Does  this  man  spend  his  time  in  working  ? — 
He  is  a good-for-nothing  fellow ; lie  spends  his  tfne  in  drinking  and 
playing. — What  do  your  children  spend  their  time  in  ?— They  spend 
their  time  in  learning. — Can  you  pay  me  what  you  owe  me  ?—  I cannot 
pay  it  you,  for  the  merchant  has  failed  to  bring  me  my  money. — Why 
have  you  breakfasted  without  me  ? — You  failed  to  come  at  nine  o’clock, 
so  that  we  have  breakfasted  without  you. — Has  the  storekeeper  brought 
you  the  gloves  which  you  bought  at  his  store  ? — He  has  failed  to  bring 
them  to  me. — Has  he  sold  them  to  you  on  credit  ? — He  has  sold  them 
to  me,  on  the  contrary,  for  cash. — Do  you  know  those  men  ? — I do  not 
know  them ; but  I believe  that  they  are  good-for-nothing  fellows,  for 
they  spend  their  time  in  playing. — Why  did  you  fail  to  come  to  my 
father  this  morning  ? — The  tailor  did  not  bring  me  the  coat  which  ho 
promised  me,  (me  habia  prometido,)  so  tliat  I could  not  go  to  him  — 
Who  is  the  man  who  has  just  spoken  to  you  ? — He  is  a merchant. — 
What  has  the  shoemaker  just  brought  ? — He  has  brought  the  shoes 
which  he  has  made  us. — Who  are  the  men  that  have  just  arrived  ? — 
They  are  Russians. — Where  did  your  uncle  dine  yesterday? — lie 
dined  at  home. — How  much  did  he  spend  ? — He  spent  five  shillings.— 
How  much  has  he  a month  to  live  upon  ? — He  has  two  hundred  dol- 
lars a month  to  live  upon. — Do  you  throw  your  hat  away  ? — I do  not 
throw  it  away,  for  it  fits  me  very  well. — How  much  have  you  spent 
to-day  ?--I  have  not  spent  much;  I have  spent  only  two  shillings. — 
Do  you  spend  every  day  as  much  as  that  ? — I sometimes  spend  more 
than  that. — Has  that  man  been  waiting  long  ? — He  has  but  just  come, 
—What  does  he  wish  ? — He  wishes  to  vspeak  to  you, — Are  yon  willing 

do  that  ? — I am  willing  to  do  it. 


FIFIY- FIRST  LESSON 


215 


FIFI’Y-FIRST  LESSON. — Leccion  Quincuagesmia  'primera. 


Far 


‘ioit  far  r (meaning  what  distance?) 


How  far  is  it  from  here  to  Pans? 

(s  it  far  from  here  to  Paris  ? 

It  is  far. 

It  is  not  far. 

Ilow  many  miles  is  it? 

It  is  twenty  miles. 

A mile. 

It  is  almost  two  hundred  miles  from 
here  to  Paris. 

It  is  nearly  a hundred  miles  from 
Berlin  to  Vienna. 


I Lijos.  Distante,  Remoto. 

^ f I Cuanto  dista  ? (Dislar.) 

I Quo  distancia  hay  7 (Imp  verb— 
^ see  Appendix.) 

I Estar  lejos  ? ^ Cuanto  hay  ? 

. I Hay  mucho  7 
I Cuanto  hay  de  aqui  d Paris? 

I Estd  Paris  Idjos  de  aqui  ? 

Estd  lejos 
I No  estd  lejos 
I Cuantas  millas  dista? 

I Cuanto  dista  7 
Veinte  millas, 

Una  milla. 

De  aqui  a Paris  hay  casi  doscienta# 
millas. 

Hay  cerca  de  cien  millas  de  Berlir 
d Viena. 


From. 

From  Venice. 

From  London. 

I am  from  Paris. 

What  countryman  are  you  ? 

Are  you  from  France  ? 

I am. 

The  Castilian. 

He  is  a Castilian,  (from  Castile.) 
The  king. 

The  philosopher. 

The  preceptor,  the  tutor 
The  professor. 

The  landlord,  the  innkeeper 


De. 

De  Venecia- 
De  L6ndres. 

Yo  soy  de  Paris,  t Soy  hijo  de  Paris 
t i De  que  pais  es  V.  ? 

I De  donde  sois  ? i De  que  tierra  t 
t i Es  V.  Frances?  • 

I Sois  Franceses  ? 

Si,  senor. 

El  Castellano. 

^11  es  Castellano. 

El  rey. 

El  fiMsofo. 

El  preceptor.  El  ayo.  El  maestro 
El  profesor.  El  catedrdtico 
Posadero.  Mesonero  Ilostolero 
Huesped.  Casero.  Patron. 


Are  you  a Biscayan? 
Whence  do  you  come  ( 
I come  from  Bilboa. 


( ^ Es  V.  Vizcaino  ? 

' I De  donde  viene  V ? 
' Vengo  de  Bilbdo- 


216 


fiity-first  lesson. 


To  Jly,  to  run  away, 

I run  away,  thou  runaest  away,  he 
runs  away,  you  run  away. 

We  run  away,  you  run  away,  they 
run  away,  you  run  away. 

Why  do  you  fly  ? 

I fly  because  I am  afraid. 


I Huir  Huirse  *,  (see  App.,  ver&a 
in  uir.)  Escaparse.  Fug  arse. 

1 Yo  huyo,  td  huyes,  el  huye,  V.  huy*^ 

Nosotros  huimos,  vosotros  huis,  elloss 
huyen,  VV  huyen. 

I Porque  huye  V.  1 
Yo  huyo  porque  tengo  miedo 


To  assure.  j Asegurar. 

1 assure  you  that  he  is  arrived.  | t Yo  aseguro  d,  V.  que  el  ha  llegado. 

Ohs.  When  the  verb  to  be  is  used  instead  of  to  havoy  as  in  the  fore- 
going example,  it  is  translated  haber. 


To  hear,  (to  have  knowledge  of.) 

Have  you  heard  nothing  new  ? 

1 have  heard  nothing  new. 


Oir  *.  Saber  (See  App.  for  these 
two  verbs.) 

t I No  sabe  V.  nada  de  nuevo? 
t Yo  no  he  sabido  nada  de  nuevo 


To  happen. 

The  happiness,  fortune. 

Unhappiness,  misfortune. 

A great  misfortune  has  happened. 
He  has  met  with  a great  misfortune. 

What  has  happened  to  you  ? 

Nothing  has  happened  to  me. 

I have  met  with  your  brother. 

The  poor  man. 

I have  cut  his  finger. 

Von  have  broken  the  man’s  neck. 


To  pity. 

Do  you  pity  that  man  ? 
i pity  him  with  all  my  heart. 

With  all  my  heart. 


I Acaecer.  Acontecer.  Suceder 
I Felicidad.  Dicha.  Fortuna.  Gracia. 
Infelicidad.  Desdicha.  Desgracia 
Infortunio. 

Ha  sucedido  una  gran  desgracia. 
t Le  ha  sucedido  un  grande  inforti> 
nio. 

I Que  le  ha  sucedido  d,  V.  ? 

I Que  os  ha  acontecido  ? 

No  me  ha  sucedido  nada. 

Me  he  encontrado  con  el  hermanc 

1 de  V. 

I El  pobre  hombre. 

I t Yo  le  he  cortado  el  dedo. 
t V.  le  ha  torcido  (rornpido)  el  pe» 
cuezo  al  hombre. 

Compadecer.  Compadecerse  de. 

(See  verbs  in  cer,  in  App.) 
Tener  Idstima. 

I Se  compadece  V.  de  ese  hombre  ? 
Le  compadezco  con  todo  mi  corazou 
J Con  (de)  todo  mi  corazon 
t t Con  toda  mi  alma 


FIFT^'FIRST  LESSON. 


217 


To  complain. 

Do  you  complain  ? 

S do  not  complain. 

Do  you  complain  of  my  friend  ? 

I do  complain  of  him. 

I do  not  complain  of  him. 

To  dare. 

To  spoil,  to  damage. 

To  serve,  to  wait  upon. 

Dost  thou  wait  upon,  (serve  ?) 

L do  wait  upon,  (I  serve.) 

Ele  waits  upon,  (he  serves.) 

To  serve  some  one,  (to  wait  upon 
some  one.) 

Has  he  been  in  your  service  ? 

Has  he  served  you  f 

How  long  has  he  been  in  your  ser- 
vice 1 

The  service 


Quejarse  dc  Lamentarse  de 
I Se  queja  V.? 

No  me  quejo. 

I Se  queja  V.  de  mi  amigo  ? 
t De  veras  (ciertamente)  me  que^o 
de  a 

No  me  quejo  de  a 

Osar.  Atreverse.  Arriesgarse 
Echar  d perder.  Inutilizar. 

Servir  * (See  Appendix.) 

Estar  en  servicio  de  otro,  d tru 
mandado.) 

I Sirves  tii  ? 

Yo  sirvo.  Estoy  sirvdendo. 
i:i  sirve.  6l  esta  sirviendo. 

Servir  d alguno. 

Estar  sirviendo  d alguno. 

Estar  al  servicio  de  alguno. 

[Ha  estado  dl  en  el  servicio  do  V ? 

I Ha  servido  d V.  ? 

I Ha  estado  sirviendo  d V.  ? 

I Cuanto  tiempo  ha  servido  dl  d V.  ? 

I Cuanto  tiempo  ha  estado  sirviendo 
d V.? 

El  servicio. 


To  offer. 
Do  you  ofFei '( 

I do  offer. 
Thou  offerest 
He  offers. 


Tc  confide,  to  trust,  to  tnti  ast. 

l\)  you  trust  mo  with  your  money  ? 

I d)  trust  you  with  it. 

I have  intrusted  that  man  with  a 
secret 

The  secret 

To  keep  any  thing  secret 

10 


Ofrecer  *.  (See  App.,  verbs  m cer.) 
I Ofrece  V.  ? [ Ofreceis  vos,  (voso- 

tros) 

Yo  ofrezco.  t De  veras  ofrezco. 

Tii  ofreces. 

El  ofrece. 


Confiar  a,  {de,  en.) 

Fiarse  de,  (en.) 

t Contar  con.  Hacer  confianza  de 
I Me  confia  V.  su  dinero  ? 

Yo  se  le  confio  d V. 

Yo  he  confiado  un  secreto  d ese 
hombre. 

El  secreto. 

Guard ar  secreto. 

Tener  secreta  algiina  coaa. 


218 


FIFTY-FIiiRT  LESSON. 


I have  kept  it  secret. 


He  guardado  secret©. 
Lo  he  teiiido  secret© 


To  take  care  of  something 

Do  you  take  care  of  your  clothes  ? 
i Jo  take  care  of  them. 

' Will  you  take  care  of  my  horse? 

I will  take  care  of  k. 

To  leave. 

To  squander y to  dissipate. 

Me  has  squandered  all  his  wealth 
To  hinder.  To  prevent. 
To  keep  from. 

V ou  hinder  me  from  sleeping. 


To  purchase. 


Cuidar  de  alguna  cosa. 

Tener  cuidado  de. 

^Cuida  V de  sus  vestidos,  (sa  icf-a! 
Si,  yo  cuido  de  ellos,  (de  ella.) 

I Quiore  V.  cuidar  mi  caballo  ? 

I Quiere  V.  cuidar  de  mi  caballo 
Si,  yo  cuidare  ae  ^I. 

Dejar. 

Malgastar.  Disipar 
Desperdiciar.  Derrochar 
fil  ha  disipado  todo  su  caudak 
Impedir  *.  Embarazar 
Estorhar.  No  dejar 
V.  no  me  deja  dormir 
Me  impide  dormir. 


K Comprar. 

UQ 
hi' 


‘ Hacer  algunas  compras 

1 1 1 1 « j i Qu®  ^21  comprado  Yt.  hey  ? 

What  have  you  purchased  to  day  ? ^ ^ y . 

I have  purchased  two  handkerchiefs.  | Yo  he  comprado  dos  panuelos 
Have  you  purchased  any  thing  to-  ^ i Ha  comprado  V.  hoy  alguna  cosa  ‘ 

f t i Hahecho  V.  hoy  algunas  compras  1 


day? 


Most  lovely,  charming. 
Admirably. 

That  hat  fits  you  admirably 
Tliat  coat  fits  him  very  well. 

It  is  charming. 


Preciosisimo.  Amabilisimo. 
Encantador. 

Admirablemente. 

t Ese  sombrero  le  va  (sienta)  d.  V 
muy  bien. 

Esa  casaca  le  sienta  perfectamente 
Esa  casaca  le  va  como  pintada. 
Eso  es  hechicero,  encantador,  deli- 
cioso. 

t Mono,  divertido,  gracioso 


EXERCISES. 

157. 

How  far  is  it  from  Paris  to  London  ?— It  is  nearly  two  hundred 
aiiles  from  Paris  to  London. — Is  it  far  from  here  to  Berlin  ? — It  is  far 
—Is  it  far  from  here  to  Vienna  ? — It  is  almost  a hundred  and 


FIFTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


219 


raiLes  from  here  to  Vienna. — Is  it  farther  from  Paris  to  Blois  than  fron: 
Orleans  to  Paris  ?— It  is  farther  from  Orleans  to  Paris  than  from  Paris 

to  Blois. How  far  is  it  from  Paris  to  Berlin  ? — It  is  almost  a hundred 

and  thirty  miles  from  Paris  to  Berlin.— Do  you  intend  to  go  to  Paris 
goon  ? — I intend  to  go  thither  soon. — Why  do  you  wish  to  go  tliis 

time  ? In  order  to  buy  good  books  and  good  gloves  there,  and  to  seo 

my  good  friends. — Is  it  long  since  you  were  there  ? — It  is  nearly  a 
year  since  I was  there. — Do  you  not  go  to  Italy  this  year  ? — 1 do  nol 
go  tliither,  for  it  is  too  far  from  here  to  Italy.—  Who  are  the  men  that 
hav^e  just  arrived  ? — They  are  philosophers. — Of  what  country  are 
they? — They  are  from  London. — Who  is  the  man  who  has  just 
started  ? — He  is  an  Englishman,  who  has  squandered  away  all  his 
fortune  in  France. — ^What  countryman  are  you  ? — I am  a Spaniard, 
and  my  friend  is  an  Italian. — Are  you  from  Cadiz  ? — No,  I am  from 
Madrid. — How  much  money  have  your  children  spent  to-day  ? — They 
have  spent  but  little ; they  have  spent  but  one  dollar. — Where  did  you 
dine  yesterday  ? — I dined  at  the  innkeeper’s. — Did  you  spend  much  ? 
— I spent  a dollar  and  a half. — Has  the  king  passed  here  ? — He  has 
not  passed  here,  but  before  the  theatre. — Have  you  seen  him  ? — I have 
seen  him. — Is  it  the  first  time  you  have  seen  him  ? — It  is  not  the  first 
time,  for  I have  seen  him  more  than  twenty  times. 

15S. 

Why  does  that  man  run  away  ? — He  runs  away  because  he  is 
afraid. — Why  do  you  run  away  ? — I run  away  because  I am  afraid. 
— Of  whom  are  you  afraid  ? — I am  afraid  of  the  man  who  does  not 
love  me. — Is  he  your  enemy? — I do  not  know  whether  he  is  my 
enemy ; but  I fear  all  those  who  do  not  love  me,  for  if  they  do  me 
no  harm,  they  will  do  me  no  good. — Do  you  fear  my  cousin  ? — 
I do  not  fear  him,  for  he  has  never  done  anybody  harm. — You  are  in 
the  wrong  to  run  away  before  that  man,  for  I assure  you  that  he  is  a 
very  good  man,  who  has  never  done  harm  to  any  one. — Of  whom  has 
your  brother  heard  ? — He  has  heard  of  a man  to  whom  a misfortune 
has  happened. — Why  have  your  scholars  not  done  their  exercises  ? — 
I assure  you  that  they  have  done  them,  and  you  are  mistaken  if  you 
beheve  that  they  have  not  done  them. — What  have  you  done  with  my 
book  ? — I assure  you  that  I have  not  seen  it. — Has  your  son  had  mv 
Knives  ? — He  assures  me  that  he  has  not  had  them. — Has  your  uncle 
arrived  already  ? — He  has  not  arrived  yet. — Vv^ill  you  wait  till  he 
returns,  {que  el  llegue  cannot  wait,  for  I have  a good  deal  to  do. 
— Have  you  not  heard  any  thing  new  ? — I have  heard  nothing  new. — 
Has  the  king  arrived  ? — They  say  that  he  has  arrived. — What  has 
happened  to  you  ? — A great  misfortune  has  happened  to  me. — What  ? 


220 


FIFTY 'FIRST  LESSOK, 


— 1 have  met  with  my  greatest  enemy,  who  has  given  me  a blow  with 
a slick. — Then  I pity  you  with  all  my  heart. — Why  do  you  pity  that 
man  — I pity  him  because  you  have  broken  his  neck. — Wliy  do  you 
complain  of  my  friend  ? — I complain  of  him  because  he  has  cut  my 
finger. — Does  that  man  serve  you  well  ? — He  does  serve  me  well,  but 
he  spends  too  much. — Are  you  willing  to  take  tliis  servant  ? — I am 
willing  to  take  him,  if  he  will  serve  me. — Can  I take  that  servant  ? — 
You  can  take  him,  for  he  has  served  me  very  well. — How  long  is  it 
since  he  is  out  of  {que  el  dejo)  your  service  ? — It  is  but  two  months 
since. — Has  he  served  you  long  ? — He  has  served  me  (for)  six  years. 

159. 

Do  you  offer  me  any  thing  ? — I have  nothing  to  offer  you,  — What 
Joes  my  friend  offer  you  ? — He  offers  me  a book. — Have  the  Parisians 
offered  you  any  thing  ? — They  have  offered  me  wine,  bread,  and  good 
beef. — Why  do  you  pity  our  neighbor  ? — I pity  him,  because  he  has 
trusted  a merchant  of  Paris  with  his  money,  and  the  man  (y  este)  will 
not  return  it  to  him. — Do  you  trust  this  man  with  any  thing  ? — I do 
not  trust  him  with  any  thing. — Has  he  already  kept  any  thing  from 
/ou  ? — I have  never  trusted  him  with  any  thing,  so  that  he  has  never 
Kept  any  thing  from  me. — Will  you  trust  my  father  with  your  money  ? 
—1  will  trust  him  with  it. — With  what  secret  has  my  son  intrusted 
you  ? — I cannot  intrust  you  with  that  with  which  he  has  intrusted  me, 
for  he  has  desired  me  {encatgado)  to  keep  it  secret. — Whom  do  you 
intrust  with  your  secrets  ? — I intrust  nobody  with  them,  so  that  nobody 
xnows  them. — Has  your  brother  been  rewarded  ? — He  has.  on  the 
contrary,  been  punished  ; but  I beg  you  to  keep  Qo  tenga)  it  secret, 
for  no  one  knows  it. — What  has  happened  to  him  ? — I will  tell  you 
what  has  happened  to  him,  if  you  promise  me  to  keep  it  secret.  Do 
you  promise  me  to  keep  it  secret  ? — I do  promise  you,  for  I pity  him 
with  all  my  heart. — Will  you  take  care  of  my  clothes  ? — I will  take 
care  of  them. — Are  you  taking  care  of  the  book  which  I lent  you  ? — 
I am  taking  care  of  it. — Who  will  take  care  of  my  servant  ? — The 
landlord  will  take  care  of  him. — Do  you  throw  away  your  hat  ? — I do 
not  throw  it  away,  for  it  fits  me  admirably. — Does  your  friend  sell  his 
coat  ? — He  does  not  sell  it,  for  it  fits  him  most  beautifully. — Who  has 
spoiled  my  book  ? — No  one  has  spoiled  it,  because  no  one  has  dared 
to  touch  it. 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


22J 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON.— 

the  people  come  soon  ? 

Soorif — very  soon. 

A violin. 

To  play  upon  the  violin. 

To  play  the  violin. 

The  harpsichord. 

To  play  the  harpsichord. 

To  play  upon  the  harpsichord. 
IVliat  instrument  do  you  play? 


‘Leccion  Quincuagesima  segwida. 

I Vendrd  la  gente  luego  ? 

LucgOy  presto,  pronto.  Muy  pronU 
Un  violin. 

t Tocar  el  viwlin. 

I Clave.  Clavicordio 
t Tocar  el  piano,  (el  clavicordio.^ 

I t I Que  instrumento  toca  V . 7 


To  touch 
Near 
' Near  me. 

Near  them. 

Near  the  fire. 

Near  the  trees. 

Near  going. 

Where  do  you  live  ? 

I live  near  the  castle. 

What  are  you  doing  near  the  fire  7 


To  dance 
To  fall. 

To  drop,  (meaning  to  let  fall.) 
Has  he  dropped  any  thing  ? 

He  has  not  dropped  any  thing. 


Tocar.  Palpar. 

Cerca  de.  Junto  d. 

Cerca  de  mu  Junto  d mu 
Cerca  de  ellos,  (or  ellas.) 

Cerca  del  fuego. 

Cerca  de  los  drboles. 

Cerca  de  ir. 

I En  donde  vive  V.  7 
Vivo  junto  al  castillo. 

I Que  estd,  V.  haciendo  junto  al 
fuego  ? 


Danzar.  Bailor 
Caer  *. 

Dejar  caer. 

I Ha  dejado  dl  caer  algo  7 
iil  no  ha  dejado  caer  nada. 


To  retain.  To  hold  hack. 

To  approach.  To  draw  near. 
Do  you  approach  the  fy*o  7 
I do  approach  it. 


To  approach,  to  have  access  to  one. 

He  is  a man  difficult  of  access. 

I go  away  (withdraw)  from  the  fire. 


Retener  *,  (conj.  like  Tener.y 
Acercarse  d.  Aproximarse  d.® 
I Se  acerca  V.  al  fuego  ? 

Me  acerco,  (d  dl.) 


Acercarse. 

Tener  comunicacion  con. 

Es  un  honiDro  de  dificil  acceso. 
Yo  mo  quite  del  fuego. 


* See  Lesson  XXIV.,  and  Appendix. 


See  Lesson  XXVI.,  Oba  F 


222 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


To  withdraw  from* 

To  go  away  from. 

[ go  away  from  it. 

Why  does  that  man  go  away  from 
the  fire  ? 

^le  goes  away  from  it  because  he  is 
not  cold. 


To  recollect. 

Do  you  recollect  that  ? 

I do  recollect  it. 

Does  your  brother  recollect  that 

He  does  recollect  it 
Do  you  recollect  the  words  ? 

I do  recollect  them. 

Have  you  recollected  the  words  ? 
I have  recollected  them. 

I have  not  recollected  them. 
Have  you  recollected  them  ? 

You  have  recollected  them. 

Has  he  recollected  them  ? 

He  has  recollected  them. 

VVe  have  recollected  them. 

They  have  recollected  them. 

To  rememher. 

To  recollect. 

Do  you  remember  that  man  ? 

Do  you  remember  that  ? 

I do  remember  it. 

What  do  you  remember? 

I remember  nothing. 

To  sit  down- 
Are  you  sitting  dawn  ? 


Quitarse  de.  Apartarsc  dc. 
Retirarse  de.  Irse  de  * 

Yo  me  quito  de  €\ 

I Porqud  se  retira  ese  hombre  del 
fuego  ? 

t El  se  retira  porque  no  tiene  fr to 


Acordarse  de 
I Se  acuerda  V de  eso  ? 

I Os  acordais  vos  (or  vosotros)  de 
eso  ? 

Me  acuerdo  de  ello. 

I Se  acuerda  de  eso  e hermano  de 
V.? 

6 1 se  acuerda  de  ello. 

I Se  acuerda  V.  de  las  palabras  ? 

Me  acuerdo  de  ellas. 

I Se  ha  acordado  V.  de  las  palabras  ? 
Me  he  acordado  de  ellas. 

No  me  he  acordado  de  ellas. 

I Os  habeis  acordado  de  ellas  ? 

V.  se  ha  acordado  de  ellas. 

I Se  ha  acordado  dl  de  ellas  ? 

El  se  ha  acordado  de  ellas. 

Nos  hemos  acordado  de  ellas. 

Se  hail  acordado  de  ellas. 

Acordarse  de  *. 

Recordarse  de  *. 

I Os  acordais  de  ese  hombre  ? 

I Se  acuerda  V.  de  ese  hombre  ? 

I I Se  acuerda  V.  de  eso  ? 

Si  me  acuerdo. 

Me  acuerdo  de  eso. 

I De  que  os  acordais  ? 

I De  que  se  acuerda  V.  ? 

I No  me  acuerdo  de  nada. 

I Sentarsc  Estar  sent  ado. 

I I Estd  V.  sentado  ? [So  sienta  V.  ? 


( 

1 


See  Acordarse  in  the  Appendix,  where  its  irregularity  is  explained. 

^ See  Alentar  in  the  Appendix,  where  the  irregularities  of  sentarae  ar« 
explained 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


223 


)L  Am  sitting  down. 

Thou  art  sitting  down. 

Ho  is  sitting  down. 

I shall  or  will  sit  down. 
He  sits  near  the  fire. 

He  is  sitting  near  the  fire. 


Me  siento.  Estoy  senlado. 
Tii  te  sientas.  Estds  sentado 
se  sieiita.  Estd  sentado. 
Yo  me  sentar4. 

El  se  sienta  cerca  del  fuego. 
^:i  estd  sentado  junto  al  fuegc 


• Gustar  mas  de.  Prefcrird. 
To  like  better,  to  prefer.  ^ 


Do  you  like  to  stay  here  better  than 
going  out  ? 


TiGusta  V.  mas  de  estar  aqui  qae 
de  salir  ? 

■j  I Prefiere  V.  estar  aqui  d salir? 

■ I Quiere  V.  mejor  (or  mas  bien'  estar 
V.  aqui  que  salir  ? 


Gustar  is  most  frequently  used  placing  the  object  as  a suoject,  in  which 
case  the  verb  agrees  with  it  in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural,  and  the 
subject  is  expressed  by  the  corresponding  pronoun  in  the  objective  case,  to 
wit : me,  ^c,  se,  Ze,  le  (v)  d V. 


J like  staying  here  better  than  going 
out. 

He  likes  to  play  better  than  to  study. 

Do  you  like  to  write  better  than  to 
speak  ? 

I like  to  speak  better  than  to  write. 


Better  than. 

He  likes  to  do  both. 

I like  beef  better  than  mutton. 

Do  you  like  bread  better  than  meat? 

X like  neither  the  one  nor’the  other 

t like  tea  as  much  as  coffee. 

Just  as  much. 

Some  veal. 

Calf,  calves. 


t Mo  gusta  mas  estar  aqui  que  salir. 

t A dl  le  gusta  mas  jugar  que  es- 
tudiar. 

t i Le  gusta  d V.  mas  escribir  que 
hablar  ? 

t A mi  me  gusta  mas  hablar  que 
escribir. 


Mas  que.  Mejor  que. 

t A dl  le  gusta  hacer  lo  uno  y le 
otro,  (or  el  uno  y el  otro.) 

Me  gusta  mas  la  vaca  que  el  camero. 

t i Le  gusta  d V.  mejor  el  pan  que 
la  came  ? 

t No  mo  gustan  ni  el  uno,  ni  la 
otra. 

f El  td  me  gusta  tanto  como  el  cafe 

Tanto  como. 

Lo  mismo  (n)  que. 

Un  poco  de  tei*nera.  Temera. 

Ternero,  ternera  • terncros,  ternenys 


Qukk  Feutt. 

^ i De  prtsa. 


224 


FiriY-SECOND  LESSON. 


( Tardo.  Lento.  Lentamsnte 
Slow.  Slowly.  ^ 


Aloud, 

your  master  speak  aloud  ? 
lie  speaks  aloud. 

ill  order  to  learn  Spanish,  one  must 
speak  aloud. 

Quicker,  Faster, 

Not  so  quick.  Less  quick. 
As  fast  as  you. 
ife  eats  quicker  than  I. 

I >o  you  learn  as  fast  as  I ? 

I iearii  faster  than  you. 
i do  not  understand  you,  because 
you  speak  too  fast 


To  sell  cheap. 

To  sell  dear* 

Does  he  sell  cheap  ? 

He  does  not  sell  dear. 

He  has  sold  me  very  dear. 

So, 

This  man  sells  every  thing  so  dear, 
that  one  cannot  buy  any  thing 
from  him. 

You  speak  so  fast  that  I cannot  un- 
derstand you. 

To  buy  something  of  some  one 

I have  bought  it  of  him. 

So  muchf  so  many, 

I have  written  so  many  notes,  that  I 
cannot  write  any  more. 


Alto,  En  alta  voz.  Redo. 
iHabla  alto  el  maestro  de  \ (oi 
vuestro  maestro)  ? 

El  habla  alto. 

Para  aprender  el  Espahol,  es  menc©-  , 
ter  hablar  alto. 

Mas  presto.  Mas  ligero. 

No  tan  presto,  Menos  pronto 
Tan  pronto  como  V.  (vos,  or  vosotros.) 
^:i  come  mas  presto  oue  yo. 

I Aprende  V.  tan  pronto  como  yo  ? 

Yo  aprendo  mas  pronto  que  V. 

Yo  no  entiendo  d,  V.  (os  entiendo) 
porque  V habla  (hablais)  tan  dr 
prisa. 

Vender  harato. 

Vender  caro, 

I Vende  6\  barato  I 
El  no  vende  caro. 

El  me  ha  vendido  rnuy  caro. 

Tan, 

Este  hombre  lo  vende  t.odo  tan  caio, 
que  no  se  le  puede  corpprar  nada. 

V.  habla  tan  ligero  oue  yo  puedo 
entenderle. 

Comprar  algo  de  alguno. 

Yo  se  le  he  comprado^  (d.  di.) 

Tanto,  tanta,  Tantos,  tantas. 

He  escrito  tantas  esquelas  quo  no 
puedo  escribir  mas. 


I ^ * you  feai  to  go  out  ? 

1 do  fear  to  go  out. 

To  run  away.  To  Jly, 
JDid  you  run  away  ? 


I Teme  V.  salir?  ^ Temeis  salir ) 
t Ciertamente  temo  salir. 

Huir  *.  Escaparse,  Salvarse, 

: I Huyd  V.?  I So  escap6  V ? 


^ Particular  care  must  be  paid  in  the  translation  of  these  phrases,  foi 
t'o  sc  le  he  comprado,  may  mean,  I bought  it  of,  or  from  him  ; and  also,  1 
bought  it  to,  or  for  his  benefit.  To  avoid  ambiguity,  the  pronouns  d el  d 
eila,  a.  ellos,  &c.  are  placed  after  the  verb. 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


225 


f diQ  not  rui  away. 

Why  did  that  man  run  away  1 

lie  ran  away  because  he  was  afraid* 

Wlio  has  run  away  ? 
lie  has  run  away. 


Yc  no  hui.  Yo  no  mo  escape 
I Porque  huy6  (or  se  escapd;  (w 
h ombre  ? 

6l  huyd  (se  escapd)  porque  tenia 
rniedo. 

^ Quieii  se  ha  huido,  (or  escapade)  ? 

I El  so  ha  huido.  El  se  ha  escapade 


EXERCISE? 

160. 

Do  you  play  the  violin  ? — I do  no„  play  the  violin,  but  the  harpsi- 
chord.— Shall  we  have  a ball  to-night  ? — We  shall  have  one. — At  what 
o'clock  ? — At  a quarter  to  eleven. — What  o’clock  is  it  now  ? — It  .s 
almost  eleven,  and  the  people  will  soon  come. — What  instrument  will 
vou  play  ? — I shall  play  the  violin.— If  you  play  the  violin  I shall  play 
upon  the  harpsichord. — Are  there  to  be  (deberd  haber)  a great  many 
people  at  our  ball  ? — There  is  to  be  a great  many. — Will  you  dance  ? 
— I shall  dance. — Will  your  children  dance  ? — They  will  dance  if  they 
please. — In  what  do  you  spend  your  time  in  this  country  ? — I spend 
my  time  in  playing  on  the  harpsichord,  and  in  reading. — In  what  does 
your  cousin  divert  himself  ? — He  diverts  himself  in  playing  upon  the 
violin. — Does  any  one  dance  when  you  play  ? — A great  many  people 
dance  when  I play. — Who  ? — At  first  (jprimero)  our  children,  then  our 
cousins,  at  last  our  neighbors. — Do  you  amuse  yourselves  ? — I assure 
you  that  we  amuse  ourselves  very  much. — Whom  do  you  pity  ? — I 
pity  your  friend. — Why  do  you  pity  him  ? — I pity  him  because  he  is 
ill. — Has  anybody  pitied  you  ? — Nobody  has  pitied  me,  because  I have 
not  been  ill. — Do  you  offer  me  any  thing  ? — I offer  you  a fine  gun. — 
What  has  my  father  offered  you  ? — He  has  offered  me  a fine  book. — 
To  whom  have  you  offered  your  fine  horses  ? — I have  offered  them  tc 
the  English  captain. — Dost  thou  offer  thy  pretty  little  dog  to  thesf 
children  ? — I offer  it  to  them,  for  I love  them  with  all  my  heart. — Why 
have  you  given  that  boy  a blow  with  your  fist  ? — Because  he  hindered 
me  from  sleeping. — Has  anybody  hindered  you  from  writing,  {que  V, 
escriba  ?) — Nobody  has  hindered  me  from  writing,  but  I have  hindered 
somebody  from  hurting  your  cousin. 

161. 

Have  you  dropped  any  thing  ? — I have  dropped  nothing,  but  my 
cousin  dropped  some  money. — Who  has  picked  it  up  ? — Some  men 
have  picked  it  up. — Was  it  returned  to  him,  (se  le  han  vuelto  1) — It  was 
returned  to  him. — Is  it  cold  to-day  ? — It  is  very  cold. — Will  you  draw 
soar  the  fire  ? — I cannot  drav/  near  (it,)  for  I am  afraid  of  burning  my 


226 


FIlfTY-SECOND  LESSON'. 


Belf. — Why  does  your  friend  go  away  from  the  fire  ? — He  goes  awa^ 
(from  it)  because  he  is  afraid  of  burning  himself. — Art  thou  coming 
near  the  fire  ? — I am  coming  near  (it,)  because  I am  very  cold. — Dc 
you  go  away  from  the  fire  ? — I do  go  away  (from  it.) — Why  do  you  gc 
away  (from  it  ?) — Because  I am  not  cold. — Are  you  cold  or  warm  ?— i 
am  neither  cold  nor  warm. — Why  do  your  children  approach  the  fire  1 
— They  approach  (it)  because  they  are  cold. — Is  anybody  cold  ?— 
Somebody  is  cold. — Who  is  cold  ? — The  little  boy,  whose  father  has 
lent  you  a horse,  is  cold. — Why  docs  he  not  warm  himself  ? — Because 
his  father  has  no  money  to  buy  wood. — Will  you  tell  him  to  come 
(gue  venga)  to  me  to  warm  himself  ? — I will  tell  him  so,  (lo,) — Do  you 
remember  any  thing  ? — I remember  nothing. — What  does  your  uncle 
recollect  ? — He  recollects  what  you  have  promised  him. — What  have  I 
promised  him? — You  have  promised  him  to  go  to  France  with  him 
next  winter. — I intend  to  do  so,  if  it  is  not  too  cold. — Why  do  you 
withdraw  from  the  fire  ? — I have  been  sitting  near  the  fire  this  hour 
and  a half,  so  that  I am  no  longer  cold. — Does  your  friend  not  like  to 
sit  near  the  fire  ? — He  likes,  (on  the  contrary,)  much  to  sit  near  the 
tire,  but  only  when  he  is  cold. — ^IVIay  one  approach  your  uncle  ? — One 
may  approach  him,  for  he  receives  everybody. — Will  you  sit  down  ? — 
I will  sit  down. — Where  does  your  father  sit  down  ? — He  sits  down 
near  me. — Where  shall  I sit  down  ? — You  may  sit  near  me. — Do  you 
sit  down  near  the  fire  ? — I do  not  sit  down  near  the  fire,  for  I am  afraid 
of  being  too  warm. — Do  you  recollect  my  brother  ? — I do  recollect  him 

162. 

Do  your  parents  recollect  their  old  friends  ? — They  do  recollect 
them. — Do  you  recollect  these  words  ? — I do  not  recollect  them. — Have 
you  recollected  that  ? — I have  recollected  it. — Has  your  uncle  recol- 
lected those  words  ? — He  has  recollected  them. — Have  I recollected 
my  exercise  ? — You  have  recollected  it. — Have  you  recollected  your 
exercises  ? — I have  recollected  them,  for  I have  learned  them  by  heart , 
and  my  brothers  have  recollected  theirs,  because  they  have  learned 
them  by  heart. — Is  it  long  since  you  saw  your  friend  from  Paris  ? — I 
saw  him  a fortnight  ago. — Do  your  scholars  like  to  learn  by  heart  ? — 
They  do  not  like  to  learn  by  heart ; they  like  reading  and  writing  better 
nhan  learning  by  heart. — Do  you  like  cider  better  than  wine  ? — I like 
wine  better  than  cider. — Does  your  brother  like  to  play  ? — He  likes  to 
atudy  better  than  to  play. — Do  you  like  veal  better  than  mutton  ? — I 
hke  the  latter  better  than  the  former. — Do  you  like  to  drink  better  than 
\o  eat  ?-  ^ like  to  eat  better  than  to  drink  ; but  my  uncle  likes  to  drink 
oetter  than  to  eat. — Does  the  Frenchman  Lke  fowl  (la  gallina)  better 
dtait  fish  ? — He  likes  fish  better  than  fowl. — Do  you  like  to  write  beUei 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


227 


Ilian  to  speak  ? — I like  to  do  both. — Do  you  like  honey  better  than 
iu^ar  ? — I like  neither. — Does  your  father  like  coffee  better  than  tea  ? 
^He  likes  neither. — Can  you  understand  me  ? — No,  Sir,  for  you  speak 
too  fast. — Will  you  be  kind  enough  (tener  la  hondad)  not  to  speak  so 
fast  ? — I will  not  speak  so  fast,  if  you  will  listen  to  me. 

163. 

Can  you  understand  what  my  brother  tells  you  ? — ^He  speaks  so 
fast,  that  I cannot  understand  him. — Can  your  pupils  understand  you  ? 
•—They  understand  me  when  I speak  slowly  ; for  in  order  to  be  under- 
stood I must  speak  slowly,  (que  yo  hahle.) — Is  it  necessary  to  speak 
aloud  to  learn  French  ? — It  is  necessary  to  speak  aloud. — Does  your 
master  speak  aloud  ? — He  does  speak  aloud  and  slow. — Why  do  you 
not  buy  any  thing  of  that  merchant  ? — He  sells  so  dear  that  I cannot 
buy  any  thing  of  him. — Will  you  take  me  to  another  ? — I will  take 
you  to  the  son  of  the  one  whom  you  bought  of  last  year. — Does  he 
sell  as  dear  as  this  one  ? — He  sells  cheaper. — Do  your  children  like 
.earning  Italian  better  than  Spanish  ? — They  do  not  like  to  learn  either ; 
they  only  like  to  learn  French.-r-Do  you  like  mutton  ? — I like  beef 
better  than  mutton. — Do  your  children  like  cakes  better  than  bread  ? — 
They  like  both. — Has  he  read  all  the  books  which  he  bought  ? — He 
bought  so  many  that  he  cannot  read  them  all. — Do  you  wish  to  write 
some  exercises  ? — I have  written  so  many  that  I cannot  write  any 
more. — Why  does  that  man  run  away  ? — He  runs  away  because  he  is 
afraid. — Will  any  one  do  him  harm  ? — No  one  will  do  liim  harm  ; but 
he  dares  not  stay,  because  he  has  not  done  his  task,  and  is  afraid  of 
being  punished. — Will  any  one  touch  him  ? — No  one  will  touch  him, 
but  he  will  be  punished  by  his  master  for  not  having  (j)orque  no  ha) 
done  his  task. 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON.— Leccion 


By  the  side  of. 

T o pass  by  the  side  of  some  one. 

I have  passed  by  the  side  of  you. 
Have  you  passed  by  the  side  of  my 
brother  ? 

T have  passed  by  the  side  of  him. 

To  pass  by  a place 
I have  passed  by  the  theatre. 


Quincuagesima  tercera 

Al  lado  dcf  (or  por  el  lado  de.) 
Pasar  por  (or  al  lado  de)  alguno. 

Yo  he  pasado  al  lado  de  V 
I Ha  pasado  V.  al  lado,  (or  por  el 
lado)  de  mi  hermano  ? 

Yo  he  pasado  ^ su  lado,  (or  por  su 
lado.) 

t Pasar  cerca  de  un  lugar, 
t Yo  he  pasado  cerca  del  (or  par  ol’ 
teatro 


228 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


I huTO  passed  by  the  castle.  t He  pasado  cerca  del 

Castillo. 

Vou  have  passed  before  my  ware-  t V.  ha  pasado  por  (or 
bouse.  1 mi  almacen. 


or  junto  iJ 
delante  dej 


To  dare 


J t^aro  not  go  thither 

He  dares  not  do  it 
I did  not  dare  to  tell  him  so. 


I Osar,  Atrcverse.  (See  in  the  Ap 
pendix,  verbs  taking  a prepos* 

I tioii  before  the  infinitive.) 

JYo  no  oso  ir  alld. 

No  me  atrevo  d ir  alia. 

I no  se  atreve  d hacerlo. 

I Yo  no  me  atrevi  d decirselo  asi. 


To  mahe  use  of,  to  use. 

Do  you  use  my  horse  ? 

I do  use  it. 

Does  your  father  use  it  ? 

Fie  does  use  it. 

Have  you  used  my  guii  ? 

I have  used  it 

They  have  used  your  books. 

They  have  used  them. 

To  instruct, 

i instruct,  thou  instructest,  he  in- 
structs ; we  instruct,  you  instruct, 
they  instruct 


Servirse  de,  Usar,  (See  Less.  I.) 

I Se  sirve  V.  de  mi  caballo  ? 

Me  sirvo  de  el. 

t 4 Se  sirve  de  el  su  seiior  padre  de 

V.? 

j Se  sirve  de  6\. 

\ Usa  de  el. 

I Ha  usado  V.  (or  se  ha  servido  Y.) 

de  mi  escopeta  ? 

He  usado  de  ella. 

Me  he  servido  de  ella. 

I Elios  han  usado  de  (se  han  servido 
1 de)  los  libros  de  V, 

Los  han  usado. 

Se  han  servido  de  ellos. 


Instruir  Instruyendo, 

Yo  instruyo,  td  instruyes,  ^1  instruye  • 
nosotros  instruimos,  vosotros  in. 
struis,  VOS  instruis,  V instruye,  VV 
instruyen,  ellos  mstruyen. 


To  teach. 

To  teach  some  one  something. 
Ho  teaches  me  arithmetic. 

! teach  you  Spanish. 

I have  taught  him  Spanish. 

To  teach  some  one  to  do  something. 


Ensehar. 

Enseiiar  algo  d alguno. 

El  me  enseha  la  aritmdtica. 

Yo  le  enseho  d.  V.  el  espahol. 

Yo  le  he  ensenado  el  espahol. 
Ensenar  d alguno  d hacer  algUiU 
cosa. 


See  verbs  in  uir,  in  the  Appendix,  where  their  irregularities  are  ex 
plained. 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


229 


ffc  tsaohes  m«  to  read.  I me  eiisena  a leer. 

I uacii  him  to  write.  | Yo  le  enseho  d escribir. 


The  Spanish  master,  (meaning  the  El  maestro  de  espahol. 

master  of  the  Spanish  language.) 

The  Spanish  master,  (meaning  that'  El  maestro  espanoL 
the  master  is  a Spaniard,  what- 
ever ha  teaches.) 


To  get  shaved. 

To  dress. 

To  undress. 

To  dress  one^s  self. 

To  undress  one^s  self. 

Have  you  dressed  yourself? 

I have  not  yet  dressed  myself 
Have  you  dressed  the  child  ? 

I have  dressed  it. 


To  undo. 

To  get  rid  of 

At6  you  getting  rid  of  your  damaged 
sugar  ? 

( am  getting  rid  of  it. 

Did  you  get  rid  of  yoiir  old  ship  ? 

I did  get  rid  of  it 


Afeitar  Rasurar. 
t Afeitarse.  Hacerse  afeitar. 
Vestir  *. 

Desnudar. 

Vestirse  *. 

Desnudarse. 

< i Se  ha  vestido  V.  ? 

^ i Os  habeis  vestido  ? 

Todavia  no  me  he  vestido. 

I Ha  vestido  V.  al  niho,  (or  mhay 
Le  (la)  he  vestido. 


Deshacer  * (Conjugated  like  hacei 
See  Appendix.) 

Deshacerse  de.  Zafarse. 

Librarse  de. 

I Se  deshace  V.  de  su  aziicar  averie 
do? 

t i Va  V.  saliendo  del  azucar 
riado  7 

SMe  deshago  de  el. 

Voy  saliendo  de  el. 

I I Se  deshizo  V.  de  su  fragata  viejai  1 
Me  deshice  de  ella. 


To  part  with. 

The  design,  the  intention 
I intend  to  go  thither. 

Do  you  intend  to  part  with,  your 
lioreos  ? 

I have  already  parted  with  them. 

He  has  parted  with  his  gun. 


( Deshacerse  de  Enagenar, 

( Vender. 

El  designio.  La  intencion. 

Yo  tengo  intencion  de  ir  alia. 

I Tiene  V.  intencion  de  desbocorat 
(de  vender)  sus  caballos  ? 

JYa  mo  he  deshecho  de  ellos. 

Ya  los  he  vendido. 

1 6l  ha  vendido  su  escopeta. 


230 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


Have  you  parted  with  (discharged) 
your  servant  ? 

\ have  parted  with  (discharged)  him. 

To  wake. 

To  awake. 


I Ha  despedido  V a su  cnaii;/ 1 

Si,  ya  le  he  despedido. 

I Despertar  Dispertar 
^ Despertar,  Despertarse,^ 

) Dispertar,  Dispertarse,^ 


Obs.  Dispertar  generally  means,  to  put  an  end  to  sleep;  dispertar st ^ ^ 

jcterrupt  sleep. 

f generally  awake  at  six  o’clock  in 
tho  morning. 

My  servant  generally  wakes  me  at 
six  o’clock  in  the  morning. 

A.  slight  noise  awakes  me. 

A dream  has  waked  me. 

I do  not  make  a noise,  in  order  not 
to  wake  him. 


Yo  despierto  generalmente  d ’as  sew 
de  la  man  ana. 

Mi  criado  me  dispierta  generalmentj 
d las  seis  de  la  manana. 

Un  ligero  ruido  me  despierta 
Un  sue  no  me  ha  dispertado. 

Yo  no  hago  ruido,  para  no  dispertarla 


A dream. 
Generally. 

To  come  down. 
To  alight  from  one’s  horse 
mount 


To  dis- 


Un  sueno.  Un  eiisueno. 
Generalmente.  Ordinariamente. 
Bajar, 

Apearse  de  su  caballo.  Desmonta? 


To  conduct  one’s  self 
To  behave, 

[ conduct  myself  well 
flow  does  he  conduct  himself? 

Towards, 

He  behaves  ill  towards  tha;  man. 
Ho  behaves  ill  towards  me 

To  he  worth  while. 

Is  it  worth  while  ? 

It  is  worth  while. 

Is  it  not  worth  while  ? 


Conducirse *  *,  (hien  or  mal,Y 
Portarse,  Comportarse. 

Yo  me  conduzco  bien 
I Como  se  porta  (conduce)  dl  ( 


A.  Con,  Para  con,  Hdcia, 

6l  se  porta  mal  con  aquel  hombrc 
se  porta  mal  conmigo 


Merecer  Valer  la  pena  dc. 
J I Lo  merece  eso  ? 
f i Vale  eso  la  pena  ? 

I t Lo  merece.  Vale  la  pena. 
i t i No  lo  merece  ? 

) I No  vale  la  pena  ? 


^ Despertar  or  dispertar  are  conjugated  like  alentar,  (See  this  verb  in 
the  Appendix.) 

* See  in  the  Appendix  the  irregularities  of  conducir,  and  all  tho  verljf 

aiidijig  in  **,  ecer,  ocer,  ucir 


FIFTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


23  J 


Is  it  worth  while  to  do  that? 

Is  it  worth  while  to  write  to  him  ? 
It  is  worth  nothing 

Is  it  better  ? 

It  is  better. 

it  be  better  ? 

It  will  not  be  better 

It  is  better  to  do  this  than  that. 

U is  better  to  stay  here  than  go 
walking. 


t I Merece  eso  hacerse  ? 
i Vale  la  pen  a hacer  eso  ? 

I ^ Vale  la  pena  escribirle  ? 

I No  vale  nada. 

I Es  mejor  ? i Vale  mas  ? 

Es  mejor.  Vale  mas. 

I Ser4  mejor  ? i Valdrd  mas  1 
No  serd,  mejor.  No  valdra  iiKta 
) Es  mejor  hacer  esto  que  eso 
Mas  vale  hacer  esto  que  eso. 
a-  I Mejor  es  estar  aqui  que  ir  d,  pasoa/ 


EXERCISES. 

164. 

Have  your  books  been  found  ? — They  have  been  found. — ^Where 
— Under  the  bed. — Is  my  coat  on  the  bed  ? — It  is  under  (it.) — Are 
your  brother’s  stockings  under  the  bed  ? — They  are  upon  it. — Have  I 
been  seen  by  anybody  ? — You  have  been  seen  by  nobody. — Have  you 
passed  by  anybody  ? — I passed  by  the  side  of  you,  and  you  did  not  see 
nie. — Has  anybody  passed  by  the  side  of  you  ? — Nobody  has  passed  by 
the  side  of  me. — Where  has  your  son  passed  ? — He  has  passed  by  the 
theatre. — Shall  you  pass  by  the  castle  ? — I shall  pass  (there.) — Why 
have  you  not  cleaned  my  trunk  ? — I was  afraid  to  soil  my  fingers. — 
Has  my  brother’s  servant  cleaned  his  master’s  guns  ? — He  has  cleaned 
them. — Has  he  not  been  afraid  to  soil  his  fingers  ? — He  has  not 
been  afraid  of  soiling  them,  because  his  fingers  are  never  clean. — Do 
you  use  the  books  which  I have  lent  you  ? — I do  use  them. — May  1 
use  your  knife  ? — Thou  mayst  use  it,  but  thou  must  not  cut  (te  cortes) 
thyself. — May  my  brothers  use  your  books  ? — They  may  use  them. — 
May  we  use  your  gun  ? — You  may  use  it,  but  you  must  not  spoil  it, 
(no  la  echen  d perder,) — What  have  you  done  with  my  wood  ? — I 
nave  used  it  to  warm  myself. — Has  your  father  used  my  horse  ? — He 
has  used  it. — Have  our  neighbors  used  our  clothes  ? — They  have  not 
used  them,  because  they  did  not  want  them. — Who  has  used  my  hat  ? 
. — Nobody  nas  used  it. — Have  you  told  your  brother  to  come  down,  (que 
haje  V) — I did  not  dare  to  tell  him. — Why  have  you  not  dared  to  tell 
him  ? — Because  I did  not  wish  to  wake  him,  (despertarle.) — Has  he  told 
you  not  to  wake  him  ? — He  has  told  me  not  to  wake  him  (despterle) 
when  he  sleeps 

165. 

Have  you  shaved  to-day  ? — I have  shaved. — Has  your  brothei 
shaved? — He  has  not  shaved  himself,  but  he  get  shaved. — Do  voii 


232 


fiftf-th:rd  lesson. 


Bhave  often  ? — 1 sliave  every  morning,  and  sometimes  also  in  the 
evening. — When  do  you  shave  in  the  evening  ? — When  I do  not  dine 
at  home. — I low  many  times  a day  does  your  father  shave  ? — He  shaves 
only  once  a day,  but  my  uncle  shaves  twice  a day. — Does  your  cousin 
shave  often  ? — He  shaves  only  every  other  day,  {un  dia  si,y  un  dia  uo.'i 
— At  what  o’clock  do  you  dress  in  the  morning  ? — I dress  as  soon  as 
I have  breakfasted,  and  I breakfast  every  day  at  eight  o’clock,  or  at  a 
quarter  past  eight. — Does  your  neighbor  dress  before  he  breakfasts  ? — 
He  breakfasts  before  he  dresses. — At  what  o’c  ock  in  the  evening  dost 
thou  undress  ? — I undress  as  soon  as  I return  from  the  theatre. — Dost 
thou  go  to  the  theatre  every  evening? — I do  not  go  every  evening, 
for  it  is  better  to  study  than  to  go  to  the  theatre. — At  what  o’clock 
dost  thou  undress  when  thou  dost  not  go  to  the  theatre  ? — I then 
undress  as  soon  as  I have  supped,  and  go  to  bed  at  ten  o’c. ock. — Have 
you  already  dressed  the  child  ? — I have  not  dressed  it  yet,  for  it  is  still 
asleep. — At  what  o’clock  does  it  get  up  ? — It  gets  up  as  soon  as  it  is 
waked. — Do  you  rise  as  early  as  I ? — I do  not  know  at  what  o’clock 
you  rise,  but  I rise  as  soon  as  I awake. — Will  you  tell  my  servant  to 
wake  me  (que  me  dispierle)  to-morrow  at  four  o’clock  ? — I will  tell 
him. — Why  have  you  risen  so  early  ? — My  children  have  made  such  a 
noise  that  they  wakened  m6. — Have  you  slept  well  ? — I have  not  slept 
well,  for  you  made  too  much  noise. — At  what  o’clock  did  the  good 
captain  awake  ? — He  awoke  at  a quarter  past  five  in  the  morning. 

166. 

How  did  my  child  behave? — He  behaved  very  well. — How  did  my 
brother  behave  towards  you  ? — He  behaved  very  well  towards  me,  for 
he  behaves  well  towards  everybody. — Is  it  worth  while  to  write  .o  that 
man  ? — It  is  not  worth  while  to  write  to  him. — Is  it  worth  while  to 
dismount  from  my  horse  in  order  to  buy  a cake  ? — It  is  not  worth 
while,  for  it  is  not  long  since  you  ate. — Is  it  worth  while  to  dismount 
from  my  horse  in  order  to  give  something  to  that  poor  man  ? — Yes,  for 
he  seems  to  want  it ; but  you  can  give  him  something  without  dis- 
mounting from  your  horse. — Is  it  better  to  go  to  the  theatre  than  to 
study  ? — It  is  better  to  do  the  latter  than  the  former.— Is  it  better  to 
learn  to  read  Spanish  than  to  speak  it  ? — It  is  not  worth  while  to  learn 
to  read  it  without  learning  to  speak  it. — Is  it  better  to  go  to  bed  than 
to  go  a-walking  ? — It  is  better  to  do  the  latter  than  the  former. — Is  it 
better  to  go  to  France  than  to  Germany? — It  is  not  worth  while  to  go 
to  France  or  to  Germany  when  one  has  no  wish  to  travel. — Did  you  at 
last  get  rid  of  that  man  ? — I did  get  rid  of  him. — Why  has  your  father 
parted  with  his  horses  ? — Because  he  did  not  want  them  any  more. — 
Has  your  merchant  succeeded  at  last  to  get  rid  of  his  damaged  sugar  ^ 


FIFTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


283 


—He  ha^  succeeded  in  getting  rid  of  it. — Has  he  sold  it  on  credit  ?— 
lie  was  able  to  sell  it  for  cash,  so  that  he  did  not  sell  it  on  credit. — 
Who  has  taught  you  to  read  ? — 1 have  learned  it  with  a Spanish 
master. — Has  he  taught  you  to  write  ? — He  has  taught  me  to  read  and 
to  write. — Who  has  taught  your  brother  arithmetic  ? — A Spanish 
master  has  taught  it  him. — Do  you  call  me  ? — I do  call  you. — What 
do  you  want  ? — Why  do  you  not  rise ; do  you  not  know  that  it  is 
already  late  ? — What  do  you  want  me  for  ? — I have  lost  all  my  money, 
and  I come  to  beg  you  to  lend  {me  preste)  me  some. — What  o’clock  is 
it  ? — It  is  already  a quarter  past  six,  and  you  have  slept  long  enough. 
— ^Is  it  long  since  you  rose  ? — It  is  an  hour  and  a half  since  I rose. — 
Do  you  wish  to  take  a walk  with  me  ? — I cannot  go  a- walking,  foi  I 
am  waiting  for  my  Spanish  master. 


FIFTY-FOURTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Quincuagejirna  cuarta 


To  hope,  to  expect 


Esperar.  Aguardar. 


I hope. 

Thou  hopest. 
He  hopes. 
You  hope. 
We  do  hope. 


V.  espera.  Vos  (vosotros)  esperais 
Nosotros  esperamos. 


Yo  espero. 
Tii  esperas. 
espera 


Do  you  expect  to  find  him  there  ? 
I do  expect  it. 


I Espera  V.  hallarle  alia  ? 
t Si.  Espero  hallarle. 


To  change,  (meaning  to  exchange.) 

To  change  one  thing  for  another. 

I change  my  hat  for  his. 


Camhiar,  Trocar  *. 

Permutar, 

Cambiar  una  cosa  por  (con)  otra. 
Cambio  {trueco)  mi  sombrero  poi  el 


suyo. 


T}  change ^ (meaning  to  pat  on  other 


Mudar  de.  Mudarse  dc. 


things.) 

Do  you  change  your  hat? 
^ do  change  it. 


1 


I Se  muda  V el  sombrero  ? 
t Le  mudo.  Le  ramhio. 
Me  pongo  otro. 


He  changes  his  linen, 
riioy  change  their  clothes 


I So  mudan  de  vestido. 


234 


FIFTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


To  mix. 


^ Mezclarse,  Meter  se 
/ Entrcmeterst 


I mix  among  the  men.  Me  meto  entre  los  hombres. 

He  mixes  among  the  soldiers.  Se  mezcla  entre  los  soldadon 
Among,  Entre.  En  meaio  de. 


To  recognise. 

Do  you  recognise  that  man  ? 

[t  is  so  long  since  I saw  him,  that  I 
do  not  recollect  him. 

More than. 

I have  more  bread  than  I can  eat. 

That  man  has  more  money  than  he 
will  spend. 

There  is  more  wine  than  is  neces- 
sary. 

You  have  more  money  than  you 
want. 

We  have  more  shoes  than  we  want. 

That  man  has  fewer  friends  than  he 
imagines. 

To  fancy. 

To  think. 

To  earn,  to  gain,  to  get. 


Reconocer.^ 

I Reconoce  V.  d ese  hombro  ? 

t Hace  tanto  tiempo  que  le  vi,  quo  na 
le  reconozco,  {no  me  acuerdo  de  el.) 

Mas  (n)  que.  Del  que.  Dc  lo  que. 

Yo  tengo  mas  pan  que  (del  quej 
puedo  comer. 

Ese  hombre  tiene  mas  dinero  del  que 
puede  gastar. 

t Hay  mas  vino  del  iiecesario,  (del 
que  se  necesita.) 

t V.  tiene  mas  dinero  del  que  nece- 
sita, (del  que  ha  menester.) 

t Tenemos  mas  zapatos  que  hemoo 
menester,  (necesitamos.) 

Ese  hombre  tiene  mdnos  amigos  quo 
(de  los  que)  dl  piensa. 

Imaginar.  Imaginarse 

Pensar  *. 

Ganar. 


Has  your  father  already  started,  (de- 
parted j) 

He  is  ready  to  depart. 

Ready. 

To  make  ready 
To  make  one's  self  ready. 

To  keep  one's  self  ready. 


I Ha  salido  ya  el  padre  de  ? 

Estd  pronto  (listo)  para  salir 
Pronto,  Presto  Listo. 

Preparar 

Prepararse. 

t Estar  pronto.  Estar  preparado, 
I Estar  dispuesto  a,  {para.) 


To  split. 

To  break  somebody's  heart. 
T ou  break  that  man’s  heart. 
Whese  heart  do  I break  ? 


Partir.  Abrir. 

t Partir  (desgarrar,  or  quebrar)  ei 
corazon  de  alguno. 
t V.  le  quiebfa  el  corazon  d ese  liom 
bre. 

f I A quicn  le  qmebro  yo  el  corazon  ^ 


' See  the  Appendix  for  verbs  ending  in  acer,  ocer,  ucir 


FIFTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


235 


* To  spill 

To  spread. 

Vo  expatiate,  to  lay  stress  upon. 
That  man  is  always  expatiating  upon 
that  subject. 

The  subject. 

Always. 

To  stretch  one’s  self  along  the  floor. 
To  hang  on,  {upon.) 

The  wall. 

I hang  my  coat  on  the  wall 
He  hangs  his  hat  upon  the  tree. 

W e hang  our  shoes  upon  the  nails. 

A^ho  has  hanged  the  basket  on  the 
tree? 

The  ihief  has  been  hanged. 

The  thief. 

The  robber,  the  highwayman. 


You  are  always  studious,  and  will 
always  be  so. 

Your  brother  is,  and  always  will  be 
good. 

A w^ell-educated  sop  never  gives  his 
father  a grief  ; he  loves,  honors, 
and  respects  him. 


Derramar.  Exten  dt  r. 

Esparcir.  Divulgar. 

Espaciarse.  Difundirse. 

Ese  hombre  siempre  se  difunde  sobri 
esa  materia. 

El  sdjeto.  La  materia. 

Siempre. 

t Tirarse  sobre  el  suelo. 

Tenderse  Extenderse  *. 

Colgar  de,  {en.)  (See  Acurdar,  in 
the  Appendix.) 

La  pared. 

Yo  cuelgo  mi  vestido  en  la  pared. 

6l  cuelga  su  sombrero  en  el  drbol. 

Col  games  nuestros  zapatos  en  lea 
clavos. 

I Quien  ha  colgado  la  canasta  en  el 
drbol  ? 

t El  ladron  ha  sido  ahorcado,  (col- 
gado.) 

El  ladron. 

t El  bandolero. 

El  salteador  de  camino. 


V.  es  siempre  estudioso,  y siempre 
lo  serd,. 

El  hermano  de  V.  es  bueno,  y siem- 
pre  lo  serd. 

Un  hijo  bien  educado  nuuca  da  pesar 
d su  padre  ; el  le  am  a,  lo  honra,  v 
le  respeta. 


EXERCISES. 

167. 

Do  you  hope  to  receive  a note  to-day  ? — I hope  to  receive  one.— 
From  whom  ? — From  a friend  of  mine. — What  dost  thou  hope  7 — 
hope  to  see  my  parents  to-day,  for  my  tutor  has  promised  me  to  take 
me  to  them. — Does  your  friend  hope  to  receive  any  thing  ? — He  hopea 
to  receive  something,  for  he  has  worked  well. — ^Do  you  hope  to  arrive 
early  in  Paris  ? — We  hope  to  arrive  there  at  a quarter  past  eight,  for 
our  father  is  waiting  for  us  this  evening. — ^Do  you  expect  to  find  him 
at  home  ? — We  do  expect  it. — For  what  (cosa)  have  you  exchanged 
youi*  coacli  of  which  you  have  spoken  to  me  ? — I have  exchanged  ii 
a fine  Arabian  horse. — Do  you  wish  to  exchange  your  book  foi 


236 


FIFTY-FOURTH  LESSOL\ 


mine  ? — I cannotj  for  I want  it  to  study  Spanish  — Why  do  you  tajcc 
your  hat  off  ? — I take  it  otF  because  I see  my  old  master  coming. — Do 
you  put  on  another  hat  to  go  to  the  market  ? — I do  not  put  on  anothei 
to  go  to  the  market,  but  {jpero  si)  to  go  to  the  concert. — When  will  the 
concert  take  place  ? — (It  will  take  place)  the  day  after  to-morrow.— 
Why  do  you  go  away  ? — Do  you  not  amuse  }^ouiself  here  ? — You  are 
mistaken  when  you  say  that  I do  not  amuse  myseif  here,  for  I assure 
you  that  I find  a great  deal  of  pleasure  in  conversing  with  you  ; but  1 
am  going  because  I am  expected  at  my  relation’s  ball. — Have  you 
promised  to  go  ? — I have  promised. — Have  you  changed  y^ur  liat  in 
order  to  go  to  the  English  captain  ? — I have  changed  my  hat,  but  1 
have  not  changed  my  coat  or  my  shoes. — How  many  times  a day  dost 
thou  change  thy  clothes,  {rojpa  1) — I change  them  Qa)  to  dine  and  to 
go  to  the  theatre. 

168. 

Why  do  y(  a mix  among  these  men  ? — I mix  among  them  in  ordei 
to  know  what  they  say  of  me. — What  will  become  of  you  if  you  always 
mix  among  the  soldiers  ? — I do  not  know  what  will  become  of  me,  bui 
I assure  you  that  they  will  do  me  no  harm,  for  they  do  not  hurt  any- 
body.— Have  you  recognised  your  father  ? — It  was  so  long  since  I saw 
him,  that  I did  not  recognise  him. — Has  he  recognised  you  ? — He 
recognised  me  instantly. — How  long  have  you  had  this  coat  ? — It  is  a 
long  time  since  I have  had  it. — How  long  has  your  brother  had  that 
gun  ? — He  has  had  it  a great  while. — Do  you  still  (siempre)  speak 
Spanish  ? — It  is  so  long  since  I spoke  it,  that  I have  nearly  forgotten  it 
all,  {del  todo.) — How  long  is  it  since  your  cousin  has  been  learning 
Spanish  ? — It  is  only  three  months  since. — Does  he  know  as  much  as 
you  ? — He  knows  more  than  I,  for  he  has  been  learning  it  longer. — 
Do  you  know  why  that  man  does  not  eat  ? — I believe  he  is  not  hungry, 
for  he  has  more  bread  than  he  can  eat. — Have  you  given  your  son  any 
money  ? — I have  given  him  more  than  he  will  spend. — Will  you  give  me 
a glass  of  cider? — You  need  not  drink  cider,  for  there  is  more  wine  than 
is  necessary. — Am  I to  sell  my  gun  in  order  to  buy  a new  hat  ? — You 
need  not  sell  it,  for  you  have  more  money  than  you  want. — Do  you 
wish  to  speak  to  the  shoemaker  ? — I do  not  wish  to  speak  to  him,  foi 
we  iiave  more  shoes  than  we  want. — Why  do  the  Spaniards  rejoice  ? — 
They  rejoice  because  lliey  flatter  themselves  they  have  many  good 
friends. — Are  they  not  right  in  rejoicing? — They  are  wrong,  for  tliey 
Iiave  fewer  iriends  than  they  imagine. 

169. 

Are  you  ready  to  depart  with  me  ? — I am  so. — Does  your  uncle 
depart  with  ua  ? — He  departs  with  us  if  he  pleases,  (quiere.) — Will  yoc 


FIFTY- FIFTH  LESSON. 


237 


* ?eli  him  to  be  ready  (que  se  este)  to  start  to-morrow  at  six  j’clocii  in  the 
evening  ? — I will  tell  him  so. — Is  this  young  man  ready  to  go  out  ?— 
Not  yet,  but  he  will  soon  be  ready. — Why  have  they  hanged  tliat  man? 
—They  have  hanged  him  because  he  has  killed  somebody. — Have  they 
hanged  the  man  who  stole  a horse  from  your  brother  ? — They  have 
punished  him,  but  they  have  not  hanged  him  ; they  hang  only  high- 
waymen in  our  country. — What  have  you  done  with  my  coat  ? — 1 have 
langed  it  on  the  wall. — Will  you  hang  my  hat  upon  the  tree? — I will 
hang  it  (thereon.) — Have  you  not  seen  my  shoes  ? — I found  them  under 
vour  bed,  and  have  hanged  them  upon  the  nails. — Has  the  thief  who 
stole  your  gun  been  hanged  ? — ^He  has  been  punished,  but  he  has  not 
been  hanged. — Why  do  you  expatiate  so  much  upon  that  subject  ?— 
Because  it  is  necessary  to  speak  upon  all  subjects. — If  it  is  necessary 
to  listen  to  you,  and  to  answer  you  when  you  expatiate  upon  that  sub- 
ject, I will  hang  my  hat  upon  the  nail,  stretch  myself  along  the  floor, 
listen  to  you,  and  answer  you  as  well  as  I can,  {yo  'pueda.') — You  will  do 
well. 


FIFTY-FIFTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Quincuagesima  quinta. 


To  he  well. 
How  do  you  do  ? 


J t Estar  hien  Estar  hueno. 

( Pasarlo  hien. 

^ I Como  esta  V.  ? ^Como  lo  pasa  V.  1 
( f i Como  se  halla  V.  ? 


Ohs.  A.  The  verbs  to  he,  and  to  do,  when  used  in  English  to  inquire 
after,  or  to  speak  of  a person’s  health,  are  translated  by  the  verbs  estar, 
pasarlo,  hallarse. 

r I Como  esta  el  seiior  padre  de  V.  ? 

How  is  your  father  ? % ^ Como  lo  pasa  (se  halla)  el  senor 

C padre  de  V.  ? 

He  is  very  well.  | t merced  se  halla  muy  hien. 

Ohs.  B.  The  qualifications  of  sehor,  (Mr.,)  sehora,  (Mrs.,)  sehorito 
;^Master,)  sehorita,  (Miss,)  are  generally  placed  in  Spanish  before  the  com- 
mon nouns  of  the  parents,  relations,  or  friends  of  the  person  spoken  to,  when 
we  mean  to  pay  them  particular  respect.  For  the  same  purpose  the  Span- 
iards use  the  words  su  merced,  (his  or  her  honor,)  su  sehoria,  (my  lord  or 
my  lady,)  &c.,  instead  of  the  noun  or  pronoun  of  the  person  spoken  of 
The  words  sehor,  sehora,  sehorita,  must  be  preceded  by  the  corresponding 
nrticlo  when  speaking  of  the  persons,  but  not  when  addressing  them.. 

Will  the  colonel  come  ? i Vendrd  el  senor  coronol  ? 

No,  because  he  is  ill.  t No,  porque  su  sehoria  esta  enfer 


238 


FIFTY-FIFTH  LESSON* 


Your  brother. 

Your  cousin. 

Your  brothers. 

Ohs,  C,  The  plurals  cf  senor,  seno 
and  seiioritas, 

I'he  Epigrams  of  Mr.  F*'aiicisco  de 
Salas. 

Obs.  D.  Mr.  is  translated  Don, 
names  only.  Don  is  used  only  in  thes 
Leandro  Fernandez  de  Moratin — Los 
Fernandez  de  Moratin.  Serior  Doi 
most  polite  a^d  respectful  manner  of  i 

To  doubt  a thing,  * 

To  question  any  thing.  i 

Do  you  doubt  that  ? 

1 do  doubt  it 
I do  not  doubt  it. 

I make  no  question,  have  no  doubt 
of  it. 

What  do  you  doubt? 
f doubt  what  that  man  has  told  me. 

The  doubt. 

Without  doubt,  no  doubt. 


El  senor  hermano  de  V.,  ) 

Su  senor  primo  de  V.,  (W.) 

Los  senores  hermanos  de  V.,  (VV  ) 
2,  and  sehorita,  are  senores,  sehoras 

Los  Epi gramas  de  Don  Francisco  de 
Salas. 

rs.  and  Miss,  Doha,  before  baptismal 
igular,  thus:  Messieurs  Nicolas,  and 
Senores  Don  Nicolas,  y Don  Leandro 
i,  Sehora  or  Sehorita  Doha,  is  the 
peaking  of,  or  addressing  a person 

Dudar  uno  de  una  cosa 
Cuestionar.  Disputar. 

Preguntar.  Conttcvertir  * 

I Duda  V.  de  eso  ? 

Yo  lo  dudo. 

Yo  no  lo  dudo. 

t Yo  no  lo  dudo,  (no  /o  pregunto,  oj 
no  lo  dispute.) 

I Que  (de  que)  duda  V.  ? 

Yo  dudo  lo  que  ese  homb’'e  me  ha 
dicho. 

La  duda. 

Sin  duda. 


To  agree  to  a thing. 

Do  you  agree  to  that  ? 
I do  agree  to  it. 


Convenir  en,  {con  or  d.)  (Conjuga* 
ted  like  venir.  See  App.) 

I Conviene  V.  (convenis  vos)  en  eso  ? 
Convengo  en  ello. 


ifow  much  have  you  paid  for  that 
hat  ? 

I have  paid  three  dollars  for  it. 


I Cuanto  ha  pagado  V.  por  ese  wm- 
brero  ? 

Yo  he  pagado  tres  pesos  por  61. 
t Tres  pesos. 


Ohs.  E.  In  the  colloquial  style,  such  phrases  as  the  preceding  one  are 


answered  by  merely  stating  the  price. 
I have  bought  this  horse  for  fifty 
dollars. 

The  price.  ^ 

Have  you  agreed  about  the  price? 

We  have  agreed  about  it. 

About  what  have  you  agreed  ? 

About  the  price 


Yo  he  comprado  este  caballo  poi 
cincuenta  pesos. 

El  precio. 

I Han  convenido  VV.  en  el  precio  ? 
Hemos  convenido. 

I En  que  hau  convenido  '^’V  ? 

En  el  precio. 


FIFTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


239 


Fo  agree,  to  compose  a difference. 
To  feel,  feeling. 

I fool,  thou  feelest,  he  feels. 

U e feel,  you  feel,  they  feel 
To  consent. 

f consent  to  go  thither. 

However. 

To  n ear,  (to  wear  garments.) 
U'hiit  garments  does  he  wear  ? 

He  wears  beautiful  garments. 

The  garment 

Against  my  custom. 

As  customary. 

My  partner 

To  observe  something. 

To  take  notice  of  something. 

Do  you  take  notice  of  that  ? 

1 do  take  notice  of  it 
Did  you  observe  that? 

Did  you  notice  what  he  did  ? 

I did  notice  it. 


1 Convenirse  *.  Componeise  • 

I Sentir  *.  Sintiendo 
Yo  siento,  tu  sientes,  el  sie?ite. 
Sentimos,  sentis,  .sientcn. 

Conseniir  en.  (Conjugated  Ikn 
sentir.) 

' Consiento  en  ir  all^. 

1 No  obstante  Con  todo 

Usar  Jjlevar.  Traer  ♦ 

I Que  vestidos  usa  ? 

El  lleva  hermosos  vestidos. 

El  vestido. 

Contra  mi  costumbre 
t Contra  mi  modo. 

Como  de  costumbre. 
t Segun  es  uso. 

I Mi  socio.  Mi  companero. 

Percibir  * Observar 
Reparar. 

Notar  algo,  (alguna  cosa.) 

I Repara  V.  esto  ? i Observais  eso  ? 
Lo  reparo.  Lo  observe 
I Percibio  V.  eso  ? 

I Repard  V.  lo  que  el  hizo  ? 

Lo  repare. 


To  expect,  (to  hope.) 

Do  you  expect  to  receive  a nc'te 
from  your  uncle  ? 

I expect  it 
He  expects  it 
We  expect  it 
Have  we  expected  it  ? 

We  have  expected  it. 


Esperar. 

I Espera  V.  recibir  un  billote  del 
senor  su  tio  ? 

Yo  le  espero. 

El  le  espera. 

Nosotros  le  esperamos. 

I Le  hemos  esperado  nosotros  ? 
Nosotros  le  hemos  esperado. 


To  get,  (to  procure.) 

I cannot  procure  any  money. 

Re  cannot  procure  any  thing  to  oat 


t Conseguir  *.  Procurar 
Lograr.  Hallar. 

^ No  puedo  conseguir  ningun  dinero. 

( t No  puedo  hallar  un  real. 

Ci  El  no  puede  procurarse  d tu9 
< tento, 

f t ]&1  no  puede  ganar  la  vida. 


240 


FIFTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


Penknife. 

After  having, 

After  having  read  my  lesson,  I wrote 
it. 

;\fter  having  cut  myself,  I broke  my 
penknife 


I El  cortaplurnas. 

^ Despues  de  haber,  (despuos  d^.j 
( Despues  que. 

Despues  que  yo  hube  leido  mi  leccioiii 
la  escribi 

Despues  que  me  hube  cortado,  yo 
quebrd  mi  cortaplurnas. 


Obs.  F.  When  after,  followed  by  a present  participle,  is  translated  in 
Spanish  by  despues  que,  the  verb  which  follows  it  must  be  in  one  of  the  past 
tenses ; but  if  it  is  rendered  by  despues  de,  the  verb  that  comes  after  it  ta 
iQ  the  infinitive  mood. 

{Despues  que  yo  lei  la  carta. 

Despues  que  hube  leido  la  carta. 
Despues  de  haber  le.do  la  carta. 
Despues  de  leer  la  carta. 


To  make  fun  of  some  one,  or  some- 
thing. 

To  laugh  at  some  one,  or  something. 
He  laughs  at  everybody. 

He  criticises  everybody. 

Do  you  laugh  at  that  man  ? 

[ do  not  laugh  at  him. 


To  stop,  {to  staij.) 

Have  you  stayed  long  at  Berlin  ? 

I stayed  there  only  three  days. 

To  sojourn,  {to  stay.) 

Where  does  your  brother  stay 
present  ? 

At  present,  actually. 

The  residence,  stay,  abode. 
Pans  is  a fine  place  to  live  in. 

Af‘©r  reading. 

After  cutting  myself. 

(See  Obs.  F.) 


Mofarse  de  alguno,  (de  alguna  cosa.' 
Burlarse  de  (con)  alguno. 

Burlarse  de  (con)  alguna  cosa. 

Reirse  de  alguno,  (de  alguna  cosa.; 
]fel  se  rie  de  todo  el  mundo,  (do 
todos.) 

El  critica  d,  todo  el  mundo. 

I Se  rie  V.  (se  burla  V.)  de  aquel 
hombre  1 
No  me  rio  de  dl. 

No  hago  burla  de  dl. 

Detenerse  *.  (Conjugated  like  tener 
See  Appendix.) 

^ Par  arse. 

I Se  ha  detenido  Y.  mucho  tiempc 
en  Berlin  ? 

Me  detuve  solamente  tres  dias. 

^ Residir.  Morar 
( t Estar  de  asiento  *. 
at  j I En  donde  reside  (mora)  ahora  su 
hermano  de  V.  ? 

A1  presente.  Actual mente  Ahora 
Domicilio. 

t Paris  es  una  ciudad  muy  hermosa 
para  vivir  de  asicnto. 
t Despues  de  leer,  (de  haber  leido.“ 
t Despues  de  habermo  cortad/> 


FIFTY-J-FTH  LESSON. 


241 


After  dressing  yourself. 

After  dressing  himself. 

' After  shaving  ourselves. 

After  warming  themselves. 

I returned  the -book  after  reading  it. 

I hrew  the  knife  away  after  cutting 
myself. 

i''ou  went  to  the  concert  after  dress- 
ing yourself. 

They  went  out  after  warming  them- 
selves. 


t Despues  de  haoerse  V.  yestido. 

Despues  que  V.  se  vistio 
t t Despues  de  vestirse. 
f t Despues  que  el  se  hubo  vest  ido. 
r t Despues  de  habernos  rasurado. 

^ t Despues  de  habernos  hecho 
^ barba. 

I t Despues  de  haberse  calentado. 

! t Yo  volvi  el  libro  despues  de  haberlo 
j leido. 

t Yo  arroje  el  cuchillo  despues  de 
haberme  cortado. 

t V.  fud  al  concierto  despues  de  ha- 
berse vestido. 

t Se  fueron  despues  de  haberse  ca- 
lentado. 


The  sick  person,  (the  patient ) 

Tolerably  well. 

It  is  rather  late. 

It  is  rather  far. 


I El  enfermo.  El  paciente. 

SBastante  bien.  Medianamento. 

\ Tal  cual. 

I Es  muy  tarde. 

1 Es  muy  lejos.  t Estd  algo  lejos 


EXERCISES. 

170. 

How  is  your  father  ? — He  is  (only)  so-so. — How  is  your  patient  ? — 
He  is  a little  better  to-day  than  yesterday. — Is  it  long  since  you  saw 
your  brothers  ? — I saw  them  two  days  ago. — How  art  thou  ? — I am 
tolerably  well. — How  long  has  your  cousin  been  learning  Spanish  ? — 
He  has  been  learning  it  only  three  months. — Does  he  already  speak 
it  ? — He  already  speaks,  reads,  and  writes  it  better  than  your  brother, 
who  has  been  learning  it  these  two  years. — Is  it  long  since  you  heard 
of  my  uncle  ? — It  is  ha~dly  a fortnight  since  I heard  of  him. — Where 
is  he  staying  now  ? — He  is  staying  at  Berlin,  but  my  father  is  in  Lon- 
don.— Did  you  stay  long  at  Vienna  ? — I stayed  there  a fortnight. — 
How  long  did  your  cousin  stay  at  Paris  ? — He  stayed  there  only  a 
month. — Do  you  like  to  speak  to  my  uncle  ? — I like  much  to  speak  to 
him,  but  I do  not  like  him  to  {que  hag  a hurla  de  mi)  laugh  at  me. — 
Wliy  does  he  laugh  at  you  ? — He  laughs  at  me  because  I speak  badly. 
— Why  has  your  brother  no  friends  ? — He  has  none  because  he 
criticises  everybody. — Why  are  you  laughing  at  that  man  ? — I do  not 
intend  to  laugh  at  him. — I beg  you  not  to  do  it,  {que  no  lo  haga,)  for  you 
will  break  his  heart  if  you  laugh  at  him.  — Do  you  doubt  what  I ap‘ 
lolling  you  ? — I do  not  d(  ubt  it. — Do  vou  doul/t  what  that  man  he« 
11 


242 


fiftf-fifth  lesson. 


told  you  ? — 1 doubt  it,  for  he  has  often  told  stories. — Have  you  at  last 
bought  the  horse  which  you  wished  {queria)  to  buy  last  month  ?— 
I have  not  bought  it,  for  I have  not  been  able  to  procure  money, 

171. 

Has  your  uncle  at  last  bougnt  the  garden  ? — He  has  not  bouglit  it. 
for  he  could  not  agree  about  the  price. — Have  you  at  last  agreed  about 
the  price  of  that  picture  ? — We  have  agreed  about  it. — How  much 
have  you  paid  for  it  ? — I have  paid  two  hundred  dollars  for  it. — What 
hast  thou  bought  to-day  ? — I have  bought  two  fine  horses,  three 
beautiful  pictures,  and  a fine  gun. — For  how  much  hast  thou  bought 
the  pictures  ? — I have  bought  them  for  five  hundred  dollars. — Do  you 
find  them  dear  ? — I do  not  find  them  dear. — Have  you  agreed  with 
your  partner  ? — I have  agreed  with  him. — Does  he  consent  to  pay  yoi 
the  price  of  the  ship  ? — He  consents  to  pay  it  me. — Do  you  consent  to 
go  to  Spain  ? — I consent  to  go  thither. — Have  you  seen  your  old 
friend  again  ? — I have  seen  him  again. — Did  you  recognise  him  ? — 
I could  hardly  recognise  him,  for,  contrary  to  his  custom,  he  wears  a 
large  hat. — How  is  he  ? — He  is  very  well. — What  garments  does  he 
wear  ? — He  wears  beautiful  new  garments. — Have  you  taken  notice 
of  what  your  boy  has  dune  ? — I have  taken  notice  of  it. — Have  you 
punished  him  for  it,  {ello  I) — I have  punished  him  for  it. — Has  your 
father  already  written  to  you  ? — Not  yet ; but  I expect  to  receive  a 
note  from  him  to-day. — Of  what  do  you  complain  ? — I complain  of  not 
being  able  to  procure  some  money. — Why  do  these  poor  men  com- 
plain ? — They  complain  because  they  cannot  procure  any  thing  to  eat. 
— How  are  your  parents  ? — They  are  as  usual,  very  well. — Is  your 
uncle  well  ? — He  is  better  than  he  usually  is. — Have  you  already 
heard  of  your  friend  who  is  in  Germany  ? — I have  already  written  to 
him  several  times  ; however,  he  has  not  answered  me  yet. 

172. 

What  have  you  done  with  the  books  which  the  English  captain  has 
lent  you  ? — 1 have  returned  them  to  him  after  reading  them. — Why 
have  you  thrown  away  your  penknife  ? — I have  thrown  it  away  after 
cutting  myself. — When  did  I go  to  the  concert  ? — You  went  thither 
after  dressing  yourself. — When  did  your  brother  go  to  the  ball  ? — He 
went  (thither)  after  dressing  himself. — When  did  you  breakfast  ? — 
We  breakfasted  after  shaving  ourselves. — When  did  our  neighbors  go 
aut  ? — They  went  out  after  warming  themselves. — Why  have  you 
punished  your  boy  ? — I have  punished  him  because  he  has  broken  my 
finest  glass.  I gave  him  some  wine,  and  instead  of  drinking  it,  he 
spilt  it  on  the  new  carpet,  and  broke  the  glass. — What  did  you  do  this 
morning  ? — I shaved  after  rising,  and  went  out  after  breakfasting.— 


FIFTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


243 


What  did  you  father  do  last  night  ? — He  supped  after  coming  from 
the  play,  and  went  to  bed  after  supping. — Hid  he  rise  early  ? — He 
rose  at  sunrise. 


FIFTY-SIXTH  LESSON.— Leccion  Quincuaghima  sexta. 


Tr.  go  to  the  village. 

To  be  in  the  village. 

To  go  to  the  exchange 
To  be  at  the  exchange. 

To  or  at  the  parlor. 

To  or  at  the  kitchen. 

To  or  at  the  cellar. 

To  or  at  the  church. 

To  or  at  the  school. 

To  or  at  the  Spanish  school. 

To  or  at  the  dancing  school. 

The  play,  (the  comedy ) 
The  opera. 

To  go  a-hunting. 

To  be  a-hunting. 

To  go  a-fishing. 

To  be  a-fishing. 

To  hunt. 

The  whole  day.  All  the  day. 
The  whole  morning.^ 

The  whole  evening. 

The  whole  night.  All  the  night 
The  whole  week. 

The  whole  society. 

All  at  once 

Suddenly.  All  ol"  a sudden. 


Ir  d la  aldea. 

Estar  en  la  aldea. 

Ir  d la  lonja. 

Estar  en  la  lonja. 

A or  en  la  sala. 

A or  en  la  cocina. 

A or  en  la  cueva,  bodega,  {sotano,) 
A or  en  la  iglesia. 

A or  en  la  escuela. 

A or  en  la  escuela  espanola. 

A or  en  la  escuela  de  Espahol. 

A or  en  la  escuela  de  danza,  {haile. 
La  comedia. 

La  fipera. 

J Ir  d caza.  Ir  d la  caza. 

\ \ Ir  d cazar. 

Estar  cazando.  t Cazar. 

Ir  d pescar.  Ir  d la  pesca  de. 

Estar  pescaiido.  Pescar. 

Cazar. 

Todo  el  dia,  (masc.) 

Toda  la  manaiia  ^ 
t Toda  la  noche. 

Toda  la  noche. 

Toda  la  semana 
Toda  la  sociedad. 

De  una  vez.  A la  vez.  Do  seguida 
De  repente.  Shbitamente. 


* Morning,  as  a word  of  address,  is  translated  dias  ; as.  Good  morning, 
Sir — Buenos  dias,  sehor ; and  dias  is  used  from  early  dawn  till  two 
o’clock,  r.  M.  Otherwise  it  is  literally  translated ; as.  He  arrived  at  ten 
o’clock,  A.  M. — El  llego  d las  diez  de  la  maiiana.  Afternoon  is  translated 
tardes  when  addressing  to,  and  tarde  when  speaking  of,  from  two  till  seven 
o’clock,  p.  M.  From  this  hour,  and  generally  from  candlelight,  evening  is 
.endered  hy  noche ; as.  We  expect  them  this  evening  at  nine  o'clock  — 
Nosotros  los  esperamos  esta  noche  d las  nuevf. 


TABLE  OP  THE  PRONOUNS  POSSESSIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


244 


FIFTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


> 


W 


m m m m 

cj  cd  ^ ^ 


.£ 


w 


® ® ^ 


a S 13  T3  3 na 

C CQ  ^ m w 

rt  ^ c3  c3 


> Sq 
cJ  C3 


W 

g 

3 

U) 

u 


oSOO^O'^ccO 

.2  >->>-»®  >^®  ® 

G -4->  OQ  CB  > OQ  ^ 

rooQtnnjMTOajQOM' 


O O O ® 

►>-»  5>>  ® ® 

- = :?  = -S. 


'S3 


6 S 


.5  e 


§ f-.  )13  Ex  (i. 


and  not  with  the  possessor,  as  in  English. 

O' When  Uated  or  Vstedes  is  expressed  in  the  sentence,  the  possessive,  el  suyo,  los  suyos,  ^c.,  must  be  used; 
bat  when  Uated  or  Usledea  is  not  expressed,  the  possessive  pronoun  must  be  translated  by  el  de  V.,  el  de  VV.,  .aa 
de  Vaa  01  los  de  VV.,  <{*r. 


FII’IJ’-SIXTH  LESSON. 


246 


Which  books  have  I ? 

You  have  yours  and  hers. 

Has  she  not  hers  and  mine  ? 

She  has  hers,  but  not  yours. 

You  liave  yours. 

I have  yours. 

She  has  hers  and  his. 

He  has  his  and  hers. 

I have  his. 

I have  hers. 

I have  theirs. 

IVhat  do  you  wish  to  send  to  your 
aunt  ? 

r wish  to  send  her  a tart. 

Will  you  send  her  some  fruit  also  ? 

[ will  send  her  some. 

Have  you  sent  the  books  to  my  sis- 
ters? 

[ have  sent  them  to  them. 


This  week. 

This  year. 

Last  week. 

Next  week. 

Every  woman 
Every  time. 

Every  M^eek 

Your  mother. 

Your  sister. 

Your  sisters. 

A person. 

The  earache. 

The  heartache. 

The  belly-ache. 

The  stomach-ache. 

She  has  the  stomach-ache. 

Her  sister  has  a violent  headache. 

J liave  the  stomach-ache. 


I Que  libros  tengo  yo? 

V.  tiene  los  suyos  y los  de  ella. 

I No  tiene  ella  los  suyos  y los  mios? 
Ella  tiene  los  suyos,  pero  no  los  de  V 
V.  tiene  los  suyos,  (las  suyas.) 

Yo  tengo  los  de  V.,  (las  de  V.) 

Ella  tiene  los  suyos  y los  de  el. 

6l  tiene  los  suyos  y los  de  ella. 
Tengo  la  suya,  (la  de  el.) 

Tengo  la  suya,  (la  de  ella.) 

Tengo  la  suya,  (la  de  ellos,  or  la  de 
ellas.) 

I Quo  quiere  V.  enviar  d,  su  senora 
tia  ? 

Y'o  quiero  enviarlo  una  empanada- 
I Quiere  V.  enviarle  tambien  alguus 
fruta  ? 

Si,  quiero  enviarle  alguna. 

I Ha  enviado  V.  los  libros  d mis  her 
manas  ? 

Yo  se  los  he  enviado. 


Esta  semana. 

Este  aho,  (mas.) 

La  semana  pasada. 

La  semana  pr6xima. 
t La  semana  que  entra. 

Tod  as  las  mujeres. 

Cada  vez.  Todas  las  veces. 

Cada  semana.  Todas  las  semanas. 

Su  senora  raadre  de  V 

(See  Obs.  B,  Less.  LV.) 
La  senora  (sehorita)  hermana  de  V. 
Las  senoras  (senoritas)  hermanas  de 
V.  (See  Obs.  C,  Less.  LV.) 

Una  persona. 

Dolor  de  oido. 
t Mai  de  corazon. 

Dolor  de  vientre 
Dolor  de  estomago. 

Ella  tiene  dolor  de  estdmago. 

Su  hermana  tiene  un  terrible  dolor 
de  cabeza. 

Tengo  dolor  de  estdrnago. 


246 


FIFTT-SIXTH  LESSON, 


The 

ache,  pain. 

El  dolor.  La  pena. 

The 

tart 

La  empanada 

'The 

peach. 

El  durazno. 

The 

strawberry 

La  fresa. 

The 

cherry. 

La  cereza. 

The 

gazette.  \ 

i La  gazeta. 

The 

newspaper  ( 

1 El  papel  pdblico. 

El  Noticiosc». 

The 

merchandiss,  (goods.) 

1 La  mercaderia 

lias  mercaderisa 

The 

aunt. 

La  tia. 

The 

female  cousin. 

La  prima. 

The 

niece. 

La  sobrina. 

The 

maid-servant. 

La  criada. 

The 

female  relation. 

La  parienta. 

The 

female  neighbor 

La  vecina. 

The 

female  cook. 

La  cocinera. 

The 

brother-in-law. 

El  cunado. 

The 

sister-in-law. 

La  cunada. 

Obs.  B. 

The  following  nouns  express  their  gender  by  different  termina 

lions 

MASCULINE. 

FEMININE. 

An  abbot. 

Un  abad. 

An  abbess. 

Una  abadesa. 

An  actor. 

Un  actor. 

An  actress. 

Una  actriz. 

An  ambassador  Un  embajador 

An  ambassadress.  Una  embajadora.. 

A baron. 

Un  baron. 

A baroness. 

or  embajatriz. 
' Una  baronesa. 

A canon. 

Un  canhnigo. 

A canoness. 

Una  canonesa. 

A singer 

Un  cantor. 

A female  singer. 

Una  cantora,  oi 

A count. 

Un  conde. 

A countess. 

cantarina,  or  can- 
tatriz. 

Una  condesa. 

A dancer 

Un  bailarin. 

A female  dancer 

Una  bailarina 

A god. 

Un  dios. 

A goddess. 

Una  diosa. 

A deacon. 

Un  didcono. 

A deaconess. 

Una  diaconisa. 

A duke. 

Un  duque. 

A duchess. 

Una  duquesa. 

An  elector 

Un  elector. 

An  electress. 

Una  electriz,  oi 

An  emperor 

Un  emperadoi 

An  empress. 

electora. 

Una  emperatriz 

A hero. 

Un  hdroe. 

A heroine. 

Una  heroina. 

A poet. 

Un  poeta. 

A poetess. 

Una  poetisa 

A priest. 

Un  sacerdote. 

A priestess. 

Una  sacerdotka 

A prince. 

Un  pnncipe. 

A princess. 

Una  princesa 

A prior. 

Un  prior. 

A prioress. 

Una  priora. 

A prop^iet. 

Un  profeta. 

A prophetess 

Una  profetisa. 

FIFTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


247 


k king. 

Lfn  rey. 

A queen. 

Una  rem« 

Sir,(addressing.)  ) 

Senor. 

Lady. 

t Senora. 

Gentleman.  J 

Caballero. 

} Dama. 

Ohs.  C Some 

nouns  distinguish  their  gender  by  difTerent  woids. 

Father. 

Padre. 

Mother. 

Madre. 

Godfather. 

Padrino 

Godmother. 

Madrina. 

Stepfather. 

Padrastro 

Stepmother 

Madrastra. 

Son-in-law. 

Yerno. 

Daughter-in- 

-law.  Nuera. 

Man. 

Hombre. 

Woman. 

Mujer. 

Horse. 

Cabalio. 

Mare. 

Yegua. 

Ram. 

Carnero. 

Ewe. 

Oveja. 

Hull. 

Toro. 

Cow. 

Vac  a. 

To  hire,  to  let. 

Have  you  already  hired  a room  ? 


To  admit  or  grant  a thing. 

To  confess  a thing. 

Do  you  grant  that  ? 

I do  grant  it. 

Do  you  confess  your  fault  ? 

I confess  it. 

I confess  it  to  be  a fault. 

To  confess,  to  avow,  to  own,  to 
acknowledge. 

To  confess. 


Alquilar.  Arrendar  *. 

Dar,  or  tomar  en  alquiler,  or  arron» 
damiento. 

I Ha  alquilado  V.  ya  un  cuarto,  (oi 
aposento,  or  camara)  1 

Admitir.  Conceder  una  cosa. 
Confesar  * una  cosa.  (See  Alenta/r., 
I Concede  V.  (admite  V.)  eso  ? 

Lo  concede.  Lo  admito. 

I Confiesa  V.  su  falta  ? 

La  confieso. 

Confieso  que  es  una  faila. 

Confesar.  Declarar.  Protestar. 
Reconocer.  (See  verbs  in  ocer.) 

I Confesar  * 


So  much,  so  many. 

She  has  so  many  candles  that  she 
cannot  burn  them  all. 

To  catch  a cold 
To  make  sick. 

if  you  eat  so  much  it  will  make  you 
sick. 


Tanto — tanta.  Tantos — tantas. 

Ella  tiene  tantas  velas  que  no  puede 
usarlas  todas. 

Resfriarse.  Constiparse. 
Acatarrarso. 

t Coger  un  resfriado,  (una  fluxion.) 
t Poner  male. 

Hacer  mal,  (dano.) 

Si  V.  come  tanto,  esto  le  pondrti 
male,  (or  le  hard,  dano.) 


Ohs,  D When  the  English  pronoun  it  relates  to  a preceding  circum- 
stance, it  is  translated  esto  ; when  to  a following  circumstance,  by  eso. 


Does  it  suit  you  to  lend  your  gun  ? | i Le  conviene  d V prestar  su  esco 

I peta  ? 


248 


FIFTY  ftIXTH  LESSON. 


It  does  not  suit  to  lend  it 

Where  did  you  catch  a cold  ? 

I caught  a cold  in  going  from  the 
opera. 

To  have  a cold. 

The  cold. 

The  cough. 

1 have  a cold. 

You  have  a cough. 

The  brain. 

The  chest. 


J No  me  conviene  prestarla. 

( No  me  acomoda  prestarla. 

I En  donde  cogi6  V.  ese  resfriado,  (oi 
esa  fluxion)  ? 

I En  donde  se  constip6  V.  ? 

Me  resfrie  al  salir  de  la  dpera. 

f Estar  resfriado,  (constipado,  or  acatar- 

' rado.) 

'|  t Teller  catarro,  (una  fluxion,  or  un 
constipado.) 

j El  catarro.  El  resfriado.  El  consti 
pado.  La  fluxion. 

I La  tos. 

Tengo  catarro,  (un  constipado,  or  una 
fluxion.) 

V.  tiene  tos 

El  celebro,  or  cerebro 

El  pecho. 


EXERCISES. 

173. 

TVhere  is  your  cousin  ? — He  is  in  the  Idtchen. — Has  your  coon 
(fern.)  already  made  the  soup  ? — She  has  made  it,  for  it  is  already  upon 
the  table. — Where  is  your  mother? — She  is  at  church. — Is  your  sister 
gone  to  school  ? — She  is  gone  thither. — Does  your  mother  often  go  to 
church  ? — She  goes  thither  every  morning  and  every  evening. — At 
what  o’clock  in  the  morning  does  she  go  to  church  ? — She  goes  thither 
as  soon  as  she  gets  up.— At  what  o’clock  does  she  get  up  ? — She  gets 
up  at  sunrise. — Dost  thou  go  to  school  to-day  ? — I do  go  thither. — What 
dost  thou  learn  at  school  ? — I learn  to  read,  write,  and  speak  (there.) — 
Where  is  your  aunt  ? — She  is  gone  to  the  play  with  my  little  sister. — 
Do  your  sisters  go  this  evening  to  the  opera  ? — No,  Madam,  they  go  tt 
the  dancing-school. — Do  they  not  go  to  the  French  school  ? — Tliey  gt 
thither  in  the  morning,  but  not  {y  no)  in  the  evening. — Is  your  fathei 
gone  a-hunting  ? — He  has  not  been  able  to  go  a-hunting,  for  he  has  a 
cold. — Do  you  like  to  go  a-hunting  ? — I like  to  go  a-fishing  better  thao 
a> hunting. — Is  your  father  still  in  the  country  ? — Yes,  Madam,  he  is  still 
there. — What  does  he  do  (there  '^) — He  goes  a-hunting  and  a-fishing. 
— Did  you  hunt  in  the  country  ? — I hunted  vhe  whole  day. — How  long 
did  you  stay  with  my  mother? — I stayed  with  her  the  whole  evening 
— Is  it  long  since  you  were  at  me  castle  ? — I was  there  last  week. — 
Did  you  find  many  people  there  ? — I found  only  three  persons  there 
die  count,  the  countess,  and  their  daughter. 


FIFTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


249 


174. 

Are  these  girls  as  good  (discrete)  as  their  brothers  ? — They  are  oettei 
tn.'in  they. — Can  (saber)  your  sisters  speak  German  ? — They  cannot, 
but  they  are  learning  it. — Have  you  brought  any  thing  to  your  mother  1 

1 brought  her  some  good  fruit  and  a fine  tart. — What  has  your  niece 

brouo-lit  you  ? — She  has  brought  us  good  cherries,  good  strawberries, 
and  good  peaches. — Do  you  like  peaches  ? — I like  them  much. — How 
many  peaches  has  your  neighbor  (fern.)  given  you  ? — She  has  given 
me  more  than  twenty. — Have  you  eaten  many  cherries  this  year  ? — 1 
have  eaten  many. — Did  you  give  any  to  your  little  sister  ? — I gave  her 
so  many  that  she  cannot  eat  them  all. — Why  have  you  not  given  any 
to  your  good  neighbor,  (fern.  ?) — I wished  to  give  her  some,  but  she 
would  not  take  any,  because  she  does  not  like  cherries. — Were  there 
any  pears  (la  pera)  last  year  ? — There  were  not  many. — Has  your 
cousin  (fern.)  any  strawberries  ? — She  has  so  many  that  she  cannot 
eat  them  all. 

175. 

Why  do  your  sisters  not  go  to  the  play  ? — They  cannot  go  thithei 
because  they  have  a cold,  and  that  makes  them  very  ill. — Where  did 
they  catch  a cold  ? — They  caught  a cold  in  going  from  the  opera  last 
xiight. — Does  it  suit  your  sister  to  eat  some  peaches  ? — It  does  not  suit 
her  to  eat  any,  for  she  has  already  eaten  a good  many,  and  if  she  eats 
so  much  it  v/ill  make  her  ill. — Did  you  sleep  well  last  night  ? — I did 
not  sleep  well,  for  my  children  made  too  much  noise  in  my  room. — 
Where  were  you  last  night  ? — I was  at  my  brother-in-law’s. — Did  you 
see*  your  sister-in-law  ? — I did  see  her. — How  is  slie  ? — She  is  better 
than  usual. — Did  you  play  ? — We  did  not  play,  but  we  read  some  good 
books ; for  my  sister-in-law  likes  to  read  better  than  to  play. — Have 
you  read  the  gazette  to-day  ? — I have  read  it. — Is  there  any  thing  new 
in  it  ? — I have  not  read  any  thing  new  (in  it.) — Where  have  you  been 
since  I saw  you  ? — I have  been  at  Vienna,  Paris,  and  Berlin. — Did 
you  speak  to  my  aunt  ? — I did  speak  to  her. — What  does  she  say  ? — 
She  says  that  she  wishes  to  see  you. — Whither  have  you  put  my  pen  ? 
— I have  put  it  upon  the  bench. — Do  you  intend  to  see  your  niece  to- 
day ? — I intend  to  see  her,  for  she  has  promised  me  to  dine  with  us.— 
I admire  (admirar)  that  family,  (la  familial  for  the  father  is  the  king 
and  the  mother  is  the  queen  of  it.  The  children  and  the  servants  aro 
the  subjects  (el  sujeto)  of  the  state,  (el  estado.)  The  tutors  of  the 
children  are  the  ministers,  (el  ministro,)  who  share  with  the  king  and 
queen  the  care  (el  cuidado)  of  the  government,  (elgobiemx .)  The  good 
education  (la  educacion,  fern.)  which  is  given  to  childrei  is  the  crown 
of  monarchs,  (el  monarca.) 


250 


FIFTY- SEVENTH  LESSON. 


176. 

Have  you  already  hired  a room  ? — I have  already  hired  one. — W here 
nave  you  hired  it  ? — I have  hired  it  in  William-street,  number  one 
hundred  and  fifty-two. — At  whose  house  have  you  hired  it  ? — At  the 
house  of  the  man  whose  son  has  sold  you  a horse. — For  whom  haa 
your  father  hired  a room  ? — He  has  hired  one  for  his  son,  wno  has  just 
arrived  from  France. — Why  have  you  not  kept  your  promise  ? — I do 
not  remember  what  I promised  you. — Did  you  not  promise  us  to  take 
us  to  the  concert  last  Thursday? — I confess  that  I was  wrong  in 
promising  you ; the  concert,  however,  {con  todo^)  has  not  taken  place. 
— Does  your  orother  confess  his  fault  ? — He  confesses  it. — What  doea 
your  uncle  say  to  that  note  ? — He  says  that  it  is  written  very  well,  but 
he  admits  that  he  has  been  wrong  in  sending  it  to  the  captain. — Do 
you  confess  your  fault  now  ? — I confess  it  to  be  a fault. — Where  have 
you  found  my  coat  ? — I have  found  it  in  tlie  blue  room,  (Obs.  C,  Les- 
son XXXVIII.) — Will  you  hang  my  hat  on  the  tree  ? — I will  hang  it 
(thereon.) — How  are  you  to-day  ? — I am  not  very  well. — What  is  the 
matter  with  you  ? — I have  a violent  headache  and  a cold. — Where  did 
you  catch  a cold  ? — I caught  it  last  night  in  going  from  the  play. 


FIFTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Quincuagesima  septima. 


OF  THE  GERUND. 


The  Gerund  (by  which  the  English  present  participle  is  translated)  i& 
formed  from  the  present  of  the  infinitive  mood,  by  suppressing  the  termi- 
nations ar,  er,  or  ir,  and  adding  in  their  place  undo  to  the  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation,  and  iendo  to  those  of  the  second  and  third. 


1.  To  speak,  hablar. 

2.  To  sell,  vender. 

3.  To  receive,  recibir. 


Speaking,  hMando. 

Selling,  vexidiendo. 

Receiving,  recihiendo. 


Ohs.  A.  Verbs  ending  in  eer,  and  uir,  (when  the  u is  sounded,  as  in 
atribuir,)  change  the  i,  with  which  the  termination  begins,  into  y ; thus* 
yendOf  instead  of  iendo  ; as — 


To  read,  leer.  | Reading,  \eycndo. 

To  instruct,  instruzr  | Instructing,  instruyewt/o. 

Ohs.  B.  The  English  present  participle  may  be  translated  into  Spanish 
by  tl  9 Gerund,  when  it  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  as  continuing,  and 
unfinished.  It  is  then  used  alone,  or  preceded  by  the  verb  Estar,  but  by 
ao  means  by  other  words  ; as.  He  corrects  whilst  reading,  el  corrige  leyendo^ 
01  zstando  leyendo,  mientras  estd  leyendo,  (t  mientras  Ice,  or  al  leer  ;)  but 
:t  cannot  ho  said,  el  corrige  mientras  leyendo. 


FFITY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


251 


rhe  man  eats  while*  running 

[ write  while  reading. 

He  questions  while  speaking. 


V^ou  speak  while  answering  me. 

To  question-^ 

The  cravat. 

The  carriage. 

The  house. 

The  letter. 

The  table. 

The  family. 

The  promise. 

The  leg 

The  sore  throat. 

The  throat. 

I have  a sore  throat. 

The  meat. 

Salt  meat. 

Fresh  meat. 

Fresh  beef. 

Cold  water. 

The  food,  (victuals ) 

The  dish,  (mess.) 

Salt  meats. 

Milk  food. 


The  traveller. 

To  march,  to  walk,  to  step. 

Ghs.  C.  To  walk,  meaning  to  do  it 
vasearse,  (Lesson  XLV ) When  it 
1 is  expressed  as  above. 

I have  walked  a good  deal  to  day. 

1 have  been  walking  in  the  garden 
with  my  mother. 

To  walk,  or  travel  a mile. 

To  walk,  or  travel  a league. 

To  walk  a step. 


El  hombre  come  yendo  corriendo. 
t El  hombre  come  al  ir  corriendo. 
t Yo  escribe  midntras  leo 
El  pregunta  mientras  (or  cuando 
estd  hablando. 

t V.  habla  al  tiempo  de  responderme 
V.  habla  mientras  (cuando)  mores- 
ponde. 

Preguntar.  Cuestionar 
La  corbata. 

La  carroza,  (el  coche.) 

La  casa. 

La  carta.  La  letra. 

La  mesa. 

La  familia. 

La  promesa. 

La  pierna. 

El  mal  de  garganta. 

La  garganta. 

Yo  tengo  mal  de  garganta. 

Yo  tengo  la  garganta  mala, 
t La  garganta  me  hace  mai. 

La  came. 

Came  salada. 

Came  fresca. 

Vaca  fresca. 

Agua  fria. 

La  comida.  El  alimento. 

Los  platos.  Las  viandas. 

Came  en  escabeche. 

Lacticinios. 


Viagero.  Viajante. 

Andar  Caminar. 

Dar  un  paso. 

for  pleasure,  is  translated  by  pasear,  oi 
signifies  to  move  slowly  on  the  feet, 

Hoy  he  and  ado  muchisimo. 

He  estado  paseando  con  mi  madiu 
en  el  jardin. 

Andar  (caminar,  viajar)  una  milla 
Andar  (caminar,  viajar)  una  legua. 
t Dar  un  paso. 


252 


FIFTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


To  take  a step  (meaning  to 
measures.) 

To  go  on  a journey. 

To  make  a speech. 

A piece  of  business. 

An  aflair. 

I'o  transact  business. 


take  5 t Tomar  sus  medidas^ 
t Valerse  de  rnedioit 
Ir  d,  un  viage. 
t Salir  d un  viage. 

Hacer  un  viage. 

I Hacer  un  discurso. 

Un  legocio.  Un  asunto. 

I Negociar.  Hacer  negocios 


To  meddle  with  something. 


What  are  you  meddling  with  ? 

I am  meddling  with  my  own  busi- 
ness. 

That  man  always  meddles  with 
other  people’s  business. 

I do  not  meddle  with  other  people’s 
business. 


Meterse,  or  entremetersc  con 
guno,  {en  algun  negocio.)  Jn 
gerirse. 

I En  que  se  mete  V.  ? 

I En  que  os  meteis  ? 

Yo  me  meto  en  mis  propios  negocios 

Ese  h ombre  se  mete  siempre  en  lo? 
negocios  agenos,  (de  otros.) 

Yo  no  me  entremeto  en  los  negocios 
agenos. 


Others.  Other  people. 
He  emphys  himself  in  painting. 

The  art  of  painting. 

Chemistry. 

The  art 
Strange. 

To  employ  one^s  self  in. 


1 Otros.  Otras  gentes. 

Se  ocupa  en  la  pintura. 
t Trahaja  de  pin  tor. 

El  (la)  arte  de  la  pintura 
La  pintura. 

La  quimica. 

El  (la)  arte. 

Extra  ho.  Asombroso.  SingUiar. 
Emplearse  en.  Ocuparse  ctu 


To  concern  some  one. 

To  look  at  some  one 
I Jo  not  like  to  meddle  with  things 
that  do  not  concern  me. 

That  concerns  nobody, 
lo  concern  one’s  self  about  some- 
thir.g. 


Concernir  *.  Tocar 
Importar.  Pertenecer. 

Interesar. 

Mirar  d alguno, 

No  me  gusta  meterme  en  cosas  qu4 
no  me  tocan,  (or  importan.) 

Eso  no  toca  (interesa)  d.  ninguno. 

+ Inquietarse  de,  (por  or  acerca  de) 
t Fatigarse  de,  (por  oi  acerca  de.) 


I'o  attract. 

Loaiktoae  attracts  Iron. 


Atraer  *. 

El  iman  atrae  el  hierro,  (fierro.) 


FIFTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


253 


^ Su  canto  me  atrae. 

Her  einging  attracts  me  ^ atrae. 


To  charm.  ( 

To  enchant.  f 

S Hechizar.  Encantar.  Embeiesar 

I am  charmed  with  it. 

Estoy  encantado  de  (or  con)  ello 

The  beauty 

La  he.-mosura. 

The  goodness. 

La  hondad. 

Obs.  D Nouns  ending  in  ady  dad,  or  tad,  expressing  properties  oi 

qualities,  a? 3 feminine. 

The  harmony. 

La  harmonia. 

The  voice 

La  voz. 

The  power 

El  poder. 

To  repeat. 

Repetir  * 

The  repetition. 

La  repeticion. 

The  commencement,  beginning. 

El  principio,  or  comienzo. 

The  wisdom. 

La  sabiduria. 

Study. 

El  estudio. 

The  lord. 

El  senor 

A good  memory. 

Una  buena  meinoria. 

A memorandum.  | 

( Apunte.  Nota. 

Razon.  Apmitamiento. 

The  nightingale. 

El  ruisenor. 

All  the  beginnings  are  difficult  | 

Todos  los  principios  son  dificilea. 

To  create. 

Criar,  or  crear. 

Creation. 

La  creacion 

The  Creator. 

El  Criador. 

The  benefit. 

El  beneficio. 

The  fear  of  the  Lord. 

El  temor  del  Senor. 

Heaven. 

El  cielo. 

The  earth 

La  tierreu 

Solitude. 

La  Boledad. 

The  lesson. 

La  leccion 

The  goodness. 

La  bondad  (See  Obs.  D,  above.) 

Flour,  meal 

Harina. 

The  mill. 

El  molino 

EXERCISES. 

177. 

Will  you  dine  with  us  to-day? — With  much  pleasure. — ^What  have 
fou  for  dinner  ? — We  have  good  soup,  some  fresh  and  salt  meat,  and 
some  milk  food. — Do  you  like  milk  food  ? — I like  it  better  than  all 
other  food. — Are  you  ready  to  dine  ? — I am  ready. — Do  you  intend  tc 


254 


FIFTY-SEVENTH  LESSON 


set  out  soon  ? — I intend  setting  out  next  week. — Do  you  travel  alono^ 
solo  ?) — No,  Madam,  I travel  with  my  uncle. — Do  you  travel  on  foot 
or  in  a carriage?  (Less.  XIJIL) — We  travel  in  a carriage. — Did  you 
meet  any  one  in  your  last  journey  {ultinio)  to  Berlin  ’ — We  met  many 
travellers. — What  do  you  intend  to  spend  your  time  in  (Lesson 
L-)  tliis  summer  ? — I inte*ad  to  take  a short  journey.^ — Did  you 
walk  much  in  your  last  journey? — I like  much  to  walk,  but  my 
ancle  likes  to  go  in  a carriage. — Did  he  not  wish  to  walk? — lie 
wished  to  walk  at  first,  {al  principio,)  but  he  wished  to  get  into  the 
coach  {montar  en  el  coche)  after  having  taken  a few  steps,  so  that  I did 
not  walk  much. — What  have  you  been  doing  at  school  to-day  ? — We 
have  been  listening  to  our  professor. — Wnat  did  he  say  ? — He  made  a 
long  {gran)  speech  on  the  goodness  of  God.  After  saying,  “ Repetition 
is  the  mother  of  studies,  and  a good  memory  is  a great  benefit  of  God,” 
he  said,  “ God  is  the  creator  of  heaven  and  earth  ; the  fear  of  the  Lord 
is  the  beginning  of  all  wisdom.” — What  are  you  doing  all  day  in  this 
garden  ? — I am  walking  in  it. — What  is  there  in  it  that  attracts  you, 
{que  atrael) — The  singing  of  the  birds  attracts  me. — Are  there  any 
nightingales  (in  it  ?) — There  are  some  in  it,  and  the  harmony  of  their 
singing  enchants  m.e. — Have  those  nightingales  more  power  over 
{sohre)  you  than  the  beauties  of  painting,  or  the  voice  of  your  tender 
{tierna)  mother,  who  loves  you  so  much  ? — I confess  the  harmony  ot 
the  singing  of  those  little  birds  has  more  power  over  me  than  the  most 
bonder  words  of  my  dearest  friends. 

178. 

What  does  your  niece  amuse  herself  with  (Lesson  XLIV.)  in  her 
solitude  ? — She  reads  a good  deal,  and  writes  letters  to  her  mother. — 
What  does  your  uncle  amuse  himself  with  in  his  solitude  ? — He 
employs  himself  in  painting  and  chemistry. — Does  he  no  longer  do 
any  business  ? — He  no  longer  does  any,  for  he  is  too  old  to  do  it. — 
Why  does  he  meddle  with  your  business  ? — He  does  not  generally 
meddle  with  other  people’s  business,  but  he  meddles  with  mine 
oecause  he  loves  me. — Has  your  master  made  you  repeat  your  lesson 
to-day  ? — He  has  made  me  repeat  it. — ^Did  you  know  it  ? — I knew  it 
pretty  well. — Have  you  also  done  some  exercises  ? — I have  done  sume, 
but  what  is  that  to  you,  {sirvase  decirme  que  le  importa  d F.,)  I beg  ? — I 
do  not  generally  meddle  with  things  that  do  not  concern  me,  but  I lovo 
you  so  much  that  I concern  myself  much  about  {quc  yo  me  inter eso) 
what  you  are  doing. — Does  any  one  trouble  his  head  about  you  ? — No 
one  troubles  his  head  about  me,  for  I am  not  worth  the  trouble,  {m 
valgo  la  pena.) — Who  corrects  your  exercises  ? — My  master  corrects 
tliem. — How  does  he  correct  them? — He  corrects  them  in  rcarlinjl 


FIFTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


255 


dicm,  and  in  reading  them  he  speaks  to  me. — How  many  things  does 
your  master  do  at  the  same  time,  {a  la  vez  1) — He  does  four  things  at 
the  same  time. — How  so,  {comol) — He  reads  and  corrects  my  exer- 
cises, speaks  to  me  and  questions  me  all  at  once. — Does  your  sister 
sing  while  dancing  ? — She  sings  while  working,  but  she  cannot  sing 
tvliile  dancing. — Has  your  mother  left? — She  has  not  left  yet. — When 
will  she  set  out  ? — She  will  set  out  to-morrow  evening. — At  what 
o’clock  ? — At  a quarter  to  seven. — Have  your  sisters  arrived  ? — They 
have  not  arrived  yet,  but  we  expect  them  tliis  evening. — Will  they 
spend  the  evening  (Note,  page  243)  with  us  ? — They  will  spend 
it  with  us,  for  they  have  promised  me  to  do  so. — Where  have  you 
spent  the  morning  ? — I have  spent  it  in  the  country. — Do  you  go 
every  morning  to  the  country  ? — I do  not  go  every  morning,  but  twice 
a week. — Why  has  your  niece  not  colled  upon  me  ? — She  is  very 
111,  and  has  spent  the  whole  day  in  her  room. 


FIFTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Quincuagesirna  octava 


The  past  or  compound  future  is  formed  from  the  future  of  the  auxiliarf 
«md  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated.  Example  ; — 


OF  THE  PAST  FUTURE.— No.  4,  p. 


I shall  have  loved. 


Yo  habrd  am  ado. 

Tii  habrds  amado. 
t\  , or  ella  habrd  amaao. 

V.  habrd  amado. 

Nosotros  habr^mos  amado. 
Vosotros  (orvos)  habreis  amado. 
Elios  (or  ellas)  habrdn  amado. 
VV.  habrdn  amado. 


Thou  wilt  have  loved. 

He,  or  she  will  have  loved. 


You  will  have  loved. 
We  shall  have  loved. 
You  will  have  loved. 
They  will  have  lovec. 
You  will  have  loved. 


[ shall  have  come. 
Thou  wilt  have  come, 
He  will  have  come. 
She  will  have  come 
You  will  have  come 
We  shall  have  come. 
You  will  have  come. 
They  will  have  come 
You  vnll  have  come. 


Yo  habrd  venido. 

Th  habrds  venido. 

]&1  habrd  venido 
Ella  habrd  venido. 

V.  habrd  venido. 

Nosotros  habrdmos  venido. 
Vosotros  (or  vos)  habrdis  venido 
Elios  (or  ellas)  habrdn  venido. 
VV.  habrdn  venido. 


256 


FIFTY-EIGHTH  LESSON 


I shall  have  been  praised. 
Thou  wilt  have  been  praised. 
He  will  have  been  praised. 
She  will  have  been  praised. 
You  will  have  been  praised. 
We  shall  have  been  praised. 

You  will  have  been  praised. 

Tliey  will  have  been  praised. 

\’ou  will  have  been  praised. 


To  have  left. 

When  I have  paid  for  the  horse,  I 
shall  have  only  ten  dollars  left. 

How  much  money  have  you  left? 

I have  five  dollars  left. 

I have  only  one  dollar  left. 

How  much  has  your  brother  left  ? 

He  has  one  dollar  left. 

How  much  has  your  sister  left  ? 

She  has  only  a few  pence  left. 

How  much  have  your  brothers  left  ? 

They  hav»  a hundred  dollars  left. 

When  they  have  paid  the  tailor, 
they  will  have  a hundred  dollars 
left, 

Obs.  A The  conjunctions  wkeUf 

jr  the  compound  of  the  present,  of  1 

press  futurity.  Example : — 

When  I am  at  my  aunt’s,  will  you 
come  to  see  me  ? 

A.fter  you  have  done  writing,  will 
you  take  a turn  with  me  ? 

You  will  play,  when  you  have 
finished  your  exercise 


Yo  habrd  side  alabado,  (alabada.) 

Tu  habrds  sido  alabado,  (alabada  ) 
6l  habrd,  sido  alabado. 

Ella  habrd  sido  alabada. 

V.  habrd  sido  alabado,  (alabada., 
Nosotros  (or  nosotrbs)  habremos  sidr. 

alabados,  (alabadas.) 

Vosotros  (or  vosotras)  habreis  sid»' 
alabados,  (alabadas.) 

Elios  (ellas)  habran  sido  alabados^ 
(alabadas.) 

VV.  habrdn  sido  alabados,  (alabadas.) 


Quedar  Sobrar.  Resiar. 

+ Cuando  yo  haya  pagadc  el  (oi 
por  el)  caballo,  solo  me  quedardn 
diez  pesos. 

1 1 Cuanto  dinero  le  queda  d V.,  (^oi 
os  queda) ? 

t Me  quedan  cinco  pesos. 

Me  queda  solo  un  peso. 

I Cuanto  le  resta  (or  queda)  al  her- 
mano  de  V.  ? 

Le  queda  un  peso. 

i Cuanto  le  queda  d la  senora  her- 
mana  de  V.  ? (or  d su  senora,  &c.) 

Le  quedan  solo  unos  cuartos. 

I Cuanto  ha  quedado  d sus  hermanoa 
de  V.? 

Les  han  quedado  cien  pesos. 

Cuando  ellos  hayan  pagado  al  sastro, 
les  quedardn  cien  pesos. 

as  soon  as,  after,  require  the  present, 

le  subjunctive  mood,  when  they  ex« 

iVendrd  V.  d verme,  cuando 
este  en  casa  de  mi  tia  ? 

I Custard  V.  de  dar  un  paseo  {una 
vuelta)  conmigo,  de  spues  que  haya 
acabado  de  esci  ibir? 

V.  jugard,  evande  haya  acabado  sv 
ejercicio 


pirrr-EiGHTH  lesson. 


257 


( i Que  hard.  'V.  despues  que  haya 
»Vhat  will  you  do  when  you  have  J comido? 
diiiod  1 t Qwe  hai  a F.  despues  de  comei 

(or  de  la  comida)  f 

IVlieii  J lave  spoken  to  your  brother,  Cuando  yo  haya  hablado  al  sefioi 
I sliall  know  what  I have  to  do.  herrnano  de  V.  sabre  lo  que  he  do 

haner 


IDIOMS  WITH  HACER. 


How  is  the  weather  ? 

It  is  fine  weather. 

It  is  bad  weather. 

It  is  hot.  It  is  very  warm. 

It  is  cold.  It  is  very  cold. 

The  wind  blows  high. 

It  is  a long  time  that  I saw  him. 

It  is  becoming  late. 

It  is  becoming  night. 

He  causes  an  information  to  be 
made. 

She  counterfeits  the  idiot,  (or  feigns  to 
be  an  idiot.) 

He  acts  as  a broker. 

Not  to  mind  a person,  (or  thing.) 

To  ridicule  any  one. 

To  boast  of. 

Out  of  doors. 


I I Que  tiempo  hace  ? 

Hace  buen  tiempo. 

Hace  hermoso  tiempo. 

Hace  mal  tiempo. 

Hace  calor.  Hace  mucho  calor. 
Hace  frio.  Hace  mucho  frio. 

Hace  mucho  viento. 

Hace  mucho  tiempo  que  le  vi. 
f Se  hace  tarde. 
t Se  hace  uoche.  Anochece. 
t ^11  hace  hacer  una  informacloii. 

t Ella  hace  la  boba,  (la  toiita.) 

Hace  el  (or  de)  corredor. 

No  hacer  caso  de  una  persona,  (oi 
cosa.) 

Hacer  chacota  (or  burla)  de  algmio 
Hacer  alarde. 

Fuera. 


To  enter.  To  go  in.  To  come  in 
Will  you  go  into  my  room  ? 

I wiil  go  in. 

I shall  go  in. 

To  sit  down. 

To  siti  to  Oe  seated. 
lls  is  seated  upon  the  large  chair. 
She  is  seated  upon  the  bench. 


Erurar.  (Ir  adentro.) 

I Quiere  V.  entrar  en  mi  cuarto 
(aposento)  ? 

Yq  entrare.  (Si,  senor.) 

Eiitrard. 

Sentarse.  (See  Lesson  I II.) 

Estar  sentadOi  (fern,  scntada^ 

]&1  estd,  sentado  en  la  silla  de  hraxoi 
Ella  esta  sentada  en  el  banco. 


To  fill  with 

To  fill  a bottle  with  wine 


Llenar — de, 

Llenar  de  vino  una  liotella 


258 


FIFTY-EIGHTH  LESS03S. 


Do  you  fill  that  bottle  with  water  ? 

fill  my  purse  with  money. 

EJe  fills  Elis  belly  with  meat. 


The  pocket. 

Have  you  come  quite  alone  I 

No,  I have  brought  all  my  men 
along  with  me. 

To  bring. 

fie  has  brought  all  his  men  along 
with  him. 

Have  you  brought  your  brother  along 
with  you  ? 

I Eiave  brought  him  along  with  me. 

Have  you  told  the  groom  to  bring 
me  the  horse  ? 

The  groom. 

Are  you  bringing  in  my  books  ? 

I am  bringing  them  to  you. 

To  take,  to  carry. 

Will  you  take  that  dog  to  the  stable  ? 

r will  take  it  thither. 

Are  you  carrying  that  gun  to  my 
father  ? 

I carry  it  to  him. 

The  cane,  the  stick. 

The  stable. 


I Llena  V.  de  agua  esta  bctella  1 
Yo  lleno  de  dinoro  mi  bo  Isa. 

6l  se  llena  de  came  la  barriga.  (A 
very  low  expression.) 

La  bolsa,  (fern.)  El  bolsillo, 

La  faltriquera,  (fern.) 

^ Ha  venido  V.  absolutamente  solo  ? 
No,  yo  he  traido  toda  mi  gente  (todcs 
mis  hombres)  conmigo 

Traer  * 

]&1  ha  traido  toda  su  gente  consigo. 

I Ha  traido  V.  consigo  d su  her- 
maiio  ? 

Yo  le  he  traido  conmigo. 

I Ha  dicho  V.  al  mozo  de  caballo* 
(caballerizo)  que  traiga  mi  cabaliol 
El  mozo  de  caballos. 

El  caballerizo. 

I Me  trae  V.  mis  libros  ? 

Yo  se  los  traigo  d V. 

Llevar.  Traer.  Conducir 

i Quiere  V.  llevar  ese  perro  al  es* 
table  ? 

Yo  le  llevare  alli. 

I Lleva  V.  esa  escopeta  d mi  padro  ? 

Yo  se  la  llevo 

La  cana.  El  palo,  (mas  l 

El  hasten,  (mas.) 

El  establo,  (mas.) 

La  caballeriza,  (fern ) 


To  come  down,  to  go  down. 

I'o  go  down  into  the  well. 

To  go,  or  come  down  the  hill. 

To  go  down  the  river. 

To  alight  from  one’s  horse,  or  dis- 

mt  imt. 

To  alight,  10  get  out 


I Bajar  d,  (or  de.'^.  Descender  ® 
1 Bajar  al  pozo. 

\ Bajar  el  cerro 
( Descender  del  cerro. 

I Bajar  el  rio. 

^ t Apearse  del  caballo. 

( Desmontarse. 

I Apearse.  Bajar.  Salir  de. 


FIFTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


259 


To  go  up,  to  mount,  to  ascend. 
To  go  up  the  mountain. 

To  get  into  the  coach. 

To  get  on  board  a ship. 


Subir.  Montar. 

Subir  el  monte. 

Eiitrar  (subir)  en  e coche 
t Embarcarse. 


Tc  desire,  to  beg,  to  request,  to  pray. 

Will  you  desire  your  brother  to  come  I i Quiere  V.  suplicar  a su  hcrmam? 
down  ? 1 que  baje  7 

Ohs.  B.  Verbs  signifying*  to  beg,  to  request,  to  command,  &c.,  require 
liie  verb  governed  by  them  to  be  in  the  subjunctive  mood.  (See  Appendix  ^ 


Desear.  Suplicar. 
Pedir  Rogar  *. 


The  beard. 

The  river. 

The  stream,  torrent. 
To  go,  or  come  up  the  river. 


La  barba. 

El  rio. 

La  corriente.  El  torrente. 
Subir  el  rio. 


EXERCISES. 

179. 

Will  your  parents  go  into  the  country  to-morrow  ? — They  will  not 
go,  for  it  is  too  dusty. — Shall  we  take  a walk  to-day  ? — We  will  not 
trke  a walk,  for  it  is  too  muddy  out  of  doors,  (en  la  calle.) — Do  you 
s?e  the  castle  of  my  relation  behind  yonder  mountain,  (aquella  mon~ 
iahal) — I see  it. — Shall  we  go  in  ? — We  will  go  in  if  you  liket — Will 
/ou  go  into  that  room  ? — I shall  not  go  into  it,  for  it  is  smoky. — I wish 
fou  a good  morning.  Madam. — Will  you  not  come  in  ? Will  you  not 
dt  down — I will  sit  down  upon  that  large  chair. — Will  you  tell  me 
what  has  become  of  your  brother  ? — I will  tell  you. — Where  is  your 
lister  ? — Do  you  not  see  her  ? She  sits  upon  the  bench. — Is  your 
father  seated  upon  the  bench  ? — No,  he  sits  upon  the  chair. — Hast 
tliou  spent  all  thy  money  ? — I have  not  spent  all. — How  much  hast 
thou  left  ? — I have  not  much  left.  I have  but  five  shillings  left. — How 
much  money  have  thy  sisters  left  ? — They  have  but  three  dollars  left, 
— Have  you  money  enough  left  to  pay  your  tailor  ? — I have  enougn 
left  to  pay  him ; but  if  I pay  him  I shall  have  but  little  left. — How 
much  money  will  your  brothers  have  left  ? — They  will  have  a hundred 
dollars  lefi. — When  will  you  go  to  Italy  ? — I shall  go  as  soon  as  (luego 
que)  I have  Qiaya)  learned  Italian. — When  will  your  brothers  go  to 
France  ? — They  will  go  thither  as  soon  as  they  know  (sepan)  French. 
— When  will  they  learn  it  ? — They  will  learn  it  when  they  have  (Jiayan) 
found  a good  master. — How  much  money  shall  wc>  have  left  when 
ve  have  (hayamos)  paid  for  our  horses  ? — When  we  have  Qiayamos' 
(K'id  for  them  we  shall  have  only  a hundred  dollars  left. 


2G0 


FIFTY-EIGHTH  LES80B. 


180. 

Do  you  gain  any  thing  by  (en)  that  business  ? — I do  not  gain  mucb 
by  it,  {en  el,)  but  my  brother  gains  a good  deal  by  it.  He  [ills  hia 
nurse  with  money. — How  much  money  have  you  gained  ? — I \ivya 
gained  only  a little,  but  my  cousin  has  gained  much  by  it.  He  has 
tilled  his  pocket  with  money. — Why  does  that  man  not  work  { — He  i*5 
a good-tor-nothing  fellow,  for  he  does  nothing  but  eat  all  the  day  long. 
He  (continually)  fills  his  belly  with  meat,  so  that  he  will  make  himself 
(se  enfermard)  ill  if  he  continues  {continuar)  to  eat  so  much. — With 
what  have  you  filled  that  bottle  ? — I have  filled  it  with  wine. — Will 
this  man  take  care  of  my  horse  ? — He  \\\J  take  care  of  it. — WIio  will 
take  care  of  my  servant  ? — The  landlord  will  take  care  of  liim. — Does 
your  ser\'ant  take  care  of  your  horses  ? — He  does  take  care  of  them. — 
Is  he  taking  care  of  your  clothes  ? — He  takes  care  of  them,  for  he 
brushes  them  every  morning. — Have  you  ever  drunk  French  wine  / 
— I have  never  drunk  any. — Is  it  long  since  you  ate  French  bread  ?— 
It  is  almost  three  years  since  1 ate  any. — Have  you  hurt  my  brother 
in-law  ? — I have  not  hurt  him,  but  he  has  cut  my  finger. — What  has 
he  cut  your  finger  with  ? — Witli  the  knife  wliich  you  have  lent  him. 

181. 

Is  } our  father  arrived  at  last  ? — Everybody  says  that  he  is  arrived, 
but  I have  not  seen  him  yet. — Has  the  physician  hurt  your  son  ? — He 
has  hurt  him,  for  he  has  cut  his  finger. — Have  they  cut  off  that  man’s 
leg  ? — They  have  cut  it  off. — Are  you  pleased  with  your  servant  ? — 
I am  much  pleased  with  him,  for  he  is  fit  for  any  thing,  (j)ara  lodo.) — 
What  does  he  know  ? — He  knows  every  thing,  {todo.) — Can  he  ride  ? 
— He  can. — Has  your  brother  returned  at  last  from  England  ? — He 
has  returned  thence,  and  has  brought  you  a fine  horse. — Has  he  told 
his  groom  to  bring  it  to  me,  {me  le  traiga  ?) — He  has  told  him  to  bring 
{lleve)  it  to  you. — What  do  you  think  of  that  horse  ? — I think  that  it  is 
a fine  and  good  one,  and  beg  you  to  lead  {lleve)  it  into  the  stable. — In 
what  did  you  spend  your  time  yesterday  ? — I went  to  the  concert,  and 
afterwards  to  the  play. — W'hen  did  that  man  go  down  into  the  well  ? — 
He  went  down  into  it  this  morning. — Has  he  come  up  again  yet, 
{volver  d subir  1) — He  came  up  an  hour  ago. — Where  is  your  brother  I 
— He  is  in  his  room. — Will  you  tell  him  to  come  down,  {que  bajel)^  ■ 
I will  tell  him  so,  but  he  is  not  dressed  (Lesson  LIII.)  yet. — Is  your 
friend  still  on  the  mountain  ? — He  has  already  come  dov.n. — Did  you 
go  down  or  up  the  river  ? — We  went  down  it. — Did  my  cousin  speak 
to  you  before  he  started  ? — He  spoke  to  me  before  he  got  into  tha 
coach. — Have  you  seen  my  brother  ? — I saw  him  before  I went  od 
board  tlie  ship. — Is  it  better  to  get  into  a coach  than  to  go  on  board 


FIFTY-NINTn  LESSON. 


261 


jhe  Sihip  ? — It  is  not  worth  while  to  get  into  a coach  or  to  go  on  board 
Jie  ship  when  one  has  no  wish  to  travel. 


FIFTY-NINTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Quincuagesima  nona. 


Ohs.  A.  The  Imperfect  is  a past  tense,  which  was  still  present  at  th<J 
Urn©  spoken  of,  and  may  always  be  recognised  by  using  the  two  terms, 
Was  doing,  or  Used  to  do.  Examples  : — 


sullen  I was  at  Cadiz  I often  went 
to  see  my  friends. 

vV'hen  you  were  in  Madrid  you  often 
W'ent  to  the  Prado. 

Rome  was  at  first  gov’erned  by  kings. 

CcEsar  was  a great  man. 

Cicero  was  a great  orator. 


Cuando  yo-  estaha  en  Cadiz,  ila  d 
menudo  d,  ver  d.  mis  amigos. 

Cuando  V.  estaha  en  Madrid,  iha 
frecuentemente  al  Prado. 

Roma  era  gobernada  primerainento 
por  reyes. 

Cesar  era  un  gran  (grande)  h ombre. 

Ciceron  era  un  grande  (gran)  orador 


Ohs.  B.  The  adjective  grande  drops  the  last  syllable  when  it  rneana 
good  in  character  or  quality.  As,  Fernando  de  Cordova  era  llamado  el 
gran  capitan.  (See  Appendix.) 


Our  ancestors  went  a-hunting  every 
day. 

The  Romans  cultivated  the  arts  and 
sciences,  and  rewarded  merit. 

Were  you  walking  ? 

I was  not  walking. 

Were  you  in  Toledo  when  the  king 
was  there  ? 

1 was  there  when  he  was  there. 

Where  were  you  when  I was  in  Ha- 
vana ? 

A-t  what  time  did  you  breakfast  when 
you  were  in  Germany? 

I breakfasted  when  my  father  break- 
fasted. 

Did  you  work  when  he  was  work- 
ing? 

I studied  when  he  was  working. 

Some  fish. 

Some  game. 

When  I lived  at  my  fathfPs  I rose 
earher  than  I do  now 


Nuestros  mayores  iban  d la  caza 
todos  los  dias. 

Los  Romanos  cultivaban  las  artes  y 
las  ciencias,  y premiaban  el  merito 

I Estaba  V.  (iba  V.)  paseando  ? 

No  me  paseaba. 

I Estaba  V.  en  Toledo  cuando  el  rey 
se  liallaba  alli  ? 

Yo  estaba  alii,  cuanao  el  estaba  alii. 

I En  donde  estaba  V.  cuando  yo  es- 
taba en  la  Habana  ? 

^A  que  bora  alniorzaba  V.  cuando 
estaba  en  Alemania  ? 

Yo  almorzaba  cuando  ml  padre  al- 
morzaba,  {al  mismo  tiempo  que 
mi  padre.) 

^Trabajaba  V.  mientras  el  trabaja- 
ba? 

Yo  estudiaba  cuando  el  trabajaba 

Un  poco  de  pescado.  Un  poco  de  psz 

La  caza 

Cuando  yo  vivia  en  casa  de  mi  padro, 
me  levantaba  mas  temprano  que 
a bora. 


262 


FIFTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


V/heii  wo  lived  in  that  country  we 
went  a-fishing  often. 

When  I was  sick  I kept  in  bed  all 
day 

l^ast  summer  when  I v/as  in  the 
country,  there  v/as  a great  deal  of 
fruit. 


Caando  viviamos  en  aquel  pais,  fre- 
cuentemente  ibamos  d pescar 
Cuando  yo  estaba  enfermo,  estaba  eii 
cama  todo  el  dia. 

Cuando  yo  estaba  en  el  campo  el 
veraiio  pasado,  habia  mucha  fruty 


A thing‘. 

The  same  thing. 

The  same  man. 

It  is  all  one,  (the  same.) 


Una  cosa. 

La  misma  cosa. 

El  mismo  hombio. 
t Todo  es  uno.  Vale  lo  mismo. 
Es  igual. 


Such 

Such  a man 
Such  men. 

Such  a woman. 

Such  things. 

Such. 

Such  men  merit  esteem. 

Mr.  such  a one  said  it. 

Mr.  such  a one  and  Mr.  such  a one. 


Un  tal,  (mas.)  Una  tal,  (fern.) 

Un  tal  hombre. 

Tales  hombres.  tJnos  tales  hombies 
Una  tal  mujer. 

Tales  cosas. 

Semejante.  Igual. 

Semej  antes  hombres  merecen  esti- 
macion. 

t El  Serior  Fulano  de  tal  {un  Don 
Fulano)  lo  dijo 

t Un  Don  FulanOy  y un  Don  Men* 
ganoy  {Zutano.) 


Out. 

Without,  or  out  of  doors. 

The  church  stands  outside  the  town. 
I shall  wait  for  you  before  the  town 
gate. 

The  town  or  city  gate. 

The  barrier  The  turnpike. 


Seldom. 

Some  brandy. 

The  life. 

To  get  one’s  livelihood  by 
I get  my  livelihood  by  working, 
tie  gets  his  living  by  writing. 

^ gain  my  money  by  working. 

By  what  does  that  man  get  his  live- 
lihood ? 


Fuera  de  Afuera. 

Fuera.  Afuera  Fuera  de  la  puerta 
La  iglesia  estd  fuera  de  la  ciudad. 
Yo  aguardar^  d V.  fuera  de  las  puer- 
tas  de  la  ciudad. 

La  puerta  de  la  ciudad 
La  barrera 


Raramente.  Kara  vez.  Raro. 

Un  poco  de  aguardiente. 

La  vida. 

Ganar  su  vida  d. 

Gano  mi  vida  d trabajar,  (Irabajando.) 
El  gana  su  vida  escribiendo,  (d  e» 
cribir.) 

Yo  gano  mi  dinero  trabajnndo. 

I A que  (de  que  manera)  gana  Obt 
hombre  eu  vida  ? 


FIFT^-NINTH  LESSON. 


263 


To  proceio.  To  go  on.  i 

To  continue.  f 

He  contiimes  his  discourse.  j 

A good  appetite.  ! 

The  narrative.  The  tale.  ^ 

Tlie  edge.  The  border.  S 

The  shore.  ( 

The  edge  of  the  brook. 

I'he  sea-shore. 

On  the  sea-shore. 

The  shore.  The  water-side.  y 

The  coast.  Ttie  bank.  i 

People,  folks. 

*Phey  are  good  folks. 

They  are  wicked  people. 


Proceder  Proaeguir 
Continuar,  (a  before  the  inf  ^ 

El  coiitinua  su  discurso. 

Un  buen  apetito. 

La  narrativa.  Fiibula.  Conseja. 
Relate  (cuento)  de  un  hccho.  Cueutc 
Mdrgen.  Orilla.  Borde. 

Costa.  Ribera.  Playa. 

La  md.rgen  del  arroyo. 

La  orilla  del  mar. 

Ell  la  playa  (costa)  del  mar. 

La  costa.  La  playa.  La  marina. 
La  orilla  del  agua.  La  ribera 
La  mdrgen. 

La  gente.  Las  genteb. 

Ellas  son  buenas  gentes. 

Elios  son  gentes  malvadas. 


EXERCISES. 

182. 

Were  you  loved  when  you  were  at  Dresden  ? — I was  not  hated. — 
Was  your  brother  esteemed  when  he  was  in  London  ? — He  was  loved 
and  esteemed. — When  were  you  in  Spain  ? — I was  there  when  you 
were  (there.) — Who  was  loved  and  who  was  hated  ? — Those  that 
were  good,  assiduous,  and  obedient  were  loved,  and  those  who  were 
naughty,  idle,  and  disobedient  were  punished,  hated,  and  despised. — 
Were  you  in  Berlin  when  the  king  was  there  ? — I was  there  when 
he  was  (there.) — Was  your  uncle  in  London  when  I was  there  ? — He 
was  there  when  you  were  (there.) — Where  were  you  when  I was  at 
Dresden  ?— I was  in  Paris. — Where  was  your  father  when  you  were 
in  Vienna  ? — He  was  in  England. — At  what  time  did  you  breakfast 
when  you  were  in  France  ? — I breakfasted  when  my  uncle  breakfasted. 
— Did  you  work  when  he  was  working  ? — I studied  when  he  was 
working. — Did  your  brother  work  when  you  were  working  ? — He 
played  when  I was  working. — On  what  lived  our  ancestors  ? — They 
lived  on  (nothing  but)  fish  and  game,  for  they  went  a-hunting  and 
a-fishing  every  day. — What  sort  of  people  were  the  Romans  ? — They 
were  very  good  people,  for  they  cultivated  the  arts  and  sciences  and 
rewarded  merit. — Did  you  often  go  to  see  your  friends  when  you  were 
at  Berlin  ? — I went  to  see  them  often. — Did  you  sometimes  go  to  the 
Champs-Elysees  when  you  were  at  Paris  ? — I :ften  went  thither. 

183. 

What  did  yon  do  when  yon  lived  in  tliat  country  ? — When  we  lived 


264 


FIFTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


there  we  went  a-fishing  often. — Did  you  not  go  out  walking? — J went 
out  walking  sometimes. — Do  you  rise  early  ? — Not  so  early  as  you, 
but  when  I lived  at  my  uncle’s  I rose  earlier  than  I do  now. — Did  you 
sometimes  keep  in  bed  when  you  lived  at  your  uncle’s  ? — When  I was 
ill  I kept  in  bed  all  day. — Is  there  much  fruit  this  year  ? — I do  not 
know  ; but  last  summer,  w^hen  I was  in  the  country,  there  w^as  a great 
deal  of  fruit. — What  do  you  get  your  livelihood  by  ? — I get  my  liveli- 
hood by  working. — Does  your  friend  get  his  livelihood  by  writing  ? — 
He  gets  it  by  speaking  and  writing. — Do  these  gentlemen  get  their 
livelihood  by  working  ? — They  get  it  by  doing  nothing,  for  they  are 
too  idle  to  work. — What  has  your  friend  gained  that  money  by  ? — He 
has  gained  it  by  working. — What  did  you  get  your  livelihood  by  when 
you  were  in  England  ? — I got  it  by  writing. — Did  your  cousin  get  his 
livelihood  by  writing  ? — He  got  it  by  working. — Have  you  ever  seen 
such  a person  ? — I have  never  seen  such  a one. — Have  you  already 
seen  our  church  ? — I have  not  seen  it  yet. — Where  does  it  stand, 
{estd  1) — It  stands  outside  the  town.  If  you  wish  to  see  it  I will  go 
with  you  in  order  to  show  it  you. — What  do  the  people  live  upon  that 
live  on  the  sea-shore  ? — They  live  on  fish  alone. — Why  will  you  not 
go  a-hunting  any  more  ? — I hunted  yesterday  the  whole  day,  and  I 
killed  nothing  but  an  ugly  bird,  so  that  I shall  not  go  any  more  a-hunt- 
ing.— Why  do  you  not  eat  ? — Because  I have  not  a good  appetite. — 
Why  does  your  brother  eat  so  much  ? — Because  he  has  a good  appetitc. 

184. 

Whom  are  you  looking  for  ? — I am  looking  for  my  little  brother. — 
If  you  wish  to  find  him  you  must  go  {que  vaya)  into  the  garden,  for  he 
is  there. — The  garden  is  large,  and  I shall  not  be  able  to  find  him  if 
you  do  not  tell  me  in  which  part  of  the  garden  he  is. — He  is  sitting 
under  the  large  tree  under  which  we  were  sitting  yesterday. — Now  I 
shall  find  him. — Why  did  you  not  bring  my  clothes  ? — They  were  not 
made,  so  that  I could  not  bring  them,  but  I bring  them  to  you  now. — 
You  have  learned  your  lesson  ; why  has  not  your  sister  learned  hers  ? 
— She  has  taken  a walk  with  my  mother,  so  that  she  could  not  learn 
it,  but  she  will  learn  it  to-morrow. — When  will  you  correct  my  exer- 
cises ? — I will  correct  them  when  you  bring  (traiga)  me  those  of  youi 
sister. — Do  you  think  you  have  made  faults  in  them  ? — I do  not  know. 
— If  you  have  made  faults  you  have  not  studied  your  lesson  well ; for 
the  lessons  must  be  learned  well  to  make  no  faults  in  the  exercises. — 
It  is  all  the  same  : if  you  do  not  correct  them  to-day,  I shall  not  leant 
them  before  to-morrow. — You  must  not  (deber)  make  any  faults  in 
your  exercises,  for  you  have  all  you  want  in  order  to  make  none. 


SIXTIETH  LESSON. 


265 


SIXTIETH  LESSON. --Leccion  Sexag6sima. 
For  the  use  of  the  Imperfect  Tense,  see  Lesson  XL. 


A plate. 

A son-in-law 

A step-son. 

A daughter-in-law 

A step-daughter. 

The  father-in  law. 

The  mother-in-law 

To  improve  in  learning. 

The  progress  of  a malady 
O*  When  the  English  tense  can 

but  if  it  means  did^  use  No.  3. 

I forgot,  thou  forgottest,  he  forgot, 
(used  to.) 

{ forgot,  thou  forgottest,  he  forgot, 
(did.) 

When  we  went  to  school  we  often 
forgot  our  books. 

When  you  went  to  church  you  often 
prayed  to  the  Lord  for  your  chil- 
dren. 


When  we  received  some  money  we 
employed  it  in  purchasing  good 
books. 

When  you  bought  of  that  merchant 
you  did  not  always  pay  in  cash.  1 

Has  your  sister  succ  3eded  in  mending 
your  cravat  ? 

She  has  succeeded  in  it. 

Has  the  woman  returned  from  the 
market  ? 

SI  1 8 has  not  yet  returned. 

Ilid  the  women  agree  to  that  1 

Tlioy  did  agree  to  it. 

Where  is  your  sister  gone  to  ? 

%he  is  gone  to  the  church. 

12 


Un  plato. 

Un  yerno. 

Un  hij  astro.  Un  entenado. 

Una  nuera. 

Una  hijastra.  Una  entenadji. 

^ El  suegro. 

^ t Padre  politico 

La  suegra. 

t Madre  politica. 

^ Adolantar  en  los  estndios. 

( Adelantar  en  las  ciencias. 

I Lc>s  progresos  de  una  enfemedad. 
be  changed  into  used  to,  use  No  2 

Olvidaba,  olvidabas,  olvidaba.  Nc.  2 

Olvide,  olvidaste,  olvidd.  No.  3. 

Cuando  ibamos  d la  escuela,  olvidaba- 
mos  d menudo  nuesiros  libros. 

Cuando  V.  iba  d la  iglesia,  V.  pcdia 
frecuentemente  al  Sehor  por  sus 
hij  os. 

Cuando  recibiamos  dinero,  le  em- 
pledbamos  en  comprar  buenos 
libros. 

Cuando  V.  compraba  de  eso  merca- 
der,  no  pagaba  siempre  al  contada 

I Logrd  componer  la  corbata  de  V 
su  hermana  ? 

Si ; or,  Lo  logrd. 

I Ila  vuelto  de  la  plaza  la  mujer  " 

Todama  no.  No  ha  vuelto. 

I Han  convenido  en  eso  las  mujeres  1 

Convinieron  (or  han  convenido)  on 
ello. 

I A donde  fud  su  hermana  de  V.  ? 

Ella  fue  d la  iglesia. 


266 


SIXTIETH  LESSON. 


OF  THE  CONDITIONAL  OR  POTENTIAL  SlxMPLE 


This  tense  corresponds  to  No.  8,  the  second  termination  of  the  Imperfect 
of  the  subjunctive  mood.  The  Imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  has  three  ler- 
niinations  for  each  person  : the  first,  No.  7,  is  ra  ; the  second,  No.  6,  is 
ria  ; and  the  third.  No.  9,  is  se,  (See  the  table  of  the  terminations  of  lha 
vsrDs.)  In  phrases  in  which  the  Potential  is  used,  there  are  generally  tv? 
jeatences,  one  of  which  is  the  principal,' and  the  other  the  subordinate.  In 
Spanish,  the  verb  of  the  principal  is  in  the  termination  marked  No.  8,  and 
tlio  verb  of  the  subordinate  is  in  the  terminations  marked  Nos.  7 or  9 
Example ; — If  I had  money,  / would  buy  hooks — Si  yo  tuviese  (tuv  era) 
dinero  compraria  lihros.  The  sentence  in  italics  is  the  principal,  and 
although,  in  the  above  example,  it  is  placed  after  the  subordinate  it  might 
be  placed  before.  It  is  easy  to  distinguish  the  principal  from  the  subo7 
dinate  : the  last  is  always  preceded  by  a conjunction. 


I would  have,  thou  wouldst  have,  he  ^ 
or  she  would  have.  j 

We  would  have,  you  would  have,  | 
they  would  have.  J 

I could  have,  thou  couidst  have,  he*' 
or  she  could  have. 

We  could  have,  you  could  have,  they 
could  have. 

I might  have,  thou  mightst  have,  he 
might  have. 

We  might  have,  you  might  have, 
they  might  have. 


Tendria,  tendrias,  tendria. 

Tendriamos,  tendriais,  ten- 
dr  i an. 

Tuviera,  tuvieras,  tuviera. 

Tiivieramos,  tuvierais,  tu- 
vieran.  > 

Tuviese,  tuvieses,  tuviese.  ^ 

Tuviesemos,  tuvieseis,  tu- 
viesen.  j 


►No.  8 


^No.  7 


. No.  9. 


Obs.  If  {si)  is  sometimes  understood  in  English,  but  it  must  always  I)e 
expressed  in  Spanish,  and  the  tenses  used  in  the  subordinate  must  be  Na  7 
and  No.  9 Example: — Had  I money,  I would  buy  books — Si  yo  tuviera 

(or  tuviese)  dinero,  compraria  libros. 


No.  8 of  To  wish, 

I would,  thou  wouldst,  he  would. 
We  would,  you  would,  they  would. 


No.  8 de  Querer, 

Querria,  querrias,  querria. 
Querriamos,  querriais,  querrian 


If  I had  money,  I would  have  a \ 
new  coat,  | 

If  thou  couidst  do  this,  thou  wouldst 
do  that. 

If  he  could,  hs  would, 

I would  go  if  I had  time. 

If  he  knew  what  you  have  done,  he 
would  scold  yotu 
To  scold. 


Si  yo  tuviera  (or  tuviese)  dineui^ 
compraria  una  casaca  nueva. 

Si  tii  pudieras  (or  pudieses)  hacof 
esto,  querrias  hacer  aquello. 

Si  ^1  pudiera,  (or  pudiese,)  querria. 

Yo  iria  si  tuviera  tiempo. 

Si  ^1  supiera  (or  supiese)  lo  que  V.  ha 
hecho,  le  reprenderia. 

Reprender.  (Conj.  like  Prender.'i 


SIXTIETH  LESSON. 


267 


ff  tliere  vere  any  wood,  he  would 
make  a fire. 

Should  the  men  come,  ii  would  he 
necessary  to  give  them  something 
to  drink. 

Should  we  receive  our  letters,  we 
would  not  read  them  until  to- 
morrow 

Not  until. 


Si  hubieru  (hubiese)  lena,  eZ  encen^ 
deria  la  candela^  {haria  el  fuego.] 
Si  vinieran  (viniesen)  los  hombres, 
seria  menesler  darles  algo  {algu- 
na  cosa)  que  beher. 

Si  recibiesemos  (recibieuimos)  n oes- 
trus cartas,  no  las  leeriamos  hmU 
mahana. 

No hasta. 


CONDITIONAL  OR  POTENTIAL  COMPOUND. 

T^is  tense  is  formed  from  No.  8 of  Haber,  with  the  peist  participle  of  thw 
verb  to  be  conjugated.  (It  is  marked  No.  8,  p.) 


Nos.  8,  7,  9,  of  To  have,  (aux.)  | 

I would  have,  thou  wouldst  have,'] 
he  would  have.  I 

We  would  have,  you  would  have,  ( 
they  would  have.  J 

I could  have,  thou  couldst  have,  he' 
could  have. 

We  could  have,  you  could  have, 
they  could  have. 

I might  have,  thou  mightst  have,  he  [ 
might  have. 

We  might  have,  you  might  have, 
they  might  have. 

No.  8,  p.  of  To  have,  (active.) 

I would  have  had,  thou  wouldst  have  ^ 
had,  he  or  she  would  have  had. 

We  would  have  had,  you  would 
have  had,  they  would  have  had.  1 


Nos.  8,  7,  9,  de  Haber. 
Habria,  habrias,  habria.  'I 


Habriamos,  habriais,  ha- 
brian. 

Hubiera,  hubieras,  hu- 
biera. 

Hubieramos,  hubierais, 
hubieran. 

Hubiese,  hubieses,  hu- 
biese. 

Hubi6semos,  hubieseis, 
hubiesen. 


I 

j 


No.  8. 


No.  7 


No.  9. 


No.  8,  p.  de  Tener. 


Habria  tenido,  habrias"' 
tenido,  habria  tenido. 

Habriamos  tenido,  ha- 
briais tenido,  habrian 
tenido.  > 


^ No.  8,  p 


If  I had  received  my  money,  / 
would  have  bought  new  books. 

If  he  had  had  a pen,  he  would  have 
recollected  the  word. 

If  you  had  risen  early,  you  could 
. not  have  caught  a cold. 

If  they  had  get  rid  of  their  old  horse, 
they  would  have  procured  a bet- 
ter one 


Si  hubiera  (hubiese)  recibido  mi  di 
nero,  habria  comprado  nuevos  lit  ■ 
ros. 

Si  el  hubiera  (hubiese)  tenido  uu& 
pluma,  se  habria  acordado  de  la 
palabra. 

Si  V.  se  hubiera  levantado  temprano, 
no  se  habria  resfriado. 

Si  se  hubiesen  deshecho  de  8U  caba* 
llo  viejo,  habrian  comprado  otn 
mejor. 


268 


SIXTIETH  LESSON. 


If  he  had  washed  his  hands,  he 
would  have  wiped  them. 

If  I had  known  that,  I would  have 
behaved  differently. 

If  thou  hadst  taken  notice  of  that, 
thou  wouldst  not  have  been  mis- 
taken. 


Si  el  se  hubiera  lavado  las  manor, 
las  habria  enjugado.  ^ 

Si  yo  hubiese  sabido  eso,  me  habri 
portado  diferentemente. 

Si  hubieras  (hubieses)  notado  eso» 
no  te  habrias  equivecado 


Wnuld  you  learn  Spanish  if  I learn- 
it  ? 

I wjuld  learn  it  if  you  learned  it. 

Would  you  have  learned  German^ 
if  I had  learned  it? 

I would  have  learned  it  if  you  had 
learned  it. 

Would  you  go  to  Spain  if  I went 
there  with  you  ? 

I would  gOy  if  you  went  with  me. 

Would  you  have  gone  to  France  if 
I had  gone  with  you  ? 

Would  you  go  out  if  I remained  at 
home  ? 

[ would  remain  at  home  if  you  went 
out. 

Would  you  have  written  a letter  if 
I had  written  a note. 


I Aprenderia  V.  el  Espahol  si  yo 
le  aprendiera,  (le  aprendiese)  ? 

Yo  le  aprenderia  si  V.  'e  aprendiera, 
(le  aprendiese.) 

I Habria  V aprendido  el  Alt  many 
si  yo  le  hubiera  (hubiese)  aprendi- 
do ? 

Yo  le  habria  aprendido  si  V.  le  hu- 
biera (hubiese)  aprendido. 

I Iria  V a Espaha  si  yo  fuera 
(fuese)  con  V.  ? 

Yo  iriay  si  V.  fuera  conmigo. 

I Habria  V.  ido  d Fran  day  si  yo 
hubiera  (hubiese)  ido  con  el  ? 

I Saldria  V.  si  yo  me  quedara  (que- 
dase)  en  casa  ? 

Yo  me  quedaria  en  casa  si  V sa* 
liera,  (saliese.) 

I Habria  escrito  V.  una  carta  si  ya 
hubiera  (hubiese)  escrito  un  hi 
liete  ? 


There  is  my  book. 

Here  is  my  book. 

There  it  is. 

There  they  are. 

Here  I am. 

That  is  the  reason  why. 
Therefore  I say  so. 


K Aili  estd  mi  libro. 

( Alli  tiene  V.  mi  libro. 

( Aqui  estd  mi  libro. 

^ Aqui  tiene  V.  mi  libro. 

Alli  estd.  Alli  le  tiene  \ 

Alli  estan.  Alli  los  tiene  \ 
Aqui  estoy.  Aqui  me  tiene  V 
Esa  es  la  razon  por  la  ciial. 
Pues  yo  digo  eso. 


My  feet  are  cold. 

His  feet  are  cold. 

He  has  a pain  in  his  side. 

Her  hands  are  cold 


t Tengo  l'>s  pies  frios. 
t Tiene  los  pies  frios. 
t Tiene  dolor  de  costado 
J Sus  manos  estan  frias. 
f Ella  tiene  laf  manos  frias 


SIXTIETH  LESSON. 


2G9 


My  body  is  cold. 

Her  tongue  hurts  her  very  much. 
My  head  hurts  me. 

Her  leg  hurts  her. 


Mi  cuerpo  esta  frio. 

Tengo  el  cuerpo  frio. 
t A ella  le  duele  mucho  la  lengua. 
t Me  duele  la  cabeza. 
t A ella  le  duele  la  pienia. 


EXERCISES. 

185 

Did  you  forget  any  thing  when  you  went  to  school  ? — We  often 
forgot  our  books. — Where  did  you  forget  them  ? — We  forgot  them  at 
die  school. — Did  we  forget  any  thing  ? — You  forgot  nothing.— Did 
your  mother  pray  for  any  one  when  she  went  to  church  ? — She  prayed 
for  her  children. — For  whom  did  we  pray? — You  prayed  for  your 
parents. — For  whom  did  our  parents  pray  ? — They  prayed  for  their 
children. — When  you  received  your  money  what  did  you  do  with  it  ? — 
We  employed  it  in  purchasing  some  good  books. — Did  you  employ 
yours  also  in  purchasing  books  ? — No ; we  employed  it  in  assisting 
the  poor,  (socorrer.) — Did  you  not  pay  your  tailor? — We  did  pay  him. 
— Did  you  always  pay  in  cash  when  you  bought  of  that  merchant  ? — 
We  always  paid  in  cash,  for  we  never  buy  on  credit. — Has  your  sister 
succeeded  in  mending  your  stockings  ? — She  has  succeeded  in  it. — 
Has  your  mother  returned  from  church  ? — She  has  not  yet  returned. 
— Whither  has’ your  aunt  gone  ? — She  has  gone  to  church. — Whither 
have  our  cousins  (fern.)  gone  ? — They  have  gone  to  the  concert. — 
Have  they  not  yet  returned  from  it  ? — They  have  not  yet  returned. 

186. 

Who  is  there  ? — It  is  I,  (yo  soy.) — Who  are  those  men  ? — The}  are 
foreigners  w^ho  wish  to  speak  to  you. — Of  what  country  are  they  ? — 
They  are  Americans. — Where  is  my  book  ? — There  it  is. — And  my 
pen  ? — Here  it  is. — Where  is  your  sister  ? — There  she  is. — Where 
are  our  cousins  (fern.  ?) — There  they  are. — Where  are  you,  Joim, 
(Juan  ?) — Here  I am. — Why  do  your  children  live  in  Spain  ? — They 
wish  to  learn  Spanish  ; that  is  the  reason  why  they  live  in  Spain. — 
Wl\y  do  you  sit  near  the  fire  ? — My  hands  and  feet  are  cold  ; that  is 
the  reason  why  I sit  near  the  fire.: — Are  your  sister’s  hands  cold  ? — 
No ; but  her  feet  are  cold. — What  is  the  matter  with  your  aunt  ? — Her 
leg  hurts  her. — Is  any  thing  the  matter  with  you  ? — My  head  hurts 
me. — What  is  the  matter  with  that  woman  ? — Her  tongue  huns  hei 
very  much. — Why  do  you  not  eat  ? — I shall  not  eat  before  I have  a 
good  appetite. — Has  your  sister  a good  appetite  ?— She  has  a very 
good  appetite ; that  is  the  reason  why  she  eats  so  much. — If  you  have 
read  the  Ixx^ks  which  I lent  you  whv  do  you  not  return  them  to  me  ?— 


^70 


SIXTIETH  LESSOET. 


I intend  reading  them  oace  more,  {otra  vez ;)  that  is  the  reason  why  1 
aave  not  yet  returned  them  to  you ; but  I will  return  them  tc 
3^ou  as  soon  as  I have  (haya)  read  them  a second  time,  {otra  rez.)— 
Why  have  you  not  brought  my  shoes  ? — They  were  not  made,  there* 
fore  I did  not  bring  them  ; but  I bring  them  to  you  now : here  they  are, 

* — Why  has  your  daughter  not  learned  her  exercises  ? — She  has  taken 
a walk  with  her  companion,  (fern. ;)  that  is  the  reason  why  she  has  no! 
learned  them : but  she  promises  to  learn  them  to-morrow,  if  you  do 
not  scold  her. 

187. 

Would  you  have  money  if  your  father  were  here  ? — I shoiJd  have 
some  if  lie  were  here. — Would  you  have  been  pleased  if  I had  had 
Borne  books  ? — I should  have  been  much  pleased  if  you  had  had  some. 
— Would  you  have  praised  my  little  brother  if  he  had  been  good  ?— 
If  he  had  been  good  I should  certainly  not  only  have  praised,  but  also 
loved,  honored,  {honrar,)  and  rewarded  him. — Should  we  be  praised  if 
we  did  our  exercises  ? — If  you  did  them  without  a fault  {sin  falta)  you 
would  be  praised  and  rewarded. — Would  my  brother  not  have  been 
punished  if  he  had  done  his  exercises  ? — He  would  not  have  been 
punished  if  he  had  done  them. — Would  my  sister  have  been  praised 
if  she  had  not  been  skilful  ? — She  would  certainly  not  have  been 
praised  if  she  had  not  been  very  skilful,  and  if  she  had  not  worked 
from  morning  {desde)  till  evening.— Would  you  give  me  something 
if  I were  very  good  ? — If  you  were  very  good,  and  if  you  worked  well, 
I would  give  you  a fine  book. — Would  you  have  written  to  your 
sister  if  I had  gone  to  Paris  ? — I would  have  written  to  her,  and  sent 
her  something  handsome  if  you  had  gone  thither. — Would  you  speak 
if  I listened  to  you  ? — I would  speak  if  you  listened  to  me,  and  if  you 
would  answer  me. — Would  you  have  spoken  to  my  mother  if  you  had 
seen  her? — I would  have  spoken  to  her,  and  have  begged  of  her 
{rogar)  to  s?nd  you  a handsome  gold  watch  if  I had  seen  her. 

188. 

One  of  the  valet  de  chambres  {ayuda  de  cdmara)  of  Louis  XIY. 
{de  Luis  XIV.)  requested  that  prince,  as  he  was  going  to  bed,  to 
recommend  to  the  first  president  a lawsuit  {pleito)  which  he  had  against 
{contra)  his  father-in-law,  and  said,  in  urging  him,  ( urgiendole ;)  “ Alas, 
(All!)  Sire,  {Senor()  you  (F.  M. — Vuestra  Majestad)  have  but  to  say 
yne  word.”  “ Well,”  {BienO  said  Louis  XIV.,  “ it  is  not  that  which 
embarrasses  me,  {embarazar ;)  but  tell  me,  if  thou  wert  in  thy  father-in- 
law’s place,  and  thy  father-in-law  in  thine,  wouldst  thou  be  glad  {te 
(ilegrarias)  if  I said  (dijera)  that  word  ?” 

It  the  men  should  come  it  would  be  necessary  to  give  them  some 


SIXTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


273 


thing  to  di  ink. — If  he  could  do  this  he  would  do  that. — 1 have  alway? 
flattered  myself,  my  dear  brother,  that  you  loved  me  as  much  as  I love 
you  ; but  1 now  see  that  I have  been  mistaken.  I should  like  to  know 
why  you  went  a-walking  without  me. — I have  heard,  my  dear  sister, 
fhat  you  are  angry  with  me,  {estar  enfadado^)  because  I went  a- walk- 
ing witliout  you.  I assure  you  that,  had  I known  that  you  were  not 
ill,  I should  have  come  for  you  ; but  I inquired  at  your  physician’s 
^jut  your  health,  and  he  told  me  that  you  had  been  keeping  your  bedl 
\utado  en  camd)  the  last  eight  days,  (por  oclio  dias.) 

189. 

A French  officer  having  arri\  ed  at  the  court  (corte)  of  Vienna,  the 
empress  Theresa  {Teresa)  asked  (preguntar)  liim,  if  he  believed  that 
the  princess  of  N.,  whom  he  had  seen  the  day  before,  was  really  the 
handsomest  woman  in  the  {del)  world,  as  was  said.  (See  Obs.  B, 
Lesson  XXXVII.)  “ Madam,”  replied  {replicar)  the  officer,  “ I thought 
so  yesterday.” — How  do  you  like  (Lesson  XXIV.)  that  meat  ' — I like 
it  very  well. — May  I ask  you  for  {Me  tomare  la  lihertad  de  pedir  d V. 
un  poco)  a piece  o^  that  fish  ? — If  you  will  have  the  goodness  to  pass 
me  your  plate  I wdll  give  you  some. — Would  you  have  the  goodness  to 
pour  me  out  {echarme)  some  drink,  {de  heherl) — With  much  pleasure. — 
Cicero,  seeing  his  son-in-law,  who  was  very  short,  (pequeno^)  arrive 
(venir)  with  a long  sword  {espada  largo)  at  his  side,  (a  su  lado)  said, 
Who  has  fastened  (atado)  my  son-in-law  to  this  sword  ?” 


SIXTY-FIRST  LESSON. — Leccion  Sexagesima  primera. 


What  has  become  of  your  aunt  ? 

I do  not  know  what  has  become  of 
her. 

What  has  become  of  your  sisters  ? 

cannot  tell  you  what  has  become 
of  them. 


To  die,  to  lose  life 
i die,  thou  diest,  he  or  she  dies. 
Shall  or  will  you  die  ? 

[ shall  die. 


I Que  se  ha  hecho  de  la  senora  tin 
de  V.? 

Yo  no  s4  lo  que  se  ha  hecho  de  ella. 

I Que  se  ha  hecho  de  las  senoritas 
hermaiias  de  V.  ? 

Yo  no  puedo  decir  4.  V.  lo  que  so  ha 
hecho  de  ellas. 


Morir  *.  Morirse.  Perder  la  vida 
Muero,  mueres,  muere. 

I Morird  (or  se  morird)  V.  ? (See  Lee 
sonXLVI.) 

' Yo  morird.  Yo  me  morird. 


272 


SIXTY-FIRST  LESSOK, 


TIjat  man  died  this  morning,  and  his 
wife  died  also. 

This  man  is  d#^ad. 

Th^  woman  died  this  morning 


Ese  h ombre  murl6  (su  murid)  esi<* 
man  ana,  y su  mujer  se  muri(' 
(muri6)  tambiea 

Este  h ombre  esta  v^or  ha)  muerto. 

La  mujer  murid  (or  se  murid)  esta 
mahaiia.  (See  Lees.  XXXIII.) 


Wine  sells  well. 

Wine  will  sell  well  next  year. 

Tlmt  door  shuts  easily. 

That  window  does  not  open  easily. 

1 hat  picture  is  seen  far  off. 

Far  off,  from  afar. 

Winter  clothes  are  not  worn  in  sum- 
mer. 

That  is  not  said. 

That  cannot  be  comprehended. 

To  conceive,  to  comprehend. 

It  is  clear. 


According  to  circumstances. 
According  to. 

The  circumstance. 

That  is  according  to  circumstances. 
It  depends. 


1 t El  vino  se  vende  bien. 

I t El  vino  se  venderd.  bien  el  afi-j 
I prdxirno,  (or  el  aho  que  viene.) 
i t Esa  puerta  se  cierra  fdcilmente. 

I t Esa  ventana  no  se  abre  facilmejte 
t Ese  cuadro  (esa  piiitura)  se  ve  de 
lejos. 

De  lejos.  Desde  .djos. 
t La  ropa  de  invierno  no  se  usa  e 
el  verano. 
t Eso  no  se  dice. 

t Eso.no  se  concibe,  (comprendi } 
Concebir  *.  Comprender 
Es  claro.  Eso  es  claro. 


Segun  las  circunstancias. 
Segun.  Conforme  d. 

La  circunstancia. 
t Comforme  d.. 

Depende  de. 


Glad. 

Pleased. 

Sorry.  Displeased. 

Are  you  rich  ] 

I am. 

Are  the  women  handsome  ? 

They  are  ; they  are  rich  and  nano- 
some. 

Are  yon  from  Spain  ? 

I am. 

What  countrywoman  is  she? 

She  is  from  Spain. 

Would  you  be  sorry  if  you  were 
lich  ? 

I should  not  be  sorry  for  it. 

To  be  an$p'y  with  somebody 


Alegre. 

Contento 
Sentido.  Triste 
I Es  V.  rico  ? 

Si.  Soy  rico.  Si  lo  soy. 

I Son  hermosas  las  mujeres  ? 

Si  son,  (si  lo  son ;)  son  ricas  y he. 
mesas. 

I Es  V.  de  Espana  ? ^ Es  V.  Espauol ' 
Si.  Si  lo  soy.  Soy  espanol. 

I De  que  pais  es  ella  ? 

Es  de  Espana.  Es  espanol  a. 
t I Sentiria  V.  el  eer  rico  ? 

I Si  fuera  V.  rico,  lo  sentiria  7 
t Yo  no  lo  sentiria. 

Estar  enfadado  con  alguno. 
f Enfadarsp  con  alguno.  Enojarsf 


SIXTY- FIRST  LESSON. 


273 


I'c  be  angry  about  something. 

Wljat  are  you  angry  about  ? 

Are  you  sorry  for  having  done  it  ? 

I am  sorry  for  it. 

Honest.  Polite. 

Impolite. 

Polite,  courteous. 

Impolite,  uncivil. 

Happy  Lucky. 

Unhappy.  Unlucky. 

Easy 

Difficult. 

Useful. 

Useless. 


Is  it  useful  to  write  a good  deal  ? 

It  is  useful. 

Is  it  well  (right)  to  take  the  property 
of  others  1 

Others*  property^  (what  belongs  to 
others.) 

It  is  bad,  (wrong.) 

It  is  not  well,  (wrong.) 

Well,  right. 

Bad,  wrong. 


Of  what  use  is  that 

That  is  of  no  use. 

What  is  this  ? 

I do  not  know  what  it  is. 


1 t Enfadarse  de  algo. 

^ t ^ De  que  se  enfada  V.  ? 

) t i Que  le  enfada  d V.  ? 
t I Sieiite  V.  haberlo  heclio  ? 
t Lo  siento. 

Civil.  Cortes.  Politico 
Incivil.  Descortes.  Impolitico. 
Politico.  Cortes. 

Impolitico.  Descortes. 

Dichoso.  Feliz. 

Desdichado.  Infeliz  Desgrac'adt 
Facil. 

Dificil. 

Util. 

In  d til. 


I I Es  dtil  escribir  muchisiino  ? 

1 Es  dtil. 

I Es  justo  tomar  lo  ageno  ? 

I Es  bien  tomar  lo  que  es  de  otro  * 
Lo  ageno. 

Es  malo.  Es  injusto. 

No  es  bien.  Es  malo. 

I Bien.  Justo. 

' Malo.  Injusto. 


J I De  que  sirve  eso  ? 

( I Para  que  sirve  eso  ? 
De  iiada  sirve,  (eso.) 
Para  nada  sirve. 

I I Que  es  esto  ? 

I No  sd  lo  que  es. 


Wliat  is  your  name  ? 

My  name  is  Charles, 
fl^hat  do  you  call  this  in  Spanish  ? 
tiow  do  you  express  this  in  Spanish? 
What  is  that  called  ? 


r t [ Como  se  llama  V.  ? 

< I Cual  es  el  nombre  de  V.  ? 

( t Cual  (conio)  es  la  gracin  de  P*.  J 
I t Yo  me  llamo  Carlos. 

1 t I Como  se  llama  esto  en  espaiiol  ? 

I 1 1 Como  se  dice  esto  en  espahol  ? 

1 t I Como  se  llama  eso  ? 


George  the  Third. 
Charles  the  Seventh. 


Jorge  Tercero. 
Carlos  Sdptimo. 


274 


SIXTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


Oba.  After  tlie  Christian  name  of  a sovereign,  the  Spaniards 
.he  ordinal  numbers  without  the  article  as  far  as  the  tenth  of  the  same 
name,  after  which  they  use  either  the  cardinal  or  the  ordinal  number  with- 
out the  article. 


Louis  the  Fourteenth. 

Henry  the  Fourth. 

Charles  the  Fifth  spoke  several  Eu- 
ropean languages  fluently. 

Europe.  European. 

Fluently. 


Luis  Catorce. 

Henrique  Cuarto. 

Carlos  Quinto  hablaba  corriente- 
mente  varias  lenguas  Europeas. 
Europa.  El  Europeo. 
Corrientemente. 


Rather, 

Rather than. 

Rather  than  squander  my  money  I 
will  keep  it. 

To  keepj  (to  remain  with.) 

1 will  rather  pay  him  thac  go  there. 
I will  rather  burn  the  coat  than 
wear  it. 

He  has  arrived  sooner  than  I. 

A half-worn  coat. 

To  do  things  imperfectly. 


Mas  bien.  An^es.  Mejor  quA 
Mas  bien  que.  Antes  que. 

Antes  que  (mas  bien  que)  disipar  mi 
dinero  me  quedard  con  dl. 
t Quedarse  con.  Guardar 
Mas  bien  quiero  pagarle  quo  ir  alH. 
Mas  bien  quiero  quernar  la  casara 
que  usarla,  (ponermela.) 

Ha  llegado  mas  pronto  que  yo. 

Una  casaca  medio  usada. 

Hacer  las  cosas  imperfertamente. 
t Hacer  las  cosas  d medias 


EXERCISES. 

190. 

What  has  become  of  your  uncle  ? — I will  tell  you  what  has  become 
of  him. — Here  is  the  chair  upon  which  he  often  sat. — Is  he  dead  ? — 
He  is  dead. — When  did  he  die  ? — He  died  two  years  ago. — I am  very 
much  afflicted  {aflyido)  at  it. — Why  do  you  not  sit  down  ? — If  you 
will  stay  with  me  I will  sit  down ; but  if  you  go  I shall  go  along  with 
you. — What  has  become  of  your  aunt  ? — I do  not  know  what  has  be- 
come of  her. — Will  you  tell  me  v/hat  has  become  of  your  sister  ? — I 
will  tell  you  what  has  become  of  her. — Is  she  dead  ? — She  is  not  dead. 
— What  has  become  of  her  ? — She  is  gone  to  Vienna. — What  has  be- 
came of  your  sisters  ? — I cannot  tell  what  has  become  of  them,  for  I 
have  not  seen  them  these  two  years. — Are  your  parents  still  alive  ?— « 
They  are  dead. — How  long  is  it  since  your  cousin  (fern.)  died  ? — It  is 
six  months  since  she  died. — Did  the  wine  sell  well  last  year  ? — It  did 
not  sell  very  well ; but  jt  will  sell  better  next  year,  for  there  will  be  a 
great  deal,  and  it  will  not  be  dear. — Why  do  you  open  the  door  ? — Do 
you  not  see  how  it  smokes  here  ? — I see  it,  but  you  must  (deber) 
upen  the  window  instead  of  opening  the  door. — The  window  does  not 
open  easily ; that  is  the  reason  why  ! open  the  door. — When  will  you 


SIXTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


275 


^hat  ii  1 — i will  shut  it  as  soon  as  there  is  Qiaya)  (Obs,  A,  lossou 
LVIU.)  no  more  smoke. — Did  you  often  go  a-fishing  when  you  were  in 
that  couniry  ? — We  often  went  a-fishing  and  a-hunting. — If  you  will  gc 
with  us  into  tlie  country  you  wfill  see  my  father’s  castle. — You  are 
very  polite,  !Sir ; but  I have  seen  that  castle  already. 

191. 

Wlien  did  you  see  my  fatner’s  castle  ? — I saw  it  when  I was  travel- 
ling last  year.  It  is  a very  fine  castle,  and  is  seen  far  oft‘. — How  is 
iliat  said  ?— That  is  not  said.  That  cannot  be  comprehended. — Cannot 
every  thing  be  expressed  in  your  language  ? — Every  thing  can  be 
expressed,  but  not  as  in  yours. — Will  you  rise  early  to-morrow  ? — It 
will  depend  upon  circumstances ; if  I go  to  bed  early  I shall  rise  early, 
but  if  I go  to  bed  late  I shall  rise  late. — Will  you  love  my  children  ? — 
If  they  are  good  I shall  love  them. — Will  you  dine  with  us  to-morrow  ? 
— If  you  get  ready  Qiace  preparar)  the  food  I like  I shall  dine  with 
70U. — Have  you  already  read  the  letter  which  you  received  this  morn- 
ing ? — I have  not  opened  it  yet. — When  will  you  read  it  ?~I  shall 
read  it  as  soon  as  I have  (tenga)  time. — Of  what  use  is  that  ? — It  is  of 
no  use. — Why  have  you  picked  it  up  ? — I have  picked  it  up  in  order  to 
show  it  you. — Can  you  tell  me  what  it  is  ? — I cannot  tell  you,  for  I do 
not  know ; but  I will  ask  (preguntar)  my  brotlier,  who  will  tell  you. — 
Where  did  you  find  it  ? — I found  it  on  the  shore  of  the  river,  near  the 
wood. — Did  you  perceive  it  from  afar  ? — I had  no  need  to  perceive  it 
from  afar,  for  I passed  by  the  side  of  the  river. — Have  you  ever  seen 
such  a thing  ? — Never. — Is  it  useful  to  speak  much  ? — It  is  according 
to  circumstances  : if  one  wishes  to  learn  a foreign  {estrangerJ) 
language  it  is  useful  to  speak  a great  deal. — Is  it  as  useful  to  write  as 
to  speak  ? — It  is  more  useful  to  speak  than  to  write ; but  in  order  to 
earn  a foreign  language  one  must  do  both,  (lo  uno  y lo  otro,) — Is  it 
useful  to  write  all  that  one  says  ? — That  is  useless. 

192. 

Where  did  you  take  this  book  from  ? — I took  it  out  of  {del)  the  room 
of  your  friend,  (fern.) — Is  it  right  to  take  the  books  of  other  people  ? — 
It  is  not  right,  I know ; but  I wanted  it,  and  I hope  that  your  friend 
will  not  be  displeased,  for  I will  return  it  to  her  as  soon  as  I have 
read  {que  le  hay  a)  it. — What  is  your  name  ? — My  name  is  William. 
{Guillermo). — What  is  your  sister’s  name? — Her  name  is  Eleanor 
{liconor,) — Why  does  Charles  complain  of  his  sister  ? — Because  she 
Qas  taken  his  pens. — Of  whom  do  those  children  complain  ? — Francis 
{Francisco)  complains  of  Eleanor,  and  Eleanor  of  Francis. — Who  is 
right  ? — They  are  both  wrong ; for  Eleanor  wishes  to  take  Francis’s 
oooks,  and  Francis  Eleanor’s. — To  whom  have  you  lent  Cer\^antea 


276 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


works,  {las  obrasl) — I have  lent  the  first  volume  to  \v’ilhani  and  tht 
second  to  Louisa,  {Luisa.) — How  is  tliat  said  in  Spanish  ? — It  is  saio 
thus. — How  is  that  said  in  German  ? — That  is  not  said  in  German.— 
Has  the  tailor  brought  you  your  new  coat  ? — He  has  brought  it  me 
but  it  does  not  fit  (Lesson  XLVTII.)me  well. — Will  he  make  you 
another? — He  will  make  me  another;  for  rather  tlian.wear  it  I will 
give  it  ^ /viy,  (regalar.) — Will  you  use  that  horse  ? — I ^^se  it. 

— Why  will  you  not  use  it  ? — Because  it  does  not  suit  me. — Will  you 
pay  for  it  ? — I will  rather  pay  for  it  tlian  use  it. — To  whom  do  those 
fine  books  belong,  {de  quien  son  ?) — They  belong  to  William. — Who 
has  given  them  to  him  ? — His  father. — Will  he  read  them  ? — He  will 
tear  them  rather  than  read  them. — Who  has  told  you  that  ? — He  lias 
told  me  so  himself,  (el  mismo.) 

193. 

What  countrywoman  is  that  lady,  (seaora  1) — She  is  from  i^'rance. 
—Are  you  from  France  ? — No,  I am  from  Germany. — Why  do  you 
not  give  your  clothes  to  mend  ? — It  is  not  worth  while,  for  I must  have 
new  clothes. — Is  the  coat  which  you  wear  not  a good  one  ? — It  is  a 
half-worn  coat,  and  is  good  for  nothing. — Would  you  be  sorry  if  your 
mother  were  to  arrive  to-day  ? — I should  not  be  sorry  for  it. — Would 
your  sister  be  sorry  if  she  were  rich  ? — She  would  not  be  sorry  for  it. 
— Are  you  angry  with  any  one  ? — I am  angry  with  Louisa,  who  went 
to  the  opera  without  'telling  me  a word  of  it. — Where  were  you  when 
she  went  out  ? — I was  in  my  room. — I assure  you  that  she  is  very 
sorry  for  it ; for  had  she  known  that  you  w^re  in  your  room,  she 
would  have  called  you  in  order  to  take  you  along  with  her  to  the 
opera. — Charles  V.,  who  spoke  fluently  several  Luropean  languages, 
used  to  say,  (solia  decir,)  that  we  should  speak  ^ que  se  debia  hablar) 
Sprmish  with  the  gods,  Italian  with  our  friend  (fern.,)  French  with 
our  friend,  (mas.,)  German  with  soldiers,  English 'with  geese,  (gansos^) 
Hungarian  (hungaro)  with  horses,  and  Bohemian  (oohemio)  with  the 
devil,  (el  diahlo.) 


SIXTY-SECOND  LY^^SO^.—Lecdon  Sexagesima  segunda. 


As  tOy  (as  for.) 
As  to  me. 


I En  cuanto  a. 

\ Eh  cuanto  d mi. 
j For  lo  que  a mi  me  loca. 


Ohs.  A.  What  (lo  que)  is  generally  translated  qucj  or  que  cosa^  before 
the  ‘nfmitive. 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


277 


As  to  that,  I do  not  know  what  to 
say. 

i do  not  know  v/hat  to  do. 

[ do  not  know  wliere  to  go. 

He  does  not  know  what  to  answer. 
We  do  not  know  what  to  buy. 

To  die  of  a disease. 

She  died  of  the  smallpox. 

The  smallpox. 

The  fever. 

The  intermittent  fever. 

The  apoplexy, 
lie  had  a cold  fit. 

He  has  an  ague, 
tlis  fever  has  returned. 

He  has  been  struck  with  apoplexy. 

To  strike. 


En  cuanto  4 eso,  yo  no  s4  qiie  decir 

Yo  no  s^  que  (cosa)  hacer. 

Y o no  se  d donde  ir. 

El  no  sabe  que  (cosa)  responder. 

No  sabemos  que  (cosa)  comprar 

Morir  (morirse)  de  una  enfermedad 
Ella  murih  de  las  viruelas. 

Las  viruelas. 

Calentura.  Fiebre 
La  terciana. 

La  apoplegia. 

fil  tuvo  un  ataque  de  fiebre. 

El  tiene  calentura. 

Le  ha  vuelto  la  fiebre. 

El  ha  tenido  un  ataque  de  apoplogit 
t Le  ha  dado  una  apoplegia 
Herir.  Golpear  Dar 


Sure. 

I am  sure  of  that. 

I am  sure  that  she  has  arrived. 
I am  sure  of  it. 

Something  has  happened. 
Nothing  has  happened. 

What  has  happened  ? 

What  has  happened  to  her  ? 

She  had  an  accident. 

To  shed. 

To  pour  out. 

A tear. 

To  shed  tears. 

To  pour  out  some  drink. 

[ pour  out  some  drink  for  that  man. 
With  tears  in  his,  her,  our,  my  eyes 
Sweet.  Mild. 

Sour.  Acid. 

S>me  sweet  wjno. 

A mild  air. 

A mild  zephyr. 

A soft  sleep. 

?^othing  makes  life  more  agreeable 
than  tlie  society  of,  and  the  inter- 
course with  our  friends. 


Seguro.  Segura. 

Estoy  seguro  de  eso,  (de  ello.) 

Estoy  seguro  que  ella  ha  llegade. 
Estoy  seguro  de  ello. 

Algo  ha  sucedido. 

Nada  ha  sucedido. 
i Que  ha  sucedido  ? 

I Que  le  ha  sucedido  d ella  ? 

A ella  le  ha  sucedido  un  accidonte 

Derramar. 

Echar. 

Una  lagrima. 

Derramar  lagrimas. 

Echar  im  trago.  Echar  de  beber 
Echo  un  trago  d ese  hombre 
t Con  lagrimas  en  los  ojos. 

Dulce.  Apacible. 

Agrio.  Acido 
Vino  dulce. 

Un  semblante  apacible. 

Un  duloe  cdfiro. 

Un  dulce  sueno. 

Nada  hace  la  vida  mas  agradabla 
que  la  companfa  y el  trato  de  nu- 
estros  amigos. 


278 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON 


To  repair  to. 

1 0 repair  to  the  army,  to  one’s  regi- 
ment. 

An  army. 

A regiment 
I repaired  to  that  place 
He  repaired  there. 


Ir  d alguna  pane.  Volvcr  d 
Ir  al  ejercito,  volverse  k su  r©gt 
miento. 

Un  ejercito. 

Un  regimiento 
Fui  d ese  lugar. 

Fu^  allti 


To  cry.  To  scream.  To  shriek. 
To  help. 

The  help. 

I help  him  to  do  that. 

I help  you  to  write. 

^ will  help  you  to  work. 

To  cry  for  help. 


To  znquinr  after  some  one. 

Wih  you  have  the  goodness  to  pass 
mo  that  plate? 

'Vill  you  pass  me  that  plate,  if  you 
please  ? 

If  you  please. 

AlS  you  please.  Ai  your  pleasure. 

A.S  you  like. 

To  knocK  at  the  door 


To  hnsi  some  one 

To  distrust  one. 

Do  you  trust  that  man  ? 

( do  trust  him. 

He  trusts  me. 

Wo  must  not  trust  everybody. 

Everyboapi  (every  one.) 
Everybodyy  (all  the  world. 

To  laugh  at  something. 
I laugh  at  that. 

We  will  laugh  at  if 


Gritar.  Dar  gritos.  Chillar. 
Ayudar.  Socorrer 
El  socorro.  La  ayuda.  La  asislencla 
Le  ayudo  d hacer  eso 
Le  ayudo  d V.  d escribir. 

Le  ayudard  d V d trabajar 
Pedir  socorro  d voces. 


( Informarse  de  alguno. 

\ Preguntar  por. 

{I  Tendrd  V.  la  bondad  de  pasaime 
ese  plato  ? 

t I Me  hard  V.  el  favor  de  pasar  ese 
plato  ? 

SI  Gusta  V.  de  pasarme  ese  plato  ? 

Se  servird  V.  pasarme  ese  plato  ? 
I Si  V.  gusta. 

I Como  V.  guste,  (subj.) 

I Llamar  d la  puerta.  Tocar  d. 


C Confiarse  d {de)  alguno. 

< Tener  confianza  en  alguno 
Fiarse  de  alguno. 

Desconjiar  de, 

I Se  fia  V.  de  ese  hombre  ? 

Yo  me  fio  de  el. 

6l  se  fia  de  mi 

No  nos  debemos  fiar  dc  Icdo 
mundo. 

Cada  uno 
Todo  el  mundc 

' Reirse  de  algo. 
j Yo  me  rio  de  eso. 

I Nos  reirdmos  de  elk 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


279 


Do  you  laugh  at  that  ? 

I do  laugh  at  it. 

At  what  do  they  laugh  7 


I Se  rie  V de  eso  7 
Me  rio  de  ello. 

I De  que  se  rien  elios,  (ellas)  7 


Tt/  augh  tn  a personas  face. 

We  laughed  in  his  face. 

To  laugh  at,  to  deride  some  one 
I laugh  at  (deride)  you. 

Did  you  laugh  at  us  ? 

We  did  not  laugh  at  you. 


Reirse  de  uno  en  su3  barhas 
Reirse  de  uno  en  sus  bigotes. 

Nos  reimos  en  su  cara. 

Reirse  de  uno.  Burlarse  de  uno 
Me  rio  (me  burlo)  do  V. 

J i Se  rieron  VV.  de  nosotros? 

( ^ Se  han  reido  VV.  de  nosolros  7 

SNo  nos  reimos  de  VV. 

No  nos  hernos  reido  de  VV 


Full. 

A book  full  of  errors. 

To  afford. 

Can  you  udiord  to  buy  that  horse  ? 

^ can«ct  afford  it. 

. can  afford  it 


I Lleno. 

I Un  libro  llenc  Je  errores,  (yerros.) 

Tener  medios  (proporcion)  de. 
Poder. 

f I Tiene  V.  medios  de  comprar  ese 
< caballo  ? 

( I Puede  V.  comprar  ese  caballo  ? 

I No  tengo  medios.  No  puedo. 

I Tengo  proporcion.  Puedo. 


Wb'»  is  there  ? 

It  i.«»  I 
It  is  not  I. 

It  is  he. 

D is  not  he. 

Are  they  your  brothers  I 
It  is  they. 

It  is  not  they. 

Is  it  she  7 
It  is  she 
It  is  not  she. 

.^re  they  your  sisters  7 
It  is  they,  (fern.) 

It  is  not  they,  (fern.) 

It  is  I who  speak. 

It  is  they  who  laugh. 

Is  it  you  who  laugh? 

I»  is  thou  who  hast  done  it 


I Quien  estd  ahi  ? 

Yo.  Soy  yo.  Yo  soy. 

Yo  no  sov.  No  soy  yo. 

Es  6\.  El  es. 

Noes^l.  6l  no  es. 

I Son  ellos  los  hermanos  de  V ? 
Son  ellos.  Ellos  son. 

No  son  ellos.  Ellos  no  son 
I Es  ella  ? 

Ella  es. 

No  es  ella.  Ella  no  es. 

I Son  ellas  sus  hermanas  do  V 1 
Son  elleis.  Ellas  son. 

No  son  ellas.  Ellas  no  son 
t Yo  soy  quien  hablo. 
t Ellos  (ell2is)  son  quienes  rieu 
t ^ Es  V.  quien  so  rie  ? 
i t Tu  eres  quien  lo  ha  hecho 


280 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


It  is  you,  gentlemen,  who  have  said 
so,  (that.) 

We  learn  Spanish,  m / brother  and  I. 


t VV.,  Caballeros,  son  quhnes  ban 
dicho  eso,  (lo  han  dicho.) 

Mi  hermano  y yo  aprendemos  el 
pahol. 


Obs.  B.  In  Spanish,  when  a verb  lias  two  pronouns  for  a subject,  itagioea 
m the  plural  with  the  person  which  has  the  priority.  Example: — V.  y yo  !o 
haremos-— You  and  I will  do  it.  V.  y el  escribirdn  la  carta — You  and  he 
will  write  the  letter.  Td  y el  la  leeriis — Thou  and  he  will  read  it 


You  and  I will  go  into  country. 

You  and  he  will  stay  at  home. 

You  will  go  to  the  country,  and  I 
will  return  to  town. 

A lady. 

What  were  you  doing  when  your 
tutor  was  here  ? 

I was  doing  nothing. 

F said  nothing. 


I t V.  y yo  iremos  al  campo. 

V.  y el  se  queda.^an  en  casa. 

Fos  y el  os  quedareis  en  c<tsa. 

V.  ira  al  campo,  y yo  volverd  a la 
ciudad. 

Una  sehora. 

I Que  hacia  V.  ciiaiido  su  ayo  estaba 
aqui  ? 

Yo  no  hacia  nada. 

Yo  no  decia  nada 


EXERCISES. 

194. 

Of  what  illness  did  your  sister  die  ? — She  died  of  fever. — Hew  la 
your  brother  ? — IMj  brother  is  no  longer  living.  He  died  three  months 
ago. — I am  surprised  (soiyrendido)  at  it,  for  he  was  very  well  last 
summer  when  I was  in  the  country.  Of  what  did  he  die  ? — He  died 
of  apoplexy. — How  is  the  mother  of  your  friend  ? — She  is  not  well ; 
she  had  an  attack  of  ague  the  day  before  yesterday,  and  this  morning 
the  fever  las  returned. — Has  she  an  intermittent  fever? — I do  not 
know,  but  she  often  has  cold  fits. — What  has  become  of  the  woman 
whom  I saw  at  your  mother’s  ? — She  died  this  morning  of  apoplexy.— 
Do  your  scholars  learn  their  exercises  by  heart  ? — They  will  rather 
tear  them  than  learn  them  by  heart. — What  does  this  man  ask  me  for  ? 
— He  asks  you  for  the  money  which  you  owe  him. — If  he  will  repair 
to-morrow  morning  (manana  por  la  manana)  to  my  house  I will  pay 
him  what  I owe  him. — He  will  rather  lose  his  money  tlian  repair 
tliither. — Why  does  the  mother  of  our  old  servant  shed  tears  ? What 
has  happened  to  her  ? — She  sheds  tears  because  the  old  clergyman, 
{eclesidstico,)  her  friend,  who  was  so  very  good  to  her,  (qice  la  favorecia 
tanto^)  died  a few  days  ago. — Of  what  illness  did  he  die  ? — He  was 
Btmck  with  apoplexy. — Have  you  helped  your  father  to  write  his  Jei- 
tere? — I have  helped  him. — Will  you  help  me  to  work  when  we  go  to 
town  ? — will  help  you  to  work  if  j ^u  help  me  to  get  a livelihood. 


SIXTY-SECOKD  LESSON. 


281 


195. 

Have  you  inquired  after  the  merchant  who  sells  so  cheap  ?— I havr. 
iiquired  after  him,  but  nobody  could  tell  me  what  has  become  of  him. 
— Where  did  he  live  when  you  were  here  three  years  ano  ? — He  lived 
then  in  Charles-street,  No.  57. — How  do  you  like  (Lesson  XXiV.) 
tills  wine  ? — I like  it  very  well,  but  it  is  a little  sour. — How  does  your 
sister  like  those  apples,  (la  manzanal) — She  likes  them  very  well,  but 
she  says  that  they  are  a littie  too  sweet. — Will  you  have  the  goodness 
to  pass  that  plate  to  me  ? — With  much  pleasure. — Shall  I pass  these 
fishes  to  you  ? — I will  thank  you  to  (me  hard  V,  el  favcr)  pass  them 
to  me. — Shall  I pass  the  bread  to  your  sister  ? — You  will  oblige  her  by 
( V.  le  dard  gusto)  passing  it  to  her. — How  does  your  mother  like  oui 
food  ? — She  likes  it  very  well,  but  she  says  that  she  has  eaten  enough. 
— What  dost  thou  ask  me  for  ? — Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  (teuga 
V.  la  bondad)  give  me  a little  bit  (un  pedacilo)  of  that  mutton  ? — Will 
you  pass  me  the  bottle,  if  you  please  ? — Have  you  not  drunk  enough  ? 
— Not  yet,  for  1 am  still  thirsty. — Shall  I give  you  some  wine  ? — No  ; 
I like  cidei* better. — Why  do  you  not  eat  ? — I do  not  know  what  to  eat. 
— Who  knocks  at  the  door  ? — It  is  a foreigner. — Why  does  he  cry  ? — 
He  cries  because  a great  misfortune  has  happened  to  him. — What  has 
happened  to  you  ? — Nothing  has  happened  to  me. — Where  will  you  go 
to  this  evening  ? — I do  not  know  where  to  go. — Where  will  your 
brothers  go  to  ? — I do  not  know  where  they  will  go  to ; as  for  me,  I 
shall  go  to  the  theatre. — Why  do  you  go  to  town  ? — I go  thither  in 
order  to  purchase  some  books.  Will  you  go  thither  with  me  ? — I will 
go  with  you,  but  I do  not  know  what  to  do  there. 

196. 

Must  I sell  to  that  man  on  credit  ? — You  may  (poder)  sell  to  him,  but 
not  on  credit ; you  must  not  trust  him,  for  he  will  not  pay  you. — Has  he 
already  deceived  anybody  ? — He  has  already  deceived  several  merchants 
who  have  trusted  him. — Must  I trust  those  ladies  ? — You  may  trust 
them ; but  as  to  me  I shall  not  trust  them,  for  I have  often  been  deceived 
oy  (par  las)  women,  and  that  is  the  reason  why  I say : We  must 
not  trust  everybody. — Do  those  merchants  trust  you  ? — They  trust  me, 
irid  I trust  them. — Whom  do  those  gentlemen  laugh  at  ? — They  laugh 
at  those  ladies  who  wear  red  gowns  (el  trage)  with  yellow  ribbons.— 
Why  do  those  people  laugh  at  us  ? — They  laugh  at  us  because  we 
speak  badly. — Ought  we  to  laugh  at  persons  who  speak  badly  ? — We 
ought  not  to  laugh  at  them  ; we  ought,  on  the  contrary,  to  listen  to 
tliem,  and  if  they  make  blunders,  (faltas^)  we  ought  to  correct  them  to 
viiem. — What  are  you  laughing  at  ? — I am  laughing  at  your  hat : how 
long  (cuanto  hace  que)  have  you  been  wearing  it  so  large  ? — Since  \ 


SIXTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


282 

returned  from  Germany. — Can  you  afford  to  buy  a horse  and  a car 
riage  ? — I can  afford  it. — Can  your  brother  afford  to  buy  that  large 
nouse  ? — He  cannot  afford  it. — Will  your  cousin  buy  that  horse  ? — Ho 
will  buy  it,  if  it  pleases  (convenir*)  him. — Have  you  received  my 
letter  ? — I have  received  it  with  much  pleasure.  I have  shown  it  to 
my  Spanish  master,  who  was  surprised,  for  there  was  not  a single 
fault  in  it. — Have  you  already  received  Calderon’s  and  Moratin's 
works  ? — I have  received  those  of  Moratin  ; as  to  those  of  Calderon,  I 
hope  to  receive  them  next  week. 

197. 

Is  it  thou,  Charles,  who  hast  soiled  my  book  ? — It  is  not  I,  it  iS  ycur 
little  sister  who  has  soiled  it. — Who  has  broken  my  fine  inkstand  ? — 
It  is  I who  have  broken  it. — Is  it  you  who  have  spoken  of  me  ? — It  is 
we  who  have  spoken  of  you,  but  we  have  said  of  you  nothing  but  good, 
{que  no  sea  bueno.) — Who  knocks  at  the  door  ?— It  is  I,  will  you  open 
it  ? — What  do  you  want,  (desear?) — I come  to  ask  you  for  the  morey 
which  you  owe  me,  and  the  books  which  I lent  you. — If  yofl  will  have 
the  goodness  to  come  to  me  to-morrow  I will  return  both  to  you. — 
Is  it  your  sister  who  is  playing  on  the  piano  ? — It  is  not  she. — 
Who  is  it  ? — It  is  my  cousin,  (fern.) — Is  it  your  sisters  who  are 
coming  ? — It  is  they. — Is  it  your  neighbors  (fern.)  who  are  laughing 
at  you  ? — They  are  not  our  neighbors. — Who  are  they  ? — They  are 
the  daughters  of  the  countess  whose  brother  has  bought  your  house.— 
Are  they  the  ladies  you  have  spoken  of  to  me  ? — They  are. — Shall  you 
learn  Spanish  ? — My  brother  and  I will  learn  it. — Shall  we  go  to  the 
country  to-morrow  ? — I shall  go  to  the  country,  and  you  will  remain 
in  town. — Shall  my  sister  and  I go  to  the  opera  ? — You  and  she  will 
remain  at  home,  and  your  brother  will  go  to  the  opera. — What  did  you 
say  when  your  tutor  was  scolding  you  ? — I said  nothing  because  I had 
nothing  to  say,  for  I had  not  done  my  task,  and  he  was  in  the  right  lo 
scold  me. — What  were  you  doing  while  he  was  out  ? — I was  playing 
on  tlie  violin,  instead  of  doing  what  he  had  given  me  to  do. — What  has 
my  brotlier  told  you  ? — He  has  told  me  that  he  would  be  the  happiesi 
man  in  the  (del)  world,  if  he  knew  the  Spanish  language,  one  of  the 
most  useful  of  all  languages  for  tne  Americans  in  the  present  times. 


SIXTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


283 


SIXTY-THIRD  LEgSON.- 

To  get  into  a had  scrape. 

To  get  out  of  a had  scrapt,. 

;rot  out  of  the  scrape. 

I ’ll  at  man  is  ever  getting  into  bad 
6<!rapes,  but  he  always  gets  out  of 
them  again. 


•Leccion  Sexagesima  tercera. 

Caer  en  enredo,  (empeiio.) 

Meterse  en  enredos,  {inaraiias.) 
Salir  de  enredos,  (empenos.) 

He  salido  del  enredo,  (del  lance.) 

Ese  hombre  cae  siempre  en  enrod^«., 
poro  siempre  sale  de  ellos. 


Between,  amongst,  amidst. 

To  make  some  onc^s  acquaintance. 

To  become  acquainted  with  some- 
body. 

I have  made  his  or  her  acquaint-^ 
ance.  I 

1 have  become  acquainted  with  him  I 
or  her.  J 


Entre. 

Entablar  (hacer)  conocimiento  con 
alguno. 

Tener  trato  con  alguno. 

He  entablado  conocimiento  con  6\, 
(con  ella.) 

He  hecho  amistad  con  61,  (con  ella.) 


To  be  acquainted  with. 
Are  you  acquainted  with  him,  (her  ?) 
I do  know  him,  (her.) 

The  acquaintance. 

He  is  an  acquaintance  of  mine. 

She  is  my  acquaintance. 

He  is  not  a friend,  he  is  but  an  ac- 
quaintance. 


Conocer.  (See  verbs  in  cer.) 

I Le  conoce  V. ? [La  conoce  V.  1 
Yo  le  (la)  conozco.  Le  trato. 

El  conocido.  La  conocida. 

Es  un  conocido  mio. 

Es  conocida  mia. 

No  es  amigo,  solo  es  conocido  mio. 


Ohs.  A.  When  to  know  means  to  he  acquainted  with,  it  is  rendered  in 
Spanish  by  conocer,  but  in  all  other  cases  it  is  rendered  by  saber.  Exam- 
ple : — I know  that  gentleman  (that  lady) — Yo  conozco  d ese  caballero,  (d  esa 
sehora.)  I know  my  lesson — Yo  se  mi  leccion.  I know  what  you  wish  to 
say — Yo  se  lo  que  V.  quiere  decir. 


To  enjoy. 

Do  you  enjoy  good  health  ? 
To  be  well. 

She  is  well. 

To  imagine. 


Gozar. 

I Goza  V.  de  una  buena  salud  ? 
Estar  bueno. 

Ella  estd  buena 
Imaginar  Imaginarse. 


Fellow-creatures. 

Fellow,  (match.) 

He  has  not  his  equal,  or  his  match. 


I Criaturas  de  la  misma  especie. 

I Companero.  Companera.  Igual 
^ 6l  no  tiene  companero,  (semejante.' 
( El  es  sin  par.  No  tiene  par. 


284 


SIXTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


To  resemble  some  one. 

To  look  like  some  one. 

That  man  resembles  my  brother. 
That  beer  looks  like  water. 

Each  other. 

We  resemble  each  other. 

I’hey  do  not  resemble  each  ( the- 
Tho  two  brothers  love  each  other. 

Are  you  pleased  with  each  other  ? 

Wt  are. 

Asy  or  as  well  as. 


The  appearance,  the  countenance. 

To  show  a disposition  to. 

That  man  whom  you  see  shows  a 
desire  to  approach  us. 

To  look  'pleased  with  some  one. 
To  look  cross  at  some  one 
When  I go  to  see  that  man,  instead 
of  receiving  me  with  pleasure,  he 
looks  displeased. 

A good-looking  man. 

A bad-looking  man. 

Bad-looking  people,  or  folks. 

To  go  to  see  some  one. 

To  pay  some  one  a visit 
To  frequent  a place. 

To  frequent  societies, 
r 5 associate  with  some  one. 


) Parecerse  d uno.  Parecet 
J Aseme^arse  d uno, 
j Ese  hombre  se  parece  d mi 
I Esa  cerveza  oarece  agua, 

; El  uno  el  otro  Uno  d oiro. 

Nos  [)arecernos  el  uno  a!  otro. 

No  se  parecen  el  uno  al  otro. 

Los  dcs  hermanos  se  aman  mo  i 
otro. 

I Estan  VV.  satisfechos  el  uno  del 
otro,  (or  uno  de  otro)  ? 

Si.  Estamos,  (or  .o  estamos.) 

Como.  Asi  como.  Tan  bien — como 

SLa  apariencia.  El  semblante. 

La  cara.  El  ademan. 

^ Manifestar  una  intencion  de. 

I Farecer  deseoso  de. 

Ese  hombre  que  V.  ve  parece  deseoso 
de  acercarse  4 nosotros. 
t Mostrar  (haccr)  buena  cara. 
t Mostrar  (hacer)  mala  cara. 
Cuando  voy  d ver  d ese  hombre,  en 
vez  de  recibirme  con  gusto,  mo 
muestra  (me  pone)  mala  cara. 

Un  hombre  de  buen  parecer,  (de 
buena  traza.) 

Un  hombre  de  mal  parecer,  (de  mala 
traza.) 

Gente  de  mala  traza. 

Ir  d ver  d alguno. 

Ilacer  una  visita  d aignna 
Frecuontar  un  parage.  Concurrir  & 
Concurrir  d tertulias. 

Frecuentar  d uno. 


To  look  likcy  to  appear. 
How  does  he  look  ? 

He  looks  gay  (sad,  contented.) 

Vou  appear  very  well. 

Ton  look  like  a doctor. 


I Tener  semblante.  Parecer. 

1 + i Que  semblante  iiene  ? 

! r Tiene  semblante  alegre, 

I contento.) 

I t V.  tiene  muy  buen  semblante. 
J t V.  parece  mddico. 

\ V tiene  traza  de  medico. 


SIXTY -THIRD  LESSON. 


285 


She  looks  (appears  to  be)  angry. 
They  look  (appear)  contented. 

To  look  good,  (to  appear  to  be  good ) 
To  drink  to  some  one. 

To  drink  some  one’s  health, 
f drink  your  health. 


t Parece  que  ella  esta  onfadada. 
Parecen  contentos. 

Parecer  bueno. 

I Prindar  d alguno. 
j Beber  d la  salud  de  alguno. 

I Yc  bebo  d la  salud  de  V 


It  is  all  over  with  me. 
It  is  all  over. 


I t Acabdse  todo  (para  ml)  para  con- 
mi  go. 

I t Acabdse. 


( Herir  d uno  en  el  alma. 

To  hurt  some  cue’s  feelings.  ^ ^ 

You  have  hurt  that  man’s  feelings.  | V ha  herido  d ese  homore  en  el 

I alma. 

Obs.  B.  The  nouns  alma,  soul  ; agua,  water  ; dguila,  eagle  ; acta,  act, 
or  record  ; ala,  wing  ; ave,  bird  ; ama,  the  mistress  of  a house,  or  house- 
keeper ; ancla,  anchor ; arma,  weapon,  and  a few  others,  though  feminiiio, 
require  the  masculine  article  ; but  only  in  the  singular  number,  and  when 
they  are  immediately  preceded  by  it ; as.  The  honest  housekeeper  said  the 
same : Lo  tmsmo  dijo  el  ama — (D.  Quixote,  ch.  6.)  The  good  mistress  re- 
ceived them  ; La  buena  ama  los  recibio.  There  are  those  who  drink  the 
delicious  waters  of  the  celebrated  Xantus : Alii  estan  los  que  beben  las 
dulces  aguas  del  famoso  Xanto — (D.  Quixote,  ch.  18.) 


A place. 

I know  a good  place  to  swim  in. 


Un  lugar.  Un  parage.  Un  sitio. 
Conozco  un  buen  sitio  para  nadar 


To  experience,  to  undergo, 

1 have  experienced  a great  many 
misfortunes. 

To  suffer. 

Dost  thou  sulFor  ? 

I do  suffer.  ' 

He  suffers. 

To  feel  a pain  in  one’s  head  or 
foot. 

I fell  a pain  in  my  eye 

To  neglect. 

To  yield. 

SVe  must  yield  to  necessity 


Experimentar.  Padecer 
Pasar  por. 

He  padecido  muchos  infortunios. 
He  pasado  por  muchas  desgracias 
Sufrir.  Padecer. 

I Sufres  (padeces)  tii  ? — 

Yo  padezco.  Yo  sufro. 

El  sufre.  El  padece 
\ Tener  dolor  de  cabeza. 

( Padecer  de  la  cabeza  (del  pie.) 
f He  padecido  de  los  ojos> 

He  tenido  mal  de  ojos 
Descuidar  de 

Ceder.  Rendirse.  Sujetarse 
t Se  debe  ceder  d la  nocesidad. 


286 


SIXTY-THIRD  LESSOTs". 


To  spring  forward. 

riie  cat  springs  upon  the  rat. 

To  leap  on  horseback. 

^n  increase,  an  augmentation 

For  more  bad  luck. 


For  more  good  luck 

For  more  bad  luck  I have  lost  my 
purse 


To  lose  one’s  wits. 


Fhat  man  has  lost  his  wits,  and  he 
does  not  know  what  to  do. 


Saliar.  Abalanzarsa  d. 

Echarse  sohre. 

El  gato  se  abalanza  ^ la  rata. 

Saltar  sobre  un  caballo. 

Aumento.  Colmo.  Por  mayo* 

For  colmo  de  la  desgracia. 

Por  mayor  desgracia. 

Para  colmo  de  la  desgracia 
Para  colmo  de  la  dicha. 

Por  colmo  de  la  dicha 
Por  mayor  dicha. 

Por  mayor  desgracia  he  perdido  mi 
bolsa. 


Perder  la  chabeta,  (el  juicio.) 

Perder  la  cabeza. 

Irsele  d uno  la  cabeza. 

Ese  hombre  ha  perdido  la  : abeza,  (e 
juicio,)  y no  sabe  quo  hacer. 

A ese  hombre  se  le  ha  ido  la  cabeza, 
y no  sabe  que  hacer. 


^ Por  fuerza.  Positivamento. 

) A toda  fuerza.  Absolutamente. 

I Ese  hombre  quiere  absolutamente 
I (por  fuerza)  prestarme  dinero. 


Obstinately,  by  all  means. 

That  man  wishes  by  all  means  to 
lend  mo  money. 

To  follow. 

I follow,  thou  followest,  he  follows. 
To  pursue. 

To  preserve,  to  save. 


Seguir  * 

Sigo.  Sigues.  Sigue. 

Per  seguir.  (Conj.  like  Seguir., 
Preservar.  Ahorrar 


EXERCISES. 

198. 

Why  do  you  associate  with  those  people  ? — I associate  with  them 
t>ecause  they  are  useful  to  me. — If  you  continue  to  associate  with  them 
you  will  get  into  bad  scrapes,  for  tney  have  mai^y  enemies. — ^IIcw 
does  your  cousin  conduct  himself? — He  does  not  conduct  himself  very 
well,  for  he  is  always  getting  into  some  bad  scrape,  (or  other.) — Do 
you  not  sometimes  get  into  bad  scrapes  ? — It  is  true  (verdad)  that  1 
sometimes  get  into  them,  but  I always  get  out  of  them  again. — Do 
you  see  those  men  who  seem  desirous  of  approaching  us  7 — I do  see 
ihem,  but  I do  not  fear  them,  {temer,)  for  they  hurt  nobody. — We  must 
go  away,  (retirarrios,)  for  I do  not  like  to  mix  with  people  whom  I do 


SIXTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


287 


aol  know. — I beg  of  you  not  to  be  afraid  of  them,  for  I perceive  niy 
ancle  among  them. — Do  you  know  a good  place  to  swim  in  ? — I know 
one. — Where  is  it  ? — On  t}>sit  side  (Lesson  XXXVIII.)  of  the  river, 
behind  the  wood,  {el  bosque,)  ne{\r  the  high  road,  (el  camino  real.) — 
When  shall  we  go  to  swim? — This  evening,  if  you  like. — Will  you 
wait  for  me  before  the  city  gate  ? — I shall  wait  for  you  there  ; but  I 
Deg  of  you  not  to  forget  it. — You  know  that  I never  forget  my  prom- 
ises.— Where  did  you  become  acquainted  with  that  lady  ? — I became 
acquainted  with  her  at  the  house  of  one  of  my  relations. — Why  does 
your  cousin  ask  me  for  (Lesson  XLI.)  money  and  books  ? — Because 
l»e  is  a fool ; of  me,  (a  mi,)  who  am  his  nearest  relation,  (su  mas  ctr- 
cano  pariente,)  and  his  best  friend,  he  asks  nothing. — Why  did  you 
not  come  to  dinner  ? — I have  been  hindered,  but  you  have  been  able 
to  dine  without  me. — Do  you  think  that  we  shall  not  dine,  if  you  can- 
not come  ? — How  long  Qiasta  que  hora)  did  yon  wait  for  me  ? — We 
waited  for  you  till  a quarter  past  seven,  and  as  you  did  not  come 
we  dined  without  you. — Have  you  drunk  my  health  ? — We  have  drunk 
vours,  and  that  of  your  parents. 

199. 

How  Qoes  your  uncle  look,  (que  semblante  ?) — He  looks  very  gay, 
for  he  is  much  pleased  with  his  children. — Do  his  friends  look  as  gay 
as  he  ? — They,  on  the  contrary,  look  sad,  because  they  are  discontented. 
My  uncle  has  no  money,  and  is  always  contented,  and  his  friends, 
who  have  a good  deal  (of  it,)  are  scarcely  ever  so. — Do  you  like  your 
sister  ? — I like  her  much,  and  as  she  is  very  good-natured  (es  muy 
carihosa)  to  (con)  me  I am  so  to  her ; but  how  do  you  like  yours  ? — We 
love  each  other,  because  we  are  pleased  with  each  other. — A certain 
(cierto)  man  liked  much  wine,  but  he  found  in  it  (el)  two  bad  qualities. 
“ If  I put  water  to  it,”  said  he,  “ I spoil  it ; and  if  I do  not  put  any  to 
it,  it  spoils  me.” — Does  your  cousin  resemble  you  ? — He  resembles 
me. — Do  your  sisters  resemble  each  other  ? — They  do  not  resemble 
each  other ; for  the  elder  (mayor)  is  idle  and  naughty,  and  the  youngei 
(la  menor)  assiduous  and  good-natured  towards  everybody. — How  is  your 
aunt  ? — She  is  very  well. — Does  your  mother  enjoy  good  health  ? — She 
imagines  she  enjoys  good  health,  but  I believe  she  is  mistaken,  for  she 
has  had  a bad  cough  these  six  months  of  which  (de  la  cual)  she  cannot 
get  rid. — Is  that  man  angry  with  you  ? — I think  he  is  angry  witli  me 
because  I do  not  go  to  see  him : but  I do  not  like  to  go  to  his  house, 
for  when  I go  to  him,  instead  of  receiving  me  with  pleasure,  he  looks 
displeased. — You  must  not  believe  that ; he  is  not  angry  with  you,  foi 
be  is  not  so  bad  (malo)  as  he  looks,  (parece.)  He  is  the  best  man  in 
die  world  ; but  one  must  know  him  in  order  to  appreciate  him.— There 


288 


SIXTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


is  a great  difference  {la  diferencia)  between  you  and  him,  {el ;)  you  look 
pleased  with  all  those  who  come  to  see  you,  and  he  looks  cross  at  them. 


Is  it  right  to  laugh  thus  at  everybody  ? — If  I laugh  at  your  coat  I do 
not  laugh  at  everybody. — Does  your  son  resemble  any  one  ? — He 
resembles  no  one. — Why  do  you  not  drink  ? — I do  not  know  what  to 
drink,  for  I like  good  wine,  and  yours  looks  like  vinegar. — If  you  wish 
to  have  some  other  I shall  go  down  (bajar)  into  the  cellar  to  fetch  you 
some. — You  are  too  polite,  Sir,  I shall  drink  no  more  to-day. — Have 
you  known  my  father  long  ? — I have  known  him  long,  for  I made  his 
acquaintance  when  I was  yet  at  school.  We  often  worked  for  one 
another,  and  we  loved  each  other  like  brothers. — I believe  it,  for  you 
resemble  each  other. — When  I had  not  done  my  exercises  he  did  them 
for  me,  and  when  he  had  not  done  his  I did  them  for  him. — Why  does 
your  father  send  for  the  physician  ? — He  is  ill,  and  as  {y  coma)  the 
physician  does  not  come  he  sends  for  him. — Ah,  {Ay^)  it  is  all  over 
with  me  ! — But,  bless  me,  {Dios  mio !)  why  do  you  cry  thus  ? — I have 
been  robbed  (Obs.  A,  Lesson  XLV.)  of  my  gold  rings,  Qa  soiiija  de  oro,} 
my  best  clothes,  and  all  my  money  ; that  is  the  reason  why  I cry. — 
Do  not  make  {no  haga  V.)  so  much  noise,  for  it  is  we  who  have  taken 
them  all,  in  order  to  teach  you  to  take  better  care  {de  cuidar  mfytrr, 
Lesson  L.)  of  your  things,  {cosas,)  and  to  shut  the  door  of  your 
room  when  you  go  out. — Why  do  you  look  so  sad  ? — I have  experienced 
great  misfortunes  ; after  having  lost  all  my  money  I was  beaten  by 
bad-looking  men ; and  to  my  still  greater  ill-luck,  I hear  that  my  good 
uncle,  whom  I love  so  much,  has  been  struck  with  apoplexy. — You 
must  not  afflict  yourself  (no  se  ajUja  F.)  so  much,  for  you  know  that 
we  must  yield  to  necessity. 


SIXTY-FOURTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Sexagesima  cuarta, 

Obs.  A.  How,  how  much,  and  how  many,  in  exclamatory  sentencoo,  are 
translated  by  cuan  before  adjectives,  and  by  que  de,  cuanto,  or  cuanios  befort^ 
nouns 


200. 


How  good  you  are ! 


How  ! 


; Cuanta  bondad  tiene  V. ! 
; Cuan  necio  es  ! 

; Cuan  necia  es  cUa  ! 


Hew  foolish  he  is  ! 
How  foolish  she  is  . 


SIXTY- FOURTH  LESSON. 


289 


llo  A rich  that  man  is ! 

flow  handsome  that  woman  is ! 

flow  much  kindness  you  have 
me  ! 

H:)W  many  obligations  I arn  under 
to  you  I 

To  he  under  obligations  to  some  one. 

I am  under  many  obligations  to  him. 

Hdw  many  people ! 

How  happy  you  are  ! 

>Iow  much  wealth  that  man  has  ! 

How  much  money  that  man  has 
spent  in  his  life  I 


To  be  obliged  to  some  one  for  some- 
thing. 

To  be  indebted  to  some  one  for  some- 
thing. 

? am  indebted  to  him  for  it. 

To  thank. 

To  thank  some  one  for  something. 

I thank  you  for  the  trouble  you  have 
taken  tor  me. 


; Cuan  rico  es  ese  hombre 
; Que  de  riquezas  tieno  ese  hombre  ! 
; Cuantas  riquezas  tiene  ese  hombre  i 
; Cuan  hermosa  es  esa  sehora ! 
t ; Que  de  bondad  tiene  V.  para  ml ! 
t / Cuanta  es  la  bondad  de  V.  para 
conrnigo  ! 

; Que  de  obligaciones  le  debo  yo  it 

V.! 

Deber  obligaciones. 

Tcner  obligaciones 
Estar  obligado  d uno. 

Le  debo  (le  tengo)  muchas  obi  gu- 
ciones. 

Le  estoy  muy  obligado. 

; Que  de  gente  I ; Cuanta  gente  ! 

; Cuantos  / 

; Cuan  dichoso  es  V. ! 

; Que  de  riquezas  tiene  ese  hombre  i 
; Que  de  dinero  ha  gastado  ese  hon> 
bre  en  su  vida  I 


Agradeedrselo  d uno 
Estimdrselo  d,  uno. 

Deberle  algo  d uno 

Se  lo  debo  d 61. 

Agradecer.  Dar  gracias. 
Agradecerselo  d uno. 

Yo  le  agradezco  d V.  el  trabajo  qns 
se  ha  tornado  por  mi. 


I 


Is  there  any  thing  more  grand  ? 

[s  there  any  thing  more  cruel  ? 

Is  there  any  thing  more  wicked  ? 

Can  any  thing  be  more  handsome  ? 


I Que  cosa  hay  mas  grande  ? 

I Que  cosa  hay  mas  cruel  ? 

I Que  cosa  peor  hay,  (mas  mala 
hay)  ? 

I Que  cosa  mas  hermosa  puede  ha* 
ber  ? 


How  large  ? 
How  high? 
How  deep? 


Of  what  size  ? 
Of  what  height  ? 
Of  what  depth  ? 


I De  que  tamaho  ? 

I De  que  alto  V i De  que  aitura  ? 
I De  que  profuiididad  ? 


In  speaking  of  dimension  the  adjective  is  more  generally  used  than  ih? 
^uDstaniive. 


13 


290 


SIXTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


Oh3.  B When  speaking  of  dim 
when  the  English  use  the  verb  to 
the  noun  or  adjective  of  dimension. 

Of  what  height  is  her  house  ? 
ft  is  nearly  fifty  feet  high. 

Our  house  is  thirty  feet  broad. 

That  table  is  six  feet  long. 

That  river  is  twentj  feet  deep. 

The  size. 

Of  what  size  is  that  man  ? 

How  was  that  child  dressed  ? 

He  was  dressed  in  green. 

The  man  with  the  blue  coat. 

The  woman  with  the  red  gown. 


True 

Is  it  true  that  his  house  is  burnt? 
It  is  true. 

It  is  not  (true.) 

Is  it  not  (true  ?) 

Perhaps. 

I shall  perhaps  go  there. 

To  share.  To  divide. 


ision,  we  use  in  Spanish  the  verb 
j ; and  the  preposition  de  stands  before 

r t i Cuanto  tiene  de  alto(de  altura)  ia 
casa  de  ella  ? 

f ^ Que  air’tm*a  tiene  la  casa  de  ella  ? 
t Tiene  cerca  de  cincuenta  pies  do 
alto,  (de  altura.) 

t Nuestra  casa  tiene  trienta  pi6s  de 
I ancho,  (de  anciiura.) 

t Esa  mesa  tiene  seis  pids  de  largo, 
I (de  largura.) 

t Ese  rio  tiene  veinte  pids  de  profun- 
do,  (de  profundidad.) 

El  tamano.  El  talle.  La  estaturfc 
t I Que  tamano  tiene  ese  hombre  ? 

I De  que  tamano  es  ese  hombre  ? 

I Como  estaba  vestido  ese  nino  ? 
t Estaba  vestido  de  verde. 
t El  hombre  de  la  casaca  azul. 
t La  mujer  del  vestido  encarnado. 


Verdad. 

I Es  verdad  que  su  casa  se  haquemado'j 
Es  verdad 
No  es  verdad. 
i No  es  verdad? 

Quizd.  Quizas.  Acaso. 

For  ventura.  Tal  vez. 

Quizd  ird  alld. 

Partir.  Dividir.  Participar 


Whose  ? 

Whose  horse  is  this  ? 

It  is  mine.  It  belongs  to  me. 

IV  hose  horses  are  these  ? 

They  are  mine.  They  belong  to  :ne. 
Whose  house  is  that? 

It  is  mine.  It  belongs  to  me 
Whose  houses  are  these  ? 

They  are  mine  Tliey  belong  to  mOf 


I De  quien  ? (See  Lessons  XXI  and 
XXIX.) 

De  quien  es  ese  caballo  ? 

Es  mio 

I De  quien  son  estos  cabalU >3  ? 

Son  mios. 

I De  quien  es  esa  casa  ? 

Es  mieu  Me  pertenece. 

I De  quien  soi.  estas  casas  { 

Son  mias.  t Son  de  mi  propiedif^ 


SIXTY-FOURTH  LESSON, 


291 


To  run  up. 

Many  men  had  nin  up ; but  instead 
of  extinguishing  the  fire,  they  set 
to  plundering. 

To  run  to  the  assistance  of  some  one. 

To  save.  To  deliver. 

To  save  anybody’s  life. 

To  plunder.  To  rob. 

To  set  about  something. 

Have  they  succeeded  in  extinguish- 
ing the  fire  ? 

They  have  succeeded  in  it. 

The  watch  indicates  the  hours. 

To  indicate.  To  mark. 


Acudir.  Correr  d 
Much  os  hombres  habian  acudido; 
pero  en  vez  de  apagar  el  fuego,  at' 
pusieron  d.  saquear. 

Acudir  d socorrer  d alguno. 

Salvar.  Lihertar. 

Salvar  la  vida  d alguno. 

Pillar.  Saquear.  Robar. 

Ponerse  d. 

I Han  logrado  apagar  el  fuego  ? 

Lo  han  logrado. 

El  reloj  senala  (apunta)  la  bora. 
Indicar.  Senalar.  Marcar 


To  quarrel. 

To  quarrel  with  one.  ^ 

To  dispute  (to  contend)  about  some- 
thing. 

About  what  are  these  people  dispu- 
ting? 

They  are  disputing  about  who  shall 
go  first. 

Thus.  So. 

To  be  ignorant  ofy  (not  to  know.) 
The  day  before. 

The  day  before  that  day  was  Satur- 
day. 


Rehir  *.  Pelcar 

Renir  con  alguno. 

Disputar  (altercar)  sobre  algo 

I Acerca  do  que  (sobre  que)  se  d ispn- 
tan  estas  gentes  ? 

Se  disputan  sobre  quien  se  ird  pri- 
mero. 

A SI.  De  esta  manera. 

Ignorar.  (No  saber.) 

El  dia  antes.  La  vispera. 

El  dia  dntes  de  aquel  dia  era  un 
Sdbado. 

La  vispera  de  aquel  dia  era  un  Sd- 
bado. 


The  day  before  Sunday  is  Saturday.  I t La  vispera  del  Domingo  es  el  Sd- 

1 bado. 


EXERCISES. 

201. 

Can  you  not  get  rid  of  that  man  ? (Lesson  LIII.) — I cannot  get  rid  of 
him,  for  he  wil.  absolutely  follow  me. — Has  he  not  lost  his  wits  ? — It 
may  be,  (puede  ser.) — What  does  he  ask  you  for  ? — He  wishes  to  sell 
me  a horse  \yhich  I do  not  want. — Whose  houses  are  those? — Thcv 
are  mine. — Do  these  pens  belong  to  you  ? — No,  they  belong  to  my 
sister. — Are  those  the  pens  with  which  she  writes  so  well  ? — Tliey 
vre  tlie  same. — Whose  gun  is  this  ? — It  is  my  father’s. — -Are  these 


292 


SIXTF-FOURTH  LESSON. 


books  your  sister’s  ? — They  are  hers. — Whose  carnage  is  this  ?-  -It  is 
mine. — Which  is  the  man  of  whom  you  complain  ? — It  is  he  (el  que) 
who  wears  a red  coat. — “ What  is  ^he  difference  (la  diferencia)  between 
a watch  and  me  ?”  inquired  (p'egunto)  a lady  of  a young  officer. — 
“My  lady,”  replied  he,  (respondio  este,)  “a  watch  marks  the  hours, 
and  near  (cerca)  you  one  forgets  them.” — A Russian  peasant  who  had 
never  seen  asses,  (burros,)  seeing  several  in  France,  said,  (dijo,) 
“ Lord,  (Dios  mio !)  what  large  hares  (la  liebre)  there  are  in  this 
country  !” — How  many  obligations  I am  under  to  you,  my  dear  friend  ! 
you  have  saved  my  life ! without  you  I had  been  lost. — Have  those 
miserable  men  hurt  you  ? — They  have  beaten  and  robbed  me,  and 
when  you  ran  to  my  assistance  they  were  about  to  (iban)  strip  'desnu^ 
iarme)  and  kill  me. — I am  happy  to  have  delivered  you  from  the  (de 
ias)  hands  of  those  robbers. — How  good  you  are  ! 

202. 

Will  you  go  to  Mr.  Tortenson’s  to-night  ? — I shall,  perhaps,  go.—  ■« 
And  will  your  sisters  go  ? — They  will,  perhaps. — Had  you  any 
pleasure  yesterday  at  the  concert  ? — I had  no  pleasure  there,  for  there 
was  such  a multitude  of  people  there  that  one  could  hardly  get  in, 
— I bring  you  a pretty  present  with  which  you  will  be  much  pleased. 
— What  is  it  ? — It  is  a silk  cravat. — Where  is  it  ? — I have  it  in  my 
pocket,  (en  mi  bolsillo.) — Does  it  please  you  ? — It  pleases  me  much 
and  I thank  you  for  it  with  all  my  heart.  I hope  that  you  v/ill  at  last 
accept  (aceptar)  something  of  me. — What  do  you  intend  to  give  me  ? 
— I will  not  tell  you,  for  if  I do  tell  you,  you  will  have  no  pleasure 
when  I give  it  to  you. — Have  you  seen  any  one  at  the  market  ? — I have 
seei  a good  many  people  there. — How  were  they  dressed  ? — Some 
were  dressed  in  blue,  some  in  green,  some  in  yellow,  and  several  in 
red. — Who  are  those  men  ? — The  one  who  is  dressed  in  gray  is  my 
neighbor,  and  the  man  with  the  black  coat  the  physician  whose  son  has 
given  my  neighbor  a blow  with  a stick. — Who  is  the  man  with  tiie 
green  coat  ? — He  is  one  of  my  relations. — Are  there  many  philosophers 
in  your  country  ? — There  are  as  many  there  as  in  yours. — How 
does  this  hat  fit  me  ? — It  fits  you  very  well. — How  does  that  coat  fit 
your  brother  ? — It  fits  him  admirably. — Is  youi  brother  as  tall  (alto)  as 
you  ? — He  is  taller  than  I,  but  I am  older  (yiejo)  than  he. — Of  what 
size  is  that  man  ? — He  is  five  feet  four  inches  (una  pulgada)  high. — 
How  high  is  the  house  of  ou"*<  landlord  ? — It  is  sixty  feet  high. — Is  your 
well  deep  ? — Yes,  Sir,  for  it  is  fifty  feet  deep. — “ There  are  many 
.earned  men  (unsahio)  in  Rome,  are  there  not,  \ no  es  verdadV^)  Milton 
asked  a Roman.  “ Not  so  many  as  when  you  were  there,”  a^swerec 
[respomlio)  the  Roman. 


SIXTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


293 


203. 

Is  it  true  that  your  uncle  has  arrived  ? — I assure  you  that  he  has 
strived. — Is  it  true  that  the  king  has  assured  you  of  his  assistance, 
{de  su  asislencia  ?) — I assure  you  that  it  is  true. — Is  it  true  tliat  the 
six  thousand  (mil ; takes  no  s in  the  plural)  men,  whom  we  were 
expecting,  have  arrived  ? — I have  heard  so. — Will  you  dine  with  us  ? 
— I cannot  dine  with  you,  for  I have  just  eaten. — Will  your  brothe? 
drink  a glass  of  wine  ? — He  cannot  drink,  for  I assure  you  that  he  ha*? 
just  drunk. — Why  are  those  men  quarrelling  ? — They  are  quarrelling 
because  they  do  not  know  what  to  do. — Have  they  succeeded  in 
extinguishing  the  fire  ? — They  have  at  last  succeeded  in  it ; but  it  is 
said  (Obs.  A,  Lesson  XLV.)  that  several  houses  have  been  burnt. — 
Have  they  not  been  able  to  save  any  thing  ? — They  have  not  been  able 
to  save  any  thing ; for  instead  of  extinguishing  the  fire,  the  miserable 
wretches  (los  malvados)  who  had  come  up,  set  to  plundering. — What 
has  happened  ? — A great  misfortune  has  happened. — Why  did  my 
friends  set  out  without  me  ? — They  waited  for  you  till  twelve  o’clock, 
and  seeing  that  you  did  not  come  they  set  out. — What  is  the  day 
□efore  Monday  called  ? — The  day  before  Monday  is  Sunday. — Why 
did  you  not  run  to  the  assistance  of  your  neighbor  whose  house  has 
oeen  burnt  ? — ^I  was  quite  (enteramente)  ignorant  of  his  house  being 
on  fire,  (que  su  casa  se  estaba  quemando ;)  for  had  I known  it  I would 
have  run  to  his  assistance. 


SIXTY-FIFTH  LESSON.- 

To  propose. 

I propose  going  on  a journey. 

He  proposes  joining  a hunting  party. 

A game  at  chess. 

A game  at  billiards. 

A gam',  at  cards. 

To  succeed. 

Do  you  succeed  in  doing  that  ? 

I do  feucceed  in  it 


-Leccion  Sexagesima  quinta. 

Proponer.  Proponerse. 

Hacer  cuenta  de. 

Me  propongo  hacer  un  viaje. 

Hago  cueuta  de  hacer  un  viaje. 
Intenta  juntarse  d.  ima  partida  de 
caza. 

Una  partida  de  ajedrez. 

Una  partida  de  billar. 

Una  mesa  de  billar. 

Un  juego  de  cartas. 

Uiia  partida  de  naipes. 


Conseguir.  Alcanzar 
Lograr.  Salir  bien. 

I Logra  V.  hacer  oao  I 
Si,  logro  hacerlo. 


294 


SIXTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


endeavor. 

I endeavor  to  do  it. 

I endeavor  to  succeed  in  it. 
Endeavor  to  do  better. 


Esforzarse.  Proturar  hitentai 
Yo  procure  hacerlo. 

Yo  procure  lograrlo. 

Procure  V.  hacer  mejor 


Since,  considering. 

Since  yoa  are  happy,  why  do  you 
complain  ? 

To  he  thoroughly  acquainted  with 
a thing. 

To  make  ones  self  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  a thing. 

That  man  understands  that  business 
perfectly. 

I understand  that  well. 

Since  or  from. 

From  that  time. 

From  my  childhood. 

From  morning  until  night. 

From  the  beginning  to  the  end. 

From  here  to  there. 

I have  had  that  book  these  two  years. 

, have  lived  in  Madrid  these  three 
years 


Yaque.  Pues  que. 
lYa.  que  es  V.  dichoso,  porque  ee 
queja  ? 

Conocer  una  cosa  d fondo. 

Entcrarse  d fondo  en  {de)  una  cosa 

Ese  hombre  conoce  d fondo  ese  asun 
to,  (ese  negocio.) 

Estoy  bien  enterado  en  ello 
Desde.  Desde  por 
Desde  ese  tiempo. 

Desde  mi  ninez,  (infancia.) 

Desde  por  la  manana  hasta  la  noche 
Desde  el  principio  hasta  el  fin. 
Desde  aqui  hasta  alii, 
t Ya  van  dos  anos  que  tengo  esvi 
libro. 

t Tres  anos  ha  que  estoy  (or  que 
vivo)  en  Madrid. 


To  blow,  to  blow  out 
To  reduce. 

To  produce. 

To  translate. 

To  introduce 
To  destroy. 

To  construct. 


Soplar.  Apagar. 
Reducir, 
Producir, 
Traducir, 
Introducir.  J 
Destruir.  ) 
Construir.  \ 


Soe  verbs  in  uclr. 


See  verbs  in  uir 


To  reduce  the  price. 

To  reduce  the  price  a dollar. 

To  translate  into  Spanish. 

To  translate  from  Spanish  into  Eng- 
lish. 

lo  translate  from  one  language  into 
another. 

I introduce  him  to  you. 


Reducir  (bajar)  el  precio. 

Reducir  (bajar)  un  peso  del  precio. 
Traducir  al  (en)  espanol. 

Traducir  del  espanol  al  ingles. 

Traducir  de  una  lengua  d otra. 

^ Yo  le  introduzco  en  su  casa  de  V 
f t Yo  se  le  presento  d V 


SIXTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


295 


Self,  selves. 

Myself. 

Thyself. 

Himself. 

Herself. 

Ourselves. 

Y ourself. 


Y ourselves. 

One’s  self. 

lie  himself  has  told  it  me. 

fie  has  told  it  me,  (to  myself,  not  to 
another  person.) 

One  does  not  like  to  flatter  one’s  self 

Even.  Not even. 

ile  has  not  even  money  enough  to 
buy  some  bread. 

We  must  love  everybody,  even  our 
enemies. 


Again,  (anew.) 
He  speaks  again. 


Mismo.  Misma. 

Mismos.  Mismas. 

Yo  mismo.  Yo  misma. 

Tu  mismo.  Tu  misma 
El  mismo.  Si  mismo. 

Ella  misma.  Si  misma. 

Nosotros  mismos.  Nosotras  mismaji 
V.  mismo.  V.  misma. 

Si  mismo.  Si  misma. 

Vos  mismo.  Vos  misma. 

C VV.  mismos.  VV.  mismas. 

< Si  mismos.  Si  mismas. 

^ Vosotros  mismos.  Vosotras  mismoa 
Si  mismo. 

6l  mismo  me  lo  ha  dicho. 

6l  me  lo  ha  dicho  d mi  mismo. 

No  gusta  uno  de  lisongearse  d si 
mismo. 

Ann.  Ni aun. 

No  tiene  bastante  dinero  aun  para 
comprar  pan. 

Debemos  amar  d todo  el  mundo ; 
aun  d nuestros  enemigos. 


Otra  vez.  Segunda  vez. 

De  nuevo.  t Volver  d. 

Habla  otra  vez.  Habla  segunda  vezi 
t Vuelve  d hablar. 


I 

s 


To  fall. 

Tlie  price  of  the  merchandise  falls 
To  deduct 

To  overcharge,  to  ash  too  much. 

jlot  having  overcharged  you,  I can- 
not deduct  any  thing. 

An  ell,  a yard. 

A mile. 

A league. 


Caer.  Bajar, 

Baja  el  precio  de  las  mercaderlas. 
Deducir.  Rehajar. 

Sobrecargar. 

Poner  alguna  cosa  d mucho  precio 
No  habiendole  puesto  d V.  muy  su- 
bido  el  precio  (muy  alto  el  precio) 
no  puedo  rebajar  nada. 

Una  vara. 

Una  milla. 

Una  legua. 


n , , . , , /.  N i Producir.  Dar.  Vender 

7 produce,  (to  yield,  to  profit.)  ^ 


296 


SIXTY -FIFTH  LESSON. 


How  much  does  that  employment 
viold  you  a year  ? 

An  employmont. 


C t Cuanto  le  produce  d V al  ufio  n 
< empleo  ? 

I Cuanto  gana  V al  am  7 
i Un  empleo. 


I Escaparse.  Huit. 

I Hair.  Escaparse, 
f A pretar  los  t atones. 

^ t Poner  los  pies  en  polvorosa, 

( t Totnar  las  de.  Villadiego, 
Desertar 

Ha  desertado  de  la  hatalla 
El  ladron  se  ha  escapado 

I De  ningun  modo. 

^ No  dej  todo.  De  ningun  mo  Jo. 
( Nada  de  esn 


EXERCISES. 

204. 

Well,  (y  bien,)  does  your  sister  make  any  progress  ? — She  would  make 
Bome,  if  she  were  as  assiduous  as  you. — You  flatter  me. — Not  at  all; 
I assure  you  that  I should  be  highly  satisfied,  (muy,)  if  all  my  pupils 
worked  like  you. — Why  do  you  not  go  out  to-day  ? — I would  go  out 
ii  it  were  fine  weather. — Shall  I have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  to- 
morrow ? — If  you  wish  it  I will  come. — Shall  I still  be  here  when  you 
arrive,  {llegue  1) — Will  you  have  occasion  (ocasion)  to  go  to  town  this 
evening  ? — I do  not  know,  but  I would  go  now  if  I had  an  onportunity, 
(una  buena  ocasion.) — You  would  not  have  so  much  pleasure,  and  you 
would  not  be  so  happy,  if  you  had  not  friends  and  books. — Man  (el) 
would  not  experience  so  much  misery  (la  miseria)  in  his  career,  (la 
carrera^)  and  he  would  not  be  so  unhappy,  were  he  not  so  blind^ 
(ciego.) — You  would  not  have  that  insensibility  (esa  insensibilidad)  to- 
wards the  poor,  and  you  would  not  be  so  deaf  (sordo)  to  their  supplica- 
tion, (el  ruego^)  if  you  had  been  yourself  in  misery  for  some  time. — 
You  would  not  say  that  if  you  knew  me  well. — Why  has  your  sister 
done  her  exercises? — She  would  have  done  them  if  she  had  not 
been  prevented. — If  you  workea  more,  and  spoke  oftener,  you  would 
gpeak  better. — I assure  you.  Sir,  that  I should  learn  better  if  I had 
more  time. — I do  not  complain  of  you,  but  of  your  sister. — You  would 
have  no  reason  (motive)  to  complain  of  her,  had  she  had  time  to  do 
what  you  gave  her  to  do. — Do  you  already  know  what  has  happened  1 
— ^ have  not  heard  any  thing. — The  house  of  our  neighbo-  has  beei 


To  maJee  one^s  escape. 
To  run  awayyjiee. 

To  take  to  one^s  heels. 

To  desert, 

fie  deserted  the  battle. 

The  thief  has  run  away. 

By  no  means. 

Not  at  all. 


SIXTY-FIFTH  LESSON”. 


297 


burnt  down,  (quemado.) — Have  they  not  been  able  to  save  any  thing  1 
—They  weie  very  fortunate  (mutj  afortunados)  in  saving  the  persons 
that  were  in  It ; but  out  of  the  {de  las)  things  that  were  there,  they 
could  save  nothing. — Who  has  told  you  that  ?— Our  neighbor  himself 
has  told  it  me. 

205. 

\Miy  are  you  without  a light  ? — The  wind  blew  it  out  when  you 
came  in. — What  is  the  price  of  this  cloth? — 1 sell  it  at  three  dollars 
and  a half  the  ell,  Qa  vara.) — I think  it  very  dear.  Has  the  price  of 
cloth  not  fallen  ? — It  has  not  fallen  : the  price  of  all  goods  has  fallen, 
except  that  of  cloth,  (menos  el  del  'pano.) — I will  give  you  three  dollars 
for  it. — I cannot  let  you  have  {dar)  it  for  (por)  that  price,  for  it  costs  me 
more. — Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  show  me  some  pieces  Qa  p'kza,) 
of  English  cloth  ? — With  much  pleasure. — Does  this  cloth  suit  you  ? 
— It  does  not  suit  me. — Why  does  it  not  suit  you  ? — ^Because  it  is  too 
dear ; if  you  will  lower  the  price,  (rebajar  alguna  cosa^)  I shall  buy 
twenty  yards  of  it. — Not  having  asked  too  much,  I cannot  take  off  any 
thing. — You  learn  Spanish:  does  your  master  let  you  translate? — He 
lets  me  read,  write,  and  translate. — Is  it  useful  to  translate  in  learning 
a foreign  language  ? — It  is  useful  to  translate  when  you  {sahe)  nearly 
know  the  language  you  are  learning ; but  while  (cuando)  you  do  not 
yet  know  any  thing  it  is  entirely  (del  todo)  useless. — What  does  yoiu 
Spanish  master  make  you  do  ? — He  makes  me  read  a lesson ; after- 
wards he  makes  me  translate  English  exercises  into  Spanish  on  the 
lesson  which  he  has  made  me  read  ; and  from  the  beginning  to  the 
end  of  the  lesson  he  speaks  Spanish  to  me,  and  I have  to  answer  hin 
in  the  very  language  Qa  misrna  lengua)  which  he  is  teaching  me.— 
Have. you  already  learned  much  in  that  manner? — You  see  that  I havf 
already  learned  something,  for  I have  hardly  been  learning  it  thre^ 
months,  and  I already  understand  you  when  you  speak  to  me,  and  can 
answer  you. — Can  you  read  (it)  as  well  ? — I can  read  and  write  as 
well  as  speak,  (it.) — Does  your  master  also  teach  German? — Ha 
teaches  it. — Wishing  to  make  his  acquaintance,  I must  beg  of  you 
(yo  le  suplico)  to  introduce  me  to  him,  {que  me  presente  V,  a el.) 

206. 

How  many  exercises  do  you  translate  a day  ? — If  the  exercises  are 
aot  difficult  I translate  from  three  to  four  every  day ; and  when  they 
so  1 translate  but  one. — How  many  have  you  already  done  to-day  ? 
—It  is  the  third  which  I am  translating ; but  to-morrow  I hope  to  be 
able  to  do  one  more,  for  I shall  be  alone,  (solo.) — Have  you  paid  a visit 
to  my  aunt  ? — I went  to  see  her  two  months  ago,  and  as  she  looked 
displeased,  I have  not  gone  to  her  any  more  »mce  that  time. — How  dc 


298 


SIXTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


yon  do  to-day  ? — 1 am  very  unwell. — How  do  you  like  that  soup  ? — 1 
think  it  is  very  bad ; but  since  I have  lost  my  appetite  (el  apetito)  I dc 
not  like  any  thing. — How  much  does  that  employment  yield  to  your 
father  ? — It  yields  him  more  than  four  thousand  dollars. — What  news 
do  they  mention,  (decirl) — Tney  say  nothing  new. — What  do  you  in- 
tend to  do  to-morrow  ? — I propose  joining  a hunting  party. — Does  youi 
brother  purpose  playing  (hacer)  a game  at  billiards? — He  proposes 
playing  a game  at  chess. — Why  do  some  people  laugh  when  I speak  ? 
— Those  are  un polite  people ; you  have  only  to  laugh  also,  and  they 
will  no  longer  laugh  at  you.  If  you  did  as  I do  (como  yo)  you  would 
speak  well.  You  must  study  (es  menester)  a little  every  day,  and  you 
will  soon  be  no  longer  afraid  to  speak. — I will  endeavor  to  follow  your 
advice,  for  I have  resolved  (proponerse)  to  rise  every  morning  at  six 
o’clock,  to  study  till  ten  o’clock,  and  to  go  to  bed  early. — Why  does 
your  sister  complain  ? — I do  not  know ; since  she  succeeds  in  every 
thing,  and  since  (y  que)  she  is  happy,  even  happier  than  you  and  1, 
Why  does  she  complain  ? — Perhaps  she  complains  (quejarse)  because 
she  is  not  thoroughly  acquainted  with  that  business. — That  may  be. 


{SIXTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 

A kind,  a sort,  (a  species.) 

What  kind  of  fruit  is  that? 

A stone,  (of  a fruit.) 

A stone  of  a peach,  an  apricot,  a 
plum. 

Stone-fruit. 

One  must  break  the  stone  before  one 
comes  to  the  kernel. 

A kernel. 

An  almond. 

Kernel-fruit. 

It  is  a kernel-fruit. 


To  gather. 

I gather,  I gathered,  I will  gather 
To  gather  fruit. 

To  serve  up  the  soup. 

To  bring  in  the  desseri 
The  fruit. 

An  apricot. 

\ peach. 


-Leccion  Sexagcsmia  sexta. 

Genero.  Especie.  Clase. 

I Que  especie  de  fruta  es  esa  ? 
Hueso,  (de  fruta.) 

Un  hueso  de  melocoton,  albaricoque, 
ciruela. 

Fruta  de  hueso.  » 

Es  necesario  romper  el  hueso  para 
conseguir  la  almendra. 

Una  pepita.  Una  almendra.  Meollo 
Una  almendra. 

Fruta  de  pepita. 

Es  fruta  de  pepita. 


Cojer. 

Cojo.  Cojia.  Cojerd. 

Cojer  fruta. 

Servir  la  sopa. 

Servir  los  postres. 

La  fruta. 

Un  albaricoque.  Un  durazno. 
Un  meloGotcn 


SIXTY -SIXTH  LESSON. 


299 


A plum 
An  anecdote 
Roast  meat. 


I Una  ciruela 
I Una  andcdota 
I El  asado. 


The  last. 

Last  week. 

To  cease,  to  leave  off. 
I leave  off  reading. 

She  leaves  off  speaking. 


El  dltimo.  La  dltiraa. 
Pasado.  Pasada. 

La  semana  pasada,  (dllimaL.) 
Cesar.  Parar.  Dejar  de 
Yo  ceso  de  leer. 

Ella  cesa  de  hablar. 


To  avoid. 

To  escape. 

To  escape  a misfortune. 

He  ran  away  to  avoid  death. 


Evitai.  Escapar. 

Escapar.  Evitar. 

Evitar  una  desgracia. 

Se  escap6  para  evitar  la  muerta 


To  do  without  a thing 
Can  you  do  without  bread  ? 

[ can  do  without  it. 

There  are  many  things  which  we 
must  do  without 


I Privarse  de.  Pasar.  Pasarse  sin 
I Puede  V.  pasar  sin  pan  ? 

I Puede  V.  privarse  de  pan  ^ 

Puedo  pasar  sin  6\. 

Me  puedo  privar  de  6\. 

Hay  muchas  cosas  sin  las  cuales  se 
puede  pasar,  (de  las  cuales  puede 
uiio  pasarse.) 


To  execute  a commission. 

To  acquit  one’s  self  of  a commis- 
sion. 

I have  executed  your  commission. 
Have  you  executed  my  commission  ? 

I have  executed  it. 

To  do  one’s  duty. 

To  discharge,  to  do,  or  to  fulfil 
one^s  duty. 

That  man  always  does  his  dutj 
riiat  man  always  fulfils  his  duty. 

Vo  rely,  to  depend  upon  something. 
He  depends  upon  h. 

I rely  upon  it 
You  may  rely  upon  him. 


C Cum.plir  con  un  encargo. 

< Ejecutar  una  comision. 

( Hacer  una  comision. 

He  cumplido  con  su  encargo  de  V. 

I Ha  cumplido  V.  con  mi  encargo, 
(comision)  ? 

He  cumplido  con  ^1,  (ella.) 

Cumplir  con  si  ohligacion,  {de- 
ber.) 

Hacer  su  deber. 

Ese  hombre  i umple  siempre  con  sn 
ohligacion. 

Contar  con.  Confiar  en. 

^11  confia  en  eso. 

Cuento  con  eso. 

V.  puede  contar  con  61,  (coafisu 
en  61.'! 


300 


SIXTl  SIXTH  LESSOR. 


To  suffice^  to  be  sufficient. 

Is  til  at  bread  sufficient  for  you  ? 

It  is  suificient  for  me. 

Will  that  money  be  sufficient  for 
that  man  ? 

It  will  be  sufficient  for  him. 

Lillie  wealth  suffices  to  the  wise. 

Has  that  sum  been  sufficient  for  that 
man  ? 

Was  that  man  contented  with  that 
sum  ? 

ft  has  been  sufficient  for  him. 

He  has  been  contented  with  it. 

To  be  contented  with  something. 

It  would  be  sufficient  for  him  if  you 
would  only  add  a few  dollars. 

Me  would  be  contented  if  you  would 
add  a few  dollars. 

To  add 
To  build. 

To  embark,  to  go  m board. 

A sail. 

To  set  sail. 

To  set  sail  for. 

To  set  sail  for  America. 

To  sail. 

Under  full  sail. 

To  set  under  full  sail. 

Ho  embarked  on  the  sixteenth  of  hist 
month 

He  sailed  on  the  thirteenth  instant. 

The  instant,  the  present  month. 

The  fourth  or  fifth  instant. 

’Fbe  letter  is  dated  the  6th  instant. 


Bastar.  Ser  bastante,  [suftcicnle.) 
I Le  basta  d V.  ese  pan  ? 

Si.  Me  basta. 

I Serd  suficiente  ese  dinero  para  es' 
hornbre  ? 

Sera  suficiente  para  el. 

Poca  riqueza  basta  al  sabio. 
i Ha  sido  bastante  esi  suma  para  csf 
hornbre  ? 

I Estaba  contento  ese  hoi3fi.bre  con 
esa  suma  7 

Ha  sido  bastante  para  el. 

Ha  estado  satisfecho  con  ell?. 

Estar  satisfecho  con,  (or  de.) 

Seria  bastante  para  el  si  V.  aiiadiera 
solamente  algunos  oesos. 

Si  V anadiese  algunos  pesos  C8- 
taria  satisfecho. 

Anadir.  Acrecentar  * 

Aumentar. 

I Edificar.  Fabricar. 

Ernbarcar.  Embarcarse. 

Ir  d bordo.  Abordo. 

Una  vela. 

Hacer  vela.  Hacerse  d la  vela. 
Hacer  vela  para. 

Hacerse  d la  vela  para  la  America 
Nave  gar. 

A velas  llenas.  A velas  tendidas. 
Andar  d buena  vela. 

Se  embared  el  diez  y seis  del  mci 
pasado. 

Se  hizo  d la  vela  el  trece  del  cor 
riente. 

El  corriente. 

El  cuatro  6 cinco  del  corriente. 

La  carta  lleva  fecha  del  seia  del 
corriente. 


That  is  to  say,  {i.  e.\ 

Et  ccetera,  {etc.,  ^-c.) 

My  pen  (quill)  is  better  than  yours. 
[ write  better  than  ycu. 
tliey  will  warm  ffie  soup. 


Es  decir.  A saber. 

Et  cetera,  {etc.,  ^a.) 

Mi  pluma  es  oejor  que  la  de  Y. 
Yo  escribo  mejor  que  V 
t Pondrdn  la  sopa  d calentar. 


SIXTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


Dinner  (or  supper)  is  on  the  table. 

Do  you  choose  any  soup  ? 

Shall  I lielp  you  to  some  soup  ? 

I will  trouble  you  for  a little. 

To  serve  up,  to  attend. 


803 

La  comida  (or  1l  cena)  eetd  en  ?« 
mesa. 

I Gusta  V.  de  sopa  ? 

I Lo  servire  ^ V.  un  poco  de  sopa  ? 
Hagame  V.  el  favor  de  darme  u;s 
poco. 

Servir.  Servirse.  Asistir 
Poner  en  ^a  mesa 


EXERCISES. 

207. 

I should  like  to  (querria)  know  why  I cannot  speak  as  well  as  you  ? 
— I will  tell  you  : you  would  speak  quite  as  well  (tan  bien  como)  as  I, 
if  you  were  not  so  bashful,  (corto.)  But  if  you  had  studied  your  les- 
sons more  carefully  you  would  not  be  afraid  to  speak  ; for  in  order  to 
speak  well  one  must  know,  (sepa,)  and  it  is  very  natural  that  he  whc 
does  not  know  well  what  he  has  learned,  should  be  timid,  (sea  cnrtOy 
pres,  subj.)  You  would  not  be  so  timid  as  you  are,  if  you  were  sure 
to  make  no  faults. 

I come  to  wish  you  a good  morning. — You  are  very  kind,  (bondoso.) 
— Would  you  do  me  a favor  ? — Tell  me  what  you  want,  for  I would' 
do  any  thing  (cualquiera  cosa)  to  oblige  you,  (servirle.) — I want  five 
hundred  dollars,  and  I beg  you  to  lend  them  to  me.  I will  return 
them  to  you  as  soon  as  I have  received  my  money.  You  would  oblige 
(favorecer)  me  much  if  you  would  render  (hacer)  me  this  service. — 
I would  do  it  with  all  my  heart  if  I could  ; but  having  lost  all  my 
money,  it  is  impossible  for  me  (me  es  imposible)  to  render  you  this 
service. — Will  you  ask  your  brother  whether  he  (si)  is  satisfied  with 
(con)  the  money  which  I have  sent  him? — As- to  my  brother,  he  is 
satisfied  with  it,  but  1 am  not  so ; for  having  suffered  sliipwreck 
(naufragar)  I am  in  want  of  the  money  which  you  owe  me. 

208. 

Have  they  served  up  the  soup  ? — Thy  have  served  it  up  some 
minutes  ago. — Then  it  must  be  cold,  and  I only  like  soup  hot,  (caliente.) 
—They  will  warm  it  for  you. — You  will  oblige  me,  (favorecer.) — 
Shall  I help  you  to  some  of  this  roast  meat  ? — I will  trouble  you  for  a 
little. — Will  you  eat  some  of  this  mutton  ? — I thank  you,  I like  fowl 
cotter. — May  I offer  you  (le  ofrecere)  some  wine  ? — I will  trouble  you 
fo7  a little. — Have  tney  already  brought  in  the  dessert? — They  have 
brought  it  in. — Do  you  like  fruit  ? — I like  fruit,  but  I have  no  more 
appetite. — Will  you  eat  a little  cheese  ? — I will  eat  a little. — Shall  1 
kelp  you  to  English  or  Dutch  cheese?  -I  will  eat  a little  Dutcl? 


302 


BIXTY-SIXTH  LESSOR. 


cheese. — What  kind  of  fruit  is  that  ? — It  is  stone-fruit. — What  is  u 
called  ? — It  is  called  thus. — Will  you  wash  your  hands  ? — I should 
like  to  {querer)  wash  them,  but  I have  no  towel  to  {para)  wipe  tliein 
with. — I will  let  you  have  (mandare  que  le  den)  a towel,  some  soap, 
and  some  water. — I shall  be  much  obliged  (agradecer)  to  you. — May 
I ask  you  for  {me  hard  V,  el  favor  de)  a little  water  ?— Here  is  some, 
{aqui  la  tiene  F.) — Can  you  do  without  soap  ? — As  for  soap  I can  do 
without  it,  but  I must  have  a towel  to  wipe  my  hands  with. — Do  you 
often  do  without  soap  ? — There  are  many  things  which  we  must  do 
without. — Why  has  that  man  run  away  ? — Because  he  had  no  other 
means  of  escaping  the  punishment  {castigo)  which  he  had  desei  ved, 
{merecer.) — Why  did  your  brothers  not  get  a better  horse  ? — If  they 
had  got  rid  of  their  old  horse,  they  would  have  got  a better. — Has  your 
father  arrived  already  ? — Not  yet,  but  we  hope  that  he  will  arrive  this 
very  day,  (hoy  mismo.) — Has  your  friend  set  out  in  time  — I do  not 
know,  but  I hope  he  has  set  out  in  time. 

209. 

Have  you  executed  my  commission  ? — I have  executed  it. — Has 
vour  brother  executed  the  commission  which  I gave  him  ? — He  has 
executed  it. — Would  you  execute  a commission  for  me  ? — I am  under 
so  many  obligations  to  you  that  I will  always  execute  your  commis- 
sions, when  it  shall  please  you  to  give  me  any. — Will  you  ask  the 
merchant  whether  {si)  he  can  let  me  have  {darme)  the  horse  at  the 
price  which  I have  offered  him  ? — I am  sure  that  he  would  be  satisfied 
if  vou  would  add  a few  dollars  more. — If  I were  sure  of  that,  I would 
add  a few  dollars  more. — Good  morning,  my  children  ! have  you  done 
your  task  ? — You  well  know  that  we  always  do  it ; for  we  must  be  ill 
{seria  menester  que  estuviesemos  enfermos,  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive, 
of  wliich  hereafter)  not  to  {para)  do  it. — What  do  you  give  us  to-day  ? 
— I give  you  to  study  the  sixty-sixth  lesson,  and  to  do  the  exercises 
belonging  to  it ; that  is  to  say,  the  207th,  208th,  and  209th.  Will  you 
endeavor  to  commit  no  errors,  {hacer  f alias  ?) — We  shall  endeavor  to 
commit  none. — Is  this  bread  sufficient  for  you  ? — It  would  be  sufficient 
for  me  if  I was  not  very  hungry. — When  did  your  brother  embark 
for  America  ? — He  sailed  on  the  30th  of  last  month. — Do  you  promise 
me  to  speak  to  your  brother  ? — I promise  you,  you  may  depend  upon 
Si  — I rely  upon  you. — Will  you  work  harder  {mg or)  for  next  lesson* 
than  you  have  done  for  dds  ? — I will  work  harder. — May  I rely  upon 
It  ? — You  may. 


SIXTY-SEVENTH  LESSON 


303 


SIXTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Sexagesima  septima. 


Tn  hr  a judge  of  something. 

Are  you  a judge  of  cloth  ? 

I am  a judge  of  it. 

I am  not  a judge  of  it. 

I am  a good  judge  of  it. 

1 am  not  a good  judge  of  it. 


To  draw. 

i i chalkf  to  trace,  (tc  counter- 
draw.) 

To  draw  a landscape 
To  draw  after  life 
The  drawing. 

The  drawer. 

Nature. 


Ser  perito  (inteligente,  facultativo 
en  alguna  cosa.  Conocedor  de. 
t Entender  de.  Poder  juzgar  de. 
1 1 Entiende  V.  de  panos  ? 
t Si.  Entiendo. 
t No.  No  soy  perito. 
t Soy  inteligente.  + Es  mi  oficio 
t No  entiendo  nada 
No  puedo  juzgar 


Dihujar.  Bosquejar 
Dihujar  con  yeso,  Trazar 
Delinear.  Calcar. 

Dihujar  un  paisaje,  (un  paia.) 
Dihujar  al  natural. 

El  dibujo. 

El  dibujador.  El  dibujanie 
La  naturaleza. 


m'lnagb,  or  to  go  about  a thing. 

How  do  you  manage  to  make  a fire 
without  tongs  ? 
f go  about  it  so. 

You  go  about  it  the  wrong  way. 
i go  about  it  the  right  way. 

How  does  your  brother  manage  to 
do  that  ? 

Skilfully.  Handily. 
Dexterously.  Cleverly. 
Awkwardly. 

Unhandily.  Badly. 


To  forbid. 

fc  fcibid  you  to  do  that. 

To  lower,  to  cast  down. 
To  cast  down  one’s  eye. 

The  curtain. 

The  curtain  rises — falls. 
The  .stocks  have  fallen. 


^ t Manejar.  Hacer  para. 

( Procurar.  Lograr, 

1 1 Como  hace  V.  para  encender  fuegc 
sin  tenazas  ? 
t Hago  de  esta  manera. 

V.  lo  hace  mal,  (t  al  reves.) 

Yo  lo  hago  bien. 

I De  que  mode  procura  su  hermoro 
de  V.  hacer  eso  ? 

Diestramente.  Manosamente. 
Habilmente. 

Desmanadamente.  Toscamento 
Torpemente.  Malamente. 


Prohibir.  No  querer. 

Yo  le  prohibo  d V.  hacer  eao. 
Bajar. 

t Bajar  los  ojos. 

La  cortina.  El  telon. 

La  cortina  se  levanta,  (baja.) 
El  telon  se  levanta,  (se  baja.) 
Los  fondos  pfiblicos  han  bajado 


804 


SIXTY -SEVENTH  LESSON 


Tlie  day  falls. 

Night  comes  on. 

It  grows  dark. 

It  grows  late. 

To  stoop. 

To  smell. 

To  feel. 

He  smells  of  garlic. 

To  feel  some  one’s  pulse. 

To  consent  to  a thing. 
I consent  to  it 


To  hide,  to  conceal. 

The  mind. 

Indeed. 

In  fact. 

The  truth. 

The  effect 
True. 

It  is  true. 

A true  man. 
riiis  is  the  right  place  for  that  pic- 
ture. 


C El  dia  cae.  t El  sol  se  pcm. 

< f Anochece.  t Se  hace  noch£ 

( t Ohscursce. 

I Se  hace  tarde. 

^ Encorvarse.  Inclinarsp 
I Bajarse 

Oler  *. 

Sentir 
Huele  d ajo. 

t Tomar  el  pulso  d alguno. 

Consentir 

Yo  consiento  en  ello,  (en  eso.' 

Esconder.  Ocultar 
El  entendimiento.  La  mento. 

En  verdad.  A la  verdad 
En  efccto. 

La  verdad. 

El  efecto. 

Verdadero.  t Verdad. 
t Es  verdad. 

Es  hombre  sincere. 

Este  es  el  verdadero  lugar  para  es*? 
cuadro. 


To  think  much  of  one,  {to  esteem 
one.) 

To  esteem  some  one 

I do  not  think  much  of  that  man. 

I think  much  of  him. 

I esteem  him  much. 

The  case. 

The  flower,  the  bloom,  the  blossom. 

On  a level  with,  even  with. 
Fhat  house  is  on  a level  with  the 
water. 

To  blossom,  {to  flourish.) 

To  grow. 

To  grow  tall 

That  child  grows  so  fast  that  w© 
may  even  see  it. 

The  rain  has  made  the  corn  grow. 
Corn. 


Hacer  gran  (or  macho)  caso  de  uno 
Hacer  estimacion. 

Estimar  d alguno.  Apreciar. 

Yo  no  hago  gran  caso  de  ese  hombrf 
t No  tengo  en  mucho  d ese  hoinhre 
Yo  hago  mucho  caso  de  el. 

Yo  le  estimo  mucho 
El  caso. 

La  flor. 

A nivel  de.  A flor  de 
Esa  czisa  estd  d flor  del  agua. 

Ecliar  flores.  Florecer, 

Crecer.  (See  verbs  in  cer,  App.) 

Ese  nine  crece  tan  rdpidamente  que 
podemos  verlo. 

La  Iluvia  ha  hecho  crecer  el  graiio. 
Maiz 


SIXTr-SETENTH  LESSON. 


305 


A cover 
A shelter. 

A cottage.  A hut. 

To  sh  eller  one’s  self  from  something. 

To  take  shelter  from  something. 

Let  llicm  shelter  themselves  from 
tlio  rain,  the  wind. 

Let  us  enter  that  cottage  in  order  to 
bo  shelterea  from  the  storm,  (the 
tempest.) 


Un  albergue.  Una  posada. 

Una  guarid2u  Un  abrigo. 

Una  cabana.  Una  choza. 
t Jacaly  (in  Mexico.) 

Ponerse  al  abrigo  (d  cubierlo)  de  al 
guna  cosa.  Abrigarse, 

Pdnganse  ellos  al  abrigo  (d  cubierto) 
de  la  11  u via,  del  viento. 

Entremos  en  esa  choza  para  guarfi' 
cernos  de  la  tempestad. 


Everywhere.  All  over. 
Throughout. 

All  over  (throughout)  the  town. 

A shade. 

Under  the  shade. 

Si^  down  under  the  shade  of  that 
tree. 


( For  todo.  For  toda. 

< For  todos.  For  todas. 
f For  todas  partes. 

^ Por  toda  la  ciudad. 

( Por  todo  el  pueblo. 

Una  sombra. 

A la  sombra. 

Sientese  V.  d la  sombra  de  ese  drbol 


To  pretend. 

That  man  pretends  to  sleep. 

That  young  lady  pretends  to  know 
Spanish. 

They  pretend  to  come  near  us. 


Aparentar.  Fingirse. 
t Hacerse.  llacer  que,  or  como  que 
Ese  hombre  se  finge  dormido. 

\ Se  hace  {se  finge)  dormido. 
t Esa  sehqrita  hace  que  sabe  el 
cspahol. 

Fingen  acercarse  d nosotros 


Now. 

From.  Since. 

From  morning. 

From  the  break  of  day. 

From  this  time  forward. 

As  soon  as. 

Af  soon  as  I see  i/iim  I shall  speak 
lo  him. 

Fram  the  cradle.  From  a child. 

For  fear  of. 

/ 

To  catch  a cold. 


Ahora. 

Desde. 

Desde  ia  man  an  a. 

Desde  el  amanecer. 
t Desde  hoy  en  adelanto. 

Luego  que.  Ast  que. 
t As!  que  le  vea  yo  le  hablariS. 

Desde  la  cuna.  Desde  la  ninoz. 

Por  miedo  de.  Por  temor  de. 
For  no. 

I Resfriarse  ’ 


S06 


SIXTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


I wDl  not  gcj  out  for  fear  of  catching 
a cold. 

He  does  not  wish  to  go  to  town,  for 
fear  of  meeting  one  of  his  creditors. 

fie  does  not  wish  to  open  his  purse, 
for  fear  of  losing  his  money. 


No  saldrd  por  temor  de  restriarme,  o:> 
de  tomar  una  fluxion. 

6l  no  quiere  ir  d la  ciudad  por  temoi 
de  encontrarse  con  uno  de  su? 
acreedores. 

"fil  no  quiere  abrir  su  bolsa  por  miedr, 
de  perder  su  dinero. 


To  copy.  To  transcribe. 
To  decline. 

To  transcribe  fairly. 

A su  )stantive.  An  adjective. 

A pronoun.  A verb. 

A preposition. 

A grammar.  A dictionary. 


Copiar.  Transcribe. 

Decliiiar. 

t Sacar  en  limpio.  Copiar. 

Un  substantivo.  Un  adjetivo 
Un  pronombre.  Un  verbo. 

Una  preposicion. 

Una  gramltica.  Un  diccionario 


EXERCISES. 

210. 

Are  ycAi  a judge  of  cloth  ? — I am  a judge  of  it. — Will  you  buy  somu 
f ards  for  me  ? — If  you  will  give  me  the  money  I will  buy  you  some. 
— You  will  gblige  Qiacer  favor)  me. — Is  that  man  a judge  of  cloth  ? — 
He  is  not  a good  judge  of  it. — How  do  you  manage  to  do  that  ? — I 
manage  it  so. — Will  you  show  me  how  you  manage  it  ? — I will  show 
you,  {yo  lo  quiero.) — What  must  I do  for  my  lesson  of  to-morrow  ? — 
You  will  transcribe  your  exercises  fairly,  do  three  others,  and  study 
"the  next  lesson,  (siguiente,) — How  do  you  manage  to  get  goods  (wer- 
caderias)  without  money  ? — I buy  on  credit. — How  does  your  sister 
manage  to  learn  French  without  a dictionary  ? — She  manages  it  thus, 
— She  manages  it  very  dexterously.  But  how  does  your  brother 
manage  it  ? — He  manages  it  very  awkwardly ; he  reads,  and  looks  for 
the  words  in  the  dictionary. — He  may  learn  in  this  manner  twenty 
years  without  knowing  how  to  make  a single  sentence,  (una  sola  sen^ 
tencia,) — Why  does  your  sister  cast  down  her  eyes  ? — She  casts  them 
down  because  she  is  ashamed  of  not  having  done  her  task. — Shall  wo 
breakfast  in  the  garden  to-day  ? — The  weather  is  so  fine,  that  we 
Bhould  take  advantage  of  it,  (aprovecharse,) — How  do  you  like  that 
coffee  ? — I like  it  very  much. — Why  do  you  stoop  ? — I stoop  to  pick 
up  the  handkerchief  which  I have  dropped. — Why  do  your  sisters  hide 
themselves  ? — They  would  not  hide  themselves  if  they  did  not  fear  to 
be  seen. — Whom  are  they  afraid  of  ? — They  are  afraid  of  their 
governess  (una  aya)  who  scolded  them  yesterday  because  they  liad 
oot  done  their  tasks,  (la  tarea,) 


SIXTY-EIGHTK  LESSON. 


307 


211. 

Have  you  already  seen  my  son  ? — I have  not  seen  him  yet ; how  is 
le  ? — He  is  very  well ; you  will  not  be  able  to  recognise  him,  for  he 
has  grown  very  tail  in  a short  time. — Why  does  that  man  give  nothing 
to  the  poor  ? — He  is  too  avaricious,  (avaro ;)  he  does  not  wish  to  open 
his  purse  for  fear  of  losing  his  money. — What  sort  of  weather  is  it  ? — 
It  is  very  warm  ; it  is  long  since  we  had  any  rain : I believe  we  shall 
have  a storm,  {una  tempestad.) — It  may  be,  (puede  ser.) — The  wind 
rises,  (levantarse,)  it  thunders  already;  do  you  hear  it? — Yes,  I 
hear  it,  but  the  storm  is  still  far  off,  (lejos.) — Not  so  far  as  you  think  ; 
see  how  it  lightens. — Bless  me,  {Dios  mio !)  what  a shower,  (que 
aguacero  /) — If  we  go  into  some  place  we  shall  be  sheltered  from  the 
storm. — Let  us  go  into  that  cottage,  then,  (pues ;)  we  shall  be  sheltered 
the^e  from  the  wind  and  the  rain. — Where  shall  we  go  to  now  ? Which 
road  shall  we  take  ? — The  shortest  (corto)  will  be  the  best. — We  have 
too  much  sun,  and  I am  still  very  tired ; let  us  sit  down  under  the 
shade  of  that  tree. — Who  is  that  man  who  is  sitting  under  the  tree  ? — 
I do  not  know  him. — It  seems  he  wishes  to  be  alone,  (estar  solo  ;)  for 
when  we  offer  (querer*)  to  approach  him,  he  pretends  to  be  asleep. — 
He  is  like  your  sister  : she  understands  French  very  well ; but  when  I 
begin  to  speak  to  her,  she  pretends  not  to  understand  me. — You  have 
promised  me  to  speak  to  the  captain  ; why  have  you  not  done  so  ? — 
f have  not  seen  him ; but  as  soon  as  I see  him  Quego  que  le  vea)  1 
'hall  speak  to  him. 


SIXTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Sexagesima  octava, 
THE  PLUPERFECT,  (No.  2,  p.) — Preterito  Pluscuamperfecto,  (No.  2,  p.) 


This  tense  is  formed  with  No.  2,  the  imperfect  of  the  auxiliary  haber, 
and  the  past  participle  (p.)  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 

This  tense  is  used  to  express  an  action  which  was  already  pa«l  when  an 
action  also  past  took  place.  Example : — I had  already  finishea  my  task 
when  you  came  in — Ya  hahia  acabado  mi  tarcaj  cuando  F.  entro. 


I had  dined  when  ho  arrived. 

You  had  lost  your  purse  when  I 
found  mine. 

Had  you  finished  your  exercise 
when  I camo  in? 

Vo,  Sir,  / had  not  finished  it. 

We  had  dined  when  it  struck 
twelve. 


Yo  hahia  comido  cuando  lleg(5. 

V.  hahia  perdido  su  bolsa  cuando  yo 
haI14  la  mia.. 

I Habia  acabado  V,  su  ejercicio 
cuando  yo  entrd  ? 

No,  senor,  yo  no  le  habiu  acabado. 

Habiamos  comido  cuando  dieron  las 
doco. 


308 


SIXTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


I had  read  your  letter  when  I wrote  I Yo  habia  leido  la  carta  de  V cuands 
mine.  | escribl  la  mia. 

O*  It  will  be  perceived  that  this  tense  is  used  in  connection  with  the 
Preterito  Perfecto  Remoto,  (No.  3.)  For  the  use  of  that  tense  see  Lesson 
XL.  Observe  that  the  Preterito  Imperfecto  (No.  2)  answers  to  the  English 
used  to ; the  Preterito  Perfecto  Remoto  (No.  3)  to  did  ; and  that  thp  Pret^ritd 
Pluscuamperfecto  (Nor  2,  p.)  corresponds  to  the  English  pluperfect 


lie  came  (used  to  come)  to  see  me 
e\ery  day. 

They  came  (did  come)  yesterday. 

I had  seen  them  before. 

After  you  had  spoken  you  used  ^o 
go  out. 

After  shaving  I washed  my  face. 

The  king  had  appointed  an  admiral 
when  he  heard  of  you,  (did  hear.) 

After  having  warmed  themselves 
they  went  into  the  garden. 

As  soon  as  the  bell  rung  (did  ring) 
you  awoke,  (did  wake.) 

As  soon  as  they  called  me  (did  call) 
I got  up,  (did  get.) 

As  soon  as  he  was  ready  he  came  to 
see  me. 

As  soon  as  we  had  our  money  we 
agreed  to  that. 

As  soon  as  he  had  his  horse  he  came 
to  show  it  me. 

After  trying  several  times  they  suc- 
ceeded in  doing  it 

As  soon  as  I saw  him  I obtained 
what  I wanted,  (was  wanting.) 

As  soon  as  / spoke  to  him  he  did 
what  / wanted. 

The  business  was  soon  over 


El  venia  d verme  todos  los  dids. 

Elios  vinieron  ayer. 

Yo  los  habia  visto  dntes. 

Despues  que  V.  habia  hablado  V. 
salia. 

Despues  de  afeitarme  me  lavaba  la 
cara. 

El  rey  habia  nombrado  un  almirante, 
cuando  le  habldron  de  V. 

Despues  de  haberse  calentado  se 
fueron  al  jardin. 

Asi  que  repied  (sono)  la  campana  V 
desperto. 

Luego  que  me  llarndron  me  levante. 

Luego  que  el  estuvo  pronto  (listo) 
vino  d vermo. 

Asi  que  tuvtmos  nuestro  dinero  con- 
venimos  en  ello. 

Luego  que  tuvo  su  caballo  vino  d en- 
sehdrmele. 

Despues  de  probar  muchas  veces 
logrdron  hacerlo. 

Asi  que  le  vi  consegui  lo  que  yc 
queria. 

Al  memento  que  le  hable  hizo  lo  que 
yo  queria 

Pronto  se  acabo  el  asunto. 


OF  THE  PRETERIT  ANTERIOR,  (No.  3,  p.) 

• ^ 

Del  Preterito  Perfecto  Anterior,  (No.  3,  p.) 

'Hiis  tense  is  fonned  with  No.  3 of  haber  and  the  past  participle  (p.)  of  the 
7orb  to  be  conjugated.  It  is  used  (from  its  name  anterior)  to  express  an 
action  past  before  another  which  is  likewise  past,  and  is  hardly  ever  used 
except  after  one  of  the  conjunctions. 


SIXTY -EIGHTH  LESSON. 


309 


^ Luego  que.  Asi  que 
( A1  momeiito  que. 

Despues  que. 

Cuaiido. 

Apeiias. 

done.  Examples : — 

I Luego  que  hube  acabudo  mi  trabajo 
se  le  lleve  d el. 

Asi  que  yo  me  kube  vestido  sail. 

! Asi  que  hube  comido  dieron  ms  Uoce 
I Pronto  hube  acabad.)  de  comer. 


O*  No  3 should  be  preferred  to  this  tense,  which  is  seldom  used  in 
Rpanish. 


EXERCISES. 

212. 

What  did  you  do  when  you  had  finished  your  letter  ? — 1 went  to  my 
brother,  who  took  (llevar)  me  to  the  theatre,  where  I had  the  pleasure 
to  find  one  of  my  friends  whom  I had  not  seen  for  ten  years. — What 
didst  thou  do  after  getting  up  this  morning  ? — When  I had  read  the 
‘etter  of  the  Polish  count  I went  to  see  the  theatre  of  the 

prince  which  I had  not  seen  before,  (iodama.) — What  did  your  father 
do  when  he  had  breakfasted  ? — He  shaved  and  went  out. — Wliat  did 
your  friend  do  after  he  had  been  a-walking  ? — He  went  to  the  baron, 
{baron.) — Did  the  baron  cut  the  meat  after  he  had  cut  the  bread  ? — 
He  cut  the  bread  after  he  had  cut  the  meat. — When  do  you  set  out  ? 
— I do  1 ot  set  out  till  to-morrow ; for  before  I leave  I will  once  m?re 
see  my  good  friends. — What  did  your  children  do  when  they  aad 
breakfasted? — They  went  a-walking  with  their  dear  preceptor,  (pre- 
ceptor.)— Where  did  your  uncle  go  after  he  had  warmed  himself? — 
He  went  nowhere.  After  he  had  warmed  himself  he  undressed  and 
went  to  bed. — At  what  o’clock  did  he  get  up  ? — He  got  up  at  sunrise, 
— Did  you  wake  him  ? — I had  no  need  to  wake  him,  for  he  had  got  up 
before  me. — What  did  your  cousin  do  when  he  heard  of  the  death  {la 
muerte)  of  his  best  friend  ? — He  was  much  afflicted,  and  went  to  bed 
^,ithout  saying  a word. — Rid  you  shave  before  you  breakfasted  ? — 
I shaved  when  I had  breakfasted. — Did  you  go  to  bed  when  you  had 
eaten  supper? — When  I had  eaten  supper  I wrote  my  letters,  and  when 
1 had  written  them  I went  to  bed. — At  what  {de  que)  are  you  afflicted  1 
— I am  afflicted  at  that  accident. — Are  you  afflicted  at  the  death  of 
four  relation  ? — I am  much  afflicted  at  it,  {de  ella.) — When  did  yow 


As  soon  as 

After. 

When. 

No  sooner,  scarcely. 

It  also  expresses  an  action  quickly 
Lm  soon  as  I had  finished  my  work 
I carried  it  to  iiim. 
soon  as  1 had  dressed  myself  I 
went  out. 

When  I had  dined  it  struck  twelve. 

1 hid  soon  done  eating. 


310 


SIXTir-ElGIITH  LESSOJS, 


relation  die  ? — He  died  last  month. — Of  whom  do  you  complain  ?— 

I complain  of  your  boy. — Why  do  you  complain  of  him  ? — Because  he 
has  killed  the  pretty  dog  which  I received  from  one  of  my  friends. — 
Of  what  has  your  uncle  complained  ? — He  has  complained  of  what 
you  have  done. — Has  he  complained  of  the  letter  which  I wrote  to  him 
the  day  before  yesterday  ? — He  has  complained  of  it 

213. 

Why  did  you  not  stay  longei  in  Holland  ? — When  I was  there  the 
living  was  dear,  and  I had  not  money  enough  to  stay  there  longer. — 
VMiat  sort  of  weather  was  it  when  you  were  on  the  way  to  Vienna  ? — 
It  was  very  bad  weather,  for  it  was  stormy,  and  snowed  and  rained 
very  heavily,  (fd  cdntaros.) — Where  have  you  been  since  I saw  you  ? 
— We  sojourned  long  on  the  sea-shore,  until  a ship  arrived,  which 
brought  us  to  France. — Will  you  continue  your  narrative  ? — Scarcely 
had  w^e  arrived  in  France  when  we  were  taken  (llevar)  to  the  king,  who 
received  us  very  well,  and  sent  us  back  to  our  country. — A peasant 
having  seen  that  old  men  {anciano)  used  (servirse  de)  spectacles  {ante- 
ojos)  to  read,  went  to  an  optician  (optico)  and  asked  for  a pair,  {pedir.) 
The  peasant  then  took  a book,  and  having  opened  it,  said  the  spectacles 
were  not  good.  The  optician  put  another  pair  {otro  par)  of  the  best 
which  he  could  find  in  his  shop  Qa  tienda)  upon  his  nose , but  the 
peasant  being  still  unable  to  read,  the  merchant  said  to  him : “ My 
friend,  perhaps  you  cannot  read  at  all  ?”  “ If  I could,  (si  yo  supiera 

leer,^^)  said  the  peasant,  “ I should  not  want  your  spectacles.^' — Henry 
IV.  meeting  one  day  in  his  palace  {el  palacio)  a man  whom  he  did  not 
know,  asked  him  to  whom  he  belonged  : “ I belong  to  mysoif,”  replied 
this  man.  My  friend,”  said  the  king,  “ you  have  a stupid  master.” — 
Tell  us  {cuentenos  V.)  what  has  happened  to  you  lately,  (ei  otro  dia.) 
— Very  willingly,  (con  mucho  gusto :)  but  on  condition  mat  you  wil) 
listen  to  me  (que  VV,  me  escuchen)  without  interrupting  (interrumpir) 
me. — We  will  not  interrupt  you  ; you  may  be  (poder  < rrJar)  sure  o' 
11,  (con  ello.) — Being  lately  at  the  theatre,  I saw  La  J'mtura  par^ 
^ante  ana  La  Mujer  llorosa  performed,  (ver  representar,)  This  lattei 
pbv  (la  ultima  :omedia)  not  being  very  amusing  to  me,  I went  to  tli9 
concert,  where  the  music  caused  me  a violent  headache.  I then  left 
(dejar)  the  concert,  cursing  it,  (maldecir,)  and  went  straight  (en 
derechwa)  to  the  madhouse  (la  casa  de  lo»  locos),  in  order  to  see  my 
cousin.  On  entering  the  hospital  of  my  cousin  I was  struck  with 
horror  (estar  penetrado  de  horror)  at  seeing  several  madmen,  (el  loi:o,) 
who  came  up  to  me,  jumping  (saltar)  and  howling,  (aulla-ndo.)-- 
What  did  you  do  then? — I did  the  same,  aPxd  they  set  i7p  a laugh 
[e^diar  d retr)  as  they  were  withdrawing,  (al  retirar$e,) 


SIXTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


311 


SIXTY-NINITI  LESSON.  —LecaoTi  Sexagesima  nov/i. 
To  get  beaten. 


To  get  paid. 

Vq  gat  one’s  self  invited  to  dine. 

At  first 
Firstly. 

Secondly 

Thirdly,  &c. 

Is  your  mother  at  home  ? 
She  is. 

I am  going  to  her  house. 

A cause. 

A cause  of  complaint. 
She  has  reason  to  be  sad. 
Grief,  sorrow,  sadness. 
Is  that  woman  ready  to  go  out? 
Stie  is. 


C t Llevar  una  paliza. 

^ Llevar  una  tunda. 

( t Sufrir  una  tunda,  {una  palitfL 
I t Hacerse  pagar. 

1 t Hacerse  convidar  k comer. 


Primero.  A1  principio. 
t Desde  luego. 

Primeramente.  Primero. 

En  primer  lugar. 

SSegundamente.  Segundo. 

Ell  segundo  lugar. 

'y  Terceramente.  Tercero 
\ En  tercer  lugar,  &c. 

I Estd  en  casa  la  senora  madre  de  \ 
Si,  estd.  Si,  senor,  (senora.) 

Voy  d casa  de  ella.  (Voy  d su  casa. 
Una  causa.  Una  razon. 

Un  sujeto.  Un  motivo. 

Un  sujeto  (un  motivo)  de  queja. 

Ella  tiene  motivo  de  estar  triste. 
Pesar.  Pesadumbre.  Tristeza. 

I Esta  esa  muger  pronta  para  sanr  i 
Si,  estd. 


Notwithstanding,  in  spite  of. 
In  spite  of  him,  her,  them. 


To  manage. 

Do  you  manage  to  finish  your  work 
every  Saturday  night  ? 

Do  you  manage  to  have  your  work 
done  every  Saturday  night  ? 

Try  to  do  that,  to  oblige  me.  , 


No  obstante.  Sin  embargo.  A pesai 
A pesar  de  el,  de  ella,  de  ellos. 


Conscguir.  Lograr. 

Ingeniarse  para.  Procurar. 

I Consigue  V.  acabar  su  trabajo  todo? 
los  sdbados  por  la  noche  ? 

t t Se  ingenia  V.  para  tener  acabado 
su  trabajo  todos  los  sdbados  po! 
(or  en)  la  noche  ? 

Procure  V.  hacer  eso  para  servinne, 
(obligarme.) 


Obs.  When  in  order  to  can  be  substituted  for  the  preposition  to,  tlie 
litter  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  para,  to  express  the  end,  the  desi^,  or 
cause  for  which  a thing  is  done. 


I »vill  do  every  thing  to  oblige  you.  i Yo  lo  har^  todo  para  servir  $ V 


SIXTT-NINl'il  LESSOR. 


tm 


To  look  upon,  into. 

The  window  looks  into  the  street. 
The  window  looks  out  upon  the  river. 
The  back  door  looks  into  the  garden. 


Caer  d.  Dar  d.  Mirar  L 
La  ventana  cae  d la  callo. 

! La  ventana  mira  al  rio. 

1 La  puerta  trasera  da  al  jar  din. 


To  drown. 

To  drown  a dog. 

To  be  drowned,  to  be  drowning. 

To  drown  one’s  self,  to  get  drowned. 
To  leap  through  the  window. 

To  throw  out  of  the  window. 

I am  drowning. 

Ho  jumped  out  of  the  window. 

To  fasten. 

He  ivas  fastened  to  a tree. 

The  cattle. 

To  keep  warm. 

To  keep  cool. 

To  keep  clean- 

T » keep  on  one’s  guard  against  some 
one 

Ke^'p  on  your  guard  against  that 
man. 


I Anegar.  Ahogar.  (En  el  agua.) 

I Ahogar  un  perro  en  el  agua. 

I Ahogarse. 

Saltar  por  la  ventana 
Echar  por  la  ventana 
Me  ahogo.  Me  estoy  ahogando 
Salt6  por  la  ventana. 

Atar.  Amarrar 

t Le  amarraron  (atdroii)  a un  drbcl 
El  ganado. 

Mantenerse  caliente. 

Mantenerse  fresco 
Mantenerse  limpio,  (aseado.) 

C Guardarse  de  alguno,  (de  uno.; 

< Free  averse  de  alguno,  (de  uno.) 

\ Estar  sobre  aviso  con  respecto  a. 
Gudrdese  V.  de  ese  hombre 


To  tarke  care  (to  beware)  of  some- 
body or  something. 

If  you  do  not  take  care  of  that  horse 
it  will  kick  you 

A kick,  (of  a horse  or  ox.) 
T %ke  care  that  you  do  not  fall. 

Take  care. 


A thought 
An  idea. 

A sally. 

To  be  struck  by  a thought 
A thought  strikes  me. 

Tliat  never  passed  my  mind 


Guardarse  de.  Tener  cuidado  dc 
(con)  alguno,  ,(con  alguna  cosa  ) 
Si  V.  no  se  guarda  de  ese  caballo  ie 
dard  coces. 

Una  coz. 

Tenga  V.  cuidado  do  no  caerso. 
t Cuidado. 

I Un  pensamiento. 

I Una  idea. 

r Un  dicho  agudo.  Un  chiste. 

< Una  agudeza.  Un  arranque. 

(Una  viveza.  Un  repente. 

Darle  golpe  d uno  un  pensamiento. 
Harcerle  fuerza  d uno  una  idea 
1 Me  da  golpe  un  pensamiento. 

Eso  nunca  me  pasd  por  el  pensu 
. miento. 

I Eso  jamas  me  entrd  en  el  pensa 
V miento. 


SIXTY -NINTH  LESSON. 


313 


7V>  tike  into  one^s  head. 

ifo  took  it  into  his  head  lately  to  rob 
me. 

\£  ir  your  head  ? 

In  my  place. 

In  your  place 
In  his  place. 

In  her  place. 

We  must  put  every  thing  in  its  place- 

Around,  round. 

Wt  sailed  around  England. 

They  went  about  the  town  to  look 
ai  the  curiosities. 

To  go  around  the  house. 

To  go  about  the  house. 

To  cost. 

How  much  does  that  cost  you  ? 

How  much  does  this  book  cost  yon  ? 
It  costs  me  three  dollars  and  a half. 

That  table  costs  him  twenty  dollars. 

AlonCf  by  one's  self. 

I was  alone. 

One  woman  only. 

One  God. 

Gcd  alone  can  do  that. 

Tlic  very  thought  of  it  is  criminal. 

A fc"Dgle  reading  is  not  sufficient  to 
satisfy  a mind  that  has  a true 
t iste. 


C t Pasarle  {ponerseli  dunoenpor)h 

< caheza. 

^ Metersele  4 wno  en  la  caheza. 

I Ultimamente  se  le  puso  en  la  cabeia 
I robarme. 

Que  le  pasa  d V.  por  la  cab^za  i 
^ Que  tiene  V.  en  la  cabeza  ? 

En  mi  lugar. 

; En  su  ugar  de  V.  En  su  lugar. 

I En  su  lugar.  En  el  lugar  de  61 
En  su  lugar.  En  su  lugar  de  eliu 
t Todas  las  cosas  se  deben  poner  on 
su  lugar. 

Al  rededor,  (vuelta.) 

Navegamos  al  rededor  de  Ingla 
terra. 

t Fueron  por  toda  la  ciudad  para 
examinar  las  curiosidaaes. 

Ir  al  rededor  de  la  casa. 

1 Dar  la  vuelta  de  la  casa. 
i 1 Ir  por  toda  la  casa. 

< t Ir  de  aqui  para  all!  en  la  casa. 

( t Andar  toda  la  casa. 

Costar  *. 

I Cuanto  le  cuesta  d V eso  ? 

I Cuanto  le  cuesta  d V.  este  libro  ? 
Me  cuesta  tres  pesos  y medio,  (veinte 
reales.) 

Esa  mesa  le  cuesta  veinte  pesos. 
Solo.  Sola. 

Por  si  solo.  Por  si  sola. 

Yo  estaba  solo,  (sola  ) 

Una  sola  muger 
Un  solo  Dios. 

Solo  Dios  puede  hacer  eso. 
t El  mero  pensamiento  es  culpable. 
Una  sola  lectura  no  basta  para  sa- 
I tisfacer  d un  ingenio  que  tiene  im 

' gusto  exacto. 


To  kill  hi  shooting. 
He  has  blown  oat  his  brains 


I Matar  d tiros. 

r t Se  ha  levantado  la  tapa  de  k><* 
( sesos. 

? t So  ha  tirado  un  tiro  {mortal.) 


14 


814 


SIXTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


Jle  has  blown  out  his  brains  with  a 
pistol. 


He  served  for  a long  time,  acquired 
honors,  and  died  contented. 

Be  arrived  poor,  grew  nch  in  a short 
time,  and  lost  all  jq  a still  shorter 

th'Qd. 


Se  volo  la  tapa  de  los  sesos  de  nn 
pistoletavir). 


Sirvid  largo  tiempo,  adquiiid  honores, 
y murid  satisfecho,  (coiitento.) 

Llcgd  aqui  pobre,  se  hizo  rico  (enri- 
quecid)  eii  poco  tiempo,  y per  did 
cuanto  tenia  en  menos  tiemv*o 
today  ia. 


EXERCISES. 

214. 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? Why  do  you  look  so  melancholy, 
( parecer  ?) — I should  not  look  so  melancholy  if  I had  no  reason  to  be 
sad.  I have  heard  just  now  (Lesson  L.)  that  one  of  my  best  fr'ends 
has  shot  himself  with  a pistol,  and  that  one  of  my  wife’s  best  friends 
has  drowned  herself. — Where  has  she  drowned  herself? — She  ha5. 
drowned  herself  in  the  river  which  is  behind  her  house.  Yesterday, 
at  four  o’clock  in  the  morning,  she  rose  without  saying  a w^ord  to 
any  one,  (ninguna  persona^  leaped  out  of  the  window  which  looks 
into  the  garden,  and  threw  herself  into  the  river,  where  she  was 
drowned. — I have  a great  mind  (niucha  gand)  to  bathe  (bannrse)  to-day. 
— Where  will  you  bathe  ? — In  the  river. — Are  you  not  afraid  of  being 
drowned  ?— Oh,  no  ! I can  (saber)  swim. — Who  taught  you  ? — Last 
summer  I took  a few  lessons  in  the  swimming-school,  (escuela  de  nada'^.) 

When  had  you  finished  your  task  ? — I had  finished  it  when  you 
came  in. — Those  who  had  contributed  (contrihuir)  most  to  his  elevation 
to  the  throne  (trono)  of  his  ancestors,  were  those  who  labored  (t^a- 
hajar)  with  the  most  eagerness  to  precipitate  (precipitar)  him  from 
it,  (de  el.)  As  soon  as  Caesar  (Cesar)  had  crossed  (pasar)  the 
Rubicon,  he  had  no  longer  to  deliberate,  (deliherar :)  he  was  obliged 
to  conquer  (veneer)  or  to  die. — An  emperor  (emperador)  who  was 
irritated  at  (irritado  contra)  an  astrologer,  asked  him:  “Wretch, 
(miserable !)  what  death  dost  thou  believe  thou  wilt  die  ?” — “ I shall 
die  of  the  fever,’  replied  the  astrologer.  “ Thou  liest,”  said  the 
emperor,  “ thou  wilt  die  this  instant  of  a violent  death,  (muerte  vio 
lentad^)  As  he  was  going  to  be  seized,  (asir^)  he  said  to  the  emperor, 
^ Sire,  order  some  one  to  feel  (pres,  subj.)  my  pulse,  (senor,  manck 
V.  M,  que  se  me  tome  el  pulso,)  and  it  will  be  found  that  I have  a fe- 
rcr.”  This  sally  (agudeza)  saved  his  life. 

215. 

Do  you  perceive  yonder  house,  (aqi^ella  '*) — I do  percei'^e  it : whtu 
Mouse  is  it  ? — It  Is  an  inn,  ( una  venta ;)  if  you  like  we  will  go  into  'v 


SEVENTIETH  LESSON. 


815 


m drink  a ^luss  of  wine,  for  I am  very  thirsty. — You  are  always 
thirsty  when  you  see  an  inn. — If  we  enter  I shall  drink  your  health. 
— Rather  than  (Lesson  LXI.)  go  into  an  inn  I will  not  drink. — 
When  will  you  pay  me  what  you  owe  me? — When  I have  money: 
it  is  useless  to  ask  me  for  some  to-day,  for  you  know  very  well  that 
tliere  is  nothing  to  be  had  of  him  who  has  nothing. — When  do  yo^ 
tliink  you  will  have  money  ? — I think  I shall  have  some  next  year.—. 
Will  you  do  what  I shall  tell  you  ? — I will  do  it  if  it  is  not  too  difficult. 

Why  do  you  laugh  at  me  ? — I do  not  laugh  at  you,  but  at  your  coat 
—Does  it  not  look  like  (Lesson  LXIII.)  yours  ? — It  does  not  look 
like  it,  for  mine  is  short  {corto)  and  yours  is  too  long,  {largo ;)  mine 
is  black  and  yours  is  green. — Why  do  you  associate  with  that 
man  ? — I would  not  associate  with  him  if  he  had  not  rendered  me 
great  services,  {el  favor.) — Do  not  trust  him,  for  if  you  are  not  on 
your  guard,  he  will  cheat  {enganar)  you. — Why  do  you  work  so 
much  ? — I work  in  order  to  be  one  day  useful  to  my  country. — When 
I was  yet  little  I once  {un  dia)  said  to  my  father,  “ I do  not  know 
commerce,  {el  comercio,)  and  I do  not  know  how  to  sell ; let  me 
{'permitame  V.)  play.”  My  father  answered  me,  smiling,  {son- 
riendose,)  “ In  dealing  (traficando  se  aprende  d)  one  learns  to  deal,  and 
in  selling,  to  sell.”  “ But,  my  dear  father,”  replied  {replicar)  I,  “ in  play- 
irio  >ne  learns  also  to  play.”  “ You  are  right,”  said  he  to  me,  “ but  you 
must  first  learn  what  is  necessary  and  useful.” — Judge  not,  {nojuzgue 
F.,)  that  you  may  not  be  judged,  {si  no  quiere  que  le  juzguen  !)  Why 
do  you  perceive  the  mote  {una  paja)  in  your  brother’s  eye,  you  who 
do  not  perceive  the  beam  {una  viga)  which  is  in  your  own  eye  ?— 
Would  you  copy  your  exercises  if  I copied  mine? — I would  copy 
them  if  you  copied  yours. — Would  your  sister  have  transcribed  liei 
letter  if  I had  transcribed  mine  ? — She  would  have  transcribed  it. — 
Would  she  have  set  out  if  I had  set  out  ? — I cannot  tell  you  what  she 
svould  have  done  if  you  had  set  out. 


SEVENTIETH  LESSON.  —Leccion  Septuagesima, 

OF  THE  IMPERATIVE.- DeZ  imperativu,  No.  6. 

See  the  table  of  terminations. 

This  mood  is  used  when  the  action  expresses  commanding,  praying,  oi 
sxnorting.  The  subject  (when  expressed)  is  always  placed  after  tho  verb 
'this  mood  has  the  three  persouft  in  both  numbers. 


S16 


SEVENTIETH  LESSON 


No.  5 of  To  be.  No.  5 de  Ser 

1st  Let  me  be.  "I  f 1.  Sea  yo. 

2d.  Be  thou.  ! I 2.  Se  td. 

3d.  Let  him  be  i ^ Sea  ^1,  (ella,  or  V 

2d.  Be  thou  not.  J L 2.  No  seas  td.^ 

1st.  Let  us  be.  f 1.  Seainos  nosotros. 

2d,  Be  ye  or  you.  ip,  , ) 2.  Sed  vos,  (vosotros.^^ 

3d.  Let  them  be.  \ * } 3.  Seau  ellos,  (ellas,  or  VV.) 

2d.  Be  ye  not.  J L 2.  No  seals  vos,  (vosotros.‘) 


No.  5 of  To  have,  (active.)  | 
Let  me  have,  &c.  | 

Let  us  have,  &c.  | 

Have  patience.  | 

Be  (ye)  attentive  j 

Go  (yo)  there. 

Give  it  me 
Send  it  to  him. 

Lend  it  to  me. 


No.  5 de  Tener,  (active.) 

Tenga  yo,  ten  td,  no  tengas  id.  ten 
ga  el,  (ella,  V.) 

Tengamos  nosotros,  tened  vosotros, 
no  tengais  vosotros,  tengan  ellos, 
(ellas,  VV.) 

Teiiga  V.  paciencia. 

Sean  VV.  atentos.  (Sed  atentos.) 

Esten  VV.  atentos.  (Estad  atentos) 

Vayan  VV.  alld.  (Id  alia.) 

Dernele  (demela)  V. 

Enviesele  (eiiviesela)  V.  (a  ^1.) 

Prestemele  (prestemela)  V. 


Ohs.  The  pronouns  object  and  complement  are  placed  after  the  Im- 
perative, and  joined  to  it  so  as  to  form  a single  word,  when  the  verb  is  used 
affirmatively  ; but,  when  used  negatively,  the  pronouns  are  placed  bekie. 
(See  Lesson  XX.  Obs.  A.) 

Do  not  give  it  to  me.  j No  me  le  (no  me  la)  d^  V 

Do  not  lend  it  to  him.  | No  se  le  (no  se  la)  preste  V.  d dl. 

Have  the  goodness  to  hand  mo  that  I Tonga  V.  la  bondad  de  pasarme  es-^ 
plate.  I plato. 


To  borrow. 

J will  b(jrrow  seme  money  of  you. 

I w ill  borrow  that  money  of  you 

Borrow  it  of  (or  from)  him. 

I borrow  it  from  him. 

Do  not  tell  it  to  him — to  her. 

Do  not  return  it  to  them. 


Pedir  'prestado. 

Yo  quiero  pedir  d V algun  dinero 
prestado. 

Yo  quiero  pedir  prestado  ese  dinero 
d V 

Pidasele  V.  prestado  d dl. 

Yo  se  le  pido  prestado  d dl. 

No  se  lo  diga  V.  d dl — d ella. 

No  se  le  (la  or  lo)  vuelva  V.  k ellot, 
(d  ellas.) 


' O*  \Yien  the  second  person,  either  singular  or  plural,  is  used  nega- 
iMvely,  its  termination  is  the  same  as  the  second  person  singular  or  plural  of 
the  subjunctive. 


SEVENTIETH  LESSON. 


317 


Patieuce.  Impatience. 
The  neighbor. 

The  snuff-box. 


Paciencia.  Impaciencia. 
El  projimo 
La  tabaquera. 

Caja  de  polvo,  (de  tabaco.) 


Bo  (ye)  good  I Sean  VV.  buenoL  Sed  buenoa. 

Know  (ye)  it.  | Sepanlo  VV.  Sabedio  vosotros. 


Obey  your  masters,  and  never  give 
them  any  trouble. 

Pay  what  you  owe,  comfort  the  af- 
flicted, and  do  good  to  those  that 
have  offended  you. 

Love  God,  and  thy  neighbor  as  thy- 
self. 

To  obey. 

To  comfort. 

To  offend. 

Let  us  always  love  and  practise  vir- 
tue, and  w’e  shall  be  happy  both 
in  this  life  and  in  the  next. 

To  practise. 

Liet  us  see  which  of  us  can  shoot 
best. 


f Obedezean  VV.  d sus  maestros,  y ao 
j les  den  jamas  ninguna  pena. 

I Obedeced  d vuestros  maestros,  y 
nunca  les  dels  ninguna  pena. 

Pague  V.  sus  deudas,  ampare  d los 
aflijidos,  y haga  bien  a log  quo  le 
hayan  ofendido. 

Ama  d Dios,  y d tu  prdjfmo  oomo  i 
ti  mismo. 

Ohedecer.  (See  verbs  in  cer.) 

Amparar.  Consolar. 

Ofender. 

Amemos  y practiquemos  siempre  la 
virtud,  y serdmos  felices  tanto  en 
esta  vida  como  en  la  otra, 

Practicar.  Ejercer.  Hacer. 

Veamos  cual  de  nosotros  puede  tira/ 
mejor. 


To  express. 

To  express  one^s  self. 

To  moke  one's  self  understood. 

To  have  the  habit. 

To  accustom. 

To  accustom  one’s  self  to  something. 

Children  must  bo  accustomed  early 
to  labor. 

To  bt  accustomed  to  a tiling. 

1 am  accustomed  to  it. 

1 cannot  express  myself  in  Spanish, 
because  I am  not  in  the  habit  of 
speaking. 

Vou  speak  properly 
To  converse 
To  chatter  to  prate. 


Expresar. 

Expresarse. 

Hacerse  comprender,  (entender.) 
Tener  costumbre.  Soler  *. 
Acostumbrar.  Acostumbrarse. 
Acostumbrarse  d alguna  cosa. 

A los  Linos  se  les  debe  acostumbrai 
temprano  al  trabajo. 

Estar  acostumbrado  d una  cosa. 
Estoy  acostumbrado  d ello. 

No  puedo  expresarme  en  espanol[ 
porque  no  tengo  costumbre  de  ha' 
blar. 

V.  habla  propiamente. 

Conversar. 

Charlar 


318 


SEVENTIETH  LESSON, 


A prattler,  a chatterer. 

I practise  speaking. 

To  permit,  to  allow. 

The  permission. 

I perniit  you  to  go  there. 

Do  good  to  the  poor,  have  compas- 
sion on  the  unfortunate,  and  God 
will  take  care  of  the  rest. 

To  do  good  to  some  one. 

To  have  compassion  on  some  one. 

Compassion. 

Pity. 

The  rest. 


If  he  comes,  tell  him  I am  in  the 
garden. 

Ask  the  merchant  whether  he  can 
let  me  have  the  horse  at  the  price 
which  1 have  offered  him. 


I read,  and  was  told. 

Tliere  they  laugh  and  weep  by  turns. 

If  they  knew  what  you  liave  done. 

The  country  where  diamonds  are 
found. 

You  have  been,  or  will  soon  be  told. 

What  we  conceive  well  we  expre.ss 
clearly. 

To  appear  before  my  eyes,  his  merit 
is  too  great. 

We  do  not  like  to  see  those  to  whom 
we  owe  so  much. 

It  is  from  a king  (Agesilaus)  that 
we  have  that  excellent  maxim — 
“ That  a man  is  great  only  inas- 
much aa  ho  is  just.’* 


Un  charlanie,  Un  hahlado^ 

Un  platicon,  Parlante, 

I t No  hago  mas  que  hablar 

Permitir,  Conceder, 

La  permision,  (licencia.) 

Yo  le  permito  a V.  que  vaya  all^. 

Ilaga  V.  bien  d los  pobres,  tonga 
compasion  de  los  infortunados,  y 
Dios  cuidard  de  lo  demas. 

Racer  bien  d alguno, 

Compadecerse. 

Tener  comjjasion  de  alguno 

Compasion 

Ldstima. 

El  resto.  Lo  demas. 


Si  ^1  viene,  dlgale  V.  que  estoy  en  el 
jardin. 

Inffirmese  V.  del  mercader  si  puede 
dejarme  (venderme)  el  caballo  por 
el  precio  que  lo  he  ofrecido. 

Lei,  y me  dijeron. 

Alli  uno  rie  y llora  por  turnos. 

t Alli  rieii  y Horan  alternativamente 

Si  supieran  lo  que  V.  ha  hecho. 

El  pais  (la  tierra)  en  donde  se  hallan 
los  diamantes. 

Ya  le  hail  dicho  d V.,  6 pronto  le 
dirdn. 

L-o  que  pe  concibe  bien  se  expresa 
con  claridad. 

Para  presentarse  ante  mi,  su  mdrito 
es  demasiado  grande. 

No  nos  gusta  ver  d aquellos  d quienes 
debemos  tanto. 

De  un  rey  (Agesilao)  es  de  quieii  te- 
nemos  esa  gran  mdxima-  Que 
uno  no  es  grande  sino  en  cusmta 
es  justo.” 


5 


SEVENTIETH  LESSON. 


319 


EXERCISES. 

216. 

Have  patience,  niy  dear  friend,  and  be  not  sad ; for  sadness  alters 
m nada  remedia)  nothing,  and  impatience  makes  bad  worse,  (lo  male 
peor.)  Be  not  afraid  of  your  creditors ; be  sure  tliat  they  will  do  you 
no  harm.  They  will  wait  if  you  cannot  pay  them  yet. — When  will 
^ou  pay  me  what  you  owe  me  ? — As  soon  as  I have  (tenga)  money  I 
will  pay  all  that  you  have  advanced  (for)  me.  I have  not  forgotten  it. 
for  I think  of  it  (en  ello)  every  day.  I am  your  debtor,  (deudor,)  and  I 
shall  never  deny  it. — What  a beautiful  inkstand  you  have  there  ! pray 
lend  it  me. — What  do  you  wish  to  do  with  it  ? — I wish  to  show  it  tc 
my  sister. — Take  it,  but  take  care  of  it,  and  do  not  break  it. — Do  not 
fear  (tzo  ienga  V,  cuidado.) — What  do  you  want  of  my  lirother  ? — J 
want  to  borrow  some  money  of  him. — Borrow  (jpedir)  some  (le)  oJ 
somebody  else,  (d  otra  persona.) — If  he  will  net  lend  me  any  I will 
borrow  some  (le)  of  somebody  else. — You  will  do  well. — Do  not  wish 
hr  (apetecer)  what  you  cannot  have,  but  be  contented  with  what 
Providence  (la  Providencia)  has  given  you,  and  consider  (considerar) 
that  there  are  many  men  who  have  not  what  you  have. — Life  being 
short,  let  us  endeavor  (Lesson  LXV.)  to  make  it  as  agreeable  as  pos- 
sible. But  let  us  also  consider  that  the  abuse  (el  ahuso)  of  pleasure 
(in  the  plural  in  Spanish)  makes  it  bitter,  (amargo,  fern.) — Have  you 
done  your  exercises  ? — I could  not  do  them,  because  my  brother  was 
not  at  home. — You  must  not  get  {dar  d hacer)  your  exercises  done  by 
your  brother,  but  you  must  do  them  yourself,  ( V,  mismo) — What  are 
you  doing  there  ? — I am  reading  the  book  which  you  lent  me. — You 
are  wrong  in  always  reading  it. — What  am  I to  do  ? — Draw  this  land- 
scape, (Lesson  LX VII.,)  and  when  you  have  drawn  it  you  shall  decline 
some  substantives  with  adjectives. 

217. 

What  must  we  do  in  order  to  be  happy  ? — Always  love  and  practise 
virtue,  and  you  will  be  happy  both  in  this  life  and  in  the  next. — Since 
(ya  que)  we  wish  to  be  happy,  let  us  do  good  to  the  poor,  and  let  us 
have  compassion  on  the  unfortunate ; let  us  obey  our  masters,  and 
.eever  give  them  any  trouble ; let  us  comfort  the  unfortunate,  (infor- 
ianadoSy)  love  our  neighbor  as  ourselves,  and  not  hate  those  (ahorrec&r) 
hat  have  offended  us ; in  short,  (en  una  palabra,)  let  us  always  fulfil 
Dur  duty,  and  God  will  take  care  of  the  rest. — My  son,  in  order  to  be 
oved  you  must  oe  laborious  (lahorioso)  and  good.  Thou  art  accused 
^acusar)  of  having  been  idle  and  negligent  in  thy  affairs.  Thou  know- 
^st,  however,  that  thy  brother  has  been  punished  for  having  been 
naughty.  Being  lately  (el  otro  dia)  in  town,  I received  a letter  from 


SEVENTIETH  LESSOlf. 


m 

ihy  tutor,  in  which  he  strongly  (fuertemente)  complained  of  thee.  Dt 
not  weep ; now  go  into  thy  room,  learn  thy  lesson,  and  bo  a good  boy, 
{buerw.)  otherwise  {de  otro  modo)  thou  v/ilt  get  notliing  for  dinner. — 1 
shall  be  so  good,  my  dear  father,  that  you  will  certainly  be  satisfied 
•vith  me. — Has  the  little  boy  kept  his  word,  (cumplir  con  su  palahra  J) 
— N(it  quite ; for  after  having  said  that,  he  went  into  his  room,  took 
'lis  books,  sat  down  at  the  table,  and  fell  asleep. — “ He  is  a very  good 
sK>y  when  he  sleeps,”  said  his  father,  seeing  him  some  time  after. 

Good  morning,  Miss  N. — Ah ! here  you  are  at  last.  I have  been 
waiting  for  you  with  impatience. — You  will  pardon  me,  (jperdonar^  my 
dear,  I could  not  come  sooner. — Sit  down,  if  you  please. — How  is  your 
mother  ? — She  is  better  to-day  than  she  was  yesterday. — I am  glad  of 
it,  (rnucho  me  alegro  de  ello.) — Were  you  at  the  ball  yesterday  ? — I was 
there. — Were  you  much  amused,  .^) — Only  so-so. — At  what 

o’clock  did  you  return  home  ? — At  a quarter  past  eleven. 

218. 

Have  you  been  learning  Spanish  long  ? — No,  Sir,  I have  only  been 
learning  it  these  six  months. — Is  it  possible ! you  speak  tolerably 
well  (Jbastante  bien)  for  so  short  a time,  {tan  carlo  tiempo.) — You  jest, 
{burlarse ;)  I do  not  know  much  (of  it)  yet. — Indeed,  you  speak  it  well 
already. — I think  you  flatter  me  a little. — Not  at  all ; you  speak  it 
properly. — In  order  to  speak  it  properly  one  must  know  more  (of  it) 
than  I know. — You  know  enough  (of  it)  to  make  yourself  understood. 
— I still  make  many  faults.—  -That  is  nothing,  (-j  eso  no  le  hace ;)  you 
must  not  be  bashful ; besides  {ademas)  you  have  made  no  faults  in  ail 
you  have  said  just  now.—  1 am  still  timid,  because  I am  afraid  of  being 
laughed  at,  {que  se  rian  de  mi,  pres,  of  the  subjunctive.) — They  w^ould 
be  very  unpolite  to  laugh  at  you.  Who  would  be  so  unpoliie  as  to 
laugh  at  you,  {que  se  riese  de  V,  1)  Do  you  not  know  the  proverb  ? — 
What  proverb  ? — He  who  wishes  to  speak  well  must  begin  by  {par) 
speaking  badly. — Do  you  understand  all  I am  telling  you  ? — I under- 
stand and  comprehend  it  very  well ; but  I cannot  express  myself  well 
in  Spanish,  because  I am  not  in  the  habit  of  speaking  it. — That  will 
come  in  {con  el  tiempo)  time. — I wish  {lo  deseo)  it  wdth  all  my  lieart. 

Do  you  sometimes  see  my  brother  ? — I see  him  sometimes  ; when  1 
met  him  the  other  day  he  complained  of  you.  “ If  he  had  behaved 
better,  and  had  been  more  economical,”  said  he,  “ he  would  have  no 
debts,  and  I would  not  have  been  angry  with  him.” — I begged  of  him 
U)  have  compassion  on  you,  {se  compadeciera  de  F.,)  telling  him  that 
you  had  not  even  money  enough  to  buy  bread. — “ Tell  him,  when  you 
sec  him,”  replied  he  to  me,  “ that  notwithstanding  his  bad  behavior 
(la  conducta)  towards  me,  I pardon  {perdonar  d uno)  him.  Tell  hinr 


SEVENTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


321 


also,”  continued  he,  ‘ that  one  should  not  laugh  {que  no  se  debe  reir) 
at  tliosc  to  whom  one  is  under  obligation.  Have  the  goodness  to 
do  this,  and  I shall  be  much  obliged  to  you,”  added  he  in  going  avvav 
(fl/  irse.) 


SEVENTY-FIRST  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesirna  prtmera. 


To  stand  up.  1 

To  remain  up  \ 

Will  you  permit  me  to  go  to  the  J 
market  ? ] 

To  hasten.  | 

Make  haste,  and  return  soon.  | 

Go  and  tell  him  that  I cannot  come  I 
to-day.  I 

He  came  and  told  us  he  could  not  J 
come.  ^ 

Go  and  see  your  friends.  | 


Esiar  en  pie. 

Permanecer  en  pie 

I Me  permite  V.  ir  al  mercado, 
la  plaza)  ? 

I Quiere  V.  permitirme  que  vaya 
la  plaza  ? 

Apresurarse.  Despacharse. 

Ir  presto^  {pronto.) 

Despdchese  V.,  y vuelva  pronto. 

Vaya  V d decirle  quQ  no  puedo  ve- 
nir  hoy. 

Vaya  V.,  y digale  que  no  puedo  vo 
nir  hoy. 

Vino  d decirnos  que  no  podia  venir. 

Vino  y nos  dijo  que  no  podia  venir 

Vaya  V.  d ver  d sus  amigos. 


To  weepf  to  cry. 

The  least  blow  makes  him  cry. 

To  frighten. 

To  be  frightened^  to  startle 

The  least  thing  frightens  him. 

Be  not  fr—' -'ened. 

To  be  frightened  at  something 

arc  you  frightened  at? 


Llorar. 

El  menor  golpe  le  hace  llorar 
Asustar.  Espantar. 

Asustarse.  Sobresaltarse. 

La  menor  cosa  le  espanta. 

Se  sobresalta  de  la  menor  cosa. 

I No  se  espante  (sobresalte)  V. 

I Asustarse  (espantarse,  sobresaltar  jg) 
j de  algo,  (de  alguna  cosa.) 

1 I De  que  se  asusla  V.  ? 


At  my  expense. 

At  his  or  her  expense 

At  our  expense. 

At  other  people’s  expense. 


I A expensas  mias.  A mi  costa. 
1 A expensas  suyas.  A su  costa 
J A expensas  nuestras. 

( A nuestra  costa. 

J A expensas  agenajs. 
f A costa  agena. 


522 


SEVENTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


To  depend. 

ri'at  depends  upon  circumstancea 
That  does  not  depend  upon  me. 

It  depends  upo~  him  to  do  it. 

Oh  ! yes,  it  depends  upon  him. 

That  man  lives  at  everybody’s  ex- 
pense. 

To  astonish j to  surprise. 

To  he  astonished,  to  wonder. 

To  he  surprised  at  something. 

I am  surprised  at  it. 

An  extraordinary  thing  happened 
which  surprised  everybody 
To  take  place. 

Many  things  have  passed  which  will 
surprise  you. 

To  surprise. 

Many  days  will  pass  before  that. 

A man  came  in  who  asked  mo  how 
I was. 


Depender  de.  Estar  eu. 

Eso  depende  de  las  circunstandaa 

Eso  no  depende  de  mi. 

Depende  de  6\  el  hacorlo. 

Esld  en  ^1  el  hacerlo. 

; Ah  ! si,  depende  de  4\. 

Ese  hombre  vive  d expensas  de  to<h 
el  mundo. 

I Asomhrar.  Pasmar.  Sorprender 

Asornhrarse.  Estar  asomhrado. 

Admirarse.  Maravillarse. 

Estar  asomhrado  de  alguna  cosa 
{de  algo.) 

Estoy  sorprendido  de  ello,  (de  eso.) 

Aconteci6  una  cosa  extraordinaria 
que  sorprendid  d todo  el  mundo. 

Acontecer.  Suceder. 

Han  acontecido  muchas  cosas  que  le 
sorprenderdn  d V. 

Sorprender. 

Pasaran  muchos  dias  antes  que  su- 
ceda  (acontezea)  eso. 

Entr6  un  hombre  que  me  preguntd 
corao  estaba,  (como  lo  pasaba.) 


Then,  thus,  consequently. 

Therefore. 

The  other  day. 
Lately. 

In  a short  time. 

In. 


Pues.  Entonces.  Asi. 

Por  consiguiente. 

Por  consiguiente.  Asi  pues. 
Por  tanto. 

El  otro  dia. 

Ultimameiite.  Poco  ha. 
Dentro  de  poco  tiempo. 

Dentro  de  poco. 

Dentro  de.  En.  De  aqui  a. 


Ohs.  In  speaking  of  time,  dentro  de  expresses  the  epoch,  en  the 
liiiiation,  and  de  aqui  d,  both. 

Ho  will  arrive  In  a week,  (when  a ^ fil  llegard  dentro  de  una  semana- 
week  is  elapsed.)  ( t De  aqui  d ocho  dias. 

It  took  him  a week  :o  make  this  ( Hizo  este  viage  en  una  semana. 


journey,  (he  made  it  in  a weeK.) 
He  wJl  have  finished  his  studies  in 
three  months. 

Ke  finished  his  studies  in  a /ear. 


t Gasto  ocho  dias  en  su  viaje. 
Habrd  acabado  sus  estudios  deiitr# 
de  ties  meses. 

Acab'5  sus  estudios  en  un  auo. 


SEVENTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


323 


Ue  has  applied  himself  particularly 
to  geometry. 

To  apply  ones  self. 

lie  has  a good  many  friends. 

A good  many. 

y^ou  have  a great  deal  of  patience. 


To  make  a present  of  something  to 
some  one. 

Mr.  Lewis  Martinez  wrote  to  me 
lately,  that  his  sisters  would  be 
here  in  a short  time,  and  requested 
me  to  tell  you  so ; you  will  then 
be  able  to  see  them,  and  to  give 
them  tne  books  which  you  have 
bought.  They  hope  that  you  will 
make  them  a present  of  them. 
Their  brother  has  assured  me  that 
they  esteem  you,  without  knowing 
you  personally. 


To  get  or  to  he  tired. 
To  want  amusement. 


pauy  ? 

He  gets  tired  everywhere. 


Agreeable,  (pleasing) 
To  be  welcome. 

you  are  welcome  everywhere. 


Se  ha  dedicado  particulaiiiente  fi  la 
geometria. 

Dedicarse.  Aplicarsc. 

Tiene  muchos  amigos. 

Muchos.  Muchas. 

tiene  muchisima  paciem.a. 
t V tiene  un  gran  Jondo  de  pacieru 
cicu 


Hacer  presente  de  algo  de  alguna 
cosa)  d alguno. 

Hacer  un  regalo,  (t  una  fineza.) 

Me  escribid  el  otro  dia  el  Sefior  Don 
Luis  Martinez  que  sus  hermanas 
estarian  aqui  dentro  de  poco  tiem- 
po,  y me  rogh  se  lo  dijera  a V. , 
enthnces  podrd  V.  verlas  y dar- 
les  los  libros  que  ha  comprado. 
Ellas  piensan  que  V.  se  los  pre- 
sentard  como  un  regalo.  JSu  her- 
mano  me  ha  asegurado  que  ellas 
estiman  d V.,  sin  conocerle  perso- 
nal mente. 


Ahurrirse.  Fastidiarse  Cansarse. 

I Como  podria  yo  aburrirme  en  la 
compania  de  V.  ? 

^il  en  todas  partes  se  fastidia. 

Agradable.  Gustoso.  Placentero. 
t Ser  hien  venido.  t Agasajar. 
t En  todas  partes  le  agasajan  d V. 
Es  V.  bien  venido  (recibido)  en  todtis 
partes. 


EXERCISE. 

219. 

Will  you  drink  a cup  of  tea  ? — I thank  you  ; I do  not  like  tea.— 
CK)  you  like  coffee  ? — I like  it,  but  I have  just  drunk  some,  (le.) — Do 
y ou  not  get  tired  here  ? — How  could  I get  tired  in  this  agreeable 
society  ? — As  to  me  I always  want  amusement. — If  you  did  as  I do, 
you  would  not  want  amusement,  for  I listen  to  all  those  who  tell  m€ 


324 


SEVENTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


any  thins^.  in  this  manner  I learn  a thousand  agreeable  things,  tind  i 
*iave  no  time  to  get  tired  ; but  you  do  nothing  of  tnat  kind,  {^de  eso,} 
tiiat  is  the  reason  why  you  want  amusement. — I would  do  every  thing 
like  (coma)  you,  if  1 had  no  reason  to  be  sad. — Have  you  seeii 
Lambert  ? — 1 have  seen  him  ; he  told  me  that  his  sisters  would  be 
here  in  a short  time,  and  desired  (me  rogo  se  lo  dijera  a V.)  me  tc 
I ell  you  so.  Wlien  they  have  (hayan)  arrived,  you  may  give  them  the 
gold  rings  which  you  have  bought ; they  flatter  themselves  that  you 
?\  ili  make  them  a present  of  them,  for  they  love  you  without  knowing 
you  personally. — Has  my  sister  already  written  to  you  ? — She  has 
written  to  me ; I am  going  to  answer  her. — Shall  I tell  her  that  you 
are  here  ? — Tell  her ; but  do  not  tell  her  that  I am  waiting  for  her 
impatiently,  (con  impaciencia.) — Why  have  you  not  brought  your  sis- 
ter along  with  you? — Which  one? — Tiie  one  you  always  bring,  the 
youngest. — She  did  not  wish  to  go  out,  because  she  has  the  toothache. 
— 1 am  very  sorry  for  it,  for  she  is  a very  good  girl. — flow  old  is  she  ? 
— She  is  nearly  fifteen  years  old. — She  is  very  tail  (alto)  for  her  age, 
(edad.) — How  old  are  you  ? — I am  twenty-two. — Is  it  possible  ! I 
thought  you  were  not  yet  twenty,  (no  llegaha  ^ . d los  veirde,) 


SEVENTY-SECOND  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesima  ssguruki 
Not.  I No. 

Hj"  Remember  that  no  is  always  placed  before  the  verb  in  negative  aud 
interrogative-negative  sentences. 


Have  you  not  my  book  ? 

I have  it  not. 

Do  not  speak  to  that  man. 

Have  you  not  seen  my  brother? 

Has  he  not  learned  Spanish? 

He  has  not  learned  it. 

He  is  loo  fond  of  me  not  to  do  it. 

I go  away  not  to  displease  him,  or 
her. 

One  must  be  a hoi  not  to  perceive 
that. 

To  cease. 

To  dare. 

To  be  able 


I No  tiene  V.  mi  libro? 

No  le  tengo. 

No  liable  V.  d ese  hombre 
I No  ha  visto  V.  d mi  hermano? 
t No  ha  aprendido  dl  el  espahol  ? 

No  le  ha  aprendido. 

Me  quiere  demasiado  para  no  hacei 
eso  por  mi. 

Me  voy  para  no  desagradai  e,  (lu.) 

Ha  de  ser  un  gran  mentecato  eJ  que 
no  perciba  eso 

Cesar.  Parar.  Desistir.  Dojor  do 
Osar  Atreverse. 

Poder. 


SEVENTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


325 


foil  continually  ask  m©  for  money. 

Si'io  does  not  cease  complaining 

I di  not  dare  tc  ack  you  for  it. 

Slift  does  not  dare  to  tell  you  so. 

1 cannot  go  there. 

I cannot  tell  you. 

You  cannot  believe  it. 

They  found  on  her  a letter,  in  which 
Lucinda  stated  and  declared  in 
her  own  handwriting,  that  she 
could  never  be  the  wife  of  Don 
Fernando,  being  already  the  wife 
Cardeiiio. 


' Moreover,  besides. 

Besides  that. 

Besides  what  I have  just  said. 

There  are  no  means  of  finding  money 
now. 


Contmuamente  me  pide  V.  dinero. 
t Siernpre  me  anda  V.  pidiendo  di 
ncro. 

E.Ia  no  cesa  de  quejarso. 
t ELla  siernpre  se  estd  quejando 
t No  para  en  sus  ';ueias. 

No  me  atrevo  4 pediiselo  d V 
Ella  no  se  atreve  a decirselo  a V 
Yo  no  puedo  ir  alia. 

Yo  no  puedo  decir  d V. 

V.  no  lo  puede  creer. 

Hallaron  un  panel  escrito  de  a mis- 
ma  letra  do  Lucinda,  en  que  decia 
y declaraba  que  ella  no  podia  sei 
nunca  esposa  de  Don  Fernando 
sino  de  Cardenio  de  quien  ya  k 
era. 

D.  Quijote,  Cap.  28. 


Ademas  de.  A mas  de  esto,  (eso.; 
Par  otra  parte.  Awn. 

Ademas  de  eso. 

Ademas  de  lo  que  acabo  de  decir. 
No  hay  medio  de  hallar  dinero  ahor. 


To  push. 

Along  the  road. 

Along  the  street 
All  along. 

All  the  year  round. 


To  enable  to. 

To  he  able. 

To  the  right.  On  the  right  side, 
the  right  hand 

On  the  left  On  the  left  side. 

On  the  left  hand. 


Empujar.  Impeler. 

Irnportunar.  Molestar. 

A lo  largo  (por  lo  largo)  del  caminf 
Todo  el  largo  del  camino. 

A lo  largo  (por  lo  largo)  de  la  callc 
Por  todo. 

Por  todo  el  ano. 

t Todo  el  ano  complete,  (en  redon- 
do.) 


Poner  en  situacion  de.  Ilahilitar 
Poder.  Poner  en  estado  de. 

Ser  capaz.  Poder. 

Tener  facultad. 

A la  derecha.  A1  lado  dorecho. 

A mano  derecha.  (Mano,  fern.) 

A la  izquierda.  A1  lado  izquierdo. 
A mano  izquierda.  A mano  siniostra 


526 


SEVENTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


Could  you  not  tell  me  which  is  the 
nearest  way  to  t ae  city  ? 

Clo  to  the  bottom  of  the  street,  and 
when  you  are  there,  turn  to  the 
righi,  and  you  will  find  a cross- 
way, which  you  mus^  take. 

And  then? 

IToii  will  then  enter  a broad  street 
which  will  bring  you  to  a great 
square,  where  you  will  see  a blind 
alley. 

Yju  must  leave  the  blind  alley  on 
your  left,  and  pass  under  the  ar- 
cade that  is  near  it. 

riien  you  must  ask  again 

An  arcade. 

The  cross- way. 

The  blind  alley. 

Tlie  shore,  (the  bank.) 


To  get  married^  {to  enter  into  mat- 
rimony.) 

To  marry  somebody. 

To  marry y {to  give  in  marriage.) 
My  cousin,  having  given  his  sister  in 
marriage,  married  Miss  Alvarez. 

Is  your  cousin  married  ? 

No,  he  is  siill  a bachelor. 

To  be  a bachelor. 

Embarrassed,  puzzled,  at  a loss. 

An  embarreissment,  a puzzle. 
V oil  embarrass  m^,  (puzzle  me.) 

The  marriage. 

lit)  asked  my  sister  in  marriage. 

The  measure. 

To  take  r ores. 

\ ehall  take  other  measures 


I Fodria  V.  decirme  cual  es  el  camiac 
mas  corto  para  ir  d la  ciudad  ? 

Vaya  V.  por  la  calle  abajo,  y cuandf. 
Ilegue  al  fin,  tuerza  V.  d la  dere- 
cha,  y hallard  una  encrucijadf 
que  atravesard. 

I Y que  mas? 

f i Y que  hare  entonces  7 

Enl6nces  entrard  V.  en  una  calle 
ancha  que  le  llevard  d una  grande 
plaza,  en  donde  verd  V.  uii  callejon 
sin  salida. 

Dejard  V.  el  callejon  d la  izquierda, 
y pasard  deSajo  del  arco  que  est^ 
junto  d el. 

Entonces  tendrd  V que  informarse 
de  nuevo. 

Un  arco. 

La  encrucijada. 

El  callejon. 

La  orillaj,  (costa,  ribera,  playa,  mac  • 
gen.) 

t Casarse  Contracr  matrimonio. 

Ca.sarse  con  alguno,  {alguna.) 

Casar.  Dar  en  matrimonio 

Despues  de  haber  casado  d su  her- 
mana,  mi  primo  se  cas6  con  la 
Sefiorita  Alvarez. 

I Es  (estd)  casado  el  senor  primo 
de  V.? 

No,  todavia  es  soltero. 

Ser  soltero. 

Embarazado.  Perplejo.  Embrollado 

Confundido.  Perdido. 

Un  embarazo.  Una  perplejidad. 

Un  embrollo.  Una  confusion. 

V.  me  embaraza,  (me  perpleja,  or 
me  embrolla.) 

El  casamiento. 

t El  pidio  la  mano  de  mi  heimana 

La  medida. 

Tomar  medidas. 

Tomard  otras  medidas 


SEVENTY-SECOND  LESSON.  827 

5oodnp>ds  ! how  rapidly  time  passes  I ; Dios  mio  ! cuaii  pronto  se  peisa  o 
.n  your  society  I j tiempo  en  la  conipahia  de  V I 

^ ^ El  cumplirnieiiio.  Ei  cumplido. 

1 he  compliment.  i t . • 

^ ^ La  ateiicion. 

You  make  me  a compliment  which  I V.  me  hace  un  cumplido  al  ciial  nc 
I do  not  know  how  to  answer  | como  corresponder. 


The  fault 
tt  IS  not  my  fault. 

Do  not  lay  it  to  my  charge. 

To  lay  to  onc^s  charge 

Who  can  help  it  ? 

Whose  fault  is  it  ? 
i cannot  help  it. 


I Culpa,  Falta. 

^ No  es  culpa  mia.  No  cs  mi  falta. 
\ t Yo  no  tengo  la  culpa. 

No  me  le  (la,  or  lo)  impute  V.  A. 

SIrnputarle  d uno. 

Echar  la  culpa  d. 

I Quien  lo  puede  remediar  ? 
t I Quien  tiene  la  culpa  ? 

No  puedo  remediarlo. 


The  delay. 

He  does  it  without  delay 
I must  go,  (must  be  off.) 

Go  away  ! Begone  ! 

To  jest. 

The  jest,  joke. 

You  are  jesting. 

He  cannot  take  a jest,  he  is 
joker. 

To  beg  some  one’s  pardon 
To  pardon. 

] beg  your  pardon- 
The  pardon. 


s 

1 

s 

1 


J 

s 

I 


La  tardanza.  La  dilaciou. 

La  detencion.  La  demora. 

Lo  (le,  or  la)  hace  sin  tardanza. 
t Tengo  que  irme. 

Es  menester  que  me  vaya. 

; Vdyase  V. ! ; Mdrchese  V I 


Burlarse.  Chancearse 
Chacotearse. 

La  burla.  La  chanza. 

La  chacota. 

V.  se  burla.  V.  se  chancea 
t 6l  no  entiende  de  burlas. 

Pedir  perdon  d alguno. 

Pedir  el  perdon  de  alguno. 
Perdonar, 

Yo  pido  perdon  d ^ 

Yo  pido  el  perdon  de  V. 

Perddneme  V.  t Con  perdon  de  V 
El  perdon. 


To  advance, 

fhe  watch  goes  too  fast,  (gains.) 
To  retard, 

Fhe  watch  goes  too  slow,  (loses.) 


Adelantar. 

El  reloj  adelaula. 
Atrazar. 

El  reloj  atrasa. 


328  SE^KNir-SECOND  LESSON. 


My  watch  has  stopped 
To  stop. 

Whore  did  wo  stop  ? 

We  left  off  at  the  fortieth  lessc’a, 
page  one  hundred  and  tiiirty-six. 

To  wind  up  a watch. 

To  regulate  a watch. 

Ifour  watch  is  twenty  minutes  too 
fast,  and  mine  a quarter  of  an 
hour  too  slow. 

It  has  not  struck  twelve  yet. 

It  will  soon  strike  twelve. 

Has  it  already  struck  twelve  ? 

To  strike,  (speaking  of  hours.) 


On  condition,  provided. 

He  will  lend  you  money,  provided  you 
will  henceforth  be  more  economi- 
cal than  you  have  hitherto  been. 

Hereafter,  for  the  future,  hence- 
forth. 

The  future. 

Economical. 

Hitherto. 

To  renounce  gambling. 

To  follow  advice,  (counsel.) 

You  look  so  me’ancholy. 

Adieu,  farewell, 

God  be  with  you,  good-hy. 

I hope  to  see  you  again  soon. 


Mi  reloj  se  ha  parade 
Pararse.  Parar. 

I En  donde  hemos  parado  ? 

Nos  paramos  en  la  leccion  cuudiR 
gesima,  pajina  ciento  troinia.  y Bok 
t Dar  cuerda  d un  reloj 
Arreglar  un  reloj. 

El  reloj  de  V.  adelanta  veinte  mira> 
tofe  y el  mio  atrasa  un  cuuto  dc 
bora. 

t Todavia  no  ban  dado  las  doce. 
t Las  doce  estan  al  dar. 

St  Las  doce  van  d dar. 
t Pronto  dardn  las  doce. 

it  I Han  dado  ya  los  doco 
Dar 


Con  tal  que.  Con  condition  que. 
Bajo  de  condicion  que. 

El  le  prestard  d V.  dinero  con  tal 
que  en  adelante  sea  V.  mas  econd- 
mic*:  de  lo  que  ha  sido  hasta  ahora 
En  adelante.  De  aqui  en  adelante 
En  lo  venidero.  En  lo  future. 

I Lo  future.  Lo  venidero. 

Econhmico.  Frugal.  Parco. 
Moderado. 

Hasta  ah  ora. 

Renunciar  al  juego. 

Seguir  el  consejo  de  alguno. 

V.  parece  tan  melanc6lico. 

A Dios,  Vaya  V.  con  Dios. 

Quede  V.  con  Dios, 

C Espero  tener  el  gusto  do  volverle  i 
ver  d V 

( Espero  volverle  d ver  i V.  pronto 


EXERCISES. 

220. 

What  o’clock  is  it  ? — It  is  half-past  one. — You  say  it  is  haif-past  one, 
and  by  (por)  my  watch  it  is  but  half-past  twelve. — It  will  soon  strike 
— Pardon  me,  it  has  not  yet  struck  one. — I assure  you  it  is  five 
and  twenty  minutes  past  ore,  for  my  watch  goes  very  well. — Bless 
r.e  ! how  rapidly- time  passes  in  your  society ! — You  make  me  a com 


SEVENTY -SECOND  LESSON. 


329 


jliment  which  1 (?o  not  know  how  to  answer. — Have  you  bought  yowl 
R’atch  in  Paris  ?-  -I  have  not  bought  it,  my  uncle  has  made  me  a 
present  o'"  it. — What  has  that  woman  intrusted  you  with  ? — She  has 
intrurtted  me  with  a secret  about  a count  who  is  in  great  embar- 
rassment about  the  (d  causa)  marriage  of  one  of  bis  daughters. — Does 
any  one  ask  her  in  marriage  ? — The  man  who  demands  her  in  mar- 
riage is  a nobleman  of  the  neigiiborhood,  {la  vecindad.) — Is  lie  rich  ? 
—No.  he  is  a poor  devil  {diablo)  who  has  not  a penny. — You  say  you 
have  no  friends  among  your  schoolfellows,  {el  condisct'pulo ;)  but  is  it 
not  your  fault?  You  have  spoken  ill  of  them,  and  they  have  not 
offended  you.  They  have  done  you  good,  and  nevertheless  {sin  em- 
hargn)  you  have  quarrelled  with  them,  (Lesson  LXIV.)  Believe  me, 
he  who  has  no  friends  deserves  {merece)  to  have  none. 

221. 

Dialogue  {didlogo)  hehceen  a tailor  and  his  journeyman^  {el  ojicia^,) 
— Charles,  have  you  taken  the  clothes  to  the  Count  Narissi  ? — Yes, 
Sir,  I have  taken  them  to  him. — What  did  he  say  ? — He  said  notliing 
but  that  he  had  a great  mind  to  give  me  a box  on  the  ear,  {hofetadas^ 
plur.,)  because  I had  not  brought  them  sooner. — What  did  you  answer 
him  ? — Sir,  said  I,  I do  not  understand  that  joke : pay  me  what  you 
owe  me ; and  if  you  do  not  do  so  instantly  I shall  take  other  measures. 
Scarcely  had  I said  that,  when  he  put  his  hand  to  his  sword,  {d  sv 
espada,)  and  1 ran  away. 

222. 

What  are  you  astonished  at  ? — I am  astonished  to  find  you  still  in  bed. 
— If  you  knew  how  sick  I am,  you  would  not  be  astonished  at  it.  Has 
it  already  struck  twelve  ? — Yes,  Madam,  it  is  already  half-past  twelve. 
— Is  it  so  late  ? Is  it  possible  ? — That  is  not  late,  it  is  still  early. — 
Does  your  watch  go  well,  {bien  1) — No,  Miss  N.,  it  is  a quarter  of  an 
hour  too  fast. — And  mine  is  half  an  hour  too  slow. — Perhaps  it  has 
stopped. — In  fact,  you  are  right. — Is  it  wound  up  ? — It  is  wound  up, 
and  yet  {sin  embargo)  it  does  not  go. — Do  you  hear  ? it  is  striking 
one  o’clock. — Then  I will  regulate  my  watch  and  go  home. — Pray 
Biay  a Uttle  longer! — I cannot,  for  we  dine  precisely  at  one  o’clock, 
[a  la  una  en  punto.) — Adieu,  then,  till  I see  you  again. 

223. 

\Miat  is  the  matter  with  you,  my  dear  friend  ? why  do  you  look  so 
nfie.ancholy  ? — Nothing  ails  me,  {nada  tengo.) — Are  you  in  any  trouble, 
{esta  V,  apurado  1) — I have  nothing,  and  even  less  than  nothing,  for  I 
have  not  a penny,  and  I owe  a great  deal  to  my  creditors : am  I not 
very  unhappy  ? — When  a man  is  well  and  has  friends  he  is  not  un- 


330 


SEVENTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


happ3'. — ^Dare  I ask  you  a favor  ? — Wliat  do  you  wish  Have  the 
goodness  to  lend  me  fifty  dollars  — I will  lend  you  them  with  all  m) 
heart,  but  on  condition  that  you  will  renounce  gambling,  (ahandom 
el  juego,)  and  be  more  economical  than  you  have  hitherto  been. — 1 
see  now  that  you  are  my  friend,  and  I love  you  too  much  not  to  follow 
your  advice. 

John,  (Juan!) — What  is  your  pleasure.  Sir? — Bring  some  wine.-. 
Presently,  Sir. — Henry ! — Madam  ? — Make  the  fire,  (encienda  V,  can 
dela.) — The  maid-servant  has  made  it  already. — Bring  me  some  paper, 
pens,  and  ink.  Bring  me  also  some  sand  (arenilla)  or  blotting-paper, 
(papel  de  estraza,)  sealing-wax,  (lacre,)  and  a light,  (una  vela  encendida,) 
Go  and  tell  (vaya  V,  d decir)  my  sister  not  to  wait  (que  no  me  espere) 
for  me,  and  be  back  again  (volver)  at  twelve  o’clock  in  order  to  carry 
my  letters  to  the  post,  (correo.) — Very  well,  madam. 


SEVENTY-THIRD  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesima  tercera 


To  last,  (to  wear  well.) 

That  cloth  will  wear  well. 

How  long  has  that  coat  lasted  you  ? 


To  my  liking 

To  everybody’s  liking. 

Nobody  can  do  any  thing  to  his 
liking 


Durar. 

Durar  largo  tiempOf  {mucho.) 

Ese  pano  durard  largo  tiompo. 

I Cuanto  tiempo  le  ha  durado  d V 
esa  casaca  ? 


A mi  gusto  Que  me  guste. 

Que  me  agrade. 

A1  gusto  de  todos. 

Que  d todos  les  guste,  (Its  agrade.; 
t Nadie  puede  hacer  cosa  alguna  qut 
le  guste,  (que  le  agrade.) 


A boarding-house. 

A boarding-school. 

To  keep  a boarding-house. 

Fc  board  with  anj’^  one,  o a:23"where. 


Casa  de  huespedes.  Posada. 
Pupilage. 

Tener  una  casa  de  nudspedos 
Tener  una  posada. 

Hospedarse  (tomar  posada)  con  id 
guno. 

Vivir  con  alguno. 

V Estar  en  posada  con  a^grnio. 


Ti>  exclaim. 

To  make  uneasy. 


Exclamar. 

Inquietar.  Molestar.  Desai«r,sfgat 


SKVENTr-THIRD  LESSON. 


331 


To  gcti  or  grow  uneasy. 

To  be  uneasy 

Wliy  do  you  fret,  (are  you  uneasy 
f do  not  fret,  (am  not  uneasy.) 

1 bat  news  makes  me  uneasy. 

i am  uneasy  at  not  receiving  any 
news. 

She  is  une2isy  about  that  affair. 

Do  not  be  uneasy. 

The  uneasiness,  trouble. 

Quiet. 

To  quiet. 

Compose  yourself 

To  alter,  to  change. 
Tliat  nian  has  altered  a great  deal 
since  I saw  him. 


{ Inquietarse.  Molesla^se 
Desasosegarse.  Incomodai  it 
Estar  inquieto,  (ansioso,  cuidadosu 
desasosegado,  incomodc  ) 

I Porqud  se  inquieta  V ? 

Yo  no  me  inquieto. 

Esa  noticia  me  inquieta. 
t Me  da  cuidado  esa  noticia. 

Me  inquieta  el  no  recibir  noticias. 
t No  se  que  hacernie  porque  nc 
recibo  noticias. 

Ella  se  inquieta  d cerca  de  os8 
asunto. 

No  se  inquiete  V. 

La  inquiet  Lid.  La  incomodidad. 

El  desasosiego. 

I Tranquilo.  Sosegado.  Quieto 
Tra-nquilizar.  Sosegar. 

Aquietar.  Apaciguar. 
Tranquilicese  V.  Sosidguese  V 
Alter  ar.  Camhiar.  Mudar. 

Ese  hombre  se  ha  mudado  mucha 
desde  que  le  vi. 


To  he  of  use. 

Of  what  use  is  that  to  you  ? 

That  is  of  no  use  to  me. 

Of  what  use  is  that  to  your  brother? 

It  is  of  no  use  to  him. 

Of  what  use  is  that  stick  to  you  ? 

I use  it  to  b(>at  my  dogs. 

Of  what  us#3  is  that  horse  to  you  ? 

I use  it  to  carry  my  vegetables  to  the 
market 

Df  what  use  are  these  bottles  to  yonr 
landlord  ? 

They  serve  him  to  put  his  wme  in. 
To  stand  instead,  to  he  as. 

f use  my  gun  as  a stick. 

This  hole  serves  him  as  a house. 

Se  ucod  his  cravat  as  a nightcap. 

To  avail 


Servir  de. 

t i De  que  le  sirve  d V.  eso  ? 
t De  nada  me  sirve  eso. 
t ^ De  que  sirve  eso  al  hermano  de 
V.? 

t De  nada  le  sirve. 
t i De  que  le  sirve  d V.  ese  palo  ? 
t Me  sirve  para  apalear  mis  perros. 
t ^ De  que  le  sirve  d V.  ese  caballo  ? 
Me  sirve  para  llevar  las  verduras  al 
mercado,  (la  plaza.) 

I De  que  sirven  estas  botellas  d su 
huesped  de  V.  ? 

t Le  sirven  para  llenarlas  de  vino 
Servir  de.  Usar  como. 

Mi  escopeta  me  sirve  de  baston. 

Uso  mi  escopeta  como  baston. 

Este  hueco  le  sirve  de  casa. 

Se  sirvid  de  su  corbata  como  df 
gorro  de  dormir. 

Servir  de.  Aproveckar  de. 


832 


SEVENTY-THIKD  LESSON. 


U^iat  avails  it  to  you  to  cry  ? 

It  avails  me  nothing^. 

Opposite 

Opposite  that  house. 
Opposite  the  garden 
0{)posite  to  me. 

Right  opposite. 

He  lives  opposite  the  castle. 

I live  opposite  the  king’s  library. 

To  get  hold  of. 

To  take  possession  of. 

To  witness,  to  show. 

To  give  evidence  against  some  one. 
The  witness. 

Me  has  shown  a great  deal  of  friend- 
ship to  me. 

To  turn  some  one  into  ridicule. 

To  become  ridiculous. 

To  make  one's  self  ridiculous. 


To  he  horn. 

Where  were  you  born  ? 

I was  born  in  this  country 
Where  was  your  sister  born  ? 

She  was  born  in  the  United  States 
of  North  America. 

Where  were  your  brothers  born  ? 

They  were  born  in  Spain. 


The  boarder 
7'lie  pouch. 
A pillow 
Down. 


A test  i guar.  Testificar.  Maaifestar 
t Ser  testigo  contra  alguno. 
t Salir  testigo  contra  alguno. 

El  testigo.  t La  testigo,  (fern.) 

Me  testified  mucha  amistad 

Ridiculizar  d alguno. 

Hacerse  ridiculo.  Ridiculizarse 
Volverse  ridiculo. 


t Nacer.  (See  Appendix.) 
t I En  donde  nacid  V.  ? 
t Yo  naci  en  este  pais, 
t I En  donde  nacid  su  hermar.a  do 
V.? 

t Ella  nacid  en  los  E.stados  Unidos 
de  la  America  del  Norte, 
t I En  donde  nacieron  los  hermarotf 
de  V.? 

t Nacieron  en  Espana. 


El  huesped.  El  pensionista. 

El  morral.  La  bolsa  de  eazadoros. 
Una  funda. 

PI  union. 


( t [ De  que  le  sirve  d V.  liorai  ? 
f I Que  le  aprovecha  a V.  liorai  1 
I t De  nada  me  sirve 

En  /rente.  Frcnte  d. 

Enfrente  de  esa  casa. 

Fhifrente  del  jardin. 

Frente  a mi. 

Frente  a.  Por  frente. 

Vive  en  frente  del  castillo. 

Yo  vivo  en  frente  de  (frente  j1)  la 
biblioteca  real. 

Asir.  Agarrar. 

Apodorarsb  de. 


EXERCISES. 

Sir,  may  {aireverse)  I ask  where  the  Earl  of  B.  lives  ? — He  lives 
near  the  castle  on  the  other  side  of  the  river. — Could  you  tell  me 


SEVENTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


333 


^liich  road  I must  take  to  go  thither  ?— You  must  go  (segui?)  (along) 
me  shore,  and  you  will  come  (llegar)  to  a little  street  on  the  right, 
jvdiich  will  lead  you  straight  (en  derechura)  to  his  house.  It  is  a tine 
aoiise,  you  will  find  it  easily. — I thank  you,  Sir. — Does  Count  N.  live 
rjere? — Yes,  Sir,  walk  in,  {sirvase  V,  j>asar  d denlro,'^  if  you  please. — 
Is  tlie  count  at  home  ? I wish  to  have  the  honor  (^ei  honor)  to  speak 
to  him. — Yes,  Sir,  he  is  at  home , whom  shall  I have  the  honor  to 
announce,  {anunciar?) — I am  from  B.,  and  my  name  is  {llamarse)  F. 

Which  is  the  shortest  {corto)  way  to  the  arsenal,  {an  arsenal  1) — 
Go  down  this  street,  and  when  you  come  Qlegue)  to  the  bottom,  {cai  >,) 
turn  to  the  left,  and  take  {jpase  por)  lie  cross- vay;  you  will  then 
enter  into  a rather  narrow  (bastante  estrecha)  street,  which  will  lead 
rou  to  a great  square,  {la  plaza,)  where  you  will  see  a blind  allev. — 
Through  (por)  which  I must  pass? — No,  for  there  is  no  outlet,  (la 
Sdlida.)  You  must  leave  it  on  the  right,  and  pass  under  the  arcade 
which  is  near  it. — And  then? — And  then  you  must  inquire,  (further.) 
— I am  very  much  obliged  to  you. — Do  not  mention  it,  hay  de  que,) 
— Are  you  able  to  translate  an  English  letter  into  Spanish  ? — I am^ — 
Who  has  taught  you  ? — My  Spanish  master. 

225. 

Why  does  your  mother  fret  ? — She  frets  at  receiving  no  news  from 
her  son  w^ho  is  with  the  army. — She  need  not  be  uneasy  about  him, 
for  whenever  he  gets  into  a bad  scrape  he  knows  how  to  get  out  of  it 
again. — Last  summer  when  we  were  a-hunting  together  (juntos)  night 
grew  upon  us  (se  cerro  la  noche)  at  at  least  ten  leagues  (una  legua) 
from  our  country-seat,  {la  quinta.) — Well,  (pues,)  where  did  you  pass 
the  night  ? — I was  very  uneasy  at  first,  but  your  brother  not  in  the 
least,  (no ;)  on  the  contrary,  he  tranquillized  me,  so  that  I lost  my 
uneasiness.  We  found  at  last  a peasant’s  hut  where  we  passed  the 
night.  Here  I had  an  opportunity  to  see  how  clever  your  brother  is. 
A few  benches  and  a truss  of  straw  (un  haz  de  paja)  served  him  to 
make  a comfortable  (hueno)  bed  ; he  used  a bottle  as  a candlestick, 
our  pouches  served  us  as  a pillow,  and  our  cravats  as  nightcaps. 
When  wo  awoke  in  the  morning,  we  were  as  fresh  and  healthy  as  if 
we  had  slept  on  down  and  silk. — A candidate  (un  candidato)  petitioned 
(pedir)  the  king  of  Prussia  (Prusla)  for  an  employment,  (un  empleo.) 
This  prince  asked  him  where  he  was  born.  “ 1 was  born  at  Berlin,’' 
answered  he.  “ Begone  !”  said  the  monarch,  (el  monarcaj)  “ all  the 
men  of  Berlin  (los  hijos  de  Berlin)  are  good  for  nothing.”  “ I beg 
'four  majesty’s  (la  majestad)  pardon,”  replied  the  candidate,  “ there  are 
some  good  ones,  and  I know  two.”  “ Which  are  those  two  ?”  asked 
the  kln^.  « The  first,”  replied  the  candidate,  “ is  your  majesty,  and  I 


334 


SEVENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


am  tlie  second.”  The  king  could  not  help  laughing  (710  pudc  tninoi 
que  reir)  at  this  answer,  and  granted  {conceder)  the  request,  ( ia 
%uplica,) 


HEVENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesima  cuarta. 


To  lose  sight  of. 

The  sight 

i wear  spectacles  b cause  my  sight 
is  bad,  (I  have  bad  sight.) 

I am  near-sighted. 

The  ship  is  so  far  off  that  we  shall 
soon  lose  sight  of  it. 

I have  lost  sight  of  that. 

As  it  is  long  since  I was  in  England, 
I have  lost  sight  of  your  brother 

As  it  is  long  since  I have  read  any 
Spanish,  I have  lost  sight  of  It 


Perder  algo  de  vista. 

La  vista. 

Llevo  anteojos  porquo  tengo  la  vists 
mala.  (See  Obs.  D,  Less.  XXVI.) 
t Tengo  la  vista  corta. 

El  buque  estd  tan  leios  jue  prontc 
le  perderdmos  de  vista. 

He  perdido  eso  de  vista. 

Como  hace  mucho  tiempo  desde  que 
estuve  en  Inglaterra,  he  perdido 
de  vista  d su  hermano  de  V 
t Como  hace  mucho  que  no  he  leid . 
espahol,  casi  le  he  olvidado. 


Ought.  Should. 

You  ought  or  should  do  that. 

You  ought  not  to  speak  thus  to  his 
father. 

We  ought  to  go  there  earlier. 

They  should  listen  to  what  you  say. 

You  should  pay  more  attention  to 
what  I say. 

You  ought  to  have  done  that. 

You  should  have  managed  the  thing 
differently. 

He  should  have  managed  the  thing 
better  than  he  has  done. 

They  ought  to  have  managed  the 
thing  £U3  I did. 

H’e  ought  to  have  managed  it  dif- 
ferently from  what  they  did. 


To  bid  or  to  wish. 

I bid  you  a good  morning. 

I wish  you  a good  morning 

I wish  you  a good  journey. 


No  8 of  Deher  (See  Less.  LX./ 

V.  deberia  hacer  eso. 

V.  no  deberia  hablar  asi  al  sehor  pa 
dre  de  el. 

Deberiamos  ir  alH  mas  temprano. 

Deberian  escuchar  lo  que  V.  dice. 

VV.  deberian  hacer  mas  atencion  a 
lo  que  digo. 

V.  deberia  haber  hecho  eso. 

V.  deberia  haber  manejado  la  cosa 
de  otro  modo,  (diferentemente.) 

FI  podna  haber  hecho  la  cosa  mejoi 
de  lo  que  la  ha  hecho. 

Elios  deberian  haber  manejado  h 
cosa  como  yo  lo  hice. 

Deberiamos  haber  lo  hecho  do  olrt 
modo  que  ellos. 


I Desear. 

r t Muy  buenos  dias  tenga  V 
^ Deseo  d-  V.  felices  dias. 
f Buenos  dias. 

[ Le  deser  d V.  feliz  viag© 


SKVEKrY-FOURTH  LESSON.  335 


ft;  play  a garae  at  billiards. 

To  play  upoi*  the  flute. 

A fall. 

To  have  a fall. 

A stay,  a sojourn. 

To  make  a stay. 

Doc«  your  brother  intend  to  make  a 
long  stay  in  the  town  ? 

He  does  not  intend  to  make  a long 
stay  in  it. 


To  propose,  (meanir.g  to  intend.) 

I propose  going  on  that  journey. 

I propose  (intend)  joining  a hunting 
party. 


Jugar  una  mesa  (partida)  de  billar 
t Tocar  la  flauta- 
Una  caida. 
t Dar  una  caida. 

Residencia.  Morada 
t Estar  de  asiento.  Morar.  Residii 
1 1 Piensa  su  hermano  de  V.  estar 
largo  tiempo  de  asiento  en  s 
ciudad  ? 

t !fil  no  piensa  estar  de  asiento  eu 
olla. 


Proponerse.  t Pensar  Inientar 
Tener  intencion. 
t Pienso  hacer  ese  viage 
Intento  juntarme  d una  partida  de 
caza. 


To  suspect,  to  guess. 

I suspect  what  he  has  done. 

He  does  not  suspect  what  is  going  to 
happen  to  him 

To  think  of  some  one,  of  something. 
Of  whom  do  you  think  ? 

Of  what  do  you  think  ? 


To  turn  upon. 

To  be  the  question. 

It  is  questioned,  it  turns  upon. 

The  question  is  not  your  pleasure, 
but  your  improvement. 

You  play,  Sir,  but  playing  is  not  the 
thing,  but  studying. 

What  is  going  on  i 
The  question  is  to  know  what  we 
shall  do  to  pass  the  time  agreeably. 


Sospechar.  Presumir.  Recelar 
Adivinar,  Suponer. 

Yo  presumo  lo  que  ha  hecho. 

No  sospecha  lo  que  va  d sucederle. 

Pensar  en  alguno,  en  alguna  cosa. 
I En  quien  piensa  V ? 

I En  que  piensa  V ? 


Tratarse  de  algo  Volver  la  vista* 

Se  trata  de. 

No  se  trata  del  placer,  sino  de  su 
adelantamiento  de  V. 

V.  juega,  senor,  pero  no  se  trata  de 
jugar,  sino  ae  estudiar. 

I De  que  se  trata  { 

Se  trata  de  saber  lo  que  hardmos  para 
emplear  el  tiempo  gustosamente. 


On  purpose. 

f beg  your  pardon,  I have  not 
It  cn  purpose. 


A proposito. 

Yo  pido  perdon  d V.,  no  lo  he  hechc 
d propdsito. 

t No  lo  he  hecho  d mal  hacer* 


To  hold  one  s tongue. 


i C altar  se.  t C altar  se  la  hocc* 
I t No  abrir  la  boca. 


836 


SEVENTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


Dc  you  hold  your  tongue  ? 

I hold  my  tongue. 

He  holds  his  tongue. 

After  speaking  half  an  hour>  he  held 
his  tongue. 


I Se  calla  V 
Yo  me  callo. 

El  se  calla. 

Despues  de  haber  habladc  por  m^dia 
bora,  se  call6. 


EXERCISES. 


226. 

A chief  having  one  day  entered  a boarding-house,  stole  three  cloak?^ 
(la  rMpa.)  In  going  av/ay  he  was  met  by  one  of  the  boarders  who 
had  a fine  laced  {galoneado)  cloak.  Seeing  so  many  cloaks,  he  asked 
tlie  man  where  he  had  taken  them.  The  thief  answered  boldly  (^con 
mucho  sosiego)  that  they  belonged  to  three  gentlemen  {caballeros)  of 
the  house,  who  had  given  them  to  be  cleaned,  {para  que  las  iimpiase.) 
‘‘  Then  you  must  also  clean  mine,  for  it  is  very  much  in  need  of  it,” 
said  the  boarder ; “ but,”  added  he,  “ you  must  return  it  to  me  at  three 
o’clock.”  “ I shall  not  fail,  {/altar, ) Sir,”  answered  the  thief,  as  he 
carried  off  {llevar)  the  four  cloaks,  with  which  he  {que)  is  still  tc 
return,  {todavia  no  han  jarecido,) — You  are  singing,  {cantar,)  gentle- 
men, but  it  is  not  a time  for  singing ; you  ought  to  be  silent,  and  to 
listen  to  what  you  are  told. — We  are  at  a loss. — What  are  you  at  a 
loss  about  ? — I am  going  to  tell  you  : the  question  is  with  us  how  we 
shall  pass  our  time  agreeably. — Play  a game  at  billiards  or  at  chess. — 
We  have  proposed  joining  a hunting-party ; do  you  go  with  us,  {venir  ?) 
— I cannot,  for  I have  not  done  my  task  yet ; and  if  I neglect  it,  my 
master  will  sccfld  me. — Every  one  according  to  his  liking ; if  you  like 
staying  at  home  better  than  going  a-h unting  we  cannot  hinder  you. — 
Does  Mr.  B.  go  with  us  ? — Perhaps. — I should  not  like  to  go  with 
him,  for  he  is  too  great  a talker,  {muy  hablador,)  excepting  that  {menos 
eso)  he  is  an  honest  man. 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ? You  look  angry. — I have  reason  to 
{motivo)  be  angry,  for  there  is  no  means  of  getting  money  now. — 
Have  you  been  to  Mr.  A.’s  ? — I have  been  to  his  house  ; but  there  is 
no  possibility  {ningun  medio)  of  borrowing  from  him.  I suspected 
that  he  would  not  lend  me  any,  that  is  the  reason  why  I did  not  wish 
to  ask  him  ; and  had  you  not  told  me  to  do  so,  I should  not  have  sub- 
jected myself  {exponer)  to  a refusal,  {d  una  negativa.) 


227. 

I suspected  that  you  would  be  thirsty,  and  (that)  your  sister  (would 
oc)  hungry ; that  is  the  reason  why  I brought  {traer)  you  hither 
E am  serry,  however,  not  to  see  your  mother. — Why  do  }ou  not  drink 
your  cofiee  ? — If  I were  not  sleepy  I would  drink  it. — Sometimes  vou 


SEVENTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


837 


are  sleepy,  sometimes  {ptras)  cold,  sometimes  warm,  and  sometimes 
something  else  is  the  matter  with  you,  (y  muchas  veces  otras  cosas,) 
I believe  that  you  think  too  much  of  the  misfortune  that  has  happened 
to  your  friend,  (fern.) — If  I did  not  think  about  it,  who  would  think 
about  it  ? — Of  whom  does  your  brother  think  ? — He  thinks  of  me,  for 
we  always  think  of  each  other  (uno  de  otro)  when  we  are  not 
together,  {juntos.) 

The  Biscayans  are  excellent  ball-players,  (jugadores.) — The  two 
chess-players  were  very  skilful. — Do  you  know  any  flute-player, 
{flautista^)  or  any  violin-player,  {violinista  ?) — I know  a very  good 
flute-player,  but  I do  not  know  any  violin-player. — For  what  purpose 
do  you  ask  ? — Because  I intend  to  have  a musical  entertainment. — Do 
you  sometimes  practise  (hacer)  music  ? — Very  often,  for  I like  it  much. 
— What  instrument  do  you  play  ? — I play  the  violin,  and  my  sister 
plays  the  harpsichord.  My  brother  who  plays  the  bass  {el  contrabajo) 
accompanies  {acompafiar)  us,  and  Miss  Stolz  sometimes  applauds 
{aplaudir)  us. — Does  she  not  also  play  some  (musical)  instrument  ? — 
She  plays  the  harp,  {el  harpa,)  but  she  is  too  proud  {orgulloso)  to 
practise  music  with  us. — A very  poor  town  went  to  considerable 
expense  {hizo  gastos  considerables)  in  feasts  and  illuminations  {fiestas 
e iluminaciones)  on  the  occasion  of  its  prince  passing  through,  {cuando 
paso  su  principe.)  The  latter  seemed  himself  astonished  at  it. — It 
has  only  done,”  said  a courtier,  {cortesanoj}  “ what  it  owed  (to  your 
majesty.”)  “ That  is  true,”  replied  another,  “ but  it  owes  all  tlia^  it 
has  done.” 


SEVENTY-FIFTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesima  quints. 


Towards, 


(physical!) .) 
(morally.) 


Hdcia. 

Con.  Para  con. 


fie  comes  towards  me. 
lie  behaved  very  well  towards  me. 
V\'^e  must  always  behave  well  to- 
wards everybody. 

The  behavior  of  others  is  but  an  echo 
of  our  own.  If  we  behave  well 
towards  them,  they  will  also  be- 
have well  towards  us ; but  if  we 
use  them  ill,  we  must  not  expect 
better  from  them. 


Viene  hd,cia  mi. 

Se  port6  muy  bien  conmigo. 

Siempre  nos  debemos  portar  bien  para 
con  todo  el  mundo. 

La  conducta  de  los  otros  no  es  maa 
que  el  eco  de  la  nuestra.  Si  noo 
portamos  bien  con  ellos,  se  porta- 
rdn  igualmente  bien  con  nosotros  ; 
pero  si  no  los  tratamos  bien,  no 
debemos  esperar  que  noe  tiatew 
mejor. 


15 


338 


6EVENTY  FIFTH  LESSON. 


To  treat  or  to  use  somebody  well. 
To  use  somebody  ill. 

Everybody, 

Others. 

Aa  you  have  always  used  me  well,  I 
will  not  use  you  ill. 
fie  has  always  used  me  well,  and  I 
have  always  used  him  in  the  same 
manner. 


Tratar  bien  d unOy  {algum.)^ 
Tratar  mol  d uno,  (alguno.) 

Todo  el  mundo,  Todos. 

Otro.  Otros. 

(Indefinite  Pronouns,  see  App ' 
Como  V.  me  ha  tratado  siempro  bien, 
yo  no  le  tratard  mal. 

Siempre  me  ha  tratado  bien,  y yo  lo 
he  tratado  siempre  de  la  misma 
manera. 


To  delayy  {to  tarry.) 
Do  not  be  long  before  you  return. 
I shall  not  be  long  before  I return. 


To  long  to  or  f 01  < 


I long  to  see  my  brother. 

He  longs  to  receive  his  money. 

We  long  for  dinner,  because  we  are 
very  hungry. 

T ney  long  to  sleep,  because  they  are 
tired. 


Tardar  Tardarse.  Detenersfi 
No  tarde  V.  en  volver. 

No  tardard  en  volver 
' Esperar  con  ansias 
Estar  ansioso. 

Desear  con  vehemencia. 

Tener  gran  gana. 

- Tener  muchas  ganas  de. 

Estoy  ansiosa  de  ver  d mi  hermano 
Desea  mucho  recibir  su  dinero. 
Tenemos  muchas  ganas  de  comer 
porque  tenemos  mucha  hambre. 
Tienen  muchas  ganas  de  dormir 
porque  estan  cansados. 


To  be  at  one* s ease.  < 

To  he  comfortable.  ' 

To  be  uncomfortable.  ^ 

I am  very  much  at  my  ease  upon 
this  chair. 

5Tou  are  uncomfortable  upon  your 
chair. 

What  can  that  be 

We  are  unccraforlable  in  that  board- 
ing-house. 

That  man  is  wefi  off  for  he  has 
plenty  of  money. 


Estar  uno  con  desahogo. 

Estar  d sus  anchuras. 

Estar  bien. 

Estar  comodamente. 
t Pasarlo  bien. 

Estar  incomodamente. 
t Pasarlo  mal. 

t Estoy  muy  d mis  anchuras  en  esta 
sill  a. 

V.  estd  incdmodamente  on  su  sDla. 

I Que  puede  ser  eso  ? 

'Estamos  incdmodamente  en  esa  po« 
sada. 

t Lo  pasamos  muy  mal  en  esa  po 
^ sada. 

, t Ese  hombre  lo  pasa  bien,  porque 
tiene  mucho  dinero 


SEVENTY -FIFTH  LESSON. 


339 


Tliat  man  is  badly  oli,  for  he  is 
poor 

To  make  one  s self  comfortable. 

M ake  yourself  comfortable. 

To  inconvenience  one’s  self. 

To  put  one’s  self  out  of  the  way 
Do  not  put  yourself  out  of  the  way. 
That  man  never  inconveniences  him- 
self ; he  never  does  it  for  any- 
body. 

Can  you,  without  putting  yourself 
to  inconvenience,  lend  me  your 
gun? 


Solicitar.  Hacer  instancias. 

Hacer  diligencias.  Instar 
Pedir  encarecidamente. 

Pedir  con  instancia. 
t Me  vali  de  toda  especie  de  suplicas 
para  ernpefiarle  d que  lo  hiciera. 
Solicitar.  Instar. 

Suplicar.  Rogar 


J Aqui  y alld.  Acd  y alld. 

( Acd  y aculld. 

De  cuando  en  cuando. 

Tal  cual.  Asi  asi. 

He  hecho  m’  composision  tal  cual. 


Here  and  there. 

Now  and  then,  (from  time  to  time.) 
Indifferently,  (as  good  as  bad.) 

I have  done  my  composition  tolera- 
bly well. 


To  make  entreaties. 

To  beg  with  entreaties. 

I employed  every  kind  of  entreaty  to 
engage  him  to  do  it. 

To  solicit^  to  presSi  to  sue,  to  en- 
treat. 


t Ese  h ombre  lo  pasa  mal,  poique  ea 
pobre. 

Hacer  uno  lo  que  le  acnmoda. 

Estar  uno  comodamcnte 

Pdiigase  V.  cdmodamente. 

t Ilaga  V.  lo  que  le  acomode. 

Incomodarse.  Molestarse. 

No  se  incomode  V.  No  se  molesto  V 

Ese  hombre  nunca  se  incomoda 
nunca  se  molesta  por  nadie 

I Puede  V.,  sin  incomodarse,  prcstar- 
rne  su  escopeta  ? 


To  impart  something  to  somebody. 

Have  you  imparted  that  to  your 
father  ? 

f have  imparted  it  to  him. 


C Informar  d alguno  de  alguna  cosa 
< Dar  parte  de  alguna  cosa  d uno. 

( Comunicar  algo  d alguno. 

^ I Ha  informado  V.  de  eso  d su  padre  1 
( I Ha  dado  V.  parte  de  eso  d su  padre  1 
] Le  he  informado  de  ello. 


To  postpone^  to  put  off. 
l/et  us  put  that  off  until  to-morrow. 
Lot  us  put  off  that  lesson  until  another 
time. 


Posponer  Difcrir  ♦. 

Difiramos  eso  hasta  manaiia. 
Difiramos  esa  leccion  hasta  otra  ve2 


340 


SEVENTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


In  vam. 

in  vaiu  I looked  around,  I saw  iieitlier 
man  nor  house  : not  the  least  sign 
of  settlement. 

A dwelling,  habitation,  settlement. 

In  vain  1 speak,  for  you  do  not  listen 
to  me. 

In  vain  I do  my  best,  1 cannot  do 
any  thing  to  his  liking. 

Vou  may  say  what  you  please,  no- 
body will  believe  you. 

It  is  in  vain  that  they  earn  money, 
they  will  never  be  rich. 

VVe  search  in  vain,  for  what  we  have 
lost  we  cannot  find. 


To  salute. 

To  wish  a good  morning. 

I have  the  honor  to  bid  you  adieu. 

Present  my  compliments  to  him,  to 
her. 

Remember  me  to  him,  to  her. 

Pray,  present  my  compliments  to 
your  sister. 

Remember  me  (present  my  compli- 
ments) to  him,  to  her. 

I shall  not  fail. 

At  your  servic3. 


En  vano.  Poi  mas  que 

For  mas  que  volvia  lo?  ojos  d todas 
partes,  no  veia  iii  casas,  ni  horn- 
bres : ni  la  mas  minima  senal  da 
habitacion. 

Una  habitacion. 

En  vano  hablo  yo,  pues  VV.  no  me 
escuchan. 

For  mas  que  haga,  yo  no  puedo  hacei 
nada  d su  gusto. 

Foi  mas  que  diga  V.  ninguno  le 
creerd. 

For  mas  dinero  que  ganen,  jamas 
serdn  ricOs. 

En  vano  buscamos,  pues  lo  que  ho- 
mos perdido  no  lo  hallaremos 


Saludar.  Para  saludar 
t Darle  d uno  los  buenos  dias. 
Tengo  el  honor  de  saludarle  d V 
Tengo  el  honor  de  despedirme  de  V 

Encomiendeme  V.  d dl,  d ella. 
Digale  V.  muchas  cosas  de  mi  parte. 

Hdgame  V.  el  favor  de  encomendar 
me  d su  senora  hermana. 

Dele  V.  memorias  y expresionea 
finisimas  mias. 

No  faltard.  t Con  mucho  gusto. 
Fara  servir  d V. 


The  present,  (tne  present  time  or 
tense.) 

The  past. 

The  future. 

The  loss  of  time. 

Enjoy  all  the  pleasures  that  virtue. 
peiTTiits. 

Tc  enjoy. 


El  presente.  Lo  presente. 

El  pasado.  Lo  pasado. 

El  futuro.  Lo  future.  Lo  veniderc 
La  perdida  de  tiempo. 

Gozad  de  todos  los  placeres  que  per- 
mite  la  virtud. 

Gozar. 


EXERCISES. 

228. 

Have  you  made  your  Sj;anish  composition  ? — 1 have  made  it. — VVaa 
your  tutor  pleased  with  it? — He  was  not.  In  vain  I do  my  best;  J 


SE  iTENTY-FXFTH  LjfiSSON. 


341 


c&nnot  do  any  diing  to  his  liking. — You  may  say  what  you  please, 
{io  qv£  quiera,)  nobody  will  believe  you. — Can  you,  without  putting 
yoursel!  tO  inconvenience,  lend  me  five  hundred  dollars  ? — As  you  have 
always  used  me  well  1 will  use  you  in  the  same  manner,  (jnodo.)  1 
will  lend  you  the  money  you  want,  but  on  condition  that  you  will  16- 
turn  it  to  me  next  week. — You  may  depend  upon  it,  (jpoder  contar.] — 
How  has  my  son  behaved  towards  you  ? — He  has  behaved  well  to« 
wards  me,  for  he  behaves  well  towards  everybody.  His  father  told 
him  often  : The  behavior  of  others  is  but  an  echo  of  our  own.  If  wo 
behave  well  towards  them,  they  will  also  behave  well  towards  us ; but 
if  we  use  them  ill,  we  must  not  expect  better  (mas)  from  them. — May 
I see  your  brothers  ? — You  will  see  them  to-morrow.  As  they  have 
just  arrived  from  a long  journey  they  long  for  sleep,  for  they  are  very 
tired. — What  has  my  sister  said  ? — She  said  that  she  longed  for  dinneri 
because  she  was  very  hungry. — Are  you  comfortable  at  your  boarding- 
house ? — I am  very  comfortable  there. — Have  you  imparted  to  youi 
brother  what  I told  you  ? — As  he  was  very  tired,  he  longed  for  sleep  ; 
so  that  1 have  put  off  imparting  it  to  him  till  to-morrow. 

229. 

I have  the  honor  to  wish  you  a good  morning.  How  do  you  do  ?-^ 
Very  well  at  your  service. — And  how  are  all  at  home  ? — Tolerably 
well,  thank  God,  (d  Dios  gracias  /)  My  sister  was  a little  indisposed, 
but  she  is  better ; she  told  (encargar)  me  to  give  you  (que  le  vresentase) 
her  best  compliments. — I am  glad  (alegrarse)  to  hear  that  she  is  well. 
As  for  you,  you  are  health  itself,  (la  misma  salud ;)  you  cannot  look 
ootter,  (es  imposible  tener  mejor  semblanle.) — 1 have  no  time  to  be  ill : 
my  business  would  not  permit  me.  Please  to  sit  down  ; here  is  a chair. 
— I will  not  detain  you  from  your  business  ; I know  that  a merchant’s 
time  is  precious. — I have  nothing  pressing  (urgente)  to  do  now,  my 
courier  is  already  dispatched,  (mi  correo  esta  despachado.) — I shall  not 
stay  any  longer.  I only  wished  in  passing  to  inquire  about  youi 
health. — You  do  me  much  honor. — It  is  very  fine  weather  to-day. 
If  you  will  allow  me  I shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again  this 
afternoon,  (al  pasar  por  aqui,)  and  if  you  have  time  we  will  take  a 
little  turn  together. — With  the  greatest  pleasure.  In  that  case  I shall 
wait  for  you. — I will  come  for  you  about  seven  o’clock. — Adieu,  then 
till  I sec  you  again. — I have  the  honor  to  bid  you  adieu. 

230. 

The  loss  of  time  is  an  irreparable  loss.  A single  minute  (un  solo) 
cannot  be  recovered  (pagar)  for  all  the  gold  in  the  world.  It  is  then 
of  the  greatest  importance  to  employ  well  the  time,  which  consists 
only  of  minutes,  of  winch  we  must  make  good  use,  {Jbuen  usn  \ Wc 


312 


SEVENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


have  but  the  present ; the  past  is  no  longer  any  thing,  and  the  future 
is  uncertain,  {incierto,) — A great  many  people  ruin  themselves  (ar- 
ruinarse)  because  they  wish  tc  indulge  themselves  too  much,  {quieren 
pasarlo  bien.)  If  most  men  knew  how  to  content  themselves  {con- 
tentarse)  with  what  they  have,  they  would  be  happy ; but  their  greedi- 
ness {codicid)  very  often  makes  them  unhappy. — In  order  to  be  happy 
we  must  forget  the  past,  not  trouble  ourselves  about  {acongojarse)  the 
lutiire,  and  enjoy  the  present. — I was  very  much  dejected  (triste)  when 
my  cousin  came  to  me.  “ What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?”  he  asked 
me.  “ Oh,  (/  Ay  de  mi !)  my  dear  cousin,”  replied  I,  “ in  losing  that 
money  I have  lost  every  thing.”  “ Do  not  fret,”  said  he  to  me,  “ for  I 
iia^  e found  your  money.” 


SEVENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesima  sexta* 


To  mean. 

What  do  you  mean? 

I mean. 

What  does  that  man  mean  ? 

He  means. 

What  does  that  mean  ? 

That  means. 

That  does  not  mean  any  thing. 

I do  not  know  what  that  means. 


To  he  particular. 

! do  not  like  to  deal  with  that  man, 
for  he  is  too  particular. 

To  srow  impatient. 

To  fret. 

Do  not  fret  about  that. 


{ Querer  decir.  Hacer  dnimo. 

( Significar. 
t I Que  quiere  V.  decir? 
t Quiero  decir. 

1 1 Que  quiere  decir  ese  hombre  ? 
t Ll  quiere  decir. 

1 1 Que  quiere  decir  eso  ? 
t I Que  signihca  eso  ? 

I t Eso  quiere  decir.  Eso  significa 
t Eso  no  significa  nada. 
t Nada  quiere  decir  eso. 
t Yo  no  sd  lo  que  quiere  decir  eso. 
t Yo  no  s^  lo  que  significa  eso. 

Ser  singular.  Ser  estrano. 
t Tener  uno  rarezas. 

No  me  gusta  tratar  {tener  negncioa 
con  ese  hombre,  porque  os  mu^ 
estrano. 

Inquietarse.  Enfadarse.  Apurarsi 
Impacientarse.  Consumirse. 

I t No  se  impaciente  V.'  de  eso. 


To  sit  up.  To  watch 
I have  sat  up  all  night. 

To  aavise. 

The  dress.  The  costume. 
Elegant  dress. 


Velar. 

He  velado  toda  la  noche. 
Aconsejar 

El  vestidc  El  trage.  El  uso. 
Trage  elegante.  Vestido  de  rnod&. 


SEVENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


843 


To  dress  one^s  self.  I 

I tioX  man  always  dresses  well.  | 

To  find  fault  with  something  * 

That  man  always  finds  fault  'vith 
every  thing  he  sees. 

1^0  you  find  fault  with  that  ? 

I do  not  find  fault  with  it. 

A trick. 

To  play  a trick. 

To  play  a trick  upon  some  one. 

tie  played  me  a trick.  | 

Take  care,  that  man  will  piny  you  | 
a trick.  | 

Besides^  (more.) 

V'ou  have  given  me  three  books,  but 
I want  three  besides. 

Less. 

Three  less. 

Three  too  many. 

To  reach. 

My  reach. 

Within  my  reach. 

Out  of  ray  reach.  | 

These  things  are  not  within  the  1 
reach  of  everybody.  | 

Within  gun-shot  ^ 

A gun-shot,  (meaning  distance.)  ( 

Two  gun-shots,  ( “ “ ) 1 

flow  many  snots  have  you  fired  ? < 


( wonder  why  that  man  makes  such  ^ 
a noise. 


Vestirse. 

Ese  hombre  se  viste  siempre  bien 
t Hallar  fait  a en  alguna  case. 
t Hallar  que  decir  de  alguna  coaa 
t Ese  hombre  halla  siempre  quo  decal 
de  cuanto  vd. 

1 1 Halla  V.  que  decir  de  eso? 
t Yo  no  hallo  que  decir  de  ello. 

Engaho.  Chasco.  Bur  la.  Piezo. 
Jugar  una  pieza.  Dar  un  chasco. 
Jugar  una  pieza  d alguno. 
t Me  jug6  una  pieza. 
t Me  did  un  chasco. 

Guidado,  ese  hombre  le  jugard  d V 
una  pieza,  (t  le  dard  un  chasco.) 

Ademas  de. 

Ademas  de  los  tres  libros  que  V.  me 
ha  dado,  quiero  otros  tres,  (quiero 
tres  mas.) 

Mdnos.  t Faltan. 
t Faltan  tres. 
t Sobran  tres. 

Alcanzar.  t Alcanzar  d entender 
Mi  alcance.  Alcanzo  d. 

A mi  alcance.  Alcanzo  d ello. 
Fuera  de  mi  alcance. 

No  alcanzo  d ello. 
t No  alcanzo  d entenderlo. 

Todo  el  mundo  no  alcanza  d entendei 
estas  cosas. 

A tiro  de  escopeta. 
t A tiro  de  hala. 

A dos  tiros  de  escopetas. 

I Cuantos  tiros  ha  disparado  V.  ? 

I Cuantos  escopetazos  ha  tirade  V.  ? 

I Cuantas  veces  hizo  V.  fuego  ? 

Quisiera  saber  porqud  hace  tanto 
ruido  ese  hombre. 

Estraho  mucho  que  haga  tanto  ruido 
ese  hombre. 

t Me  admiro  porqve  hace  tanto  rui- 
do  ese  hombre. 


344 


SEVENTY-SIXTH  LESSOiN. 


So  long  as. 

So  long  as  you  behave  well,  people 
will  love  you. 

1 o carry  olT. 

A mouthful. 

To  cverwhelm  To  heap.  To  load. 
To  overwhelm  some  one  with  joy. 
Generous. 

Charitable.  Beneficent. 
You  have  heaped  benefits  upon  me. 
Sincere. 

Sincerely. 

An  advantage. 

The  disadvantage.  The  prejudice. 

I shall  never  say  any  thing  to  your 
disadvantage. 

To  surrender. 

The  enemies  have  surrendered. 

To  prefer 

1 prefer  the  useful  to  the  agreeable. 


I Mientras.  En  tanto  que. 

Le  amaran  a V.  mientras  se  portc 

I bien. 

lilevarse.  Quitar. 

Quitar  del  medio. 

Un  bocado.  Un  pedacito. 

Colmar.  Llenar.  Abrumar 
Llenar  d alguno  de  gozo. 

Colmar  d alguno  de  gozo. 

Generoso. 

Caritativo.  Benefico. 

V.  me  ha  colmado  de  beneficios. 
Sincere. 

Sinceramente.  (Adverb,  see  App.) 
Una  ventaja. 

La  desventaja.  El  perjuicio. 

Nuiica  dird  nada  en  perjuicio  de  V, 

Rendlrse  * Entregar. 

Los  enemigos  se  han  rendido. 
Preferir  * 

Yo  prefiero  lo  dtil  d lo  agradable. 


Obs.  A.  Adjectives  used  substantively  are  preceded  by  the  indefijiito 
pronoun  lo.  (See  Appendix.) 

The  drinking.  1 El  beber. 

The  eating.  | El  comer. 

Ohs.  B.  Verbs  used  substantively  take  the  article  el.  (See  Appendix.) 


To  behold. 

Behold  those  beautiful  flowers,  with 
their  colors  so  fresh  and  bright. 

The  col6r. 

The  lily. 

The. violet. 

The  forget-me-not 
The  rose. 

An  emblem. 

Fresh  verdure  is  salutary  to  our  eyes. 


Mirar. 

Miren  VV.  (or  mirad^  esas  hermosas 
flores,  con  sus  colores  tan  frescos 
y vivos,  (or  brillantes.) 

El  color. 

El  lirio. 

La  violeta. 

La  trill itaria. 

La  rosa. 

Un  emblema,  (mas.) 

El  verdor  fresco  es  agradable  d la 
vista. 


SEVENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


34^1 


EXERCISES. 

231. 

Why  have  ycu  played  a trick  upon  that  man  ? — Because  he  altvays 
5nds  fault  witii  every  thing  he  sees. — What  does  that  mean,  Sir  ? — 
Tliat  means  *hat  I do  not  like  to  deal  with  you,  because  you  are  toe 
particular. — I wonder  why  your  brother  has  not  done  (haya  liecho)  hia 
task. — It  was  too  difficult.  He  has  sat  up  all  night,  and  has  not  been 
able  to  do  it,  because'it  was  out  of  his  reach. — As  soon  as  Mr.  Flausen 
sees  me  he  begins  to  speak  English,  in  order  to  practise,  (gercitar,) 
and  overwhelms  me  with  politeness,  (^cortesias,)  so  that  I often  do  not 
know  what  to  answer.  His  brothers  do  the  same,  (lo  mismo.')  How- 
ever, they  are  very  good  people,  (gentes  they  are  not  only  rich  and 
amiable,  but  they  are  also  generous  and  charitable.  They  love  me 
sincerely,  therefore  I love  them  also,  and  consequently  shall  never  say 
any  thing  to  their  disadvantage.  I should  love  them  still  more,  if  they 
did  not  make  so  much  ceremony ; but  every  one  has  his  faults,  and 
mine  is  to  speak  too  much  of  their  ceremonies. 

232. 

Have  the  enemies  surrendered  ? — They  have  not  surrendered,  for 
they  did  not  prefer  life  to  death.  They  had  neither  bread,  nor  meat, 
nor  water,  nor  arms,  nor  money ; notwithstanding  they  determined  to 
die  rather  than  surrender. — Why  are  you  so  sad  ? — You  do  not  know 
what  makes  me  uneasy,  my  dear  friend,  (fern.) — Tell  me,  (lo,)  for  J 
assure  you  that  I share  your  sufferings  as  well  as  your  pleasures. — 1 
am  sure  that  you  feel  for  me,  (que  V,  me  compadece,)  but  I cannot  teii 
you  nov^  what  makes  me  uneasy.  I will  however  tell  you  when  an 
epportumty  offers,  (se  presente.)  Let  us  speak  of  something  else  now 
What  do  you  think  of  the  man  who  spoke  to  us  yesterday  at  the 
concert  ? — He  is  a man  of  much  understanding,  (talento,)  and  not  a; 
all  wrapt  up  in  his  own  merits,  (y  nada  presumido.)  But  why  do  yov 
ask  me  that  ? — To  speak  of  something. — It  is  said  : contentment  (con 
lento)  surpasses  (valer  mas)  riches ; let  us  then  always  be  content. 
Let  us  share  (partir)  (with  each  other)  what  we  have,  and  remain  oui 
lifetime  (mientras  vivamos)  inseparable  friends.  You  will  always  be 
welcome  at  my  house,  and  I hope  to  be  equally  so  at  yours.  If  I saw 
you  happy  I should  be  equally  so,  and  we  should  be  more  contented 
llian  the  greatest  princes,  who  are  not  always  so.  We  shall  be  happy 
when  we  are  perfectly  contented  with  what  we  have ; and  if  we  da 
our  duty  as  we  ought,  God  will  take  care  of  the  rest.  The  past  being 
no  longer  any  thing,  let  us  not  be  uneasy  about  the  future,  and  enjoy 
the  present 


[546 


&EVEKTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


233. 

Behold,  ladies,  {sehoras^)  those  beautiful  flowers,  witn  their  co.ors  5C 
fresh  and  bright ; they  drink  nothing  but  water.  The  white  lily  has  the 
color  of  innocence,  (inocencia  ;)  the  violet  indicates  gentleness,  (indica 
la  dulzura ;)  you  may  see  it  in  Louisa’s  eyes.  The  forget-me-not  lias  tlie 
color  of  heaven,  our  future  dwelling,  and  the  rose,  the  queen  of  flowers, 
is  the  emblem  of  beauty  and  of  joy.  You  see  all  that  personified  (per* 
licmijicado)  in  seeing  the  beautiful  Amelia,  {Amalia.)  How  beautiful 
is  the  fresh  verdure  ! It  is  salutary  to  our  eyes,  and  has  the  color  of 
hope,  (de  la  esperanza^)  our  most  faithful  friend,  (fern.,)  who  never 
deserts  (ahandonar)  us,  not  even  in  death,  {en  el  momento  de  la  rnuerte.) 
— One  word  more,  my  dear  friend. — What  is  your  pleasure  ? — I forgot 
to  tell  you  to  present  my  compliments  {que  me  encomendara)  to  your 
mother.  Tell  her,  if  you  please,  that  I regret  (sentir)  not  having  been 
at  home  when  lately  she  honored  me  with  her  visit. — I thank  you  fox 
her,  {en  su  nombre,)  I shall  not  fail. — Farewell  then. 


SRVENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON.— Leccion  Septuagesima  ssptima, 


A silk  gown. 

A kitchen  table. 

A mahogany  table. 

A brick  house. 

A stone  house. 

A windmill. 

A coflee-mill. 

A sugar-mill. 

A velvet  bonnet. 

A silver  tankard. 

A water-mill. 

A steam -mill. 

Fire-arms. 

A two-wheeled  wagon. 
A four-wheeled  carriage 

A one-story  house 
A two-story  house. 

A Ihree-story  house. 

A one-horse  wagon. 

A four-horse  carriage. 

Gunpowder 


Un  tunfco  (trage,  vestido)  de  seda. 
Una  mesa  de  cocina. 

Una  mesa  de  caoba. 

Una  casa  de  ladrillo. 

Una  casa  de  piedra. 

Un  molino  de  viento. 

Un  molinillo  de  cafe. 

Un  trapiche.  Ingen io  de  azticar 
Un  gorro  de  terciopelo. 

Un  jarro  de  plata. 

Un  molino  de  agua. 

Un  molino  de  vapor. 

Armas  de  fuego. 

Un  carro  de  dos  ruedas. 

Un  carruage  (coche)  de  cuatro  ruev 
, das. 

Una  casa  de  un  alto. 

Una  casa  de  dos  altos. 

Una  casa  de  tres  altos.  (See  Lessee 
II.,  Obs.  A.) 

Un  carro  tiradb  por  un  caballo. 

Un  carruage  tirado  por  cuatro  ca 
ballos. 

Pblvora. 


SEVENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


347 


Ohs.  A.  We  have  seen  (Lesson  II.)  that  the  prepositijn  de  is  pat  bo- 
fvvcen  two  substantives,  the  latter  of  which  expresses  the  substance  of  whicis 
the  former  is  made ; but  the  preposition  para  is  sometimes  made  use  ol 
when  the  latter  expresses  the  use  of  the  former.  In  both  cases  the  order  of 
the  two  substantives  is  inverted  in  Spanish,  when  they  make  a compound 
‘«r  English. 


To  exaggerate. 

rbat  man  exaggerates  all  that  he 
says  and  does. 

All  that. 

To  take  the  place  of,  to  be  instead 
of 

That  man  is  father  to  me.  | 

That  umbrella  serves  him  as  a cane.  | 

An  inch. 

On  a small  scale. 

On  a large  scale. 
Thereabouts,  nearly. 
Alternately,  turn  by  turn. 

To  endeavor,  to  strive. 

To  give  one^s  self  up  to  grief 
To  melt. 

To  melt  in  tears. 


Exagerar.  Ponderar. 

Ese  hombro  .^xagera  cuaiito  dice  y 
hace. 

Cuanto.  Todo  lo  que 
Ser.  Servir  de. 

Ese  h ombre  me  es  un  segundo  padie, 
Ese  hombro  me  sirve  de  padre. 

Ese  pardguas  le  sirve  de  cana. 

Una  pulgada. 

En  pequeno.  For  menor. 

En  grande.  For  mayor. 

Cerca  de.  Foco  mas  6 mdiite  de. 
Alternativamente.  For  turnos. 
Esforzarse.  Empeharse. 
Abandonarse  (entregarse)  al  dolor 
Dejarse  veneer  del  dolor. 

Derretir  Derretirse 
Derretirso  en  Idgrimas. 


1 


To  raise,  ro  cause. 

To  raise  difficulties. 

To  cause  quarrels. 

To  cause  suspicions. 

The  behavior  of  that  man  raised  sus- 
picions in  my  mind. 


Excitar.  Incitar.  Mover. 

Levant  at 

Excitar  dificultades. 

Mover  pendencias. 

Excitar  sospechas. 

La  conducta  de  ese  hombre  me  inoi* 
t6  a sospecharle. 


To  shake. 

®].ake  that  tree,  and  the  fruit  will 
come  down. 


Sacudir. 

Sacuda  V ese  arbol,  y la  fruta  caer^ 
al  suelo. 


To  he  in  want  of. 

To  he  short  of. 

To  want. 

fhal  man  is  ia  want  of  every  <hing. 
[ am  in  want  of  nothing. 


t Hacer  falta.  Haber  menester. 
t Faliarle  d uno. 

Necesitar. 

A ese  hombre  todo  le  hace 
A mi  nada  me  falta 


848 


SEVENTY -SEVENTH  LESSON. 


A plate,  knife,  fork,  spoon,  napkin, 
and  bread. 

A table  for  four  persons. 

A table  for  ten  persons. 

A writing-table.  A desK 
A dining-room. 

A bedroom. 

A repeater. 

An  oil-bottle. 

A mustard-pot. 

A pitcher. 

A fowling-piece 
A fishing-line. 

A fisliing-rod. 


C Plato,  cuchillo,  tene- 
Un  cubierto,  < dor,  cuchara,  eer 
t villeta,  y pan. 

Una  mesa  de  cuatro  cubiertos 
Una  mesa  de  diez  cubiertos. 

Una  mesa  para  escribir.  Un  bufeto 
Una  sal  a de  comer.  Un  coinedor. 

( Un  dormitorio.  Una  alcoba. 

( Un  aposento  para  dormir. 

Un  reloj  de  repeticion. 

Una  botella  para  aceite. 

Una  mostacera. 

Un  jarro.  Un  pichel. 

Una  escopeta  de  cazador. 

Una  cuerda  para  cafia  de  pescar. 
Una  cafia  de  pescar 


exact,  to  want  oj 

VV' hat  do  you  want  of  me  ? 
What  do  you  exact  of  me  ? 

I exact  nothing  of  you 
A tea-pot 


I Exijir,  Querer. 

I Que  exije  V.  de  mi  ; 
t ^ Que  me  quiere  V,  ? 

I Que  quiere  V.  de  mi  ? 

Yo  no  exijo  nada  de  V 
t Yo  no  quiero  nada  de  V 
j Una  tetera. 


Obs.  B.  Such  compounds  as  the  following  are  generally  expressed  bj 
one  word  in  Spanish  : — 

The  oyster-woman.  I La  ostrera. 

The  tinman.  | El  hojalatero. 


OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  PROPER  NAMES  OF  PERSONS  TAJfEN  FROM  THE  LATIN 
AND  GREEK. 


Obs.  C,  Proper  names  ending  in  English  in  a,  as,  or  ««  are  the  same  in 
both  languages.  But  it  must  be  observed,  that  nouns  haviu<;  a double  con- 
sonant, drop  one  of  them ; that  nouns  that  have  th,  suppress  the  h ; that 
fh  is  changed  into  f ; y into  ^ • the  diphthongs  (e,  ce,  into  e ; mto  qu  be- 
fore e or  i,  and  int,  c before  a,  o,  u ; and  that  names  beginuing  with  S 
followed  by  a consonant,  generally  add  E before  it.  Examples  : — 


Caligula. 

Dolobella. 

Cleopatra. 

Diana. 

Julia. 


Caligula. 

Dolabela. 

Cleopatra. 

Diana. 

Julia 


SEVENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


349 


iEneas. 

I Endeis. 

I-  ythagoras. 

Pitagoras 

Ulysses. 

Ulises. 

Socrates. 

Socrates. 

Philadelphia. 

Filadelfia 

Acheron 

Aquerou. 

Acliilles 

Aquiles. 

Achates. 

Aedtes. 

Sparta. 

Esparta. 

Proper  names  ending  in  i 

0 generally  add  an  n.  Exampios*  — 

Cicero. 

Ciceroii. 

Plato. 

Platon. 

Scipio. 

Escipion. 

Proper  names  ending  in  us  change  that  termination  into  c 

Cyrus. 

Ciro. 

Camillus. 

Camilo. 

Orpheus. 

Orfeo. 

Most  of  those  ending  in  al  or  is  are  the  same  in  both  languages 

Juvenal.  1 

Juvenal. 

Sesostris.  | 

Sesdstris. 

Those  ending  in  English 

/ 

in  under,  change  that  terminatiog 

Examples : — 

Alexander  I 

Alejandro. 

Lysander.  | 

1 Lisandro. 

Remark  The  proper  names  of  kingdoms,  provinces,  and  towns,  ending 
n English  in  <z,  are  the  same  in  Spanish  ; and  those  of  towns  ending  ic 
')urgf  add  frequently  o.  Examples: — 


Arabia. 

Ac.ia. 

Friburg. 

Hamburg. 

Dainties. 

Br  is  fond  orf  dainties. 

At  broad  daylight 
I'o  sit  down  to  dinner 


Arabia. 

Asia. 

Friburgo. 

Hamburga 


Golosinas.  Manjares  delicados. 
i El  es  amigo  de  golosinas 
f A el  le  gustan  mucho  las  g Iq 
sinas. 

De  dia  claro. 

Sentarse  d la  mesa. 


350 


SEVENTY- SEVENTH  LESSON. 


EXERCISES. 

234. 

Has  your  sister  been  out  to-day  ? — She  has  been  out  to  buy  several 
tilings. — What  has  she  bought  ? — She  has  bought  a silk  gown,  a velvet 
bonnet,  and  a lace  veil,  (un  veto  de  encaje.) — What  have  you  done 
with  my  silver  tankard  ? — It  is  on  the  kitchen  table  (together)  with  the 
oil-bottle,  the  milk-pot,  the  pitcher,  the  mustard-pot,  and  the  coffee 
mill. — Do  you  ask  for  a wine-bottle  ? — No,  I ask  for  a bottle  of  wine, 
and  not  for  a wine-bottle.  If  you  had  the  goodness  to  give  me  the 
key  of  the  wine-cellar,  (la  bodega^  I would  go  for  or  e. — What  does 
tiiat  man  want  of  me  ? — He  exacts  nothing  ; but  he  will  accept  what 
you  will  give  him,  for  he  is  in  want  of  every  thing. — I will  tell  you 
that  I am  not  fond  of  him,  for  liis  behavior  raises  suspicions  in  my 
mind.  He  exaggerates  all  that  he  says  and  does. — You  are  wrong  in 
having  such  a bad  opinion  of  him,  for  he  has  been  a father  to  you. — 
I know  what  I say.  He  has  cheated  me  on  a small  and  on  a large 
scale,  and  whenever  he  calls  he  asks  me  for  something.  In  this 
manner  he  has  alternately  asked  me  for  all  I had : my  fowling-piece, 
my  fishing-line,  my  repeater,  and  my  golden  candlesticks. — Do  not 
give  yourself  up  so  much  to  grief,  else  (si  no)  you  will  make  me  melt 
in  tears,  (deshacerse.) 

Democritus  and  Heraclitus  w^ere  two  philosophers  of  a very  different 
character : the  first  laughed  at  the  follies  (la  locura)  of  men,  and  the 
other  wept  at  them. — They  w^ere  both  right,  for  the  follies  of  men 
deserve  to  be  laughed  (se  debe  reir)  and  wept  at,  (llorar  por  ellas.) 

235. 

Have  you  seen  your  niece? — Yes;  she  is  a very  good  girl,  who 
WTiies  well,  and  speaks  Spanish  still  better ; therefore  she  is  loved  and 
honored  by  everybody. — And  her  brother,  what  is  he  doing  ? — Do  not 
speak  10  me  of  him ; he  is  a naughty  boy,  who  writes  always  badly, 
and  speaks  Spanish  still  worse ; he  is  therefore  (asi)  loved  by  nobody. 
He  is  very  fond  of  dainties,  but  he  does  not  like  books.  Sometimes  he 
goes  to  bed  at  broad  daylight,  {cuando  es,)  and  pretends  to  be  ill ; but 
when  we  sit  down  to  dinner  he  is  generally  better  (again.)  He  is  to 
study  physic,  (la  medicina,)  but  he  has  not  the  slightest  inclination  for 
it,  (aficion. ) — He  is  almost  always  talking  of  his  dogs,  w^hich  he  lovea 
passionately,  (apasionadamente.)  His  father  is  extremely  sorry  for  it. 
The  young  simpleton  (el  tontuelo)  said  lately  to  his  sister,  “ I shall 
enlist  as  soon  as  a peace  (la  paz)  is  proclaimed,  (que  se  publique,^^) 

My  dear  father  and  my  dear  mother  dined  yesterday  with  some 
friends  at  (el  palacio)  the  King  of  Spain. — Why  do  you  always  speak 
English  and  never  Spanish  ? — Because  I am  too  bashful. — You  arc 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


351 


joking : is  an  Englishman  ever  bashful  ? — I have  a keen  appetite, 
[grande  apetito:)  give  me  something  good  to  eat.--- Have  you  any 
money  ? — No,  Sir. — Then  I have  nothing  to  eat  for  you. — Will  you 
aot  let  me  have  some  (no  me  dard  V.)  on  credit  ? I pledge  my  honor 
—That  is  too  little. — What,  (como,)  Sir  I 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesuna  octava. 

PRESENT  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

(Presente  del  Subjuntivo,) 


N.  B For  the  sake  of  brevity,  the  Present  of  the  Subjunctive  is  desig- 
nated by  N.  6.  For  the  formation  of  this  Tense,  see  Appendix. 


N.  6 of  To  HAVE,  (active.) 

Tliat  I may  have. 

N.  6 of  To  HAVE,  (aiixiliaiy.) 
That  I may  have. 

N.  6 of  To  BE. 

That  I may  be. 

N.  6 of  MAY  or  CAN,  (to  be  able.) 
That  I may  be  able. 


N.  6de  Tener,  (active  *.) 

Que  tenga,  tengas,  tenga,  tengamoe, 
tengais,  tengan. 

N.  6 de  Haber,  (auxiliar  *.) 

Que  haya,  hayas,  haya,  hdyamos, 
hdyais,  hdyan. 

N.  6 de  Ser  ana  Estar. 

{Que  sea,  seas,  sea,  seamos,  seals, soan 
^ Que  este,  estes,  este,  estemos,  esteis, 
^ esten. 

N.  6 de  Poder 

Que  pueda,  pueda.s,  pueda,  podamoe, 
podais,  puedan. 


Ohs.  A.  May  and  can  are  not  translated,  when  the  emphasis  is  on  the 
principal  verb.  Example  * — 

May  you  live  happy.  I Viva  V.  feliz. 

I fear  he  may  be  displeased.  | Temo  que  el  se  enfade. 


remarks. 

In  Spanish  a verb  governs  another  verb  in  the  infinitive,  in  the  indica^ 
five,  or  in  the  subjunctive  mood.  To  elucidate  this  subject,  the  following 
rules  are  laid  down,  in  which  the  governing  verb  v/ill  be  designated  by  the 
name  of  the  leading  verb,  and  the  governed  verb,  by  that  of  the  sub- 

JJRDINATL  VERB. 

RULE  1. 

The  subordinate  verb  is  n the  infinitive,  when  the  action  it  exprosceg 
^ff»rs  to,  and  is  to  be  performed  by,  the  subject  (nominative)  of  the  isap- 
ifn  VERB  Exaumle  : — 


352 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


Peace  i«  the  greatest  good  that  men  I La  paz  es  el  mayor  bien  que  los 

can  wish  ior  In  this  life.  hornbres  pueden  dcsear  on  esta 

I vida.* 

RULE  II. 

The  SUBORDINATE  TERB  is  in  the  indicative j when  the  leading  verf 

merely  declares,  or  points  out  a fact,  or  action  expressed  by  the  subor 

dinate.  Example : — 

I will  tell  them  that  they  do  not]  Vo  les  dirO  que  no  lo  que 
know  what  they  say.  j 


RULE  III. 

The  SUBORDINATE  VERB  is  111  the  subjunctive^  when  the  action  expressec 
by  it  is  indicated  as  douhtfuly  uncertain^  conditional^  or  conthigent,  by 


THE  LEADING  VERB.  Examples  : — 

Even  if  this  should  not  happen,  but 
merciful  Heaven  guard  and  pre- 
serve him  safe  and  sound,  he  con- 
tinues as  poor  as  ever. 

I doubt  he  will  come  this  evening. 

You  are  not  sure  that  they  will  do  it. 

What  do  you  want  me  to  do  ? 


Y cuando  eso  no  suceda,  si  no  que  el 
Cielo  piadoso  le  guarde  y conserve 
sano  y vivo,  podrd  ser  que  se 
quede  en  la  misma  pobreza  que 
antes  estaba.^ 

Dudo  que  el  venga  esta  noche. 

V.  no  estd  seguro  de  quo  ellos  lo  ha 
gan. 

i Que  quiere  V.  que  yo  hag  a ? 


Remark. — It  must  be  observed,  that  although  in  the  paradigms  of  th< 
conjugations  the  English  potential,  as  well  as  the  subjunctive  moods 
are  translated  into  Spanish  by  the  subjunctive,  the  use  of  the  latter  depends 
entirely  on  the  meaning  of  the  leading  verb  ; in  consequence  of  which,  ? 
verb  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive  mood,  or  in  the  future  tense  in  English 
requires  often  to  be  placed  in  the  subjunctive.  Examples ; — 


It  is  necessary  for  you  to  write  to 
them. 

He  says  he  will  do  it,  whenever 
they  shall  pay  him  what  he  asks. 


Es  necesario  que  V.  les  escriba. 

El  dice  que  lo  hard,  siempre  que  ello 
le  paguen  lo  que  pide. 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1.  When  THE  leading  verb  means  admiration^  application,  approbatioiii 
command,  demand,  duty,  doubt,  fear,  fondness,  ignorance,  intelligence^ 
intention,  permission,  prohibition,  satisfaction,  supplication,  sorrow,  sur- 
prise, suspicim,  conveniency,  wish,  necessity,  will,  asking,  advising,  coun- 
selling, entreating,  rejoicing,  soliciting,  or  any  act  of  the  mind,  such  as 


CERViNTES,  D.  Quijotc,  Cap.  XXX vH  pt  ii. 


SEVENTY  -EIGHTH  LESSON 


353 


ihinling,  hclievingt  <Slc.,  it  governs  the  subordinate  verb  in  the  subjuko- 
nvE,  preceded  by  the  conjunction  que. 

2.  The  subordinate  verb  niu‘«t  also  bo  placed  in  the  subjunctive,  pre- 
ceded by  QUE,  when  the  leading  verb  is  preceded  by  an  irUerjectinn  ex- 
pressing wish  or  desire,  or  when  «t  is  an  impersonal  verb,  indicating  doubt, 
duty,  obligation,  or  some  contingent  and  future  effect  produced  by  the  oc« 
ticn  of  such  subordinate  verb  But  this  is  placed  in  the  present  oi 
the  infinitive  mood,  without  th<»  conjunction,  when  its  subject  is  not  oX' 
pressed.  Example : — 

T.  . 1 1 j -I  ^ necesario  que  V.  lo  haga. 

It  is  necessary  that-you  should  do  it.  < ^ ^ 

( Es  necesario  nacerlo. 

3 The  leading  verb  governs  the  subordinate  verb  in  the  subjunctive, 
when  the  former  is  connected  with  the  latter  by  a conjunction  implying 
condition,  (conditional  terms  or  clause,)  doubt,  exception,  such  as  if,  un^ 
less,  provided,  that,  although,  <Slc.,  when  they  mean  also  a contingent  and 
future  effect  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  subordinate  verb. 


government  of  the  verbs  set  down  and  specified  in  the  three 

PRECEDING  rules. 

Any  of  the  verbs  contained  and  set  forth  in  the  preceding  rules,  being 
THE  LEADING  VERB,  and  ill  the  present  or  future  tense  of  the  indicative,  or 
in  the  imperative  mood,  governs  the  subordinate  verb  in  the  present  of 
the  subjunctive. 

N.  B..  To  show  to  the  learners  the  relation  of  the  tenses,  and  in  order 
to  make  easy  to  them  the  use  of  the  above  rules,  the  number  of  each  tense 
is  here  employed  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  instead  of  the  name  of  the  tense. 
Should  they  not  remember  them,  they  must  consult  the  Appendix. 

N.  1 stands  for  the  present  of  the  indicative — N.  6 for  the  present 
of  the  subjunctive — p.  for  participle. 


LEADING  verb.  SUBORDINATE  VERB.  DIRECTIONS. 


Simple  tenses.  < 

\ N.  1. 
i N.  4. 

N.  6. 

C When  the  action  is 
< to  take  place  after  a 

Compound  tenses.  ^ 

|N.  l,p. 
\ N.  4,  p. 

N.  C,  p 

^ certain  time, 
f When  the  action 
< has  taken  place  before 

i 

F If* 

\ a certain  time. 

What  do  you  want  him  to  do  ? 

! 1 Que  quicre  V.  que  haga  el  ? 

It  will  be  necessary  for  him  to  have  | Sera  necesario  que  el  haya  acabadi 

finished  his  exercise  before  two  j su  tema  antes  de  las  dos. 

o’clock.  I 

It  will  be  sufficient  for  you  to  Know  K Bastard,  aue  V.  sepa  eso. 

that.  ( Serd.  suficieiite  que  V.  lo  sepa. 

It  is  enough  for  him  to  have  written  I Basta  que  el  haya  escrito  dos  car 
two  letters.  tas. 


554 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


I will  be  very  glad  for  your  having 
spoken  so. 

He  will  give  you  paper,  without  your 
asking  for  it 

Let  me  know  when  he  writes. 


Yo  me  alegraid  mucho  de  qut  V 
haya  hablado  asi. 

6l  le  dard  d V.  papel,  sin  que  V h 
pida, 

Aviserne  V cuando  el  escriha 


EXAMPLES  ON  THE  USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Leading  Vtrbs,  N.  2,  of  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive. 


It  ig  necessary  that. 

It  needs  to,  or  that. 

It  is  strange,  or  a wonder  that. 

It  is  a pity  that. 

It  is  right  that. 


It  is  proper  that. 

It  is  surprising  that 
It  is  becoming  that. 

It  is  time  that. 

It  is  important,  or  it  matters  that. 

It  suffices,  it  is  sufficient  that. 

It  is  to  be  wished  that. 

It  is  possible  that. 

It  is  better  that. 

You  must  have  the  goodness  to  do 
that. 

It  is  necessary  that  you  should  be 
here  at  an  early  hour. 

You  must  do  that. 

It  needs  that  one  should  have  money. 
I must  go  to  market. 

He  must  go  away. 

[t  is  just  that  he  should  be  punished. 
It  is  sufficient  for  you  to  know  that. 
It  is  time  for  you  to  speak. 

We  must  sell  our  goods  immediately. 

What  iHust  I say  ? 
il  is  important  that  this  should  be 
done. 

it  is  proper  that  we  should  set  out. 


Es  necesario  que. 

Es  menester  que. 

Es  un  prodigio  que. 

Es  un  milagro  que. 

Es  Idstima  que. 

Es  bueno  (bien)  que  Es  justo  qua 
Es  malo  (es  injusto)  que. 
t No  hay  razon  para  que. 

No  es  bueno  que 

Es  propio  (conveniente,  or  d prop6 
sito)  que. 

Es  sorprendiente  (maravilloso)  que 
Conviene  que. 

Es  tiempo  que. 

Importa  que.  Es  importante  que. 
Basta  que.  Es  suficiente  que. 

Es  de  desear  que. 

Es  posihle  que. 

Es  mejor  que.  Vale  mas  que. 

Es  menester  que  V.  tenga  la  bondad 
de  hacer  eso. 

Es  necesario  que  V.  esii  aqui  tem- 
prano. 

Es  menester  que  V.  haga  eso. 

Es  menester  que  uno  tenga  dinero. 
Es  menester  que  yo  vaya  d la  plaza 
Es  menester  que  el  se  vaya. 

Es  justo  que  €[  sea  castigado. 

Basta  que  V.  lo  sepa. 

Es  tiempo  de  que  V.  hable. 

Es  menester  que  uendarncs  inmedia 
tamente  nuestras  mercaderias. 

I Que  es  menester  que  yo  diga  ? 
Importa  que  eso  se  haga 

Conviene  que  par  tamos. 


It  is  wrong  that. 


SEVENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


355 


ft  18  tu  be  wished  that  you  should 
go  to  the  country. 

it  is  necessary  that  we  should  finish 
to-day. 

It  is  sufficient  that  you  are  satisfied. 

I am  sorry  that  she  is  ill. 

I am  charmed  that  you  are  here. 

I am  glad  that  he  has  received  his 
money. 

She  is  angry  that  you  are  my  friend. 

I am  surprised  that  you  are  not  more 
attentive. 

I am  extremely  glad  that  your  sister 
has  recovered. 

Vour  father  is  afflicted  that  you  miss 
your  lessons. 

i am  surprised  that  you  have  not 
done  your  task. 


Es  de  desear  que  V se  vaya  al  cain- 
po. 

Es  necesario  quo  acahemos  hoy. 

Basta  que  VV.  esten  satisfechos. 

Siento  que  ella  este  mala. 

Estoy  encantado  de  que  V,  este  aqui 

Me  alegro  de  que  el  haya  recibida 
su  dinero. 

Ella  estd  enojada  de  que  V.  sea  mi 
amigo. 

Estoy  sorprendido  de  que  V.  no  sea 
mas  atento. 

Estoy  extremameiite  alegre  de  que 
su  hermana  de  V.  este  restable- 
cida. 

El  padre  de  V.  estd  aJUgido  de  que 
V.  pierda  sus  lecciones. 

Estoy  sorprendido  de  que  V no 
haya  hecho  su  tarea. 


EXERCISES. 

236. 

Will  yon  rebate  (contar)  something  to  me  ? — What  do  you  wish  me 
4o  relate  to  you  ? — A little  anecdote,  if  you  like. — A little  boy  one  day 
at  table  (d  la  mesa)  asked  for  some  meat ; his  father  said  that  it  was 
not  polite  to  ask  for  any,  and  that  he  should  wait  until  some  was  given 
to  him,  {que  le  dieran,  imperf.  subjunctive ; see  the  following  Lesson.) 
The  poor  boy,  seeing  every  one  eat,  and  that  nothing  was  given  to 
him,  said  to  his  father : “ My  dear  father,  give  me  a little  salt,  if  you 
please.”  “ What  will  you  {tu)  do  with  it  ?”  asked  the  father.  “ I wish 
to  eat  it  with  {echarh  en)  the  meat  which  you  will  give  me,”  replied 
(replicar)  the  child.  Everybody  admired  {admirar)  the  little  boy’s  wit ; 
and  his  father,  perceiving  that  he  had  nothing,  gave  him  meat  without 
his  asking  for  it,  {sin  que  la  pidiera.) — Who  was  that  little  boy  that 
asked  for  meat  at  table  ? — He  was  the  son  of  one  of  my  friends. — Why 
did  he  ask  for  some  meat  ? — He  asked  for  some  because  he  had  a good 
appetite. — Why  did  his  father  not  give  him  some  immediately  ? — Be- 
cause he  had  forgotten  it. — Was  the  little  boy  wrong  in  asking  for  some? 
—He  was  wrong,  for  he  ought  to  have  waited. — Why  did  he  ask  his 
father  for  some  salt  ? — He  asked  for  some  salt,  that  his  father  might 
perceive  that  he  had  no  meat,  and  that  he  might  give  him  some. 

Do  you  wish  me  to  relate  to  you  another  anecdote? — You  wil 
greatly  ^mitcMsimc)  oblige  me. — Some  one  purchasing  some  goods 


356 


SEVENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


of  a shopkeeper,  said  to  him  : “You  ask  too  much ; you  should  not 
sell  so  dear  to  me  as  to  another,  because  I am  a friend.”  The  mer- 
chant replied  : “ Sir,  we  must  gain  something  by  {con)  our  friends,  for 
our  enemies  will  never  come  to  the  shop.” 

237. 

A young  prince,  seven  years  old,  was  admired  by  everybody  for  hia 
wit,  (d  causa  de  su  ingenio.)  Being  once  in  the  society  of  an  ohl  ofhcer, 
the  latter  observed,  in  speaking  of  the  young  prince,  that  when  cliildreu 
discovered  so  much  genius  in  their  early  days,  they  generally  grew 
very  stupid  when  they  came  to  maturity. — “ If  that  is  the  case,”  said 
the  vouflg  prince,  who  had  heard  it,  “ then  you  (vos)  must  have  been 
very  remarkable  for  your  genius  when  vou  were  a child.” 

An  Englishman,  on  first  visiting  France,  met  with  a very  young 
child  in  the  streets  of  Calais,  who  spoke  the  French  language  with 
fluency  and  elegance. — “Good  heaven,  {Santo  cielo^)  is  \i  po&able?” 
exclaimed  he,  “ that  even  children  here  speak  the  French  language 
with  purity,  {purezay) 

Let  us  seek  {solicitar)  the  friendship  of  the  good,  and  avoid  the 
society  of  the  wicked  ; for  bad  company  corrupts  good  manners. — 
What  sort  of  weather  is  it  to-day  ? — It  snows  continually,  as  it  snowed 
yesterday,  and  according  to  all  appearances,  will  also  snow  to-morrow. 
—Let  it  snow ; I should  like  it  to  snow  {que  nevara^  imperf.  sub- 
junctive; see  next  Lesson)  still  more,  for  I am  always  very  well  when 
it  is  very  cold. — And  I am  always  very  well  when  it  is  neither  cold 
nor  warm. — It  is  too  windy  to-day,  and  we  should  do  better  if  we 
stayed  at  home. — Whatever  weather  it  may  be  I must  go  out ; for  I 
promised  to  be  with  my  sister  at  a quarter  past  eleven,  and  I must 
keep  my  word. 


SEVENTY-NINTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Septuagesima  nona, 

IMPERFECT  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

(Imperf ecto  del  Suhjuntivo,) 

N.  B.  For  the  formation  of  this  tense,  see  the  Appendix. 

The  Spanish  verbs  have  three  words  to  express  the  imperfect  tense  of  the 
subjunctive  mood,  to  wit  one  ending  in  ra,  one  in  ria,  and  one  in  se. 
Examules : — 

FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

To  desire.  I Deseor. 

I might,  could,  ivould,  ur  should  de-  j Yo  deseara  7,  dosecria  8,  deecase  9. 
Biro.  1 


SEVENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


357 


SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

To  fear.  1 Temer. 

[ might,  could,  would,  or  should  fear.  | Yo  temiera  7,  teme;  ia  8,  temscss  9 


nilRt*  CONJUGATION. 

To  unite.  i UnzV. 

! might,  could,  would,  or  should  Yo  uniera  7,  uuiria  8,  imfcse  9 
unite.  I 


USE  OF  THE  IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

Tho  same  leading  verbs  that  govern  the  subordinate  verb  in  the 
present  of  the  subjunctive  mood  with  que,  being  in  any  of  the  past  tenses 
5)f  the  indicative,  govern  the  subordinate  verb  in  the  first  (N.  7)  or 
ihiru,  (N.  9)  imperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive,  preceded  by  que. 


leading  verbs.  subordinate  verbs. 


Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

C N.  2. 

N.  7. 

Simple  tenses.  ^ N.  3. 

N.  9. 

f N.  8. 

C N.  2.  p. 

N.  7,  p. 

Compound  tenses.  ^ N.  3.  p. 

N.  3,  p. 

( N.  8.  p. 

directions. 


5 


When  the  action  is  to 
take  place  after  a 
certain  time. 

When  the  action  has 
taken  place  after  a 
certain  time. 


I doubted 
I did  doubt 
I would  doubt 
I had  doubted 
I would  have  doubted 
I doubted 
I did  doubt 
1 would  douDt 
I had  doubted 
I would  have  doubted 


A 

" Yo  dudaba 

Yo  dude 

that  you 

Yo  dudaria 

would  come. 

Yo  habia  dudado 

J 

^ Yo  habria  dudado  > 

^ Yo  dudaba 

that  you 

Yo  dude 

^ would  have  ' 

Yo  dudaria 

! come. 

Yo  habia  dudado 

J 

. Yo  habria  dudado  J 

que  V.  vin- 
iera  ; or  que 
V.  viniese. 

queV.huhie- 
ra  vpuido ; 
or  que  V 
hubiese  ve- 
nido. 


Remark  A,  on  the  use  of  the  subjunctive. 

After  the  following  conjunctions,  the  verb  is  in  the  subjunctive,  prosenti 
ir  imperfect,  in  conformity  with  the  rules  above  explained. 


Hvat,  in  erder  that, 
to  the  »^nd  that. 
I nfoes,  except, 

If,  t should  it  hap- 
pen, 

Ikjforo, 


d fin  que. 

d minos  que. 
en  caso  que — si. 

antes  que. 


Though,  although, 
For  feai  of,  lest, 
unless, 

In  case,  if, 
Though. 


hien  que 
por  temor  de  no, 
sea  que,  d me- 
nos  que. 
en  caso  que  si 
lunque. 


858 


SEVENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


Till,  until, 

Far  from, 

Not  that, 

For  all  til  at,  not- 
withstandiii^  that, 
Sluppose  that, 

If  over  so  little,  how 
•little  soever, 


hasta  que. 
lejos  de, 
no  por  quc, 
no  obstante  eso 

supuesto  que. 
por  poco  que. 


Provided  that,  save 
that. 

Though,  although. 
Without, 

However  littloj 
Whether, 

Suppose  that, 


cm  ial  qm. 

aunque. 
sin,  sin  que. 
por  poco  que 
sea  que. 

i supuesto  que 
se  suponc. 


£XAMPLF« 


Will  you  stay  here  until  I can  go 
out  with  you  ? 

I will  go  out  before  he  comes  back. 

If  you  had  what  you  have  not,  you 
would  be  rich. 

I send  you  my  book,  that  you  may 
read  it. 

Unless  you  accompany  her,  she  will 
not  go  out. 

Though  your  children  are  idle,  they 
make  progress. 

If  a man  had  ever  so  little  acquaint- 
ance with  another,  ho  was  bound 
to  take  a part  in  the  dispute,  and 
venture  his  person  as  much  as  if 
he  had  himself  been  angry. 


Be  it  as  it  may. 

Though  she  is  little  and  bad-looking, 
she  is  nevertheless  amiable. 

I would  not  have  her  for  a wife, 
though  she  is  rich  and  has  a great 
dea.  of  wit,  because  she  is  not 
good-hearted. 

Provided  you  are  my  friend,  I am 
content. 

Whether  you  are  in  the  nght  or  in 
the  wrong. 

Although  the  monkey  be  dressed  jn 
silk,  he  is  still  a monkey. 


I Quiere  V.  estarse  aqui  hasta  qm 
yo  pueda  salir  con  V.? 

Yo  saldrd  antes  que  dl  vuelva. 

Si  V.  tumera  lo  que  no  tiene,  V seria 
rico. 

Envio  d V.  mi  libro  para  que  (d  fin 
de  que)  V.  le  lea. 

A menos  que  V.  la  acompahe,  ella  no 
saldrd. 

Aunque  los  ninos  de  V.  scan  perezo- 
sos,  olios  hacen  progresos. 

Por  poca  amistad  que  un  hombre 
tumera  con  otro,  era  necesario  quo 
el  se  mezclara  en  la  disputa,  y que 
arriesgara  su  persona  tanto  como 
si  61  mismo  se  hubiera  (hubiese) 
encolerizado. 

Sea  lo  que  fuere.  Sea  lo  que  sea  ^ 

t Como  quiera  que  sea. 

Aunque  sea. 

Aunque  ella  sea  chica,  y tenga  mala 
cara,  no  deja  de  ser  amable. 

Yo  no  querria  tomarla  por  mi  esposa 
aunque  sea  rica,  y tenga  mucho 
taleiito,  porque  no  tiene  bueii  co- 
razpn. 

Con  tal  que  V.  sea  mi  amigo,  estny 
contento. 

Sea  que  V tenga ^ 6 no  tenga  mzotj 

Aunque  se  msta  de  seda 

La  Mona,  Mona  se  queda 

Iriarte,  Fable  XXVI] 


SEV^ENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


359 


But  before  it  comes  to  that  issue,  a | 
knight  must  travel  througli  the 
world. 

But  bo  that  as  it  n.ay,  I will  order  it 
to  be  repaired  in  the  first  village, 
whore  we  can  find  a blacksmith, 
in  such  a manner  as  to  be  unex- 
celled, nay,  even  unequalled,  by 
that  which  Vulcan  forged  and  fin- 
ished for  the  god  of  war. 

I want  to  divide  no  spoils,  but  to  beg 
and  supplicate  some  friend  to  bring 
me  a draught  of  wine,  and  that  he 
will  wipe  me  dry  of  this  sweat. 


I Pero  antes  que  se  llcgue  d ^ tdr- 
mino  es  menester  andar  poi  el 
I mundo. 

I D.  Quijotet  cap.  xxi.  pi.  i. 

Pero  sea  lo  que  fuere,  yo  la  adsre- 
zard  en  el  primer  lugar  donde  hay  a 
herrero,  y de  suerte  quo  no  le  haga 
ventaja,  ni  aun  le  llegue  la  que 
hizo  y forjd  el  dios  de  las  herrerias 
para  el  dios  de  las  batallas. 

Ditto i ditto. 

Yo  no  quicro  repartir  despojos,  sino 
pediVf  y suplicar  d algun  amigo, 
que  me  de  un  trago  de  vino,  y me 
enjugue  este  sudor. 

Ditto,  cap.  liii.  pt.  ii. 


Ohs  A.  Some  conjunctions  govern  the  indicative,  when  the  sentence 
affirms  positively  that  the  thing  in  question  is,  has  been,  or  will  be ; and  the 
subjunctive,  when  the  sense  of  the  phrase  indicates  uncertainty,  condition, 
stipulation,  contingency,  futurity,  or  wish.  Examples  : — 


If- 

Although. 

But. 

So,  in  such  a manner. 

So  as  to 

So  that. 

Ind.  You  behave  in  such  a manner, 
that  you  are  loved  by  everybody 

Subj.  Behave  in  such  a manner 
that  you  may  be  loved. 

If  he  lent  them  money,  they  also 
lent  it  to  him. 

If  he  lent  (should  he  lend)  them 
money,  they  would  also  lend  it  to 
him. 

D-  it  so  as  to  have  him  satisfied. 

Cut  for  me,  he  could  not  have  known 
it 

Ind.  If  he  had  gained  a suit,  he  also 
bad  lost  a friend,  and  therefore  he 
had  reason  to  complain 


Si. 

Aunque. 

Si  no. 

^ De  {de  tal)  forma  que. 

De  {de  tal)  manera  que. 

De  {de  tal)  modo  que. 

^ De  {de  tal)  suerte  que. 

Ind.  V.  se  porta  de  manera  que 
amado  de  todo  el  mundo. 

Subj.  Pdrtese  V.  de  tal  mfinera  que 
sea  amado,  {se  haga  amar.) 

Si  ^1  les  prestd  dinero,  ellos  tambien 
se  le  prestJlron. 

Si  €\  les  prestara  dinero,  ellos  tam- 
bien se  le  prestarian. 

t Hdgalo  V.  de  modo  que  €i  quedc 
satisfecho. 

Si  no  fuera  por  mi,  61  no  lo  hauria 
sabido. 

Ind.  Si  61  habia  ganado  el  pleito, 
tambien  habia  perdido  un  omigot 
y asi  tenia  razon  de  quojarse. 


360 


SEVENTY- NINTH  LESSON. 


Subj.  If  he  had  gained  (that  is,  had 
he  gained)  the  suit,  he  would  have 
lost  a friend,  and  therefore  he  had 
no  reason  to  be  sorry. 

Tnd.  Although  I had  Deen  there 
often,  I had  never  seen  her. 

Subj,  Although  I had  been  there 
often,  (or  had  I been,)  I never 
should  have  seen  her. 


Subj.  Si  ^1  hubiera  ganado  el  pleiU 
habria  perdido  un  amigo,  y asi  IK 
tenia  razon  de  quejarse. 

McHenry’s  Gram 

Ind.  Aunque  yo  habia  estado  a me- 
nudo  alii,  nunca  la  habia  visto.  ♦ 
Subj.  Aunque  yo  hubiera  estado  alii 
k menudo,  nunca  la  habria  visto. 


Ohs.  B.  'The  subjunctive  is  used  after  the  conjunction  que  when  it  is 
elliptic  or  substituted  for  other  conjunctions,  such  as : d Jin  quey  {de  que,)  sea 
qu€y  sin  quCf  con  tal  quey  antes  qucy  despues  quey  d menos  quey  hasta  que, 
<Slc. 


Whether  I read  or  write,  it  is  always 
found  fault  with. 

He  can  say  nothing  without  your 
knowing  it. 

Wait  till  your  father  comes. 


Que  yo  lea,  6 que  escriba,  siempre 
hallan  falta. 

±\  no  puede  decir  nada,  que  V.  no 
sepa. 

Aguarde  V.  que  su  padre  vuelva 


EXERCISES. 

238. 

M.  de  Turenne  would  never  buy  any  thing  on  credit  of  tradesmen, 
{tenderoSy)  for  fear,  he  said,  they  should  lose  a great  part  of  it,  if  he 
happened  to  be  killed.  All  the  workmen  (meneslral)  who  were  em- 
ployed about  his  house  had  orders  to  bring  in  their  bills  (una  cuenta) 
before  he  set  out  for  the  campaign,  and  they  were  regularly  paid. 

You  will  never  be  respected  unless  you  forsake  (abandonar)  the  bad 
company  you  keep. — You  cannot  finish  your  work  to-night,  unless  1 
help  you. — I will  explain  to  you  every  difficulty,  that  you  may  not  be 
disheartened  (desanimar)  in  your  undertaking,  (una  empresa.) — Sup- 
pose you  should  lose  your  friends,  what  would  become  of  you  ? — In 
case  you  want  my  assistance,  call  me,  I shall  help  you. — A wise  and 
prudent  man  lives  with  economy  when  young,  in  order  that  ho  may 
enjoy  the  fruit  of  his  labor  when  he  is  old. — Carry  this  money  to  Mr. 
N.,  in  order  that  he  may  be  able  to  pay  his  debts,  (una  deuda.) — Will 
you  lend  me  that  money  ? — I will  not  lend  it  you  unless  you  promise 
to  return  it  to  me  as  soon  as  you  can. — Did  the  general  arrive  ? — He 
arrived  yesterday  morning  at  the  camp,  (el  campo,)  weary,  and  tired, 
but  very  seasonably ; he  immediately  gave  his  orders  to  begin  the 
action,  though  he  had  not  yet  all  his  troops. — Are  your  sisters  happy  ^ 
— They  are  not,  though  they  are  rich,  because  they  are  not  contented. 
Altliough  they  have  a good  memory,  that  is  not  enough  to  learn  any 
language  whatever,  (cualquiera  que  sea  ;)  they  must  make  use  of  theii 


SEVENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


361 


judgment. — Behold  how  amiable  that  lady  is ; for  all  that  she  has  no 
fortune,  I do  not  love  her  the  less. — Will  you  lend  me  your  violin  ?— . 
I will  lend  it  you,  provided  you  return  it  to  me  to-night. — Will  your 
mother  call  upon  me  ? — She  will,  provided  you  will  promise  to  take 
her  to  the  concert. — I shall  not  cease  to  importune  (importunar)  her, 
till  she  has  forgiven  me. — Give  me  that  penknife. — I will  give  it  you, 
provided  you  will  not  make  a bad  use  of  it. — Shall  you  go  to  London  ? 
— 1 will  go,  provided  you  accompany  (acompanar)  me ; and  I will 
write  again  to  your  brother,  lest  he  should  not  have  received  my  letter. 

239. 

Where  were  you  during  the  engagement  ? — I was  in  bed  to  have 
my  wounds  dressed,  (curar.)  Would  to  God  (Ojald)  I had  been  there  ! 
I would  have  conquered  (veneer)  or  perished,  (morir.) — We  avoided 
an  engagement  for  fear  we  should  be  taken,  their  force  being  superior 
to  ours. — God  forbid  (no  quiera  el  cielo,  with  the  subjunctive)  I should 
olame  your  conduct,  but  your  business  will  never  be  done  properly 
mless  you  do  it  yourself. — Will  you  set  out  soon  ? — I shall  not  set  out 
till  1 have  dined. — Why  did  you  tell  me  that  my  father  was  arrived, 
though  you  knew  the  contrary  ? — You  are  so  hasty,  (violento,)  that 
however  little  you  are  contradicted  (contradecir)  you  fly  into  a passion 
(encoierizarse)  in  an  instant.  If  your  fatlier  does  not  arrive  to-day, 
and  if  you  want  money,  I will  lend  you  some. — I am  much  obliged  to 
you. — Have  you  done  your  task  ? — Not  quite  ; if  I had  had  time,  and 
if  I had  not  been  so  uneasy  about  the  arrival  (llegada)  of  my  father,  I 
should  have  done  it. — If  you  study  and  are  attentive,  I assure  you  that 
you  will  learn  the  Spanish  language  in  a very  short  time. — He  who 
wishes  to  teach  an  art,  must  know  it  thoroughly,  (a  fondo  ,*)  he  must 
give  none  but  clear  and  well-digested  notions  (reglas)  of  it ; he  must 
instil  (infundir)  them  one  by  one  into  the  minds  of  his  pupils,  and  above 
all,  he  must  not  overburden  (sobrecargar)  their  memory  with  useless 
or  unimportant  rules. 

My  dear  friend,  lend  me  a dollar. — Here  are  two  instead  of  one. — 
How  much  obliged  I am  to  you  ! — I am  always  glad  when  I see  you, 
and  I find  my  happiness  in  yours. — Is  this  house  to  be  sold  ? — Do  you 
wish  to  buy  it  ? — Why  not  ? — Why  does  your  sister  not  speak  ? — She 
would  speaK  if  she  were  not  always  so  absent,  (distraida.) — I like  pretty 
anecdotes ; they  season  {sazonar)  conversation,  and  amuse  everybody, 
Pmy  relate  me  some. — Look,  if  you  please,  in  some  of  the  numbers  of 
flic  Spectator,  and  you  will  find  many. 


16 


362 


EIGHTIETH  LESSON. 


EIGHTIETH  LESSON. — Leccion  Octogesima, 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE,  (continued.) — Continuacion  del  Subjuntivo. 

However^  howsoever  1 Por,  Por  mas* 

Ohs.  A.  Por,  or  por  mas,  before  a noun  or  an  adjective,  governs  tlie  sub- 
}nnclive. 

However  good  you  may  be.  i Por  bueno  que  V.  sea. 

How  rich  soever  they  may  be.  | Por  mas  ricos  que  scan. 


Whatever,  whatsoever. 


C Por  (n)  que,  Por  mas  (n)  que, 

J Cualquiera,  Cualesquiera,  (plur.) 

I Todo  lo  que.  Sea  el  que,  \ la  que.) 
t Sea  cual  fuere.  Sea  cual  sea. 


Obs.  B.  Sea  el  que,  &c.,  followed  by  a noun,  requires  de  after  it,  and 
que  when  a verb  comes  after  it.  It  always  governs  the  subjunctive. 


Whatsoever  courage  you  may  have, 
he  has  more  than  you. 

Whatsoever  patience  we  may  have, 
we  will  never  have  enough. 

Whatsoever  riches  he  may  have,  he 
will  soon  see  the  end  of  them. 

Whatsoever  kindness  I may  have 
for  him,  I never  shall  have  as 
much  as  he  merits. 

Whatsoever  faults  you  may  make,  I 
will  take  care  to  correct  them. 

Whatever  may  be  the  happiness  you 
enjoy,  I am  happier  than  you. 

Whatsoever  may  be  the  fortune 
which  you  enjoy,  you  may  lose  it 
in  an  instant. 

Whatsoever  may  be  the  efforts  which 
you  make,  you  never  can  succeed. 

Vi'hatsoever  may  be  the  pains  which 
you  take,  no  one  will  be  under  ob- 
ligation to  you  for  them. 

No  one 


Por  valor  que  V.  tenga,  el  tiene  ma« 
que  V 

T Sea  cual  fuere  el  valor  de  V.  H 
t tiene  mas 

Por  mas  paciencia  que  tengamos, 
nunca  tendremos  bastante 

Sean  cuales  fueren  sus  riquezas, 
pronto  las  verd  acabadas. 

Por  mas  afecto  que  yo  le  tenga, 
nunca  le  tendre  tanto  como  me- 
rece. 

Cualesquiera  faltas  que  V.  haga,  vo 
tendre  cuidado  de  corregirlas 

Sea  cual  fuere  la  felicidad  que  V. 
goce  (vos,  or  vosotros  goceis)  yo 
soy  mas  feliz  que  V.,  (que  vos,  or 
vosotros.) 

Por  mas  fortuna  que  tengais  (V 
tenga)  podreis,  (podrd,)  perderla  en 
un  instante. 

Por  mas  esfuerzos  que  V.  haga, 
nunca  podrd  salir  con  bien. 

Por  mas  trabajo  quo  V.  se  tome, 
ninguno  se  creerd  obligado  d V., 
(nadie  se  lo  agradecerd,  or  crervf 
dehcrle  nada.) 

Nadie.  Nin^na 


eightieth  lesson. 


863 


Whaietei  t whatsoever y (meaning  all  ^ 
things  soever.)  I 

Whatsoever  you  may  do  for  my 
father,  he  will  reward  you  for  it. 

I complain  of  nothing  whatsoever. 


Whoever,  whosoever. 


Todo  lo  que.  Todo  cuanto. 

Todas  las  cosas  que. 

Cualquier  {cualquiera)  cosa  que. 

Todo  cuanto  V.  fiaga  por  mi  padro, 
su  merced  (el)  se  lo  recompensard, 

Yo  no  me  quejo  de  nada,  (or  de  cosa 
ninguna,  or  de  nada  que  valga  La 
pena.) 

Quienquiera.  Cualquiera 


Obs.  C.  The  indeterminate  pronouns  quienquiera,  cualquiera,  whoever, 
whosoever ; quienquiera,  or  cualquiera  que  sea,  whoever,  whosoever ; 
nadie,  nobody ; ninguno,  ni  uno  solo,  no  one,  not  any  ; nada,  notning ; 
require  the  next  verb  in  the  subjunctive 


De  quienquiera  que  V.  hable,  evite 
murmurarle. 

No  conozco  d nadie  (d  ninguno)  que 
sea  tan  bueno  como  V. 

Yo  no  he  visto  nada  que  pudiera 
tacharse  en  la  conducta  de  dl,  (en 
su  conducta.) 

Obs.  D.  The  subjunctive  is  employed  at  the  beginning  of  a sentence  to 
express  surprise,  a desire,  or  an  imprecation.  Examples ; — 


Of  whomsoever  you  may  speak, 
avoid  slander. 

I know  nobody  who  is  as  good  as 
you. 

I have  seen  nothing  that  could  be 
blamed  in  his  conduct. 


May  heaven  ever  preserve  you  from 
such  a misfortune. 


Quiera  el  cielo  preservar  a V.  (pre- 
I senaros)  de  una  tal  desgracia. 
r / Plegue  d Dios  I ; Plegue  al  cielo  . 
' ; Quiera  Dios,  (el  cielo)  I 
; Ojald ! (See  Placer  *,  in  App.) 
; Pluguiera  d Dios  que  eso  fucse 
asi  I 

/ Plugutvra  d Dios  que  el  lo  hubiese 
hecho ! 

; Pluguiera  d Dios  que  todos  loa 
grandes  senores  amasen  la  paz  I 
/ Plegue  al  Cielo  que  nosotros  iiunca 
seamos  mas  infelices  I 
^ / Sea  V.  feliz ! 

( / Ojald  que  V.  sea  feliz ! 

Obs.  E.  The  subjunctive  is  also  sometimes  employed  at  the  beginning 
of  a sentence,  when  for  the  sake  ot*  energy  an  ellipsis  is  made  of  the  con- 
ditional conjunctions  aunque,  si, 


Would  to  God  I 

Would  to  God  it  vrore  so ! 

Would  to  God  he  had  done  it ! 

Would  to  God  that  all  the  great 
lords  loved  peace ! 

Would  to  God  we  may  never  be 
more  unhappy ! 

May  you  bo  happy ! 


Though  it  cost  me  all  I have,  I shall 
know  how  to  preserve  myself  from 
such  a misfortune. 


Costdrame  todo  cuanto  tengo,  yo  ms 
sabria  precaver  do  una  tal  desgra 
cia.* 


* Instead  of,  Aunque  (or  aun  cuandn)  me  enstara,  &c» 


B64 


EIGHTIETH  LESSON. 


Were  he  to  do  what  they  advise  him,  Hiciera  6i  lo  que  le  acousejan,  y no 
he  would  not  have  cause  to  com-  tendria  motive  de  quejarse  * 
plain. 


Remark  E,  on  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  mood 

It  may  be  remarked,  in  conclusion,  on  the  use  of  the  subjunctive,  that 
whenever  the  subordinate  verb,  or  the  second  member  of  a sentence,  is 
united  to  the  leading  verb,  or  the  first  member  of  a sentence,  by  one  of  the 
relative  pronouns,  que,  quien,  cual,  &c.,  it  is  put  in  the  indicative  when  it 
expresses  any  thing  certain  or  positive,  and  in  the  subjunctive  when  it  rc- 


’ates  to  any  thing  uncertain,  doubtful. 

Here  is  a book  for  you,  which  you 
may  consult  occasionally. 

Give  me  a book  that  I may  be  able 
to  consult  occEisionally. 

Lend  me  that  book  which  you  do 
not  want. 

[icnd  me  a book  which  you  may  not 
be  in  want  of. 

Oo  not  leave  a place  where  you  are 
comfortable,  and  whence  you  hear 
well. 

Choose  a place  where  you  may  be 
comfortable,  and  whence  you  may 
hear  well. 


or  contingent.  Examples ; — 

Ind.  Aqui  tiene  V un  libro  que 
puede  consultar  d ocasiones. 

Subj.  Deme  V.  un  libro  que  yo  pue- 
da  consultar  t cuando  se  ofrezea. 

Ind.  Prdsteme  V.  aquel  libro  de  que 
no  necesita. 

Subj.  Presteme  V.  un  libro  de  que 
no  necesite. 

Ind,  No  deje  V.  un  a§iento  en  que 
V.  estd  edmodamente,  y desde  el 
eual  V.  oye  bien. 

Subj.  Escoja  V.  un  asiento  en  que 
este  edmodamente,  y desde  el  cual 
V.  oiga  bien 


SOME  ADDITIONAL  EXAMPLES  ON  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
TAKEN  FROM  THE  SPANISH  CLASSIC  AUTHORS. 


Will  your  worship  allow  me  to  con- 
fer a little  with  you  ? 

lu  these  cross -paths,  though  your 
worship  conquer,  and  achieve  the 
most  perilous  exploits,  there  is  no- 
body present  to  be  witness  of 
them. 


I Quiere  vuestra  merced  darme  li- 
cencia  quo  departa  un  poco  con 
dl  ? D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxi.  pt  i 

En  estas  encrueijadas  aunque  se 
venzan,  y acaben  las  mas  peligro- 
sas  aventuras,  no  hay  quien  la« 
vea,  ni  sepa.  Ditto,  ditto 


* Instead  of,  Si  el  hiciera,  &c. 


EIGHTIETH  LESSON. 


3(55 


Neither  will  there  be  wanting  some 
person  to  write  the  history  of  your 
worship’s  exploits. 

Andrew  must  wait  for  my  return,  as 
you,  madam,  say. 


I request  thee  again,  not  to  tell  it  to 
anybody. 


Cut  I positively  wish  it  not  to  be 
known,  till  it  is  done. 


Is  it  possible  that  a Christian  preacher 
can  have  the  boldness  to  proffer 
such  an  opinion  ? 


Provided  that  two  (religious  persons) 
make  themselves  exempt,  or  be 
noi  able  to  pass  the  roads,  I shall 
be  certainly  called. 

1 am  calm,  and  will  be  the  same, 
although  the  triumph  of  the  Gerun- 
dios  be  complete. 

By  this  mean«*,  and  provided  that 
you  can  pronounce  as  well,  as 
Heaven  may  grant,  the  name  of 
the  illustrious  Shakspeare,  nobody 
will  doubt  of  your  authority. 

In  order  that  ignorant  persons  may 
not  confound  them  v/ith  the  tri  ly 
learned. 

May  Jupiter  preserve  you  from  all 
evil ! 


Alli  no  faltard  quien.  ponga  poi 
escrito  las  hazanas  de  V uestra  mor- 
ced.  DiitOf  ditto 

Es  forzoso  que  Andres  tenga  pa- 
ciencia  hasla  mi  vuelta  como  vos, 
senora,  decis. 

DiitOf  cap.  xxxi.  pt.  i 

Te  vuelvo  d encargar  que  d nadie 
lo  descubras. 

Moratin — El  Si^  Act  1. 

Pero  quiero  absolutamente  que  no  se 
sepa  hasta  que  este  hecho. 

Ditto,  ditto 

I Es  posible  que  tenga  aliento  pan 
proferir  semejante  proposicion  ui 
orador  cristiano  ? 

P Isla — Fr.  Gerundio 

Con  tal  que  dos  (religiosos)  se  ex^ 
cusen,  6 no  puedan  pasar  lot 
puertos,  sere  infaliblemente  llama* 
do.  Ditto — Carta  LI 

EsLoy  fresco,  y lo  estard  aunque  sea 
completo  el  triunfo  de  los  Gerun- 
dios.  Ditto — Carta  LX VI. 

Con  esto,  y como  pronunrieiSf  como 
el  cielo  os  de  d entender,  el  nom- 
bre  del  insigne  Shakespeare,  nin- 
guno  dudard  de  vuestro  voto. 

Cadalso — Eruditos  d la  Violctix. 

A fin  de  que  los  ignorantes  no  lofl 
confundan  con  los  verdaderos  sa- 
bios.  Ditto f ditta 

; Jupiter  os  guarde  de  todo  mal ! 

Ditto,  ditto 


866 


EIGHTIETH  LESSON. 


Ueaven  grant  you  would  sing,  re- 
plied the  little  bird. 

AJtbough  the  critics  I am  speaking 
of,  may  abuse  me,  I will  describe 
them  in  other  fable. 


If  the  statutes  of  knignt-errantry 
were  lost,  they  would  be  found  in 
your  worship’s  heart. 


Don  Quixote  told  him  to  relate  some 
story  ; and  Saucho  said  he  would 
do  so,  if  the  dread  of  what  he  heard 
did  not  prevent  him. 

If  I were  permitted  to  speak  freely 
as  usual,  I could  perhaps  give  such 
reasons  as  would  convince  your 
worship,  that  you  are  mistaken  in 
what  you  say. 

Don  Fernando  was  highly  displeased 
that  his  grandfather  had  not  ap- 
pointed him  for  principal  gov- 
ernor. 

Fhe  neglect  of  appointing  him,  might 
be  imputed  to  his  youth. 


It  is  not  fit  for  us  to  rejoice  at  a good 
luck,  or  to  grieve  for  an  ill  one. 


If  those  men  who  shun  adversity, 
could  understand  the  blessings 
inorein  contained,  they  not  #nly 


/ Ojald  que  cantatas 
Replied  el  pajarillo. 

Iriarte — Fabula  XXV II  • 

Aunquerenieguende  ml 
Los  criticos  de  que  trato, 

£n  otra  fd.bula  aqui 
Tengo  de  hacer  su  relrato. 

Ditto — Fabula  XXIll 

Si  las  ordenanzas  de  la  andante 
caballeria  se  perdiesen  (perdieran) 
se  hallarian  en  el  pecho  de  vucs 
tra  merced. 

Z).  QaijotCi  cap  xvii 

Dijole  Don  Quijote  que  contase  (con- 
tara)  algun  cuento  ; y Sancho  dijo 
que  si  hariay  si  le  dejar  a el  miedo 
de  lo  que  oia. 

Ditto ^ cap.  xxi. 

Si  yo  pudiera  hablai*  tanto  coma 
solia,  quizd  diera  tales  razones 
que'vuestra  merced  viera  que  se 
engahaba  en  lo  que  dice. 

DittUf  ditto 

Don  Fernando  se  hall  aba  desabrido 
de  que  su  abuelo  no  le  aejase 
nombrado  por  principal  gobernador 
SoliSi  lib.  iii.  cap.  hi. 

El  no  nombrarle  pudiera  pasar  poi 
disfavor  hecno  d su  poca  edad. 

Ditto,  ditto 

No  conviene  que  nos  alegremos  con 
los  buenos  sucesos,  6 nos  angu^- 
tiemos  con  los  malos. 

Fr  Luis  de  Leon 

Si  los  que  esqurvan  la  adversidaa 
entendiesen  el  bien  que  en  ella  se 
encierra,  no  solo  no  la  huirian^ 


lUIGHTIETH  LESSON. 


367 


jFOuld  not  fly  from  it,  but  they 
perhaps  would  beg  God  to  visit 
them  with  it. 


mas  por  ventura  harian  plegariai 
d Dios  para  que  se  la  enviaee  d 
sus  casas.  Ditto ^ ditto 


EXERCISES. 

240. 

You  must  have  patience,  though  you  have  no  desire  t,  have  it , for 
I must  also  wait  till  I receive  my  money.  Should  I {en  caso  que) 
receive  it  to-day  I will  pay  you  all  that  I owe  you.  Do  not  believe 
diat  I have  forgotten  it;  for  I think  of  it  every  day.  Or  do  you 
oelieve,  perhaps,  that  I have  already  received  it  ? — I do  n ot  believe  that 
vou  have  already  received  it ; but  I fear  that  your  other  creditors  may 
already  have  received  it. — Would  to  God  {Ojald  que)  you  had  what  I 
wish  you,  and  that  I had  what  I wish. — Though  we  have  not  had  what 
we  wish,  yet  we  have  almost  always  been  contented  ; and  Messieurs 
B.  have  almost  always  been  discontented,  though  they  have  had  every 
thing  a reasonable  man  {un  hombre  racional)  can  be  contented  with. — 
Do  not  believe.  Madam,  that  I have  had  your  fan,  (abanico,) — Who 
tells  you  that  I believe  it  ? — My  brother-in-law  would  wish  he  had  not 
had  what  he  has  had. — Wherefore  ? — He  has  always  had  many 
creditors,  ai^d  no  money. — I wish  you  would  always  speak  French  to 
me ; and  you  must  obey,  if  you  wish  to  learn,  and  if  you  do  not  wish 
to  lose  your  time  uselessly,  (inutilmente.)  I would  wish  you  were 
more  industrious  and  more  attentive  when  I speak  to  you.  If  I were 
not  your  friend,  and  if  you  were  not  mine,  I should  not  speak  thus  to 
you. — Do  not  trust  (no  se  fie  V.)  Mr.  N.,  for  he  flatters  you.  Do  you 
think  a flatterer  {un  adulador)  can  be  a friend  ? — You  do  not  know 
him  as  well  as  I,  though  you  see  him  every  day. — Do  not  think  that  I 
am  angry  with  him,  because  his  father  has  offended  me. — Oh ! here  he 
is  coming,  {hele  aqui  que  viene,)  you  may  tell  him  all  yourself. 


241. 

Wliat  do  you  think  of  our  king  ?- — I say  he  is  a great  man,  but  I 
add,  that  though  kings  be  ever  so  powerful  (poderoso)  they  die  as  well 
as  the  meanest  of  their  subjects. — Have  you  been  pleased  with  my 
sisters  ? — I have ; for  however  plain  {feo)  they  may  be,  they  are  still 
very  amiable ; and  however  learned  (instruido)  our  neighbors’  daughters 
may  be,  they  are  still  sometimes  mistaken. — Is  not  their  father  rich  ? 
— 1 lowever  rich  he  may  be,  he  may  lo«e  all  in  an  instant. — Whoever 
the  enemy  may  be  whose  malice  {n^itcia)  you  dread,  (recelar,)  you 
ought  to  rely  (descansar)  upon  your  innocence ; but  the  laws  {las 
■eyes)  condemn  (condenar)  all  criminals  {criminal)  whatever  they  may 
be. — ^Whatever  your  ir*tentions  {intencion)  may  be,  you  should  liave 


368 


EIGHTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


acted  differently. — Whatever  the  reasons  (razon)  be  which  5’0i;  maj 
allege,  they  will  not  excuse  your  action,  blameable  in  itself. — Wliat* 
ever  may  happen  to  you  in  this  world,  never  murmur  {murmurar) 
n gainst  Divine  Providence  ; for  whatever  we  may  suffer  we  deserve  it. 
— Whatever  I may  do,  you  are  never  satisfied. — Whatever  you  may 
say,  ycur  sisters  shall  be  punished,  if  they  deserve  4t,  and  if  they  d< 
not  endeavor  to  amend,  {enmendar.) — Who  has  taken  my  gold  watch  1 
— I do  not  know.  Do  not  believe  that  I have  had  it,  or  that  Miss  C. 
has  had  your  silver  snuff-box,  for  I saw  both  in  the  hands  of  youi 
sister  when  we  were  playing  at  forfeits,  {juegos  de  prendas.) — To- 
morrow I shall  set  out  for  Dover ; but  in  a fortnight  I shall  be  back 
again,  (t  oZrer,*)  and  then  I shall  come  and  see  you  and  your  family. — 
Where  is  your  sister  at  present  ? — She  is  at  Paris,  and  my  brother  is 
at  Berlin. — That  little  woman  is  said  (se  dice)  to  be  going  to  marry 
-General  (el  general)  K.,  your  friend  ; is  it  true  ? — I have  not  heard  of 
)t. — What  news  is  there  of  our  great  army  ? — It  is  said  to  be  lying 
y^estar)  between  the  Weser  {el  Veser)  and  the  Rhine,  {el  Rhin.) — All 
that  the  courier  told  me  seeming  {parecer)  very  probable,  I went  home 
immediately,  wrote  some  letters,  and  departed  for  London. 


EIGHTY-FIRST  LESSON. — Leccion  Octogesima  primera, 
FUTURE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Remark. — This  tense  expresses  a positive  future  conditional  action,  and  la 
governed  by  the  same  verbs  and  conjunctions  that  govern  the  present  of  the 
subjunctive  mood,  in  consequence  of  which  it  is  sometimes  mistaken  for  and 
used  instead  of  that ; but  it  is  very  different,  and  expresses  the  idea  with 
more  energy  and  precision.  Therefore  the  rules  laid  down  for  the  use  ol 
the  present  of  the  subjunctive  are  applicable  to  this  tense  when  the  sense  is 
conditional  and  future.  It  frequently  answers  to  the  future  of  the  indica- 
tive, or  present  of  the  potential  mood  in  English ; but  most  frequently  to  the 
auxiliary  verb  shouldy  as  may  be  observed  by  the  following  examples  : — 


I do  not  tell  thee  to  live,  or  to  die  : 
live,  if  thou  canst ; die,  if  thou 
canst  not  do  better. 

Wo  have  resolved  to  do  in  his  behalf 
all  that  shall  lie  in  our  power. 


No  te  digo  que  vivas,  ni  que  mueras 
vive,  si  PUDiERES,  y muere,  si  no 
PUDiERES  mas.  Quevedo. 

Tenemos  ya  determinado  que  sa  hags 
en  su  obsequio  todo  lo  que  alcan 
' ZAREN  nuestras  fuerras. 

Solis,  lib.  iii  cap  xi. 


BIG HTI -FIRST  LESSON. 


869 


Joiumaiid  what  you  please^  rouew 
to  our  good  friend  my  sincere  at- 
tachment, and  say  from  me  all 
that  you  please  to  all  those  M'ho 
shall  remember  me 


Just  a littlcy  ever  so  little, 

^Vill  you  do  me  the  favor  of  giving 
me  a piece  of  bread  ? 

Do  you  wish  a great  deal  ? 

No,  just  a little. 


To  turn  to  account. 

To  make  the  best  of. 

That  man  does  not  know  how  to 
make  the  most  of  his  talents. 

That  man  turns  his  money  to  ac- 
count in  trade. 

How  do  you  employ  your  money  ? 

I employ  it  in  the  stocks. 

To  boast f to  brag. 

f do  not  like  that  man,  because  he 
boasts  too  much 


Notwithstanding  that. 

For  all  thatf  although. 

That  man  is  a little  bit  of  a rogue, 
but  notwithstanding  he  passes  for 
an  honest  man. 

Although  that  man  is  not  very  well, 
he  notwithstanding  works  a great 
deal. 

Although  that  woman  is  not  very 
pretty,  still  she  is  very  amiable. 


Manda  lo  que  gustares,  renuova  d 
nuestro  buen  amigo  mi  fino  afecto, 
y d cuantos  se  acordaren  de  ml, 
dirds  de  mi  parte  todo  lo  quc 
quisieres.  Isla — Cartas. 

r Solo  un  poco.  No  mas  que  un  [)oeii 

^ I Un  poquito,  Un  poquitito. 

( Solo  un  poquito 
i Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  dc 
darme  un  pedazo  (un  poco)  do 
pan  ? 

I Quiere  V.  mucho  ? 
t iVo,  solo  un  poquitOy  (un  pedacito 
un  cachito.) 

f t Hacer  valer.  t Haccr  para  g anar 

•?  Aproveckarse  de. 

( Sacar  ventaja  de,  Servirse  de. 

Ese  hombre  no  sabe  como  aprove- 
charse  de  sus  talentos. 

Ese  hombre  saca  ventaja  (sabe  sacar'' 
ventaja)  de  su  dinero  en  el  comer- 

! cio. 

I t I Como  hace  V.  para  ganar  con  su 

I dinero  7 

I Yo  le  pongo  en  los  fondos  piiblicos. 

{ Jactarse.  Vanagloriarse. 

^ Preciarse.  Alabarse. 

\ Fanfarronear.  t Ser  jactancioso. 
t No  me  gusta  ese  hombre,  porqus 
se  jacta  mucho,  {es  muy  jactan- 
cioso.) 


r t No  dejar  de. 

< No  obstante.  Sin  embargo. 

( Con  todo.  Aunque. 

Ese  hombre  no  deja  de  ser  un  pica- 
rillo,  con  todo  pasa  por  un  hombra 
de  bien. 

Aunque  aquel  hombre  estd  enfermo, 
no  deja  de  trabajar  mucho. 

Aunque  aquella  mujer  no  sea  mny 
bonita,  no  deja  de  ser  am  able. 


370 


EIGHTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


Although  that  man  has  not  the  least 
talent,  yet  for  all  that  he  boasts  a 
great  deal. 

Although  the  tavern-keeper’s  wife  is 
rather  swarthy,  yet  for  all  that 
she  turns  the  business  to  good  ac- 
count. 

I nsceived  your  letter  on  the  fifth. 

On  the  sixth. 

To  £To  back,  to  return. 

The  top. 

The  bottom. 

From  top  to  bottom. 


t Aunque  aquel  hombre  no  tenga  el 
menor  talento,  no  por  eso  deja  dc 
jactarse  mucho  de  el. 

Aunque  la  tavernera  es  un  poco  mo- 
rena,  ella  no  deja  de  sacar  buot 
provecho  de  sus  uegocios. 

Yo  ecibi  la  carta  de  V.  el  cinco. 

El  seis. 

Volver  Volver  atras.  Revolver 

Lo  alto.  Elevado.  El  remate. 

La  cima,  (cumbre,  punta.) 

Lo  bajo.  Lo  inferior.  El  suelo. 

El  fondo.  El  pid. 

' t flasta  arriba,  encima,  (lo  alto,  la 
) cima.) 

( t De  arriba  abajo. 


The  eldest  brother. 

The  eldest  sister. 

He  is  the  eldest. 

To  appear,  to  seem. 

I appear,  thou  appearest,  he  ap- 
pears. 

To  keep,  to  maintain. 


I El  hermano  mayor. 

La  hermana  mayor. 
I 6l  es  el  mayor. 


My  keeping  or  maintenance. 


Parecer.  Tener  aparieiicia  de. 
Parcciendo.  Parecido. 

Yo  parezco.  Tii  pareces.  El  pareco. 


Tener  Mantener  *.  Conservar 
manutencion,  (mantencion.) 


^ Mi 

( t Gastos. 

(Mi  manutencion  me  cuesta  mil  y 
doscientos  pesos  al  ano. 

Mis  gastos  montan  d mil  y doscientoe 
pesos  al  ano. 


To  drive  in,  to  sink. 
T converse  with 
A conversation. 
To  spare. 

Spare  your  money 

To  get  tir^d. 

To  be  tired. 


‘ Clavar,  Hundir.  Encajar.  Meter 
K Conversar  con.  Hablar  con. 

( Tratar  con. 

I Una  conversacion. 
i Ahorrar.  Economizar 
( Guardar.  Conservar. 

I t Guide  V.  de  su  diner o. 

ICansarse  de.  Fatigarse  de 
Fastidiarse  de.  Enfadarse  de. 
Estar  cansado,  (fatigado,  fastidiado 
V enfadado  de.; 


EIGHTY-FIRSI  LESSON. 


371 


To  handle. 

To  leeiu  against. 

Lean  against  me. 
Lean  against  the  wall 


I Manosear.  Manejar.  Tratar. 

J Apoyarse.  Descansar. 

^ Reclinarse.  Recostarse. 

Recuestese  V.  sobre  mi 
Reclinese  TaD^yese)  V.  contra  la 
pared. 


To  aim  at. 
Short. 

To  stop  short. 


Apuntar  Asestar.  Encarar. 
Tirar  al  bianco, 

Corto.  Breve.  Bajo. 

Pequeho.  Chico. 

Pararse.  Detenerse. 

Cortarse.  Perderse. 


Virtue  is  amiable.  I La  virtud  es  amable. 

Vice  is  odious.  | El  vicio  es  aborrecible. 

Ohs.  A.  The  definite  article  is  used  in  Spanish  before  substantives  taken 
m a general  sense,  and  in  the  whole  extent  of  their  signification.  In  such 


in£tances  no  article  is  made  use  of  in 
Men  are  mortal. 

Gold  is  precious. 

Flour  is  sold  at  six  dollars  a barrel. 

Beef  costs  six  pence  a pound. 

The  horror  of  vice,  and  the  love  of 
virtue,  are  the  delights  of  the  wise 
man 


English.  Examples ; — 

Los  hombres  son  morta!es. 

El  oro  es  precioso. 

La  harina  se  vende  d seis  pesos  e! 
barril. 

La  came  cuesta  d seis  neniques  la 
libra. 

El  horror  del  vicio,  y el  amor  de  la 
virtud,  son  lets  delicias  del  sabio. 


England  is  a fine  country  | Inglaterra  es  uii  pais  hermoso. 


Obs.  B.  The  definite  article  is  used,  of  late,  before  the  names  of  king- 
doms, provinces,  and  countries ; not  by  the  best  writers,  however,  excepting 
when  those  names  are  accompanied  by  an  adjective,  or  when  the  countries 


admit  of  a division.  It  is  required  i 
general  usaget  Examples;— 

Spain,  Spain  ultramarine,  of  this 
side  or  of  that  side  of  the  sea. 

Asia.  Asia  major,  or  minor. 
Havana. 

Peru. 

Italy  is  the  garden  of  Europe. 

Vhe  dog  is  the  friend  and  companion 
of  man. 


0 be  placed  before  a few  names  by 

Espana.  La  Espaila  ultra  mar  C 
citra  mar. 

Asia.  Asia  n ay  or,  or  menor 
La  Habana. 

El  Peru. 

Italia  es  el  jardin  de  Europa 
* El  perro  es  el  amigo  y el  compafLers 
^ del  hombre. 


372 


EIGHTY -FIRST  LESSON. 


Obs.  C.  The  articles  are  repeated  before  every  substantive  when  a pai 
licular  empheisis  is  placed  on  them  otherwise  they  may  bo  omitted. 


Thessaly  produces  wine,  oranges, 
lemons,  olives,  and  all  kinds  of 
fruits. 

He  ate  the  bread,  meat,  apples,  and 
cakes  ; he  drank  the  wine,  beer, 
and  cider. 

Ueauty,  gracefulness,  and  wit,  are 
valuable  endowments  when  height- 
ened by  modesty. 


Tcsalia  produce  vino,  naraiijas,  li* 
moues,  olivas,  y toda  especie  de 
frutas. 

^:i  se  comid  el  pan,  la  came,  la* 
manzanas,  y los  bollos  ; y se  be« 
bid  el  vino,  la  cerveza,  y la  sidra. 

La  hermosura,  las  gracias,  y el  inge 
nio,  sonprendas  apreciables  cuando 
estan  acompahadas  de  la  modestia 


EXERCISE. 

242. 

Whither  shall  you  go  next  year  ? — I shall  go  to  England,  for  it  is  a 
fine  kingdom,  where  I intend  spending  the  summer  on  my  return 
from  France. — Whither  shall  you  go  in  the  winter  ? — I shall  go  to 
Italy,  and  thence  (de  alii)  to  the  West  Indies,  (d  las  Anlillas  ;)  but 
before  that  I must  go  to  Holland  to  take  leave  (despedirse)  of  m} 
friends. — What  country  do  these  people  inhabit,  (habitar  ?) — They 
inhabit  the  south  (mediodia,sur  or  sud)  of  Europe;  their  countries  are 
called  Italy,  Spain,  and  Portugal,  and  they  themselves  are  Italians, 
Spaniards,  or  Portuguese ; but  the  people  called  Russians,  Swedes, 
and  Poles,  inhabit  the  north  (norte)  of  Europe  ; and  the  names  of  theii 
countries  are  Russia,  Sweden,  and  Poland,  (Polonia.)  France  is 
separated  (separar)  from  Italy  by  (pm')  the  Alps,  (los  Alpes^)  and  from 
Spain  by  the  Pyrenees,  (los  Pirineos.) — Though  the  Mahometans 
(los  Mahometanos)  are  forbidden  the  use  of  wine,  (este  prohibido,) 
yet  for  all  that  some  of  them  drink  it. — Has  your  brother  eaten 
any  thing  this  morning  ? — He  has  eaten  a great  deal ; though  he 
said  he  had  no  appetite,  yet  for  all  that  he  ate  all  the  meat,  bread,  and 
vegetables,  (legumbres,)  and  drank  all  the  wine,  beer,  and  cider. — Are 
eggs  (liuevo)  dear  at  present  ? — They  are  sold  at  a dollar  a hundred. — 
Do  you  like  grapes,  (uvas  1) — I do  not  only  like  grapes,  but  alsr 
olums,  (ciruelas,)  almonds,  nuts,  and  all  sorts  of  fruit. — Though 
modesty,  candor,  and  an  amiable  disposition  (condicion)  are  valuable 
endowments,  yet  for  all  that  there  are  some  ladies  that  are  neithei 
aiodest,  nor  candid,  (candido,)  nor  amieble. — The  fear  of  death  and 
the  love  of  life  being  natural  to  men  they  ought  to  shun  (huir)  Hcc 
'el  vicio^)  and  adhere  to  (adherirse  d)  virtue. 


EIGHTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


373 


EIGHTY-SECOND  LESSON.- 

To  give  occasion 

To  leave  it  to  one 
I leave  it  to  you.  | 

A good  bargain.  ^ 

To  stick,  or  abide  by  a thing.  ^ 

{ abide  oy  the  offer  you  have  made  \ 

me.  i 


^Leccion  Octogesima  segunda, 

Dar  motivOf  (causa,  ocasion  dt 
(n)  para.)  (With  a verb  in  the 
infinitive  or  subjunctive.) 

t Dar  pie  para.  (With  a verb  ic 
the  infinitive  or  subjunctive.) 

Referirse  d *.  Deferirse  * al  die 
tdmen. 

Dcjar  d,  (the  person.) 

Dejar  d la  decision,  (al  dietdmen.) 

t Fonerlo  en  mams,  (dl  ai  bitrio  de., 

t Lo  dejo  d lo  que  V.  diga,  (haga.) 

Buen  contrato,  (pacto.) 

Buena  compra,  (venta.) 

i Una  ganga.  Una  buena  suerte 

Una  chiripa. 

Alenerse  d Mantenerse  cn  *. 

Pasar  por.  Estar  por  *. 

Y o me  atengo  d la  oferta  que  V.  m*. 
ha  hecho. 

Paso  por  la  oferta  que  V.  me  ha  hechc 


I do  not  doubt  but  you  are  my  friend.  | Yo  no  dudo  que  V.  sea  mi  amigo. 


To  suffer,  to  hear. 


Tliey  were  exposed  to  the  whole  fire 
of  the  place. 


Sufrir.  Aguantar.  Experimentar 
Snstener  *.  Padecer  *. 

Resistir.  Arrostrar. 

Elios  estuvi6ron  expuestos  d todo  e' 
fuego  de  la  plaza. 

Sufrieron  todo  el  fuego  do  la  plaza. 


To  examine  one  artfully,  or  to  draw 
a secret  from  one. 

I examined  him  artfully,  and  by  that 
means  I have  made  myself  ac- 
quainted with  all  his  affairs. 


Examinar  con  mafia, 
t Hacer  cantar  d alguno. 

Sacarle  un  secreto. 

Hacerle  desembuchar. 
t Yo  le  he  examinado  con  mafia,  y 
de  este  modo  me  he  Iiecho  duenc 
de  ^todos  sus  negocios. 


C Pasar.  Sohrellevar.  Sujrir. 

To  hear^  or  to  put  up  with.  t Dejar  que.  Aguantar. 

( t No  hacer  caso  de. 

fon  will  be  obliged  to  put  up  with  I V.  se  verd  obligado  d pasai  j>o3 
oil  his  wishes.  I cuanto  61  quiera. 


374 


EIGHTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


Thick. 

A thick  cloud 
A thick  bea»-‘i. 

He  has  a thick  heard 
A burst. 

A burst  of  laughter. 

To  burst  out  laughing. 

To  burst  out. 

To  burst  out  a laughing. 

Splendor,  brightness. 

To  make  a great  show. 

To  light. 


To  suffer  one’s  self  to  be  beaten. 

To  let  or  to  suffer  one’s  self  to  fall. 
To  suffer  one’s  self  to  be  insulted. 
To  suffer  one’s  self  to  die. 

To  let  one’s  self  be  struck. 

To  send  back,  to  send  away. 

To  extol,  to  praise  up. 

To  boast,  to  praise  one’s  self. 


Go  thither. 

Let  us  go. 

Go  thou. 

Go  (thou)  thither. 
Go  rthou)  away. 

Lot  him  go  thither 
Lot  them  go  thither 


t Espeso.  Espesa.  Denso  Dousa 
Grueso.  Gruesa. 

Una  nube  espesa. 
t Una  barha  pohlada,  {espesa.) 
t EL  es  barhicerrado. 

Un  reventon,  (estallido,  estampidex 
flujo.) 

Una  carcajada.  Un  flu^o  do  risa, 
Reventar  de  risa.  Caerse  de  risa 
Reventar.  Estallar.  Brotar. 
Romper.  Quebrar.  Prorumpir. 
Dar  de  carcajadas.  Hacerse  trizaa 
Esplendor.  Resplandor  Brillo. 
Lustre.  Brillaniez.  Claridad. 
Pompa.  Magnificencia. 

Hacer  ostentacion. 

Hacer  un  gran  papel. 

JAlumbrar.  Iluminar. 

Dar  luz.  Encender 

Dejarse  aporroar,  (golpear,  maltia 
tar,  sacudir.) 

Dejarse  caer. 

Dejarse  insultar. 

Dejarse  morir. 

Dejarse  apalear. 

Devolver.  t Volver  d enmat. 
Remitir  (enviar)  otra  vez. 

Hacer  volver. 

C Engrandecer.  Alabar. 

/ Magnificar.  Ensalzar.  Aplaudir 
f Engrandecer.  Exaltar. 

Jactarse.  Vanagloriarse. 

Alabarse.  Exaltarse.  Preciarse 
t Echar  plantas. 

C Vaya  V.  ahi,  (alli  or  alld.) 

< Id  VOS  (vosotros)  ahi,  (alii  or  alld.) 

^ Ve  tti  alli,  (alld  or  ahi.) 

I Vamos. 

I Ve  td. 

I Ve  alia,  (alli.) 

‘ Veto. 

Vdyase  €[  alia. 

Que  se  vaya  €\  alU. 

J Vayanse  ellos  alld. 

\ Que  86  vayan  ellos  alli. 


EIGHTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


375 


Go  away,  bi>gone. 

Let  us  begone.  | 

hiir  go  av*^ay,  let  him  begone.  | 
Give  me.  | 

Give  it  to  me.  ^ 

Give  it  to  him  | 

Give  him  some. 

To  get  paid.  | 

Get  paid.  | 

Let  us  set  out.  | 

Let  us  breakfast.  I 

Let  him  give  it  to  me. 

L&\  him  be  here  at  twelve  o’clock. 

Let  him  send  it  me 
He  may  believe  it. 

Make  an  end  of  it. 

Let  him  finish. 

Let  him  tak?  it. 

Let  her  say  so. 

Rather,  (before  an  adjective.) 


■ S 


Vete.  Marchate. 
t Quitate  de  aqui. 

Vayase  V.  Marchese  V 
.t  Quitese  V.  de  aqui. 

Vd.monos.  Marchcmonos. 
t Quitemonos  de  aqui. 

Qne  se  vaya.  Que  se  marclio. 
t Que  deje  el  puesto. 

Deme  V.  Denme  VV.  Dadme. 
Demele  (demela)  V 
Dddmele.  Dadmela  vos. 

Desele  (desela)  V. 

Diotele  or  k,  (vos,  vosotros.) 

Dele  V.  alguno,  (algunos,  algun& 
algunas.) 

Dadle  vos,  vosotros  alguno,  (algunos 
alguna,  algunas.) 

Hacerse  pagar. 

Hdgase  V.  pagar. 

+ Haceos  pagar. 

Salgamos.  Marchemos. 

Partarn  os.  V dmonos. 

Almorcemos. 

Demele  el.  Que  ^1  me  le  de 
Que  el  este  aqui  d las  doce. 

Que  el  estd  aqui  al  medio  dia. 

Que  el  me  le  (la)  envie. 

6 1 puede  creerle,  (la  or  lo.) 

Acabar.  Final  izar. 

Terminar.  Concluir. 

Que  acabe,  (dl.) 

t Dejele  V.  acabar , {que  acabe.) 
Tdmele,  (el.)  Que  le  tome  dl. 
Dejele  V.  que  le  tome. 

Digalo  ella. 

Deje  V.  que  ella  lo  diga. 
t Dejeselo  V.  decir. 

Algo. 


The  starling. 

If  I were  to  question  you  as  I used 
to  da  at  the  beginning  of  our  les- 
sons, what  would  you  answer  ? 

We  found  these  questions  at  first 


El  estornino, 

iSi  yo  les  hicicra  d VV.  (os  hicieraj 
preguntas  como  lo  hacia  al  principle 
de  nuestras  lecciones,  que  me  re- 
spouderian  VV.  (que  responderiais)! 

Nosotros  hallamos  al  principio  ealas 


376 


EIGHTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


rather  ridiculous  ; but  full  of  con- 
fidence in  your  method,  we  an- 
swered as  well  as  the  small  quan- 
tity of  words  and  rules  we  then 
possessed  allowed  us. 

tVe  were  not  long  in  finding  out  that 
those  questions  were  calculatea  lo 
ground  us  in  the  rules,  and  to  ex- 
ercise us  in  conversation,  by  the 
contradictory  answers  we  were 
obliged  to  make. 

We  can  now  almost  keep  up  a con- 
versation in  Spanish. 

This  phrase  does  not  seem  to  us  logi- 
cally correct. 

We  should  be  ungrateful  if  we  al- 
lowed such  an  opportunity  to 
escape  without  expressing  our 
' liveliest  gratitude  to  you. 


In  all  cases,  at  all  events. 

The  native. 

The  insurmountable  difficulty 


preguntas  algo  riditw.as  ; pero 
llenos  de  confianza  en  el  m^todc 
de  V.,  (vuestro  metodo,)  las  res- 
pondimos  tan  bien  como  nos  lo 
permiti6  el  corto  niimero  de  pala- 
bras  y reglas  que  entOnccs  po»e.‘a- 
mos,  (sabiamos.) 

No  tardamos  mucho  en  hallar  quc 
aquellas  preguntas  estaban  c^dcii- 
ladas  para  inculcarnos  las  regI:iF, 
y ejercitarnos  en  la  conversacion, 
por  (medio  de)  las  respuestas  coii- 
tradictorias,  que  estdbamos  cjliga- 
dos  d hacer. 

A1  presente  podemos  mantener  c asl 
toda  una  conversacion  en  es 
panol. 

Esta  frase  no  nos  parece  Idgicamentc 
correcta. 

Nosotros  seriamos  unos  ingratos  si 
dejaramos  escapar  una  tal  oportu* 
nidad  de  manifestar  d V.  (mani- 
festaros)  nuestro  mas  vivo  recouoci- 
miento. 

En  todo  caso. 

En  todo  evento,  (suceso.) 

En  todas  ocasiones. 

t Suceda  lo  que  succda. 

El  nalivo.  El  natural. 

t EL  originario  de,  El  hijo  (tt 

La  dificultad  insuperable. 


EXERCISES. 

243. 

Will  you  drink  a cup  of  coffee  ? — I thank  you,  I do  not  like  coftee. 
— Then  you  will  drink  a glass  of  wine  ? — I have  just  drunk  some.—- 
Let  us  take  a walk. — Willingly,  (con  mucho  gusto ;)  but  where  shall 
we  go  to  ? — Come  with  me  into  my  aunt’s  garden  ; we  shall  there  find 
very  agreeable  society. — I believe  it ; but  the  question  is  (eZ  caso  es) 
whether  this  agreeaole  society  will  admit  me. — You  are  welcome 
everywhere. — What  ails  you,  my  friend  ? How  do  you  like  that  wine  ? 
— 1 like  it  very  well,  (muy  bien ;)  but  I have  drunk  enough  of  it.— 
Drink  once  more,  {ptra  copita.) — No,  too  much  is  unwholesome ; 1 
know  my  constitution. — Do  not  fall.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?— 


KIGHTY-SECCKD  LESSON. 


377 


cl  j not  know ; but  my  head  is  giddy,  (estoy  aturdido ;)  I tiiink  I am 
ihinling,  (pienso  que  me  desmayo.) — I think  so  also,  for  you  look 
almost  like  a dead  person,  (un  cadaver.) — What  countryman  are  you  1 
— I am  an  American. — You  speak  Spanish  {espailoL)  so  well  that  I 
took  you  for  a Spaniard  by  birth. — You  are  jesting. — Pardon  me ; I do 
not  jest  at  all.  How  long  have  you  been  in  Spain,  (Espaiia?) — A 
few  days. — In  earnest  ? — You  doubt  it,  perhaps,  because  I speak 
Spanish ; I knew  it  before  I came  to  Spain. — How  did  you  learn  it 
go  well  ? — I did  like  the  prudent  starling. 

Tell  me,  why  are  you  always  on  bad  terms  {en  discordia)  with  you? 
wdfe  ? and  why  do  you  engage  in  unprofitable  trades,  (meterse  en  nego 
cios  inutiles  ?)  It  costs  so  much  trouble  (cuesta  tanto)  to  get  {Lener) 
a situation  ; and  you  have  a good  one  and  neglect  it.  Do  you  not 
think  of  the  future  ? — Now  allow  me  to  speak  also,  (a  mi  turno.) — 
All  you  have  just  said  seems  reasonable  ; but  it  is  not  my  fault,  if  I 
have  lost  my  reputation ; it  is  that  of  my  wife : she  has  sold  my  finesi 
clothes,  my  rings,  (anillos,)  and  my  gold  watch.  I am  full  of 
(cargado)  debts,  and  I do  not  know  what  to  do. — I will  not  excuse 
your  wife ; but  I know  that  you  have  also  contributed  to  your  ruin, 
{la  ruina.)  Women  are  generally  good  when  they  are  left  so, 
{cuando  se  dejan  ser  tales.) 

244. 

Dialogue. 

The  Master. — If  I were  now  to  ask  Qiacer)  you  such  (algunas  pr& 
guntas)  questions  as  I did  in  the  beginning  of  our  lessons,  viz.  {poi 
^emplo :)  Have  you  the  hat  which  my  brother  has  ? am  I hungry  ? 
has  he  the  tree  of  my  brother’s  garden  ? &c.  What  would  you 
answer  ? 

The  Pupils. — We  are  obliged  {estar  obligado)  to  confess  that  we 
found  these  questions  at  first  rather  {algo)  ridiculous  ; but  full  of  con- 
fidence in  your  method,  we  answered  as  well  as  the  small  quantity  of 
words  and  rules  we  then  possessed  allowed  us.  We  were,  in  fact, 
{pero^)  not  long  (to  be  not  long,  no  tardar  mucho)  in  finding  out  that 
these  questions  were  calculated  to  ground  us  in  the  rules,  and  to  exer- 
cise us  in  conversation,  by  the  contradictory  answers  we  were  obliged 
to  make.  But  now  that  we  can  almost  keep  up  a conversation  in  tne 
beautiful  language  which  you  teach  us,  we  should  answer:  It  is  im- 
possible that  we  should  have  the  same  hat  which  your  brother  lias,  for 
two  persons  cannot  have  one  and  the  same  thing.  To  tlie  second 
question  we  should  answer,  that  it  is  impossible  for  us  to  know 
whether  you  are  hungry  or  no*;.  As  to  the  last,  we  should  say : that 
ihere  is  more  than  one  tree  in  a garden ; and  in  asking  us  whether  he 


378 


EIGHTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


nas  the  tree  of  the  garden,  the  phrase  does  not  seem  to  us  logicallj 
correct.  _At  all  events  we  should  be  ungrateful  (ingrato)  if  we 
allowed  such  an  opportunity  to  escape,  without  expressing  (expresar) 
our  liveliest  gratitude  to  you  for  the  trouble  you  have  taken.  In  ar- 
ranging (por  e arreglo)  those  wise  combinations,  (combinacicn,)  you 
have  succeeded  in  grounding  us  almost  imperceptibly  {imperceptible'^ 
mente)  in  the  rules,  and  exercising  us  in  the  conversation,  of  a lan- 
guage which,  taught  in  any  other  way,  presents  to  foreigners,  and  even 
to  natives,  almost  insurmountable  difficulties,  {insuperables,) 


EIGHTY-THIRD  LESSON.- 
To  lack,  {to  be  wanting.)  | 

It  lacks  a quarter. 

It  lacks  a half. 

How  much  does  it  want  ? 

It  does  not  want  much. 

It  wants  but  a trifle 

It  lacks  but  an  inch  of  my  being  as 
tall  as  you. 

It  lacked  a great  deal  of  my  being 
as  rich  as  you. 

The  half. 

The  third  part. 

The  fourth  part. 

You  think  you  have  returned  me  all ; 
a great  deal  is  wanting. 

Tie  younger  is  not  so  good  as  the 
elder  by  far. 

In  a foolish  manner,  at  random. 

He  talks  at  random  like  a ci*azy 

man. 

jssort  to  violence. 

A fact, 
is  a fact. 


-Leccion  Octogesima  tercera. 
Faltar,  Necesitarse. 

Le  falta  un  cuarto,  (un  cuarteron ) 
Le  falta  una  cuarta  parte. 

Le  falta  una  (la)  mitad. 

I Cuaiito  le  falta? 

No  le  falta  mucho. 
t Solo  le  falta  un  poquito,  {una  ba~ 
gatela.) 

Solo  me  falta  una  pulgada,  para  ser 
tan  alto  como  V. 

t Por  una  pulgada  no  soy  tan  alto 
como  V 

Faltaba  mucho  para  que  yo  fuese 
tan  rico  como  V. 

La  mitad. 

( La  tercia  (tercera)  parte,  (fern.) 

El  ter  do,  (mas.) 

La  cuarta  parte.  Un  cuarto. 

V.  piensa  que  me  lo  ha  devuelto  todo ; 
pero  falta  muchisimo. 

' El  menor  no  es  con  mucho  tan  bueno 
como  el  mayor. 

Mucho  le  falta  al  menor,  para  ser 
. tan  bueno  como  el  mayo^ 
t A trochemoche. 

\ A diestro  y d siniesti'o 
t El  habla  d tontas  y d locas  corns 
un  hombre  sin  juicio. 

Venir  d las  manos. 

Un  hecho. 

Es  un  hecha 


EIGHTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


379 


EUe*  Or  else. 


O.  De  otra  suerie.  De  otro  mode 
De  otra  mancra.  Si  no. 


To  make  fun  of. 

To  contradict,  to  give  one  the  he. 

Should  he  say  so,  I would  give  him 
tho  lie 

His  actions  belie  his  words. 

To  scratch 


C Burlarse  de.  Chancearse  con. 

^ Reirse  de.  Hacer  burla. 

( Hacer  chacota  de. 

De(?menlir  *. 

Decirle  d uno  que  miente. 

Dar  uiia  desmentida.  Contradecir  * 
Si  el  dijera  eso,  yo  le  desmentiria. 

Sus  acciones  contradicen  (desmieii' 
ten)  sus  palabras. 

Arahar.  Ras^uhar 


To  escape. 

fell  from  the  top  of  the  tree  to  the 
bottom,  but  I did  not  hurt  myself 
much. 

[ escaped  with  a scratch. 

The  thief  has  been  taken,  but  he  will 
escape  with  a few  months’  impris- 
onment. 


Escapar.  Escaparse. 

t Quedar  lihre.  t Salir  Uhre. 

Yo  cai  de  la  cima  del  drbol  hasta  el 
pie,  pero  no  me  lastime  mucho. 

Escape  con  un  arano,  (rasguno.) 

El  ladron  fud  tornado,  pero  saldra 
libre  (escapard)  con  algunos  meses 
de  prisioii. 


By  dint  of. 

By  dint  of  labor. 

By  too  much  weeping. 

you  will  cry  your  eyes  out. 

I obtained  of  him  tJiat  favor  by  dint 
of  entreaty. 


Afuerza  de 
t A fuerza  de  trabajo. 
t A fuerza  de  lagrimas,  {de  llorar.) 
t A fuerza  de  llorar,  perderd  V.  los 
ojos. 

Se  le  secardn  a V.  los  ojos. 
t Consegui  de  dl  ese  favor  d fuerza 
de  siiplicas. 


That  excepted. 


1 


That  fault  excepted,  he  is  a gci»d 
man. 


To  vie  with  each  otner 


t Excepto  {salvOf  menos)  eso 
t Amen  de^  (little  used.) 
t Quitada  esa  falta,  es  uii  buen 
hombre. 

t A competencia.  A porfia, 
t A cual  mas.  A cual  mejor. 


Hiose  men  are  trying  to  rival  each 
other 


t Esos  hombres  tiabajan  d compe- 
tencia. 

Estan  procurando  excederse  uno  i 
otro. 


580 


ElJHTr-THIRD  LESSON. 


Clean. 

Clean  linen. 

The  more as. 

The  less as. 

I am  the  more  discontented  witli  his 
conduct  as  he  is  under  many  ob- 
ligations to  me. 

I am  the  less  pleased  with  his  con- 
duct, as  I had  more  right  to  his 
friendship 


1 wish  that 

I wish  that  house  was  mine 


Limpio. 

Ropa  limp'a,  (b!anca; 

Tanto  mas ciianto. 

Tan  to  mas cuanto  mas 

Tanto  menos cuanto. 

Tanto  menos cuanto  mentis  flj 

mas. 

Yo  estoy  tanto  mas  descent ento  d* 
su  conducta,  cuanto  el  me  dobc 
muchas  obligaciones. 

Yo  estoy  tanto  menos  satisfecho  de 
su  conducta,  cuanto  mas  dcrocho 
tenia  yo  d su  annstad. 


Yo  quiero  (deseo)  que. 

Yo  querria  (quisiera)  que  esa  casa 
fuese  mia. 

Yo  deseara  (desearia)  que  esa  casa 
fuese  mia. 


To  muse,  to  think. 

I thought  a long  time  on  that  affair. 


Meditar,  rejlexionar,  pensar — {en.) 
Yo  reflexione  largo  tiempo  en  este 
negocio. 


To  be  naked. 


To  have  the  head  uncovered. 


To  have  the  feet  uncovered. 


S Estar  desnudo,  (desnuda.) 

\ t Estar  {andar)  en  cueros. 

C Tener  la  cabeza  desnuda. 

< t Estar  descuhierto. 

\ t Tener  la  cabeza  al  atre. 
f Tener  los  pies  desnudos. 

J t Estar  descalzo. 

1 Estar  {andar)  descalzo  de  pie  y 
t pierna. 


Ohs.  A.  When  the  verb  haher  is  used,  no  preposition  is  required  ; but 
mih  the  verbs  estar  and  andar  the  prepositions  de  or  con  must  be  employed 
srhen  the  substaniives  are  expressed,  as  in  the  following  examples : — 


To  be  barefooted. 


' Tener  los  pies  desnudos. 

t Estar  {andar)  descalzo. 

< Estar  (andar)  con  los  pids  desnudos 
(descalzos.) 

^ Estar  (andar^  desnudo  de  pi6s. 


EIGHTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


381 


C Tener  la  cabeza  desnuda,  ^descubier 
To  be  baieheaded  < ta.) 

i Estar  (andar)  con  la  cabeza  al  airo 
To  ride  barebacked  j t Montar  (andar)  ^ caballo  en  pelo. 


Vo  have  likcy  or  to  think  to  have. 

( had  like  to  have  lost  my  money, 
f thought  to  have  lost  my  life. 
tVo  had  like  to  have  lost  our  fingers, 
tie  was  very  near  falling 

He  \\  as  within  a hair’s  oreadth  of 
being  killed. 

He  had  liked  to  have  died. 


C Estar  para. 

/ Estar  a pique  de,  {a  punto  de.) 

\ Faltar  poco  para,  t Per  poco. 
Estuve  para  perder  mi  dinero. 

Pense  haber  perdido  la  videu 
For  poco  perdimos  los  dedos. 

Estuvo  d pique  de  caer. 

C For  poco  le  matan. 

^ t Estuvo  en  un  tris  que  le  mataran 
( Falto  casi  nada  para  ser  muerto. 

C Estuvo  para  morir,  (or  ^ punto  de 
< muerte.) 

( Pens6  morii. 


C A los  (sus)  talones. 

At,  on,  or  upon  your  heels.  < Al  alcance,  (or  d,  los  alcances.) 

V En  seguimiento. 

The  enemy  is  at  our  heels.  | El  enemigo  nos  sigue  los  alcances. 


To  strike,  (speaking  of  lightning.) 

The  lightning  has  struck. 

The  lightning  struck  the  ship. 

While  my  brother  was  on  the  open 
sea,  a violent  storm  rose  unex- 
pectedly ; the  lightning  struck  the 
ship,  which  it  set  on  fire,  and  the 
whole  crew  jumped  into  the  sea  to 
save  themselves  by  swimming. 

lie  was  struck  with  fright,  when  he 
saw  that  the  fire  was  gaining  on 
nil  sides. 

fie  did  not  know  what  to  do 

lie  hesitated  no  longer. 

I have  not  heard  of  him  yet 

An  angel. 

A masterpiece. 

Masterpieces. 


Caer  (estallar,  dar,  romper)  sobre,  or 
en. 

Ha  caido  un  rayo. 

Un  rayo  cay 6 sobre  (en)  el  barco. 

Mientreis  mi  hermano  estaba  en  alta 
mar,  se  levantd  de  repente  una 
tempestad,  cay6  un  rayo  sobre  el 
barco,  le  puso  fuego,  y toda  la 
tripulacion  se  echb  al  mar,  para 
salvarse  d nauo,  (nadando.) 

El  qued6  amedrentado,  cuando  vio 
que  el  fuego  se  extendia  por  todas 
partes. 

.fil  no  sabia  que  hacer,  (or  que  par 
tido  tomar.) 

£l  no  vacil6  mucho  tiempo. 

Todavia  no  he  sabido  de  6\, 

Un  dngel. 

Una  obra  maestra. 

Una  obra  de  prim  era  ;Iase. 

1 Obras  maestras 


S82 


EIGHTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


Ohs.  B.  Words  compounded  of  prepositions  and  nouns,  aio  generally 
translated  by  single  words.  Example : — 

Four-o’clocks,  (flowers.)  | Maravillas 


His  cr  her  physiognomy. 

Ills  or  her  shape. 

The  expression. 

The  look. 

Contentment. 

Respect. 

Admiration. 

Grace,  charm. 

Delightfully. 

Fascinating. 

Thin,  (slender.) 

Uncommonly  well. 

His  or  her  look  inspires  respect  and 
admiration. 


Su  fisonomfa  de  dl,  or  de  ella. 

Su  talle,  figura  (or  forma)  de  dl,  ® 
de  ella. 

La  expresion. 

C El  aspecto.  El  semblante. 

< El  aire.  El  ademan. 

( La  cara.  La  mirada.  La  vistiu 
Contento.  Coutenlamiento 
Gusto.  Placer. 

Respeto.  Respecto. 

Miramiento.  Acatamiento. 

I Admiracion. 

Gracia.  Gracias.  Eiicanto 
Atractivo.  Donaire 
I Deliciosamente. 

Hechiceramente. 

Encantadoramente. 

Delgado.  Flaco.  Descaniado 
Extraordinariamente  bien. 

Su  presencia  iuspira  respeto  y ad 
miracion. 


EXERCISE. 

245. 

Will  you  be  my  guest,  {comer  conmigo : tomar  la  sopa  conmigo , 

hacer  penitencia  conmigo  ?) — I thank  you  ; a friend  of  mine  has  inviied 
me  to  dinner : he  has  ordered  (hacer  preparar)  my  favorite  dish, 
(un  plato  favorito.) — What  is  it  ? — It  is  a dish  of  milk,  (laciicinio.) — 
As  for  me,  I do  not  like  milk-meat : there  is  nothing  like  (no  hay  nada 
como)  a good  piece  of  roast  beef  or  veal. — What  has  become  of  youi 
younger  brother  ? — He  has  suffered  shipwreck  (naufragar)  in  going  to 
America. — You  must  give  me  an  account  ')f  that,  (dar  una  relacicn.)-^ 
Very  willingly,  (de  muy  buena  gana.) — Being  on  the  open  sea,  a great 
storm  arose.  The  lightning  struck  the  ship  and  set  it  on  fire.  The 
crew  jumped  into  the  sea  to  save  themselves  by  swimming.  My 
brother  knew  not  what  to  do,  having  never  learned  to  swim.  He 
reflected  in  vain  ; he  found  no  means  to  save  his  life.  He  was  struck 
with  fright  when  he  saw  that  the  fire  was  gaining  on  all  sides.  He 
hesitated  no  longer,  and  jumped  into  the  sea. — Well,  (pues  lien,)  whal 
has  become  of  him  ? — I do  not  know,  having  not  heard  of  him  yet.— 


KIGHTr-FOURTH  LESSON. 


383 


But  who  told  you  all  that  ? — My  nephew,  who  was  there,  and  who 
saved  hiirself. — As  you  are  talking  of  your  nephew,  (d  proposito  de — ,) 
where  is  he  at  present  ? — He  is  in  Italy. — Is  it  long  since  you  heard 
ot  him  ? — I have  received  a letter  from  him  to-day. — What  d<3es  he 
write  to  you  ? — He  writes  to  me  that  he  is  going  to  marry  a young 
woman  who  brings  him  {qiie  le  trae)  a hundred  thousand  dollars. — Is 
she  handsome  ? — Handsome  as  an  angel ; she  is  a master-piece  of 
nature.  Her  physiognomy  is  mild  and  full  of  expression ; her  eyes 
are  the  finest  in  the  (del)  world,  and  her  mouth  is  charming,  (y  su 
hoca  muy  linda.)  She  is  neither  too  tall  nor  too  short ; her  shape  is 
slender ; all  her  actions  are  full  of  grace,  and  her  manners  are  en- 
gaging. Her  look  inspires  respect  and  admiration.  She  has  also  a 
great  deal  of  wit ; she  speaks  several  languages,  dances  uncommonly 
well,  and  sings  delightfully.  My  nephew  finds  in  her  (lialla  en  ella) 
but  one  defect,  (un  defecto.) — And  what  is  that  defect  ? — She  is 
affected,  (afectada.) — There  is  nothing  perfect  in  the  world. — How 
happy  you  are  ! you  are  rich,  you  have  a good  wife  pretty  children,  a 
fine  house,  and  all  you  wish. — Not  all,  my  friend. — What  do  you  desire 
more  ? — Contentment ; for  you  know  that  he  only  is  hanov  who  is 
contented. 


EIGHT Y-FOURTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Octogesima  cuartn 


To  read  again. 

To  (v)  again. 

Obs.  A.  When  again  signifies  that 
the  Spaniards  use  the  verb  volver  d, 
the  action  of  which  is  to  be  repeated, 
When  will  you  read  this  book  again  ? 
I will  read  it  again  to-morrow. 


To  unriddle.  To  disentangle. 
To  find  out. 

To  disentangle  the  hai» 

To  unriddle  difficulties. 

I liave  not  been  able  to  find  out  the 
aense  of  that  phrase. 

A quarrel. 


I Volver  d leer. 

I Volver  d 

the  action  of  the  verb  is  to  be  repeated, 
in  its  different  tenses ; and  the  verb, 
in  the  infinitive. 

I I Cuando  volverd  V d leer  este  libro  ? 
I Yo  le  volvere  d leer  manana. 

C Desenredar.  Desenmaranar. 
Explicar. 

f Adivinar  Hallar. 

Desenmaranar  el  cabeJlo. 
Desenredar  (explicar,  aclarar)  las 
dificultades. 

Y ) no  he  podido  hallar  (eniender)  el 
sentido  de  esa  frase. 

tUna  desavenencia,  (diferencia,  rlSa 
quimera.) 

Uu  pleito. 

Una  contienda,  (disputa,  pendoncin.) 


884 


EIGUTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


To  have  differences  (a  quarrel)  with 
some  one. 


To  take  good  care 
To  shun.  To  beware 

I will  take  good  care  not  to  do  it 
Mind  you  not  to  lend  that  man 
money. 

He  takes  good  care  not  to  answer 
the  question  which  I asked  him. 
To  ask  a question. 

If  you  take  into  your  head  to  do  that, 
I will  punish  you. 


t Estar  de  cuerno,  {de  hocico  con 
alguno.) 

Teller  un  pleito  (una  contienda)  con 
alguien. 

Cuidar  de.  Cuidarse  de. 

Tener  cuidado  de. 

Guardarse  de.  Precaverse  de. 

Recatarse  de.  Evitar. 

Yo  me  guardare  bien  de  no  hacerlo. 

Cuidese  V.  de  no  prestar  dinero  d esc 
hombre 

6l  tiene  cuidado  de  no  responder  d 
la  pregunta  que  yo  le  he  hecho. 

Hacer  una  pregunta.  Preguntar 

Si  d V.  se  le  pone  en  la  cabeza  hacer 
eso,  yo  le  castigare. 


To  become.  To  jit  well. 

Obs.  B.  These  verbs  in  this  sense 
or  plural. 

Does  that  become  me  ? 

That  does  not  become  you. 

ft  does  not  become  you  to  do  that. 
That  fits  you  wonderfully  well. 

Her  dress  does  not  become  her. 

It  does  not  become  you  to  reproach 
me  with  it. 


Sentar  bien.  Estar  bien. 

Caer  bien.  Ir  bien.  Venir  bien. 
are  used  only  in  the  third  person  singula: 

I I Me  sienta  eso  bien  ? 

No  le  sienta  d V. 

I No  le  cae  bien  d V. 

No  le  estd  bien  d V.  hacer  eso. 

Eso  le  va  d V.  (le  sienta  d V.)  per- 
fectamente. 

Su  tocado  no  le  sentaba,  (iba  bien.) 
Estd  bien  en  V.  el  afedrmelo ! (frd- 
nicamente.) 


To  follow  from  it. 

It  follows  from  it,  that  you  should 
not  do  that. 

How  is  it  that  you  have  come  so 
late? 

I do  not  know  how  it  is. 

How  is  it  that  he  had  not  his  gun  ? 

I do  not  know  how  it  happened. 


Seguirse.  Deducirse.  h»acarse. 
De  eso  se  sigue  que  V.  no  deberia 
hacerlo. 

I Porqud  es  que  V.  viene  tan  tardo  ? 
Yo  no  se  porqud. 

I Como  sucedio  que  el  no  tuviern  so 
escopeta  ? 

Yo  no  se  como  sucedin 


To  fast. 

To  be  fasting. 

To  give  notice  to. 

To  lot  anybody  kno  w 


I Ayunar. 

I Estar  en  ayunas. 

J Avisar.  Noticiar.  luformar. 

( Hacer  saber  d alguno,  (alguna  coiw. 


KIGHTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


385 


To  warn  some  one  of  something. 

Give  notice  to  that  man  of  his  bro- 
ther’s return.  « 


Precautelar.  Precauciouar. 

Advertir  de  antemaiio. 

Informe  (avise)  V.  d ese  hombre  dc 
la  vuelta  de  su  hermano,  {que  eu 
hermano  ha  vuelto.) 


To  clear.  To  elucidate. 

To  clear  up. 

l^e  weather  is  clearing  up. 

To  refresh. 

llefresh  yourself,  and  return  tc  me 
immediately. 

To  whiten.  To  bleach. 

^’o  blacken. 

To  turn  pale.  To  grow  pale. 

To  grow  old. 

To  grow  young.  1 

To  blush.  To  redden.  < 


Aclarar.  Despejar.  Poner  cn  claro 

I El  tiempo  se  aclara. 

Reirescar.  Refrescarse. 

Descansar.  Reposar. 

Repose  V.,  (refresquese,)  y vuolva 
aqui  (d  verme)  inmediatamento. 
Blanquear.  Emblanquecer. 
Ennegrecer. 

Ponerse  palido. 

Perder  (mudar)  el  color. 

Envejecer.  Envejecerse. 
Avejentarse.  Aviejarse. 
Rejuvenecer.  Remozar. 
Abochornarse.  Correrse. 
Sonrosearse.  Sonrojarse. 
t Tener  verguenza,  (rubor») 


To  make  merry. 

To  make  one’s  self  merry. 

He  makes  merry  at  my  expense. 

To  feign.  To  dissemble. 
To  pretend. 

I feign,  thou  feignest,  he  feigns. 

He  knows  the  art  of  dissembling. 

To  procrastinate. 

To  go  slow  about. 

I do  not  like  to  transact  business  with 
that  man,  for  he  always  goes  very 
slow  about  it 


^ Alegrar  d.  Alegrarse  de. 

( Divertir  d.  Divertirse  d,  (con.) 

J Alegrarse.  Divertirse. 

( Ponerse  (estar)  alegre. 

1 El  se  divierte  d mi  costa. 

^ Fingir.  Aparentar. 

\ Disimular.  Encubrir. 

Yo  finjo.  Til  finjes.  6l  (V.)  finje. 
6l  sabe  (conoce)  el  arte  de  fingu*, 
(disimular.) 

{ Diferir.  Dilatar. 

\ Dejar  de  un  dia  para  otro. 
t No  me  gusta  tener  negocics  oon 
ese  hombre,  porque  siempre  Ics 
despacha  con  pies  de  plomo. 


A proof.  I Una  prueba. 

Tills  is  a proof.  | Esta  es  una  prueba. 

To  strayy  to  get  lost,  to  lose  one^s 
s^lf,  to  los-i  one*8  way. 

ir 


r Descaminarse.  Descamarse. 

Extraviarse.  Perderse. 
f Perder  el  camino.  - 


386 


EIGHTY  FOURTH  LESSON. 


Through. 

riie  cannon  ball  went  throuffli  the 
wall. 

! 2 an  him  through  the  body 


' Par,  De  medio  a mtdh 
De  parte  d parte. 

De  un  lado  d otro.  De  travel 
At  traves.  For  medio. 

< Por  en  medio.  Por  enire, 

I La  bala  del  canon  pas6  de  un  lado 
I a otro  de  la  mural  la,  {traspaso 

SLe  atravesd  el  cuerpo  con  mi  espada 
t Yo  le  eiwase  mi  espada  en  el  cuerpn. 


EXERCISES. 

246. 

The  Emperor  Charles  the  Fifth  (^Carlos  Quinto)  bei^ig  me  day  cun 
a-hunting  lost  his  way  in  the  forest,  and  having  come  to  a house 
entered  it  to  refresh  himself.  There  were  in  it  four  men,  who  pro* 
tended  to  sleep.  One  of  them  rose,  and  approaching  the  Emperoi 
told  him  he  had  dreamed  he  should  take  his  watch,  and  took  it.  Then 
another  rose  and  said  he  had  dreamed  that  his  surtout  (sobretodo)  fitted 
him  wonderfully,  and  took  it.  The  third  took  his  purse.  At  last  the 
fourth  came  up,  and  said  he  hoped  he  would  not  take  it  ill  if  he 
searched  him,  and  in  doing  it  perceived  around  the  emperor’s  neck  a 
small  gold  chain  to  which  a whistle  was  attached,  which  he  wished  to 
rob  him  of.  But  the  emperor  said  : “ My  good  friend,  before  depriving 
me  (privar  d und)  of  this  trinket,  (alhaja,)  I must  teach  you  its  vir- 
tue.” Saying  this,  he  whistled.  His  attendants,  who  were  seeking 
him,  hastened  to  the  house,  and  were  thunderstruck  {queddron  pasma- 
dos)  to  behold  his  majesty  in  such  a state.  But  the  emperor  seeing 
himself  out  of  danger,  {fuera  de  peligro,)  said  : “ These  men  (aqut 
ieneis  unos  hombres  que)  have  dreamed  all  that  they  liked.  1 wish  in 
my  turn  also  to  dream.”  And  after  having  mused  a few  seconds,  he 
said : “ I have  dreamed  that  you  all  four  deserve  to  be  hanged 
which  was  no  sooner  spoken  than  executed  before  the  house. 

A certain  king  making  one  day  his  entrance  into  a town  at  two 
3’clock  in  the  afternoon,  (de  la  larde,)  the  senate  sent  some  deputies 
(un  diputado)  to  compliment  him.  The  one  who  was  to  speak  Qiabia 
de  hablar)  began  thus  : “ Alexander  the  Great,  the  great  Alexander,"' 
find  stopped  short,  (se  corto.) — The  king,  who  v/as  very  hungry,  (tenia 
hambre,)  said : “ Ah ! my  friend.  Alexander  the  Great  had  dined,  and 
I am  still  fasting,  (estar  en  ayunasJ^)  Having  said  this,  he  proceeded 
o (siguio  su  camino)  the  City  Hall,  or  State  House,  (d  la  casa  co^ 
nstorial,)  where  a magnificent  dinner  had  been  prepared  for  him. 


EIGHTY-FIFTU  LESSEN. 


887 


247. 

A good  old  man,  being  very  ill,  sent  tor  his  wife,  who  was  still  verj 
f oung,  and  said  to  her : “ My  dear,  you  see  that  my  last  hour  is  ap- 
proaching, and  that  I am  compelled  to  leave  you.  If,  therefore,  you 
wish  me  to  die  in  peace  you  must  do  me  a favor.  You  are  still  young, 
%nd  will,  without  doubt,  marry  again,  (se  volcerd  d casar :)  knowing  this, 
I request  of  you  not  to  wed  (no  se  case  con)  M.  Louis ; for  I confesg 
tliat  1 have  always  been  very  jealous  of  him,  and  am  so  still.  I shouldj 
therefore,  die  in  despair  (desesperado)  if  you  did  not  promise  me  that.” 
The  wife  answered : “ My  dear  husband,  (alma  mia^  I entreat  you, 
let  not  this  hinder  you  from  dying  peaceably ; for  I assure  you  that, 
if  even  I wished  to  wed  him  I could  not  do  so,  being  already  promised 
to  another.” 

It  was  customary  with  Frederick  the  Great,  whenever  a new  soldier 
appeared  in  his  guards,  to  ask  him  three  questions  ; viz. : “ How  old 
are  you  ? How  long  have  you  been  in  my  service  ? Are  you  satis- 
fied with  your  pay  and  treatment  ?”  It  happened  that  a young  soldier, 
born  in  France,  who  had  served  in  his  own  country,  desired  to  enlist 
in  the  Prussian  service.  His  figure  caused  him  to  be  immediately 
accepted  ; but  he  was  totally  ignorant  of  the  German  dialect ; and  h:s 
captain  giving  him  notice  that  the  king  would  question  him  in  that 
tongue  the  first  time  he  should  see  him,  cautioned  him  at  the  same 
time  to  learn  by  heart  the  three  answers  that  he  was  to  make  to  the 
king.  Accordingly  he  learned  them  by  the  next  day ; and  as  soon  as 
he  appeared  in  the  ranks  Frederick  came  up  to  interrogate  him  : but 
he  happened  to  begin  upon  him  by  the  second  question,  and  asked  him, 
“ How  long  have  you  been  in  my  service  ?”  “ Twenty-one  years,’ 

answered  the  soldier.  The  king,  struck  with  his  youth,  which  plainly 
indicated  that  he  had  not  borne  a musket  so  long  as  that,  said  to  him, 
much  astonished,  “ How  old  are  you  ?”  “ One  year,  an’t  please  youi 

majesty,  (con  permiso  de  Vuestra  Majestad.^')  Frederick,  more  as- 
tonished still,  cried,  “ You  or  I must  certainly  be  bereft  of  our  senses.” 
The  soldier,  who  took  this  for  the  third  question,  replied  firmly,  (ci?:! 
ienuedo^  “ Both,  an’t  please  your  majesty.” 


EIGHTY-FIFTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Octogesima  quinta. 


To  doublt 


Dollar.  Pedir  dohle,  (el  dohle) 
Duplicar, 

El  diiplo.  El  doble. 

Dos  veces  mas.  Otro  taiito  mas 


The  double. 


B88 


EIGHTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


That  merchant  asks  twice  eis  much 
as  Le  ought. 

iTou  Must  bargain  with  him;  he 
will  g'ivo  it  you  for  the  half. 

You  have  twice  your  share. 

You  hi/e  three  times  your  sliaie. 


Ese  comerciante  pide  dos  veces  mas 
de  lo  que  debe. 

Es  menester  que  V.  se  ajusto  con 
el  ; porque  61  se  lo  dard  d V.  per 
la  mitad. 

V.  tiene  dobie  parte  que  le  toca. 

V.  tiene  tres  veces  mas  de  lo  qne  le 
toca. 


To  renew. 

To  stun. 

Wild,  giddy. 

Open,  frank,  real. 

I told  him  yes. 

I told  him  no. 

To  squeeze. 

To  lay  up,  to  put  hy. 

Put  your  money  by. 

A.S  soon  as  I have  read  my  book, 
put  it  by. 

I do  not  care  much  about  going 
the  play  to-night. 


Renovar  *. 

Aturdir.  Atolondrar.  Aiontar 
AtroiTado.  Alocado 
Desatinado.  Atolondrado. 

Franco.  iLgenuo  Sincere 
Verdadero.  Real. 

Yo  le  dije  si,  (que  si  ) 

Yo  le  dije  no,  (que  no.', 

Apretar 

^ Juntar.  Cerrar. 

( Apretar.  Guardar. 

Guardo  V.  su  dinero. 

Luego  que  yo  hube  leido  mi  libro 
le  guarde,  (le  cerre,  le  puse  d ub 
lado.) 

No  me  da  cuidado  ir,  6 no,  a la  como- 
dia  esta  noche. 

Saciar.  Hartar. 

Llenar.  Satisfacer. 

Yo  he  estado  comiendo  una  hora,  y 
no  puedo  saciar  mi  hambre. 

Estar  satisfechOf  {harto,  saciado^ 
lleno.) 

Refrescarse,  Refrigerarse, 
Apagar  la  sed 

Hace  media  hora  que  estoy  bebiendo^ 
y no  puedo  apagar  mi  sed. 

Haber  apagado  la  sed. 

Haberse  refrescado. 

Tener  sed.  Estar  sediento. 

Ansiar.  Anhelar. 

Eba  es  un  hombre  sedi  nto  de  sangr< 
he  dmbas  partes. 

For  dmbos  iados.  For  todos  ladoa. 

1 For  todos  Iados.  For  todas  partea 


I 

to 


To  satisfy  one^s  self  with  a thing. 

I have  been  eating  an  hour,  and  I 
cannot  satisfy  my  hunger 
To  he  satisfied. 

To  quench  one^s  thirst. 

[ have  been  drinking  this  half  hour, 
but  I cannot  quench  my  thirst. 

To  have  one’s  thirst  quenched. 

Tq  thirst  for,  to  be  thirsty,  or  dry 
tliat  is  a bloodthirsty  fellow.  [ 

On  both  sides,  cii  every  side. 

On  all  sides. 


. EIGHTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


38a 


A.II0W  lire,  my  lady,  to  introduce  to 
you  Mr.  G.,  an  old  friend  of  our 
family. 

I am  delighted  to  become  acquainted 
with  you. 

I shall  do  all  in  my  power  to  deserve 
your  good  opinion. 

Lndies,  allow  me  to  introduce  to  you 
Mr.  B.,  whose  brother  has  rendered 
such  eminent  services  to  your 
cousin. 

VVe  are  very  nappy  to  see  you  at  our 
house. 


Sehora , permitame  V.  que  le  presente 
el  Senor  G.,  antiguo  amigo  de 
nuestra  famiiia.^ 

Tengo  mucho  gusto  en  hacer  el 
conocirniento  de  V. 

Yo  hare  cuanto  este  de  mi  parte 
pare  merecer  la  buena  opinion  do  V. 

Sehoras,  permitanme  VV.  que  lee 
presente  el  Seiior  B.,  cnyo  hei^ 
mano  ha  hecho  tan  importantee 
servicios  al  prime  de  VV. 

Nos  consideramos  muy  felices  en  ver 
d V en  nuestra  casa. 


It  is  the  prerogative  of  great  men  to 
conquer  envy  ; merit  gives  it  birth, 
and  merit  destroys  it. 


Es  prerogativa  de  los  grandes  hom- 
bres  conquistar  la  enviJia ; ei 
m6rito  la  hace  nacer,  y el  mdiito 
la  destroy e. 


EXERCISES. 

248. 

A man  (cierto)  had  two  sons,  one  of  whom  liked  to  sleep  very  late 
in  the  morning,  (a  pierna  suella^)  and  the  otlier  was  very  industrious, 
{aplicado  y trabajador^)  and  always  rose  very  early.  The  latter  having 
one  day  gone  out  very  early,  found  a purse  well  filled  with  money. 
He  ran  to  his  brother  to  inform  him  («  contarle)  of  his  good  luck,  (la 
buena  fortuna^  and  said  to  Iiim  : “ See,  Louis,  what  is  got  {ganarse) 
by  rising  early?” — “Faith,  {cierto answered  his  brother,  “if  the 
person  to  whom  it  belongs  had  not  risen  earlier  than  I,  (he)  would  not 
have  lost  it.” 

A lazy  young  fellow  being  asked,  {preguntado,)  what  made  him  lie 
(vorque  se  estaba)  in  bed  so  long  ? — “ I am  busied,  {estar  ocupadoy^)  says 
ne,  “ in  hearing  counsel  every  morning.  Industry  (el  trabajo)  advises 
me  to  get  up ; sloth  {la  pereza)  to  lie  still ; and  so  they  give  me  twenty 
reasons  pro  and  con,  {en  pro  y en  contra.)  It  is  my  part  {tenet  obliga^ 
cion  de)  to  hear  what  is  said  on  both  sides ; and  by  the  time  the  cause 
is  over  {acabarse)  dinner  is  ready.” 

It  was  a beautiful  turn  given  by  a great  lady,  who,  being  {se  cueTtta 
un  hermoso  rasgo — ) asked  where  her  husband  was,  when  he  lay  con* 
tealed  {estar  escondido)  for  having  been  deeply  concerned  in  a con- 
spiracy, (a  causa  de  haber  tornado  gran  parte  en  una  conspiracUm^ 
resolutely  {resueltamente)  answered,  she  had  hid  him.  This  confession 
{esla  confesi(m)  drew  her  before  the  king,  who  told  her,  nothing  but 


390 


EIGHTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


her  discovering  where  her  lord  was  concealed  could  save  her  from  the 
torture,  (que  si  no  descubria  donde  se  hallaba  su  senor  marido,  ncda 
vodria  librarla  de  la  tortura.)  “ And  will  that  do,  (bastar  ?”)  said  the 
lady.  “Yes,”  says  the  king,  “I  will  give  you  my  word  for  it.” 

“ Then,”  says  she,  “ I have  hid  liim  in  my  heart,  where  you  will  find 
him.”  Wliich  surprising  answer  (esta  admirable  repuesta)  charmed 
her  enemies. 

249. 

Cornelia,  the  illustrious  (^ilustre)  mother  of  the  Gracchi,  {de  los 
Gracos,)  after  the  death  of  her  husband,  who  left  her  with  twelve 
children,  applied  herself  to  (dedicarse  «)  the  care  of  her  family,  with  a ! 
wisdom  {una  discrecion)  and  prudence  that  acquired  for  (adquirir*) 
her  universal  esteem,  (estimacion  universal.)  Only  three  out  of  the 
twelve  lived  to  years  of  maturity,  {edad  madura ;)  one  daughter,  Sem- 
pronia,  whom  she  married  to  the  second  Scipio  Africanus ; and  two 
sons,  Tiberius  and  Caius,  whom  she  brought  up  (crio)  with  so  much 
care,  that,  though  they  were  generally  acknowledged  (confesar 
generalmente)  to  have  been  born  with  the  most  happy  dispositions, 
{la  disposicion^)  it  was  judged  that  they  were  still  more  indebted 
{deber)  to  education  than  nature.  The  answer  she  gave  {dar*)  a 
Campanian  lady  (una  dama  de  Campania)  concerning  them  (con 
respecto  d ellos)  is  very  famous,  (famoso — sa,)  and  includes  in  h 
(contener*)  great  instruction  for  ladies  and  mothers. 

That  lady,  who  was  very  rich,  and  fond  of  pomp  and  show, 
(apasionado  d la  pompa  y d la  ostentacion,)  having  displayed  (mostrar) 
her  diamonds,  (el  diamante^  pearls,  (la  perla^)  and  richest  jewels,  ; 
earnestly  desired  (suplicar  con  ahinco)  Cornelia  to  let  her  see  her  i 
jewels  also.  Cornelia  dexterously  (diestramenle)  turned  the  conversa-  ' 
tion  to  another  subject  to  wait  the  return  of  her  sons,  who  were  gone 
to  the  public  schools.  When  they  returned,  and  entered  their  mother’s 
apartment,  she  said  to  the  Campanian  lady,  pointing  to  them,  (mostrar :) 

“ These  are  my  jewels,  and  the  only  ornaments  (adornos)  I prize, 
(apreciar.^')  And  such  ornaments,  (unos  ornamentos,)  which  are  the  i 
strength  (la  fuerza)  and  support  (el  sosten)  of  society,  add  a brightc! 
lustre  (mayor  lustre)  to  the  fair  (la  hermosura)  than  all  the  jewels  of 
tlie  East,  (del  Oriente.) 


EIGHTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


391 


EIGHTY-SIXTH  LESSON. — Leccion  Octogesima  sexUu 
' SOME  IDIOMATICAL  EXPRESSIONS. 


lu 

To 

To 
Tc 

To 
To 

To  meet  with  one’s  match. 

To  go  to  bed  betimes. 

To  catch  at  a fly. 

To  stop  at  a trifle  ; or  to  bo  afflicted 
with  a light  cause. 

To  dismay  one’s  spirit  in  the  perform- 
ance, or  pursuit  of  any  thing. 

To  inure,  or  accustom  one’s  self  to 
execute  or  perform  any  thing. 

To  be  siiot  as  a criminal. 

To  bury,  or  silence  an  affair. 

To  give  up  one’s  command. 

To  command  imperiously. 

To  treat  a person  contemptuously. 

To  be  wet  to  the  skin. 

To  defend  the  ground  inch  by  inch. 
To  obtain  a thing  without  pain  or 
labor. 

To  sustain  one’s  opinion  steadfastly. 
To  be  one’s  principal  support  and  aid. 
To  bribe. 

To  dive  into  other  people’s  affairs. 

To  meddle  witn  things  in  which  one 
has  no  concern. 

To  be  loaded  with  honorable  titles, 
riie  principal  town  of  a district. 

To  get  into  favor,  {to  please.) 

To  hit  upon  a thing,  {to  find  it  out.) 
To  have  an  unexpected  change  for 
the  better. 

To  go  on  better  and  better. 

To  turn  one  out  of  doors. 


Tener  gracia  para  todo. 

Dormir  profundamente. 

Dormir  como  una  piedra. 

Dormir  d pierna  suelta. 

Estar  para  perderse,  (or  arruinai  ac. 
Echar  tierra  en  los  ojos. 
Deslumbrar. 

Echar  rayos  y centellas. 

Echar  pestes. 

Hallar  la  horma  de  su  zapato. 
Acostarse  con  las  gallinas, 
Agarrarse  {asirse)  de  un  pelo, 
Ahogarse  en  poca  agua. 

Quehrar  {cortar)  las  alas.  - 

Hacerse  d las  armas. 

Pasar  por  las  armas. 

Echar  tierra  d alguna  cosa. 
Arrirnar  el  baston,  (or  el  mando.) 
Mandar  d baqueta^  (or  d la  baqueta.) 
Tratar  d baqueta,  (or  d la  baqueta.) 
Estar  mojado  hasta  los  huesos. 
Defender  el  terreno  palmo  d palmo. 
Conseguir  una  cosa  d pie  quedo,  {on 
enjuto.) 

Sostener  su  opinion  d pie  firmer 
Ser  sus  pies  y sus  manos. 

Untar  las  mams. 

C Meterse  en  vidas  agenas. 

^ Meterse  en  lo  que  {d  uno)  m le  va 
f ni  le  viene. 

Tener  muchas  campanulas. 

Cabeza  de  Partido. 

Caer  en  gracia. 

Caer  en  ello. 

Caersele  {d  uno)  la  sopa  en  la  mteU 

Poner  d uno  en  la  (or  echarU  d la] 
calle 


do  every  thing  gracefully. 

sleep  soundly. 

sleep  void  of  all  cares, 
bo  on  the  brink  of  ruin. 

cast  a mist  before  one’s  eyes, 
fret  and  fume. 


392 


EIGHTY-SIXTH  LESSOH. 


To  lose  one’s  livelihood. 

To  be  crest-fallen  or  dispirited. 

To  defend  a thing  with  ail  one’s 
might  or  force. 

Every  one  is  master  to  dispose  of  his 
own  property. 

To  go  abroad  without  a cloak  or 
surtout. 

To  waste  one’s  time  in  fruitless  pur- 
suits. 

To  go  stark  naked. 

To  be  roving  and  wandering  about. 
To  be  in  cross  purposes : to  deal  in 
tfs  and  ands. 

To  quarrel,  to  scuffle,  to  box. 

To  fight. 

To  go  groping  along,  or  in  the  dark. 
To  walk  on  all-fours. 

To  conform  to  the  times. 

To  go  a begging 
To  be  at  hide  and  seek. 

To  go  skulking. 

To  be  carried  from  post  to  pillar. 

To  go  with  a design  to  deceive  some- 
body. 

To  lead  an  abandoned  life. 

To  live  very  economically. 

By  her  gait  one  would  say  it  is 
Louisa. 

To  pull  down  the  courage  of  any 
person. 

To  humble  any  one. 

To  bow  down  the  head : to  obey 
without  objection  or  reply. 

To  be  ashamed. 

Ti  stop  one’s  mouth. 

7 J shut  one’s  mouth. 

To  offer  a thing  for  mere  ceremony’s 
sake. 

To  keep  a profound  silence. 

To  be  the  talk  of  the  town. 

Not  to  dare  to  say  no. 

To  talk  well  or  ill  of  others. 

To  blush  deeply  with  shame 


Quedar  en  la  calle. 

Andar  (or  ir)  de  capa  ciida. 
Defender  una  cosa  d capa  y eapada 

Cada  uno  puede  hacer  de  su  cape 
un  sayo. 

Andar  en  cuerpo, 

Andar  d caza  de  gangas, 

Andar  en  carnes,  (or  en  cueros., 
Andar  de  Ceca  en  Meca, 

I Andar  en  dimes  y dirctes. 

( Andar  en  dares  y tomares, 

Andar  d irornpis,  (or  d palos.) 

Andar  a degas,  (or  d tientas.) 
Andar  d galas. 

Andar  con  el  tiempo,  (or  al  uao.) 
Andar  d la  sopa. 

Andar  d somhra  de  tejado. 

Andar  de  H erodes  d Pilatos. 
Andar  con  segundas,  (or  con  mala 
intenciones.) 

Andar  en  malos  pasos. 

Andar  pie  con  hola. 

En  el  andar  se  parece  d Luisa 

Bajar  los  hrios  d alguno. 

Bajar  los  Jiumos  d alguno. 

Bajar  la  cabeza,  (or  las  orejas.) 

Bajar  los  ojos. 

Cerrar  (or  tapar)  d uno  la  hoca. 
Coserse  la  boca. 

Ofrecer  algo  con  la  boca  chica. 

No  decir  esta  hoca  es  mia, 

Andar  de  boca  en  boca. 

No  tener  boca  para  decir  no  (or 
negar.) 

Tener  buena  (or  mala)  hoca. 
Caersele  d uno  la  cara  dr  cer 
guenza. 


EIGHTY -SIXTH  LESSON. 


393 


To  chido  or  reprove  one  severely. 
Mum,  mum,  not  a word. 

To  obtain  one’s  ends  by  crafty  si- 
lence. 

To  act  out  of  reason. 

In  one’s  way,  going  along. 

To  come  off  victorious  in  an  engage- 
ment or  dispute. 

To  be  in  high  office  : to  be  in  an  ex- 
alted station. 

That  is  another  kind  of  speech. 

To  be  stranger  to  fear. 

Not  to  know  one’s  duty  or  business. 
Employment  of  much  profit,  and  lit- 
tle trouble 

Not  to  be  able  to  bring  one  to  reason. 
At  all  events. 

To  be,  or  not  to  be,  to  the  point. 
There  is  nothing  more  than  what 
you  see. 

Without  examination. 

To  cure  one  excess  with  another. 

To  hit  the  mark. 

To  chatter  or  prattle  a good  deal. 

To  make  a person  blush 

To  fall  into  an  error. 

To  give  cause  for  laughing. 

To  make  one  cry. 

To  clothe  one.  To  feed  one. 

To  give  trouble  : to  grieve. 

To  trust. 

To  encourage  an  undertaking. 

To  publish,  to  print,  to  bring  to 
light. 

To  give  a cause  to — 

To  furnish  materials. 

To  shut  the  door  upon  one. 

To  give  gratis  or  for  nothing. 

To  put  off  with  words  and  excuses. 
To  stretch.  To  consent. 

To  touch  one  to  the  quick. 

To  share  with : also^  to  inform, 
r©  give  security  : to  find  bail. 


Caleniarle  a alguno  las  oi  ejaa. 
Panto  en  hoca. 

Mdtalas  callando. 

Ir  fuera  de  camino. 

De  camino. 

Quedar  el  campo  par  uno. 

Estar  en  el  candelero 

Ese  es  otro  cantar. 

No  conocer  la  cara  al  miedo. 

No  saber  en  donde  se  tiene  la  careu 
Came  sin  hueso. 

No  poder  hacer  carrera  con  algunc 
En  todo  caso. 

Ser  (or  no  ser)  del  caso. 

No  hay  ?nas  cera  que  la  que  ardc. 

A ojos  c err  ados. 

Sacar  un  clavo  con  otro  clavo. 

Dar  en  el  clavo. 

Hablar  por  los  codos. 

Sacarle  los  colores  al  rostro,  (i 
una  persona.) 

Dar  de  ojos. 

Dor  que  reir. 

Dar  que  llorar. 

Dar  de  vestir.  Dar  de  comer. 

Dar  que  sentir. 

Dar  al  fiado,  (or  d cridito.) 

Dar  calor  {dnimo  or  alma)  a urte 
cmpresa. 

Dar  d la  cstampa.  Dar  dim 

Dar  asunto  para — 

Dar  barro  d la  mano. 

Dar  con  la  puerta  en  los  ojvs. 

Dar  dadoj  (or  de  balde.) 

Dar  con  la  entretenida. 

Dar  de  si.  Dar  el  si. 

Dar  en  lo  vivo. 

Dar  en  las  mataduras, 

Dar  parted 

Dar  Jianza.  Dar  fiador. 


394 


EIGHTY-SIXTH  LESSOR? . 


To  wage  war ; to  torment,  to  vex. 
To  wish  a good  day. 

To  congratulate  on  one’s  birthday. 
To  give  earnest;  that  is,  money  in 
token  of  a bargain  or  contract. 

To  nod,  calling  or  informing. 

To  despair. 

To  surrender.  I give  it  up. 

To  shake  hands. 

To  manage  one’s  affairs  in  an  able 
manner. 

To  set  sail. 

It  gives  me  no  concern. 

To  leave  a word,  or  orders. 

To  leave  in  writing. 

To  excel,  to  surpass. 

To  frustrate,  to  baffle. 

To  delay,  to  procrastinate. 

To  omit  something  necessary  to  the 
subject. 

To  get  the  start  of  any  person. 

To  take  the  lead. 

Make  yourself  easy. 

I understand  what  you  tell  me. 

To  be  security  ; to  answer  for  N. 

To  be  ready  to  set  out. 

To  be  on  the  alert. 

To  be  in  good  humor : to  be  ir  bad 
spirits. 

To  stand  a sentry. 

To  be  in  haste,  in  a hurry. 

To  interpose,  to  meaiaie. 

To  be  merr5\ 

To  have  a sound  unoersianding. 

To  be  idle. 

To  bo  very  siubborn. 

To  be  in  difticuities. 

To  bo  careful  of  every  thing 
To  be  at  hand. 

To  be  kept  in  constraint. 

To  DO  ready  to  fall 

To  be  at  the  point  of  death. 


Dar  que  Tiacer  Dar  gturi^i 
Dar  los  buenos  diaa. 

Darle  d uno  los  dias. 

Dar  senal 

Dar  seiialf  (or  la  seiial.) 

Darse  al  diantre. 

Darse  por  vencido.  - 
Me  doy  por  vencido. 

Darse  las  manos. 

Darse  mafia. 

Darse  d la  vela. 

No  se  me  da  nada^ 

Dejar  dicho,  {mandadoy  or  sus  6r 
denes.) 

Dejar  cscrito. 

Dejar  atras. 

Dejar  fresco  d aiguno. 

Dejar  para  rnanana. 

Dejarse  alguna  cosa  en  el  tintero 

Cojer  la  delantera. 

To  mar  la  (or  ir  en  la)  delantera. 
Descuide  V 
No  le  de  d V.  cuidado 
Estoy  en  lo  que  V,  me  dice. 

E star  por  Fulano. 

Estar  para  (or  por)  salir. 

Estar  cleria. 

Estar  de  buen  humor,  (or  de  ma 
humor.) 

Estar  de  faccion,  (or  de  centinela.) 
Estar  de  priesa. 

Estar  de  por  medio. 

Estar  de  gorja,  {alegre,  or  dc  cha 
cuta.) 

Estar  en  su  juicio. 

Estar  mano  sobre  mono 
Estarse  en  sus  trecc. 

Estar  apurado. 

Estar  en  todo, 

Estar  d la  mano. 

Estar  d raya. 

Estarse  cayendo. 

Estarse  muriendo 


EIGHTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


895 


To  be  in  want  o!  money. 

In  behalf  of  his  sister. 

To  b©  merry : to  be  in  good  humor 
To  caress,  to  wheedle. 

To  do,  or  serve  an  ill  turn. 

To  glory,  or  boast  in  one’s  wicked- 
ness 

To  be  giddy-brained. 

To  indicate  one’s  sentiments  by  the 
looks. 

To  talk  without  reflection. 

To  talk  on  an  endless  subject. 

To  oblige  to  come,  to  cause,  or  ask 
to  be  sent. 

It  is  cold.  It  was  very  cold. 

To  act  as  a notary. 

To  counterfeit  an  idiot. 

To  endeavor  to  arrive. 

To  make  any  one  lose  his  temper. 
To  pay  attention  to. 

To  pluck  up  a heart. 

To  raise  soldiers. 

To  make  one’s  fortune. 

To  be  well  matched. 

To  reckon  without  the  host. 

To  do  wonders. 

To  act  a part-  To  cut  or  make  a 
figure 

To  take  a family  dinner  with  one. 
To  carve,  (a  dish  for  a person.) 

To  affect  doing  some  business. 

To  inure  one’s  self  to  labor. 

To  intend,  to  mean. 

To  be  disposed  to  do  every  thing. 

To  kil'  two  birds  with  one  stone. 

To  ketip  one’s  bed,  to  be  ill. 

To  play  one’s  frolics. 

To  procure  to  one  the  means  of  be- 
coming rich. 

To  feign  not  to  see. 

To  affect  to  be  deaf. 

To  endeavor  to  walk  after  a long  ill- 
ness, (or  when  first  ’earning  to 
walk  ) 


Faltarle  d uno  el  diner o. 

A favor  de  su  hermana. 

Estar  de  fiesta.  Estar  para  fiesl  'js 
Hacer  fiestas. 

Hacer  un  fiaco  servicio. 

Hacer  del  samhenito  gala. 

Terter  los  cascos  d la  ginela. 
Hablar  con  los  ojos. 

Hahlar  de  memoria. 

Hablar  de  la  mai 
Hacer  venir. 

Hace  frio. 

Hacia  fiizo)  mucho  fric 
Hacer  de  escribano. 

Hacerse  el  boboy  {el  tonto.) 

Hacer  por  llegar. 

Hacer  d uno  perder  los  estrihoB. 
Hacer  caso  de. 

Hacer  de  tripas  corazon. 

Hacer  gente. 

Hacer  hombre  d alguno. 

Hacer  juego. 

Hacer  la  cuenta  sin  la  huespedi. 
Hacer  milagros. 

Hacer  papel. 

Hacer  penitencia  con  alguno 
Hacer  plato. 

Hacer  que  hacemos. 

Hacerse  al  trabajo. 

Hacer  intencion. 

Hacer  d pluma  y d pelo. 

Hacer  de  un  camino  {una  via)  iis 
mandados. 

Hacer  cama. 

Hacer  de  las  suyas. 

Hacerle  d uno  la  olla  gorda. 

Hacer  la  vista  corta. 

Hacer  orejas  de  mer cadet., 

Hacer  pinitos. 


396 


EJGHTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


To  excel,  to  surpass. 

To  take  care  of  a thing. 

To  feign  to  oe  ignorant,  innocent. 

To  be  too  easy  and  indulgent  to 
others. 

To  praise  one  exceedingly. 

To  fail  down  flat,  to  dash  to  pieces. 

I lay  a hundred  dollars  that  it  is  so. 

To  have  no  concern  in  a thing. 

To  go  on  softly.  Walk  carefully. 

To  go  off,  to  go  out,  to  evaporate,  to 
ooze. 

To  become  moderate,  to  restrain 
one’s  self. 

Who  is  there  ? 

Go  to,  (frequently  an  expression  of 
contempt.) 

To  reprimand  severely. 

Checkmate. 

To  discover  any  one’s  designs. 

Very  far,  at  a great  distance. 

To  get  over  a thing  well,  or  ill. 

To  be  on  good  or  bad  terms. 

To  rain  hard,  to  rain  buckets  full 

To  go  in  enmity. 

To  be  one’s  chief  support,  or  assist- 
ance. 

To  be  familiar  alone,  or  in  company. 

To  wish  to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  anoth- 
er’s labor,  without  having  con- 
tributed to  it. 

lb  be  born  to  wretchedness. 

To  be  born  to  good  luck. 

To  affect  business. 

lb  be  a man  of  strict  integrity  and 
honor. 

To  have  a large  family  to  support. 

To  have  an  absolute  power  over  any 
thing. 

To  act  without  cause  or  motive, 
without  rhyme  or  reason. 

To  put  to  the  sword. 

To  become  surety. 


Hacer  ray  a, 

Hacerse  cargo  de  'ilguna  cosa 
Hacer se  chiquito,  (inocente.) 
Hacerse  de  miel,  * 

Hacerse  lenguas  de  aJguno. 
Hacerse  tortilla ^ {atiicos.) 

Van  cien  pesos  que  es  eierto  esa 
No  ir  nada  en  una  cosa. 

Ir  con  tiento.  Vaya  V.  con  tiente 
Irse,  El  gas  se  ha  ido. 

Irse  d la  mano, 

I Quien  va  1 i Quien  va  alia  ? 
Vaya  V.  {vete,  idos)  d pasear 

Dar  unjahon. 

Jaque  y mate, 

Conocer  eljuego. 
ic  A legua.  A la  legua. 

< De  muchas  leguas.  De  cien  leguas 
f A lo  lejos.  De  lejos.  Desde  Idjos. 
Librarse  bien,  imal.) 

Salir  bien  Salir  mal, 

Llevarse  bien,  {mat.) 

Llover  d cdntaroa. 

An  dar  d (de)  malas. 

Ser  sus  pies  y sus  manos 

Estar  mano  d mano. 

Vonir  con  sus  manos  lavadas. 

Naccr  de  caheza, 

Nacer  de  pies. 

Fingir  negocios. 

Ser  hombre  de  obligaciones.  * 

Estar  cargado  de  ohligacionca 
Tener  el  palo  y el  mando. 

Ohrar  sin  que  m para  qut. 

Pasar  d cuchillo. 

Quedar  par  alguno 


EIGHT! -SIXTH  LESSON. 


39*3 


To  take  any  things  in  the  worst 
souse. 

To  make  futile,  or  silly  allegations. 

To  endeavor  to  ruin,  or  destroy  a 
person  or  thing. 

To  be  rich,  (colloquial.) 

To  name,  or  cite  unnecessarily  any 
person  or  thing,  (colIoquiaL) 

Not  to  know  what  one  is  about. 

To  happen,  or  occur  what  it  may. 

For  ever  and  ever. 

He  is  a worthless  fellow 

To  have  equal  numbers. 

To  make  essays  or  trials  ; to  grope 
or  to  feel  where  one  cannot  see. 

To  understand  thoroughly. 

To  bribe  with  money. 

To  be  hand  and  glove. 

Better  late  than  never. 

To  boast  of  any  thing. 

To  find  one  in  a favorable  disposi- 
tion. 

Et  cetera,  (colloquial,)  used  after 
several  epithets.  Mr.  N.  N.,  et 
cetera- 

To  bear  up  under  the  frowns  of  for- 
tune. 

Not  to  come  up  to  or  near  one  in  any 
line. 

To  be  haughty  with  good  fortune. 

0/js.  It  may  also  be  remarked, 
. many  proverbs,  and  proverbial  forms 

are  some  of  those  most  in  use. 

Death  rather  than  dishonor. 

Provide  in  good  time  for  a bad  one. 

\ thing  well  begun  is  half  finished. 

A.rms  and  literature  render  families 
illustrious. 

There  is  a time  for  every  thing. 

He  who  has  faults  of  his  own,  should 
not  reflect  upon  another  for  having 
the  same. 

Pieeents  remove  difficulties. 


Tomar  por  doude  qutma. 

Dar  razones  de  pie  de  banco. 

Tirar  corno  d real  de  entmigo 

Tener  cuhieito  el  rinon. 

Sacar  d bailar. 

No  saber  lo  que  se  pesca. 

Saiga  lo  que  saliere. 

Por  los  siglos  de  los  siglos. 

El  es  un  tal  por  cual. 

Estar  tanios  d tantos. 

Andar  tentando. 

Estar  d lo  ultimo. 

Untar  las  manos  con  unguento  de 
Mejico. 

Ser  una  y came. 

Mas  vale  iarde  que  nunca. 

Hacer  vanidad. 

Cojer  {hallar)  d alguno  de  vena. 
Don  Fulano  de  Tal  y otras  yerbc* 

Estar  al  yunque 
No  llegar  d los  zancdjos. 

Subirse  cn  zancos. 

that  there  are  in  Spanish  a gre? 
f expression,  of  which  the  following 

Comer  arena  dates  que  hacer  vileza 
Agosto,  y vendimia,  no  es  cada  dia 
Barba  bien  remojada^  medio  rapada, 
Alrnete  y bonete  hacen  cosas  de  co« 
pete. 

Cada  cosa  en  su  tiempOf  y nabos  eji 
adviento. 

Cdllate  y callemos,  que  sendas  not 
debemos. 

Dddivas  quehrantan  pcnas 


898 


EIGHTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


Tell  me  what  company  you  keep, 
and  I will  tell  you  who  you  are. 

Be  cautious  before  you  pay,  or  re- 
ceive payment. 

Trust  in  God,  for  your  own  merit 
avails  but  little. 

He  who  undertakes  many  things  at 
once,  seldom  succeeds  in  any. 

A flatterer’s  talk  is  always  vain  and 
unprofitable. 

You  must  not  advise  one  to  go  to 
war,  or  to  marry. 

Rude  play  is  used  only  by  low-bred 
people. 

He  labors,  although  uselessly,  who 
works  without  attention. 

To  affect  great  diligence,  and  neglect 
one’s  duty. 

God  helps  him  who  helps  himself. 

Fools  and  obstinate  people  make 
lawyers  rich. 

Neither  look  into  another’s  letter,  nor 
put  your  hand  into  another  man’s 
chest. 

A good  paymaster  needs  no  pawn. 

We  must  catch  the  manners  of  the 
times. 

Evil  communication  corrupts  man- 
ners. 

Curse  on  accounts  with  relations. 

^'Iake  youi  affairs  public,  and  every 
one  will  judge  of  them  according 
to  his  own  fancy. 

You  are  v/oilh  as  much  as  you  pos- 
sess. 

A wolf  in  a lamb’s  skin.  * 

Wind  and  good  luck  are  seldom  last 
ing. 

An  old  uninstructed  person  will  not 
loam  any  thing. 


Dime  con  quien  andas,  direte  quiets 
eres. 

Escribe  antes  que  deSf  y lecibe  antes 
que  escribas, 

Fortuna  te  de  Dios,  hijo,  que  cl 
saber  poco  te  basta. 

Galgo  que  muchas  liebres  leoantSt 
ninguna  mata, 

Habla  de  lisonjero  siempre  es 
y sin  provecho. 

Jr  d la  guerra,  ni  casar,  no  se  ha 
de  aconsejar, 

Juego  de  manos  es  de  villanos. 

Lahrar  y hacer  albardas  todo  ea 
dar  puntadas. 

Las  Haves  en  la  cinta,  y el  goto  en 
la  cocina. 

A quien  madruga  Dios  le  ayuda. 

Necios,  y porjiados  hacen  ricos  a lot 
letrados. 

Ni  ojo  en  la  carta,  ni  mono  en  el 
area 

Al  buen  pagador  no  le  duelen  pren- 
das. 

Cual  el  tiempo,  tal  el  tiento. 

Quien  con  lohos  anda  d aullar  si 
ensena. 

Reniega  de  cuentas  con  deudos  y 
deudas. 

Saca  lo  tuyo  al  mercado,  y unoi 
dir  an  que  es  negro,  y otros  que  e* 
blareco 

Tanto  vales,  cuanto  tienes 

Unas  de  gato,  y hdbito  de  bra  to 

Viento  y ventura  poco  dura. 

Ya  estd  duro  el  alcacer  p^n 
pofiae. 


APPENDIX 


THE  ELEMENTS 

OF  THE 


SPANISH  LANGUAGE: 

BETMl 


A LiRIEF,  BUT  COMPREHENSIVE  RECAPITULATION  OF  THE  RILES 
ESTABLISHED  IN  THIS  METHOD,  AND  OF  ALL  THE  VERBS. 
BOTH  REGULAR  AND  IRREGULAR,  SO  AS  TO  RENDER 
THEIR  USE  EASV  AND  FAMILIAR  TO  THE 
MOST  ORDINARY  CAPACITY 


PARTICULARLY  DESIGNED 

FOR  YOUNG  SCHOLARS, 

AND 


PERSONS  WHO  ARE  THEIR  OWN  INSTRUCTORS. 


BY 

MARIANO  VELAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADENA, 

PTlurESSOR  OF  THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE 
IN  COLUMBIA  COLLEGE,  CITY  OF  NEW  YORK 


NEW  YORK: 

D.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY, 

1,  3,  AND  6 BOND  STREET. 

1 8 8 7. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


As  it  is  supposed  that  the  Student  is  conversant  with  the 
English  Grammar,  the  technical  words  belonging  to  it  are 
made  use  of  in  the  following  Appendix,  without  explaining 
them;  because  they  are  the  same  in  Spanish.  Should  the 
Learner  be  unacquainted  with  the  Grammar  of  his  mothei 
tongue,  he  is  advised  to  make  himself  first  acquainted  with  it. 
in  order  the  better  to  profit  by  this  Appendix. 


iNbw  York,  Februery,  1848. 


APPENDIX 


ORTHOGRAPHY 


SPANISH  ALPHABET. 


The 

letters  made  use 

of  in  the  Spanish  language  are 

twenty -seven  ' 

number, 

as  follows  ; — ‘ 

A 

a 

a\ 

like  a 

in 

alarm. 

B 

b 

hay^ 

h 

in 

babery. 

C 

c 

thay, 

ill  lisped,  as  in 

theft. 

Ch 

ch 

Icliay, 

ch 

in 

chess. 

D 

d 

day, 

d 

in 

dedicate,  fed. 

E 

e 

a or  ay, 

e 

in 

egg. 

F 

f 

f 

in 

elfect. 

G 

g • 

hay, 

h (breathing  forcibly 

the  h)  in 

hay,  he,  ham. 

H 

h 

atchay. 

h silent,  as  in 

lieir,  honor. 

1 

i 

ee. 

i 

in 

idiotism. 

J 

j 

hotdh. 

h (more  strongly  aspi- 

rated  than  g)  in 

home. 

L 

1 

ai^-lay. 

1 

in 

element,  labial 

I.l 

11 

ai-lyay. 

ll 

in 

brilliant. 

M 

m 

aH-may,  - 

m 

in 

amen. 

N 

n 

aV-nay, 

n 

in 

energy,  no. 

N 

h 

ai'-nyay. 

n 

(somewnat  nasal)  in 

poniard,  onion. 

0 

0 

oh^ 

0 

in 

odorous. 

P 

P 

V 

in 

paper,  plan. 

Q 

q 

coo, 

y 

in 

piquet,  quint. 

Pw 

r 

er-ay. 

r 1 

soft,  in 

erect. 

R 

r 

er-ray. 

r or  rr  (very  harsh)  in 

rack,  horror. 

S 

s 

essay. 

ss 

in 

senseless. 

T 

t 

lay. 

t 

in 

tent. 

U 

u 

oo. 

u 

in 

lull. 

^ For  the  respective  sounds  of  the  letters  in  the  English  words,  explaiia- 
rory  of  the  sounds  they  are  intended  to  represent,  the  student  must  consuP 
Walkcr^s  English  Pronouncing  DictionarVi  from  which  they  are  copied. 


i02 


APPENDIX. 


V V 
X X 

V y 

V y 
Z z 


vay^  like  v in 

ai'-kiss,  x (cs]'  in 

ee  vowel,  or  ) 

> V in 

ee  griegay  ^ ^ 

ee  consonant,  softer  than  g or  j in 

thaV-dak^  th  lisped,  in 


velvet. 

maxim. 

liberty. 

gentry,  jet. 
thermometer 


The  vowels  are  a,  e,  ?*,  o,  w,  and  y when  it  stands  by  itself,  or  at  the  end 
af  a word,  or  of  a syllable  immediately  followed  by  a consonant.  Thesa 
letters  must  be  sounded  as  they  are  in  the  following  English  words,  which 
must  be  regarded  as  a Standard : — 

A M E N I T Y. — o H ! F DLL. 

1 2 3 3 4 5 

a e i y 0 u 

DIPHTHONGS  AND  TRIPHTHONGS. 


"ai, 

au. 

ay. 

oe, 

oi, 

oy. 

13 

15 

13 

42 

43 

43 

ea, 

ei, 

eo, 

eu, 

ey. 

ua, 

ue. 

ui, 

uo. 

uy. 

21 

23 

24 

25 

23 

51 

52 

53 

64 

53 

ia. 

ie. 

io, 

iu. 

iai, 

iei, 

uai, 

uei, 

uey. 

t 31 

32 

34 

35 

313 

323 

513 

523 

523 

EXAMPLES. 

Dabais,  pausa,  hay  ; Hnea,  veis,  virgineo,  deuda,  ley  ; gracia,  cielo,  precio, 
ciudad;  h^roe,  sois,  voy;  fragua,  dueno,  ruido,  drduo,  muy ; apreciaist 
yacieis,  santiguais,  averigiieis,  buey. 

In  the  following  combinations  the  vowels  are  pronounced  separately, 
forming  two  distinct  sounds. 

aa,  ae,  ao,  ee,  ii,  oa,  oo. 

11  12  14  22  33  41  44 

EXAMPLES. 

Contraamura,  caemos,  aorta,  paseen,  friisimo,  coailar,  loor 
THE  VOWELS 

a,  e,  o,  u,  y.  a,  e,  i,  6,  u. 

Pronounced  ah,  ay,  ee,  oh,  oo,  ee,  ah,  ay,  ee,  oh,  oo. 

Pronounce  them  quickly.  Pronounce  them  slow  y 


SYLLABLES. 

Qh9  A.  Pronounce  the  vowels  of  the  following  table,  as  directed  above 
Dut  be  particuleir  to  sound  the  u as  oo  in  coo,  or  u in  full.  Every  lattei 
must  be  fully  pronounced,  h excepted. 


APPENDIX. 


403 


TABLE  I. 


ab 

ob 

lb 

ob 

ub 

ar 

er 

ir 

cr 

01 

ac 

ec 

ic 

oc 

uc 

as 

es 

is 

os 

ua 

ad 

ed 

id 

od  ^ 

ud 

at 

et 

it 

ot 

ut  t 

ag 

eg 

ig 

eg 

«g 

ab 

eh 

ih 

oh 

uh 

^ ax 

ex 

ix 

ox 

ox 

al 

el 

il 

ol 

ul 

( acs 

ecs 

ics 

ocs 

acs 

am 

ein 

im 

oin 

um 

ail 

en 

in 

on 

un 

\ az 

ez 

iz 

oz 

uz 

ap 

ep 

ip 

op 

up 

X ath} 

eth 

ith 

oth 

uth 

Obs.  h To  make  it  easier  for  a young  scholar  to  learn  at 

sight  the  pro- 

nunciation  of  every  letter,  the  sound  of  it  is  i 

epresented  in 

the  following 

table  by 

an  English  syllable,  in  italics,  under  it.  H,  under  j or  g,  must  be 

trongly  aspirated  ; th, 

under  c or  z,  lisped  as  in  thin. 

truth  ; 

and  r 

harshly 

ronounced 

TABLE  II. 

) ba 

be 

bi 

bo 

bu 

J ma 

me 

mi 

mo 

mu 

\ hah 

hay 

hee 

boh 

boo 

( mah 

may 

mee 

nioh 

moo 

^ ca 

qne' 

qui 

CO 

CU 

K na 

lie 

iii 

no 

nu 

^ kah 

kay 

kee 

koh 

koo 

X nah 

nay 

nee 

noh 

noo 

S cua 

cue 

cui 

cuo 

\ na 

ne 

fii 

no 

nu 

^ kwah  kway 

kwee 

kwo 

( nyah  nye-ay  nyee 

nyoh 

nyoo 

) cha 

che 

chi 

cho 

chu 

S pa 

pe 

pi 

po 

pu 

( tchah  tchay 

tehee 

tchoh 

tchoo 

( pah 

pay 

pee 

poh 

poo 

S da 

de 

di 

do 

du 

S qua 

qiie 

qiii 

quo 

\ dah 

day 

dee 

doh 

doo 

X kwah 

kway 

kwee 

kwoh 

Wa 

fe 

fi 

fo 

hi 

^ ra 

re 

ri 

TO 

ru 

Xfah 

fay 

fee 

foh 

foo 

X rah 

ray 

ree 

roh 

TOO 

\ ga 

gue 

gui 

ge 

gu 

K sa 

se 

si 

so 

su 

X gah 

g^y 

gee 

goh 

goo 

( ssah 

ssay 

ssee 

ssoh 

) gua 

giie 

gui 

guo 

jta 

te 

ti 

to 

tu 

X gwah  gway 

gwee 

gv)oh 

X tah 

tay 

tee 

toh 

too 

K ha 

he 

h‘ 

hoh 

hu 

^ va 

ve 

vi 

VO 

vu 

/ ah 

ay 

ee 

oh 

Ort 

X vah 

vay 

vee 

voh 

voc 

J ja 

je 

ji 

jo 

jo 

J xa 

xe 

xi 

xo 

XU 

( hah 

hay 

hee 

hoh 

hoo 

X esah 

esay 

csce 

csoh 

zsoo 

\ 

ge 

gi 

S ya* 

ye 

yi 

yo 

yu 

hay 

hee 

(jah 

jay 

jee 

joh 

joo 

Ua 

le 

li 

lo 

lu 

K za 

ze 

zi 

zo 

zu 

X lah 

lay 

lee 

loh 

loo 

^ thah 

thay 

thee 

thoh 

tkoi. 

\ Ua 

lie 

Hi 

l!o 

llu 

s 

ce 

ci 

( lyah 

lyc-ay  lyee 

t,yoh 

lyoo 

I 

thay^ 

thee 

* Th,  lisped  ^ in  pathi  truikt  theft ^ thin. 


404 


APPENDIX. 


Oba.  C.  The  vowels  are  never  silent,  except  u in  the  syllables  gucy  gui 
que,  quif  the  sound  of  which  corresponds  to  that  heaid  in  the  English  words 
getf  gcescy  etiquette,  quint.  When  the  u in^these  syllables  is  to  b©  scunded 
tt  is  marked  with  a dia3resis  ; thus,  arguir,  aqueducto.  But,  in  conformity 
with  the  present  use,  the  words  in  which  the  u is  pronounced  after  q are 
written  with  c;  thus,  cuatro,  acueducto. 

Obs,  D.  The  consonants  that  are  pronounced  differently  from  the  Eng- 
lish are  the  following  : — 

C before  a,  o,  u,  I,  r,  and  when  it  is  at  the  end  of  a syllable,  sounds  like 
k in  English  ; as  canal,  colico,  cur  a,  clamor,  credito,  pacto,  C before  t, 
or  2,  sounds  lisped,  like  th  in  the  English  words  theft,  thin. 

Ch  sounds  like  the  same  letters  in  the  English  words  chap,  chess,  chin, 
chop,  choose,  much. 

When  ch  is  followed  by  a vowel  marked  with  a circumflex  ac  cent,  ?t 
must  be  pronounced  as  k ; as,  Chdribdis.  But  all  the  words  derived  from 
the  Greek  having  ch,  are  at  present  written  in  Spanish  with  c before  a,  o, 
u,  r,  and  with  qu  before  e or  i ; as,  arcdngel,  cristiano,  cco,  monarquia. 

D must  be  pronouiiced  as  the  same  letter  in  English.  In  some  parts  of 
Spain  it  is  pronounced  as  th  in  father ; and  in  others,  where  it  occurs  at 
the  end  of  words,  as  th,  or  as  t,  or  is  even  silent ; thus,  ciudad,  ciudath, 
ciiidat,  ciudd.  This  pronunciation  is  considered  provincial,  and  not  Castilian 

G before  a,  o,  u,  I,  r,  sounds  as  in  English  ; as,  galan,  gohierno,  gusto, 
gloria,  gracia.  Before  e or  i,  it  sounds  like  the  English  h aspirated ; as, 
genio,  (hen'-e-o,)  gitano,  (he-tan-oh.) 

H is  always  mute,  or  silent,  except  at  the  beginning  of  words  followed  by 
ue,  in  which  case  it  has  a very  soft  and  slightly  nasal  sound,  as  in  huesc, 
'bone.)  The  vulgar  pronounce  such  words  as  if  written  with  g, 

J has  a guttural  sound,  harsher,  however,  than  the  aspirated  h in  Eng- 
lish. Before  e or  i it  sounds  as  the  g does  in  Spanish  before  the  same 
letters. 

LL  is  sounded  by  placing  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  lower  teeth, 
ind  turning  the  thick  part  of  it  towards  the  roof  of  the  mouth  while  emit- 
ting the  breath  with  rapidity.  It  may  be  heard  in  the  English  word  mii- 
lion ; but  the  ll  must  be  pronounced  more  .quickly  and  strongly  than  in 
that.  LL  is  consid^^'ed  in  Spanish  a single  letter  with  a double  character, 
consequently  it  cannot  be  divided  ; thus,  ca-llar. 

N has  a strong  nasal  sound,  somewha^  like  n in  poniard.  The  gn  in 
French  gives  the  exact  sound. 

Q is  always  followed  by  u,  and  is  pronounced  like  k.  In  conformity  with 
ihe  modern  orthography,  the  syllables  in  which  u is  sounded  before  a,  e,  o 
are  written  with  c instead  of  q ; thus,  cuando,  cuestion  ^ 

R,  at  the  beginning  of  a word,  after  n,  I,  s,  and  in  compound  words 
the  primitive  of  which  begin  with  r,  has  a harsh  and  rough  sound  ; as.  rata 
enriquecei , malrotar,  cariredondo.  When  ab  and  ob  are  not  prepositioca 
as  in  abrogar,  obi  epcion,  the  r becomes  liquid ; as  in  abrojo,  obrero. 


APPENDIX. 


405 


R,  in  the  middle  of  a wore',  or  between  two  vowels,  has  a very  smooth 
louiid  ; as  in  morosidad,  meriio 

The  harsh  and  rou^h  sound  of  r between  two  vowels,  in  Ihe  middle  of 
simple  words,  is  always  expressed  by  double  rr;  thus,  barraca,  correcto, 
horror. 

Common  people  frequently  clip  the  r;  saying  paa  instead  oi para. 

N.  B Some  Spaniards  make  in  manuscript  the  letter  r thus,  x ; as, 
fuexdds  paxa  amaxxaxle,  (cuerdas  para  amarrarle,)  cords  to  tie  it.  Tho 
tebolai  will  do  well  to  take  notice  of,  but  not  to  follow  this  old  fashion.  If 
Liie  English  r be  not  well  formed,  it  will  be  mistaken  for  i or  z. 

S has  always  a harsh,  hissing  sound,  like  ss  in  English  ; as  in  dempost* 
mmar»  (to  dispossess.)  There  is  not  a word  in  Spanish  beginning  with  a 
followed  by  a consonant.  S'  is  not  written  double,  except  when  the  pro- 
noun se  comes  after  the  first  person  plural  of  a verb;  as,  dimoiselef  (wo 
gave  it  to  him.) 

T must  be  pronounced  as  in  the  words  tarti  ten^  tirii  tone.  It  never  un- 
iergoes  the  variations  it  does  in  English,  in  creature,  nation,  &c. ; conse- 
quently creatura,  patio,  tia,  &bc.,  must  be  pronounced  cray-ah-toor' ~ah, 
pah' -tee-oh,  tce-ah,  &c.  T is  never  written  double 

N.  B.  As  the  English  capital  in  manuscript,  has  in  Spanish  a different 
name  and  power,  the  learner  is  advised  always  to  use  this  Q/  Observe, 
also,  that  this  C^is  called  by  the  Spaniards  T,  not  F. 

U always  sounds  as  it  does  in  English  in  the  words  full,  pull. 

V must  be  pronounced  as  in  English.  It  is  frequently  used  in  man?i- 
script  instead  of  the  capital  U;  thus,  for  Vn  dia. 


X sounds  like  cs  or  ks  in  English  ; as,  experiencia.  When  it  is  me  last 
letter  of  a word  it  has  a guttural  sound,  like  that  of  the  Spanish  y,  as  in 
careax,  (quiver ;)  but  such  words  are  no  longer  written  with  x,  but  v/ith  j ; 
thus,  reloj,  (watch,)  formerly  relax. 

Y,  when  alone,  or  after  a vowel,  and  followed  by  a consonant,  or  at  the 
end  of  a wore,  is  a vowel,  and  sounds  like  ee  in  English  ; as,  el  y ella,  (he 
and  she,)  convoy.  Y,  before  a vowel  in  the  same  syllable,  or  between  two 
vowels,  is  a consonant,  and  sounds  like  the  English  j,  though  somewhat 
softer  Some  persons  write  i in  estoy,  soy,  voy,  y,  muy,  instead  of  y. 

Thus — estoi,  soi,  voi,  i,  mui. 

In  Spanish  manuscript  capital  Y is  to  be  used  instead  of  capital  I ; thus — 


^ue  e/  cozone/  ^^nacco 

cfe  con  u/n  ^cUa^n  t/o/ 


These  nouns,  in  printing,  would  be  Isidro,  Isla,  Ignacio,  Izquierdo,  Iniii 
Jifante. 


406 


APPENDIX. 


2 must  be  pronounced  as  th  in  the  English  words  thanks  theft,  tha% 
thorn,  path,  tenth,  truths 

N.  B.  Particular  care  must  be  taken  to  pronounce  fully  ana  distinctly 
the  letters  c,  a,  r,  and  5,  at  the  end  of  the  words.  , 


REMARKS  ON  THE  PRONUNCIATION. 

Every  well-educated  person  in  old  Spain,  as  well  as  in  its  former  and  ac- 
nial  possessions  in  America,  speaks  and  writes  correctly  the  Spanish  o! 
Castilian  language  ; but  as  the  Spanish  Peninsula  consists  of  several  p:ov- 
inces,  that  once  were  states  and  kingdoms  independent  from  each  other, 
and  (Biscay  excepted)  were  settled  and  governed  by  various  nations,  there 
are  to  be  observed,  in  the  mass  of  the  people  of  each  of  its  present  divisions, 
certain  peculiarities,  propensities,  and  even  animosities,  that  make  the  in- 
habitants of  each  division  appear  almost  a different  people.  Some  of  them 
have  had  a peculiar  idiom ; hence  it  is  that  the  Lengua  Castellana  is  not 
spoken  in  all  its  purity  by  every  person,  except  in  both  Castiles,  and  par- 
‘.icularly  in  the  districts  of  Burgos,  Salamanca,  Toledo,  &c. 

The  most  frequent  faults  to  be  observed,  and  which  the  scholar  iS  warnea 
to  avoid,  are  the  following : — 


B instead  of  V ; 

as, 

el  bihc. 

in  lieu  of 

el  vice, 

he  lives. 

V 

(( 

B; 

(( 

el  vevio, 

<( 

el  bebio, 

he  drank 

s 

« 

C; 

(( 

serernonia, 

(( 

ceremonia, 

ceremony 

c 

u 

s ; 

« 

selehro, 

(( 

celebro, 

the  brain. 

s 

u 

z ; 

(( 

casa. 

n 

caza. 

hunting. 

R 

u 

L; 

(( 

craro, 

(( 

claro, 

clear. 

Y 

« 

LL; 

(( 

cavayo, 

(( 

caballo. 

a horse. 

LL 

Y; 

(( 

polio, 

it 

poyo. 

a bench. 

N 

(( 

M; 

ti 

onbro, 

(t 

hombro, 

a shoulder 

H is  used  in  words  that  have  it  not,  and  is  omitted  in  others  that  have  it : 
as,  handan  instead  of  andan,  (they  walk  ;)  el  iso  for  el  hizo,  (he  made  ;) 
olio  for  hoyo,  (a  hole.)  J is  sometimes  used  instead  of  h;  as,  el  se  juio  for 
el  se  huyo,  (he  ran  away.)  In  the  terminations  ado  and  ido  they  generally 
suppress  the  d,  both  in  writing  and  pronouncing,  and  say,  un  hestio  colordo 
for  un  vcstido  Colorado,  (a  red  dress.)  The  first  e,  in  the  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation,  that  double  that  letter,  as  pasear,  (to  walk,)  is  sounded,  an6 
even  written  i ; thus,  yo  me  pasie  ioa  la  tarde  instead  of  yo  me  pasee  toda 
la  tarde,  (I  walked  all  the  afternoon  ;)  diendo  for  yendo,  (going,)  &c. 

Vallejo,  Palomares,  and  other  Spanish  authors,  may  be  consulted  on  the 
Bubject. 

DOUBLE  LETTERS. 

In  simple  words,  e,  i,  c,  r,  are  the  only  letters  that  may  be  written  double. 

E is  double  in  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  when  it  is  the  last  of 
Iheir  radical  letters,  and  the  termination  begins  v-ith  e;  as,  pasear,  (\x 


APPENDIX.  407 

valk.)  The  radical  letters  are  pase.  The  termination  of  the  first  person 
lingular  of  the  preterit  Is  e — pasee,  (I  did  walk.) 

I is  double  in  the  superlative  degree  of  the  monosyllables  ending  in  io  ; 
ftSj  friot  (cold ;)  friisimo,  (very  cold.) 

C is  double  only  before  e or  z,  and  is  pronounced  with  both  syllables  ; as, 
acceder,  (to  accede  ;)  accidente,  (accident.) 

Remark. — Almost  all  words  ending  in  English  in  ction,  and  their  deriva- 
tives, change  the  t into  c,  and  become  Spanish ; as,  diction,  (diccion 
dictionary,  (diccionario.) 

R is  written  double  in  the  middle  of  words,  between  two  vowels,  to 
point  out  its  harsh  sound  ; as,  carro,  (a  cart ;)  cm  ro,  (I  run,)  &cc.,  to  distin- 
guish them  from  caro,  (dear ;)  coro,  (choir,)  &c.  (See  R.) 

In  compound  words  all  the  vowels,  and  also  n and  s,  are  written  double, 
whenever  any  of  them  are  the  last  of  the  component  and  the  first  of  the 
word  to  be  compounded  ; as,  contraabertura,  (a  counter-opening  ;)  preemi^ 
nente,  (pre-eminent ;)  amandoos,  (ye  loving  each  other  ;)  dannos,  (they 
give  us  ;)  ddmosselos,  (we  give  them  to  him.) 


DIVISION  OF  SYI.LARLES. 

Vowels  forming  a diphthong  or  triphthong  must  not  be  separated;  a», 
gra-cio-so,  pre-ciaia,  and  not  gra-ci-os-o,  pre-ci-ais. 

A single  consonant  between  two  vowels  must  be  joined  to  the  vowei 
after  it ; except  x,  that  must  be  left  with  the  preceding ; as,  hue-no,  jlo-res, 
me-lo-co-to-ne-ro,  ex-d-men.  LL,  being  considered  a single  letter,  follows 
the  same  rule,  which  is  also  the  case  with  ch  ; as,  ca-ha-Ue-ro,  mu-cha-cho. 

Two  consonants  between  two  vowels  are  divided  by  placing  one  to  each 
syllable ; as,  car-ga^men-to,  en-ter-ne-ci-mien-to.  Except  if  the  first  of 
them  be  an  /,  or  any  of  the  mute  letters,  followed  by  I or  r,  for  then  both 
are  joined  to  the  second  syllable ; as,  a-jiic-cion,  ha-hlan-chin,  co-hre. 

When  three  consonants  come  between  two  vowels,  the  first  two  of  them 
belong  to  the  first  syllable,  if  the  second  of  said  consonants  be  s,  and  the 
third  to  the  second  syllable  ; as,  cons-ti-tu-cion,  ins-pi-rar  But  if  the 
second  letter  be  /,  or  any  of  the  mute  letters,  followed  by  I or  r,  one  belongs 
to  the  first,  and  the  other  two  to  the  second  syllable ; as,  con-jiic-to,  an-cla. 

Four  consonants  between  two  vowels  are  equally  divided ; as,  abs-trac* 
don. 

Compound  words  are  to  be  divided  into  their  component  parts ; as,  dei- 
9r-de-nar.  But  should  the  simple  word  in  its  Latin  origin  begin  with  5, 
followed  by  a consonant  the  s is  to  be  placed  with  the  preceding  syllable  ; 
as,  ins-tru-ir. 


PUNCTUATION. 

The  notes  used  in  Spanish  for  punctuation  are  the  same  as  in  English 
A differencej  however,  is  to  be  observed  in  the  points  of  exclamation  am? 


408 


APPENDIX. 


interrogation,  which  in  long  sentences  are  placed  upside  down  at  tho  be- 
ginning of  them,  in  order  that  the  reader  may  calculate,  and  apply  tha 
proper  emphasis  and  tone  of  voice  ; as — 

( j Como  no ! respondid  Sancho.  i Por  ventura  el  qua 

^ / Coh’-moh  noh  I res-pon-deeoh'  San-tchoh.  i Por  ven-toor~rah  ell  hay 

Jayer  mantedron  era  otro  que  el  hijo  de  mi  padre  ? 

ah-jer  man-tay-ar-on  er-ah  oh-troh  kay  ell  ee-koh  day  me  pah-dray  ? 
J iy  las  alforjas  que  hoy  me  faltan  son  de  otro  que  de  <51 
( I ee  lass  al-for-hass  kay  oh-ee  may  fal-tan  son  day  oh-troh  kay  day  ell 
J mismo?  Que!  ^Te  faltan  las  alforjas,  Sancho? 

I miss-moh  ? Kay  ! i Tay  faltan  lass  al-for-hass,  San-tchoh  7 

Don  Quijote,  Cap.  xviii.,  part  1 

Translation. — How  now  ! answered  Sancho.  Mayhap,  then,  they  whom 
they  tossed  up  in  the  blanket  yesterday  was  not  the  son  of  my  father  ? and 
did  the  saddle-bags  that  are  lost  to-day  belong  to  some  other  person  1 
How  I Hast  thou  lost  the  saddle-bags,  Sancho  ? 

N.  B.  No  apostrophe  is  used  in  Spanish.  It  is  found,  however,  in  very 
old  books,  and  particularly  in  poetry ; at  present  it  is  entirely  expunged. 
Formerly  it  was  also  customary  to  suppress  the  e of  words  beginning  with 
that  letter,  when  they  came  after  the  preposition  de,  joining  both  words  in 
one  ; thus,  del,  deste,  dellos,  &c.,  instead  of  de  el,  de  este,  &c 


ACCENT. 

The  Spanish  vowels  have  always  the  same  unvaried  sound,  whether  they 
be  at  the  beginning,  in  the  midst,  or  at  the  end  of  a word.  They,  in  all 
situations,  must  be  fully  and  distinctly  pronounced.  The  only  difference  to 
be  observed  in  them,  is  the  time  requisite  in  their  pronunciation.  This  time 
is  called  accent. 

An  accent  is  that  peculiar  stress  of  the  voice  laid  on  a vowel  of  a sylla- 
ble, in  consequence  of  which  it  is  more  distinctly  and  forcibly  pronounced 
than  the  other  vowels  of  tho  same  word.  Hence  the  vowels  are  called 
long  or  short. 

A vowel  is  termed  Zong*  when  it  requires  a peculiar  stress  of  the  voice  to  bo 
laid  upon  it ; dwelling,  consequently,  on  it  a longer  time  than  on  any  other 
vowel  of  the  same  word ; as  c in  the  first  syllable  of  reverence,  which  is 
distinguished  from  the  other  two  c’s  by  the  time  spent  in  pronouncing  it. 
The  latter  are  therefore  called  short,  because  the  stress  of  the  voice  is  not 
laid  on  them,  they  being  pronounced  rapidly. 

The  following  English  words  will  elucidate  this  explanation. 

No.  1.  An  abstract,  an  accent,  the  torment,  the  conduct 

No.  2.  To  abstract,  to  accent,  to  torment,  to  conduct 

The  words  in  line  No.  1 have  the  accent  on  the  first  syllable,  and  those 
ol  No.  2 on  the  last  Consequently  it  is  said  df  the  former,  that  they  have 


APPENDIX. 


409 


ihe  first  syllable  long,  and  the  second  short ; and  of  the  latter,  that  then 
tiret  syllable  is  short,  and  the  second  long. 

The  little  line,  or  mark  set  over  a vowel,  to  point  out  that  it  must  be  pro- 
nounced long,  is  arso  called  an  accent.  In  the  Spanish  language  the  only 
accent  used  at  present  is  that  styled  the  acute  (')  In  old  books  there  is 
found  also  the  circumflex,  to  indicate  that  the  ch  preceding  the  vowel 
marked  with  it  must  be  pronounced  as  c (k)  before  a,  o,  or  u,  and  as  qu 
before  e or  i ; and  that  x is  to  be  sounded  as  cs ; as,  archangel,  AchileSt 
proximo,  which  at  present  are  written  arcdngel,  (ar-can'-hell,)  Aquiles, 
(ah-key-less,)  proximo,  (prok-see-moh.) 

The  vowels  d,  e,  6,  u,  when  used  as  prepositions  or  conjunctions,  are  al- 
ways accented  ; as,  ama  d tu  projimo,  sabios  e ignor antes,  grandes  6 pf>- 
luerios.  The  accent  is  never  placed  over  y.  But  in  printing  (dictionaries 
excepted)  the  capitals  are  seldom  accented  ; and  in  manuscript  are  almost 
diways  unaccented. 

Monosyllables  of  more  than  ono  signification  are  accented  on  that  sylla- 
rfk  in  which  ti  vowel  is  pronounced  longer  ; as — 

Tu,  thou.  Tu,  thy.  Si,  himself,  &c.  Si,  if. 

he.  El,  the.  De,  give  you.  Dc,  of. 

Mi,  me.  Mi,  my.  Te,  tea.  Te,  thee 

Se,  I know.  Se,  himself,  &c.  &c.  &c. 


TilK  USE  OF  THE  ACCENT. 

Nouns  ending  in  q ^ owel  have,  for  the  most  part,  the  penultimate,  or  last 
0^  liable  but  one,  long,  and  consequently  they  do  not  require  the  mark  or 
decent  to  point  it  out ; as,  publico,  habito  ; but  if  the  stress  of  the  voice 
Ij  to  be  laid  on  any  other  tsyllable,  it  must  be  indicated  by  placing  the  accent 
upon  such  syllable  ; thus,  publico,  public  ; publico,  I publish  ; publico,  he 
published  ; habito,  a habit ; habito,  I inhabit ; habito,  he  inhabited. 


WORDS  FOR  EXERCISE. 

Animn,  calculo,  intimo,  participe,  numero. 

"Capitulo,  domestico,  limite,  practice,  titulo. 

Celebre,  ejercito,  cantara,  termino,  vario. 

But  if  to  a person  of  a verb  ending  in  an  accented  vowel  the  case  of  a 
pronoun  be  added,  the  accent  must  be  retained,  although  it  fall  on  the  pe~*‘ 
nultimate  ; as,  pago,  he  paid  ; pagole,  he  paid  him. 

Words  ending  in  a consonant  have,  generally,  the  last  syllable  long,  and 
do  not  require  the  mark  of  the  accent  ; as,  caridad,  animal,  capitan,  favor, 
interes,  lobrcguez.  But  should  the  accent  be  on  any  other  syllable  it  must 
be  marked  ; as,  orden,  iris,  mdrtir,  cardeter,  caracteres,  (pi.) 

Exception  1. — The  plurals  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  which,  though  they 
t3rminate  in  s,  retain  the  accent  they  have  in  the  singular ; as,  padreSi 
amorosos,  capitanes,  {rom  padre,  amoroso,  &<c. 

Exception  2. — Family  names  in  ez  or  iz  that  generally  have  their  pe 
ftultimaie  syllable  long  ; as,  Fernandez,  Armendariz. 

18 


410 


APPENDIX. 


Exception  3. — The  persons  of  the  verbs  ending  in  s or  n m v«hich  the 
penultimate  is  pronounced  long  ; as,  miraras,  entraran.  When  the  slreea 
of  the  voice  is  to  be  iaid  upon  any  other  syllable,  it  is  accented  ; as,  mirardj, 
entrardn,  pasdramos. 


READING-LESSONS. 


O*  The  learner  is  reminded  to  pronounce  the  vowels  in  the  following 
Ifjfcsons  as  set  forth  in  page  402,  to  wit : a ah,  e ay  i ee,  o oh,  m oo ; to  sound 
tlie  syllables  al  and  ad  as  they  are  sounded  in  the  English  words  alcana^ 
comical,  lad  ; and  to  lisp  the  th,  as  in  theft,  thin,  path,  tenth,  &c. 

The  English  words  in  the  third  line  are  intended  rather  as  a vocabulary 
than  as  a translation. 

N B.  A under  a word  indicates  that  it  must  not  be  translated, 

I. 

c La  Lihertad  es  uno  de  los  mas  preciosos  aoncs 

J Lah  Lee-ber-tad  ess  oon-oh  day  loss  mass  praith-ee-os-oss  don-esn 

f Liberty  is  one  of  the  most  precious  gifts 

( que  los  cielos  dieron  d.  los  homhres : con  ella  no 

) kay  loss  thee-a5-“loss  dee-air-on  ah  loss  om-bress:  cone  el-lyah  no 

( that  heaven  gave  to  men : with  it  not 

C pueden  igualarse  los  tesoros  que  la  tierra 

) poo-ai-den  ee-gwal-ar-say  loss  tais-sor-oss  kay  lah  tea-er-rah 

( can  be  equalled  the  treasures  which  earth 

c contiene,  ni  el  mar  encubre : por  la  lihertad,  asi 

? con-tea-ay-nay,  nee  ell  mar  en-coo-bray:  pore  lah  lee-ber-tad,  as-see 

f contains,  or  — sea  hides ; for  — liberty,  as  well 


r como  por  la  honra,  se  puede  y dehe  aventurar 

J ooh-moh  pore  lah  on- rah,  say  poo-ai-day  ee  day-bay  ah-ven-toor-a: 
( as  for  — honor,  one  may  and  ought  to  venture 

r la  vida : y por  el  contrario  el  cautiverio  es 

) lah  Tee-dah : ee  pore  ell  con-trar-ee-oh  ell  cah-oo-tee-ver'  ee-ch 

( — life : and  on  th3  contrary  — captivity  is 

^ el  mayor  mal  que  puede  venir  d los  homhres. 

? ell  mah-jor  mal  kay  poo-ai-day  vai-nir  ah  loss  om-bress. 


the  greatest 

evil 

that 

may 

fall 

on  men. 

Don  Quijote,  Cap.  IviiL,  Pt  2. 

II. 

La  senda 

de 

la 

virtud 

es 

7nuy  estrecha ; 

ei 

Lah  sen  dah  day 

lah 

1 vir-tood 

ess 

moo-ee  ess-trai-tchah 

ell 

The  path 

of 

— 

virtue 

is 

very  straight ; 

the 

camino 

del 

vicio 

ancho 

y 

espacioso ; mas 

8US 

.itih-moe-no 

dell  vith-e-o 

an-tchoh 

ee 

ess-path-e-os-soh ; mass 

6008 

road 

of 

vice 

broad 

and 

spacious ; but 

theif 

' Pronounce  the  syllable  vir  as  it  sounds  in  the  English  word  virulent 


APPENDIX. 


411 


( fines  y paradeios  son  diferentes : porque  el  del  vlcio 

? ftn-ess  ee  par-ah-der-osc  sen  dif-fer-en-tess  • pore-kay  ell  dell  vitb-e-o 

( end  and  issue  arc  different;  because  that  of  vice 

( dilatado  y fdcil  acaha  en  muerte ; y el  de  la 

) dee-lah-tah-doh  ee  fath-ill  ah-cab-ah  en  moo-er-tay ; ee  ell  day  lah 

( wide  and  easy  closes  in  death ; and  that  of  — 

C virt'id  angosto  y trahajoso  acaha  en  vida ; v 

^ vii-  tood  an-goss-toh  ee  trah-bah-hos-soh  ah-cah-ba  en  vee-dah ; ee 
f virtue  narrow  and  toilful  leads  to  life ; and 

C no  en  vida  perecedera,  sino  en  la  que  no  tendrd 

) no  en  vee-dah  per-eth-ai-der-ah,  see-no  en  lah  kay  no  ten-drah 

( not  in  life  perishable,  but  in  that  which  not  shall  have 

C Jin 
/ feen 

( end  Don  Quijote,  Cap.  vi.,  Ft.  2. 


III. 

N.  B.  The  following  piece  heis  been  written  with  a view  to  exercise  the 
earner  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  letters  that  present  some  difficulty  ; for 
which  purpose  it  has  been  made  to  consist  of  words  that  contain  them. 
Therefore  it  must  not  be  considered  as  a pattern  of  the  Spanish  style  ol’ 
writing. 

EL  ENCARGO  DE  LA  VIEJECITA. 

Ell  en-car-go  day  lah  ve-ai-heth-ee-tah. 

The  commission  of  the  little  old  woman. 

1 Hijo,  dijo  la  viejecita  gazmona 

> Ee-hoh,  dee-hoh  lah  ve-ai-heth-ee-tah  gath-mo-nyah 
^ Son,  said  the  little-old-woman  prude 

agues  el  haile  con  ins  alharacas. 

ah-gwess  ell  bah-ee-lay  cone  toos  al-ar-ac-ass. 

disturb  the  ball  with  your  vociferations. 


jusilsimo 
hoos-tee-se-moh 
very  just 
los  devengues ; 
loss  day-ven-gess ; 


que  es 
kay  ess 
that  it  is 
euando 
kwan-doh 
when 

de  paciencia,  y 
day  pa';h-ee-enth-ee-ah, 


say 

that 


te 

tay 


paguen 

pah-gain 


al 

page,  m 

all 

pah- hay,  nr 

to  the 

page,  n<  i 

Bien 

conozco 

Be-en 

coh-noth-cob 

Well 

I know 

tus 

gdjes 

toos 

gah-hess 

you  should  be  paid  your 
pero  aguarda 


them  you  have  earned ; but 


perquisites 
con  un  poco 
per-oh  ah-gwar-dah  cone  oon  poh-coh 
wait 


veras 

ver-ass 


que 

kay 


— patience, 
de  quejarte  Ve 

day  Kai-har-tay.  Vay 

to  complain.  Go  now 

dile  al  Jorobado 
dee-lay  al  Hor-oh-bah-doh 
tell  the  Hunchbacked 


and  you  will  see  that  no 
ahora  al  almacen 
ah-or-ah  al  al-matt  -en 
now  to  the  store 


que 

kay 

to 


with 
no  iienes 
noh  tee-en-ess 
you  have 
del 

dell  He-gan-tay, 
of  the  Giants’  sign,  and 
ruegue  enc  irccidisima- 

roo-ai-gay  en-car-eth-ee-dee-set--uiaii 
beg  very  earnestly 


a little 
mot  wo 
moh-tee  rob 
reason 
Gigante,  y 


112 


APPENDIX. 


que 

kay 

to 


menle  al 
meii-tay  al 
\ the 

checer,  y 
cheth-er,  ee 
[ and 

y los  otros 
' ee  loss  ch-tross 
and  the  other 
puedes  hacer 
poo-ai-cless  ath  er 
you  may  do 
Don  Hermogencs 
Don  Er-moh-heri-ess 


que 

kay 

to 


guitarrista 
gee-tar-ris-tali 
guitar-player 
traiga 
trah-ee-gah 
bring  along 
musicos, 
moo-see-coss, 
musicians, 
otros 
oh-tross 
other 
el 
ell 


tenga  sin 
ven-gah  sin 
come  without 
d JuanitOf 

ah  Hoo-an-ee-toh, 
— Jack, 
le 


que  le  encargue. 

kay  ay  en-car-gay. 

which  him  I requesited. 

encargos : recoge 

en-car-goss : rai-coh-hay 

commissions : ask 

ajonjoliy  el 

ah-hon-hoh-lee,  ell 
Don  Hermogenes  for  the  oily  grain,  the 

verizado,  el  unguento  anodino,  i 

vcr-ith-ah-doh,  ell  oon-goo-en-toh  ah-no-dee-nok , e 
verized,  the  unguent  anodyne, 

cicatrizativo,  que  Arrigorriaga 

thic-ah-treeth-ah-tee-voh,  kay  Ar-ree-gor-ree-ah-gah 
cicatrisive,  that  Arrigorriaga 

guardar:  ; cuidado  con  no  hacer  de 

gwar-dar : i coo-ee-dah-doh  cone  no  ath-er  day 

' keep ; take  care  not  to  make  with 


falta  al  ano" 
fal-tah  al  an-oti 
fail  about  dusk 
al  contrahajoy 
al  con-lrah-bah-hoh 
the  bass-viol  player, 
Al  irte 
Al  ir-tay 
By  the  way 
de  casa  de 
day  cas-sah  day 
at  the  house  of 
gengibre  puU 
hen-he-bray  poo^ 
ginger  pul- 
el  emplasio 
ell  em-plas-toh 
the  plaster 
dejo  d 
day-hoh  ah 
left  with  te 
un  hatur^ 


and 
le 
lay 
him 
to  do 


rillo ! De  camino 
ree-lyoh ! Day  cah-mee-noh 
mash ! By  the  way 
Olazaverreteguieta, 
0-lath-ah-ver-rai-tai-gee-ai-tah,  ee 
Olazaverreteguieta,  and 

lla 
' lyah 


pasa  a ver 

pas-sah  ah  ver 

stop  to  see 

y pidele 


toh-doh  oon  ba-tuoi 
all  a 
d Don  Herrnenegildo 
ah  Don  Er-may-nay-hil-doh 
— Don  fiermenegildo 
la  disertacionci- 


que 

kay 

that 


pee-dai-lay  lah 
ask  him  for  the 
Iharguerigoitia  escribio 

E-bar-gain-go-ee-tee-al  es-cree-bee-oh 


dis-er-tath^ee-on-thii- 
short  disquisition 


agiotage, 
ah-he-o-tah-hay 
stock-jobbing 
calle  de 


Ibarguengoitia  wrote 

Dt  al  borceguinei  7,  que 
Dee  al  borth-ai-gee-ner-oh,  kay 
Tell  — buskin-maker,  who 
Barrionuevo 


sobre 

soh-bray 

on 


que 


cal-lyay  day  Bar-ree-oh-noo-ai-voh  kay 


venga 

ven-gah 


ah 


vive 

vee-vay 

lives 

verme, 

ver-may. 


en 

en 

in 


el 

elJ 

the 

la 

lah 

No 

No 


street  - 

- Barrionuevo 

to  come  to  see  me.  Do  not 

Divides 

truer  de 

casa  de 

dona 

Geronv'ia 

el-veedess 

trah-er'  day 

cas-sah  day 

doh-nyah 

Her-oh-nec  ma 

forget 

to  bring  from 

the  hou.se  of 

donna 

Gerome 

Juarez 

el  manguitOy 

y 

la 

cajitUy 

con  los 

zarcillos 

lloo-ar-eth 

oil  man-gee  toh, 

ee 

lah 

cah-he-tah, 

cone  loss 

tharth  eel-lyos 

Juarez 

the  muff, 

and  the 

little  box. 

with  the 

ear-rings 

y 


dijes  de 
dee-hess  day 
and  trinkets  of 


Gertruditas. 

Her-troo-dee-tass. 

Gertruditas 


Miray 

Mir-ah, 

Mind, 


no 

no 

not 


juegues 
hoo-ai-gess 
to  play 


la 

lab 

thi 


APPENDIX. 


413 


calle 

y 

pierdas 

to  do 

lo  que 

traes. 

Antes 

de 

cal-lyay 

ee 

pee-er-dass 

toh-doh  lo  kay 

trah-ess. 

An-tess 

day 

street 

and 

lose 

all 

that 

you  bring. 

Before 

going 

saliVi 

haja 

y di 

d 

Catujita 

que  el 

gigote 

que 

bah-jah  ee  dee 
go  down  and  tell 
para  el  hijo 
par-ah  ell  ee-hoh 
for  the  son 
haga 
ah-gah 

she  must  make 
de  ajo  y la 
’ so  pah  day  ah-hoh  ee  lah 


ah 


Cah-too-hee-tah 
— dear  Kate 
del  cojo 

dell  coh-hoh 

of  the  lame  man 


kay  ell 
that  the 
se  le 
say  lay 
— it 


he-go-tay 
hash 
comio 
CO  rne-ol 
eat 


kay 

that 

e/ 


^ gato : que 

< gah-toh:  kay 
' cat : that 

sopa 


ha 

inmediatamente  nn  poco  di 
in-may-de-ah-tah-men'tay  oor.  poh-coh  day 
immediately  some 

envte  d mi  ahijaditOf  que 
en-vee-ay  ah  me  ah-ee-han-dee-toh  kay 


soup  — 

garlic 

and  it 

send 

to  my  little  godson,  who 

estard 

muerto 

de 

hambre. 

Encierra  el  perro 

ess-tar-ah' 

moo-er-toh  day 

am-bray. 

Enth-ee-er-rah  ell  pair-roh 

will  be 

dying 

with 

hunger. 

Lock  up  the  dog 

para 

que  no 

haga 

ruido 

en  el  corredorcillo : 

par-ah 

kay  no 

ah-gah 

roo-ee-doh  en  ell  cor-ray-dor-thil-lyoh  * 

( in  order 
C cuelga 
< coo-el-ga 


that  not  may  make 
las  j aulas  de 

lass  hah-oo-lass  day 


the 
jilgueros 


hang  up  the 
te,  porque  me 
pore-kay  may 
because  me 
pollitos 
pol-lyee-toss 
chicken 


cages  of 
molestan 
mole-ess-tan 
they  disturb 
al  gallinero, 
ai  gal-lyee-ner-oh 
to  the  hencoop. 


noise 
los 

loss  hil-gay-ross 
the 
con 
cone 
with 


passage : 


los 
loss 
the 

tate  quietOf  estudia  hien 
tah-tay  kee-ai-toh,  ess-too-dee-ah  bee-en 
be  still,  study  well 

diez  veces  diez  hacen  ciento ; 

dee-eth  veth-ess  dee-eth  atn-en  the-en-to , 

ten  times  ten  make 

la  pronunciacion  clara 
lah  pro-noonth-ee-ahth-ee-on  clar-ah  ee  vel-oth 
the  pronunciation  clear  and  quick 

DESPROPORCIONADISIMAMENTE,  la  maS 

des-pro-porth-ee-o-nah-diss-see-mah-men-tay^  lah  mass 
without  any  proportion  whatever,  the  more 
hallards  en  Castellano. 
al-lye-ar-as8  en  Cas-tel-lye-an-oh. 
ym  may  find  in  Spanish. 


en  el  gabinc- 
en  ell  gah-bee-nai 
linnets  in  the  cabinet, 

sus  gorgcos.  Lleva 

soos  gore-hay-oss  Lye-ai-vah 
their  chirping.  Car*y 

Cuando  vuelvas^  es- 
Kwan-doh  voo-el-vass,  esjf- 
When  you  return, 

la  tahla,  hasta 

lah  tah-blah,  ass-tah 

the  numeration-table,  as  far  as 
ejercitate  en 

ai-herth-ee -tah-tay  cn 


hundred ; exercise  yourself 
y veloz  de  la  palahra 


day 

of 


lah 
the 
larga 
lar-gah 
long 


que 

kay 

that 


pah  lah-brak 
word 
tal  vet 
tal  vetb 
perhap? 


414 


APPENDIX, 


COMMON  SPANISH  ABBREVIATIONS. 


A.  C 

Alio  Cristiano, 

tn  the  year  of  Ch^st 

a.’ 

Arroba,  or  arrobas, 

twenty-five  pounds. 

As. 

Anos, 

years. 

A.  A. 

Autores, 

authors. 

A.  V.  E. 

A.  V."  Es.®‘®, 

to  Y,  E,  (Your  Excd 
lency.) 

Adm.** 

Administrador, 

administrator. 

Ag.“ 

Agosto, 

August, 

Ain.® 

Amigo, 

friend. 

An.** 

Antonio, 

Anthony, 

Ang.» 

Angosto, 

narrow. 

App.**  App.®* 

Apostolico,  ca. 

apostolical. 

Art. 

Articulo, 

article. 

Arzbpo. 

Arzobispo, 

archbishop. 

At,® 

Atento, 

respectful. 

B. 

Beato, 

blessed,  ~ 

Barr. 

Barril, 

barrel. 

B.' 

Bachiller, 

bachelor. 

B.  L.  M. 

Beso  6 besa  las  manos. 

I kiss,  or  he  kisses  tht 
hands. 

B.  L.  P. 

Beso  6 besa  los  pies, 

I kiss,  or  he  kisses  the 
feet. 

3 mo  p e 

Beatisimo  Padre, 

most  blessed  father  * 

C.  A.  R. 

Cat.®  Ap."  Rom.® 

Cath,  Apost.  Rom, 

C.  M.  B. 

Cuyas  manos  beso. 

whose  hands  I kiss. 

C.  P.  B. 

Cuyos  pies  beso, 

whose  feet  I kiss 

Cam.® 

Camara, 

chamber. 

Cap.® 

Capitulo, 

chapter. 

Cap.® 

Capiian, 

captain. 

Capp.® 

Capellan, 

chaplain. 

CoU 

Coiumna, 

column. 

Comis.® 

Comisario, 

commissary. 

Comp.® 

Compania, 

company. 

Cons.® 

Consejo, 

council. 

Conv.*® 

Conveniente, 

convenient. 

Corr.*® 

Corriente, 

current. 

^ do 
vy. 

Cuando, 

when. 

C.*®  C.*® 

Cuanto,  ta. 

how  much. 

D.  or  D.®  or  D.® 

Don,  Dona, 

mister,  mistress 

D,  D. 

Doctores, 

doctors. 

0 ' or  D,®' 

Doctor, 

doctor. 

APPENDIX. 


413 


D 

Dios, 

God. 

D."“(lha. 

. Dicho,  dicha. 

said^t  ditio. 

Dro. 

Derecho, 

right  or  duty. 

Die  " 10." 

Diciembre, 

December, 

Doz. 

Docena, 

dozen. 

Doin.® 

Domingo, 

Sunday. 

Ecc.®  Ecc.* 

Eclesiastico,  ca. 

ecclesiastic. 

Enm/“,  vale. 

Enmendado, 

amended^  valid. 

En.® 

Enero, 

January. 

Es.“®  Es 

Escelentisimo,  ma. 

most  excellent. 

Es.“®  p." 

Escribano  publico. 

Not.*  Public 

Fho.  fha. 

Fecho,  fecha. 

dated. 

Feb.® 

Febrero, 

February. 

Foi 

Folio, 

folio. 

Fr. 

Fray, 

brother  oj  certain  reli- 
gious orders. 

Fr. 

Frey, 

A title  of  the  knights  of 
certain  orders 

Fran.®® 

Francisco, 

Francis. 

Frnz. 

Fernandez, 

Fernandez. 

Gue.  or  gde. 

Guarde, 

save,  preserve. 

Gra. 

Gracia, 

grace. 

Gen.’  or  (adj.)  gral.  General, 

general. 

Id.  Yd. 

Idem,  . 

ditto. 

Tgla. 

Iglesia, 

church. 

11.® 

Ilustre, 

illustrious. 

11  mo  J1  ma 

Ilustrisimo,  ma. 

most  illustrious. 

Inq.®^ 

Inquisidor, 

inquisitor. 

Intend.*® 

Intendente, 

intendant. 

Jbs. 

Jesus, 

Jesus. 

J.  U.  I 

Jesus,  Maria  y Jose, 

Jesus,  Mary,  and  Joseph 

Jph. 

Josef,  Jose, 

Joseph. 

Jn. 

Juan, 

John. 

L.  L. 

Leyes, 

laws. 

Lib. 

Libro, 

book. 

IJb.Mb.  , 

Libras, 

pounds. 

Lin. 

Linea, 

line. 

Lic.^“ 

Licenciado, 

licentiate. 

L.  S. 

Lugar  del  sello. 

place  of  the  seal. 

M.  P.  S 

Muy  poderoso  Senor, 

most  powerful  Lord, 

M.’ 

Madre, 

Mother. 

M.®' 

Mayor, 

elder,  major. 

M.®  a • 

Muchos  anos, 

many  years. 

116 

APPENDIX. 

Mag/ 

Magestad, 

Majesty  > 

Man.' 

Manuel, 

Manuel, 

May."* 

Mayordomo, 

Steward, 

Mig,' 

Miguel, 

Michael, 

Mntro 

Ministro, 

minister. 

Mrd. 

Merced, 

favor,  worship. 

Mrn. 

Martin, 

Martin, 

Mras. 

Muestras, 

patterns. 

Mrnz. 

Martinez, 

Martinez, 

Mro. 

Maestro, 

master. 

Mr&. 

Maravedis, 

maravedis. 

Ms. 

Muchos, 

many. 

MS. 

Manuscnto, 

manuscript. 

MSS. 

Manuscritos, 

manuscripts. 

N. 

Fulano, 

such  a one. 

N.  C.  M. 

Nro.  Cat.®  Mon  area, 

our  Cath,  Mon, 

.N.  S. 

Nuestro  Senor, 

our  Lord, 

s.  s.* 

Nuestra  Senora, 

our  Lady, 

Nro.  nra. 

Nuestro,  nuestra, 

our. 

Nov.*  9.'* 

Noviembre, 

November, 

Obpo. 

Obispo, 

Bishop, 

Oct."  8." 

Octubre, 

October, 

On.  oiiz. 

Onza,  onzas. 

ounce,  doubloor,^. 

Ord.“  ord. 

Orden,  ordenes. 

order,  orders. 

P.  D. 

Posdata, 

postscript. 

P.*q 

Para  que. 

for,  in  order  thta'i 

P.* 

Padre, 

father. 

P.* 

Pedro, 

Peter, 

P.' 

Por, 

/or,  per,  by. 

P.* 

Pies,  pesos, 

feet,  dollars. 

pt. 

Plata, 

silver  or  plate. 

p te 

Parte, 

part. 

p to 

Puerto, 

port. 

Pag. 

Pagina, 

page. 

Pag.*' 

Pagamento, 

payment. 

Pza. 

Pieza, 

piece. 

PL 

Plana, 

trowe„,  page. 

Pror 

Procurador 

attorney. 

Publ* 

Publico, 

public. 

Prcv/’ 

Provisor, 

provtsor. 

Pral. 

Principal, 

principal. 

p mt  p io 

Proximo  pasaao, 

last  past. 

aos 

Quintales, 

quintals 

APPEK  DIX. 


417 


Q or  q.* 

Que, 

that. 

Q.“ 

Quien, 

who. 

Q.  S.  M.  13. 

Que  sus  manos  besa, 

W,  K,  Y,  H. 

R.'  V - 

Real,  reales  velloii, 

real,  reales,  silver  ctm, 

R.“* 

Reverendisimo, 

most  reverend. 

R.  R.****  R.*** 

Reverendo,  reverenda, 

reverend. 

P.  M.  Fr. 

Padre  maestro  fray, 

reverend  father  and  mui 
ter. 

R.‘‘ 

Recibi, 

I received. 

Rec.* 

Recibo, 

receipt. 

Resp. 

Respuesta, 

answer. 

S. 

San  6 Santo,  Santa, 

saint,  holy. 

S.  M. 

Su  magestad. 

his  majesty. 

S.'  or  S « S." 

Senor,  Senora, 

Sir,  Madam. 

S.  S.^ 

Su  Santidad, 

his  Holiness. 

SS.  S/*** 

Senores, 

gentlemen,  Messrs. 

S.  S.  S. 

Su  seguro  servidor, 

your  faithful  servant 

Seb.“ 

Sebastian, 

Sebastian. 

Sop."  or  7.’’" 

Setiembre, 

September. 

S.“*  Secret.® 

Secretana, 

secretarifs  office. 

S.®  Secret.® 

Secretario, 

secretary. 

Ser.“®  or  ““ 

Serenisimo,  ma, 

most  serene. 

Serv.® 

Servicio, 

service. 

Serv.' 

Servidor, 

servant. 

Sig.- 

Siguiente, 

following. 

SS.“® 

Santisimo, 

most  holy. 

SS.“' 

Santisimo(el  Sacramento) host,  the  holy  sacru 
merit. 

SS.“®  P.® 

Santisimo  padre. 

most  holy  father. 

SS.®* 

Escribano, 

notary,  scrivener^ 

S.  S.  P.  P. 

Santos  padres. 

holy  fathers. 

Sup.®* 

Suplica, 

entreaty,  request. 

Sup.*® 

Suplicante, 

petitioner. 

Super.*® 

Superintendente, 

superintendent. 

S.  Y.  0 

Salvo  yerro  u omision, 

errors  or  omissions  cx 
cep  ted. 

Ten.*® 

Teniente, 

lieutenant. 

Tesor.® 

Tesorero, 

treasurer. 

I’om. 

Tomo, 

volume 

Tpo. 

Tiempo, 

time 

Ton.' 

Tonelada, 

^on. 

T.-aL 

Tribunal, 

tribunal. 

V.  M. 

Vuestra  Magestad, 

your  Majesty, 

APPENDIX 


V.  R. 

Vuestra  Real, 

your  Royal. 

Ult* 

Ultimo, 

last. 

V.  V. 

Venerable, 

venerable. 

V.  A. 

Vuestra  Alteza, 

your  highness. 

V.  B.* 

Vuestra  Beatitud, 

your  beatitude. 

V.  I 

Vuestra  Il.“% 

your  grace. 

V.  E.  or  V.  Ex. 

Vuecelencia, 

your  excellency. 

V.  G 

Verbi  gracia. 

for  example. 

Vm.  Vmd.  V.  Vd.^ 

Vuestra,  vuesa  merced, 

you,  your  worship,  y ia\ 

or  usted. 

favor. 

V.  P. 

Vuestra  Paternidad, 

your  paternity 

V.  R.“ 

Vuestra  Reverencia, 

your  reverence. 

\ S.%  Usia, 

V.®  Sehoria, 

your  lordship,  honor. 

V.  S.  I. 

Vuesehoria  Ilustrisima, 

your  most  illustf'ioud 
reverence. 

Vuestra  Santidad, 

your  holiness. 

v.« 

Real  vellon. 

real  of  bullion,  corn 

Vol. 

Volumen, 

volume. 

V.  S.  G. 

Vuelta  si  gusta. 

please  turn  over 

Vro.  vra. 

Vuestro,  vuestra. 

your. 

X mo 

Diezmo, 

tenth  and  tithe. 

Xp.*» 

Cristo, 

Christ. 

Cristiano, 

Christian. 

Xptobal, 

Cristobal, 

Christopher. 

In  the  Old  Books, — 


a stands  for  an  or  am. 
e “ en  or  em. 

I “ in  or  im. 


o stands  for  on  or  om. 
u un  or  tun 

q “ que 


OTHER  ABBREVIATIONS. 

§ is  read  Pdrrafo,  a paragraph 
Mily  a thousand. 

J.  M.  J.,  a1  the  beginning  of  writings  of  religious  persons,  means  Jesus, 
Maria,  Jose. 

The  Jesuits  always  be-gin  and  finish  their  letters  and  other  writings  with 
Jhs,  which  means  and  is  read  Jesus. 


* An  s is  added  to  these  abbreviations  when  more  than  one  person  is  ad- 
dressed ; and  then  they  stand  for  vuestras  mercedes,  vuesas  mercldes  oi 
ustedesy  in  the  plural.  At  present  the  word  usted  and  its  plural  are  ex- 
pn^saed  by  a V.  or  VV. 


APPENDIX. 


419 


ETYMOLOGY. 

There  are  in  Spanish  nine  sorts  of  words,  or,  as  ihey  are  commonlj 
jailed.  Parts  of  Speech;  namely,  the  Article,  the  Noun,  the  Pronoun, 
die  Verb,  the  Participle,  the  Adverb,  the  Preposition,  the  Conjunction, 
find  the  Interjection 

The  meaning  of  a word  must  be  first  ascertained,  in  order  to  classify  it 
Example : — Claro,  clear.  Ese  claro  (a  substantive)  es  muy  vequeho,  that 
skylight  is  very  small.  Un  dia  claro^  (an  adjective,)  a cleai  day  El  no 
kahla  claro,  (an  adverb,)  he  does  not  speak  plain. 

Take  notice,  that  henceforth  the  numbers  placed  thus  (1)  after  a word 
or  at  the  end  of  a sentence  or  a paragraph,  refer  to  the  page  which  the 
learner  must  consult  in  the  preceding  Method. 


ARTICLE. 

There  are  two  articles : the  Indefinite  and  the  Definite. 


indefinite  article. 


Must ulinc  Sing.  A or  an.  I/n,  (38.)  Plur.  Some.  Unos  or  algunoa 

Feminine  “ “ “ Una,  (162.)  “ “ Unas  or  algunas 


definite  article. 

Masculine  Sing  The.  El,  (9.)  Plur  The.  Los,  (26.) 

Feminine  “ “ La,  (159.)  “ “ Las,  (159.) 

When  the  masculine  definite  article  el  comes  after  the  preposition  d (to) 
or  d ,s  (of,  from,)  the  e is  suppressed,  and  the  two  words  are  written  as  one  ; 
thus,  al,  del,  instead  of  d el,  de  el.  The  pronoun  el  (he,  it)  is  distinguished 
by  the  accent,  and  it  is  always  written  separately  from  the  said  prepositions  ; 
thus  d el,  de  el. 


Ohs.  El,  los,  (34,)  la,  las,  are  articles  when  they  are  before  a noun,  to 
point  out  how  far  its  signification  extends  ; but  they  are  pronouns  when  el 
B the  subject  of  a verb,  or  comes  after  a preposition ; and  la,  (her,  it,)  los, 
'as,  (them,)  are  governed  by  a verb ; as— 


The  bed  of  Don  Quixote  was  fore- 
most, and  next  to  it  Sancho  made 
his. 


El  lecho  de  Don  Quijote  estaha 
primero,  y luego  junto  d dl  hizc 
Sancho  el  suyo. 

Don  Quijote,  cap  xvi.  pt  i. 


NOUNS 


Nouns  are  either  substantive  or  adjective. 

'Souns  Substantive  have  Persons,  Numbers,  Genders,  and  Cases. 


420 


APPENDIX. 


PERSONS. 

There  are  three  persons ; namely,  the  speaker ^ wlio  is  called  the 
person;  the  person  spoken  to,  who  is  styled  the  second  person  and  thfl 
person  or  thing  spoken  of,  which  is  said  to  be  the  third  person  : as — 


Make  haste,  son  Sancho,  (second 
person,)  and  tell  (second  person) 
that  Lady  of  the  hawk,  (third 
parson,)  that  I,  the  knight  of  the 
lions,  (first  person,)  send  my  re- 
spects to  her  exceeding  beauty. 

The  speaker  seldom  refers  to  himself  by  name. 

When  brutes,  or  inanimate  objects,  stand  as  speakers  or  persons  spoken 
to,  they  are  said  to  be  personified  ; as — 


Corre,  hijo  Sancho,  y di  a aquello 
seuora  del  azor,  que  yo,  cl  cab  i 
Hero  de  los  leones,  bcso  las  mano* 
2 su  gran  fermosara. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxx.  pt.  ii 


Oh  Jars  of  Toboso,  which  have  re- 
called to  my  mind  the  dear  ob- 
ject of  my  greatest  sorrow  ! 


; O tohosescas  Tinajas,  que  me  A«- 
be  is  traido  a la  memoria  la  dula 
prcnda  de  mi  mayor  omargura  ! 
Don  Quijote,  cap.  xviii.  pt.  ii. 


There  are  two  numbers,  the  Singular  and  the  Plural.  (Less.  IX.  p.  26.) 

Rule  1.  Nouns  ending  in  a short  vowel,  that  is  to  say,  a vowel  having 
no  accent  over  it,  form  their  plural  by  adding  s to  the  singular ; as,  head, 
cabeza,  heads,  cabezas ; eye,  ojo,  eyes,  ojos. 

Rule  2.  Nouns  terminating  in  a long  vowel,  that  is  to  say,  a vowel 
naving  an  accent  over  it ; or  in  any  consonant,  or  in  y,  add  es  to  the  sin- 
gular ; as,  ruby,  rubi,  rubies,  rubies ; lion,  Icon,  lions,  leones ; law,  ley, 
laws,  leyes.  Except  papa,  mama,  pie,  &lc.  Maravedi,  the  smallest 
Spanish  brass  coin,  has  three  plurals,  rnaravedies,  maravedis,  maravedises. 
Nouns  terminating  in  z change  it  into  c,  or  retain  it  and  add  ts  to  form  the 
plural  ; as,  cross,  cruz,  crosses,  cruces,  or  cruzes. 

Rule  3.  Nouns  of  two  syllables  ending  in  s,  being  accented  on  the  pe 
nnltimate,  admit  of  no  change  for  the  plural,  and  distinguish  it  by  means 
Df  the  article  ; thus,  Monday,  lunes,  Mondays,  los  lunes : — 


He  had  lentils  on  Fridays,  and  an 
addition  of  a pigeon  on  Sundays. 


El  tenia  lentejas  los  vi^rnes,  y al- 
gun  palomino  de  aiiadidura  lop 
domingos. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  i.  pt.  i 
The  same  is  to  be  observed  with  nouns  compound  of  a verb,  and  a nciir 
plural  ; as,  the  penknife,  el  cortaplumas,  the  penknives,  los  cortapiurnas 
There  are  some  nouns  with  a plural  termination  without  reference  to  an\ 
lingular  ; as. 


Alfilcres, 

Esposas, 

Griilos, 


ladies*  pinmoney. 

handcuffs. 

fetters. 


Albricias,  a present  for  good  news 
Alicates,  pincers. 

Preces,  prayers,  &lc. 


(zeal,)  has  no  pioral . Zelos,  (jcaloasv,)  has  no  singular. 


ikPPENDIX. 


421 


Don  and  Doila,  as  Spanish  titles  for  a gentleman  or  lady^,  are  not  used  in 
Jie  plural  ; and  in  conformity  with  the  present  custom  they  are  placed  only 
t)efor6  prenomens,  or  baptismal  names;  as,  Messrs.  Nicholas  and  Leandro 
F.  Moratin,  Don  Nicolas  y Don  Leandro  Fernandez  de  Moratin.  Mr. 
Capmanv,  el  Senor  Capmany,  and  not  Don  Capmany. 

GENDEa. 

There  are  two  genders,  the  masculine  and  the  feminine. 

Every  Ac,  or  male  animal,  is  of  the  masculine  gender ; as,  boy,  mucha^* 
cho  ; lion,  Icon.  Every  sAe,  or  female  animal,  is  of  ♦he  feminine  gender ; 
£s,  girl,  muchacha  ; lioness,  Icona. 

The  collective  nouns  g'cnfc,  people  ; turba,  torpa,  crowd;  multitude 
multitude  ; plebe,  common  people  ; juveniud,  youth  , vejez,  old  age  ; asam- 
bleOi  assembly;  ave,  bird;  Aes^ia,  beast,  &c.,  require  the  articles,  the  ad- 
jectives, and  the  pronouns  that  agree  with  or  refer  to  them,  to  be  of  the 
feminine  gender  ; as — 


The  coach  must  belong  to  some 
travelling  people. 


El  coche  debe  de  ser  de  algunt, 
gente  pasagera. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  viii.  pt.  i. 

Nouns  signifying  dignities,  offices,  trades,  professions,  &c.,  proper  to  men, 
are  masculine  ; and  those  proper  to  mv omen,  feminine. 

Remark.  There  are  some  nouns  of  animals  which  custom*  has  made  cc 
express  both  genders,  under  either  the  masculine  or  feminine  termination 
preceded  by  the  corresponding  article.  Nouns  of  this  description  are  called 
ill  the  grammatical  language  epicenos,  epicene.  Such  are  the  following 


MASCULINE. 


El  avestruz, 
El  buitre, 

El  cisne, 

El  cuervo, 
El  gilguero, 
El  ruiseTwr, 


the  ostrich, 
the  vulture, 
the  swan, 
the  crow, 
the  goldfinch 
the  nightingale. 


I FExMlNINE. 

La  ardilla,  the  squirrel. 


La  becada, 

La  calandria, 
La  grulla, 

La  pc^'diz, 

La  tor  tug  a. 


the  woodcock, 
the  lark, 
the  crane, 
the  partridge, 
the  turtle. 


The  rest  of  these  nouns  will  be  found  in  the  dictionary. 

The  word  macho,  male,  or  hembra,  female,  with  the  corresponding  ai 
licle,  is  prefixed  to  any  noun  of  this  kind  when  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish 
the  sex  ; as,  the  partridge,  la  perdiz — the  male,  or  he  partridge,  el  macho 
de  la  perdiz  ; the  sparrow,  el  gorrion — the  female,  or  she  sparrow,  la  hem- 
bra  del  gorrion. 

Obs.  A.  The  pronouns  he  or  sne,  and  the  nouns  male  and  female,  arc 
Lot  lianslated  into  Spanish  when  the  gender  may  be  distinguished  by 
changing  the  termination  of  the  noun  masculine;  as, 

A wmlf,  un  lobo.  I A she  wolf,  una  loha. 

A male  servant,  un  criado.  | A female  servant,  una  criada. 


* Si  volet  usus,  quern  penes  arbitrium  est,  ct  jus,  et  norma  loguendt.  - 
lIOrtACE. 


422 


AlPENDIX. 


RULK3  TO  FORM  THE  FEMININE  OF  COMMON  NOUNS  OF  AX  MATE  BE1N06. 

Rule  1.  Common  substantives  ending  in  o,  and  the  most  part  of  tliOBC 
in  e,  change  the  o or  c into  a to  form  the  feminine  ; as^ 


Son, 

Brother, 

A male  relative, 


hijo, 

hermano 

pariente. 


Daughter, 

Sister, 

A female  relative. 


hija. 

hermana. 

parienta. 


Except  tcstigo,  (witness,)  that  admits  of  no  change,  and  distinguishes  the 
gonder  by  the  article ; thus,  cZ,  or  la  testigo. 

Ohs,  B,  The  feminine  nouns  formed  out  of  the  substantives  signifying 
iignity,  trade,  &c.,  mean  not  only  the  female  whc  enjoys  the  dignity,  or 
follows  the  same  trade  or  profession,  but  most  frequently  the  wife,  and  even 
die  daughter  of  the  person  that  has  the  dignity,  or  follows  the  trade,  &c. ; as, 


Superiora, 

Capiiana, 


a female  superior, 
a captain’s  wife. 


Conjitero, 

Conjitera. 


confectioner 


Conjitera,  may  signify  a female  confectioner,  or  a confectioner’s  wife  cr 
daughter. 

Rule  2.  Most  of  the  common  nouns  ending  in  an  and  on,  add  an  a foi 
the  feminine ; as, 


Capitan, 

Patron, 

Pastor, 


captain. 

patron 

shepherd. 


Capitana,  a female  commander. 

Patrona,  a patroness. 

Pastora,  a shepherdess. 


Rule  3.  National  nouns,  that  is,  nouns  that  express  the  nation  or  coun- 
try of  persons,  or  where  the  thing  is  produced,  or  comes  from,  whether  they 
be  substantive  or  adjective,  if  they  terminate  in  o,  change  it  into  a ; and  il 
they  end  in  a consonant,  add  an  a to  form  the  feminine  ; as, 

Americano,  Americana,  American.  | Espaiiol,  Espanola,  Spaniard. 

Rule  4.  Common  substantives  ending  in  a,  and  most  of  those  termina- 
ting in  en  or  ir,  admit  of  no  change,  and  distinguish  the  gender  by  the  ar- 
ticles— (Obs.  D,  162;)  as, 

Un  pensionista,  a pensioner.  I El  mdrtir,  the  martyr. 

Una  pensionista,  “ | La  mdrtir,  the  female  martyr. 

Rule  5.  Almost  all  words  compound  of  the  substantives  man  or  woman 
And  an  adjective,  distinguish  their  gender,  in  Spanish,  by  prefixing  to  them 
Ihe  corresponding  article  and  omitting  said  substantives  ; as, 

Unjooen,  a young  man.  I Unajoven,  a young  woman. 

Los  Ingleses,  the  Englishmen.  | Las  Inglesas,  the  English  women. 

Man  and  woman  are  translated  when  a particular  emphasis  is  placed  on 
diem 

Obs.  C.  Many  of  the  nouns  compound  of  said  substantives,  or  of  an  ad- 
jective, are  translated  in  Spanish  by  a single  word,  to  be  found  in  the  dic- 
tionary, in  the  masculine  gender,  out  of  which  the  feminine  may  be  formed 
XI  conformity  with  the  foregoing  rules  ; as, 

El  lechero,  the  milkman.  ' La  lechera,  the  milk-woman 

Un  naranjero,  an  orange-man.  | Una  naranjera,  an  orange-woman 


APPENDIX.  ^ 423 

SuLE  6 Some  nouns  express  their  gender  by  diffeienl  termini^tioua 
See  Lesson  LVI.,  page  246.) 

Rule  7.  Some  nouns  distinguish  their  gender  by  different  words.  'See 
Lesson  LVI.,  page  247.) 


GENDER  OF  NOUNS  NEUTER  IN  ENGLISH 

The  nouns  that  are  neuter  in  English  are  masculine  or  feminine  in 
Spanish,  according  to  their  signification  or  their  termination. 


BY  THE  SIGNiriCATIUN. 

Arte^  canal,  capital,  corte,  dote,  /rente,  guardia,  orden,  mar,  arc 
masculine  or  feminine  according  to  their  meaning,  to  wit: 

Arte,  (art,)  in  the  singular,  may  be  used  in  either  gender ; in  the  plural, 
only  in  the  feminine.  Should  arte  be  qualified  by  an  adjective,  the  latter 
agrees  with  it  in  the  feminine  termination  ; as, 

El  delicado  gusto  de  V.  en  el  arte  I Your  fine  taste  in  the  rhymic  art. 
ritmica.  I Moratin,  Comedia  Nueva. 

Mar,  (sea,)  when  it  is  alone,  may  be  used  in  either  gender.  When  it  is 
accompanied  by  the  adjectives  Mediterranean,  White,  Red,  &c.,  it  is  mascu- 
line ; as,  el  or  la  mar ; el  mar  Rojo.  With  other  adjectives  it  is  generally 
feminine : la  mar  estaha  algo  mas  sosegada,  (Cervantes.)  However,  the 
ase  id  not  fixed. 

Orden  (order)  is  masculine  when  it  signifies  arrangement,  or  refers  to 
architecture  ; as. 

All  was  in  good  order.  | Todo  estaha  en  hucn  orden. 

The  edifice  is  of  the  Ionic  order.  | El  edificio  es  del  orden  Jonico. 
Orden,  signifying  command,  or  a religious  or  military  institution,  is  femi- 
nine ; as, 

1 received  your  order.  I Yo  recihi  la  orden  de  V. 

Two  friars  of  the  order  of  St.  Bene-  Dos  frailes  de  la  orden  de  San  Be- 
diet.  nito.  Cervantes. 


Dueno,  (master,  owner,  lord,  mistress,  lady,)  in  a figurative  sense,  is 
used  only  in  the  masculine  termination  for  both  sexes  ; as. 

From  that  instant  I made  he"  mis-  Desde  aquel  instante  la  hice  duenc 
tress  of  my  heart  (senora)  de  mi  corazon. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xliv.  pt.  i 


masculine. 

Canal,  Erie  canal,  el  canal  Erie. 

Capital,  a slock  of  funds. 

Corte,  the  sharp  edge  of  a tool,  a 
paltein  for  a dress,  means,  &c. 
Dote,  a gift  of  nature,  endowment 
Frenie,  the  front 


feminine. 

Canal,  the  gutter,  or  leader  of  watei 
from  the  roof  of  a house. 

Capital,  the  chief  city  of  a country. 
Corte,  the  court,  the  persons  that 
compose  it,  courtship,  attendance 
Dote,  dowry,  dower. 

Frente,  the  forehead. 


424 


APPENDIX. 


MASCULINE. 

. soldier  of 


the  king’s 


Quardia, 
guard. 

Margen,  the  margin  of  a book,  &c 
Parte,  a report,  information. 

<&c.,  &c. 


FEMININE 

Guardia,  a guard,  a body  of  soldiow 

Margen,  the  bank  of  a river 
Parte,  the  part  of  a vi^hole. 

&c.,  &c 

Alhald,  a permit,  or  certificate  of  a custom-house,  (little  used  ;)  anatejUG, 
anathema  ; azucar,  sugar  ; cisma,  schism  ; cutis,  the  fine  skin  ; emldcma, 
emblem  ; puentc,  bridge  ; tribu,  tribe,  &c.,  may  be  used  as  masculine  oi 
feminine 

BY  THE  TERMINATION. 

Ohs.  D The  proper  names  of  kingdoms,  provinces,  cities,  &lc.,  when 
they  stand  alone,  are  generally  of  the  gender  of  their  termination  ; as, 

Spain  is  almost  insulated  from  the 
rest  of  the  continent 


Espana  estd  casi  aislada  del  resto 
del  continente. 

But  when  they  are  qualified  by  common  nouns  of  dilferent  terminations, 
they  agree  with  them  accordingly  ; as, 


Toledo  es  una  antigua  ciudad. 
Sevilla  fue  un  reino  poderoso. 


Toledo  is  an  ancient  city 
Seville  was  a powerful  kingdom. 


The  following  general  rules  are  subject  to  many  exceptions,  of  which 
Duly  the  most  usual  are  pointed  out. 

Rule  1. — Nouns  ending  in  a uvq  feminine,  (162.) 

Except  most  of  those  derived  from  the  Greek  ; as, 

Antipoda.  antipode.  [ Clima,  climate,  &c. 

And  also  the  following : — 


Dia, 

day. 

Guarda-costa. 

, custom -hous 

Mapa, 

map. 

\ Paragua, 

umbrella. 

Idioma, 

idiom. 

Viva, 

huzza. 

Poema, 

poem.  1 

1 &c. 

&c. 

ULE  2. — Nouns  ending  in  d or  ad 

are  feminine. 

Except — 

Ardid, 

stratagem.  1 

Sud, 

south 

Cesped, 

turf. 

1 &c. 

&c 

. B. — A great  many  of  the  words  ending  in  English  in  ty,  may  1 
1 into  Spanish  by  changing  it  into  dad  ; as — 

Activity, 

actividad,  | 

Veracity, 

veracidad. 

ULE  3. — Nouns  ending  in  e,  i,  o,  or  u,  are  masculine  Except- 

Calle, 

street. 

Noche, 

night. 

Came, 

flesh,  meat 

Tarde, 

afternoon 

CLase, 

class. 

Llave, 

key. 

E specie, 

species. 

Leche, 

milk. 

Suerte, 

chance 

Nieve, 

snow. 

Hanibre, 

hunger. 

Nave,  nao, 

vessel. 

Costumbre, 

custom. 

Mano, 

hand. 

Mente, 

mind 

&c 

APPENDIX. 


425 


fiuEa  4. — N&ins  ending  in  Z,  n, 


Miel, 

honey. 

Col, 

cabbage. 

Imdgen, 

image. 

Razon, 

reason. 

Voz, 

voice. 

Tos, 

cough. 

Cruz, 

cross. 

&LC. 

&c. 

r,  s,  or  z. 

are  masculine.  Except^ 

Luz, 

light. 

Flor, 

flower 

Nariz, 

nose. 

Nihez, 

childhood 

Vejez- 

old  age 

Nuez, 

nut 

Paz, 

peace. 

&.C. 

&.C. 

Rule  5. — Nouns  ending  in  ion  are  feminine.  Except — 
Sarampion,  measles.  I Turhionj  shower 

Bastion,  bastion.  | &.c.  &c. 


CASES. 

There  are  three  cases:  the  Subject,  or  nominative  case;  the  Object,  ot 
tiie  direct  objective  case  ; and  the  Complement,  or  the  indirect  objective 
case,  (69.)  The  object  is  the  accusative  in  Latin ; and  the  complement 
answers  to  the  dative,  or  any  of  the  oblique  cases,  except  the  vocative, 
which  111  Spanish  is  a subject  absolute 

When  two  pronouns,  oZyec/  and  complement,  come  together  in  a sentence, 
the  complement  is  always  set  before  the  object.  When  they  are  governed 
by  a verb  in  the  infinitive,  or  in  the  imperative  mood,  they  are  placed  after 
it,  and  written  so  as  to  form  one  word  with  it ; as — 

He  promised  to  send  them  to  me.  | El  prometio  envidrmelos. 

In  cases  where  the  stress  of  the  voice  is  on  the  last  syllable  of  the  verb, 
it  is  preserved  on  the  same  syllable  ; which,  on  account  of  changhig  its 
place,  requires  the  mark  of  the  accent;  thus,  dan,  danme,  ddnmelos,  they 
give  them  to  me. 

Remark. — When  the  object  of  a transitive  verb  is  the  noun  of  a rational 
being,  or  a proper  noun,  or  a thing  personified,  it  must  be  preceded  by  the 
preposition  d,  (which  in  that  case  being  an  idiom,*  is  not  translated  intc 
English ;)  but  the  preposition  is  not  required  in  other  cases. 


The  surgeon  cured  the  wounded 
woman. 

The  surgeon  dressed  the  woman’s 
w Dund. 

The*o  is  a God  in  heaven,  who  takes 
care  to  chastise  the  wicked,  and 
to  reward  the  righteous 

His  impatience  killed  Chrysostom. 


El  cirujano  curd  k la  mujer  herida. 

El  'irujano  vendo  la  herida  dc  lo 
mujer. 

Dios  hay  en  el  cielo  que  no  se 
cuida  de  castigar  al  male,  y dc 
premiar  al  bueno. 

Don  Quijote,  cap,  xxii.  pt.  i. 

Su  impaciencia  mato  d Crisostomo. 

Ditto,  cap.  xiv.  pt  i. 


* Idiom  is  the  peculiar  construction  of  a language  which  distinguishes  \i 
altogether  from  others. — Crabb. 


426 


APPENDIX. 


It  was  known  there  that  Signor  Don 
Juan  had  taken  Tunez. 


We  must,  in  slaying  giants, 
pnde 


kill 


Se  supo  tn  ella  que  eJ  Senar  Dcr 
Juan  hahia  tornado  d Tunez» 
Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxix.  pt  i. 
Nosotros  hemos  de  matar  en  los  gu 
gantes  d la  soherhia. 

Ditto ^ ditto 


ADJECTIVES 

Adjectives  have  persons  cases^  numbers,  and  genders;  they  admit,  be- 
Bsdes,  several  degrees  of  signification. 

The  person  and  case  of  the  adjectives  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  nouns 
or  pronouns  which  they  qualify ; as, 


Art  thou  come  to  rejoice  at  the  cruel 
exploits  of  thy  character,  and  be- 
hold, like  another  merciless  Nero, 
the  flames  of  his  burning  Rome  ? 


I Vienes  d ufanarte  en  las  cruelee 
hazanas  de  tu  condicion,  6 ver, 
como  otro  desapiadado  Nero,  el  in- 
cendio  de  su  abrasada  Roma  ? 
Don  Quijote,  cap.  xiv.  pt.  i. 

NUMBERS 

The  plural  number  of  the  adjectives  is  formed  by  the  same  rules  laid 
down  for  the  substantives,  (26,)  as. 


White 

Crimson. 

Natural. 

Prudent. 

Happy. 


Blanco,  blancos ; blanca,  blancas. 
Carrnesi,  carraesies. 

Natural,  naturales. 

Prudcnte,  prudentes. 

Feliz,  felices,  or  felizes,  (78.) 


genders. 

Rule  1.  Adjectives  ending  in  o are  of  the  masculine  gender,  and 
change  the  o into  a to  form  the  feminine  ; as,  fine,^no,  Jina,  (161.) 

Rule  2.  Most  of  the  adjectives  ending  in  an,  on,  or,  add  an  a for  the 
feminine ; as, 

Haragan,  Jiaragana,  idle.  | Griton,  gritona,  clamorous. 

Rule  3.  Adjectives  ending  in  any  other  letter  are  common  to  both  gexi- 
iors  ; as. 


Un  hombre  prudente, 

Una  mujer  prudente. 

Un  cuento  persa, 

Una  anecdota  persa,  (161 ) 

consonant,  add  an  a to  foirB 


A prudent  man. 

A prudent  woman. 

A Persian  story. 

A Persian  anecdote. 

Rule  4.  National  adjectives  ending  in 
die  feminine  ; as, 

A Spaniard.  | Vn  Espaiiol. 

A Spanish  lady.  I Una  seiiora  espancla, 

Spanish  gold.  I Oro  espanol, 

Spanish  silver.  1 Plata  espanola. 


APPEiSDIX. 


427 


DEGREES  OF  SIGNIFICATION  OR  C0MFARa30N. 

Til©  comparative  of  superiority  is  formed  by  translating  moi  c,  mas,  than 
auE ; as, 

Honor  is  more  precious  than  riches.  | El  honor  es  mas  precioso  que  l(U 

1 riquezas.  (108-9.) 

When  the  comparative  in  English  is  formed  by  the  addition  of  the  temn 
nation  cr,  as  fairer  ^ it  must  be  translated  as  if  written  more  fair  ; this, 

He  is  richer  (more  rich)  than  his  I El  es  mas  rico  que  su  hermano. 
brother. 


The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  formed  by  translating  literally  the  ad- 
verbs LcsSf  MENos,  thany  que  j is, 

Silver-  is  less  useful  than  iron.  | La  plata  es  menos  util  que  el  hierro 

It  may  also  be  expressed  negatively  ; as, 

Silver  is  not  so  useful  as  iron.  | La  plata  no  es  tan  util  como  el  hieriK 


More thaUf  less thany  before  a noun  signifying  quantity  oi 

umber,  are  rendered  by  mas  de,  menos  de  ; as. 


They  spent  more  than  five  hundred 
dollars. 

He  gains  less  than  what  he  says. 


Elios  gastdron  mas  de  quinientos 
pesos. 

El  gana  m^nos  de  lo  que  dice. 


More  than,  less  than,  preceded  by  no,  may  be  translated  mas  que  ; as, 


He  earns  no  more  than  twelve  shil- 
lings a day 


El  no  gana  mas  que  doce  reales  al 
dia. 


The  comparative  of  equality  is  formed  by  translating  the  adverbs  as  or 
so,  TAN,  before  the  adjective,  and  the  second  adverb  as,  como  ; as. 


She  is  as  tall  as  a spear,  and  as  fresh 
as  an  April  morning. 


It  may  also  be  expressed  by  not  less 
He  was  from  the  coast  of  St.  Lucar, 
not  less  of  a thief  than  Cacus,  and 
not  less  mischievous  than  a stu- 
dent or  a page. 


Ella  es  tan  grande  como  una  lanza, 
y tan  fresca  como  una  mahana  de 
Abril. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xiii.  pt  ii. 
than;  as, 

El  era  de  la  playa  de  San  Lucar, 
no  mdnos  ladron  que  Caco,  ni  md- 
nos  maleante  que  estudiante,  6 
page.  Ditto,  cap.  ii.  pt  I 


COMPARATIVES  WITH  NOUNS  AND  VERBS,  (108-9.) 

As  much,  ( with  reference  to  a J tanto,  (masculine,)  > 

So  much,  \ substantive  sing.  ^ tanta,  (feminine,)  J 

K with  reference  to  a ^ tantos,  (masculine,)  ) 

*i^a.ny,  ^ substantive  plur.  \ tantas,  (feminine,)  \ como. 

Not  so  mush,  no  tanto,  (mas.)  no  tanta,  (fern.)  as,  como 

Not  so  many,  no  tantos,  (mas.)  no  tantas,  (fern.)  as,  c(rmo. 


428 


APPENDIX. 


He  has  as  much  honor t and  as  much 
instruction  as  his  competitor  ; but 
he  has  neither  so  many  years  of 
service,  nor  has  given  so  many 
proofs  of  his  practical  knowledge. 


El  tiene  tanto  honor,  y tanta  uistmO' 
cion,  como  su  compctidor ; peri 
el  no 'tiene  taiitos  ahos  de  icrvicio^ 
ni  ha  dado  tantas  pruebas  dc  mu 
conocimientos  prdcticos. 


So  as  is  rendered  by  de  modo  que,  de  suerte  que,  de  manera  que ; os — 
Do  (you)  it,  so  as  to  please  him.  1 Hdgalo  V.  de  modo  que  el  quedi 

I contento. 

As  much aSi  as  many as,  with  reference  to  a noun,  are  trans- 
lated by  tanto  or  tanta comoy  cuanto,  or  cuanta,  according  to  tlie 

gender  and  number  of  the  nctrn  they  refer  to  ; as — 


Ue  spends  as  much  money  as  he  re- 
ceives. 

As  for  dolls,  Anastasia  has  as  many 
as  she  wants. 

You  have  here  as  much  as  you  want. 


El  gasta  tanto  diner o comoy  or 
cuanto  recibe. 

En  cuanto  d munccas,  Anastasia 
tiene  tantas  cuantas  quicre. 
listed  tiene  aqui  cuanto  (or  tanto 
cuanto)  ha  menester. 

As  much,  or  so  much,  with  reference  to  a verbal  adjective,  is  translateu 
tan — como;  as, 

They  are  as  much  interested  as  you.  | Elios  esian  tan  interesados  como  V 
When  the  second  as,  in  this  kind  of  phrases  is  followed  by  a verb  in  the 
present  of  the  infinitive  mood,  it  must  be  translated  que,  and  the  verb  in  the 
indicative  mood  ; as. 


She  is  so  charitable  as  to  deprive 
herself  even  of  the  most  necessary 
things  to  give  them  to  the  poor. 


Ella  es  tan  caritativa  que  se  priva 
aun  de  las  cosas  mas  necesarias 
para  darlas  d los  pobres. 


The  most — the  least,  (109,)  with  reference  to  verbs,  must  be  translated 
only  by  mas  or  menos,  omitting  the  article  the;  as. 


He  is  the  man  they  praise  the  most. 

Such  is  the  person  they  oppose  the 
least.  * 


El  es  el  hombre  que  ellos  mas  ala- 
bam 

Tal  es  la  persona  d quien  menos  sz 
oponen. 


Obs.  When  the  adiective  in  the  comparative  degree,  in  English, 
(whethe  it  be  formed  tlirough  the  adverbs  more  or  less,  or  through  the 
iffixes  r or  er,)  is  preceded  by  the  definite  article  the,  and  the  same  article 
{the'^  is  repeated  in  the  second  part  of  the  sentence,  before  an  adjective  in 
die  comparative  degree  ; the  article  the  is  omitted  in  both  parts,  and  cuanto 
is  used  instead  of  it  in  the  first,  and  tanto  in  the  second  part  of  it ; as, 

The  shorter  (more  short)  time  is,  the  more  precious  it  isi 

Cuanto  * mas  breve  el  tiempo  es,  tanto  mas  precioso  il  es. 

The  more,  or  the  less,  (110,)  repeated  in  the  same  sentence  with  reference 
to  a verb,  must  also  be  translated  cuanto  mas  or  menos,  tanto  mas  ox 
minos;  asv 


APPENDIX. 


429 


Now  there  is  no  doubt  that  this  exer-  Ahora  no  hay  que  dudai  sino  que 
else  exceeds  all  others,  and  that  it  este  ejercicio  excede  d todos  loa 
ought  to  be  the  more  esteemed,  otrosy  y tanto  mas  se  ha  de  tener 

because  it  is  the  more  exposed  to  en  estimay  cuanto  d mas  peiigros 

danger.  estd  expuesto. 

Don  Quuote,  cap.  xxxvii.  pt.  i 

The  more,  the  less,  rhay  be  also  rendered  by  mientras  mas  or  menos  ; as, 
Ihe  more  he  plays,  the  less  he  j Mientras  mas  juega,  menos  aprende. 


learns. 


or  tanto  menos  aprende. 


When  the  more  and  the  least  relate  to  a noun,  cuanto  and  tanto  change 
Uieir  number  and  gender  so  as  to  agree  with  it  ; as. 


The  more  pride  he  shows,  the  more 
enemies  he  makes. 


Cuanta  mas  soherbia  muestra  el^ 
tantos  mas  enemigos  se  hacc. 


Tanto  may  be  omitted  in  the  second  part  of  the  sentence  ; as. 

The  more  he  has,  the  more  he  wants.  I Cuanto  mas  tiene,  mas  qaiere,  oi 

1 tanto  mas  quiere 

So  or  such as,  followed  by  a verb  in  the  infinitive  mood,  is  rendered 

by  tan que,  placing  the  verb  in  the  same  tense  as  the  one  that  pre* 

cedes  it  in  the  same  sentence  as. 


His  friend’s  failure  was  so  unexpect- 
ed, as  to  oblige  him  to  stop  his 
, business. 


La  quiehra  de  su  amigo  fue  tan 
inesperada,  que  le  ohligo  d sus- 
pender sus  negocios. 


BUrERLATIVE. 

The  Superlative  is  absolute  or  relative. 

The  superlative  absolute  (]  10)  is  formed  by  prefixing  the  adverb  rruy 
(very)  to  the  adjective  ; as — 


Fair. 

Very  fair,  fairest. 


Hermoso,  hermosa. 

May  hermoso,  muy  hermosa. 


It  is  also  formed  by  adding  the  termination  isimo  to  the  adjective,  which 
drops  the  last  letter,  if  it  be  o or  e ; as — 


Very  fair,  most  fair,  fairest. 

Merry. 

Very  meny,  most  merry,  merriest. 
Useful. 

VeT^  useful,  most  useful. 

. j.  ( ble  change 

Adjectives  *= 

, . ! CO  “ 

tciininatmg  < 

in  I 


Hermosisirno,  hermosisima. 
Alegre. 

Alegrtsimo,  alegrisima. 

Util. 

Utilisimo,  utilisima. 

ble  into  bil;  as,  amable,  amabilisimo 

CO  “ qu ; “ rico,  riqmsimo. 

go  “ gu;  “ largo,  larguisimo. 

“ z “ c / “ feliz,  fclicisimo. 

The  most  part  of  the  dissyllables  in  io,  double  the  i ; as — 

Fio,  pious  I Piisimo,  most  pious. 

Adjectives  in  ientt,  drop  the  i ; as — 

Tnliente,  valiat.t  { VaUntisimo.  most  valiant 


430 


APPENDIX. 


Tile  adjective  in  the  superlative  degree,  in  English,  whether  fcnned  by 
the  terminations  st  or  est,  or  by  the  adverbs  7nost  or  least,  being  preceded 
by  the  article  the,  (which  constitutes  it  a superlative  relative,)  must  be 
translated  by  the  definite  article,  and  the  adverbs  mas  or  menos,  according 
to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  substantive  it  refers  to ; as — 

!!e  has  the  finest  broadcloth,  but  I *El  tiene  el  paiio  mas  jino,  pern  cllos 
they  want  the  least  expensive.  | quieren  el  menos  costoso. 

N.  B. — The  adverbs  mas  or  menos  must  always  be  placed  immediately 
before  the  adjective  ; thus — 

The  most  innocent  pleasures  are  al-  Los  placeres  7nas  mocentes  so7i 
ways  the  most  pure.  sie7npre  c^)s  mas  puros,  or  los  mas 

inocentes  placeres,  &c.,  but  not 
los  mas  placeres  inocentes. 

An  adjective  in  the  superlative  degree,  in  English,  preceded  by  the  defi- 
nite article  the,  taken  substantively,  must  be  translated  by  the  superlative 
foimed  by  the  termination  isimo  ; as. 

The  Highest  (or  the  Most  High)  or-  ( El  Altishno  lo  dispuso  asi. 
dered  it  so.  | 

An  adjective  in  the  superlative  degree,  preceded  by  the  article,  being 
used  with  a reference  to  a verb,  or  a sentence,  must  be  translated  by  using 
the  pronoun  lo  instead  of  the  article,  and  placing  the  adjective  in  the  com- 
parative degree ; as. 

The  best  that  he  can  do,  is  to  pay  I Lo  mejor  que  puede  hacer,  es  pagn7 
immediately.  | inmediatamente. 

For  the  irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives,  consult  page  111 


NOUNS  OF  NUMBER. 


CARDINAL 

NUMBERS. 

One. 

Uno,  m Una,  £ 

Eleven. 

Once 

Two. 

Dos.^ 

T welve. 

Doce. 

Three 

Tres. 

Thirteen. 

Trece 

Four 

Cuatro. 

Fourteen 

Catorce. 

■Five 

Cinco 

Fifteen. 

Quince 

Six. 

Sets. 

Sixteen. 

Diez  y seis. 

Seven. 

Siete. 

Seventeen. 

Diez  y siete. 

Eight 

Ocho. 

Eighteen. 

Diez  y ocho 

Nine 

Nueve. 

Nineteen. 

Diez  y nueve 

Ten. 

Diez. 

Twenty. 

Veinte. 

From  dos,  (two,)  up  to  ciento,  (hundred,)  inclusively,  the  numbers  ait 
plural,  and  common  to  both  genders  ; as — 

Three  men,  trcs  hombres.  | Four  women,  ruatro  rr.vjerea. 


appendix. 


431 


Twenly-one 

Tweiity-twc. 

Twenty-three 

Twenty-four. 

Twenty-five. 

Twenty -six. 

Twrenty-seveii. 

Twenty-eight. 

Tw^enty-nine. 

Thirty^ 

Thirty-one. 

Thirty-two,  &c. 

Forty 

Fifty. 


Veintiuno, 

Veintidos. 

Veintitres. 

Veinticuatrc 

Veinticinco 

Veintiseis. 

Veintisiete. 

Veintiocho. 

Veintinueve. 

Treinta. 

Treinta  y uno. 

Treinta  y dos. 

CUARENTA. 

ClNCUENTA. 


Sixty. 

Seventy. 

Eighty. 

Ninety. 

A or  one  hundred 
Two  hundred. 
Three  hundred. 
Four  hundred. 
Five  hundred. 

Six  hundred. 
Seven  hundred. 
Eight  hundred. 
Nine  hundred. 

A or  one  thousand 


Sesenta. 

Setenta. 

OCHENTA 

Noventa. 

ClENTO. 

Doscientoa.^ 

Trescientoa. 

Cuatrocienta 

Quinientoa 

Seiscientos. 

Seiecientos 

Ochocientoa. 

Novecientoa 

Mil.* * 


One  thousand  and  one. 

One  thousand  and  eleven. 

One  thousand  one  hundred  and  one. 
One  thousand  five  hundred. 

Two  thousand. 

Five  hundred  thousand. 

A Million. 


Mil  y uno. 

Mil  y once. 

Milf  cienio  y uno. 
Mil  y quinientoa. 
Dos  mil. 
Quinientos  mil. 
Millon,  {cuenio.) 


Two  numbers  coming  together  in  an  inverted  order  in  English,  are  trans- 
lated by  placing  the  highest  in  the  first  place  ; thus, 

Three  and  thirty.  | Treinta  y tres. 

Eleven  hundred f fifteen  hundred,  and  the  like  expressions,  are  always 
translated  one  thousand  one  hundred,  one  thousand  five  hundred,  &c. ; thus, 
mil  y ciento,  mil  y quinientos,  and  not  once  cientos,  &c. 

The  cardinal  numbers  are  used  instead  of  the  ordinal  in  speaking  of  the 
days  of  the  month,  excepting  the  first ; as, 

The  fourth  of  July.  El  cuairo  de  Julio. 

The  first  of  May.  El  primero  de  Mayo. 

(See  Obs.  A,  p 46.) 

The  words  o'* clock  (65,  Obs.  B,)  are  omitted  in  reference  to  the  hours  of 
the  day,  which  are  expressed  by  the  cardinal  numbers,  preceded  by  the 
article  las  or  la  with  reference  to  una,  one  ; as. 


* From  doscientos  to  novecientos,  inclusively,  the  termination  oa  is 
changed  into  as  for  the  femmine  ; as — 

Three  hundred  miles.  1 Trescientas  millas. 

* Mil  has  neither  gender  nor  number ; but  it  may  be  used  in  the  plural, 
speaking,  as  in  English,  in  a vague  sense ; as — 

In  that  railroad  many  thousands  I En  ese  Ferro-carril  se  han  gaatad^ 
have  been  spent  | muchos  miles. 


432 


What  time  is  it  ? 
It  is  one  o’clock. 
It  is  two  o’clock 


APPENDIX. 


I Quc  hora  e&  7 
Es  la  una. 

Son  las  dus. 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS 

First,  primero,  | Second,  segundo,  (4G.) 

Ordinal  numbers  change  o into  a for  the  feminine,  and  admit  the  earns 
yariation  of  numbers  as  the  adjectives. 

Obs.  The  adjectives  uno,  one,  primer first,  (46,)  alguno,  some,  wfw- 
none,  hueno^  good,  ma/o,  bad,  postreroy  (little  used,)  last,  drop  the  o 
wli3n  they  are  immediately  followed  by  a substantive  alone,  or  preceded  by 
an  adjective  in  the  singular.  Ciento,  hundred,  loses  the  last  syllable  before 
nouns  of  either  gender,  (Obs.  A,  p.  139.)  Grande,  great,  generally  loses 
the  last  syllable  when  it  is  not  applied  to  size  ; as,  el  Gran  Capitan, 
(Obs.  C,  p.  97.)  Santo,  saint,  also  drops  the  last  syllable  before  nouns  mas 
cuHne  in  the  singular,  except  Domingo,  Tomas,  <Slc. 

The  ordinal  numbers  are  used  in  speaking  of  the  chronological  order  o 
kings,  &c.,  but  the  article  is  suppressed ; as, 

Isabel  the  First,  queen  of  Castile.  | Isabel  primera,  reina  de  Castilla 

AUGMENTATIVE  AND  DIMINUTIVE  NOUNS.  (31-2.) 

Remark.  Many  of  the  nouns  signifying  relationship,  as  sister,  hcrmana, 
as  well  as  the  baptismal,  and  even  family  names,  such  as  Luis,  Catalina, 
Rivero,  Gonzalez,  are  used,  in  colloquial  and  familiar  style,  with  the  termi- 
nations ito  or  ita  ; but  for  the  most  part  they  are  not  diminutive  nouns,  for 
they  have  no  reference  to  the  size,  beauty,  age,  or  moral  qualities  of  the 
persons.  They  are,  properly,  endearing  words,  that  express  affection, 
friendship,  or  regard.  Therefore,  hermanita,  Luisito,  Catalinita,  Riverito, 
or  Riverita,  Gonzalitos,  do  not  signify  precisely  little  sister,  but  rather  a 
beloved  sister,  esteemed  Luis,  dear  Catalina, /newc?  Gonzalez. 

These  names  are  not  always  regularly  formed  by  the  addition  of  ito  or 
ita;  they  frequently  have  other  terminations,  and  are  even  changed  into 
ether  odd  words. 

Examples.  From  Maria,  (Mary  or  Maria,)  are  derived  Mariqmta, 
^fariquilla,  Maruca,  Maruja.  From  Maria  de  la  Concepcion,  Concep- 
cion, Concha,  Conchita,  Chona,  Cota,  Cotita.  From  Maria  de  Jesus, 
Jesusa,  Jesusita,  Chucha,  Chuchita.  From  Francisco,  (Francis,)  Fran- 
cisquito,  Frazeo,  FrazquHo,  Paco,  Paquito,  Pacorro,  Pancho,  Panchiio, 
C^rro,  Currito,  &c.  Francisca  (Frances)  changes  the  o of  the  above 
laniea  into  a 


APPENDIX. 


433 


PRONOUNS. 

Pronouns  are  divided  into  personal,  possessive,  relative,  interrogative, 
iemonstrative,  and  indefinite. 

The  personal  pronouns  are,  sin^lar — I,  yo,  thou,  tu,  you,  (your  honor  or 
worship,)  usted,  he,  el,  she,  ella,  it,  el,  ella,  ello,  or  lo.  Plural — we,  noso- 
or  nosotras,  you,  vosotros,  vosotras,  or  ro5,  you,  (your  honors  or  woi- 
jiiips,)  ustedes,  they,  ellos,  ellas,  (See  table  of  personal  pronouns,  p.  70.) 

Vos  is  used  in  addressing  a single  person,  and  vosotros,  when  speaking  of 
35“  to  uore  persons  than  one.  The  objective  case  of  uos  after  a preposition 
ti  also  vos;  as. 

And  what  share  of  it  falls  to  you,  i Pues  que  parte  os  alcanza  d vos, 
Sancho 1 Sancho  ? 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxi.  pt.  i. 


The  use  of  usted  is  explained  in  Observation  A,  pages  9 and  10,  which 
the  learner  is  desired  to  consult.  What  is  said  there  about  usted,  is  like- 
wise applicable  to  usia,  (V  S.,)  your  lordship,  or  ladyship ; vuecelencia, 
(V.E  .,)  your  excellency,  &c. 

Me,  te,  sc,  nos,  os,  le,  los,  la,  las,  les,  are  governed  by  verbs  ; and  (in 
conformity  with  the  present  use)  never  placed  after  prepositions. 

When  mi,  ti,  si,  nosotros,  nosotras,  vosotros,  vosotras,  el,  ellos,  ella, 
ellas,  are  used  as  objects,  they  are  to  be  preceded  by  prepositions. 

When  mi,  ti,  si,  come  after  the  preposition  con,  (with,)  they  are  con- 
verted into  conmigo,  contigo,  consign,  and  admit  no  change  in  gender  or 
number. 

Mis?no  (self)  is  sometimes  added  to  the  personal  pronouns  to  give  them  a 
particular  energy.  It  changes  its  number  and  gender  in  conformity  with 
the  rules  Idid  down  for  adjectives. 

We  must  love  our  neighbor  as  our-  1 Debemos  amar  d nuestro  projimo 

selves.  como  d nosotros  mismos. 


The  objective  cases  of  the  pronouns  are  generally  placed  before  the  verb 
when  it  is  either  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunctive  mood  ; and  after 
the  verb,  and  joined  to  it,  so  as  to  form  one  single  word,  when  the  verb  is 
m the  infinitive,  or  in  the  imperative  mood  ; except  when  the  verb  in  the 
imperative  mood  is  preceded  by  an  adverb  of  negation  ; as. 


Let  him  who  terms  me  a fierce  basi- 
lisk, shun  me  as  an  evil  being ; 
let  him  who  calls  me  ungrateful, 
refuse  mo  his  services. 


El  que  me  llama  fiera  y basilisco, 
dejeme  como  cosa  perjudicial  y 
mala  ; y el  que  me  llama  ingrata, 
no  me  sirva. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xiv.  pt.  L 


When  two  pronouns,  object  (the  direct  objective  case)  and  complement, 
(indirect  objective  case,)  come  together,  the  complement  must  be  placecf 
before  the  object,  (Obs.  A,  p.  69  ;)  as. 

He  paid  it  to  me.  | El  me  Ic  pagd. 

19 


134 


APPENDIX. 


Should  both  pronouns,  object  and  complement,  be  of  the  third  peitson,  the 
complementy  or  that  which  in  English  is  governed  by  to,  expressed  or  un* 
ilerstood,  must  be  rendered  by  se , as, 


He  will  carry  him  to  him. 

He  will  carry  her  to  him. 

He  will  carry  them  to  him. 
die  will  not  carry  it  to  him. 

Will  he  carry  her  to  him? 

Will  he  not  carry  them  to  them  ? 


El  se  le  llevard. 

El  se  la  llevard. 

El  se  los  (las)  llevard 
El  '10  se  le  llevard, 

I Se  la  llevard  el  ? 

I No  se  los  (las)  llevard  el  1 


In  order  to  avoid  the  ambiguity  arising  sometimes  from  such  phiases,  th© 
rther  pronoun  of  the  same  person  is  frequently  repeated  after  the  verb ; thiw 
el  se  le  llevard  d el,  d ella,  d elloSf  &c. 

You,  when  it  is  translated  usted,  must  be  rendered  by  se  ; as. 

Ho  presented  him  to  you.  ’ El  se  le  presento  d V 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


Possessive  pronouns  are  conjunctive  or  absolute. 

The  possessive  pronouns  conjunctive  are  so  called  because  they  cannot 
be  used  alone,  but  must  be  accompanied  by  a noun.  They  have  numbers, 
out  admit  no  variation  of  gender.  (160.) 


SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 


SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 


My,  mi,  mis. 

Thy,  tu,  tus. 

His,  su  or  de  el,  ms  or  de  ellos. 

Her,  su  or  de  ella,  sus  or  de  ellas. 


Its, 


f su  or  de  el,  sus  or  de  ellos. 

su  or  de  ella,  sus  or  de  ellas. 
su  or  de  ellos,  sus  or  de  ellos 
su  or  de  ellas,  sus  or  de  ellas 


These  pronouns  agree  in  number  with  the  noun  that  comes  after  them  ; as. 
He  paid  his  expenses.  I El  pago  sus  gastos. 

They  fulfilled  their  promise.  | Ellos  cumplieron  su  promesa. 

When  you  is  translated  usted  or  ustedes,  your  is  to  be  rendered  by  su  oi 
sus,  de  usted  or  ustedes  ; as, 

He  thinks  that  the  letter  is  yours.  | El  piensa  que  la  carta  es  de  V 


Remark.  The  use  of  su  and  sus  (your)  without  the  addition  of  usted, 
in  addressing  respectable  persons,  is  considered  vulgar  and  impolite.  Nc 
person  accustomed  lo  good  society  will  ever  say,  Senor  N.  i como  estd  su 
hermana  ? Mr.  N.  how  is  your  sister  ? Amigo,  i digame  que  kora  ej  7 
Friend,  tell  me  what  o’clock  it  is?  instead  of,  Senor  N.  icomo  estd  su  (or 
la)  hermana  de  V.7  or  la  Sehora  hermana  de  V.  Amigo,  i digame  V 
<que  hora  es  ? or  sirvase  V.  decirme  que  hora  es. 

The  following  quotations  from  the  celebrated  modern  dramatist,  Moratm, 
who  wrote  in  Madrid,  and  frequented  the  best  society  of  that  court,  will 
corroborate  this  remark. 

I do  not  kn/rw  your  mother.  | Yo  no  conozco  a su  madre  ae  usted 

I El  si  de  las  Ninas,  act  ii.  sc.  17 


APPENDIX. 


436 


Four  uncle  wishes  to  know  vhat  all 
this  means 

How  do  you  do,  good  man  ? — I would 
speak  more  politely,  answered  Don 
Quixote,  were  I you  ; is  that  the 
language  used  in  this  country  to 
knights  errant  ? — you  blockhead. 


Quiere  saber  el  tio  de  usted  lo  qan 
hay  en  i sto. 

Ditto,  act  iii.  sc.  10. 

I Como  na,  huen  hombrc  7 — Ilahlara 
yo  mas  bien  criado,  respondio  Don 
Quijote,  si  fuera  que  vos.  i Usase 
en  esta  tierra  hablar  de  esa  suerts 
d los  Caballeros  andantes  7 — ma- 
jadero. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xvii.  pt.  i. 


The  possessive  pronouns  absolute  (244)  may  bo  used  with  or  instead  of 
the  noun  to  which  they  refer ; when  used  with  a noun,  they  are  placed 


after  it,  (31 ;)  as, 

Your  hat  cost  five  dollars,  mine  three 
dollars,  and  John’s  only  twenty 
shillings  ; but  his  is  better  than 
yours,  and  as  good  as  mine. 


Come  here,  my  Anastasia. 


El  sombrero  de  usted  costo  cinco 
pesos,  el  mio  tres,  (pesos,)  y el  de 
Juan  solamente  veinte  reales ; 
pero  el  suyo  (de  el)  es  mejor  que 
el  de  usted,  y tan  bueno  como  cJ 
mio. 

Ven  acd,  Anastasia  mia 


Mine, 

Thine, 

Ilis,  hers,  its,  theirs, 
Our,  ours. 

Your,  yours, 


mio,  mios,  mia,  mias. 

tuyo,  iuyos,  tuya,  tuyas. 

suyo,  suyos,  suya,  suyas. 

el  suyo,  los  suyos,  la  suya,  las  suyas. 

el  de  el,  los  de  el ; el  de  ella,  los  de  ella, 

los  or  las  de  el,  &c. 

nuestro,  nuestros,  nuestra,  nuestras. 

vuestro,  vuestros,  vuestra,  vuestras 

de  Usted  or  de  Ustedes. 

el,  los,  la,  las  de  V.  or  de  VV 

suyo,  suyos,  suya,  suyas  ; as — 


I am  your  servant,  sir.  | Yo  soy  servidor  de  V caballero. 

When  mine,  thine,  &c.,  stand  instead  of  the  noun  they  refer  to,  they 
must  be  preceded  by  the  corresponding  article ; as. 


Has  the  postman  brought  the  letters? 
Yes,  he  brought  thine,  but  not 
mine. 


I Ha  traido  el  cartero  las  cartas  ? 
Si,  el  trajo  las  tuyeis  pero  no  lia 
mias. 


These  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  substantives  es 
pressing  the  thing  possessed  ; as, 


These  houses  are  his. 

The  gardens  were  hers,  but  now 
they  are  theirs. 


Estas  casas  son  suyas,  {de  el.) 

Los  jardines  eran  suyos,  {de  ella ;) 
pero  ellos  son  ahora  suyos,  dt 
ellos  or  ellas.) 


m 


APPENDIX. 


The  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used  in  speaking  of,  and  the  ahaolutt  rl 
addressing  to ; as, 

My  friends,  these  are  my  children.  | Amigos  mios,  estos  son  mis  Kijos. 
When  the  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  adjective,  either  of  them  may  b€ 
used  ; as. 


My  dear  brother,  farewell ! I Mi  querido  hermanOy  (querido  her 

1 mano  mioy)  pdsalo  bien  ! 

Vuestro  is  not  used  in  colloquial,  polite  style,  therefore  your  and  youn 
must  be  translated  de  usted  or  de  ustedesy  or  suyoy  suyuy  according  to  the 
sense  of  the  phrase  ; as, 

tie  bought  his  umbrella  in  Pearl-  El  compro  su  pai  agua  en  la  calle  de 
street,  and  you  brought  yours  from  la  Perluy  y V,  trajo  el  suyo  (el  de 
London.  V.')  de  Londres. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  (73.) 

The  relative  pronouns  simple,  are  quieny  quey  cualy  and  cuyc  ; and  the 
compound,  quienquiera  and  cualesquicra. 

Quieny  in  the  plural  quienes  or  quien,  (who,  which,  that,)  admits  of  no 
change  for  the  gender,  and  is  u«ed  only  with  reference  to  persons,  or  ob- 
iects  personified.  (73.) 

Que  (who,  which,  what,  that)  has  no  variation  of  gender  or  number,  and 
IS  used  with  reference  both  to  persons  and  things. 

Cualy  in  the  plural  cualcSy  (who,  which,  what,  that,)  refers  to  persons  oi 
things,  without  any  change  of  gender ; but  it  requires  the  corresponding 
article  whenever  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  it;  thus,  el  cualy  los  cuales , 
la  cualy  las  cuales. 

Cuyo  (whose,  which)  forms  its  number  and  gender  like  the  adjectives  in 
0,  and  agrees  with  the  noun  that  comes  after  it. 

Cualquieruy  in  the  plural  cualesquierUy  (whoever,  whichever,  whatever,) 
has  no  change  for  the  gender,  and  is  common  to  persons  and  things.  It 
generally  drops  the  last  letter  when  the  noun  following  begins  with  a vowel, 
or  an  h. 

Quienquiera  (whoever,  whichever)  is  applied  to  persons,  or  personified 
nouns  of  either  gender.  The  Academy  sets  it  down  as  invariable  in  number 
but  quienesquiera  is  found  in  classic  authors. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


The  relative  pronouns  are  called  interrogative  when  they  are  used  ii 
asking  a question  ; as. 


Who  wrote  the  letter  ? 

To  whom  did  you  write? 

Which  of  the  two  does  he  want  ? 

Of  what  does  she  complain  ? 

Whose  image  and  inscription  is  this? 
CoBsar’s. 


I Quien  escribio  la  carta  ? 

I A quien  escribio  V.  ? 

I Cual  de  los  dos  quiere  el  ? 

I De  que  se  queja  ella  7 
I Cuya  (de  quien)  es  esta  imagen  I 
in  scrip  cion  7 Del  Cesar. 


APPENDIX. 


437 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS,  (21,  28,  16 1.) 


- 

&1NQ. 

PLUR. 

SING. 

PLUR. 

SINO. 

PLUB 

This. 

These. 

That. 

Those. 

That. 

TtiJse. 

Slasculine. 

Este. 

Estos. 

Ese. 

Esos. 

Aquel. 

Aquellos. 

Feminine. 

Esta. 

Estas. 

Esa. 

Esas. 

A.quella 

Aquellas. 

Este  denotes  proximity ; ese,  some  distance ; and  aquelf  remoteness  oi 
ttlace  or  time.  (24.) 

EstOf  (this,)  eso  or  aquelloj  (that,)  and  ello  or  Zo,  (it,)  are  used  only  in 
the  singular,  with  reference  to  whole  sentences,  or  to  the  actions  expressed 
by  the  verbs,  and  frequently  to  avoid  the  repetition  cf  a verb  or  a noun  ; as, 


Be  that  as  it  may. 

lie  was  one  of  those,  who  being  no 
princes  by  birth,  know  not  how  to 
direct  those  who  are  princes  to  act 
as  such. 

Brother,  if  you  are  buffoon,  keep 
your  jokes  for  a place  where  they 
may  turn  to  account. 


Sea  lo  que  se  fuere. 

El . era  uno  de  estos  que  como  no 
nacen  prmcipes,  no  aciertan  d en^ 
seiiar  como  jO  han  de  ser,  los  que 
lo  son. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxi.  pt.  ii. 

HermanOf  st  sots  juglar,  guardad 
vuestras  gracias  para  donde  lo 
parezcan.  DittOy  ditto 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


'’'’he  most  commonly  used  are  the 

It. 

This. 

That. 

Each  one. 

Every  one. 

Each. 

Every. 

One. 

Som3. 

Such. 

Such  a one,  or  Mr.  such  a one. 
Such  a one  and  such  a one 

Both. 

Everybody 

Somebody 

Nobody. 

Several. 

Something.  Somewhat 
Nothing. 

One  says,  or  it  is  said 
They  8issure. 

It  is  believed. 


following : — 

Lo,  ello.  (See  table,  p.  70  ; Obs.  E, 
Esto.  [97  ; Obs.  A,  126.) 

Eso.  Aquello. 

Cada  uno,  or  una,  (182.) 

Todos,  todas. 

Cada,  (m.  &.  f.,  sing.)  Todo,  toda. 
Todos  los,  todas  las,  (81,  186.) 

Uno,  una.  Alguno,  alguna,  (143.) 
Unos,  unas.  Algunos,  algunas. 

Tal  (m.  & f.)  un,  una  tal. 

Fulano,  or  Un  don  fulano  de  tal,  (262.) 
Fulano  y mengano.  Zutano  y men* 
gano. 

Ambos,  ambas.  Ambos  (dmbas)  A 
dos,  (48.) 

Todos.  Todo  el  mundo,  (182.) 
Alguien,  (m.  &.  f.)  Alguno,  alguna 
Nadie,  (m.  &.  f.)  Ninguno,  nisgune 
Algunos.  Varios,  (51.) 

Algo.  Alguna  cosa,  (13.) 

Nad  a. 

Dicen,  or  se  dice,  (143.) 

Se  asegura,  aseguran. 

; Se  cree,  creen. 


APPENDIX. 


^^8 


OF  THE  VERB. 


A Verb  is  a word  that  signifies  to  be,  to  do,  or  to  suffer;  as, 


I live. 

lie  commands. 

They  are  commanded. 


Yo  vivo. 

El  manda 

Elios  son  mandados 


Verbs  are  divided  into  active  transitive,  active  intransitive,  passive,  and 
neuter.  They  may  be  also  pronominal  or  reflective,  reciprocal,  imperson^ 
al,  and  auxiliary.  These  verbs  being  the  same  as  in  English,  mention  will 
be  made  only  of  such  as  require  particular  explanation  in  regard  to  th« 
Spanish  language. 

A pronominal  or  reflective  verb  (181)  is  .hat  which  has  the  same  person 
or  thing  as  subject  and  object ; as, 

He  flatters  himself.  | El  se  lisongea  a si  mismo. 

Almost  all  active  verbs  may  be  made  pronominal. 

Impersonal  verbs  (191)  are  those  which  are  used  only  in  the  third  person 
singular,  without  a subject  or  nominative  ; as. 


It  snows. 

It  happened. 
It  is  said. 


Nieva. 
Sucedio. 
Se  dice. 


Auxiliary  verbs  are  those  through  the  help  of  which  the  compound  tensei 
of  all  other  verbs,  and  their  passive  voice,  are  formed  ; such  are, 

To  have.  | Haber. 

To  be.  I Ser,  or  estar,  &c 

To  verbs  belong  Numbers,  Persons,  Moods,  Tenses,  and  Conjugation. 


NUMBERS  AND  PERSONS 

Verbs  have  singular  and  plural  numbers ; and  in  each  number  there  aie 
three  persons,  which  are  distinguished  by  the  different  terminations  corre- 
sponding to  each  person. 

(O*  The  flrst  person  singular  terminates  in  o,  e,  a,  e,  i. 

Except  to  have,  to  be,  to  give,  to  go,  and  to  know,  the  first  person  of 
which  is,  respectively,  he,  soy,  estoy,  doy,  voy,  se. 

The  second  person  singular  terminates  in  as,  es. 

Except  the  preterit  indefinite  of  the  indicative  and  the  imperative  mood 
The  third  person  singular  terminates  in  a,  e,  o,  6,  or  id 
The  first  person  plural  terminates  in  mos.  ^ 

The  second  person  plural  terminates  in  ais,  eis,  or  is. 

Except  the  2d  of  the  imperative  that  ends  in  ad,  ed,  or  id. 

The  third  person  plural  terminates  in  an,  en,  or  on. 

Obs.  A.  When  nos  (us)  is  placed  after  the  first  person  plural  of  a verb 
the  verb  generally  drops  the  s;  as, 

Cuidemonos.  (Cuiddmosnos.)  | Let  us  take  care  of  ourselves. 


APPENDIX.  439 

llie  second  person  plural  of  the  imperative  drops  also  the  d when  os  is 
•laced  after  it ; as, 

Amaos  (amados)  ainceramente,  | Love  each  other  sincerely. 

Ohs.  B.  The  vowel  by  which  the  termination  of  the  second  per£3C.n  sin* 
pular  of  each  tense  begins,  is  also  the  first  of  the  termination  of  every 
person  of  the  same  tense ; as,  estuditf^as,  estudiafict,  esiudidbarnosy  estudi- 
dbaiSf  estudiaban.  Except  the  imperative  in  all  the  conjugations,  and  the 
preterit  indefinite  of  the  first  conjugation. 

MOODS. 

Tl'ore  are  four  moods:  the  Infinitivey  the  Indicative,  the  Imperative, 
and  the  Subjunctive. 

Ohs.  C.  The  English  potential  mood  is  generally  rendered  by  whe  suh^ 
junctive  in  Spanish. 


tenses. 

Tense  is  that  variation  of  a verb  that  distinguishes  its  time 

Tenses  are  simple  or  compound.  The  former  consist  of  one  word,  the 
latter  of  two  ; the  first  of  which  is  the  auxiliary  verb,  and  the  second  the 
participle  past  of  the  verb  that  is  conjugated. 

Obs.  D.  The  verb  to  write,  (escribir,)  will  be  made  use  of,  the  better  to 
elucidate  the  following  explanations;  and  the  numbers,  1,  2,  &lc.,  to  avoid 
the  repetition  of  the  whole  name  of  the  tense  in  the  rules. 


The  Infinitive  Mood  has  three  simple,  and  two  compound  tenses. 


SIMPLE  TENSES. 


Present.  To  write. 
Gerund.  Writing. 
Participle.  Written. 


Escribir. 

Escrihiendo. 

Escrito. 


COMPOUND  tenses. 

To  have  written.  Haber  escrito. 
Having  written.  Habiendo  escrito 


The  Indicative  Mood  has  four  simple,  and  four  compound  tensea. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 


N 1. 

Present. 

I write. 

Yo  escribe. 

N 2. 

Imperfect. 

I wrote. 

Yo  escribia. 

N.  3. 

Preterit  Indefinite. 

I wrote. 

Yo  escribi. 

N 4. 

Future  Indefinite. 

I shall  write. 

Yo  escribiri. 

compound  tenses. 

y h 

p.  Definite  Perfect  or  Preterit. 

I have  written. 

1 Yo  he  escrito. 

N.  2 

p Pluperfect. 

I had  written. 

1 Yo  habia  escrito. 

S.  3, 

p.  Preterit  Anterior. 

As  soon  as  I had  written 

1 Luego  que  huhe  escrito. 

N 4, 

p.  Future  Definite. 

I shall  have  written. 


I Yo  hahre  escrito. 


i40 


' APPENDIX. 


N 5.  The  Imper  ii  ve  Mood  (315)  has  one  simple  te.K^ 


L.et  not  mercy  and  truth  leave  thee. 
— Write  my  commandments  in  the 
tablets  of  thy  heart. 


Tne  Subjunctive  Mood  (351)  has 


No  se  aparten  de  ti  la  mieericordu 
y la  verdad. — Escribe  mis  tnanda- 
mientos  en  las  tablas  de  tu  cOTa> 
zon.  Prov.  iii. 


five  simple,  and  five  compound  tenses, 


SIMPLE  TENSES. 

N 6.  Present. 

L aless  I write.  | A mdnos  que  yo  escriba. 

N.  7.  Imperfect,  First  Terminatioru 
It  was  necessary  that  I should  write.  ] Fud  necesario  que  yo  escribiet  i 
N.  8.  Imperfect,  Second  Termination, 

I would  write,  if  I could.  [ Yo  escribiria,  si  pudiera. 

N.  9.  Imperfect,  Third  Termination, 

Me  would  not  do  it,  even  if  I should  I El  no  lo  haria,  aun  cuando  yo  ea 
write.  cribiese 


N.  10.  Future  Indefinite. 

Should  I write,  I will  inform  you.  | Si  yo  escribiere,  lo  informard  d V 


COMPOUND  tenses. 

N.  6,  p.  Preterit. 

I doubt  whether  he  has  written.  | Yo  dudo  que  dl  hay  a escrito. 

N.  7,  p.  Pluperfect,  First  Termination, 

I should  know  it,  if  he  had  written.  | Yo  lo  sabria,  si  dl  hubiera  escrito, 

N.  8,  p.  Pluperfect,  Second  Termination, 

^I©  would  have  written,  had  he  I El  habria  escrito,  si  lo  hubiera  sa 
known  it.  | bido. 

N.  9,  p.  Pluperfect,  Third  Termination, 

Even  if  he  had  written,  he  would  not  I ^il  no  lo  habria  estorbado,  aun  cuan- 
have  prevented  it.  | do  hubiese  escrito. 

N.  10,  p.  Future. 

inform  him  of  it,  should  he  not  have  1 Infdrmele  V.  do  ello,  por  si  no  hu^ 
written.  biere  escrito 


OF  THE  conjugation. 

The  Conjugation  of  a verb,  is  the  regular  combination  and  arrangement 
of  its  Several  numbers,  persons,  moods,  and  tenses. 

These  combinations  are  made  and  formed  in  the  Spanish  language,  out 
sf  the  present  of  the  infinitive  mood  of  any  verb,  which  invariably  termi- 
nates in  either  ar,  er  or  tr,  which  syllables  are  called  its  termination  ; and 
the  letters  that  remain  of  the  said  present  of  the  infinitive,  after  separating 
ane  of  the  said  terminations,  whatever  they  may  be,  are  called  its  root,  and 
Sie  ’ootters  of  such  root  are  called  its  radical  letters  as,  to  esteem 


appendix. 


441 


98iim-ar  ; to  offend,  ofend-er , to  permit,  permiUir  ; in  which  verbs  ar,  er 
ir  are  the  terminations  ; and  estim,  ofend^  permit,  the  radical  LETTEHf 
of  each  respectively,  to  which  the  other  combinations  must  be  added  to  form 
the  various  persons  and  tenses  of  a verb. 

All  the  Spanish  verbs  are,  therefore,  classed  into  three  conjugations 
Verbs  ending  in  ar  belong  to  the  first ; those  in  er  to  the  second  ; and  thosa 
in  ir  to  the  third. 

Obs.  E.  It  is  not  necessary  to  express  the  pronouns  subject  or  nomina^ 
lint,  in  the  colloquial  style,  {usted  and  ustedes  excepted  ;)  but  they  must  b* * 
caed  whenever  elegance  or  clearness  requires  it. 

Ohs.  F.  The  numbers  before  the  terminations  point  out  the  different  per- 
iv)ns.  N.  2,  before  usted  and  ustedes,  denotes  that  they  are  of  the  second 
person,  but  that  the  verb  agrees  with  them  in  the  third,  (by  Enallage.) 

TERMINATIONS  OF  ALL  THE  REGULAR  VERBS. 

Ohs.  G.  The  grave  accent  ( ' ) upon  a vowel  in  the  following  termina- 
tions, points  out  the  syllable  on  which  the  stress  of  the  voice  is  laid,  but 
over  which  the  mark  of  it  must  not  be  set.  The  acute  accent  ( ' ) marks 
the  syllable  on  which  the  stress  of  the  voice  lays,  and  over  which  the  ac* 
cent  is  to  be  written.  When  there  is  no  mark  of  an  accent  in  the  termina- 
tion, the  syllable  that  precedes  it  is  long, 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 


First  Conjugation.  | Second  Conjugation,  j Third  Conjugation. 


Present 

\ o arm,  armar. 

Termination,  ar. 

Radical  letters,  arm. 

Gerund.* 

Arming*,  ando. 

Participle  past.^ 
\Tmcd,  ado. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 

To  offend,  ofender. 
Termination,  er. 
Radical  letters,  ofend. 

Gerund. 

Offending*,  iendo 

Participle  past. 
Offendcfi,  ido. 


Present. 

To  unite,  unir 

T ermination,  ir. 

Radical  letters,  un. 

I Gerund. 

I Uniting*,  iend^ 

I Participle  past. 

I Unitcci,  ido 


* The  Gerundio  (gerund)  never  changes  its  termination  for  gender  oi 
number. 

* The  participle  past  coming  immediately  after  any  of  the  tenses  of  the 
verb  haher,  (to  have,)  does  not  admit  of  any  change  of  gender  or  number. 
\fter  other  vei  bs,  it  changes  its  termination  to  agree  with  that  of  the  person 
'ir  thing  it  refers  to. 


First  Coijugatioii.  i Second  Conjugation.  . Third  Conjugation 


442 


APPENDIX. 


uiicerstood  of  ail  inc  veros  in  the  imperfect  tense. 


APPENDIX. 


443 


42  :2 


I 


-TJ  ».  ^ *13  ^ 

9 « 'C  — T TJ  cj  'TS 

^ <13  -a  ® ^ C3 

^3  aj  .ti  .ti  '3  .ti 

5 s g c s a a 


CO^-- 

P ^ ® O ^ O ^ O 

^*  (^  CO  (?!  -H  ci  00  CJ 


P ® s 
0^0 


S -22  R 

'«j  • 


I 


> 


® „ ® 

.ti  « ® ^ ® .tJ  ® 

^ § .•§  '3  ‘S  'a  p p 

-I  ^ I 3 a a _ a 

f ^hIsI 

^o’^S-3S®P 
WJP®  o ^ o ^ o 

^ CO  ci  >-H  ci  00  ci' 


•S  -2 


I 


s S 


'T?  'S  na 


'5  -2  ^ 'p 


a ® ^ -5 
' -®  *p  p ^ P 
» 5tt  P f®  " 
1 o ;®  ^ 
o ^ 

% p 


I ^ O 5« 


o j5  ® o ^ o x:  O 
'-i(3!?OOC'irHC^CO(Oj 


-<^  'Q 


® ^ ® ® V ® 


lll 

p ® p 
0^0 
Ph  H 


»“lCiOOC^— ICJOOG^ 


II' 

o 

_ J! 

ca  _a  ® o I 

HH  H ffi  ^ I 


sS  a; 
f & 

15  p 

^ o 


'5f  '©  '^O  '«  '«  '© 


,60  , .S*22sgjs 

4J  ■ *3  '?S  '5i  '<i)  '<0  vQ  vQ 

cR«c«ee« 


S £ 


« ^ H3  „ 

•T3  ^ T3  ® -a 

= “ s S 2 

i S g S3  g 

p ^ «2  K.  p 


Co  PajPoa 

aj3®c,®o_ao 

^34coc?ir-3ciooc4 


s|  ^___^_ 

s ^ p ? *5  ^ 

’pp'sf’“Q^I 

.CO  P®P®P 

w^POKTOjao 

i-HcioooJ>-5c<ooci 


^44 


APPEKDIX. 


u 


^ "o  flT 


43 


a g ^ 


9 S 


® ® s 

t>»  ® 


q®®_c®s®®’ii® 

®SS®Sa3SC®S 

'-H(rjoicoc'irHC}c^?oci 


Ph 

o oT 

?>> 

c3 

S 


« a '«  '«  c 


S 

i oT  i a i I i 


>> 


I e e 


s s 


-C  ® o " 

K ^ !*>■ 


Ph  H 


rH  (7i  CO  C? 


I=i 

O 

o 

iJ 

> 


^ S ^3 


•S  si  S 
« C e 


§ *§ 


2^0 


3 3 ^ 

(-^  o 3 


3 

'S  -® 

a « 


t:  - >.'Z 


o 5j5  ® ® 


vw  — o 

S >» 


^^3*0  '**  '“S 

hJOOHJO^OOJO 

p^c^cioocQrHcicicoci 


Q 

O 

O 

W 

> 

HH 

o 

)z; 

»-i 

w 

OJ 


. s .2 

« 'C 


u: 


«0  r- 

^ iS 

o 

d 

s 


.r>  'a 

I -.3  3 f "S  I "I 
-Si  J ^ Sc  ^ !c 


i-ij=  o»^  OJ3  O 


r-MCJCOCJ^C^CO(7? 


S "3 


s 


,S  g 

'S  ^ 

12 " 


rj  *rt 
^ • G 

"M  Z t3 


3 3 3 ^ 


. s 


s 

o ^ 


® _3  ^ 


e g- 


- 3 S 

® c <5J 

^ ^-3 

£ 3 ' 


rT  “ 

£ ^ 
:-i  d 

d £ 

- 3 = 

£ 


Qj  ^ ^ V 


- -«S- 

- £ cT  C 5 C 

s3  ® b 3 ^ (53 

>%  3 ^ 3 3 3 

3 3 2 3 "*  C 

c = 3"->^"- 
3 jD  3 ® S 


®S5®5cd5j^©5  E^oc^ojco 


»-tCMCO  Tlr-tCSJOOCJ 


3"2 


3 ® -2 

£5 

3 S 8 

® ,. 

1«  -s 
2 

I o « 


^ <w  > 
o R,  .G 
.£,<«  3 

^ -P  bo 

<y  > « 

.“S 

•^■3  CO 
® 3 

1^3.2 

--3  2fJ 
a 2 eo  ® 
s 3^  > 
S to  ^ 3 

li-= 

sS=$ 

li-l* 

4»  -3'3  3 
4-3 
- d 

-Sfc| 
I5«c 
II  I" 

r*  3s  ® 


to  3 "3 
^ ® ® 
___  3.  ® -3  >. 

^ £ "5  ® 

5 ® - c g 

£ ® = V)  3 
= 1; 

® ^ ® ® 

3! 

^ c«  ^ ! 
C tD  ^ ; 

gs  I 

ia  tfl  S * 


APPENDIX. 


445 


, OD  . . S *S  s e 

^ '‘Qj 

1 i 7 T 

s 

c: 

I s 
^ I ■ 


,C5 


r s o s 


u 


=2  *j  3 


. be  3 
!?  g 2 


E “t^-5  ' 

S ^ S ^ 1 


-=-  Ok®  O j=  V 

E-,  a >H  ^ >,  gH  >. 


he 

2 


'-^C'JOOC^fHClCOC^ 


^52  ^O 

> 'il!  S T 


I 


1 


S 


.t:  . . ®'^ 

fl  « o »«  ® .ti  flT 

3 <D  .-ti  S --^  = ® 

.ti  = -3  3 3 3 

M C 3 3 3 ^ 3 

:3  = *-  = w Jc  2 

he  w -3  -3  -3  hr  32 

•3  j=  hr  fee  *3  fcjD 

s Mg  -f-a  E -g 
3 E £ ^ ^ 

^ 3 C 


Bj=®  OkT  03=  O 


i-iC^COC^r-HC^COC^ 


.05  . S -S  s 

e 

^ '•4J  |<4J 


I 

33 

R 

T3 


I 

"3  -o'  ^ 

III 


pK 

ru 


^ -3  '2  'S  3 e£  ' 
^ 2 .2  2 ^ % , 


llo. 


•^!i>“  H ’ 

>» 


r>^  2 £ .^‘c  ’3  'c 

5^  2 £ o § ® § ^ 

« H K P«  ^ Px  H 

1-J  (?j  CO  oi  r-;  C^  CO 


. . =0  . . S -S  R s 

e R 53  ^R 

14  1 I 

■xi  ^ ^ ^ no  »-k 

R ®e2  ^ ’'  »>  .VI  -!  n 

•2  .^’2'£'2=i|'3 

i "2v-JfSj5§oc5 
»®  "3  o ® o oi  ® 


j^cgJn  ®2 

^o  5=JD*-^T^.3  hc^ 

00  s E f>f:if  E f 

• hX)3S^£^>»^ 
^■3®  3-5®®=* 

^ 33=®0Kr03=0 

*-^(?icoc^.-5cicooi 


R R « R 


g 

R R 

5^  2 b 

't«f  'i?  'C 


8 S 


'R  'R  'R  'b  'R  'R  'R  'R 


« « 
'Si  Si 

R R 


v2  ® « ’I  vS  vg 
h b ^ ^ ^ ^ 


I -s^. 

^ f=  § 2 § s £ 


R 

2*^ 


Ter 

btinij 

ghts 
t an 
ht  a 
it  ai 
ht  a 
ght 
ht  ai 

Ter 

arrrij 

06  5 

• OU  S H ^ 

Z'c®  3<n  3®=3 

^ 23=®0k?03=0 

^ f 

t-H 

-<t 

E 6 E B I I 

£ 3 b 3 ^ b 


J3  ® ^ Oi  .®! 

be  *j  -3  o;  ^ be 

•5^.^^.M-= 


2 


3 .: 

^ ;>  ^ 
3 <0  I 
O 3:  ' 


•-HC^COC^r-iGSlCOC^ 


t-HC>JC0(?l»-tC}fOCM 


446 


APPENDIX. 


.5® 


'Qj 


S 

^ ^ ^ 
®® 


. .<  . . s 

^ ^ ^ 

^ v»  v» 

<qj  'qj  ''qj  ' 

*T  ”*! 


K ? 


3 ^ 


2 ^ 


^ C5  ^ 


^ i2  g S 5 5=  ^ 

53  -C  ^ ^ -M  X 

p be  -*->  ^ '^  -C  be 
•p  ^ be  -r*^  be  *p 
2 c -^'S  2 

_ 3 g S g C 

2 O ” S a,  S ® 

e J3  ® O ^ O JS 

- tc><  ^ 5h  Eh 


S 2 S3  HQ 

g -T3  ’5  2 

2 ^ = I g 

i " ^ TS  ^ 


i.-“  ••§ 

*JU  fl 

3 ^ 

Hrt  2 

111 
l-S  “ 

H ^ 5? 


C^  00  C^  .-t  (7J  CO  CM 


«6  2 


—<CMCO(MrH(yjCOG^ 


qj  q)  q)  V 


S .2  s 


60  00 


S?  S'  ® 


/qj  'qj  'qj  'Qj  'q)  'qj 


fee  ,o  -a 


u s 


•If 


e to 


03  ^ 

be  jc 

£ ■|d.|^ 

“I  3 I 
J=  <i>  o 

H S >- 


I 

u 

.V  T3 

= J 'H 
Is 

<D  » ® S 

^ 


^ S gj 

'H  'lj 

4'”  ■" 

.§  to 


. s -i 

qj  ^ qj 

.t; 


ai  v2i 

o || 

rH  o g 

h2  o 

“ _c 


— <(MC0(M—  (MCOCM 


»-H(MCOCMrH<MCOCM 


qjqjqoqjqjqiqjq) 
6o6o0o0o6<o05ec60 
'«  '«  '«  '«  ^5S  '«  '53  '« 


fee 


£ 


SZi  ^ ^ 

JZ  a ^ 

^ hL  ^ 

” -g  ^ b£ 
S bC^  *P 

^ .s^-  c 

^ S £ ® 


^‘5  2 


S . 

Eh  ffi  >H 

"i  (M  CO  c4 


1 2 
J®  o 

^ >H 


I S 


c OA) 

^ s 

C3  S 
_C  O 

H 


2 ® 


q)q3q)q)q>q3q'qj 

'«  '«  'C  'S 


£ § 2 


2 ^ s o 
^ p cS  o ^ 


Hs  ^ *T3  n3 
.V  n3  ^ p p 

'tS  p ^ £ tfi  eP 

III! 


® ^ “ rs  ^ ^ 

_ 5 ® 5 ® ® 

£ 2.  > 2 -s:  -d 

JP  >*  1>  r»-»  *j  -•-» 


: ^ o'  £ p 


^ >» 

d ® b ^ b £ ® 


(M  CO  (M  ^ 01  CO  Ol 


ce  > g 


s t 


£ 5 S -2 
I "£  ® *2 
I 2!  E £ 


5^  c ® — , 

® »H  r-!  *P 

c 5 
^ ^ xi  ^ 
•*2  ® 

® -p 

£ 5 f J 

O Wh 

^ O -s 


12  « 


fee  *. 

® c ‘’t  ,< 
■5  ’£  sx  s 

o I a I 

"Soil 

t,g  §.s 

S W -g 
(/}  'S  £ ■£ 

ce  >-  J rt 
^ •p  p "w 

S3  p .P  c- 

® ® -p  rt 

s » I s 

«)  "P  p qj 

«S  g ^ 

£■§  £§ 
g-^-,2  S 

® “ •'d  o' 
S W)  2 

^ b qT 
^ ,g  c > 

° 6 1 1 

lltol 

® ® "S 

s 


a d 


P<  £ 


APPENDIX, 


447 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Obs.  These  tenses  being  formed  by  placing  after  the  verb  haber,  (tc 
nave.)  the  participle  past  of  the  principal  verb,  or  the  verb  that  is  conju- 
gated, only  one  participle  for  each  conjugation  is  here  given,  in  all  the 
Reuses 


INDICATIVE  MOOD 


N 1,  p.  Perfect,  or  Preterit  Definite 
It  is  compounded  of  the  present  of  the  indicative  of  the  verb  hahcr,  (to 
have,)  and  the  perfect,  or  participle  past  of  the  verb  which  is  conjugated 
For  brevity’s  sake,  the  English  is  prefixed  only  to  the  first  person  of  all  thosfi 
.onses. 


/ have  armed. 

I have  offended. 
I have  united. 


Yo  he  arm  ado. 
Yo  he  ofondido. 
Yo  he  unido. 


1.  He 

2.  lias 

3.  Ha 
2.  V ha 


Iarmado 
ofendido 
unido. 


Hemos 
Habeis 
Han 
VV.  han 


{armado. 
ofendidc. 
unido 


/ had  armed. 

I had  offended. 
I had  united. 


N.  2,  p. 


Pluperfect. 

Yo  habia  armado. 
Yo  habia  ofendido. 
Yo  habia  unido. 


1.  Habia 

2.  Habias 

3.  Habia 

2 V.  habia 


Iarmado. 

ofendido. 

unido 


Habfamos 
Habiais 
Habiaii 
VV.  habian 


Iarmado. 
ofendido. 
unido. 


N 3,  p.  Preterit  Indefinite,  or  Anterior.. 


I had  armed. 

I had  offended. 
I had  united. 

1 Hube 

2.  Hubiste 

3.  Hubo 
2.  V.  hubo 


Yo  hube  armado. 
Yo  hube  ofendido. 
Yo  hube  unido 
Hubimos 
Mubisteis 
Hubieron 
VV.  hubieron 


armado 

ofendido. 

unido. 


N.  4,  p.  Future 
/ shall  have  armed.  I 

I shall  have  offended. 

I shall  have  united. 


Definite. 

Yo  habre  armado 
Yo  habre  ofendido 
Yo  habre  unido. 


1 Ilabrd 

2.  Habras 

3.  llabrd 

2 V.  habrd 


Iarmado. 
ofendido 
unido. 


Habremos 
Habre  is 
Habrdn 
VV  habrdn 


iarmado. 
ofendido 
unido 


APPENDIX 


148 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOCD. 

N.  6,  p.  Perfect,  or  Preterit  Definite. 


/ may  have  armed. 

I may  have  offended 
I may  have  united 
1 Ilaya 

2.  Hay  as 

3.  llaya 
2.  V.  haya 


Yo  haya  armado. 
Yo  haya  ofendido 
Yo  haya  uaido. 
Hdyamos 
Hayais 
Hayaii 
VV.  hayan 


armadc. 

ofendido 

unido. 


N.  7,  p. 

* might  have  armed. 

I might  have  offended. 
I might  have  united. 

1.  Hubiera  ^ 

armado. 
ofendido. 
unido. 


2.  Hubieras 

3.  Hubiera 

2 V.  hubiera 


Pluperfect — Termination  ier\. 

Yo  hubiera  armado. 
Yo  hubiera  ofendido. 
Yo  hubiera  unido 
Hubidramos 
Hubicrais 
Hubiera  n 
VV.  hubierau 


N.  8,  p.  Pluperfect — Termination  ria. 


1 might  {would)  have  armed. 

I might  {would)  have  offended. 
I might  {would)  have  united. 

1.  Habria 

2.  Habrias 

3.  Habria 
2.  V.  habria 


Yo  habria  ani  ado. 
Yo  habria  ofendido. 
Yp  habria  unido 
Habriamos 
Habria  is. 

Habrian 
VV.  habrian 


Pluperfect — Termination  iese. 


I might  have  armed. 

I might  have  offended. 
I might  have  united. 

1.  Hubiese 

2.  Hubieses 
.3.  Hubiese 
2.  V.  hubiese 


armado. 

ofendido. 

unido. 


N.  10,  p 

Should  I have  armed. 
Should  I have  offended. 
Should  / have  united. 

1 Hubiere 
2.  Hubieres 
3-  Huoiere 

2 V.  hubiere 


armado. 

ofendido 

unido. 


Yo  hubiese  armado 
Yo  hubiese  ofendido 
Yo  hubiese  unido. 
Hubicsemos 
Hubiese  is 
Hubiesen 
VV.  iiubiesen. 


Futt  re  Definite. 

Si  yo  hubiere  armado. 
Si  yo  hubiere  ofendida 
Si  yo  hubiere  unido. 
Hubiereinos  "1 

armado. 
ofendido 
unido. 


Hubidreis 
Hubiereii 
VV.  hubieren 


APPENDIX. 


449 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 
INFINITIVE  MOOD 


PRESENT. 

To  have,  I 

Teller.  | Ser. 

Hibiendo 

GERUND. 

Having,  I 

Teiiiendo.  | Siendo. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

To  he, 

Estax 

Being, 

Estandc 


Had, 

flabida  Teiiido. 


Been 

Sido.  Esiad' 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


N.  1.  PRESENT. 


I have. 

/ am. 

] 

He. 

Tengo. 

Soy. 

Esto*y 

? 

Has. 

Tienes. 

Eres. 

Estas 

3 

Ha. 

Tiene. 

Es 

Estd. 

2 

V.  ha. 

V.  tiene. 

V.  es. 

V.  esta. 

1 

Hemos. 

Tenemos. 

Somos 

Estamot 

2 

Habeife 

Teneis. 

Sois. 

Estais. 

3 

Han. 

Tienen. 

Son 

Estan 

2 

VV.  han. 

VV.  tienen. 

VV.  son 

VV  estan. 

N.  2 IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

1 had. 

1 was 

1 

Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

Estaba. 

2 

riabias. 

Tenias. 

Eras. 

Estabas. 

3 

Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

Estaba. 

2 

V.  habia. 

V.  tenia. 

V.  era. 

V.  estaba. 

1 

Habiamos. 

Teniamos. 

Eramos. 

Estaba  mob 

2 

Habiais. 

Teniais. 

Erais. 

Estabais, 

3 

Habian. 

Tenian. 

Eran. 

Estaban. 

2 

VV.  habian. 

VV.  tenian. 

VV.  eran. 

VV.  estaban 

N.  3.  PRETERIT. 

I had 

/ was 

1 

ITube. 

Tuve. 

Fui. 

Estuve. 

S 

Hiibiste. 

Tuviste. 

Fuiste. 

Estuvisle 

3 

llubo. 

Tuvo. 

Fue. 

Estuvo 

2 

V.  hubo. 

V.  tuvo. 

V.  fud. 

V.  estuVu. 

1 

Hubimos. 

Tuvimos. 

Fuimos. 

Estuvimos 

2 

Hubisteis. 

Tuvisteis. 

Fuisteis. 

Estuvisteis. 

3 

Hubi^ron 

Tuvi^ron.  I 

Fueron. 

Estuvidron. 

VV  hubieron.  VV.  tuvidrou 

VV.  fueron 

VV.  estuvier< 

150 


APPENDIX 


N.  4.  FUTURE. 

/ shall  have. 

1 shall  he. 

1 

Habrd. 

Tendrd. 

Serd. 

Estar6. 

2. 

Habrda 

Tendrds 

Serds. 

Estards. 

3. 

Habrd. 

Tendrd. 

Serd. 

Estard. 

2 

V.  habrd. 

V.  tendrd. 

V.  serd. 

V.  estard. 

1 

Habrdrnos. 

Tendrdmos. 

Seremos. 

EstardmoH. 

2. 

Habrdis. 

Tendreis. 

Serdis. 

Estardis. 

3. 

Ilabrdn. 

Tendrdn. 

Serdn. 

Est^rdn. 

2 

VV  babran 

VV.  tendrdn. 

VV.  serdn. 

VV.  estardL 

N.  5.  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Let  me  have:' 

Let 

me  he. 

1 

Lot  me  have 

Tenga  yo. 

Sea. 

Estd. 

2. 

Have  thou. 

Ten  td. 

Se. 

Estd. 

2. 

Have  not. 

No  tengas. 

No  seas. 

No  estes. 

3. 

Let  him  have.  Tenga  el. 

Sea. 

Estd. 

2. 

Have. 

Tenga  V 

Sea  V. 

Estd  V. 

1. 

Let  us  have. 

Tengamos. 

Seamos. 

Estemos. 

2. 

Have  ye. 

Teived. 

Sed. 

Estad. 

2. 

Have  not. 

No  tengais. 

No  seals. 

No  esteis. 

3. 

Let  them  have. 

Tengan. 

Sean. 

Esten. 

2. 

Have  you. 

Tengan  VV. 

Sean  VV. 

Esten  V^ 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


N.  6.  PRESENT 


/ may  have. 

1 may  he. 

1 Haya. 

Tenga. 

Sea. 

Estd. 

2.  Hayas. 

Tengas. 

Seas. 

Estes. 

3.  Haya. 

Tenga. 

Sea. 

Estd. 

2.  V.  haya. 

V.  tenga. 

V.  sea. 

V.  estd. 

1.  Hdyamos. 

Tengamos. 

Seamos 

Estemos. 

2.  Hdyais. 

Tengais. 

Seais. 

Esteis. 

3.  Hayan. 

Tengan. 

Sean. 

Esten. 

2.  VV.  hayan. 

VV.  tengan. 

VV.  scan. 

VV.  esten 

N.  7.  IMPERFECT  TENSE — FIRST  TERMINATION. 


I would  have. 


I would  he. 


2.  Ilubieras. 

3.  Hubiera. 

2.  V.  hubiera. 

X.  Hubi^ramos. 
2.  Hubierais. 

3 Hiibieran 
VV.  hubieran 


Tuviera. 

Tuvieras. 

T Liviera. 

V.  tuviera. 

T uviOramos. 
T uvierais. 
Tuvieran. 

VV.  tuvieran. 


Fuera. 

F ueras. 

F uera. 

V.  fuera. 
Fu^ramos. 
Fu^rais. 
Fueraii. 

I VV  fueran. 


Estuviera. 

Estuvieras. 

Estuviera. 

V.  estuviera. 
Estuvi^ramoe. 
Estuvi^rais. 
Ectuvieran. 
VV.  estuvidraii 


APPENDIX 


451 


N.  8.  SECOND  TERMINATION 


/ would  have. 

I would  be. 

1 

flabria 

Tendria. 

Seria. 

Estaria. 

2 

Habrias. 

Tendrias. 

Serias. 

Estarieis. 

3 

Habria. 

Tendria. 

Seria. 

Estaria. 

2. 

V.  habria. 

V.  tendria. 

V.  seria. 

V.  estaria. 

i. 

Ilabriamos. 

Tendriamos. 

Seriamos. 

Estariamoa. 

2 

Habriais. 

Tendriais. 

Seriais. 

Estariais. 

3 

Habrian. 

Tendrian. 

Serial!. 

Estarian 

2 

V^V.  habrian. 

VV.  tendrian. 

VV.  serial! 

VV.  estarian 

N.  9.  THIRD  TERMINATION. 


i should  have. 

I should  be. 

1 

Hubiese. 

Tuviese. 

Fuese. 

Estuviese. 

2 

Hubieses. 

Tuvieses. 

F ueses. 

Estuvieses. 

3 

Hubiese. 

T uviese. 

Fuese. 

Estuviese. 

2 

V.  hubiese. 

V.  tuviese. 

V.  fuese. 

V.  estuviese. 

1 

Hubidsemos. 

Tuvi^semos. 

Fudsemos. 

Estuviesenios. 

2 

Hubieseis. 

Tuvidseis. 

F ueseis. 

Estuvieseis. 

3 

Hubiesen. 

T uviesen. 

Fuesen. 

Estuviesen. 

2 

V^V.  hubiesen. 

VV.  tuviesen. 

VV.  fuesen 

VV.  estuviesen 

N.  10  FUTURE 

When  I shall  have. 

When  I shall  be. 

1 

Hubiere. 

T uviere. 

Fuere. 

Estuviere. 

2 

Hubieres. 

Tuvieres. 

Fueres. 

Estuvieres. 

3. 

Hubiere. 

Tuviere. 

Fuere. 

Estuviere. 

2. 

V.  hubiere 

V tuviere. 

V.  fuere.  • 

V estuviere. 

1. 

Hubi^remos. 

T uvidremos. 

Fudremos. 

Estuvieremos. 

2. 

Hubidreis. 

Tuvi^reis. 

Fuereis. 

Estuviereis. 

3. 

Hubieren. 

Tuvieren. 

Fueren. 

Estuvieren. 

2. 

VV.  hubieren. 

VV.  tuvieren 

VV.  fue'ren. 

VV.  estuvieren. 

IDIOMATICAL  TRANSLATION  OF  SOME  TENSES. 


present  of  the  infinitive  mood,  and  the  (p 


N.  B. — The  (i)  stands  for  the 
for  the  past  participle. 

I am  to  (i ) 

I'hoii  art  to  (i,)  &c. 

I was  tc  (i,)  &.C. 
i shall  be  obliged  to  (i,)  &c 
I have  just  (p,)  &c. 

! had  just,  &c. 

. am  going  to  (i,)  &c. 

I was  going  to  (i,)  &<; 


He  de  (i,)  (139,  153.) 

Has  de  (i,)  &c. 

Hahia  de  (i,)  &c. 

Habre  de  (i,)  &c. 

Acaho  de  (i,)  acabas  de  (i,)  &c  (21 1 
Acababa  de  (i,)  acabahis  de  (i,)  &c 
Voy  d (i,)  vas  d (i,)  va  d (i.) 

Vamos  d (i,)  vais  d (i,)  van  d (i.) 
Iba  d (i,)  ibas  d (i,)  iba  d (i,) 


452 


APPENDIX 


To  (v)  again,  &c 

I liked  to  have  (p.) 

To  be  near.  ) _ . , 

To  come  near.  ^ V^rUaple 

To  be  about  (p.  oi  i.) 

To  be  to  (i.) 

It  is?  to  be  observec. 


' Voocer  a (i,j 

Vuelvo  a (i,)  tuelves  a (i,)  nutlvt 
^ rt  (i.) 

Volvemos  d (i,)  volveis  d Tk)  tuil 
^ ven  d (i.) 

I Estuve  para  (i.)  ^ 

£ Estar  d pique  de  (i.) 

< Estar  d panto  de  (i.) 

( Estar  para  (i.) 

Estar  para. 

Ser  de,  Haber  de.  Deher 
Es  de  notar.  Se  ha  de  notar 
Debe  notarse. 


TABLE  SHOWING  HOW  TO  PLACE  THE  DIFFERENT  PRONOUNS  IN  A SENTENCE,  (69  ) 
fil  me  le  (los,  la,  las,  lo)  da. 

no  te  le  (los,  la,  las,  lo)  envia. 

^Nosle  (los,  la,  las,  lo)  ofrece  el  ? 

No  os  le  (los,  la,  las,  lo)  trae  ^1? 

V.  no  se  le  (los,  la,  las,  lo)  promete. 


A VERB  AFFIRMATIVELY,  NEGATIVELY, 

I recompense,  or  do  recompense.  | 
I do  not  recompense.  | 

Do  I recompense?  | 

Do  I not  recompense  ? | 

I have  corresponded.  I 

I have  not  corresponded.  | 

Have  I corresponded?  | 

Have  I not  corresponded?  | 


AND  INTERROGATIVELY  CONJUGATED. 
Recompenso. 

Yo  no  recompenso,  or 
No  recompenso. 

I Recompenso  7 or  i Recompenso  yo  i 
I No  recompenso  7 or 
I No  recompenso  yo  7 
He  correspondido. 

No  he  correspondido. 

I He  correspondido  7 or 
I He  correspondido  yo  7 
I No  he  correspondido  yo  7 


PASSIVE  VERBS.  (175.) 

Passive  verbs  are  formed  from  active-transitive  verbs  ny  adding  their  par- 
ticiple past,  or  passive,  to  tne  auxiliary  verb  ser,  (to  be,)  through  all  ni 
changes,  as  in  English  ; thus,  from  the  active  verb  amar,  (to  love,)  is  formed 
the  passive  verb  ser  amado,  (to  be  loved.) 

Obs.  A.  The  participle  must  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
nominative  it  refers  to ; consequently  it  changes  the  o into  a when  the  fub- 
ject  is  feminine,  and  adds  s for  the  plurai ; thus, 


He  is  loved. 
She  is  loved. 
Von  are  loved 


SINGULAR. 

El  es  amado. 

Ella  es  amada. 

V.  es  amado,  (amada.) 


APPENDIX. 


453 


They  are  loved. 
They  are  loved. 
You  are  loved. 


PLURAL. 

Elios  son  amados. 

Ellas  son  atnadas, 

VV.  son  amadoSy  (amadas.) 


Ohs.  B.  Ill  the  compound  tenses  the  participle  of  the  principal  verb  ia 
lli0  only  one  that  admits  the  change  ; the  participle  of  the  auxiliary  verb 


JO  bo  (been,  sido)  is  unchangeable  ; 
n 3 has  been  rewarded. 

They  have  been  rewarded. 

She  had  been  admired. 

They  had  been  admired. 

You  could  have  been  employed. 

You  could  have  been  assisted. 


El  ha  sido  premia  do, 

Elios  han  sido  premiados. 

Ella  habia  sido  admirada, 

Ellas  hahian  sido  admiradas. 

V.  hahria  sido  empleado,  {emple- 
ada.) 

VV.  habrian  sido  asistidos,  {asistu 
das.) 


Obs.  C.  Passive  impersonal  verbs,  and  those  referring  to  inanimate  c b- 
jects  or  things,  are  translated  by  placing  the  verb  which  is  in  the  participle 
past  in  English,  in  the  same  person  and  number  in  which  the  verb  to  be  is 
in  the  English  sentence,  placing  the  pronoun  se  before  it ; thus.  This  ship 
was  built  in  less  than  three  months — Esta  fragata  se  construyo  en  menos 
de  Ires  meses,  instead  of  fue  construida.  It  is  said — Se  dice,  instead  of  Es 
dicho. 


PRONOMINAL,  OR  REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

A pronominal,  or  reflective  verb,  is  that  which  has  the  same  person  or 
thing  as  subject  and  object ; as, 

He  arms  himself.  | El  se  arma  a si  mismo. 

These  verbs  terminate  their  present  of  the  infinitive  mood  by  the  pronoun  se, 
which  must  be  suppressed  in  order  to  find  out  the  conjugation ; thus — 

To  approach.  I Acer  car  se. 

To  be  sorry  | Dolerse. 

To  repent.  | Arrepentirse. 

Taking  off  the  se  we  here  have,  acercar,  1st  conjugation;  doler,  2d  conju- 
Ration  ; and  arrepentir,  3d  conjugation.  (80.) 

These  verbs  are  conjugated  by  placing  the  pronouns  me,  te,  se,  se,  nos, 
os,  se,  se,  according  to  the  number  and  person  of  the  nominative  they  refer 
to,  immediately  before  the  verb,  if  the  subject  be  expressed  before  it ; and 
either  before  or  after  the  verb,  if  the  subject  be  not  expressed  or  placed  after 
it  When  they  are  placed  after  the  verb  they  must  be  written  so  as  to 
'brm  one  word  with  it. 

In  the  imperative  mood  they  are  always  placed  after  the  verb,  which  sup- 
presses the  s in  the  fir&t  person  plural,  and  the  d in  the  second  person  of  the 
Game  number.  When  the  second  person  singular  or  plural  is  used  with 
the  adverb  no,  the  pronouns  are  placed  before  the  verb.  Examples: — 


i54 


APPENDIX. 


1.  I congratulate  myself. 

2.  Thou  congratulatest  thyself. 

3 He  congratulates  himself. 

2,  You  congratulate  yourself. 

1 We  congratulate  ourselves. 

2 You  congratulate  yourselves. 

3 They  congratulate  themselves 
You  congratulate  yourselves 

\ 1 had  congratulated  myself. 

2 I have  armed  myself. 

3.  They  had  flattered  themselves. 

IMPERA 

Behave  (thou)  well. 

Behave  (you)  well 
Behave  not  ill. 

Behave  (you)  not  ill. 

Let  us  prepare  ourselves. 


Yo  me  congratulo. 

Tu  te  congratulas 
El  se  congratula, 

V.  se  congratula, 

Nosotros  nos  congraiulamo$ 
Vosotros  os  congratulais. 

Elios  se  congratulan, 

VV.  se  congratulan. 

Me  hahia  congratulado. 

Yo  me  he  armada. 

Elios  se  habian  lisonjeado 

MOOD. 

Portate  hien. 

Portdos  hien,  (the  a is  suppressed.) 
No  te  portes  mal 
No  os  porteis  mal. 

Preparemonos.  (The  s is  suppressed,  i 


GERUND.-~GferM7^^^^o. 


The  Gerund  is  that  part  of  the  verb  that  terminates  in  undo  in  the  verba 
of  the  first  conjugation,  and  in  iendo  in  those  of  the  second  and  third ; as, 
puhlicando,  (publishing,)  from  publicar ; prometiendo,  (promising,)  from 
prometer;  asistiendo,  (assisting,)  from  asistir.  It  does  not  admit  any 
change  of  gender  or  number. 

It  is  translated  by  the  English  present  participle,  and  conjugated  with  tlie 
verb  estar,  (to  be  ;)  as. 


Anastasia  estd  leyendo,  y Maria 
Ana  estd  tocando  el  piano. 


Anastasia  is  reading,  and  Maria  Ann 
is  playing  on  the  piano. 

It  is  used  also  absolutely  ; as, 

By  practising  virtue  thou  wilt  be 
happy  I 

In  such  cases  it  may  be  expressed  by  the  corresponding  tense  of  its  vero 
and  even  by  the  noun  derived  from  it ; as, 


Practicando  la  virtud,  serdsfeliz 


Columbus  discovered  the  new  world 
in  the  reign  of  Isabella,  the  Catho- 
lic, and  under  her  auspices. 


Reinando  Isabel,  la  Catohea,  y hajo 
sus  auspicios.  Colon  descuhrio  el 
Nuevo  Mundo,  (or  cuando  reinaba 
Isabel,  or  en  el  reinado  de  Isabel.) 


PARTICIPLE. 

The  passive  or  past  participle  terminates  in  ado  in  the  first  conjugatioii 
ind  in  idc  in  the  second  and  third.  It  changes  its  termination  according  to 
the  number  and  gender  of  the  person  it  refers  to  ; except  when  it  follows 
immediately  after  the  verb  haher,  or  any  other  auxiliary,  in  which  case  it 
does  not  admit  of  any  change 


APPENDIX. 


45D 


All  passive  participles  that  do  not  terminate  in  ado 
regular ; such  are  the  following,  from  the  verbs — 

or  ido  are 

To  open. 

ahriry 

abicrto. 

To  cover. 

cubrir. 

cubierto* 

To  say, 

deciTy 

dicho. 

To  write. 

escribir, 

escrito 

To  fry. 

freivy 

frito. 

To  do, 

hacevy 

hccho. 

To  print. 

imprimiry 

impreso 

To  die, 

morivy 

muerto 

To  solve, 

solveVy 

sueito. 

To  see. 

very 

visto. 

To  put. 

ponevy 

puesto. 

To  turn, 

volvevy 

vuelto. 

Tlieir  compounds  have  the  same  irregularity 

Obs.  The  participles  past  of  haheVy  ser,  esiary  and  tenery  do  not  ad- 
Dili  any  variation.  The  firsi  and  the  last  had  it  formerly. 

VERBS  THAT  HAVE  TWO  PARTICIPT.FS. 

There  are  some  verbs  that  have  two  passive  pariicipleSy  the  one  regulai 
fold  the  other  irregular.  They  are  contained  in  the  following  list,  in  whicli, 
tor  brevity’s  sake,  the  irregular  participle  only  is  expressed. 


To  surfeit. 

ahitavy 

ahito. 

To  bless, 

hendecivy 

bendito. 

To  compel. 

compeler, 

comp  also 

To  conclude. 

concluiTy 

concluso. 

To  confuse. 

confundivy 

confuso. 

To  convince. 

convencevy 

convicto. 

To  convert. 

convertivy 

converse. 

To  awake. 

dcspertavy 

despierto 

To  elect. 

elegify 

electo. 

To  wipe, 

enjugavy 

enjuto. 

To  exclude. 

excluivy 

excluso 

To  expel. 

expeleVy 

expulso. 

To  express. 

expresaVy 

expreso. 

To  extinguish. 

extinguivy 

extinto. 

To  fix. 

fijfiry 

To  satiate. 

hartary 

harto. 

To  include. 

incluiry 

incluso. 

To  incur, 

incurrivy 

incurso. 

To  insert. 

in^ertary 

inserto. 

To  invert. 

invertir 

’nverso. 

To  ingraft, 

ingerify 

ingerto. 

To  join, 

untavy 

iunto. 

To  cniso, 

maldecvr 

maldiU 

456 


APPENDIX. 


To  manifest. 

manifestart 

manijiesto. 

To  fade, 

mar  chit  ar. 

marchito 

To  omit, 

omitirf 

omiso. 

To  oppress. 

oprimir^ 

opreso. 

To  perfect, 

perfeccionary 

perfecto 

To  arrest, 

prendeTy 

preso. 

To  prescribe, 

prescribir, 

prescrito 

To  provide. 

proveery 

provisto. 

To  shut  up. 

recluiry 

recluso 

To  break. 

romper, 

roto. 

To  loosen. 

soltar, 

suelto. 

To  suppress. 

supriinhy 

supreso. 

To  suspend. 

suspendery 

suspenso. 

The  regular  participles  of  these  verbs  are  used  to  form  the  coinpouuc 
tenses  with  haher  ; as, 

He  has  awaked  early.  | El  ha  dispertado  temprano. 

The  irregular  participles  are  used  as  verbal  adjectives,  and  with  the  vertii 
s'cr,  &c.,  and  do  not  form  compound  tenses  with  haber ; excepting  preso, 
vrescritOj  provisio,  roto,  and  a few  others  ; as, 

He  is  early  awaked.  I El  estd  despierto  temprano. 

They  have  provided.  | Elios  han  provisto,  (proveido,) 


ADVERBS. 

Adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  of  one  termination  by  adding  to  them 
mente  ; as,  dulce,  dulcemente  : and  from  those  of  two  terminations  by  add- 
ing mente  to  the  feminine  ; as,  gracioso,  graciosamente.  They  admit  tbo 
superlative ; as,  graciosisimamente. 

When  two  or  more  adverbs  ending  in  ly  occur  in  the  same  sentence,  the 
termination  mente  is  added  to  the  last  only  ; as. 

He  speaks  elegantly  and  correctly.  1 El  habla  correcta  y elegantementf 


A FEW  OF  THE  ADVERBS. 


Here, 

aedy  aqui. 

Well, 

bien. 

There, 

alld,  alliy  ahi. 

111, 

mal. 

Near, 

cerca. 

More, 

mas 

Far, 

lejos. 

Less, 

menos. 

Where, 

dondey  adonde. 

Much, 

mucho. 

Within, 

dentro. 

Little, 

poco. 

Without, 

fuera. 

Already, 

ya. 

Vp, 

arriba. 

Often, 

d menudo. 

Down, 

abajo. 

To-day, 

hoy. 

Before, 

delante. 

Yesterday, 

ayer. 

Behind, 

detras. 

To-morrow, 

mahana. 

Upon, 

encima. 

Last  night, 

anoche. 

Under, 

debajo. 

Now, 

ahora 

APPENDIX. 


457 


PreseiUlj 

luego 

Thus, 

aai. 

Late, 

tarde. 

Very, 

muy. 

Early, 

temprano. 

Even, 

aun. 

Always, 

siernpre. 

Yes, 

si. 

Never, 

nunca,  jamas. 

No,  nor. 

noy  ni 

SOME  ADVERBIAL  EXPRESSKINS. 

All  “fours. 

d gatas. 

Across, 

de  traces. 

in  heaps, 

d montones. 

Suddenly, 

de  repents 

Hardly, 

d penas. 

Gratis, 

de  balde. 

At  once. 

de  una  vez. 

Indeed, 

de  veraa. 

Sometimes, 

d veces. 

Softly, 

poco  d poco. 

On  credit. 

d plazo. 

Behold, 

he  aquiy  or  alii 

PREPOSITIONS. 

The  most  frequent  are — 

At,  to,  for, 

A. 

Towards, 

hdcia. 

Before, 

dntes,  ante 

Until, 

hasta. 

With, 

con. 

For,  to, 

para. 

Against, 

contra. 

By,  for,  through, 

por. 

Of,  from. 

de. 

According, 

seguru 

From, 

desde. 

Without, 

sin. 

^n,  on,  at. 

en. 

On,  upon. 

sobre. 

Between,  among,  entre. 

Behind, 

tras,  detras. 

The  following  prepositions  require  de  after  them,  when  they  are  followed 

oy  a noun  or  pronoun  ; as — 

That  man  ( 

comes  after.  I 

Ese  hojnhre  viene 

! despues. 

Sir,  he  will 

go  after  you.  | 

Ne/ior,  el  ird  despues  de  V 

k d cercay  al  rededor,  en  torno. 

About, 

( d cerca  dcy  al  rededor  de,  en  torno  de. 

Before, 

dnieSy  delante. 

Within,  in. 

dentro. 

Above,  up. 

cncima. 

After, 

despues. 

Below, 

ahajo. 

Behind, 

detras,  tro3. 

Under, 

bajo. 

Beneath, 

debajo. 

Out  of. 

fuera. 

Opposite, 

enfrente 

Near, 

cerca. 

On,  upon. 

encima. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

They  are  classed  as  follows : — 

COPULATIVE. 

Moreover, 

ademas. 

That, 

que. 

And, 

y or  i,  e * 

Also, 

tamhien. 

Neither,  nor. 

ni.^ 

^ K is  used  instead  of  y when  the  following  word  begins  with  i or  hi » as, 
W ise  men  and  ignorant.  I Sabios  e ignorantea. 

Mother  and  daughter.  | Madre  e kija. 

Neither  he  nor  she  went  out,  m el  ni  ella  salieron. 

20 


458 


APPENDIX. 


DISJUNCTIVE 


Or,  either,  ) 
Whether,  \ 
Whether, 
either. 


o,  M,  ya. 

sea  que. 
tampoco 


ADVERSATIVE. 


Bjt, 

E-van, 


maSf  pero. 

\ aun  cuando 


f aurii  cuando. 
Although,  though,  aunque. 


fJecause, 
Why  ? 
Since, 

By,  for. 
Therefore, 


Alas ! 

Ah! 

Wo  to  me . 
Lo! 

Well! 

Holla . 


porque,  que. 

I porque  ? 
pues,  pues  que. 
por. 

par  tanto. 


Whereas,  por  cuanU 

That,  pa>i'a  que 

That,  C para  quo 

In  order  that,  \dfin  de 


If, 

But, 

Provided, 

Unless, 


Since, 


As, 

So, 


CONDITIONAIh 

sL 

sino. 

con  tai  que. 

J a menos  de 
\ d menos  que 

CONTINUATIVE. 

pueSf  pues  to  aui 

COMPARa  f iTE. 

comoy  ast  coma, 
asi. 


; Ay  • 

; Ah  ! 

; Ay  de  mi  ! 
; He  : 

/ Ea  ! 

; Ola  / 


INTERJECTIONS. 

Take  care  ! / Tate  ! 

Hurrah ! ; Viva  ! 

Here  ! / Cc  ! 

Fie!  i Puf  ! 

God  grant.  / Ojald  ' 


ANALOGY. 


PJLES  TO  TRANSLATE  MANY  OF  THE  ENGLISH  AND  SPANISH  WORDS  HAVING  THI 
SAME  GREEK  OR  LATIN  ORIGIN 

1.  Words  in  fl,  e,  aZ,  ar,  ble,  ion,  sion,  sts,  are  the  same  in  both  Ian» 
gnages;  as,  diploma,  epitome,  vital,  solar,  durable,  opinion,  adhesion^ 
analysis. 

2.  Words  in  ant,  ent,  ient,  add  an  e;  as,  observant,  ohservante  ; regent, 
ngcnte;  ohoAiewi,  obediente. 

3.  Words  in  ect,  ic,  id,  il,  add  an  o;  as,  select,  selecto ; critic,  critico ; 
plscid,  pldcido  ; tranquil,  tranquilo* 

4 Words  in  ance  or  ancy  change  it  into  ancia  ; and  those  in  ence  oi 
into  encia  ; as,  tolerance,  toler ancia  ; constancy,  prudence,  adolescency. 

5.  Words  in  acy,  amy,  emy,  logy,  ody,  omy,  ory,  asy,  esy,  change  the  \ 

V is  employed  instead  of  d,  when  the  word  immediately  folVwmg  t? 
hcgms  with  o or  ho  as,— 

Si.Ver  or  gold 


1 Plata  ti  oro 


APPENDIX. 


459 


mlo  J ; as,  efficacy,  infanij',  academy,  mytholc^y,  melody,  economy,  theory 
fantasy,  courtesy — ejicacia,  ^c. 

6.  Those  in  cky  change  it  into  quia  ; and  those  in  phy  into  p.a ; as, 
monarchy,  monarquia  ; philosophy , filosojia. 

7.  Words  in  ice  change  it  into  icia  ; as,  avarice,  avaricia. 

8 Words  in  inc,  ivcy  ire^  change  e into  o ; as,  divine,  active,  severe — 
^'vino,  ^c. 

9.  Those  in  tion  change  it  into  cion ; as,  constitution,  constitucion. 

10.  Words  in  ty  change  it  into  dad,  and  sometimes  add  ad  instead  of  the 
y 'j  as,  activity,  actividad;  majesty,  magestad. 

11.  Words  in  ary,  ery,  ory,  change  the  y into  io  ; as,  anniversary,  «/«• 
vcrsario  ; baptistery,  bautisterio  ; laboratory,  laboratorio. 

12.  Words  in  ous  or  ious,  change  ous  into  oso  ; as,  famous,  fainoso ; 
delicious,  delicioso. 

13.  Latin  words  beginning  with  s followed  by  a consonant,  either  lose 
the  s,  or  add  an  e ; as,  scientia,  ciencia  ; spiritus,  espiritu. 

14.  Proper  nouns  in  us  change  it  into  o ; as,  Publius,  Publio  ; Titus, 
Tito,  (348.)  Those  in  er  change  it  into  ro ; as,  Alexander,  Alejandro. 
Those  in  o add  n ; as,  Cicero,  Ciceron.  Those  in  es  or  on  are  the  same  in 
both  languages.  Nouns  having  the  diphthongs  (b,  cb,  retain  the  e only  ; as, 
Mwoos,  Eneas ; CEdipus,  Edipo  ; Caesar,  Cesar. 


SYNTAX. 


Syntax  principally  consists  of  two  parts,  Concord  {Concordancia)  and 
Government,  ( Regimen.) 

Concord  is  the  agreement  which  one  word  has  with  another  in  gender, 


* Agreement  is  the  similarity  of  words  in  number,  gender,  &c  As  the 
articles  and  adjectives  admit  of  no  variation  of  either  in  English,  it  will  bo 
proper  to  explain  here  what  that  word  imports  and  requires  in  Spaiiish, 
V hich  will  be  better  understood  by  the  following  examples : — 


The  rich  man 
The  rich  men. 

The  rich  woman. 
The  rich  women. 
A just  man. 

Some  just  men. 

A just  woman. 
Some  just  women. 


El  hombre  rico. 

Los  h ombres  ricos 
La  mujer  rica. 

Las  mujeres  ricas 
Un  hombre 
Unos  homhres  justos 
Una  mu]eT  jusia. 
Unas  mu}eres  Justus 


It  will  be  observed  by  these  examples,  that  the  article  the  ha&  no  change 
Ji  English,  and  that  el  has  four  in  Spanish.  The  same  is  the  case  with  tlm 
sdjectives  rich  &nd  just,  and  with  the  articles  un  and  unos. 


^60 


APPENDIX, 


aumber,  case,  or  person.  Gcvernment  is  tha  power  which  one  part  oi 
speech  has  over  another  in  directing  its  mood,  tense,  or  case.  The  follow- 
ing rales  contain  the  most  important  of  both. 


OF  THE  ARTICLE. 

Rule  1.  The  article  must  agree  in  number,  gender,  and  case,  with  the 
toun  to  wnich  it  refers ; as, 


Quiet  sol  .tude,  pleasant  fields,  serene 
weather,  purling  streams,  and 
tranquillity  of  mind  contribute  very 
much  to  the  fecundity  even  of  the 
most  barren  genius. 


El  sosiegOj  el  lugar  apacihle,  la 
amenidad  de  los  campoSf  la  sere- 
nidad  de  los  cielos,  el  murmurar 
de  las  fuentes,  la  quietud  del  es- 
piritu  son  grande  parte  para  que 
las  musas  mas  esteriles  se  mues- 
tren  fecundas 

Don  Quijote,  prol.,  pt.  i. 

Obs,  i.  The  nouns  agua,  (water,)  aguilay  (eagle,)  acta,  (act,  recorc  ) 
ancla,  (anchor,)  diay  (wing,)  almay  (soul,)  ave,  (bird,)  ama,  (the  mistress  of 
a house,  a housekeeper,)  and  a few  others,  though  feminine,  require  the 
masculine  article,  but  oniy  in  the  singular  number,  and  when  they  are  im- 
mediately preceded  by  ii. 


They  quenched  their  thirst  in  the  I Elios  hehieron  del  agua  del  arroyo. 
v.^ater  of  the  rivulet.  j Don  Quijote,  cap.  xviii.  pt.  l 

Some  other  nouns  feminine  beginning  with  a,  or  Aa,  having  the  first 
Byllable  long,  are  frequently  used  in  the  singular  with  the  masculine  article. 
This  use,  however,  is  not  generally  sanctioned  ; and  the  greatest  number  of 
the  classic  writers  follow  the  rule  laid  down  by  the  Spanish  Academy,  that 
excepts  only  the  above  nouns. 

Rule  2.  The  English  indefinite  article  before  national  nouns,  as  well 
as  before  those  that  signify  the  dignity,  profession,  trade,  condition,  &c.,  ol 
persons,  in  the  titles  of  books  and  other  performances,  and  in  exclamations, 
is  not  translated  into  Spanish  ; as. 


The  Monserrate  of  Cristobal  de  Vi- 
rues,  a Valencian  poet. 

It  was  certainly  known  that  Don 
Juan  de  Austria  was  appointed  a 
general  of  the  league. 

And  ending  in  Zoilus  or  Zeuxis, 
though  one  was  a backbiter,  and 
the  other  a painter. 

What  a pity ! 


El  Monserrate  de  Cristobal  de  Vi- 
rueSy  poeta  Valenciano, 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  vi.  pt  i. 

Se  supo  por  cierto  que  venia  por 
General  desta  liga  Don  Juan  de 
Austria.  Ditto,  cap.  xxxix. 

Y acabando  en  Zoilo,  6 Zeuxis, 
aunque  fue  maldiciente  el  uno,  y 
pintor  el  otro.  Ditto,  Pref. 

/ Que  lastima  .' 


Obs.  2.  If  the  indefinite  article  be  immediately  followed  by  an  udjec 
<ve  emphatically  jsen,  it  must  be  translated ; as. 


APPENDIX. 


m 


There  I obtained  an  ensign’s  com- 
mission in  the  company  of  a fa- 
mous captain. 


Alcance  a ser  aljtrcz  ac  unfumoat 
capiton. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxix. 


Ohs.  3.  Should  a proper  noun  follow  that  of  the  dignity,  &.C.,  tl^e  dcfi- 
xiite  article  must  be  affixed  to  it  ; as, 


Whom  continually  in  our  Castilian 
language  we  call  king  Artus. 


Que  continuamente  en  nuestro  rO’^ 
mance  Castellano  llamamos  el  rey 
Artus.  DittOf  cap.  xiii 

Rule  3.  The  definite  article  (el,  &c.)  is  prefixed  in  Spanish  to  all  com* 
mon  substantives,  when  they  are  used  to  express  the  whole  extent  of  their 
signification  ; which,  for  the  same  reason,  do  not  require  it  in  English  ; as. 


Vice  is  hateful. 

Men  are  mortal. 

Virtue  is  amiable. 

Riches  shall  not  profit  in  the  day  of 
revenge* 


El  vicio  es  aborrecible. 

Los  hombres  son  mortales. 

La  virtud  es  amable 
Las  riquezas  no  aprotechardn  en  e\ 
dia.  de  la  venganza. 


The  nouns  vice,  men,  virtue,  riches,  are  used  as  collective  nouns,  anc^ 
taken  in  a general  sense  ; that  is  to  say,  they  mean  that  all  vices  are  hate  • 
fill,  all  virtues  are  amiable,  that  all  men  are  mortal,  and  that  no  riches  cau 
prevent  the  vengeance  of  God. 

Ohs.  4.  The  article  is  retained  in  the  phrase  before  the  adjective,  when 
a common  noun,  taken  in  the  whole  extent  of  its  meaning,  is  omitted  by 
ellipsis ; as. 

Red  wane  is  not  so  dear  as  white.  I El  vino  tinto  no  es  tan  caro  coma  el 

I (vino)  bianco. 

Rule  4.  Common  nouns,  used  in  an  indeterminate  sense,  are  used  with 
or  without  the  article,  2is  in  English  ; as. 


He  asks  ti  iree  dollars  for  the  hat. 

He  asks  for  the  three  dollars,  value 
of  the  hat. 


El  pide  tres  pesos  por  el  sombrero. 
El  pide  los  tres  pesos,  valor  del 
sombrero. 


Rule  5.  When  the  names  of  the  days  of  the  week  are  used  to  mention 
the  day  with  a reference  to  a certain  day,  they  require  the  article  ; as, 


Thursday  before  the  Friday  on  wffiich 
she  was  to  remove  to  her  father’s 
garden,  she  gave  us  a thousand 
crowns. 


El  jueves  antes  del  viernes,  que  ella 
se  habia  de  ir  al  jar  din  de  su 
padre,  nos  did  mil  escudos. 

Don  Quijote,  cap  xl. 
Casa,  meaning  home,  and  being  preceded  by  a preposition,  does  not  admil 
the  article ; wdien  it  signifies  house,  it  may  be  used  with  or  without  it ; as, 
Wife,  I will  show' you  them  at  home.  I En  casa  os  las  mostrare,  mujer. 

I Ditto,  cap  lii. 

Calle  (street)  requires  the  article  before  it,  and  before  its  name  if  it  should 
oe  a common  noun  ; as, 


i62 


APPENDIX. 


He  lives  in  Pearl  street,  (in  tho  street 
of  m©  Pearl.) 

As  he  entered  St.  James  street  in 
Madrid. 


JEl  V2ve  en  la  c tile  dc  ia  Ptria^ 


Al  entrar  la  colic  dc  Santiago  er. 
Madrid 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xlviii.  pt.  ii. 
Rui  K 6.  The  Englisn  indefinite  article,  before  nouns  of  measure,  weight 
QT  number,  is  translated  by  the  definite  article,  according  to  the  name  it  re- 
fers to.  The  prepositions  d or  por  are  sometimes  added,  which  may  as  well 
t>e  omitted  ; as. 


This  broadcloth  is  worth  ten  dollars 
a yard. 


Butter  sells  at  two  shillings  a pound. 


Este  paiio  vale  diez  pesos  vara,  (or 
d diez  pest  s la  vara,  or  iiez  pe» 
SOS  por  vara.) 

La  manteca  (mantequilla)  se  vendt 
d dos  reales  libra,  {la  libra,  ( r por 
libra,) 

Rule  7.  The  English  definite  article  before  ordinal  numbers,  when 
they  are  immediately  preceded  by  a substantive,  in  quotations,  divisions  of 
books,  names  of  dignity,  &c.,  is  omitted  in  Spanish  ; as, 


Book  the  first,  chapter  the  second, 
section  the  fifth,  &c. 

The  invincible  Charles  the  Fifth. 


Lihro  primero,  capitulo  segundo, 
pdrrafo  quinto. 

EL  invictisimo  Carlos  quinto. 
i D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxix. 

Obs.  5.  When  the  English  definite  article  precedes  an  adjective  used 
as  an  epithet  before  the  nouns  above  stated.  It  must  be  translated  ; as. 


Augustus  Caesar  v/ould  have  been  in 
the  wrong  had  he  consented  to 
the  /execution  of  what  the  divine 
Mantuan  ordered  on  his  death- 
bed. 


No  hubiera  acertado  Augusto  Cesar 
si  consintiera  que  se  pusiera  en 
ejecucion  lo  que  el  divino  Mantu- 
ano  dejo  en  su  testamento  orde- 
nado.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  xiii. 


Rule  8 The  article  a,  and  the  adjective  one,  are  not  translated  before 
hundred,  thousand,  million,  half,  &c. ; as. 

In  the  year  one  thousand,  one  hun- 
dred and  one. 

fie  asks,  or  wants  one  yard  and  a 


En  el  aho  de  mil,  ciento,  y uno. 

El  necesita,  or  quiere  vara  y media- 


half. 

Rule  9.  Proper  names  of  persons  and  of  countries  do  not  admit  the 
irticle ; the  former,  however,  in  a colloquial  and  very  familiar  use,  take 
it ; as. 

She  was  called  Tolosa.  I Se  llamaba  la  Tolosa. 

I Don  Quijote,  cap.  iii. 

Obs.  6.  The  nouns  muerte,  (death,)  cielo,  (heaven,)  and  the  like  namejfej 
lake  the  article,  except  in  exclamations  or  direct  speeches ; as, 


the  power  of  death  be  your  sub- 
iect,  apply  “ Pallida,  morsf  &c. 


Si  tratdredes  delpoder  de  la  muerte^ 
acudid  luego  con  **  Pallida  mors,** 
&c  D.  QurioTE,  Prdlogo 


APPENDIX. 


468 


Remark.  *'  It  is  the  rule  of  our  language^  (the  Castilian,)  that  proper 
^ouns  are  net  accompanied  hy  articles;  excepting  la  Mancha,  la  Cc- 
kuna,  la  Habana.” — (Grammar  of  the  Castilian  Language,  by  the  Roya; 
Spanish  Academy,  part  ii.,  ch.  vi.)  The  preceding  rule  has  been  given  in 
(?onformity  with  this  decision  of  the  Academy,  which  may  be  used  as 
foi-lows : — 


The  names  of  the  countries  that  are  not  qualified  by  the  adjectives  cld  ci 
uew,  upper  or  lower,  &c.,  expressed  or  understood,  are  generally  used  with- 
out the  article  ; as, 

Mexico.  Mejico.  | Malta.  Malta. 


The  nam'^s  of  ihe  countries  that  are 
lives,  when  these  are  not  expressed) 
article;  America,  or  la  Americ 
Andalucia,  (alta  or  baja.)  When  tl 
the  article. 

The  following  are  exceptions,  and 

Brazil. 

Canada. 

Paraguay. 

Peru. 

A province  of  New  Castile. 

Barbadoes. 

Florida. 

Ferrol. 

Corunna. 

Havana,  &c. 


qualified  by  the  said,  or  other  adjec- 
may  be  used  with  or  without  the 
, (norte  or  sud.)  Andalucia,  or  la 
) adjective  is  expressed  they  require 

iiust  always  be  used  with  the  article. 
El  Brasil. 

El  Canada. 

El  Paraguay 
El  Peru. 

La  Alcarria. 

La  Barbada. 

La  Florida. 

El  Ferrol. 

La  Coruna. 

La.  Habana,  ^c. 


The  article  is  omitted  in  the  dates  of  letters  written  in  the  places  above 
excepted. 

Obs.  1.  Proper  names  of  mountains  and  rivers  take  the  definite  mas- 
culine article,  without  regard  to  their  termination  ; as, 


Those  who  feea  their  flocks  upon  the 
f^pacious  meads  of  the  meandering 
Guadiana  ; those  who  shiver  with 
the  chib’  blasts  of  the  whistling 
Pyrenees 


Los  que  su  ganado  apacientan  en 
las  extendidas  dehesas  del  toHu- 
oso  Guadiana  ; los  que  tiem'olan 
con  el  frio  del  silboso  Pirineo. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xviii. 


Rule  10.  When  several  nouns  come  together  in  English,  with  an  arti- 
cle before  the  first  of  them  only,  the  article  is  repeated  before  every  one, 
specially  when  they  are  of  different  genders,  and  a particular  emphasis  is 
^aced  on  them.  When  they  are  used  in  English  without  any  article,  the 
<ame  is  done  in  Spanish,  (372.) 

They  mention  the  father,  mother,  ^ Nos  cuentan  el  padre,  la  madre,  la 


couiitry,  relations,  age,  and  ex- 
ploits performed  by  said  knight. 


patria,  los  parientes,  la  edad,  y 
las  hazahas  que  el  tal  caballem 
hizo.  D.  Quijote,  capi  L 


APPENDIX. 


f:64 


Rule  1 1.  The  article  is  omitted  before  nouns  used  in  appositioa  ; as, 


0 Envy,  the  root  of  all  evils,  and  the 
destroyer  of  so  many  virtues ! 


El  sabio  teme  y se  desvia  del  maL 
La  esperanza  de  los  impios  pcrecetA 


; O Envidia,raiz  de  injlniios  males 
y car  coma  de  las  virtudes  ! 

Don  Quuote,  cap.  viii.  pt.  ii. 
Rule  12.  The  definite  masculine  article,  singular  or  p’ural,  is  used  be 
Lie  the  adjectives  taken  substantively  ; as. 

The  wise  man  feareth  and  dec'lineth 
from  evil. 

‘File  expectation  of  the  wicked  sha  1 
perish. 

Ohs,  8.  When  a noun,  qualified  by  an  adjective,  is  suppressed  by  ellip- 
sis, the  article  that  precedes  the  adjective  must  agree  in  number  and  gendei 
with  the  noun  that  has  been  omitted  ; as, 

Black  and  white  are  two  opposite  I El  negro  y el  bianco  wn  dos  colores 
colors.  1 opuestos. 

That  is,  el  color  negro  y el  color  bianco. 

Rule  13.  The  English  definite  article  before  adjectives  used  in  an  ab- 
solute sense,  that  is  to  say,  comprehending  in  their  meaning  a generality  of 
objects  or  things  that  may  be  masculine  or  feminine,  singular  or  plural,  is 
translated  by  the  indefinite  pronoun  lo  ; (344,)  as, 


Let  no  man  judge  the  white  black, 
and  the  black  white. 


Ninguno  se  ponga  djuzgar  lo  bianco 
por  negrOy  y lo  negro  por  bianco, 
Don  Quuote,  cap.  iv.  p.  ii. 
Rule  14.  When  the  adjective  todo  (all,  or  whole)  is  placed  before  the 
substantive,  it  requires  the  article  after  it,  whether  it  be  expressed  or  not  in 
English  ; as. 

All  men,  or  all  the  men.  I Todos  los  hombres. 

The  whole  assembly  | Toda  la  asamblea. 

Remark.  The  meaning  of  many  phrases  depends  on  the  use  or  omissu>p 
of  the  article.  A few  examples  may  elucidate  this  remark. 


To  set  up  a store. 

To  open  the  store. 

To  encourage,  to  support. 
To  die. 

To  miss  one’s  aim. 

To  be  successful. 

To  have  an  evil  tongue. 
To  have  lh3  tongue  sore. 


Abrir  tienda, 

Abrir  la  tienda 
Dar  alma, 

Dar  el  alma. 

Dar  en  blancn. 

Dar  en  el  blantm. 
Teller  mala  lengua, 
Tener  mala  la  lengua. 


OF  THE  NOUN  AND  THE  ADJECTIVE. 

ULE  15. — The  adjective  must  agroa  with  the  substantive  in  gender  ant 
dumber;  as, 

The  valiant  boy.  I El  muchacho  valiente 

The  handsome  girls.  j Las  muchachas  hermosas. 


avpj:ndix. 


465 


Obs.  9-  An  adjective  qualifying^  two  or  more  nouns  or  {Toiiouiis  ci  differ- 


#nt  genders,  in  the  singular,  agrees 
11  the  plural ; as, 

The  father  and  the  son  are  rich. 

The  rnolher  and  the  daughter  are 
handsome. 

He  and  she  are  generous. 

I’iie  house  and  the  garden  are  mag- 
nificent. 


with  them  in  the  masculine  terminatioa 

El  padre  y el  liijo  son  ricos. 

La  madre  y la  kija  son  hcrtnosna. 

El  y ella  son  generosos. 

La  casa  y eljardin  son  magnificos. 


Ohs.  10.  Two  or  more  adjectives  qualifying  a plural  noun,  which  sign>fiefi 
them  as  separately  considered,  agree  with  it  in  the  singular ; as, 


She  is  unexcelled  by  Helen,  unri- 
valled by  Lucretia,  or  any  other 
heroine  of  ages  past,  whether  Gre- 
cian, Roman,  or  Barbarian. 


A ella  no  la  llega  Elena^  ni  la  al~ 
canza  Lucreciaf  ni  otra  alguna 
de  las  famosas  mujeres,  que  vi- 
vieron  en  las  edades  pretcritas, 
griega,  latina,  6 bdrbara. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxv. 


Ohs.  11.  An  adjective  qualifying  two  or  more  nouns  of  inanimate  objects 
or  things,  having  different  gender  and  number,  generally  agrees  with  the 


nearest ; as, 

A union  which  the  equality  of  our 
family  and  riches  seemed  to  point 
out. 


Union  que  casi  la  conceriaoa  In 
igualdad  de  nuestro  linaje,  y 
riquezas 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxiv 


Ohs.  ly.  A noun  of  the  feminine  gender  in  the  plural,  being  in  the  same 
phrase  with  a noun  masculine  in  the  singular,  having  but  one  adjective, 
tin  adjective  agrees  in  tlia  plural,  and  in  the  masculine  termination,  if  the 
vero  agrees  with  the  plural  noun  ; as. 

His  promises  and  his  oath  have  been  I Sus  promesas  y su  juramento  han 
false.  I sido  falsos. 


i!n  such  cases  it  is  better  to  place  the  plural  noun  next  the  adjective,  and 
make  the  agreement  with  it ; thus — Su  juramento  y sus  promcsas  han  sido 
falsas. 

Rule  16. — An  adjective  qualifying  two  or  more  plural  nouns  or  pronouns, 
of  different  genders,  agrees  with  them  in  the  masculine  termination  in  the 
Dlu'al  ; as, 

toth  the  brothers  and  sisters  are  I Tanto  los  hermanoSf  como  las  her* 
chk\ri,table.  | manas  son  caritativos. 

Obs.  13.  This  rule  is  strictly  ooserved  when  the  nouns  or  pronouns  signify 
animate  objects  ; but  when  the  nouns  signify  inanimate  objects  or  things 
classic  authors,  both  ancient  and  modern,  generally  make  the  adjective 
agree  with  the  nearest  substantive ; as. 


466 


APPENDIX. 


r Sus  temores  y esperanzas  fueron  vanat 
J Sus  esperanzas  y temores  fueron  vanos. 

' ) Vanas  fueron  sus  esperanzas  y temores. 

L Vanos  fueron  sus  temores  y esperanzas 
Dichosas  eran  mis  horas,  mis  diaa 
y mis  aiios.  y 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  liii.  pt  i 
Rule  17. — An  adjective  referring  to  listed,  (you,)  Usia,  (your  lordship 
or  ladyship,)  &c.,  must  agree  in  gender  with  that  of  the  person  spoken  of  ox 
to,  without  any  regard  to  the  termination  of  these  nouns  ; as, 


llis  fears  and  hopes  were  vain.  ' 


Happy  were  my  hours,  my  days, 
and  my  years. 


If  your  lordship  would  be  pleased  to 
bestow  on  me,  &c. 

V our  worship  must  be  out  of  your 
senses,  said  Sancho. 


Si  vuestra  Sehoria  fuese  servido  dt 
darme,  ^c. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xlii.  pt.  ii. 
Vuestra  merced  dehe  de  ser  men- 
guado,  dijo  Sancho, 

Ditto,  ditto. 

Rule  18. — The  English  possessive  case  with  the  ’s,  is  translated  b\ 
imitting  the ’s,  setting  the  preposition  de  (of)  before  the  word  to  which  the 
A^as  annexed,  and  placing  the  noun  which  is  the  last  in  the  English  sentence 
^he  first  in  the  Spanish  translation,  with  the  corresponding  article ; and  re* 
rersing  hi  the  same  manner  the  order  of  the  other  nouns ; as, 

He  has  read  Pope’s  works. 


^ El  ha  leido  las  ohras  de  Pope. 


He  has  read  the  works  of  Pope. 

If  there  be  more  than  two  substantives,  the  last  in  English  must  be  the 
first  in  Spanish  ; as, 

La  casa  del  compahero  de  su  Ae?- 
mano. 


His  brother’s  partner’s  house. 


Ohs.  14.  In  English  the  sign ’s  is  frequently  used  instead  of  the  noun  of 
a place,  house,  office,  store,  &c.,  where  a thing  has  happened  or  been  done, 
which  being  omitted  by  ellipsis,  it  is  perfectly  understood  by  the  whole  of 
the  sentence ; but  the  noun  thus  omitted  must  always  be  expressed  in 
Spanish  ; as. 


Sancho  figured  to  himself  that  ho 
would  find  at  her’s,  (the  duchess’s 
house,)  what  he  had  found  at  Don 
Diego’s  and  Basil’s. 


A Sancho  se  le  figuraha  que  hah  i 
de  hallar  en  ella,  (la  casa  de  la 
duquesa,)  lo  que  hahia  hallado  cn 
la  casa  de  Don  Diego,  y en  la  da 
Basilio. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxi.  pt.  ii 
Role  19. — Common  nouns  of  the  masculine  gender,  in  the  plural  nuinbas’, 
ar«  frequently  used  to  express  both  genders  ; as. 


riio  duke  and  duchess,  extremely 
satisfied  with  the  chase,  returned 
to  their  castle. 


Satisf echos  los  dvques  de  la  caxa 
volvieron  a su  castillo, 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxv 


APPENDIX. 


467 


R(/le  20. —Adjectives  si^iiilYing  dimension,  such  as  deep,  high,  low 
ktmg,  wide,  thick,  &-c.,  require  the  preposition  de  between  them  and  tli€ 
lumber,  and  also  after  the  substantive  they  refer  to  ; and  the  verb  to  he  w 
fransiated  by  tener,  (290  ;)  as, 


They  have  a room  twenty-four  feet 
long  twelve  wide,  and  fifN^en 
high. 


Elios  tienen  un  aposento  (cuarto)  de 
veinticuatro  pies  ae  largo,  doa 
de  ancho  y quince  de  alto. 


The  adjectives  in  such  cases  are  used  only  in  the  singular  number,  and 
ta  the  masculine  gender. 

Obs.  15.  When  the  nouns,  length,  width,  height.  See.,  ire  made  use  of, 
?iiey  must  be  preceded  by  the  preposition  de  ; and  they  may  be  translated 
as  substantives  or  adjectives  ; as, 


The  Giralda  of  Seville  is  300  feet  i 
height. 


La  Giralda  de  Sevilla  tiene  300 
de  pies  alto,  (or  de  altura.) 


Rule  21. — The  adjective  is  to  be  always  placed  after  the  noun  or  nouns 
t qualifies  ; as. 


Take  notice,  doctor,  that  from  hence- 
forth you  need  not  to  take  the 
trouble  to  provide  dainty  and  deli- 
cate dishes  for  me. 


Mirad,  doctor,  de  aqui  adelante  no 
os  cureis  de  darme  d comer  cosas 
regaladas,  ni  manjares  exquisites. 
D.  Quuote,  cap.  xlix.  pt.  ii. 


Ohs.  16.  When  a particular  emphasis  is  laid  on  the  adjective,  it  is  gene- 
rally placed  before  the  substantive  ; as. 


Tlie  limpid  fountains  and  murmuring 
rills  afforded  them  their  savory  and 
transparent  waters  in  magnificent 
abundance. 


Las  claras  fuentes,  p corrienics  rios 
enmagnijica  abundancia  sabrosas 
y iransparentes  aguas  les  ofrecian, 
D.  Quuote,  cap.  xi.  pt.  i. 


When  one  of  tvo  or  more  adjectives  qualifying  a substantive  is  more  em- 
phatically used  than  the  other,  or  others,  it  is  generally  placed  before  the 
noun,  and  the  other  adjective  after  it ; as. 

My  good  young  lady,  have  pity  on  a I Caritativa  Senorita  mia,  compade- 
poor  fugitive  slave.  ceos  de  una  pohre.  esclava  fugt’ 

tiva.  De  Alea. 

Rule  22. — The  adjectives  uno,  (one,)  alguno,  (some,)  ninguno,  (none,) 
are  always  placed  before  their  substantives  ; and  when  they  are  immediate- 
ly followed  by  a masculine  noun,  or  adjective  in  the  singular,  they  drop  the 
0 The  same  do  hueno,  malo,  (12,)  primero,  and  tercero,  (46.)  Grande, 
(97,  261,)  ciento,  (139,)  and  santo  suppress  the  last  syllable  ; as, 


Asl  was  one  day  in  Mercers  street, 
in  Toledo. 

^Itiiough  the  composition  of  it  cost  | 
me  some  trouble.  I 


Estando  yo  un  dia  en  el  Alcana  de 
Toledo.  D.  Qutjote,  cap.  ix. 
Aunque  me  costo  algun  trabajc 
componerla.  Ditto,  Preface. 


Obs.  17.  Uno  drops  the  o also  before  substantives  in  the  plural  ; ar, 


They  could  not  find  x>ne  in  twenty- 
one  days. 


Elios  no  pudieron  h'lllar  unc  en  vo 
intiun  dias. 


APPENDIX. 


168 


OF  THE  PRONOUN. 

Rulk  23. — The  personal  pronouns  subject ^ or  in  the  nominatiTe  cqfo,  arc 
frequently  omitted,  (14,)  especially  in  colloquial  style,  unless  a paiticulal 
emphasis  is  laid  on  them,  or  it  is  necessary  to  express  them  in  order  to  avoid 
ambiguity,  which  may  happen  by  their  omission  in  the  first  ana  third  persoi' 
singular  of  the  imperfect  tense  of  the  indicative,  and  of  the  mperfecl  ten-ie 
of  the  subjunctive  mood  of  all  the  verbs ; as,  Pensaba  co  nprar  la  casa 
wliich  phrase  may  signify,  “ I thought,  or  he  thought  to  buy  the  house,”  fo, 
the  want  of  the  pronouns  yo  or  el, 
iVe  know  that  thou  wast  at  Algiers 


Sahiamm  nue  estabas  en  Argel. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xli. 
Yo  velo  cuando  tu  duermeSi  yo  lion 
cuando  tu  cantos. 

Ditto,  ?ap.  xl.  pt.  ii. 
Rule  24. — Me,  thee,  him,  &c.,  must  be  translated  me,  te,  le,  6lc.,  when 
they  are  the  immediate  object  of  the  verb  ; as, 


I watch  while  thou  art  sleeping,  I 
weep  while  thou  art  singing. 


As  soon  as  she  saw  me,  she  told  me, 
bo  not  uneasy,  my  friend. 


Asi  como  clla  me  vie  me  dijo  : no 
te  turbes,  amigo. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxvii. 
Aquien  se  humilla,  Dios  ie  ensalza 
Ditto,  cap.  xi. 

Obs.  18.  Him,  her,  them,  you,  (when  referring  to  usted,)  being  thf 
direct  object  of  a pronominal  or  reflective  verb,  must  be  translated  se ; as. 


He  that  is  humble,  God  will  exalt. 


And  a great  friend  of  his  dressed 
himself  also  as  a shepherd. 


Y juntaynente  se  vistio  con  el  de 
pastor  otro  su  grande  amigo. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xiv. 

Obs.  19.  Me,  him,  her,  you,  &c.,  being  the  indirect  objective,  or  com- 
plement of  a verb  governed  or  preceded  by  a preposition  expressed  or  un- 
derstood, are  translated  mi,  el,  ella,  <Slc.,  after  the  preposition,  (see  Table  o> 
Pronouns,  p 70.)  Except  should  the  preposition  be  d,  for  then  they  are 
generally  translated  me,  le,  &c.,  without  the  preposition,  and  frequently  re- 
peated with  it  before  mi  and  el,  to  give  more  energy  to  the  phrase  ; as. 


El  supo  la  partida,  y no  de  mi. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xliii. 
Por  ella  deje  la  casa  de  mi  padre. 

Ditto,  ditto. 

Tienele  aqui  encantado,  como  itu 
tiene  d mi. 

Ditto,  cap.  xxiii.  pt.  ii. 

Rule  25. — As  him,  her,  it,  them,  you,  (usted,)  may  be  in  English  lh« 
ci)jtct  or  the  complement  of  a verb,  particular  care  must  be  taken  to  distin* 
guish  these  cases.  When  they  are  the  object  of  the  verb  they  are  trans- 
lateti  le,  la,  los,  or  las,  according  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  oi 
pronoun  they  stand  for  When  they  are  the  comDlement,  or  indirect  objec 


He  was  informed  of  the  departure, 
though  not  by  mo. 

For  her  1 forsook  my  father’s  house. 

He  k^eps  him  here  enchanted,  as 
well  as  myself. 


APPENDIX. 


469 


live  casoj  they  must  be  expressed  by  h in  the  sinjjular,  and  Us  in  the 


pluial,  for  both  genders  ; eis, 

He  prostrated  him  on  the  ground. 

The  companions  who  saw  them  sc 

AnJ  we  who  know  her. 

Quixote  called  Sancho  to  give 
him  his  helmet. 

The  hostess  recounted  to  them  what 
had  happened  in  her  house  be- 
tween him  and  the  muleteer. 

Don  Quixote  asked  her  what  was 
her  name. 

But  the  deeds  which  they  (the  maids) 
had  seen  kept  their  mirth  under 
the  rein. 


El  le  derriho  en  el  suelo. 

D.  Quuote,  cap.  iii. 

Los  companeros  que  tales  los  vieron 
Ditto,  Jitto. 

Y los  que  la  conocemos. 

Ditto,  cap.  xii. 

Don  Quijote  llamd  a.  Sancho  qu*. 
viniese  d darle  la  celada. 

Ditto,  ditto. 

La  huespeda  les  conto  lo  que  con  el 
y con  el  arriero  les  hahia  aconte- 
cido.  Ditto,  cap.  xxxii  pt.  i. 

Don  Quijote  le  pregunt.6  como  se 
llamaba.  Ditto,  caj . iii. 

Pero  las  proezas  que  ya  habian  visto 
(las  doncellas)  les  tenian  la  visa  d 
raya.  Ditto,  ditto. 


In  order  to  prevent  the  ambiguity  that  in  some  phrases  may  result,  the 
pronouns  H ella,  &c.,  are  repeated ; as, 

He  delivered  the  letter  to  him,  (to  | El  le  entrego  la  carta  d el,  {a  ella.) 

hei.)  I 

Rule  26. — Mismo  (self)  is  sometimes  added  to  the  nouns  or  pronouns  to 
give  them  particular  energ)”  It  changes  its  termination,  like  any  otner  ad- 
jective, according  to  the  number  and  gender  of  the  noun  or  pronoun  it  re- 
fers to,  and  is  placed  near  it ; as. 

Without  money,  Alexander  himself  1 Sin  hacienda  Alejandro  mismo  pa- 

must  have  seemed  frugal.  reciera  estrecho. 

I D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxix. 

Rule  27. — The  neuter  pronoun  it,  is  used  in  English  to  repre.«5ent  objects 
or  things  that  by  nature  are  neither  male  nor  female ; and  even  animals, 
when  their  gender  is  not  known.  In  Spanish  all  common  nouns  are  either 
masculine  or  feminine,  as  has  been  explained  in  treating  of  gender  ; con- 
sequently the  pronoun  it,  and  its  plural  them,  must  be  translated  el,  ellos 
ella,  ellas,  with  the  respective  variation  of  the  cases  of  said  persons.  The 
scholar,  therefore,  must  be  careful  to  ascertain  the  gender  and  case  of  the 
noun  to  which  it  refers  in  English  before  translating  said  pronoun  ; as, 

He  read  the  project,  and  approved  it.  El  leyo  el  proyecto,  y le  aprobo. 

She  received  the  letter,  and  answer-  Ella  recibio  la  carta,  y la  contesto. 

ed  it. 

Obs.  20.-T— When  the  pronoun  it  is  redundant  in  a phrase,  it  must  not  be 
Uanslated.  It  is  redundant  when  it  is  used  instead  of  the  words  that 
after  the  verb,  and  which  constitute  its  subject  or  object : as. 


470 


APPENDIX. 


It  is  a matter  of  constant  experience, 
that  bodily  exercise  is  conducive 
to  health. 


Es materia  de  constantc  experitneta 
que  el  ejercicio  corporal  es  condu' 
cente  d la  salud. 


In  which  phrase  the  natural  order  is:  that  bodily  exercise  is  conducive 
to  healthy  is  a matter  of  constant  experience. 

It,  referring  to  the  verbs,  or  to  phrases  and  sentences  to  which  no  gendei 
can  be  applied,  is  translated  bj  the  pronoun  lo  ; and  when  it  is  to  be  placed 


after  a preposition  in  Spanish,  by  ello 
The  gallant  shepherd  begged  him  to 
accompany  them  to  their  tents ; 
Don  Quixote  was  fain  to  comply 
with  ity  and  accordingly  did  it  so. 

Whoe'^  er  spends  his  time  ill,  sooner 
or  later  will  repent  of  it. 

It,  in  the  impersonal  verbs  (as  has 
lated ; as. 

It  rains,  llueve. 


; as, 

El  gallardo  pastor  le  pidio  que  se 
viniese  con  el  d sus  tiendas ; hii- 
bolo  de  conceder  Don  Quijoie,  y 
asi  lo  kizo. 

D.  Quijote,  cap  xlviii.  pt.  ii. 

Quienquiera  que  en  plea  mai  cl 
tiempo,  tarde  6 tempranc  se  arre- 
pentird  de  ello. 

been  already  explained)  is  not  trails- 
I It  is  cold,  kace  frio, 


In  the  phrases  it  is  said,  they  say,  it  is  rumored,  &c.,  the  pronouns  it  and 
they  are  not  translated  : the  verb  is  placed  in  the  third  person  singular,  pre- 
fixing the  pronoun  se  to  it,  or  in  the  third  person  plural  without  any  pro- 
noun ; as, 


As  they  say,  let  the  dead  go  to  the  Y como  dicen,  vdyase  el  muerto  d 
bier,  and  the  living  to  good  cheer.  la  sepultura,  y el  vivo  d la  hoga- 

za.  Don  Quijote,  cap.  xix. 

Rule  28. — When  two  or  more  objective  cases  of  the  pronouns  occur  in  the 
same  phrase,  they  must  be  arranged  in  the  following  order:  se  is  to  be 
placed  before  all  others;  then  me,  te,  nos,  or  os;  in  the  third  place,  le,  los 
la,  las,  les ; and  el,  ella,  &c.,  with  a preposition,  the  last  of  all  ; as. 

He  gave  it  (a  book)  to  them.  | El  se  le  (un  libro)  did  d ellos. 

Rule  29.  Whe^  coming  immediately  after  its  antecedent,  is  translated 
que  ; when  it  stand?  by  itself,  or  is  governed  by  a preposition,  it  is  rendered 
by  quien;  as, 


Sancho  came  out  to  receive  the  Sancho  salio  d ver  Lo  que  te  man- 
commands  of  Don  Quixote,  who  | daba  Don  Quijote,  que  estaba 

had  sat  down  upon  a bench.  ! sentado  solve  un  poyo. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  lix.  pt.  ii. 

•V  student  to  whom  you  imparted  Un  estudiante  d quien  disteis^uenta 
your  intentions,  was  he  who  dis-  | de  vuestros  pensamientos  fue  el 
closed  it.  I que  lo  descubrio. 

I Don  Quijote,  cap.  xliv.  pt.  ii. 

W/iio/i,  that,  or  any  other  two  relative  pronouns,  being  in  the  same  sen- 
tence, tlie  second  may  be  translated  cual,  with  the  corresponding  article 


APPENDIX. 


471 


Co  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  same  pronoun,  unless  a particular  emphasis  is 
placed  on  it;  as, 


The  first  person  (whom)  I met, 
his  father,  who  said  to  me. 


La  prunera  persona  con  quien  cn- 
contre  fue  su  padre,  el  cual  me 
dijo.  Don  Quijote,  cap.  xli. 
Ohs,  21.  When  these  pronouns  are  governed  by  a preposition,  whom  is 
Sisually  translated  quien  or  ewaZ,  with  reference  to  persons  ; and  que^  and 
sometimes  cual,  with  the  corresponding  article,  speaking  of  animals  or 
things ; as, 


Indeed,  Signior  Don  Luis,  it  suits 
well  to  whom  -you  are  the  dress 
you  wear,  and  the  bed  in  which 
you  now  lie 


Por  ciertOf  Sefior  Don  Luis,  que 
corresponde  Men  d quien  vos  sois 
cl  hdbito  quo  tends,  y la  cama  en 
que  os  hallo 

Don  Quijc  te,  cap.  xliv. 
Rule  30. — He  who,  she  who,  they  who,  those  who,  are  translated  el  que, 
la  que,  los  que,  las  que,  and  sometimes,  for  the  sake  of  energy,  aquel  que, 
&c. ; as, 


Asi  ella  como  el  quo  la  acompahaba 
Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxvii. 
Don  Fernando  y los  que  con  el  ve~ 
nian.  Ditto,  cap.  xxxvi. 

Obs.  22.  What,  when  it  is  the  same  as  that  which,  is  translated  lo  que  ; 


Both  she,  and  he  who  accompanied 
her. 

Don  Fernando,  and  those  who  came 
with  him. 


He  could  see  it,  for  through  what 
might  be  termed  the  roof,  entered 
a stream  of  light. 


Pudolo  ver,  porque  por  lo  que  se  po~ 
dia  llarnar  techo,  entraba  un  rayo 
de  sol. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  Iv.  pt.  W. 

Rule  31. — Relative  pronouns  are  called  interrogative  when  they  aro' 
employed  to  make  a question.  They  are  translated  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  ro^  itive  pronouns.  Which,  referring  to  more  than  one  object,  is  trans- 
lated cual  or  cualeS  ; as, 


I I Quien  fue  el  ignorantc  que  jirmo 
tal  mandamiento  ? 

I Que  Caballero  andante  pago  vecho 
6 alcabala  ? 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xlv 
I Quien  (or  cual)  de  ellos  (or  ellas) 
vendrd ? 

I Cual  de  los  (or  las)  dos  quiere  V,1 
■ I Quien  llama  d la  puerta  ? 
i Quien  llama  ? 

i Quien  estd  ahi  ? i Quien  es  f 
Ohs  23.  When  the  interrogation  begins  by  a preposition,  the  answer  must 
begin  by  the  same  preposition  ; as, 


Who  was  the  ignorant  wretch  who 
signed  suen  a warrant  ? 

What  knight-errant  ever  paid  tax  or 
custom  1 

Which  of  them  will  como  ? 

Which  of  the  two  will  you  have  ? 
Who  knocks  at  the  door  ? 


172 


APPENDIX. 


Where  are  you  going  ? 

To  the  Exchange. 

Where  do  you  come  from  7 
From  iny  counting-room. 

What  way  did  you  come  ? 

Through  Broad  street. 

With  wliom  did  you  come  ^ 

With  my  partner. 

Where  can  I see  you  this  afternoon  1 
At  home. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  tins  ? 

The  thirtieth  of  January,  1848. 


I Adonde  va  V 7 
A la  Lonja. 

/ De  donde  tiene  T.  ? 

De  mi  esrriturio. 

I Par  donde  vino  V.  7 
For  la  calle  Ancha^ 

I Con  quien  vino  V.  ? 

I Con  mi  sock , {companei  i\) 

I En  donde  prodr^  vei  a V esta 
tarde  ? En  casa. 

I A cdantos  estamqs  hoy  ? 

A treinta  de  Enero  de  1648. 


Remark. — The  pronouns  who,  whom,  {quien,  que,)  which,  that,  (que,) 
and  the  conjunction  that,  {que,)  although  they  are  frequently  omitted  in 
English,  must  always  be  expressed  in  Spanish.  The  attention  of  thelearne: 
is  particularly  requested  on  this  subject.  Examples. — 


He  thinks  you  are  in  the  right. 
4’he  man  you  were  speaking  to. 
The  letter  she  wrote. 

They  thought  he  would  do  it. 
Do  you  believe  he  will  consent  ? 


El  cree  que  V.  tiene  razon. 

El  homhrc  d quien  V.  hahlaba. 
La  carta  que  ella  escribio. 
Elios  pensdron  que  el  lo  haria. 
I Cree  V,  que  el  consienta  7 


Rule  32.  The  possessive  pronouns  conjunctive,  referring  to  the  parts  or 
limbs  of  the  body,  or  other  things  of  common  use  in  or  about  it,  are  gene- 
rally expressed  by  the  definite  article  ; as. 


She  saw  him  move  his  hand,  and  lay 
it  upon  his  sword. 

She  threw  her  amrs  about  his  neck. 


Ella  le  vio  encaminar  la  mano  d 
ponerla  en  la  espada. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxvi. 
Ella  le  echo  los  brazos  al  cuello. 

Ditto,  ditto. 


Her,  as  an  objective  case  of  the  personal  pronoun,  must  be  translated  la 
)r  le,  according  to  its  relation  to  the  verb  ; and  when  it  is  preceded  by  a 


preposition,  by  ella.  As  a possessive 
sus,  suyo,  &.C.,  (de  V.)  de  ella  ; as, 
They  invited  her,  and  with  that  ob- 
ject they  wrote  her  a letter. 

The  book  was  for  her 
She  lost  her  gloves. 

He  looked  for  her  handkerchief. 


pronoun  it  must  be  expressed  by  su., 

Elios  la  conviddron,  y con  este  oh- 
jeto  le  escribieron  una  carta. 

El  libro  era  para  ella. 

Ella  perdio  sus  guantes. 

El  busca  el  pahuelo  de  ella. 


In  the  last  example  her  is  not  translated  su  in  order  to  avoid  the  am 
biguity,  because  su  might  mean  in  Spanish  either  his  or  her 

As  the  pronouns  his,  hers,  yours,  theirs,  when  they  stand  alone  are  al. 
translated  suyo,  which  proiKun  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  per- 
son or  thing  possessed,  and  not  with  the  possessor  as  in  English  ; when- 
ever an  ambiguity  may  arise  from  the  use  of  that  pronoun  alone,  the  pro 


APPENDIX. 


473 


flour,  that  /epresents  the  person  of  the  possessor,  preceded  by  is  to  ho 
repeated  after  it,  or  used  in  its  stead  ; as.  Send  me  his  (book,  m.  s.) — En 
tieine  V.  el  suyo  de  el ; or  better,  el  dc  el  alone. 

Possessive  pronouns  must  be  repeated  before  every  substantive  in  a sen 
tence,  though  not  expressed  in  English  ; as. 

He  bought  his  hat  and  gloves  in  John  El  compro  su  sombrero  y sus  guan* 


street. 

Sutler  me  to  avail  myself  of  the  prop 
from  which  you  could  not  disen- 
gage me  with  all  your  importuni- 
ties, threats,  promises,  nor  presents. 


ies  en  la  calle  de  Juan. 

Dejadme  llegar  al  arrimo  de  quicn 
no  me  han  podido  apartar  vuestrae 
importunaciones,  vuesiras  amena- 
zas,  vue  sir  as  promesas  i ni  vuestras 
dddivas. 

H.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxvi.  pt.  ii. 


OF  THE  VERB. 


Rule  33. — A verb  having  several  pronouns  of  different  persons  for  its 
rabject,  (nominative,)  must  agree  in  the  plural  with  the  first  of  them  in  or- 
dei  ; as. 

You,  he,  and  I will  do  it.  I V.  el  y yo  lo  haremos. 

Thou  and  she  wrote  well.  | Tu  y ella  escribisteis  bien. 


In  the  first  example  the  verb  is  placed  in  the  first  person  plural,  because 
the  pronoun  /,  together  with  the  other  two,  is  the  same  as  wt ; and  in  the 
second,  because  the  two  pronouns  may  be  expressed  by  you. 


They  left  Zoraida  and  me  by  our- 
selves, and  we  are  going  to  see 
whether  my  father  is  still  alive 


Solos  quedamos  Zoraida  y yo,  y 
vamos  con  iniencion  de  ver  si  mi 
padre  es  vivo. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xi. 


The  person  speaking,  out  of  civility  always  names  himself  the  last. 
When  listed  and  a pronoun  of  the  third  person  singular  form  the  subject 
of  a verb,  the  verb  is  in  the  third  person  plural  ; as. 

You  and  he  saw  them.  | listed  y el  los  vieron. 


Ohs.  24.  A verb  having  for  a subject  a noun  in  the  singular,  that  com- 
prehends in  itself  tne  sense  of  the  other  subjects  of  the  same  verb  preceding 
‘t  should  it  be  the  last,  or  the  nearest  to  the  verb,  must  agree  with  it  in  tho 
lingular  ; as. 


So  that  the  solitude  of  the  place,  the 
darkness  of  the  night,  the  noise  of 
the  water  and  rustling  of  the 
leaves,  all  together y caused  horror 
and  dismay. 


De  manera  que  la  soledad,  el  sitio 
la  oscuridady  el  ruido  del  agua 
con  el  susurro  de  las  hojaSy  lode 
causaba  horror  y espanto. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xx.  pt.  i. 


Obs.  25.  When  the  subject  is  a common  noun  plural,  in  which  tin 
speaker  is  iimluded,  the  verb  is  placed  in  the  first  person  plural ; as, 


i74 


APPENDIX. 


The  Spaniards,  whenever  they  have 
a choice,  incline  to  that  which  is 
most  difficult. 


Los  Espano.es  siemprt  que  tenomoi 
eleccion,  nos  inclinamos  d lo  mat 
dijicultoso. 

Solis,  lib..iii.  cap.  viii. 
Ohs.  26.  Two  or  more  subjects  of  diffierent  number,  connected  by  an 
adversative  conjunction,  require  that  the  verb  shall  agree,  with  the  last  oi 
them  : as. 


Not  only  the  mother  and  the  daugh- 
ters, hut  the  father  also  was  then 
dead. 


No  solamente  la  madre  y las  hijas, 
sino  tamhien  el  padre  habia  muer< 
to  entonces.  M‘ Henry. 


Rule  34. — Collective  nouns  definite^  or  such  as  denote  a determinate 
lumber  of  persons  or  things,  require  the  verb  in  the  singular  ; as. 


Seest  thou  that  cloud  of  dust?  The 
whole  of  it  is  raised  by  a vast 
army  of  various  and  innumerable 
nations  that  are  marching  that 
way. 


I Ves  aquella  polvarcda  ? Toda  es 
cuajada  de  un  copiosisimo  ejercito 
de  diversas  e innumerahles genteSy 
que  por  alii  viene  marchando. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xviii 


Collective  nouns  indefinite  must  have  the  verbs  in  the  plural ; as. 


Be  that  as  it  may,  these  people  are 
carried,  but  not  voluntarily,  they 
are  driven  by  force. 


Como  quiera  que  ello  sea,  esta  gente, 
aunqiie  los  llevan,  van  de  por 
fuerza.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxii. 


Particular  care,  hov/ever,  must  be  paid  to  the  logical  sense  of  the  phrase, 
for  it  may  sometimes  require  the  singular  ; as. 


The  greatest  number  of  the  people 
of  the  castle,  who  did  not  know 
the  truth  of  the  case,  were  sur- 
prised and  astonished. 


La  mayor  parte  de  la  gente  del  cas~ 
tillo  que  no  sabia  la  verdad  del 
caso  estaba  suspensa  y admirada. 
D.  Quijote,  cap.  xlvi.  pt.  ii. 


Rule  35. — An  active  transitive  verb  requires  the  noun  that  is  the  object 
of  its  action,  in  the  objective  case ; and  the  prepositjoii  a must  besides  be 
prefixed  to  it,  when  the  said  object  signifies  a person  or  thing  personified,  or 
is  a proper  noun  ; as. 


Don  Fernando,  Cardenio,  Lucinda, 
and  Dorothea  were  struck  dumb 
wit?  astonishment,  gazing  in  si- 
lence to  one  another. 


Callahan  todos,  y mirdhanse  todos, 
Dorotea  d Don  Fernando,  Don 
Fernando  k Cardenio,  Cardenio 
k Luscinda,  y Luscinda  k Carde* 
nio.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxvi. 
Memos  de  conquistar  k la  gula  y al 
sueilo  en  el  poco  comer,  y en  el 
mucho  velar.  Ditto,  cap.  viii. 
El  aho  siguiente  acometio  k la  Go* 
leta.  Ditto,  cap.  xxxix. 

Ohs.  27  The  p’*eposition  d is  not  used  before  the  pronouns  me,  te,  se,  nos, 
ss,  le,  los,  la,  las,  les,  lo  ; but  it  is  required  before  the  otte»*  cases  of  said 
oronouns;  as, 


H^e  must  conquer  gluttony  and  sloth 
by  temperance  and  watchfulness. 

Next  year  he  attacked  the  Goleta. 


APPENDIX. 


475 


lly  beauty  compels  you  to  love  me. 

9Vho  would  give  thee  islands  to  gov- 
ern? 


A que  me  ameis  cs  mueve  mi  her- 
mosura.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  xiv, 

I Quien  te  hahia  de  dar  d ti  isla$ 
que  gobernar  1 

DittOf  cap.  liv.  pt.  ii. 
Ghs.  28.  Active-transitive,  and  even  intransitive  verbs,  and  those  signify- 
ing to  adhere^  to  accede  to^  &c.,  require  the  preposition  «,  even  before  othoi 
objects,  to  prevent  ambiguity  ; as. 


The  old  man  found  a little  kid  that 
its  mother  had  lost. 


El  viejo  hallo  un  cabrito  que  habia 
perdido  d su  rnadre. 

Obs  29.  An  active-transitive  verb,  having  both  as  object  and  complement 
two  nouns  or  pronouns,  signifying  rational  beings,  both  cases  requiring  the 
position  d,  suppresses  it  before  the  object  direct,  and  retains  it  before  the 
object  indirect  or  complement ; as. 


4y  dear  father,  I recommend  to  you 
the  innocent  Laura, 
am  not  your  daughter,  you  have 
taken  away  from  mo  my  husband. 


Querido  padre,  yo  os  recomiendo  la 
inocente  Laura. 

Yo  no  soy  vuestra  hija,  vos  me  ha- 
beis  quitado  mi  esposo. 

JovELLANos,  El  Deliucuente, 
[act  V.  sc.  3,  5 

Rule  36.  The  present  of  the  infinitive  mood  in  English,  used  substan- 
.ively  as  a subject  or  object  of  another  verb,  does  not  admit  any  preposition 
oefore  it  in  Spanish,  and  frequently  takes  the  article  el ; as. 


I have  always  heard  it  said,  that  to 
confer  benefits  on  base-minded 
people  is  like  throwing  water  into 
the  sea. 

[ swear  to  go  with  you. 


Siempre  he  oido  decir  que  el  hacei 
bien  d villanos,  es  echar  agua  en 
el  mar 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxiii 
Yo  juro  ir  con  vos. 

Ditto,  cap.  XXX. 

Ohs.  30.  The  verbs,  will,  shall  may,  could,  &c.,  when  they  are  not 
auxiliary,  but  expressed  by  querer,  deber.  or  poder,  govern  the  verb  that 
follows  immediately  after  them  in  the  present  infinitive  without  a preposi- 
tion ; as, 

I could  do  no  less  than  answer  him. 


lie  would  not  pass  these  things  in 
silence. 


No  pude  dejar  de  responderle. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xxxii, 

El  no  quiso  pasar  estas  cosas  en  si* 
lencio.  Ditto,  cap.  xvi. 

Rule  37. — Verbs  implying,  to  move,  to  begin,  to  compel,  to  teach,  U 
itarn,  to  exhort,  to  invite,  to  assist,  to  oppose,  to  accustom,  &c.,  gcvmm 
th9  verb  that  depends  on  them  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive  mood,  and 
feiierally  require  the  preposition  d ; as. 


The  innkeeper  returned  to  see  what 
his  guest  commanded. 


El  ventero  volvio  d ver  lo  qut  .vn 
huesped  mandaba. 

Don  Quijote  cap  ii 


^76 


APPENDIX. 


The  companions  of  the  wo:^sled  he- 
gan  to  discharge  a shower  of  stone 
upon  Don  Quixote. 


Los  compancros  de  los  he%  idos  cv 
menzfiron  a Hover  piedrais  sobrt 
Don  Quijote,  D.  Quu.  cap.  iii 


Ohs.  31.  Verbs  implying  motion,  govern  the  noun  or  verb,  denoting  from 
whence  the  motion  proo^^eds,  with  de ; the  noun  or  verb  which  points  out 
its  direction,  with  d;  and  the  noun  expressing  the  space  through  which  U 
passes,  with  por  ; as. 


I come  from  the  city  of  Baeza,  in 
company  with  eleven  other  priests, 
and  we  are  going  to  the  city  of 
Segovia. 

As  he  entered  the  street  of  St.  Jago, 
in  Madrid,  a judge  was  coming 
through  it. 


Vengo  de  la  ciudad  de  Baeza  con 
otros  once  sacerdotes,  y '^amos  a 
la  ciudad  dt  Segovia. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xix 
Al  entrar  en  la  calle  de  Santiago  en 
Madrid,  veiiia  d salir  por  ella  un 
Alcalde.  Ditto,  cap.  xlviii. 


Bule  38. — The  present  or  active  participle  in  English,  being  alone  in  the 
phrase,  must  be  literally  translated  ; as, 


So  saying,  she  entered  into  the  thick- 
est part  of  a wood. 


Y en  diciendo  esto,  se  entro  en  la 
mas  cerrado  de  un  hosque. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xiv.. 
Obs.  32.  The  English  present  participle,  referring  to  a noun  that  is  an 
object  of  the  former  verb,  may  be  translated  in  the  gerund,  in  the  infinitive 
or  in  the  indicative  mood,  according  to  the  sense  of  the  phrase  ; as. 


I saw  the  boys  playing,  (that  is, 
whilst  they  were  playing.) 


Yo  vi  d los  rnuchachos  jugando,  (or 
jugar,  or  que  jugaban.) 


Obs.  33.  Words  ending  in  English  in  ing,  prefixed  to  a common  noun, 
are  used  as  verbal  adjectives ; and  they  are  most  frequently  translated  by 
the  Spanish  participles  terminating  in  ante  or  iente  ; as. 


A loving  father, 

An  obedient  son. 

The  constituting  assembly, 


Un  padre  amante, 

Un  hijo  ohediente, 

La  asamblea  constituyente, 


from  the  verbs  amar,  obedecer,  constituir.  But  as  not  all  the  Spanish 
verbs  have  active  participles,  and  as  verbal  adjectives  in  ante  or  iente  can 
not  be  formed  of  all  of  them,  the  learner,  before  translating  the  English 
words  terminating  in  ing,  must  consult  the  dictionary  in  order  to  find  out 
tht  proper  word  to  be  used  in  the  translation  ; as. 

An  affecting  scene.  Una  escena  sensible,  (not  afectante ) 

Meddling  people.  Gente  entrsmetida,  (not  entrerne- 

tiente.) 

Presuming  iaeas.  Ideas presuntuosas,  (not  presumien^ 

tes.) 

Ohi.  34.  A substantive,  compounded  of  a present  participle  and  a ccinnuji 
innn,  is  generally  translated  by  a particular  name  ; as, 

A speaking-trumpet  [ Una  vocina. 


A.PPENDIX. 


477 


*t  IS  also  expressed  by  the  infinitive  mood  of  the  verb,  and  even  by  a sub- 
wantive  derived  from  it,  preceded  in  either  ceise  by  the  preposition  de  / as. 


A repeatiiiff-watch. 
A fishing-rod. 


Un  reloj  de  repeticion, 
Una  caha  de  pescar. 


Rule  39. — The  English  present  or  active  participle,  being  preceded  by  a 
proposition,  i«  translated  by  the  present  of  the  infinitive  mood  after  the  same 
proposition  ; as, 

i (c^ue  iodama  das,  Sancho,  en  decir, 
en  pensar,  en  creer,  y en  afirmar 
que  Dulcinea  estaha  ocupada  en 
tan  vil  ojicio  ? 

I Don  Quijote,  cap.  viii. 

Ohs  35.  When  the  preposition  is  the  English  particople  is  frequently 
translated  by  the  Spanish  gerund,  suppressing  the  preposition  ; as, 


Wilt  thou  still  persist,  Sancho,  in 
saying,  thinking,  believing,  and 
afiirrning,  that  Dulcinea  was  em- 
ployed in  such  a mean  object? 


And  by  doing  it  you  will  oblige  him 
to  sign  the  deed. 

He  lost  his  place  by  speaking  too 
freely. 


Y haciendolo,  V.  le  ohligard  d fir- 
mar  la  escritura. 

El  perdio  su  plaza  por  hablar  con 
demasiada  libertad. 


Ohs  36.  The  English  present  participle  used  substantively  with  an 
article,  is  translated  either  as  a substantive  or  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive 
mood  with  the  article  ; as. 


The  commencing  of  a thing  is  as 
good  as  half  completing  it. 


El  comenzar  las  cosas  cs  tenerlas 
medio  acabadas, 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xli. 

Ohs.  37.  When  the  present  participle  of  the  verb  to  be,  (being,)  followed 
by  a past  participle,  points  out  the  action  expressed  by  the  latter  as  present 
and  continuing,  it  is  translated  by  the  verb  estar  in  the  corresponding 
tense,  preceded  by  the  pronoun  se,  and  the  past  participle  is  rendered  by  the 
Spanish  gerund  ; as. 


To  let,  one  of  the  two  houses  now 
being  finished  in  Pearl  street. 


Se  alquila  una  de  las  dos  casas,  que 
se  estan  acabando  en  la  calle  de 
la  Perla. 


REMARK. 

The  following  rules  are  devoted  to  the  explanation  of  the  tenses  that 
claim  particular  notice:  no  mention,  therefore,  is  made  of  those  of  uhich 
the  literal  translation  is  sufficient. 

Rule  40. — As  the  tense  called  in  English  the  Imperfect  of  the  Indica- 
tive, may  be  translated  into  Spanish  by  the  Imperfect  Tense,  N.  2,  o.*  by 
the  Preterit  Indefinite,  N 3,  as  it  has  been  explained  in  Les.son  XLst 
pago3  157-8,  to  the  directions  therein  given  the  following  explanations  are 
added,  the  oetter  to  elucidate  this  subject. 

1.  When  the  imperfect  tense  in  English  expresses  an  action  or  a stats 
of  things  that  was  going  on  at  some  time  past,  but  was  still  unfinished  or  in* 
complete,  it  must  bo  translated  in  the  imperfect  tense  in  Spanish  ; as. 


478 


APPENDIX. 


In  a town  of  La  Mancha  there  lived 

a gentleman He  maintained  a 

female  housekeeper  turnea  of  for- 
ty, and  a niece  who  was  not  quite 
tv/enty. 


En  vn  lugar  de  la  Mancha  vivia  un 

hidalgo Tenia  cn  su  casa  una 

arna,  que  pasaba  de  los  cuarentaf 
y una  sohrina  que  no  llegaba  d los 
vcinte.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  L 


2 This  tense  denotes  a former  progressive  state  of  existence ; as, 


Yo  le  dije  que  pensaba  en  el  prologs 
D.  Quijote,  Preface 


1 Icld  him  I thought  about  the  pre- 
face. 

lliat  is  to  say,  I was  thinking. 

3.  It  expresses  a time  present,  with  respect  to  another  past,  or  that  some- 
thing was  being  done  at  a time  in  which  another  circumstance  happened  j 


He  died  on  the  road  to  Constantino- 
p.e,  whither  they  were  carrying 
him. 


El  murid  en  el  camino  de  Constant 
tinopla,  adonde  le  llevaban  can- 
tivo.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxix. 


4.  It  denotes  the  recurrence  or  repetition  of  an  action,  at  a time  which  is 
past ; as. 


This  said  gentleman,  the  hours  that 
he  was  at  leisure,  (which  were  the 
greatest  part  of  the  year,)  he  ad- 
dicted himself  to  the  reading  of 
the  books  of  chivalry. 


Este  dicho  hidalgo  los  ratos  que 
estaba  ocioso,  (que  eran  los  mas 
del  aho,)  se  daba  d leer  libros  de 
Caballerias. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  i. 


5.  The  customs,  habits,  characters,  professions,  or  occupations  of  individ- 
uals, when  they  are  no  longer  in  existence,  or  have  undergone  some  chaiigo 
or  alteration,  are  expressed  by  the  imperfect ; as. 

He  was  of  a rough  constitution | El  era  de  complexion  recia y so 


and  was  called  Quijana. 

The  curate  of  his  village  was  a 
learned  man. 

But  Master  Nicholas,  who  was  the 
barber  of  the  same  village,  affirm- 
ed that  none  of  them  equalled  the 
Knight  of  the  Sun. 

6.  The  verbs  that  imply  continuance,  or  that  express  a state  of  things 
that  v^as  continued  for  some  time  or  period,  without  any  reference  to  the 
commencement,  duration,  or  end  of  the  action  which  they  express,  must  be 
{ranslated  by  the  imperfect  tense  ; as. 

He  was  a lative  of  Calabria,  and 


llamaba  Quijana. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  i. 

El  cur  a de  su  lugar  era  hombre 
sabio.  DittOf  ditto. 

Pero  Maese  Nicolas,  que  era  ei 
barbero  del  mismo  pueblo,  decia 
que  ninguno  igualaba  al  caballero 
del  Febo,  Ditto,  ditto. 


treated  Ins  slaves  with  great  hu- 
manity. 

Don  Antonio  Moreno  was  called 
Hon  Quixote’s  entertainer,  and  he 
tried  to  find  means,  &:c. 


El  a Calobres  de  nacion,  y trataba 
con  niucha  humanidud  d sus  cau- 
tivos.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  xliv. 

Don  Antonio  Moreno  se  llamaba  el 
huesped  de  Don  Quijote,  y andabs 
buscando  medios,  &c. 

Ditto,  caj>  Ixil 


APPENDIX. 


479 


Kem^rk.  -It  may,  therefore,  be  considered  as  a rule,  that  whenever  thif 
English  imperfect  tense  may  be  expressed  by  the  verb  to  he  and  the  present 
participle  of  the  same  verb,  or  by  the  verbs  used  to,  in  the  habit  of,  ac- 
customed to,  &-C.,  preser\'ing  the  sense  of  the  phrase,  it  must  be  translatea 
in  Spanish  by  the  imperfect  tense. 

But  as  the  imperfect  tense  is  frequently  expressed  in  English  by  tne  am* 
iliary  verb  did,  the  scholar,  before  translating  the  principal  verb,  must  a& 
certain  whether  did  means  at  that  time  or  then,  expressing  the  action  ns 
entirely  finished  and  completed,  without  requiring  any  other  verb  ; oi 
whether  the  verb  following  did  may  be  rendered  by  to  be  and  the  present 
participle,  as  explained  in  the  preceding  paragraph.  If  the  verb  to  which 
did  is  prefixed  may  be  translated  by  the  verb  to  be  and  the  present  parti* 
ciple^  the  verb  must  be  translated  by  the  imperfect  tense  in  Spanish.  But 
if  the  verb  connected  with  did  expresses  an  action  entirely  past,  and  that 
cannot  be  translated  by  to  be  and  the  present  participle,  without  changing 
the  meaning  of  the  phrase,  then  it  must  be  rendered  by  the  preterit,  N.  3, 
in  Spanish  ; as, 

Don  Quixote  did  thank  him  for  his  | Agradecidselo  Don  Quijotc,  comid 


good  will,  took  a little  sustenance, 
Sancho  ate  voraciously,  and  then 
both  laid  themselves  (Zoion  to  sleep. 


algo,  y Sancho  mucho,  y echd- 
ronse  d dormir  entrdmhns. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  lix.  pt.  ii. 


In  the  preceding  example,  the  verbs  took,  ate,  laid  down,  might  be  ex- 
pressed by  did  take,  did  eat,  did  lay  down  ; but  not  by  was  taking,  eating, 
or  laying  down  ; the  verb  consequently  must  be  translated  in  the  preterit, 
N.  3,  (as  in  the  example,)  and  not  in  the  imperfect  tense. 

Rule  41. — The  imperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood  has  three  ter- 
minations, the  first  ending  in  ara  or  iera,  N.  7 ; the  second  in  aria,  eria,  or 
iria,  N.  8 ; the  third  in  ase  or  iese,  N.  9. 

I.  The  terminations  ara  or  iera,  ase  or  iese,  ought  to  be  used  when  the 
verb  is  governed  by  a conditional  conjunction ; and  the  verb  that  completes 
the  sense  of  the  sentence,  (whether  it  be  placed  before  or  after  the  govern- 
ing verb,)  must  bo  placed  in  the  termination  aria,  eria,  or  iria,  according 
to  its  conjugation  ; as, 


If  chance  and  fortune  had  not  fa- 
vored me,  the  world  would  have 
been  deprived  of  this  pleasure. 


Si  el  acaso  y la  fortuna  no  me  ayt»- 
daran,  el  mundo  quedaria  falto  de 
este  gusto.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  ix. 


2.  When  there  is  in  English  an  inversion  in  the  phrase,  the  sentence  mu^ 
be  set  first  in  the  regular  form,  prefixing  the  corresponding  conjunction  to 
ho  verb ; as, 


Were  it  not,  (if  it  were  not,)  because 
I dc  certainly  know  that  all  these 
inconveniences  are  annexed  to  the 
exorcise  of  arms,  I would  lie  still 
where  I am,  and  die  with  pure 
vexation 


Si  no  fuera,  porque  se  may  cur  Li 
que  todas  estas  incomodidaJcs 
tan  anejas  al  ejercicio  de  las  at- 
mas,  aqui  me  dejaria  morir  de  pure 
enojo. 

I>.  Quijote,  cap. 


480 


APPENDIX. 


3.  When  the  sentence  begins  without  a conditional  conjunction,  the  tei 
m illations  ra,  7,  or  8,  may  be  used ; and  the  verb  necessary  to  com- 
plete  the  sense,  (should  there  be  any,)  must  be  placed  in  the  termination 
ase  or  iese,  according  to  its  conjugation ; as, 


I would  not  like  that  princes  and 
kings  run  themselves  into  such 
dangers. 


No  querria  (quisera)  yo  que  los  prin* 
cipeSf  y los  reyes^  se  pusiesen  en 
semejanies  peligros. 

I D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxiv.  pt  ii 
The  termination  ara  or  ieray  is  generally  used  in  ejaculation  ; as. 


Who  could  describe  now  the  throb- 
bings  of  my  heart,  while  I remain- 
ed there ! 


/ Quien  pudiera  decir  ahora  los  so 
hresaltos  que  me  did  el  corazon, 
mientras  alii  estuve  i 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxvii. 

4.  T wo  or  more  verbs  in  the  imperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive,  governed 
Dy  the  same  conjunction,  or  completing  the  sense  of  the  same  phrase,  must 
be  placed  in  the  termination  chosen  for  the  first  of  them,  whether  ra,  «e,  or 
na , as. 


Tile  archbishop  ordered  one  of  his 
chaplains  to  go  to  the  rector  and 
inquire  into  me  truth,  and  even  to 
talk  with  the  madman  himself,  and 
that  if  he  shouid  think  that  he  was 
recovered,  he  might  bring  him 
away,  and  set  him  at  liberty. 


Nl  arzohispo  mandd  d un  capellan 
suyo  que  se  informase  (inforrnara) 
del  rector  si  era  verdady  y que  asi 
mismo  hablase  con  el  loco,  y que 
si  le  pareciese  que  tenia  juicioy  le 
sacase  y pusiese  en  libertad. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  i.  pt.  ii. 


5.  When  the  imperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood  is  governed  by  a 
verb  in  any  ol  the  past  tenses  ot  the  indicative,  and  the  governing  verb  sig- 
nifies to  speak,  to  think,  to  believe,  or  any  other  of  the  like  meaning,  any 
of  the  three  terminations  may  be  used  with  the  conjunction  que  ; provided 
the  verb  to  be  placed  in  the  subjunctive  mood  has,  as  its  subject  or  nomina- 
tive, any  other  person  but  the  one  speaking  ; as, 

I said  that  he  would  come.  | Yo  decia  que  el 
I did  say  that  he  would  come,  j Yo  dije  que  eZ 
I have  said  that  he  would  come.  | Yo  he  dicho  que  el 
I had  said  that  he  would  come.  I Yo  habia  dicho  que  el  ^ 

But  when  the  verb  governed  or  subordinate,  has  the  same  subject  or 
iominative  as  the  leading  or  governing  verb,  only  the  termination  ria  is 
used ; as. 


viinera. 

vendria. 

viniese. 


it  is  not  that,  said  Sancho,  but  be- 
cause IiDould  not  have  any  secret 
rot  in  my  keeping. 


No  es  eso,  dijo  Sancho,  sino  que  yo 
no  querria  que  se  me  pudriesen  de 
guardadas. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xvii 
It  must  be  observed,  that  although  any  of  the  terminations  may  be  used 
f^itli  the  above-mentioned  verbs,  the  termination  ra  generally  indicates  duty 
or  obligation  on  the  part  of  its  subject,  and  the  termination  ria  merely  im 
plies  futurity  or  possibility ; as 


APPENDIX. 


481 


The  master  told  his  servant  to  do  it 
immediately. 

The  mistress  promised  that  her  ser- 
vant would  do  it. 


El  amo  dijo  a su  criado  que  lo  hici- 
era  inmediatamente 
El  ama  prometid  que  su  criada  Ifi 
haria. 


REMARK 


The  use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  is  fully  explained  in  Lessons  LXXVIIl., 
{351,)  LXXIX.,  (356,)  LXXX.,  (362,)  and  LXXXL,  (368,)  which  the 
scholar  is  advised  frequently  and  attentively  to  study,  in  order  to  make  him- 
self perfectly  well  acquainted  with  the  rules  therein  set  forth. 


Rule  42. — Will  and  would,  shall  and  should,  can  and  could,  may  and 
might,  used  as  auxiliaries,  point  out  the  tense  of  the  verb  that  follows  them, 
which  is  the  only  one  that  must  be  translated.  But  when  they  are  used  as 
principal  verbs,  they  are  translated  querer,  deher^  poder. 

1.  When  the  emphasis  of  the  phrase  Ues  on  the  verb  that  follows  them, 
will  and  shall  point  out  the  future  of  the  indicative,  and  shall  and  should 
wiretimes  the  future  of  the  subjuneti^^e ; as, 


She  will  come  to-mormw. 

He  shall  do  it  to-day. 

Should  they  write,  please  o let  me 
know  it 


Ella  vendrd  maiiana, 

El  lo  hard  hoy. 

Si  ellos  escrihieren,  sirvase  V.  avu 
sdrmelo. 


Obs.  38.  Will  m»ans  the  free  determination,  or  ready  disposition  to  do  a 
thing.  Shall,  in  ^he  first  person,  simply  indicates  and  declares,  in  English, 
what  will  take  niace  ; in  the  second  and  third  persons,  it  implies  a promise, 
command,  ^nd  determination  ; and  in  the  interrogative  sentences,  permission 
?r  direct'OP  In  translating  these  two  verbs,  attention  must  be  paid  to  these 
'•eniarks 

Therefore,  he  will  not  do  it  may  mean  he  is  not  willing  to  do  it,  or  he 
viill  not  be  willing  to  do  it,  or  he  certainly  shall  not  do  it,  according  to  the 
sense  of  the  preceding  sentences.  This  phrase  in  the  first  example  must  bo 
translated  by  the  present  of  the  indicative  of  the  verb  querer — el  no  quiere 
hacerlo  ; in  the  second,  will  is  to  be  placed  in  the  future  of  the  same  verb— 
el  no  querrd  hacerlo  ; and  in  the  third,  the  auxiliary  will  is  not  translated, 
and  the  verb  to  do  (hacer)  is  translated  in  the  future — H no  lo  hard. 

The  same  rule  is  to  be  observed  with  may  and  can,  which  may  be  trans- 
lated by  the  present  of  the  indicative  or  subjunctive  of  the  verb  poder  *,  oi 
in  the  present  of  the  subjunctive  of  the  principal  verb. 

2 When  will  and  would  are  not  joined  to  any  verb,  they  must  be  trans- 
lated by  querer,  (to  wish,  to  be  willing,  to  desire,  to  like ;)  as. 


\\liy  do  you  not  write  to-day  ? 
Because  I will  not,  (/  wont.) 

He  begged  his  uncle  to  sign,  but  he 
would  not. 


I P or  que  no  escribe  V.  hoy  7 
Porque  no  quiero,  (no  mo  da  la 
gaiia.) 

El  suplico  d su  tio  que  firmara,  pt'tn 
el  nc  quiso. 


21 


i82 


APPENDIX. 


3.  Will  and  would,  though  followed  by  a verb,  are  translated  ly  qusre^ 
when  they  are  used  emphatically  to  express  an  absolute  wish  ; as, 

lie  will  be  obeyed  without  any  ex-  I El  quiere  ser  ohedccido  sin  excu$a 
^use.  I alguna. 

They  would  have  him  go,  and  he  i Elios  quisieron  que  el  fuera,  y cstu 
was  obliged  to  do  it.  1 vo  ohligado  d hacerlo. 


4.  Would  denotes  sometimes  the  repetition  of  an  act,  or  a custom,  Dr  the 
iabit  of  doing  a thing,  and  then  it  is  frequently  rendered  by  soler,  usar^ 
acostumhrar,  or  by  the  verb  that  follows  it,  in  all  cases  in  he  imperfect  of 
the  indicative ; as, 


In  the  summer  the  old  man  would  En  el  verano  el  mejo  solia  (acostum- 
sit  at  his  cottage  door,  and  draw  braba)  sent  arse  d la  puerta  de  sh 

letters  in  the  sand  for  his  darling.  choza  y dibujaba  letras  en  la  arena 

para  su  queridito  ; or, 

El  viejo  se  sentaba  d la  puerta^  &c 

5.  Should,  used  foi  ought  to,  denoting  duty  or  necessity  of  acting,  ia 
translated  by  deber,  in  the  tense  of  the  other  verb  in  the  English  sentence, 
or  in  the  imperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive  ; as, 


You  should  not  do  that,  since  you 
know  it  is  wrong. 

If  he  wishes  to  do  it,  he  should  ask 
permission  before. 


V.  no  debe  (debiera  cr  deberia)  hacci 
eso,  pues  sabe  que  es  malo. 

Si  el  desea  hacer  eso,  el  debe  dates 
(debiera  or  deberia)  pedir  per?niso 


6.  Can  and  could,  may  and  inight,  signifying  possibility,  are  translated 
by  poder,  (to  be  able  ;)  as, 


You  can  speak  to  him  whenever  you 
please ; but  they  may  not  take 
that  liberty. 

If  I could,  I would  write, 
lie  might  d:  it,  if  he  pleased. 


V.  puede  hablarle  siempre  que  quie 
ra  ; pero  ellos  no  pueden  tomarse 
esa  libertad. 

Si  yo  pudiera,  escribiria. 

El  podria  hacerlo,  si  quisiera 


7.  The  auxiliaries  would,  could,  should,  might,  being  followed  hy  have 
and  a past  participle,  must  be  translated  by  poder,  querer,  aeber,  in  the 
imperfect  tense  of  the  indicative,  or  in  the  termination,  ra,  N.  7,  or  ria,  N 
S,  of  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive,  according  to  the  sense  of  the  phrase, 
when  the  emphasis  is  on  any  of  the  said  auxiliaries,  leaving  the  verb  have 
in  the  present  of  the  infinitive;  but  when  the  emphasis  is  not  on  them,  but 
in  to  have,  this  is  translated  by  haber  in  the  corresponding  tense,  followed 
by  the  participle  querido,  podido,  or  debido ; as. 


Ho  should  have  spoken  to  them  in 
time  ; but  he  would  not,  and  con- 
sequently ho  lost  the  best  opportu- 
nity 

( could  hart  seen  them,  but  I did 
not  Know  that  the}  were  in  town. 


El  les  debia  (debiera  or  debeiia)  ha* 
ber  hablado  en  tiempo ; pero  nc 
quiso,  y por  consiguiente  perdU 
la  mejor  oportunidad. 

Yo  hubiera  podido  vertos^  pero  Hf 
supe  que  cstaban  en  la  Qiudad 


APPENDIX. 


483 


You  could  have  written  it 


They  should  have  paid  it. 


f K.  podia  naherle  escriio. 

J V.  pudlera  (podria)  haberle  efsiTito 
I V,  hahia  podido  escrihirlc. 

I V.  hubiera  ^habria)  podido  escribirte 
^ Elios  debian  haberle  pagado. 

Elios  debieran  {deberian  haharli 
) pagado. 

Elios  le  habian  debido  pagar. 

Elios  le  hubieran  (habiian)  dihiik, 
^ pagar. 


REMARK. 

The  scholar  is  reminded  carefully  to  examine  and  ascertain  the  meaning 
Df  the  phrases  containing  will,  would,  could,  &c.,  before  translating  themj 
for,  as  it  has  been  explained,  these  verbs  may  or  may  not  be  translated 
and  placed  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunctive  mood. 


OF  THE  PARTICIPLE. 

The  Spanish  past  or  passive  participle,  coming  immediately  after  the  verb 
haber,  does  not  admit  any  change,  (118  ;)  as. 


Quedense  los  zapaios  y las  sangrius 
por  los  azotes,  que  sin  culpa,  le 
habeis  dado,  que  si  el  rompio  el 
cuero  de  los  zapaios  que  vos  pa- 
gasteis,  vos  le  habeis  rompido  a 
de  su  cuerpo. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  iv. 

The  passive  participle,  after  the  verbs  ser  and  estar,  changes  its  termina- 
tion, like  an  adjective,  according  to  the  number  and  gender  of  the  noun  or 
pronoun  it  refers  to.  It  does  the  same  after  tener,  when  it  is  used  as  an 
active  verb ; as, 


[A‘t  the  shoes  and  bleeding  stand  for 
the  stripes  you  have  given  him 
^without  cause ; for  if  he  wore  out 
the  leather  of  the  shoes  you  paid 
for,  you  have  torn  the  skin  from 
his  body. 


I am  Pasamonte,  whose  life  is  writ- 
ten by  these  fingers. 

1 have  written  a letter  to  my  wife. 


Yo  soy  Pasamonte,  cuya  vida  esta 
escrita  por  estos  pulgares. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxii. 
Yo  tengo  escrita  una  carta  d mi 
mujer.  Ditto,  cap.  xxxvi  pt  ii 
The  passive  participle  is  often  elegantly  used  at  the  beginning  of  a son- 
scnce,  like  the  ablative  absolute  in  Latin  ; as, 


Don  Quixote  starting  up,  and  trem- 
bling fi(  m head  to  foot,  said. 


Leventado  en  pie  Don  Q njotc,  ^ 
temblando  de  los  pies  d la  cabeza, 
dijo. 

D Quijote,  cap.  xxxii.  pt  ii. 
Ohs.  39  Words  ending  in  ado  or  ido  are  participles,  when  they  have  the 
«me  meaning  and  government  as  the  verbs  from  v.  iiich  they  may  ho  form- 


184 


APPENDIX. 


ed,  having  also  a reference  to  time  ; otherwise  they  are  adjectives  and  have 
a different  signification  ; as, 


The  captain  being  informed  of  the 
danger,  could  avoid  it. 

The  cautious  captain  avoided  the 
danger. 


Advertido  el  capitan  del  ptligro, 
pudo  evitarle 

El  advertido  capitan  evito  elpehgro 


Advertidoy  in  the  first  example,  is  a past  participle  ; in  the  second,  aa 
Still  ective. 

There  are  some  words  in  ado  and  idoy  that  have  both  an  active  and  a 
passive  signification,  and  may  be  used  as  verbal  adjectives ; as. 


Tired,  tiresome. 

Measured,  unassuming,  prudent. 
Caused,  provoking. 


Cansado 

Medido. 

Ocasionado 


OF  THE  ADVERB. 


The  following  quotations  jrorn  Cervantes j corroborate  the  rules  alieaa^y 
laid  down  for  the  Adverb. 

When  an  adverb  modifies  a verb,  it  is  generally  placed  after  the  verb ; 
«vhen  it  modifies  an  adjective  or  another  adverb,  it  is  generally  placed  be- 
fore, (106.)  Except  the  adverbs  of  negation,  as  well  as  any  other  word  ex- 
oressing  a negative,  and  when  the  adverbs  are  emphatically  used,  for  then 


they  are  placed  before  the  verb  ; as, 

I confess  that  I was  wrong,  and  did 
not  speak  correctly. 

As  Horace  did  with  s)  much  ele- 
gance. 

Nada.  (nothing,)  nadie  or  ninguno, 
v’dien  placed  after  the  verb,  require  no 
Camacho  the  rich,  in  order  to  show 
i.ow  little  he  resented  or  thought 
of  the  trick,  desired  that  the  en- 
tertainments might  proceed. 


Yo  confieso  que  anduve  mal,  y no 
dije  bien. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxiii.  pt.  ii. 
Como  tan  eiegaiitemente  lo  hizo 
Horacio. 

Ditto,  cap.  xvi.  pt.  ii. 

(nobody*,)  nunca  2L\\d  jamas,  (never,) 
or  ni  before  it ; as, 

El  rico  Camacho  por  mostrar  qne 
no  sentia  la  burla,  ni  la  estimaba 
en  nada,  quiso  que  las  fiestas  pa- 
sasen  adelante. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxi.  pt.  ii 


Two  negatives  make  the  phrase  more  elegant  in  Spanish  ; thus,  Ni 
quisro  nada,  (I  want  nothing,)  is  more  energetic  than,  nada  quiero. 


I gay  nothing,  answered  Sancho. 

We  are  not  at  all  in  one  another’s 
debt 


No  digo  nada,  respondUo  Sancho 
No  nos  debemus  nada. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxii.  pt  ii. 


The  conjunction  but,  preceded  by  a negative  in  the  same  sentence,  have 
yenerallv  be  translated  sino,  and  sometimes  mas  que  or  ?nas  de  ; as. 


appendix. 


485 


Sii,  melancholy  weis  not  made  for 
beasts  but  for  men ; and  yet  if 
men  encourage  melancholy  too 
much,  they  become  no  better  than 
beasts. 

A-s  if  their  profession  (the  military) 
was  the  office  of  a common  porter, 
for  which  nothing  else  is  wanting 
hut  good  strength  ^ 


SenoTf  las  tristezas  no  sc  hicier^ 
p ira-  las  bestias  sino  para  los 
homhres ; pero  si  los  hombres  lot 
sieriten  demasiado,  se  vueLven 
bestias. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xi.  pt.  ii 
Como  si  fuese  su  ejercicio  (el  de  .e? 
annas)  oficio  de  ganapanes  para 
el  cual  no  cs  menester  mas  da 
buenas  fuerzas. 

Ditto,  cap.  xxvii. 


When  two  or  more  adverbs  ending  in  mente,  follow  in  succession  in  the 
icame  sentence,  that  termination  is  added  to  the  last  of  them  only,  changing 
the  others  in  the  feminine  termination,  if  they  admit  of  it ; as. 


Cardenio  heard  these  words  very 
plainly  and  distinctly. 


Oyo  estas  azones  Cardenio  bien 
clara  (claro)  y distintamente. 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xxxvi. 


Nunca  and  jamas  signify  never,  and  are  used  separately  or  together;  in 
the  latter  case,  nunca  must  be  placed  before  jamas,  and  thus  they  give 
greater  energy  to  the  phrase  ; as, 

f shall  never,  never  see  them  again.  | Yo  nunca  jamas  los  volvere  d ver. 


Jamas  is  often  used  after  siernpre,  (ever;)  as,  por  siempre  jamas,  which 
means,  for  eper  and  ever. 

No  is  sometimes  used  redundantly,  to  give  more  force  to  the  sentence  \ 
as, 


The  mighty  Homer  did  not  write  in 
Latin,  because  he  was  a Greek ; 
nor  Virgil  in  Greek,  because  he 
was  a Roman. 


El  grande  Homero  no  escribio  en 
latin,  porque  era  Griego  ; ni  FiV- 
gilio  no  escribio  en  griego,  porque 
era  Latino, 

D.  Quijote,  cap.  xv*  pt.  il 


OF  THE  PREPOSITIOJN. 

The  govemment  of  the  verbs  through  the  prepositions  is  so  varied,  as  to 
render  it  very  difficult  to  explain  and  comprise  it  in  a few  rules  adapted  to 
the  capacity  of  the  younger  classes  of  learners.  The  student,  therefore,  is 
requested  to  consult  the  “ List  of  the  Prepositions  required  by  certain 
Verbs,**  &c.,  placed  at  the  end  of  this  part ; and  also  a go(xl  dictionary,  in 
which  he  will  find  the  several  meanings  of  the  verbs  in  consequence  of  iho 
propositions  that  accompany  them. 

As  the  English  prepositions  for  and  by,  may  be  translated  into  Spanish 
by  para  and  por,  the  following  rules  and  examples  are  laid  df'wn  to  assist 
the  learner  in  the  use  of  them 


m 


APPENDIX. 


PARA. 

Wh<sn  for  is  used  to  denote  the  end  or  motive,  the  use  of  things,  the  rda- 
lion  01  respect  of  one  thing  to  another,  it  is  generally  translated  para;  cs, 


The  honor  of  the  invention  will  be 
for  him 

It  has  been  a great  loss  for  them. 
I’he  letter  was  for  my  friend 


El  honor  de  la  invencion  sera  para 
el. 

Ha  sido  una  gran  perdida  para  cllot 
La  carta  era  para  mi  amigo. 


Fort  with  verbs  of  motion,  is  translated  para,  and  also  when  »t  refers  to 
time ; as, 

Mr.  I.  G.  sailed  for  Europe  last  week. 


We  will  leave  it  for  to-morrow. 


El  sehor  I.  G.  salio  para  Eurnpa  la 
semana  pasada. 

Lo  dejar emos  para  mahana. 

To,  when  denoting  the  end  or  motive  of  acting,  and  signifying  for  tht 
purpose  of,  in  order  to,  the  use  of,  is  translated  para;  as, 

He  went  to  settle  his  accounts  with 
them,  and  to  buy  a new  assort- 
ment for  his  store. 

I read  to  instruct  myself. 


Elfue  para  ajustar  sus  cuentas  con 
ellos,  y para  comprar  un  nuevo 
snrtido  para  su  almacen. 

Yo  lea  para  instruirme. 

Para  is  used  to  express  capacity  or  incapacity,  fitness  or  unfitness,  incli- 
nation or  disinclination,  disposition  or  propensity  ; as. 


He  is  not  a man  to  undertake  it. 

He  is  fit  for  every  thing 
That  is  fit  for  nothing. 

He  is  always  inclined  to  play. 

In  order  that,  considering,  &c.,  may  also  be  expressed  by  para  ; as, 
She  knows  a great  deal  for  her  age.  [ Ella  sahe  mucho  para  su  edad 


No  es  hombre  para  cmprcnderlo 

Es  hombre  para  todo 

Eso  no  es  bueno  para  nada. 

El  siempre  estd  pda-dL  jugar 


POR. 

For,  meaning  by,  through,  for  the  sake  of,  by  means  of,  in  favor  or  oe- 
half  of , in  exchange  of,  &c.,  is  translated  por ; as. 


She  obtained  it  through  her  brother. 
Pardon  your  enemies  fo"  God’s  sake- 


Ella  lo  consiguio  por  su  hermano. 
Perdonad  d vuestros  enemigos  por 
amor  de  Dios. 

He  did  it  for  his  friend,  {el  lo  hizo  por  su  amigo.)  This  phrase  means, 
he  did  it  for  the  sake,  or  instead  of  his  friend.  Should  para  be  substituted 
for  por,  it  would  signify,  he  did  it  for  the  use,  benefit,  or  advantage  of,  or 
merely  to  please  his  friend. 

For,  with  reference  to  time,  or  price,  is  translated  por  ; as, 


He  is  gone  into  the  country  for  a 
week. 

I paid  five  dollars  for  the  hat. 


El  se  ha  ido  al  campo  por  una 
mana, 

Pague  cinco  pesos  por  el  sombrero 


Por,  before  the  infinitive  of  a verb,  indicates  sometimes  the  same  ns 
Kiithout ; at  other  times  in  order  io^  so  as  to,  or  to  ; and  also  a future  oc 
>ion ; as, 


APPENDIX. 


487 


The  letters  are  yet  to  be  written. 

He  did  it  not  to  be  thought  insensible. 
The  answer  is  about  to  come, 
riio  house  is  not  yet  finished. 


Las  cartas  a tan  poi  iscnbiT. 

Lo  hizo  para  no  pasar  por  insensibla 
La  respucsta  estd  por  veuir. 

La  casa  estd  por  acahar. 


Por,  between  two  nouns,  or  two  verbs  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive,  de 
notes  the  choice  between  two  things , as, 


Einperador  por  Emperador,  y Me  • 
narca  por  Monarca,  en  Ndpola 
tengo  al  gran  Conde  de  Lemos 
D.  Quuote,  Dedication,  pt. 


If  I am  to  choose  between  an  em- 
peror and  other  emperor,  between 
a monarch  and  other  monarch,  I 
have  the  great  Count  of  Lemos, 
at  Naples. 

Por  is  often  prefixed  to  an  adverb,  ana  becomes  an  adverbial  expression ; as 
On  the  top,  por  encima.  | Underneath,  por  debajo. 

Prepositions  require  the  noun  or  pronoun  governed  by  them  to  be  in  the 
objective  case.  Personal  pronouns,  governed  by  a preposition  expressed, 
must  be  placed  in  the  indirect  objective  case  or  complement : except  the 
pronouns  me  and  thee,  which,  in  conformity  with  the  modern  use,  are 
placed  in  the  nominative  when  they  are  governed  by  the  preposition  entre, 
(between ;)  as, 


fudge  whether  it  will  be  reasonable 
to  lay  his  sufferings  to  me. 

For  your  desire  to  know  what  is  be- 
tween us, O’ermaster  it  as  you 

may. 


Ved  si  sera  razonable  que  de  su 
pena  se  me  de  4 mi  la  culpa. 

Don  Quuote,  cap.  xiv. 

Reprimid  cuanto  os  fuere  posible  el 
deseo  de  saber  lo  que  ha  pasado 
entre  el  y yo.  ITamlet,  act  i., 
[translated  by  Moratin 


When  an  English  verb  is  accompanied  oy,  or  ends  in  a preposition,  as. 
She  asks  for  the  letter,  he  asked  after  you,  they  could  not  bring  it  about, 
the  scholar  must  first  ascertain  whether  the  preposition  constitutes  a part  of 
the  verb,  so  as  to  make  one  single  meaning  with  it,  or  whether  it  gives  the 
verb  a different  signifi?ation  or  not : if  the  preposition  with  the  verb  have  one 
single  meaning,  the  preposition  is  not  translated  ; if  it  gives  the  verb  a dif- 
ferent signification,  it  must  be  translated  as  directed  in  the  dictionary.  In 
the  first  of  the  above  examples  for  makes  a part  of  the  verb  pedir,  and  it  is 
a »t  translated,  ella  pide  la  carta.  In  the  second  it  gives  a different  meaning 
ii  the  verb  to  ask,  and  is  translated,  el  pregunta  por  V.  In  the  third  it  is 
£ot  translated,  because  it  is  also  a part  of  the  verb,  which  in  that  case  sig- 
aihes  conseguir ; thus,  ellos  no  pudieron  conseguirlo. 

Tney  made  a secret  of  it,  but  he  at  1 Hicieron  secreto  de  ello ; pero  el  rl 
last  found  it  out.  | jin  le  descubrid. 

As  the  grammatical  order  of  the  prepositions  is  frequently  inverted  in 
English,  and  in  the  colloquial  style,  the  object  of  them  is  for  shortness  sake 
fcmetimes  omitted  ; the  scholar  must  take  care  to  put  such  phrases  in  thoij 


488 


APPENDIX. 


proper  order,  and  to  sup  ply  the  word  or  words  wanting,  as  the  transition  ot 
a sentence  would  be  otherwise  very  incorrect.  Examples: — 

Be  careful  in  selecting  the  persons  you  accompany  yoprself  with.  In* 
vert  the  construction  thus,  Be  careful  in  selecting  the  persons  with  whom 
you  accompany  yourself. — Tenga  V’’.  huen  cuidado  en  la  eleccinn  de  las 
personas  con  quienes  se  acompahe  Where  do  you  come  from?  (from 
whence  do  you  come?) — i De  donde  viene  V.  7 Where  are  you  going  tol 
(to  what  part  are  you  going  ?) — i Adonde  va  V 7 Eyes  were  made  to  see 
with,  (to  see  with  them.) — Los  ojos  se  hicieron  para  ver,  or  para  rtr  ecu 
ellos. 


OF  THE  CONJUNCTION. 

The  conjunction  e is  used  instead  of  y,  when  the  word  coming  after  it 


begins  with  i or  hi ; as. 

The  authors  of  other  nations  con- 
clude that  we  are  barbarous  and 
ignorant. 

Both  mother  and  son  were  struck 
with  the  uncouth  figure  of  Don 
Quixote. 


Los  autores  extrangeros  nos  tienen 
por  hdrharos  e ignorantes. 

Don  Quijote,  cap.  xlviii. 
Madre  e hi  jo  quedaron  suspensos 
de  ver  la  extraha  figura  de  Don 
Quijote.  Ditto,  cap.  xviii.  pt.  ii. 


U is  employed  instead  of  d when  the  following  word  begins  with  o or 
ho ; as. 


This  does  not  differ  at  all  from  any 
speech  in  the  play  of  “ The  most 
prodigious  Black  Man,'^  or  other 
such. 

But  they  could  not  say  whether  it 
was  a woman  or  a man  who 
called  them. 

Ni  requires  the  verb  in  the  plural ; as. 
Neither  I nor  my  master  ever  set 
eyes  on  her. 


Esto  no  se  distingue  de  una  rela» 
cion  de  El  Negro  mas  prodigi* 
oso,^^  6 otra  semejante. 

Cadalso,  Los  Erudites. 

Pero  no  podian  decir,  si  era  mujer 
d hombre  quien  los  llamaha. 

IsLA,  cartas 

N'  yo,  ni  mi  amo  la  hemos  vista 
•jama.s.  D.  Quijote,  cap.  x.  pt.  ii 


OF  THE  INTERJECTION. 


Alas ! how’  much  more  agreeable 
will  be  the  company  of  these 
rocks ! 

Ah,  Lucinda ! Lucinda ! take  care 

what  you  do  ! Ha ! treacherous 

Don  Fernando,  robber  of  my 
glory ! 

O fatal  star  of  my  destiny ! 

Ah,  ha ! cried  the  curate,  have  we 
got  gia:7ts  too  in  the  dance? 


; Ay  desdichada  ! / y cuan  mas 

agradahle  compahia  hardn  cstos 
riscos . Ditto,  cap.  xxviii. 

/ Ah,  Luscinda  I Luscinda  I mira 

lo  que  haces  I • Ah  traidor^ 

Don  Fernando,  rohndor  de  mi 
gloria!  Ditto,  cap.  xxvii. 

/ O fatal  estrella  mia  ! 

Ditto,  cap.  xxvii. 

; Ta,  ta  ! dijo  el  cura,  ijayanes 
hay  en  lo  danza  7 Do  cap.  xxi 


APPENDIX- 


4S9 


TABLE 

CONTAINING  THE  VERBS  THAT  GOVERN  CERTAIN  PREPOSITIONS. 

It  is  copied  from  the  Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Academy,  and  the  student 
s advised  to  consult  it  frequently,  so  as  to  become  familiar  with  tlie  use  of 
tliorn. 

A. 


Aba’anzarse  d los  peligros, 
abantlonarse  d la  suerte, 
abocarse  con  algurio, 
abochornarse  de  algo, 
abogar  por  alguno, 
abordar  (una  nave)  d,  con  otra, 
aborrecible  d las  gentes, 
aborrecido  de  todos, 
abrasarse  cn  deseos, 
abrirse  d,  con  los  amigos, 
abstenerse  de  la  fruta, 
abundar  de,  en  riquezas, 
aburrido  de  las  desgracias, 
abusar  de  la  amistad, 
ac.abar  de  venir, 
r;aecer  d alguno, 
acaecer  en  tal  tiernpo, 
acalorarse  cn,  con  la  disputa, 
acceder  d la  opiniar.  de  otro, 
accesible  d todos, 
acertar  d,  con  la  casa, 
acogerse  d sagrado, 
acomodarse  d,  con  otro  dictamen, 
acorn  pail  arse  con  otros, 
aconsejarse  con,  de  sabios, 
dcvn  ecer  d los  incautos, 
acordarse  de  lo  pasado, 
acordarse  con  los  contrarios, 
acosturnbrarse  d trabi'os, 
acre  de  genio, 
acreditarse  de  necio, 
acreditarse  con,  para  alguno, 
acreedor  d la  confianza, 
anreedor  de  alguno, 
actuarse  de,  en  los  negocios, 
acusar  (ti  alguno)  de  algun  delito 
acusarse  de  las  culpas 
adelantarse  d otros, 

adhcrirse  d otro  dictamen, 
adolecer  de  alguna  enfermedad, 
Afer«  arse  en,  con  su  opinion, 
aferrarse  (una  nave)  con  otra, 
bficionarsc  d,  de  alguna  cusa, 
idirmarse  en  lo  dicho, 
iffeno  de  verdad. 


to  rush  on  dangers. 

to  abandon  one’s  self  to  chance 

to  confer  with  any  one. 

to  be  chagrined  with  any  thing. 

to  plead  for  any  one. 

to  board  (one  ship)  another. 

hateful  to  the  people. 

detested  by  all. 

to  be  inflamed  with  desires. 

to  open  one’s  self  to  one’s  friends 

to  abstain  from  fruit. 

JO  abound  with  or  in  riches, 
weary  with  misfortunes, 
to  abuse  friendship, 
to  be  just  come, 
to  happen  to  any  one. 
to  happen  at  such  a time, 
to  grow  warm  in  a dispute, 
to  accede  to  another’s  opinion 
accessible  to  ail. 
to  fina  out,  to  hit  the  house, 
to  take  shelter  in  a church, 
to  conform  one’s  self  to  another  opinion 
to  keep  company  with  others, 
to  take  advice  with  wise  men. 
to  happen  to  the  unwary, 
to  remember  the  past, 
to  agree  with  the  opponents, 
to  accustom  one’s  seif  to  trouble 
austere  in  temper,  disposition 
to  prove  one’s  self  a tool, 
to  get  credit  with  one. 
worthy  of  confidence, 
any  one’s  creditor, 
to  acquaint  one’s  self  with  business 
to  accuse  (any  one)  of  any  crime 
to  accuse  one’s  self  of  faults, 
to  be  in  advance  of  others,  to  take  the 
lead  of  others. 

to  adhere  to  another  opinion, 
to  be  ill  of  some  disorder, 
to  be  fixed  in  one’s  own  opinion, 
to  grapple  (one  ship)  another, 
to  be  ibnd  of  any  thing, 
to  affirm  what  has  been  said, 
foreign  to  truth. 


490 


AFPKNDIX. 


iffradable  al  paladar 
agradecido  a los  beneftcios 
agraviarse  de  algimo, 
agraviarse  de  la  seiitencia, 
agregarse  d olros 
Egrio  al  gusto, 
dgudo  de  mgenio, 
ahitarse  de  manjares. 
ahogarse  en  el  mar, 
ahorcajarse  en  las  espaldas, 
tviiorrar  de  razones 
alion  arse  (no)  con  ninguno . 
airarse  con  alguno, 
djustarse  d la  razon, 
ajustarse  con  alguno, 
alabarse  de  vLliente, 
alargarse  d la  ciudad, 
alegrarse  de  algo, 

Alejarse  de  su  tierra, 
ilirnentarse  dc,  con  yerbas, 
alimentarse  de  esperanzas, 
alindar  con  otra  heredad, 
allanarse  d lo  justo, 
alto  de  cuerpo, 
amable  d lodos, 

Rmancebarse  con  los  libros, 

arnaiite  de  alguno, 

amana-.se  d escribir, 

amoroso  con  los  suyos, 

ampararse  de  algo,  de  alguna  cosa, 

ancho  de  boca, 

andar  con  el  tiempo, 

andar  de  capa, 

andar  en  pleitos, 

andai  d gatas, 

andai  for  tierra, 

angosto  de  manga, 

anhelar  d,  por  mayor  fortuna, 

anticiparse  d otro, 

aovar  en  la  ribera, 

aparar  en  la  mano, 

aparecerse  d alguno, 

aparecerse  en  el  camino, 
aparejarse  para  el  trabajo, 
apartarse  de  la  ocasion, 
apartarse  d un  lado, 
apasionarse  d,  de,  por  alguno 
apearse  de  su  opinion, 
apechugar  con  alguna  cosa, 
apechugar  por  los  peligros, 
aprdrear  con  las  palabras, 
ipegarse  d alguna  cosa, 
tt'peiar  de  la  sentencia, 
jxpc-lar  d otro  medio, 
apercibirse  de  armas, 
np«  rcibirse  d,  para  li  batalla 


agreeable  to  the  palate. 

grateful  for  benefits. 

to  be  affronted  with  any  one. 

to  appeal  from  the  sentence 

to  unite  one’s  self  to  others 

sour  to  the  taste. 

witty,  or  sharp  of  intellect 

to  surfeit  one’s  seif  with  foo<l 

to  be  drowned  in  the  sea. 

to  get  astride  upon  the  baclr 

to  spare  words. 

not  to  spare  any  one. 

to  be  angry  with  anybody. 

to  be  right  inclined. 

to  make  it  up  with  any  one 

to  boast  of  bravery. 

to  hasten  to  the  city. 

to  be  rejoiced  at  any  thing 

to  leave  one’s  country. 

to  subsist  upon  herbs. 

to  feed  one’s  self  with  hopes 

to  be  contiguous  to  another’s  cslato 

to  submit  to  what  is  just 

tall  in  stature. 

amiable  to  all 

to  be  fond  0/ books. 

a lover  of  some  one. 

to  be  clever  in  writing. 

kind  with  one’s  relations. 

to  take  possession  of  any  thing. 

wide-mouthed. 

to  accommodate  one’s  self  to  time, 
to  walk  with  a cloak  on. 
to  be  litigious 
to  go  all-fours, 
to  be  humbled  to  the  ground 
tight-sleeved 
to  covet  better  fortune, 
to  anticipate  another, 
to  lay  eggs  on  the  sea-shor^. 
to  receive  with  the  hand, 
to  present  one’s  self  suddenly  before  ar.i 
one. 

to  present  one’s  sell  suddenly  on  the  road 

to  prepare  for  work. 

to  separate  one’s  self  from  the  occasion 

to  retire  on  one  side. 

lo  be  enamored  with  any  one 

to  change  one’s  opinion. 

to  undertake  any  thing  with  spirit 

to  brave  dangers. 

to  abuse  any  one  with  words. 

to  adhere  to  any  thing. 

to  appeal  from  the  sentence. 

to  have  recourse  to  another  meas^jre 

to  provide  one’s  self  with  arms. 

to  get  ready  for  battle. 


i^PPENDIX. 


49) 


apetecible  al  gusto, 
apetecido  por  todos, 
B])iadarse  de  los  pobres 
aplicarse  d los  estudios. 
apodcrarse  de  la  nacienda, 
apostar  d correr, 
apresurarse  a venir, 
apresurarse  por  aiguna  cosa, 
apretar  por  la  cinmra, 
aprobarse  en  aiguna  facultad, 
aprobado  de  cirujan^, 
apropiado  para  el  oficio, 
apropiarse  d si, 
apropincuarse  d alguno, 
aprovechar  en  la  virtud, 
aprovecharse  de  la  ocasion, 
apto  para  el  empleo, 
apurado  de  medios, 
aquietarse  en  la  disputa, 
arder  en  Jeseos, 
irderse  en  quimeras, 
irrnarse  de  paciencia, 
arrebozarse  con  algo, 
arrecirse  de  frio, 
arreglarse  d las  leyes, 
arregostarse  d aiguna  cosa, 
arremeter  d,  con,  contra  el  muro 
arrepentirse  de  las  culpas, 
arrestarse  d todo, 
arribar  d tierra, 
arrimarse  d la  pared, 
arrinconarse  en  casa, 
arrogarse  (algo)  d si  mismo. 
arrojarse  d pele&r, 
drroparse  con  la  capa, 
arrostrar  d,  con  los  peligros, 
asarse  de  calor, 
ascender  d otro  empleo, 
asegurarse  de  su  contrario, 
asentir  d otro  dictamen, 
asesorarse  con  letrados, 
asistir  d los  enfermos, 
asistir  en  tal  casa, 
asociarse  d,  con  otro, 
asomarse  d,  por  la  ventana. 
asparse  k gritos, 
ftsparse  por  aiguna  cosa, 

Aspero  al  gusto, 

&sp3ro  en  las  palabras, 
aspirar  d mayor  fortuna, 
atarse  d una  sola  cosa, 
atemorizarse  de,  por  algo, 
Stender  d la  conversacion, 
fitcnerse  a lo  seguro, 
atcnto  con  sus  mayores, 
atestiguar  con  otro, 
itinar  d,  con  la  casa, 


desirable  to  the  palate, 
desired  by  a_i. 

.o  have  compassion  on  the  pooi 

bO  apply  one’s  self  to  study. 

to  take  possession  of  the  propertj 

to  lay  a wager  on  a race. 

to  make  haste  to  come. 

to  make  haste  for  something. 

to  take  fast  hold  by  the  waist 

to  be  approved  in  any  faculty 

approved  as  a surgeon. 

adapted  to  the  office. 

to  appropriate  to  one’s  self 

to  approach  any  one. 

to  improve  in  virtue. 

to  seize  the  opportunity. 

fit  for  the  employment. 

exhausted  of  means. 

to  grow  quiet  in  the  dispute. 

to  burn  with  desires. 

to  De  full  0/ qut.:  rels. 

tc  arm  one’s  self  with  patitnce. 

to  muffle  one’s  self  up  m any  thi  ig 

to  be  benumbed  with  cold. 

to  conform  to  the  laws. 

to  be  inclined  to  any  thing. 

to  assault  the  w all. 

to  repent  of  sms,  faults. 

to  be  enterprising  in  every  thing. 

to  arrive  at  land,  on  shore. 

to  lean  against  the  wall. 

to  confine  one’s  self  at  home. 

to  appropriate  (any  thing)  to  one’s  self 

to  rush  on  to  fight. 

to  cover  one’s  self  with  a cloak. 

to  face  dangers. 

to  be  scorched  with  heat. 

to  ascend  to  another  office. 

*;o  shelter  one’s  self  from  one’s  enern/ 

to  assent  to  another’s  opinion. 

to  seek  counsel  from  learned  men 

to  assist  the  sick. 

to  attei  d such  a house. 

to  associate  one’s  self  loith  another 

to  look  out  at  the  window 

to  be  exhausted  with  clamorings, 

to  torment  one’s  self /or  any  thing, 

rough  to  the  taste 

rude  in  conversation. 

to  aspire  to  better  fortune. 

fo  tie  one’s  self  to  one  thing  alone 

to  be  afraid  of  something. 

to  attend  to  the  conversation. 

to  keep  to  the  safe  side. 

respectful  to  one’s  superiora 

tO  testify  with  another. 

to  hit  upon  the  house. 


192 


APPENDIX. 


aioiiarse  cn  los  caminos, 
atraer  d si, 

atreverse  d cosas  grandes 
atreverse  con  todos, 
atribuir  d olro, 

atribularse  en,  con  los  trabajoi 
atropellarse  en  las  acciones, 
atiifarse  en  la  conversacion, 
atufarse  por  poco, 
aunarse  con  otro, 
ausentarse  de  Madr'l; 
avecindarse  en  algun  pueblo, 
avenirse  con  todos, 
aventajarse  d otros, 
avergonzarse  d pedir, 
avergonzarse  de  algo, 
avenguarse  con  alguno, 
aviarsc  de  ropa, 
avocar  (alguna  cosa)  d si. 


Balancear  d tal  parte, 
balaiicear  en  la  duda, 
balar  por  dinero, 
bambolear  en  la  maroma, 
banarse  en  agua, 
barar  en  tierra, 

Darbear  con  la  pared, 
baslardear  de  su  naturaleza, 
bastardear  en  sus  acciones, 
batallar  con  los  enemigos, 
bajar  d la  cueva. 
bajar  de  la  torre, 

>ajar  de  la  autoridad, 

Dajar  hdcm  el  valle, 
bajo  de  cuerpo, 
ben6fico  d^  para  la  salud, 
Dlanco  de  ciitis, 
blando  de  corteza, 
blasfemar  de  la  virtud, 
blasonar  de  valiente, 
bordar  (algo)  de,  con  plata, 
bordar  (algo)  al  tam..ar, 
bordar  de  pasados, 
poclezar  de  hambre, 
lolo  de  punta, 
boyante  en  la  fortuna, 
trarnar  de  corage, 
i rear  d chasco, 
brcgar  con  alguno, 
blind ar  con  regales, 
brindar  A la  salud  de  afguns 
bueno  de,  para  comer, 
bufar  de  ira 

bullir  en,  por  todas  paries 
*ii  arse  de  algo. 


*o  stick  fast  in  the  road 
to  attract  to  one’s  self, 
to  animate  one’s  self  to  great 
to  dare  everybody, 
to  attribute  to  another, 
to  be  afflicted  with  labor,  tiouOiCS 
to  overhasten  actions, 
to  take  pet  in  conversation, 
to  be  affronted  at  a trifle 
to  unite  one’s  self  with  another, 
to  absent  one’s  self  from  Madrid 
to  take  one’s  abode  in  any  town 
to  agree  with  all. 

^o  gain  the  advantage  over  others 
to  be  ashamed  at  asking, 
to  be  ashamed  of  any  thing, 
to  agree  with  any  one. 
to  furnish  one’s  self  with  clothes, 
to  call  a cause  from  an  inferior  co  al  tc 
^ one’s  own 


to  vibrate  on  such  a side 

to  fluctuate  in  doubt 

to  clamor  for  money. 

to  dance  on  the  rope. 

to  bathe  one’s  self  in  water 

to  run  aground. 

to  reach  a wall  with  one’s  chin 

to  degenerate  from  his  nature. 

to  be  degenerated  in  one’s  actions 

to  fight  with  the  enemy. 

Do  go  down  to  the  cellar, 
to  descend  from  the  tower, 
to  recede  from  authority. 

„o  descend  towards  the  valley. 

-cw  in  stature, 
beneficial  to  the  health, 
of  a white  complexion, 
of  a soft  skin,  bark, 
to  blaspheme  against  virtue 
to  boast  of  bravery. 

to  embroider  (any  thing)  in  or  with  silvol 

to  embroider  on  a tambour  frame. 

to  embroider  with  a needle. 

to  gape  through  hunger. 

blunt  at  the  point. 

to  be  very  fortunate 

to  roar  with  anger. 

to  vex  with  tricks. 

to  struggle  with  any  one 

to  offer  presents. 

to  toast  to  any  one’s  heallk 

good  to  eat. 

to  swell  with  anger. 

to  move  in  all  parts. 

tc  make  a jest  of  any  thing 


APPEKDLX. 


493 


ETaDcr  de  pies, 
caber  «n  la  rnano, 
eaer  hAda  tal  parte, 
caer  dt  lo  alto, 

caer  en  tierra,  en  cuenta,  en  error,  en  tal 
tiempo,  en  lo  que  se  dice, 

caer  por  p^cua, 

caer  solrc  los  enemigos, 

calarse  de  agua, 

calentarse  a la  lumbre, 

califi(;ar  de  docto,  * 

callar  (la  verdad)  d otro, 

callar  rfe,  por  miedo, 

calumniar  (^t  alguno)  de  injusto, 

calzarse  a alguno, 

cambiar  (alguna  cosa)  con,  por  otra, 

caminai  a,  para  Sevilla, 

caminar  d pn^, 

caminar  por  el  monte, 

cansarse  de^  con  el  trabajo, 

cansarse  de  pretender, 

cansarse  en  el  carnino 

capaz  de  cien  arrobas, 

capaz  dcy  para  el  empleo, 

capitular  con  el  eneinigo, 

capitular  (^l  alguno)  de  mal  juez, 

cargarse  de  razon, 

casar  (una  persona  6 cosa)  con  otra, 

catequizar  (a  alguno)  para  alguna  cosa, 
causar  (perjuicio)  d alguno, 
cautivar  (a  alguno)  con,  por  beneficios, 
cavar  (la  imaginacion)  en  alguno, 
cavar  (con  la  imaginacion)  en  alguna 
cosa, 

cazcalear  de  una  parte  k otra, 
ceder  d otro  a la  autoridad, 
ceder  en  beneficio  de  alguno, 
censurar  (alguna  cosa)  de  mala, 
cenirse  d lo  posible, 
cliancearse  con  alguno, 
chapuzar  (algo)  en  el  agua, 
chico  de  cuerpo, 
chocar  d alguno, 
chocar  con  otro, 
circunscribirse  d una  cosa, 
clarnar  d Dios, 
clamar  por  dinero, 
clamorear  por  los  muertos, 
coartar  (la  facultad)  d alguno, 
cobrar  (dinero)  dc  los  deudores, 
cclegir  dc,  por  los  antecedentes, 
coligarse  con  alguno. 


to  be  able  to  stand  in  on  one’s  feet, 
to  be  contained  in  the  hand, 
to  fall  on  such  a side, 
to  fall  from  on  high. 

to  fall  upon  the  earth,  to  comprehend,  t« 
fall  into  a mistake,  to  fall  out  at  su(h 
a time,  to  understand  what  is  said 
to  fall  at  Easter, 
to  fall  upon  the  enemy, 
to  wet  one’s  self  through  xoith  water 
to  w'arin  one’s  self  at  the  fire, 
to  qualify  any  one  as  a learned  man 
to  conceal  (the  truth)  from  another, 
to  be  silent  from  fear, 
to  calumniate  (any  one)  as  unjust, 
to  lead  another  by  the  nose, 
to  exchange  (one  thing)  for  another 
to  travel  to  Seville, 
to  travel  on  foot, 
to  walk  along  the  mountain, 
to  fatigue  one’s  self  with,  the  labor, 
to  be  tired  of  pretending, 
to  be  tired  on  the  road, 
capable  of  holding  a hundred  arrobas  • 
capable  for  the  employment, 
to  capitulate  with  the  enemy, 
to  reproach  (any  one)  as  a bad  judge 
to  insist  upon  one’s  opinion, 
to  couple  (one.  person  or  thing)  with  an 
other. 

to  persuade  (any  one)  to  any  thing, 
to  cause  (prejudice)  to  any  one. 
to  overcome  (any  one)  with  favors, 
any  one  to  think  (seriously.) 
to  think  (deeply)  on  any  thing. 

to  go  lounging  about. 

to  yield  to  another,  to  authority. 

to  resign  in  another’s  favor. 

to  blame  (any  thing)  as  bad. 

to  keep  within  bounds. 

to  joke  with  any  one. 

to  sink  (any  thing)  in  the  water. 

small  in  person. 

to  provoke  any  one. 

to  strike  one  against  another 

to  confine  one’s  self  to  one  thing 

to  call  on  God. 

to  cry  out  for  money. 

to  ring  a peal  for  the  dead. 

to  restrict  (the  power)  of  any  one. 

to  recover  (money)  from  debtors. 

to  infer  from  the  antecedents. 

to  make  an  alliance  with  any  one 


♦ Four  arrobas  make  a qr  mtal 


494 


APPENDIX. 


columpiarse  en  el  aire, 

Bombatir  con,  contra  el  enemigo, 
combinar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
comedirse  en  ’as  palabras, 
comenzar  A decir, 
comerse  de  envidia, 
compatible  con  la  justicia, 
cornpensar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
competir  con  alguno, 
complacerse  rfc,  en  alguna  cosa, 
coinponerse  con  los  deudores, 
componcrse  de  bueno  y malo, 
comprar  (alguno)  a/,  del  vendedor, 
jomprensible  al  entendimiento, 
comprobar  (algo)  con  instrurnentos 
comprorneterse  con  alguno, 

comprometerse  en  jueces  arbitros, 
comunicar  (luz)  t alguna  pane, 
comunicar  (uno)  con  otro, 
concebir  (alguna  cosa)  en  el  animo, 
concebir  (una  cosa)  por  buena, 
conceder  (algo)  d otro, 
conceptuar  (^i  alguno)  de,  por  sabio, 
roncertar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
concordat  (la  copia)  con  el  original, 
concurrir  d algun  lin, 
concurrir  d alguna  parte, 
concurrir  con  otros, 
concurrir  (muchos)  en  un  dictamen, 
condenar  (a  uno)  d galeras, 
condenar  (^  uno)  en  las  costas, 
condescender  d los  ruegos, 
condescender  con  la  instancia, 
condolerse  de  los  trabajos, 
conducir  (algo)  d tal  parte, 
conducir  (una  • >sa)  al  bien  de  otro, 
confabularse  con  l:s  contrarios, 
confedcrarse  con  alguno, 
conferir  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
conferir(unnegocio)  con,  entrc  los  amigos 
confesar  (el  deii.t:>  al  juez, 
confesarse  d Dios, 
confesarse  con  alguno, 
confesarse  de  sus  culpas, 
confiar  (una  cosa)  d una  persona, 
confiar  en,  de  alguno, 
confinar  (fi  alguno)  d tal  parte, 
confinar  (Espana)  con  Francia, 
confirmarse  en  su  dictamen, 
conformarse  con  el  tiempo, 
conforme  d,  con  su  opinion, 
confrontar  con  alguno, 
confrontar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
confundirse  de  lo  que  se  ve 
^nfundirse  en  sus  juicios 


to  sv/ing  in  the  air 
to  fight  against  the  enemy, 
to  combine  (one  thing)  with  anoiu^ 
to  be  civil  in  words 
to  begin  to  say. 
to  pine  with  envy 
compatible  with  ,Tistice 
to  compensate  (one  thir  g)  wtth  aii( 
to  vie  with  any  one. 
to  be  p.eased  with  any  thing, 
to  compound  with  debtors, 
to  be  made  of  good  and  bad. 
to  buy  (any  one)  from  the  seller 
comprehensible  to  the  understanding, 
to  prove  (any  thing)  with  instruments, 
to  render  one’s  self  answerable  t aiq 
one 

to  compromise  by  arbitration, 

\ n communicate  (light)  to  any  part 
to  commune  (one)  with  another 
to  comprehend  (something.) 
to  conceive  (any  thing)  as  good, 
to  yield  (any  thing)  to  another, 
to  look  upon  (any  one)  as  a wise  man. 
to  concert  (one  thing)  with  another, 
to  make  the  copy  agree  with  the  original 
to  concur  to  some  end. 
to  meet  at  some  place, 
to  concur  with  others, 
to  agree  (many)  in  one  opinion 
to  condemn  (one)  to  the  galleys, 
to  condemn  (one)  in  the  costs, 
to  condescend  to  entreaties, 
to  condescend  to  the  instance, 
to  be  grieved  with  the  troubles 
to  conduct  (any  thing)  to  such  a place 
to  conduce  (something)  to  another’s  gooc 
to  converse  with  one’s  enemies, 
to  ally  one’s  seif  to  any  one. 
to  compare  one  thing  with  another, 
to  confer  on  any  business  with  friends 
to  confess  (one’s  crime)  to  the  judge 
to  confess  to  God. 
to  acknowledge  to  any  one. 
to  confess  one’s  sins, 
to  intrust  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 
to  rely  upon  any  one. 
to  confine  (any  one)  to  such  a place 
to  lie  adjacent  (Spain)  to  France 
to  be  confirmed  in  one’s  opinion, 
to  conform  to  the  times, 
conformable  to  his  opinion, 
to  confront  with  any  one. 
to  confront  (one  thing)  with  another 
to  be  confounded  with  what  one  sees, 
to  be  thrown  (one’s  senses  into  CJnhJ 
Sion. 


APPENDIX. 


495 


Sfsttgomar  cun  aiguno, 
congraciarse  con  otro 

congratularse  con  os  suyos, 

congratmarse  de  alguaa  cosa, 
congelurar  (algo)  de,  por  senalos, 
conmutar  (algo)  con  otra  cosa, 
conmutar  (iin  voto)  en  otra  cosa., 
corisagrarse  d Dios, 
consentir  en  algo, 
consolarse  con  sus  parientes, 
conspirar  d algima  cosa, 
conspirar  contra  aiguno, 
conspirar  en  un  intento, 
constar  (el  todo)  de  partes, 
constar  por  escrito, 
consultar  d aiguno  para  un  empl€5 

consultar  con  letrados, 
consumado  en  una  facultad, 
containinarse  con  los  viciosos, 
contaminarse  de  heregias. 
conteinponzar  con  aiguno, 
contender  con  aiguno, 
contender  sobre  alguna  cosa, 
contenerse  en  su  obligacion, 
contestar  d la  pregunta, 
contraer  (algo)  d un  asunto, 
contrapesar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
contraponer  (una  cosa)  d otra, 
contrapuntarse  con  aiguno, 
contrapuntarse  de  palabras, 
contravenir  d la  ley, 
contribuir  d tal  cosa, 
contribuir  con  dinero, 
convalecer  de  la  enfermedad, 
convencerse  de  la  razon, 
convenir  con  otro, 
convenir  en  alguna  cosa, 
conversar  con  alguna, 
conversar  en  materias  de  estadc, 
convertir  (la  hacienda)  en  dinero. 
convertirse  d Dios, 
convidar  (a  aiguno)  d comer, 
convidar  (a  aiguno)  con  dinero, 
convidarse  d los  trabajos, 
convocar  d junta, 
eooperar  (con  otro)  d alguna  cosa 
«orrerse  de  vergUenza, 
iporresponder  d los  beneficios, 
oorresponderse  con  los  amigos, 
cotejar  (la  copia)  con  el  original, 
jrccer  en  virtudes, 
ciecido  de  cucipo 
Creer  en  Dios, 

Woerse  dc  alguna  osa. 


to  be  congenial  to  ai  y one 
to  ingratiate  one's  seif  into  another’^ 
favor 

to  congratulate  one’s  self  with  one’s  owa 
friends. 

to  rejoice  in  any  thing, 
to  conjecture  (any  thing)  by  signs, 
to  barter  (•>ne  thing)  for  another 
to  exchange  (a  vow)  into  another  thirg 
to  consecrate  one’s  self  to  God 
to  agree  to  any  thing, 
to  be  comforted  with  one's  friends, 
to  aspire  to  any  thing, 
o conspire  against  any  one 
I'D  enter  into  a conspiracy 
to  be  composed  (the  whole)  oj  parts, 
to  appear  in  writing, 
to  propose  any  one  lor  an  employment 
office. 

to  consult  with  Jearned  men 

to  be  consummate  in  a faculty. 

to  pervert  one’s  self  with  the  vicious. 

to  contaminate  one’s  self  with  heresies. 

to  temporize  with  any  one. 

to  contend  with  any  one. 

to  dispute  upon  any  thing. 

to  hold  to  one’s  contract,  duty. 

to  answer  one’s  question. 

to  apply  (something)  to  a subject. 

to  counterpoise  (one  thing)  with  anotha 

to  put  (one  thing)  against  another. 

to  compare  one’s  self  with  any  one 

to  scold  at  one  another 

to  transgress  against  the  law. 

to  contribute  to  such  a thing. 

to  contribute  money. 

to  recover /rom  illness. 

to  be  convinced  by  reason. 

to  agree  with  another 

to  agree  upon  any  thing. 

to  converse  with  any  one. 

to  converse  on  affairs  of  state. 

to  convert  (goods)  into  money 

to  be  converted  to  God. 

to  invite  (any  one)  to  dine. 

to  offer  money  to  anybody. 

to  be  ready  to  work. 

t;>  convene  a meeting. 

to  co-operate  in  any  thing. 

to  be  ashamed. 

to  be  grateful. 

to  correspond  with  friends 

to  compare  (the  copy)  with  the  firigisiai 

to  increase  in  virtues. 

tall  in  stature. 

to  believe  in  God. 

to  be  convinced  oj  any  thing 


496 


APPEUDIX. 


cucharetear  en  lodo, 
cuidar  de  algo,  de  alguno, 
culpar  fk  uno)  de  omiso, 
cumpur  con  alguno, 
cumplir  con  su  obligacion, 
curarse  de  alguna  enfemiedad. 
curarse  en  salud 
curtirse  al  aire, 
cuitido  del  sol. 


Dar  (algo)  d alguno, 

dar  (A  alguno)  de  palos, 

dar  de  bianco, 

dar  en  manias, 

dar  por  \ isto, 

darse  a estudiar, 

darse  al  diantre, 

darse  por  vencido, 

deber  (dinero)  A alguno, 

decaer  de  su  autoridad, 

decir  (algo)  a otro, 

decir  (bien)  con  una  cosa, 

decir  (bien)  de  alguno, 

declararse  A alguno, 

declararse  por  un  partido, 

declinar  A,  hacta  tal  parte, 

declinar  en  bajeza, 

dedicar  (tiernpo)  al  cstudio, 

dedicarse  A la  virtud, 

defender  (&  uno)  de  sus  contranos, 

deferir  (al  parecer)  de  otro, 

defraudar  (algo)  de  la  autoridad  de  o 

degenerar  de  su  nacimiento, 

delante  de  alguno, 

delatarse  al  juez, 

deleitarse  con  la  vista, 

deleitarse  en  oir, 

deliberar  sSbre  tal  cosa, 

dentro  de  casa, 

depender  de  alguno, 

dep  yier  (a  alguno)  de  su  empl*^, 

depositar  (algo)  en  alguna  parte, 
derivar  de  otro  autoridad, 
derrenegar  de  alguna  cosa, 
desabrirse  con  alguno, 
desabrocharse  con  alguno, 
desagradecido  A algun  benef 'm, 
iesaliogarse  (con  alguno)  dt,  su  p«na 

desapropiarse  de  algo, 
desavenirsp  con  alguno, 
desavenirse  (unos)  de  otres, 
desayunarse  de  aiguna  noticia, 
liescabezarse  en,  con  alguna  co?'» 
I'^scalabazarse  en  alguna  cosa, 


to  intermeddle  in  every  thing. 

to  take  care  of  something,  of  some  d 

to  blame  (any  one)  for  negligence 

to  discharge  one’s  obligation  to  anytK>d5 

to  perform  one’s  c uty. 

t»  be  cured  of  any  disorder. 

to  lake  care  of  one’s  self  in  health 

to  tan  hi/  the  air 

tanned  by  the  sun. 


to  give  (something)  to  anybody, 
to  beat  (any  one)  with  a stick 
to  hit  the  mark, 
to  be  foolish,  whimsical, 
to  suppose  any  thing  as  seen, 
to  give  one’s  self  to  study, 
to  despair. 

to  acknowledge  one’s  se.-f  as  conqi  sred 
to  be  indebted  to  anybody, 
to  fall  from  one’s  authority, 
to  say  (any  thing)  to  another, 
to  agree  (one  thing)  with  another, 
to  speak  (well)  of  any  one. 
to  declare  one’s  self  to  anybody, 
to  declare  one’s  self  for  a party 
to  incline  towards  such  a side, 
to  degenerate. 

to  employ  (one’s  time)  in  study 
to  devote  one’s  self  to  virtue, 
to  defend  (anybody)  from  his  enemies 
to  adopt  another’s  opinion, 
to  usurp  (a  little)  another’s  authority 
to  degenerate  from  one’s  ancestors, 
before  anybody, 
to  accuse  one’s  self  a judge 
to  be  pleased  with  seeing, 
to  delight  in  hearing, 
to  deliberate  upon  any  thing, 
within  the  house, 
to  depend  upon  anybody, 
to  depose  (anybody)  from  his  employ 
ment. 

to  deposit  (any  thing)  in  any  place, 
to  derive  authority  from  another, 
to  detest  any  thing, 
to  have  a difference  with  anvbody. 
to  divulge  one’s  secret  to  anothei. 
ungrateful  for  any  benefit, 
to  communicate  (to  another)  one  s hou 
ble. 

to  alienate  any  thing. 

to  disagree  with  any  one. 

to  disagree  (some)  with  others. 

to  take  notice  of  any  news. 

to  labor  hard  in  vain  on  any  thing 

to  puzzle  one’s  wits  to  find  nut  any  thing 


APPENDIX. 


497 


lescansar  de  a fatiga^ 
descantillar  (algo)  de  algi.na  cosa 
descargarse  de  alguna  cosa, 
descartarse  de  algun  encargo, 
descemler  a los  valles, 
descender  de  buen  linage, 
descolgarse  rfe,  par  la  inuralla, 
desoollar  sobre  otros, 
descomponerse  con  alguno, 
descondar  de  alguno, 
desconocido  d los  beneficios 
descontar  (algo)  de  alguna  cosa 
descubrirse  con  alguno, 
descuidar»e  de^  en  su  obligacion, 
desdecir  de  su  caracter, 
desdecir  de  lo  dicho, 
desdenarse  de  alguna  cosa, 
desembarazarse  de  estorbos, 
desembarcar  de  la  nave, 
deseinbarcar  en  el  puerto, 
desenfrenarse  en  vicios, 
desertar  de  las  banderas, 

*esesperar  de  la  pretension, 
rfesfalcar  (algo)  de  alguna  cosa, 
aesgajarse  de  los  inontes, 
deshacerse  d trabajar, 
deshacerse  de  alguna  cosa, 
deshacerse  en  llanto, 
de«mentir  d alguno, 
desmcntir  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 
desnudarse  de  pasiones, 
despedirse  de  alguna  cosa, 

Jespeharse  de  un  monte, 
despertar  d alguno, 
despertar  del  sueho, 
despicarse  de  la  ofensa, 
despobiarse  de  genie, 
desposarse  con  alguno, 
jlesprenderse  de  algo, 
despues  de  llegar,  de  alguno,  de  alguna 
cosa, 

desquiciar  (h  aiftTmo)  de  su  poder, 
desquitarse  de  la  p6rdida, 
desterrar  (h  uno)  de  su  palria 
destrizarse  d llorar, 
destrizarse  de  enfado, 
desvergonzarse  con  alguno 
desviarse  del  carnino,  ^ 

desvivirse  por  algo, 
detenerse  en  dificultades, 
detcrrninarse  d partir, 
uelras  de  la  iglesia, 
dfevolver  (la  causa)  a^juez, 
dojar  (una  manda)  d algunc 
dejar  de  cscribir, 
digax  (algo)  en  mano  de  otro 


to  relieve  one’s  self  from  fatigue, 
to  break  off  the  corner  of  any  thing, 
to  clear  one’s  self  from  any  thing 
to  excuse  one’s  seif  from  any  charge 
to  descend  to  the  valleys, 
to  come  of  a good  family 
to  creep  down  the  wall, 
to  surpass  others; 
to  disagree  with  any  one 
to  mistrust  any  one. 
ungrateful  for  benefits, 
to  discount  one  thing  f?om  another 
to  disclose  one’s  self  to  any  one 
to  neglect  one’s  obligation,  duty 
to  deviate  from  one’s  characte*^. 
to  retract  what  one  has  said, 
to  disdain  any  thing, 
to  get  rid  of  obstacles, 
to  unship,  unload  from  the  vessel 
to  land  in  the  harbor, 
to  abandon  one’s  self  to  vices, 
to  desert  the  standard, 
to  despair  of  one’s  pretension, 
to  deduct  from  another  thing, 
to  fall  from  the  mountains, 
to  work  hard,  with  anxiety, 
to  get  rid  of  any  thing, 
to  burst  into  tears 
to  give  any  one  the  lie. 
to  contradict  (one  thing)  another 
to  divest  one’s  self  of  passions, 
to  take  leave  of  any  thing, 
to  fall  headlong  from  a mountain, 
to  awake  any  one. 
to  awake  from  sleep, 
to  be  revenged  of  an  affront, 
to  become  unpeopled, 
to  marry  any  one. 
to  get  rid  of  something, 
after  arriving,  after  any  one,  after  anj 
thing. 

to  deprive  (any  one)  of  his  authority 

to  make  up  for  one’s  loss. 

to  banish  (any  one)  from  his  cruntry 

to  consume  one’s  self  with  weeping. 

to  consume  one’s  self  with  anger. 

lo  take  liberties  with  anybody. 

to  lose  one’s  way 

to  be  anxious  for  something. 

to  be  stopped  by  difficulties. 

to  take  tlie  resolution  to  set  out. 

behind  the  church. 

to  return  the  cause  to  tne  judge. 

to  leave  (a  legacy)  to  any  one. 

to  leave  off  writing. 

to  deposite  something  tn  the  bands  o 
another  ' 


198 


APPENDIX 


liferir  (algo/  A,  para  otro  tiempo, 
lignarse  de  conceder  algo, 
iiinanar  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 
liscernir  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 
lisguf^arse  de^  con  alguna  cosa, 
lisponer  de  los  bienes, 

Jisponerse  d caminar, 

iisputar  de,  sobre  alguna  cosa, 

iisentir  de  otro  dictamen, 

distar  (uii  pueblo)  de  otro, 

distinguir  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 

distraerse  de,  en  la  conversacion, 

disv  adir  (d  alguno)  de  alguna  cosa, 

dividir  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 

dividir  en  partes, 

dividir  entre  muchos, 

dividir  por  mitad, 

dolerse  de  los  pecados, 

dotado  de  ciencia, 

dudar  de  alguna  cosa, 

durar  hasta  el  invierno, 

durar  por  mucho  tiempo, 

duro  de  corteza, 


Echar  (algo)  de,  en,  por  tierra, 
echar  (olor)  de  si, 
elevarse  d,  hasta  el  cielo, 
elevarse  de  ia  tierra, 
embarcarse  en  negocios, 
embobarse  con,  de,  en  alguna  cosa, 
emboscarse  en  el  monte, 
embiitir  (alguna  cosa)  de  algodon, 
embutir  (una  cosa)  en  otra, 
enmendarse  con  la  corr3^ccion, 
enmendarse  de,  en  alguna  cosa, 
empaparse  en  agua, 
emparejar  con  alguno, 
emparentar  con  alguno, 
empenarse  en  una  cosa, 
empenarse  por  alguno, 
emplearse  de  alguna  cosa, 
enagenarse  de  alguna  cosa, 
enarnorarse  de  alguno, 
enarnoricarse.  de  algurso, 
encallar  (la  nave)  en  arena, 
encaminarse  d alguna  parte, 
enca~amarse  en,  por,  sobre  la  parer  , 
encararse  d,  con  alguno, 

'^ncargarse  de  algun  negocio, 
encasquetarse  (algo)  en  ia  cabeza, 
encastillarse  en  alguna  parte, 
cncajarse  en,  por  alguna  parte, 
encenagarse  en  vicios, 
sncenderse  en  ira, 
mcerrarse  en  su  casa, 
nit’*«arcarse  en  agua, 


to  defer  ^any  thing,  to  another  time 
to  condescend  to  grant  any  thing, 
to  emanate  (one  thing)  from  another 
to  discern  (one  thing)  from  another 
to  be  disgusted  with  any  thing, 
to  dispose  of  goods 
to  prepare  one’s  self  to  travel, 
to  dispute  about,  on  any  thing, 
to  dissent  from  another’s  opinion, 
to  be  distant  (one  town) /rom  another 
to  distinguish  (one  thing)  from  anothe 
to  wander  from,  in  conversation, 
to  dissuade  (any  one)  from  any  thing 
to  divide  (one  thing)  from  another 
to  divide  in  parts, 
to  divide  between  several, 
to  divide  into  halves, 
to  repent  of  sins, 
endowed  with  learning, 
to  doubt  any  thing, 
to  last  till  winter, 
to  last  a long  time 
of  a rough  skin,  barn 


to  throw  (any  thing)  from,  on  uie  eanh 

to  exhale  (an  odor)  from  one’s  seif 

to  be  exalted  to  the  skies. 

to  be  elevated /rom  the  earth. 

to  be  involved  in  business. 

to  be  stupified  with  any  thing 

to  lie  in  ambush  on  a hill. 

to  inlay  (any  thing)  with  coltoa 

to  inlay  (one  thing)  in  another, 

to  be  amended  by  correction. 

to  correct  one’s  self  in  any  thing. 

to  be  soaked  with  water 

to  put  one  on  a level  with  any  one 

tG  be  related  to  any  one. 

to  pledge  one’s  self  to  a thing. 

to  take  part  for  another. 

to  employ  one’s  self  about  a thing 

to  alienate  any  thing. 

to  be  enamored  with  any  one 

to  fall  in  love  with  any  one. 

to  run  (a  ship)  on  shore,  or  on  the  sand 

to  direct  one’s  course  to  any  part. 

to  climb  up  the  wall. 

to  face  another. 

to  charge  one’s  self  with  any  business. 
,o  be  obstinate  in  maintaining  any  thing 
to  fortify  one’s  self  in  any  place, 
to  busy  )ne’s  self  in  any  thing- 
*o  become  vicious, 
to  kindle  with  anger, 
to  shut  one’s  self  up  in  one  s house 
to  drink  too  much  water. 


APPENDIX. 


499 


rsj  d Dios, 

eiiconarse  von  alguno, 
enfermar  dtl  peoho, 
eiifrascarse  en  la  disputa, 
engolfarse  en  cosas  graves, 
engreirse  con  la  fortuiia, 
enlazar  (alguna  cosa)  con  otra, 
ciiredarse  ^ana  cosa)  con,  cn  otra 
ensaya.rse  d,  para  alguna  cosa, 
ensiyarse  en  alguna  cosa, 

Pateiider  de  alguna  cosa, 
calender  en  sus  negocios, 
enterarse  de  alguna  cosa, 
enierarse  en  algun  negocio, 
entrar  en  alguna  parte, 
entregar  (algo)  d alguno, 
cntrerneterse  en  cosas  de  otro, 
tnviar  (algo)  d alguno, 
jquivocarse  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
•.quivocarse  cn  algo, 
escaparse  de  la  prision, 
escaparse  por  la  ventana, 
jscarmentar  de,  con  alguna  cosa» 
jscarrnentar  en  cabeza  agena, 
.sconderse  en  alguna  parte, 

Bsconderse  de  alguno, 

cscaso  de  rnedios, 

escribir  (cartas)  d alguno, 

esculpir  en  bronr  s, 

esinerarse  en  alguna  cosa, 

espantarse  dr  algo, 

estampar  en  papel, 

estar  d la  orden  de  otro, 

estar  de  viage, 

estar  en  alguna  parte, 

estar  en  ammo  de, 

estar  en  lo  que  se  hace 

estar  para  salir, 

estar  por  alguno 

estar  (alguna  cosa)  por  suceder, 

estrecharse  ron  alguno, 

estrecharse  en  los  gastos, 

estrellarse  ion  alguno, 

eslrellatSB  en,  contra  alguna  cosa, 

estribar  en  alguna  cosa, 

esceder  (-na  cosa)  d otra, 

esceder  (una  xiad)  en  mil  reaies, 

esceptuar  (a  alguno)  de  alguna  cosa, 

escluir  (alguno)  de  alguna  parte  6 cosa. 

escusarse  con  alguno, 
escusarse  de  hacer  alguna  cosa, 
exhorlar  (^i  alguno)  d tal  cosa, 
exiintr  (a  alguno)  de  alguna  cosa, 
exonerar  (t  alguno)  de  su  empleo, 
espeler  (^i  alguno)  de  alguna  parte, 
e»  las  artes. 


to  commend  one’s  seif  to 
to  be  irritated  against  a ny  one 
to  have  a pain  in  the  breast. 
to  entangle  one’s  self  in  a disputa 
to  be  absorbed  in  important  tlirngs. 
to  become  vain  with  fortune. 

-o  tie  (one  thing)  close  to  another. 

to  interweave  (one  thing)  with  arid  ’a®’; 

to  try  to  do  any  thing. 

to  become  expert  m any  thing 

to  understand  any  thing. 

to  understand  one’s  business. 

to  be  well  informed  of  any  thing. 

to  be  well  acquainted  with  any  busitJOfix 

to  enter  any  place. 

to  deliver  (something)  to  some  one. 

Xo  meddle  with  another’s  affairs, 
to  send  (something)  to  some  one. 
to  mistake  (one  thing)  for  another, 
to  be  mistaken  in  any  thing, 
to  escape  from  prison, 
to  escape  through  the  window, 
to  take  warning  at  any  thing, 
to  take  'w'arning  at  another’s  expen&*i 
to  hide  one’s  self  in  any  place 
to  hide  from  any  one. 
limited  in  means, 
to  write  (letters)  to  any  one 
to  engrave  on  brass, 
to  exert  one’s  self  in  any  thing 
to  be  terrified  at  any  thing, 
lo  print  on  paper 
to  be  under  another’s  directicn 
to  be  on  a journey 
to  be  in  some  place 
to  have  a mind  to. 
to  know  what  is  doing, 
to  be  ready  to  go  out. 
to  be  in  favor  of  any  one. 
to  be  (something)  near  happen*ar 
to  become  intimate  with  any  one 
to  restrain  one’s  self  in  one’s  expenses 
to  fall  out  with  any  one. 
to  dash  one’s  self  against  any  thing 
to  be  supported  in  any  thing 
to  excel  (one  thing)  another, 
to  exceed  (a  sum)  by  one  thousand  reals 
to  except  (any  one)  from  any  thing, 
to  exclude  (any  one)  from  any  place  3; 
thing. 

to  apologize  to  any  one 
to  excuse  one’s  seif  from  doing  any  ti 
to  exhort  (any  one)  to  such  a th.ng. 
to  exempt  (any  one)  from  any  t-iing 
to  dismiss  (any  one)  from  his  » ace. 
to  expel  (any  one)  f'^om  any  place, 
skilled  in  the  arts 


500 


APPENDIX. 


estraei  (\ma  c >sa)  de  otra, 
eSira^iarse  de  la  carrera, 


F^cil  de  digcrir, 

failar  d.  la  palabra, 

faltar  de  alguiia  parte, 

falto  de  juinio, 

fastidiarse  de  manjares, 

fatigarse  de,  en,  por  algiina  t^osa, 

favorable  d,  para  alguno, 

favorecerse  de  alguno, 

fiarse  de,  tn  alguno, 

fiar  (algo)  d alguno, 

fiel  d,  con  sus  amigos, 

fijar  (algo)  en  la  pared, 

flexible  d la  razon, 

I'.uctuar  en,  entre  dudas, 

fortificarse  en  alguna  parte, 

franquearse  d,  con  alguno, 

frisar  (una  persona  6 cosa)  cor.  atra 

hiera  de  casa, 

fuerte  de  condicion, 

fundarse  en  razon. 


Girai  (una  letra)  d cargo  de  otro, 
girar  de  una  parte  d otra, 
girar  por  tal  parte, 
girar  sobre  una  casa  de  comcrcio, 
gloriarse  de  alguna  cosa, 
gordo  de  talle, 
gozar  de  alguna  cosa, 
graduar  (una  cosa)  de,  por  buena, 
grangear  (la  voluntad)  d,  de  alguno, 
guardarse  de  alguno,  de  alguna  cosa, 

guarecerse  de  alguna  pwsona  6 cosa 

guarecerse  en  alguna  parte, 
giiarnecer  funa  cosa)  con,  ds  otra, 
guiado  de  alguno, 
guiarse  por  a-gu*r  o,^ 
guindarse  por  la  pared, 
gustar  de  alguna  ersa, 

II. 

Habil  en  papeles, 

babil  para  el  empleo, 

habditar  (a  uno)  cn,  para  alguna  cosa, 

habitar  con  aiguno, 

fiabitar  en  tal  parte, 

aabituarse  d,  en  alguna  cosa, 

hablar  con,  por  alguno, 

hablar  de,  en,  sobit  algur  a cosa 

riablar  griego. 


to  extract  (one  thing)  frem  xr.'  T.hoi 
to  deviate  from  one’s  purpose. 


easy  to  digest. 

to  fail  in  one’s  promise 

to  be  ihissing,  wanting 

wanting  in  sense. 

to  be  disgusted  with  victualfc 

to  long  for  something. 

favorable  to  some  one. 

to  avail  one’s  self  of  any  one 

to  confide  in  any  one. 

to  trust  (any  thing)  to  any  one 

faithful  to  one’s  friends. 

to  fix  (any  thingi  in  the  wall. 

pliant  to  reason. 

to  fluctuate  in  dou.  t 

to  strengthen  one’s  self  in  any  place. 

to  open  one’s  self  to  any  one. 

to  be  like  (a  person  or  thing)  with  another 

out  of  the  house. 

high,  strong  in  temper. 

to  be  founded  in  reason. 


to  draw  (a  bill)  upon  another, 
to  reel  from  one  side  to  another, 
to  turn  to  such  a siae. 
to  draw  upon  a commercial  house, 
to  boast  of  any  thing 
fat  or  thick-set. 
to  relish  any  thing, 
to  pronounce  'any  thing)  as  good, 
to  gam  (the  affection)  of  any  vy.ie. 
to  guard  one’s  self  from  any  one,  from 
any  thing. 

to  shelter  one’s  self  from  an>  pr-rsun  or 
thing. 

to  take  shelter  in  any  place, 
to  garnish  (one  thing)  with  aiiOther. 
guided  by  any  one. 
to  guide  one’s  self  by  any  one. 
to  suspend  one’s  self  by  the  wall 
to  like  any  thing. 


skilful  in  documents, 
qualified  for  the  employment, 
to  fit  up  (anybody)  lo  do  any  thing 
to  dwell  with  any  one 
to  dwell  in  such  a place, 
to  accustom  one’s  self  somcthii^g 
to  speak  with,  or  for  any  one 
to  speak  of,  about  any  thing, 
to  talk  gibberish  or  Greek 
be  handy  at  any  thing. 


APPENDIX. 


501 


Hacer  de  v'a'ienle, 

aacer  para  ti. 

tiacer  po^  algiino, 

hacerse  con  buenos  libios, 

hallar  (aiguna  cosa)  en  ta  parle, 

hallarse  a,  en  la  fiesta, 

harlarse  de  coinida, 

heiichir  (el  cantaro)  di  agua, 

tierlr  (a  alguiio;  cn  la  estimacion, 

nerido  de  la  injuria, 

German ar  (ur.a  cosa)  con  otra, 
f:ervir  (un  lugarj  de,  en  gente, 
hiincarse  de  rOv.illas, 
iiocicar  cn  alguna  cosa, 
holgarse  con,  de  alguna  cosa. 
huir  de  alguna  persona  6 cosa, 
humanarse  d alguna  cosa, 
liumariarse  con  los  inferiores, 
iiumillarse  A alguna  persona  6 c jss 

hundir  (alguni  cosa)  en  el  agua, 
iiundirse  en  un  pantano, 

I. 

Idoneo  para  alguna  cosa, 
igual  d.  con  otro, 
igual  en  fuerzas, 
jgualar  (una  cosa)  A,  con  otra, 
imbuir  (A  alguno)  de,  en  alguna  cosa, 
irapeler  (.A  alguno)  d alguna  cosa, 
irnpelido  de  la  necesidad, 
impenetrable  d los  mas  perspicaces, 
impenetrable  en  el  secreto, 
impetrar  (algo)  de  alguno, 
iniplicarse  con,  en  alguna  cosa, 

Imponer  (pena)  d alguno, 
imponerse  en  alguna  cosa 
importer  d alguno, 
importunado  de,  por  otr  j. 
jmportunar  (A  alguno)  con  pietensiones, 
iinpresionar  (A  alguno)  contra  otro, 
impdi.ar  (alguna  cosa)  en  el  aniino, 
impropio  de,  en,  para  su  edad, 
irnpugnar  alguna  cosa  d alguno 
impugnado  de,  por  muchos, 
iinputar  (la  culpa)  d otro, 
inaccesible  d los  pretend''3iites , 
inapeable  de  su  opinion, 
incansable  en  el  trabajo, 

Jicapaz  de  rernedio, 
tncesante  en  sus  tarea  s, 
mcjdir  en  culpa, 
incitar  (A  alguno)  d su  defensa, 
incitar  (A  alguno)  contra  otro, 
jiciinar  (A  alguno)  d la  virtud 
in3luir  en  el  niimero, 

’ncompatible  con  el  rnando. 


to  pretend  to  courage, 
to  provide  for  one’s  sell 
to  do  for  any  one 

to  furnish  one’s  self  with  gviod  books, 
to  find  (any  thing)  ^n  such  a place, 
to  be  present  at  the  feast. 

*^o  satiate  one’s  self  with  food 
to  fill  (the  pitcher)  with  water, 
to  hurt  (any  one)  in  his  reputation, 
wounded  by  injury, 
to  match  (one  thing)  with  another, 
to  swarm  (a  place)  with  people, 
to  kneel  down, 
to  stumble  on  any  thing 
to  rejoice  at  any  thing, 
to  fly  from  any  person  or  thing, 
to  lower  one’s  self  to  any  thing 
to  be  condescending  to  inferiors, 
to  humble  one’s  self  to  any  person  or 
thing. 

to  plunge  (any  thing)  into  the  water 
to  sink  in  a bog. 


fit /or  any  thing, 
equal  to,  with  another, 
equal  in  forces. 

to  make  (one  thing)  equal  with  another 
to  imbibe  (any  one)  with,  in  any  thing, 
to  compel  (any  one)  to  any  thing. 
Impelled  by  necessity, 
impenetrable  to  the  most  perspicacious 
impenetrable  in  secrecy, 
to  obtain  (any  thing)  of  anyone, 
to  intermeddle  in  any  thing, 
to  impose  (penalties)  on  any  one. 
to  instruct  one’s  self  in  any  thing, 
to  be  of  importance  to  any  one. 
importuned  with,  by  another, 
to  importune  (any  one)  with  pretensiona 
to  impress  (any  one)  against  another, 
to  imprint  (any  thing)  on  the  mind, 
unbecoming  his  age. 
to  impugn  any  one  in  any  thing, 
impugned  by  many, 
to  impute  (the  fault)  to  any  one. 
inaccessible  to  pretenders, 
obstinate  in  one’s  opinion, 
untiring  in  work, 
incapable  of  remedy, 
ncessant  in  one’s  labors, 
o fall  again  into  a fault, 
to  incite  (any  one)  to  one’s  defcnc® 
to  incite  any  one  against  another, 
to  incline  (any  one)  to  virtue 
to  include  in  the  number, 
incompatible  with  the  commaao. 


602 


APPENDIX. 


mcomyirensible  d los  hombics. 
Inconsecuente  en  algima  cosa, 
mconstante  e»  su  procecler, 
iiicorporar  (una  cosa)  d,  con,  en  otra, 
jicreible  d,  para  mu<;hos, 
incurnDir  (^una  cosa)  d alguno, 
incurrir  en  delitos, 
indeciso  en  resolver, 

Lndignarse  con,  contra  alguno, 

.ndisponer  (ii  uno)  con  otro. 

icducir  (a  alguno)  d pecai, 

uaductivo  de  error, 

indultar  (a  alguno)  de  la  pena 

iTifatigable  en  el  trabajo, 

liifecto  de  heregias, 

mierior  d otro, 

inferior  en  alguna  cosa, 

mferir  (una  cosa)  de,  por  otra, 

iniicionado  de  peste, 

infiei  d su  amigo, 

inflexible  d la  razon, 

inflexible  en  su  dictamen, 

influir  en  alguna  cosa, 

inforinar  (a  alguno)  de,  sohre  algina  cosa, 

iniundir  (ammo)  d,  en  alguno, 

ngrato  d los  bencficios, 

ingrato  con  los  amigos, 

inhabil  para  el  empleo, 

inhabilitar  (a  alguno)  para  alguna  cosa, 

inhibir  (al  juez)  de,  en  el  conocimiento, 

insensible  d las  injurias, 
inseparable  de  la  virtud, 
insertar  (una  cosa)  en  otra, 
insinuar  (una  cosa)  d alguno 
insinuarse  con  los  poderosos, 

nsipido  al  gusto, 
insistir  en,  sobre  alguna  cosa, 
inspirar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
irstruir  (t  aiguno)  de,  en,  sobre  alguna 
cosa, 

tnterceder  con  alguno  por  otro, 
nterceder  por  otro  con  alguno, 
nteresarse  con  alguno  por  otro, 

iHteresarsc  en  alguna  cosa, 
iiiternarse  con  alguno, 
internal  se  en  alguna  cosa  6 lugar, 
mterpolai  (unas  cosas)  c-^  otras, 
mterponer  (su  autoridad)  con  algur  o, 

bitervenir  en  las  cosas, 
intervenir  ^wr  alguno, 
aitroducirsc  con  los  qde  mandan, 


jicomprehensible  to  nien 
inconsistent  in  any  thing, 
inconsistent  in  one’s  proceedings, 
to  incorporate  (one  thing)  with  another 
incredible  to  many. 

to  be  incumbent  (any  thing)  on  any  one 

to  incur  crimes. 

undecided  in  resolving. 

to  be  angry  with  any  one. 

to  indispose  (one)  with  another. 

lO  induce  (one)  to  sin. 

.eading  to  error. 

to  pardon  (any  one)  the  punishment 
indefatigable  in  labor, 
infected  with  heresies, 
inferior  to  another, 
inferior  in  any  thing, 
to  infer  (one  thing)  from  another, 
mfected  with  the  plague, 
unfaithful  to  one’s  friend 
inflexible  to  reason, 
inflexible  in  one’s  opinion, 
to  have  an  influence  over  any  tning. 
to  inform  (any  one)  of  any  thing, 
to  infuse  ^courage)  in  any  one 
ungrateful  for  favors, 
ungrateful  to  friends, 
unfit  for  the  employment, 
to  disable  any  one  for  any  thing, 
to  inhibit  (any  judge) /rom  taking  cogni 
zance. 

insensible  to  injuries, 
inseparable  from  virtue, 
to  insert  (one  thing)  in  another, 
to  insinuate  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 
to  insinuate  one's  self  into  the  favoi  oi 
the  great, 
insipid  to  the  taste, 
to  insist  on  any  thing, 
to  inspire  (another)  with  any  thing, 
to  instruct  (any  one)  in  any  thing 

to  intercede  with  any  one  for  anotner. 
to  intercede  for  another  with  any  one. 
to  interest  one’s  seif  with  any  one  foi  Jtn 
other. 

to  interest  one’s  self  in  any  thing, 
to  creep  into  another’s  tavcr. 
to  penetrate  into  any  t2±"g  or  place, 
to  mingle  (one  thing)  with  another, 
to  interpose  (one’s  authority)  wiib,  any 
one. 

to  intervene  in  things 
to  intervene /or  any  one. 
to  introduce  one’s  self  to  those  who  com 
mand. 

to  intrude  one’s  self  into  any  place 


fotroducirse  c«,  por  alguna  parte, 


ArPEXDIX. 


503 


feiT&cido  de,  por  los  contraries, 
inveriiar  en  tal  parte, 
uivertir  (el  caudal)  en  otro  uso 
mgerir  (un  Arbol)  en  otro, 

11  de  (Madrid)  d,  h&cia  Cadiz, 
ir  contra  alguno, 
ir  por  A cammo. 
ir  por  pan, 
ir  tras  alguno. 


Jictarse  de  alguna  cosa, 
jug  ar  d tal  juego, 
juga:  amos)  con  otros, 
pi  gar  (alguna  cosa)  con  otra, 
juntar  (una  cosa)  d,  con  otra, 
justificarse  de  algun  cargo, 

.mzgar  de  alguna  cosa, 

Ladear  (una  cosa,  d tal  parte, 

ladearse  (alguno)  d otro  partido, 

larnentarse  de  la  desgracia, 

lanzar  (algo)  a,  contra  alguno, 

largo  de  cuerpo, 

largo  de  manos, 

lastimarse  cow,  en  una  piedra, 

lastiinarse  de  alguno, 

leer  (los  pensamientos)  d alguno, 

lejos  de  la  tierra, 

levantar  (las  manos)  al  cielo, 

levantar  (alguna  cosa)  del  suelo, 

levantar  (alguna  cosa)  en  alto, 

libertar  (a  alguno)  de  peligro, 

Ubrar  (a  alguno)  de  riesgos, 

lidiar  cen  alguno, 

ligar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 

ligero  de  pies, 

.imitar  Qas  facultades)  d alguno, 
limitado  de  talentos, 
lindar  (una  posesion)  con  otra, 
Uevar  (algo)  d alguna  parte, 
llevarse  de  alguna  pasion, 
luchar  con  alguno, 
ludir  (una  cosa)  con  otra. 


Malquistarse  con  alguno, 
aianar  (agua)  de  una  fuente, 
znai.ee  de  una  mano, 
mancemunarse  con  otros, 

Diandar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
manifestar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
naantener  (conversacion)  d a guno, 
inantenerse  de  yerbas, 
aaantenerse  en  paz. 


invaded  iy  the  enemies, 
to  winter  in  such  a place, 
to  invest  (stock)  into  another  use. 
to  ingraft  (one  tree)  on  another, 
to  go  (from  Madrid)  towards  Cad.ii 
to  go  against  anybody, 
to  go  in  the  w ay,  road, 
to  go  for  bread, 
to  go  after  one 

to  boast  of  any  thing, 
to  play  at  such  a game 
to  play  (one)  with  another 
to  move  (one  thing)  with  another, 
to  join  (one  thing)  to  anotlier. 
to  justify  one’s  self /rom  any  charge* 
to  judge  of  any  tiling. 

,o  incline  (a  thing)  on  such  a side 
to  be  inclining  to  another  party 
to  lament  the  misfortune, 
to  fling  (something)  at  any  one. 
tall  in  stature, 
liberal  with,  free  with. 
to  hurt  one’s  seif  against  a stone, 
to  take  pity  on  any  one. 
to  read  (the  thoughts)  of  any  one 
from  land. 

to  raise  (the  hands)  to  heaven 
to  raise  (any  thing)  from  the  groiiuj 
to  raise  (any  thing)  on  high, 
to  deliver  (any  one)  from  danger 
to  free  (any  one)  from  risk, 
to  contend  with  any  one. 
to  tie  (one  thing)  with  another, 
lightfooted. 

to  limit  any  one’s  powders, 
of  slender  talents. 

to  be  adjoining  (a  possession)  to  anorh« 
to  carry  (something)  to  any  place, 
to  be  carried  away  by  some  passion, 
to  WTestle  with  any  one. 
to  rub  (one  thing)  against  another. 


to  make  one’s  self  hated  by  any  one. 
to  spring  (water)  from  a fountain, 
maimed  of  one  hand, 
to  unite  one’s  self  with  others  in  the  exs 
cution  of  any  thing, 
to  command  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 
to  manifest  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 
to  maintain  conversation  with  one. 

.0  live  upon  herbs, 
to  live  in  peace. 


504 


APPENDIX, 


maqumar  contra  alguno, 

maquinar  cn,  sohre  alguna  cosa, 

maravillarse  de  alguna  cosa, 

mas  de  cien  ducados, 

matarse  en  trabajar, 

malarse  por  conseguir  alguna  cosa, 

matizar  con,  de  colores, 

rnediano  de  cuerpo, 

medlar  con,  por  alguno, 

medlar  entre  los  contrarios, 

rn^dirse  con  sus  fuerzas, 

£ne<ljrse  en  las  palabras, 

aaedrar  en  la  hacienda, 

mejorar  de  empleo, 

mejdrar  {k  alguno)  en  tercio  y quinto, 

mcnor  de  edad, 
menos  de  cien  ducados, 
merecer  a,  rfc,  con  alguno, 
mesurarse  en  las  acciones, 
meter  (dinero)  en  el  cofre, 
meter  (a  alguno)  en  empeho, 

meter  (una  cosa)  entre  otras  cosas, 
meierse  d gobernar, 
meterse  d caballero, 

meterse  con  los  que  mandan, 
meterse  en  los  peligros, 
mezclar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 
mezclarse  en  negocios, 
mirar  (la  ciudad)  d oriente, 
imrar  por  alguno, 
mirarse  en  alguna  cosa, 
moderarse  en  las  palabras, 
mofarse  de  alguno, 
mojar  (alguna  cosa)  en  agua, 
molerse  d trabajar, 
molido  de  andar, 
molestar  (a  uno)  con  visitas, 
molesto  d todos, 
montar  d caballo, 
montar  en  mula, 
montar  en  colera, 
morar  en  poblado, 
morir  de  poca  edad, 
morir  de  enfermedad, 
morirse  de  frio, 

morirse  por  lograr  alguna  cosa, 
motejar  (a  alguno)  de  ignorante, 
motivar  (la  providencia)  con  razones, 
moverse  de  una  parte  a otra, 
muchos  de  los  presentes, 
mudar  (alguna  cosa)  d otra  parte, 
mudar  de  intentp, 
inudarse  de  casa, 
murmur^Lr  de  alguno, 


to  plot  against  any  one 

to^ontrive  any  thing. 

to  wonder  at  any  tiling. 

more  than  a hundred  ducats 

to  kill  one’s  self  with  labor. 

to  strive  to  obtain  any  thing 

to  shade  with  colors. 

of  a middling  stature 

to  intercede  for  any  one. 

to  mediate  between  enemies. 

to  act  according  to  one’s  abilities 

to  weigh  one’s  words. 

to  thrive  m riches. 

to  better  one’s  employment. 

to  meliorate  (any  one’s  fortune)  in  c. 

third  and  fifth  part, 
under  age,  minor, 
less  than  a thousand  ducats, 
to  merit  from  any  one. 
to  be  cautious  in  one’s  actions, 
to  put  (money)  into  the  chest, 
to  put  (one)  under  the  necessity  of  doinj 
a thing. 

to  put  (one  thing)  among  others, 
to  set  one’s  self  to  govern, 
to  aifect  the  character  and  dignity  of  c 
knight,  a gentleman, 
to  meddle  with  those  who  command 
to  expose  one’s  sell  to  dangers 
to  mix  (one  thing)  with  another 
to  meddle  in  business 
to  face  (the  city)  the  east, 
to  look  for  any  one’s  interest 
to  regard  one’s  seif  m any  thing 
to  be  moderate  in  worls 
to  make  game  of  any  one 
to  wet  (something)  in  water, 
to  fatigue  one’s  self  with  working, 
fatigued  with  walking, 
to  trouble  (any  one;  with  visits 
troublesome  to  all. 
to  mount  on  horseback, 
to  mount  a mule, 
to  get  into  a passion, 
to  dwell  in  a settled  place, 
to  die  at  an  early  age. 
to  die  of  a sickness, 
to  be  dying  with  cold, 
to  long  for  obtaining  any  end. 
to  stigmatize  any  one  as  ignorant, 
to  persuade  (a  measure)  by  reasons, 
to  move  from  one  side  to  another 
many  of  those  present, 
to  remove  (any  thing)  to  another  plac':. 
to  change  one’s  intention 
to  remove  from  a house, 
to  murmur  against  any  one. 


APPENDIX. 


50f) 


N. 

Nacer  con  forluna 

aacer  (alguna  cosa)  de  alguiia  parte, 
aacer  en  .as  laulvas, 
nacer  para  irabajos, 
nadar  en  el  riJ, 
na^e-gar  a indias, 
negarse  d la  coinunicacion, 
aiaiio  en  su  proceder, 
ainguno  de  los  presentes, 
aivelarse  a lo  justo, 
noiriorar  (a  alguno)  para  el  emple  >, 

notar  (h  alg'iiio)  de  hablador, 

Qotificai  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 

Obligar  (a  alguno)  d alguna  cosa, 
obstar  (una  cosa)  a otra, 
obstlnarse  en  alguna  cosa, 
obtener  (alguna  gracia)  de  alguno, 
ocultar  (alguna  cosa)  d,  de  alguno, 
ocuparse  en  trabajar, 
ofenderse  con,  de  alguna  cosa, 
ofrecer  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
olrecerse  d los  peligros, 
oler  (una  cosa)  d otra, 
olvidarse  de  lo  pasado, 
opinar  cn,  sabre  alguna  cosa, 
opriinir  4 alguno  con  el  poder, 
optar  d los  einpleos, 
ordenarse  de  sacerdote, 
orillar  d alguna  parte. 


Pactar  (alguna  cosa)  con  otro 
pagar  con  palabras, 
pagar  en  dinero, 
pagarse  de  buenas  razones, 
paladearse  con  alguna  cosa, 
pa'iar  (alguna  cosa)  con  otra, 
paudo  de  sernDlante, 
palmear  d alguno, 
parar  d la  puerta, 
parar  en  casa, 
pararse  d descansar, 
pararse  con  alguno, 
j ararse  en  alguna  cosa, 
parco  en  la  comida, 
parec  er  en  alguna  parte, 
parccerse  d otro, 
parti<5ipar  (algo)  d alguno 
wrticipar  de  alguna  cosa, 
parti«uiarizarse  con  alguno, 
pnrticularizarsc  en  alguna  cosa, 
lArta  d Italia, 


to  be  bom  to  a fortune, 
to  spring  (any  thing)  from  any  i nn. 
to  be  born  of  low  parents, 
to  be  born  to  labor,  trouble 
to  swim  in  the  river, 
to  sail  to  tne  inuies. 
to  deny  one’s  self  to  company 
over-nice  in  one’s  conduct, 
none  of  the  present, 
to  level  one’s  self  to  justice, 
to  appoint  (any  one)  to  the  employment, 
office. 

to  censure  (any  one)  as  a talker, 
to  notify  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 

O. 

to  oblige  (any  one)  to  any  hing. 

to  hinder  (one  thing)  another. 

to  be  obstinate  in  any  thing. 

to  obtain  (a  favor)  from  any  one. 

to  conceal  (any  thing)  from  any  one. 

lo  be  occupied  with  work. 

to  be  offended  at  any  thing. 

to  offer  any  thing  to  any  one. 

to  offer  one’s  self  to  dangers. 

to  have  the  smell  (one  thing)  of  anolh€* 

to  forget  the  past. 

to  hold  an  opinion  on  any  thing 

to  oppress  (another)  by  power. 

to  be  a candidate  for  offices. 

to  be  ordained  as  a priest. 

to  draw  near  any  side. 


to  contract  (something)  with  anotnei 
to  pay  with  words, 
to  pay  in  cash. 

to  be  satisfied  with  good  reasons, 
to  please  one’s  palate  with  any  thing 
to  palliate  one  thing  with  another 
pale-faced. 

to  cheer  any  one  with  the  hands. 

to  stop  at  the  door.^ 

to  stay  at  home. 

tc  stop  to  rest  one’s  self. 

to  stop  with  any  one 

to  stop  at  any  thing 

sparing  in  eating. 

to  appear  anvwliere. 

lo  resemble  another. 

♦o  communicate  (any  thing)  to  anv 
♦^o  partake  of  any  thing, 
to  be  singular  with  any  ono. 
to  signalize  one’s  self  tjs  any 
to  set  off  to  Italy. 


22 


506 


ArPENDIX. 


partir  (algo)  con  otio, 
partir  en  pedazos, 
partir  entre  amigos, 
partir  por  rnitad, 
partir  vor  entero, 
partirse  dc  Espana, 
pasar  d Madrid, 
pasar  de  Sevilla, 
pasar  entre  montes, 
pasar  por  el  camiro, 
pasar  por  entre  arboles 
pasar  por  cobarde, 

pasarse  (alguna  cosa)  de  la  meni<^  vj  i, 

pasarse  (la  fruta)  de  madura, 

pasarse  (algimo)  de  letras, 

pasearse  con  otro, 

pasearse  por  el  campo 

pecar  contra  la  ley, 

pecar  de  ignorante, 

pecar  en  alguna  cosa, 

pecar  por  demasia, 

pedir  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 

pedir  con  justieia, 

pedir  contra  alguno, 

pedir  de  justicia, 

pedir  en  justicia, 

pedir  por  Dios, 

pedir  por  alguno, 

pegar  (uiia  cosa)  i otra, 

pegar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 

pegar  contra,  en  la  pared, 

pelarse  por  alguna  cosa, 

peligrar  en  alguna  cosa, 

pelotearse  con  alguno, 

penar  en  la  otra  vula, 

penar  por  alguna  persona  6 cosa 

pender  de  alguna  cosa, 

penetrar  hasta  las  entranas, 

penetrado  de  dolor, 

pensar  en,  sobre  alguna  cosa 

perder  (algo)  de  vista. 

pemerse  (alguno)  de  vista 

perierse  en  el  caniino, 

pel  ecer  de  hambre, 

perecerse  de  risa, 

nerecerse  por  alguna  cosa, 

peregrmar  por  el  rnundo, 

perlurnar  con  incienso, 

pcrmanecer  en  alguna  parte, 

permitir  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 

p«rmutar  (una  cosa)  con,  por  otra. 

perseguido  de  enemigos, 

nerseverar  en  algun  intento, 

peiauaair  (alguna  3osa)  d alguno, 

persuadirse  d alguna  cosa, 

oersuadirse  de,  por  las  razones  ie  otro, 

jertenccer  (una  cosa’ d alguno 


to  share  (an>  thing)  with  anolb^ 

to  break  into  pieces. 

to  share  between  friends. 

to  divide  in  halves 

to  divide  by  tens. 

to  set  off  from  Spain. 

to  go  to  Madrid 

to  go  beyond  Seville. 

to  pass  between  mountain?. 

to  pass  by  the  road. 

to  pass  between  trees. 

to  pass  for  a coward. 

to  slip  the  memory  (any  thing.) 

to  begin  (the  fruit)  to  decay. 

to  become  (some  one)  a scholar 

to  take  a walk  with  another 

to  walk  in  the  country. 

to  transgress  the  law. 

to  sin  through  ignorance. 

to  be  faulty  in  any  thing. 

to  sin  through  excess. 

to  ask  (any  thing)  of  any  one 

to  ask  with  justice. 

to  bring  an  action  against  any  ont. 

to  claim  in  law. 

to  sue  at  law. 

to  beg /or  God. 

to  ask  for  any  one. 

to  apply  (one  thing)  to  another. 

to  join  (one  thing)  with  another 

to  fasten  against  the  wall. 

to  be  anxious  for  any  thing. 

to  be  in  danger  in  any  thing. 

to  scuffle  with  any  one. 

to  suffer  in  the  other  life. 

to  suffer  for  any  person  or  thing 

to  depend  upon  any  thing. 

to  penetrate  to  the  entrails 

penetrated  with  grief. 

to  think  of,  upon  any  thing 

to  lose  sight  of  any  thing. 

to  excel  tn  an  eminent  degree 

to  lose  one’s  way. 

to  perish  with  hunger 

to  die  with  laughing. 

me  jor  any  thing, 
to  wander  through  the  world 
to  perfume  with  incense, 
to  remain  in  any  place, 
to  permit  (any  thing)  to  any  f*ne 
to  exchange  (one  thing)  for  anoiue? 
pursued  by  enemies, 
to  persevere  in  any  design 
to  persuade  any  one  of  (anj  thing  ' 
to  be  persuaded  0/ any  thing, 
to  be  persuaded  by  another’s  reaso?v' 
to  belong  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 


APPENDIX. 


507 


p«frti  echarse  de  lo  necesa  no, 

oesarle  (a  algiino)  de  lo  que  ha  hecho 

pesado  en  la  oonversacion, 

pescar  con  red, 

piar  por  alguna  cosa, 

picaF  de,  en  todo, 

picarse  de  alguna  cosa, 

pintiparado  a alguno, 

plagarse  de  graPxOS, 

plantar  (h  alguno)  en  alguna  parte, 

plantarse  en  Cadiz, 

poblar  de  arboles, 

pobiar  en  buen  parage, 

poblarse  de  gente, 

ponderar  (una  cosa)  de  grande, 

poner  (a  uno)  d oficio, 

poner  (alguna  cosa)  cn  alguna  parte, 

poner  (a  alguno)  por  corregidor, 

ponerse  d escribir. 

porfiar  con  alguno, 

portarse  con  decencia, 

posar  en  alguna  parte, 

poscido  de  teinor, 

postrado  de  la  enfermcdad, 

postrarse  d los  pies  de  alguno, 

postrarse  en  cama, 

postrarse  en  tierra, 

precedido  de  otro, 

preciarse  de  valiente, 

precipitarse  rfe,  por  alguna  parte, 

preferido  d otro, 

preferido  de  alguno, 

preguntar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno 

prendarse  de  alguno, 

prender  (las  plantas)  en  la  tierra, 

preocuparse  de  alguna  cosa, 

prepararse  d,  para  alguna  cosa, 

preponderar  (una  cosa)  d otra, 

prescmdir  de  alguna  cosa, 

presentar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 

presentar  (a  uno)  p%ra  una  prebf  ad? 

preservar  (a  algun:)  de  daho, 

presidir  d otros, 

presidir  en  un  tribunal, 

presidido  de  otro, 

prestar  (dinero)  d alguno, 

prestar  (la  dieta)  para  la  salud, 

prestar  sobre  prenda, 

prcsumir  de  docto, 

prevalecer  (la  verdacf  obre  la  mentira, 
prevenir  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
Drevenirse  de  lo  necesaric, 
prevenirse  para  un  viage, 
primero  de,  entre  todos, 

I rirgarse  en  alguna  cosa, 
nrivar  (a  alguno)  de  lo  suyo, 
wsrar  con  alguno 


to  provide  one  s self  vcith  necessarle-s 

to  regTet  (any  one)  vvliat  he  has  don^ 

dull  in  conversation. 

to  fish  with  a net. 

to  long  for  any  thing. 

to  excel  in  every  thing. 

to  pique  one’s  self  upon  any  tkrni; 

like  to  any  one  exactly. 

to  be  plagued  with  pimples. 

to  set  (any  one)  in  ai.y  place 

to  be  settled  in  Cadiz. 

to  fill  with  t ees. 

to  settle  in  a good  situation. 

to  be  peopled  with  persons. 

to  exaggerate  (any  thing)  as  great. 

to  put  (any  one)  in  business. 

to  put  (any  thing)  somewhere. 

to  appoint  (any  one)  as  corregidoi 

to  set  one’s  self  to  writing. 

to  be  positive  with  any  one. 

to  conduct  one’s  self  with  decency 

to  lodge  in  any  place. 

possessed  by  fear. 

prostrated  by  sickness. 

to  prostrate  one’s  self  at  anothe; 

to  be  confined  to  one’s  bed. 

to  kneel  down  on  the  ground. 

preceded  by  another. 

to  pique  one’s  self  upon  courage. 

to  be  precipitated  from  any  pUce 

preferred  to  another 

preferred  by  any  one. 

to  ask  any  one  (any  thing.) 

to  be  taken  with  any  one. 

to  take  root  (plants)  in  the  earth. 

to  be  prepossessed  with  any  thing. 

to  prepare  one’s  self  for  any  thing. 

to  preponderate  (one  thing)  over 

to  lay  aside  any  thing. 

lo  present  (any  thing)  to  a^y  one. 

*o  present  any  one  for  a prebend, 
to  preserve  (any  one)  from  injury, 
to  preside  over  others, 
to  preside  in  a tribunal, 
presided  by  another, 
to  lend  (money)  to  any  one. 
to  contribute  (the  diet)  to  health, 
to  lend  on  security, 
to  set  up  for  a man  of  learning, 
to  prevail  (truth)  over  falsehood, 
to  advise  another  of  (any  thing.) 
to  provide  one’s  self  with  necesssnes 
to  prepare  one’s  self  for  a journey 
first  amonp'  all. 
to  intermeddle  in  any  thing, 
to  deprve  (any  one)  of  his  ov  n. 
t be  intimate  with  any  one. 


608 


APPENDIJt 


probar  d saltar, 
probar  de  todo, 
proceder  d la  eleccion, 
proceder  con,  sin  acuerdo, 

proceder  contra  alguno, 
proceder  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 
procesar  (a  uno)  par  delitos, 
procurar  por  alguno, 
proejar  contra  las  olas, 
profesar  en  religion, 
prometer  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
pioinover  {k  alguno)  a algun  cargo, 
propasarse  d,  en  alguna  cosa, 
proponer  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
proponer  (a  alguno)  en  primer  lugar, 
pi  oporcionar  (d  alguno)  para  alguna  cosa, 
proporcionarse  d las  fuerzas, 
proporcionarse  para  alguna  cosa, 
prolongar  (el  plazo)  d alguno, 
prorurnpir  en  lagrimas, 
proveer  (la  plaza)  de  viveres 
proveer  (el  empleo)  en  alguno 
provenir  de  otra  cosa, 
provocar  d ira, 

provocar  (a  alguno)  con  malas  p "tlabras 

proximo  a morir, 
pujar  pur  alguna  cosa, 
purgarse  de  sospecha, 


Cuadrar  con  el  encargo, 
cuadrar  (alguna  c -sa)  d alguno, 
cual  de  los  dos, 

•^uebrantar  (los  hiiesos)  d alguno, 

quebrar  (el  corazon)  d alguno, 

quedar  de  asiento, 

quedar  de  pi»is, 

quedar  en  casa, 

quedar  (camino)  por  andar 

queda  por  alguno, 

quedar  por  cobarde, 

quedar  (una  cosa)  por  mia, 

quedarse  en  el  sermon, 

quejarse  d alguno, 

quejarse  de  alguno, 

querellarse  d,  ante  el  juez, 

quercliarse  de  su  vecino, 

^uemar  con  malas  razones, 
luemarse  de  alguna  palabra, 
quemarse  por  alguna  cosa, 
laendo  de  sus  amigos, 
iuien  de  ellos, 

iuitar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno 
luitar  (alguna  cosa)  de  aigui.*.  parte 
iuitar se  de  quimeras. 


to  try  to  jump, 
to  taste  of  every  thing, 
to  proceed  to  the  election, 
to  proceed  with  or  without  circumspcs 
tion. 

to  proceed  against  any  one. 

..o  proceed  (one  thing)  /rom  another 
to  proceed  against  a man  for  crimes 
to  procure  for  any  one. 
to  row  against  the  waves, 
to  profess  m religion 
to  promise  (any  thing)  to  any  one 
to  promote  (any  one)  to  any  office, 
to  overshoot  one’s  mark  xn  any  thing, 
to  propose  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 
to  propose  (any  one)  in  the  first  place 
to  fit  (any  one)  for  any  thing, 
to  proportion  one’s  self  to  one’s  strength 
to  fit  one’s  self  for  any  thing, 
to  prolong  (the  credit)  to  any  one. 
to  burst  into  tears. 

to  furnish  (the  fortress)  with  provisions 
to  provide  any  one  with  (an  employment 
to  proceed  from  something  else 
to  provoke  to  anger, 
to  provoke  (any  one)  hy  scurrilous  Ian 
guage. 

at  the  point  of  death. 

to  strive  for  any  thing. 

to  clear  one’s  seif  from  suspicion 


to  fit /or  the  employment. 

to  fit  (any  thing)  any  one 

which  of  the  two. 

to  break  any  one’s  bones. 

to  break  any  one’s  heart. 

to  remain  or  reside  in  a place. 

to  remain  standing. 

to  tarry  at  home. 

to  have  to  proceed  farther. 

to  be  bail  for  any  one. 

to  be  reputed  a coward. 

to  fall  (any  thing)  to  my  share. 

to  stop  short  in  a discourse. 

to  complain  to  any  one 

to  complain  of  any  one. 

to  lay  one’s  complaint  before  llie  judge 

to  complain  of  one’s  neighbor. 

tc  inflame  one  with  invective. 

to  be  offended  with  any  word. 

to  heat  one’s  self  for  any  thing. 

beloved  by  one’s  friends. 

which  of  them. 

to  take  (any  thing)  from  any  one. 
to  take  (any  thing)  from  any  place 
to  free  one’s  self  fiom  whims 


APPENDIX. 


509 


R. 

Rabiar  dt  hambre, 

'abiar  j>or  comer, 

radical 86  en  la  virtud, 

raer  de  alguna  cosa, 

rallar  (las  tripas)  d cualquiera, 

rayar  con  la  virtud, 

razonar  con  alguno, 

rebalsarse  (el  agua)  en  alguna  parte, 

rebatir  (una  cantidad)  de  otra, 

lebajar  (una  cantidad)  de  otra, 

recaer  en  la  enfermedad, 

recalcarse  en  lo  dicho, 

recatarse  de  alguno, 

recavar  (alguna  cosa)  de,  con  alguno 

recetar  (medicmas)  a,  para  alguno, 

recetar  contra  alguno, 

recibir  (alguna  cosa)  de  alguno, 

recinir  d cuenta, 

recibir  (4  alguno)  en  casa, 

recibirse  de  abogado, 

recio  de  cuerpo, 

reclinarse  en,  sobre  alguna  cosa, 
recluir  (A  alguno)  en  alguna  parte, 
recobrarse  de  la  enfermedad, 
recogerse  d.  casa, 

recoinendar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
recoiiipensar  (agravios)  con  beneficios, 
reconcentrarse  (el  odio)  en  el  corazon, 
reconciliar  (^  uno)  con  otro, 
recoil venir  (a  alguno)  con,  de,  sohre  alguna 
cosa, 

recostarse  en,  sobre  la  silla, 
rccudir  (^i  alguno)  con  el  sueldo, 
redondearse  de  deudas, 
reducir  (alguna  cosa)  d la  mitad, 
redundar  en  beneficio, 
referirse  a alguna  cosa, 
refocilarse  con  alguna  cosa, 
refiigiarse  d,  en  sagrado, 
reerlarse  d lo  justo, 
legodearse  en.  con  alguna  coii, 
reirse  a carcajadas, 
reirse  de  alguno, 
reinirarse  en  alguna  cosa 
reemplazar  (a  alguno'  n su  empleo, 

rendirse  d la  razon, 
renegar  de  alguna  cosa, 
repartir  (alguna  cosa)  d,  entre  algunos, 
representarse  (alguna  cos')  d la  iinag 
nacion, 

resbalarse  de  las  manos, 
resentirse  de  alguna  cosa, 
residir  de  asiento  en  alguna  parte 
ro«idir  en  la  corte, 
nspiolTcrea  d alguna  cosa. 


to  be  very  hui.gry. 

to  long  to  eat. 

to  be  fixed  in  virtue. 

to  scrape  from  any  thir  g. 

to  importune  (the  intestines)  u y oiio 

to  excel  in  virtue. 

to  converse  with  any  one. 

water  to  stagnate  in  any  place 

to  deiiuct  (a  sum>  from  anoth#»r. 

to  abate  (one  sum)  from  anotner 

to  relapse  into  sickness. 

to  be  firm  in  what  has  been  said 

to  be  cautious  of  any  one. 

to  obtain  (any  thii.g)  from  any  one. 

to  prescribe  (medicines)  for  any  one 

to  make  a charge  against  any  one 

to  receive  (any  thing,  from  any  one 

to  receive  on  account. 

to  receive  (any  one)  at  home 

to  be  admitted  as  a counsellor. 

of  a strong  constitution. 

to  lean  upon  any  thing. 

to  shut  (any  one)  up  in  any  place. 

to  recover  one’s  sell  from  sickness. 

to  retire  home. 

to  recommend  (any  tiling)  to  any  one. 
to  recompense  wrongs  u>ilA  benefits, 
to  concentrate  (hatred)  in  the  heart, 
to  reconcile  (one)  with  another, 
to  charge  (any  one)  with  any  thing 

to  recline  on  a seat, 
to  pay  (any  one)  his  wages, 
to  pay  otf  one’s  debts, 
to  reduce  (any  thing)  to  the  half, 
to  conduce  to  the  benefit, 
to  refer  one’s  self  to  any  thing, 
to  be  refreshed  with  any  thing 
to  take  refuge  m some  sacred  place, 
to  conform  to  what  is  right, 
to  delight  one’s  self  in  any  thing, 
to  laugh  heartily, 
to  make  a jest  of  any  one. 
to  examine  one’s  self  in  any  thing, 
to  take  the  place  (of  any  one)  in  his  em 
ployment,  office, 
to  yield  to  reason, 
to  apostatize  from  any  thing, 
to  share  (any  thing)  among  several, 
to  represent  any  thing  to  one’s 
tion. 

to  slip  away  from  the  hands 
to  resent  any  thing, 
to  be  settled  in  any  place, 
to  reside  at  court, 
to  resolve  upon  any  thing. 


510 


APPENDIX. 


responder  4 la  prtgunta, 
restar  (una  cantidad)  de  otra, 

••estituirse  d su  casa, 

resuitar  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 

retirarse  d la  soledad, 

retirarse  del  inundo, 

retraerse  d alguna  parte, 

retraerse  de  alguna  cosa, 

retroceder  A,  hacxa  tal  parte, 

reventar  de  risa, 

reventar  -por  hablar, 

revestirse  de  auloridad, 

revolcarse  en  los  vicios, 

revolver  contra,  hdcia,  sobre  el  enemigo, 

robar  (dinero)  d alguno, 

rodar  (el  carro)  por  tierra, 

rodear  (i  alguno)  por  todas  partes, 

rodear  (una  plaza)  con,  de  inurailas, 

rogar  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 

romper  con  alguno, 

romper  po^  alguna  parte, 

rozarse  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 

rozarse  en  las  palabras. 

Saber  d vino, 
saber  de  trabojos, 
sacar  (una  c*»sa)  d la  plaza, 
sacar  de  alguna  parte, 
sacar  en  limpio, 

sacnfic.ar  (alguna  cosa)  d Dios, 

sacrificarse  por  alguno, 

salir  a alguna  cosa, 

salir  con  la  pretension, 

salir  contra  alguno, 

salir  de  alguna  parte, 

salir  por  fiador, 

saltar  (una  cosa)  d la  imaginacion, 

sallar  de  el  suelo, 

saltar  de  gozo, 

saltar  en  tierra, 

salvar  (ii  alguno)  dcZ  peligro, 

sanar  de  la  enferrnedad, 

satisfacer  par  las  cul))as, 

satisfacerse  de  la  duda, 

segregar  (it  alguno)  de  alguna  parte, 

segregar  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 

'cguirse  (una  cosa)  de  otra, 
semejar,  6 senaejarse  (una  cosa)  d otra 

pentarse  en  la  mesa, 
sentarse  d la  silla, 
sentenciar  (ti  uno)  d destierro, 
sentirse  de  algo, 
sepal  ar  vuna  cosa)  de  otra, 
ser  (una  cosa)  d gusto  ae  todos, 
ser  (una  cosa)  de,  para  algunos 
^rvir  de  mayoruomo. 


to  answer  the  question, 
to  remain  (one  sum)  from  another 
to  return  to  one’s  house, 
to  result  (one  thing)  from  anothe 
to  retire  into  solitude, 
to  retire /rom  the  world. 

U)  take  refuge  anywhere. 

to  escape  from  any  thing. 

to  recede  towards  such  a place 

to  burst  with  laughter. 

to  burst  with  a desire  of  speaking 

to  be  invested  with  authority 

to  wallow  it  vice. 

to  return  to  tne  enemy. 

to  rob  any  one  of  (money.) 

to  overset  ^a  cart.) 

to  encompass  (any  one)  on  r.ll  sidei 

1,0  surround  (a  place)  with  walls 

to  beg  (any  thing)  of  any  one. 

to  break  olf  with  any  one. 

to  break  in  any  place. 

to  rub  (one  thing)  against  anothei 

to  stammer  in  one’s  speech. 

to  taste  like  wine, 
to  be  acquainted  with  trouble, 
to  take  (any  thing)  to  the  market, 
to  take  any  thing  from  any  place, 
to  clear  up  all  doubts,  to  copy  fair, 
to  sacrifice  (any  thing)  to  God. 
to  sacrifice  one’s  self  for  any  one 
to  co-operate  xn  any  thing, 
to  obtain  one’s  aim. 
to  go  out  against  any  one. 
to  go  out  from  any  place, 
to  appear  as  security, 
strike  (any  thing)  the  imagination 
to  leap  from  the  ground, 
to  leap  with  joy. 
to  leap  on  the  ground,  on  shore, 
to  save  (any  one)  from  danger, 
to  recover  from  sickness, 
to  atone  for  one’s  faults, 
to  oe  satisfied  for  the  doubt, 
to  separate  (any  one)  from  any  place 
to  separate  (one  thing)  from  anothei 
t^  follow  (one  thing)  from  another, 
to  liken  (one  thing)  to  another,  to 
sernble. 

to  sit  down  to  table, 
to  sit  down  in  the  chair, 
to  condemn  (one)  to  exile, 
to  be  sensible  of  any  thing 
to  separate  (one  thing)  from  anothei 
to  be  (any  thing)  to  the  taste  of  all 
to  be  (any  thing)  to  or  for. some  one 
to  serve  as  a steward. 


APPENDIX. 


511 


lervlr  en  palacio, 
servirse  de  alguno, 
sinoerarse  de  alguna  cosa, 
sisar  de  la  compra, 

Bitiado  de  enemigos, 
sitiar  por  hambre, 
situarse  en  alguna  parte, 

Bobrellevar  (los  trabajos)  cun  paciencia, 

Bobrellevar  (4  alguno)  en  sus  trabajos, 

sobrepujar  alguno)  en  autoridad, 
sobresalir  en  galas, 
sobresalir  entre  todos, 
sobresaltarse  de  alguna  cosa 
sojuzgado  de  enemigos, 
someterse  d alguno, 
sonar  (alguna  cosa)  d hueca, 
sonar  (alguna  cosa)  hdcia  tal  parte, 
sordo  d las  voces, 
sordo  de  un  oido, 

sorprender  (i  alguno)  en  alguna  cosa, 

sorprenderle  en  alguna  cosa, 

sorprendido  de  la  bulla, 

sospechar  (alguna  cosa)  de  alguno, 

sospechoso  d alguno, 

subdividir  en  partes, 

subir  d alguna  parte, 

subir  de  alguna  parte, 

subir  sobre  la  mesa, 

subrogar  (una  cosa)  en  lugar  de  Gtra, 

subsistir  del  auxilio  ageno, 
subsistir  en  el  dict^men, 
sustiluir  a,  por  alguno, 
bustituir  (un  poder)  en  alguno, 
sustraerse  de  la  obediencia, 

Buceder  (a  alguno)  en  el  empleo, 

sulrir  (los  trabajos;  con  paciencia, 
sugerir  (alguna  cosa)  d alguno, 
sujetarse  d a guno,  6 alguna  cosa, 

sumergir  (alguna  cosa)  en  el  agua 
sumirse  en  alguna  parte, 
sumiso  d la  voluntad, 
supeditado  de  los  contraries, 
fui  erior  d sus  enemigos, 
superior  en  luces, 

Buplicar  de  la  sentencia, 
suplicar  por  alguno, 

Buplir  por  alguno, 
surgir  (la  nave)  en  el  puertf 
Burtir  de  viveres, 

Buspenso  de  oficio, 

(aopimr  por  cl  mando, 


to  be  a servant  xn  a palace, 
to  make  use  of  any  one. 
to  clear  one’s  self  from  sometliing. 
to  curtail  from  the  purchase, 
besieged  by  enemies, 
to  lay  siege  by  means  of  hunger, 
to  station  one’s  self  in  any  place, 
to  undergo  (labors  or  troubles)  with  , » 
tience. 

to  assist  (any  one)  in  his  labcrs  ^ 
troubles. 

to  exceed  (any  one)  in  authority. 

to  surpass  in  dress. 

to  excel  among  all. 

to  be  started  at  any  thing 

subdued  by  enemies. 

to  submit  to  any  one. 

to  sound  (any  thing)  hollow. 

to  sound  (any  thing)  towards  such  a si  le 

deaf  to  the  cries. 

deaf  xoith  one  ear. 

to  surprise  (any  one)  with  any  thing, 
to  surprise  him  in  any  thing, 
surprised  by  the  noise, 
to  suspect  any  one  of  (any  thing.) 
suspected  by  any  one. 
to  subdivide  into  parts, 
to  go  up  to  any  place, 
to  go  up  from  any  place, 
to  get  upon  the  table, 
to  substitute  (one  thing)  instead  of  an 
other. 

to  subsist  by  others’  aid, 
to  continue  in  an  opinion, 
to  substitute  for  any  one. 
to  substitute  (a  power)  to  any  one, 
to  withdraw  one’s  self  from  subordina 
tion. 

to  succeed  (any  one)  in  an  employment 
office. 

to  suffer  (troubles)  with  patience, 
to  suggest  (any  thing)  to  any  one. 
to  subject  one’s  self  to  any  one,  or  an^ 
thing 

to  plunge  (any  thing)  in  the  water, 
to  sink  in  any  place, 
submissive  to  the  will, 
subdued  by  the  enemies, 
superior  to  one’s  enemies 
superior  in  talents, 
to  petition  against  the  sentence, 
to  entreat /or  any  one. 
to  supply  for  any  one. 
to  ride  (the  vessel)  at  anchor  in  the  port 
to  supply  with  victuals, 
suspended  in  the  exercise  of  one’s  eoi 
ployment,  office, 
to  aspire  after  command. 


512 


APPENDIX, 


lu  Stent  arse  ton  yerbas, 

Bustentarse  de  esperanzas, 

Tachar  {k  alguno)  de  ligero, 
tembiar  de  frio, 
tenudo  de  niuchos, 
teiiieroso  de  Ja  nmerte, 
leinible  ti.  los  coiitrarios, 
remplarse  en  comer, 
tener  (k  uno)  por  otro, 

;^enerse  en  pi6, 

tenir  de  azul, 

tirar  A,  hdcia  tal  parte, 

tirar  por  tal  parte 

tiritar  de  frio, 

titubear  en  alguna  cosa, 

tocar  (la  herencia)  d algimo, 

tocar  en  alguna  parte, 

tocado  de  enfermedad, 

tomar  con,  en  las  manos, 

lomar  (una  cosa)  de  tal  modo, 

tomar  (una  cosa)  a uno, 

torcido  de  cuerpo, 

tornar  d alguna  parte, 

tornar  de  alguna  parte, 

♦rabajar  en  alguna  cosa, 

trabajar  por  alguna  cosa, 

trabajar  por  otro, 

trabar  de  alguno, 

trabar  (una  cosa)  con  otra, 

trabar  en  alguna  cosa, 

trabarse  de  palabras, 

trabucarse  en  las  palabras, 

traer  (alguna  cosa)  d alguna  parte 

traer  (alguna  cosa)  de  alguna  parte, 

traficar  en  drogas, 

transferir  (alguna  cosa)  d otro  tiempo, 
transferirse  d tal  parte, 
transrigurarse  en  otra  cosa, 
transforinar  (una  cosa)  en  otra, 
traiisitar  por  alguna  parte, 
transpirar  por  todas  partes, 
transportar  (algimacosa)  d alguna  parte, 
transportar  (alguna  cosa)  de  alffi.na  parte 
traspasar  (algur'i  cosa)  d alguiiO, 
iraspasado  de  dolor, 
trasplanlar  (de  una  parte)  d otra 
con  alguno, 
tratar  de  alguna  cosa, 
tiatar  en  lanas, 
tra resear  con  alguno, 
tnunlar  de  los  enemigos, 
trocar  (una  cosa)  por  otra 
tropezar  en  alguna  cosa 

TTltimo  de  todos, 
uncu  (los  bueyesj  al  carre, 


to  feed  upon  he:  &o. 
to  sustain  one’s  self  teiik 

to  accuse  (any  one)  of  lerity. 

to  tremble  with  cold 

feared  bi/  many. 

fearful  of  death. 

dreadful  to  his  enem:'es 

‘o  be  ten.perate  in  eating. 

to  take  (<  me)  for  another 

to  keep  one’s  self  on  foot. 

to  dye  in  blue. 

to  draw  on  such  a side. 

to  diaw  towards  such  a side 

to  shiver  with  cold. 

to  waver  in  any  thing. 

to  fall  (the  u.heritance)  to  any  one 

to  touch  on  anyw  here. 

touched  with  disease. 

to  take  withf  or  tn  the  hands. 

to  take  (any  thing)  in  such  a mannsi 

to  take  (any  thing) /rom  any  one. 

deformed  in  body. 

to  turn  to  such  a side. 

to  turn  from  such  a side. 

to  work  tn  any  thing. 

to  contend  for  any  thing. 

to  work  for  another. 

to  seize  on  any  one. 

to  join  one  thing  with  another 

to  fall  on  any  thing. 

to  engage  in  words. 

to  mistake  one's  words. 

to  bring  (any  thing)  to  any  place. 

to  bring  any  thing  from  any  place 

to  deal  in  drugs. 

to  transfer  (any  thing)  to  another  time 

to  transport  one’s  self  to  such  a place. 

to  ti  ansform  one’s  self  into  another  thini( 

to  transform  (one  thing)  into  another. 

to  pass  by  any  place. 

to  transpire  on  all  sides. 

to  transjiort  (any  thing)  to  any  place. 

to  transport  (any  thing)  from  any  plac^ 

to  transfer  (something)  to  another. 

transfixed  with  grief. 

to  transplant  (from  one  place)  to  ancthei 

to  treat  with  any  one 

to  treat  of  any  thing. 

to  deal  tn  wool. 

to  banter  with  any  one. 

to  triumph  over  the  enemy. 

to  change  (one  thing)  for  anothe 

to  stumble  on  any  thing. 

the  last  cf  all. 

to  yoke  (the  oxen)  to  the  cor* 


APPENDIX. 


siiiforinar  (una  cosa)  con  otra^ 

»nir  (una  cosa)  A,  con  otra, 
unirse  en  comunidad, 
miirse  entre  si, 
uno  de,  entre  muchos, 
uLil  a la  p^lna, 
util  para  tal  cosa, 

Jtilizarse  en,  con  alguna  cosa^, 

Vacar  al  estudio, 

vaciarse  de  alguna  cosa, 

vaciarse  por  la  boca, 

vacilai  en  la  eleccion, 

vacilar  entre  la  esperanza  y el  temor, 

vacio  de  entendirniento, 

vagar  por  el  mundo, 

valerse  de  alguno,  de  alguna  cosa, 

vahiar  (una  cosa)  en  tal  precio, 

vanaglonarse  de  alguna  cosa, 

recino  al  trono, 

vecino  de  Antonio, 

velar  a los  muertos, 

velar  sohre  alguna  cosa, 

vericerse  a alguna  cosa, 

vencido  de  los  contrarios, 

renderse  a alguno, 

vengarse  de  otro, 

venir  n,  de,  por  alguna  parte, 

venir  con  algiino, 

verse  con  alguno, 

verse  en  allura, 

vestir  A la  moda, 

vestirse  de  pano, 

vigilar  sobre  sus  subditos, 

violentarse  A,  en  alguna  cosa, 

visible  a,  para  todos, 

vivir  A su  gusto, 

vivir  con  alguno, 

vivfr  de  liinosna, 

'/ivir  por  milagro, 

vivir  sobre  la  haz  de  la  tierra, 

volar  al  cielo, 

volar  por  el  aiie, 

volver  A,  de,  hdcia,  por  tal  parte 

volver  por  la  verdad 

volar  en  el  pleito, 

votar  por  alguno, 

Zabullirse  6 zambullirse  en  el  agus-^ 
lafarse  de  alguna  persona  6 cosa 
zambucarse  en  alguna  parte 
tarrpuzarse  en  agua, 
lapatparse  con  alguno, 
tcaor  'ar  en  la  tormenta, 


513 

to  make  (one  thing)  uniform  with  another 

to  unite  (one  thing)  with  another. 

to  unite  in  a communiiv. 

to  be  united  between  theictfc  ves. 

one  among  many. 

useful  to  the  country 

useful  for  such  a thing. 

to  draw  advantage  oj  any  thing. 

to  attend  to  study. 

to  be  emptied  of  any  thing 

to  be  open-mouthed. 

to  hesitate  in  one’s  choice. 

to  vacillate  between  hope  and  fea*- 

addle-headed. 

to  wander  through  the  world. 

to  avail  one’s  self  of  any  one  or  any  thing 

to  value  (any  thing)  at  such  a price. 

to  be  puffed  up  with  pride  for  any  thing 

near  the  throne 

near  Anthony. 

to  watch  the  dead. 

to  watch  over  any  thing. 

to  conquer  one’s  self  in  any  thing. 

conquered  by  the  enemy. 

to  sell  one’s  self  to  any  one. 

to  revenge  one’s  self  on  another. 

to  come  to,  from,  or  by  any  place. 

to  come  with  another. 

to  meet  any  one. 

to  find  one’s  self  in  such  a latitude,  oi 
high  station, 
to  dress  tn  the  fashion, 
to  be  dressed  tn  cloth, 
to  watch  over  one’s  subjects 
to  be  violent  tn  any  thing 
visible  to  all. 
to  live  to  one’s  taste 
to  live  with  any  one. 
to  live  by  alms, 
to  live  by  a miracle, 
to  live  without  care, 
to  fly  to  heaven, 
to  fly  tn  the  air. 

to  return  to,  from,  towards,  by  such  a plac?r 
to  defend  the  truth, 
to  vote  tn  the  trial. 
to  vote  for  any  one. 

o piunge  into  the  water, 
to  escape  any  one  or  any  thing 
to  hide  one’s  self  tn  any  place, 
to  dive  into  water, 
to  scuffle  with  any  one. 
to  sink  or  founder  tn  the  storm. 


614 


APPENDIX. 


THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

A verb  is  called  irregular  when,  in  some  of  its  persons,  it  either  takes 
letters  that  are  not  in  its  radicals,  or  suppresses  or  changes  them,  or  tlie 
termination  of  its  respective  conjugation  ; as  tener,  to  have  ; tengo,  I have  • 
tuve,  1 had  ; tendre,  I shall  have : instead  of  teno,  tent,  tencrL  Dar,  U 
give  ; doy,  I give  ; di,  I gave : instead  of  do,  de 


lERBS  THAT,  ON  ACCOUNT  OF  THEIR  PRONUNCIATION,  REaUIRE  A CHANGE  IN 
THEIR  RADICAL  LETTERS. 


I Verbs  ending  in  car  change  the  c into  au  | 


When  the  first  letter  of  the 
termination  is  e 


CER 
CIR 
GER  1 
GIR  1 
QUIR 
GUIR  2 

GAR 
ZAR 


drop 

add 

change 


c 

o 

o 

QU 

u 

u 


Ohs.  1 and  2.  Verbs  ending  in  ger  and  gir,  are  written  at  present  by 
Hiany  learned  persons  with  j instead  of  g,  in  all  the  tenses;  thus,  escojer, 
escoji,  6lc, 


Obs.  3.  Vel-bs  ending  in  uir  drop  the  u,  when  it  is  liquid,  in  the  Infinitive 
mood,  as  in  seguir;  but  they  retain  it  when  it  is  fully  sounded,  as  in  arguir> 

Ohs.  4.  In  the  following  examples,  explanatory  of  the  preceding  rules, 
only  the  first  person  of  an  irregular  tense  is  laid  down,  as  it  is  easy  to  form 
the  rest.  When  only  one  person  is  irregular,  it  is  followed  by  the  regular 
one,  after  which  the  rest  may  be  formed.  Examples : — 

Marcar,  marque,  marcaste,  &c.  Marque,  &c. — Vencer,  venzo,  vences, 
&c.  Venza,  &c. — Resarcir,  resarzo,  resarces,  &c.  Resarza,  &c. — 
Escoger,  escojo,  escoges,  &.c.  Escoja,  &c. — Elegir,  elijo,  eliges,  &c 
ELija,  &LC. — DELiNauiR,  delinco,  delinques,  &c.  DeLinca,  6lc. — Seguir, 
sigo,  sigues,  &c.  Siga,  &c. — Pagar,  pague,  pagaste,  &c.  Pague,  &lc 
• — Alcanzar,  alcance,  alcanzaste,  &c.  Alcance,  &c. 


Obs.  5.  The  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  ending  in  Uir  or  nir,  suppress 
the  i of  the  termination  when  it  is  immediately  followed  by  o or  c;  as,  en- 
^uliir,  to  swallow  ; engulleron,  they  swallowed ; renir,  to  fight. 

While  our  masters  are  fighting,  we  Mientras  nuestros  duenos  rineren 
must  fight  also.  nosotros  hemos  de  renir  tamhien 

D.  Quijots,  cap.  xiv.  pt  ii. 


APPENDIX. 


515 


V2RBB  T'lIAT  ARE  IRREGULAR  IN  TllElR  RADICAL  LETTERS. 

Tno  number  of  the  Irregular  Verbs  in  the  Spanish  language  is  upwards 
af  Jive  hundred  and  Jifty;  forty  of  which  confine  their  irregularities  tc 
diemsolves,  their  compounds,  and  a few  other  verbs;  the  rest  are  arranged 
Into  several  classes. 

Remark  — In  the  following  collection  of  verbs,  only  the  irregular  tenser 
and  persor>s  are  laid  down,  and  printed  in  italics : the  regular  ones  are  in 
Roman  characters.  The  tenses  and  persons  omitted  are  formed  in  the  reg- 
ular way. 


GENERAL  RULES. 

1.  Verbs  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations  that  have  a,  e,  or  u for  the 
last  of  their  radical  letters,  change  the  i,  by  which  the  termination  begins, 
into  Y,  when  said  i is  immediately  followed  by  E or  o ; as 


VERBS. 

Rad  letters 

Ctfer,  to  fall,  ca 

Leer,  to  read,  Ic 

Atnbuir,  to  attribute,  atrihu 


GERUND.  FRET.  INDEF.  N.  3. 
rermination  3 p.  sing,  terra.  3 p.  pi.  term. 

lENDO.  lO.  lERON. 

cayendo  cay  6 cayeron 

leyendo  ley 6 ley  iron 

atrihuyendo  atribuyo  atribuyeron 


Obs.  6.  The  same  change  of  i into  y takes  place  in  all  the  persons  of  the 
first,  N.  7,  and  third,  N.  9,  terminations  of  the  imperfect  tense  of  the  sub- 
jUJictive,  and  in  the  future  of  the  same  mood  ; thus,  Cayera,  cayese,  cayerc. 
—Leyera^  leyese,  leyere. — Atribuyera,  atribuyese,  atribuyere. 

Obs.  7.  In  the  verbs  in  uir  this  change  is  made  when  the  u is  sounded, 
as  in  atribuir  ; but  not  when  it  is  liquid,  as  in  seguir. 

2.  Verbs  ending  in  uir,  when  the  u is  sounded  as  in  contribuir,  (to  con- 
ribute,)  besides  changing  the  i into  y in  the  terminations  beginning  with  io, 
te,  as  explained  in  the  preceding  rule,  add  y immediately  after  the  u in  all 
the  terminations  beginning  with  o,  e,  or  a ; as. 


INSTRLTIR,  to  instruct. 

A verb  of  the  third  conjugatiou  5 
• ( Termination,  ir. 

Gerund,  Instruyendo. — Indicative  Present.  1 Instruyo,  2 instruyes, 
3 instiuye,  2 V.instruye.  1 Instruimos,  2 instruis,  3 instruyen,  2 VV.in- 
stray en — Preterit  Indefinite.  1 Instrui,  2 instruiste,  3 instruyo,  2 V 
nstruyo.  1 Instruimos,  2 instruisteis,  3 instruyeron,  2 VV.  instruyeron, 
— Imperative.  1 Instruya  yo,  2 instruye  tu,  3 instruya  el,  2 instruya  V. 
2 No  instruyas  tu,  1 Instruyamos  nosotros,  2 instruid  vosotros,  3 in- 
ttruyan  ellos,  2 instruyan  VV.,  2 No  instruyais. — Subjunctive  Present 
I Instruya,  &c.  IxMperfect.  1st  term.,  1 Instruyera,  &c.  2d  term.,  1 In 
strmria,  &lq  3d  tenn.,  1 Instruyese,  &c.  Future.  1 Instruyeie,  &c 


516 


APPENDIX. 


3.  Verbs  tiiding  in  acer,  ecer,  ocer,  ucir,  take  a z before  the  radicx 
Ct  when  the  first  letter  of  the  termination  is  o or  a j as, 


CONOCER,  to  know. 


A.  verb  of  the  second  conjugation. 


J Radical  letters,  conoc 
\ Termination,  er. 


Indicative  Present  1 Cono^rco,  2 conoces,  &-c.  Subjunctive  Present 
i Conozca,  2 conozcas,  &c.  Imperative.  1 Conozca  yo,  2 conoce  tii,  3 
conozca  6\,  2 conozca  V.,  2 No  conozcas  1 conozcamos^  2 conoced,  3 conoz- 
can,  2 conozcan  VV.,  2 No  conozcais. 

Except  Hacer,  Cocer,  Torcer,  and  a few  othei*s,  together  with  their  com- 
pounds. 


Ohs.  8.  Verbs  ending  in  acer,  &c.,  were  formerly  conjugated  by  changing 
the  radical  c into  g,  in  the  persons  in  which  it  was  preceded  by  the  z.  Old 
people  still  do  the  same  in  some  of  the  towns  of  Spain.  Example : Y se 
reduzga  d unidad,  instead  of  reduzca — And  it  may  be  reduced  to  unity — 
Fr.  Luis  de  Leon. 


ANALOGY  BETWEEN  SOME  OF  THE  TENSES. 

1.  When  the  first  and  second  person  singular  of  the  present  of  the  indica- 
tive mood  have  the  same  irregularity,  the  third  person  singular  and  plural 
of  it  are  likewise  irregular;  and  the  same  irregularity  takes  place  in  the 
three  persons  singular  and  third  plural  of  the  present  of  the  indicative  mood, 
and  of  the  imperative.  See  the  verbs  Pensar,  Entender,  ♦S'criiir.- -Except 
Haber,  Ser,  Estar,  Dar,  Saber,  Ir,  and  their  compounds. 

2.  When  only  the  first  person  of  the  indicative  mood  is  irregular,  the 
same  irregularity  is  to  be  observed  in  all  the  persons  of  the  subjunctive  and 
of  the  imperative  mood ; excepting  the  second  person  singular  and  plural  of 
the  latter,  and  also  the  six  verbs,  Haber,  Ser,  &c. 

3.  When  the  gerund  has  any  irregularity,  then  the  third  person  singu- 
lar and  the  third  person  plural  of  the  preterit  indefinite  (N.  3)  have  the 
game  irregularity  ; which  is  also  found  in  the  first  termination,  (N.  7,)  thiid 
termination,  (N.  8,)  and  in  the  future  of  the  same  mood.  If  these  verbs 
drop  the  i of  the  termination  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  preterit 
definite,  they  do  the  same  also  in  the  first  and  second  terminations  of  the 
imperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive,  and  in  the  future  of  the  same  mood 
See  the  verbs  Pedir,  Sentir,  &c. 

4 The  same  analogy  is  found  between  the  future  of  the  indicative  mood 
and  the  termination  ria  (N.  8)  of  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  mood. 
Ocnsult  verbs  Tener,  Poder,  &lc. 


THE  SEVEN  MOST  NUMEROUS  CLASSES  Or  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS 

I. 

ACRECENTAR,  to  increase,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  like  it,  take  as 
i before  the  last  e of  the  radical  letters,  in  the  hrst,  second,  and  third  pcreor. 


APPENDIX. 


517 


Mgular,  and  third  plural  of  the  present  of  the  indicative  mood,  present  sub 
unctive  mood,  and  in  the  imperative.  They  are  regularly  conjugated  in 
all  the  other  tenses  and  moods. 


ACRECENTAR,  to  increase. 
Radical  letters,  Acrecent  : termination,  a.r 


Indicative. 

Present. 

1 Acreciento  1 Acrecentamos 

2 Acrecientas  2 Acrocentais 

3 Acrecienta  3 Acrecientan 

2 V.  acrecienta  2 VV.  acrecientan 


Subjunctive. 

Present. 

1 Acrecienta  1 Acrecentemoe 

2 Acrecientes  2 Acrecenteis 

3 Acrecicnte  3 Acrecienten 

2 V.  acrecienta  2 VV.acreciantM^ 


Imperative. 


1 Acrecienta  yo 

2 Acrecienta  tu 

3 Acreciente  el 
2 Acreciente  V. 
2 No  acrecientes 


1 Acrecentemos 

2 Acreceiitad 

3 Acrecienten 

2 Acrecienten  VV. 
2 No  acrecenteis. 


The  following  verbs,  and  their  compounds,  are  conjugated  like  Acrecent  i 


To  hit  the  aim 

aceriar 

To 

recommend 

encomendar 

To  breathe 

alentar 

To 

bury 

enterrar 

To  render  skilful 

adestrar 

To 

take  warning 

escarmentar 

To  feed 

apacentar 

To 

rub 

f re  gar  2 

To  squeeze 

apretar 

To 

govern 

gohernar 

To  hire 

arrendar 

To 

freeze 

helar 

To  place 

asentar 

To 

shoe 

herrar 

To  saw 

aserrar 

To 

winter 

invernar 

To  stuff 

atestar 

To 

mention 

mentar 

To  throw  down 

aterrar 

To 

take  a collatlo  i 

merendar 

To  cross 

airavesar 

To 

deny 

negar  2 

To  winnow 

mmtar 

To 

snow 

nevar 

To  warm 

calentar 

To 

think 

pensar 

To  blind 

cegar  2 

To 

break 

quehrar 

To  shut 

cerrar 

To 

recommend 

recomendar 

To  commence 

comenzar 

To 

water 

regar  2 

To  agree 

concertar 

To 

burst 

reventar 

To  confess 

confesar 

To 

cut  down 

segar  2 

To  taste  for  the  > 

decentar 

To 

sow 

semhrar 

first  time  ) 

To 

set 

sentar 

To  break  the  back 

derrengar  2 

To 

quiet 

sosegar 

To  cut  off  the  legs 

despernar 

To 

bury 

soterrar 

To  awake 

despertar 

To 

tremble 

temblar 

To  banish 

desicrrar 

To 

tempt 

tentar 

To  pave 

empedrar 

To 

rake 

trasegar  2 

To  begin 

empezar 

To 

stumble 

tropezar 

To  lock  up 

encerrar  * 

618 


APPENDIX. 


II 

ACORDAR,  to  agree,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  liKe  it,  take  the 
kble  ue  instead  of  the  last  radical  o,  in  the  Jirst,  second,  and  third  person 
singular,  and  tnird  plural  of  the  present  indicative  mood,  present  subjunc- 
tive mood,  and  in  the  imperative. 

ACORDAR  t:  agree. 

Radical  letters.  Acord : termination,  ar. 


Indicative. 

Subjunctive 

Present. 

Present. 

1 Acuerdo 

1 Acordamos 

1 Acuerde 

1 Acordemos 

2 Acuerdas 

2 Acordais 

2 Acuerdes 

2 Acordeis 

3 Acuerda 

3 Acuerdan 

3 Acuerde 

3 Acuerden 

V acuerda 

VV.  acuerdan 

VV.  acuerde 

VV.  acuerden 

Imperative. 

Acuerde  yo 

Acordemos 

Acuerda  tii 

Acordad 

Acuerde  41 

Acuerden 

Acuerde  V 

Acuerden  VV 

No  acuerdes 

No  acordeis. 

The  following 

verbs,  and  their  compounds,  are  conjugated  like  Acorda\ 

To  shame 

avergonzar 

To  force 

forzar 

To  thunder 

atronar 

To  rest 

holgar  2 

To  waste 

asolar 

To  tread 

hollar 

To  approve 

aprobai 

To  show 

mostrar 

To  bet 

apostar 

To  people 

poblar 

To  hoe 

aporcar 

To  prove 

probar 

To  grind 

amolar 

To  remind 

recordar 

To  breakfast 

almorzat 

To  lie  down 

rt  costar 

To  divine 

agorar 

To  belch 

rtgoldai 

To  la)  lown 

acostar 

To  renew 

renovar 

To  cost 

costar 

To  reprove 

reprobar 

1 0 count 

contar 

To  roll 

rodar 

To  hang 

colgar  2 

To  compensate 

rescontar 

To  console 

consoiar 

To  breathe 

resollar 

To  verify 

comprobar 

To  entreat 

rogar  2 

To  strain 

colar 

To  desolate 

desolar 

To  demonstrate 

demostrar 

To  skin 

desollar 

To  surpass 

descollar 

To  behead 

degollar 

To  be  impudent 

desvergonzarse 

To  discourage 

desconsolat 

To  diity 

emporcar  2 

To  meet 

encontrar 

To  string 

encordar 

To  solder 

soldvtr 

To  meet 

encontrar 

To  lessen 

soltar 

To  engross 

engrosar 

To  sound 

sonar 

APPENDIX. 


519 


To  dream  sohar 

To  toast  tostar 

To  thuudor  tronai 


To  barter  irocai  ? 

To  fly  volar 

To  overtimi  volcar  2. 


III. 

MOVER,  to  movey  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  like  it,  take  the  syllaola 
iie  instead  of  the  radical  o,  in  the  Jirsty  second,  and  third  ^person  singular, 
and  third  plural  of  the  present  indicative  mood,  present  subjunctive  mood, 
and  in  the  imperative. 


1 Muevo 

2 Mueves 

3 Mueve 
V mueve 


MOVER,  to  move. 

Radical  letters,  Mov  : termination,  er. 


Indicative. 

1 Movemos 

2 Moveis 

3 Mueven 
VV.  mueven 


1 Mueva 

2 Muevas 

3 Mueva 
V.  mueva 


Subjunctive. 

1 Mov  am  03 

2 Movais 

3 Muevan 
VV  muevan 


Imperative. 


Mueva  yo 
Mueve  tii 
Mueva  cl 
Mueva  V. 
No  muevas 


Movamos 
Moved 
Muevan 
Muevan  VV. 
No  movais. 


The  following  verbs,  and  their  compounds,  are  conjugated  like  Mover  : 


To  absolve 

ahsolver 

To  grieve 

doler 

To  iain 

Hover 

To  solve 

solver 

To  grind 

moler 

To  twist 

torcer  2 

To  bite 

morder 

To  turn 

volver 

To  dissolve 

disolver 

To  twist  again 

retorcer  2. 

IV. 

ATENDER,  to  attend,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  like  it,  take  an 
oefore  the  last  e of  the  radical  letters,  in  the  first,  second,  and  third  person 
iingulaa , and  third  plural  of  the  present  indicative  mood,  present  snbjuno- 
live  mood,  and  in  the  imperative. 


Atiendo 
i Atiendes 
3 Aticnde 
V atiende 


ATENDER,  to  attend. 

Radical  letters,  Atend : termination,  er. 


Indicative. 

Present. 

1 Atendemos 

2 Atendeis 

3 Atienden 
VV.  atienden 


1 Atienda 

2 Atiendas 

3 Atienda 
V.  atienda 


Subjunctive 

Present. 

1 Atendaraos 

2 Atendais 

3 Atiendan 
VV.  atiendan 


520 


APPENDIX. 


Imperative. 


AUenda  yo 
Alien  de 
Atienda  6\ 
Atienda  V. 
No  aiiendas 


Atendamoe 
Atended 
Atiendan 
Atieiidan  VV. 
No  ateiidais. 


The  following  verbs,  and  their  compounds,  are  conjugated  like  Atcndaf 


To  ascend 

ascender 

To  extend 

extender 

To  contend 

contender 

To  kindle 

encender 

To  sift 

cerner 

To  stink 

heder 

To  condescend 

condescender 

To  split 

header 

To  descend 

descender 

To  lose 

perder 

To  defend 

defender 

To  stretch  out 

tender 

To  neglect 

desatendcr 

To  transcend 

trascendci 

To  understand 

entender 

To  pour  out 

verier 

V. 

ASENTIR,  to  assent,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  like  it,  change  th# 
e of  the  last  syllable  of  their  radical  letters  into  i in  the  gerund;  in  th^ 
third  person  singular  and  plural  of  the  preterit  of  the  indicative  mood ; ii 
the  first  person  plural  of  the  imperative;  in  the  first  and  second  person  plu 
ral  of  the  present  of  the  subjunctive ; in  all  the  persons  of  the  first  anC 
third  terminations  of  the  imperfect,  and  in  the  future  of  the  said  mood 
These  verbs  take  besides  an  i before  the  last  e of  their  radical  letters,  ii 
the  first,  second,  and  third  person  singular,  and  third  person  plural  of  thf 
present  o'  the  indicative  mood,  present  of  the  subjunctive,  and  in  the  iin 
perativo  mood. 

ASENTIR,  to  assent 
Radical  letters,  Asent : termination,  ir 
Gerund.  Asiniiendo. 


1 As^rnto 

2 Asientea 

3 Asiente 
V asiente 


Present. 

1 Asentimos 

2 Asentis 

3 Asienten 
VV.  asienten. 


Indicative. 

1 Asenti 

2 Asentiste 

3 Asintio 
V.  asintio 


Preterit 

1 Asentimos 

2 Asentisleis 

3 Asintireon 
VV,  asintixeoix 


Imperative. 

Asienta  yo  Asintamos 

Asiente  Asentid 

Asienta  6\  Asientan 

Asienta  V.  Asientan  VV 

No  asientas  No  asintais 


APPENDIX. 


521 


Subjunctive 


1 Asienta 

Present. 

1 Asintamos 

1 Asintiese 

3d  Term. 

1 Asintiesemos 

2 Asientas 

2 Asintais 

2 Asintieses 

2 Asintieseis 

3 Asienta 

3 Asientan 

3 Asintiese 

3 Asintiesen 

1'.  asienta 

VV.  asientan. 

V.  asintiese 

VV.  asintiesejv 

1st 

1 Asintiera 

Imperfect, 

Termination. 

1 Asintieramo^ 

1 Asintiere 

Future. 

1 Asintieremos 

2 Asintieras 

2 Asintierais 

2 Asintieres 

2 Asinticreis 

3 Asintiera 

3 Asinticran 

3 Asintiere 

3 Asintiere n 

V,  asintiera 

VV,  asintieran. 

V.  asintiere 

VV  isinticren. 

2(Z  Term. 

Asentiria,  &c. 

The  following  verbs,  and  their  compounds,  are  conjugated  like  Asentu 

To  repent 

arrepentirse 

To  boil 

hervir 

To  advert 

advertir 

To  wound 

herir 

To  adhere 

adherir 

To  ingraft 

ingerir 

To  consent 

consentir 

To  invert 

invertir 

To  confer 

conferir 

To  prefer 

prefer  ir 

To  controvert  controvertir 

To  pervert 

pervertir 

To  convert 

convertir 

To  require 

requerir 

To  defer 

defer  ir 

To  refer 

referir 

To  differ 

diferir 

To  feel 

sentir. 

To  digest 

digerir 

VI. 

PEDIR,  to  ask,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated  like  it,  change  the  e of  the 
last  syllable  of  their  radical  letters  into  i in  the  gerund  ; in  the  first,  second^ 
and  third  person  singular  and  third  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the  in- 
dicative mood  ; in  the  third  person  singular  and  plural  of  the  preterit ; in 
all  the  persons  of  the  imperative,  the  second  plural  excepted ; and  in  all  the 
persons  cf  the  present  of  the  subjunctive,  of  the  first  and  third  terminations 
of  the  imperfect,  and  of  the  future  of  the  same  mood. 

PEDIR,  to  ask. 

Radical  letters,  Ped  : termination,  ir 


1 Pido 

2 Pides 

3 Pide 


Gerund.  Pidiendo. 


Present. 

1 Pedimos 

2 Pedis 

3 Piden 
VV  piden 


Indicative. 

1 Pedi 

2 Pediste 

3 Pidio 
V.  Pidio 


Preterit. 

1 PedlmoB 

2 Pedisteis 

3 Pidieron 
VV.  pidieron 


522 


APPENDIX. 


Imperative. 


Pida  JO 

Pidamos 

Pide 

Pedid 

Pida  6\ 

Pidan 

Pida  V. 

Pidan  V\ 

No  pidas 

No  pidais. 

Subjunctive. 

Present 

3d 

Term. 

1 Fida 

1 Pidamos 

1 Pidiese 

1 Pidicsemo9 

2 Pidas 

2 Pidais 

2 Pidieses 

2 Pidieseis 

3 Pida 

3 Pidan 

3 Pidiese 

3 Pidiesen 

V pida 

VV.  pidan. 

V.  pidiese 

VV.  pidiesen 

Imperfect. 

Termination. 

Future. 

i Pidiera 

1 Pidieramos 

1 Pidierc 

1 Pidieremos 

2 Pidieras 

2 Pidierais 

2 Pidicres 

2 Pidiereis 

3 Pidiera 

3 Pidieran 

3 Pidiere 

3 Pidieren 

V.  pidiera 

VV.  pidieran. 

V.  pidiere 

VV.  pidieren. 

2d  Termination. 

i Pediria,  &c 

The  following  verbs,  and  their  cornpcunds,  have  the 

same  irregularity 

Pedir  : 

To  benumb 

arrecir  2 

To  groan 

gemir 

To  constrain 

constrehir  2 

To  measure 

medir 

To  conceive 

concebir 

To  quarrel 

reilir  2 

To  contend 

competir 

To  follow 

seguir  2 

To  collect 

colejir  2 

To  render 

rendir 

To  belt 

cefiir  2 

To  rule 

rejir  2 

To  melt 

derretir 

To  repeat 

repetir 

To  dissolve 

desleir 

To  serve 

servir 

To  elect 

elejir  2 

To  dye 

iehir  2 

To  attack 

embestir 

To  dress 

vestir 

v; 

[1. 

CONDUCIR,  to  conduct^  and  the  verbs  conjugated  like  it,  take  a z bo- 
foro  the  radical  c in  the  terminations  beginning  with  o,  or  a,  as  explained  ih 
?age  516.  This  verb  takes,  besides,  the  terminations  je,  jiste,  jo,  jimos^ 
*lstcis,  jeron,  &c.  in  the  tenses  set  below.  These  terminations  were  for- 
/nerly  written  with  x,  {conduxe,)  and  many  persons  write  them  with  g 
condugc ) 

CONDUCIR,  to  conduct* 

Radical  letters,  Conduc  : termination,  it 


appendix. 


523 


Indicative. 

Present. 

i Conduzco  1 Condiiciinos 
i Conduces,  &c.  2 Conducis,  &c. 


] Conduje 

2 Condujiste 

3 Condujo 

2 V condujo 


Preterit 

1 Condujimos 

2 Condujisteis 

3 Condujeron 

2 VV.  condujhan 


Lmperative. 

1 Conduzc.j  yo  1 Conduzcamos 

2 Conduce  tii  2 Couducid 

3 Conduzca  el  3 Conduzcan 

2 Conduzca  V.  2 Conduzcan  VV 

2 No  conduzcas  2 No  conduzcais. 


Subjunctive. 


I Conduzca 
&c. 


Present. 

1 Conduzcamos 

&.C. 


Imperfect. 

\st  Termination. 

I Condujera  1 Condujeramos 
&c.  &c. 


2d  Temu 

1 Coiiduoiria  1 Conduciriamos 

&.C.  &c. 

3d  Term. 

1 Condujese  1 Condujesemos 

&LC.  6lc 

Future. 

1 Condujere  1 Condujeremos 

&c.  &c. 


The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  Conducir  : 


To  produce 
To  translate 
To  introduce 


producir 

traducir 

introducir 


To  reduce 
To  deduce 
To  adduce 


reducir 

deducir 

aducir 


IMPORTANT  REMARK. 

Verbs  that  have  two  irregularities,  are  marked  throughout  all  these  rules 
with  a 2 attached  to  them.  Example : negar  2.  This  verb,  besides  taking 
an  i before  as  Acrecentar,  adds  the  letter  u before  the  terminations  be 
ginning  with  e,  as  explained  in  page  514,  thus ; let  him  deny,  niegue 


VERBS  THE  IRREOULARITY  OF  WHICH  IS  CONFINED  ONLY  TO  THEM,  AND  THEIR 
COMPOUNDS. 

N-  B.  The  tenses  and  persons  not  conjugated,  or  expressed  in  the  follow- 
ing veros,  are  regular  ; as  for  the  sake  of  bre\  ity,  only  their  irregularities  arc 
forth.  Thus  in  Andar,  for  instance,  the  present  of  the  indicative  mood 
is:  1 arzr/o,  2 andas,  3 anda,  <^c.  The  imperfect  tense,  1 andabuy  2 an- 
dabaSy  ^c. 

ADQUIRIR,  to  acquire. 

Indie.  Pies.  1 Adquiero,  2 adquieres,  3 adquiere,  V.  adquiere  ; I idtfii 
njsiost  2 adq'^iiriSy  3 adquieren,  VV.  adquieren. 


624 


APPENDIX. 


imptrative,  1 Adquiera,  2 adquiere,  3 adquiera,  adquiera  V.,  2 no  ad 
quieras:  1 adquirdmos,  2 adquiridy  3 adquieraii,  adquieran  VV.,  2 no  ad< 
quirais. 

Suhj.  1 Adquiera,  2 adquieras,  3 adquiera,  V.  adquiera;  1 adqniramos 

2 adquirais,  adquieran,  VV.  adquieran. 

Inq,uirir,  to  inquire,  is  subjugated  like  Adquirir. 

ANDAR,  to  walk. 

Indie.  Preterit  1 Anduve,  2 anduviste,  3 anduvo,  V.  anduvo:  1 anduvl- 
mos,  2 anduvisteis,  3 anduvicron,  VV.  anduvieron. 

Suhj.  Imperf.  terin.  1 Anduviera,  2 anduvieras,  3 anduviera,  V 
andmiera:  1 anduvieramos,  2 anduvierais,  3 anduvieran,  VV.  anduvieran. 
« — 2</  term.  1 Andaria,  &c.  ^d  term.  1 Anduviese,  2 anduvio«es,  &c  — 
Put.  1 Anduviere,  2 anduvieres,  <Sco. 

ASIR,  to  seize. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Asgo,  2 ases,  3 ase,  V.  ase:  1 asimos,  2 asis,  3 asen,  VV 
asen. — SubJ.  1 Asga,  2 asgas,  3 asga,  V.  asga : 1 asgamos,  2 asgais,  3 as- 
gan,  VV.  asgan. — Imperative.  1 Asga  yo,  2 Ase  or  as  td,  3 asga  el,  asga 
V.,  2 no  asgas : 1 asgamos,  2 asid,  3 asgan,  asgan  VV.,  2 no  asgais. 

BENDECIR,  to  Mess. 

Is  conjugated  like  Deeir,  except  in  the  tenses  and  persons  following. 

Gerund.  Bendiciendo.  Past  participle.  | 

Indie.  Future.  1 Bendecir6,  2 bendecirds,  3 bendecird:  V.  bendecird; 
1 bendecirdmos,  2 bendecirdis,  3 bendecirdn,  VV.  bendecirdn. — Suhj.  Imper 
2tZ  term  1 Bendeciria,  2 bendecirias,  3 bendeciria,  V.  bendeciria : 1 ben- 
deciriamos,  2 bendeciriais,  3 bendecirian,  VV.  bendecirian. — Imper atire 

1 Bendiga  yo,  2 bendice  td,  &,c. : 1 bendigamos,  2 bendecid,  <Scc. 

Maldecir,  to  curse,  is  conjugated  like  Bendecir, 

CABER,  to  he  (^ontained. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Quepo,  2 cabes,  3 cabe,  V.  cabe : 1 cabemos,  2 cabeis, 

3 caben,  VV.  caben. — Perf.  1 Cupe,  2 cupiste,  3 cupo,  V.  cupo:  1 cupi 
inos,  2 cupisteis,  3 cupidron,  VV.  cupidron. 

Fut.  1 Cabrd,  2 cabras,  3 cabra,  V.  cabrd:  1 cabrdmos,  2 cabrdia, 
3 cabrdn,  VV.  cabrdn. — Imperative.  1 Quepa  yo,  2 cahe,  3 quepa,  quepa  V , 

2 no  quepas:  1 quepamos,  2 cabed,  3 quepan,  quepan  VV.,  2 no  quepais. 
Suhj.  Pres.  1 Qiu‘pa,  2 quepas,  3 quepa,  V.  quepa : 1 quepamos,  2 que- 

pais,  3 quepan,  VV.  quepan. — Imperf.  1st  term.  1 Cupiera,  2 cupieraa, 

3 cupiera,  V.  cupiera:  1 cupidramos,  2 cupicrais,  3 cupieran,  VV.  cupie-a« 
— 2d  term.  1 Cabria,  2 cabrias,  3 cabria,  V.  cabria : 1 cabriamos,  2 ca 
nriais,  3 cabrian,  VV  cabrian. — 3d  term.  1 Cupiese,  2 cupieses,  3 cupieso 
V cupiose:  1 cujrid?<Dmos,  2 cupieseis,  3 cupiesen,  VV.  cupiesen-  Ful 


APPENDIX.  525 

1 Cupiere,  2 cupiereis,  3 cupiere,  V.  cupiere : 1 cupidiemos,  2 cupidieis, 
3 cupiereu  VV.  cupiereu. 

CAER,  to  fall. 

Gerund.  Cayendo.  Past  participle  Caido 
Indie.  Pres.  I Caigo,  2 caes,  3 cae,  V.  cae : 1 caemos,  2 caeis,  3 caen, 
VV.  caen. — Pret.  1 Caf,  2 caiste,  3 cayo,  V.  cayo  : 1 caimos,  2 cais- 
^ie,  3 cay  iron,  VV  cay  iron. 

Imper  1 Caiga  yo,  2 cae,  3 caiga  el,  caiga  V.,  2 no  caigas : 1 caiga- 
2 caed,  3 caigan,  caigan  VV.,  2 no  caigais. — jSuIjJ.  Pres.  1 Caiga, 

2 caigas,  3 caiga,  V.  caiga:  1 caiganios,  2 caigais,  3 caigan,  VV.  caigan^^ — 
Imperf.  1st  term.  1 Cayera,  2 cayeras,  3 cayera,  V.  cayera:  1 cayeramos, 
2 cay^rais,  3 cayeran,  VV.  cayeran. — 2d  term.  1 Caeria,  &.c.,  1 caeriamos, 
&c. — 3d  term.  1 Cayese,  2 cayeses,  3 cayese,  V.  cayese:  1 cayesemos, 

2 cayeseis,  3 cayesen,  VV.  cayesen. — Put.  1 Cayere,  2 cayeres,  3 cayere, 
V.  cayere : 1 cayeremos,  2 cayereis,  3 cayeren,  VV.  cayeren. 

Decaer,  to  decay.  Recaer,  to  relapse. 

COCER,  to  boil. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Cuezo,  2 cueces,  3 cuece,  V.  cuece : 1 cocemos,  2 coceis, 

3 cuecen,  VV.  cuecen. — Suhj.  Pres.  1 Cueza,  2 cuezas,  3 ciieza,  V.  cueza: 

1 cozamos,  2 cozais,  3 cuezan,  VV.  cuezan. — Imper.  1 Cueza  yo,  2 cuece, 
3 cueza  el,  cueza  V.,  2 no  cuezas  ; 1 cozamos,  2 coced,  3 cuezan,  cuezan  W . 

2 no  cozais. — Suhj.  Pres.  1 Cueza,  2 cuezas,  &lc. 

Recocer,  to  boil  again.  Escocer,  to  cause  a sharp  pain,  to  smart. 

DAR,  to  give. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Doy,  2 das,  3 da,  V.  da:  1 damos,  2 dais,  3 dan,  VV  dan 
— Imperf.  1 Daba,  &c.  1 Ddbamos,  &-c. — Perf.  1 Di,  2 diste,  3 did,  V.  did 
I diinos,  2 disteis,  3 dieron,  VV.  dieron. 

Put.  1 Dare,  &c.  1 Daremos. — Imper.  1 De  yo,  etc.  1 Demos,  &c. — Subj 
Pres.  1 De,  &-c.  : 1 Demos,  &c. — Imperf.  Isi  term.  3 Diera,  2 dieras, 

3 diera,  V.  diera:  1 dieramos,  2 dierais,  3 dieran,  VV.  dieran. — 2d  term. 
I Daria,  &c. : 1 dariamos,  &c. — 3d  term.  1 Diese,  2 dieses,  3 diese,  V.  dieso  * 
I diesemos,  2 dieseis,  3 diesen,  VV.  diesen. 

Put.  1 diere,  2 dieres,  3 diere,  V.  diere : 1 dierernos,  2 diereis,  3 diereUt 
VV.  dieren 

DECIR,  to  say 

Gerund.  Diciendo.  Past  participle.  Dicho. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Digo,  2 dices,  3 dice,  V.  dice  : 1 decimos,  2 decis,  3 dicen, 
V V.  dicen. — Imperf.  1 Decia,  &c. — Pret.  1 Dije,  2 dijiste,  3 dijo,  V.  dijo* 

1 dijtmos,  2 dijfsteis,  3 dijdron,  VV.  dijeron. 

Put.  1 Dir^,  2 diras,  3 dir^,  V.  dird, : 1 diremos,  2 direis,  3 dirdn,  VV  di- 
ran. — Imper.  1 Diga  yo,  2 di  tu,  3 diga  el,  diga  V.,  2 no  digas : 1 digamos, 

2 decid,  3 digan,  digan  VV.,  2 no  digais.-  —Suhj.  Pre.^  I Diga  2 digas,  3 diga 


626 


APPENDIX. 


V.  diVa.  1 diganios,  2 digais,  3 digaii,  VV.  digaii. — Imperf.  1st  term  I Dijera 
2 dijeras,  3 dijera,  V.  dijera:  1 dijeramos,  2 dijerais,  3 dijeraii,  VV  dijeran 
— 2d  term.  1 Diria,  2 dirias,  3 diria,  V.  diria:  1 dinamos,  2 dinas,  3 dirian 
VV.  dirian. — 3c?  term.  1 Dijese,  2 dijeses,  3 dijese,  V dijese:  1 dij^semos, 
2 dijeseis,  3 dijesen,  V^V.  dijesen. — Fut.  1 Dijere,  2 dijeres,  3 dijere,  V 
dijore ; 1 dijeremos,  2 dijereis,  3 dijereii,  VV.  dijeren 

CoxTRADECiR,  to  coYitradict.  Desdecirse,  to  retract.  Predecir,  tn 
edict.  These  three  verbs  are  conjugated  like  decir,  except  in  the  second 
person  singular  of  the  imperative,  which  is  contradicCf  predice^  desdicete. 

DORMIR,  to  sleep. 

Gerund.  Durmiondo.  Past  participle.  Dormido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Duermo,  2 duermes,  3 duerme,  V.  duerme.  1 dorm;*nos, 
2 dormis,  3 duermen,  VV.  duermen. 

Pret.  1 Dormiy  2 dormiste,  3 durmid : 1 dormimoSy  2 dormisteisy  3 dui- 
niidron,  VV.  durmidron. — Imper.  1 Duerma  yo,  2 duerme,  3 duerma  el,  du- 
erma  V.,  2 no  duermas:  1 durraamos,  2 dormidy  3 duerman,  duerman  VV., 
2 no  durmais. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Duerma,  2 duermas,  3 duerma,  V.  duerma* 
i durmamos,  2 durmais,  3 duerman,  VV.  duerman. — Imperf  1st  term 
1 Durmiera,  2 durmieras,  3 durmiera,  V.  durmiera : 1 durmieramos,  2 dur 
mierais,  3 durmieran,  VV.  durniieran. — 2d  term.  1 Dormiria,  &c. — 3c?  term.. 

1 Durmiese,  2 durmieses,  3 durmiese,  V.  durmiese ; 1 durmidsemos,  2 dor- 
mieseis,  3 durmiesen,  VV  durmiesen.— 1 Durmiere,  2 durmieres,  3 dur- 
miere,  V.  durmiere : 1 durmidremos,  2 durmidreis,  3 durmidren,  VV.  du** 
midreii 

MORIR,  to  die. 

Past  participle.  Muerto, 

The  rest  is  conjugated  like  Dormir. 

ERGUIR,  to  hold  up  the  head. 

Gerund.  Irguiendo.  Past  participle.  Erguido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Yergo,  2 yergues,  3 yergue,  V.  yergue ; 1 erguimos, 

2 erguisy  3 yerguen,  VV.  yerguen. — Pret.  1 Erguiy  2 erguiste,  3 ir- 
giiid,  V.  irguid : 1 erguimosy  2 erguisteisy  3 irguidron,  VV.  irguidron. — 
Imper.  1 Yerga  yo,  2 yergue,  3 yerga  el,  yerga  V.,  2 no  yergas:  1 irgarnos 
2 erguidy  3 yergan,  yergan  VV.,  2 no  irgais. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Yerga,  2 yer- 
gas, 3 yerga,  V.  yerga:  1 irgarnos, 2 irgais,  3 yergan,  VV.  yergan. — Imperf 
Isi  term.  1 Irguiera,  2 irguieras,  3 irguiera,  V.  irguiera;  1 irguieramoi^ 
2 irguidrais,  3 irguidran,  VV.  irguidran. — :2d  term.  1 Erguiria,  &.c.  3d  term 
1 Irguiese,  2 irguieses,  3 irgiiiese,  V.  irguiese  : 1 irguidsemos.  2 irguidscis^ 
8 Irguidsen,  VV  *rguiesen. 

ERRAR,  to  err. 

Jndic.  Pres.  1 Yerro,  2 yerras,  3 yerra,  V.  yerra:  1 erramosy  2 erraib 
S yerran,  VV.  yerran. — Subj.  Pres.  I Yerre,  2 yerres,  3 yerre,  V'  yerro 


APPENDIX. 


627 


1 erremost  2 ends,  3 yerren,  VV.  yerren. — Imper  1 Yerre  yo,  2 yerraj 
3 yerre  <51,  yerre  V.,  2 no  yerres:  1 erremos,  2 err  ad,  3 yerren,  yerren  VV., 
8 no  erreis. 

ESTAR,  to  he. 

See  page  449. 

HABER,  to  have. 

As  an  auxiliary  verb,  see  page  449. 

HABER,  when  signifying  there  to  he,  is  conjugated  only  in  the  third 
person  singular  of  each  tense,  whether  the  nominative  be  singular  or  plural 
thus — 

There  to  be,  Haher.  There  being,  Hahiendo. 

There  is  ) , 

rn  i h,ay 

There  are  S 

There  was  > hahia 

There  were  j huho 

There  will  be  hahrd 

Let  there  be  haya 

There  may  be  haya 

There  might,  \ huhiera 

could,  would,  > hahria 

or  should  be  j huhiese 

When  there  shall  > j i i- 
, > cuando  hubiere 

be  S 

HACER,  to  make. 

Gerund.  Haciendo.  Past  participle.  Hecho 
Indie.  Pres.  1 Hago,  2 haces,  &lc. — Imperf.  1 Hacia,  &c. — Pret.  ] Hico, 

2 hiciste,  3 hizo,  V.  hizo:  1 hicimos,  2 hicisteis,  3 hici^ron,  VV.  hicid- 
ron. — Put.  1 Hard,  2 hards,  3 hard:  1 haremos,  2 hardis,  3 hardn. — Imper. 

1 Haga,  2 haz,  3 haga*  1 hagamos,  2 haced,  3 hagan. — Suhj.  Pres.  1 Haga, 

2 hagas,  &c. — Imper^  term.  1 Hiciera,  2 hicieras,  3 hiciera : 1 hicidra- 

mos,  2 hicidrais,  3 hicieran. — 2<Z  term.  1 Haria,  2 harias,  3 haria : 1 ha- 
riamos,  2 hariais,  3 harian. — 3c?  term.  I Hicieso,  2 hicieses,  3 hici<?se: 
1 hicidsemos,  2 hicidseis,  3 hiciesen. — Fat.  1 Hiciere,  2 hicieres,  3 hiciers 
I hicidremos,  2 hicidreis,  3 hicieren. 

CoNTRAHACER,  to  Counterfeit.  Deshacer,  to  undo.  Rehacer,  to  do  ove? 
again. 

IR,  to  go. 

Gerund.  Yendo.  Past  participle.  Ido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Voy  or  voi,  2 vas,  3 va:  1 vamos,  2 vais,  3 van. — Imperf 
I 5 Ibas,  3 iba : 1 ibamos,  2 ibais,  3 iban,  (puede  tambien  escribirBC 

ora  — Fret  1 Fui,  2 fuiste,  3 fud  1 fufmos,  2 finsteis,  3 fudron. — Fzii 


There  has  been 
There  have  been 
There  had  been 
There  shall  have 
been 

There  may  have 
been 

There  might, 
could,  would,  or 
should  have  been 
When  there  shall 
have  been 


ha  hahido 
hahia  hahido 
I hahrd  hahido 

haya  hahido 

huhiera  hahido 
> hahria  hahido 
) huhiese  hahido 
) cuando  hubiet^ 
S hahido 


528 


APPENDIX. 


1 2 irds,  3 ird : 1 iremos,  2 ireis,  3 irdn. — Imper  1 Vaya,  2 

3 vaya:  1 vamos,  2 id,  3 vayaii. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Vaya,  2 vayas,  3 vaya 
1 vd3  amos,  2 vaj^ais,  3 vayan. — Imperf.  term.  1 Fuera,  2 fueras^ 

3 fuera ; 1 fueramos,  2 fudrais,  3 fueran. — 2<Z  term.  1 Iria,  2 irias,  3 iria 
1 iriamos,  2 iriais,  3 irian. — 3rf  term.  1 Fuese,  2 fueses,  3 fuese : 1 fudse 
mos,  2 fudseis,  3 fuesen. — Fut.  1 Fuere,  2 fueres,  &lc 

JUGAR,  to  play. 

Gerund.  Jugando.  Past  participle.  Jugado 
Indie.  Pres.  1 Juego,  2 juegas,  3 juega:  1 jugamos,  2 jugais,  3 juegan 
^Imperf.  1 Jiigaba,  — Pret.  1 Jugue,  2 jugaste,  &c. — Fut.  1 Jugard, 

&c. — Imper.  1 Juegue,  2 juega,  3 juegue:  1 juguemos,  2 jugad;  3 jue- 
gueii. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Juegue,  2 juegues,  3 juegue:  1 juguemos,  2 jugueis, 
3 jueguen. — Imperf.  1st  term..  1 Jugara,  &c. — 2J  term.  1 Jugaria, 

— term.  1 Jugase,  &c. — Fut.  I Jugare,  &lc. 

OIR,  to  hear. 

Gerund.  Oyeudo.  Past  participle.  Oido 
Indie.  Pres.  1 Oigo,  2 oyes,  3 oye : 1 oimos,  2 ois,  3 oyen. — Imper) 

1 Oia,  &LC. — Pret.  1 Oi,  2 oiste,  3 oy5 : 1 oimos,  2 oisteis,  3 oyeron. — Fut. 
t Oire,  &LC. — Imper.  1 Oiga,  2 oye,  3 oiga:  1 oigamos,  2 oid,  3 oigaiL. 
^Subj.  Pres.  1 Oiga,  2 oigas,  3 oiga:  1 oigdmos,  2 oigais,  3 oigau. — hn- 
perf.  1st  term.  1 Oyera,  2 oyeras,  3 oyera:  1 oyeramos,  2 oyeraisi 
3 oyeran. — 2d  term.  1 Oiria,  &-c. — 3d  term.  1 Oyese,  2 oyeses,  3 oyeso 
1 oyesemos,  2 oyeseis,  3 oyesen. — Fut.  1 Oyere,  2 oj^eres,  3 oyere : 1 ovd- 
remos,  2 oydreis,  3 oyeren 

OLER,  to  smell. 

Gerund.  Oliendo.  Past  participle.  Olido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Huelo,  2 hueles,  3 huele : 1 olemos,  2 oleij,  3 hueleii. 
^Imperf.  1 Olia,  &c. — Pret.  1 Oli,  &c. — Fut.  1 Olere,  &c. — Imper. 
1 Iluela,  2 huele,  3 huela:  1 olamos,  2 oled,  3 huelan. — Subj.  Pres. 
1 Huela,  2 huelas,  3 huela : 1 olamos,  2 olais,  3 huelan, — Imperf.  1st  term. 
I Oliera,  &c. — 2d  term.  1 Oleria,  &c. — 3d  term.  1 Oliese,  &.c. — Fut 

1 Oliere,  &c. 

PODER,  to  be  able 

Gerund.  Pudiendo.  Past  participle.  Podido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Puedo,  2 puedes,  3 puede : 1 podemos,  2 podeis,  3 pue- 
den. — Imperf.  1 Podia,  &c. — Pret.  1 Pude,  2 pudiste,  3 pudo : 1 pudimos, 
9 pudisteis,  3 pudieron. — Fut.  1 Podre,  2 podrds,  3 podra:  1 podrdmos, 
3 podrdis,  3 podran. — Carece  de  Imperativo. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Pueda,  2 pue- 
dus,  3 pueda  : 1 podamos,  2 podais,  3 puedan. — hnperf.  1st  term.  1 Pudiera 

2 pudieras,  3 pudiera:  1 pudieramos,  2 pudierais,  3 pudieran. — 2d  term 
I Podria,  2 podrias.  3 podria ; I podriamos,  2 podriais,  3 podrian  —3d  term 


APPENDIX. 


629 


1  Pudies  , 2 pudieses,  3 pudiese : 1 pudi^sonios,  2 padieseis,  3 pudiesea.— 
Fut.  1 Fudiore,  2 pudieres,  3 pudiere : 1 pudieremos,  2 pudi^reis,  3 p udierea 

PODRIR,  to  rot 

Gerund,  Pudriendo.  Past  pariicipJe.  Podrido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Pudro,  2 pudres,  3 pudre : 1 podrimos,  2 podris,  3 p udreu 
Impirf.  1 Podria,*  &c.,  or  pudria,  &lc. — Pret.  1 Podri,  2 podriste,  3 pu- 
1 podrimos,  2 podristeis,  3 pudrleroii. — Put.  1 Podrire,  &c. — Impor 
a Piidra,  2 pudre,  3 pudra : 1 pudramos,  2 podrid,  3 pudran. — Subj.  Pres, 
1 Pudra,  2 pudras,  3 pudra,  <Slc. — Imperf.  1st  term.  1 Pudriera,  2 pudrU 
eras,  3 pudriera:  1 pudri^ramos,  2 pudrierais,  3 pudrieraii. — 2d  term, 
I Podriria, '&c. — 3c?  term.  1 Pudriese,  2 pudrieses,  3 pudriese:  1 pudriese- 
nos,  2 pudrieseis  3 pudriesen. — Fat.  1 Pudriere,  2 oudrieres,  3 pudriere: 
I pudrieremos,  2 pudriereis,  3 pudrieren. 

PONER,  to  put. 

Gti  jnd.  Pouiendo.  Past  participle.  Puesto. 

Indie  Pres.  1 Pongo,  2 pones,  &c. — Imperf.  1 Ponia,  &c. — Pret. 
1 Puso,  2 pusiste,  3 puso:  1 puaimos,  2 pusisteis,  3 pusieroii. — Fut.  1 Poii- 
dre,  2 poiidrds,  3 pondrd,:  1 pondremos,  2 pondreis,  3 pondrdn. — Imper 
i Ponga,  2 pon,  3 poiiga : 1 pongamos,  2 poned,  3 poiagan. — Subj.  Pres 

1 Ponga,  2 pongas,  3 ponga : 1 pongamos,  2 pongais,  3 pongan. — Imperf 
1st  term.  1 Pusiera,  2 pusieras,  3 pusiera:  1 pusieramos,  2 pusierais 
3 pusieran. — 2d  term.  1 Pondria,  2 pondrias,  3 pondria:  1 pondriamos 

2 poiidriais,  3 pondrian. — 3d  term.  1 Pusiese,  2 pusieses,  3 pusiese ; 1 pusi4- 
semos,  2 pusieseis,  3 pusiesen. — Fut.  1 Pusiere,  2 pusieres,  3 pusiere 

1 pusieremos,  2 pusiereis,  3 pusiereii. 

QUERER,  to  wilt. 

Gerund.  Queriendo.  Past  participle.  Querido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Quiero,  2 quieres,  3 quiere ; 1 queremos,  2 quereis,  3 quie- 
reii. — Imperf.  1 Queria,  &c. — Pret.  1 Quise,  2 quisiste,  3 quiso : 1 quisimos, 

2 quisisteis,  3 quisieron. — Fut.  1 Querre,  2 querrds,  3 querrd:  1 querrernos, 

2 querreis,  3 querrd.u. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Quiera,  2 quieras,  3 quiera:  1 quera- 
mos,  2 querais,  3 quieran. — Imperf.  Is?  term.  1 Quisiera,  2 quisieras, 

3 quisiera:  1 quisierarnos,  2 quisierais,  3 quisieran. — 2d  term.  1 Querria, 
^ }uerri£is,  3 querria:  1 querriamos,  2 querriais,  3 querrian. — 3c?  term.  1 Qui- 
^ese.  2 quisieses,  3 quisiese : 1 quisiesomos,  2 quisiesels,  3 quisiesen. — Fut 
1 Quisiere,  2 quisieres,  3 quisiere : 1 quisieremos,  2 quisi^reis,  3 quisiereu. 

REIR,  to  laugh. 

Gerund.  Riendo  or  riyendo.  Past  participle.  Roido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Rio,  2 ries,  3 rie:  1 reimos,  2 reis,  3 rien. — Imperf.  I Roia, 
fcc. — Pret.  1 Rei,  2 reiste,  3 ri(j  or  riy<3 : 1 reimos,  2 re^eteis,  3 ndren  eg 


23 


Some  writers  use  pudria^  &c 


580 


APPENDIX. 


riy^ron. — Fut.  1 Reir4,  &c. — Imper.  1 Ria,  5 rie,  3 ria : I riamos,  2 ro  d 
3 lian. — Suhj.  Pres.  1 Ria,  2 rias,  3 ria:  1 riamos,  2 riais,  3 rian. — /m* 
vcrf.  1st  term.  1 Riera,  2 rieras,  3 riera,  {6  riyera,  &c.) — 2d  term.  1 Rciriaj 
&c. — 3d  term.  1 Riese,  2 rieses,  3 riese:  1 riesemos,  2 rieseis,  3 riesen 
("»  riyeso,  &c.) — Fut.  1 Rieroj  2 rieres,  3 riere;  I rieremos,  2 rierein, 
3 ’^i  'ren,  (6  riyere,  &c.) 

Freir,  to  fry.  Past  participle.  Frito.  Desleir,  to  dilute 
SABER,  to  know 

Gerund.  Sabiendo.  Past  participle  Sabido. 

Indie  Pres.  1 Se,  2 sabes,  &c. — Imperf.  1 Sabia,  &c. — Pret.  1 Sup©, 

2 supiste,  3 supo : 1 supimos,  2 supisteis,  3 supieron. — Fut.  1 Sabrd,  2 sa- 
bras,  3 sabrd : 1 sabrdmos,  2 sabreis,  3 sabpdn. — Imper.  1 Sepa,  2 sabe. 

3 sepa:  1 sepamos,  2 sabed,  3 sepan. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Sepa,  2 sepas,  3 sepa; 

1 sepamos,  2 sepais,  3 sepan. — Imperf.  Isf  term.  1 Supiera,  2 supieras 
3 supiera : 1 supieramos,  2 supierais,  3 supieran. — 2d  term.  1 Sabria,  2 sa- 
brias,  3 sabria:  1 sabriamos,  2 sabriais,  3 sabrian. — 3d  term.  I Supiese, 

2 supieses,  3 supiese,  &c. — Fut.  1 Supiere,  2 supieres,  3 supiere : 1 supier© 
mos,  2 supiereis,  3 supieren. 

SALIR,  to  go  out. 

Gerund.  Saliendo.  Past  participle.  Salido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Salgo,  2 sales,  &-c. — Imperf.  Salia,  &c. — P:xt.  1 Sail, 
&-C. — Fut.  1 Saldr^,  2 saldras,  3 saldrd:  1 saldrdmos,  2 saldreis,  3 saldran 
— Imper  1 Saiga,  2 sal,  3 saiga : 1 salgamos,  2 salid,  3 salgaii. — Suhj.  Pres 
1 Saiga,  2 saigas,  3 saiga:  1 salgamos,  2 salgais,  3 salgan. — Imperf.  Isi 
term.  1 Saliera,  &c. — 2d  term.  1 Saldria,  2 saldrias,  3 saldria:  1 saldria- 
nu>s,  2 saldrias,  3 saldrian. — 3d  term.  1 Saliese,  &c. — Fut.  1 Saliere,  6lc. 

SATISFACER,  to  satisfy 

SATISFACER  is  a verb  compounded  of  satis  and  hacer,  and  is  conjii 
gated  like  hacer,  changing  the  h into  f ; thus,  satisfago,  satisfaces, 
iiatisfacia,  &c.,  satisfice,  satisficiste,  satisfizo,  ^c.,  ^c.  Except  the  ir-u- 
perative,  the  second  person  singular  of  which  is,  satisface,  or  satisfaz 

SER,  to  he. 

See  page  449. 

TENER,  to  hold. 

See  page  449. 

TRAER,  to  bring. 

Gerund.  Trayendc  Past  participle  Traido. 

Indtc  Pres.  1 Traigo,  2 traes,  &c. — Imperf.  1 Traia,  &c. — Pr«l 
I Tmjo,  2 trajiste,  3 trajo*  1 trajimos,  2 trajisteis,  3 traj<$ron. — Fnl 


APPENDIX. 


531 


i  Trac3rd,  &c. — Imper  1 Pra'ga,  2 trae,  3 traiga,  traiga  V.,  2 no  tra.gaa 
i traigamos,  2 traed,  3 traigan,  traigan  VV.,  2 no  traigais. — SubJ.  Pres 

1 Traiga,  2 traigas,  3 traiga,  &c. — Imperf.  1st  term.  1 Trajera,  2 trajeras, 
3 tiajera:  1 trajeramos,  2 trajerais,  3 trajdran. — 2d  term.  1 Traeria,  &c. 
—■3d  term.  1 Trajese,  2 trajeses,  3 trajese,  &c. — Fut.  1 Trajore,  2 trajoreej 
3 trajere : 1 trajeremos,  2 trajereis,  3 trajereii 

VALER,  to  be  worth. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Valgo,  2 vales,  &c. : 1 va.Iemos,  &c. — Fut.  1 valdrd,  2 val- 
drds,  3 valdrd,  V valdrd ; 1 valdremos,  2 valdrdis,  3 valdrdn,  VV.  valdrdn. 
— Imper.  1 Valga  yo,  2 valct  3 valga,  valga  V 2 no  valgas,  &c.,  2 no  valgais 
— Subj.  Pres.  1 Valga,  2 valgas,  3 valga,  V.  ralga:  1 valgamos,  2 valgais, 
3 valgaii,  VV.  valgan. — Imperf.  term.  1 Valiera,  &c. — 2d  term.  1 Val- 

dria,  2 valdrias,  3 valdria,  V.  valdria:  1 valdrfamos,  2 valdriais,  3 vaidrian; 
VV.  vaidrian. — 3d  term.  1 Valiese,  2 valieses,  &c. — Fut.  .1  Valiere,  dt-c. 

VENIR,  to  come. 

Gerund.  Viniendo  Past  participle.  Venido. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Veiigo,  2 vienes,  3 vieiie,  V.  viene:  1 venimos,  2 vemSf 
3 vienen,  VV.  vieneii. — Pret.  1 Vine,  2 veniste,  3 irino,  V.  vino  : 1 venimos, 

2 venisteiSf  3 vinieron,  VV.  vinieron. — Fut.  1 Vendre,  2 vendras,  3 vendrd, 
V.  vendrd:  1 vendremos,  2 vendreis,  3 vendraji,  VV.  vendran. — Imper. 

1 Venga  yo,  2 ven  td,  3 venga  dl,  venga  V.,  2 no  vengas:  1 vengamos,  2 venid., 

3 vengan,  vengan  VV.,  2 no  vengais. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Venga,  2 vengus, 
3 venga,  V.  venga:  1 vengamos,  2 vengais,  3 vengan,  VV.  vengan. — 
Imperf.  1st  term.  1 Viniera,  2 vinieras,  3 viniera,  V.  viniera:  1 vinieramos, 

2 vinierais,  3 vinieran,  VV.  vinieran. — 2d  term.  I Veiidria,  2 vendrias, 

3 vendria,  V.  vendria:  1 vendriamos,  2 vendnais,  3 vendrian,  VV.  vendrian. 
— 3d  term.  I Viniese,  2 vinieses,  3 viniese,  V.  vinieee:  1 vinidsemos,  2 vi- 
nieseis,  3 viniesen,  VV.  viniesen. — Fut.  1 Viniere,  2 vinieres,  3 viniere,  V 
viiiiere : 1 vinierernos,  2 viniereis,  3 vinieren,  VV  vinieren. 

VER,  to  see. 

Gerund.  Viendo.  Past  participle.  Visto. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Veo,  2 ves,  3 ve,  V.  ve : 1 vemos,  2 veis,  3 ven,  VV.  ven. 
— Imperf.  1 Veia,*  2 veias,  3 veia,  V.  veia:  1 veiamos,  2 veiais,  3 veian, 
VV.  veian. — Pret.  1 Vi,  2 viste,  3 vi6,  V.  vi6 : 1 vimos,  2 visteis,  3 vieron, 
Vf  vieron. — Fut.  1 Vere,  2 verds,  3 verd,  V.  verd,  &c. — Imper.  1 Vea  yo, 
2 ve  td,  3 vea  cl,  vea  V.,  2 no  veas:  1 vedmos,  2 ved,  3 vean,  vean  VV., 

2 no  ve.i  S. — Subj.  Pres.  1 Vea,  2 veas,  3 vea,  V.  vea:  1 vedmos,  2 veais, 

3 veaUj  VV.  vean. — Imperf.  term.  1 Viera,  2 vieras,  &c. — 2d  term 

1 Veria,  2 verias,  &c. — 3d  term.  1 Viese>  2 vieses,  &c. — Fut.  1 Viere 

2 viores,  3 viere,  &c. 


Formerly  it  vras  said  ma,  via<i,  via.  vvmos.  viais,  viati. 


532 


APPENDIX. 


YAGER,  to  lie  down. 

This  verb  is  rarely  used,  but  in  epitaphs ; and  it  is  conjugafed  only 
Ihe  following  tenser  and  persons. 

Gerund.  Yaciendo. — Indie.  Pres.  1 Yago,  2 yaces,  3 yace,  V.  yace 
I yacernos,  2 yaceis,  3 yacen,  VV.  yacen. — Imperf  1 Yacia,  2 yaciaa, 
3 yacia,  V.  yacia:  1 yaciamos,  2 yaciais,  3 yacian,  VV.  yacian. — Suhj 
Yaga. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  are  conjugated  in  the  third  person  sin« 
gular  of  each  tense  only,  without  expressing  the  nominative : as. 


GRANIZAR,  to  hail. 


It  hails 

graniza 

It  has  hailed 

It  hailed 

( granizaba 

It  had  hailed 

\ granizo 

It  shall  have 

It  will  hail 

granizard 

hailed 

Let  it  hail 

granice 

It  may  have 

It  may  hail 

granice 

hailed 

It  might,  could. 

'j  granizara 

It  might,  could. 

would,  or 

> granizaria 

w’ld,  or  sh‘d 

should  hail 

) granizase 

have  hailed 

Wlien  it  shall 

1 ganizare 

When  it  shall 

hail 

have  hailed 

ha  granizado 
habia  granizado 

I hahrd  granizado 

I hay  a granizado 

j huhiera  granizade 
> hahria  granizado 
) hubiese  granizadt 
) cuando  hubiere 
} granizado 


The  following  are  some  of  the  impersonal  verbs: 


To  freeze 
To  glare  (speak- 
ing of  the  dew) 
To  thaw 
To  drizzlo 
To  snow 
To  lighten 


helary  irr. 

- escarchar 

deshelar 
lloviznar 
nevar,  irr. 
rclampaguear 


To  thunder 
To  rain 

To  happen 

To  dawn 
To  become  night 


tronar,  irr 

Hover j irr. 

suceder 

acaecer 

acontecer 

amaneccr 

anochecer 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

SOLER,  to  accustom. 

This  verb  is  used  only  in  the  two  following  tenses. 

Indie.  Pres.  1 Suelo,  2 sueles,  3 suele,  2 V.  suele : 1 solemos,  2 soleifc; 
b suelen,  2 VV.  suelen. — Imperf.  1 Solia,  2 solias,  3 solia,  2 V solia : 1 so- 
Jiamos,  2 soliais,  3 solian,  2 VV.  solian. 

PLACER,  to  please. 

This  verb  is  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural,  in  the  nuxxk 
tnd  tenses  as  follows  • it  is  always  accompanied  by  a personal  pronoun  ii? 
objective  case. 


APPENDIX. 


533 


Indie.  Pres.  1 Me  place,  2 te  place,  3 le  place,  2 le  place  d V.:  I no* 
siace,  2 os  place,  3 les  place,  2 les  place  d VV. ; or  1 Me  placen,  2 te 
placen,  &c. — Imperf.  1 Me  placia,  or  placian,  2 te  placia,  or  placian,  &-C. 
— Pret.  1 Me  plu^o,  2 te  pi  ago,  &.c. : 1 me  pluguieroii,  2 te  plugui^roii,  &c. 
^SuhJ.  Pres.  1 Me  piegue,  &c. — Imperf.^  1st  term.  Me  pluguiera,  &,c. 
— 3(1  term.  Me  pliiguiese,  &.c. — Fat.  Me  pluguicro. 

Remark.  The  Spanish  Academy  observes  that  the  subjunctive  mood  Is 
. used  only  in  the  following  expressions:  plegucj  pluguiera^  or  pluguiese  & 
Dios;  and  si  me  pluguiere^  if  it  should  please  me. 

Ohs.  The  verbs  gustary  to  have  a liking  for;  pesar^  to  be  sorry  for; 
acomodar,  to  suit ; convenir,  or  no  convenir,  to  comport,  or  not,  with  one'd 
interests,  «Scc.,  are  frequently  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  or  plu- 
ral ; and  in  that  case  they  take  as  a suhjecty  the  person  or  thing  liked,  &c.. 
with  which  they  agree  in  number ; and  the  person  who  likes,  is  sorry,  &.c. 
becomes  their  complement,  and  is  represented  by  the  pronouns  me,  te,  se, 
&c.,  as  in  the  verb  placer.  Ex.:  Music  pleases  him,  le  gusta  la  musico 
or  el  gusta  de  la.  musica. 


A LIST  OF  ALL  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

Ohs.  1.  The  compound  verbs  are  not  comprehended,  when  they  have  the 
same  irregularity  as  the  simple  ones  from  which  they  are  derived : aS; 
componer,  contraponer,  deponer,  disponer,  imponer,  oponer,  proponer,  &lc., 
all  of  which  are  conjugated  like  poner. 

Ohs.  2.  The  verbs  that  admit  some  change  for  the  sake  of  the  sound., 
are  marked  with  a 2,  as  negar,  2 niegue. 

Ohs.  3.  The  most  general  irregularities  of  the  Spanish  verbs,  as  it  hj\ 
beei-  already  stated,  consist  in  their  taking  i,j,  y,  or  ue,  or  i,  instead  of  o, 
or  e.  To  find,  therefore,  the  infinitive  mood,  and  the  person  and  tense  ol 
such  verbs,  the  scholar  must  first  separate  the  regular  termination,  and  then 
the  letter- or  letters  that  do  not  belong  to  the  radicals  of  such  verbs;  as  in 
comienzo,  muestras,  sintio,  condujeron,  trajeran,  construyesen,  the  termi- 
nations are  o,  as,  id,  eron,  eran,  esen.  The  remaining  letters  are,  comienz, 
rnuestr,  sint,  condiij,  iraj,  construy.  Add  to  these  the  regular  terminations 
of  the  infinitive  mood,  and  they  will  read  comienzar,  muestrar,  sintir,  con- 
dujir,  trajer,  constuyir.  Take  off  the  i,  j,  and  y,  change  the  ue  into  o, 
and  the  i into  e;  add  a c before  the  termination  to  those  in  ij,  or  uj;  and 
they  will  be  comenzar,  rnostrar,  sentir,  conducir,  truer,  construir.  It  must 
be  observed  that  verbs  that  have  a y before  their  termination,  may  be  of  the 
second  or  third  conjugation;  in  consequence  of  which  the  terminations  of 
both  may  be  tried  in  order  to  find  them  out  in  the  dictionary.  Example; 
creyo,  huyen;  take  off  o,  yen,  and  add  the  terminations  thus,  creir,  hucr 
the  scholar  will  not  find  them,  but  he  will  find  creer,  hair. 

Ohs.  4.  Verbs  that  have  two  participles  are  marked  thus;  Bendeciv'^ 
B Bendito,  and  the  regular  one  is  omitted. 

Qbs.  5.  The  irregular  participles  are  set  in  italics  after  their  verbs 


bU 


APPENDIX, 


O’  The  verbs  of  the  first  column  are  conjugated  like  those  of  he  sec 
Dnd,  which  must  be  consulted  in  their  respective  places 


Pajfe 

Pagi 

Abrir,  rcg. 

Cerrar 

Acrcccntar, 

516 

Abierto,  prt.  in 

Cimentar, 

“ 

Absolver, 

Mover, 

519 

Cocer, 

see  rule. 

529 

Absvelto^  prt.  irr 

Coiar, 

Ac^ordar, 

61S 

Abslraer, 

Traer, 

530 

Colegir,  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Aoerlar, 

Jlcreccntar, 

516-7 

Colgar,  2 

A curdar, 

5D5 

Acordab, 

see  rule, 

518 

Comedirse, 

Pedir, 

521 

Acostar, 

Coinenzar, 

A crecentar, 

516 

Acrzgentar, 

see  rule, 

516-7 

Cornpetir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Aoestrar, 

Concebir, 

Adherir, 

AsentiTy 

520 

Conc.ernir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Adquirir, 

523 

Concertar, 

Acrcccntar, 

516 

Adverlir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Concordar, 

Acurdar, 

518 

Aducir, 

Cunducir, 

522 

Condescender 

Atem'er, 

519 

Agorar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Condolerse, 

Mover, 

ib. 

Alentar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

CONDUCIR, 

see  rule. 

522 

Altnorzar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Conferir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Araoiar, 

Confesar 

Acrcccntar, 

516 

Andar, 

524 

Conocer, 

51C 

Apacentar, 

Acreccntar, 

516 

Coriseguir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Aposlar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Conseritir, 

Asentir, 

520 

A probar, 

Consolar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Aprelar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Constrehir,* 

Pedir, 

521 

Argiiir, 

Jnstruirf 

515 

Conlar, 

A cordar, 

518 

Arre<Mrse,  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Coiitener, 

Tener, 

449 

Arreiidar, 

A crcccnta'^, 

516 

C(uitender, 

A tender. 

519 

Af^c.eiider, 

Alender, 

519 

Conlradecir, 

Decir, 

525 

A rrepeiitirse, 

Asentir, 

520 

Coiiirovertir, 

A sentir. 

520 

Aseiitar, 

Acrcccntar, 

516 

Contraer, 

Traer, 

530 

Asentir, 

see  rule, 

520 

Coiivertir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Aserrar, 

Acrcccntar, 

516 

Corregir,  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Aseslar, 

“ 

Cubrir,  reg. 

Ateiilar, 

Cubierto,  prt  irr 

Asir, 

Asoldar, 

Acordar^ 

524 

51b 

Dar, 

525 

u 

Decaer, 

Caer, 

525 

Atender, 

see  rule. 

519 

Decentar, 

A crecentar 

516 

Aterrar,  (echar  ( 

Acrcccntar , 

516 

Decir, 

Deducir, 

see  rule, 
Conducir, 

525 

522-3 

por  tierra)  ) 
Atestar,  (rellenar) 
Atraer, 

<< 

Traer, 

530 

Defender, 

Defenr, 

A tender, 
Asentir, 

519 

520 

Atravesar, 

'Acrcccntar, 

516 

D ego  liar, 

A cordar. 

518 

Aventar, 

U 

Denioler, 

Mover, 

519 

Avenlarse, 

Avergonzar, 

<( 

Acordar, 

518 

Demostrar, 
Denegar,  2 
Denoslar, 

A cordar, 
Acrcccntar 
Acordar, . 

518 

516 

518 

Derrengar,  2 

A crecentar 

516 

Bendecir, 

see  rule, 

524 

Derrelir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Desavenir, 

Venir, 

5ol 

Caber^ 

see  rule. 

524 

Descender, 

Atender, 

519 

n 

525 

Desc.ollar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Calentati 

Acrstentar, 

516 

Descordar, 

(i 

Cegar,  2 

Descomedirse, 

Pedir, 

6SI 

• ’onir  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Describir,  reg. 

‘ rner, 

sunder, 

519 

Descrito  or  descripto,  prt.  irr 

APPENDIX. 


535 


Pa?e 

Oesflocar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Fregar, 

Acrecent 

5ie 

Deshacer, 

Hacery 

527 

Freir, 

Reir, 

52^1 

Deshelar, 

Acrecentar 

516 

Fnto,  prt.  in. 

Desleir, 

Retry 

529 

Desembrar 

Acrecentar  ^ 

516 

Gemir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Ocsolar, 

A cordary 

518 

Gobernar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Dosoilar, 

ii 

Dcsovar, 

ii 

Haber,  see  auxilia 

,:y  verbs. 

449 

Oespedir, 

Pediry 

521 

“ see  impersonal  “ 

521 

Despernar 

JScrccentar, 

516 

Hacer, 

527 

Despertar, 

(( 

Heder, 

Atender, 

519 

Desterrar, 

'* 

Heiar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Desplegar, 

u 

Henchir,  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Desvergonzarstj 

Acordary 

518 

Ilender, 

Atender, 

519 

Dezmar, 

Acrecentary 

516 

Ileilir,  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Discernir, 

Asentiry 

520 

Herir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Diferir, 

“ 

Iierrar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Digerir, 

“ 

Hervir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Discordar, 

Acordary 

518 

Holgar,  2 

Acordar, 

518 

Disolver, 

Movery 

519 

Hollar, 

“ 

Divertir, 

Jisentiry 

520 

Doler, 

Mover  y 

519 

Impedir, 

Pedir, 

• 521 

Dormir, 

see  rule, 

526 

Impriinir,  reg. 

IrnpresO,  prt.  irr. 

Elegir,  2 

Pediry 

521 

Iiicensar, 

Acrecentar 

516 

Einbestir, 

“ 

Iiicluir, 

Instruir, 

515 

Empedrar, 

Acrecentary 

516 

Inducir, 

Conducir, 

522 

Empezar, 

Inferir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Einporcar,  2 

Acordary 

518 

Inquirir, 

Adquirir, 

523 

Eiicender, 

A tender. 

519 

Instruir, 

515 

Enceiisar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Introducir 

Conducir, 

522 

Enoerrar, 

Inveriiar, 

dcrecentar. 

516 

Encomendar, 

(( 

Iiivertir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Encontrar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Investir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Eiicordar, 

ti 

Ingerir, 

Asentir, 

520 

Ejigreirse, 

Reir, 

529 

Ir, 

see  rule. 

527 

Engrosar, 

A cordar, 

518 

Enrodar, 

“ 

Jugar,  2 

528 

Enmendar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Ensangrentai, 

(ft 

Llover, 

Mover, 

519 

EnvesLir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Enteiider, 

Atender, 

519 

Maldecir, 

Bendecir, 

524 

Eiiterrar, 

Acrecentar 

516 

Manifestar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Erguir, 

see  rule, 

526 

Maiitener, 

Tener, 

449 

Errar, 

see  rule, 

ib. 

Medir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Escarmentar, 

Acrecentai 

516 

Mentar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Escocer,  2 

Cocer, 

518 

jMentir, 

Asentir 

520 

Escribir,  reg. 

Merendar, 

A crecentar 

516 

Escmo,  prt.  far. 

Moler, 

Mover, 

519 

Esforzar, 

A cordar. 

518 

iM  order. 

“ 

Eitar,  see  the  auxiliary  verbs 

449 

Mo  nr, 

526 

Excluir, 

Instruir, 

515 

Miierto,  prt.  in 

Estrehir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Mostrai, 

Acordar, 

518 

Bxtendei , 

Atender, 

519 

Mover, 

see  rule, 

519 

Expedii’, 

Pedir, 

521 

Negar,  8 

Acrecentar 

61  e 

Forzaj, 

Acordar, 

518 

Nevai 

(4 

£)36  ^PPENDIJ1[ 


Pag-e 

Uir, 

see  nile, 

528 

Salir, 

53( 

Dior, 

n 

ib. 

Satislacer, 

lb 

Segar,  2 

Acrece'<ittiry 

51€ 

Pediu, 

see  rule, 

521 

Seguir,  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Pensar 

Acrercntar, 

516 

Sernbrar, 

AcrecentaTy 

510 

f'erder 

A tender i 

519 

8entar, 

“ 

Perver^r 

AtentiTy 

520 

Senlir, 

Asentir. 

520 

Plac-r, 

532 

8er,  see  auxiliary  verbs, 

449 

Plegar,  2 

AcrecentaT^ 

516 

Servir, 

Pedxry 

521 

Poblar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Serrar, 

Acieceniar 

516 

Poder, 

528 

Soldar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Podrir, 

529 

Soler, 

532 

Poner, 

ib. 

Solver, 

Mover, 

519 

Preferir, 

AsentiTy 

520 

Sut/to,  prt  irr 

Prescribir,  reg. 

Soltar, 

Acordar, 

51? 

Prcscripto,  prt.  irr. 

Suelto,  prt.  irr. 

Probar, 

Acordar, 

518 

Sonar, 

“ 

ib 

Producir, 

Conducir, 

522 

Sonar, 

ib. 

Proferir, 

Asentir^ 

520 

Sosegar,  2 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Proscribir,  reg. 

Soterrar, 

Proscnpio,  prt.  in 

Sugerir, 

Asentir^ 

520 

Quebrar, 

Acrcccnlar, 

516 

Temblar, 

Acrecentar 

516 

Querer, 

529 

Tender. 

A tender. 

519 

Tener, 

449 

Raer, 

Cacr^ 

525 

Tenir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Recomendar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Tentar, 

Acrecentar , 

616 

Recordar, 

Acordar^ 

518 

Torcer, 

Cocer, 

525 

Recostar, 

“ 

Tosiar, 

A cordar, 

518 

Reducir, 

Conducir, 

522 

Traducir, 

Conducir, 

522 

Referir, 

Mscntir, 

520 

Truer, 

530 

Regar,  2 

Jicrecentar  ^ 

516 

Transeender, 

A tender, 

519 

Regir,  2 

Pedir, 

521 

Trascender, 

“ 

Regoldar, 

Acordar^ 

518 

Tra.seordarse, 

Acordar, 

518 

Reir, 

see  rule, 

529 

Trasegar,  2 

A crecentar, 

61C 

Rernendar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Trocar,  2 

Acordar, 

518 

Reiulir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Tronar, 

Renovar, 

A cordar, 

518 

Tropezar, 

Acrecentar, 

516 

Renir,  2 

PediCj 

520 

Repetir, 

a 

Valer, 

53] 

Reqiiebrar, 

jScrcccniar 

516 

Venir, 

ib 

Requerir, 

Jisentii 

520 

Ver, 

ib 

Rescoiitrar 

JJeordaTj 

518 

Verier, 

A tender. 

519 

Resollar, 

ii 

Vestir, 

Pedir, 

521 

Reteiitar, 

jdcrecentar 

516 

Vo  Lear, 

Acordar, 

518 

Reventar, 

Volar, 

R r ’olcai,  2 

AcordaVy 

518 

Volver, 

Mover 

Rodur, 

“ 

VueltOy  prt  irr 

Uoer, 

Caery 

525 

Hogar  2 

Acordar^ 

518 

Yaccr, 

5SS 

■> 

see  nile, 

530 

^ ZalicT-T , 

dseyxiic, 

tSf 

MODELOS 


de 

CARTAS  MERCANTILES  I FAMILIARES. 

FOR  M.  V.  C. 


INTRODUCCION. 

Es  muy  necesario  saber  escribir  bien  una  carta,  porque  ocurre  casi  dia- 
riameiite,  tanto  para  los  asuntos  de  importancia,  como  para  los  de  pura 
cortesia,  6 mera  diversion : y sieiido  las  cartas  una  conversacion  entre 
ausentes,  deben  tener  fluidez,  claridad,  sencillez,  y naturalidad  i.  fin  de  decLr 
6.  aquellas  personas  d quienes  se  las  envian  lo  mismo  que  se  les  diria,  s« 
estuviesen  presentes.  Su  estilo,  por  consiguiente,  debe  variar  seguii  el 
objeto  d que  se  coiitraen,  la  persona  d quien  se  dirijen,  y la  que  las  escribe. 
Es  precise,  pues,  estudiar  con  atencion  las  reglas  del  estilo  en  las  cartas ; 
mas  no  siendo  posible  explicarlas  en  los  estrechos  limites  de  e»te  Apdndice, 
se  aconseja  d los  j6venes  estudiosos  las  aprendan  en  su  respectiva  lengua, 
(por  ser  las  niismas  en  todas,)  y por  lo  respective  d la  Castellana,  hallardn 
exceJentes  modelos  en  las  Cartas  Familiares  del  P.  Isla,  en  las  Carlas 
Mnrruecas  de  Cadalso,  en  la  Colleccion  de  Cartas  de  varios  autores 
Espafioles,  recogidas  por  Don  Gregorio  Mayans;  en  lasde  Antonio  Perez, 
y por  lo  respective  d las  antiguas,  en  el  Centon  Epistolario  del  Br.  Fenian 
Gomez  de  Cibdad  Real,  &c.,  pues  como  dice  el  erudito  d ilustre  autoi 
espanol,  Feijoo,  Los  preceptos  para  escribir  cartas  pueden  suplirse 
la  copia  de  hue  nos  ejemplares.^  (Teatro  Critico,  tomo  7,  discurso  10.) 

La  curiosidad  en  cerrar  las  cartas,  y la  propiedad  del  sobrescrito,  debon 
tambien  cuidarse ; pues  una  palabra  mas,  6 mdncs,  en  la  cubierta  do  un 
papel,  da  6 quita  satisfaccion  al  qu")  le  rccibe,  y suele  influir  mucho  en  la 
luerte  de  lo  que  se  solicita. 

i\L  Vz.  C 

Nubi'A  York,  Feb.  8 tie  1848. 


538 


APPENDIX. 


CARTAS  MERCANTILES. 

PROPUESTA  PARA  UNA  CORRESPONDENCIA 

Seiior  Don  A.  B.,  ^ 

N * I Nueva  York  d S de  Fehrero  de  1348. 

Muy  Senor  mio  deseando  estaolecer  en  esa  ciudad  una  correspondencia 
Begura  cca  un  sujeto  de  probidad  para  las  varias  comisiones  y encargos,  qu© 
puedan  ocurrirme  en  los  asnntos  de  mi  comercio ; informado  de  las  circun» 
fetancias  y calidades,  que  concurren  en  V.  me  tomo  la  libertad  de  suplicails 
se  sirva  accptar  el  encargo  de  corresponsal  mio,  y de  informarme  de  su 
resol ucion  para  mi  gobierno. 

El  buen  nornbre,  que  la  persona  y casa  de  V.  tienen  en  esta,  me  inducen 
igualmenle  d ofrecerle  mis  sei*vicios  para  cuanto  fuere  de  su  agrado ; y ora 
ace|)te  V.  mi  proposicion,  6 no,  apreciare  mucho  se  sirva  honrarme  con  sua 
preceptos. 

Dios  guarde  la  vida  de  V.  los  muchos  anos  que  le  desea  su  muy  atenlo 
^ervidor.  Q.  B S.  M. 

C.  D 


CONTESTACION. 


Sr.  Dn.  C.  D.,  ) 

N ) N , d — de de  1848. 

Muy  Senor  mio : el  honor  de  ser  corresponsal  de  una  persona  del  crddito 
de  V.  no  puede  dejar  de  aceptarse  con  la  mayor  satisfaccion.  Yo  desde 
luego  le  admito,  daudole  las  mas  sinceras  gracias  por  esta  prueba  con  que 
su  confianza  me  distingue,  y ofreciendo  servirle  con  la  punctualidad  y 
bonradez  que  me  son  propias. 

Espero  manifestar  d V.  la  sinceridad  de  mis  sentimientos  luego  que  sc 
»irva  emplearme,  segun  propone  : y me  aprovechard  igualmento  de  sus  ofer- 
d que  estoy  muy  reconocido. 

Dios  guarde  d V.  muchos  ahos  como  le  pide  S.  S.  S. 


Q.  B.  S M. 

A.  B. 


AVISO  DE  EMBARQUE. 

fir.  Dn.  E.  F.,  ) 

N ] N , d-^  de de  1848 

Muy  Senor  mio : en  esta  fecha  y de  conformidad  con  las  drdenes  de  V 
be  ©mbarcado  de  su  cuenta  y riesgo,  d bordo  de  ia  fragata  Espanola  KI 

N.,  the  name  of  the  residence  of  the  person  addressed  to. 

^ These  words  according  to  circumstances,  must  be,  Muy  Senorcs  miu^ 
Muy  Senor  nues^ro ; Muy  Senores  nuestros. 


APPENDIX. 


539 


su  Capitau  Don  Pr<5spero  liigero,  con  destiiio  d y d la  drden  y 

consignacion  do  Don  F G.  los  efectos  quo  constan  en  la  Factura  y Conoci- 
aiieiito  que  incluyo  en  esta. 

Espero  que  sean  del  gusto  de  V.  asi  por  su  calidad,  como  por  su  precio,  y 
que  llogueu  bien  acoiidicionados,  pues  se  ban  enfardado  con  mucho  esmero 
Celebrard  la  buena  salud  y prosperidades  de  V.  y soy  su  muy  afecto  se- 
fiirc  sorvidor  Q-  B-  S.  M. 

G.  IL 


\ 

FACTURA. 

Factura  de  los  efectos,*  que  por  cuenta  y riesgo  de  Don  E.  F.  del  corner* 

510  de y con  la  marca  y numero  del  mdrgen,  tengo  embarcados  d borda 

lie  la  fragata  Espanola,  El  Aguila,  capitan  Don  Prbspero  Ligero,  con  des- 
tino  ^ para  entregar  d la  6rden  de  Don  F G : d saber  • 


F G. 


1 d 10 — Diez  Cajas  de Pesos. 

11  ^7 — Diez  y siete  Fardos  de 

28  39 — Doce  barriles  de  Vino  de  Jerez 

40  45 — Seis  huacales  do  loza 

Pesos. 

Derechos 

Gastos 

Comision  d por  ciento — 

S.  Y.  O.  Total : Pesos. 

N.  N d de . 


G.  H 


- CONOCIMIENTO. 

Digo  yo  ^Don  Prospero  Ligero)  capitan  y maestro  que  soy  de  la  fragata, 

{goleta,  &c.)  que  Dios  salve  nombrada  El  Aguila,  de  porte  de tonela- 

das,  que  al  presente  esta  surta,  anclada,  enjuta  y bien  acondicionada  en  este 

puerto  de  N para  con  la  buena  ventura,  seguir  este  presente  viage  al 

puerto  de  S , que  conozco  haber  recibido  do  vos  Don {aqui  la  enu- 

meracion  de  los  articulos  embarcados)  todos  enjutos  y bien  acondicioirados 
y marcados  con  la  marca  del  mdrgen  : con  los  cuales  mo  oblige,  llevdndom 
Dios  en  buen  salvamento  con  el  diclio  mi  barco,  al  d ’.ho  puerto,  de  acudL 

por  VOS  y en  vuestro  nombre  d Don pagdndorne  de  flete  d razon  do 

— — por con por  ciento  de  capa  y sus  averia^  acostumbradas,  a 

eptilo  de  comercio  Y para  cumplir  y guardar  todo  lo  dicho  y expuesto,  obh- 

* When  the  articles  consist  of  one  or  two  kinds  only,  it  is  said — Factura 
de  ciento  y veinte  cajas  de  azucar  or  de  sesenta  hocoyes  de  azucar  y 
tincuenta  zurrones  ae  ailil^  &.c. 


540 


APPENDIX. 


go  mi  persona  y bieiies,  juntamente  con  el  dicho  mi  barco,  sus  fletes,  ajiuxo 
jos,  y lo  inejor  parado  de  dl.  En  fd  de  lo  ciial  os  doy  tres  conociniicntos  de  ub 
«,enor,  firmados  de  mi  nombre  por  mi,  6 por  mi  coatramaestro,  6 segQiido  (an- 

tigiiamente  mi  Escribano)  el  uno  cumplido,  los  otros  no  valgaii.  N i 

3 do  Enero  de  1848.  Prospero  Ligeuo. 


CONTESTACION  A LA  ANTERIOR 
Sor  Da. , ^ 

N \ N Y.,d  — de de  1848 

Muy  Senor  mio:  Don  N.  N.  mi  corresponsal  en me  avisa  con  fecha 

de haber  llegado  a aquel  puerto  procedente  de  el  de la  fragata 

Aguila,  su  capital!  Dn.  Prdspero  Ligero,  d igualmente  haber  recibioc  de 
este,  bien  acondicionados,  todos  los  efectos  que  conslaii  de  la  factura,  y 

conocimiento,  que  V.  me  remitid  con  su  muy  aprec  able  de 

Incluyo  eii  esta  una  ]etra  de  cambio,  valor  de a ocho  dias  vista,  a 

cargo  de  los  Sehores de  ese  cornercio,  que  se  servira  V.  cobrar,  y 

abonar  d mi  cueiita. 

Doy  a V.  las  mas  expresivas  gracias  por  la  eficacia  y cuidado  con  que  se 
•^irvo  desempehar  mis  encargos,  y me  repito  su  muy  afecto  S.  S.  Q.  B.  S.  M 

F.  G 


LETRA  DE  CAMBIO. 

Nueva  Yorky  d — de de  1848.  Por Pesos  Fuertes. 

A ocho  dias  vista,  se  servirdn  VV.  mandar  pagar  por  esta  mi  primera  de 
cambio  (no  habidudolo  hecho  ya  por  la  segunda,  ni  tercera  de  esta  misma 

fecha,  y valor)  a la  drden  de  Don  la  caiitidad  de  valor  recibido 

de  dicho  senor,  que  anotardn  VV.  en  cuenta  segun  aviso  {or  sm  otro  aviso) 
de  S.  S.  S Q.  B.  S.  M. 

F C 


EL  ENDOSO 

rim  era. 

A Don en 

Pagucso  d la  drden  de  Don  N.  Y.,  Febrero  8 de  1848. 


UN  PAGARE. 

SON  $150.  Nueva  York  a S de  Febrero  de  IS'  u 

Pagare  d veinte  dias,  contados  desde  la  fecba,  d Don  Guzman  de  Alfa- 
’Tiche,  6 su  ordeii  la  cautidad  de  ciento  y cincuonta  pesos,  valor  recibido  d< 
iuiho  sejior  en  dinero  efectivo  (d  en  generos)  L toda  mi  satisfacr’cn. 

Gjxes  de  PAa«^Mnr,/E 


APPENDIX. 


511 


UN  VALE 

Vale  por  quinieiitos  pesos  fuertes,  quo  yo,  el  abajo  firniado,  Pedio  PeroZj 
reciuo  y del  comercio  de  esta,  me  oblige  d.  pagar  el  dia  21  del  prfixirno  mea 
do  Agosto  d la  6rden  de  Du.  Pedro  Hernandez,  y en  el  dornicilio  do  Don 
Rafat  I Maiigual,  del  mismo  comercio ; cuya  cantidad  precede  de  varies 
fdneros  que  en  este  dia  me  ha  vendido,  y yo  coiifieso  haber  recibido  d ir.i 
3iilora  satisfaccion. — Filadelfia  d 9 de  tebrerode  1843 

SON  500  PS.  FS.  Pedro  Perez. 


CARTA  ORDEN. 

Sr.  Dn.  N.  N.  ) 

A \ C , d — de Je  1848. 

Mny  Sehor  rnio:  en  virtud  do  la  presente,  se  servird  V.  e.itregar  {oi 
pagar)  al  dador  Don  Juan  Cancela,  la  cantidad  de  doscientoy  y cincuenU 
pesos  fuertes  ($250.)  valor  recibido  del  mismo,  que  anotard  V.  en  cuenta, 
sin  otro  aviso,  (segun  aviso,)  de  su  afectisimo  S.  S.  Q.  B.  S. 

D.  M 


CARTA  DE  AVISO. 

Sr.  Dn.  N.  N.  ) 

A I C , d — de de  1848 

Muy  Sehor  mio:  con  esta  fecha  he  librado  d cargo  do  V.  y por 
cuenta,  una  letra  por  valor  de  doscientos  y cincuenta  pesos  fuertes,  ($250.) 
pajraderos  a Don  Juan  Cancela.  Espero  le  haga  V.  el  honor  etcosturnbrado, 
y me  la  carg'ie  on  cuenta,  pues  yo  se  la  dejo  abonada.  Pasolo  V.  bien,  y 
mande  d su  muy  atento  S.  S.  Q.  B.  S.  M. 

D.  M. 


CARTA  DE  RECOMENDACION. 

Muy  Sehor  mio,  y amigo  : Dn.  N.  N.  dador  de  la  presente,  pasa  d esa 
a asuntos  propios,  (con  el  objeto  de  recuperar  su  salud.)  Es  un  sujeto  de 
todo  mi  aprecio,  y como  tal  se  le  recomiendo  d V.  d quien  agradecerd  comr 
Dropias  cuantos  favores  se  sirviere  hacerle  ; quedando  yo  obligado  d recipro- 
•arlos  d V.  siempre  que  lenga  la  bondad  de  proporcionarme  ocasion. 

Puede  suceder  que  dicho  Sehor,  mi  recomendado,  haya  rr.enester  algun 
iinero,  en  cuyo  caso  se  servird  V.  franquearle  hasta  la  cantidad  de  mil  7 
quinieiitos  pesos  <^$1500.)  constituyendome  yo  responsable  d abonar  d V.  la 
que  le  entrc‘gare,  y de  la  cual  tomara  V.  recibo  por  dupliccdo,  d cuya  vista 
je  abouard  la  que  fuere. — Para  evitar  contingencias,  va  au  firma  d cout' 
naacioii  de  la  mia. 


542 


APPENDIX. 


Estaudo  seguro  de  que  V.  tendrd  particular  satisfaociou  en  hacer  el 
conocimieuto  de  una  persona  de  tan  apreciables  circunstancias,  y quo  este 
nnsmo  1©  estimulard  d desernpenar  perfectamento  mi  encargo,  reitero  d V 
mi  alecto  y quedo  como  siempre  d sus  ordenes  S.  S.  S. 

Q.  B.  S.  M. 

M.  V C.  R.  M 


'CIRCULAR 

Sr.  Dn.  Frcfticisco  Canales 

N , d 14  de  Fehrero  de  1848 

May  Senor  nuestro:  permitanos  V.  que  nos  tomemos  la  iibertad  de 
anunciarle  que  acabamos  de  establecer  en  esta  ciudad  (puerto,  villa,  &c.) 
una  casa  de  comercio  bajo  la  firma  de  Cancela  y Mangual. 

Nuestro  caudal,  y la  experiencia  de  los  negocios,  que  hemos  adquiridr. 
durante  el  tiempo  que  hemos  trabajado  en  el  escritorio  d©  los  Senores  RuiiJ 
y Compaiiia,  (que  nos  ban  permitido  nos  valgamos  de  su  nombre,)  nos 
ponen  en  estado  de  desernpenar  los  negocios  que  se  nos  encarguen,  d satis- 
faccion  de  las  personas,  que  se  dignen  honrarnos  con  su  confianza. 

Dios  guard©  d V.  muchos  anos  como  desean  sus  muy  ateiitos  servidores. 

Q.  B.  S.  M. 

CANCELA  Y MANGUAL. 

Firma  de  Juan  T.  Cancela — Cancela  y Mangual. 

“ Rafael  U.  Mangual — Cancela  y Mangual. 


ORDEN  PARA  HACER  UN  SEGURO. 

Senores  Navarro  y Perea 

N.  Y , d 10  de  Febrero  de  1848. 

Muy  senores  nuestros : d bordo  de  la  fragata  Espanola,  Isabela,  Capitau 

Francisco  Chaves,  que  hac©  viaj©  d hemos  registrado  por  nuestra 

cuenta  los  efectos  que  constan  de  la  Factura  y Conocimieuto  adjulito  La 
fragata  es  nueva,  y velera,  el  capitan  muy  experimentado  y se  hard  d la 
vela  pasado  manana. — Estas  noticias  serdn  suficientes  para  que  VV.  puedau 
proceder  d los  Seguros,  que  les  suplicamos  hagun  con  un  veinticinco  poi 
oiemo  do  anmento  por  ganancias  imaginarias. 

Nos  rep^tiraos  de  VV  con  afecto  S.  S.  S. 

Q.  B.  S.  M. 

CANCEl.A  V MANGUAL 


APPENDIX. 


543 


Dsben 

18*47. 
Encro  13. 


CUENTA  CORrJENTE. 

Los  Sres.  Duvivier  y Wogaii  eii  su  cuenta  corriente 
con  M.  y B.  Navarro. 

1847 


Han  db 
HABSSi. 


Import©  de  la  Fa- 
tura  remitida  por 

el  Pepe 

Marzo  9.  Pagado  por  el  segu- 
ro  del  Arrogant©.. . 
Tunio  23.  Pagado  por  su  cuen- 
ta k D.  E.  Peug- 
r\et 


S.  Y.  O 


Enero  5.  Producto  liquido 
del  azdcar  recibi- 
do  por  El  Aguila . $ 
Abril  17.  Valor  de  su  Letra 
de  cambio  k cargo 

de  N 

Febrero  11.  Alcance  k su  favor 
quo  pasd  d cuenta 
nueva 


(Salvo  yerro,  d Omision) 

N.  Y.,  Febrero  11  de  1848. 

M.  Y B.  Navarro 


CUENTA  DE  UNA  DEUDA. 

Don  Lazarillo  de  Tonnes  debe  d. 

Pedro  de  Urdemalas.  Pesos. 

Por  dos  casacas  de  pano,  superfino,  una  azul  y otra  negra $ 

Por  la  hechura  y avios  do  dos  chalecos 

Por  id.  id.  dos  pantaloiies 

Por  la  compostura  de  un  sobretodo 


N.  Y d de de  1848.  Total $ 


RECIBO 

He  recibido  de  Don  Leopoldo  Peugnet  la  cantidad  de  ciento.  cuarenta  y 
aueve  pesos,  tres  y medio  reales  por  saldo  de  todas  cuentas  hasta  la  fecha 


Nueva  York  d 8 do  Febrero  de  1848. 

Francisco  Estevan 

Soc  Pesos  149.3.6.  (or  $149-43|.; 


OTRO. 

Raoibi  de  Don  Fulano  Droguete  sesenta  pesos  d cuenta  de  mayor  cantidad 
Jauja  d 11  de  Diciembre  de  1800. 


Son  60  Pesos. 


Pascual  Bobo- 


544 


APPENDIX. 


TABLA  DE  LA  MONEDA  CORRIENTE  EN  ESPANA,  \ LAJ 
REPUBLICAS  DE  AMERICA. 

COBRE. 

2 maravf^dises 

2 ochavos 

cuarlos 

4 reales  de  vellon 

5 pesetas 

4 pesetas  columnarlas 

'’LATA. 

I Duro,  peso  fuerte,  peso,  6 escudo  de  plata,  o silver  dollar.... ytile  $1.00 


I Medio  duro,  6 escudo  de  vellon,  half  a dollar 50 

I Peseta  colunmaria,  quarter  of  a dollar 25 

I Real  de  plata  Americano,  New  York  shilling 12^ 

I Medio  real,  medio,  New  York  sixpence OG^ 


Valor  nominal.  Valor  real 

1 peseta  provincial  6 Sevillana,  20  cents.  16  cents 

2 reales  de  velloii,  half  pistareen 10  “ 8 “ 

1 real  de  vellon,  6 34  maravedises,  quarter  pis- 
tareen  5 “ 4 “ 

OHO 

Valor  nom  Valor 
inal.  real. 

1 Onza  ii  onza  de  oro,  a doubloon $16.00  $15.56 

I Onza,  (cuatro  escudos,)  half  of  a doubloon 8.00  7.76 

J Un  doblon  de  ^ dos  a Quarter  of  a doubloon 4.00  3.88 

J Un  dobloncito,  6 an  escudo,  an  eighth  of  a doubloon.  2.00  1.34 

'g  Un  escudito,  un  durillo,  6 veinten,  a sixteenth  of  a 

doubloon 1.00  37 


valen  1 ochavo. 

1 cuarto. 

1 real  de  vellon 

1 peseta. 

1 peso,  or  duro. 

2 


CARTAS  FAMILIARES. 

Oarta  de  Don  Gregorio  Mayans  al  Dr.  Don  Assensio  Sales 
sohre,  el  modo  de  FsESPonder. 

Muy  Senor  mio,  y mi  Amigo : En  el  trato  familiar  solemos  hablar  con 
libertad,  y con  aquella  confianza  que  merecen  los  amigos : pero  por  escritc 
ftiele  ser  peligroso  expiicarse  con  la  misma  claridad ; porque  permanece  b 


APPENDIX. 


545 


«enioria  de  lo  que  se  escribe : y aunque  el  amigo  sea  fiel,  tal  vez  no  lo  ec 
. i que  hereda  sus  cartas,  y con  el  tiempo  paran  estas  en  donde  m^nos  se 
oiensa.  For  eso  es  may  prudente  la  duda  do  V.  sobre  el  Modo  con  que 
Uno  debe  portarse  por  escrito. 

Homos  de  distiiiguir  el  que  pregunta  del  que  responde.  Aquel  tiene 
mayor  libertad  ; [mnjue  puede  callar  sin  nota ; <3  hacer  la  pregunta  con 
arte,  del  modo  rn^iios  ofensivo,  y mas  cauteloso.  Si  io  que  se  ha  de  pre- 
guntar  tiene  conexioii  con  la  ofensa,  y leido  no  puede  dejar  de  causarla  j 
asmos  de  distiiiguir  las  preguntas  4 que  no  nos  obliga  la  necesidad  de  las 
voluiitarias.  Las  primeras  son  inescusables,  y asi  deben  hacerse  iel  modo 
mas  cauto;  esto  es  mdnos  circimstanciado,  respecto  de  la  inteligencia  de 
otros,  con  quien  no  se  trata.  Las  segundas  deben  evitarse  cuanto  sea  posible. 
Ilecha  la  pregunta,  se  ha  de  considerar,  si  conviene  responder,  6 no?  Si 
es  necesario,  6,  si  conviene  responder,  se  puede  hacer  con  palabras  alusivas 
4 la  pregunta,  callando  la  persona,  6 el  negocio  do  que  se  trata,  y respondi- 
endo  en  suposicion  del  hecho ; si  bien  este  4 voces  es  tal,  que  41  mismo 
schala  la  persona,  y el  hecho,  por  mucho  que  se  quiera  ocultar : como  se 
ve  en  las  cartas  de  Ciceron  4 Atico.  Si  es  peligroso  responder  absoluta- 
mente,  debe  callarse : y en  casos  de  traicicn,  entregarse  la  pregunta  a 
quien  convenga  por  no  hacerse  complice,  ui  aun  disimulador  en  el  delito  de- 
.esa  Majestad. 

Cuando  Don  Joseph  Antonio  de  Quiros  salib  de  la  prision  de  la  Inquisi- 
cion,  y me  escribi6,  pedia  la  Caridad  que  yo  le  respondiese,  y lo  hice  de 
modo,  que  habiendole  aprisionado  de  nuevo,  se  alabaron  mucho  mis  respues- 
tas,  pues  dije  4 aquel  insigne  Varon  lo  que  le  convenia,  pensando  lo  que  le 
jodia  suceder.  Callar  era  contra  la  ainistad,  que  siempre  le  habia  yo  pro- 
fesado,  y le  debia  ; habiar  pedia  mucha  prudencia. 

Estoy  leyendo,  y apuntando  los  tres  dltimos  libros  de  Dion  Casio,  que 
publicb  en  Roma  en  el  ano  1724  Nicolas  Carminio  Falcon,  habiendolos 
sacado  de  la  Libreria  Vaticana. 

Usted  me  mande:  y nuestro  Sehor  guarde  4 Usted  muchos  anos  como 
deseo.  Olivia  4 6 de  Junio  de  1750. 

B.  L.  M.  de  Usted, 

Su  mas  seguro  servidor,  y amigo, 

Don  Gregorio  Mayans,  y Sicji  r 

Al  Dr  Don  Assensio  Sales 


l7a?ta  de  Don  Antonio  Solis  d Don  Antonio  CarnerOy  sohn 
asuntos  familiares, 

Senor  y amigo  mio:  vamos  al  negocio,  que  es  muy  tarde  para  no  decii 
o que  se  viene  4 la  pluma.  La  carta  que  vino  en  mi  pliego  se  di6  con  lo 
Mivertoncia  que  V.  previno,  en  cuanto  a su  seguridad. 

Las  vitelas  ban  hecho  ruido.  Solo  me  han  dicho  que  el  San 


646 


APPENDIX. 


viene  gordo,  y sera  menester  enflaquecerle  de  maiiera  que  parezca,  algn 
tnas  peiiitente  ; y que  tenga  los  brazes  levantados  en  accion  do  predicar  el 
juicio  final.  V.  vaya  teniendo  cuidado  con  que  ya  se  piden  gollerias,  como 
si  fuoran  vitelas ; y se  ban  de  pagar  como  las  miniaturas ; ponga  V.  uno  y 
otro  en  el  libro  de  las  partidas  que  se  deben,  por  lo  que  pudiere  suceder. 

Espero,  en  respuesta  del  correo  que  viene,  la  censura  de  V.  y del  senor 
marques  sobre  lo  que  ha  parecido  mi  libro  en  esas  regiones  del  norte,  qii® 
oor  aca  continuan  sus  aplausos ; aunque  se  habran  vendido  unos  ciento  y 
cincuenta  tomos,  pues  en  todo  influye  la  falta  de  dinero  y en  Madrid  hay 
pocos  hombres  que  tengan  dos  reales  de  A echo  juntos. 

lie  pagado  enteramente  A D.  N.,  porque  me  tenia  con  cuidado  el  maes- 
tro de  obras.  A V.  se  debe  la  de  la  Nueva  Espana  y tengo  por  evidente  que 
no  se  habria  impreso  si  no  fuera  por  el  socorro  de  V. ; porque  la  ayuda  de 
costa  todavia  se  esta  en  el  aire.  Y asi  puede  V.  llamar  suya  la  historia  y 
las  demas  razones.  A esta  accion  que  ha  hecho  tanto  ruido,  de  habcr 
acompanado  al  Divinisimo  nuestro  rey,  escribi  estos  dos  sonetos,  porque  su 
Majestad  so  acord6  de  mi  antigua  vena.  V.  vera  en  ellos  el  trabajo  quo  me 
han  costado,  por  el  que  le  costard  el  leerlos.  A D.  Martin  tenemos  ya  con 
titulo  de  su  Majestad,  en  que  le  nombra  Corrector  general  de  los  libros  de 
estos  reinos  ; y estd  en  dnimo  de  ser  tan  conocido  comp  Murcia  de  la  Liana. 
Tiene  cincuenta  doblones  de  salario,  y lo  que  produjeren  las  erratas.  Pone 
desde  luego  d las  6rdenes  de  V.  esta  dignidad,  habiendo  conseguido  el  sei 
persona  de  inuchos  envidiosos. 

Sirvase  V.  ponerme  A.  L.  P.  de  mi  senora  Dona  N.,  y quedese  lo  demas 
para  otra  ocasion.  Guarde  Dios  d V.  muchos  anos.  Madrid,  &c. 

Don  AxNtonio  de  SoLis. 


Carta  del  P,  Jose  Francisco  de  Isla  d su  hermana  Dona  Ftoji.,’ 
cisca  de  Isla  y Lozada. 

Villagarcia,  a 24  de  Julio  de  175i:v 

Mujer  de  tu  marido:  has  dado  en  la  mania,  de  algunas  semanas  d e.'^ta 
parte,  de  que  te  pierdo  el  respeto,  sin  que  yo  acierte  d concebir  como  sc 
puede  perder  lo  que  jamas  se  ha  tenido.  Pero  tii  eres  una  pequena  dia- 
blesa,  y sabes  mas  que  Merlin,  por  lo  que  te  estimard  me  comuniques  esie 
secrete,  que  puede  importar  para  mas  de  dos  ocasiones.  Hallar  una  cosa 
dntes  de  perderse  es  habilidad  que  d cada  paso  la  usan  los  ladrones ; pero 
perderse  lo  que  jamas  se  poseyb,  no  lo  habia  tenido  por  posible,  hasta  que 
tii  me  aseguras  que  es  cosa  evidente.  Al  fin,  si  te  he  perdido  el  respeto, 
fijare  cedulones  en  las  esouinas  de  los  correos,  (porque  has  de  saber  que 
los  corrdos  tienen  esquiaas,)  para  que  qualquiera  persona  que  haya  hadado 
an  respeto  que  se  perdi6,  acuda  d ti,  A quien  pertenece,  que  se  le  pagard  cl 
hallazgo,  y por  lo  que  toca  d mi,  doy  palabra  de  guardar  tan  bien  el  primere 


A.rPENDIX. 


547 


que  te  tenga,  que  no  solo  no  se  pueda  perder,  pero  que  niiiguiio  me  le 
pueda  encontrar.  No  sabia  que  estuviese  por  prior  de  es©  convent©  de  S. 
Agustin  el  Mro.  Ocampo.  Es  de  los  hombres  sabios,  religiosos,  honradcs 
) atentos  que  he  conocido.  Dice  bien : trat^le  mucho  en  Pamplona,  y 
Eiempre  le  he  profesado  singular  estimacion.  La  he  hecho  muy  grand©  de 
la  inemoria  con  que  me  honra,  y de  la  amistad  que  me  conserva.  To 
estimard  mucho,  asi  d ti,  como  d Nicolas,  que  I©  correspondais  en  vuestro 
nombre  y en  el  mio  con  el  mas  fino  aprecio,  tratdndol©  con  toda  confian2:a5 
y eirviendule  en  quanto  se  le  ofrezca  Si  dntes  d©  ahora  hubiera  sabido  su 
destine,  antes  de  ahora  os  habria  hecho  esta  recomendacion  ; porque  tengo 
singular  complacencia  en  que  los  hombres  particulares  seau  particular- 
mente  distinguidos.  Si  todos  fueran  como  el  Rmo.  Ocampo,  no  habria 
quejas,  porque  no  habria  Gerundios.  Dile  cuanto  quisieres  d©  mi  parte,  en 
ia  inteligencia  do  que  en  nada  te  excederds.  Ahora  vete  d pasear,  que  yo 
voy  d escribir  otras  cartas. 

Sehora,  B.  T.  P (con  uii  cardo)'el  mas  atento  capellan  d©  Ti. 
mia  YO 


Carta  de  Luscinda  a Cardenio. 

Sehor:  La  palabra  que  Don  Fernando  os  did  de  hablar  d vuestro  padre 
para  que  hablase  al  mio,  la  ha  cuinplido  mucho  mas  en  su  gusto  que  en 
vuestro  provecho.  Sabed,  sehor,  que  el  me  ha  pedido  por  esposa,  y mi  pa- 
dre, llevado  de  la  ventaja  que  el  piensa  que  Don  Fernando  os  hace,  ha  ve- 
nido  en  lo  que  quiere  con  tantas  veras,  que  d©  aqui  d dos  dias  se  ha  d©  hacer 
el  desposorio,  tan  secret©  y tan  d solas  que  solo  han  de  ser  testigos  los  Cielos 
y alguna  gente  de  casa-  Cual  yo  quedo,  imaginadlo ; si  os  cumple  venir, 
vedlo,  y si  os  quiero  bien  6 no  el  suceso  deste  negocio  os  lo  dard  d entender. 
A Dios  plega  que  esta  llegue  d vuestras  manos  dntes  que  la  mia  se  vea  en 
condicion  de  juntarso  con  la  de  quien  tan  mal  sabe  guardar  la  fe  que  promete. 

Luscinda. 

{Don  Quijote,  ch.  XXV 11.,  p.  iD 


Carta  de  Don  Carlos  d Dona  Francisca 

Bien  mio  : si  no  consigo  hablar  con  Usted,  hard  lo  posible  para  que  llegue 
1 sus  manos  esta  carta.  Apenas  me  separd  de  Usted,  encontrd  en  la  posadc. 
ul  que  yo  Ilamaba  mi  enemigo  ; y al  verle,  no  sd  como  no  espird  de  dolci 
We  mandh  que  saliera  inmediatament©  de  la  ciudad,  y fud  precise  cbede* 

serle.  Yo  me  llamo  Don  Carlos,  no  Don  Felix. Don  Diego  cs  mi  tio 

Vi  7a  Usted  dichosj*  y olvide  para  siempre  d su  infeliz  amigo. 

Carlos  ds  Urbina. 

(Moratzn — El  Si  de  las  Ninas,  Act  111 , sc.  xii.) 


APPENDIX. 


548 

/ 

Carta  de  Don  Quijotc  de  la  Mancha  a Sancho  Panza,  gobemadoi 
de  la  insula  Barataria. 

**  <'^uaiido  csperaba  oir  nuevas  de  tus  descuidos  6 imperlinencias,  Sanclic 
amigo,  las  oi  de  tus  discrecioiies,  de  que  di  por  ello  gracias  parliculares  a. 
Cielo,  el  cual  del  estiercol  sabe  levantar  los  pobrcs,  y de  los  loiitos  hacei 
discretes.  Diceiirne  que  gobieriias  como  si  fueses  lioinbre,  y que  eres  hom- 
bre  como  si  fueses  bestia,  segun  es  la  humildad  con  que  to  tratas : y quiero 
que  adviertas,  Saiicho,  que  muchas  veces  conviene  y es  necesario  por  la 
autoridad  del  oficio,  ir  contra  la  humildad  del  corazon,  porque  el  buen  adorno 
de  la  persona  que  esta  puesta  en  graves  cargos,  ha  de  ser  conlcrme  a lo  que 
ellos  piden,  y no  a la  medida  de  lo  que  su  humilde  condicion  la  /ncliiia 
Vistete  bien,  que  un  palo  compuesto  no  parece  palo.  no  digo  que  traigaa 
dijes,  ni  galas,  ni  que  siendo  Juez  te  vistas  como  soldado,  sino  que  te  adoi 
nes  con  el  hd.bito  que  tu  oficio  requiere,  con  tal  que  sea  limpio  y bien  com- 
puesto. Para  ganar  la  voluntad  del  pueblo  que  gobiernas,  entre  otras  has 
de  hacer  dos  cosas ; la  una  ser  bien  criado  con  todos,  auntjue  esto  ya  otra 
vez  te  lo  he  dicho,  y la  otra  procurar  la  abundancia  de  los  mantenimientos, 
que  no  hay  cosa  que  mas  fatigue  el  corazon  de  los  pobres  que  la  hambre  y 
la  carestia. 

“No  hagas  muchas  pragmaticas,  y si  las  hicieres  procura  que  sean  bue- 
iias,  y sobre  todo  que  se  guardeii  y cumplan,  que  las  pragmaticas  que  no  se 
guardan,  lo  misrno  es  que  si  no  lo  fuesen,  dntes  dan  a entender  que  el  Prin- 
cipe quo  tuvo  discrecion  yauloridad  para  hacerlas,  no  tuvo  valor  para  hacer 
que  se  guardasen : y las  leyes  que  aternorizan  y no  se  ejecutan,  vienen  a 
ser  como  la  viga,  rey  de  las  ranas,  que  al  principio  las  espant6,  y con  el 
tiempo  la  menospreciaron  y se  subieron  sobre  ella.  Se  padre  de  las  vir- 
tudes,  y padrastro  de  los  vicios.  No  seas  siempre  riguroso,  ni  siempre  blanao 
y escoge  el  medio  entre  estos  dos  extremos,  que  en  esto  esta  el  punto  de  la 
discrecion.  Visita  las  cdrceles,  las  carnicerias  y las  plazas,  que  la  presencia 
del  Gobernador  en  lugares  tales  es  de  mucha  imponancia.  Consuela  d los 
presos  que  esperan  la  brevedad  de  su  despacho.  Se  coco  d los  carniceros. 
que  po*  entdnees  igualan  los  pesos,  y se  espantajo  d las  placeras  por  la  mis- 
ma  razon.  No  te  muestres  (aunque  por  ventura  los  seas,  lo  cual  yo  no 
creo)  codicioso,  mujeriego,  ni  gloton,  porque  en  sabiendo  el  pueblo  y los  que 
te  trataii  tu  inclinacion  determinada,  por  alli  te  dardn  baterra  hasta  derri- 
barte  en  el  profundo  de  la  perdicion.  Mira  y remira,  pasa  y repasa  los  con- 
sejos  y docurnentos  que  te  di  por  escrito  dntes  que  de  aqui  partieses  d tu  go- 
bierno,  y verds  corno  hallas  en  ellos,  si  los  guardas,  una  ayuda  de  costa  quo 
te  sobrelleve  los  trabajos  y dificultades  que  d cada  paso  d los  Gobernadorea 
se  les  ofrecen.  Escribe  d tus  senores  y mudstrateles  agradecido,  que  la  in- 
graf'tud  es  hija  de  la  soberbia  y uno  do  los  mayores  pecados  que  se  sabe,  y 
ia  persona  que  es  agradecida  a los  que  bien  le  han  hecho,  da  indicic  qu< 
tambien  lo  serd  d Dios,  que  tantos  bienes  le  hizo  y do  continun  le  hace 


APPENDIX. 


549 


“ La  Sefiota  Duquesa  despachb  un  propio  con  td  vestido  y otro  presente 
i tu  mujer  Teresa  Paiiza;  por  mornentos  esperamos  respuesta.  Yo  he 
estado  un  poco  mal  dispuesto  de  un  cierto  gateamiento,  que  me  suscedi^  nc 
muy  ^ cuento  de  inis  narices  ; pero  no  fue  nada,  que  si  hay  encantadorea 
que  me  maltraten,  tambien  los  hay  que  me  defiendan.  Avisame  si  el  nia 
yordomo  que  esta  contigo  tuvo  que  ver  en  las  acciones  de  la  IVifaldi,  com<» 
lii  sospechaste,  y de  todo  lo  que  te  sucediere  me  irds  dando  aviso,  pues  es 
Ian  corto  el  carnino,  cuanto  mas  que  yo  pienso  dejar  presto  esta  vida  ociosa 
en  quo  estoy,  pues  no  naci  para  ella.  CJn  negocio  se  me  ha  ofrecido,  que 
Greo  que  me  ha  de  poner  en  desgracia  de  estos  sehores ; pero  aunque  se  me 
da  mucho,  no  se  me  da  nada,  pues  en  fin,  en  fin,  tengo  de  cumplir  d.ntes 
con  mi  profesion  que  con  su  gusto,  conforme  d lo  que  suele  decirse ; amicus 
Plato;  sed  magis  arnica  veritas.  Digote  este  latin,  poique  me  doy  a 
entender  que  despues  que  eres  Gobernador  le  habrds  aprendido.  Y d Dios, 
el  cual  te  guarde  de  que  ninguno  te  tenga  Idstima. 

Tu  amigo, 

Don  Quijote  de  la  Mancha.” 
{Ch.  li.^  p,  a.] 


ESQUELAS. 

M.  V (el  Sr.,  la  Sra.,  or  la  Srta.  A)  agradecerd  mucho  que  el  Senoi 

N.  (la  Sonora  or  Senorita  B.)  le  (la)  favorezca,  (honre,)  con  su  compahia 
el  lunes  8 del  corriente  despues  de  las  7 de  la  tarde. 

Calle  de  Troyoy  Febrero  2 de  1848. 


Sr  D.  M Miercoles,  10  de  Febrero  de  1848. 

Querido  amigo : esta  noche  vendrdn  d esta  muy  de  V.  algunos  sugetos 
que  deseo  la  pasen  con  satisfaccioii  ; para  esto  cuento  con  V.  cuya  pre- 
eeiicia  espero  para  hacer  brillante  la  compania.  A Dios,  hasta  la  vista. 

Amigo  y servidor  de  V. — M.  V 


M.  V.  sail! da  afectuosa  y respetuosamente  al  Sr. , y le  quedara 

tnuy  agradezido  si  se  diere  lugar  para  pasar  en  su  compahia  la  tarde  do 
5ueves  prbximo  despues  de  las  7. 

Lunes  Febrero  — de  1848. 


M.  V B.  L.  M.  al  Sehor (B.  L.  P.  d la  Sra.  or  Sta  N.)  y 

accpta  con  gusto  su  invitacion,  por  la  que  le  da  muchas  gracias. 

Maries  


M V—  B.  li.  M.  al  Sr. y siente  no  poder  gozar  de  su  amable 

oompahia  la  n^*che  sehalada,  por  hallarse  comprometido  de  antemano 


550 


APPENDIX. 


M V.  aaluda  amigable  y respetuosamente  al  Sr. y ucepla  con 

su  convite  para  la  noche  de 

Jueves  d w 


CEREMONIAL  DE  LAS  CARTAS. 

I or  coremonial  se  entiende  el  titulo  de  cortesia  que  se  da  & algnno,  ccnic 
Vsted,  Senoria,  <fec.,  y tambieu  el  uso  de  ciertas  formulas  a que  estd 
geducida  la  civilidad  La  manera  mas  usual  de  poner  los  sobrescritos  es  la 
aiguiento : 

A Don  A.  B del  comercio  de N 

A Don  C.  D- en ^ F 

A mi  Sra.  Da.  M.  V. 

en M. 

Don  es  el  ti^ulo  distintivo  de  la  nobleza  de  sangre  en  Espana,  bien  quo 
en  estos  liltirnos  tiempos  se  ha  prodigado  d toda  geiite  decente  ; por  lo 
mismo  las  nuevas  Repdblicas  le  han  excluido  enteramente,  y usan  solo  los 
nombres  Seiior  y SeTiora. 

Al  Senor  Francisco  P.  Santander,  Presidente  de  la  Repdblica  de  Colom- 
bia, &c. 

Con  todo,  la  costumbre  hace  que  la  mayor  parte  de  las  personas  continueu 
usando  del  Don.  Por  esto,  y para  evitar  faltas,  que  podrian  considerarse  de 
respeto,  sera  mejor  usarle  cuando  se  empiece  una  correspondeucia,  6 imitar 
el  ceremonial  que  se  observe  en  la  contestacion,  y conforrne  d 6\  usar,  6 no, 
del  Don. 

Lo  mismo  hay  que  advertir  acerca  de  la  frase  B.  L.  M.  que  mucluis 
omiten  en  cl  dia,  acabando  sus  cartas  simplemente  con  S.  S.  6 Su  amigv 
y servidoTi  &a. 


DENTRO  DE  LA  CIUDAD 


B.  L.  M. 

Al  Sr.  Dn.  N 

s.  s.  s. 

M.  V 
B L.  P. 

4 a’  Sia.  Da.  A.  S 
S A.  S.  S. 
M.  F 


B.  L.  M. 

A Don  N. 

s.  s.  s. 

M.  V. 

B.  L.  P. 

A la  Sra.  Da.  A.  S 
S A.  S.  S. 
M.  F 


B.  L.  M. 

Al  Sr.  N. 

S S.  S 
M V. 

B.  L P. 

A la  Sra.  A,  S. 

S.  A S.  S. 

M.  F. 


INDEX 


CONTAINING  AN  ALPHABETICAL  LIST  OF  THE  WORDS  USED  AS 
STANDARDS  IN  THIS  BOOK 


A. 

^ or  owe,  un,  58.— When  not  to  be  trans- 
late J,  96,  Obs.  A.— Los,  las,  96,  Obs.  B. 

About,  cerca  de,  poco  mas  6 menos  de,  al 
rededor  de,  135. 

Active  verbs,  438. 

Adjectives,  (adjetivos,)  agreement,  27,  Obs. 
A r 78.  Obs.  B. ; 97,  Obs.  D. 

Adverbs,  adverbios,  28,  Obs.  A. 

6.  ftw,  algunos,  unos,  unos  pocos,  unos 
cuanios,  44. 

^ good  deal,  mucliisimo,  196,  Obs.  A. 

A little,  un  poco,  un  poco  de,  13. 

After,  despues  de,  165.  •After  having, 

despues  de  haber,  240. 

All,  tndo,  todos,  23.  111.  149. 

Already,  ya,  todavia  aui,  118. 

Almost,  casi,  133. 

Also,  tambien,  89.  172. 

All  what,  cuanto,  153. 

And  then,  y entoiices,  y pues,  y que,  178. 

Another,  otro,  45. 

Any,  alguno,  algun,  algunos,  36. 

Anybody,  any  one,  alguno,  alguien,  22. 

Any  more,  mas,  todavia,  aun,  algun,  49. 

A few  more,  todavia  mas,  aun  mas.  Any 
more,  algunos  maa,  todavia  algunos,  49. 

Any  one,  alguno,  87. 

Any  one,  se,  143,  Obs.  A. ; 145,  Obs.  B. 

Any  other,  otro,  otros,  algun  otro,  algunos 
otros,  45. 

Anywhere,  alguna  parte,  cualquiera  parte, 
119. 

Ani!  *hing,  algo,  alguna  cosa,  13. 

As — as,  tan— como,  102.  109. 

As  far  as,  hasta,  147. 

As  many— as,  tantos— como,  51.  108. 

As  much — as,  tanto — como,  51.  108. 

As  much — as,  tanto  como,  tanto  cuanto, 
109. 

As  it  shoula  be,  como  se  debe,  deber,  bien, 
168. 

Ask  for  ito),  preguntar  por,  buscar,  infor- 
marse  de,  or  a cerca  de,  166. 

Augmentatives,  aumentativos,  32. 

And,  y,  6,  145,  Obs.  D. 

Ask  a Question  Uo),  hacer  una  pregunta, 
preguntar,  384. 

As  soon  as,  luego  que,  asi  que,  178. 

At  last,  al  fin.  Finalmente,  178. 

Apply  one’s  self  ito),  dedicarse,  apiicarse, 
323. 

Advise  ’to)  aconsejar,  342. 


All  that,  cuanto,  todo  lo  que,  347. 

Appear  (to) — to  seem,  parecer,  tener  apahefi 
cia,  370. 

Aim  at  {to),  apuntar,  tirar  al  bianco,  ;’71. 

Article  {use  of  the),  articulos,  372,  Obs.  O 
and  Appendix. 

Ago,  pasado,  hace,  hay.  Two  years  ago 
hace  dos  anos,  210. 

At  all  events,  in  all  cases,  en  todo  caso 
suceda  lo  que  suceda,  376. 

Again,  signifying  the  repetition  of  an  04> 
tion,  volver  a,  383,  Obs.  A. 

Apply  to  {to),  recurrir,  acudir,  193. 

Among,  entre,  en  medio  de,  234- 

Agree  to  a thing  {to),  convenir  en,  con,  d 
238. 

Agree  {to),  to  compose  a difference, CQn\en\tso 
Componerse,  239. 

As  to,  {as  for),  en  cuanto  a,  276. 

Afford  {to),  tener  medios,  (proporcion  de). 
Poder,  279. 

Agreement  of  verb  with  several  pronouns, 
280,  Obs. 

Again,  otra  vez.  De  nuevo.  Volver  d, 
295. 

All  over,  por  todo.  Por  toda.  Por  todas  par 
tes,  305. 

B 

Badly,  mal,106. 

Be  {to),  ser.  Estar,  59.  Ser  de,  112. 

Be  able  {to),  poder,  67.  144.  325. 

Be  better  {to),  valer  mas,  ser  mejor,  154. 

Because,  porque,  139. 

Before,  antes  de,  105.  Ante,  delante,  por, 
211.  213,  Obs.  C. 

Be  fond  of  {to),  gustarle  d uno,  88. 

Be  necessary  {to) — must,  ser  menester,  sof 
necesario,  152. 

Be  to  {to),  haber  de,  139. 153. 

Both,  ambos,  uno  y otro,  48. 

But,  sino,  pero,  24. 

But  a f { (orsolamente)  pocos ; unoa 
Jew,  \ pQC(,g . cuantos,  42, 45. 

But  few,  I solo  (or  solamente)  alguno-oa- 
’ V unos  cuantos,  43. 

But  little,  solo  un  poco,  solamente  un  poco 
muy  poco,  42. 

But,  only,  solo,  solamente,  no(v)  sino,  no  (v 
mas  que,  41. 

Be  wrong  {to),  no  tener  razon,  hacer  mal  p** 
56. 


552 


INDEX. 


Be  right  Cto\  tener  razon,  hacer  bien  en, 
o6~l. 

Be  worth  (.to),  valer,  tener,  poseer,  154. 

Be  wUling  Uo),  querer,  58. 144. 

Be  in  want  (to),  huber  menester,  82- 
Be  acQuainted  with  (to)— to  know,  conocer, 
82.  2rt3,  Obs.  A. 

Be  iil  (to),  estar  malo,  enfermo,  128. 

Be  S2tisJieU  (to),  with  some  one,  cstar  con- 
tunto  con  (or  tie)  alguien  ; con  (or  dc)  al- 
guno,  172. 

f^ecorne  (to) — to  turn,  t Imcerse.  Meterse, 
1^3.  Ser  de,  205.  To  Jit  well,  sen  tar  bien, 
caei  bien,  384. 

V-ilunj  (to),  ser  do,  Perteneccr,  199. 

By~and  by,  \\iego.  Deaquiapoco.  Dentro 
de  poco,  205. 

Be  good  Jor  nothing  (to),  no  ser  bueno  para 
natia,  para  ninguna  cosa,  212. 

Be  good  for  something  (to),  set  bueno  para 
algo,  para  alguna  cosa,  212. 

Better  than,  mas  que.  Mejor  qne,  223. 

Be  woi  tk  while  (to),  merecer.  Valer  la  pena, 
230. 

Be  well  (to),  estar  bien.  Estar  bueno.  Pa- 
sarlo.  Estar,  237.  283. 

Be  under  obligation  (to),  deber  (tenor)  obli- 
gacion.  Estar  obligado,  289. 

Be  diornughly  acquainted  with  (to),  conocer 
una  cosa  a fondo,  294. 

Bring  in  the  desert  (to),  servir  los  postres, 
298. 

Be  a judge  of  (to),  serperito  on.  | Entender 
de,  303. 

Borrow  (to),  pedir  prestado,  316. 

Be  frightened  (to),  asustarse,  sobresaltarse, 

321. 

Be  astonished  (to)— surprised,  maravillarse. 
Estar  asombrado,  322. 

Be  welcome  (to),  ser  bien  vinido.  Agasajar, 
323. 

Be  born  (to),  nacer,  332. 

Be  at  one's  ease  (to),  estar  uno  con  deshaogo, 
estar  a sus  anehuras,  338. 

Be  comfortable  (to),  estar  comodamentc. 
Pasarlo  bien,  338. 

Be  uncomfortable  (to),  estar  incomodamente. 
Pasarlo  mal,  338. 

Beg  with  entreaties  (to),  pedir  encarecida- 
mente,  339. 

Be  varticular  (to).  «er  singular.  Tener  uno 
rarezas.  342 

Behold  (to),  mirar  344. 

Be  in  want  oj  Uo/.  hacer  falta.  Faltar'e  a 
uno,  347. 

B2ast(to)—tob*ag  oreciarse.  Jactarse.  369. 
|?5  it  as  it  man . sea  lo  que  fuere.  Como 
quiera  que  sea  35H. 

Bear  (to)— to  nut  up  wiL\  sobrellevar  Dcjar 
que.  373. 

Board,  barba.  The  ve^-son  whose  heard  is 
thick,  un  narbtrorrado  374 
Burst  out  laughing  <to)  reventar  de  risa, 
874. 

By  dint  of  afuerza  379. 

Be  naked  ' m)  esiai  en  cuero.s.  380 


Blush  (to),  abochornarse.  Sonrojarse,  885. 

Be  satisfied  (to),  estar  satisfecho,  harto 
saciado,  388. 

c. 

Can,  Doder,  154. 

Comfort  (to),  amparar.  Consolar,  317. 

Complements,  complementos,  b9,  Obs  A 

Comparatives,  comparativos,  108. 

Conjugations,  conjugaciones,  85. 

Conjunctions,  conjonciones,  governing  the 
subjunctive,  357.  Governing  the  indicative, 
359. 

Cast  an  eye  upon  (to),  echar  una  mirada  6. 
Cor  una  ojeada  a),  207. 

Confide  (to)— to  trust,  to  intrust,  confiar. 
Fiarse  de.  Contar  con,  217. 

Come  down  (to),  bajar,  230. 

Change  (to)— meaning  to  put  on  other  things 
mudar  de.  Mudarse  de,  233. 

Concern  some  one  (to),  concernir.  Tocar. 
Importar.  Pertenecer.  Interesnr,  252. 

Come  in  (to)— to  enter,  to  go  in,  entrar.  Ir  6 
dentro,  257. 

D. 

Days  of  the  week,  dias  de  la  semana,  143, 
Obs.  A. 

Drink  coffee,  tea  (to),  tomar  cafe,  te,  98. 

Dimensions.  High,  broad,  alto,  altura;  an 
cho,  anchnra,  290,  Obs.  B 

Diminutives,  diminutivos,  31. 

Do  without  (to),  ptiwuxsQ.  Pasarsin.  Pasrise 
sin,  299. 

Do  one's  duty  (to),  cumplir  con  su  obligacion, 
299. 

Draw  after  life  (to),  dibujar  el  natural, 
303. 

Depend  {to),  depender  de.  Estar  en,  322. 

Dress  one's  self  (to),  vestirse,  343. 

Drioe  in  (to) — to  sink,  clavar.  Hundir, 
370. 

During,  durante,  mientras.  Todo  el.  Toda 
la,  140. 

Dye  {to),  tenir  de.  Colorar,  149. 

Dine  [to),  comer,  166. 

Drive  (to)— to  ride  in  a carriage,  ir  en  coche. 
Pasearse  en  coche,  177. 

Dismount  {to)— to  alight,  apearse,  258. 

Deceive  (to),  enganar.  t Hacer  droga,  183. 

Do  one's  best  (to),  hacer  uno  lo  mejor  que 
puede,  211. 

Do  good  (to)— to  somebody,  hacer  biea  i r|. 
guno,  187. 

Do  with  (to),  hacer  con.  Disponer  de,  157. 

E. 

Early,  temprano,  114. 

Enable  (to),  poner  en  situacion  de.  Ponei 
en  estado  de,  325. 

Exaggerate  (to),  ponderar.  Exagorar,  347. 

Endeavor  (to),  esforsarse.  EmpenarM*.  347. 

Exact  (to)— to  want  of,  exijir.  sf 

3^ 


INDEX. 


553 


bastante,  bastuntes,  42. 
jamas,  aiguna  vez,  en  algun  ticinpo, 

118. 

Ecfry,  todo,  todos ; toda,  todas,  81.  Todos 
ios,  todas  las,  188. 

Early  in  the  mornings  imr  la  manana  tein- 
praiio,  172. 

Each,  Each  one.  Cada,  todo.  Cada  uno, 
182. 

E'oery  one.,  ever^hody ^ cada  uno,,  todo  el 
inundo,  todos,  182.  ilS.  338. 

Ktilist  ito)—to  enrol,  alistarse.  Hacerso 

soldado.  Sentar  plaza,  188. 

Employ  one's  self  (,to),  emplearse.  Ocu- 
parse,  252. 

Experience  Uo)—to  undergo,  experimentar. 
Padecer.  Pasar  por,  285. 

Execute  ito^—a  commission,  cumplir  con  un 
encargo,  299. 

F. 

For  more  had  luck,  por  colmo  de  desgracia. 
Por  mayor  desgracia,  286. 

For  more  good  luck,  por  colmo  de  dicha. 
Por  mayor  dicha,  286. 

fhr  fear  of,  por  miedo  de,  por  temor  de, 
por  no,  305. 

Frighten  {.to),  asustar,  espantar,  321. 

Fret  (to),  in(4uietars€,  342. 

Find  fault  with  (to),  hallar  que  decir  en, 
hallar  7alta  en,  343. 

For  all  that,  con  todo,  369. 

Feign  (to)— to  pretend,  fingir,  aparentar, 
385. 

Follow  from  it  (to),  seguirse,  deducii*se, 
384. 

Fast  (to),  ayunar,  estar  en  ayunas,  384. 

Few,  unos  pocos,  unos  cuantos,  42. 

Fewer — than,  menos  (n)  que,  53.  108. 

For,  por,  durante,  140.  Meaning  because, 
porque,  189. 

Former  (the),  aquel,  aqueHos,  31. 

Fly  (to)— to  run  away,  huir,  huirse,  escapar, 
escaparse,  216. 

From  whom,  de  quien,  155 

Future  (first),  futuro  adefinido,  195 

Fetch  (to),  traer,  77. 

Fit  (to\  ca«r!e  i uno,  sontar,  201. 

Formerly,  antiguamente,  en  otro  tiempo, 
en  tiempo  pasado,  122. 

From  which,  del  cual,  de  los  cuales,  de  que, 
155. 

G. 

Ge.1,  [to  — to  pyocure,  conseguir,  lograr,  pro- 
curar,  hallar,  239. 

Genders,  t'emiuine,  159. 

Go  to  bed  (to),  t aco.starse,  186. 

Go  for  (to),  ir  por,  ir  a buscar,  TJ.  95. 

Go  on  foot  (to),  ir  i pi6, 177. 

Great,  grande,  gran,  97,  Obs.  C. 

Get  (to),  followed  by  avast  participle — man- 
dar.  followed  by  an  injinith  e,  131, 

Get  up  (to),  levantarse,  186. 

Give  back  (to),  volver.  roslituir.  154 

24 


r/dqf «o.),deshacerse  zafarse,  libraiBO,  229, 

Get  one's  living  (to),  ganar  la  vida  a,  262. 

Get  into  a bad  scrape  (to),  caer  en  enredo 
283. 

Get  oat  of  a bad  scrape  (to),  salir  de  enredo, 
283. 

Grow  tall  (to),  crecer,  304. 

Get  beaten  (to),  iievar  una  paliza,  (um» 
tunda),  311. 

Get  paid  (to),  hacerse  pagar,  311. 

Go  about  the  house  (to),  ir  por  toda  la  caao, 
andar  toda  la  casa,  313. 

Get  tired  (to),  uburrirse,  fast.iiarae,  can- 
sarse,  323. 

Get  married  (to),  ?asarse  con,  dar  en  ma- 
trimonio,  326. 

Oood-by,  adieu,  a Uios,  vaya  V.  con  Dioa, 
quede  V.  con  Dios,  328. 

Get  uneasy,  inquietarse,  molestarse,  deta 
sosegarse,  331, 

Grow  impatient  (to),  impacientarse,  enla- 
darse,  342. 

Give  one's  self  up  to  grief  (to),  darse  a 
dolor,  dejarse  veneer  del  dolor,  347. 

Give  occasion  (to),  dar  motivo  (ocasioji, 
causa)  para,  373. 

Go  away  (to),  irse,  marcharse,  205.  375. 

Grow  old  (to),  envejecer — young,  remozar 
385. 

H. 

Have  (to),  (active,)  tener,  86.  121. 

Have  (to),  (auxiliary,)  haber,  121. 

Have  a sore  (to),  tener  mal  de,  (a  noun.; 
Tener  (the  noun)  malo-a-os-a.s,  93. 

Have  to  (to),  tener  que,  deber,  66.  74.  130 
153. 

He,  el,  21  .—Table,  70. 

Here,  aqui,  80. 

His,  her,  su,  22.  160. 

His,  or  his  own,  el  suyo,  22.— Table  244. 

Him,  le,  67,  68. — Table,  70. 

How  many,  cuantos,  41. 

How  much,  cuanto,  41. 

Home,  at  home,  en  casa,  59,  60. 

How,  como,  101,  Obs.  A.  In  exclamatori 
sentences,  i Cuan ! 288,  Obs.  A. 

How  far,  hasta  donde,  147. 

How  long,  cuanto  tiempo,  hasta  cuando, 
140.  142.  Since,  cuanto  hace,  desde  cuan. 
do,  210. 

Hundred,  ciento,  139,  Obs.  A, 

Hoxo  old,  que  edad,  cuantos  anos,  135. 

Hardly,  apenas,  135. 

Hurt  somebody  (to),  hacer  mal,  daiio  a al 
guno,  lastimar,  187. 

Hear  of  (to),  oir  hablar  de,  tener  noticia  de 
saber  de,  209. 

Have  just  (to),  aenbar  de,  211. 

Happen  (to),  acaecer,  acontecer,  sucedoi 
216. 

Hinder  (to) — to  prevent,  impedir.etnbarazai 
estorbar,  no  dejar,  218. 

Hope  (to) — to  expect,  eaperar,  agUJWtltu 
233. 


554 


INDEX, 


Have  .eft  Oo).  quedar,  sobrar,  restar  256. 

Have  the  habit  ito)^  tener  costumbre.  soler,^ 
317. 

Help'll  cannot  help  iU  no  puedo  remediarlo, 
327. 

Hold  onie  tongue  {to),  cabarse,  callarse  iU 
boca,  335. 

Uirweper,  por,  por  mas,  362. 

Have  like  ito),  estar  a pique,  estor  pa/a,  381, 

I. 

I yo,  19. — Table,  70. 
si,  173. 

Imperfect,  (how  to  translate  the  English,) 
158. 

Infinitive,  infinitive,  55.  85. — Used  as  sub. 
ject,  115,  Obs.  C. 

Infinitive,  (used  as  a noun,)  115,  Obs.  C. 

Instead  of,  en  vez  de,  en  lugar  de,  92. 

^n  this  manner,  de  este  modo  de  esla  manera, 
134. 

Into,  en,  k,  102. 

1mpkrsona.l  Verbs,  verbos  inipersonaJes, 
82,  Obs.  A,  191. 

It,  le,  12.— Table,  70.  126.  La,  163  ; le,  la, 
168. 

It,  (meaning  this,  that,)  ello,  lo. — Table, 
70. 

It,  lo. — Table,  70.  97,  Obs.  E ; 126,  Obs.  A. 

It  is,  es,  81. — It  is  I who,  yo  soy  quien,  202. 

It  is  he,  they,  we,  <^c.,  el  es,  ellos  son,  no- 
sotroa  somos,  279. 

Intend  (J.o),  intentar,  pensar,  101. 

In,  dentro  de,  en,  de  aqui  a,  322,  Obs.  A. 

Inconvenience  one's  self  {to),  incomodarse, 
molestarse,  340. 

In  a foc4<^h  manner,  at  random,  a troche 
moche,  a diestro  y 4 siniestro,  378. 

rMPEHATiVK  Mood,  imperative,  315. 

J 

Just  the  same,  just  as  much,  justamente  lo 
mismo,  cabalmente  lo  mismo,  106. 

Just  a little,  ever  so  little,  un  poquito.  solo 
un  poquitito,  36^ 

K. 

Keep  (to) — to  maintain,  tener,  mantener, 
370. 

Know  how  {to'),  saber,  101,  Obs.  A. 

Keep  from  {to),  impedir,  estorbar,  no  dejar, 
218. 

Kill  by  shooting  {to'),  matar  a tiros,  313. 

L. 

hate,  tarde,  11  t. 

hotter  {the),  este,  estos.  31. 

htss,  m^nos,  53. 

Ijcast,  m^nos,  109. 

Less — than,  m^nos — que,  53.  108,  109, 

(to')  gustar  a uno,  88. 
ooco,  pocos.  42. 


Iwng,  largo  tiempo,  mucho  tifmpo,  VW 

Listen  to  some  one  {to),  escuchar  a uu  •> 
aiguno,  97. 

Look  for  {to),  buscar,  167 

Like  better  {to),  gustar  mas  de,  querer 
223. 

Laugh  in  a person's  face,  reirse  de  uno 
BUS  barbas,  (en  sus  bigotes,)  279. 

Look  like  some  one  {to),  parecerse  a UB®. 
parecer,  tener  semblante,  284. 

J^ook  pleased  {to),  mostrar  buena  cara. 

J^ook  cross  {to),  mostrar  mala  cara,  284. 

Leave  off  {to),  cesar,  parar,  dejar  de,  299. 

Look  upon  (to),  caer.  Dura.  Mirara,  3l8;i 

Lay  to  one  s charge  {to),  imputarle  a uiu», 
Echar  la  culpa  k,  327. 

Liking  {to  my),  a mi  gusto.  Q,ue  me  guste, 
330. 

Ijose  sight  of  {to),  perder  algo  de  vista,  33L 

Long  for  {to),  estar  ansioso,  338. 

Leave  it  to  one  {to),  dejar  a.  Penerlo  e« 
manos  de,  373. 

Lack  {to)— to  be  wanting,  faltar,  378. 

Lay  up  {to)— to  put  by,  juntar.  Guardar 
Apretar  388. 

M. 

May,  poder,  154. 

Many,  rnuchos,  41. 

Make  zise  of,  servirse  de.  Usar  de,  228. 

March  {to),  andar.  Caminar,  251. 

Make  {to),  one's  self  thoroughly  acquaiate^ 
with,  enterarse  a foiido  en  (de),  296. 

Myself,  yo  mismo,  295. 

Manage  {to),  to  go  about  a thing,  ma»  jar. 
Hacer  para,  303.  311. 

Make  one's  self  understood  {to),  hacerse 
comprender  (entender),  317. 

Make  uneasy  {to), 'mqxhaXat,  Molestar.  De- 
sasosegar,  330. 

Make  one's  self  comfortable  {to),  hacer  uno 
lo  que  le  acomoda,  339. 

Make  entreaties  {to),  solicitar.  Hacer  ins- 
tancias,  389. 

Mean  {to),  querer  decir.  Hacer  4nlmo. 
Significar,  342. 

Make  the  best  {to),  aprovecharse  de.  Sacxit 
venlaja  de,  369. 

Make  a great  show  {to),  hacer  gran  papoi. 
374. 

Muse  {to'y—to  think,  meditar,  380. 

Make  merry  {to),  alegrarse  de.  Divertirw 
a.  385. 

Me,  me,  67.  Table,  70. 

More,  mas,  52. 

More— than,  mas— que,  52.  89.  108.  Ma^  da. 
Obs.  A,  108,  109. 

More  than,  mas  que,  109.  Mas  de’  qus 
234. 

Mine,  e!  mio,  16.  Los  mios,  31.  Mio,  mia 
inios,  mias,  167,  Obs.  Table,  r44. 

Most,  mas,  109. 

Much,  inueho,  41. 109. 

Must,  deber,  ser  menester,  ser  aeceeatSe , ra 
tar  obligado,  153. 


INDEX.  355 


iaae,  .iiber  necesilar,  152. 

Atp,  mi,  10.  El,  lus ; la,  las,  B8.  Obs.  F, 
160. 

MucA  more,  mucbo  mas,  49. 

Manu  more,  inuchos  mas,  49. 

Make  a Jire  (fa),  «iicender  candela,  lumbre, 

79. 

Mistake  (to),  equivocarse,  183. 

Meet  tcitk  (to),  eiicontrar  a.  Eucantrarse 
con,  193. 

Miss  (to)~to  fail,  perder,  omitir.  Faltar 

212. 

N. 

Mamcs  of  empires,  kingdoms,  states,  U8, 
Obs.  A. 

JVeither—nor,  no,  ni  — ni,  17. 

Mever,  no  —jamas,  nniica,  nuica  jamas, 
118. 

Meed  (to),  hater  menester,  necesitar,  152. 
Mo,  no  35. 

Mobody,  not  anybody,  no  one,  not  any  one, 
ninguno,  nadie,  22. 

Mobody,  no  one,  nadie,  ninguno,  137. 

Mo  one,  ninguno,  87, 

Mone,  ninguno,  36. 

M'o  other,  no  Cv)  otro  ; no  (v)  ningun  otro 
46. 

M'o  more,  not  any  more,  no  (v)  mas,  49.  153. 
M'ot—as  much  as,  no— tanto  como,  109. 

M'o  less  — Uian,  ) , 

JVo  fewer -Oian,  \ "o-nidnos-que,  108. 
M'ot  ies  i—than,  no— m6nos— que,  109. 

M'o  longer,  no — mas,  141. 

M'ot  so — as,  no— tan— eomo,  109. 

Mowhere,  ninguna  parte,  119. 

Mot  anywhere,  ninguna  parte,  64. 

Mcither  the  one  nor  the  other,  ni  el  uno,  ni  cl 
otro,  46. 

Mot— even,  ni — aun,  295. 

Mot  at  all,  de  ningun  modo.  Nada  de  eso, 
296. 

Mo,  not,  no,  12.  35,  36. 

M'othing,  not  any  thing,  no  tv)  nada.  Nada 
(v),  13,  Obs.  A. 

Mot  any,  ninguno,  ningun,  ningunos,  85, 36. 
Mot  many,  no  — muchos,  42. 

A" ot  much,  no  — mucho,  42. 

Mot  any  other,  no  (v)  otros,  no  (v)  ningunos 
otros,  46. 

Mot  much  more,  no  (v)  mucho  mas,  49. 

M'ot  many  more,  no  (v)  muchos  mas,  49. 

Mot  so  often,  no  tan  a menudo,  102. 

Mot  so  often  as,  no  tan  amenudo  como,  102. 
Mot  so  much  as,  no  tanto— como,  108. 

Vot  so  many  us,  no— taiitos— como,  108. 

M ot  as  much  as,  no  tanto — como,  109. 

Mot  less — than,  no — menos — que,  109. 

Mot — as  much  as,  no — tanto  como,  109. 

Mot  so — as,  no — tan— convi,  119. 

Mot  yet,  no— todavia,  aun  no,  .odavio  no,  J15. 
118. 

Mot  Quiet,  no— todavia,  todavia  no,  135. 
Neuter  verbs,  verbos  neutros,  13(. 
fe'uMBZRs.  niimeros,  26.  IIule. 


M“o  less — than,  no  fewer— than,  no— 
que,  108. 

Mever,  no— jamas.  Nunca.  Nunca  iamw 
118. 

Mowhere,  ninguna  parte,  119. 

Mobody,  nadie.  Ninguno  137. 

o. 

O'cdock,  65.  Obs.  B. 

Object,  objeto,  69,  Obs.  A. 

Of,  de,  15.  Of  a,  of  aii,  de  un,  38.  De  its, 
162. 

Of  the,  del,  15.  De  los,  26.  De  la,  do  lag 
159. 

Often,  k menudo,  frecuentemente,  102. 

Oftener,  mas  a menudo,  103. 

Oftener  than,  mas  a menudo  que,  102. 

One,  se,  uno,  143,  Obs.  A. 

One  more,  otro  mas,  50. 

One  o'clock,  la  una,  65. 

Ojily,  solo,  solamente,  no  (v)  sino,  no  i,v 
mas  que,  41. 

Only  a little,  scjo— un  pocc,  43. 

Order  iji  which  the  pronouns,  objects,  otti 
complements  are  placed,  69. 

Once  a day,  una  vez  al  dia,  172. 

Or,  6.  16. 

Other,  otro  45.  338. 

Other,  others,  otro,  otros,  141.  Other  peo- 
ple, otros,  otras  gentes,  2o2, 

Our,  nuestro,  28.  160. 

Ours,  el  nuestro,  los  nuestros,  31. — ^Tabls, 
244. 

Ought,  as  it  should  be,  como  se  debe,  16S. 

Others'  property,  lo  ageno,  273, 

Overcharge  (to),  poner  alguna  cosa  a precic 
muy  sabido,  295. 

On  a level  with,  a nivel  de,  a flor  del  agua, 
304. 

Opposite,  enfrente,  frente  a,  332. 

One,  uno,  una,  143. 

P. 

Past  Participle,  participio  pnsivo,  117. 

Passive  verbs,  verbos  pasivos,  175. 

People,  se,  143,  Obs.  A ; 145,  Obs.  B. 

Personal  Pronouns,  pronombres  person, 
ales.— Table,  70. 

Please  one  (to),  gustarle  a uno,  86. 

Perfect  Tense,  preterite  perfecto  proxi- 
mo. 125.  185. 

Present  of  Indicative,  presente  de  m 
dicativo,  N.  1,  85. 

Present  Participle,  gertind,  participie 
activo,  gerund io,  250. 

Pronominal  Verbs,  verbos  pronnmina 
80,  (1.) 

Possessive  Pronouns,  pronombres  poae 
si  VOS. — Table,  244. 

Put  on  (tn),  meterse,  114  ; ponerse,  126. 

Put  to  dry  (to),  poner  a secar,  liacer  sceui 

134. 

Please  (to),  irle  a uno,  pasarlq,  estar,  22E, 

Pay— for  (to),  pa  gar  a,  166. 


556 


INDEX. 


Pity  (#o),  compadecer,  compadecerse,  tener 
lastima,  216. 

Fart  with  ito\  deshacerse  enagenar,  vender, 
229. 

Pour  out  (to)  echar,  277.  Four  out  some 
•brink,  ecJiar  (de  beber)  un  trago,  277. 

Pluperficct,  pretorito  plus  cuainperfecto, 
(N.2,  p.,)307. 

Preterit  Anterior,  pretdrito  perfect©  an- 
terior, (iM.  3,  p.,)  308. 

FuiiLed,  embarazado,  perdido,  326. 

Pardon  (to),  perdonar.  / beg  your  pardon, 
yo  pido  perdon  a V.,  327. 

Play  (to),  jugar,  93. 

Play  a trick  (to),  dar  un  chasco,  jugar  una 
pieza,  343. 

Play  upon  (to) — an  instrument,  tocar,  221. 

Procrastinate  (to),  diferir*,  dilatar,  .385. 

Possessive  Adjective  Pronouns,  ICO. 


Q 

Quite  as  much,  tanto,  jiistamcnte  tanto,  > '2 

Quite  as  many,  tantos,  justamente  tantos,  > 

Quicker,  faster,  mas  presto,  mas  ligero,  224. 

Question  a thing  (to),  dudar  de,  disputar, 
cuestionar,  preguntar,  238. 

Quench  one's  thirst  (to),  refrescar,  apagar  la 
Bed.  388. 

11. 

Remain  (to),  quedar,  quedarse.  119. 

Ride  (to) — on  horseback,  xnontar  (andar) 
a caballo,  177. 

Ride  (to) — in  a carriage,  ir  cn  coche,  andar 
(pasear  en)  coche,  177. 

Return  (to),  venir  de.  volver  de,  148. 

Reflective  verbs,  verbos  pronomenales, 
181. 

Rejoice  at  something  (to),  alegrarse  de  algo 
(de  alguna  cosa),  186. 

Repair  to  (to),  ir  a,  volverse,  278. 

Rather,  mas  bien,  antes.  Rather  than,  mas 
bien  que,  antes  que,  274. 

Run  up  (to),  acudir,  291. 

Rely  (to) — to  depend  upon,  contar  con, 
confiar  en,  299. 

Reach  (to),  alcanzar  a,  alcanzar  a entender 
343. 

Rather,  before  an  adjective,  algo,  375. 

s. 

8T  (meaning  the  one  (n)  of),  el  (n)  del,  el 
(iv  de,  15. 

S’  (meaning  that  of  or  the  one  of),  el  del,  el 
de.  15. 

Same  (the),  lo  mismo,  106.  El  mismo,  los 
mismoB,  155. 

Bcoerai  varios,  algunos,  51. 

Borne,  un  poco,  alguno,  algun,  34,  35.  Le 
los,  99,  Olis.  G. 

iemabodu,  «<me  one,  alguien,  alguno,  22. 101. 


Some  more,  mas.  algun,  todavla,  auei>  49. 

Some  more,  tod  avia  mas,  aun  mas,  algunof 
mas,  todavia  algunos,  49. 

Some  other,  otro,  otros,  algun  otro,  algunoa 
otros,  45. 

Somewhere,  alguna  parte,  64. 

So,  USX,  de  s'lene  que,  134. 

So  so,  asi  asi,  134. 

Something,  algo,  alguna  cosa,  13. 

Something  like,  como  unos,  unas,  135. 

Send  for  (to),  enviur  por,  inandar  por,  envlitx 
a busiar,  77. 

She,  ella. —Table,  70. 

Shortly,  soon,  pronto,  luego,  prontamentc 
139. 

Should  be  (as  it),  como  se  debe,  168. 

So  much  the  more  than,  tanto  mas  que.  111. 

So  much  the  less  than,  tanto  menos  que,  IIL 

So  much  a year,  tanto  al  ano,  i 

So  much  a head,  tanto  por  cabeza,  J 

Subject,  sujeto,  69,  Obs.  A. 

Superlatives,  superlativos,  110. 

Still,  aun,  dodavia,  55. 

Soon,  luego,  pronto.  Fery  soon,  muy  pronto 

221. 

Sooner,  mas  temprano,  115. 

Sometimes,  algunas  veces,  122, 

Set  out  (to),  partir,  salir,  marcharse,  130 

Steal  something  from  some  one  (to),  robai 
algo  (alguna  cosa  a alguno),  149. 

7'ry  (to),  probar  a,  procurar,  167,  168. 

So  that,  asi  que,  de  suerte  que,  194. 

Suit  (to),  acomodar,  ajustar,  venir,  conve. 
nir,  199. 

Succeed  (to),  conseguir,  lograr,  tener  baes 
6xito,  salir  bien,  200. 

Shoot  (to) — to  fire,  disparar,  hacer  fuego. 

Since,  desde,  209.  Ya  que,  pues  que,  294. 

Spend  time  in  something  (to),  pasar,  empleai 
gastur  el  tiempo  en  alguna  cosa,  212, 

Spoil  (to),  echar  a perder,  inutilizar,  217. 

Serve  (to) — to  wait  upon,  servir,  estar  co 
servicio  de  otro,  217. 

Squander  (to) — to  dissipate,  malgaBtar,disipar, 
desperdiciar,  derrochar,  218. 

Slow,  slowly,  tardo,  lento,  lentamente,  poca 
a poco,  224. 

So,  tan,  224. 

So  much,  so  many,  tanto,  tanta,  tantos,  tan 
tas,  224. 

Sir,  senor,  237,  Obs.  B ; 2^18,  Obs,  C and  II. 

Sojourn  (to)— to  stay,  residir,  morar,  T estaf 
de  asiento,  240. 

Step  (to),  dar  un  paso,  251.  Meaning  to  taki 
measures,  valerse  de  medios,  tomar  sus 
medidas,  252. 

Such,  un  tal,  una  tnl,  262. 

Such  a one,  el  senor  Fulano  de  tal,  un  do« 
Fulano,  262. 

Spring  (to),  saltar,  abalanzarse  a,  286. 

Succeed  (to),  conseguir.  Alcanzar.  Salir  bien 

293. 

Serve  up  the  soup  (to),  servir  la  sopa,  298. 

Suffice  (to),  bastar.  Ser  lottante.  Sa 
1 suficiente,  300. 


€fet  g&il  (it),  hacerse  a la  vein,  300. 

of  (to),  oler  ♦a,  J04. 
t^trike  (to) — speaking  of  hours,  dar,  328. 

Solicit  (to)— to  sue,  solixiitar.  Rogar,  33& 

Sit  up  (to),  velar,  342. 

So  long  as,  niientras.  En  tanto  que,  34-4. 
Subjunctive,  subijuntivo,  351. 

Spare  (to),  ahorar,  370 

Stop  short  (to),  piiTSiTse.  Cortarse  371. 

Stick  to  a thing  (to),  atenerue  a.  Pasar  por 
- 373. 

Suffer  (to) — to  bear,  sufrir.  Agoantar,  373. 
Suffer  one's  self  to  (to),  dejarse,  374. 

Strap  (to) — to  get  lost,  descamiimrse.  Ex- 
tra viarse,  385. 

Satisfy  one's  self  with  (to),  saciar.  Ilartar. 
Sati^sfacer,  3S8. 

T 

Thatt  e.se.  15.24.  Esa,  161. 

That  of,  el  del,  el  de,  15. 

1'hat  (relative),  que,  25. 

That  which,  the  one  which,  el  que,  25.  Lo 
nue.  Aquello  que,  192,  193. 

That  one,  aquel.24- 

Thai  (meaning  that  thing),  eso,  aquello, 
122. 

That— all,  cuanto,  153. 

That  excepted,  exerpto  eso,  salvo  eso,  mo- 
nos eso,  379. 

The  more — as,  tanto  mas — cuanto.  Tanto 
mas — cuanto  mas,  380. 

That,  or  the  one  of  which,  aquel  do  quien, 
&c..  193. 

Thank  (to),  agradecer.  Dar  gracias,  289. 
True,  verdad.  It  is  true,  es  verdad,  290. 
Towards,  a.  Con.  Para  con.  Hacla,  230. 
Trust  some  one  (to),  conliarse  a (de)  alguno, 
278. 

Take  to  one's  heels  (to),  apretar  los  talones. 

t Tornar  las  de  villadiego,  296. 

That  is  to  say,  es  decir.  A saber,  300. 

Think  much  of  a person  (to),  hacer  gran 
(mucho)  caso  de,  304. 

Take  care  (to),  guardarse  de.  Preca  verse  de. 

Estar  sobre  aviso,  312.  383. 

Take  into  one's  head  (to),  pasarle  a uno.  por 
la  cabeza.  Metersele,  &c.,  313. 

Therefore,  por  consiguiente.  Aei  pues,  322. 
Then,  thus,  pues.  Entonces.  Asi,  3^. 

Turn  upon  (to)— to  be  the  question,  tratarse 
de  algo,  335. 

Towards,  hacia.  Para  con,  337. 

Take  the  peace  of  (to),  set.  Servir  de,  347. 
Turn  to  account  (to),  hacer  vuler.  Sacar 
ventaja  de,  369. 

The  less — as,  tanto  m^nos — cuanto  mas  or 
menos.  Tanto  monos  — cuanto  monos, 
380. 

Turn  pale  (to),  ponerse  palido.  Perder  el 
color,  385. 

Thirst  for  (to) — to  be  thirsty,  toner  sed.  Es- 
tar sediento,  388. 

The,  el.  9.  Los,  26.  La,  las,  159.  El  m- 
etead  of  la,  285,  Oba-  B.  \ 


INDEX.  657 

The  more  - the  mare,  cuanto  mas  — tanU 
mas,  110. 

The  less  — the  less,  cuanto  m^noa  — tanto 
menos,  110. 

The  one  and  the  other,  el  uno  y el  otro,  oa 
unos  y los  oti  os,  48. 

The  one  who,  el  que,  los  que,  170. 

The  least,  el  nidnos,  la  menos.  loa  m^nos,  las 
menos.  110. 

The  most,  el  mas,  la  mas,  los  mas,  las  nru. 

110. 

These,  estos,  28.  31.  Estas,  161. 

Them,  los,  34.  Table,  70.  Los,  163. 

Tkdr,  su,  sus,  28.  160. 

Theirs,  el  suyo,  los  suyos,  31.  Table,  244 
There,  thither,  alii,  alia,  64.  When  not 
translated,  74,  Obs.  B. 

There  is,  there  are,  hay,  135.  200.  Is  there- 
more  7 i que-  hay  mas  1 289. 

This,  este,  24.  Esta,  16i. 

This  one,  este,  24. 

Till,  until,  hnsta.  i Hasta  cuando  1 iHasia 
que  bora  1 142. 

They,  ellos,  34.  Table,  70. 

They,  se,  143,  Obs.  B. 

They,  uno.  143,  Obs.  B.  ; 144,  Obs.  C. ; 185. 
Obs.  A. 

Thine,  el  tuyo,  los  tuyos,  79.  Table,  24K 
Thy.  tu,  tus,  79.  160.  ' 

Those,  esos,  aquellos,  28.  31.  Esaj,  aqueilaa 

161. 

Those  of,  los  de, 

Those  which,  los  que,  30.  170.  193. 

To.  a,  66. 

To,  meaning  in  order  to,  para,  66. 

To  the,  al.  a los,  67.  A la,  a las,  159 
To  whom,  a quien,  a quienes,  73.  193. 

Thou,  tu.  Table,  70. 

Too,  demasiado,  114. 

Too  late,  demasiado  tarde,  115. 

Too  many,  demasiados,  sobrados,  42. 

Too  much,  demasiado,  sobrado,  42,  115. 

To  me,  to  him,  to  you,  ^c.,  me,  le,  a V 
Table,  70. 

Take  off— away  (to),  quitar  del  medio,  qui 
tarse.  Llevar,  llevarse,  98. 

Take  a walk  (to),  pasearse,  186. 

Take  place  (to),  tenerse.  Verificarse.  Ceie 
brarse.  Darse.  Haber,  122.  Acoiitec«» 
322. 

Travel  tc  a place  (ta),  ir  a.  Irse  a,  17b.  - 

u. 

Us,  no3,  68.  Table,  70.. 

Until,  hasta.  I Hastaque  bora  ? i^. 

Up  to,  hasta,  147. 

Upon,  sobre,  131. 

UndcTi  debajo  de.  Bajo,  131. 

Under  full  sail,  a velas  Uenas.  A veloa  tendi 
das,  300. 

Unriddle  (to)— to  find  out,  desenredar,  383 

V. 

Very,  muy.  bien,  110.  Mucho,  171. 

V(xry  mueh,  muchisi  no,  41.  l-JB. 


558 


INDEX. 


Very  ‘aeU,  inuy  bien,  112. 

Very,  very  much,  muy,  110. 

Vie  with  each  other  ito),  a competenciK.  A 
cuai  mas.  379. 

w. 

quo,  14.  73.  Meaning  that  which,  lo 
quo.  92.  97.  137. 

H aul  ito),  haber  menester.  necesitar,  82. 152. 

ff'e,  nosotros,  42.  Table,  70. 

ff'here,  where  from,  de  donde,  155. 

fTAcre,  on  donde.  donde.  64.  132. 

if’itk  me,  coninigo.  70  (1). 

Which,  what,  que,  11.25.  Of  which,  deque, 
del  dial.  &c.,  1^2, 

Which  one,  cual,  20.  From  which  ^ de  que. 
Del  cual,  155. 

Which  ones,  cuales,  28. 

Who,  quien.  21.  Quienes,  73. 

Who  Orelative'i,  que,  170. 

Whom,  quien,  quienes,  73.  Of  whom,  de 
quien.  Del  cual,  &c.,  192. 

Whom  (,to),  a quien,  a quienes,  73. 

Whose,  quien,  quienes,  73. 

Whore,  of  whom,  de  quien,  cujo,  cuya,  cu- 
yo"*  cuyes,  113,  Oba.  C. ; 19^ 

Why  porqu^,  133 


Whose  house  (.at),  en  casa  do  quiao,  6L 

Well,  bien,  106. 

When,  cuando,  132. 

Without,  sin,  178,  Obs. 

Walk  a child  (to),  hacer  pasear  a un  iiitto 
Llevnr  un  nino  a pasco,  186, 

Walk  (to),  andar,  caminar,  ^l. 

Wish  a good  morning  (to),  darle  a nno  hs 
buenos  dias,  340. 

Whatever,  whatsoever,  cualquiera.  Todc  lo 
quo.  Por  mas  (n)  que,  362. 

Whoever,  whosoever,  quienquieia.  cual 
quiera,  363. 

Would  to  Godf  iplegiie  a Dios'  i Q,uieiD 
Dios!  iPlegue  al  Ciolo!  i Ojala  ! 363. 

Warn  some  one  (to),  precautelar.  preca*’ 
cionar,  384. 

Y. 

You,  V.,  VV.,  9,  Obs.  A.  ; 63.  Table,  70. 

Your,  su  (n)  do  V.  or  el  (n)  de  V.,  11.  160. 

Yours,  el  de  V , los  do  V.,  el  vuestro,  loi 
vuestros,  16*  31.  Table,  244 

Yet,  ya,  31. 

Yesterday,  ayer,  122. 

Yield  (Co),  coder.  Uoxidiree  Saietarac. 

Yea,  hi 


THE  ENB, 


SCHOOL  AND  COLLEGE  TEXT-BOOKS. 


SPANISH. 

AHN,  A New,  Practical,  and  Easy  Method  of  Learning  the  Spanish 
Language,  after  the  System  of  F.  Ahn,  Doctor  of  Philosophy  and 
Professor  at  the  College  of  Neuss.  12mo.  85  cents. 

Key  to  Spanish  Grammar.  25  cents. 

BUTLER.  The  Spanish  Teacher  and  Colloquial  Phrase-Book:  An 
Easy  and  Agreeable  Method  of  acquiring  a Speaking  Knowledge 
of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  Francis  Butler.  293  pages. 
18mo.  50  cents. 

DE  BELEM.  The  Spanish  Phrase-Book ; or,  Key  to  Spanish  Con- 
versation : containing  the  Chief  Idioms  of  the  Spanish  Language, 
with  the  Conjugations  of  the  Auxiliary  and  the  Regular  Verbs — 
on  the  Plan  of  the  late  Abbe  Bossuet.  By  E.  M.  de  Belem.  88 
pages.  ISmo.  30  cents. 

DE  TORNOS.  The  Combined  Spanish  Method.  A New,  Prac- 
tical, and  Theoretical  System  of  Learning  the  Castilian  Language, 
embracing  the  most  advantageous  Features  of  the  best  known 
Methods.  With  a Pronouncing  Vocabulary.  12mo.  $1,25. 

Key  to  the  Combined  Spanish  Method.  75  cents. 

DE  VERE.  Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Language,  with  a History 
of  the  Language  and  Practical  Exercises.  By  Schele  de  Vere. 
12mo,  $1.00. 

D 1 CT 1 0 N A R Y.  See  Meadows  and  V el azquez. 

MEADOWS’S  Spanish-English  and  English-Spanish  Dictionary. 
18mo.  Half  roan,  $2.20. 

MORALES.  Progressive  Spanish  Reader,  with  an  Analytical  Study 
of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  Augustin  Jose  Morales,  A.  M. 
H.  M.,  Professor  of  the  Spanish  Language  in  the  New  York  Free 
Academy.  336  pages.  12mo.  $1,25. 


School  and  College  Text-Books. — {Continued.) 


OLLENDORFF.  A New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write, 
and  Speak  the  Spanish  Language,  after  the  System  of  Ollendorff. 
By  Mariano  Velazquez  and  T.  Simonne.  12mo.  ^1.00. 

Key  to  the  Exercises  in  the  New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write, 
and  Speak  the  Spanish  Language,  after  the  System  of  Ollendorif. 
By  M.  Velazquez  and  T.  Simonne.  174  pages.  I2mo.  75  cts. 

TOLON.  The  Elementary  Spanish  Reader  and  Translator.  With 
Spanish  and  English  Vocabulary,  containing  all  the  words  used 
in  the  Lessons.  By  Miguel  T.  Tolon,  12mo.  75  cents. 

VELAZQUEZ.  New  Spanish  Reader;  consisting  of  Extracts  from 
the  Works  of  the  most  approved  Authors,  in  Prose  and  Verse, 
arranged  in  progressive  order,  with  Notes  explanatory  of  the 
Idioms  and  most  difidcult  Constructions,  and  a copious  VocabU' 
lary.  By  Mariano  Velazquez  de  la  Cadena.  12mo.  $1.25. 

Seoane’s  Neuman  and  Baretti.  By  M.  Velazquez.  A Pronouncing 
Dictionary  of  the  Spanish  and  English  Languages:  composed 
from  the  Spanish  Dictionaries  of  the  Spanish  Academy,  Terreros, 
and  Salva,  upon  the  Basis  of  Seoane’s  edition  of  Neuman  and 
Baretti,  and  from  the  English  Dictionaries  of  Webster,  Worcester, 
and  Walker ; with  the  addition  of  more  than  8,000  Words,  Idioms, 
and  Familiar  Phrases,  the  Irregularities  of  all  the  Verbs,  and  a 
Grammatical  Synopsis  of  both  Languages.  In  Two  Parts.  I. 
Spanish-English ; II.  English-Spanish.  1,310  pages,  large  8vo. 
$5.00. 

Seoane’s  Neuman  and  Baretti,  abridged.  By  M.  Velazquez.  A 
Dictionary  of  the  Spanish  and  English  Languages,  abridged  from 
the  author’s  larger  work.  847  pages.  12mo.  $1.50. 

An  Easy  Introduction  to  Spanish  Conversation.  By  Mariano  Vei  az- 
QUEZ  de  la  Cadena.  100  pages.  18mo.  35  cents. 


D.  APPLETON  c&  CO.,  Publishers,  1,  S,  (&  5 Bond  Street,  New  York. 


D.  APPLETON  & CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


SPANISH  GEAMMAES. 


Ollendorff’s  Spanish  Grammar. 

A New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write,  and  Speak  the  Spanish 
Language,  with  Practical  Rules  for  Spanish  Pronunciation,  and 
Models  of  Social  and  Commercial  Correspondence.  By  M.  YE,, 
LASQUEZ  and  T.  T.  SIMONNE.  12mo,  560  pages. 

The  admirable  system  introduced  by  Ollendorff  is  applied  in  this  toL 
ume  to  the  Spanish  language.  Having  received,  from  the  two  distinguished 
editors  to  whom  its  supervision  was  intrusted,  corrections,  emendations, 
and  additions,  which  specially  adapt  it  to  the  youth  of  this  country,  it  is 
believed  to  embrace  every  possible  advantage  for  imparting  a thorough 
and  practical  knowledge  of  Spanish.  A course  of  systematic  grammar 
underlies  the  whole  ; but  its  development  is  so  gradual  and  inductive  as 
not  to  weary  the  learner.  Numerous  examples  of  regular  and  irregular 
verbs  are  presented  : and  nothing  that  can  expedite  the  pupil’s  progress, 
in  the  way  of  explanation  and  illustration,  is  omitted. 

KEY  to  the  Same.  Separate  volume. 

Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Language  : 

With  a History  of  the  Language  and  Practical  Exercises.  By  M. 

SCHELE  DE  YERE.  12mo,  273  pages. 

In  this  volume  are  embodied  the  results  of  many  years’  experience  on 
the  part  of  the  author,  as  Professor  of  Spanish  in  the  University  of  Yirginia. 
It  aims  to  impart  a critical  knowledge  of  the  language  by  a systematic 
course  of  grammar,  illustrated  with  appropriate  exercises.  The  author, 
has  availed  himself  of  the  labors  of  recent  grammarians  and  critics ; and, 
by  condensing  his  rules  and  principles  and  rejecting  a burdensome  super- 
fiaity  of  detail,  he  has  brought  the  whole  within  comparatively  small  com- 
pass.  By  pursuing  this  simple  course,  the  language  may  be  easily  and 
quickly  mastered,  not  only  for  conversational  purposes,  but  for  reading  rt 
fluently,  and  writing  it  with  elegance. 


B.  APPLETON  & CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Elementary  Spanisli  Reader : 

By  M.  B.  TOLON.  12mo,  156  pages. 

This  is  one  of  the  best  Elementary  Spanish  Readers,  not'  only  for  the 
purposes  of  self-instruction,  but  also  as  a class-book  for  schools,  that  has 
been  published.  A full  Vocabulary  of  all  the  words  employed  is  ap» 
pended,  rendering  a large  dictionary  unnecessary. 

• Progressive  Spanish  Reader : 

With  an  Analytical  Study  of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  AUGUSTIN 
JOSE  MORALES,  A.  M.,  Prof,  of  the  Spanish  Language  and  Litera- 
ture in  the  College  of  the  City  of  New  York.  12mo,  336  pages. 

The  prose  extracts  in  this  volume  are  preceded  by  an  historical  account 
of  the  origin  and  progress  of  the  Spanish  Langurge,  and  a condensed, 
scholarlike  treatise  on  its  grammar  ; the  poetical  selections  are  introduced 
with  an  Essay  on  Spanish  versification.  Prepared  in  either  case  by  the 
preliminary  matter  thus  furnished,  bearing  directly  on  his  work,  the  pupil 
enters  intelligently  on  his  task  of  translating.  The  extracts  are  brief, 
spirited,  and  entertaining ; drawn  mainly  from  writers  of  the  present  day, 
they  are  a faithful  representation  of  the  language  as  it  is  now  written  and 
spoken.  The  arrangement  is  progressive,  specimens  of  a more  difScult 
character  being  presented  as  the  student  becomes  able  to  cope  with  them. 

New  Spanish  Reader : 

Consisting  of  Extracts  from  the  Works  of  the  Most  Approved  Authors 
in  Prose  and  Verse,  arranged  in  Progressive  Order;  with  Notes 
explanatory  of  the  Idioms  and  Most  Difficult  Constructions,  and  a 
Copious  Vocabulary.  By  M.  VELAZQUEZ  DE  LA  CADENA. 
12mo,  351  pages. 

This  book,  being  particularly  intended  for  the  use  of  beginners,  has  been 
prepared  with  three  objects  in  view : First,  to  furnish  the  learner  with 
pleasing  and  easy  lessons,  progressively  developing  the  beauties  and  diffi- 
culties of  the  Spanish  language ; secondly,  to  enrich  their  minds  with  valu- 
able. knowledge ; and  thirdly,  to  form  their  character,  by  instilling  correct 
principles  into  their  hearts.  In  order,  therefore,  to  obtain  the  desired  ef- 
fects, the  extracts  have  been  carefully  selected  from  those  classic  Spanish 
writers,  both  ancient  and  modern,  whose  style  is  generally  admitted  to  be 
a pattern  of  elegance,  combined  with  idiomatic  purity  and  sound  morality* 


D.  APPLETON  & 00:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


Grammar  for  Teaching  English  to  Spaniards. 

Gramatica  Inglesa : 

Un  Metodo  para  Aprender  a Leer,  Escribir,  y Habler  el  Ingles,  segun 
el  Sistema  de  Ollendorif.  Acompanado  de  un  Apendice  que  com- 
prende  en  Compendio  las  Reglas  contenidas  en  el  Cuerpo  Princi-} 
pal  de  la  Obra ; un  Tratado  sobre  la  Pronunciacion,  Division  y 
Formacion  de  las  Palabras  Inglesas;  una  Lista  de  los  Yerbos 
Regulares  e Irregulares,  con  sus  Conjugaciones  y las  Distintas 
Preposiciones  que  rigen ; Modelos  de  Oorrespondencia,  etc.,  todo 
al  Alcance  de  la  Capacidad  mas  Mediana.  Por  RAMON  PALEN- 
ZUELA  y JUAN  DE  LA  C.  CARRENO.  12mo,  457  pages. 

Key  to  Exercises.  Separate  volume. 

Spaniards  desirous  of  learning  English  will  find  in  this  volume  all  that 
is  needed  for  its  speedy  and  thorough  acquisition.  The  system  adopted 
is  clear,  simple,  philosophical,  and  practical. 

Grammar  for  Teaching  French  to  Spaniards. 

Gramatica  Prancesa : 

Un  Metodo  para  Aprender  a Leer,  Escribir,  y Hablar  el  Frances,  segun 
el  Yerdadero  Sistema  de  Ollendorff.  Ordenado  en  Lecciones  Pro- 
gresivas,  consistiendo  de  Ejercicios  Orales  y Escritos ; enrique- 
cido  de  la  Pronunciacion  Figurado  como  se  Estila  en  la  Conver- 
sacion ; y de  un  Apendice,  abrazando  las  Reglas  de  la  Sintaxis, 
la  Formacion  de  los  Yerbos  Regulares,  y la  Conjugacion  de  los 
Irregulares.  Por  TEODORO  SIMONNE.  12rao,  341  pages. 
Key  to  Exercises.  Separate  volume. 

M.  Simonne  has  done  a good  work  in  bringing  the  French  language 
within  the  reach  of  Spaniards  by  this  application  of  the  Ollendorff  system. 
A few  weeks’  study  of  his  “ Gramatica  Francesa  ” will  impart  a knowl- 
edge of  the  more  common  conversational  idioms,  and  a thorough  mastery 
of  it  will  insure  as  perfect  an  acquaintance  with  French  as  can,  be  desired. 
With  the  aid  of  the  Key  the  study  can  be  pursued  without  a master ; for 
the  illustrative  exercises  at  once  show  whether  the  grammatical  rules  and 
principles  successively  laid  down  are  properly  understood. 


D.  APPLETON  & CO:S  PUBLICATIONS. 


The  Spanish  Teacher  and  Colloquial  Phrase^ 
Book. 

All  Easy  and  Agreeable  Method  of  Acquiring  a Speaking  Knowledge 
of  the  Spanish  Language.  By  Professor  BUTLER.  18mo,  293 
pages. 

The  object  of  the  author  is  to  make  the  Spanish  language  a living, 
speaking  tongue  to  the  learner ; and  the  method  he  adopts  is  that  of  na- 
ture. He  begins  with  the  simplest  elements,  and  progressively  advances, 
applying  all  former  acquisitions  as  he  proceeds,  until  the  learner  has  mas- 
tered one  of  the  most  perfect  languages  of  modern  times. 

From  the  Few  York  Journal  of  Commerce. 

“ This  is  a g’ood  book,  and  well  fitted  for  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  designed.  The 
Spanish  language  is  one  of  great  simplicity,  and  more  easily  acquired  than  any  other 
modern  tongue.  For  a beginner,  we  recommend  this  little  book,  which  is  small  and  de- 
signed to  be  carried  in  the  pocket.” 

An  Easy  Introduction  to  Spanish  Conver- 
sation. 

By  MARIANO  VELAZQUEZ  BE  LA  CADENA.  18mo,  100  pages. 

This  little  work  contains  all  that  is  necessary  for  making  rapid  prog- 
ress in  Spanish  conversation.  It  is  well  adapted  for  schools,  and  for 
persons  who  have  httle  time  to  study  or  are  their  own  instructors. 

Spanish  Grammar. 

Being  a New,  Practical,  and  Easy  Method  of  Learning  the  Spanish 
Language ; after  the  System  of  A.  E.  AHN,  Doctor  of  Philoso^ 
phy,  and  Professor  at  the  College  of  Neuss.  First  American 
Edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  12mo,  149  pages. 

Prof.  Ahn’s  method  is  one  of  peculiar  excellence,  and  has  met  with 
great  success.  It  has  been  happily  described  in  his  own  words  : “ Learn 
A foreign  language  as  you  learned  your  mother  tongue — in  the  same  sim- 
ple manner,  and  with  the  same  natural  gradations.  This  method  of  the 
distinguished  German  Doctor  has  been  applied  in  the  present  instance  to 
the  Spanish  Language,  upon  the  basis  of  the  excellent  Grammars  of  Les- 
pada  and  Martinez,  and  it  is  hoped  that  its  simplicity  and  utility  will  pro- 
cure for  it  the  favor  that  its  German,  French,  and  Italian  prototypes  have 
already  found  in  the  Schools  and  Colleges  of  Europe. 


■ Wj'*  V 


■;/  r 


V.  , ^ /f.  . -;  , . ; r-  ■ , , . ■■_.> 

• • 


STANDARD  SPANISH  TEXT-BOOKS. 


De  Tornos.  The  Combined  Spanish  Method.  A New  Practical  and  Theoretical 
System  of  Learning  the  Castilian  Language,  embracing  the  most  advan- 
tageous Features  of  the  best  known  Methods.  With  a Pronouncing  Vocabu- 
lary. 12mo. 

Key  to  the  Combined  Spanish  Method. 

De  Vere.  Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Language,  with  a History  of  the  Language 
and  Practical  Exercises.  By  Schele  de  Vere.  12mo. 

Dictionaries.  See  Meadows  and  Velazquez. 

Meadows’s  Spanish-English  and  English-Spanish  Dictionary.  18mo. 

Morales.  Progressive  Spanish  Reader,  with  an  Analytical  Study  of  the  Spanish 
Language.  By  Augustin  Jose  Morales,  A.  M.  H.  M.,  Professor  of  the  Span- 
ish Language  in  the  New  York  Free  Academy.  336  pages.  12mo. 

Ollendorff.  A New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write,  and  Speak  the  Spanish 
Language,  after  the  System  of  Ollendorff.  By  Mno.  Velazquez  and  T. 
SiMONNE.  560  pages.  12mo. 

Key  to  the  Exercises  in  the  New  Method  of  Learning  to  Read,  Write,  and 

Speak  the  Spanish  Language,  after  the  System  of  Ollendoi-ff.  By  M.  Velaz- 
quez and  T.  Simonne.  174  pages.  12mo. 

Tolon.  The  Elementary  Spanish  Reader  and  Translator.  With  Spanish  and 
English  Vocabulary,  containing  all  the  words  used  in  the  Lessons.  By 
Miguel  T.  Tolon.  156  pages.  12mo. 

Velazquez,  New  Spanish  Reader;  consisting  of  Extracts  from  the  Works  of 
the  most  approved  Authors,  in  Prose  and  Verse,  arranged  in  progressive 
order,  with  Notes  explanatory  of  the  Idioms  and  most  difficult  Constructions, 
and  a copious  Vocabulary.  By  Mariano  Velazquez  de  la  Cadena.  351 
pages.  12mo. 

Seoane’s  Neuman  and  Baretti.  By  Velazquez.  A Pronouncing  Dictionary 

of  the  Spanish  and  English  Languages:  composed  from  the  Spanish  Dic- 
tionaries of  the  Spanish  Academy,  Terreros,  and  Salva,  upon  the  Basis  of 
Seoane’s  edition  of  Neuman  and  Baretti,  and  from  the  English  Dictionaries 
of  Webster,  Worcester,  and  Walker;  with  the  addition  of  more  than  Eight 
Thousand  Words,  Idioms,  and  Familiar  Phrases,  the  Irregularities  of  all  the 
Verbs,  and  a Grammatical  Synopsis  of  both  Languages.  In  Two  Parts.  I. 
Spanish-English  ; II.  English-Spanish.  1,310  pages,  large  8vo. 


STANDARD  SPANISH  TEXT-BOOKS. 


Velazquez.  Seoane’s  Neuman  and  Baretti,  abridged.  By  Velazquez.  A 
Dictionary  of  the  Spanish  and  English  Languages,  abridged  from  the  author’s 
larger  work.  847  pages,  12mo. 

An  Easy  Introduction  to  Spanish  Conversation.  By  Mabiano  Velazquez 

DE  LA  Cadena.  100  pages,  18m  o. 


PORTUGUESE  TEXT-BOOK. 


A New  Method  of  Learning  the  Portuguese  Language.  By  E.  J.  Grauert. 


LIBROS  EN  PORTUGTJES. 

Smith.  Astronomia  Illustrada.  Disposta  para  o Uso  dos  Collcgios  Publicos  e 
Municipaes  dos  Estados  Unidos.  Illustrada  com  numerosos  Diagrammas 
Originaes.  Por  Asa  Smith,  Director  da  Escola  Publica  No.  12,  da  Cidade  de 
Nova  York.  Traduzida  em  Portuguez  para  que  possa  servir  de  Texto  nos 
Collegios  e nas  Academias  do  Brasil  e de  Portugal,  por  Leonardo  Aejbr- 
BLOM,  Doutor  em  Philosophia. 

Elementos  Scientificos.  No9oes  de  Pliysica,  pelo  Professor  Balfour  Stewart. 
Traduc9ao  de  H.  de  Aquino.  Com  estampas. 


D.  APPLETON  & CO.,  Publishers, 

New  York,  Boston,  Chicago,  and  San  Francisco. 


